
.. <&, 



<0 Q<s 






i. 



••r^,...*..* ^ 















c?\ 












v 



\cf ^ 






^ 



<i 












^ % 






#" <*• 



\ 



5 *Vi 





■V= 



\> +**<>, *u 






V. <^% 






-<'^°: ^ 










' jF 



/Ai ^ 



















"o *%. ^ 













£ q« 




£°<* 



• s a* ,... % ^s^'/ § % 

V * * * o , <f» V> V * , < 



£ 





Ck -v 



* ^ -~«^ \- 






H a, 



^ >( ^ 





9^ *<.~*o ^ 







^ 



^ <3* 




fc/^^ c ^ 














^o^ 



^0^ 



D. Appleton & Goh Educational Piiblications. 

Dr. Arnold's Classical Series. 

i. 

FIRST LATIN" BOOK: re-modelled, re-written, and adapted to the 
Ollendorff Method of Instruction. By Albekt Harkness. One vol. 12mo. 75 eta. 
Several improvements have been introduced by Mr. H., and an effort made to sim- 
plify and render more clear the elementary portions of the work of Dr. Arnold. It is a 
capital book. 

A FIRST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK AND PRACTICAL GRAM- 
MAE. Eevised and carefully corrected, by J. A. Spekcek, A. M. One vol. 12mo. 
75 cts. 

A most admirable volume, based on the true principles of learning a language, viz. 4 
those of imitation and repetition. The pupil is put to work at once at Exercises in 
Latin, involving the elementary principles of the language ; words are supplied ; the 
mode of putting them together is told the pupil ; and by imitating and repeating, all the 
time adding to his stock of words and ideas, the docile 'boy has the Latin elements in- 
delibly impressed upon his memory, and rooted in his understanding. 

in. 
LATIN" PROSE COMPOSITION": a Practical Introduction to Latin 
Prose Composition. Eevised and corrected by J. A. Spencer, A. M. 12mo. $1. 
Very exact, copious, and scientific ; Latin synonymes are carefully illustrated, differ- 
ences of idiom noted, cautions as to niceties pointed out, and every help afforded to- 
wards attaining a pure and flowing Latin style. 

rv. 
CORNELIUS NEPOS; with Practical Questions and Answers, and an 
Imitative Exercise on each Chapter. Eevised, with Additional Notes, by Prof. 
Johnson, Professor of the Latin Language in the University of the City of New- 
York. 12mo. A new, enlarged edition, with Lexicon, Index, &c. $1. 
Very excellent, especially on account of the Exercises formed on the model of the 
text, by which the pupil becomes more thoroughly acquainted with the author and the 
language in general. A good vocabulary is attached. 

FIRST GREEK BOOK, on the Plan of the First Latin Book. Revised 
and corrected by J. A. Spencer, A. M. 12mo. 75 cts. 
A new and very admirable volume prepared by Prof. Spencer from the work of Dr, 
Arnold. It is equally good with the First Latin Book, and carries out the same princi- 
ples to their legitimate results. 

GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION: a Practical Introduction to Greek 
Prose Composition. Eevised and corrected by J. A. Spencer, A. M One vol. 
* 12mo. 75 cts. 

Exact, clear, direct, and copious. It is intended for use at a rather early stage, viz., 
air ;ctly following the First Greek Book, or simultaneously with the Greek Beading 
2ook. 

VII. 

GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. Part II. A Practical Introduction 
to Greek Prose Composition Part II. (The Particles.) 

In this volume the Particles are treated in full, and the student carried as far foi*- 
ward as ]S possible in the art of composition in Greek. 

TIIL 

GREEK READING BOOK, for the Use of Schools; containing the sub- 
stance of the Practical Introduction to Greek Construing, and a Treatise on the 
Greek Particles ; and also a Copious Selection from Greek Authors, with English 
Notes, Critical and Explanatory, and a Lexicon, by J. A. Spencer, A. M. 12mo. 
$1 25. 

A capital volume, having admirable Introductory Exercises on the Forms and 
Idioms of the Language; a choice collection of passages (of length) from standard au- 
thors ; notes, clear, and precise ; and a copious lexicon at the end. It is fully equal to 
sny one of the series. 

32 



D. Appleton & CoSs Educational Publications. 
PROP. ASHEL C. KENDRICK. 

Greek Ollendorff ; 

Being a Progressive Exhibition of the Principles of the Greek Grammar. 
Designed for beginners in Greek, and as a Book of Exercises for Acad- 
emies and Colleges. 12mo. $1. 

"Among the many elementary books published for the use of schools, we have not 
met with one that has pleased us as much as Professor Kendrick's Greek Ollendorff. 
It seems exactly fitted for the purpose intended, viz., by instilling into the minds of the 
young the more simple elementary principles of the language, thus to prepare them for 
a more extensive and familiar acquaintance with the ancient Greek classics. Its sim- 
plicity is perfectly delightful. The unfamiliar character of the letters, and the long 
course of study required to give a boy even a very imperfect knowledge of the Gram* 
mar, have deterred many a beginner from prosecuting the study of Greek, who, with 
the attractive volume before us, would have taken hold of it at once, and mastered all 
its difficulties. This is not only the best possible book to be put into the hands of boys, 
but it seems to us, that any person more advanced in years, and wishing to acquire 
some knowledge of Greek, even without a teacher, may, by the aid of this volumes-ac- 
complish his object. 

"The sounds of the letters and diphthongs, and the use of the breathings and accents, 
are so briefly, yet so familiarly explained, that, although the author recommends that this 
portion of the work should be deferred by the younger pupils to a second, or a third pe- 
rusal, yet such a recommendation seems to us to be hardly necessary. 

"A knowledge of the Greek Grammar has generally been considered as an indispen- 
sable qualification of the pupil before he begins to mad Greek. The doing away with 
the necessity of this at the beginning, is very encouraging to the learner, while at the 
same time it gives the author an opportunity to introduce gradually, and almost imper- 
ceptibly, sufficient grammar to illustrate the examples as they occur ; and then, by re- 
peating these examples with variations almost innumerable, the principle is indelibly 
impressed upon- the mind. 

In the older Greek books intended for schools, the examples given have been faulty, 
from their involving too many principles at the beginning. The mind of the pupil can- 
not comprehend so many things at once ; he gets confused, and becomes, after a while, 
discouraged. Whereas, in the'Greek Ollendorff of Professor Kendrick, every principle 
of the Grammar is introduced by degrees, and only when it is wanted for application. 
It teaches rules by examples, rather than examples by rules. 

" Another advantage of this volume over the older school books of the kind, is the 
examples of double translation, introduced at the very beginning, and made a part c-f 
the regular daily exercise. 

" The book is well printed in good type, and on go }d paper, for which the Appleton* 
deserve due credit. 

" We conclude by recommending this work to the favorable attention of teachers.— 
IT. Y. Recorder. 



PROF. JAMBS R. BOISE. 

Exercises in Greek Prose Composition. 

Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon's Anabasis. One volume 
12mo. Price 75 cents. 

*** For the convenience of the learner, an English-Greek Vocabulary, a Catalogue 
of the Irregular Verbs, and an Index to the principal Grammatical Notes, have been, 
appended. 

"A school-book of the highest order, containing a carefully arranged series of exer- 
cises derived from the first book of Xenophon's Anabasis (which is appended entire), 
an English and Greek Vocabulary, and a list of the principal modifications of irregular 
verbs. We regard it as one peculiar excellence of this book, that it presupposes 
both the diligent scholar and the painstaking teacher; in other hands it would be 
not only useless, but unusable. We like it also, because, instead of aiming to give the 
pupil practice in a variety of styles, it places before him but a single model of Greek 
composition, and that the very author who combines in the greatest degree purity of lan- 
guage and idiom, with a simplicity that both invites and rewards imitation."— Christian 
Register. 

33 



GRAMMAR 



THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 



FOR THE USE OP 



HIGH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, 



DR. RAPHAEL KUHNER 
ii 

CONRECTOR OF THE LYCEUM, HANOVER. 



TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN 

m 

BY 

B. B. EDWARDS, 

LATE PROFESSOR IN THE THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, AND 

S. H. TAYLOR, 

PRINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVER. 



A NEW REVISED EDITION. 



NE W YORK: 
D.APPLETON AND COMPANY. 

1853. 






Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1852, by 

D. Appleton & Co., 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States 

for the Southern District of New York. 



am 

emfami" Tush* 



ANDOVER: JOHN D. ELAGG 
BTEREOTYPER AND PRINTER. 



ttor 



PREFACE 



Raphael Kuhner, the author of the following Grammar, 
was born at Gotha, in 1802. From 1812 to 1821, he 
studied at the celebrated gymnasium in his native city,. 
Among his classical teachers were Doring, Rost and Wuste- 
mann. From 1821 to 1824, he enjoyed, at the University 
of Gottingen, the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen and 
Ottfried Muller. While there, he prepared an essay on 
the philosophical writings of Cicero, which received a 
prize. Since 1824, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum 
at Hanover. The principal works from the pen of Dr. 
Kuhner are the following : 

1. Versuch einer neuen Anordnung der griechischen Syntax, 

mit Beispielen begleitet. 1829. " Attempt towards a 
new Arrangement of the Greek Syntax," etc. 

2. M. Tull. Cicero nis Tusculan. Disputationum libri. 1829 ; 

ed. altera 1835 ; ed. tertia 1846. 

3. Sammtliche Anomalien des griechischen Verbs in Attisch. 

Dialecte, 1831. " Anomalies of the Greek Verb, etc. 

4. Ausfuhrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, in 2 

Theilen, 1834, 1835. " Copious Grammar of the Greek 
Language, in two Parts." The second Part of this 
grammar, containing the Syntax, translated by W. E. 
J elf, of the University of Oxford, was published in 
1842; the first Part in 1845. A second edition of 
Jelf s translation of this work was published in 1851. 
This work is, however, only in part a translation, Mr. 



VI PREFACE. 

Jelf being the author of the remarks on the Cases, the 
particle dv, the compound verbs, etc. 

5. Schulgrammatik der griechischen Sprache, 1836 ; zweite 

durchaus verbesserte u. vermehrte Auflage, 1843; 
dritte verbesserte und vermehrte Auflage 1851. 
" School Grammar of the Greek Language, third 
edition, improved and enlarged." The present vol- 
ume is a translation of this Grammar, from the 
sheets, furnished for this purpose by the author. 

6. Elementargrammatik der griechischen Sprache, neunte 

Auflage 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Greek 
Language, containing a series of Greek and Eng- 
lish exercises for translation with the requisite vocab- 
ularies." This Grammar, translated by Mr. S. H. 
Taylor, one of the translators of the present volume, 
has passed through eleven editions in this country. 

7. Xenophontis de Socrate Commentarii, 1841. 

8. Elementargrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, siebent 

Auflage, 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Latin 
Language with Exercises." This Grammar, trans- 
lated by Prof. Champlin, of Waterville College, has 
passed through several editions in this country. 

9. Lateinische Vorschule nebst eingereihten lateinischen 

und deutschen Ubersetzungsaufgaben, vierte Auflage, 

1849. 
10. Schulgrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, dritte sehr 

verbesserte Auflage, 1850. " School Grammar of 

the Latin Language, third edition, greatly improved." 
Dr. Kiihner has also published in the Bibliotheca Graeca 
the first part of his edition of Xenophon's Anabasis. 

From the above statements, it will be seen that Dr. 
Kiihner has enjoyed the most favorable opportunities for 
preparing the work, a translation of which is now pre- 
sented to the public. The names of his early instructors 
are- among the most honored in classical philology. For 



PREFACE. Vll 

nearly thirty years, he has been a teacher in one of the 
principal German gymnasia, and has thus had ample facili- 
ties for testing in practice the principles which he has 
adopted in his Grammars. At the same time, he has pur- 
sued the study of the classical authors with the greatest 
diligence, in connection with the productions which his 
learned countrymen are constantly publishing on the differ- 
ent parts of Latin and Greek grammar. Of course, his 
works might be expected to combine the advantages of 
sound, scientific principles with a skilful adaptation to prac- 
tical use. The " School Grammar of the Greek Lan- 
guage," being his latest publication, contains the results of 
his most mature studies. Its chief excellences, it may be 
well, perhaps, briefly to indicate. 

First, The grammar is based on a profound and accurate 
knowledge of the genius and principles of the Greek lan- 
guage. The author adopts substantially the views which 
are maintained by Becker, Grimm, Hupfeld and others, and 
which are fully unfolded in the German grammars of 
Becker. According to these views, the forms and changes 
of language are the result of established laws, and not of 
accident or arbitrary arrangement. Consequently, language 
may be subjected to scientific analysis and classification. 
The multitude of details may be embraced under a few 
comprehensive principles, and the whole may have some- 
what of the completeness and spirit of a living, organic 
system. Dr. Kiihner's grammar is not a collection of de- 
tached observations, or of rules which have no connection, 
except a numerical one. It is a natural classification of 
the essential elements of the language, an orderly exhibi- 
tion of its real phenomena. It is, at the same time, a truly 
practical grammar, fitted for its object, not by a theorist in 
his closet, but by an experienced instructor in his school. 

Second, The author has adopted a clear and satisfactory 
arrangement of his materials. This can be seen by an 



Vlll PREFACE. 

examination of the table of contents. To those, indeed, 
who are familiar only with the common distribution of 
subjects in our Greek grammars, the arrangement of Dr. 
Kiihner may appear somewhat obscure and complicated. 
A slight acquaintance, however, with the plan on which 
the Syntax, for example, is constructed, will show that he 
has followed the true and logical method. Abundant 
proofs of the justness of this remark may be seen in the 
exhibition of compound sentences. The particles are 
treated, not as isolated, independent words, but as a com- 
ponent and indissoluble part of discourse. 

Third, Fulness and pertinence of illustration. The cor- 
rectness of every principle advanced, especially in the Syn- 
tax, is vouched for by copious citations from the classics. 
If, in any case, a principle is stated in an abstract form, or 
if a degree of obscurity rests upon the enunciation of it, 
its meaning may be readily discovered by reference to the 
illustration. The paradigms contain much more complete 
exemplifications of conjugation and declension than are to 
be found in the grammars in common use in this coun- 
try. In this connection, it may be stated, that Dr. Kiihner 
has chosen a pure verb as the model of regular inflection. 
He can thus exhibit the stem unchanged, throughout the 
entire conjugation. 

Fourth, The perfect analysis to which the forms of the 
language, especially of the verb, is subjected, may be men- 
tioned as another excellence of the grammar. In learning 
a paradigm, in the manner which the author points out, the 
pupil first resolves the verb into its elements, and then 
rearranges these elementary parts into a complete form. 
In this method, and in no other, can he attain a mastery 
of this most difficult portion of the subject. 

Fifth, Every part of the grammar is equally elaborated. 
The closing pages exhibit the same fulness and conscien- 
tious accuracy, which characterize the forms, or the first 






PREFACE. IX 

portions of the Syntax. No part can be justly charged 
with deficiency or with superfluous statement. The view 
of the Third Declension, the scientific list of Irregular 
Verbs, the Dialectic peculiarities, the observations on the 
Use and Position of the Article, on the Middle and Passive 
Verbs, on the delicate shades of thought indicated by the 
Modes and Tenses, and on the difference between the use 
of the Participle and Infinitive, may be referred to as spe- 
cimens of careful observation and nice analysis. 

The Appendix on Versification has been supplied by the 
translators, the grammar of Kiihner containing nothing on 
that subject. The materials were drawn from a variety of 
sources. A more full view is less necessary, as the excel- 
lent work of Munk on Greek and Roman Metres, trans- 
lated by Profs. Beck and Felton, is now accessible. 

Much pains have been taken in verifying the almost in- 
numerable references to classical authors- The very few 
exceptions are those cases where the author made use of 
an edition of a classic not accessible to the translators. In 
this verification, the following editions of prose authors 
were used : Kiihner's edition of the Memorabilia ; Weiske's 
and Tauchnitz's editions of the other works of Xenophon ; 
Schafer's and Tauchnitz's editions of Herodotus ; Becker's 
and Tauchnitz's editions of Thucydides ; Dobson's edition 
of the Oratores Attici ; and Stallbaum's Plato. There are 
slight variations in numbering the lines of poetry in differ- 
ent editions, particularly in the tragedians. 

The present edition has been prepared from the third 
German edition, in which the author had made many im- 
portant improvements, particularly in the Syntax, having 
availed himself of the corrections or remarks of his learned 
friends and his reviewers. This the translators have en- 
deavored to put into such a form as would best meet the 
wants of American scholars. They have not aimed merely 



X PREFACE. 

at a translation ; it has been their object to state in as clear 
and concise a manner as possible the principles contained 
in the original, without reference to the particular form in 
which the statements were there made. The translators 
have also added principles and illustrations of their own, 
where it seemed desirable. 

The numbering of the paragraphs has not been changed 
in the present edition, and most of the subdivisions and 
Remarks are the same as in the former edition. The 
changes in this respect have been so few, that it has not 
been thought necessary to indicate them. 

The labor of preparing the first edition of this work was 
shared equally by the translators ; so, also, in the second 
edition as far as the 210th page. At this point in the 
progress of the work, the state of Professor Edwards's 
health made it necessary for him to relinquish his labors in 
connection with it, for the purpose of seeking a milder 
climate. After a few months' residence in one of the South- 
ern States, he was called away from his labors on earth, 
deeply lamented by his associate, and the large circle of 
friends to whom his character presented so many attractive 
qualities. His loss will be extensively felt also in the cause 
of Biblical and Classical literature, for which none cher- 
ished a deeper interest, and for the promotion of which he 
contributed with great zeal and success the rich stores of 
his elegant and varied learning. 

The proofs of the Grammar have been read by Mr. P. 
S. Byers, an associate Instructor in Phillips Academy, to 
whom special acknowledgments are due for these services, 
as well as for many valuable suggestions. 

Andover, July 15, 1852. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



SECTION L — SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. 
Chapter I. — Letters and Sounds of the Language. 



Alphabet 

Sounds of the Letters . . . 
History of the Alphabet. 

Organs of Speech 

Vowels 

Consonants 

Breathings 

Changes of Letters 
Changes of the Vowels . 

Hiatus 

Contraction of Vowels . , 
Crasis 



Synizesis 

Elision 

N Paragogic (icpeXitviTTiKov) ; 

ovtw(s) ; e£ and e« ; ov and ovk 
Strengthening and Weakening 

of Vowels 



M 
2a 

2b 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8—16 
8 
9 

10, 11 
12 

13, 14 

15 
16 



Prolongation, Shortening. In- 
terchange and Variation, ... § 16 
Influence of a Vowel or Con- 
sonant on another vowel. ... 16 
Syncope, Omission of a Vowel 16 

Euphonic Prothesis 16 

Changes of the Consonants. . . 17 — 25 

Mutes 17 

Liquids 18 

Mutes and Liquids, Liquids and 

Mutes 19 

Sibilant <t with Mut. and Liq... 20 

Change of separated Consonants 21 

Metathesis of Liquids 22 

Doubling of Consonants 23 

Strengthening and Addition of 

Consonants 24 

Expulsion and Omission of 

Consonants 25 



Chapt. II. — 

Nature and Division of Syllables 26 

Quantity of Syllables 27 

Quantity of the Penult 28 

Accents . .' 29 

Change and Removal of the 
Accent by Inflection, Compo- 
sition and Contraction 30 

Change and Removal of the Ac- 
cent in connected Discourse 31 — 35 



Syllables. 

I. Grave instead of the acute 31 

II. Crasis 31 

III. Elision 31 

IV. Anastrophe 31 

V. Atonies or Proclitics ... 32 

VI. Enclitics 33 — 35 

Division of Syllables 36 

Punctuation Marks — Diastole. 37 



SECT. II. — GRAMMATICAL FORMS. 

Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflection. 
Chapt. I. — The Substantive. 



Different kinds of Substantives. . . 39 

Gender of Substantives 40 

Number, Case and Declension ... 41 



First Declension 42 

I. Feminines 43 

II. Masculines 44 



Xll 



CONTENTS. 



Quantity and Accentuation . § 45 

Second Declension 46 

Contraction of the second Dec. 47 
Attic second Declension. .. . 48 

Accentuation 49 

Remarks on Gender 50 

Third Declension 51 

Remarks on the Case-endings 52, 53 

Paradigms 54 — 63 

Quantity 64 

Accentuation 65 



Gender 66 

Anomalous Nouns 67, 68 

Defective Nouns 69 

Interchange of Forms in the 

Declensions 70 — 72 

I. Redundant Nouns 70 

II. Heteroclites 71 

III. Metaplasts 72 

Indeclinable and Defective 

Nouns 73 



Chapt. II. — The Adjective and Participle. 



Nature, Gender and Declension 74 

Accentuation 75 

Summary of the Adjective and 
Part. Endings 76 — 80 

I. Adjectives and Partici- 
ples of three Endings. . 76, 77 
II. Adjectives of two Endings 78, 79 
III. Adjectives of one Ending 80 



Comparison of Adjectives 81 

A. -repos, -repa, -repoy) -tcltos, 

-TUTT), -TOLTOV 82 

B. -iwf, -IOV, -WU, -OU\ -KTTOS, -7], 

-ov 83 

Anomalous forms of Comparison. 84 

Comparison of Adverbs 85 



Chapt. III. — The Pronoun. 



Nature and Division of Pronouns 86 

I. Personal Pronouns 87-90 

II. Demonstrative Pronouns 91 
III. Relative Pronouns 92 



IV. Indefinite and Interrogative 

Pronouns 93 

Correlative Pronouns 94 

Lengthening of the Pronoun 95 



Chapt. IV. — The Numerals 

Nature and Division of Numerals 96 
Numeral Signs 97 



Principal classes of Numerals .... 98 
Remarks on the Numerals 99 



Chapt. V. — The Adverb. 
Nature and Division of Adverbs 100 I Formation of Adverbs 101 



Chapt. VI. — The Verb. 



Nature and Division of the Verb 102 

Classes 102 

Tenses 103 

Modes 104 

Infinitive and Participle 105 

Persons and Numbers 106 

Conjugation of Verbs in -co 107 

Stem, Augment, Reduplication 

and Characteristic 108 

Inflection-endings 109 

a. Tense-characteristic and 

Tense-endings 110 

b. Personal-endings and Mode- 

vowels 11 1 — 114 

Full Paradigm of a Regular Verb 1 1 5 
Remarks on the Inflection-endings 116 
Remarks on the Formation of the 
Attic Future 117 



Accentuation of the Verb 118 

Further view of Aug. and Redup. 119 

(a) Syllabic Augment 120 

(b) Temporal Augment . . 121, 122 

Reduplication 123 

Attic Reduplication 124 

Aug. and Redup. in Compounds 125-6 
Formation of the Tenses of Verbs 

in -co 127—167 

Division of Verbs in -co according 

to the Characteristic 127 

Derivation of Tenses 128 

I. Formation of the Tenses of 

Pure Verbs 129 

a. With a short Characteristic- 

vowel 130 

b. With a in Aor. Pass, and Perf. 

Mid. or Pass 131 



CONTENTS. 



Xlll 



Paradigms of Pure Verbs § 132—137 

A. Uneontracted Pure Verbs . . 132 

(a) Without o" in the Mid. or 

Pass 132 

(b) With o- in the Mid. and 

Pass 133 

B. Contract Pure Verbs... 134 — 136 
Remarks on contract verbs... 137 

II. Formation of the Tenses of 

Impure Verbs 138 

Strengthening of the Stem 139 

Variation of the Stem- vowel 140 

Remarks on the Secondary Tenses 141 

A. Formation of the Tenses of 

Mute Verbs 142—144 

Remarks on the Characteristic 143 
Paradigms of Mute Verbs 145 — 148 

B. Formation of the Tenses of 

Liquid Verbs . . . ■ 149 

Paradigms 1 50 — 1 53 

Peculiarities in the Formation of 

Single Verbs 154 

Syncope 155 

Metathesis 156 

Verbs in -co with Stem of the Pres. 

strengthened 157 

I. Verbs with v inserted 158 

II. Verbs with the syllable ve 159 

III. Verbs with av or aiv 160 

IV. Verbs in -anw, -ictkco 161 

V. Verbs in -&co 1 62 

VI. Verbs with Reduplication. 163 
VII. Verbs whose Pure Stem- 
vowel a is strengthened by i 164 
VIII. Verbs which assume e . . . . 165 
Verbs which assume an e in form- 
ing the Tenses 166 

Verbs whose Tenses are formed 

from different Roots 167 

Conjugation of Verbs in -/« 168 

Division of Verbs in -ya. 169 



Characteristic-vowel and Strength- 
ening of the Stem of the Pres. § 170 

Mode-vowels 171 

Personal-endings 172 

Formation of the Tenses. . . 173, 174 

Paradigms "... 175 

Remarks on the Paradigms 176 

Summary of Verbs in -fit. . 172 — 190 

I. Verbs in -fxi which annex the 

Personal-endings immediate- 
ly to the Stem-vowel 177 

(a) Verbs in -a 177 

<Hui 178 

Deponents 179 

(b) Verbs in -e 180 

(c) Verbs in -1 : Elfii. — Eifii. . . 181 

II. Verbs in -fii which annex vvv 

or w to the Stem- vowel . . 182 

Formation of the Tenses 182 

Summary of this class of Verbs 183 
—188 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 

Vowel 183—186 

(a) in -a 183 

(b) in-e 184 

(c) in -t 185 

(d) in-o 186 

B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 

Consonant 187,188 

(a) in a Mute 187 

(b) in a Liquid 188 

Inflection of KeTfxai and rj.ucu 189, 190 

Verbs in -co analogous in Forma- 
tion to those in -pi . . 191 — 196 
I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid- 
dle . .191 192 
II. Perf. and Plup. Act.. . 193,' 194 

OiSa and ecu/ccc 195 

III. Present and Imperfect 196 

Summary of Deponent Passives. 197 
Summary of Active Verbs Avith a 
Mid. Fut 198 



Chapt. VII. — Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections 199 



PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. 



A. Orthography. 
Digamma or Labial Breathing F. 200 

Interchange of the Vowels 201 

Interchange of the Consonants 202-204 

Change of the Vowels 205-207 

Contraction, Diaeresis 205 

Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Par- 

agogic, Hiatus 206 

Lengthening and Shortening of 
the Vowels. — Syncope. — Apo- 
cope 207 

B 



Prothesis and Insertion of Vowels 207 

Changes of Consonants 208 

Quantity 209 

B. Dialectic Forms. 

Declensions 210—214 

Homeric Suffix (pi or <piu 210 

First Declension 211 

Second Declension 212 

Third Declension . 213 

Anomalous and Defective 
Words. Metaplasts 214 



XIV 



CONTENTS. 



The Adjective $ 215 

Comparison 216 

Pronouns 217 

Numerals 218 

The Verb 219-230 

Augment and Reduplication . . 219 
Personal-endings and Mode- 
vowels 220 

Epic and Ionic Iterative Form 221 
Contraction and Resolution in 
Verbs 222 



Formation of the Tenses ... § 223 

Conjugation in -/xi 224 

Elpi and El/xi 225, 226 

Verbs in -co with a Sec. Aor. an- 
alogous to Verbs in -fti ... . 227 

Verbs in -ca with a Perf. and 
Plup. Act. like Verbs in -/u 228 

Verbs in -« with a Pres. and 
Impf. Act. like Verbs in -/u 229 

List of Dialectic Verbs 230 



SECT. Ill— FORMATION OF WORDS. 



Radical "Words, Stems,Derivatives 231 

A. Derivation 232-235 

I. Verbs 232 

II. Substantives 233 



III. Adjectives 234 

IV. Adverbs 235 

B. Compounds 236 

Formation of Compounds 237 



SYNTAX. 



SECT. I.— SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
Chapt. I. — Parts of a Simple Sentence. 



Nature of a Sentence. — Subject 
and Predicate 238 

Comparison. Attribute and Ob- 
ject 239 

Agreement 240 

Exceptions to the general rules of 
Agreement 241 

Agreement when there are several 
Subjects 242 

Remarks on Peculiarities in use of 
Number 243 

The Article 244 

Position of the Article 245 

Use of the Article with Pronouns 

and Numerals 246 

The Article as a Demon, and 
Rel. Pronoun 247 



Classes of Verbs 248 

A. Active form 249 

B. Middle 250 

C. Passive 251 

Remarks on Deponents 252 

Tenses and Modes 253 

A. Particular View of the Tenses 254 

(a) Principal tenses: Pres., 
Perf., Fut 255 

(b) Hist. Tenses : Aor., Impf., 

Plup 256 

Tenses of the Subord. Modes 257 

B. Particular View of the Modes 258 
Use of the Subj.,Opt.and Imp. 259 

The Modes with &v 260 

Position and Repetition of &v 251 



Chapt. II. — Attributive Construction. 



Ellipsis of the Substantive . 
(a) Attributive Adjective . 



263 
264 



(b) Attributive Genitive .... 265 

(c) Apposition 266 



Chapt. III. — Objective Construction. 



I. The Cases 268 

Nominative and Vocative . . . 269 
(1) Genitive 270 

A. Local Relation 271 

B. Causal Relation 272 

(a) Active Genitive 273 

(b) Causal Genitive 274 



(c) Gen. denoting mutual re- 
lations 275 

(2) Accusative 276 

A. Local Relation 277 

B. Causal Relation 278 

(a) Ace. denoting effect . . . 278 

(b) Acc.of the Object on which 

the action is performed . 279 



CONTENTS. 



XV 



Two Accusatives § 280 

Kemarks on the Ace. with the 

Passive .......... 281 

(3) Dative 282 

A. Local Dative 283 

B. Dative as a personal Object 284 

C. Dative of the thing 285 

II. Construction of Prepositions . 286 



(1) Prepositions with the Gen. 

only § 287, 288 

(2) With the Dative only .... 289 

(3) With the Accusative only . 290 

(4) With the Gen. and Ace. 291-294 

(5) With the Gen,, Dat. and 

Ace. 295-299 

Remarks on peculiarities of the 

Prepositions 300 



Chapt. IV. — The Pronoun as Subject, Peedicate, Attribute and 

Object. 

I. Personal Pronouns 302 I Prospective and Retrospective 

II. Remaining Pronouns 303 J Use of the Pronoun 304 



Chapt. V. — The Infinitive and Participle used as an Attribute 
and Object. 



A. The Infinitive 305 

(I) Inf. as an Object without 

the Article 306 

Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
with the Inf. ....... 307 

(II) Inf. with the Article .... 308 

B. The Participle 309 

(I) The Part, as the Comple- 
ment of the Verb .... 310 



Remarks on the Inter- 
change of the Part, and 

the Inf. 311 

(II) Part, used to express Ad- 
verbial Subox-dinate Re- 
lations 312 

Special Peculiarities in the 
Participial Construction 313 



Chapt. VT. — The Adverbial Objective. 



A. A 77, Srjra, &^f, SfjSev, 8r)Trov&€v, 

Sai 315 

B. Confirmative Adverbs ....... 316 



C. Emphatic Suffixes, 7c, irep, toI 317 

D. Negative Particles 318 



SECT. IX — S.YNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
Chapt. VII. A. — Coordination. 



Different Forms of Coordinate 

Sentences 320 

I. Copulative Coordinate Sen- 
tences 321 

II. Adversative Coordinate Sen- 
tences 322 



III. Disjunctive Coordinate Sen- 
tences 323 

IV. Causal Coordinate Sen- 
tences 324 

Remarks on Asyndeton 325 



Chapt. VTII. B. — Subordination. 



Principal and Subordinate Sen- 
tences 326 

Sequence of Subjunctive Tenses 

in Subordinate Sentences 327a 

Use of Modes in Subordinate 

Clauses 327b 

I. Substantive Clauses 328 

A. Introduced by 5rt or ws, that 329 

B. Introduced by ft/a, so that, etc. 330 
IL Adjective Clauses 331 



Agreement of the Rel. Pron. . . 332 
Modes in Adjective Clauses . . 333 
Connection of several Adjective 

Clauses 334 

Interchange of the Subordinate 

Clause with the Adj. Clause 334 
HI. Adverbial Clauses 335 

A. Adverbial Clauses of Place 336 

B. Adverbial Clauses of Time 337 

C. Causal Adv. Clauses . 338 — 340 



XVI 



CONTENTS. 



I. Denoting Ground or 

Cause § 338 

II. Denoting Condition 339, 340 
III. Denoting Consequence 

or Effect 341 



D. Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Manner and Quantity 342, 343 
I. Comparative Adv.Clauses 

denoting Manner 342 

II. Comparative Adv.Clauses 
denoting Quantity 343 



Chapt. IX. — Interrogative Sentences. 



I. Interrogatives 344 

II. Oblique Discourse 345 

HI. Special Peculiarities in the 
Construction of Words and Sen- 
tences 346, 347 



Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Zeugma, 

Contraction, Pleonasm 346 

Anacoluthon 347 



Chapt. X. — Position op Words 348 



Appendix A. — Versification Page 574 
Appendix B. Abbreviations 
in writing 587 



Index of Subjects Page 589 

Greek Index 602 

Index for the Eorms of Verbs 614 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

Aesch. Aeschylus, Ag. Agamemnon, S. Septem adv. Th. — Ar. Aristophanes. — 
Dem. Demosthenes, 01. Olynth., Ph. Philipp,, Cor. Corona, Chers. Chersones., Aph. 
Aphobus. — Eur. Euripides. M. Medea. C. Cyclops, H. Hecuba, 0. Orestes. H. F. 
Hercules Fvrens, Hipp. Hippolytus. — Her. Herodotus. — Isae. Isaeus — Lys. Ly- 
sias. — PI. Plato. Cr. Crito. L. Leges, Th. Theages, Men. Meno, Soph. Sophista, 
Crat. Cratylus, Prot. Protagoras, Phil. Philebus, Rp Respublica. — Soph. Sopho- 
cles, 0. C Oedipus Coloneus, O. R. Oedipus Rex, Ant. Antigone, Ph. Philoctetes, 
Aj. Ajax, El. Electra. — X. Xenophon, C. Commentarii, An. Anabasis, H. Hellen- 
ica, S- Symposium, R. Ath. Respublica Atheniens., R. L. Respubl. Lacedaem., 0. 
Oeconomicus, Ag. Agesilaus, R. Equ. R. Equestris. 



GREEK GRAMMAR 



DIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 

1. The Greek language was divided into many different 
dialects, the most highly cultivated of which were the 
.ZEolic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. The ^Eolic prevailed in 
Boeotia, Thessaly, and in the iEolian colonies in Asia 
Minor ; the Doric, throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the 
Dorian colonies in Asia Minor, Italy, and Sicily ; the 
Ionic, in the Ionian colonies in Asia Minor ; the Attic, in 
Attica. 

2. The iEolic and Doric dialects are characterized by 
harshness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic, 
which is distinguished for delicacy and softness. The 
Attic dialect holds a beautiful medium between the two 
former and the Ionic, as it skilfully combines the soft and 
pleasant forms of the Ionic with the strong and full-toned 
forms of the Doric. 

3. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the 
Later Ionic. The older Ionic is the language of Homer 
and of his school, although these poets were not satisfied 
with their own dialect merely, but were able, in accordance 
with the true principles of art, to select, from all the 
dialects, those forms which corresponded to the nature of 
their poetry; and to employ — since the regular laws of 
versification had much influence in forming the language 

2 



14 GREEK DIALECTS. 

— a peculiar and definite poetic language, called the Epic, 
or Homeric. This had a great effect on the language of 
all the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the 
later Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born 
484 b. c, and of Hippocrates, b. 460 b. c. 

4. The Attic dialect is divided, in accordance with cer- 
tain peculiarities, into the Older, the Middle, and the Later 
Attic. The older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 b. c. ; the 
tragic poets ; iEschylus, who died 456 b. c. ; Sophocles, 
b. 497 b. c, d. 405 b. c. ; Euripides, b. 480 b. c. ; and the 
more ancient comic writers, e. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 b. c. ; 
by several orators, e. g. Antiphon, b. 479 b. c, and An- 
docides, b. 467 b. c. The middle Attic is used by Plato, 
b. 430 b. c. ; Xenophon, b. 447 b. c. ; and the orator Iso- 
crates, b. b. c. 436. The later Attic is employed by De- 
mosthenes, b. 385 b. c, and other orators, the later comic 
writers, and the prose authors in more recent times, who 
sought to preserve in their works the language of the earlier 
"writers. 

5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed 
by Philip, king of Macedon, the Attic dialect came to be 
the common written language. As it extended, not only 
over all Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of 
Syria and Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the 
introduction of foreign forms and words, and it then 
received the name of the Common, or Hellenic language, 
rj kolvt), or 'EWrjvifcr) SiaXe/cros. It was used, e. g. by Apol- 
lodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



SECTION I, 



CHAPTER I. 



Letters and Sounds of the Language. 
$ 1. Alphabet. 
The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four letters. 



Form. 


Sound. 


Name 




A 


a 


a 


"A\<f>a 


Alpha 


B 





b 


BfjTO, 


Beta 


T 


7 


g 


Tdfjbjxa 


Gamma 


A 


a 


d 


AeKra 


Delta 


E 


€ 


e short 


*JE tyiXov 


Epsilon 


Z 


r 


z 


Zrjra 


Zeta 


H 


V 


elong 


"Hra 


Eta 


Q 


%d 


th 


GrjTCt, 


Theta 


I 


i 


i 


'I&TCl 


Iota 


K 


K 


k 


Kdirira 


Kappa 


A 


\ 


1 


AdfjufiBa 


Lambda 


M 


V* 


m 


Mv 


Mu 


N 


V 


n 


Nv 


Nu 


8 


f 


X 


m 


Xi 





o 


o short 


*0 fjbl/cpov 


Omikron 


n 


7T 


P 


m 


Pi 


p 


P 


r 


<Pco 


Rho 


2 


CT? 


s 


^ly/ua 


Sigma 


T 


T 


t 


Tav 


Tau 


r 


V 


u 


^r^iXov 


UpsTlon 


$ 


<t> 


ph 


$1 


Phi 


X 


% 


ch 


XI 


Chi 


w 


\1r 


ps 


WZ 


Psi 


n 


m 


o long 


"*S2 fiiya 


Omega. 



16 SOUNDS OF PARTICULAR LETTERS. [$ 2. 

Eejiark 1 . Sigma at the end of a word takes the form s, e. g. <rei<rfjt.6s, in 
most editions of the classics. This small s is also used in the middle of com- 
pound words, if the first part of the compound ends with Sigma, though such 
a usage is contrary to the authority of the manuscripts, e. g. irpos<pepw or 
Trpocrcpepct), dvsywqs or dvcrywfis. 

Rem. 2. When <r and r come together, both letters may be expressed by one 
character, r, Sti, or Stigma. 

Rem. 3. Besides their use as alphabetic characters, e and v were originally 
used as mere marks of aspiration, the former for the spiritus asper (§6), for which 
in the earliest times H was also employed, the latter for the Digamma (§ 25) ; 
hence, as letters, they were called, in opposition to their use as aspirates, e \pL\6v 
and v t\/iXov, i. e. unaspirated. Omicron and Omega (small and large o) derive 
their name from their relative size. 

Rem. 4. The principle on which most of the letters of the Greek alphabet 
are named, is entirely different from that adopted in this country and among 
the European nations, at the present day. We name each letter by the sound 
it represents, as a, b, c, adding a vowel to the consonants in order to vocalize 
them. But among the Orientals, from whom the Greek alphabet was derived) 
the name was not determined by the sound of the letter. They gave their 
letters the name of some familiar object, the first sound or syllable of which 
was the alphabetic character to be represented. For example, the Phoenicians 
and Hebrews called the first letter of the alphabet Aleph (Greek Alpha), which 
means an ox : now the first sound or syllable of Aleph is the character or 
element to be represented. The second letter was Beth (Greek Beta), a house, 
the first sound of which is the character to be represented. The third is Gimel 
(Greek Gamma), a camel. This mode of naming letters, undoubtedly originated 
from the custom of designating those letters by the picture of the object from 
which they derived the name, instead of by the characters now used. Thus 
Aleph was represented by the picture of an ox, Beth by that of a house, etc. 

§ 2a. Sounds of particular Letters. 

The sound of the letters is indicated by the Roman characters opposite to 
them. The following remarks on particular letters are all that is needed in 
addition : — 

Remark. The sounds given to the following letters are those more usually 
adopted in pronouncing the Greek in New England ; but the usage is i 
entirely uniform. 

A has the sound of a in fan, when it is followed by a consonant in the same 
syllable, c. g. x«*-'«k; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a single 
consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is e or i, e. 
avaardaecos, aTpcntcoTris ; also, when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a 
syllable not final, e. g. fxey-d-Kr), a-Tpa-rSs; it has the sound of a in fatlier, when 
it is followed by a single p, in the same syllable, and also when it ends a word 
but a final in monosyllables has the sound of a in faVe, e. g. Bdp-fia-pos, ydp, 
ayv&d, rd. 



$ 23.] BRIEF HISTORY OF THE ALPHABET. 17 

7, before y, k, x, and J, has the sound of n^ in an^/e, or nasal n m ancle, e. g. 
HyyeAos, ang-g;!os ; K\ayyri, clangor; 'Ayxicrns, Anchises (Angchises) ; (TvyicSir-n, 
syncope ; \dpvy£, larynx, y before vowels always has the hard sound, like g in 
get ; also before consonants, except y, k, x, £, e. g. 7/70?. 

e has the sound of short e in met, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
same syllable, e. g. fiiy-as, per-d ; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a 
word or a syllable, or when it forms a syllable by itself, e. g. 76, &e-a, Pcuri\- 

rlt] has the sound of e in me, e. g. fiowf]. 

& has the sound of th in *Aic&, e. g. ^ai/a-ros. 

t has the sound of i in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, or forms a 
syllable by itself, e. g. ihiri-ai, otl, tt^-1-ov. the sound of 1 in jom, when it is 
followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. irpiv, klv-Swos. 

k always has the hard sound of k, and was expressed in Latin by c, e. g. 
KiXiKia, Cilicia ; Kacpoty, Cecrops ; KiKepcov, Cicero. 

£, at the beginning of a word or syllable, has the sound of z, e. g. \ivos ; else- 
where, the sound of x, e. g. dia^vco, irpa^s, dva^. 

has the sound of short in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
same syllable, e. g. \6y-os, Kv-pos ; the sound of long o in go, when it ends a 
word or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. t6, vit6, &o-6s, to£-6-tt]s. 

<r has the sharp sound of s in son ; except it stands before p, in the middle 
of a word, or at the end of a word after 77 or w, where it has the sound of z, 
e. g. o-K-nvi], vofiifffxa, yris, icdXas : before 1 it does not have the sound of sh, as in 
Latin, but retains its simple sound, e. g. 'Atn'a =A-si-a, not A-shi-a. 

t followed by 1 has its simple sound, never the sound of sh, as in Latin, e. g. 
TaXaria = Galati-a, not Galashi-a ; Kpnias =Kriti-as, not Krishi-as ; AiyvTrrioi. 

v has the sound of u in tulip, e. g. rv X ri ; but before p the sound of u in pure, 
e. g. irup, y4(pvpa. 

X has the hard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. raxvs. 

a has the sound of long in note, e. g. &yw. 



$ 2b. Brief history of the Alphabet. 

1. The Greeks derived most of their alphabet from the Phoenicians. Ac- 
cording to the common tradition, letters were brought into Greece by Cadmus, 
a Phoenician. The Phoenician alphabet, being nearly the same as the Hebrew, 
consisted of 22 letters, the names of which are, Aleph, Beth, Gimel, Daleth. 
He, Van, Zain, Heth, Teth, Jod, Kaph, Lamed, Mim, Nun, Samcch, Oin, Pej 
Tsade, Koph, Eesch. Schin, Thau. Van, the 6th letter of the Phoenician 
alphabet, was rejected by the Greeks as an alphabetic character, and used only 
as the numeral sign for 6. Koph (Greek Koppa), the 19th letter of the Phoe- 
nician alphabet, was also rejected, because its sound so nearly resembled that 
of Kaph (Greek Kappa), and was used as the numeral sign for 100. Zain 
and Tsade were modifications of the same sound ; Tsade, like the Greek Zeta, 
2* 



18 ORGANS OF SPEECH. [§ 3. 

represents the sound of both, and takes the place of Zain, becoming the 6th 
letter of the Greek alphabet, while Zain (Greek San, Sampi), was rejected as an 
alphabetic character, and used as a numerical sign for 900. Thus 1 9 letters of 
the Phoenician alphabet were adopted by the Greeks, as alphabetic characters. 
These are the first 19 letters of the present alphabet. To these the Greeks 
themselves added the five last letters of the alphabet, viz., v, <p, x» ty, &>. This 
seems to be the most rational view of the formation of the Greek alphabet, 
though somewhat different from the common legendary account, which repre- 
sents Cadmus as bringing only 16 letters into Greece, viz., o, /3, 7, 8, e, 1, k, X, 

fl, V, O, 7T, p, <r, t, v. 

2. The alphabet was not brought at once into its present complete form. 
The old Attic alphabet contained but 21 letters. H was considered merely as 
a breathing, and the place of 77 and &> was supplied by e and 0, and that of ty 
and I by $2 and X2, e. g. AI0EP (ot^p), EX0PON (ix&p&v), $2TXAI (^«x«0> 
X2TN (|w). The alphabet is said to have been completed in the time of the 
Persian war, by Simonides, who added E, ¥, and H, and changed the breathing 
H, to the long vowel 77. The Ionians first adopted the present full alphabet 
of 24 letters, and by them it was communicated to the Athenians. This full 
alphabet was first used in Attic inscriptions in the archonship of Euclides, 
B.C. 403, before this period only the old Attic alphabet is found in Attic 
inscriptions. 

3. The early Greeks used the capital letters exclusively, and left no spaces 
between the words, e. g. METAAETOYTONEinEXEIPl20<f>02, i. e. fiera 5e tov- 
tov etTre XeLpi&ocpos. The cursive, or small character, was not introduced till 
very late. A document has been found in Egypt written in the cursive char- 
acter, 104 b. c. But cursive writing was not in general use till long after that 
time. It is first found in manuscripts in the eighth century. 

4. The early Greeks commonly wrote in the Oriental manner, i. e. from 
right to left, as may be seen in several inscriptions. Other inscriptions, how- 
ever, of equal antiquity, are written from left to right, proving that both modes 
were in use. A third method was from left to right and right to left alternate- 
ly. This was called fSovffTpotpiiS&v, because it resembled the turning about of 
oxen in ploughing. Solon's laws were written in this way. But in the time of 
Herodotus, the Greeks wrote only from left to right. 



§3. Organs of Speech. 

1. The organs of speech, used in forming or articulating 
words, are the palate, the throat, the tongue, and the lips. 

2. The sounds which are emitted almost without any action 
of the throat, tongue, and lips, and which proceed in the freest 
manner from the breast, are called Vowels; the rest, Conso- 
nants. 



§ 4.] VOWELS. 19 

§ 4. Vowels . 

1. The Greek has seven vowels, a, t, v, which may be 
long or short, e and o, which are always short, tj and w 
which are always long. The character (") over one of the 
vowels a, i, v, shows that the vowel is short ; (") that it is 
long ; (~) that it may be either long or short, e. g. a, a, a. 

Remake: 1. a, i, and v are called the principal vowels, because they denote 
the principal sounds ; the other vowels are called subordinate, because their 
sounds are the intermediates of the principal sounds. Thus, the sound of e is 
intermediate between a and i, the sound of o is intermediate between a and v ; 
7) is produced by lengthening e or o, w by lengthening o. The relation of these 
vowels may be illustrated by the following diagram: — 



T. 




2. When two vowels are so combined as to form but 
one sound, the sound so produced is called a diphthong. 
When both the vowels are sounded, the diphthong is called 
proper ; when only one, improper. 

3. The Greek diphthongs originate from the union of the 
vowels a, e, o, v, tj, co, with the vowels i and v, thus : — 



a -\- i = cu, 


pronounced 


like ai in aisle, e. 


?• alff , 


a -{- v = av, 




" 




u 


au in laud, J " 


vaus, 


«+' = «» 




it 




u 


ei in sleight, , " 


deiv6s, 


€ -f- v = eu, ") 




« 




« 


eu in feudal, " 


ZirKsvffa, tyv^ov, 


O + l = 01, 




<( 




u 


oi in oil, " 


koiv6s, 
obpav6s, 


-f- V = OVy 




(C 




" 


ou in sound, i ' 


V -{- t = VI, 




" 




(( 


whi in whine, " 


vlos, 


<a -f- v — av, (only Ionic, 


)" 




" 


ou in sound, ' 


wvt6s; also the im- 


>er diphthongs, a, rj, 


© (i 


e. 


*+, 


,V 


+ l,«4- t ); « 


atVxp?, k epa, rrj, r<p 



Rem. 2. The pronunciation of the diphthongs o, 77, w is the same as that of 
the simple vowels d, 77, o>, though the ancient Greeks probably gave the 1 a 
slight sound after the other vowel. 

Rem. 3. With capital letters, the Iota subscript of a, 77, <a, is placed in a 
line with the vowels, but is not pronounced, e. g. Till KAAX1I= t<£ Ka\$, r§ 
"AtS?7, but a5p. 



20 VOWELS. [$ 4. 

Rem. 4. The Iota subscript, which in the most flourishing period of the 
Greek language was always pronounced, at length became a silent letter, and 
was either omitted in writing, or was written under the vowel to which it 
belonged. It was first Avritten under the vowel in the thirteenth century. 

Rem. 5. The following examples will show how the Romans sounded the 
diphthongs : at is expressed by the diphthong ae, ei by I and c, oi by oe, ov by u ; 
v was generally expressed by y, e. g. 

$a78pos, Phaedrus ; Evpos, Eurus ; 0/>£/<es, Thraces ; 

TXavKos, Glaucus ; Boiwria, Bceotia ; @pjj(T<Ta, Thressa ; 

NelAos, Nilus ; Modaa, Musa ; rpay V d6s, tragoedus ; 

AvksIou, Lyceum ; E<A.e&i/ia, Ilithyia; Kvpos, Cyrus. 

In words adopted later, the Romans expressed w by o, as W&77, ode. 

Rem. 6. When two vowels, which would regularly form a diphthong, are to 
be pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called Diaeresis, placed 
over the second vowel (1, v), e. g. alSo'i, for aiSoi, vis, &vttuos. If the acute 
accent is on the t or v, it is placed between the points ; if the circumflex, over 
them, as aiSrjs, KAe'idi, rrpavs. 

Rem. 7. The pronunciation given under § 2a, as well as that given to the 
diphthongs above, is the one more generally adopted in New England. The 
original pronunciation of the Greek is lost. It is, therefore, the common cus- 
tom for scholars (in each country) to pronounce it according to the analogy of 
their own language. This is the method proposed by Erasmus in the sixteenth 
century, and is generally adopted in Europe at the present day. The pronun- 
ciation defended by Reuchlin ' in the same century, corresponds nearly with 
the modern Greek. 



r Eor the benefit of those who may wish to compare the two modes, the fol- 
lowing explanation of the Reuchlinian is extracted from the Greek Grammar 
of Sophocles : " A is pronounced like a in father, far. p, 7, 8, like b, g hard, 
d; in later times, like Romaic 0, 7, 8. Before k, 7, x> !> 7 nad the sound of 
ng in hang, e, like Romaic e, or Italian e. £ like ?> but stronger, -n, like French 
e, as in fete. &, like th in thin, ether, saith. t, like i in machine, k, like k. 
X, /a, like I, m, respectively, v, like n. At the end of a word it was often pro- 
nounced and written as if it were a part of the next word. {, in the Attic 
dialect, like |s ; in the other dialects, like ks. In later times, the sound ks pre- 
vailed. 0, like Romaic 0, or Italian 0. tt, like p. p, like r. At the begin- 
ning of a word it was rotted ; when it was doubled, only the second one was 
rolled. It was rolled, also, after &, cp, %. c, like s in soft, past. Before /*, it 
was, in later times, sounded like £ and even changed into C in writing ; as 
Zp.vpva, for ^vpva, in an inscription, r, like t in tell, strong, v, like French u 
<p, like/ but stronger. x> like Romaic x , German ch, or Spanish,;' (x). ^, in 
the Attic dialect, like <ps ; in the other dialects, like its. In later times, the 
sound 7ts prevailed. &>, like in note, nearly. When a consonant was doublec 
in writing, it was doubled also in pronunciation. During the most flourishing 
period of the language, both the vowels of a diphthong were distinctly heard 



§ 5.] CONSONANTS. 21 



§ 5. Consonants. 

1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the dif- 
ferent organs of speech, by which they are formed, into — 

Palatals, <y k %, 
Linguals, 8 r ^ v X p a; 
Labials, /3 ir <fc yu. 

Remark 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of 
speech, are called cognate consonants ; thus 7, k, x are cognate consonants. 

2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater 
or the less influence of the organs of speech in their forma- 
tion, into breathings, liquids, and mutes. 

(a) The Breathings form a kind of transition from the 
vowels to the consonants. There are three breath- 
ings : the lingual <r; the Spiritus Asper ( f ), correspond- 
ing to our h (§ 6) ; and the labial F (Digamma) ; on 
the last, see the remarks upon the Dialects. 

(b) The Liquids, \ //, v p, are so called, because they easily 
coalesce with the other consonants. 

Rem. 2. The Breathings and Liquids are also included under the common 
name of semivowels, forming a kind of transition to the full vowels. 



! During the brazen age, and probably during the latter part of the silver age, 
the diphthongs ot, ei, ov, had each the power of a single vowel, ai, like ai in 
aisle ; in later times, like tj, or French 6 ; during the latter part of the brazen 
1 age, like e. av, like ou in our, house ; in later times, like av, af. et, like ei in 
freight, nearly 5 in later times, like t. During the silver and brazen ages, e was 
ooften prefixed to 1 long, merely to mark its quantity; as Kpetvco, reTcra/, ret^Jjcrai. 
And when quantity began to be disregarded, even short 1 was represented by 
f«; as ElalScoposy ElaoKparris, yv[Mj/a<Teiapxfi<ras. eu, like eh-oo rapidly pro- 
j nounced ; in later times, like ev, ef. 01, like oi in oil, nearly, ov, like oh-00 
, rapidly pronounced ; in later times, like 00 in moon, or like French ou, Italian u. 
, When the Boeotians used ov for v, they pronounced it long or short, according 
j as the original v was long or short ; thus, in ot/Swp, o-oiv, it was short, like 00 in 
,, hook ; in ov\r\, aaovKia, long, like oo in moon, vi, like xoi in twist ; vt, like whi in 
j whip ; in later times, like v. As to the diphthongs 9, 77, o>, av, 77V, wu, they 
, differed from ai, a, oi,jxv, ev, ov only in the prolongation of the first vowel. 
[jln later times, o, 77, <y were pronounced like d, 77, «, respectively." — * Tr. . 



22 



BREATHINGS. 



[*6. 



(c) The Mutes are formed by the strongest exertion of the 
organs of speech ; they are, ^S^/cttt^. 

3. The Mutes are divided, 

(a) According to the organ of speech used in pronouncing 
them, into three Palatals, three Linguals, and three 
Labials ; 

(b) According to their names, into three Kappa, three 
Tau, and three Pi-mutes ; 

(c) According to the force of articulation, into three smooth, 
three medial, and three rough Mutes. 

Rem. 3. Hence each of the nine mutes may be considered in a threefold 
point of view, e. g. y may be called a palatal, a kappa-mute, or a medial, ac- 
cording as we wish to bring into view the organ by which it is pi-onounced, its 
name, or the force of articulation, a medial mute requiring less force to articu- 
late it than a rough mute. 





SMOOTH. 


MEDIAL. 


EOUGH. 




Palatals 


/< 


7 


X 


Kappa-mutes 
Tau-mutes 


Linguals 


T 


S 


£ 


Labials 


7T 


P 


<£ 


Pi-mutes 


Rem. 4. The ( 

organs, are called 

4. From tli 
ing a, three d 


consonants, w 
coordinate, e. 

e coalesce 
ouble cons 


hich are pro 
g. the smootl 

i nce of th< 
onants ori 


luced by the 
i mutes, k, ir, 

i Mutes \^ 
ginate, — 


same effort of the 
t, are coordinate. 

dth the Breath- 



tj/ from 7TO- /3<r <p<r, as twJ/w (ncr), x^W' (00"), KarrjXL^ ((pa), 

| from kit y<r %<T, as /copa| (k<t), \e|« (70"), ui/v£ (x<r), 

£ is not, like \p and f , to be regarded as a sound compounded of two con- 
sonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft z. 
Only in the adverbs in (e, is ( to be considered as composed of <rd, e. g. 
y AStJiva(€ instead of 'A&VcisSe; also, fSv(yv (close), for ^vadr]v (from fiwea>, 
to stop, Perf. Pefivo-fxai). It may be regarded, perhaps, as a transposition 
of sounds, as when the iEolic and Doric dialects use, in the middle of 
a word, <r8 instead of £, e. g. /xeXtcrSerai for /j.e\i£eTcu. 



§ 6. Breathings. 

1. Every word beginning with a vowel has a smooth or 

a rough Breathing; the former (Spiritus Lenis) is indi- 



W 7, 8] hiatus. 23 

cated by the mark ( ' ) ; the latter (Spiritus Asper) by the 
mark ( f ). The rough breathing answers to the English 
and Latin h, e. g. laropla, historia, history. The smooth 
breathing is connected with every vowel which has not the 
rough ; but the smooth has no influence on the pronuncia- 
tion, e. g. 'AiroXkwv, Apollo. 

Remark 1. With diphthongs, the breathing is placed over the second vowel, 
e. g. olos, ebMs, abriKa. But when the improper diphthongs, a, v , a , are capital 
letters, the breathing is placed over the first vowel, as these three diphthongs 
are regarded, to a certain extent, as simple vowels, e. g. «aOt,s (fift,,) ; •*.•& 

Rem. 2. Originally, the Greeks had no mark for the smooth breathing The 
rough breathing was at first denoted by E or H. But when H came to be used 
as a vowel, Aristophanes of Byzantium, about 200 years b.c, divided it into 
two characters l and i, the former as the sign of the rough breathing the 
latter of the smooth. Later, these became ( r ) and ( J ), and at last ( ■ ) and ( ' ) 

Rem. 3. The liquid p at the beginning of words has the rough breathino- 
e g. fa&os. When two p's come together, the first has the smooth breathin- 
the last the rough, e.g. ntftos, Pyrrhus; but some editors omit both breath- 
ings, e. g. Uvppos. 

Rem. 4. At the beginning of a word, „ always has the rough breathing 
except in the iEolic dialect. 



CHANGES OF LETTERS. 

§ 7. General Remark. 
Both the vowels and consonants are subject to a variety of 
changes. These changes result from the tendency of the 
language to euphony, from their grammatical significance, and 
from the difference of dialects. The last will be considered 
m treating of the Dialects. 



I. Changes of the Vowels. 

§ 8. Hiatus. 
The concurrence of two vowels in two successive sylla- 
bles or words, occasions a harshness in the pronunciation, 



24 EUPHONIC CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. [$ 9. 

called Hiatus. This is avoided by Contraction, Crasis, 
Synizesis, and Elision. 

Remark 1. The poets, particularly the Attic, were decidedly averse to the 
Hiatus of two vowels in two successive words ; among the prose-writers, the 
orators sought most carefully to avoid it. 

Rem. 2. In, the Iambuses of the tragic poets, the Hiatus is allowed in the 
interrogative tij what? e.g. ii ovv ; n dires ; among the comic poets, its use is 
mostly confined to t(, otl, 7repi, S>, e.g. on is, on oi>x'h irspl v/j.c2v, also in ouSe 
(/j.7]be) els («/), ne unus quidern. to distinguish it from ovSeis, nullus. In addition 
to its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is found frequently, even in the 
Tragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when possible ; still, it is mostly limited 
to special cases ; for example, it occurs with interjections and imperatives, e. g. 
£>, vai, dva {up !). ?&l, as 1&i, fth /noi ireuebv, Soph. Ph. 832; c\X>C dva, e£ zdpd- 
vmv, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus in the Epic dialect, see § 200. 



§ 9. A. Contraction of Voice Is. 

Contraction is the union of two successive vowels in the 
same word into one long syllable. These contractions arise 
either from the natural coalescence of two successive vowels, 
in accordance "with the laws of euphony, or from grammatical 
principles. The first kind of contractions is called euphonic, 
the latter, grammatical. In the Common language, the follow- 
ing contractions occur : — 

I. Euphonic Contractions. 



(a) a -fa 


= a 


as • treXaa = creXa 


* +* 


= ei 


" <pi\ee = (p(Xei (Comp. No. II.) 


t + « 


= I 


- ir6pni = iroprl 


o -4- 


= ov 


" voos = vovs 


(b)a+6 > 


. 


" ri/xae — Ti/xct 


«+T) V 




" nfj.clrjTe = nfiare 


a -f- i 


= a 


" yrjpa'i = yvpa 


«+» | 


= d) 


" nixa.op.ev = n/jco/xev 


a -f- co > 




" nfidw/jev = njj.cc/j.ev 


a+« ) 




" npaeis = n;j.as 


0-+V i 




" rifidris = nfxas 


a -f- oi 


= CO 


" TlfxdoijJ.L = Tlj.CVjJ.1 


a -f- ov 


= CO 


" TLfiaOV = TljJLCC 


(c)e +a 


= V 


" retx^o. = reixv (Comp. ~No. II.) 


e +d 


= d 


;i X oea = X°" 


e +' 


= €4 


' : Tfi'xei* = Tei'xei 


6 +o 


= OV 


" cpiXeo/.L€v — <pi\ovjxev 


e -\- <o (&>)• 


— co (co) 


" cpiXecj = cpiXca, bo~rico = oorrcp 


« -f- at 


*■ v 


•' rvirreai = rvTrrr) 



§ 9-] GRAMMATICAL CONTRACTIONS. 



25 



€ -f- CI 


= €1 


as 


: <pi\4eis = cpiXcis 


* +77 


— I? 


" 


cpiAeys = (piXys 


e -f- oi 


= 01 


" 


cpiAeois = (piAoTs 


% + ov 


= ou 


" 


e/uAeou = cptXov 


(d) 77 + e 


= 7? 


'.' 


vX-fjccrcra = vXrjffcra 


77+* 


= V 


u 


Qp-fl'icrcra == &pfjcrcra 


77 -f-€i 


= 77 


" 


n/xricis = n/xrjs 


(e) t + a 




" 


irSprias = irSprls 


« + * 




" 


irSpries '== iv6pTls 


(f)o +« 


= CO 


u 


alS6a = alSco (Comp. No. II.) 


0+6 


= OV 


" 


/xlcr&oe = (ittrfrov 


0+77 


= CO 


" 


fucr&SrjTe = nicr&coTG 


o+< 


= 01 


a 


alSSi = aiSoi 


o + co (co) 


= co (co) 


" 


/j.io~&6co = /Aia&to, ttX6co = 7rAcp 


o + at 


== at 


a 


c\trX6ai = cwrAa? 


+ €t 




(i 


/Aicr&oei = ij.icr&o? ( Comp. Eem. 2.) 


0+7? 


= ot 


" 


fjucr&6r) = /xicr&o? 


+ <H 




u 


fucr&Soi/xi = (ua&oT/Ai 


+ OV 


== OV 


(C 


/jucr&6ovo~i = [Aicr&odcri 


(g)v+a 




" 


Ix&vas = Ix&vs 


v+c 


= 


" 


iX&vcs = Ix&vs 


v +77 




" 


8eiKvv7)Tcu = DciKuvrai (rarely) 


(h) a, + a 


== CO 


" 


7jpcoa = 7?pco (only in Ace. of some Sub. of 


co + t 


= CO 


u 


XcL'Ccttos = X$o~tos. [3d Dec. 



Remark 1. The above contractions take place in accordance with the fol- 
lowing principles: (1) Both vowels are retained and form a diphthong, e. g. 
rdxe'i — Tei'xet, aldS'i = aldoZ (2) Both vowels coalesce into a cognate long 
vowel or diphthong, e. g. rijxdojxcv == Tifj.6o/j.ej/, aldoa = al8£>. (3) A short vowel 
is absorbed by a diphthong or long vowel preceding or following it ; e. g. 
(piX4co = c/uAco, <piX4ov = (piXov, iiX-qccrca = vArjcro~a. (4) The short vowels, a, i, 
v, absorb the following vowel and become long ; e. g. riuac = rt/xd, Ix&vas = 
i%&Os. (5) A short vowel coalesces with the first vowel of a diphthong, ac- 
cording to the preceding principles ; when the second vowel is i, it is subscribed 
with a, 77, co, but if it is any other vowel it is dropped ; e. g. ri/ndys = rifxas, 

Tifj.doip.1 = TifAteiM = rifj-dov = TI/J.U), TVTTTCai = TVimrj. 

II. Grammatical Contractions. 

(a)-e + e = 77, particularly in the third Dec, e. g. rpifycc = rpi-fjpr], y4vce 
= y4vt\. 

(b) e + a = d in the second Dec, c g. ocrrea == octtS, xp v(rea == XP var <* 
(PL), and elsewhere, if a vowel precedes, e. g. UepiKx4-ca = 
Ilept/cAed, /cAe-ea = /cAea, vyi-4a = xiyia ; in the Ace PI. 
Fern, of Adjectives in -cos, -4a, -eov, e. g. xp var ^- as = XP V(r "- s j 
finally, in the Fem. of Adjectives in -cos, -4a, -cov, when 
these endings are preceded by a vowel or p, e. g. epe-eos, 
e-4a, 4-cov = ipeovs, ipea, ipeovv, apyvpeos, eo, coy = ovs t 
a, ovv. 

3 



26 CRASIS. [$ 10. 

e + o = 5j in the Fern. Sing, of adjectives in -eos, not preceded by a 
vowel or p ; e. g. xP V0 ~* a = XP V<T W> xP var ^ as == X/ Jl " r ^ s '* 

e -f~ « = €I i n Accusatives PI. in eas of third Dec, e. g. o~a<p£-as = cra-V 
(pets ; SO irSXeis, irr]X €ls > e '7X e ^ eiS > from Tr6Xeas, etc.* 
(c) o -{- a = a in Adjectives in 60s, 6m, 6ov, e.g. air\6-a = a7r\a. 

o -f- 77 = ri in Adjectives in 60s, 6-q, 6ov, e. g. a7r\6-v = a7rA7j. 

o + a = ov in Accusative PI. of fiovs ; so also ixzi£oas = fxeiCovs, and 
the like. 

Eem. 2. The contraction of oet into ou is found only in the Inf. Act. of 
verbs in 6a>, and is accounted for from the fact that the Inf. originally ended in 
fv, not in eiv (consequently, not iaio~&6<ziv = nicr&ovv, but p.ic&6sv = nio~$rovv), 
and in adjectives in 6eis, e. g. 'OTr6eis = 'Oirovs, in which the root ends in oevr, 
and consequently the 1 does not belong to the root. On the accentuation of 
contract forms, see § 30. 

Rem. 3. The Tragic poets sometimes neglect the contractions on account 
of the measure, yet only in the lyric and anapestic passages, not written in the 
pure Attic dialect, e. g. /caAew, Aesch. Ag. 147 ; rpo/xeau, Prom. 542 ; veiKeos, 
Sept. 936; eVeo, Soph. OC. 182 5 eup«, Trach. 114. 

Eem. 4. Sometimes the grammatical importance of the ending, or the form 
of the nominative, prevents the usual contraction, especially if the ending 
would thereby become doubtful. 

$ 10. B. Crasis. 

1. Crasis (Kpacns) is the coalescence of the final and 
initial vowels of two successive words into one long sylla- 
ble, e. g. to ovo/jLa = TOvvofjia, to e r rro<;=TovTTOs. 

Remark 1. The mark of Crasis is the same as that of the Spiritus 
Lenis ( ' ), and is named Coronis. It is placed over the vowel or diphthong 
formed by Crasis, but is omitted when the word begins with a vowel or diph- 
thong so formed, because it would then coincide with the Spiritus Lenis, e. g'. 
ra ayo.&d = raya&d ; a &u = av ; & frvfrpwrre = HovSpunrt. On the accentuation, 
see § 31, II; on the change of the smooth Mute into the rough before the 
Spiritus Asper, as rb vdwp = 3-ot»Swp, see 4 below, and § 17, Rem. 3. 

2. Crasis is found only with closely connected words, the first 
of which is unimportant; hence it most frequently occurs, (a) 
with the article, e. g. 6 avrjp = avrjp, rov avSpos = ravSpos ; — (b) 
frequently with Kat and the interjection w, e. g. kcu apcrrj = Kapcrrj, 
w avSpunre = wv#pa)7T€, <o dya#e == a>ya#e, & ava£ = wva£ ; — (c) some- 
what often in cyai with oTSa and oTpat, e. g. iyZSa, eya>p«; — 
(d) less often with the neuter relative o and a, as o eyw, a cyw = 
0170), ayw; with roi, pivrot, ovroi, particularly in connection 



$ 11.] MOST COMMON INSTANCES OF CRASIS. 27 

with av, apa, e. g. rav (seldom in prose), ficvrav; -rapa and ovrapa 
(poetic) ; but seldom with 77700, e. g. irpovpyov for 7rpb epyov ; fre- 
quently in composition with the augment i, as 7rpovSwKa. 

3. As the second word is the most important, it has properly 
a greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the first ; on 
this principle it is to be explained, that the Iota subscript is 
used only when the t belongs to the last of the two vowels, 
e. g. /cat €tra = Kara, eyw otoa = eywSa ; Oil the contrary, /cat hrti- 
ra = /coVetTa; at dya#at = dya^at, r<3 o^Xw — tw^Aw. 

4. When Crasis occurs with the article, and an a follows, the 
vowels of the article — even ov and w — are combined with the 
following a into a long a, and, if the article is aspirated, the 
aspirate is transferred to the long a, e. g. 6 av-qp = avrjp, 61 dVSoes 
== avSpes, to a\r)$£s = Ta\r)$£s, to. dAAa = raXXa, tov avSpo<s = TavSpos, 
rw avSpt = ravSpt ; also, to£> avrot) = TauTOu, r<5 aura) = rauT(j>. 

Rem. 2. Also the forms of the article ending in a, o, ov, co, a>, 01, at, among 
the Attic poets, combine with the first vowel of erepos (Doric arepos), and 
form long a ; when the second word has the aspirate, as here, the preceding 
smooth mute must be changed into the cognate rough; see also §17, Rem. 3. 
e.g.: — 

rh erepa = &&repa 6 trepos = arepos tov erepov = barepov 

r$ kripca = Sarepa ol erepoi = arepoi at zrepai = arepai 

5. In Crasis, at of the particle /cat coalesces with the follow- 
ing vowel, the a being sometimes retained and sometimes 
absorbed, e.g. /cat e/cetvos = /cd/cetvos, /cat aV = /cdV, /cat kv = kolv, /cat 
iyci) = Kayca [/cat el == Kel, /cat ets = /cets, poetic], /cat rj\$ov = ktjXSov 
[/cat ov = Kov, /cat euSatjawv = /ceuSat/xoov, poetic]-. 



$ 11. Summary of the most common instances of 
Crasis. 

(a) The following cases conform to the rules of contraction 
.'riven in § 9 : — 



« + « = «; 


a-f-6 = a; 


a -f- o = a>; 


o -f- o = 


o -j- e = ov ; 


o -f- t = ot ; 


?? + e = v ; 


a> -f~ a == 



(b) The following instances belong to Crasis only: — 

o -f" v = ou as : rb uScop = dni/Swp (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 
o -f- av = ou " to avr6 = tout<{ 
o -f- ai = <y ' *> a%Tiov = T&TIOV 



m 



28 SYNIZESIS. ELISION. [$$ 12, 13. 

o -f- ot = (J; as : o ol^os = yj/os 

o -f" ^7 = f] u to rifjiirepov = ^rj/xerepou (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 

CO -f- e = ft) " TCp ifJLCp = TW/jLO) 

O) -f" = CO " TO) OCp^aX/XO! = TUXp&CtXlJLd) 

oi -f- a = a ' l fievroi &v = /nevrliv 

ot + e — ou " °"°* ecrrtj/ = (Toio-riv, /xoi iSS/cei = ixov56kA (both poetic.) 

ou -j- e = ou " 7T0U eo'Tii' = irovcrnv 

ov -J- o = ov " tou bvofxaros = rovvo/xaros 

ov -}- u = oo " toG vSotos = ^oucWos (§17, Rem. 3.) 

V ~h V = V " T j? ^/"•eoa = &7)ix£pa (§17, Rem. 3.) 

ec -f" ot = cp " iycn olSa = €7^Sa 

ov -f- 77 = ?? " rod 7]iAerepov == ^rrj/xeTepov, poetic. (§17, Rem. 3.) 

ou -j- ov = ou " tou ovpavov = rovpavov 

at -f- et = a " /cal elra == /caTa 

(c) Here belong the examples given under § 10, 4 and 5. 



$ 12. C. Synizesis. 

1. Synizesis is the contraction in pronunciation of two 
vowels into one syllable, e. g. when fir) ov is pronounced as 
a monosyllable. It can occur only among the poets, but 
may have been used in the common colloquial language. 

Remark. The difference between Contraction and Synizesis is, that in the 
ordinary Contraction and also in Crasis, the contraction is made in writing, 
e. g. (piXw from <pi\4co, rovpavov from rod ovpavov ; but in Synizesis, it is made 
only in the pronunciation, both vowels or diphthongs being written out in full. 

2. In the Attic poets, Synizesis occurs almost exclusively 
between two words, viz., with brd, r), rj, fxrj, followed by et, ov, a, 
ot, e. g. e7ret ov, r) ovSets (dissyllable), /at) ov (monosyllable), /at) 
aAAot, eya) ov (dissyllable), and eyw ei/u S. Ph. 577; also, in a 
few single words and forms, e.g. #eot (=$o( } monosyllable), 
ewpaKa (=copaKa, trissyllable), dveojytuVos (= ava>y/xevos, four sylla- 
bles), particularly in the Ionic- Attic Genitive -cws, as ®t/o-«os 
(dissyllable). On Synizesis in Homer, see $ 206. 

$ 13. D. Elision. 

1. Elision is the omission of a short final vowel before 
the initial vowel of the following word. It occurs also in 
compounds, but the apostrophe is then omitted. 



$ 14.] USE OF ELISION IN THE POETS. 29 

Remark 1. The mark of Elision is the same as that of the Spiritus Lenis, 
and is called apostrophe, as rovr eariv, yevon dv. 

Rem. 2. Elision differs from Oasis in that the former elides the vowel, 
while the latter lengthens it, e. g. <xAA 3 dye (Elision), to aAAa = TaAAa (Oasis). 
This distinction, however, does not hold, when the second word begins with a 
long vowel or diphthong, e. g. to avr6 = to.vt6. 

2. In the prose writers, Elision is confined mainly to the 
following cases, where it often occurs : — 

(a) In prepositions which end in a vowel, except irepi and irpb ; also pexpi 
and &XP L > use( i as prepositions, but rarely in eVe/ca, e. g. St oIkov, in oXkov, but 
irepi oIkov, irpb otnov. Elision is regular in composition, except with irepi, irp6, 
and sometimes a/x<pl, e. g. ave?&e?v, but irepiopqv] 

(b) In conjunctions and adverbs, oAAc{, &pa, Spa, djxa, e?ra, eireira, fid\a, 
ixdhiffra, rdxa, and in many other adverbs ending in a before aV ; also in the 
following adverbs and conjunctions, 'Iva, ye, re, 8e, ovde, woe, wcrre, tire (not 
'6tl ), 7T0T6 (with the compounds, as oforoTe), r6re, en, ovueri, firiKeri ; e. g. &AA 5 
ai>Tos, ap ovv, fid\i(TT &v\ 

(c) In forms of pronouns in a, o, e, as ravra, roiavra, aAAa, riva ; irorepa 
more rare ; rovro, avr6, ifie, ere, era (never hxr6, rd) ; also in nouns and adjectives 
of the second and third declensions, ending in a, as a/xapT^fxara, etc. ; dpio-Ta, 
etc. ; epya, e. g. ravr abrd, irdvr aya&d, xpTj/xaT 5 els <pepei ; 

(d) In <prifxi, oWa, 6l<r&a, and generally in verbal forms in p.i, an, i, r a, e, o, e. g. 
<p{]/A eyct>, otS' oVSpa, i\eyeT &v, eTvirrouT' aV, yevon'' &v ; of the forms which 
admit the v Paragogic (§ 15), in prose, only earl often suffers elision ; 

(e) In certain familiar phrases, as v)} AC e<prj. 

Rem. 3. The above elisions are most frequent in the orators, particularly 
Isocrates, much more seldom in the historians. 

Rem. 4. A smooth mute before an aspirate is changed into the correspond- 
ing rough, as Trdv& oca. 

Rem. 5. A vowel, followed by a punctuation-mark, cannot be elided. Hence, 
in words closely connected, as v)] Af f=<p7j, the comma is omitted, for in such cases, 
without doubt, the ancients pronounced the words in quick succession. On 
accent in Elision, see § 31, III. 



$ 14. Use of Elision in the Poets. 

1. The use of Elision in poetry is very frequent, and much more extended 
than in prose 5 yet the following points are to be noted : A word ending in v is 
never elided ; nor a, 1, in a monosyllable ; hence the article t6, and the pro- 
nouns t\ and ri, are not elided ; and irepi in no case, — at least among the Attic 
poets, — nor Sri, pexph &XPh nor substantive adverbs of place ending in &i 
(c&t excepted), and very rarely the Optative ending in eie. 

2. The Elision of the t in the Dat. of the third Dec, particularly in the 
Sing., is very rare in the Attic poets, and is even doubted by many. 

3. The verbal endings, fxai, rai, o-frcu, which are short in respect to the 

3* . 



30 N Paragogic. [§ 15. 

accent, are rarely elided in the Attic poets : the Datives fxol and <roi are never 
elided. 

4. In the verbal forms which may take the'v Paragogic (e<£eA/cwT</cJj/), the 
poets nse Elision or the v, according to the necessities of the verse. 

5. Sometimes in Attic poetiy, a weak and grammatically unimportant sylla- 
ble is excluded by a preceding long vowel ; this is specially the case with the 
augment e, e. g. rax el ' iropevcrav, Soph. OC. 1602, eVel 'Sdupvcra, Phil. 360. This 
omission of the vowel is called aphaeresis (atyaipeais). It can also occur after 
a punctuation-mark, e. g. <ppd(rw ' VeiSr? ?j|« ■ 'irl tovtois. 



$15. N Paragogic (i<pe\Kv<TTiKov). — Ovra)(s). — 'E£ and 

6K. O V (k). 

1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of two vowels 
in two successive words is by appending a v, (v 1<j>z\kv(ttik6v, or 
Paragogic,) to certain final syllables, viz. : — 

(a) to the Dat. PL in cri, to the adverbs Tripvai, TravTaTracn, and 

all adverbs of place hi <ti, as tracrw eA.e£a; rj HXaraiaaLV 

rjyejxovta ; 
(/?) to the third Pers. Sing, and PL in m, as tvtttovo-iv e/xi, 

tlStjctiv ev rfj rpaTri^y ; so also with Icrri ; 
(y) to the third Pers. Sing, in e, e. g. trvTrrev ip.4 ; 
(8) to the numeral eUoai, though even before vowels the v 

is often omitted, e. g. eiKocriv aVSpes and cIkoo-l avSpes; 
(e) to the Demonstrative t ($ 95, e) but rarely, and then 

always after cr, e. g. ovrocriv, iKewoaiv, tovtovctlv, ovtuxtiv', 
(£) to the Epic particles, vu and kL, and to the Epic suffix <pt; 

hence also to voafa. 

Remark. The poets place the v Paragogic before a consonant, so as to make 
a short syllable long by position. In Attic prose, it stands regularly at the end 
of a book or section ; it is, also, sometimes found before the longer punctuation- 
marks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of a more emphatic pronun- 
ciation. 

2. The adverb ovtus always retains its full form before a 
vowel, but drops the final 5 before a consonant, e. g. ovrws liroi-q- 
crev, but ovtw 7tol£) ; still, ovtus may stand even before consonants, 
when it is to be made emphatic, e. g. owws ye, Xen. C. 3. 6, 9. 

3. So the Prep. i£ retains its full form before vowels and at 
the end of a sentence, but before consonants becomes Ik, e. g. 
c£ ci/o^nys, but Ik tt}<s elprjvrjs ; so also in composition, e. g. igeXav- 






$ 16.] STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VOWELS. 31 

veiv, but eKreXetv. It also lias its full form when it stands after 
the word it governs, and is then accented, dprjvqs 2£. 

4. So ovk has its full form before a vowel, e. g. ovk ato-^pos; 
before a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes ofy, e. g. 
ox>x rjSvs', but before a consonant, ov, e. g. ov /caAos; so also //.^Ken 
(instead of ^ In) after the analogy of ovkctl. 

Rem. 2. When ou stands at the end of a discourse, or of a sentence, and is 
to be pronounced with emphasis, the form oti with the acute accent is used 
even before a vowel ; in this case there must be an actual break in the discourse, 
as when ov stands at the end of an answer expressed interrogatively, without 
connection with what follows, as IIws yhp ov; ^Ap' ovv kt\. Xen. C. 4. 2, 37 ; 
or when it is found in the answer only, and corresponds to our No ; it is found 
especially in antithetical sentences, e. g. Taya&d, t« 8e /ccuca o v : 'Eav Se ktA. 
Xen. C. 1. 2, 42 ; Al&ovs els rhu Trorapoj/ eppi-rrTovv, Qikvovvto Se ov, o$re efiXair- 
rov ovdeva. An. 4. 8, 3. If, on the contrary, the following sentence is closely 
connected with the preceding, then it is written ovk, e. g. ovk, aAAoi kt\. Xen. 
C. 2. 6, 11. and 13 ; 4. 6, 2 ; ovk, el or ¥,v ktX. Hell. 1. 7, 19. 

$16. Strengthening, Weakening, Prolongation, Shortening, Inter- 
change, and Variation of Vowels. — Influence of a Voivel or 
a Consonant on another Vowel. — Syncope. — Omission of a 
Vowel. — Euphonic Prothesis. 

The changes, which further take place in vowels, are : — 

1 . Strengthening of vowels ; this consists in changing a weaker vowel into a 
stronger (see §• 4, Rem. 1). There are different degrees of strength in the 
vowels ; the weakest is e. The strengthening takes place, e. g. in words of the 
third Dec. in os, Gen. -eos ; the pure stem of these words ends in es : in the 
Nom., however, which prefers fuller forms, the weaker e is changed into the 
stronger o (in Latin into w), e. g. yivos, genus, Gen. y4veos (instead of y4uecr-os), 
gener-is. In yow and S6pv (Gen. yoi/ar-os, S6pa.T-os), a, the final vowel of the 
stem, is changed into the stronger v. 

2. The weakening or attenuation of vowels 5 this is the opposite of the 
change just described ; it occurs, e. g. in substantives of the third Dec. in -ts, -?, 
-v>, -v ; in these, the stronger stem-vowels 1 and v are changed into the weaker e, 
e. g. tt6\is, ir6\€C>}5 ; irrix^s, 7T7]xecos ; alvairi, crwdireos ; 'affTV, &(TT€OS. So with 
adjectives in -us, -v, e. g. yXvKvs, yXvKv, Gen. -cos. 

3. Prolongation of vowels ; this changes a short vowel into a long vowel or 
diphthong, viz. a into r\ or at ; t into t or ei ; v into or eu ; e into 77 or ei ; into co 
or ov. This prolongation takes place either for the sake of euphony, or from 
grammatical reasons, or from both together ; in the poets often on account of the 
metre. The prolongation of vowels is very prevalent in the Greek language. 
One instance only is here mentioned, namely, the strengthening of the Present 
tense in Mute and Liquid verbs, e. g. Kpivw, irXvuco, X^a, <paivoo, \dirw, <pe6ya t 



32 INTERCHANGE AND VARIATION OF VOWELS. [f 16. 

instead of nptvoo, trxtvco, Aa3-«, <pava, xirrw, cpvyoo. — The reason of the prolon- 
gation is very- often found in the omission of a v with a Tau-mute, more rarely 
of a mere v, or in the omission of a ar after a Liquid, or of a final Sigma, e. g. 
odovs instead of 6d6urs, Sidovs instead of SiS6vts, fiovXevwv instead of fiovAev- 
ovrs ; /xeAas instead of (x4\avs ; %<T<pt)\a instead of eo-<paAo-a, tfyyeiAa instead of 
tfyyeXaa, 4<p&eipa instead of e<p^epaa] prjrcop instead of pT}rops, iroifx^v instead 
of ttoijx4ps, 8al,uwv instead of Salixovs, alScbs instead of alSous, ah-nfrfis instead of 
a\r]&ecrs. 

4. Shortening of vowels. See the remarks on the Dialects, § 207. 

5. Interchange of vowels ; this consists in softening a long vowel into a 
short one, and as a compensation, in lengthening the short vowel immediately 
following. Thus, in the Ionic and Attic dialects, e« instead of do, e. g. t'Aews, 
•wv, instead of c l\dos, -ov, \edos instead of Ado's, vews instead of vaos, MeveAews 
instead of MeveAdos ; further, in the Attic dialect, /3a<nAea>s, f3acri\4d instead of 
the Ionic Pao-iXljos, -rja; so also, irjAecos, ™fjx €WS > Attic, instead of tt6Aios, 
irr)X V0S ; e is weaker than i and v, see No. 2. 

6. Variation, i. e. the change of the radical vowel e into o and o, for the 
formation of the tenses (§ 140) and derivatives (§ 231, 6); when €t in the 
Present is lengthened from the radical i, it becomes oi in the second Perf., hut 
when from the radical e, it becomes o ; e. g. rp4cpco, r4rpo(pa, iTpa<pr]u ; \eiirco 
(root A«r), AeAoi7ra; <p&eipa> (root <p&ep), ecp&opa, icpfrapriv ; <p\4yca, <p\6l- ; Tpe%a>, 
rpoxos ; rpecpca, rpocpr), rpocpevs, rpacpepSs. Comp. Germ, stehle, gestohlen, stahl, 
English, ring, rang, rung. The r\ is changed into w, e. g. dp^ya, apwy-tj. 

Remark 1. Whether the a is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as a 
euphonic change of e, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, partic- 
ularly p and A, sometimes even fx and v, may be doubted. Comp. erpairov, 
irpdcpriv, icrrpdcprju, ifipaxqv, i8dpr)v, i(p&dpr,v, iardk-rju, erafxov, etcravov with 
ityeyrju, erekou. 

7. Change of a vowel by the influence of another vowel or of a consonant. 
Here belong two special cases : — 

(a) The Attic writers change the Ionic t\ into a after the vowels e and t and 
the diphthongs ending with i, sometimes even after other vowels, and 
after the Liquid p, e. g. lS4a (Ion. I54ri), o~o<pia, xP e ' a 5 VH-^P^ dpyvpa, 
eiriava, iirepa.ua ] 

(b) The union-vowel e in verbs in «, is changed into o before the terminations 
beginning with p. and v, e. g. fiovXtvofxev, jSouAeiWrai, ifiovAevopicv, e/3ov 
Xevovro. 

8. Syncope (o-iry/ccwr^), i. e. the omission of e in the middle of a word between 
a Mute and a Liquid, or between two Liquids, or between ttt ; the same, also, 
occurs in the declension of certain substantives of the third Dec, e. g. iraTp6s 
instead of narepos ; in the forming of the Present tense of certain verbs, e. g. 
yiyvop.ou instead of yty4uo/j.ai, ir'mTui instead of iwreTCd, fil/xvca instead of fj.ip.4vca ; 
and in the formation of the tenses of some verbs, e. g. r)yp6fxr)u from iyetpw ; 
Syncope rarely occurs after <r, e. g. ioxov, k<rn6p.t\v, icrai, instead of ia^xov, 
4<reir6p.r]v, 4o-erat. A striking example of Syncope is found in ^A&oj/ instead 
of fjAv&oi/, from 'EAETOn. Comp. § 155. 



17.1 



MUTES. 



33 



9. Apocope. See on the Dialects, § 207. 

10. One of the vowels a, e, o is prefixed to several words, for the sake of 
euphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, e. g. aoTepo-n-^ and o-Tepoirr}, atrrcupis 
and (TTcxpis, e'x&es and x^ es J ^kc7uos and kgIvos, e&eA.« and 3-eA.w, dicpvoeis and 
Kpvos, ofivpofxcu and dvpo/xai, okcAAw and /ceAAco, etc. 

Rem. 2. From these euphonic letters care must be taken to distinguish 
(1) a when it stands for air6, e. g. a-^vveiv, to avert, or when used instead of 
avd, e. g. a/xva-creiy, to tear up, or instead of the a or & copulative with the 
meaning of 'djxa, from which also a intensive has been formed ; (2) e, when it 
is used instead of ij- or iu, e. g. iyeipeiv, to wake up, ipevyew, eructare, ipe&eiv, 
trritare 5 (3) with the meaning of 6/j.ov, e. g. dixix^V- 



II. Changes of the Consonants. 
§ 17. a. Mutes. 

1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a great degree, 
from the tendency of language to assimilate different sounds. 
This assimilation is either a mere resemblance in sounds, as 
when AeAey-raris changed into AeAcKrcu, the smooth r chang- 
ing the medial y into the smooth k ; or it is a complete identity 
in sounds, as when o-vv-p'nrTD> is changed into avppcTTTui. — 
Sometimes, however, the language shuns a sameness in sound, 
and seeks to remove it by changing similar sounds into dissim- 
ilar, e. g. 7T€.-(pi\r]Ka for <fce-cpi\.r)Ka ) 5a7T(/)t6 for ^a</><£co. 

2. A Pi-mute (^ j3 <f>) or a Kappa-mute (k y x) before a Tau- 
mute (t 8 #) must be coordinate with the Tau-mute, i. e. only 
a smooth Mute (tt k) can stand before the smooth r ; only a 
medial (/? y) before the medial 8; only an aspirate (<£ x) before 
the aspirate #; consequently, ttt and kr; (38 and yS; </># and 
X$, e. g. 



j8 before t 


nto 7r as : 


from 


T pi &(>)) 


T6Tpi)8-Tai 


= Terpiirrai 


♦ " 


T 


« 


TT " 


" 


ypdcpoo) 


yiypa<p-rai 


= yiypairrai 


7 " 


T 


" 


K " 


' cc 


Xeyco) 


AeAey-Tai 


= \4\CKTCll 


X " 


T 


" 


K " 


u 


PpeX®) 


j8e^pex-Tat 


= fizfiptKTCU 


TT " 


5 


" 


J8 " 


" 


KVTTTOO) 


KVTT-da 


= Kvfida 


<*> " 


5 


cc 


J8 " ( 


EC 


ypd<pcti) 


ypd(p-?>7)v 


= ypdpSr,v 


K " 


5 


" 


7 " 


CC 


tt\4kco) 


ttXek-Stju 


= ir\eydr)v 


X " 


5 


(C 


7 " 


:t 


frpeX™) 


&p4x-$w 


= fipzyZT)v 


n- " 


& 


a 


4> " 


' " 


Tre^TToo) 


iirG/j.7r-&7}v 


= iire/ncp^u 


£ " 


& 


" 


4, « 


! " 


Tpifico) 


iTplfi-frrju 


= irpl(p&7}u 


/c " 


S 


n 


X " 


a 


ir\eK(i)) 


iTrAeK-frriv 


= e7rAe%^7jv 


7 " 


S 


" 


X " 


a 


\4yw ) 


ikcy-Srif 


= iXsx&V 1 '. 



34 MUTES. [$ 17 

Remark 1. The preposition e/c remains unchanged, probably by virtue of an 
original movable cr, thus £ks, e. g. iicdovpai, iK&elvcu, etc., not iySovvai, ex&ew'ai. A 

3. The smooth. Mutes (tt k t) before a rough breathing, are 
changed into the cognate aspirates (<f> x $), not only in inflec- 
tion and derivation, but also in two separate words, the rough 
breathing being transferred from the vowel to the smooth Mute ; 
but the medials (/3 y 8) are thus changed only in the inflection 
of the verb ; elsewhere there is no change, hence : — 

air' ov == acp' ov, iTT-fifxepos (from irri, ypepa) = iip'fj/J.epos 

iirvcpaiva} (from iiri, iKpaiuu) = icpvcpaivw, rirvir-a = rervcpa 

ovk 6<rld)s = oi>x 6<rlws, SeK-fifxepos (from delta, y^pa) = Sex^l^pos 

avilXKw = avfreAKOD = from avri, eA/ca>), but ovdeis (not ov&ds, from ovS" and eiV) 

€?\oy-a = eVAo%a, but \ey srepav (not A ex' erepav) 

Terpifi-a = rerpicpa, but TpTfi ovrcas (not rpTfi ovrus). 

Rem. 2. The negative ovk {ov) thus becomes ovx> e - S- ox>x rjSvs] yet this 
change does not occur before the aspirate p, e. g. ov p'nrra>. In some com- 
pounds, the smooth Mute is retained even in the Attic dialect, according to 
Ionic usage, e. g. ain)\i<i)TT}s {east wind, from ano and t}Aios), Aevicnriros {one who 
rides a white horse, from Aevic6s and 'iiriros), Kparnriros, etc. 

Rem. 3. This change of the smooth Mute before the rough breathing takes 
place also in Crasis (§§ 10 and 11), e. g. rcc erepa = &&Tepa, rb ifidriov == frol/nd- 
tlov, Kai erepos = x&Tepos, ical '6o~a offris, oirvs = x^ * * X^ <TTiS > X^ 7r&,s# ^ e ^ 
this Crasis is only poetic. When the smooth Mutes ttt or kt precede the rough 
breathing, both must be changed into Aspirates (No. 2), e. g. ecpfrfifu-pos instead 
of 47ttt7^6/)os (from eirrd, 7)ix4pa), vvx&' '6h-nv instead of vvkt '6Kt}v. Attic prose 
uses also the full forms, e. g. vvkto. '6\r\v. 

Rem. 4. In some compounds, the aspirated liquid p changes the preceding 
smooth Mute into the Aspirate, e. g. <ppol/juov, formed by Crasis from irpooifxiov 
(from irp6 and oT/jlos) ; re&piinroj/ (from rdrpa and 'Ittitos), frpdo-crcti from rapdo-o-<o; 
so (ppovSos from -rrp6 and 686s. 

4. On the contrary, a rough Mute cannot stand before the 
same rough Mute, but is changed into the corresponding smooth, 
e. g. ^a7rcf>o), Ba/cx°5j tltStj, 'Aral's; not Zsacfxfrw, Ba^o?, T$3iq, 
'A##ts: on the same principle, when p is doubled, the first 
Aspirate disappears, e. g. TLvppos, not Hvppos. 

5. A Tau-mute (t S $) before another Tau-mute is changed 
into o- (comp. claustram from claudo) ; but it disappears before 
k (in Perf. and Plup. Act), e. g. 

tirel£f-frnv (from Tret^w) becomes iirelo-frrii/ 

7rei&-T€OS ( " irei&oi}) " ireiffreos 

7)pei5-&riv ( " epe/Sw) " ypelafrriu 

frfaefo-Ka ( " irei&a>) " iriireuta. 



$ 18.] LIQUIDS. 35 

6. The r, which in the Attic dialect very often becomes <x, is 
frequently changed into o- by the influence of a following i, e. g. 
irXpvcrios (instead of ttXovtio<s, from 7tA.oi!tos), 'AfxaSovcnos (instead 
of 'AfxaS-ovvT-ios), MiXrjarios (from MtA^ros), 'AvepotVios (instead 
of 'A)(ep6vT-ios), ova-ta (instead of oVr-ia), yepovcn'a (instead of 
yepovT-ta), Ivuxvo-los (from Ivlclvtos). The t sometimes changes 
by assimilation the other Tau-mutes, and the Palatals, into o- ; 
thus in the forms of the Comparative in -o-ow and -£cdv, where 
there is a double change, first of the Tau-mute or Palatal to <r 
by means of the i, and then the assimilation of the t to <t, e. g. 
fipaSvs (/3pa8tW, (Bpao-ioiv), /3pd(T(ra)V, poet., Tra^ys (7ra^tW, ira<s- 
i(dv), 7rd<Tcro)V } poet, fxiya^ //,ei£cov (instead of fjLeyiwv), raxys, 
Saarcrajv (instead of ra^-ticov). 



$ 18. b. Liquids. 

1. The Liquid v is sometimes changed into a. This takes 
place, e. g. in the Ace. Sing, third Dec. of substantives, whose 
stem ends with a consonant, e. g. /<opa£, KopaK-a (not KopaK-w), 
XapLirds, XafM7rdS-a. The same change, also, sometimes takes 
place in the third Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass, of 
mute and liquid verbs, which properly should end in -i/t<h and 
-vto (as in pure verbs, e. g. (SefiovXtv-vrai, ifieftovXev-vro), e. g. 
rcrpt<j£)arat, IrerpifjidTO, ir^TrXiyarai, rera^on-ai, ecrKeuaSarai, Ke^wpiSdraiy 
l^dpdrai (instead of rerpif^vraiy crerpt^vro, etc., from rpt^-u), 
7rA.e/c-o), Ta<ro--co, o~Kevd£-(ti, -^xtpi^-oi, <£#eip-co). See $ 116, 15. 

2. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g. 

ffvv-Xoyifa becomes cvWoyifa cvv-fierpia becomes <rv/j./j.eTpta 

iv-fxivw " i[J.[j.ei/<o (rvv-p'\.irr<a " GvppiirTO). 

Remark. Comp. iSino, immineo, instead of inZino, imrcineo. Assimilation 
takes place in 6\\vi*i, instead of oKw/xi. — "Ev before p is not assimilated, e.g. 
ivphrca ; yet e/Jpwfyios is more frequent than evpv&fios ; on the contrary, ivXaK- 
/cetfw stands instead of e'AAa/c/cetta. 

3. M initial before a Liquid is changed into ft, e. g 

[iXIttciv (from fi4\i) becomes fixim-iv 

/xXctxTKU ( " jAOXsiv) " /3\ti(TKW 

fjLporSs ( " (x6pos, mors) " Ppor6s. 



36 



MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 



[U9. 



$ 19. c. Mutes and Liquids. — Liquids and Mutes, 
1. A Pi-mute (tt /? </>) before /* is changed into fx, 



a Kappa-mute (k y x) 
a Tau-mute (t 8 #) 



(a) Pi-mute: 



()8) Kappa-mute 



(7) Tau-mute: 



TeTpif3-/J.at 

XeAenr-fiai 

yeypacp-fiai 

ireirXeK-fxai 

\e\ey-fiai 

PePpeX-f* ai 

¥jvvr-fxai 

ip-fipeid-yai 

Treirei^-fxaL 

KeK0y.1d-p.cu 



" /* 

from rpifSoo) 

" Keiirw) 

" ttX4ko>) 

" Ae-ya)) 

1 avvrco) 

1 epelda)) 

' 7rei&ct>) 

' KoyiCco) 



" cr, e. g. 

becomes reTpi/xfj.at 
" KeXeifx/xai. 

" • yeypaixfAal 
" treirXeyfxai 

remains XeKeyyai 
becomes fieflpeyfiai 
" • ijuva-fiai 
" * ep^peifffiai 
" TreTreifffxai 

" KeK6(Ju<rfj.ai. 






Remake: 1 

before ^u, e. : 



In some words, tbe Kappa and Tau-mutes are not changed 
a/c/^j, ttStixos, Kaxyds, /ceud/uSj/, etc. In some words, even x 
stands before jit, instead of tbe original k or 7, e. g. twx/^^s from tc6/cw, irXoxyo's 
from irKeKca. The preposition <fk, in composition, is not changed, e. g. e/^tew- 

2. The medial ft before v is changed into p, e. g. 



<re(3-v6s (from Gefiojxai) 
epefi-v6s ( " epefios) 



becomes cre/Ws 
" ipefxvSs. 



N before a Pi-mute (n {3 <j> ij/) is changed into /a, 
N before a Kappa-mute (k y x 9 is changed into 7, 
N before a Tau-mute (t 8 #) is not changed, e. g. 



iv-Treipia becomes e/jnreipla 
iv-fiaWct) " e/AfidWa 

ev-cppoov " e/j.(ppa)v 

ev-i\/vxos " efxtyvxos 

but avvre'ivw, ffvydew, <rvvSrea>. 



ffvv-KaXew becomes crvyKaKeoe 
ffvv-yiyvdxTKO) " (Ti'Ty^j'Ctfa'Ka; 
ffvv-xpovos " cvyxpovos 

<rw-£ea> " cu7^ew ; 

Comp. imZmo, imjorimo. 



Rem. 2. The enclitics are not changed, e. g. ovirep, rSvye, not oyrrep, etc. 

Rem. 3. Also at the end of a word, v before a Pi-mute, as well as before /*, 
was, without doubt, pronounced like /a, and before a Kappa-mute, like 7 ; and 
so it is found in .ancient inscriptions, e. g. TOMnATEPAKAITHMMHTEPA, 
TOrXPHMATl2MON (i. e. rhv irarepa ical t-}jv fxr]repa, rov x/377/xcmay/oV). So also 
A and a- are used instead of v before A and or. e g. 'EAAHMNOI, 'E22AMOI 
(i. e. iu A^/xj/oj, iu 'Zdfiw). 



$ 20.] THE SIBILANT O" WITH MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 37 

§ 20. d. Use of the Sibilant <r, with Mutes and 
Liquids. 

1. A Pi-mute (fr /? </>) with cr is changed into \J/, 

a Kappa-mute (k y x) with cr is changed into £, 
a Tau-mute (r 8 #) disappears before cr, e. g. 



(a) Pi-mute: AeiWw 

rpififfio 
ypd(pa~co 

(/3) Kappa-mute: -n-AeWw 
Ae^Cw 

(7) Tau-mute : avvrcro} 
ipei8(T(a 
irei&arco 
iTwlSffCti 



from Ae^w) becomes Aetycu 

" rplfico) " rptyta 

" ypdcpa) " ypdipw 

" tt\4kco) " 7rAe|a> 

" Aeyoj) " Ae£a> 

" jSpe'xw) " /3pe£« 

" aj/uTo>) " avvff<a 

" epei'Sa) " epekrai 

" Treiidxo) " iveiffta 

" eA7ri£aj) " iXiricru 



Remark 1. Comp. duri, re:ri, coad ; from duco, re#o, coguo. The Prep, e/c 
before c is an exception, e. g. e/c<rc6£o>, not e|c6(rw. — In 71-ous, Gen. iroo-6s, and 
in the Perf. active Part, in -c6s, Gen. -6t-os, after the Tau-mute disappears, the 
preceding vowel is lengthened. 

2. N disappears before o-; but when v is joined with a Tau- 
mute, both disappear before cr, but the short vowel before cr, is 
lengthened : e into et, o into ov, a, t, v into d, I, i5, Comp. Rem. 3, 
e.g. 

Tv<$>$4vr-<ri becomes Tv<pS&<ri \£ovr-<n becomes Aeot/tn 

o"ir4v8-<r<o " <rtre{<r<0 eX/xiv^-ffi " eA/itcrt 

TitycwT-a'i " Titydo"i 8et/cj/iW-o"t " Set/ciwi 

8ai(j.ov-<n " SaifiOffi RevcxpavT-cri " aevcxpwcrt. 

Rem. 2. Exceptions : 5 Ej/, e. g. 4uo"ireipco ; 7ray- before <r with another conso- 
nant, e. g. irduaKOTTos, in some words is assimilated ; e. g. ird<j<ro$os is used as 
well as irdv<ro(pos, etc. (in irdxiv the usage varies) ; also in some inflective and 
derivative forms in -acu and -<m from verbs in -aivco, e. g. iretyavaai (from 
<paiv«), ire-rraua-is (from ir&raiva), and in the substantives, -^ eX/xivs, earth-worm, f] 
irelpivs, wagon-basket, f) Tipws, v is retained before o\ — In composition, the v in 
crtiv is changed into cr before cr followed by a vowel, e. g. avaa&fa (from civ and 
<rcoC&>) ; but before cr followed by a consonant, or before £ it disappears, e. g. criv- 
(TTr}fj.a becomes <rv<TTf\\ia, crw-^vyia becomes av(vyia. — In xaptetn, vr is dropped ; 
on the contrary, in TdAds, ^ueAds (Gen. -dvos), tcrels, ets (Gen. -Iw's), efe, and in 
the third Pers. PL of the principal tenses (see § 103), e: g. fiovXevovcri (instead 
of fiov\evov<ri), the omission of the simple v is compensated by lengthening 
the vowel. 

3. On the contrary, in the Aorist of Liquid verbs, o- is omitted 

4 



38 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [$ 21. 

after the Liquid, but the omission is compensated, by lengthen- 
ing the stem-vowel, e. g. 

^yyeX-aa- becomes ^yyeiAa euep.-cra becomes evei/xa 

e(f>av-(ra " %<pi\va %<p&ep-<ra " e$d-e£/>a. 

Rem. 3. Sigma is likewise omitted befox^e a in tbe future of Liquid verbs, e 
being inserted before c for the sake of an easier pronunciation, and e« being con- 
tracted into a>, e. g. ayye\-4-o-(v, a-^eAw. So too in the Nom. of the third Dec. 
the final Sigma is omitted, when c or p precedes, and the short vowel is 
lengthened, e. g. elKci>y instead of et/cJy-s, iroi/irju instead of iroifxiv-s, p^rwp 
instead of prjTop-s, al^rrjp instead of alSrep-s. — T and <r are omitted in the Nom. 
of substantives and participles in -wu, Gen. -ovr-os ; but, as a compensation, o is 
lengthened into a>, e. g. k4ovt-s becomes AeW, PovAevovr-s becomes fiovAevuv. 

Rem. 4. In '4wvjxi (instead of c<r-vv/j.i, ves-tio) the <r is assimilated to the 
following v, and in efyu (instead of eV-jiu) or is omitted, but € is lengthened 
into €i. 

§21. e. Change of separated Consonants . 

1. Sometimes a consonant affects another consonant, though 
they do not immediately follow one another, but are separated 
by a vowel or even by two syllables. Thus, one A changes 
another A into p, e. g. Kt^aXapyla (instead of Kt^aXaXyia from 
aAyeu/), yXwcra-apyia (instead of yXuxraroXy ta) , apyaXeos (instead of 
aXyaXtos from dAyetV) ; the surhx ojXrj becomes wprj, when a X pre- 
cedes, e. g. SaXTrwprj. 

2. In the reduplication of verbs whose stem begins -with a 
rough mute, instead of repeatmg this mute, which would be 
the regular formation, the first rough mute is changed into the 
coiTesponding smooth, thus : — 

<pe-<pi\r)Ka (from <pi\4w) is changed into TrecplAriKa 
Xe-X^Ka ( " X ew ) " K*X VKa 

fri-frr){jLi (stemOE) " " tL^i. 

Likewise in the verbs, d-uet?/, to sacrifice, and Tt&eW (stem ©E), to place, & of 
the root is changed into t, in the passive forms which begin with & : — 

iTv-frr)v, Tv-frfjo-ofiai, ire-byy, Te-frfio-o/ucu, instead of i&v-frr)v, i&e-frrjv. 

So also, for the sake of euphony, the p is not reduplicated, and instead of it 
e/J/S is used, e. g. e^v7j/ca. 

3. In words whose stem begins with t and ends with an 
Aspirate mute, the aspiration is transferred to the preceding 



§§ 22, 23.] METATHESIS OF THE LIQUIDS. 39 

smooth r, when the Aspirate before the formative syllable be- 
ginning with cr, t, and /x, must, according to the laws of euphony 
(§$ 17, 2; 19, 1 ; 20, 1), be changed into a smooth consonant; 
by this transposition, t is changed into the Aspirate $. Such a 
change is called the Metathesis of the aspiration, 

Thus, rp4(p-w (reTpocpa Perf.) is changed into (3y>e7r-<ra>) frptyco, ^rpeir-r^p, (&p4ir- 
jiia) frpe/j./j.a ; 

T«(/)i TA#-w, ro(p7jj/at (second Aor. Pass.), into &ctya>, d-a7r-Ta>, (Te3-o7r- 
^ucu) TefraiA/xcu (but third Pers. PI. Terdcparai, e. g. Her. 6, 103, with one 
of the better MSS. is to be read instead of T&d<parcu) ; 

rpv<pos, TPT$-a> into &pinpw, &pvir-Tu> {Te&pvK-jxcu), rd&pvfificu] 

rpix' w i n t° l^p^K-crofxai) &p4£opar, — rpix~6s into 3-pi|, &pi£,iv ; 

Ta%us, in the comparative, becomes &d(r<rwv. For the same reason, the 
future e£co, from ex«, to have, is the proper form, the aspiration of 
the x being transferred to the smooth breathing and making it 
rough. 

Remark 1. Teu|a> from rei>x^, and rpv^w from Tpi5x«, remain unchanged. 

Rem. 2. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, Tp4<po>, TA$X1 
(frdTTTw), TPY<J>fl (&/}irn-Ta>), begin with 3-, the aspiration of the two final conso- 
nants <pfr, changes t, the initial consonant of the stem, into &, e. g. 

£&p4(p-&7iv, &pe<p-&r]i/ai, &pe<p-& i f)<Tecr&ai, 
i&d(p-&r)i', &a(p&ds, frcMp-brjaofiai, Te&d(p-&cu. 

Rem. 3. In the imperative ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both sylla- 
bles should begin with &, namely, &r)£n, not the first, but the last aspirate mute 
is changed into the corresponding smooth ; thus &7}ti, e. g. fiovAevfrr)Ti. 

§ 22. Metathesis of the Liquids. 

The Liquids, and also the Lingual r when tr precedes, often 
change place with a preceding vowel, for the sake of euphony. 
The vowel then usually becomes long. This lengthening of 
the vowel distinguishes Metathesis from Syncope (the latter 
being the mere omission of e), e. g. ^i-ju-vtJo-kw (from the root pev, 
comp. mens), $vrjai«o (from Sav-etv), ■ rirjxrjKa (from re/x,-etv), 
/3ij3Xr)Ka (from /3a\-€iv), 7TT^o-o/xat (from 7T€To/*at). 

§ 23. Doubling of Consonants. 

1. Consonants are doubled, in the first place, for the sake of 
euphony, e. g. ftaSvppoos from fiaSv and pew ; eppeov instead of 
epeov ; in the second place, in consequence of the concurrence 



40 STRENGTHENING AND ADDITION OP CONSONANTS. [$ 24 

of like or similar sounds, in the inflection and derivation, e. g. 
Zv-vofjios (from iv and v6p,o<s), kX-Xuiroi (instead of ivX.), <rvpL-p,axo<s 
(instead of crvvfx.), AeA.ei/x-/*,ai (instead of XiXei7rp,.'), Xrjp.-p.a (in- 
stead of Xrjirpia), KOfX-fia (instead of kottjjlcl), Ta<T-cru> or rar-rw 
(instead of rdy-aoi), fjao-aiv or rjrroiv (instead of 17K-1W), fxaXkov 
(instead of pok-iov), aAAos (instead of aXtos, alius). 

2. In the Common language, only the Liquids, X, /*, v, p, the 
Sibilant o-, and the Mute r, can be doubled; yet tt and k are 
also doubled in single words, e. g. tWos, « Aor.se ; k6kko% a berry. 
The Medial y is often doubled, but this letter thus doubled is 
softened in the pronunciation ($ 2). Two Aspirates are not 
doubled (§ 17, 4). 

3. p is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. eppeov, 
and in composition, when it is preceded by a short vowel, e. g. 
apprjKTOS, fiaS-vppoos ; but ev-paxrTOS (from eu and puWu/xi). 

Remark. In imitation of Homer, the Tragic writers also double the <r, yet 
much less frequently than Homer, e. g. r6aaov, Soph. Aj. 185; oAeWas, 390; 
i<r<rv&ri, 294; fA.4<rcrr], Ant. 1223 ; eo-treToi, iEsch. Pers. 122 ; so also in the Dat. 
PL of the third Dec. eaai. 



$ 24. Strengthening and Addition of Consonants. 

1. Consonants are frequently strengthened, in the inflection, by the addition 
of a corresponding consonant, namely : — 

(a) The Labials (/3 ir <p) by t, e. g. fixdir-T-ca (instead of j8\aj8-w), tvtt-t-w 
(instead of tv7t-o)), piir-T-ca (instead of pi(p-cc) ; sometimes also by <r, which 
assimilates the preceding Labial (thus c<r, Attic tt), e. g. ireWco (root 
7re7r), Att. •7T6TTC0, Put. 7rei//o>, the poetic ocra-o/xai, Put. 6^/o/xai ; in Setf/w 
(instead of 8e'<|>a>), </> and <r are changed into ty ; 

(b) The Palatals (7 k %) are strengthened by a, which assimilates the pre- 
ceding Palatal (thus aa; Att. tt), or, though more seldom, the Palatal 
unites with the a- and is changed into (, e. g. rd(r-<r-w, Att. rdr-r-w 
(instead of rdy-w). (ppicr-cr-w , Att. cppir-T-e* (instead of (pp'tic-ai), fifo-c-a), 
Att. ^r-r-u (instead of /37?X" a, )5 KpaC^ (instead of Kpdyw),rpi(o (instead 
of rpiyoo) ; a Kappa-mute with or is seldom changed into £, e. g. ay£« 
(aug-eo), aAe£co, o5a|co and o5a£a>; the strengthening t is found only in 
ireKTw and tIktoo. 

(c) The Linguals (8 t &) are strengthened by <r, which with the preceding 
Lingual is changed into £ e. g. <ppd(co (instead of (ppdSw), or, though 
more seldom, ar assimilates the preceding Tau-mute, e. g. \'kt<to[xoll and 
Xirofiai, ipeacru), iperrco (instead of cp'6T«), Kopvcrcrw (instead of Kopv&ca).- 

2. The unpleasant concurrence of \xp and vp in the middle of some words, 
occasioned by the omission of a vowel, is softened by inserting j8 between ftp 



$ 25.] EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 41 

and 8 between vp, thus, in fxea-qix-^-pia (formed from /xeaTj/xepia, fj.eo'rjfxpla), yafi- 
(i-p6s (from yaf/.-e-p6s, ya.fx.p6s), av-o-pos (from avepoz, avpSs). 

3. N also is used to strengthen the Labials, especially in poetry, so as to make 
a syllable long by position, e. g. rvfXTravov (from tu7t-t-co), (rrp6fj.f3os (from <rrpe- 
(pca)j frd/xfios (rdcpos) ; Kopi/xfir) (nopvcp-f)) ; &p6/xfios (rpe<peiv)] b[x<p-f} (elirelv) ; 
vvfxcpr] (nubere) ; bfipiixos and o[x{Spiixos, vdw/xos and vcaw/xvos. In the present 
tense of many verbs, this strengthening v is found, e. g. Trvv&dvo/xcu, Snyydva, 
Ka[x&dvw instead of irvfro/xcu, Sriyco, xdfiw. On the change of v, see § 19, 3. On 
the v Paragogic, see § 15, 1. 

4. 2 also is prefixed to some words, but mostly to such as begin with \x, e. g. 
uw5t| and o-fxw'S^, /xwpSs and o-jxiKp6s ; a strengthening c is also inserted before fx 
and t in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and before 3- in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. rereXe- 
cr-fiou, rereXe-ff-Tai, ireXe-cr-frriv (§ 131); also in the derivation and composition 
of words, c is frequently inserted for the sake of euphony, e. g. ffei-o--fx6s, irav- 
cr-dve/xos, /xoyo-cr-rSicos, etc. ; instead of <r, fr also is inserted before fx, e. g. 
fxvK7}-^-fx6s, 6pxy-&-p6s, arKap-&-fx6s from cricalpca, 7rop-&-[x6s from ireipca. 



$ 25. Expulsion and Omission of Consonants. 

1. In inflection, <r is very often omitted between two vowels, e. g. Tiirrri, 
eriirrov, t utt to to instead of rviTTe-o'-ai. or rvirr-q-ffai, ervirre-o'-o, t-utttoi-ct-o ; 
y eve-os, y e v e-w v instead of yeve-o'-os, yevi-G-wv (comp. gene-r-is, gene-r-um). 
At the end of a word, and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yevos, 
rvipca (=tu7to-w), 7rAe£<y (= irXex-o-w), but after the Liquids, in inflection, as 
well as commonly at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. tfyy eiXa (instead 
of ijyyeX-ff-a), ayyeXco (instead of ayyeX-e-cr-w, ayyeX-e-oo) , pi]T(ap (instead 
of fffjTop-s). Comp. § 20, Eem. 3. 

2. The Digamma softened into the vowel v (§ 200) is omitted: (a) in the 
middle of the word between two vowels, e. g. a>6v (a>F6v), ovum, 6'is (6Fis), ovis, 
aldv (alFdov), aevum, veos (veFos), novus, ctkcuos (<riccuF6s), scaevus, (3o6s {(3oF6s), 
bovis ; &4ca, irXew, irveco, ixda instead of freFa}, etc. ; (b) at the beginning of 
the word before vowels and p, e. g. olvos (Foivos) : vinum, eap (Feap), ver, 'ts 
(Fis) vis, oJkos (FoIkos), vicus, lde7v (Fide?v), videre, i<rfrr)s (FeaSr-fjs), vestis, 
p-fjyvufj.1 (FfrriyvvfAi), frango. On the contrary, the Digamma (this softened v) 
is retained in connection with a preceding a, e, o, with which it then coalesces 
and forms a diphthong : (a) at the end of a word, e. g. /3ou (instead of &6F), 
fiacriXev, etc.; (0) before a consonant, e. g. fiovs (&6Fs, bovs, bos), vavs [vdFs), 
navis, {Sovv, fiovffi, fiaffiXeis, ^aaiXevai, &evo~ofxcu, Tv\eva~o[xa.i, irvevo~Ofxcu, eXavvco. 
But when an t or v precedes it, then it disappears before a consonant, but 
lengthens the i or v, e. g. k?s (instead of kIFs), ads (instead of cvFs) Ix&vs 
(instead of Ix&vFs), Ace. ntv, <tvv, Ix&vv] but it disappears also, in this case, 
in the middle of a word between vowels, e. g. Al-6s, kI-6s, o~v-6s, Ix&v-os (instead 
of AtF-6s, k?F-6s, <rvF-6s, Ix&vF-os. 

4-# • 



42 EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. [§25. 

3. Since the Greek language admits an accumulation of three consonants, 
only in composition, not in simple words, unless the first or the last is a 
Liquid, then, if in the inflection of the verb, a termination beginning with <r& 
is appended to the consonant of the root, the a is dropped : — 

XeXeirr-crSrwv (from Xeiir-co) becomes AeAei^wj/ (§17, 2.) 
AeAe'y afrai ( " Aey-«>) " AeAex^at (§17,2.) 

eaTaA-crfrai ( " crreAA-ct>) " iaraA^ai. 

Eemark. On the omission of a Tau-mute, and a v and vt before <r, and a a 
after a Liquid, see § 20. On iriTrefifiai, ecrcpiy/j-ai, etc. instead of ireVe/ijii/xcu, 
eacpiyyixai, see § 144, E. 2. In composition, v is often omitted, e g. IIv&okt6- 
vos, 'AiroAXS-dapos, instead of Tlv&oyKT., 'A7roAA^5. 

4. Some words may drop their final consonant, either to avoid an accumula- 
tion of consonants, or, in verse, to prevent a syllable becoming long by position. 
In addition to the words mentioned under § 15, namely, ovk (ou), e| (e'/c), ovrws 
(oStw), which usually retain their final consonant before a vowel to prevent 
Hiatus, but drop it before consonants, here belong, 

(a) adverbs of place in &ev, e. g. irpSa&ev, oiria&ev, vTrep&ev, etc., which never 
drop the v before a consonant, in prose, but very often in Epic poetry, 
more seldom in the Attic poets ; 

(b) fxixP ls an( * &XP ls i which, however, in the best classical writers, drop 
their <r, not only before consonants, but commonly even before vowels, 
e. g. fiexpi 'Ava^ayopov, PL Hipp. Maj. 281, c; fi£%pi ivravfra, Id. Symp. 
210, e ; jue'xpi otov, X. C 4. 7, 2 ; pexp 1 ipv&pas SfaXdrrrjs, Id. Cy. 8. 
6, 20; 

(c) the adverbs arpe/nas, e/xTras, fj.e<rr)yvs, avriicpvs, auecos, dcpuas, which in 
poetry may drop their s, but never in prose ; in the Ionic dialect, numeral 
adverbs in -olkis also frequently drop the cr before consonants, e. g. 
-n-oAAct/a. Her. 2, 2. 

5. A genuine Greek word can end only in one of the three Liquids, v, a- (\p, 
|, i. e. Trff, Ka) and p. The two words, ovk, not, and 4k, out of, form only an 
apparent exception, since, as Proclitics (§ 32), they incline to the following 
word, and, as it were, become a part of it. This law of euphony occasions 
either the omission of all other consonants, or it changes them into one of the 
three Liquids just named; hence, cw/xa (Gen. o-dfiar-os), instead of o-w/j-ar, 
yaAa (Gen. yaXaKT-os), instead of ydXatcr, Aeo>j/ (Gen. Aeoz/T-os), instead of 
AeV-r, ifiovhevov instead of ifiovXevovT ; — repas (Gen. Tzpar-os), instead of 
repar, Kepas (Gen. Kepar-os), instead of tcepar, fieXi (Gen. fieXn-os), instead 
of fxiXn. 



$$ 26, 27.] NATURE AND QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 43 

CHAPTEE II. 
Syll ables. 

$ 215. Nature and Division of Syllables. 

1. Every vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with 
one or more consonants, is called a syllable. 

2. A word consists of one or more syllables. When a word 
consists of several syllables, a distinction is made between the 
stem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation. 
The stem-syllables express the essential idea of the word, the 
syllables of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea. 
Thus, e. g. in ye-ypacp-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable ; 
the two others, syllables of inflection : in Trpay-fxa, the first is 
the stem-syllable ; the last, the syllable of derivation. 

$27. Quantity of Syllables. 

1. A syllable is short or long, by nature, according as its 
vowel is short or long. 

2. Every syllable is long which contains a diphthong, or a 
simple long vowel, or two vowels contracted into one, e. g. 
fiovXevu) ; rjpo)<s', "olkcdv (from doctov), fiorpvs (from j36rpvas). 

3. A syllable with a short vowel becomes long by position, 
when two or three consonants, or a double consonant (£ £ i/^), 
follow the short VOWel, e. g. crreAAa), rvij/avT&s, Kopa£ (ko/ocucos) 
T/oa7re£a. 

Remark 1. The pronunciation 1 of a syllable long by nature, and of one 
long by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced long, but the 
latter not. When a syllable long by nature is also long by position, its pronun- 
ciation must be protracted. Hence a distinction is made in pronouncing such 
words as irpdrru, irpa^is, irpciyfia (d), and t<zttw, rdl-is, Tay/na (a). 

Rem. 2. But when a short vowel stands before a Mute and a Liquid (Positio 
debihs), it commonly remains short in the Attic dialect, because the sound of 
the Liquids, being less distinct than the Mutes, they are pronounced with more 



1 The method of pronunciation stated in this remark is adopted in many of 
the German gymnasia, and in some of the schools in England and Scotland, 
but not to any extent in this country. — Tk. 



44 QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. [$ 28. 

ease, e. g. &reKvos, &ire7rXos, 'o.k/j.7], fiorpvs, SiSpdx/^os, yet in two cases the posi- 
tion of the Mute and Liquid lengthens the short vowel : — 

a) in compounds, e. g. 'eKve/j.ca ; 

hj when one of the Medials (;8 y 5) stands before one of the three Liquids 
(\ fj. v), e, g. pifiXos, evoS/j.os, Tri-nXey p.0.1 ; in tragic trimeter, &A. also lengthen 
the preceding short vowel. 

It is obvious that a vowel long by nature cannot be shortened by a Mute and 
Liquid, e. g. ^r]vvrpov. 

4. A syllable, which, contains one of the three doubtful 
vowels (a, 1, v), cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long 
and short, but must be either long or short. 



$ 28. Quantity of the Penult. 

In order to a correct pronunciation, the quantity of the three 
doubtful vowels, a, i, and v, in the penult of words of three or 
more syllables, must be determined. The following are the 
principal instances in which the penult is long. The quantity 
of the syllables of inflection is treated in connection with the 
Forms : — 

The penult is long, 

1. In substantives in -dwv (Gen. -aovos or -auvos), in substantives of two or 
more syllables in -loov (Gen. -iovos; but -low, Gen. -twos), and in forms of the 
comparative in -lav, -lov (Gen. -iovos), e. g. birdav, -ovos, 6, 7], companion, Iloaei- 
Sdav, -wvos ; fdoov, -ovos, 7], pillar, fipaxt<»v, -ovos, 6, arm, 'A/j.<pTa>v, -ovos ; but 
AevKaXtwv, -wvos ; KaWtoov, K&Kkiov, more beautiful. 

Exceptions. The two Oxytones, r\ r\iav (I), shore, and generally r\ x i( *>v, snow. 
In Homer, the comparatives in -iwv, iov, are always short, where the versifica- 
tion admits. 

2. In oxytoned proper names in -dv6s, and in the compounds in -dyos (from 
&yw, to lead, and dyvvfii, to break), -dvap and -Kpdvos, e. g. 'Aowos, \0xdy6s, 
captain ; vavdy6s, naufragus ; Bidvwp, SUpdvos, having two horns. 

3. In adjectives in -drjs (Fern, -ais) derived from verbs- in -da, in proper 
names in -kr-ns, in substantives in -ir-ns (Fern. -7ns), and in those iu-vT-ns of the 
first Dec. (Fern, -vns), and in proper names in -tr-q, e. g. axpdr)s, untouched; 
Ev(ppd.Tr]s, MiSfpiddr-ns, iroXir-ns, -ov, citizen (Fem. ttoA?tis) : irpeo-fivrris, -ov, old 
,aan ; 'AcppoSirT), 'A/xcpiTpTrr). 

Exceptions: (a) to the proper names in -arris: TaXar-ns, Aakjj.aT7]S, 'Xapfiarris, 
all in -)8dT77s and -<pdrr\s, and compounds formed from verbal roots, e. g. 2o>/cpd- 
T7?s 1 — (b) Kplriis, judge, from the short root upl, ktItJjs, builder, and frvriris, 
one who sacrifices. 

4. In Proparoxytones in -IX os, -ZXov, -Ivos, -Ivov, in words in -Ivr), -Iva, 
-vvt), -vva, in those in -vvos, when a does not precede the ending; in Pro- 



% 



$ 28.] QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. 45 

Proparoxytones in -vpa, and in adjectives in -vpos with a preceding long 
syllable, e. g. 

'O (i/jLl\os, multitude ; Swttvt], gift ; 6 Kivdvi/os, danger ; 

iredihov, shoe; Atylva, yitpvpa, bridge; 

7) Kajui/os, oven ; alcrx^wq, shame : iax^pos, strong ; 

akhlvov, parsley ; &p.wa, defence; (but ox^pos and exfycfc), firm. 

Remark 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxytones in -Zvos 
and -v p a, namely, 6 x a ^ v ds, rein ; 6 ipZvSs, wild fig-tree ; and % KoWvpa, coarse 
bread. 

Exceptions. El\aTrfvy, feast, and compounds in -yvvos (irovayvvi], woman), 
e. g. avSp6yvv os, and Kopvvn, club. 

5. In substantives in -vtos, whose antepenult is long, and in compound 
adjectives in -SaKpvTos and -rpvros (from SctKpvw, rpvw), and also in sub- 
stantives in -Op. a, -vyjj, and -vyoov, and in adverbs in -v86v, e. g. 

6 kwkvtSs, wailing; &t pin os, indestructible; oAoXvyf), ululatus ; 

addxpvTOs, without tears ; "dpvfxa, -S.tos, seat; oXoXvydv, ululatus, 

fSoTpi>86v, in clusters. 
Exception. Mapp-apvy-fj, splendor. 

6. In dissyllabic Oxytones in -l\6s, -Zp.6s, -Zv6s, -los, -v\6s, -v{x6s, 
-vv6s, and in Paroxy tones in -v p.r\, -vv rj, e. g. 

$I\6s, bare ; r\ plv6s, shin ; 6 f>vp.6s, pale ; t,i>v6s, common ; 

6 x l ^s, fodder ; 6'Zos,dart; 6 &vp.6s, mind; \vjx-n, injury ; 

6 \tfj-6s, hunger ; 6 x^°' s > juice ; so, &&vp.os, etc. ; (ivvrj, excuse. 

Exceptions. Bi6s (6), bow ; ir\vv6s (<5), washing-trough. 

7. In dissyllables in -dos, -av6s (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in -ia, which 
begin with two consonants, e. g. 

6 vd6s, temple ; <pavos, brilliant ; aria, pebble ; <pXid, door-post. 

Rem. 2. The following maybe added to dissyllables in -ia: KaXZa, shed; 
avia, trouble ; novia, dust ; and to those in -dos, the variable '£\aos, and the proper 
names in -d o s, e. g. 'Afi(pidpdos ; OlvS/mos is an exception. 

Exceptions. Toco's or rddts (6), peacock; crnid (l), shadow. 

8. The following single words should also be noted : — 

I. d. 

"AKparos, unmixed ; veavts, young girl ; riapa, turban ; 

aviap6s, troublesome; oiraSSs, attendant; <pd\dpos, clear ; 

av&aS-ns, self-sufficient ; crimiri, mustard ; 6 <p\6dpos, tattle. 

Also the proper names, "Afiacris, "Avdiros, "Apdros, Aypidparos, Qedvd, 'I&o'cov, 
Upidiros, 'Xdpdiris (Serapis), ?iTi>{Ji<pd\os, $dp(rd\os. 

II. r. 

'AKpIfiTis, exact; ivZir-f), rebuke; irap&evotrhrns, gallant, 

?<p&Zp.os, strong ; epl&os, day-laborer; 

rb rdpZxos, pickled jish ; 6 fj xeAtS^i', swallow; 



46 ACCENTS. [§ 29. 

Also the proper names, 'Ayxicrrjs, TpavlKos, Evpliros, Kd'iKos (l),*0(ripis, Bovalpis. 
The following dissyllables should be noted for the sake of the compounds : 
rl/j.7], honor; vitro, victory ; <$>vXt\, tribe; "vK-n, forest ; \It6s, tittle; fiiKpSs, small; 
e. g. &tI/aos. 

III. v. 
'A/J.V/J.WJ/, blameless ; ipvKO}, to hold back ; Xa<pvpov, booty ; 

&<tv\ov, asylum; 5 l\v6s, den; 7) irdirvpos, papyrus; 

avri] (v), war-cry ; lyvvy, the ham; irirvpov, bran. 

Also the proper names, "AfivSos, 'Apxvras, B&vvds, Ai6vvcros, Kafi/Svo-ns, K4p- 
Kvpa, Kcokvtos. And the dissyllables, i\n>x>h soul; 6 rvpos, cheese; 6 irvpSs, wheat; 
6 xpvcos, gold; Kvtn], grief; tyvxpo's, cold. 

§ 29. Accents. 

1. The written accent designates the tone-syllable, according 
to the original Greek pronunciation. The accented syllable 
was pronounced with a particular stress as well as elevation of 
voice. The same is true of the modern Greek. In English, 
too, while the stress of the accented syllable is more particu- 
larly prominent, there is often also an accompanying elevation 
of the voice, but not so much as in the modern Greek. 

2. In the pronunciation of Greek prose, the accent and quan- 
tity were both regarded ; thus, in av#pco7ro9, while the accentual 
stress was laid on the a, the proper quantity of the penult co was 
preserved. Compare analogous English words, as siinrising, 
outpouring, in which both the accent on the antepenult and the 
length of the penult are observed. 

3> How the Greeks observed both the accent and quantity in 
poetry, cannot now be determined. But as it was generally 
sung or recited in the style of chanting, the accent was probably 
disregarded, as is constantly done in singing at present. 

4. The Greek has the following marks for the tone or accent 
(7rposa>6Yai) : — 

(a) The acute (-) to denote the sharp or clear tone, e. g. 
Xoyos ; 

(b) The circumflex (- ) to denote the protracted' or winding 
tone, e. g. o-co/xa. This accent consists in uniting the rising 
and falling tone in pronouncing a long syllable, since, e. g. 
the word o-w/xa was probably pronounced as aobfxa ; 

(c) The grave (-) to denote the falling or heavy tone. 



{ 29.] ACCENTS. 4T 

Remark 1. The mark of the falling tone was not used. Hence not fofrpcb- 
irbs, Xoybs, but 'dj/frpeoiros, \6yos. The mark of the grave was used only to 
distinguish certain words, e. g. rh, some one, and ris, who ? and, as will be seen 
in § 31, I, instead of the acute on the final syllable of words in connected 
discourse. ^^ 

Rem. 2. The accent stands upon the second vowel of diphthongs ; at the 
beginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand 
after the breathing, but the circumflex over it, e. g. aira£, avKeios, av divvs, 
evpos, alp.a. But in capital letters, in connection with the diphthongs <j, 77, &>, 
the accent and the breathing stand upon the first vowel, e. g."AtS?js. On the 
diaeresis, see § 4, Rem. 6. 

Rem. 3. The grave accent differed from the acute as the weaker from the 
stronger accent in detrimental, or in the Latin fe'neratdrum, the penultimate accent 
in both words being much stronger than the preceding one. The circumflex 
accent denoted a tone like the circumflex inflection in English. 

Rem. 4. In the United States and Great Britain, Greek is not generally 
pronounced by the accents, no regard being had to- these so far as the pronun- 
ciation is concerned. In a few institutions, however, the pronunciation is 
regulated by the accent ; but where this is the case, the grave and circumflex 
accents are pronounced in the same manner as the acute. No difference is 
therefore made in the pronunciation of rip.ii and. T£ M> nor between yvwpai and 
yj/dp-ais. In these and all similar cases, the Greeks must have made distinc- 
tions. 

5. The accent can stand only on one of the last three sylla- 
bles of a word; it was not any natural difficulty but merely 
Greek usage which prevented the accent from being placed 
further back than the antepenult. 

6. The acute stands on one of the last three syllables, whether 
this is long or short, e. g. KaXos, avSpomov, 7roAe/*,os ; but upon the 
antepenult, only when the last syllable is short, and is also not 
long by position, e. g. avSpam-os, but avSpumov. 

7. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two sylla- 
bles, and the syllable on which it stands must always be long 
by nature, e. g. tov, cno/m ; but it stands upon the penult only 
when the ultimate is short, or long only by position, e. g. ret^os, 
■Xpyj/Aa, 7rpa£is, avAa£, Gen. -Sko?, KaXavpoif/, KaTrjXnj/, Arj/xwvat;. 

Rem. 5. Also in substantives in -r£ and -C-£ (Gen. -Ikos, -vkos) : 1 and v long 
by nature, are considered as short in respect to accentuation, e. g. <po?vl£, Gen. 
•Ikos, Krjpvj-, Gen. -vkos. 

\8. If, therefore, the antepenult is accented, it can have only 
the acute ; but if the penult is accented, and is long by nature, 



48 ACCENTS. [$ 29. 

it must have the circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g. 
Teix°s> TTpaTTe, but the acute, when the ultimate l is long, e. g. 
reixovs, Trpdrroi ; if the penult is short it has only the acute, e. g. 
rarroi, roLTTe. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex 
stands, e. g. 7rar^p, irarpoiv) nominatives accented on the ulti- 
mate usually have the acute, e. g. l7nre6s 7rora/W, $rjp. 

Rem. 6. In the inflection-endings, -ai and -o i, and in the adverbs, irp6iraXaL 
and e/nraAai, the diphthongs, in respect to the accent, are considered short, e. g. 
rpdire(ai, rvirreTai, yXaxrcrai, &v^pwjroi, %<£poi. The optative endings, -o i and 
-a i f e. g. Tifi7)<rcu, e/cAehroi, AeiVoi, and the adverb oticot, domi, at home, are long; 
on the contrary, oIkol, houses, from oJkos. 

Rem. 7. In the old Ionic and Attic declension, « is considered as short 
in respect to accent, having only half its usual length, as it takes the place of o, 
e.g. Meveheus, avwyewv; — ir6\€(cs, TroXewv — ; '{\ecos, &ynpws, Gen. 'l\eo», ay7)pu)) 
but if adjectives like 'lAeoos are declined according to the third Dec, they are 
accented regularly, e. g. <pi\oyeXcos, (pi\oye\aTos ; so also in the Dat. Sing, and 
PI., as well as in the. Gen. and Dat. Dual, where the penult is long, e. g. &yr)pa)s, 
ayhpce, ayrjpws, b.yt)pu>v. 

Rem. 8. In the words, et&e, that, valxh certainly, the penult has the acute, 
apparently contrary to the rule ; but these must be treated as separate words. 
The accentuation of the words efrre, ovre, wsirep, ^tis, rovspe, etc., is to be 
explained on the ground, that they are compounded with Enclitics (§ 33). 

Rem. 9. According to the condition of the last syllable with respect to 
accent, words have the following names: — 

(a) Oxytones, when the ultimate has the acute, e. g. rervcpais, k<xk6s, drfp; 

(b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute, e. g. tu7tto> 5 

(c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute, e. g. 'av&pwKos, tvk- 
rSfieyos, &V&PQOTTOI, rvTrr6jxevoi ; 

(d) Perispomena, when the ultimate has the circumflex, e. g. KaK&s ; 

(e) Properispomena, when the penult has the circumflex, e. g. irpay/xa, <pi- 
Kovaa ; 

(f ) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented, e. g. Trpayixara, -rrpuy/xa. 

1 Hence the accent often enables us to determine . the quantity of syllables, 
e. g. from the acute on the antepenult of iroi-hrpia, pLa^Tpia, we infer that the 
ultimate is short, otherwise the accent could not stand further back than the 
penult, No. 6, above ; — from^the circumflex on <t2tos and irpa£is, that those 
syllables are long by nature, 7; — from the circumflex on fxolpa and areTpa, 
that the ultimate is short, 7 ; — from the acute on x^pa, &pa, and "Hpa, that 
the ultimate is long, otherwise the penult of these words must be circumflexed, 
8; — from the acute on <f>iAos and ttoik'iXos, that the penult of these words is 
short, otherwise they must have been circumflexed, 8. — Tk. 



§ 30.] CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT. 49 



§ 30. Change and Removal of the Accent by Inflec- 
tion, Comjjosition, and Contraction. 

1. When a word is change cl by inflection, either in the quan^ 
tity of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, there 
is generally a change or removal of the accent. 

(a) By lengthening the final syllable, 

(a) a Proparoxytone becomes a Paroxytone, e. g. 7roA.e//,os, 

iroXefxov ', 
(ft) a Properispomenon, a Paroxytone, e. g. ret^o?, rei^cvs ; 
(y) an Oxytone, a Perispomenon, e. g. 3-tos, Seov. Yet this 

change is limited to particular cases. See § 45, 7, a. 

(b) By shortening the final syllable, 

(a) a dissyllabic Paroxytone with a penult long by nature 

becomes a Properispomenon, e. g. favycji, 'favye, Trparre 

(but Tarre) ; 
(/3) a polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long 

or short, becomes a Proparoxytone, e. g. ftovXeva), fiov- 

Aeve. 

(c) By prefixing a syllable or syllables to a word, the accent 
is commonly removed towards the beginning of the word, e. g. 
(jievyco, efavyov; so also in compounds, always in verbs, com- 
monly in substantives and adjectives, e. g. 686s crvvo8os, #eos 
<jn\6$cos, ti\jJ] art/xos, cfievye a7r6cf)cvy€. But when syllables 
are appended to a word, the accent is removed towards the 
end of the word, e. g. Txnrroi, TVTTTOjxeS-a, ru^^o-o'/xe^a. 

Remark 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and 
the exceptions to the general rales here stated, will be seen below, under the 
accentuation of the several parts of speech. 

2. The following principles apply in contraction : — 

(1) When neither of the two syllables to be contracted is 
accented, the contracted syllable also is unaccented ; and the 
syllable which had the accent previous to contraction, still 
retains it, e. g. </>tAee — <jf>iAei (but cfaXia = cfukei), ycve'i = yivet (bn 
yevecov = ycvcov). 

5 



50 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [$ 31. 

(2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is 
accented, the contracted syllable also is accented, 

(a) when the contracted syllable is the antepenult or penult, 
it takes the accent which the general rules require, e. g. 

ayairdofiai = ayaTrco/xai <pi\e6fievos = <pi\ov/xeuos 

ktrraSros = ko'TWTOs bp&6ov(ri = op&ovai 

vXrjeacra = v\r\<T<ra Tifj.a6vTwu = rifidovrcou ; 

(b) when the contracted syllable is the ultimate, it takes the 

acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted had 

the acute ; the circumflex, when the first of the syllables 

was accented, e. g. co-raws = lo-rais, rjx™ = VX°^' 

Rem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will he seen helow, under 
the contract Declensions and Conjugations. 

CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT IN CONNECTED 
DISCOURSE. 

§31. I. Grave instead of the Acute. — II. Crasis. — 
III. Elision. — IV. Anastrophe. 

I. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of 
the grave, i. e. by the close connection of the "words with each 
other the sharp tone is weakened or depressed, e. g. Et p/q 
fjL7)TpvLr) 7reptKaAA^s 'Hepi/?oia rjv. But the acute must stand before 
every punctuation-mark by which an actual division is made 
in the thought, as well as at the end of the verse, e. g. c O fiev 
~Kvpo<; eVepacre rbv 7rora/x6V, ol Se TroXipuoL aTrecpvyov. 

Exceptions. The interrogatives rls, t/, quis ? who ? quid ? what ? always 
remain oxytoned. 

Remark 1. "When an Oxytone is not closely connected with the other 
words, i. e. when it is treated grammatically, the acute remains, e. g. el rb jx^ 
\4yeis — rb avrjp b'vop.a. 

II Words united by Crasis ($ 10), have only the accent of 
the second word, that being the more important, e. g. raya%v 
from to aya$6v. When the second word is a dissyllabic Paroxy- 
tone with a short fina] syllable, the accent, according to $ 30, 2, 
(2) (a), is changed into the circumflex, e. g. to tVos = tovitos, 
to. aXka = ToXkoL, to epyov = Tovpyov ; ra oirXa = $£)7r\a } iyoi oT/xcu = 
eyiojxai. 



$ 32.] ATONICS OR PROCLITICS. 51 

III. When an unaccented vowel is elided (§ 13), the accent 
of the word is not changed, e. g. tovt Zvtiv. But if the elided 
vowel is accented, its accent is thrown back upon the preceding 
syllable, as an acute ;. yet, when the elided word is a preposi- 
tion or one of the particles, a\Xd, ot>Se, fxySe (and the poetic 
rjSe, tSe), the accent wholly disappears, and also when the 
accented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided, e. g. 

jroAAcfc eira&ov = tto?JC eira&oi/ irapa ejxov = Trap' i/xov 

Seiva ipccT^s = SetV epcoras airb eavrov = acp' eavrov 

<p7)fj.l eyd> = cp-fjfi ey<a aWa. iy<Jo = a\?C eyd> 

alaxpd eA.e£as = «^o"XP' eAe|as ovde eya> = ovff eytib 

eirra fjCav = eirr -f\o~av ij 5e os = rf S 5 os. 

IV. Anastrophe. When a preposition follows the word which 
it should precede, the tone of the preposition naturally inclines 
back to its word, and hence the accent is removed from the 
ultimate to the penult; this drawing back of the accent is 
called Anastrophe (dvacrrpo^), e. g. 

jua%7js eiri but iirl f^axys veccv oltto but airb vewv 

'l^aKiju Kara " Kara. 'l&dKyv ,/caA(2i/ irepi " irepi koKcov. 

Rem. 2. The prepositions, a/xcpi, avri, avd, did, and the poetic virai, wreip, 
dial, irapai, do not admit Anastrophe. If the preposition stands between an 
adjective and a substantive, according to Aristarchus the Anastrophe is found 
only when the substantive stands first, e. g. zdi'&a) eiri divrievn (but Sivfjevri eiri 
Ecwd-w). Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe in both cases. — In poetry, 
irepi is subject to Anastrophe only when it governs the Gen., but then very 
often, and even when the Gen. and irepi are separated by other words. See 
§ 300, (c.) 

Rem. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used 
instead of abridged forms of the verb, e. g. ava instead of avd(rfrr)Ti ; jxera, irdpa, 
eiri, viro, irepi, evi, instead of the indicative present of elvai, compounded with 
these prepositions, e. g. iyh irdpa instead of napei/xi, irepi instead of ireplecm ; 
also, when the preposition is separated from the verb and placed after it, which 
is often the case in the Epic dialect, e. g. oXecras &iro irduras eraipovs. But the 
accent of air6 is drawn back without any reason, in such phrases as airb &akd(r- 
(T7js oiKetv, airb (tkoitov, air eXiriSos, and the like ; in such cases it is properly on 
the ultimate. 



$ 32. V. Atonies or Proclitics. 

Atonies or Proclitics, are certain monosyllables which, in 
connected discourse, are so closely united to the following 



52 ENCLITICS. [$ 33. 

word, that they coalesce with it, and lose their accent. They 
are : — 

(a) the forms of the article, 6, rj, ol, al] 

(b) the prepositions, £v, els (is), £k (££), ws, ad; but if ££ is 
after the word which it governs, and at the end of a verse, 
or before a punctuation-mark, it retains the accent, e. g. 
kclkuv t£, H. £ 472 ; in prose, e£ does not stand after its 
case. 

(c) the conjunctions, a>s (as), el; but if cos follows the word 
which it should precede, it has the accent ; this position, 
however, is found only among the poets, e. g. kclkoI w<s } 
for is kolkol; 

(d) ov (ovk, ovx), not ; but at the end of a sentence and with 
the meaning No, it has the accent, ov (ovk). Comp. 
$ 15, Rem. 2, 

§ 33. VI Enclitics. 

Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in 
connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, 
to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw 
it back upon the preceding word, e. g. <£i'A.o? ns, ttoXcjxos tls. 
They are : — 

(a) the verbs el/j.1, to be, and (prifxl, to say, in the Pres. Indie., except the second 
Pers. Sing., el, thou art, and (pips, thou sayest ; 

(b) the following forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic dia- 
lect : — 



T. P. S. 



/xov 


n. p. s. cod 


III. P. S. ol 


fMoi 


COL 


of 


fli 


ae 


e, viv 



Dual. ff(pwiv PI. a(pl(Ti (u) 



(c) the indefinite pronouns, rls, t\, through all the cases and numbers, 
together with the abridged forms rod and tw, and the indefinite adverbs irdis, 
7rco, 7rr], ttov, iro&i, TTo&ev, tto'l, xoTe ; but the corresponding interrogative pro- 
nouns are always accented, e. g. ris, rt, ir«j, etc. ; 

(d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, re, rot, ye, vvv, irep (and in 
the Epic, kc, k4v, vv, f>a), and the inseparable particle Se, § 34, Rem. 3. 

Remaek. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming 
with them one word, with a meaning of its own, e. g. efr-e, ovre, {i-hre, &sre, 
&sirep, '6sTis, etc. 



$ 34.J INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 53 



$34. Inclination of the Accent. 

1. An Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the 
accent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence 
($ 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g. 

frfip ris for Strjp rls KaXos iariv for ica\.bs eariv 

Kai rives " teal rives irora/JiSs ye " irorafxbs ye 

Ka\6s re " KaAbs re irora/xoi rives " rrorafjiol rives. 

2. A Perispomenon unites with the following enclitic without 
further change of the accent, e. g. 

(pws ri for <pws rl (piKe? ris for QiAe? rls 

<pws etrriv " (puis ecrr'iv Kahov rivos " koAov rivos. 

Remark 1. A Perispomenon followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, is regarded 
as an Oxytone. For as <pas ianv, for example, are considered as one word in 
respect to accent, and as the circumflex cannot go further back than the penult 
(§ 29, 7), the Perispomenon must be regarded as an Oxytone. Long syllables 
in enclitics are treated as short in respect to the accent ; hence oTvnvoiv, S>vri- 
vcav, are viewed as separate words, e. g. koXcov nvccv. 

3. A Paroxytone unites with the following monosyllabic 
enclitic without further change of the accent ; but there is no 
inclination when the enclitic is a dissyllable, e. g. 

cpi\os fxov for (piXos fxov but cpiAos iariv, (pikoi (pacriv 
aAAos irws " &\\os ira>s " ciAAos irore, 6.Wcov rivuv. 

Rem. 2. It is evident that if there was an inclination of the accent when a 
Paroxytone was followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, the accent would stand on 
the fourth syllable, e. g. (pi\oi-(paaiv, which is contrary to the usage of the 
language. 

4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite with the 
following enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last sylla- 
ble; this syllable forms the tone- syllable for the following 
enclitic, as cu/#pa>-7ros ns, e. g. 

'dv&pooirSs ris for frvfrpaxros rls aco/jux ri for <ra>/j.a rl 

&v&pa)iroi rives " av&pcciroi rives crwfjid effriv " aufia eariv. 

Exception. A Properispomenon, ending in | or \p, does not admit the incli- 
nation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. auAa| rivSs, av\a£ eariv, <poivi% etrriv, KJ\pv^ 
eariv, AaiAaty eariv. 

5* 



54 ENCLITICS ACCENTED. [§ 35. 

Rem. 3. The local suffix Se ((e), which expresses the relation to a place, 
whither, coalesces with substantives according to the rules of inclination, e. g. 

"OA^uttoVos m ~2,<Pt}tt6v§<e ovpavovoe TLv&wde (from Iluid-ctS) 

epe(36sSe 5 EAeucr?j/a5e MeyapdSe oo^iovde. 

So 'A&7jva(e (i. e. 'Afrf)vaso*e), H\aTaia£e (UXaTaiai), x^^ (x a M" s Ace.) The 
suffix 8e when appended to the Demon, pronoun draws the accent of this pro- 
noun to the syllable before Se. In the oblique cases, these strengthened 
pronouns are accented according to the rules for Oxy tones, § 45, 7 (a), e. g. 

r6(ros — Toa6sde, Toaovde, Tocrcpde, Too-r)vde, TOawvfie, 
ro7os — Toiosde, ttiXikos — TrjKiKSstie, To?<ri — ToiaiZe, 

ev&a — eV&aSe. 

5. When several enclitics occur together, each throws back 
its accent on the preceding, e. g. el' irip n's o-e jjlol <j>r)<TL tvotc. 

$35. Enclitics accented. 

Some enclitics, whose signification allows them to be in a measure indepen- 
dent, are accented in the following cases : — 

1. 'Eo-ti (v) is accented on the penult, when it stands in connection with an 
Inf. for e|ecrri (v), and after the particles &AA 5 , et, ovk, fxij, ws, nal, fiev, oti, irov, 
and the pronoun tovt, and also at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. loe?v ianv 
(licet videre), et io~Tiv, ovk evTiv, tovt %<ttlv, %vti &eos, etc.; the other forms of 
€*/«.( which are capable of inclination, retain the usual accent on the ultimate, 
when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. el<r\ beoi. 

2. The forms of (prj/xi which are capable of inclination, retain the accent, 
when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, and also when they are sep- 
arated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark, e. g. <prj/A eyco. — "Eo-tiv 
avrjp ay a&6s, <pT]fii. 

3. The enclitic Pers. pronouns, <rov, o~oi, o~e, of, o-cplo-L (v), retain their accent: 
(a) when an accented Prep, precedes, e. g. irapa <rov, fieTa ere, irpbs <roi. But 

the enclitic forms of the first Pers. pronoun are not used with accented 
prepositions, but, instead of them, the longer and regularly accented 
forms, e. g. 

Trap' ifj.ov not irapa fxov irpbs epoi not irp6s fxoi 

KaT i/u.4 " KaTa jxe irepX ifiov " irepi fxov. 

Remark 1. There are, however, a few instances of enclitics of the first Pers. 
pronoun standing with accented prepositions, e. g. irpSs fie. PI. Symp. 218, c. 

Rem. 2. When the emphasis is on the preposition, there is an inclination 
of the accent, e. g. iirt ere tf avv aoi, X. An. 7. 7, 32 (against you, rather than with 
you). — The enclitic forms are used with the unaccented prepositions, e. g. e/c 
fxov, ev fioi, es ere, es fie, en aov, ev <roi. But when the emphasis is on the pro- 
noun, there is no inclination, and instead of jxov, /jlo'l, fxe, — ep.ov, epoi, i/xe, are 
Used, e. g. ev i/xoi, a\X' ovk ev aoi. 



$ 36.] DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 55 

(b) The enclitic pronouns generally retain their accent when they are em- 
phatic, as in antitheses, e. g. e,ue nal <r4 ; ifih 7) <re ; hence the forms 06, of, 
e, are accented only when they are used as reflexive pronouns. 

4. The pronoun rls is accented when it stands at the beginning of a sentence, 
e. g. rives Xeyovtxiv. 

5. There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the enclitic 
rests disappears by Elision, e. g. KaXbs 8* iariu, but tcaXbs S4 icrriv — iroXXol 5* 
el<riv, but iroXXol Se slffiv. 



$36. Division of Syllables . 

Preliminary Eemarks. The division of syllables, according to our mode 
of pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon the place of the accent. The 
term accent and accented, throughout these rules, is used with reference to our 
pronunciation of the Greek, and not to the written accent on the Greek words. 

The accent (sti-ess) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepenult in 
polysyllables, when the penult is short. The accent on the penult or antepenult 
is called the primary accent. If two syllables precede the primary accent, there 
is a secondary accent on the first syllable of the word. 

The following rales exhibit the more general method of dividing syllables, 
except where the pronunciation is regulated by the Greek accent : — 

1. A single consonant between the vowels of the penult and ultimate is 
joined to the latter, e. g. 01-70?, ira-pd, /xd-Xa, 'i-va, l-r6s, i-x<i>p> TrSXe-fj-os, (rrpdrev- 
(j.a, xa\e-T<fo, Xo%a-y6s, inroXa-fidov. 

Exception. In dissyllables, a single consonant following € or is joined to 
the first syllable, e. g. Xoy-os, reX-os, irep-i, or-i, iroX-v, %x~ w i <rr6x-os. 

2. The double consonants £ and \p are joined to the vowel preceding them; 
e. g. Ta|-o), Sn//-oy, irpa^-is, b.vriral-djxevos. But ( is joined to the vowel following 
it, except when it stands after e or 0, or after an accented vowel in the ante- 
penult, — in which case it is joined with these vowels; e. g. vojxi-fa, j/o/u-fo 
apird-fa ; but rpdire^-a, o£-os, u6fj.i£-o/j.ev, apird£-ofAev. 

3. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and 
t having the accent, and also a single consonant before or after e and having 
the accent, is joined to these vowels ; e. g. ay-a&6s, iror-a/jios, 0a-<riX-ea, v-ttoX- 
al3cx>i>, 6-ir6r-epos, rl^-o/xeu, a-irop-ia, ev-diK-la, i-m-rlfi-ia ; for a single consonant 
after a long vowel, etc., see 4. 

Exception. A single consonant preceded by a, and followed by two vowels, 
the first of which is e or t, is joined to the vowel after it ; e. g. crrpa-rid, amard- 
(Tecas, <rTpa-Ti<tiT-ns (not ar par-id, etc.). 

4. A single consonant after a long vowel, a diphthong or u, is joined to the 
vowel following ; e. g. aTror-n-Xo&i, icp-fj-^epos, (piXdo-repos, aKoXov-&ia, anov-crare, 
[Av-plas, a.&v-/Aia, (pv-youres, (pv-yo^ev. 

Exception. A single consonant following long a or 1 in the antepenult, and 
having the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding ; e. g. airoKptv-aro, cVtj- 
p.du-afiey. 



56 DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH, ETC. [§$ 37, 38. 

5. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, are 
separated ; e. g. 7ro\-AcL, la-rdvai, t£&-vt]k<x, Sap-paXsas, K\vrorex-vr]S. 

Exception. A mute and liquid are sometimes joined to the following vowel ; 
e. g. iri-TpuxTKoy. 

6. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last 
two, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel ; if not, the last 
only ; e. g. <xv-&pooiros, av-Spia, but irepty-frnv. 

7. Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part 
ends with a consonant ; hut if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a 
short syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word ; e. g. iic-fiaivw, 
(rvyeK-(p(tii/7](ris, Trp6&-e(Tis, audfi-ao'ts, but inro-<pr]T7)s, not inro(p-"!iTr}s ', so irapa- 



$ 37. Punctuation-marks — Diastole . 

1. The colon and semicolon are indicated by the same mark, a point above 
the line, e. g. Ev eA.e£as • irdures yap wp.o\6yr](rav. The interrogation-mark is 
our semicolon, e. g. Tis ravra ino'iycrey ; who did this ? The period, comma, and 
mark of exclamation have the same characters as in English; the mark of 
exclamation is rarely used. 

2. The Diastole (or Hypodiastole), which has the same character as the 
comma, is used to distinguish certain compound words from others of like 
sound, but of dissimilar meaning, e. g. '6, rt, whatever, and on, that, since ; '6, re, 
whatever, and ore, when. More recently, such words are generally separated in 
writing merely, e. g. '6 n, '6 re. 



SECTION II. 



ETYMOLOGY, OR GRAMMATICAL FORMS. 

$38. Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflection. 

1. Etymology relates to the form and meaning of the Parts 
of Speech. 

2. The Parts of Speech are : — 

(1) Substantives, which denote anything, which exists, any 
object (person or thing) ; as man, rose, house, virtue; 

(2) Adjectives, which denote a property or quality; as great, 
small, red, beautiful, hateful; 



$ 38.] DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. — -INFLECTION. 57 

(3) Pronouns, winch denote the relation of the object spoken 
of to the speaker (§ 86) ; as I, thou, he, this, that, mine, thine, 
his ; 

(4) Numerals, which denote the number or quantity of an 
object; as one, two, three, many, few; 

(5) Verbs, which denote an action or state; as to bloom, to 
toake, to sleep, to love, to censure ; 

(6) Adverbs, which denote the way and manner in which an 
action takes place, or the relations of place, time, manner, qual- 
ity, and number; as here, yesterday, beautifully (= in a beautiful 
manner), perhaps, often, rarely ; 

(7) Prepositions, which denote the relation of space, time, 
etc. of an object to an action or thing; as (to stand) before the 
house, after sunset, before sleep ; 

(8) Conjunctions, which connect words and sentences, or 
determine the relation between sentences ; as and, but, because. 

3. Words are either essential words, i. e. such as express a. 
notion, or idea, viz. the substantive, adjective, verb, and the 
adverbs derived from them; or formal words, i. e. such as 
express merely the relations of the idea to the speaker or some 
one else, viz. the pronoun, numeral, preposition, conjunction, the 
adverbs derived from them, and the verb ehai, to be, when it is 
used as a copula, with an adjective or substantive for its predi- 
cate ; as 6 avSpo)7ro<; Svtjtos e cr r i v. 

Remark. Besides the parts of speech above mentioned, there are certain 
organic sounds, called interjections ; as alas ! oh ! ah ! They express neither 
an idea nor the relation of an idea, and hence are not to be considered as proper 
words. — Prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs not derived from adjectives 
and substantives, are included under the common name of Particles. 

4. Inflection is the variation or modification of a word in 
order to indicate its different relations. The inflection of the 
substantive, adjective, pronoun, and numeral, is termed Declen- 
sion ; the inflection of the verb, Conjugation. The other parts 
of speech do not admit inflection. 



58 DIFFERENT KINDS AND GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. [§§ 39, 4& 

CHAPTER I. 

The Substantive. 

§39. Different kinds of Substantives . 

1. When a substantive (§ 38) indicates an object, which has 
an actual, independent existence, it is termed a Concrete substan- 
tive, e. g. man, woman, lion, earth, flower, host; but when the 
substantive indicates an action or quality, which is only conceived 
of as being something actual or independent, it is called an 
Abstract substantive, e. g. virtue, wisdom. 

2. The Concretes are, 

(a) Proper nouns, when they denote only single persons or 
things, and not a class; as Cyrus, Plato, Hellas, Athens; 

(b) Appellatives, when they denote an entire class or an 
individual of a class ; as mortal, tree, man, woman, flower. 

Remark. Appellatives axe called material nouns, when they indicate the 
simple material, e. g. milk, dust, water, gold, coin, grain ; collective nouns, when 
they designate many single persons or things as one whole, e. g. mankind, 
cavalry, fleet ; nouns of quantity, when they denote measure or weight, e. g. a 
bushel, a pound. 

§40. Gender of Sub stantiv es . 

Substantives have three genders, as in Latin; the gender. is 
determined partly by the meaning of the substantives, and 
partly by their endings. The last mode will be more fully 
treated under the several declensions. The following general 
rides determine the gender of substantives by their mean- 
ing:— 

1. The names of males, of nations, winds, months, and most 
rivers, are masculine, e. g. 6 /WiAevs, the king; ol "EXXrjves, 6 
Ya^rjkioiv (January, nearly) ; 6 'AA<£aos, the Al/pheus ; 6 evpos, the 
southeast wind. 

Remark 1. Exceptions: Diminutives in -ov, which are not proper names 
(these are conceived of as things and are neuter) ; e. g. to /xeipdKiov, the lad 
(but proper names of females in -ov are feminine, e. g. 77 Ac6i>tiov) ; also to 
kvhpaiTob'ov, a slave, mancipium ; ra iraih'iKa, a favorite ; and some rivers, e. g. 
i) 2tu|, and also some according to the ending, e. g. % A-fifrn. 

2. The names of females are feminine, e. g. fj ^r^p, mother. 



$ 40.] GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 59 

3. The names of the letters, infinitives, all indeclinable 
words, and every word used as a mere symbol, are neuter, e. g. 
to \dfji/3Sa, to TVTTTecv, the striking ; to (JirJTrjp, the word mother. 

Rem. 2. The gender of the names of mountains is determined by their 
endings; hence (a) masculine, 'EktKdov, -wvos, etc.; those in -os, Gen. -ov, e. g. 
YlapvacrSs ; in -cos, -«, e. g. "A&ws (o v Epu£, derived from the name of a person, 
is particularly to be observed); (b) feminine, those in -n (a), Gen. -77s, e. g. 
Putvt), "IStj, OiV?j ; those in -is and -vs, e. g. "hhiris, Gen. -ecus, "AX-ireis, -&eu, 
Kdpaixfiis, -tSos, "O&pvs, -vos (masculine in Lat.), Yldpvrjs, -Tjd-os ; (c) neuter, those 
in -ov, e. g. Avkcuov, Ui)\iov. 

Rem. 3. The gender of the names of places also is determined almost entirely 
by the endings ; only a few of these are feminine, properly agreeing with the fem- 
inine appellatives 777, x&P a i vricros (i. e. viovcra x^pa), t6\is to be supplied with 
them ; (a) names of cities and islands in -os, -ov, e. g. 7) Kopiv&os [tt6Kls], 77 'P6Sos 
[vr)aos], 77 A77A0S [j/Tjcros] (except 6 'OyxyvrSs, 6 ''D.pcoTrSs, 6 Alyia\6s, 6 Kdvwiros] 
usually 6 'Opxo/xsvSs, 6 'Axiapros; but generally 77 Hv\os and 77 ''E-widavpos) ; and 
the following names of countries : 77 Myvirros, 77 Xepp6v7)o-os, 77 "Hireipos, 1) IleAo- 
novvricros ; (b) names of cities in -oov, e. g. 77 BafivXwv, -wvos, 77 Aa/ceScuficu//, -ovos, 
7) 'Av&rjSdiv, -ovos, 77 XaXic7)5a>v, -ovos, 77 Kapx^^coz/, -ovos (except 6 Olvecov and 
Bpavpdov, -uvos, usually 6 Mapa&wv, -5>vos; but commonly 77 ~S,iKvci>v T -£>vos) ; (c) 
7) Tpoi(i)v, -rjvos. The gender of the others is determined by the endings. 
Hence, 

(a) All names of countries in -os, Gen. -ov (except those named above), are 
masculine, e. g. 6 B6o-7ropos, 'logo's, IlSvros, 'EXXtjsttovtos, AlyiaX6s ; all plural 
names of cities in -01, Gen. -ccv, e. g. $iXnnroi ; names of cities in -ovs, Gen. 
-ovvTos, e. g. 6 "Ttyovs (some of these are used both as masculine and feminine, 
e. g. Qikovs; 'Ana&ovs, Kapaaovs, 'Pa/j-vovs, ~Si8ovs, and Tpaire(ovs, are feminine 
only) ; those in -as, Gen. -avros, e. g. 6 Tdpas; those in -ens, Gen. -ea>s, e. g. 
6 Qavorevs ; finally, 6 Maaris, Gen. -7770s; 

(b) All names of countries oV the first Dec. and those of the third, which 
have feminine endings, are feminine (see § 66, II), e. g. 77 'EAeixns, -wos, 77 
2aAa/.us, -?vos, etc. ; 

(c) All in -ov, Gen. -ov ; plurals in -a, Gen. -wv, and those in -os, Gen. -ovs, 
are neuter, e. g. to "\Xiov, to. Aevtcrpa, to "Apyos, Gen. -ovs. 

4. The names of persons which have only one form for the 
Masc. and Fern, are of common gender, e. g. 6 7) £eos, god and 
goddess ; 6 r) -nois, boy and girl. 

Rem. 4. Movable substantives are such as change their ending so as to 
indicate the natural gender, e. g. 5 jSao-tAeus, king; 77 fiaatAeia, queen. See For- 
mation of Words. 

Rem. 5. Substantives (mostly names of animals) which have but one gram- 
matical gender, either Masc. or Fern., to denote both genders, are called 
Epicenes (imKotva), e. g. 77 a\<inr7)£, the fox, whether the male or female fox: 7) 
&pxTos, the bear ; 77 /ca/rrjAos, the camel ; /xvs, the mouse ; 77 x^&uv, the swallow ; 
77 ots, the sheep ; 77 fiovs (collectively), at jSdes, cattle; 6 "tztvos, horse (indefinitely), 
but in PL, ai 'ittitol ; but when the natural gender is to be distinguished, app7]u y 
male, or &77AUS, female, is added, e. g. Xayws 6 frrjXvs, the female hare; aX^-n-n^ 77 
&pp7)v, the male fox ; or the gender may be indicated by prefixing the article, or 
by another adjective, e. g. apKTos, the male bear. Some masculine names of 
animals have also the corresponding feminine forms, e.g. 6 Xeav, a lion:. 7) 
AeWa, a lioness. See Rem. 4. — Here belong, in the second place, the Masc. 
names of persons in the PL, which include the Fern., e. g. at yoveis, the parents 
al »ra?8es, liberi, the children (sons and daughters). 



CO 



NUMBER CASE, AND DECLENSION. — FIRST DEC. [$$ 41,42. 



$41. Number, Case, and Declension. 

1. The Greek has three Numbers ; the Singular, denoting one 
person or tiling ; the Plural more than one ; and the Dual, two. 

Remark 1. The dual is not often used; it is found most frequently in the 
Attic dialect ; it does not occur in the .ZEolic, nor in the Hellenistic Greek. 

2. The Greek has five Cases, 1 Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
Accusative, and Vocative. 

Eem. 2. The Nom. and Voc, as thej represent an object as independent of 
any other, are called independent cases (casus recti) ; the others, as they rep- 
resent an object as dependent on or related to some other, are called dependent 
cases (casus obliqui). 

Rem. 3. Neuter substantives and adjectives have the same form in the Nom., 
Ace, and Voc. of all numbers. The dual has only two case-endings ; one for 
the Nom., Ace, and Voc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. 

3. There are in the Greek three different ways, of inflecting 
substantives; distinguished as the First, Second, and Third 
Declensions. 

Rem. 4. The three declensions may be reduced to two principal declensions, 
viz. the strong and the weak. The case-endings of the strong are prominent and 
clearly distinguishable, while those of the weak are less distinctly marked. 
Words of the third Dec. belong to the strong, those of the first and second to 
the weak. In the third Dec. the case-endings uniformly appear pure; in the 
first and second this is less so, because in these declensions the stems end in a 
vowel, and hence combine with the case-endings which begin with a vowel. 
The inflexion of both the principal declensions, in the Masc. and Jem., is as 
follows : — 





Singular. 


Plural 


Dual. 




Strong. 


Weak. 


Strong. 


Weak. 


Strong. 


Weak. 


Norn. 


s 


i— n s 


es 


i 


e 


e 


Gen. 


03 


S 


WV 


UP 


oiv 


IV 


Dat. 


t 


i 


a-i(u) 


IS 


OIV 


IV 


Ace. 


v and o 


V 


as 


as 


6 


6 



§42. First Declension. 

The first declension has four endings, a and -q feminine ; as 
and r)s masculine. 



1 See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, § 268, seq. 



43. 



NOUNS OF THE FEMININE GENDER. 



61 







Endings . 








Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 


a a or 77 


as or 7]s 


ai 


a 


Gen. 


77s as 


TjS 


ov 


S>v 


aiv 


Dat. 


V ? 


V 


a ri 


ais 


aiv | 


. Ace. 


ay fly 


f]V 


av f\v 


as 


d 


Voc. 


a a 


V- 


a 77, a. 


ai 


d. 



Remark 1. It will be seen from the above terminations, that the plural as 
well as the dual endings are the same, whatever may be the form of the singu- 
lar. 

Rem. 2. The original ending of the Dat. PL was ai<ri (v), as in the second 
Dec. oicri(v), e.g. SiKaicri, ra?(ri, ka/XTraTcn, &eo?cri, (r/j.iKpo?<ri, aya&o?(ri. This 
form is also found in the Attic poets, and is not foreign even to prose, at least 
to that of Plato, especially in the second Dec. Even the Ionic form -ri<n {v) 
is sometimes used by the Attic poets. 



§ 43. Nouns of the Feminine Gender . 

1. (a) The Nom. ends in d or d, which remains in all the 
Cases, if it is preceded by p, c, or 1 (a pure), e. g. x^P a > land; 
tSe'a, form ; o-o<£ia, ivisdom ; xP e ^ a » utility ; evvota, benevolence ; here 
also belong the contracts in a (see No. 2), e. g. y,va.\ some sub- 
stantives in d, e. g. aXaXd, ivar-cry, and some proper names, e. g. 
'Avopo/^eSd, ArjSa, TeXd, $tA.o/x^Xd, Gen. -as, Dat. -a, Ace. -ay. 

Remark 1. The following words whose stem ends in p, take the ending 77 
instead of a: nopy, maiden; Kopprj, cheek; Seprj, neck; aSrapt), water-gruel; and 
some proper names introduced from the Ionic dialect, e. g. 'Ecpvprj ; the 77 then 
remains through all the cases of the Sing. — If any other vowel than eor i, 
precedes, the Nom. and all the cases of the Sing, have 77, e. g. &K077, <pwfj, <tksv4\, 
far) ; except ir6a, grass; xP^ a > c °l° r > <rr6a, porch; yva, field; <riicva, gourd; 
Kapita, walnut-tree ; i\da, olive-tree ; ak<ad, threshing-jioor ; Nav<riKaa, all Gen. -as. 

(b) The Nom. ends in a, which remains only in the Ace. and 
Voc. ; but in the Gen. and Dat., it is changed into 77, if the a is 
preceded by X, XX, a, era- (tt), £, £, \\r. 

Rem. 2. The ending is commonly in a when v precedes, e. g. ix&va (so es- 
pecially in words in -aiva) ; but 77 is often found, as is always the case in the 
suffix evvy), e. g. sveppoawr), also froivr), TrpvfivT] and irpi/xva, iretvn and iretva. 
Alaira is the only word ending in a preceded by a single t. 

(c) In other cases, the Nom. ends in 77, which remains 
throughout the singular. 

6 



62 



NOUNS OF THE MASCULINE GENDER. 



[M4. 



2. If a is preceded by e or a, -ea is contracted in most words 
into rj, and -aa into a in all the Cases (cornp. poppas, § 44, 3). 
The final syllable remains circumflexed in all the Cases. 

Rem. 3. The first Dec. is called the a declension, as its uninfected forms 
end in a, e. g. yvco/xr) from the uninfected yvd^a (comp. avuea), veavias from 
the uninfected veavla, voTCLrrfs from iroAiTea; the second, the o declension, as 
its uninfected forms end in o, e. g. \6yos, uninfected form A 6yo ; the third, the 
consonant declension, as its uninfected forms end in a consonant, and the vowels 
t and v, which originated from consonants. 

Paradigms, 





a) 7] through all the cases. 


b) d through 


all the cases. 


c) d, Gen. Tjs. 




Opinion. 


Pig-tree. 


Shadow. 


Land. 


Hammer. 


Lioness. 


S. N. 


7] yvcofirj 


(TVK-(ea)r) 


(TKI-d 


X&>pa 


o~(pvpa. 


Keaiva. 


G. 


tt)s yv<*>iJ.7]s 


aVK-TjS 


CKi-as 


X<»>pas 


crcpvpds 


AeaivrjS 


D. 


rr} yvci/j-r) 


auK-r) 


CTKl-a, 


X<*P% 


a<pvpa 


XeaivTj 


A. 


rr]v yvwfxrjv 


<tvk-t)V 


GKl-OV 


X&P°- V 


acpvpav 


\4aivav 


V. 


3> yvwfxrj 


avK-rj 


<tkl-o. 


X d>pa 


o~(pvpo. 


Xiaivd 


P. N. 


ai yuco/xai 


crvK-cu 


(TKi-ai 


X&pai 


ff(pvpai 


Xeaivai 


G. 


tow yvcofxcov 


ffVK-toV 


O~Kl-Q0V 


X^pcov 


acpvpdv 


Aeaivwv 


D. 


reus yudfxais 


avK-cus 


am-ais 


Xupais 


acpvpais 


Keaivais 


A. 


ras yvvj-Las 


avK-as 


(TKi-as 


X^po.s 


aepvpas 


Xeaivas 


V. 


do yvS>/xai 


crvK-cu 


(Tici-ai 


X w P ai 


acpvpai 


\4aivai 


Dual. 


tw yvwjxa 


avK-a 


CTKl-S. 


X&pa. 


crepvpa. 


AeatVd 




toliv yvuifxaiv 


GVK-a.LV 


(TKl-a.IV 


X&pcuv 


o~<pvpaiv 


Xeaivaiv. 



Remark 1. On the form of the article t« instead of rd, see §.241, Rem. 10. 
On the declension of the article r), see § 91. The S> standing before the singu- 
lar and plural Voc. is a mere exclamation. 

Rem. 2. On the contraction of -ea into -17, see § 9, II. (a) ; in the plural and 
dual of the first and second declensions, however, -ea is contracted into a. 
Comp. § 9, II. (b). Nouns in -aa are contracted as follows: N. jxvda, /xva, 
(mina)i G. fxvdas, /xvas, D. [xvda, fxv^, A. jxvdav, fxvav] PI. N. /xva7, etc. » 



$44. II. Nouns of the Masculine Gender. 

1. The Gen. of masculine nouns ends in -ov; nouns in -as 
retain the a in the Dat, Ace, and Voc, and those in -77? retain 
the 7] in the Ace. and Dat. Sing. 

2. The Voc. of substantives in -77s ends in a : — 

(1) All in -ttjs, e. g. to£ot?7s, Voc. ro^ora, 7rpocpr]T7]<i, Voc. vpocprj' 
ra ; (2) all in -77s composed of a substantive and a verb, e. g. 

yeoifxirp-qs, Voc yecop^erpa, p;vp<mo)\:qq, a salve- seller, Voc. fnvpo- 



44.; 



MASCULINE NOUNS. 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



63 



TftoXa; (3) national names in -t?*?., e. g. LTeoo-^s, a Persian, Voc. 
Ilepcra. — All other nouns in -775 have the Voc. in rj, e. g. LTepo-^?, 
Perses (the name of a man), Voc. TL£p<rq. 

3. The remarks on contract feminine nouns ($ 43, 2), ap- 
ply to Masc. nouns contracted from -£as, e. g. 'Ep/x^s, /Soppas. 
In fiopeas, the ea is contracted into a, and not into 77, since p 
precedes, $ 43, 1 (a). The doubling of the p in fioppas is merely 
accidental. 

Remake: 1. Contrary to § 43, I, compounds of fierpeco (to measure), as 
YecD^erpTjs, end in -77s instead of -as ; on the contrary, several proper names, etc., 
as ITeAo7rtSas and yewadas, a noble, end in -as instead of -rjs. 

Rem. 2. Several masculine nouns in -as have the Doric Gen. in a, namely, 
irarpaXoias, /xr]TpaXoias, patricide, matricide; opvifrofr-fipas, fowler; also several 
proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, e. g."TXas, Gen. 
'TAd, ^Koreas, -a, 'Avvlfias, -a, 2vXXas, -a ; (the pure Greek, and also several 
of the celehrated Doric names, e. g. 'Apxvras, AeaviSas, Uavaavlas (also the 
Boeotian 'Eira/AeivccvSas), commonly have ov;) finally, contracts in as, e. g. 
Boppas, Gen. fioppa. 

Paradigms. 







Citizen. 


Mercury. 


Youth. 


Fowler. 


Sing 


N. 


irO\TT7)S 


'Epfi (4as) 77s 


veavtds 


dpvi&ofrhpas 




G. 


ttoXitou 


'Ep/j-ov 


veaviov 


opvi&o&rjpd 




D. 


iroXirri 


'Epjxrj 


veavia 


dpvi&o&rjpa 




A. 


TroXirriv 


'Ep/J.7)V 


veavidv 


opvi&o&Tjpav 




V. 


ttoXTto. 


'Epfxrj 


veavia 


opvi&o&'fjpd 


Plur. 


N". 


iroXlrai 


'Epfia? 


veaviai 


dpvi&o&rjpal 




G. 


iroXirwv 


'Ep/xwv 


veaviwv 


opvi8ro&7)pS}V 




D. 


iroXirais 


'Epfxais 


veaviaiS 


bpvi2ro&r)pais 




A. 


iroXirds 


'Ep/xas 


veavids 


bpvi&oSr-fjpds 




V. 


TTohnai 


'Ep/xa? 


veaviai 


opvi&o&ripai 


Dual 




iroXird. 


'Ep/xa 


veavia. 


opvi&o&'hpa 






iroXiraiv 


Ep[xa?u 


veaviaiv 


opvi&o&ipaiv 



Rem. 3. The Ionic Genitive-ending -ew of Masc. nouns in -77s (§ 211), is 
retained even in the Attic dialect in some proper names, e. g. ®dxea from 
QaXTjs, T-fipea from T-f)pT]s. — The contract fioppas is also found in the Attic 
writers in the uncontracted form ; thus, fiopeas, X. An. 5. 7, 7. PI. Phaedr. 229, 
b. fiopeov, Th. 3, 23. fiopeav, 3, 4. 

Rem. 4. The ending rjs occurs, also, in the third Dec. To the fii'st Dec. 
belong: (a) proper names in -iSrjs and -a57?s, e.g. &oukl5lSt]s, 'ArpetS^y (from 
'Arpe and i'Stjs), MiXridB^s, as well as gentile nouns, e. g. 'ZirapnaT^s; (b) nouns 
in -TTjs derived from verbs, e. g. ttolt]T7}s from Troteco; (c) compounds consisting 
of a substantive and verb, or of a substantive compounded with another of the 
first Dec, e. g. 7rai<5oTpf/3Tjs, fiifUXioircoXris, ap^eSfrojs, 



64 QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION.- — FIRST DEC. f^ 45. 



$45. Quantity and Accentuation of the First 
Declension. 

a. Quantity. 

1. The Nom. ending a is short in all words, which have the Gen. in *tjs [§ 43, 
1 (b)] ; but long in those which have the Gen, in -as, e. g. 7rreAed, aiaa, croQia, 
7ratSetd, xp e '<*> XP 0l ^-> """^a? vp-tpv-i A-qda, dAaAa, etc. ; the same is true of the Pern, 
ending of adjectives in os, e. g. eAeud-epd, Sucaia. 

Exceptions . 
The following classes of words have a short in the Nom. : — 

(a) Dissyllables, and some Polysyllabic names of places in -aia, e. g. 'lo-rlaia, 
TlXaTaia. 

(b) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -etd, e. g. a\r}&eia, MiiSeia, fiaariXsia, 
queen, yAu/ceta, except abstracts from verbs in -evw, e. g. fia(rt\eia, king- 
dom ; SouAeta, servitude (from fiacriKevco, SouAeuco) ; 

(c) the names and designation of females, etc. in -rpia, e. g. \pd\rpia, a female 
musician, words in -v ?&, e. g. fiv7a, rerv(pv7a, the numeral /xia, and, finally, 
some poetic words ; 

(d) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -oia, e. g. evvoia, dvoia; 

(e) words in -pa whose penult is long by a diphthong (except av), by, v, or 
by p*£, e. g. rcelpa, fidxcupa ", yecpvpa, crcpvpa ; Tlvpfta. 'Eraipa, irakaiarpa, 
At&pa, $aidpa, KoXXvpa, are exceptions. 

2. The Voc. ending a is always short in nouns in -jjs ; but always long in 
nouns in -ds, e. g. iroXTra from iroXirns, veavia from veavias. The quantity of 
Pern, nouns in -a. and -d, is the same in the Voc. as in the Nom. 

3. The Dual ending o is always long, e. g. Movara from Movcra. 

4. The Ace. ending av is like the Nom., e. g. Movaav, x^P av from Movcrd, 
X<fyd. 

5. The ending as is always long, e. g. ras Tpair4(as from rpdirefa, 6 veavlas, 
robs veavids, rrjs olntds, ras oltcias. 

b. Accentuation. 

6. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws 
of accentuation permit (§ 30 ). 

Exceptions. 

(a) The Voc. SeWoTa from deo-rrSTns, lord; 

(b) The Gen. PI. of the first Dec. always has the final syllable u>v circum- 
flexed, which is caused by the contraction of the old ending dov, e. g 
Aeaivwv from \4aiva, veavioov from veavias. — But the substantives, xpfo' 
ri)s, creditor; a<pi>T], anchovy; ir^aiai, monsoons; and x^ ovl '' ns i wild-boar, 
are exceptions ; in the Gen. PI. they remain Paroxytones, thus xP'h (rrcov i 
&tf>iW, ir-naiM (but a<pvuv, XP 7 f rrT ^ 1/ from a<pvfjs, unapt; XPVffos, useful). 



$ 46.] SECOND DECLENSION. 

Eemark. On the accentuation of Adjectives, see § 75. 



65 



7 The accent of the Nom. is changed, according to the quantity of the final 
syllable, thus : — 

(a) Oxytones become Perispomena in the Gen. and Dat. of the three num- 
bers, e. g. (Nom. ri/xri) ri/xys, -fj, -5>v, -cuv, -cus] this holds, also, in the 
second Dec; e. g. &e6s, -ov, -<$ -an/, -o?v; 

(b) Paroxytones with a short penult remain so through all the Cases, except 
the Gen. PL, which is always circumflexed on the last syllable; but 
Paroxytones with a long penult become Properispomena, if the last syl- 
lable is short, as in the Nom. PL, and in the Voc. Sing, in a of Masc. 
nouns in -77s (§ 44), e. g. jvco/at], yvcoj/cu, but yvco/xcov ] iro\i'Tr}s, ttoTuto., 
•7toATtc», but ttoAitcov; on the contrary, 8)^77, Sinou, but Sikuv ; 

(c) Properispomena become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
Movaa, Movents ; 

(d) Prop aroxy tones become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
Xiaiva, \eaivr]s. 



$ 46. Second Declension, 

The Second Declension has two endings, os and ov; nouns 
in -os are mostly masculine, but often feminine (§ 50) ; those 
in -ov are neuter ; except Fern, diminutive proper names in -ov, 
e. g. r) TXvKepLOV (J 40). 



Endings. 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 


OS ov 


0; 




a 


CO 


Gen. 


ov 




cov 




OLV 


Dat. 


V 




OlS 




OLV 


Ace. 


ov 


ovs 




a 


CO 


Voc. 


os and e ov. 


01 




a. 


CO. 



Eemark 1 . The Gen. and Dat. endings of the different genders are the 
same in all numbers; neuters have the Nom., Ace, and Voc. alike in all 
numbers, and in the plural they end in o. 

Eem. 2. On the form of the Dat. PL oiari (v), see $ 42, Eem. 2. 



6* 



66 



SECOND DECLENSION. 

Paradigms, 



[H7. 





Word. 


Island. 


God. 


Messenger. 


Pig. 


S.N. 


5 x6y-os 


?J VT)ffOS 


6 (T))freos 


ayyeXos 


rb avKov 


G. 


tov Xoy-ov 


tt)s vi\ffov 


tov &eov 


ayyeXov 


TOV ffVKOV 


D. 


t&5 Xoy-ca 


rfj viicrca 


t4> &ecp 


ayyehep 


T(f ffVKCf) 


A. 


rbu Xoy-ov 


t?V vrjerov 


TOV 3-60V 


fryyeXov 


rb gvkov 


V. 
P.N. 


3> Xoy-e 


3> vrjere 


S> fre6s 


&77eAe 


d) ffVKOV 


ol x6y-oi 


al vrjffoi 


ol &eoi 


&yyeXoi 


to. arvKa 


G. 


tS>v Xoy-cav 


to>v vrjffojy 


twv &ewv 


ayyiXoov 


T&V CVKdiV 


D. 


reus- Xoy-ois 


reus vr)ffois 


rots &eo7s 


ayyeXois 


TOlS ffVKOlS 


A. 


robs x6y-ovs 


TCLS VT]ffOVS 


robs &eovs 


ayyeXovs 


to avKa 


V. 


3> Xoy-01 


3) VTJffOl 


3> i^eoi 


&yyeXoi 


3> cvkcl 


I). 


T(b \6y-Ct) 


to. vrjffa 


Tcb 3-eco 


ayy4\(a 


TO) ffVKto 




tolv x6y-oiv 


TOUV VT\ffOiV 


to7v &eo7v 


ayyiXoiv 


ToTv (TVK01V. 



Rem. 3. The Voc. of words in -os commonly ends in e, though often in -os, 
e. g. Z> (pi\€, and 5 <pixos ; always & &eos in classic Greek. 

§47. Contraction of the Second Declension. 

1. A small number of substantives, with o or e before the 
case -ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect (§ 9). 

Paradigms. 





Navigation. 


Circumnavigation. 


Bone. 


S.N. 


ttXSos 


ttXovs 


6 Trep'nrXoos 


TrepiirXovs 


rb oo~t£ov 


OffTOVV \ 


G. 


ttXSov 


ttXou 


irepiirXoov 


iceplirAoy 


oarcov 


OO-TOV 


D. 


tt\6ci) 


irXcp 


TrepiTrXoco 


7repiTrX(o 


offTeco 


OffTUi 


A. 


ttXoov 


tvXovv 


TzepiirXoou 


TrepiirXovv 


oareov 


OO-TOVV 


V. 


ttXSc 


irXov 


TTtp'nvXoe 


irep'nrXov 


offTeov 


OffTOVV 


P.N. 


TVX6oL 


ttXo7 


TreptirXooi 


Trepi-xXoi 


ocrrea 


Off TO. 


G. 


ttXSwu 


irXau/ 


irepnrXowv 


irepiirXoiV 


OffTEWV 


OffTWV 


D. 


ttXSois 


ttXo7s 


irepnrXSois 


irepiirXois 


oaTeois 


OffTOtS 


A. 


tvX6ovs 


irXovs 


TrepnrXoovs 


TrepiirXovs 


bffria 


offra 


V. 


ttx6ol 


nXo? 


irepiirXooi 


irepiirXot. 


oo-Tea 


ocrra 


D. 


ttX6w 


irXw 


irepnrXdco 


TTepiTrXco 


ocrreca 


offTca 




irX6oiv 


irXoiv 


irepnrXooiv 


■xsp'nrXoiv 


OffTEOlV 


OffTOtV 



Only the following nouns besides the above are contracted in this manner : 6 
vSos, vovs, the mind ; 6 p6os, povs, a stream; 6 frpovs, noise ; 6 xvovs, doum-j 6 aSeX- 
(prfovs, a nephew ; 6 frvyarpidods, grandson ; 6 avetyiaSovs, son of a sister's child. 

Remark. Uncontracted forms sometimes occur even in the Attic dialect 
though seldom in substantives, e. g. p6a>, Plato, Prot. .344. a; much oftener in 
adjectives, particularly neuters in -oa, as rk avoa, erepairXoa. On the contrac- 



tion of ea 



the I" 



;i.(b). 



$6 48, 49.] 



THE ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 



67 



§ 48. The Attic Second' Declension. 

Several substantives and adjectives have the endings cos 
(Masc and Fern.) and wv (Neut.), instead of o<? and ov; they 
retain the w through all the Cases instead of the common 
vowels and diphthongs of the second Dec. and subscribe 1 
under w where the regular form has w or 01 ; thus, ov and a 
become co ; o?, ov, and ovs become co?, cov, and cos ; 01, 01s, and oiv 
become w, cos, and cov ; — w, co, and wv remain unchanged. The 
Voc. is the same as the Nom 







Paradigms 






1 


People. 


Table. 


Hare. 


Hall. 


Sing. N. 


6 Ke-dos 


7) KaX-as 


6 Xay-tios 


rb aucvye-ay 


G. 


Xe-c*> 


taxX-co 


Xay-ca 


avcoys-oo 


D. 

A. 
V. 


Ae-<£ 


kclX-co 


Xay-tp 


avcoye-ca 


Ae-coi/ 


KaX-wv 


Xay-dov 


av&yz-av 


Xe-us 


KaX-ccs 


Xay-dos 


avaye-cov 
avdoye-w 


Plur. N. 


Ae cp 


fcdX-ip 


Xay-cp 


G. 


Xe-cou 


KaX-ccv 


Xay-S>v 


avdoye-wv 


D. 


Ae-a>s 


KaX-q>s 


Xay-cps 


avwys-qis 


A. 


Xe-cvs 


icdX-cas 


Xay-cas 


avd>y€-o) 


V. 


Xe-ca 


KaX-cp 


Xay-cf 


avct>ye-co 


i D. N. A. V. 


Xe-ca 


/caA-w 


Xay-d) 


av&ye-ta 


\ G. and D. 


Xe-cpv 


Ka\-q>v 


Xay-a>v 


avdoye-uv. 



Remark 1. Some words of the Masc. and Pern, gender often reject the v 
in the Ace. Sing., namely, Xaytios, the hare ; (Ace. rbu Xaywv and Acryco), and 
commonly rj Has, the dawn ; 7] aXws, a threshing-floor ; 7) Kews, 7] Kas, 6 'A&ws, r) 
Tews, and the adjectives &ynpu)s, not old ; i-rriirXeoos,full; virepxpeccs, guilty. 

Rem. 2. This Declension is termed Attic, because, if a word of this class 
has another form, e. g. Aec6s and Xa6s, vedos and va6s, MeveAews and MeveXdos, 
the Attic writers are accustomed to select the form in -ecos ; though, in the 
best Attic writers, the non- Attic forms also may be found. On the interchange 
of the long vowel in this Declension, see § 16, 5. 



•.§ 49. Accentuation of Second Declension. 

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quan- 
tity of the final syllable permits; the Voc. &5eAcbe from oSeA^xfe, brother, is 
an exception. 

2. The change of accent is the same as in the first Dec. (§ 45, 7); in the 
Gen. PI., however, only oxytones, e.g. fe6s, are perispomena; the rest are pro 
paroxytones. See the Paradigms. 



68 REMARKS ON THE GENDER OF THE ENDING OS. [$ 50. 

3. The following exceptions to the rules given for the accentuation of con 
taracts in § 30, 2, should be observed : (a) the Dual in w of words in -oos, -eos, 
-eov, has the acute instead of the circumflex, e. g. irx6w = irXa, ocrreco = 6 err do, 
instead of ttXco, ocrra; — (b) compounds and polysyllabic proper names, which 
retain the accent even on the penult, when it would regularly stand as a cir- 
cumflex on the contracted syllable, e. g. Trepiir\6-ov = ir split kov (instead of 
irepiirXov), from irepiirXoos — ireplirAovs ; TIeipi&6-ov = Tleipi&ov (instead of 
Ueipi&ov), from Tleipi&oos = Tleipi&ovs ; also adjectives, e. g. evv6-ov = evvov (not 
evvov), from evvoos = evuovs ; yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult ; 
thus, ireplirXoi, not irepiirXoi; ko.k6voi, not kcikovoi] — (c) to Kciveov, basket, takes 
the circumflex on the ultimate, in the contract forms ; hence ndveov = icavovv 
(instead of kdvovv) ; — (d) words in -5e6s = Sods denoting kindred, have the cir- 
cumflex instead of the acute on the ultimate, e. g. adeAcpideSs = adsk(pi§ovs, 
nephew (instead of adeXcpidovs). It may be stated as the rule, that all simple 
substantives and adjectives in -eos and -oos take the circumflex on the contracted 
syllable, hence kolvovv, ade\<pi8ovs, xpwovs (from xp&re-os). 

4. In the Attic Dec., Proparoxytones retain the acute accent on the antepe- 
nult through all the cases and numbers. See § 29, Rem. 7. Oxytones in -<hs 
retain the acute accent in the Gen. Sing., contrary to § 45, 7 (a), e. g. Aec6. il 
here absorbs o, the inflection- vowel of the Gen. (e. g. \6yo-o = \6yov), which 
accounts for this unusual accentuation, thus Aec«> instead of Xedo-o. 



$ 50. Remarks on the Gender of the Ending os. 

Substantives in -os are regularly Masc. ; yet many are Fern. In addition to 
the names of countries, cities, and islands, mentioned under the general rule 
in § 40, the following exceptions occur, which may be divided into general 
classes : — 

(a) Substantives which denote certain products of trees and plants, e. g. 
t) &kv\os, acorn; t) fSd\avos, acorn; t) fivcraos, fine linen; r) Sokos, a beam; r) 
/3a/35os, a staff; r) filfiXos, bark offthe papyrus ; t) ipia&os, rush mat; 

(b) Such as denote stones and earths, e. g. 6 t) \l&os, a stone; t) \i&os, partic- 
ularly a precious stone ; r) iprjcpos, a small stone ; r) \pd/j.fj.os, sand ; r) o-rroSos, ashes ; 
t) [aiAtos, red earth; r) Kpvo-raXXos, crystal. (6 Rpvo-raWos, ice) ; r) {Sdaavos, a touch- 
stone; 7) rjXeicrpos, elect rum; r) a/ndpaydos, a smaragdus ; r) fiwXos, a clod; r) yinpos, 
gypsum; t) vdXos, glass; r) rlrdvos, chalk; r) dpyiAos, clay ; r) irXivfros, brick; r) 
&o-fiG\os, soot ; rj uSirpos, ordure ; r) do-cpaXros, bitumen ; 

(c) Such as denote a hollow or cavity, e. g. t) tcdpdoiros, kneading-trough ; r) va/3«- 
t6s and r) xv^os, a box ; r) o-op6s, a coffin; v) Xnv6s, a wine-press; r) Atjkv&os, an 
oil-flask ; -q ndpclvos, an oven; t) (pwpiap.6s, a chest; r) irveXos, tub; 

(d) Such as express the idea of a way, e. g. r) 656s, a road; r) afiagirSs (sc. 
6B6s), a carriage-road ; r) rplfios and r) drpdiros, afoot-path; t) rdeppos, a ditch; 

(e) Many of the above substantives were originally adjectives, and hence 
appear as feminine nouns, because the substantives with which they properly 
agree are feminine. There are also many others, e. g. t) atiAeios (sc. &vpa), 



M 51, 52.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



69 



house-door; 7\ tfireipos (sc. 7?}), the mainland] 7) &vvdpos (sc.yrj), thirsty land, desert; 
r] vios (sc. x&pa), a fallow field ; 7) vricros (from veiv, sc. 777), an island; 7) StaAe/c- 
ros (sc. (pavr)), a dialect; 7) crvynXyTos (sc. fiovAr)), senate; 7) {Sapfinos (sc. Xvpa), 
lyre; 7) hidjxerpos (sc. ypa/j-jxi)), diameter; 7) (more seldom 6) IxKaros (sc. vavs), 
boat; 7) &6\os (sc. 01/aa), roi/^eZ building, etc.; 

(f ) Several feminine nouns which stand alone, and hence specially to be 
noted, e. g. 7) v6o~os, sickness; 7) yvd&os, jaw-bone; 7) dpoaos, dew; 7) pAipiv&os, 
twine ; 

(g) Some words which have a different meaning in different genders, e. g. 
tWos, horse ; 7) 'Ittttos, mai'e, also cavalry ; 6 \4icifros, pea-soup ; 7) Ae/a&os, the 
yolk of an egg. 

Remark. On the diminutives in -ov, see § 40, Rem. 1. 

$51. Third Declension. 
The third Declension has the following Case-endings : — 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 


s Neut. — 

OS 

t 

v and a Neut. — 

mostly as the Nom. ; Neut. — 


€s; Neut. a 

Q!V 

<rX{v) 

as; — a 

es ; — a. 


6 

OIV 

OIV 

e 

6 



Remarks ok the Case -endings 
$ 52. A. Nominative. 



1. The Nom. of Masculine and Feminine nouns ends in 5, 
e. g. 6 Kopai (instead of KopaK-s), i) XaiXaxf/ (instead of AaiAxwr-s). 
Still, the laws of euphony do not always allow the s to be an- 
nexed to the stem; it is either rejected entirely, or, as a com- 
pensation, the short vowel of the stem is lengthened (§16, 3). 
But when the stem allows s to be annexed, the usual euphonic 
($ 20) changes take place in the final consonant of the stem. 

2. In this way all Masc. and Fern, nouns maybe divided into 
three classes : — 

(a) The first class includes words, which in the Nom. assume 
the gender-sign s, e. g. 

tp\4p-s 



>A€j3 

KOpdK 

Aa/x7ra5 
yiydvr 
SeXcpIv 
$6F (/3c 
[AlF 



bov) 



Kopaic-s 
Aa/xirdd-s 
yiya.vT-s 
tie\<piv-s 



</>Aety (§20,1) 
K6paZ (§ 20, 1) 
KajxTvds (§ 20, 1) 
yiyds (§ 20, 2) 
z\tpis (§ 20, 2) 



6 rj $6F-s (bov-s) Pods, bos (§ 25, 2) 
L<3 AtF-s Afs (§ 25, 2) 



CJ 



r (p\eP-6s 
K.6pa.K-os 
XajXTraZ-os 
yiyavr-os 
8e\<p7v-os 
&o-6s 
Ai-6s 



70 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 53. 

(b) The second class includes words, which in the Nom. 
reject the gender-sign s, but, as a compensation, lengthen the 
short final vowel of the stem, e into -q, o into w (§$ 16, 3, and 

20, Rem. 3), e. g. 

. . I" Troi/xev . . (6 iroifxr]j/ . . f iroL^eu-os 

g J A.60J/T d J o (AeWr) AeW d J AcVt-os 

_2 1 prjTop »z 1 * Wtfl»f» O 1 PVrop-os ■ ' 

[ alSos [v adds I (atS(J<r-os) cu5o-os ; 

(c) The third class includes words, which in the Nom. have 
the stem pure, since the stem neither assumes the gender-sign 
s, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g. 

.. ( frnp .. (6 frvp (instead of S^p-s) .. [&y}p-$s 

£ J caw?' d J o cucov ( " " alcov-s) d J o-luu-os 

£ 1 ^pws o j o Tjpojs ( " " f}p««r-s) $ j (7jpa><r-os) fyx»-os 

[SafiapT ^ [^5ctyiap( " " Sdfx.apT-s, Sd/xapr) [5dp.apT-os. 

3. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nom. ; still, euphony 
does not permit a word to end in t ($ 25, 5). Hence, in this 
case, the r is either wholly rejected (as in the Masc. AeW, Gen. 
XeovTos), or is changed into the corresponding o- ($ 25, 5), e. g. 

. . f ireirep? . . f r& ireirepX , . f Treirtpi-os or e-os 

S J <reAas d J to aeAas d J (creA-atr-os) o~4Xa-os 

+= 1 <ro)jxa.T o 1 <r^ {(Tcofxar) <rco/j.a ^ 1 aca/nar-os 

[_ repar [to (TepaT) repay [ re'par-oy. 

Eemaek. The stem xup is lengthened in the Nom., contrary to the rule : 
to Trvp, Gen. 7rvp-Js. 

$ 53. B. Tifre remaining Cases. 

1. The remaining Cases (with a few exceptions, which will 
be specially treated), are formed by appending the endings to 
the stem, e. g. 

Stem KopaK Nom. «Jpa£ Gen. it6paK-os PI. Nom. /c^po/c-es. 

2. In forming the Dat. PL by appending the syllable o-t to 
stems ending in a consonant, the same changes take place as 
have already been noticed hi regard to the Nom. of similar 
words [$ 52, 2 (a)], e. g. 

(pAe/8-crt i= <p\e\pi K6paK-o*i = /cJpa|t Xa/JLirdS-cri, = Xafj.irdffi 

yiyauT-at = ylyaffi od6vT-o~i — 68ouo~i j8oF-tri = fiovcrl. 

The following points also are to be noted : — 

3. (a) The Ace. Sing, has the form in -v with masculines and 



§ 53.] THIRD DECLENSION. 71 

feminines in -is, -vs, -avs, and -ovs, whose stems end in -i, -v, -av } 
and -ov, e. g. 

Stem 7roAt Nom. tt^Aw Ace. 7r^Ati/, Stem fiorpv Nom. fiorpvs Ace. $6rpw 

vaF vav vaFs vavs vaFv vavv, &oF fiov fi6Fs fiovs &6Fv fiovu. 

But the Ace. has the form in -a, 1 when the stem ends in a con- 
sonant, e. g. cf>\€J3, (pXiij/, <fi\e/3a — KopaK, Kopa^, KopaK-a — Aa/X7raS, 
A.a/X7ras, XafjardB-a. 

(b) Yet barytoned substantives in -is and -vs, of two or more 
syllables, whose stems end with a Tau-mute, in prose have only 
the form in v, e. g. 

Stem iptS Nom. epis Ace. ipiv (poet. '4pi8-a ; in the dramatists epiv) 

bpv& fipvis tipviv (poet. $pvi&-a) 

Kopvfr nSpvs Kopvv (poet. K6pv&-a) 

Xaptr X^P ls X^P lv (poet. xapiT-a). 

In prose there are but few exceptions, e. g. Tepyi&a, X. H. 3. 1, 15, and else- 
where (instead of Tepyiv) from y\ Tipyis; %apna (instead of %apji/), ib. 3. 5, 16 ; 
in constant use rpi-noZa, tripod. (X. An. 7. 3, 27, raivl^a is to be read instead 
of Ta-n-tSa.) The goddess x°-P LS nas X^P lTa i* 1 tne Ace; still, in Luc. Deor. d. 
15, 1 and 2, rty x&P lv ' 

Remark 1. Oxy tones of one or more syllables have only the regular form 
in -a, e. g. (7toS) irovs, Ace. 7ro'8-a; (iXirid) iXiris, Ace. eAxiS-a; (xActyiuS) x Act- 
ios, Ace. x^A^S-a. The monosyllable /cAefc, Gen. /cAeiS-o's, contrary to the 
rule, usually has the Ace. /cAe«/, instead of /cAetS-a. 

4. The Voc. is like the stem, e. g. Sai/xcov, Gen. oatjuov-os, Voc. 

Scujaov. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem-form to 

appear. Hence the following points should be noted : — 
(1) The Voc. is like the stem in the following cases :— - 
(a) When the final vowels of the stem, e and o, in the Nom. 

are lengthened into y and co, the short stem-vowel reappears in 

the Voc, e. g. 

Saifxcov Gen. SalfAOV-os Voc. 8cuy.oj/ 

yepwv yepovr-os yipov (instead of yipovr) 

fJ-JjTTip /JL7]T4p-os firjrep 

2a>/cp«T7js ^coKpdre-os (instead of ea-os) ^diKpares. 



1 It is probable that the Ace. Sing, in the third declension as well as in the 
first and second, originally ended in v ; but where the stem ended in a conso- 
nant, the v could not be appended without a union- vowel; a was used for this 
purpose ; hence, e. g. icSpaKav ; the termination v was at length omitted. The 
Ace. ending o, may therefore strictly be regarded as a union-vowel. 



72 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 53. 

Exceptions: Oxytoned substantives (not adjectives) retain the lengthened 
vowel, e. g. 

Troifj.'fiy, Gen. iroijj.ev-os, Voc. ttoi^v (not iroi/xev), 
except the three oxytones : irarrip, avrjp, and Sarjp, which, in the Voc, take 
again the short stem-vowel e, but with the accent drawn back, thus : irdrep, 
&vep, daep. According to this analogy, even 'HpanM^v)vs (stem 'HpdvcAees) is 
shortened in the Voc. by the later writers, into c/ Hpa/cAes. 

(b) Adjectives in -a?, Gen. -avo<s, and also adjectives (not 
participles, see Rem. 5), whose stems end in -vr, have in the 
Voc. a form like the neuter (or the stem) ; 7ras and its com- 
pounds are exceptions, e. g. 

jiieAdy, Gen. dv-os Neut. and Voc. fx4\av 

Xapieis, evr-os X a p' iev (instead of x a -p'^ VT i h 52, 3). 

So substantives in -as, Gen. -ai/ros, have the Voc. in -av (instead 
of -avr), § 52, 3, e. g. 

ytyas Gen. avr-os Voc. ytydv (instead of ylyavr) 

KaA%dy avr-os KaA%dv 

Aids avr-os Aldv. 

Rem. 2. Some substantives of this class, with the r reject also the v, but as 
a compensation lengthen the short a, e. g. "At Ads, Gen. -avr-os, Voc. "At Ad, 
rioAuSa/ids, Voc. TloXvddfid. 

(c) Substantives in -is, -i>s, -av?, -eus, and -ovs, whose stems 
end in -i, -v, -av, -ev, and -ov, have the Voc. like the stem, the 
s of the Norn, being rejected, e. g. 

[xdvris Voc. jxdvTi ; irp£o-$vs Voc. irpeffftv ; fxvs Voc. /xG ; ads Voc. (ri) ; Ats Voc. 
At; ypavs Voc. 7pa0 ; jSounAeus Voc. /SacnAeD ; jSous Voc. /3o£>. 

The word irais, Gen. -rraiS-os, has 7ra? in the Voc, since, by rejecting the gender- 
sign s, the stem would end in 8 (7ra78), a letter which cannot end a word, and 
must be dropped. 

Rem. 3. Substantives in -is, -vs, -ovs, whose stems end in a consonant, have 
the Voc. like the Nom., e. g. S> opvis, nopvs, irovs. Still, some substantives in 
-is, Gen. -ivos, have the Voc. like the stem, e. g. S> SeAtfuV (also Se\<pis), from 
5e\<piS) Gen. -7vos. 

(d) The Voc. is like the stem in all words, which in the 
Norn have their stem pure, e. g. Srjp, aloyv, etc.; but 'AttoAAwv 
(Gen. -oivos), TLoaetSiov (-covo?) and o-orr^o (-rjpos) are exceptions, 
the Vocatives being w "A-n-oXXov, lioaetSov, cr&rcp, with the accent 
drawn back. 



$ 54.] THIRD DECLENSION. 73 

(2) The Voc. is not like the stem, but like the Nom., in most 
words whose stems end in one of the consonants which cannot 
euphonically stand as the final letter (§ 25, 5), because after 
dropping the stem-consonant, frequently it could not be de- 
termined from the Voc. what the true stem was ; e. g. from 
o-dpt;, Gen. <rapK-6<s, the Voc. would be crap (instead of adpK) ; from 
6 c/>co?, Gen. c/xor-os, Voc. c/>o6 (instead of c/>drr) ; from vfy, Gen. 
vtc/>-o9, Voc. vt (instead of vi<f>) ; from aty, Gen. wtt-os, Voc. <3 
(instead of &tt) ; from novs, Gen. 7roS-os, Voc. tto. 

Rem. 4. The Voc. of &yai;, king, in the Common language, is like the Nom. 
3> &va£, or by Crasis £>ua£- : but in the solemn language of prayer: S> &va (in 
Horn, and the Attic poets, e. g. Soph. 0. C. 1485 : ZeO &va, ao\ (pwua>), or 3>va 
(instead of 'dvaKT, according to § 25, 5). 

3. Substantives in -w and -cos, whose stems end in -os, have 
the Voc. neither like the stem, nor the Nom., but, contrary to 
all analogy, in -ot, e. g. 

Stem 7)x os N. vx^ G. VX^-° s (instead of t)x6(T-os) V. 77%°' (instead of vxocri, vxo-'i) 
alSos alSws aiS6-os ( " " ald6<r-os) alSo? ( " " al86o~-i al86-i) 

Rem. 5. The Yoc. of all participles is like the Nom., e. g. 3> tvittwv, tctu- 
<pu>s, Ti>\pas, Tvtyoov, Seacvvs. ''Apxwv, Voc. &px ov i when a substantive, is an 
exception. 



A. "Words, which in the Gen. have a consonant before the ending- 

-OS, i. C. WORDS WHOSE STEM ENDS IN A CONSONANT. 

§ 54. I. The Nom. adds o- to the stem 

(a) The stem ends in X ; thus : 6 y a\<s, Gen, dA-os, Dat. PI. 
aX-o-i(v). See Rem. 1. 

(b) The stem ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute — ft ir t <j>; y, yy» 
k, ok (rj aap%, crapK-os), and ■%• See § 52, 2 (a). 

(c) The stem ends in a Tau-mute — 8, t, kt, #, v#. See 
§ 52, 2 (a). On the Ace. see $ 53, 3 (b). 

The stems of the Neuter, belonging to this class, end in t and kt (yaXcucr), 
but, according to § 25, 5, reject the t and kt ; thus : crw^a instead of a-wfiar, and 
7<xAa instead of yaXaKT ; or, according to § 52, 3, they change the t into a- ; on 
the omission of the t before <n in the Dat. PI. see § 20, 1. 

(d) The stem ends in v or vt. See $ 52, 2 (a). 

7 



74 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[* 54. 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


77, Storm. 

AcuAa^ 

XaiXaTT-os 

XaiXdir-i 

Xa.iXo.TT-a 

XadXdxp 


r), Torch. 7), Helmet, t2>, Body. 
Xa.jJ.Trds Kopvs o~a>/j.a 
Xa/j.7rdS-os ic6pv&-os G&fxaT-os 
Xap.Trdd-1 n6pv&-i cdo^.a.T-1 
Xafx-irdd-a nSpvv (rw/xa 
Xa/MTrds Kopvs aoo/xa 


7), Nose. 1 
pis 

plv-6s 
plu-i 
plu-a, 
piv 


, Tooth. 
68ovs 
6S6ut-os 

6S0UT-I 

656vT-a 
odovs 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


XaiXair-es 
XaiXaTr-wu 
XaiXatyi(u) 
XaiXaTr-as 
XaiXdir-es 


XafJ-irdS-es 

XajXTTaS-cov 

XajXTtd-cri{v) 

XafiirdB-as 

XafiTtdd-es 


ic6pv&-es 
Kopv&-aiv 

K6pV-(Tl(u) 

Kopv&-as 
tcopvfr-es 


(Twjxar-a piu-ts 
(Ttoixdr-wv plv-a>v 
ab}jxa-(n(v) pl-ai{v) 
ffdifxar-a ptv-as 
crcti/xaT-a plv-es 


65ovT-es 

odour-av 

odov-o'i(u) 

656u7-as 

6douT-cs 


D.N.A.V. 
G. and D. 


XaiXdir-e 
XaiXair-oiu 


Xa/j.Trd5-e 
XafxirdZ-oiv 


Kopv&-e 
Kopv&-ow 


(r&jxaT-e 
ffuixaT-oiv 


p?u-e 
plu-olv 


oSSur-e 
6S6ut-oiu. 



So: 6 Kopo.%, -oLKos, raven; 6 Xdpvy£, -vyyos, throat; 6, 7) opvls, -I&os, bird; 6 
aVa|, -aKTos, king; 7) eXfuvs, -tvfros, tape-worm; 6 8eX<p(s, -?uos, dolphin ; 6yiyas, 
-avTos, giant, etc. 

Remark 1. The stem of nouns in -ty and -| commonly ends in the smooth 
ir and k ; the stem of those in -7I ends in -77, except 6, 7) Xvy£, Gen. Xvyic-Ss, 
lynx (buti) Xvy£, Gen. Xvyy-6s, hiccough). Instead of <$>dpvyyos from 7) <pdpvy}-, 
throat, the poets, according to the necessities of the verse, use <j>dpvyos also. On 
7) <fyt£, rpixts, hair, see § 21, 3. 

Rem. 2. The word 7) aXs, Gen. aX-6s, signifying sea, and in the Pem. gender, 
is only poetic, and the Sing. 6 aXs, signifying salt, is only Ionic and poetic ; 
elsewhere, only ol aXes, salt, occurs (PI. Symp. 177, b. Lys. 209, e). 

Rem. 3. To class (c) belong also the contracts in -tjis, Gen. -7]iSos = --fls, 
-7?8os, e. g. 7) iraprfs, cheek, 7raprj8os. 

Rem. 4. The stem of rb ois, ear, is wr, thus : Gen. &-t6s, Dat. tori, PI. &ra, 
&tuv, wo-l(u). The word rb repas, according to the rule of the ancient gram- 
marians, usually admits contraction in the plural, among the Attic writers, 
after the t is dropped: repd, repwv (but X. C. 1. 4, 15. PI. Phil. 14, e. Hipp. 
300, e. Tepara) ; — rb yspas, reward of honor ; rb yrjpas, old age; rb npeas, flesh, 
and rb Kepas, horn, reject t in all the Numbers, and then suffer contraction in the 
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Plural (except the Dat. PL) ; 
yet /ceprts, besides these forms, has the regular form with t ; Thucyd. uses the 
contracted forms ; the uncontracted tcepara occurs only in 5, 71. Kepwy is uni- 
formly employed in the phrase iirl Kepcas, in column. When the a, contracted 
from aa, is used by the poets as short, it must be considered a case of elision, 
not of contraction ; the same is true also of Neuters in -as, -00s, -os, -eos, e. g. 
<r«e7rd (fr. o-Kciras) instead of <TKe7rd, /cAe<? (fr. kXzos) instead of /cAe'a. 



$ 55.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



75 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 



rb repas, wonder. 
r4par-os 
repar-i 



rb Kepas, horn. rb Kp4as, flesh 



K^par-os and Kepws 
Kepar-i and fc4pa 



(Kp4a-os) Kpioos 
(icpea-i) Kpeq, 



Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 



repar-a and repa 
repdr-wi/ and repwv 
Tepa-<rt(v) 



Kepar-a and Kepd 
Kepdr-wu and Kepwv 
K.4pa-<ri(v) 



(Kp4a-a) Kp4a 
(Kped-uv) Kpewv 
Kp4a-(Ti(v) 



Dual. 



repdr-oiv 



n4par-e and /cepd (wpea-e) Kped 

Kepdr-oLV and K€p$v (Kped-oi^Kpeyif. 



Rem. 5. To class (d) belong also the contracts in -Sets, Gen. -6evros = ovy, 
ovutos, e. g. 6 ttAchcoOs, cake, Gen. irAa/cowrcs ; also in -fcjs, Gen. -fevros = -jjs, 
-rjvTos, e. g. Ti/xrjsi honorable, ri{xrjVTOs. 

Rem. 6. For the irregular lengthening of the vowel in nrets, els, fi4\ds, and 
rd\as, see § 20, Rem. 2. 



$ 55. II. The Worn, rejects 9, 5w£ lengthens the short 
final vowel of the stem e or o into -q or <o ($ 16, 3). 

1. The stem ends in -v, -vr, and -p. For the omission of v, 
and vr, before 0-1, see h 20, 2, and for the omission of r, in the 
Nom. of stems ending in vr, e. g. AeW, see $ 25, 5. 

2. The following substantives in -rjp: 6 iraTrjp, father ; fj p.rj- 
rrjp, mother ; -r) SvyaTrjp, daughter ; rj yao-r^p, belly ; y\ Arjfirjrrjp, 
Demeter (Ceres), and 6 dv^p, man, differ from those in the above 
paradigms only in rejecting c in the Gen. and Dat. Sing, and 
Dat. PI. (§ 16, 8), and in inserting an a in the Dat. PI. before 
the ending <n, to soften the pronunciation. 

The word awftp (stem av4p), rejects e in all Cases and Numbers, except the 
Voc. Sing., but inserts a 5 (§ 24, 2), thus: Gen. avhp6s, Dat. avdpt, Ace. &v8pa, 
Voc. &vep, PI. &vSpes, avSpwu, au8pa<ri{js), &i/Spas t etc. 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


6, Shepherd 

•KQipA\V 

iroi[x4v-os 

TTOl/J.4v-l 

iroiix4v-a 


. <5, Lion. 
X4wv 

\4oVT-OS 
\4oVT-t 

\4ovT-a 
\4ov 


5, Orator. 

f>4\TUp 
pJlTOp-OS 

pyTOp-i 
p^)Top-a 
prjrop 


6, Father. 

irar-fip 

irarp-Ss 

irarp-i 

iraT4p-a 

irdrep 


7), Daughter. 

frvydrrip 

Svyarpos 

fruyarpi 

&vya.T4pa 

dvyarep 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


iroi/i4u-es 

TTOlfM£U-0)V 

7coifj.4-<n{v) 

iroi/x4v-as 

iroi/j.4u-€S 


\4oVT-GS 

\e6vT-(av 

K4oV(Tl{v) 

\4ovt-ols 
\4ovr-es 


p7jT0p-€S 

pr)T6p-a>v 
pj)Top-cn(v) 
pr)Top-as 
p-f)70p-es 


7raTep-es 

irar4p-uv 

irarp-a-(Ti{v) 

ivaT4p-as 

irarep-es 


drvyar4pes 

^vyar4po}V 

^vyarpacri(v) 

Stvyar4pas 

&vyar4pes 


Dual. 


TTOllx4v-€ 

Troifx.4v-oiv 


\4ovr-e 

\*6vT-OlV 


p^Top-e 
pT\r6p-oiv 


Trar4p-€ 
irarep-oiv 


&vya.T4pe 
frvyarepou/. 



76 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[§56. 



Remake: 1. The substantive tj x*' l P* hand, belongs to nouns of class No. 2, 
and differs from them only in not lengthening the e of the stem (x*p) into if, 
but into ei, e. g. x € ' L P instead of x*P s '■> ^ i s irregular in retaining the « in 
inflection, thus : x*' l P-> X eL P^ s -> etc -> except in the Dat. PL and the Gen. and Dat. 
Dual xepviiv)) X e P ?"' Yet in poetry, the short as well as the long form is used 
in all the Cases, as the necessities of the verse require, e. g. x ei P^ s an( i X e P^> s i 
X^poly and x^ L P°^ v i X*P°~' L an< ^ X*' l P €(Tl ' 

Rem. 2. The following nouns in -wv, Gen. -ovos, reject the v in particular 
Cases, and suffer contraction : rj cIkSv, image, eluSvos, eiKovi, eiKova, ewSvas, etc., 
together with the Ionic and poetic forms : Gen. sikovs, Ace. et/ccS, Ace. PI. sIkovs 
(the irregular accent is to be noted in elKii and cIkovs) ; y awSc&v, nightingale, 
Gen. arfi6vos arid a-qSovs, Dat. anSol; tj xeAtSw;/, swallow, Gen. x*^6vos, Dat. 
XeAiSo?. 

Rem. 3. To class No. 2, belongs the obsolete Nom. a, 7] APH'N, lamb; the 
Nom. of this is supplied by 6 rj a/xv6s, Gen. apv6s, Dat. apvl, Ace. fywa, PI. 
Nom. &pves, Gen. apvwv, Dat. apvaa't(j'), Ace. &/?j/as; farther, the word 6 aarrip, 
-epos, star, though not syncopated like irarrfp, etc. belongs to this class on account 
of the assumed a in the Dat. PI. ao~Tpa<ri{v). In substantives belonging to 
class No. 2, the accent of the Gen. and Dat. Sing, (and in the word av-fjp, also 
that of the Gen. PI. and Gen. and Dat. Dual) is removed by syncope to the last 
syllable, and that of the Dat. PI. to the penult, e. g. TrarpSs, iran-pi, avdpuv, 
iraTpaart(v). ' The word Awfr-np has a varying accent, viz. A-hfi-nrpos, A-fifMi]- 
rpi, Voc. Ar}fj.r)Tep (but Ace. ArjurjTepa). So also bvyarep Voc. of frvydrvp. 
On the Voc. of irar-fip and avf]p, see § 53, 4 (1) (a). In poetry, according to the 
necessities of the verse, are found frvyarpes, frvyarpuv, A-fj^Tpa, and also, on 
the contrary, iraTepos, frvyarepos, [xr]Tepi. 



$ 56. III. The Stem of the Nom. is pure. 
The s is omitted without changing the final vowel of the 
stem. The stem ends in v, vt s p, and (only in Sa/^ap, wife) in 
pr. The Case-endings are appended to the Nom. without 
change. On the omission of t in stems ending in vr and pT, see 
$ 25, 5 ; and on the omission of v, vr, before m, see § 20, 2. 





6, Paean. 


o, Age. 


6, Xenophon. 


6, Wild beast 


to, Nectar. 


Sing. N. 


iraiav 


aldiv 


aevocpuv 


iHp 


veKTap 


G. 


iratav-os 


aiwv-os 


aevo<pwvT-os 


&7]p-OS 


veKTap-os 


D. 


iraiav-i 


aiuv-i 


"Eevo<pS)VT-i 


Srnp-i 


veKTap-i 


A. 


■naiav-a 


aiwv-a 


s.evo<pcovT-a 


&rjp-a 


veKTap 


V. 


iraiav 


aicav 


"Eevotywv 


Mip 


veKTap 


Plur. N. 


iraiav-es 


alwv-es 


"EevocpccvT-es 


&rjp-es 


veKTap a 


G. 


iraiav-wv 


ald)f-o>v 


aevo<ptoVT-tov 


&7)p-CCV 


veKTap-wv 


D. 


Traia-cri(v) 


alu-ai(v) 


2,€VO(pU)-Cri(j/) 


Sr)p-o-i{v) 


veKTapo~i{v) 


A. 


iraiav-as 


aiwv-as 


HZevocpwvT-as 


&rjp-as 


veKTap -a 


V. 


iraiav-es 


aiooves 


"Eevo<pu>vT-es 


&rjp-es 


veKTap-a 


Dual. 


iraiav-e 


alwv-e 


"EevocpSivT-e 


Srjp-e 


veKrap-e 




TTO.IO.V-OIV 


al&v-oiv 


nevocpcavT-oiv 


&7ip-div 


veKTap-oiv. 



57.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



77 



Remark 1. The three words in -wv, Gen. -ovos: 'Air6\\wv, Tloaretdwv, t) 
&\o)v, threshing-floor, drop v in the Ace. Sing., and suffer contraction; thus, 
(' ' Air6x\wva, 'AirSAAooa) 'Att6\\w, Tlocrcidw, a\w (on ahw, comp. § 48, Rem. 1, on 
KVK€<o, § 213, 11). Also the Ace. yXr)xo, from r) yX-r\x o>v or &Xt)x<0v, penny- 
royal, Gen. -oouos, is found in Aristophanes. 

Rem. 2. All the Neuters belonging to this class end in -p (ap, op, up, vp), 
e. g. to veKTap, IJTop, ireAoup, irvp (Gen. irvp6s). The word to tap, spring, may 
also be contracted, e. g. r)p, Gen. r)pos. 

B. "Words which have a vowel before the ending -os in the Gen. 



$ 57. I. Words 



in -evs. 



avs. 



1. The stem of substantives in -evs, -aus, -o£s, ends in v (from 
the Digamma F) ; s is the gender-sign. On the omission of v 
between vowels, see $ 25, 2. 

2. Substantives in -evs have -ea in the Ace. Sing., and -eas in 
the Ace. PL, from iFa, eFas; the omission of the F lengthens 
the a and as. These nouns have the Attic form in the Gen. 
Sing., viz. -ecos instead of -cos, and in the Dat. Sing, and Nom. 
PL admit contraction, which is not usual in the Ace. PL When 
a vowel precedes the ending -evs, as, e. g. \°^> Ev/3oevs, the end- 
ings -ecos, -eW, -ea, -ids are also contracted into -cos, -tov, -5, -as. 
Nouns in -avs and -ovs are contracted only in the Ace. PL, which 
is then like the Nom. PL, as in all contracts of Dec. III. 





6, King. 


6, A measure. 


6, i), Ox. 


r), Old woman. 


Sing. N. 


fiacriAevs 


Xoevs l 


fiovs, bos for bovs 


ypavs 


G. 


f3curi\4-as 


Xo(ew)ws 


fio-6s, bov-is 


ypa-os 


D. 


/SaaiAe? 


X 0€t 


j8o-i, bov-i 


ypa-t 


A. 


fiao-L\4-a 


Xo(ed)« 


fiovv 


ypavv 


V. 


fiatfiXev 


X oev 


frov 


ypav 


Plur. N. 


f3acri\e?s 


XO& 


&6-cs 


ypa-es 


G. 


fiaaiXi-wv 


Xo{4(>})S>v 


Po-5>v, bo-um 


ypa-cav 


D. 


fia<ri\€vo-L(v) 


Xosvcn{v) 


fiovo'i(v) 


ypavai(v) 


A. 


jSociAe-ds (and 


e?s) xo(ea)as 


&OVS 


ypavs 


V. 


Pao-iAe?s 


Xoeis 


fio-es 


ypa-es 


Dual. 


/3ao-tAe-e 


X oe ' e 


&6-e 


ypa-e 


fiao-iAe-oiv 


Xoeoiu 


Po-OlV 


ypa-otv. 



Remark 1. Among the Attic poets, the Gen. Sing, of nouns in -evs some- 
times ends in -e'os instead of -4ws ; thus ©rjceos, apurrios, and the Ace. Sing., 
not only in the Attic, but in all the poets, sometimes ends in -rj, instead of -ed, 
e. g. Uprj, t,vyypa<pr). The Nom. and Voc. PL in the older Attic writers, 

1 Commonly written x° os > contract x°^« 

7* 



78 THIRD DECLENSION. [§$ 58, 59. 

especially in Thucydides, end also in -rjs (formed from the Ionic -7?es), e. g. 
fiaaiArjs, 'nnrrjs, UXaTairjs instead of TlAaraiels. The uncontracted Nom. ©Tjcre'es 
occurs in PI. Theaet. 169, 6. The Ace. ending -ets instead of -eds is very 
common in Xen., e. g. robs tinrcls, C. 3. 5, 19. robs yoveTs, 2. 2, 14. ypa<pe7s, 
o-Kvrels, x^AKelsy 3. 7, 6. robs Pao-LXth, 3. 9, 10. and elsewhere, but more seldom 
among the other Attic prose writers. The Ace. vlsis is regular in all the Attic 
writers. 

Rem. 2. The following are declined like x°^ s '• rietpeueus, Gen. rietpatoSs, 
Ace. Tleipaia, 6 ayvisvs, altar before the door, Gen. ayvi&s, Ace. ayvia, Ace. PI. 
ayvias, and several proper names, e. g. 'Eperpiws, 'Sreipiws, MtjAiS, EujSows, 
EujSoS, EuySoas, TlAaraias, Aupias ; yet the uncontracted forms are often found 
in proper names, e. g. ©eoTrteW, 0eo"7rieas, Sretpte'o, TiXaraUwv, "EperpUuv, 
Awpiewu, IletpateW (in Thu., X., PL, Dem.). The uncontracted forms are 
regular in aAtevs, fisherman, aAtews, aAtea, a\Uas % 

Rem. 3. The Nom. PI. of &ovs and ypavs are always uncontracted in good 
Attic writers : BtJes, ypaes ; on the contrary, in the Ace. only the contract forms 
ypavs and vavs occur ; the Ace. PI. fiovs is the common form ; fiSas occurs only 
very seldom. 

Rem. 4. Only 6 x°^» a measure, a mound, and rj povs, vinegar-tree, are de- 
clined like fiovs; hut in the PI. both without contraction 5 only 7) vavs (udFs, 
navis), is declined like ypavs] still, this noun is quite irregular; see § 68. 

§ 58. II. Words in -ys, -es (Gen. -eos); -ws (Gen. 
-wos), -ws and -o> (Gen. -oo%\\ -as (Gen. -aos), -os 
(Gen. -cos). 

The stem of words of this class ends in s. On the omission 
of <r, see $ 25, 1. In the Dat. PL, a o- is omitted. 

§ 59. (1) Words in -rj<s and -es. 

1. The endings -77s and -es belong only to adjectives (the 
ending ~rj<s is Masc. and Fern., the ending -es neuter), and to 
proper names, terminating like adjectives, in -</>av^s, -/xeVr/s, 
-yeV^s, -KpdTrjSi -fJLrjSrjs, -7rei#?7S, -cr^eV^s, -tcA^s, -/07877s, -aV-^s, -€0/075, 
-/^ap^s, -ap^s (-^p^s), -apK^s, -vcik^s, -Aa/x,7r^s, -craKYjs, -tv^s, and 
(kAe^s) kXtjs. The neuter exhibits the pure stem ($ 52, 3) ; but 
in the Masc. and Fern., e, the short final vowel of the stem, is 
lengthened into rj [$ 52, 2 (b)]. 

2. The words of this class, after dropping o-, suffer contraction 
in all the Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. Sing, and Dat. PL ; 
and nouns in -kXc^s, which are already contracted in the Nom. 
Sing, (into kA^s), suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Sing. 



§ 59.] THIRD DECLENSION. 79 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



Singular. Plural. 

aacpris, clear. <ra<p4s (aa(p4-es) carets (cra<p4-a) cra<pT} 

(<ra<p4-os) l <ra<povs (ffacpe-wv) aacp&v 

(oracpe-'i) ffacpei aa(p4-ai{v) 

(<ra<p4-a) o-a<pr) cra<p4s (aa<p4-as) <ra<pe?s {<ra<p4-a) <ra<prj 

aa<p4s <ra<p4s (<racp4-es) <ra<pe?s \aa<p4-a) tra<f>rj 

Dual N. A. V. 1 <ra<p4-e ■ (Tacprj 

G. and D. \ o~a<p4-oiv. o~a<po?v. 

Singular. Plural. Dual. 

7] Tpi7]p7)s., trireme. (TpiJipe-es) rpt^peis rprfpe-e 

(rpnipe-os) TpL-fipovs (rpLr)p4-cav) rpiripwv Tpir)p4-oiv rpffjpoiv 

(rpi-fipe-'i) rprfjpeL rpiT]pe-(Ti{v) 

(rpiripe-a) rpt-fiprj {rptiipe-as) Tpirjpeis 

rpirjpes (rpiripe-es) rpirjpeis 

Singular. 
2aj/cpaT7jy (Ilepi/cAe^s) TIepiK\T)S 

'ZwKp&Tovs (n.€piK\4e-os) TlepiK\4ovs 

XcoKparei (UepiKKee-'i) (TLepiK\4ei) UepiKXe? 

'ZcaKpa.TT} (ilept/cAee-a) Ilept/cAed (Poet, also TlepiK\rj) 



Sw/cpares (UepLKAees) riepi/cAets. 



Remark 1. On the contraction in the Dual of ee into v\ (not into et), and in 
the Ace. PL of -eas into -eis, see § 9, II. When a vowel precedes the endings 
-7js, -es, then -ea in proper names in -KArjs is always contracted into -a, and 
commonly also in adjectives (§ 9, II.), e.g. IlepiK\4e-a = TleptK\4a; darAdjy, 
without fame, d/cAeea = d/cAea, vyi-hs, healthy, vyi4a = vyia, eVSe^s, poor, ivd4ea = 
eVSea, vTrep<pvfjs, supernatural, {nrep(pv4a = inrepcpva ( Ace. Sing. Masc, and Nom., 
Acc, and Voc. PI. neuter) ; but sometimes the contraction into -r\ occurs, e. g. 
vyiTj, Stcpvyj, a<pvrj, avrocpvrj, X. R. Equ. 7, 11 (in all the MSS.). The Acc. PI. 
Masc. and Pern, has -e?s, e. g. vyie?s, avro(pue?s. 

Rem. 2. Proper names in -updrns, -a&4vris, -y4vr\s, -cpdv-qs, etc., also "Aprjs 
(Voc. "Apes), form the Acc. Sing, both according to the first and third Dec, 
and are hence called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declensions), e. g. Sw/fpdV^ 
and ^coKpdrr]]/, according to Dec. I., 'AXica/ievr) and -fievrjv, 'AvTiar&4i>7) and 
-(r&4vr)v, "Apr) and -i\v, etc. ; Plato commonly uses the form in -7), Xenophon that 
in -i]v, other writers both, without distinction ; in words in -vr]s, the form in -vt\v 
is preferred to that in -vt\. (The Gen. of "Apt\s in good prose is 'Apeou [often in 
Plato], yet in the poets "Apeos is also used according to the necessities of the 
verse.) But in words in -k\tjs, the Acc. in -kXtjv is first used in later writers. 
The PI. is declined according to Dec. I., e. g. ' Apio-ro<pdvcu, ro?s AeaKpdrais, robs 
l ApiffTO(pd.vas, robs Ar\[j.oo-&4vas ; still, 'Hpa/cAe'es occurs in PI. Theaet. 169, 6. 

Rem. 3. The Gen. PL of rpi-f]prjs occurs, also, in the uncontracted form, viz. 
Tpit)p4w, but in all the other Cases it is uniformly contracted; the Dual 
also in words of this class occurs in an uncontracted form in Attic writers, 
e. g. |i»77eW, and the Tragedians use the uncontracted forms of proper names 

1 ca<p4-os from aa^tr-os, the a of the stem being dropped ; and so in the 
other Cases, except the Norn, and Voc. 



80 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



60, 61. 



in -k\ct)s = K\rjs, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. 'HpaK\4r)s, Dat. 
-K\4et, Voc. -KXees. The contract Ace. in -k\t) is rare. The Voc. & "Hpa/cAes, 
as an exclamation, belongs to the later prose. 

Eem. 4. The irregular accent of the Gen. PI. and Dual is to be noted, yiz. 
rpir)pcov (instead of Tpir)pa>i> from rpirjpeccv), rpir)poLv (X. H. 1. 5, 19. 5. 4, 56). In 
addition to this word, adjectives in -rifrrjs and the word avrdpKrjs, have the like 
accent, e. g. o~vvr}fr4cov = ctvptj^ccv, avrapKecav =?= ahrapttcov. 



$ 60. (2) Words in -co?, Gen. -coos, and in -cos and -co, 
Gen. -00s. 
(a) -ccs, Gen. -aos. k 
Thus, e. g. 6 rj #co9, jackal, Gen. #coos, etc. Polysyllables have 
the Ace. Sing, and PL either contracted or uncontracted, e. g. 
6 7//o(os, hero, tov ^ocoa and rjpw, tous T/otoas and 17/ocos. 

(b) -cos and -co, Gen. -00s. 
Substantives of these endings are always feminine. The 
stem ends in -os. The short final vowel, according to § 52, 2 
(b),is lengthened into co. The ending -cog, however, is retained 
in the Attic and Common language only in the substantive 
atScos (stem tuSos), and in poetry in 17005, morning (in Eurip.) ; 
but in all other words, it has been changed into a smoother 
form, so that the Nom. ends in -co, e. g. ^co (stem rjx o<5 )- ® n 
the Voc. in 01, see § 53, 4 (3). The Dual and PI. are formed 
like the ending -os of Dec. II. ; thus, atSot, vrxp^ etc - 



Sing. N. 


rj alDds (stem aldos). shame. 


7] vx^ (stem ^x os )j echo. 


G. 


(aido-os) alb*ovs 


(vx^-os) vxovs 


D. 


(cuSo-i") aido? 


(r/Xo-'O VX ' 


A. 


(c»8o-a) aldco 


(vxo-a) i\xS> 


V. 


(ai5o-i) al8o?. 


(yxJ-'i) 7?X°^ 



$ 61. (3) Words in -as, Gen. -aos, and in -os, Gen. -eos. 
(a) -os, Gen. -aos. 
Only the Neuters to o-e'Aa?, £2g7&£, and to SeVas, goblet, belong to 
this class : Gen. o-eAa-os, Dat. creka-'i, and creA-a ; PL creAa-a and 
creA-d, Gen. aeXd-oiv, Dat. aeka-at(v) ; Dual creAa-e, creAa-ot^. 

Eemark 1. On the poetic shortening of the contract a, see § 54, Rem. 4. 
In the following four Neuters in -as, the a in the Gen., Dat., and in the PL, is 
changed, according to Ionic usage, into the weaker e, viz. 



62.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



81 



fiperas (poet.), image, Gen. /3peVeos, PI. Pperea and Ppfrrj, fiperewv 
Kwas (poet.), place, PI. in Homer, tcccea, Kweo't(v). 
ovSas (poet.), ground, Gen. ovdeos, Dat. ovSe'i and ovSei (Horn.) 
nv4<pas (poet, and prose), darkness, Gen. nv4cpaos Epic, tcv4<povs Attic, Kv4<pa'i 
Epic, Kye^os Attic. 

(b) -os, Gen. -cos. 
All substantives of this class are also neuter. In the Nom., 
e, the stem-vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o ($ 16, 1). 



Sg.N.A. 
G. 
D. 


to yeVos (instead of yeves), genus. 
(yeve-os) y4vovs 
(y4ve-'i) ' yeVet 


to /cAe'os (instead of /cAe'es), glory. 
(/cAe'e-os) k\4ovs 
(/cAe'e-i - ) /cAe'et 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 


(yeVe-a) 7eVi? 
yev4-wv and yevuv 
y4ve-o~i(v) 


(wAee-a) /cAe'd 
(/cAe-cov) K\euv 
K\4e-o-i(v) 


Dual. 


(y4ve-e) y4vn 
(yev4-oiv) yevoiv 


(/cAee-e) /cActi 
(KAee-oij') /cAeoii'. 



Rem. 2. On the contraction of ee into 77 (instead of ei), and of ea into a 
(instead of 77), when a vowel precedes, see § 9, II. On the poetic shortening 
of the contracted d in /cAe'a, see § 54, Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The uncontracted form of the Gen. PI. is not unusual, e. g. ooeW, 
/3eAeW, KeoSeW, and almost without exception cwfreW; in PI. Polit. 260, a., the 
uncontracted Dual in ee occurs : toutw t<*> 7eVee. In the lyric portions of the 
Attic tragedians, irdfrea, a%ea, etc. occur. 



III. Words in -is, -us, -1, -v. 

§ 62. (1) Words in -Is, --us. 

The substantives in -Is, -v<s originally ended in -XFs, -vjPs. 
See § 25, 2. 



Sing. N. 


6 k7s, corn-worm. 


7} (TVS, SOW. 


6 Ix&vs, fish. 


G. 


k"i-6s 


o~v-6s 


Ix&v-os 


D. 


kX-1 


av-i 


iX&v-'i 


A. 


KlV 


avv 


ix^w 


V. 


KL 


(TV 


i X M 


Plur. N. 


KISS 


av-es 


Ix&v-es 


G. 


Ki-cav 


o~v-wv 


lX^v-av 


D. 


KL-o-i(v) 


<rv-o~l(v) 


Ix^v-cri(v) 


A. 


nt-as 


av-as, Attic cvs 


Ix&v-as, Attic tx&vs 


V. 


J. 

Ki-es 


av-es 


Ix&v-es 


Dual. 


KX-G 


o~v-e 


(lx^v-e) l X dd 




Kl-OlV 


o~ii-o?v 


Ix&v-oiv. 



Remark. The contracted Nom. PI. at apKvs occurs in X. Ven. 2, 9 ; 6, 2 j 
10. 2, 19. 



82 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[$63. 



§ 63. (2) Words in -Is, -£, -vs, -v. 

The stem of these substantives ends in T or v. The stem- 
vowels t and v remain only in the Ace. and Voc. Sing. ; in the 
other Cases they are changed into c ($ 16, 2). In the Gen. 
Sing, and PL, masculine and feminine substantives take the 
Attic form in -cos and -wv, in which the w has no influence on 
the accent (comp. $ 29, Rem. 7). In the Dat. Sing, and in the 
Nom. and Ace. PL, contraction occurs. 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


7) ir6\h, city. 
7r6\e-u>s 

v6MP 

irShi 


6 Trr)xvs, cubit. 

TTJ)X*-<»>S 

irr)xw 
irrjxv 


rb <rivam, mustard. 
anrdirs-os 
aivdirei 
civairt 
(xivairi 


rb &<Ttv, city. 

&<TT€-OS 

dffrei 
d(TTv 

d(TTV 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


iroKeis 

ir6\€-wu 

ir6\e-(Ti(v) 

n6\eis 

ir6\eis 


irr\xsis 

Trr)x*-tov 

7T7jxe-cn(z') 

Tri)x*is 

irr)x*is 


trivdirrj 

Givair4-0)v 

<rivdire-Gi{v) 

aiudinj 

oivdirt] 


dart} * 

h(Tr4-(av 

d(Tre-cri(v) 

d<TTTJ 
dcTTT} 


Dual. 


ir6\e-e 
iro\4-oiv 


trt)x^ m oiv 


cnvdire-e 
(Tiuan4-oiv 


dare-e 

aGTS-OlV. 



Remark 1. Here belong all substantives in -|is, -\pis, most in -<m and many 
others, e.g. 7) k6vis, dust; 6 jxdvr is, prophet ; r) ocpis, serpent; 7) Triaris, faith ; r) 
vfipis, abuse; 6 tt4\ckvs, axe; 6 irp4c^vs, old man; rb ireirepi, pepper; rb riyyd- 
fiapi, cinnabar ; rb ttuv (poet.), herd (without contraction). Adjectives in -vs, 
•e7a, -v are declined in the Masc. and Neut. like ttTjxvs and darv, except that the 
Gen. Masc. takes the regular forms -4os, -eW (not -ecos, -eau), e. g. tjovs, r)S4os. 

Rem. 2. In the Attic poets, though probably only in the lyric passages, the 
Gen. in -eos, from substantives in -is, occurs, e. g. ir6\cos. 

Rem. 3. In X. An. 4. 7, 16, the contracted Gen. irnx&v is found. Instead 
of the Dual form in -ee, one in -77 is also used; likewise a form in -et (instead 
of -ee ), is quoted by the ancient grammarians from Aeschines. ' — The Ace. PL 
of nouns in -vs sometimes occurs uncontracted in the Attic poets, e. g. irr)x*ns. 

Rem. 4. Neuters in -1 and -v have the Attic Gen. Sing, very seldom, e. g. 
dtrreoos, Eur. Bacch. 838 (831). Or. 761 (751). 

Rem. 5. Adjectives in -<s, -», e. g. lopts, "(opt, skilful, and some substantives 
in -Xs, which are partly poetic, have the regular inflection : i-os, 1-1, t-es, etc., 
or both forms together, e. g. r) firjvis, anger (also fxi)vihos, etc.), 6 7) ols, sheep; rb 
ireVept (Gen. -ipios and -eos), pepper; 6 r) irSpris, calf; 6 77 tr6<ris, spouse (Gen. 
irScrios, but Dat. always 71-oVei) ; 7) rpoiris, keel (also rpoirioos, etc.); 7) riper is, 
tower (Gen. Tvp<rios,X. An. 7. 8, 12. rvpciv, ib. 13, but Plural rvpcreis, rvpaeai, 
etc.) ; 7} fxdyaois (Gen. -tos, Dat. /xayddl, X. An. 7. 3, 32) ; some proper names, 
e. g. Sve'wecns, ^lpis (Gen. -10s, etc.), X. An. 1. 2, 12; 6. 2, 1 (5. 10, 1), finally 
one noun in -vs, 7) eyx&vs, but only in the Sing. 



§§ 64, 65.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



83 



Sing. N. 


<5, 7) irSpris, calf. 


i) eyxeAus, eel. 


6, t) o7s, sheep. 


G. 


ir6pTi-os 


e7XeAu-os 


ol6s 


D. 


ir6pri-i and ir6pil 


67X6Ai/-t 


oil 


A. 


trSpriv 


%yX*Kuv 


olv 


V. 


ir6pTi 


e7%eAt/ 


ois 


Plur. N. 


iropri-ss and ir6prls 


€7xeAets 


ohs 


G. 


TTOpTL-WV 


€7xeAe-oji/ 


0103V 


D. 


ir6pTi-<ri(v) 


€7xeA€-(n(j/) 


ol(ri(v) 


A. 


iropri-as and iropTis 


e7xeAets 


oTas and oh 


V. 


irSpri-es and irSprls 


€7XeAe<y 


ohs 


Dual. 


ir6pTi-€ 


e7xeAe-e 


oh 




iropri-oiv 


iyX^^-oiv 


OIOIV 



Rem. 6. Xenophon uses the Ionic forms of oh : 6'iv, oi'es, otwv, oias, and ois. 



$ 64. Quantity of the Third Declension. 

1. The inflection-endings -a, -i, -v, and -as, are short. 

Exception : The a in the Ace. Sing, and PI. of substantives in -e6s is long, 
e. g. rbv teped, robs Upeas from 6 tepeus, priest. 

2. Words, whose Nom. ends in -a£, -t£, -w|, -aty, -t^, -u^, -is, and -vs, have the 
penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according as the 
vowel of the above endings is long or short by nature ; a, i, v, are long in all 
Genitives in -avos, -ivos, -wos, e. g. 6 &<£pd|, breastplate, -d/cos ; 6 pity, reedf, plir6s ; 
^ clktis, ray, -?vos, but ^ j3<JAd|, c/oc?, -d/cos, ^ ihiri's, hope, -t8os. See fuller 
explanations in Larger Grammar, Part I. § 291. 

$ 65. Accentuation of the Third Declension. 

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the laws 
of accentuation (§ 30) permit, e. g. to irpayixa, deed, irpdyfiaros (but TrpayfiaTuv), 
to ovofia, name, ovofxaros (but bvofxaToiv), 6 tj x e ^-'5coj/, swallow, x^AtSoVos, Eeyo- 
<pa>v, -wvtos, -covres, -civrav. Particular exceptions have been noticed in the 
Paradigms. 

2. Monosyllables are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers on the 
final syllable 5 the long syllable wv and oiv having the cireumflex ; the others, 
the acute, e. g. 6 fx.r)v, fir)v6s, fJLrjvi, fx-nvolv, firjvwv, (j.r{crt(v). 

Exceptions: 
(a) The following ten substantives are Paroxy tones in the Gen. PI. and Gen. 
and Dat. Dual : r) Ms, torch ; 6 6>c6s, slave ; 6 r) 3x6s, jackal ; rb KPA2, poet. 
(Gen. Kpar6s), head; rb ovs (Gen. wt6s), ear; 6 r) ireus, child; 6 <rr)s, moth; 6 r) 
Tpdos, Trojan, Trojan woman; 7) (pas (Gen. cpwdSs), a burning; rb <pas (Gen. 
(pwros), light ; e. g. ddSccv, SqSotv, frcW, tepdrwu, &tow, &toiv, iraiSwv, iraiSoiv, 
<reW, Tpc<W, (paSScav, (pdrccv (on the contrary, twv S/xwwv from al 8/j.uai, twv 
Tpw&v from ot Tpwcu, twv cpwTwv from 6 <pws, man; twv &wuv from 77 &wr), 
injury). 



84 THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 65. 

(b) The following contracts, according to the nature of the final syllable, are 
either Properispomena or Paroxytones, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, 
as in the other Cases, e. g. rb eap (Epic r)p), spring ; Krjp (Epic from neap), heart; 
6 Xas (from Xaas), stone; p ivpclov (from Trpriwv), hill, e. g. r)pos (rarer eapos), r)pi 
(rarer eapi), Krjpos, nr,pi, Xaos, \ai, AcW, irp&vos, irpuyi. 

Remark. The following contracts, on the other hand, follow the principal 
rule (No. 2): (neap = crTip, tallow; crrearos = crr-nros, (ppeap, well, (ppearos and 
cpprjros, PI. (ppr)TU)j/, ©pal;, ®Pj7£ 5 Qp-qiKOS = ©pctKos, and QprjKos, oTs, olos, oil, 
olcou, olai(u). 

(c) Monosyllabic participles, as well as the pronoun ris ,- quis? retain the 
accent, through all the Cases, on the stem-syllable ; but the pronoun iras and 
6 Udv is an Oxytone in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. ; in the other Cases either a 
Pai-oxytone or a Properispomenon, according to the nature of the final syllable, 
e. g. (pvs, cpvvros, wv, ouros, ovri, tivrwv, ovai(v), ovroiv, ris, rluos, rivi, etc. ; iras, 
iravrSs, iravri, irdvrcav, ivdvroiv, iTa<Ti{v), 6 Ildu, Uavos, rots Hacn(v). 

3. The following are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, like 
monosyllabic substantives : — 

(a) 7) yvvr), wife (yvvaiKos, yvvaud, yvvaiKotv, yvvauc&v, yvvai^i(v) ; but yvvat- 
Ka, yvvatttes, etc.) ; or) kvwv, dog (kvvjs, kvv'i, Kvvotv, kvvwv, Kvai(v) ; but 
Kvva, Kvves, etc.); 

(b) Syncopated substantives in -rip, on which see § 55, 2 ; 

(c) Compounds of eh, unus, in Gen. and Dat. Sing., e. g. ovdeis, ovdevos, 
ovdevi; but ovtSevcov, ovdecri(v), SO ju.rjdeis, /xr)dev6s, etc.; 

(d) The Attic poetic forms, oopos, Sopi, from Sopv. 

4. Eor the accentuation of substantives in -is, -vs, Gen. -eas, see § 63 ; of 
those in -6 (§ 60), the irregular accentuation of the Ace. Sing, of vxoa = f)x^ 
(instead of r)x&)-, should be noted. 

5. (a) In the Voc. of syncopated substantives (§ 55, 2) in -rip, the accent, 
contrary to the principal rule, is drawn hack as far as possible, e. g. 5 rrdrep, 
frvyarep, Ar)fxr)rep, avep; so also (a) in the folloAving substantives; 'AiroKAwv 
(ccuos), UoaeiBcoi/ (covos), car-rip (rjpos), 'Aficpiav (iouos), Sai'ip (epos); thus, a 
"AttoAAov, Tloo-eioov, (rS}Tep,"Ajx(piou, oaep; — (b) in compound substantives in 
-wv, Gen. -ovos, in adjectives in -tov, Gen. -ovos, whether simple or compound ; 
also in comparatives in -twv, -wi> (in adjectives and comparatives, also, in the 
neuter gender), e. g. ^Aydjxefxvou from 'Aya/xefxycou, ""Apiaroyeirov from 'Apicrro- 
yeircov (but 'lacrov, TiaXatjxov, $iXr)ixov, etc. as simple) ; 5 and rb etidai/xov, cl> and 
rb eXe-nixou, d> and rb KaXXiov ; (the following are exceptions : & AaKedat/uov from 
AaKedai/xcou, compounds in -eppoov, e. g. S> AvKo<ppov from Avic6cppo>>j/, Ev&6(ppov from 
Ev&vcppoov, S> and rb 5a'i<ppov from od'i(ppuv ;) — (c) in the compound Paroxytones in 
-7?s, mentioned in § 59, e. g. ~2,u>Kpares, ArnxooSeves ; S> and rb ati&aoes from avbd- 
8-ns, (ptXaXri&es from <piXaXr)Sr)s (but aXr)Ses from aXy&r)s as a simple), air apices, 
KaK6rj^es. — (Adjectives and substantives in -toris, -coorjs, -caXrjs, -coprjs, -tj/wjs, are 
exceptions, e. g. evwSrjs, evcoSss, a/j.(p<t>ris a/j.(pures, iravwXris iravuXes, veu>pr)s veS>pes, 
^Kpr)prjs £i<pr)pes, r) rpir)pr)s rpirjpes, Aicoprjs d> Aiwpes. 

(b) The Voc. of nouns in -avs, -evs, -ovs, -w, and -cos is Perispomenon, e. g. 
ypav, fiacriAev, fiov, ~%aircpol, allot. 



$ 66.] THIRD DECLENSION. 85 



§ 66. Gender of the Third Declension. 

The natural gender — the masculine and feminine — is distinguished in the 
third Declension, not by a special form, but partly by the signification, partly 
by the forms, and in part by usage alone. The following rules will aid in 
determining the gender : — 

I. Masculines: (A) all nouns whose Nom. and stem (which can be recognized 
by the Genitive) end in -av, Gen. -dv-os ; -av, Gen. -ovr-os and -uvr-os ; -vv, 
Gen. -vv-os (only 6 iiocavv, tower) ; -eis, Gen. -ev-os (only 6 Krels, comb) ; -as, 
Gen. -avr-os; -ovs, Gen. -ovr-os, -ovvr-os, -o8-os (o ttovs) ; -up, Gen. -op-os; -evs, 
Gen. -ea>s ; -?js, Gen. (-e-os) -ovs ; -us, Gen. -eo-os ; 

(B) the following with exceptions : — 

(a) in -riv, Gen. -7jvos ; but 6 i] xw, goose; — in -nv, Gen. -ev-os ; but 6 i) aS-nv, 
gland, and i) <ppi)v, diaphragm ; 

(b) in -wv, Gen. -uv-os; but i) aXoov, threshing-floor; i) fi\r)x<w or yX^x^v, 
penny-royal ; t) fjieXedoov (poet.), care; i) /j.t)kwv, poppy ; i) rrXarayoiv, rattle 
(but 6 irX. petal of the poppy) ; i) rp-fjpcov, pigeon; i) ai/Xdov (poet., but prose 
6), ravine; r) 6 KdoScav bell; 

(c) in T)p, Gen. -r]p-os ; but t) icf)p,fate (on account of r) K-fip, goddess of fate) ; 
6 r) pai<TTT)p, hammer ; (those in -t\p contracted from -eap, are neuter: rb 
Krjp (poet.), Gen. KTJpos, heart; rb tap, Gen. r)pos, spring;) — in -yjp, Gen. 
•pos ; but i) yaar-hp, yacrrpos, belly ; — in -np, Gen. -ep-os ; but 6 r) alfrnp, 
ether; 6 r) ai\p, air; 

(d) in -eip, Gen. -eip-os; but i) x«V» hand (regularly, 6 avrix^ip, the thumb) ; 

(e) in -wp, Gen. -ap-os; but rb '4Xwp (poet.), booty; rb ireXwp (poet.), monster; 

(f ) in -ovs, Gen. -o-os, see § 57, Kem. 4; 

(g) in -a>5, Gen. -ar-os; but t2> <pws, light; 
(h) in -^, Gen. -iros, -&os. 

II. Feminines : (A) aK nouns in -as, Gen. -a8-o? ; -ets, Gen. -eid-os (only 77 
KXds,Jcey); -avs, Gen. -a-os; -i^s, Gen. -iv&-os; -ws, Gen. -ui/^-os ; -tjs, Gen. 
-tjt-os; -ts, Gen. -rr-os- (only i) x°-P ls ) 5 " us > Gen. -vS-os and -u^-os; -c6 and -<los, 
Gen. -({-os ; 

(B) the following nouns with exceptions : — 

(a) in -is, Gen. -i-os *, but 6 x^ ls > P ure w ^ ne ) & <pdXnis, a part of a ship ; 6 
&pris, carpenter's tool; 6 k?s, corn-worm; 6 yXavis, a kind offish; 6 X7s 
(Epic), lion, and 6 7) oh, sheep; — in -is, Gen. -ecus, but 6 opx^s, testicle (7) 
opxi-s, a kind of olive) ; 6 ocpis, serpent; 6 (later also t)) ex's, viper; 6 (later 
7)) n6pis, bug ; 01 and at Kvpfieis, law-tables; — in -is, Gen. -t8-os; but 6 <p&6'is, 
-iBos, a kind of cake; i) 6 riypis, Gen. -10s and -iSos, tiger; — in -is, Gen. 
-ib-os, but 6 7) opvis, bird; — in -is, Gen. -7v-os\ but 6 8eX(pls, dolphin; 6 
IktIs, weasel; 6 7) &(s, heap ; o reX/xls, marsh-mud; 

(b) in -vs, Gen. -v-os; but 6 fiorpvs, cluster; 6 frpTJws, footstool; 6 lx&vs,fish\ 
6 [ivs, mouse ; 6 vitcvs, corpse ; 6 ardx^s, ear of corn ; 6 o~koXXvs, mode of 
tonsure ; 6 r?<pvs, the night-mare ; 6 Kavbvs, a Median garment ; o i) vs or o~vs, 

8 



86 THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 67. 

swine; 6 /xeXdvdpvs, tun-fish; f] (later also o) e7xeAvs, eel ; o xp& vs > a sea ~ 
fish; — in -vs, Gen. -ecos; but 6 ireheicvs, axe ; 6 irrjxvs, cubit; 
(c) in -wv, Gen. -ov-os ; but 6 &Kfj.wu, anvil; 6 irplwv, saw; 6 Kav&v, rule; & 
&l<t>v, axle ; 6 irefowp. earthen-vessel ; 6 imo-doov, flag ; 6 t) kiwv, pillar ; 6 
K\aSa>v and aKpifxwv, bough ; 6 Xaycau, gulf; 6 irKayy^v, doll ; o (jLvp/x-qSJ^y, 
ants nest ; 6 fj &Ae/cTpuwj/, cock and hen. 
Remark 1. Nouns in -£ are partly masculine, partly feminine, except those 
in -o£ (Gen. -d/cos), which are masculine ; most of those in -| are feminine; the 
larger part of those in -ij> are masculine, but many are feminine, e. g. % koAov- 
poty, -o7ros, shepherd's crook; 77 \dt\aty, tempest; t\ oty (vox), 6tt6s, voice; 77 (rarely 
6) &$, airSs, face ; 77 <p\ty, <pAe/3o's, vein ; 77 X*P yi ^ holy-water; 77 /cottjAh//, -upos, 
upper story, etc. 

HE. Neuters: (A) all in -a, Gen. -crr-os ; -77, Gen. -nr-os (only to Kdpt]) ; -i, 
Gen. -iT-os (only to fj.4\i with its compounds) ; -vp, Gen. -vp-os (only to irvp, Gen. 
irvp-6s, fire) ; -op, Gen. -aT-os or -rip. Gen. -tjt-os ; -op, Gen. -op-os ; -as, Gen. -ot-os ; 
-os, Gen. (-e-os) -ous ; -t, Gen. -eos ; -v, Gen. -u-os, and -eos, and -aT-os, § 68, 1 ; — 

(B) the following with exceptions: (a) -op, Gen. -ap-os; but 6 \j/dp, star- 
ling; (b) -os, Gen. -a-os; but 6 Aas, stone; (c) -ap, Gen. -ot-os (except o o%wp, 
iX^pi ecTTcop, 7jAeVr«p, § 68, 15). 

Rem. 2. The following single words may be noted in addition : 77 Sois, Gen. 
8clit-6s, feast ; t6 ctcus or ctolis, oTaiTd's, dough; to oSs, Gen. arr-o's, ear. 

$ 67. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declension* 

All substantives, whose inflection differs from the rules and 
analogies above given, are included under the irregular substan- 
tives of the third Dec. All the anomalous forms of the third 
Dec. may be divided into three classes : — 

(a) The first class includes those substantives whose Nom. cannot be derived, 
according to general analogy, from the Genitive-stem, e. g. 77 7W77, wife, Gen. 
ywaiK-6s. 

(b) The second class includes those substantives, which, with one Nom. 
form, have in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation ; both of these, 
however, may come, in accordance with the general rules, from one form of the 
Nom., e. g. 6 77 opvis, Gen. -I&os, bird, PL opvi&es and opueis, as if from opvis, 
Gen. -cms. These substantives are called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declen- 
sions or irregularly declined). 

(c) The third class includes substantives, which, with one Nom. form, admit, 
in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation, one of which may be 
derived from the Nom. form in use, but the other supposes a different Nom. 
form, e. g. frepdirajv, -ovtos, servant, Ace. Sepd-rovTa and poet, frepaira, as if from 
&epa\p. This formation is called Metaplasm (transformation), and the substan- 
tives included under it, Metaplasts. The Nom. form, presupposed in this case, 
is called the Theme. 



$68.] ANOMALOUS FORMS OP THIRD DEC. 87 

$ 68. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declenion^. 

1. Vow (to, knee), and 86pv (to, spear), see $ 54 (cJ.J 

In the tragic poets, the Epic forms, yoivara and yovua, yowacri, occur ; 
also in the Attic poets, the Gen. dopos, Dat. Sop I, and even S6pei, and 
PL dopy instead of Sopara, are formed from 56pv; and in the phrase, Sopl 
e\e?u, to take a prisoner of war, this Dat. form is retained even by the Attic 
prose writers. 

2. Tvvri (rj, woman), Gen. ywatK-ds (as if from ywat£), Dat 
ywatK-t, Ace yvvaiK-a, Voc. ywat; PL ywatKes, yvvaiKwv, ywat£t (v), 
ywatKas; on the accentuation, see $ 65, 3 (a). 

3. Adpv, see yow, No. 1. 

4. Zevs, "Gen. Aids, Dat. Act, Acc. Ata (as if from At?), Voc. 
Zev. 

Poet, corresponding forms are Zrjv6s, Zr)vl, Zyjva. 

5. ®€pa7r(ov (6, servant), -ovros. In Eurip. Ace. SipaTra, PL 
£epa7TC5, § 67 (c). 

6. Kapa (to, head), an Epic and poetic word, Gen. Kpar-os, 
Dat. apart and Kapa, Ace. to /cdpa, to Kpara (rbv Kpara, $ 214) ; 
Acc. PL rovs Kpa.Ta<s, § 67 (c). 

7. KA*ts (17, hey), Gen. KAaS-d?, Dat. KXet8-t, Acc. /cXetv (§ 53, 
Rem. 1), later KAaSa; PL Nom. and Acc. /cXets, and KXetSes, 
KAetSas, $ 67 (b). 

Old Attic, kA??s, K\rid6s,M\r)?>i, /cAj?5a. 

8. Kvcov (6, 17, tfao - ), Gen. kw-6s, Dat. kvw, Acc. kuW, Voc. kvov, 
PL Kwes, kwcov, KvaL, kvvols. 

9. AtV-a (to, oil, fatness), in the Epic dialect always in the 
phrases, dXeii/'acr^at XtV eXaia), ^pio-at and xpio-ao~3ai AiV eXawp, and 
so also in the Attic prose, dXet</>eo-#at, -xpUo-Sai XtVa ; XtVa is thus 
an abridged Dat. instead of XtVat, XtVa, from to XtVa, Gen. -aos, 
but eXatov must be considered as an adjective from eXda, olive, 
so that XtVa eXatov means olive-oil. 

10. MdpTvs (6, witness). Gen. fxdpTvpos, Dat. fxdprvpi, Acc. 
pApTvpa, and in Simonides [xdprvv ', Dat. PL fidprvcrt (v). 

11. NaGs (17, 5^), Gen. veto?, Dat. w$ Acc. vaw, Voc. want- 
ing ; Dual, Gen. and Dat. veotv ( Nom. and Acc. wanting) ; PL 
vyJ€<s, vecov, vavo~L (v), vavs. Comp. ypavs, § 57. 

In Attic poets and later prose also, vr)6s, 107/, vya, etc. 



88 DEFECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 69. 

12. "Op vis (6, fj, bird), Gen. 6pvZ$-os, etc. The PL has a col- 
lateral form declined like 77-0A19, except the Dat. : opvlSts and 
opvas, SpviSwv and opvewv, opvTxrt, opvZd-as, opvus, and opvZs, § 67 (b). 
So 'Ava^a-pans, 'Ava^apcrtSos, and 'Ava^apo-ecos. 

In the Attic writers, the 1 is sometimes short, opvts, opviv, Aristoph. Av. 16. 
270, 335 (but opvls, opvlv, 70, 103, 73). 

13. Tlvvt; (rj, place of meeting), Gen. ttvkv-os, Dat. ttvkvl, Acc. 
irvKva. 

14. ^rjs (6, moth), Gen. o-e-os; PL crees, Gen. o-eW, etc.; in the 
later writers, Gen. o-^ros. 

15. ]§Kwp (to, dirt), Gen. o-xaros, etc., and vSoyp (to, water), 
Gen. -uSaros, etc. To both of these belong : — 

16. Qpiap (to, a well), and o-rcap (to, talloiu), Gen. -earos and 
-v^-os (a long in Attic, short in Epic). 

17. <&$6'i.s, cpSoZs (6, ait of cooking), Gen. cp$oi-6s and (from 
<fj$ois) cpSoiS-os; PL (pS-oets and <f>S-oi$es. 

18. Xovs (6, & measure), x o °s> X ^ X°^ v > X° €<s , x°^ v > X 0V<T ^ X° as 
like /5o9s (§ 57) ; also Gen. x°^> Acc. X°<*> Acc. ^l. x°^> as if 
from x o€ vS' The latter forms are preferred by the Attic writers ; 
Xovs, with the meaning of mound, is inflected only like /?o£s. 
The form xoeu's is Ionic, Dat. ^oei". 

19. X.po)<s (6, skin), ^pcor-os, XP 0)T ^ XP^ ra " Collateral forms in 
the Ionic dialect and the Attic poets, are, Gen. XP '^ XP oC > XP° a > 
like aiSws. The Dat. xp$ is found in certain phrases with iv, 
e. g. iv xpy> Ketpeo-Sai, Xen. Hell. 1. 7, 8. £vpti iv xpa> } it shaves close 
to the skin, it comes home, Soph. Aj. 786. 

§69. Defective Nouns of the Third Declension. 

Some nouns of the third Dec. are wanting in one or more of the Cases, and 
are, consequently, called Defectives. Existing forms, however, of such substan- 
tives, ^.re found, for the most part, only in certain phrases, e. g. 

Xpews (rb, debt), Ionic-Attic form for the Norn., Gen., and Acc; also t& 
Xpeos, Gen. XP* 0VS > PI- T « XP* a > Gen. XP**» V ; the Dat. and Dual are wanting ; 
ovap and virap (only as Nom. and Acc), in dreaming and waking ; ocpeKos (only 
as Nom. and in the construction of the Acc. with the Inf.), advantage; fidx-n 
only in the phrase virb /xdA-ns, under the arm. 



§$70,71.] REDUNDANT NOUNS. HETEROCLITES. 89 

Remarks on the Declensions. 

§70. I. Redundant Nouns. 

Nouns are called Redundant, which have two modes of 
inflection in all or in most of the Cases : — 

A. They belong to the same declension, 

(a) of the same gender, e. g. 

5 \ews and \a6s, people; 6 vews and va6s, temple; 6 \ayd>s and Kay 6s, hare; 
6 Ka\a>s, rope, PL also nahoi ; 77 aKcos, threshing-floor, PL also at a\oi ; rj Topyw 
and Topydov. 

(b) of different genders (hence called heterogeneous), e. g. 

t vwtos and rb vwrov, back (the last form was regarded by the Atticists as the 
only proper form, still tqv v&tov Xen. R. Equ. 3, 3) ; 6 (vy6s and rb Ct^j yoke. 
' — In the PL the neuter form of these heterogeneous nouns is more frequently 
used, e. g. 6 clros, ra aha : oi Sea/xoi, and more commonly to, Sea/xd ; 6 araSrfxSs, 
a station, balance, oi araS}xoi and to ara&ixd, stations, and ra. ara^/xd, sometimes 
also balances; oi Cvyoi does not probably occur. 

B. To different declensions, and commonly of different gen- 
ders (heterogeneous), e. g. 

6 <p&6yyos and r\ <p&oyyrj, voice; 6 x&P 0S an( l V xfya, space; r\ fx&V an( l ^ 
fix&os, rising ground; 7) dtya and rb Styos, thirst; r\ vdirt] (the older form) and rb 
vdTros, valley, etc. It should be observed further, that the word 6 npeafivs, elder, 
has only Ace. irpeafivv, Voc. irpeafiv, these three forms are almost entirely 
poetic (irpeafivTepos and TrpeafivraTos formed from this, are in frequent use) ; 
in the Common Language, 6 -npeaflvT-ns, -ov, elder ; in the meaning of messenger, 
envoy, the Common Language uses in the Sing. 6 irpeafievT-fis, -ov ; but in the 
PL oi and tovs irpeafieis, irpeafiecov, irpeafieai ; also, rb ddicpvov and rb Sa/cpu, 
tear. The latter and older form is retained in the poetic dialect ; still, the Dat. 
PL SaKpv<n is found even in the Attic prose-writers (Thu. 7, 75; Dem. c. Onet. 
I. § 32). 

$71. II. Heteroclites. 

Heteroclites [§ 67 (b)] have two modes of formation; they 
are either of the third Dec, which have been already presented 
together 68), or of two different declensions. Those of dif- 
ferent declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 

A. Of the First and Third Declension. 

Several substantives in -rjs are inflected, either in whole or in 
part, according to the first and third declensions : — 

(a) Some in -rjs, Gen. -ov and -tjtos, through all the Cases according to both 



90 THIRD DEC. METAPLASTS. [$72. 

declensions : 6 /jlvktis, mushroom, Gen. /xvkov and (ivk^tos, and some proper 
names, e. g. Xdp-qs. The name ©aAys, in the old Attic, has the Ionic Gen. 
form 0aA.ea>, Dat. &a\fj, Ace. (daKriv; in the later writers, ©aAoD and 0oA7jtos, 
©a\?]Tt and QaX^ra. Observe that the accent is drawn back on 0aA.ea>. 

(b) The proper names mentioned, § 59, Rem. 2, hare 7j as well as i\v in the 
Ace. Sing. only. 

B. Of the Second and Third Declensions. 

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions : several 
substantives in -os, as masculine, are inflected according to the 
second Dec, but as neuter, according to the third Dec, e. g. 6 
and to o^os, chariot, rov fyov and o^ous, top o^ov and to oxos ; 6 
and to o~k6tos, darkness. 

(b) Of the contract second and third declensions : — 

itp6xoos (f], watering-pot), Att. irpSxovs, Gen. irpSxov, etc., Dat. PL irp6xovfft 
(like fiovs, fSovoiv). 

Oldiirovs, Gen. Ol8tiro5os and (poet.) Oldfaov, Dat. OlSimSi, Ace. OiS'urob'a and 
OiSiirow, Vbc. OlSlirov. 

(c) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — 

In the Ace. Sing., 6 yeXws, laughter, yeXwTos, yi\wTi, Ace. ye \a> to, and 
y4\<av, and the three following: irdTpoos, patruus, fx-hrpws, avunculus, and 
Mlvws, which, in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., are inflected according to the third 
Dec. and the Attic second Dec. ; in the other Cases, according to the third 
Dec. 

iroLTpus, Gen. irdrpco and Trdrpcoos, Dat. Trdrpwi, Ace. irdTpwv and irdrpwa; 
MtVcos, Gen. MiVa> and Miuuos, Dat. Mivwi, Ace. Mlvco (§ 48, Rem. 1), Mivwv 
and MtVwa. 

$ 72. Ill Metaplasts. 

Metaplasts [$ 67 (c)] like Heteroclites, have two modes of 
formation ; they are either of the third declension, which have 
been already presented together (68), or of two different declen- 
sions. Those of different declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions : — 

Ae'z/Spov (to, tree), Gen. SevSpov, etc.; but in the Dat. PI. among the Attic 
writers, SeVSpeen (from the stem to AENAPOS) and SevSpois', the first form is 
regarded by the Atticists as the better. To this stem belong, also, the forms 
r$ SeuSpei and ra SevSpr], which occur in the Attic poets, and in later prose 
writers. 

Ko ip a> v6s (6, partaker), Gen. koiuwvov, etc. 5 Xenophon uses the forms 01 
Koivwves and tovs aoiv&vas (from KOINflN). 



$ 73.] INDECLINABLE AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 91 

Kplvov (to, lily) Gen. Kplvov, etc., with the secondary form in the Dat. PL 
Kpiveai in Aristoph. from the PL Kpivea (in Herod.). Comp. SsySpov. 

A as (6, stone), Gen. Aaos and in Soph. O. C. 196. Xaov. 

'O oueipos [and poetic rb ovapov], dream, Gen. bvsipov and bveiparos. 

Uvp (rb,fire), irvpos. But PL, tci irvpd, watch-fires, according to the second 
Dec. 

"Ti6s (6, son), Gen. viov, etc. Together with this formation, there is another 
according to the third Dec, much in use, particularly in the Attic writers, from 
the theme 'TIET5, Gen. viios, Dat. vie? (Ace. viia is rejected) ; PL vU7s, Gen. 
vU<av, Dat. uteVt, Ace. (visas), Attic vieis (§ 57, Rem. 1); Dual, vice, Gen. 
viioiv. 

(b) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — 

The three substantives, ■}) dx.ws, threshing-floor ; 6 ra&s, peacock; and 6 rv<p<&s, 
whirlwind, have, together with the common inflection according to the Attic 
second declension, another* according to the third declension, in -wvos, etc., e. g. 
Tvtyuiva. 

Remark. The words fi a\<as and 5 ra&s are generally declined accord- 
ing to the Attic second Dec. Ace Sing. d\<av, radu ; still, the v is commonly 
rejected from aAws in the Ace, \ 48, Rem. 1. But the forms ahwvos, a\wyesy 
aXa><ri(u), rawvi, rawves, rawo'iv, etc., are used on account of their greater 
perspicuity. 

$73. Indeclinable and Defective Nouns. 

1. Substantives which do not vary the termination, but retain in all the Cases 
the form of the Nom., are called indeclinable. Except foreign proper names, as 
6 'APpadp, rod 'AfSpadix., and the indeclinable cardinal numbers, all indeclinable 
nouns are of the neuter gender. Here belong especially : — 

(a) The names of the letters, e. g. rb, rod, t£, &\<pa ; 

(b) Most of the cardinal numbers, e. g. Se/co avdpobv; 

(c) Tb, rod, Tffl, xps&v, necessity, destiny, and hiyus with 4<rrtv and elvai, and 
several foreign words, e. g. to, rod, rip ird<rx*] 

(d) The substantive infinitives, e. g. to, rod, rep ypd<peiv. 

2. Some substantives are used only in the Sing., or only in the PL Such 
words may be termed defective in number. The reason of it is found, either 
in the meaning of the word, or simply in usage, e. g. 6 alb-hp, ether ; oi irrjcriai, 
the Etesian wind; ai'A&yjvai, Athens ; ra 'OXvfnria, the Olympic games. Comp. 
further, Syntax, § 243. 

3. It has been already noted, § 69, that some substantives are found only in 
single Cases (Defectiva casu). 



92 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [$$ 74, 75. 

CHAPTER n. 

The Adjective and Participle. 

$74. Gender and Declension of the Adjective 
and Participle. 

1. The Adjective and the Participle, like the Substantive, 
have three genders, being varied by inflection to agree with 
the gender of their substantive. But all adjectives have 
not separate forms for the three genders ; many have but 
two endings, one for the Masc. and Fem., the other for the 
Neuter, e. g. 6 <ra)(f>pcov avrjp, r) aaxppcov yvvrj, to aaxfrpov 
re/cvov. Several, indeed, have but one ending, commonly 
used only for the Masc. and Fem. See § 80, e. g. 6 (jivyas 
avrjp, r) <£>v<y a ? yvvf). 

2. In Adjectives and Participles of three endings, the 
Masc. and Neuter belong to the same declension (second or 
third), and the Neuter is like the Masc. in the Gen. and 
Dat. ; the Fem. is always of the first Dec. 

Remark 1. Hence, in an Adjective in -os of three endings, the Masc. is 
declined like x6yos (§ 46), the Fem. like 8ftc7? or cuia (§ 44), and the Neut. 
like gvkoi> (46). 

Rem. 2. The declension of Adjectives and Participles differs only in a few 
points from that of the Substantive ; these will be noted hereafter. But it may- 
be remarked here, as an essential deviation, that Participles always have the 
Voc. of the third Dec. like the Nom., § 53, Rem. 5. 

$75. Accentuation of Adj ectives and Participles. 

The accentuation of Adjectives and Participles is like that 
of Substantives, with a few exceptions, which are now to be 
noted : — 

1. The Pern, is accented on the same syllable as the Masc. through all the 
Cases, where the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. k<xx6s, KaX-f], koXov ; 
tcovepos, Kovcprj, itovcpov, x a p' ieis i X a P' err(ra 5 X a p' iej/ 5 V-tXas, fJ-eXmua, /xeXav ] reprjy, 
rzpeiva, Tepev ; fiapvs, fiapua, fiapv ; fiovXtvcras, jSouAeucdcra, fiovXsvffav ' Ti&cls, 



$ 75.] ACCENTUATION OP ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 93 

Remark 1. In adjectives in -os, -77, -ov, or -os, -a, -ov, the Fern., on account 
of the length of the final syllable {77, d), must be a Paroxytone, when the Masc. 
is a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, e. g. dv&pdoirLvos, avfrpairlv-n, dv&pu>- 
ttivov] eAeud-epos, eAev&epd, iAev&epov ] KOv<pos, Kovcp-n, Kovcpov; <rirovdcuos, aitov- 
Said, <nrov8a?oj/ ] but, when the final syllable in the declension is short, it- again 
takes the accentuation of the Masc, i. e. it becomes again a Proparoxytone, or 
a Properispomenon, e. g. dv^pdirivai, iAev&epai, kovQcu, airovScucu, like avfrpcairi- 
voi, i\ev&epoi, Kovcpoi, <rirov8a?oi. Hence the difference between 'P68iai, Avmai 
(ywcuKes), as adjectives, and 'PoSiai, Avitlai, as substantives, according to 
$ 45, 6. 

2. Participles accent the same syllable in the Neuter Nom. as in the Masc., 
when the nature of the syllable permits, e. g. 

iraidevcav, iraidevov rifx-fjaav, ti/jltjctov 

<pi\wVj (piKovv Aiirtiov, A 1 ir 6 v. 

Rem. 2. Yet Adjectives sometimes deviate from this rule, see § 65, 5. 

3. Contracts in -ovs, -77, -ovv, from -eos, -ed, -eov, 60s, -6r\, or 6a, -6ov (except 
the Nom. and Ace. Dual Masc. and Neuter, which are Oxytones, \ 49, 3), are 
Perispomena through all the Cases and Numbers, though the uncontracted 
forms of those in -eos are Proparoxytones, e. g. apyvpeos == dpyvpovs, apyvpeov 
«= apyvpovv. On contracted compounds in -00s, -oov, e. g. evvovs, stivovv, see 
§ 49, 3. 

4. Barytone feminines of adjectives and participles, whose Masc. is of the 
third declension, are Perispomena [§ 45, 6 (b)] in the Gen. PI., but all the 
other Cases retain the accent of the Masc, e. g. 

fSapvs, -eta, -v Gen. PL fiapeav, fi apei&v 

Xapi^is, -tecrcra, -lev " x a P l ^ VT<av ^ X a P lea ' a '^ v 

fi4\as, fieXaiva, fx.4\av " /xeXavcov, fteAaivcov 

iras, irao~a, Trav " irdvrwv, iraacbv 

rv(p&ets, -etca, -iv " rvcp&evTcov, rvcp&e io~e*v 

rvtyas, rtydo-a, rv\pav " rvtyavrew, t v xp a o~ G> v ; but, 

av&p&TTivos, -Ivy, -ivov " a v 3- p o) tt i v a> v, as Masc, P., and N. 

iKci&epos, -epd, -epov " e A e v 3 e p w v, as Masc, P., and N. 

TvirT6ixevos, -iv-n, -evov " rvirrofievcov, as Masc, F., and N. 

Rem. 3. On the accentuation of the monosyllable iras, and of monosyllabic 
participles in the Gen. and Dat., see § 65, 2 (c). 

Rem. 4. On the accentuation of the Nominative of compound adjectives, 
the following things are to be noted : — 

(a) Those in -os, when the last part is formed of a substantive or adjective, 
follow the general rule [§ 30, 1, (c)], and are Proparoxytones, e. g. <pi\6- 
tckvos (from renvoi/), irdyKaKos (from kolkos). But if the last part is 
formed of a verb, then adjectives with a long penult, are Oxytones, e. g. 
$vxoiroiJ.ir6s, /x<=\ottol6s, 8eivunr6s, 687770s ; but those with a short penult, 
are commonly Paroxytones, if they have an active sense, but if a passive, 
Proparoxytones, e. g. 

\fto&6\os, one casting stones ; \ifr6/3o\os, cast down by stones ; 

fXT)TpoKTovos, matricide ; f*r}Tp6KTovos, slain by a mother ; 

br\porp6<pos, nourishing wild beasts ; fr^rpocpos, nourished by wild beasts. 

Words compounded with prepositions, o privative and intensive, cu and 



1 



94 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [$ 76. 

Svs, and ctet, ayav, apt, apri, epi, 7]/j.i, £a, irav, and iroXv, are always Pro- 

paroxytones, and hence exceptions to the rule respecting words with a 

short penult. 
'(b) Verbal adjectives in -r6s remain Oxytones. even in compounds, if they 

have three endings, but are Proparoxytones, if they have but two. See 

§ 78, I. (c). 
(c) All compounds in -7rA^|, -pc6|, -rpc6|, -o-<£a|, are Oxytones. 



UMMAEY OP THE ADJECTIVE AND PARTICIPLE ENDINGS. 



§ 76. I. Adjectives and Participles of three 

Endings. 



I. -o< 



-1, -ov: 



'O s. -a, -o v 



Nom. 


aya&os, 


ayafrf], 


aya&6v, good, 


Gen. 


aya&ov, 


aya&rjs, 


aya&ov 


Nom. 


oySoos, 


6y56r), 


6ySoov, eighth, 


Gen. PI. 


oydoccv, 


6yd6cav, 


6y86b>v ( § 75, 4. 


Nom. 


ypa<p6fj.evos, 


ypa<po/j.4vn, 


ypa<p6fj.evov 


Gen. PL 


ypa<po/Aevoov, 


ypcxpo/Aevow, 


ypacpofxevcov 


Nom. 


SiKatos, 


Sihrafd, 


hixaiov, just, 


Gen. 


SikclIov, 


SiKaias, 


ZlKaloV 


Gen. PI. 


dutaiwv, 


SiKaiav, 


SiKaicw 


Nom. 


exSrpos, 


iX&p&, 


ex^p6v, hostile, 


Gen. 


ex^pou, 


iX^pas t 


eX&pov 


Nom. 


a&p6os, 


adpdd. 


aSrpoov, full, 


Gen. 


a&p6ov, 


a&p6as, 


a&p6ov 


Gen. PI. 


a£rp6a)V, 


abp6wv i 


a&poav. 



Most of the adjectives belong to this class. The Fem. ends in a, when pre- 
ceded by i or p, § 43, 1. Still, adjectives in -oos have -6a in the Fem., when p 
precedes o, otherwise, -6-n, e. g. aSrp6a, yet 078077. On the accentuation of 
adjectives in -os, -77 (d), -ov, see § 75. 

Adjectives in -eos, -ea, -cov, which denote the material, e. g. XP 1 ' " 60 ** 
golden ; apyvpsos, silver ; Kepdfxeos, earthen ; and multiplicative adjectives in 
-6 o s, -6 77, -6 v, e. g. clttxSos, single ; Snr\6os, double, are contracted. On the 
accentuation of those in -eos, -ea, -eov, see § 75, 3, and on the contraction of 
those in -ea into -a, -6-n into -77, and -6a into -o, see § 9, II. 



Xpvo-eos, 


Xpwtr-ea, 


Xpvff-eov 


Xpvc-ovs, 


Xpvtr-rjy 


Xpvo--ovv 


ipe-eos, 


epe-e'd, 


ipe-eov 


ipe-ovs, 


epe-S, 


ipe-ovv 


apyvp-eos, 


apyvp-ea, 


apyvp-eov 


apyvp-ovs, 


apyvp-a, 


apyvp-ovv 


Si7rX-(Jos, 


diir\-6r}, 


8nr\-6ov 


Snr\-ovs, 


SiirX-T), 


8nr\-ovv. 



Remark 1. Contraction is seldom omitted in Attic classic prose, not unfre- 
quently in the Tragedians, e. g. xp^o-ea, Xen. Ag. 5, 5 ; yet a&p6os, -6a, -6ov* 
crowded, is rarely found contracted ; Sacpoos, -6a, -6ov, two-pronged, is com- 
monly contracted in the Masc. and Neut., SiKpovs, SiKpovv, but in the Fem. the 
uncontracted form is usual, r\ 8tKp6a; oydoos is always uncontracted. 



H. 



Nom. y\vKvs, y\vK€?a, y\vnv, sweet, 

Gen. y\vKeos, yXvKtias, y\vn4os 

Gen. PL yXvKtwv, y\vKstwv, yXvuewv (§ 75, 4.) 



§ 76.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. 95 

The declension of the Masc. is like irrjxys, though with the common genitives 
in -eos, -eW ; the declension of the Neut. is like cuttv, yet always uncontracted in 
the PI. (-4a). The only deviations from the regular accentuation are, fyuiovs 
■rj/xicreia, 71/j.ktv, half; d^Aus, &-f)Xeia, SrijXv, female ; irp4<r{Svs, old (used only in the 
Masc), and some poetic forms. ©rjXvs is sometimes used as feminine in Homer 
and in the Tragedians. 

Eem. 2. The adjective H\ fx t <r v s, in the Attic writers, has both the contracted 
and uncontracted forms in the Ace. PL, rjfj.i<reis and rj/xicreas : also the Neut. 
7)/xt(rea is found in several passages in Demosthenes in the contracted form 
rnxia-t]. Sometimes the Ionic Pern, form -4a occurs, e. g. irXarea, X. E. Equ. 1, 
14. (in all MSS.) fifxicreas, PI. Menon. 83, c. in the best MSS. 

III. -v s, -Ceo, -vv : Nom. Seinvvs, Seiavvcra, Seucvvv, showing, 

Gen. deiKvvvros, Zeinvixr-ns, Scikvvptos 

Gen. PI. SeiKuwrwu, 8eiia/v<ra>v, hciKvvvrwv (§ 75,4.) 

Nom. cpvs, <pv<ra, <pvv, produced, 

Gen. (pvvros, (pvar-ns, tyvvros [§ 65, 2 (c).] 

Gen. PI. (pVVTCW, (pVa&Vy (pVVTWV. 

So the Pres. and second Aor. Act. participles of verbs in -/a. Por the de- 
clension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d). 

IV. -e i s, -e (T a a, -e v : Nom. xapiets, xapie<r<ra, x a p' Lev i lovely, 

Gen. x a P' Let/T0S > x a P l * <Ta " r )Si x a p' L * VT °s 

Gen. PI. x a P l * VTa>I/ > x a P l ^ <T<J ^ v -> x a P i * vrCl " / ' 

Por the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54- (d), the only difference 
being that the Dat. PI. ends in -eon, not -euri, e. g. xapieai. — The Masc. and 
Neut. is in the Nom. a Paroxytone, in the Fern, a Proparoxytone ; yet the 
ancient grammarians prescribe that the Neut. of x a P >LeLS should be accented on 
the antepenult, hence x<*ptev. 

Eem. 3. Some of the adjectives in -ye is, -^ e <r <r a, -rj e v, and -oeis, -6 ev- 
er a, -6e p, admit contraction, e. g. 

Nom. ri/j.'ff-eLs, rifi-fj-eaa-a, TiLiTJ-ev, honored, 

TifMrjs, Ti/xricrcra, tl/jltju 
Gen. rifirivros, TL^aa-qs, rifxrivTos 
Nom. /xeXirS-eis, LieXiTQ-eaaa, fieXiro-ev, honeyed, 

fxeXiTovs, jxeXnovacra, fxeXirovv 
Gen. fieXirovvTos, fieXnovaa-ns, fxeXirovvTOS. 

V. -eis, -et<ra, -4 v. Nom. Xei<p&eis, Xei<p&e?(ra, Xei<p&4v, relictus, 

Gen. Xei(p&4vTos, \ei(p&ei(r7)S, Xei<p&4vros 

Gen. PL Xei<p&4vTccv, Xeup&eicrwv, Xeup&4vTwv 

Nom. T&eis, rifrelcra, ri&4v, placing, 

Gen. Tt&evTOS, Ti&ei(TT)S, t&4vtos. 

Por the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), and also in the Dat. 
PL, e. g. Tv(p&e7crL. So likewise the first and second Aor. Pass. Participle, and 
the Pres. and second Aor. Active Part, of TifrnLti and &j/w, e. g. iels, klaa, I4v, 
e'is, eTcra, eV, &els, &e?cra, 3-eV. 

VI. -d s, -a i v a, -a v : Nom. fx4Xas, fj.4Aa.iva, jx4Xau, black, 

Gen. fj.4Xa.vos, fxeXaivt)S, /j.4Xavos 

Gen. PL fxeXavow, ixeXaiv&v, fxeXavGW. 

In the same manner only raXas, rdxaiva, rdxav, unhappy, the feminine Voc. 
of which has also rdXav. Por the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 
(d), with Eem. 6. 






96 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [$ 76. 

VII. -a s, -a<r a, -civ : Nom. iras, irao~a, irav, all, every, 
Gen. iravros, -rrdo-qs, itcivtos 

Gen. PL irdvrwv, ira<ru>v, irdvTwv. 

In the same manner only the compounds of iras, e. g. anas (aVda"a, airav), 
av/xTTds, Trpoirds, etc. ; these compounds have a short a in the Neut., in dac- 
tylic and anapestic verse. See § 54 (d^for the declension of the Masc. and 
Neut., and § 65, 2 (c), for the accentuation of the simple adjective in the Gen. 
and Dat. PL and Dual. 

YIJLL. -as, -a era., -dv : Nom. Aetyds, Aeii//dcrd, Xsfyav, having left, 
Gen. Xeixpavros, Xei\pdo~r]s, Xeiipavros 

Gen. PL XenpdvTwv, Xeityaauv, XeitydvTwv. 

So the first Aor. Act. Part., and also the Pres. and second Aor. Act. Part, of 
tcTTj/if. lards, -aaa, -dv; ffrds, -acra, -dv. Por the declension, see § 54 (d). 

IX. -r]v, -etva, -sv: Nom. r4pr]V, repeiva, repev (poetic), smooth, 

Gen. repevos, repelvrjs, repevos 

Gen. PL reptveev, repeivoov, repevav. 

No other adjective is thus declined. Por the declension, see § 55, 1. 

X. -o v s, -o v <r a , -6 v : Nom. SlSovs, SiSovcra, Sloov, giving, 

Gen. 5iS6vtos, SiSovcttjs, SlSovtos 

Gen. PL SlSovtuv, Zibovcrwv, Zi86vtwv. 

Thus only the Part. Pres. and the second Aor. Act. (Sovs, Sovaa, S6v, Gen. 
Sovtos, Sovcr-ns, Gen. PL Pern. Zova&v) of verbs in -cofxi. 

XI. -d>v, -over a, -6 v: Nom. endbv, etcovcra, £k6v, willing, 

Gen. £k6vtos, eKOvcrris, skovtos 

Gen. PL £k6vto>v, eKovcrwv, kK.6vrcav. 

Thus only the compound aetccov, commonly &kwv, &K-ovcra, anov. Por the 
declension, see § 54 (d). 

XlT. -co v, -o v o~ d, -o v : Nom. Xeliruv, Xe'nrovo~a, Xziirov, leaving, 
Gen. Xeiirovros, Xenroixrrjs, Xeiirovros 

Gen. PL XenrSvrcov, Xenrovawv, Xeiir6vrcov. 

So also the Pres., Fut., and second Aor. Act. Part., the last, however, with a 
different accentuation : -tav, -ovcra, -6v, e. g. Xncwv, -ovaa, -6v. For the declen- 
sion, see §.54 (d). In the same manner, the Present participles of contract 
verbs in -da, -eo>, and -6w, e. g. 

Nom. rifxwv, -acra, -G>v Nom. cpiXwv, -ovo-a, -ovv 

Gen. ti/xcovtos, -ucrrjs, ~wvTos Gen. PL cpiXovvrwv, -ovcr&v, -ovvtwv. 

Gen. PL tijxwvtwv, -cocrav, -covtcov. Nom. /j.icr&a>v, -ovo~a, -ovv 

Gen. PL fxia^ovvrcov, -ovffcov, -ovvtwv. 

The Put. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs is declined like cpiXwv, (piXovo-a, <piXovv, 
Gen. (piXovvros, etc., e. g. <nrepa>v, -oucra, -ovv (formed from enrepiuv, etc.), from 
enreipu}, to sow. 

XIII. -u>s -via -6 s: Nom. rervepws, T€rv<pv7a, rervepos, having struck, 
Gen. Terv<poTos, Tervcpvias, rerveporos 

Gen. PL Tervcporwu, Tervcpviwv, rervcpdrcuv. 

On the form karSs, -S>ca, k<n&s and -6s, etc., see below, § 193, Rem. 2 and 3. 



$77.] 



ADJECTIVES. 



PARADIGMS. 



97 



XIV. The adjectives, fx4yas, fieydXrj, [x e y a, great, iroXvs, iroXX-fi, 
ttoXv, much, are irregular in the Nom., Ace., and V"oc. of the Masc. and Neut. 
Sing. ; the other parts are regular ; but even ttoXXou instead of tvoXvv or ttoXv, 
occurs in the Attic poets; Aesch. S. 824, uses the Voc. fieyoXe; irpaos, 
irpae7a, -Kpaov, soft, is also irregular; it has, throughout the Fern., in the 
PI. and Dual Neut., as also in the Gen. PI. Masc., and sometimes, also, in the 
other Cases of the Masc. PL, a form like irpaiis, -e?a, -v (comp. yXvKus, -e?a, -u), 
which occurs in the Dialects. See the Paradigm. 



§ 77. Paradigms. 



S.N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


aya&-6s 
aya&-ou 
aya&-i3 
&ya&-6v 
aya^-4 


ayaS-r] dya&-6v, gooc 
aya$r-rjs dya§-ov 
aya&-f) dya&-<2 
ayaS-rji/ dya&-6i/ 
aya^r-7] ayc&-6v 


(pLXl-OS 

cpiXi-ov 
(piXi-ca 
(piXi-ov 
(piXi-e 


<piXi-a 

<piXt-as 

<piXi-a 

(piXi-av 

<piXi-a 


(/u'At-o^lovely 
(piXi-ov 
(piXi-co 
(p(Xi-ou 
(piXi ou 


P.N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


aya&-oi 

dya&-u>i> 

dya&-o7s 

aya&-ovs 

dya^-oi 

dya&-d> 
dya&-o7v 


aya&-ai aya&-d 
aya^-uiy ayafr-cov 
aya&-cus dya&-o7s 
dya&-ds dya&-d 
dya&-at dya&-d 

aya&-a dya&-<& 
ayaS-aiv aya&-oiu. 


(piXi-oi 

cpiXi-wv 

cpiXi-ois 

(piXi-ovs 

(piXi-oi 


(piXi-ai 
<piXi-cov 
(piXi-ais 
<piXi-as 
(piXi-ai 


(piXi-a 

(piXi-av 

(piXi-ots 

(p'tXi-a 

<p(Xi-a 


Dual. 


(piXi-ci) 
(pLXi-oiv 


(piXi-d 
(piXi-aiv 


<piXi-(a 
(piXi-oiv. 


S. N. lyXvKvs 
G. \yXvKe-os 
D. '.yXvite? 
A. yXvKvv 
V. yXvKv 


yXvKtia yXvKv, sweet 
yXvKeias yXvKe-os 
yXvKeia yXvice? 
yXvKeiav yXvKi) 
yXvK€?a yXvuv 


irpaos 
irpaov 
irpaca 

TTpCLOU 

Trpaos(e) 


irpae?a 

irpaeids 

irpaeiq, 

irpaetav 

Tr-pae7a 


Trpaov, soft 

irpaov 

Trpaa) 

Tzpaov 

Trpaou 


P.N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


yXvKeis yXvKetcu yXvuea 
yXvKewv yXvusiav yXvKecay 
yXviceo~i(v) yXviceiaLS yXvKeo-i(u) 
yXvKe?s yXvKeias yXvKea 
yXvKe?s yXvK€?ai yXvicea 


Trpaoi, irf 
tt paeans 
Trpaois, 7r p 
irpdovs, 7r p 
irptioi, tt p 


ae?s TrpaeTai irpaea 

ir pae iSiv ir pa 4 cov 
ae<ri irpaeiais tt paecr i 
ae?s irpaelas trpaia 
ae?s it paetai irpa4a 


Dual. 


yXvKee 
yXvKeoiv 


yXviceia yXvicee 
yXvKeicuv yXvKeoiv 


irpao) 
Tvpaoiu 


ir paeia Trpdco 
ir pae laiv irpdoiv. 


S.N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Xapieis 

XapievTos 

X&pievTi 

Xapitvra 

XOLpizv 


Xapie(T(ra x a P l * v 
Xapieacrrjs x a P ievT0S 
Xapieacrr) x a P L€J/Tl 
Xapiecrcrav %ap/ej/ 
Xapiecrcra x a P lsr/ 


XeKp&eis 

XeKp&evros 

Xei(p&evTi 

XeKpfrevra 

Keicp&eis 


X€i<pSei(Ta Xeicp&ei/ 
Xei<p&eicn)s Xeup&ei/Tos 
Xei<p&et<Tr) Xeicpfreuri 
Xeicp&e7(rav Xeicp&ev 
Xei<p&e7aa Xeicp&ev 


P.N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Xapieures 
XapievTow 
Xapiecri(v 
XapievTas 
Xapisures 


Xapie<r(rcu x a P' Leura 
X^pi-^o'croov x a P l * VT(au 
XapL^acrais x a p' L * (Tl { 1/ ) 
Xapietfcras x a p' ievTa 
XapieaaaL x a p' ievTa 


\€i(p^4vres Xei(p&e?(rai 
Xeicp&ePTCov Xei(p&ei(ra>v 
\6i<p£re?(Ti(v) XeKp^-eicraii 
KeKp&evras XeKpdreicras 
KeKp&eyres XeL(p&e7crat, 


XeKp&evra 

XeKp&euTcav 

Xei<p&e7o-i(v) 

XeKpSrevra 

XeHp&ivra 


Dual. 


Xapievre 
XupievTOiv 


XOLOLecraa. x a p' ieuTe 
Xap^o"(raLu x a P l * VT0LV ' 


KeKp&evre 
KeupfrevTOLV 


XeKp&etaa XeLcp&evre 
XeKpfreiaaiv XeKpfrevTous. 1 



98 



ADJECTIVES. 



PARADIGMS. 



[$77. 



Xpvcreos 
Xpvcrovs 


Xpvcrea 
Xpvcrii 


Xpvcreov, golden 
Xpvcrovv 


airXovs Qf 
airXovs 


dirXoij 

dirXri 


d-Kx6ov, single 
dirXovv 


Xpvcreov 
Xpvcov 


Xpvcreas 
Xpvcrrjs 


Xpvcreov 
Xpvcrov 


airXoov 
dirXov 


dirx6r)S 
dirXijs 


dirXoov 
airXov 


Xpvo-eco 
Xpvcrcp 


Xpvcrea. 
XP vcr V 


Xpvcrecp 
Xpvcry 


airXccp 
dirXop 


dirXor) 
dirXfj 


atrX6ca 
airXcfj 


Xpvcreov 
Xpvcrovv 

doubtful 


Xpvcreav 
Xpvcrrjv 

Xpvcria 
Xpvcrr\ 


Xpvcreov 
Xpvcrovv 
Xpvcreov 
Xpvcrovv 


airXoov 
airXovv 
doubtful 


airX6r)v 
dirXrjv 
dirXSrj 
dirXri 


dirXSov 
dirXovv 
dirX6ov 
dirXovv 


Xpvcreoi 
XpvcroT 

Xpvcricau 
Xpvcrcov 


Xpvcreai 
Xpvcrcu 
Xpvcrewv 
Xpvcrcov 


Xpvcrea 
Xpvcra 

Xpvcrecov 
Xpvcr&v 


airXdoi 
dirXot 

airXocov 
airXcov 


airXoai 
dirXat 
airXScov 
dirXcov 


dirX6a 
dirXa 

d-rrX6cav 
dirXoov 


Xpvcreois 
Xpvcrols 


Xpvcreais 
Xpvcrcus 


Xpvcreois 
Xpvcrols 


airXSois 
airXoTs 


dirX6ais 
airXaTs 


dirXoois 
aTrXo7s 


Xpvcreovs 
Xpvcrovs 


Xpvcreas 
Xpvcras 


XP^crea 
Xpvcra 


dirXSovs 
airXovs 


airX6as 
dirXas 


dtrX6a 
dirXa. 


Xpvcreoi 
Xpvcrot 


Xpvcrecu 
Xpvcrcu 


Xpvcrea 
Xpvcra 


dirXooi 
airXo? 


dirXSai 
dirXal 


dirX6a 
dirXa 


Xpvcrico 
XpvcrS) 


Xpvcria 
Xpvcra 


Xpvcreot 
Xpvcrea 


dirXoo) 
airXco 


dirXoaL 
dirXa 


aTrXoca 
divXG> 


Xpvcreoiv 
Xpvcrolv 


Xpvcreaiv 
Xpvcraiv 


Xpvcreoiv 
Xpvcrotv 


aitXooiv 
dirXdiv 


dirXoaiv 
airXaiv 


dirX6oiv 
dirXdiv 


to to 3 

o ca o ca 
„9- 9- „9- 9- 


dpyvpea 
apyvpa 

dpyvpeas 
apyvpas 


dpyvpeov, silver 
apyvpovv 
dpyvpeov 
apyvpov 


rervepcos 
Tervcp6ros 
rervcpoTL 
rervcp6ra 


rervcpvTa 
Tervcpvias 
Tervcpvia 
TervcpvTav 


rervcpSs, haying 
reTocpSros [struck. 
rervcp6ri 
rervepos 


apyvpeco 
apyvpcp 

dpyvpeov 
apyvpovv 


apyvpea 
apyvpa 

apyvpiav 
apyvpav 


apyvpeco 
apyvpep 

dpyvpeov 
apyvpovv 


rervcpSres reTvcpv?ai 
Terv<p6rcov reTvcpvicov 
rervcpScri rervcpviais 
rerveporas rervepvias 


rervepora 
TervcpoTcvv 
rervcpocri 
reTvcpora 


apyvpee 


apyvpea 
apyvpa 


dpyvpeov 
apyvpovv 


rervcpSre rervcpvta 
Tervcp6T0iv reTvcpviaiv 


rervepore 
Tervcporoiv 


iroXvs 
ttoXXov 
ttoXXcS 

TTOXVV 
TT oXv 


iroXX-f) 

■iroXXrjs 

iroXXfj 

iroXX-qv 

TroXX-f) 


ttoXv, much 
ttoXXov 

TVOXXcp 
7T Xl) 
TTOXV 


/X eyas 
fxeyaXov 
fj.eya.Xw 
fx ey av 
fxeya . 


LieyaX-q 

[xeydXys 

fxeyaXr) 

fxeydXi}V 

txeydXt) 


fxey a, great 

fxeyaXov 

fxeyaXca 

fxeya 

fxeya 


ttoXXol 

iroXXcov 

iroXXols 

■koXXovs 

nvoXXoi 


iroXXai 
iroXXcov 
TroXXaTs 
TroXXds 
7roXXai 


iroXXa 

TTOXXCOV 
TTOXXCHS 

iroXXa 
TroXXa 


fxeyaXoi 

fxeyaXcov 

fieyaXoLS 

iteyaXovs 

fxeyaXoi 


fxeyaXai 
fxeyaXcov 
fxeyaXais 
/xeyaXas 
fxeyaXai 


fxeyaXa 

fxeyaXcov 

(xeyaXois 

fxeyaXa 

fxeyaXa 




/xeydXco 
fxeyaXoiv 


fxeyaXa 
fxeyaXaiv 


fxeyaXev 
fxeyaXoiv 



* 78.] 



ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 



99 



fi4Xas 

(j.4Xavos 

fj.4Xavt 

fi4Xava 

/x4Xav 


fA.4Xaiva 

fxeXaivrjs 

(j.e\atvri 

fi4Xaivav 

/j.4Xatva 


fieXav, "black 

fj.4x6.vos 

fx4Xavi 

fx4Xav 

fx4Xav 


TTCIS 

iravrSs 
iravri 
irdvra 
iras 


iraaa 

irdo~i\s 

irda-p 

iraaav 

iraara 


irav, all 

iravrSs 

iravri 

irav 

irav 


/x4Xav€S 

/xeXdvav 

f.t4Xacn 

fx.4Xavas 

fx.4Ka.ves 


/j.4Xaivai 

/xeXaiv&v 

fxeXaivats 

fxsXaivas 

fj.4Xaivai 


fi4Xava 

fieXavcDj/ 

fi4Xaari 

fx4Xava 

fi4Xava 


irdvres 

irdvrwv 

iraai 

irdvras 

irdvres 


iraaai 
iraawv 
irdo~ats 
irdo~as 
iraffai 


irdvra 

irdvrwv 

irao~i 

irdvra 

irdvra 


fx4Xave 
fieXdvoiv 


fieXaiva. 
/xeXaivaiv 


/x4Xave 
fxeXdvotv. 


irdvre 
irdvroiv 


irdaa 
irdcraiv 


irdvre 
irdvroiv. 


(TTOLS 

crrdvros 

(TTaVTl 

ardvra 
ards 


araca 

o~rdo-t\s 

ardcrri 

araaav 

o~Tao~a 


crav, standing 

ardvros 

orrdvri 

ffrdv 

ardv 


Xiirc&v 

Xiir6vros 

XiirSvrt 

Xiir6vra 

Xnrc&v 


Xiirovrra 

Xnrovo~7)s 

Xiirovar) 

Xtirovaav 

Xnrovo~a 


Xnr6v, leaving 

Xiirovros 

Xiir6vri 

XiirSv 

Xiir6v 


crrdvres 
(rrdvrcov 
(rraai(v) 
crravras 
crrdvres 


o'rao'ai 

crraffwv 

crdaoxs 

ffrdaas 

(praaai 


ardvra 

o'ravrav 

o-Tao'i(v) 

crdvra 

ardvra 


XiirSvres 

Xiir6vrcav 

Xlttovo-i(v} 

XiirSvras 

Xnrovres 


Xiirovcai 

Xiirovo'wv 

Xiirovo~ais 

Xiirovaas 

Xnrovaai 


Xiir6vra 

XnrSvrcov 

Xnrovcri(v) 

Xiir6vra 

XiirSvra 


ardvre 
ardvroiv 


ardcra 
crdcraiv 


o~rdvre 
ardvroiv. 


Xiirovre 
XiirSvroiv 


Xiirovaa 
Xiirovaaiv 


XiirSvre 
Xiir6vroiv. 


(pavcov 

tyavovvTos 

(pavovvri 

(pavovvra 

ipavwv 


(pavovaa. 

(pavovcrrjs 

(pavovcr-p 

(pavovaav 

(pavovad 


(pavovv, about to 
(pavovvros [show 
(pavovvri 
(pavovvra \ 
(pavovv 


fevyvvvros £evyvvo-r)s 
fevyvvvri ^evyvva'rj 
£evyvvvra £evyvvo~av 
£svyvvs £evyvvo~a 


fayvvv, joining 

^evyvvvros 

fcvyvvvri 

fevyviv 

£evyvvv 


(pavovvres 

(pavouvrwv 

(pavod(Ti 

(pavovvras 

(pavovvres 


(pavovffai 
<pavov<rS)V 
(pavoixrais 
(pavovaas 
<pavovo~ai 


(pavovvra 

(pavovvrouv 

<pavovo~i 

(pavovvras 

(pavovvra 


fcvyvvvres fevyvva'ai 
£tvyvvvrwv £evyvvcr<t>v 
^vyvvffi ^evyvvarais 
{evyvvvras (evyvvo-as 
fcvyvivres £evyvvo~ai 


Cevyvvvra 

Csvyvvvrwv 

£evyvvo~l 

fevyvvvra 

^evyvvvra 


(pavovvre (pavovaa 
(pavovvroiv (pavoixratv 


(pavovvre 
(pavovvroiv. 


^evyvvvre £evyvvo~a 
£evyvvvroiv £evyvvo~aiv 


(evyvvvre 
£<-vyvvvrotv. 



Remark. All participles in -eis are declined like Xeup&els (see § 76, V.) ; all 
participles in -us, like deucvvs (see § 76, III.) ; all participles in -as, like eras (see 
§ 76, VIII.) : the Pres. Put. and second Aor. Part. Active, like Xiirdv (§ 76, 
XII.) ; the Fut. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs, like (rirspwv (§ 76, XII.) 



§ 78. II. Adjectives of two Endings. 

Adjectives in -os of two endings are declined like dya#os, 
except that they have no separate form for the feminine, the 
same form being used for the masculine and feminine. 



100 ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. [$ 78. 

I. -os, -of, or) &\oyos, rb &\oyov, irrational. 

To this class belong, 

(a) A few simple adjectives without particular derivative endings, e. g. 6 r) 
fidpfiapos, not Greek ; Aafipos, vehement ; rjfiepos, gentle ; Xoidopos, calumniating ; 
rtSraoSs, mild; x*P <T0S i unfruitful; 7]o-i>xos, silent; Sdiravos, extravagant; ewAoy, 
yesterday ; 

(b) Most simple adjectives with the derivative-endings -ios and -eios, and 
-i.fj.os, e. g. 6 r) ffunripios, saving ; 6 t) jSatriAeios, regal ; 6 r) yydopi/xos, recognizable ; 

(c) All compounds, e. g. 6 t) d\oyos, rb <x\oyov, irrational; 6 r) apy6s (instead 
of aepyos), inactive (but apySs, -r), -6v, bright) ; 6 r) irdyicaXos, very fair (but Ka\6s, 
-r), -6v) ; 6 7) TraWevKos, very white (but XevKos, -t), -6v) ; Seoirveva-ros, -ov, divinely 
inspired (but irvcvcrr6s, -r), -6v) ; adjectives compounded with adjectives in 
•k6s, which then become Proparoxytones, e. g. 6 i) tyevddrrtKos, not pure Attic, 
but ('Attik6s, -t), -6v) 6 7) /AKroTrepo-iKos (but Tlepo-iKOSy -r), -6v). 

Exceptions are adjectives derived from compound verbs with the deriva- 
tive-endings -k6s, which remain Oxytones ; those in -r4os, which remain 
Paroxytones, e. g. iiri5eiKTiK6s, -r), -6v, from eirihe'iKwixi; those in -r6s vary 
between two and three endings, e. g. avmros, -t), -6u (from &i/e'x«), and av€Kr6s, 
-6v, see Lobeck, ad S. Aj. 1296. Paralipp. p. 482, sq. Poppo ad Th. 2, 41, 4. 
But when compounds in -ros, -tt), -r6v, are again compounded, they have but 
two endings, and are Proparoxytones, e. g. 6 r) anarao-Kevao-ros. 

Remark 1. Comparatives and Superlatives have three endings, even when 
the Positive has but two, though there are some rare exceptions, e. g. anopwrs- 
pos 7] \7j\pis, Thu. 5, 110. Svs€fif3o\wraros t) Aonpis, Id. 3, 110. 

II. -ovs, -ovv; 6 7) evvovs, rb evvovv, benevolent. 

Adjectives with these endings are, 

(a) Those compounded with the contracted substantives vovs and tt\ovs, and 
hence in the Masc. and Pern, are declined like these, but in the Neuter like 
o<ttovv (§ 47), yet the Neuter PL in -oa does not admit contraction, consequently 
to evj/oa. On the accentuation, see § 49, 3. 

Rem. 2. Attic writers sometimes omit the contraction in the PL, e. g. /co/co- 
v6ois X. Cy. 8. 2, 1. KpvtyivSovs X. Ag. 11,5. Usvooi X. H. 2. 1, 2. 

(b) Such as are compounded with the substantive nods, e. g. 6 t) ttoXvttovs, 
rb ttoKvttovv, and are inflected like it, but in the Ace. Sing., even as OlBiirovs 
[§ 71, B. (b)], are partly of the contract second Dec. and partly of the third, 
e. g. Gen. ttoAvitoSos and ttoKvttov ; Ace. 7roAu7ro8a and tvoKvttovu, etc. 

Rem. 3. In several adjectives of this kind, e. g. a-xovs, fipadinrovs, SIttovs, 
avnrrSirovs, the inflection does not follow the second Dec. 

III. -a) s, -<a v ; 6 7) 'Ikews, rb 'iKeuv, compassionate. 

Adjectives of these endings are like the Attic second Dec. (§48). 

Rem. 4. The Ace. commonly ends in -ecu, but in a number of compound 
words, it ends in -a> (§ 48, Rem. 1), e. g. a^Sxpew, avdirXew, dyripca (in respect to 
the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7), e7R7rAea>, vwepxpea). 

Rem. 5. There are three endings to the simple adjective: — 

ITAeaJS, 7rAea, 7rAeW, full, Gen. 7rAeaj, 7rAeas, irXico, PL 7rAew, nrXiai, 7rAea ; the 
compounds are either of two endings, e. g. 6 r; audirXews, rb avdirXeow, PL ol at 
6K7rAeo> ('nrirels eK7r\ea> X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. e/c7rAew rpdire(cu X. Hier. 1, 18), ra eK7rAea> 
X. Cy. 3, 1, 28. 1, 6, 7, and even the Nom. PL TrAzcp, of the simple adjective 
is not seldom used for the Masc. and Pern., or they have (yet more seldom) 



$ 78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 101 

three endings, e. g. avdirXews, avair\4a (PL Phaedon 83, d.), avdirXeav. Eur. 
Ale. 730, has tt\4ov, after the example of Homer, as Neuter Sing. So like- 
wise compounds, seldom in the Sing., e. g. rb e/AirXeov, Soph., oftener in the 
PI., e. g. €/j.TT\eot PI. Rp. 6. 505, c. and very frequently in the Neuter, e. g. 
e/cTrAea X. Cy. 6. 2, 7, and 8. irep'nr\ea 6. 2, 33. Also from 7Aews, Plato Phaedon 
95, a. has '/Aea as Neut. PI. 

Rem. 6. 'O r) <rws, rb irwc, salvus, is formed from the old word 2A02 hy 
contraction. In addition to the Nom. creDs, <xwv, this word forms only the Ace. 
Sing, <rwv, like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Ace. awov. The form <ra 
(from <rda), occurs as Pern. Sing, in Eurip. Fr. 629. (Dind.) and as Neut. PL in 
Plat. Critias, 111, c. in the best MSS. The PI. consists of forms from crccs of 
the second Dec. and of forms from the lengthened awos, namely : — 

PL N. ol al <rS>s (from cnSes), and ol awoi, at <ra>cu, N. aSia, rarely era. 
A. robs ras o~as (from awas), and robs ar&ovs, N. aaia, rarely era. 

The Singular forms of crwos are very rare in the Attic writers, e. g. o~wos, X. 
An. 3. 1, 32. 

Rem. 7. The compounds of Kip as and y4\cos are partly like the Attic 
second Dec, partly like the third Dec, e. g. 6 t) xpf<rctaepcos, rb xp^o-^cpuv, 
Gen. xpver^Kepw and xp v coKepcoros ; 6 r) (piXoyeXccs, rb (piX6yeXwv, Gen. <piX6yeXa) 
and (piXoytXwros ; fiovKepcas, Gen. fiovKepu and (iovKepcoros, so evKcpas. The 
adjective Svsdpas follows the third Dec. only, e. g. Svsepwros, etc. Forms like 
the Common second Dec. originate from forms of the Attic second Dec, e. g. 
SUepov, vfjitepoi, &K.epa. On the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7. 

IV. -co v ; -o v ; N. 6 r) o~(txppwv, rb cruxppou, prudent, 

G. rod rrjs rod crdxppovos (according to § 55, 1). 

Rem. 8. From 5 r) it lav, fat, comes also the Fern, form irieipa, even in prose 
writers; so also irpScppao-ffa from 6 r) irp6cppwv, occurs in the poets. 

Rem. 9. Here belong, also, the Comparatives in -uv, -ov, -tow, -lov ; but in 
respect to the declension of these it is to be noted, that, after the rejection of 
v, they are contracted in the Ace Sing., and in the Nom., Ace, and Voc PL 
See the Paradigms, § 79. In the Attic writers, the uncontracted forms in -ova, 
-ov€S, -ovas, frequently occur, e. g. fAel&va, ixdrrova, KaXXiova, ixdrroves, 
KOKioves, fieiCoves, fieXrioves, irXetoves, rjrrovas, fieXrlovas, iXarrovas, X. Cy. 5. 2, 
36. 7. 5, 83. 2. 1, 23. 2. 1, 13. 5. 2, 36. Hell. 6. 5, 52. Cy. 7. 5, 70. On the accen- 
tuation, see § 65, 5. 

"V. -7js, -es ; N. 6 r) aXrjSr)s, rb aXrj&es, true, 

G. rod rr)s rod aXrj&eos, aXrj&ods (§ 59). 

On the contraction of -4 a into -a (instead of -rj), where a vowel precedes, see 
4 59, Rem. 1. 

Rem. 10. Compounds in -4rr\s (from Zros, Gen. erous), are either of two 
endings, e. g. Tropeiav x iA - leT ^> PI- Rp- 10. 615, a. irepi68a> rrj x'^Te?, Phaed. 249, 
a., or they take a particular Fern, form, namely, -ens, Gen. -4ri8os, e. g. 
eirrerjjs, F. kirriris ; rpiaKovrovKiSwv o-irovScHv, Th. 1, 87. 

Rem. 11. Simple adjectives in -r,s are Oxytones, except irXr)pr}s, TrXrjpes, 
full. On the accentuation of the Voc. and of the Neuter, see § 65, 5, and on 
the accentuation of the Gen. PL § 59, Rem. 4. 

VI. -7] v, -e v ; N. 6 r) appr\v, rb appev 

G. rod rr)s rod 'dppevos (§ 55, 1). No other word like this. 

VII. -cop, -op) N. 6 7) airdroip, rb air ar op, fatherless, 

G. rod rrjs rod aivdropos (§ 55, 1). In like manner only 
a/j.r)rwp, afJ.r)rop. 

9* 






102 



PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 



[$79. 



vni. 



■is, -i; (a) N. 6 r) ftipis, to ft>pt, knowing, 

G. tov tt}s rov Idpios (§ 63, Rem. 



5). 



In like manner, only vr)<TTis, temperate, and rpScpis, nourished. In addition to 
the form in -tos, these adjectives have another in -iSos, but more rare, and only 
poetic, e. g. tdpida, fSptSes. 

(b) N. 6 7] evxapts, to evx a P l > agreeable, 
G. rod TTJs rod evxdpiTos. 

Here belong the compounds of x*P ls -> ^d-Tpis, e\iris, <pp6vris, which are 
declined like the simples, e. g. eveXiris, e^eAirt, Gen. eueA7rtSos ; <\>i\6iraTpis, Gen. 
<f>i\oTra.Tpidos ; the Ace. ends according to § 53, 3, in -iv, e. g. ei/eA.7nj/, evx a P lf/ ,i 
but compounds of iroKis, when they refer to persons, are inflected in the Attic 
dialect in -tSos, e. g. <pi\6-rroMs, Gen. -iSos, yet in the Ace, <pi\6no\iv and -ida ; 
still, as epithets of cities, etc., they are inflected like iro\is, e. g. KaAAiiroAty, 
diKai6iro\is, etc., Gen. KaWnrSXews, etc. 

IX. -vs, -u; (a) N. b r) &SaKpvs, rb &daicpv, tearless. 

So compounds of ddicpv ; yet these inflect only the Ace. Sing, like the third 
Dec, e. g. &8aKpvv, Neut. frScwpv. The other Cases are supplied by aSa/cpu-roy, 
•ov, Gen. -ov, according to the second Dec. 

(b) N. 6 7i dtirrjxvs, to 5i7T7jxu, two ells long, 

G. TOV TTJS TOV SlK-f}X e0S ' 

Here belong the compounds of irrixvs ; the declension is like yXvKvs, y\vic6 
m 76, II. and 77), except that the Neuter PI. in -to is contracted into -77, like 
&<rTri, e. g. SiTT-fixv- 

X -0 v s, -0 v ; N. 6 r) /xovSSovs, rb jxov6§ov, one-toothed, 

G. tov tt)s TOV /JLOVodoVTOS. 

So the remaining compounds of 65ovs. For the Dec, see § 54 (d). 



$ 79. Paradigms. 



S.N. 


ej/8o£oy 


evdo^ou 


diirovs 


SlTTOVV 


G. 


eV5o£ou 


ivh6^ov 


SittoSos 




D. 


€j/S<$£&> 


ivdo^u) 


8i7ro8t 




A. 


€v8o£oj/ 


ev8o£ov 


StVaSo and StTrouy 


Stirovv 


V. 


ej/8o£e 


evSo^ou 


StVou 


SlTTOVP 


P.N. 


cv8o£oi 


ev8o£a 


8i7ro8es 


SiiroSa 


G. 


eV5^|ojj' 


ivho^uiv 


8i7r^8wj/ 




D. 


eV8J|ois 


iuSo^ois 


8l7TOO"l 




A. 


ev8d£ous 


fEvdo£ovs 


8t7ro8as 


StVoSa 


V. 


ei/8o£oi 


ev8o|a 


S'nroSes 


Siiroda 


Dual. 


iudo^a 


eud6i-co 


SiiroSe 






iudo^oiv 


£v86£oiv. 


SnrSSoiV' 





§79.] 



PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 



103 



S.N. 


evir\(o-os)ovs evirh(o-oj/)ovv 


t'Aecos 


ikGup 


G. 


€vir\ov 




VAeco 


D. 


evirAca 




iAeco 


A. 


evwKow 




'i\eav 


V. 


doubtful 


'Iheas 


'(\ewv 


P.N. 


evirXoi evTT\oa 


VAeaj 


7Ae« 


G. 


evirXay 




"Xeuv 


D. 


evirAois 




'Ikecps 


A. 


€V7r\ovs evirXoa 


7A.6WS 


C /Ae« 


V. 


eSfl-Aoi evirAoa 


'/Aea> 


'/Aeo> 


Dual. 


eforAw 




?Aea> 




evirXoiu. 




'lXea>u. 


S.N. 


evdai/xcav evdai/xoy 


e'x&r«v 


ex^iov 


[Aelfai/ fJ-zK 0V 


G. 


evdal/JLOvos 


4x&tovos 


jxei^ovos 


D. 


evdai/u.oi'i 


iX&iovt. 


jxei^ovi 


A. 


evda.tfJi.ova evBaifioy 


iX^ova-iw 


eX&iov 


fxel^ova fieifa fie?£ov 


V. 


€v8aiy.ov 


£%&iov 


p*%ov 


P.N. 


evdalfAOves ev8aiy.ova 


iX&iove? 


£x&' LOVa - 


jxei^oves fie(£ova 






iX&iovs 


£x&' L0} 


fxei^ovs pe'iC 00 


G. 


evSaifiSvccv 


&&< 


6vcav 


ljt.ei£6vwv 


D. 


evdai/j.o(n(v) 


iX^o<ri{v) 


fxei(o(n(v) 


A. 


evdai[J.ovas evdai/xova 


ix&tovas 


iX&tova 


fiei^ovas fxei^ova 






ix&lovs 


iX&'"n> 


/j.ei£ovs fAeifa 


V. 


evdalfxoues evdaipova 


like the N 


ominative. 


like the Nominative. 


Dual. 


ev8atfj.ove 


iX& 


ove 


fxet^ove 




evZaijJi6voiv. 


iX& 


6votv. 


fxei£6voiv. 


S.N. 


a\7)*ri}S a\ri&4s 


vyii}s 


vyi4s 


G. 


aArj&(4-os)ovs 


\ 


'jyi(4-os)ovs 


D. 


a\7]&(e-t)e? 


i 


jyi(4-'i)ei 


A. 


aAij3-(e-a)7j aAi]&4s 


vyi {4-a) 


a 2 vyi4s 


V. 


aAr]&4s 


1 


ryies 


P.N. 


a\T]St( 4-es ) eis a\T]^{ 4-a ) rj 


vyi(4-es)ei 


s vyi(4-a)a z 


G. 


a\7i&{4-ooi>)tov l 




jyi(4-(av)uy 


D. 


aA7)&4a't(v) 




jyi4cri(v) 


A. 


aA7jfr(e-as)e?s a\7)fr(4-a)rj 


vyi(4-as)e 


"s vyi(4-a)a 


V. 


like the Nominative. 


like 1 


he Nominative. 


Dual. 


aAr}&(4-e)7J 




jyi(4-e)rj 




aAi)&(4-oiv)div. 




byi(4-oiv)oiv. 


S.N. 


eijxapis evxapi 


andrwp 


dirarop 


G. 


evxdplros 




xirdropos 


D. 


ebxdpiri 




xirdropi 


A. 


evxdpira and evxdpiv ^X a P l 


airdropa 


&irarop 


V. 
P.N. 


€v'X cl P l 




xirarop 


evxdpires ei>xdpira 


airdropes 


airdropa 


G. 


evxo-pirtav 




xirarSpow 


D. 


evxdpio~i 




airdropai 


A. 


ebxdpiras evxdptra 


airdropas 


airdropa 


V. 


evxdpires evxdpira 


airdropes 


airdropa 


Dual. 


ei»xap£T€ 




xirdrope 




eu%apiT 


OIV 

59. Rem. 4. 




hiraropoiy. 

2 § 59, Rem. 1. 


1 but r 


rvvr]S4-tt)V = o-w-fi&wv, § 



104 ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. [$ 80. 

§ 80. III. Adjectives of one Ending. 

Adjectives of one ending have no separate form for the Neu- 
ter, partly because their meaning is of such a nature that they 
generally occur in connection -with persons, and partly because 
their formation admits of no separate neuter form. In poetry, 
however, these adjectives sometimes occur in those Cases in 
which the Neut. form is like that of the Masc. and Fern., i. e 
in the Gen. and Dat, even in connection with neuter substan- 
tives, e. g. ixavtdcnv Xvora^fxao-iv, Eur. Or. 264. ev Ttivryri awfxaTL, la 
El. 375. They very seldom take a separate form for the Neut, 
e. g. £7r^Avs, iirrjXvSa efhea, Her. 8, 73 ; a derivative adjective is 
commonly used, where the neuter is to be denoted. 

Endings. 
I. -as, Gen. -ov; 6 p.ovias, Gen. fxoviov, single (Paroxytone). 
II. -as, Gen. -avros: 6 tj axdfxas, Gen. -avros, unwearied (Paroxytone). 

III. -as-, Gen. -ados: 6 rj <pvyds, Gen. <pvy ados, fugitive (Oxytone). 

IV. -ap, Gen. -apos : onfy fidxap, though the Fern, form /xdnaipa is sometimes 
found. 

V. --ns, Gen. -ov: 6 i&eAovrris, Gen. i&eAovrov, voluntary. 

Some of these adjectives take, in connection with Fern, substantives, a sepa- 
rate Fern, form in -is (Gen. -idos), e. g. evciir-ns, Fern, evwirts, fair-looking. They 
are Paroxytones, except 4Sre\ovTT}s, skovtt]s, and v^picrris. 

VI. -i)s, Gen. -tjtos: 6 i) apyi\s, Gen. apyiiros, white* 

So all compounds in -&vf)s, -djxrjs, -/3At?s, -ttXtis, and -k/x^s, and some simple 
adjectives, e.g. yvy.vt)s, naked; %epy^s, needy; ivivns, poor ; irXavns, wandering, 
etc. 

VII. -77 v, Gen. -i}vos: 6 i) awr^y, Gen. airrrivos, unfeathered. In like manner 
no other. 

VIII. -(as, Gen. -Soros: 6 t) ayvoos, Gen. ayv&ros, unknown. 

So all compounds in -fipus, -yvws, and -xpus, and also airT&s, firm. 

IX. -is, Gen. -idos: 6 77 avaXms, Gen. avaXxidos, powerless. 

These adjectives after the omission of a feminine substantive to which they 
belong, are, like those in -as, -ados, c. g. 77 'Ewds (sc. yrj), used as substantives, 
e. g. 77 irarpis (sc. yyj) fatherland. 

X. -iis, Gen. -vdos : o 1) j/eyAvs, Gen. j/e^AuSos, one lately come. 
In like manner only a few other compounds. 



§ 81.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 105 

XI. -|, Gen. -yos, -kos, -xos: 6 r) apira^, Gen. -ayos, rapacious. 
6 r) t}\i£, " -?kos, equal. 
6 7) ixa>vv£, " -vxos, one-hoofed. 

XII. -rp, Gen. -ttos: o 7) alyihnp, Gen. -nros, high. 

XIII. Such as end in an unchanged substantive, e. g. frirais, childless; /j.aKp6- 
X el p, long-handed; abrox^p-, done with one's own hand; fxaKpaiwu, long-lived; 
ixa.Kpa.vxw, long-necked ; KevKa&iris, having a white shield. The declension of such 
adjectives is like that of the substantives, e. g. (xaKpavx^vos. On the compounds 
of TTovs, however, comp. § 78, II. (b). 

$ 81. Comparison of Adjectives. 

1. The quality expressed by an adjective may belong to 
an object in different degrees : — 

(a) "When the quality belongs to one object in a higher 
degree than to another, the form is called the Comparative, 
e. g. Plato was more learned than Xenophon. 

(b) When the quality in the highest degree belongs to an 
object, the form is called the Superlative, e. g. Plato was 
the most learned of the disciples of Socrates. 

(c) The form of the adjective which expresses its simple 
meaning without any comparison, is called the Positive, 
e. g. Plato was learned. 

2. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of com- 
parison ; the participle does not admit it, except in a few 
rare cases, where the participle has the meaning of an 
adjective, e. g. Ippwfjuevo^, -earepos, -eararo^. 

3. The Greek has two classes of terminations for the 
Comparative and Superlative. The first, and much the 
most common, is -repos, -repd, -repov, for the Compara- 
tive, and -TflTo?, -Tan?, -rarov, for the Superlative; the 
second is ~(t 1 )cov, -(I) op, or -cov, -ov, for the Comparative, 
and - (i) CT09, -(L)o-rrj, - (t) a to v, for the Superlative. The 
i is the union-vowel. 

4. The first class of terminations is appended to the stem 
of the adjective by the connecting syllables o (co), at, £?, e?; 
hence the general rule : In most adjectives, the usual end- 
ings are appended to the stem by means of the connecting 
syllable. 



106 ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [$82. 

Remark. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
the Greek, like the Latin, can prefix fiaXXou (magis) and ixdXio-ra (maxime) to 
the Positive. This periphrasis is necessary in all adjectives, which, for the sake 
of euphony, have no Comparative form. 

$ 82. A. First Form of Comparison. 

Comparative, -re/3 05, -re pa, -repov] 
Superlative, -raros, -Tar 77, -rarov. 
These endings are appended to the stem of the adjective ; 
the stem is found by rejecting os in the Nom. of the second 
Dec, and the same syllable in the Gen. of the third Dec. 
I. Adjectives in -os, -rj (-a), -ov. 

(a) Most adjectives of this class annex the above endings to 
the stem by means of the union -vowel oorw; the union -vowel 
is o, when a syllable long by nature or by position ($ 27, 3), pre- 
cedes, but to, when a short syllable precedes, — o> being then 
used to prevent the concurrence of too many short syllables, 
e.g. 

Kov<p-os, light, Com. Kovcp-6-Tepos, Sup. Kov<p-6-TaTos> -77, -ov, 

l<rxvp-6s, strong, " lo~xvp-6-T*pos y " lcrxvp-6-raTos, 

\e7TT-6s, thin, " XeTTT-6-rcpos, " Xeirr-S-raTos, 

o~<po8p-6s, vehement, " (r<podp-6-T*pos, " o~<po8p-6-TaTos, 

iriKp-6s, bitter, " TriKp-6-repos, " TriKp-6-raros, 

<ro(p-6s, wise, " ffocp-co-repos, " aocp-cb-raros, 

ixvp-6s, firm, " exfy-w-Tepos, " ixvp-6-Ta.TOs, 

&£i-os, worthy, " a£i-d>-Tepos, " agi-cb-Taros. 

Remark 1. A mute and liquid here always make a syllable long by posi- 
tion, though the Attic poets, on account of the verse, sometimes consider such 
syllable as short, e. g. evTeKvc&Taros from etireicvos, Eur. Hec. 579. 618. (Pors.), 
SvsTroTfM&Tepa, Id. Ph. 1367. 

(b) Contracts in -eos = -ous and -00s = -ovs are contracted also 
it the forms of Comparison ; the first contract c and w the union- 
vowel into w ; the last assume the union-syllable es and contract 
in with the preceding o, e. g. 

Tropcpvp-eos = irop<pvp-ovs airX-6os = airX-ovs 

iroptpvp-ewTzpos — iropcpvp-d-repos airXo-ea-Tepos = airX-ovs-repos 

Trop<pvp-ect)TaTos = irop<pvp-u}-ra.Tos airXo-ea-raros = aTrX-ova-Taros. 

Here belong also contracts of two endings in -ovs and -ow, e. g. ev"v-oos = 
efv-ovs, Neut. ttiv-ooi/ = evv-ovv, Com. evvo-4o , -T€pos = evv-ovs-repos, Sup. ewo- 
fff-raros = svv-ovo~-to.tos. 



$82.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 107 

Rem. 2. Adjectives in -oos take also the uncontracted forms of the Compara- 
tive and Superlative in -ocorepos, -odoraros, e. g. evirvoATspoi, X. R. Equ. 1, 10. 
evxpoc!>Tepos, X. O. 10, 11. 

(c) The following adjectives in -atos: yepaios, old; 7raAat- 
05, ancient; Trepalos, on the other side; o-voXaios, at leisure, 
assume -repos and -raros without a union-vowel, e. g. 

yepcu-6s, Com. yepat-repos, Sup. yepai-Taros, 

iraXai-os, " iraAal-repos, " 7raAai-TaTos. 

Rem. 3. IlaXatJs and <rxoXa?os have also the usual forms of Compari- 
son; vaXai6repos, (rxo^aiSrepos, SO also yepaidi epos, Antiph. 4, p. 125, 6. 

(d) The following adjectives in -os: eu'Stos, calm; tJo-v^os, 
quiet; t'Stos, peculiar; to-o?, equal; /*,ecros, middle; op $p to 5, 
early; o\pio<s, late; TrapaTrX-fjo-ios, similar; and Trpwlos, in the 
morning, assume the union-syllable at, the Comparative and 
Superlative thus becoming like the preceding words in -atos, 
e. g. 

fie<r-os, Com. fiear-al-repos, Sup. fiec-al-Taros, 

ffii-os, " ISi-ai-repoSf " tSi-at-TaTos. 

Rem. 4. Sometimes also the common form is found, e. g. rjcrvx^repos, 
ti<tvx&toltos ; '(piXurspos, <piA<&Ta.Tos are the usual forms in the Attic writers. 
Here belong also the adverbial forms irpooia'iTepov, irpwiaireTa, from itp&fas ; thus 
in Plato ; likewise irpwirepou and irpcotTara ; thus always, as it seems, in Thu. 
(Popp. ad 7, 19, 1), also in Xen. Anab. 3. 4, 1. irpufoepov according to the best 
MSS. (on the contrary Trpwialrara, Cy. 8. 8, 9). The adjective <pl\os has 
three forms: (piKdorepos seldom (e. g. Xen. C. 3. 11, 18.), and cpiKdoraros, 
(piAafoepos seldom in prose (e. g. Xen. An. 1. 9, 29, though one good Ms. has 
<pi\<&Tepov), and (piXairaros seldom in prose (e.g. Xen. H. 7.3, 8.), <pi\repos 
poetic, and cplxraros very frequent 5 the Comparative is usually expressed by 
HaWou (ptAos. In addition to these three forms, also the Superlative <p(\io~Tos 
(as in Homer, the Comparative <pi\ia>v) is found in Attic poetry. 

Rem. 5. The two adjectives, p.4<ros, middle, and veos, young, have a special 
Superlative form, p.4craros, v4aros; but this is in use only when a series 
of objects is to be made prominent, p.4o~a.Tos denoting the very middle of the 
series, and vearos the last or most remote, whereas fiecrairaTos expresses the 
idea of the middle in general, and vswraros retains the primary signification 
of the adjective, young, new. In prose, vewros is used only in reference to the 
tones of music (vearos <pfroyyos) ; and then the Feminine is contracted, vfjT-n, 
the lowest line or string. 

(e) Two adjectives in -os: ippw^ivos, strong, and a/cpdros, 
unmixed, append the union-syllable es to the stem, e. g. ippto/xev- 



108 ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [$ 82. 

eor-Tepos, eppco/xev-ecr-Taros, d/cpar-ecr-repos, d/cpar-ecr-raTO?. So also 
aiSoios has atSot-eV-raTos in the superlative. 

Rem. 6. Further, the adjectives, &<p&ovos, rich; cnrov5a7os, zealous; and 
&<r/xevos, glad, sometimes take the above form, as acpfroveo-repos, -eo-raTos, 
together with the common form, -carepos, -wt<xtos. From dc/xevos is formed 
acr/xevcarepos, and the adverbial neuter, ao-fxevairara and aa/xev-ecr-TaTa. — Several 
other adjectives also have this formation, yet for the most part only in poetry, 
e.g. evfypos, unmixed (of wine) ; rjdvfxos, sweet; eTrliredos, flat (iiwre8eo~Tepos, 
X. H. 7. 4, 13), and all contracts in -ovs; comp. (b). The forms in -eVrepos, 
-eorraros, belong properly to adjectives in -tjs and -gov. 

(f) The following adjectives in -os: AaAos, talkative; fiovo- 
<£dyos, eating alone; o\f/ocf>ayo<s, dainty ; and tttw^os, poor, 
drop os, and append the syllable is, e. g. AaA-os, Com. AaA-io- 
repos, Slip. XaX-tcr-raros ', 7no))(6s has also Sup. Trrca^oraros. 

Rem. 7. These endings properly belong to adjectives in -77s, Gen. -ov. 

II. Adjectives in -77s, Gen. -ov, and ^cuStJs, -es, Gen. -eos, drop 
-77s, and append the syllable -is, e. g. KAern-^s (Gen. -ov), thievish, 

Com. KXe7TT-lO--TepOS, Sup. KA£7TT-lCT-TaTOS ', lj/€v8'LO--T€pOSj lf/€V$-LO~- 

raros. 

Exceptions. 'YfipicrTris, -ov, insolent, has vfipio-TSrepos, X. An. 5. 8, 3, vfipio'TS- 
tcltos, X. An. 5. 8, 22. C. 1. 2, 12. From anpar-fis (Gen. -eos) is the Com. b.Kpa- 
riffTepos, to distinguish it from atcpareo-TaTos, No. (e). 

III. Adjectives of the third Declension. The Comparison- 
endings are appended to the stem of the adjectives, either 
directly or by inserting the syllable -es (also -is). 

(1) Those in -us, -eta, -v, 77s, -es (Gen. -eos=-ous), as, 

-av, and the word /xd/<ap, happy, append the endings of Com- 
parison directly to the pure stem, which appears injthe Neuter 
form, e. g. 

jXvkvs, Neut. -v — yXvKv-repos yXvKv-Taros 

a\7]frf)s, Neut. -es — aX-n^eo'-repos aXrj&eo , -TaTos 

/xeXas, Neut. -av — /xeXav-repos fxeXav-raros 

raXas, Neut. -av — raXav-repos raXav-raros 

fiaKap, — fxandp-repos [xandp-Taros. 

Rem. 8. The adjectives rjdvs, rax^s, and iroXvs are compared in -loov and 
•uv. See § 83, I. 

(2) Adjectives in -wv, -ov (Gen. -ovos), assume -es, e. g. 

evZaijxcav, Neut. crjSai/.iov, happy. 

Com. evhaiixov-ea-repos, Sup. evSai/xov-eo'-TaTos. 



$83.] ADJECTIVES. SECOND FORM OP COMPARISON. 109 

(3) Adjectives in -£ sometimes assume -es, sometimes -is, 
e.g. 

ctyfjAtl, Gen. a(pr}\iK-os, growing old, apira^ Gen. apiray-os, rapax, 

Com. a<pi}\iK-eo , -repos, Com. apiray-icr-repos, 

Sup. a(pn\iK-ea-ro.ros y Sup. apiray-ic-raros. 

(4) Adjectives in -eis, -«/, whose stem ends in vt, append the 
Comparison-endings directly to the stem, the last r being 
changed into o; and the preceding v being then dropped ($ 20, 2). 

Xapleis, -lev, Gen. xapiej/r-oy, pleasant. 

Com. xa/ J ko--Tepos, Sup. xapfec-TaTos. 

(5) The compounds of xapis assume w, e. g. 
eirixapis, Gen. emxapir-os, pleasant. 

Com. iirixapir-ca-repoSf Sup. imxapir d-raros. 

'Axapio-repos in Homer, comes from axapir-repos ; comp. No. (4). 

$ 83. B. Second Form of Comparison. 

Comparative. -tW, Neut. -lov, or -wv, Neut. -ov. 
Superlative, -tcrros, -10-T17, -to- to v. 

Remark 1. On the quantity oft in -tW, -toy, see § 28, 1 ; on the declension, 
\ 78, Rem. 9; and on the accent, § 65, 5 (a). 

This form of Comparison includes, 

I. Some adjectives in -us, which drop -us and append -tojv, 
etc.; this usually applies only to fjSvs, siveet, and rax^s, swift 
(the other form of these adjectives in -vrepos, -vraros, is some- 
times used, but not by Attic writers). Ta^us has in the 
Comparative Sdo-o-wv (Att. $oltto)v), Neut. Saaarov (Sarrov). 
Comp. $$ 21, 3, and 17, 6. Tax/wj/ is found only among the 
later writers. Thus, 

7)§-vs, Com. 7)8-ia)v, Neut. flS-iov, Sup. tfS-Hrros, -r], -ov. 

rax-vs, " &d<r<rwv, Att. frdrroov, Neut. fracraw, Att. frarrov, Sup. rdx«rro$ 

Rem. 2. The other adjectives in -i5s, as fia&vs, deep; fiapis, heavy ; )8pa- 
Sus, sfow; j3po%uy, s/iori; yAu/cus, sweet; Batrvs, thick; evpis, wide; o|us, 
sharp; Trpeo-fiv s, old; witis, swift, have the form in -vr epos, -vraros (§ 82, 
III.) ; in Attic poetry, however, single examples of these adjectives are found 
with the other form, e. g. fipdxurros, irpeo-fiiaros, &kio~tos. 

II. The following adjectives in -p os : alaxpo^base ; capo's, 
hostile; /cuSpos, honorable; and oIkt p 6 s, wretched (but always 

10 



110 ADJECTIVES. ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. [$84. 

oiKTpoTepos in the Comparative), — the ending -pos here also 
being dropped, e. g. cucr^os, Com. alo~x-t(nv y Neut. ala-^-lov, Sup. 
aur^-ioTos. 

Rem. 3. OKkthttos, KvStay, kvShttos, are poetic. Besides this form, in -low, 
etc., which is preferred hy the Attic writers, the above adjectives have also, 
though seldom, the other form in -6repos, -Sraros, e. g. 4x^P^ TaT0S 5 Du t always, 
in prose, oltcTpSraros. 





$ 84. Anomalous Forms 


of 


Comparison. 




Positive. 


Comparative. 




Superlative. 


1 


aya&6s, good, 


a/xeivwv, Neut. &^ivov 


dpicrros 






fZeXriwt/ 




/UgAtkttos 






(0eAre/>os, Poet.) 




(PeXraTos, Poet.) 






Kpelffffwv, Att. KpelrToov 


KpaTurros 






\d>av 




AyffTOS 






((peprepos, Poet.) 




((pepraros, <p4pi<TTOS, Poet.) 


2. 


ko.k6s, bad, 


KaKiwu 
Xeipcov 
Tfjffawv, Att. H\ttwv 




KaKiffros 
X«ipiffros 
Adv. r\Kiffra 


3. 


koXos, beautiful, 


KaXkiwv 




KdWlffTOS 


4. 


a\yeiv6s, painful, 


aXysivSrepos 
aXy'uav 




aXyeivoraTOS 
&Ayiffros 


5. 


/jiaKpSs, long, 


fxaKporepos 
(/jLaaawv, Poet.) 




IxaKpoTaros 

[M-f)KlffTOS 


6. 


fx.iKp6s, small, 


(AlKp6TepOS 




fiiKporaros 






ixdffffwu, Att. ikdrToov 


iAaxLffros 


7. 


6\tyos,few, 


fxelcou 




bxiyiffTos 


8. 


fteyas, great, 


pxlfav 




fieyiffros 


9. 


iro\vs, much, 


7rAe/wj/, or 7rAeW 




irAeTffros 


10. 


pddios, easy, 


pdcou 




paffTos 


11. 


iriirwv, ripe, 


ireiraiTepos 




TreirairaTos 


12. 


iriuv, fat, 


iriSrepos 




iriSraTos. 



Remark 1. The Superlative frpiffros (from "Aprjs, the god of war), and the 
Comp. aixdvwv, have particularly the idea of bravery, boldness; fSeArlwv, like the 
Latin melior, signifies better, in a moral sense, though by no means confined to 
that ; \(£u)v is mostly used in such phrases as XSov iffri, it is better, and \$<ttos 
mostly in the Voc. & Aytrre. The poetic Superlative (p^picrros is found in 
Plato, in the exclamation a <p4piffre ! most worthy ! The irregular forms of 
IMKp6s, viz. eXdfffftav, ihdxtffTos, express both the idea of smallness and fewness 
(6\iyos); but (xelwv generally expresses the idea of fewness, seldom that of 
smallness; the regular forms of /j.iKp6s, viz. /jnKp6repos, -oraros, always retain 
their original idea of smallness, and also bxiyiffros that of fewness, though o\iyos 
often signifies small. 



§84.] ADJECTIVES. ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. Ill 

Eem. 2. The use of the longer and shorter form of the Comparative ir\eiwv, 
fl-AeW, should be particularly noted. The neuter ir\4ov is more frequent than 
irAelov, especially when it is used adverbially ; irKiovos and irXeiovos, irXeovi 
and TrXeiovi, Ace. 7rAeo>, irAeWa, and irXzla), are used indiscriminately ; PI. Nom. 
and Ace, usually irXeiovs, also irXeioves and irXeiovas (but not irX4ous) ; nXelw 
is much more frequent than 7rAeco ; irXeiSvwv and irXeloo-i are more frequent than 
Ttteovaiv and irAeocn. Finally, the shortened form of the Neut. Sing. irXeiv 
(formed from irXtiov), but limited to such phrases as ttXsiv ^ n&pioi> should be 
mentioned as a special Atticism. 

Several adjectives, which express the idea of an order or 
series, have only the Comparative and Superlative forms, 
because, on account of their signification, they cannot be used 
absolutely, but only in comparison. An adverb of place is 
usually the root of these forms of Comparison, e. g. 

from irpd), irpSrepos (prior), irpwros (primus), first. 
" &va>), avwrepos (superior), avdoraros (supremus). 

" vvrep), inreprcpos (superior), higher, {nrdpraros, Poet, viraros (supremus). 
" foro?), vtrrepos (posterior), later, vcrraros (postremus), last. 
" e|), ecrxaTos (extremus), outermost. 

" wXycrlov, prope), (irXTjcrlos, Homeric), irhrjciairepos, or irXycrieo-Tepos 
(proprior), nearer, irXTjo-ialraTos, -4(rraTos (proximus), nearest. 
( " trp6<ro)),far, irpoffdrepos, farther, irpoa&TaTos, farthest. 

Eem. 3. Other adjectives in the Comparative and Superlative, which are 
also derived from adverbs, have no Positive form of the adjective, e. g. Tipe/xa, 
quietly, rjpey.eo'Tepos, ^p^jxiarraTOS ; irpoijpyov, useful, irpovpyiairepos, more useful, 
irpovpyialraros. 

Eem. 4. Comparatives and Superlatives are also formed from substantives. 
Here two cases are to be distinguished : (a) when the substantive, both in form 
and signification, is the Positive from which the Comparative and Superlative 
may be formed, i. e. when the substantive can be considered as an adjective, 
e. g. SovXos, slave, 8ovX6Tepos, more slavish; — (b) when the substantive, in 
respect to the signification, is not really the Positive, but only in respect to the 
form can be considered as the basis of the Comparative and Superlative, the 
proper Positive form having been lost, (comp. Hpa-no-ros from the Epic Kparvs, 
iXeyxurros from the Epic iXeyxfo. ) Numerous examples of the last kind may 
be found in poetry, particularly in Epic. See § 216, Eem. 2. 

Eem. 5. Eor the sake of greater emphasis, the Comparative and Superla- 
tive are sometimes compared, e. g. %0x aTOS (Superb), ecxaTcoTepos, icrxaTdora- 
ros ; so irpuriaros from- irpwros. This is frequent in the Comic writers, seldom 
in Homer and the Tragedians, still more seldom in prose. 



112 



COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 



[$85. 



$ 85. Comparison of Adverbs. 

1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, when compared, have 
commonly no independent adverbial ending ; the Comparative 
is expressed by the Ace. Sing, neuter of the Comparative 
adjective, and the Superlative by the Ace. PI. neuter of the 
Superlative, e. g. 



(TOCpUS 


(from ao<p6s) 


Com. ao<p<t>T€pov 


Sup. ao<pd}tara 


craepws 


( 


' <ra<pT]s) 


<ra<p4<TTepov 


ffa<\>4(nara 


Xapievroos 


( 


' x a P ieis ) 


Xapieffrepov 


Xttpie&TctTa 


€vSaifj.6i/ws 


( 


' evSai/xcov) 


evdai/xoyearTepoy 


€vSai/j.ou4<rraTa 


atVxpcDs 


( 


' altTxpds) 


aXffxiov 


a!((rxio"ra 


7]dews 


( 


' rjdvs) 


ijStoj/ 


ifl8i<TTa 


raxecos 


( 


1 raxvs) 


Sa<T<rov, -ttov 


raxtcTTo. 



Remark 1. The Singular of the Comparative is used, because only two 
objects are compared, and it is affirmed that one of these is better, etc. than 
the other ; but the Plural of the Superlative, because the object compared is 
the best, etc. of many others. 

Rem. 2. But sometimes these adverbs also retain in the Comparative the 
adverbial ending of the Positive -coy, e. g. xaAeircorepcos, a\r)fre<rT4p(os i fiox&ripo- 
r4pas, KaWiovas, especially /j.ei£6va>s, etc. The Neuter Singular is seldom used 
in the Superlative, and belongs mostly to poetry. 

2. All original adverbs in -w, e. g. aVoo, Karoo, e£oo, co-w, etc., 
retain the ending -w regularly in the Comparative, and almost 
uniformly in the Superlative, e. g. 



&vci), above, 
koWw, below, 



Com. av(i)r4po) 

/CCtTCOTepCU 



Sup. cWjtcCtw 
ko.twt6.tw. 



In like manner, most other original adverbs have the ending 
-o> in the Comparative and Superlative, e. g. 



ayxov, near, 
ir4pd, ultra, 
tt]\ov, Jar, 
eKas,far, 
iyyis, near, 



Com. ayxoT4pco 
irepaiT4pa 
rrj\0T4pca 

1/fOCTTe/JCO 

£yyvT4po> 

iyyvrepov 



Sup. ayxoTarroo 

Sup. wanting 

TT/AOTOTCO 

iKacrTOLTca 
iyyvToWu) and 
iyy^JTwra 
iyyurra (rarely). 






H. 86, 87.1 



THE PRONOTTIYS eyw, (TV, ov. 



113 



CHAPTER III. 



The Pronoun. 



$ 86. Nature and Division of Pronouns. 

1. Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea 
of an object, but only the relation of an object to the 
speaker ; i. e. they show whether the object is the speaker 
himself (the first person), or the person or thing addressed 
(the second person), or the person or thing spoken of (the 
third person), e. g. i" (the teacher) give to thee (the scholar) 
it (the book). 

2. All pronouns are divided into five principal classes : 
(1) Personal, (2) Demonstrative, (3) Relative, (4) Interrog- 
ative, (5) Indefinite Pronouns. Pronouns are again di- 
vided, according to their signification and form, into (a) 
Substantive, (b) Adjective, and (c) Adverbial Pronouns, 
e. g. e'7 &) ravra eirolrjo-a', (a) J, thou, he, she, it; (b) my, thy, 
his; (c) here, there, thus. 



I. Personal Pronouns. 

A. Substantive Personal Pronouns. 

§ 87. The simple cyw, ego, o-v, tu, ov, sui. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


iydo, I 

fxov (fiov), ifxov, of me 
fxoi (jaoi), i/JLoi, to me 
fx4 (fie), ifxe, me 


Singular. 
<rv, thou 

(Tov (gov), of thee 
(roi (o~oi), to thee 
<re (o-e), thee 


wanting 

ov (ov), of himself, etc. 
of (ol), to himself, etc. 
e (e), himself etc. 


Dual. 


N.A. 
G.D. 


vd), we both, us both 
v$u, of us both, to us 
both 


ffcpcf), you both 
ar<j>a)V, of you both, 
to you both 


o~(p(0€, Ace. (Poet.), them both 
ff<p(o'iv (crcpca'iv), of them both, 
to them both 


Plural. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


r]fj.e7s, we 

T}fJLWV, of us 

f](up, to us 
t)/aS.s, US 


v[A.e7s,ye (v) 
fy*«"> of you (v) 
vfuu, to you (v) 
v/xus, you (0) 


<r^>e?s, Neut. o~(p£a (Poet.), (o~<f>ea) 
<r<pG)v, of them [they 
C(pi(Ti{v) {a<pi(ri\y\), to them 
o-tpas, Neut. o-<pea (ffepea), them. 



10* 



114 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS i/xaVTOV, (TCaVTOV, iaVTOV. [$ 88. 

Remark 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, 
without any mark of accent. Comp. §§ 33 (b), and 35, 3. On the accentuation 
and use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see § 302, Rem. 3. The Vocative 
is here, as in the following paradigms, omitted, because, when it occurs, it is 
always like the Nominative. 

Rem. 2. The Gen. Sing, of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer, 
often has, among the Attic poets, also the forms i/xefrei/, o~4&ev, ed-ey; these 
forms always retain their accent, except when e'3-ev is not used as a reflexive 
(sui), but as a pronoun of the third person {ejus). Comp. § 35, 3 (b). 

Rem. 3. The Ace. Sing, and PI. of ov has in Attic poetry also the form 
viv {viu) signifying him, her, it, PI. them, e. g. Soph. OR. 868. 1331, instead of 
avrovs and avrds. See the Dialects, § 217. 

Rem. 4. The oblique Cases of ^ue?s and ifius, when not emphatic, some- 
times undergo a certain inclination among the poets, being written in the fol- 
lowing manner : rnxoov vficau, %\ixiv v/j.Iu, or ri/juv vfitv ; still, this inclination 
cannot take place if a Paroxytone precedes. The shorter form of the pronoun 
of the third Pers. is used in the Dat. and Ace. PI. by the poets (also by the 
Attic writers), e. g. Dat. <r(pi (or <r<piv) instead of o~(pio-i{u), to them, Ace. o-<pe 
instead of a<pas, them. Both forms, a<pl and o~<piv, though seldom, are used by 
the poets as the Dat. Sing. ; the form <r<p£, on the contrary, is used much more 
frequently as the Ace. Sing, instead of avrov, -hv, -6, also as reflexive instead 
of kavr6v. 



§ 88. (b) The Reflexive Pronouns, i/xavrov, a-zavrov, 

iavrov . 



Singular. 


G. 


i/Mtvrov, -rjs, of 


aeavrov, -rjs, or 


kavrov, -rjs, or 




myself 


aavrov, -rjs, of thyself 


avrov, -Tjs, of himself, of herself 


D. 


ifiavrcp, -??, to 


(TeavrcS, rj, or 


kavrw, -rj, or [itself 




myself 


ffavrw, rj, to thyself 


airy, -rj, to himself, to herself, to 


A. 


i/xavrou, -r]v, 


aeavrSv, -r)v, or 


kavrov, -7]v, -6, or [itself 




myself 


aavr6v, -~i\v, thyself 


avrov, -i\v, -6, himself, herself 


Plural. 


G. 


71/j.cou avrS>v, of 


v/jlwv avrwv, of your- 


kavruv or avrwv, or 




ourselves 


selves 


a<pS)v abTosv, of themselves 


D. 


Tjfuv avrols, -a?s, 


v/jl?v avrols, -cus, to 


eavroTs -a?s, or avro?s -cus, or 




to ourselves 


yourselves 


(Tcpiffiv avrols -ais, to themselves 


A. 


7}/j.as avrovs, -ds, 


v/xas avrovs, -as, 


kavTovs, -as, -d, or avrovs, -as, 




ourselves 


yourselves 


-a, or 
o~(pas avrovs, -ds, acpia avrd, 
themselves. 



§§ 89-91.] RECIPROCAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 115 



§ 89. (c) Reciprocal Pronouns. 

To express reciprocal relation, the Greek has a special pro- 
nominal form, which is made by the coalescence of aAAoi aAAwv, 
aAAoi aAAois, aAAoi aXXovs, into one word. From the nature of 
the relation, this word can have no Singular. 



Plural Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



aW-ffKwv, of one another 
aW-fi\ois, -ais, -ois 
oAA^Aoi/s, -os, -a 



Dual aWrj\oiv, -ouv, -oiv 
a\X-{]\oiv, -aw, -oiv 
\KK-r\Kw, -d, -a. 



§ 90. B. Adjective Personal Pronouns. 

Personal pronouns, having the form of adjectives, are called 
Possessive pronouns, since they express possession. They are 
formed from the Genitive of substantive personal pronouns : — 

ifj.6s, ->7, -6v, mens, -a, -um, from ifiov ; TjfitTepos, -Tepa, -repov, noster, -tra, -trum, 

from T)ii&v ; 
o~6s, -4), -6v, tuns, -a, -um, from (rod : vpirepos, -repa, -repot* , vester, -tra, -trum, 

from v/jlwv ; 
crcperepos, -ripa, -repov, suus, -a, -urn, from o~<pwv (used in speaking of many ; 

when single persons or things are spoken of, Att. prose always uses the 

Gen. kavTov, -ris). The Epic form, os, H], ov, suus, -a, -wm, also occurs in 

the Tragedians, though seldom. 



91. II. Demonstrative Pronouns. 











Singular. 










the 




hie 


haec hoc 


ipse 


ipsa 


ipsum 


Nom. 


6 


$ r6 


OVTOS 


O.VTT) TOVTO 


avTos 


avTJ\ 


wt6 


Gen. 


TOO 


rrjs rod 


TOVTOV 


TCLVTTJS TOVTOV 


avTov 


OUTTJS 


avTov 


Dat. 


TCfi 


T V Tc f 


TOVTW 


TaVTT] TOVTCti 


avTcp 


ai/TTJ 


avru) 


Ace. 


t6v 


t4]V TO 


TOVTOV 


Tavrnv tovto 
Plural. 


ovt6v 


aVTTJV 


o.vt6 


Nom. 


ol 


at TOL 


OVTOl 


avTai TavTa 


aVToi 


avTai 


avrd 


Gen. 


TWV 


t£>v twv 


TOVTWV 


TOVTWV TOVTWV 


avTwv 


ovtwv 


avT&v 


Dat. 


rots 


TCUS Tots 


TOVTOIS 


TaVTCUS TOVTOIS 


ai>To?s 


avTcus 


avTols 


Ace. 


tovs rds t6, 


TOVTOVS 


TavTas TavTa 


avTovs 


avTas 


avrd 










Dual. 








N.A. 


T(t> 


(Tot) T(il 


TOVTQJ 


{TOVTO.) TOVTOi 


clvto} 


avTtx 


avTit) 


G. D. 


Totv 


TOUV Totv 


TOVTOIV 


TOVTCLIV TOVTOIV 


avTolv 


cwtouv 


clvtoTv. 



1. The pronoun ovtos is composed of the article 6, rj, t6, and the pronoun 
wtos ; where the article has o, a>, or oi, they combine with the first syllable 
of cvt6s and make ov; all other vowels of the article are absorbed by the 



116 



RELATIVE PRONOUN. 



[$92. 



first syllable of avros. Hence the first syllable of ovtos ends in ov where the 
article has o, «, or 01 ; elsewhere in av. The same rule holds when avros is 
compounded with an adjective pronoun, e. g. roaovros (from rocros and avr6s). 

Examples : 6 avr6s = ovtos, t\ avr-f) == avri), to avr6 == tovto ; rod avrov = 
rovrov, r?is avrrjs = ravrrjs, etc. ; so roaos avr6s == rocrovros, r6ct\ avri] == toC- 
avrt], roffov avr6 = tocovto, r6o~ov avrov = roaovrov, etc. 

2. Like <5, r], r6 is declined, o5e, 7j8e, rJSe, roCSe, TTjsSe, PI. ot5e, aVSe, tciSc ; 
Like ovros are declined, toctoutos, ro(rauT7j, togovto{v), tardus, -a, -wm, tojoi/- 
tos, TotauTTj, TotouTo(j'), iafo's, -e, tt]Kikovtos, TTjXucavrri, tt]\ikovto{v), sogreat, 
so old ; it is to be noted, that the neuter Sing., besides the form in o has 
also the common form in ov ; 
Like avros is declined, iiceivos, e/ceij/77, itceivo, he, she, it, #AAos, &K\ri, &\\o, 
alius, alia, aliud, the neuter Sing, here also ending in o. 

Remark 1. The neuter form in o seems to have rejected a 5, as may be 
inferred from the Latin, is, ea, id, ille, -a, -ud, alius, -a, -ud. — On the Dual 
forms, to, raiv, ravra, ravraiv, see § 241, Rem. 10 (b). — Instead of ineTvos, the 
Ionic K€?uos is also used in Attic poetry ; this word occurs somewhat frequently 
in Attic prose, but always after a long vowel or diphthong ; hence Aphaeresis 
(§ 14, 5) must be assumed here, as 3) '/ceiyccs, PL Rp. 2. 370, a. 





Singular. 




Plural. 




Nom. 


roaovros roaravrr} roo~ovro(v) 


roffovroi 


roo~avrai 


roaavra 


Gen. 


rocrovrov roaavrrjs roaovrov 


roaovrwv 


rocovrwv 


roffovruv 


Dat. 


roaovrca roo'avrr) too~ovtm 


roaovrois 


roaavrais 


roaovrois 


Ace. 


roaovrov roo~avrr]V roo'ovro(v) 


roaovrovs 


roo~avras 


rocravra 




Dual. 








N. A. 1 roffovru) roffavra roffoireo 






G. D. [ rocrovroiv roffavraiv roffovroiv. 





Rem. 2. The article usually coalesces by Crasis (§ 10) with avros and forms 
one word, viz. avr6s (instead of 6 avr6s, idem), avrr), ravr6, usually rau- 
r6v (instead of rbai/rS), r avrov, but rrjs avrrjs, ravr^, ravrrj (to distinguish 
it from ravrrj, this), but rbv avrov, r^v avri\v, avroi, avrai, raiird (instead of 
ra. avrd, to distinguish it from ravra, haec), but ruv avrwv, ro?s avro7s, etc. 



92. III. Relative Pronoun. 







Singular. 






Plural. 






Dual. 




"Norn. 


'6s 


5$ 


'6 


o'l 


at 


ti 

a 


to 


a 


to 


Gen. 


ov 


fjs 


ov 


cov 


UV 


wv 


oTv 


aXv 


oTv 


Dat. 


to 


V 


V 


oTs 


ats 


oTs 


oTv 


alv 


oTv 


Ace. 


ov 


T\V 





ovs 


as 


a 


to 


a 


to. 



93.1 



INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 



117 



§ 93. IV. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns. 

The Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns are denoted 
by the same form, but are distinguished by the accent and 
position, the Indefinite being enclitic ($ 33) and placed after 
some word or words, the Interrogative being always accented 
and placed before. 

Remark 1. When the interrogative pronouns stand in an indirect question, 
the relative o is placed before their stem, which, however (except in the case 
of Hsris), is not inflected, e. g. bircuos, 6ir6aos, bnSrepos, etc. 



Sing. N. 


rls, some one N. t2, some thing 


ris ; quis % ri ; quid 1 


G. 


riv6s y or TOV 




rivos, or rod 


D. 


Tivi, or T<J? 




rivi, or t<£ 


A. 


nvd N. r\ 


riva ri 


Plur. N. 


rives N. nvd and arret, 


rives rim 


G. 


rivSiv 




rivcav 


D. 


rio~i(v) 




ria-i(v) 


A. 


nvds N. nvd and &rra 


rivas riva 


Dual N. A. 


rive 




rive 


G. and D. 


rivoiv 




rivoiv. 


N. 


'6sris, whoever j\ris '6 ri 


o'lrives dtrives 


'driva, or arra 


G. 


ovrivos, or '6rov fisrivos 


§>vrivoov (rarely '6 


tqov) 


D. 


(j>TlVL, Or #TO> TJTIVI 


oTsricri(v) (rarely 0Tot(n[i/] ) aTsriari(v) ohri<ri{v) 


A. 


6vriva rjvriva '6 ri 


ovsrivas asrivas 


ariva, or arra 




Dual N. A. &rive, 


irive, G. D. oTvrivo 


iv, aivrtvoiv. 



Rem. 2. The form drra not enclitic (Ion. deca) is often used instead of riva 
in connection with adjectives, e. g. leiva arra, fiiKpa drra, or placed first, e. g. 
r)v yap Stj arra roidSe, PI. Phaedon. 60, e. On the accent of wvrivav, oTvrivoiv, 
ahnvoiv, see § 34, Rem. 1. The shorter forms, orov, orca, etc. are used by the 
dramatists almost always ; orov, '6ra> are also used by the orators ; but orcov, 
'6roo-i(v) are very rare in prose. The negative compounds of rly, viz. ofcis, 
ovn, fir)ris, \iA\ri, no one, nothing, inflect the simple rls merely, e. g. ovrivos, 
oijrives, etc. These forms are poetic ; instead of them, prose writers use ovdeis, 
firjSeis ; only ovn and fj.r)ri are used in prose with the adverbial meaning, in no 
respect, not at all, and in the phrase, ovn ye Si) [p.r)ri ye Sri), let alone then, much 
less. 



Sing. N. 


6 r) rb SeUva, some one, 


some thing 


Plur. ol Selves 


G. 


rov rrjs rov Se?vos 




rcov Seivwv 


D. 


r<2 rfj tgJ Se7vi 




wanting 


A. 


rbv r\\v rb Seiva 




robs SeTvas. 



Rem. 3. 

Se?va. 



AeTva is also used indeclinably, though seldom, e. g. rod r<p rbv 



118 



.' 



a 



9 

$ 94. 



CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



L^ 94 



Correlative Pronouns. 



Under Correlative Pronouns are included all those which 
express a mutual relation (correlation) to each other, so that if 
one implies a question, the other with a corresponding form 
contains the answer. 

1. This mutual relation is either a general or a definite one. The general 
correlation is expressed bjris; ri; who? what? Tis,T\,some one, some thing; 
S5e, ovtos, he, this; iitsiuos, that one; ovSds, no one; '6 s, who, which, etc. Here 
the forms of the correlatives do not correspond with each other, except in the 
case of rls. For example, if a question is asked by rls, the answer may be by 
t\s, '6Se, ovtos, etc. 

2. The definite correlation has four different forms, viz. the Interrogative, 
Indefinite, Demonstrative, and Relative. This fourfold correlation belongs both 
to adjective and adverbial pronouns. All the four forms come from the same 
root, but they are distinguished, partly by a different accent, partly by a differ- 
ent initial : the Interrogative begin with tt, the Indefinite have the same form, 
though with a different accent, the Demonstrative begin with r, and the 
Relative with the Spiritus Asper. The indirect interrogatives, as shown above, 
§ 93, Rem. 1, place the relative 6 before the initial ir. 

3. Correlative adjective pronouns express relations of quantity and quality ; 
correlative adverbial pronouns, the relations of place, time, and manner, or 
condition. 

(a) Adjective Correlatives. 



Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Relat. and De- 
pend. Interrog. 


tt6o~os, -7], -OU; 
how great? how 
much ? quan- 
tus? 


iroff6s, -t\, -6u, 
of a certain 
size, or number, 
aliquantus 


tocos, -tj, -ou, so great, so 

much, tantus 
Too'60'Se, Toar)8e, too'SuSg 
toctoutos, -avTT), -ovto(u) 


Scros, -77, -ou and 

oiroaos, -77, -ou, 

as great, as 

much, quantus 


iroios, -a. -ou ; 
of what kind? 
qualis 1 


iroiSs, -a, -6u, of 
a certain kind 


to7os, -a, -ou, of such a 

kind, talis 
ToiSsdc, ToidSe, ToiSude 

TOIOVTOS, -ai>T7], -OVTo(u) 


oTos, -d, -ou and 
ottoTos. -a, -ou, 

of what kind, 

qualis 


ittiKikos, -7], -ou; 
how great? how 
old? 


wanting 


ttjXikos, -77, -ou, so great, so 
T7)\iK:6s8e, -r)8e, -ouSe [old 

TTjAlKOVTOS, -aVTT], -OVTO{u) 


tjXlkos, -77, -ou and 

OTTYlXlKOS, -7J, -OU, 

as great, as old. 



Remark 1. The simple forms t6<tos and to?os are seldom used in Attic 
prose ; too-os and toIos are found, in the phrase, toIos 7) to7os, PI. Phaedr. 271, 

d, and elsewhere; toctos ko.1 too-os (PL ib.) ; 4k togov (so long time since), PI. 
Leg. 642, at end ; roVy with a Comparative, corresponding to the relative &ro>, 

e. g. Th. 8, 24. X. Cy. 1. 6, 26. Vect. 4, 32. 



H5.] 



LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUN. 



119 





(b) Adverb 


ial Correlatives. 


* 


Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Eelative. 


Indirect 
Interrog. 


ttov ; where ? 


ttov, somewhere, 


wanting (hie, 


ou, where, 


oirov, where. 


ubi? 


alicubi 


ibi) 


ubi 


ubi 


Tr6&ev; whence? 


iro&ev, from some 


wanting (hinc, 


o&ev, whence, 


OTTO&ef, 


unde'? 


place, alicunde 


inde) 


unde 


ivhence,xm&e 


iroii; whither? 


ttoi, to some place, 


wanting (eo) 


of, whither, 


oTroi,whither, 


quo? 


aliquo 




quo 

ore, when, 


quo 


7TOT6 ; when ? 


irore, some time, 


r6re, then, turn 


owSre, 


quando ? 


aliquando 




quum 


when, 
quando 


TrrjviKa ; quo 


wanting 


rnvi- ") hoc 


T)v'iKa, when, 


OTT-nviKa, 


temporis punc- 




k65s 1 ipso 
Trjvi- j tem- 


quo ipso 


when, quo 


to ? quota ho- 




tempore 


ipso tem- 


ra? 




Kavra J pore 




pore 


TTWS ; how? 


irws, some how 


ovrco(s) wSe, so 


&>s, how 


OTTtoS, how 


irrj ; whither ? 


irf], to some place, 


Trjde ( hither, 
ravTT) \ or here 


rj, where, 


o7T7j. where, 


how? 


thither, in some way 


whither 


whither. 



Rem. 2. The forms to express the idea of here, there (hie, ibi), wanting in 
the Common language, are supplied by ivrav&a, ev^dSe, and the idea of hence, 
thence (hinc, inde), by ivSrevde, iurev&ej/', ev&a and ev&ev in the old and poetic 
language have both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a 
relative sense, except in certain phrases, e. g. evSa jxev — ev&a 5e, hie, illic, 
ev&ev Kal ev&ev, hinc, illinc, and when the signification of place is changed to 
that of time, e. g. ev&a Xeyei, then he says, evSfev, thereupon. The forms rct>s, thus, 
Tfi, hither, here, are poetic ; &s (instead of ovtms), is also for the most part 
poetic ; in prose, it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, e. g. Kal &s, vel 
sic, ovS' (jUtjS') 8>s, ne sic quidem, and in comparisons, ws — 8>s, ut — sic, PI. Ep. 
7. 530, d. Prot. 326, d. ; also &s ovv, so then, Th. 3, 37. 



§ 95. Lengthening of the Pronoun. 

Some small words are so appended to the pronouns, for the purpose of giving 
a particular turn to their signification, that they coalesce and form one word. 
They are the following : — • 

(a) The enclitic ye is joined to the Personal pronouns of the first and second 
person, in order to make the person emphatic, by putting him in contrast with 
others, e. g. ey&rye, I for my part. The pronoun iyd then draws back its accent 
in the Nom. and Dat. e. g. eycoye, ey.ovye T efioiye, e/xeye, crvye. As ye can be 
joined with any other word, so also with any other pronoun, but it does not 
form one word with the pronoun, e. g. olr6s ye. 

(b) The particles St? (most commonly d-fjirore), and ovu, are appended to 
relatives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to Zeros, in 
order to make the meaning general or indefinite, i. e. to extend it to everything 
embraced in the object denoted by the pronoun, e. g. dsTLsd-f], osTisd-hiroTe, ostis- 
Srjirorow, dsrisow, TjTisow, Sriovu, whoever it be, I know not xvho, nescio quis, qui- 
cunque (Gen. ovtivosovv or brovovv, ^stivosovv, Dat. u>tivlovv or 6twovv, etc.) ; — 
diroffosdJ], ovrocrosovv, oaos^iroTe, quantuscunque ; — dirr]\ucosovv, however great, 
how old soever ; so also wsirepovv [comp. (d)]. 



120 NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [$ 96. 

• (c) The suffix Se is joined with some demonstratives for the purpose of 
strengthening their demonstrative relation, e. g. oSe, ^5e, To'Se ; roiosde ; roaos- 
8e; TT)\uc6sde, from io7os, tocos, t7)\Ikos, which change their accent after Se is 
appended (§ 34, Eem. 3). 

(d) The enclitic irep is appended to all relatives, in order to strengthen the 
reference to a demonstrative, and thus to connect the relative more closely with 
its antecedent ; hence it denotes, even who, which, the very man, who, etc. e. g. 
osirep, ?j7rep, oirep (Gen. ovirep, etc.) ; ocros-rrep, o?6s7rep (Gen. oo-oinrep, o'iovirep, etc.) ; 
o&iirep, o&emrep. 

(e) The inseparable demonstrative r, is appended to demonstratives and some 
few adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative sense. It takes the 
acute accent (which yet, according to § 31, I., is changed into the grave in con- 
nected discourse) and absorbs every short vowel immediately preceding it, and 
also shortens the long vowels and diphthongs : — 

ouToat, this here (hicce, celui-ci), ainrji, tout/, 

Gen. rovToiit, ravr-nai, Dat. rovTcjpT, ravrfji, PI. ovroii, avrau, tout/; 

oSr, 7?8r, ToSr from 6'8e ; wdi from £>8e ; ovTcoai from ovtcvs ; 

ivTev&evi from ij/rev&ev ; iv&aSi from eV3-a5e ; vvvi from vvv ; Sevpi from Sevpo. 



CHAPTER IV. 

The Numerals . 

§ 96. Nature and Division of Numerals. 

1. Numerals express the relation of number and quantity. 
They are divided into the following classes, according to their 
signification : — 

(a) Cardinals, which express a definite number absolutely, 
and answer the question, how many ? e. g. one, two, three. The 
first four Numerals and the round numbers from 200 (oWoVioi) 
to 10,000 (jxyptoi) and their compounds, are declined; but all the 
others are indeclinable. The thousands are expressed by 
adverbial Numerals, e. g. rpisyikioi, 3^00. 

(b) Ordinals, which denote a series, and answer the question, 
which one in the series? All have the three endings of adjec- 
tives, -os, -7], -ov, except Sevrepos, which has -o?, -a, -ov. All up 
to 19, except 2, 7, 8, end in -tos and have the accent as near 
as possible to the beginning of the word. From 20 upwards 
they end in -o-tos. 

Remark 1. Adverbial Ordinals, which also denote a series, are expressed by 
the Neut. Sing, or PI., with or without the article, but sometimes also with the 
adverbial ending -us, e. g. itpurov, to irpurov, irpura, ra irpura, Trpcarus. 



$ 96.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. 121 

(c) Numeral adverbs, which express how often, or how many 
times anything has happened, and which answer the question, 
hoiv many times ? They are formed, except the first three, from 
the ordinals with the ending -a/as, e. g. 7revTa/as, Jive times 
98). 

(d) Multiples, which show the number of parts of which 
a whole is composed, and answer the question, how many fold? 
All are compounded of irXovs, and are adjectives of three end- 
ings, -ov ?, -rj, -ovv ($$ 76, I, and 77). 

airXovs, -t), -ovv, single; SiirXovs (2), rpLirXovs (3), rerpwrrXovs (4), irevrairXovs 
(5), e^cnrXovs (6), kirrairXovs (7), OKrcnrXovs (8), iuvairXovs (9), Se/cairAoOs (10), 
enaTOVTairXovs (100), X'AicnrAoOs (1000), (xvpiairXovs (10,000). 

Eem. 2. The adverbial Multiples in answer to the question, how many 
fold ? or into how many parts ? are formed from the Cardinals with the ending 
-%a or -xv and -%£$, e. g. irevraxo., TrevraxVi Tr^urax^s. 

(e) Proportionals, which denote a proportion, and answer the 
question, how many times more ? All are compounded with the 
endings -7rAao-ios, -id, -iov (more seldom -7rAao-iW, -ov, e. g. eKarov- 
Ta7rAao-iW, -ov) : — 

ZnrXaaios, twice as much (as another which is taken as an unit), rpnrXd<rios 
(3), reTpaTrXdaios (4), 7rej/Ta7rAa(nos (5), e^airXao-ios (6), 4TTT07rAa(rzos (7), o/cra- 
irXdaios (8), hvcnrXdcios (9), SeKaTrAao-ios (10), kKaTovrairXdaios (100), ^iAto- 
TrAaa-tos (1000), fivpioirXd(Tios (10,000). 

(f ) Substantive Numerals, which express the abstract idea 
of number. Except the first, all are formed from the Cardinals 
with the ending -as, Gen. -aSos : — 

r) fiovds (from fxouos, only), more seldom rj hvds, unity ; dvds, duality; rpids (3). 
rerpds (4), Trevrds or Tre^ir-ras (5), e£as (6), ^dofids (7), 6y8ods (8), ivveds (9). 
Se/cas (10), et/cas (20), rpiaKas (30), rerrapaKovrds (40), irevTr/KOvrds (50), e/ca- 
Toi/ras (100), xiAias (1000), /lupck (10,000), 5vo fivpidSes (20,000). 

Eem. 3. In addition to the Numerals mentioned above, there is still another 
class, which does not, like those, express a definite number, but either an 
indefinite number or an indefinite quantity, e. g. Zvioi, some ; Trdvres, all ; iroX- 
Xoi, many (§ 77); oXiyoi, few; bxiyov, bxlya, a little; ovSels, no one; ouSeV, 
nothing, etc. 

2. Numerals, like pronouns, are divided, according to then 
signification and form, into Substantive, Adjective, and Adver- 
bial Numerals, e. g. rpch yjXSov ; 6 toi'tos avrjp ; toi's. 

u 



122 



NUMERALS. 



[W 97, 98. 



$ 97. Numeral Signs. 

1. The Numeral Signs are the twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, to 
which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after e, Bad, or the Digamma F, or 
2t?, s- ; the last character is taken from the figure r, which is a mutilated form 
of the Digamma, but which has only an accidental resemblance to the abbre- 
viation of cr (s-) and t (§ 1, Rem. 2) ; — KoWa, 5, as the sign for 90; — 'Xafnr?, 
^ , as the sign for 900. 

2. The first eight letters, i. e. from a to & with the Bad or 2t7, denote the 
units ; the following eight, i. e. from i to ir with the KoWa, the tens ; the last 
eight, i. e. from p to w with the ^a/xir?, the hundreds. 

3. Up to 999, the letters as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark 
placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral 
signs, only the last has this mark. With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but 
the letters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, o' = 1, p. = 
1000, { = 10, ,t = 10,000, rffiff = 5742, ,a«/*j8' = 1842, p' = 100, t p = 
100,000. 





$ 98. Principal Clas 


ses of Numerals. 




Cardinals. 




Ordinals. 


1 a' 


ets, fjiid, ev 




irpwros, -77, -ov, primus, -a, -nm 


2& 


Suo 




SeuTepos, -d, -ov 


3 7' 


rpus, rpio 




rptTos, -77, -ov 


4 8' 


reTTopes, -a, or 


TeWaoey, -a 


rirapros, -77, -ov 


5e' 


TOT6 




ireft-XTos, -7], -ov 


6 s-' 


II 




'(tKTos, -77, -op 


7C 


|7TT££ 




e/35ouos, -77, -ov 


8„' 


OKTC<5 




fiydoos, -77, -ov 


9&' 


evvea 




lyaros, -77, -ov 


10/ 


Se/co 




Se/caTos, -77, -ov 


11 la 


eVSe/ca 




kvZeKaTOS, -77, -ov 


12 i/3' 


8w5e/ca 




SwSeKOToy, -77, -ov 


13 17' 


Tpe?s (Tpta) na\ Sena 1 


Tp'iTos, -77, -ov /cat dinar 05, -77- -op 3 


14 iS' 


TeTTapes(a) /cal 5e'/ca 2 


rerapros, -77, -ov /cal Sckotos, -77, -ov 


15 i€' 


irevTeieaideKa 




ire/xiTTOS, -77, -op «ai Se/coTos, -77, -ov 


16 is- 7 


e/c/<ai8e/ca 




6/ctos, -77, -op Kal detcaros, -77, -ov 


17*' 


eTTTa/caiSe/ca 




efidofjLOs, -77, -oj/ /cat SeKaros, -77, -ov 


&* 


QKT(s)KCiSe/C« 




cfySoos, -77, -ov /cal Se/caTOS, -77, -ov 


r tS' 


ewea/cai'Sewa 




evaros, -77, -ov /cal SeKaros, -77, -ov 


20 k' 


tfKO(Tl{v) 




tiKOOTo's, -7^, -oV 



1 The rare Attic form rpisKaideica is indeclinable. 
3 The non- Attic form Tecnraoa/cafcie/ca is indeclinable. 

3 The forms given from the 13th to the 19th are preferable tp rpisKa^KwroSy 
TfTTapaKaiSfKaTos, irevTtKaiZtKaros, etc. 



s ys.j 


NUMERALS. ] 




Cardinals. 


Ordinals. 


21 ko! 


e?KO(riv efs, ju/a, ev 


et/COtTTby, -?/, -OV, TTpWTOS, -7}, -OV 


30 A/ 


TptOKOfTO 


rpia.KO(xr6s, --fj, -6v 


40 ft' 


reTTopa/covTa 


rerrapa.KO(Xr6s, -77, -oV 


50 v' 


7r€PT77KOJ/Ta 


ttevrn]KO(Tr6s, -77, -oV 


60 £' 


4|rj/coj/Ta 


e£a/co(rros, -77, -of 


70 o' 


efido/ATIKOPTa 


efffiofMyKocrros, -i], -oV 


80 ir' 


6ySor)K0UTa 


6y5o7]KO(rr6s, -77, -oV 


90 5' 


iv€vi]KOVTO. 


£vevr\Koo~r6s. l -77, -oV 


100 p' 


e/earoV 


kKaro(TT6s, -t^, -oV 


200 (/ 


Siattocrioi, -at, -a 


StdKOO-lOCTjs, -7^, -dV 


300 t' 


rpi&K6<rioi, -at, -a 


rpiaKO(rioo~r6s, -^7, -op 


400 v 


rerpaK6<rioi, -at, -a 


rsrpa.KO<Tiocrr6s : -77, -oV 


500 <j/ 


irevra.K6(rioi, -ai, -a 


TTej/raKoo-too'To's, -7^, -oV 


600 x' 


e|d/cocrtoi, -o», -a 


e|a(coo-tocrTJs, -77, -oV 


700 f 


eTrraKoVtot, -at, -a 


eirra.Ko<Tio(rT6s, -77, -op 


800 «' 


oKTa.K6<noi, -at, -a 


OKTa/COO-tOCTT^S, -7^, -Of 


900 *% 


ivvanoaioi, -ai, -a 


ivvaKo<xio'(TT6s, -77, :<Jj» 


1000 ,a 


X&101, -at, -a 


XtA.too'To's, -117, -oV 


2000 ,0 


tiisx&ioi, -ai, -a 


SisxifooarSs, -77, -oV 


3000 /y 


rpisx^oi, -ai, -a 


rpisx^o<rr6s, -^7, -oV 


4000 ,5 


TZTpaKisx'ifooi, -ai, -a 


TeTpa/CtSX'*-'00"rOS', -7^, -oV 


5000 ,e 


irevTaKisx^oh -«'» -a 


irevraKisxiA-ioo'rds, -tj, -oV 


6000 ,r 


^olkisx^oi, -ai, -a 


e4o/ctsx'A.'oo-T(Js, -7'/, -oV 


7000 ,£ 


47rra/«sxtAtot, -at, -a 


67TTaKtSXtXtOO-T({s, -7^, -dV 


8000 fl 


oktolkisx^oij -cu, -a 


OKraKisx^oar6s, -77, -oV 


9000 ^ 


ivvaicisxfaioi, -cu, -a 


£vvaKisx^o<rr6s, -1(7, -oV 


10,000 ji 


fivpioi, -cu, -a 


fivpio<rr6s, -77, -oV 


20,000 /T 


Sis/Jivpioi, -at, -a 


8isp.vpio<Tr6s, -7^, -oV 


100,000 ,p 


SeKaKisfivpioi, -cu, -a 


Se/faKts/tuptocTTo'y, -77, -oV 


1,000,000 ifi 


kKOTovTaKisfxvpioi, -at, -a 


iKarovraKisfivpioarSs, -^7, -oV 


2,000,000 Kfi 


StaKocriaKispvpioi, -cu, -a 


8ia,Ko<riaKisfji.vpio<rT6s, --f], -6v. 




Numeral Adverbs. 


1 aVa£, owce 


13 rpisKculieKolKts 


50 Trevrt)KovrdKis 


2 5ty, fwi'ce 


14 rerrapesKafieKaKis 60 kl-i)KOvrdKis 


3 rpis 


15 irej/Te/catSe/ca/cts 70 e^SofnjKOurdKis 


4 T€Tpa.KlS 


16 €KKai8eK<xKis 


80 6y5oT]KovrdKis 


5 TTefra'/cts 


17 eTrraAcatSeKci/cti 


90 £vivt)KovrdKis 


6 e|d/«s 


18 OKTCtiKcuZenaKii 


100 kKarovraKis 


7 eTTTa/cts 


19 ewea/catSe/cct/cts 200 SiaKocridKis 


8 bicTaKis 


20 eluoaoLKis 


300 rpiaKoaridKis 


9 eWectats, iydKiz 21 e'lKOffaKis aired 


1000 x«*-"*Kts 


10 SeKcfots 


22 elKoadicis Sis 


2000 StsxtA-taW 


11 ivS&cdicis 


30 rpia.Kovrd.Kis 


10,000 fxvpidKis 


12 5a>5c/c<i/m 


40 rtrrapaKovrdKis 20,000 SisfxvpidKts. 



123 



124 REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. [$ 99. 



§ 99. Remarks. 

1. The rarer subordinate forms of 13, 14, etc., used by later writers, are 
Se/coTpeis, Neut. SenaTpia, Se/coTeTTapes, -o, 8e/ca7reVre, etc. 

2. Mvpioi, 10,000, when Paroxytone (jxvpioi), signifies innumerable. 

3. In compound numerals, the smaller number either precedes the larger, 
and then always with itai, or it follows the larger, usually with /ecu, sometimes 
without it. The first order corresponds with the usage in English, e. g. Jive 
and twenty; the second only in part, e. g. twenty-Jive, e. g. 

25 : 7reVre /col eftcocrt(j'), or efrcocn /ecu* ?reVre, 
345 : -Trevre /col r^rrapaKovra /col rpiaK6aioi, or rpiax. T6TT. /col ir. 

The same holds of the Ordinals, e. g. 

ireiAirros /col eiKO<rr6s, or elfcoarTOS /col ire/xinos. 

4. The tens compounded with 8 or 9 are frequently expressed in the form of 
subtraction, by means of the participle of 5eiV, to want, which agrees with the 
larger number, e. g. 

49 : irevT-fiKovra whs ScVto err) 1 , undequinquaginta anni, 
48 : TrevT^KOvra Svolv 84ovra err], duodequinquaginta anni, 
39 : VTjes pnas Ssovcrai TerrapdicovTa, undequadraginta naves. 

So with the Ordinals, e. g. 

49 : kvbs 5eW ■jrevTTjKoo'Tbs avr\p, undequinquagesimus vir. 

5. Fractions are usually expressed by fidpos or fiotpa. These words, as 
denominators of the fraction, are put in the Gen., depending on the numeral 
which denotes the numerator. If they are expressed as denominators, they are 
understood with the numeral denoting the numerator ; if they are expressed 
as numerators, they are understood with the numeral denoting the denominator, 
e. g. -5 is ruv irevre (xep&v to Svo [fieprj], or rwv 7reVre [/iepwj/] to dvo pepy, two 
parts of the Jive; § is t5>v 0KT(b fxoipwv at ir4vrc [fx.o7pai], or rwv oktu [fioipuv] at 
Zvo (xolpai. But one half is expressed by compounds with rim, e. g. j^uiSopet/cJj', 
half a daric ; so in the PL Tpta, ttsvts ^utSapei/ca, a daric and a half, two darics 
and a half. — Fractions are also expressed by an ordinal with [j.6piov or pepos, 
e. g. TpiTt]p.6piou or rpirov p.4pos = £, irefxinov /xepos = ■§■ ; a mixed number is 
also expressed by tj/xi preceded by a numeral, e. g. ireVre r)[u8apeiKd = 2^ darics, 
also by iwi prefixed to an ordinal, e. g. lirirpnov = l£, iTriTre/xirTov = 1-^. 

6. The Cardinal numbers compounded with <rvv are equivalent to the Latin 
distributives, e. g. avvZvo (bini), two together, two at a time, each two, trwrpeis 
(terni), a-v/xirevTe (quini), etc. 

1 Fifty years, wanting one. 



$ 100.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE ADVERB. 125 

7. Declension of the first four Numerals : — 



Nom. 


els fj.la '4v 


hvo 


Gen. 


eras [Mas eras 


Bvo?v (very seldom Sveiv) 


Dat. 


evl /xt$ kvi 


Svo7u (Svtri[v] Ionic and Th. 8, 101.) 


Ace. 


era ixiav eV 


Svo 


Nom. 


rpe?s Neut. rpia 


rerrapes, or TeWapes Neut. rcrrapa 


Gen. 


rpiwv 


rerTapwv 


Dat. 


rpi<ri[v) 


T€TTap<ri(v) 


Ace. 


rpeis Neut. *rpia 


rirrapas Neut. rirrapa 



Remark. Like els are also declined ovdels and fiySe'is, no one ; like efs too 
they have the irregular accent, e. g. ovSeis, ovdefxia, ov54v, Gen. ovdev6s, orae- 
fiias, Dat. ovSevty ovSe/xia, etc. ; but in the PL ovSeVes (/i7j5eVes),--e'ra>*', -4o~i(v), 
-eras. Comp. further, § 65, 3 (c). The form Svw, instead of Svo, seems to be 
foreign to the Attic dialect. Avo is often used as indeclinable in all the Cases. 
*Au<f>«, both, is declined like Svo, Gen. and Dat. a/x(po7v, Ace. &fj.<pa>. 



CHAPTER V. 






The Adverb. / 



§ 100. Nature and division of the Adverb. 

Adverbs (§§38 and 314) are indeclinable words, denoting 
the relations of place, time, manner, modality, intensity, and 
repetition. They are formed either from essential words 
(§ 38, 3), viz. Substantives, Adjectives, Participles, or from 
formal words, viz. Pronouns and Numerals, or they are 
primitive words, e. g. ov, fir), tcai, yur]v, rj, av, etc. 

(a) Adverbs of place, e. g. ovpav6&ev, coelitus, iravraxVi ubivis; 

(b) Adverbs of time, e. g. ra/cTap, noctu, vvv, nunc ; 

(c) Adverbs of manner, e. g. koKSjs, ovtw(s) ; 

(d) Adverbs of modality, which, e. g. rai and ov{tc), express an affirmation and 
negation, or e. g. [a4\v, roi, %, % pA\v, Srj, 'l<rws, ttov, &v, iravTus, etc. which 
express certainty, dejiniteness, uncertainty, conditionahty ; 

(e) Adverbs of intensity and frequency, e. g. p.d\a, irdvv, iroXv, '6<rov, etc. rpls, 
three times; av&is, again; iroXXaias, often. 

11* 



126 FORMATION OP ADVERBS. [$ 101. 



$ 101. Formation of Adverbs. 

1. Most Adverbs axe formed from adjectives by the ending 
-cos. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the adjective ; 
hence, as the stem of adjectives of the third Dec. appears in the 
Gen., and as adjectives in the Gen. PL are accented like 
adverbs, the following rule for the formation of adverbs from 
adjectives may be given : — 

Change -cov, the ending of the adjective in the Gen. PI., into -cos, 
e.g. 

<pl\-os, lovely, Gen. PI. <pl\-wv Adv. <pl\-ws 

Kak-6s,fair, " kolK-Siv tcaK-Sis 

Kalpi-os, timely, " naipl-uv Kcupl-ws 

air\(6-os)ovs, simple, " air\(6-uv)wv air\(6-cos)&s 

€ijv(o-os)ovs, benevolent, " (evu6-uv) etivwv (cvv6-m) svvws 

iras, all, travros, " irdvr-wv iravr-ws 

adxppwv, prudent, " aoxppov-tav cu><pp6v-<i>s 

Xapieis, pleasant, " x a P l * UT ~ wv x a P l * t/r ' ws 

raxvs, swift, " rax^-ay rax^-us 

fieyas, great, " fxeyd\-uy fieydx-ws 

aK-nfrf}S, true, " a\rj^(4-a>p)uv a\7)&(4-us)us 

ovv-fifrns, accustomed, " (avvn&i-wv) <rvv4]&o)V (ffvwn&e-ws) crvvi]&us. 

Remark 1. On the accent of compounds in -r\^ws, and of the compound 
avrdpKws, see § 59, Rem. 4, also on the accent of etfvcus, instead of ew&s, § 49, 
3. On the comparison of Adverbs, see § 85. 

2. In addition to the adverbs with the ending -cos, there are 
many which have the endings of the Gen., Dat, or Ace. 

(a) The Gen. ending appears in many adverbs in -77s and -ov, 
e. g. c^s, ec/>e£>7s, in order; iiaTrCvrjs, suddenly ; ttov> alicubi ; ttov, 
ubi ? oirov, ov, ubi ; avrov, ibi ; ov8ap,ov y nowhere. 

(b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. or Locative 1 ending, occurs 
in the following adverbs, 

(o) In adverbs with the ending -i, e. g. fjpi, in the morning, comp. ?jp, spring, 
awpt, unseasonably ; %ktiti (Dor. <zk<xti), aeK-nri, tKovrt, aeKovrt; in adverbs 
of manner in -ef and -f, from adjectives in -qs and -775, and almost exclu- 
sively in adverbs compounded of a privative and iras or avros, e. g. 
-navopnei and Trauop/xt On the use of both forms, see Large Grammar, 
Part I, $ 363 (0). 

1 The Locative Case, is one which denotes the place where. 



§ 102.] CLASSES OF THE VERB. 127 

(j8) In local adverbs in -o?, commonly derived from substantives of the sec- 
ond Dec, e. g. 'IcrS/iot from 'Io-3/ios, TlvSoi from Tlv&d, Me-yapo? (ret 
Mtyapa), Tieipcuo?, KikvvvoI from t) Kluvvva), of, oiroi, quo, whither, oXkoi, 
domi, from oIkos. 

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -o?, derived from substantives, denote an indefinite 
where, but those derived from pronouns commonly denote the direction whither, 
yet sometimes the indefinite where. 

(y) In local adverbs in -at. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g. 
Xay-a'h humi, ird\ai. To this form corresponds the PI. locative form 
-77 (Ti (i/), or where t precedes, -do-iu, derived from substantives of the first 
Dec. ; this ending originally belonged to plural substantives only, but 
was transferred later to substantives in the singular number, e. g, ©77/377- 
(ti{v) from 0f;/6cu, * P&i\v7)<Ti{v) from 'A&rjvai, n\aTcua<ri(j/) from IIAoTotoi ; 
Tlspya<Tri(Ti(v) from Tlepycurr}, '0\vfnridcrt(v) from 'OXv/xiria. 

(8) In adverbs in -77 and -d, e. g. &X\-,i, zr4p-n, 7re^, on foot ; fcpv<prj, \dfrpa t 
el/cTj, teinere ; ovdafiri, 877^00-10, publice ; koivtj, in common ; tSio, privatim ; 
Kojjudrj, diligenter ; also 71-77, ^ 7r7 ?5 ttoVttj, 7'/, T77, TijSe, touttj, etc. 5 77 and a com- 
monly have an Iota subscript. 

(c) The Ace. ending occurs in the following forms, 

(o) In the endings -17 v and -ok, e.g. irpw-qv; [ia.Kpdv,far ; irepav and ir4prjv t 

trans (but irspa, ultra), etc.; so also of substantives, e. g. Ziicnv, instar; 

aKp.-f)v {acme), scarcely ; 8o>peaV, gratis. 
(j8) In the ending -ov, e. g. 5r)p6v, diu; o-f]fxepoy, hodie ; avpiov, to-morrow. 
\y) In the endings -Soy, -d-qv, -5a (adverbs of manner), e. g. avTo<rx^6v % 

cominus ; x av Sdv, linroTpoxdSrjv, cbroo-TaSa. 
(8) In some substantive forms in the Ace. of the third Dec, e. g. x&P lv i for 

the sake of; irpo?Ka, gratuitously. 



CHAPTER VI 

The Verb. 

Nature and Division of the Verb. 

$ 102. Classes of the Verb. 

1. The Verb expresses an action or state, which is af- 
firmed of a subject, e. g. the father writes, the rose blooms, 
the boy sleeps, God is loved. 

2. Verbs are divided into the following classes : — 

(1) Active verbs, which express an action, that the sub- 
ject itself performs or manifests, e. g. ypd<f>co, to write ; 
^aXkw, to bloom (comp. § 248) ; 

(2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, which express an action 
that the subject performs on itself, the subject being, 



128 VERBS. TENSES. [$ 103. 

therefore, both agent and object, e. g. (BovkevojAai,, I 
advise myself, I deliberate ; 
(3) Passive verbs, which express an action that the sub- 
ject receives from another object, e. g. rvTrro/j^ao virb 
tlvos, I am smitten by some one. 
3. Verbs, which are used only in the middle form, are 
called Deponent. They have either a reflexive or intransi- 
tive meaning. They are divided into Middle Deponents, 
which have a middle form for their Aorist and Future, e. g. 
^apt^ofjiaL, gratificor, Aor. i^apicrdjjbrjv, Fut. yapiovpuai ; and 
into Passive Deponents, which have a Passive form for 
their Aorist, but commonly a middle form for then Fut., 
e. g. iv^v/jbio/xai, mecum reputo, Aor. ive^vfirf^rjv, mecum 
reputavi, Fut. ev^vfjurjo-o/jLac, mecum reputabo. Comp. § 197. 

§ 103. The Tenses. 

1. The Tenses denote the time of the action of the verb. 
The Greek has the following Tenses : — 

I. (1) Present, fiovXevco, I advise, 

(2) Perfect, {3e/3ov\evfca, I have advised; 
II. (3) Imperfect, iftovkevov, I ivas advising, 

(4) Pluperfect, i(3e(3ov\evKeiv, I had advised, 

(5) Aorist, iftovXevaa, I advised (indefinite) ; 
III. (6) Future, fiovXevcrco, I shall or ivill advise, 

(7) Future Perfect (almost exclusively in the mid- 
dle form), ^€^ov\evaofiat, I shall have advised my- 
self, or i" shall have been advised. 

2. All the Tenses may be divided into, 

a. Principal tenses : Present, Perfect, and Future ; 

b. Historical tenses : Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. 

Remark. The Greek has two forms for the Perf. and Pluperf. Act., two for 
the simple Fut. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass., and Mid. Aorist ; these 
two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses ; i. e. the 
first Perfect is a primary tense, the second Perfect a secondary tense, etc. 
Still, only a very few verbs have both forms : most verbs construct the ahove 
tenses with one or the other form, but not with both. No verb has all the 



$$ 104, 105.] VERBS. MODES. PARTICIPIALS. 129 

tenses. Pure verbs (§ 1 08, 5) form, with very few exceptions, only the primary 
tenses. Mute and liquid verbs (§ 108, 5) may form both the primary and 
secondary tenses, but no verb has all the forms in use. The Fut. Perf., which 
is found in but few verbs, is entirely wanting in liquid verbs. It is seldom 
found in verbs which have the temporal augment (§ 121), e. g. cupew, to take, 
rip-fio-opai, PI. Prot. 338, c., arifidco, to dishonor, rjTi/julxroixai, Dem. 19, 284. 



$ 104. The Modes. 

The Modes denote the manner in which the action of 
the verb is represented, whether as a direct affirmation, a 
condition, or a command, etc. (comp. § 258, seq.) The 
Greek has the following Modes : — 

I. The Indicative, which makes a direct affirmation, e. g. 
the rose blooms, bloomed, will bloom. 

II. The Subjunctive, which expresses what is merely- 
conceived, or conditional. The Subjunctive of the his- 
torical tenses is called the Optative. Comp. <ypd<f>oifu with 
scriberem. 

Remark. See § 257, 2 (a), (b), and Rem. 1, for the manner in which the 
Aorist may use both forms of the Subj., and how the Future may have an 
Optative. 

III. The Imperative, which expresses a command, e. g. 
fiovkeve, advise. 

$ 105. Participials (Infinitive and Participle). 

Besides the modes, the verb has two forms, which, as 
they partake both of the nature of the verb and also of 
the nature of the substantive and adjective, are called 
Participials : — 

(a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive participial, 
e. g. i^e\(o fi o v\ e v e i v, I wish to advise, and to fiovXeveiv, 
the advising. 

(b) The Participle, which is the adjective participial, e. g. 
fiovXevwv dvrjp, a counsellor. 

Remark. These two participials maybe called verbum infinitum; the re- 
maining forms of the verb, verbum Jinitum. 



130 VERBS. STEM, AUGMENT, AND REDUPLICATION. [H 106-108. 



$ 106. The Persons and Numbers. 

The personal forms of the verb show whether the sub- 
ject of the verb be the speaker himself (I, we, first person) ; 
or a person or thing addressed (thou, you, second person) ; or 
a person or thing spoken of (he, she, it, third person). They 
also show the relation of number: Singular, Dual, and 
Plural (comp. § 41, 1), e. g. fiovXevco, I, the speaker, advise ; 
fiovkevets, thou, the person addressed, advisest; fiovXevei, he, 
she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; fiovXeverov, 
ye two, the persons addressed, advise ; ftovXevovai, they, the 
persons spoken of, advise. 

Kemakk 1. The student will at once observe that the ending, or personal 
forms of the Greek verb, determines the person and number without the subject 
being expressed. So in Latin. But in English, as the verb is not varied so 
as to indicate the person and number of itself, the subject must be expressed. 

Rem. 2. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual throughout the 
Act., and none for the Pass. Aorists ; in these instances it is expressed by the 
form of the first Pers. PL 

/ 

$ 107. Conjugation. 

Conjugation is the inflection of the verb in its Persons, 
Numbers, Modes, Tenses, and Voices. The Greek has 
two forms of conjugation, that in -co, which includes much 
the larger number of verbs, e. g. fiovXev-co, and the older, 
original conjugation in -/ii, e. g. io-ttj-juuc, to station. 



Conjugation of Vekbs in -w. 

$ 108. Stem, Augment, and Reduplication. — Char- 
acteristic. 

1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the 
ground-form of the verb, and into the syllables of formation, by 
which the relations of person, number, tense, etc. are denoted. 
The stem is found in most verbs in -w by cutting off the ending 
of the first Pers. Ind. Pres., e. g. /?ov/W-w, Aey-w, rpt)8-a). 



$$ 109, 110.] VERBS. INFLECTION AND TENSE-ENDINGS. 131 

2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings 
to the stem, and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. /?ovAev-a>, 
fiovXev-aro), fiovXeu-o-ofxai, or are prefixed to the stem, and are 
then called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. e-/?ovAevov, I was 
advising ; p€-fiovX.€vi<a, I have advised. For a change in the stem 
of many verbs, e. g. rpiir-a), Tt-Tpo<f>-a, i-Tpd-K-qv, see $ 140. 

3. The Augment is e prefixed to the stem of verbs which 
begin with a consonant, e. g. i-fiovktvo-a, I advised; but in 
verbs which begin with a vowel, it consists in lengthening the 
first stem-vowel, a and e into rj (and in some cases into «), X and 
v into I and v, and o into <o. The Augment implies past time, 
and hence belongs to all the historical tenses (Imperfect, 
Aorist, and Pluperfect) ; but it is confined to the Indicative. 

4. Reduplication consists in repeating the first stem-conso- 
nant with c, when the stem begins with a consonant ; but when 
the stem begins with a vowel, the Reduplication is the same as 
the augment, e. g. fit-fiovkevKa, I have advised; 'i/ceVevKa, / have 
supplicated, from 'iKerev-w. The Reduplication denotes the com- 
pletion of the action, and hence belongs to the Perfect, Pluper- 
fect, and Future Perfect. For a fuller view of the Augment 
and Reduplication, see Ml 9, sq. 

5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -<o is cut off, 
is called the verb -characteristic, or merely the characteristic, 
because, according to this, verbs in ><o are divided into different 
classes ; according as the characteristic is a vowel, a mute, or 
a liquid, verbs are divided into pure, mute, and liquid verbs, e. g. 
fiovXev-oj, Tifxd-u) (pure verbs), rpt(3-o) (mute), (patv-to (liquid). 

$ 109. Inflection- endings. 

In the inflection-endings, so far as they denote the relation 
of tense, mode, and person, there are three different elements : 
the tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel, and the personal- 
ending, e. g. {3ov\ev-cr-o-fx.ai. 

$ 110. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings. 

1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands 
next after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark 



132 VERBS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. [$ 111. 

of the tense. In pure verbs, k is the tense-characteristic of the 
Perf. and Plup. Lid. Act., e. g. 

fie-fiovAev-K-a i-fie-fiovAev-K-eiv ; 

the characteristic of the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
the Fut. Perf. is <r, e. g. 

f$ov\ev-o~-<a (SovXsv-ff-ojxca jSe-jSouAeu-ff-o^iat 

£-f3ovAev-(r-a £-fiovAev-o~-a.ixt)v ; 

the characteristic of the first Aor. Pass, is #; the first Fut. 
Pass, has, besides the tense-characteristic a-, the ending of the 
first Aor. Pass, -fhj, thus, 

£-&ovAgv-&-t]v f5ov\ev-frf)-<r-oiAai. 

The primary tenses only ($ 103, Rem.) have a tense-charac- 
teristic. 

2. The tense-characteristic, together with the ending follow- 
ing, is called the tense-ending. Thus, e. g. in the form fiov- 
Xevcro), a- is the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable 
o-w is the tense-ending of the Fut. The stem of the verb, 
together with the tense-characteristic and the augment or 
reduplication, is called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g. hi efiov- 
Xevcr-a, efiovkevcr is the tense-stem of the first Aor. Act. 

§ 111. (b) Personal-endings and Mode-voivels. 

The personal-ending denotes the person of the verb, and 
takes a different form according to the different persons and 
numbers ; the mode-vowel connects the tense-stem and the 
personal-ending, and takes a different form according to the 
different modes, e. g. 



1 Pers. 


Sing. Ind. Pres. J 


I. fiovXev-o-jxai 


Subj. fiovAev-at-fiat 


3 " 


" Fut. 


' fiovAev-cr-e-Tcu 


Opt. fiovAev-a-oi-ro 


1 « 


PI. " Pres. ' 


' fiovXev-o-ne&a 


Subj. fiovAev-a)-fj.e&a 


2 " 


U CC (1 


' fiovAev-e-a&e 


" (3ovA€v-r)-(r&€ 


1 " 


Sing. " A.I. < 


' £f5ovXsv-(r-a-ixT)v 


" fiovAev-cr-cc-jjiai 


3 " 


U Ci (( ( 


' 6)30uA€U-(T-O-T0 


Opt. f3ov\ev-(r-cu-TO. 



Remark. In the above forms, &ov\ev is the verb-stem, and QovAev, fiovAevcr, 
and ifiovKev<r are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Put., and first Aor. 
Mid. ; the endings -fxai, -rat, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels o, 
«, e, oi, 7} o, cu, are the mode-vowels. The mode-vowels e and o of the Indie 
are lengthened into t\ and a in the Subj. 



H 112, 113.] MODE-VOWELS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



133 





§ 112. 


Summary of 


the 


Mode-vowels. 






Indicative. 


Subj. 


Opt. 


Impr. 


Inf. 


Part. 


Person. 


Pres. and Fut. 
Active. 


Impf., A. II. A. and 
M. and Prs.and F.M. 


Act. Mid. 








S. 1. 


CO 





CO 


u 


ot 


- 


et, e 


CO, 


2. 


et 


6 


?' 


V 


01 


e 






3. 
D. 1. 


et 


€ 



?? 


V 

CO 


01 
01 


€ 






2. 


€ 


€ 


*? 


V 


01 


e 






3. 
P. 1. 


6 



€ 



CO 


V 

CO 


01 
01 


e 






2. 


6 


6 


*? 


V 


01 


6 






3. 








CO 


CO 


01 


e - 








Indicative. 


Optative. 


Impr. 


Infinitive. 


Person. 


Plpf. 


A. I. M. 


A. I. A. and 
Pf. A. 


A. I. A. 

and M. 


A. I. A. and M. 


A. I. A. and M. 
a 


S. 1. 


€1 


& 


d 


at 


- 


2. 
3. 


61 

et 


a 
a 


a 

E 


Of 

at 


o a 
a 






D. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 


ei 

et 
et 


a 

a 

a 
a 


d 
d 
d 


at 
at 
at 
at 


a 
a 


Participle. 

A. I. A. and M. 
and P£ A. 


2. 


et 


a 


a 


ai 


a 


a 


3. 


(et)e 


a 


d 


at 


a 





§ 113. Personal-endings 


of Verbs in -co. 


I. Active Form. 


II. Middle Form. 


A. Ind. and Subj. 
the Princ. tenses. 


B. Ind. and Opt. 
the Hist, tenses. 


A. Ind.andSubj. 
the Princ. tenses. 

fiat 

o~ at 

Tat 

fie&ov 

oSov 

cr&ov 

fieSra 

VTCtl (aTOt) 


B. Ind. and Opt. 
the Hist, tenses. 


Sing. 1. 

2. 

3. 
Dual 1. 

2. 

3. 
Plur. 1. 

2. 

3. 


s 

TOV 

TOV 

fiev 

T6 

(i>Tt) <ri(v) 


v, Opt. fit 
5 

TOV 
TTfV 

fiev 

Te 

v, o~av 


fir,v 
ao, o 

TO 
fie&OV 

trbov 

tT&T]V 

fie&a 
VTO (aTo) 


C. Imperative. 


C. Imperative. 


Sing. 2. 
Dual 2. 
Plur. 2. 


3. TOO 
TOV 3. TUV 

Te 3. Tcocraz' 


Sing. 2. (cro) o 3. cdco 

Dual 2. tr&ov 3. <t&wv 

Plur. 2. o-fre 3. o-frcocraj', cr&wv 


D. Infinitive. 


D. Infinitive. 


v Pres., Put., and Aor. II. 

vai Perf. Act. and Aor. I. and II. Pass. 

t Aor. I. 


cr&ai 


E. Participle. 


E. Participle. 


Stem vt, with exception of the Perf., 
whose stem ends in -ot. 


fievos, fievr}, fievov ; 
fievos, fievij, fievov, Perf. 



12 



134 PERSONAL-ENDINGS. [$ 114. 

Remark. The Personal-endings follow so directly the mode-vowel, and are 
so closely joined to it, that often the two do not appear separately, but are 
united together, e. g. BovAev<r-r)s, instead of BovAeva-Ti-ts, BovAev-y, instead of 
BovAev-e-ai (a and e coalescing and t being subscribed). 

$ 114. Difference betiveen the Personal-endings 'm 
the Principal and the Historical Tenses. 

1. The difference between the Principal and Historical tenses is important. 
The Principal tenses (Pres., Perf., and Fut.) form the second and third Pers. 
Dual with the same ending -o v, e. g. BovAev-e-rou BovAev-e-rov ; BovAcv-e-a&oj' 
BovAcv-e-a&oj' ; the Historical tenses also form the second Pers. Dual in -ov, 
but the third in -t\ v, e. g. 

iBovAev-e-T o v iBovAev-e-rrjv, iBovAe6-e-<r&ov if3ovAev-4-<r&r]v. 

2. The Principal tenses form the third Pers. PI. Act. in -<r i(i>), from -vrt, 
-vcr i, and the Mid. in -v rai ; the Historical tenses in the Active, in -v, and Mid., 
in -vto, e. g. 

BovAev-o-v <r t = BovAsv-ovcri(i>) £BovAev-o-v 
BovAev-o-vr a i £BovAev-o-vro. 

Remark. In BovAevovai the v is dropped, and as a compensation the o pre- 
ceding it is lengthened ; so also in the Put. Act. Comp. 116, 5. 

3. The Principal tenses in the Sing. Mid. end in -/««, -cat, -rat ; the Histori- 
cal in -fjiw> -°"°> -to* e - S- 

BovAev-o-{A a i iBovKev-6-firjV 

BovAev-e-a a i = BovAev-y, eBovAev-e-cr o = eBovAcv-ov 

BovAtv-e-rai iBovAev-e-ro. 

4. The Personal-endings of the Subj. in the Principal tenses are like those 
of the Ind. in the same tenses ; the Opt. are like those of the Ind. of the His- 
torical tenses ; 



2 and 3 Du. Ind. Pr. BovAeve-rov 




Subj. BovAtV7)-TOV 




BovAeve-ff&ov 




" BouAsvt)-<t & V 


3 PI. " 


" BovAevov-tr i {v) 




" BovAevw-(r i (u) 




fiovAevo-vrai 




" BovAevw-v t a i 


1 Sing. " 


" BovAevo-fiai 




" BovAevw-fiai 


2 '• " 


" BovAev-r/ 




" BovAev-j) 


3 " " 


" BovAeve-rai 




u BovAevrj-T a i 


2 and 3 Du. " 


Impf.e^ouAeue-TOJ', -I 


■T7)U 


Opt. BovAevoi-r o v, -oi-ri\v 




iBovAeve-cr&ov, 


-e-(r3-7J] 


>> " BovAevot-ff&ov, -ol-<r&r)V 


3 PI. " 


" iBovAevo-u 




" BovAevoi-ev 




iBovAevo-VTO 




" BovAzvoi-yro 


1 Sing." 


" £fiovAevo-/j.r)V 




" BovAevoi-fj. r\v 


2 " " 


" (e/3oi/Aeve-(ro) iBovAtv-ov 


" (PovAevoi-<ro) BovAevoi-o 


3 " " 


" iBovAeve-ro 




" BovAcvoi-to. 



§ 115.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -0). 135 

§ 115. Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -co. 
Preliminary Eemaeks. 

1. Since pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses (§ 103, Rem.) these 
tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs and one liquid 
verb (toi/8-w, AeiV-w, stem Ain, <paiv-w, *AN), so as to exhibit a full Conju- 
gation. 

2. In learning the table, we are to note, 

(1) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into, (a) Personal-ending, 
(b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f ) 
Augment, or Reduplication. 

(2) The spaced forms, e. g. &ov\ev-e to v, fiovKev-rtrov, third Pers. Du. Ind. 
and Subj. Pres., may direct attention to the difference between the Historical 
tenses in the Ind. and Opt., and the Principal tenses. 

(3) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are 
distinguished by a star (*). The learner should compare these together, e. g. 
fiovKevffu, 1. Sing. Ind. Put. Act. or 1. Sing. Subj. I. Aor. Act.; PovXevaai, 
2. Sing. Imp. I. Aor. Mid., jSouAeuo-at, 3. Sing. Opt. I. Aor. Act., fSov\evo~cu, 
Inf. I. Aor. Act. 

(4) The accentuation (§ 118) should be learned with the form. The follow- 
ing general rule will suffice for beginners : The accent of the verb is as far from 
the end as the final syllable will permit. Those forms, whose accentuation 
deviates from this rule, are indicated by a dagger (t). 

(5) When the Paradigm is thus thoroughly learned, the pupil may first 
resolve the forms either of jSouAeuw, or any pure verb, into their elements, i. e. 
Personal-ending, Mode-vowel, etc.; observing this order, viz. fiovXevaw is, (1) 
first Pers., (2) Sing., (3) Ind., (4) Put., (5) Act., (6) from PovXeva, to advise; 
then he may arrange the elementary parts of the form, and in the following 
order: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment, or Reduplication, (3) Tense-characteristic, 
(4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel, (7) Per 
sonal ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel and Personal-ending. E. g. 
What would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised himself using the 
Aor. of the Pres., /3oi/Aeu-&>, to advise ? Answer : The Verb-stem is fiovtev, 
Augment, e, thus ifiovtev ; the Tense-characteristic of the first Aor. Mid. is (r, 
thus Tense-stem is e-j8ovA«=v-<r ; the Mode-vowel of the first Aor. Ind. Mid. is a ; 
thus, i-fiovXev-cr-a ; the Personal-ending of the third Pers. Sing, of an Historical 
tense of the Mid. is to ; thus, e-jSouAeu-tr-o-To. 

Remark. By making himself familiar with the above elements, the pupil 
can construct from the root any form of the verb he may wish. 



136 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -0). 



P 115. 



Tenses. 



Indicative. 



Subjunctive 
of the Principal tenses. 



Present, 

Tense- 
stem : 

PovAeV- 



D. 



Imperfect, 

Tense- 
stem: 
i-PovAeu- 



Perfectl, 

Tense- 
stem : 
Pt-PovAeu-K 



Pluper- 
feet I, 

Tense- 
stem : 

i-jfc- 

fiovhev-K- 



Perf. II 
Plpf II 



Aorist I, 

Tense- 

stem: 

i-PovAzv-cr- 



Aorist II, 
i-Aiir- 

Future, 
PovAev-c- 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 

P. 1. 
2. 
3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1 



PovAev-ca,* I advise, 
PovAev-eis, thou advisest, 
£oi»Aev-ei, he, she, it advises, 
PovAev-erov, ye two advise, 
PovAev-erov, they two advise, 
fiovAev-ofxev, we advise, 
PovAev-ere,* you advise, 
PovAev-ov<ri{v), they advise, 



jSouAeu-w,* I may advise, 

PovAev-ys 

(iovAev-r)* 

PovAsv-tjtov 

fiovAev-7) tov 

fiovAev-wfJiev 

{3ovAev-TjT€ 

PovAev-wcri(u) 



i-fiovAev-ov,* I was advising, 
i-fiovAev-es, thou wast advising, 
€-/8ouAeu-e(j/), he, she, it was adv. 
i-fiovAev-erov, ye two were adv. 
e-/3oi/Aeu-e r 77 v, they two were adv 
e'-jSouAeu-oftev, we were advising, 
i-fiovAev-eTe, you were advising, 
i-PovAzv-ov,* they were advising, 



Pe-PovAev- 
pe-PovAtv- 
Pe-PovAsv- 
Pe-PovAfv- 
fZe-BovAev- 
advised, 
Pe-PovAev- 
Pe-PovAev 
Pe-PovAev- 



/c-a, I have advised, 
K-as, thou hast adv'd, 
k-c(v),* he,she,ithasa 
K-arov, ye two have a. 
K-a rov, they two have 

■K-a/xev, we have adv'd. 
■K-are, you have adv'd, 
■K-a.ai{v), they have a. 



&e-fiovAev-K-ci),Imay Imvea 
&e-fiovAev-K-r)s 
Pe-PovAev-K-r) 
(ie-flovAev-K-riTOV 
(Se-fiovAev-K-T) rov 

Pe-PovAev-K-wfieu 

fie-(3ovAev-K-r)T€ 

fie-fiovAzv-K-ao~i(i') 



K-eiv, I had advised, 
K-eis, thou hadst adv. 
K-ei, he, she, it had ad, 
K-eirov, ye two had 



i-Pe-povAev 
i-Pe-PovAev 
i-Pe-PovAev 
i-Pe-PovAev 

advised, 

e-/3e-/3ouAeu-/c-e ir7jv,they two had 
advised. 

(ie-fiovAev 

fie-fiovAev 

j3e-/3ouAev 



-K-eifiev, we had adv. 
■K-eire, you had adv. 
K-€<rav, they had a. 



ire-(priv- 

e-ire-(j)7}V- 

fiovAev- 

fiovAev- 

e-/3ouAeu- 

PovAev- 

/3ouAeu- 

PovAev- 

PovAev- 

i-@ovAev 



I appear, 
, 2 I appeared, 



7re-(pi]v-b}, I may appear, 



a-a, I advised (indef.), 
<r-as, thou advisedst, 
a-e(v), he, she, it adv'd, 
(T-arov, ye two advised, 
(t-<xtt}v, they two adv'd, 
a-ajxtv, we advised, 
v-are, you advised, 
ff-a v, they advised, 



PovAev-v-to,* I may advise, 

fJouAev-cr-ys 

PovAev-c-T) * 

jSouAeu-cr-TjToi/ 

PovAev-a-r) r o v 

PovAev-a-u/xev 

PovAev-o~-r}Te 

PovAev-<r-(i)(ri(v) 



e-AiiT-ov. 

H-Anr-es, 

Ind. 



Heft, 

etc. declined like Impf. 



Ahr-co, etc., like the Subj 
Pres. 



PovAev-cr-o),* I shall advise, 
like the Indie. Pres. 



The inflection of the 2d Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, is like that of the 1st Perf. 



I 115.] 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN 



137 



Mode s 



fiouAev-oifu, / might advise, 

fiovAev-ois 

fiovAev-oi 

$OV\ZV-OlTOV 

j8ouAeu-o/T7jj/ 

fS0V\€V-0lfJI.SV 
j8oi»A.€W-OiT6 

fiovAev-o I 6 V 



Optative 
i. e. Suhj. of Historical tenses. 



fie-fiovAev-K-oifu, I mig. have a 
Pe-fiovAevic-ois 
/3e-/6ot>Aev-/e-0i 
j8e-j8ouAeu-K-oiTOV 

/3e-/3ovAeu-/c-o i t 77 v 

fie-fiovkev-K-oifiev 
Pe-fiovAcv-K-oire 
/8e-/8ouAeu-/c-o 1 e v 



ire-cp'fiv-oifji.i, I might appear, 
PovAev-ff-aifju, I might advise, 
{3ovAev-<r-ais, or -eias 
fiovAev-cr-cu,* or -ete(y) 
fiovAev-cr-aiTov 
PovAev-a-aiTT) v 
povA^v-cr-ai/xeu 
@ovAev-<r-cuTe 
/3ouAeu-cr-a 1 e v, or -e 1 a v 



/3ovAeu-e, advise, 
fSovAev-eTo>, let him ad. 
fiovAei-eTOV, ye two ad. 
fiovAev-eTuu, let them 

both advise, 
fiovAev-ere,^ do ye ad. 
fSovAev-eraxrav, usually I$ovA<-v-6vtu>v,* let them a. 



Anr-oijxi, etc., like the Opt. 
Impf. 



Imperative. 



Participials. 



Infill. 



Particip. 



' fiovAev-a)v 
jSoi/Aeu- fiovAev-ov(ra, 



to 
advise, 



fiovAev-ovj 
Q.fSovAev-ovros 

fSovAev-oixrrjs. 

advising, 



[/Se-jSouAeu-K-e,*] etc., 
like the Imp. Pres. 
yet only a few Per- 
fects, and such as 
have the meaning 
of the Pres., form 
an Imperative. 



Tre-(pr)u-€, appear, 



fio6Aev-<r-ov, advise, 
fSovAev-ff-aro) 
(ZovAev-cr-aTov 
PovAev-cr-drwy 

j8ouAeu-<r-aT6 

/3oi/Aet/-cr-aTa>eray, usually -aavrwu* 



Pe-Pov- 
Aev- 

K-eVa£,t 
to have 
advised, 



fiov- 
AeO- 

to 
advise, 



fis-fiovAev-K-cios'l 

fi€-fiovAev-K-v?a\ 

fie-{iovA€v-K-6s't 

G. -k-6tos, -k- 

vias, having 

advised, 



ire-tyrjv-toSJ 



{SovAev-<r-as 
fiovAev-<r~a<ra 
/3ouAeC-<r-dj/t 
Genitive : 
(3ovAev-(T-avTos 
j3ouAei/-<r-acT77s, 
having advised, 



At7r-€, etc., like 
Imp. Pres. 



the 



AlTT- 



Anr-(av,ov<ra, 6v% 
G. ovtos, ova-rjs. 



fiovAev-<r-ew, 
etc. like Pr. Pt. 



fiovAev-ff-oi/jii, I would advise, fiovAev- 

| like the Opt. Impf. I <r-eiv, 

2 The inflection of the 2d Pluperf. is like that of the 1st Pluperf., both in the Ind. and Opt, 

12* 



138 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -CO. 



[* 115. 





U (C 


The 


Tenses. 


•o*2 § 




|^2 
s ® 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive 






£ £* 




of the Principal tenses. 






S.I. 


fiovhtv-ofxai, I deliberate, or am 


fiov\ev-a> /a a i, I may de- 






2. 


£ouAeu-7? * [advised, 


f}ov\ev-7) * [liberate, 




Present, 


3. 


fiov\ev-e r a i 


j8ouAeu-7j t o t 






D.I. 


fiov\ev-6[jt.e&ov 


fSovkev-(t>ixe&ov 




Tense- 


2. 


fiov\ev-€(r&oi/ 


P0V\€V-T}CT&0V 




stem : 


3. 


j8ouAeu-e<r&oj/ 


jSouAeu rjcr&ov 




fiovKev- 


F.l. 


fSov\€v-6/Ae&a 


fiovXev-do/Ae&a 






2. 


fiov\ev-e(r&€ * 


fiov\ev-r)(T&e 






3. 


fiovXev-ovrai 


fiovhsv-tovrai 






S.l. 


£-fiov\sv-6/A7)v, I was deliber- 








2. 


e-/3oi»Aeu-o v [ating, 






Imperfect, 


3. 
D.l. 


i-fiovXev-ero 
e-fiovAev-ofj.e&oi' 






Tense- 


2. 


i-fiovtev-eff&ov 






stem: 


3. 


£-l3ov\ev-G(T&'>]v 






i-fiov\ev- 


P. 1. 

2. 
3. 


£-&ovKev-6iJ.&a 

i-fiovkev-ecr&e 

£-flov\ev-ovTO 








S.l. 


{3e-fiov\ev-iA a i, I have deliberated, 


fie-fiovXev-fjevos, 5, 1 may 






2. 


fie-fiov\ev-(rai 


fie-fiovXev-nwos ys [have 
fHe-fiovtev-/j.ej'os ?} [delib- 




Perfect, 


3. 


j8e-j8ouAeu-Tat 






D.l. 


f3e-fiovtev-fj.e&ov 


erated, 




Tense- 


2. 


fie-fiovXev-cr&ot/ 


j8e-j8oi>Aev-/u«'a; 1\tov 




stem : 


3. 


/3e-fSov\ev-(r&ov 


jSe-ySouAey-^ueVw tfrov 




&e-f}ov\ev- 


P. 1. 


fie-fiov\€v-/j.e&a 


fie-fiovAev-fieuoi &/xev 






2. 


&e-fiov\ev-(r&e * 


fie-fiovXtv-fxtvoi ^re 






3. 


(5e-{iov\ev-v t a i 


/Je-jSoi/Aeu-^ueVot 2>cri 






S.l. 


£-Pe-fiov\ev-/j. t) v, 1 had deliber- 






Pluperfect, 


2. 


e-/3e-y9ouAet/-<ro [ated, 






3. 


e-£e-j8ouAeu-T o 






Tense- 


D.l. 


£-f3e-f}ovAev-/jt.€&ov 








2. 


£-fie-fiov\€v-(r&ov 






e-/3e- 


3. 


£-fie-fiov\ev-(r &-nv 






jSoi/Aeu- 


P. 1. 
2. 
3. 


£-fie-flov\ev-(A€&a 
e-,Q€-/3ouA.et/-0"id-e 
£-f$e-ISov\6v-v t o 








S.l. 


i-^ovX^v-ff-d^-nv, / deliberated, 


fiovKev-tr-a p. a i, I may de- 






2. 


e-fiovXev-a-ca [(indefinite) 


fSov\zv-(r-ri * [liberate, 




Aonst L, 


3. 


£-^ofj.\ev-(r-aTo 


fiov\ev-<r-r) r a i 






D.l. 


i-fiovXtv-ff-aiie&ov 


fZov\€v-<r-(t>/j.e&ou 




Tense- 


2. 


4-fiov\ev-(r-a(r&ov 


(SovXtv-cr-ncr&ov 




stem : 


3. 


e-/8ouAeu-cr-a (T&t)v 


fiovXzv-a-r) <tSov 




i-fiov\ev-(r- 


P. 1. 


i-fjovAGV-ff-diAe&a 


/3ovKev-(T-Q!>(j.e&a 






2. 


£-fiovhzv-(r-a(r&e 


f3ov\ev-a-'n<r&€ 






3. 


£-$ovhev-<r-aj>TO 


/3ouAeu-(T-a> v t a l 




Aorist II. 


S.l. 


£-Xnr-6jxt]v, I remained, like Ind. 
Imperf. 


\iir-wfj.ai, I may remain, 
like Pres. Subj. 






S.l. 


fiovh€v-(r-o/xai, I shall deliberate, 








like Pres. Indie. 






Fut. Per/., 


S.l. 


fie-Pov\€v-(T-oncu, I shall have de- 
liberated, like Pres. Indie. 







$ 115.] 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -CD. 



139 



Mode s 



Participials. 



Optative 
i. e. Subj. of Hist, 



fiov\ev-o ifx-nv, I might 
fiov\ev-o i o [deliberate, 
fiov\ev-o i t o 
fiovKev-oifxe&ov 
fiov\ev-oi<r&ov 
fiov\ev-oi<r&r)V 

fiov\€v-oi<r&€ 
fSov\ev-o i v t o 



fie-fiovAev- 
&g-I3ov\€v- 
j8e-)3oi/Aev- 

/Je-jSouAeu- 
)8e-/3ouAev- 
fie-fiovKev- 
j8e-/3oi»Aeu- 
fi€-{iov\ev- 



■julsvos sfyvy I 
ixevos e?ris[mi't 
Ijlsvos €i7j [de- 
liberate, 
[iiv(a *1t\tov 
■fj.4v(a elr}Tr]v 
■fjievot. efy/xsv 
■jxivoi eiTjre 
■fievoi zit\<Tav 



fiov\ev-<r-a ip-ov, I might 
j8ouAeu-<r-a i o [deliberate, 
$ov\ev-(r-a i t o 
f$ov\ev-<r-ai/j.e&oj/ 
fiov\€v-<r-ai<r&ov 
)8ouA.eu-(r-o i(r&7]v 

j3ouAeu-<r-cua-&e 
fHovAev-a-aivT o 



Xnr-oiixi}v,Imiglit remain. 
like Opt. Impf. 



^ov\€v-a-oifj.r}v,I m. have 
e?eZ/'&eratec7.1ikeOpt.Imp. 



Imperative. 



Infill. 



fiov\€v-ov, deliberate, 
fiov\ev-e<T&(o 

fiovAev-ecr&ov 
jSouAeu-eVfrajp* 



fiovhev- 

to deliber- 
ate, 



Particip. 



fZ0V\SV-6(JLSV0S 
fi0V\€V-0fX.4vTJ 
&OVX*V-6[JLSVOV, 

deliberating, 



/JouAev-ecr&e * 

fiov\zv-4<T&a><rav, usually fiovAev-ecr&av* 



£e-/3ouAei/-<ro, deliberate, 
f}€-fiov\ev-(r&<0 

fie-fiovAev-a&ov 
)8e-j8ot/Aeu-o"&a>j/ * 

£e-j8ovAev-<r&e * 

fie-ffovAev-g-frwa-qy, usually fje-fiovXev-afrtov * 



jSe-jSouAeu- 
<rfrai,t to 

erated. 



j8e)3ouAeu-/ieVost 

&€fiov\ev-/j.€vri 

j8e#ouAev-jue- 

iw,f having 

deliberated, 



fiovAev-<r-cu,* deliberate, 
fiovAev-a-dcr&oo 

fiovAtv-ff-aff&ov 
f$ov\€v-(T-dcr&a}p * 

jSouAeu-tr-aCi&e 

(SovAsv-ff-da&wcrav, usually fiovtev-c-da&wv * 



/SouAeu- 
<r-a<r-&cu, 
to deliber- 
ate, 



fiovAev-a-d/xevos 
PovAcv-c-a/xevrj 
fiovAcv-cr-d/xevov 
having deliber- 
ated, 



At7roD,t -6<r£-a>, like Pres. 
Imp. 



fie-fiovAev-<r-oiiJ.r)v, Isli'd 
[deliberate, like Opt. Imp. J 



Ai7r-ecr&ait Altt-Sjagvos, -o- 
fj-evr), -SfjLevou 



fiovAev- 
tr-eo^ou 



j8e-^ouAeu- 
(r-ecr^at 



^ovAev-a-6/j.e- 
vos, -r], -ov 



fie-fiovAev-a-S- 
(xeuos, -17, -of. 



140 



VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [$ 116. 



Tenses. 


2 00 

!■§§ 


Thi 




Indicative. 


Subjunctive 
of the Principal tenses. 




Aorist /., 

Tense- 
stem : 
i-fiovAev-&- 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


i-fiovAev-b-riv, I was advised. 

i-fSovAev~&-ris 

e-/3ouAeu-id-77 

£-fiovAev-&-7iTov 

i-f3ovAev-&--f)T7)v 

4-{iovAci>-&-T)iJ.Gi' 

e-fiovAev-&-T)Te 

e-flovAtvS-r) <rav 


fiovAev-&-u>, / might have 
PovAev-fr-ys {been advised. 
f5ovAev-&-rj 
^ovAev-^-rJTou 
fiovAev-S-rj rov 
fSovAev-&-u>nev 

fiovAcv-fr-u) o~i(v) 




Future I. 


8.1. 

2. 


fiovAev-fr>i-(r-o[Aai, I shall be adv. 
fSovAev-frf)-(r-r), etc., like the 
Ind. Pres.'Mid. 






Aorist U. 


S. 1. 
2. 


£-Tpl@-7)v, I was rubbed, 
£-Tpi[3-7)s, etc., like the first 
Aor. Ind. Pass. 


TpifS-w, I may have been ruVd, 
Tpifj-rjs, etc., like the first 
Aor. Subj. Pass. 




Fut. n. 


S.I. 

2. 


TpifS-T)-<T-oncu, I shall be rubbed, 
Tpi&-r)-(T-r), etc., like the first 
Put. Ind. Pass. 






Verbal Adjectives : fiovAev-ros, --f), -6v, advised, 





$ 116. Remarks on the Inflection-endings. 

1. The personal-endings of verbs in -u are apocopated forms, as may be 
shown from the older conjugation in -/xi, and in part from the dialects (§ 220, 
1); thus, -fxi in the first Pers. Sing. Ind. and Subj. Act. and -ti in the third 
Pers. have disappeared, e. g. fiovAev-ca instead of f3ovAev-o-[u or flovAev-wiii, 
fiovAev-ei instead of f$ovAev-e-Ti (by the dropping of -pi in flovA€v-o-/j.i, the o is 
lengthened into «, and by the dropping of -ti in ffovAev-e-Ti, e is lengthened 
into et) ; in the first Pers. Sing, first Aor. Ind. Act., v has disappeared, e. g. 
e£ouAeu<ra instead of SfiovAevo-av ; in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Act., except 
the first Aor., -d-i has disappeared, e. g. ySovAeu-e instead of fiovAcv-e-&i ; but the 
first Aor. Imp. Act. has a different ending -ov, e. g. fiovAev-ff-ov. 

2. The second Pers. Sing. Act. has the ending -aba in the Common lan- 
guage in the following forms only : — 

olv&a, nosti, from the Perf. oTSa; jj§ei(r&a and ffS-rjcrba, Plpf. of olda- 
ecpriaba, Impf. from <pi)fj.i, to say; tfaSra, Impf. from cl/xl, tobe; -peio-fra, 
Impf. from el/ii, to go. 

3. There is no special form for the first Pers. Dual Act., or for the first 
and second Aor. Pass. ; the first Pers. PI. is used for this purpose. Comp. 
§ 106, Rem. 2. 

4. The original form of the first Pers. PI. Act. is -^es (not -fiev). Comp. 
the Dialects, § 220, 6, and the Latin ending -mus, e. g. ypd.<p-o-jx^s, scrib-i-mws. 

5. The original form of the third Pers. PI. Act. of the Principal tenses was 



§ 116.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 141 



SIVE. 



Modes. 


Participials. 




Optative 
i. e. Subj. of the Hist, tenses. 


Imperative. 


Infin. 


Participle. 




/3ov\ev-&-eir)i' f I might be 
f}ovAev-&-eirjs [advised, 
fiovAev-fr-eir] 
&ov\ev-&-d7)Tov 

fiovAev-&-eirip.ev and -el/xev 
j3ov\ev-&-elriTe and -€?T€ 
0ovAev-&-e7cv 


fiovAev-&-riTi, be thou ad- 
{jov\€v-&-r)T<o [vised, 
j8ouA.eu-3"77T ov 

f$OvXtV-&-T)T(t)V 

fSovXev-fr-rire * 
fiov\ev-&-r)T(0<rav 


fiovXev- 
&-r)vai, 
to be ad- 
vised, 


;8ouAeu-&-ejst 

fiovAev-&-e?cra\ 

/3ouAeu-3--eVt 

Genitive : 
fiovAev-fr-evros 
fiovAev-fr-Gicrris, 

being advised, 




fiov\ev-&r]-<r-oiiJ.rii', I should 
be advised, etc., like the 
Impf. Opt. Mid. 




fiovAev- 
frr)-(re- 
a&ai 


fiovAev&ri-cr-o- 
/xevos, -77, -ov 




Tpil3-eir)v, I might be rubbed, 
TpiP-elris, etc., like the first 

Aor. Opt. Pass. 
TpifS-7)-(r-olixriv, I should be 

rubbed, etc., like the first 

Fut. Opt. Pass. 


rplfi-ri&i, -TjTco, etc., like 
the first Aor. Imp. Pass. 


rpiP- 

r)vai 


Tpi$-eis,\ etc., 
like first Aor. 
Part. Pass. 




ipifrr)- 


Tptfi-r)-<r-6p.evos, 
-7J, -ov 


jSoi/Acu-Teos, -Tea, -reov, to be advised. 



-vti; when t was changed into <r, v was dropped (§ 20, 2), e. g. fiovAeiovrt = 
fiovAevovci = fiovKevovai. On the irregular lengthening of the vowel pre- 
ceding the v, see § 20, Eem. 2. 

6. In the first Pers. Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use, together with the 
form in -etu, a form in -77, which arises from the Ionic ending of the Plup. -co, 
e. g. ifiefiovAevK-ri instead of -K-eiv. The mode-vowel ei in the third Pers. PI. 
is commonly shortened into e, e. g. ifiefiovAev-ic-e-crav instead of i&efiovAev-K- 
si-<rav. 

7. The first Pers. Sing. Opt. Act. has the ending -fit in verbs in -a, e. g. 
iratSev-oi-ixi, -rraiSeixr-ai-ni ; but the ending -77 v in the first and second Aor. Pass., 
according to the analogy of verbs in -pu. This 77 remains through all the per- 
sons and numbers, though it is often dropped in the Dual and PI., especially 
in the third Pers. PL and then, elrip.ev = €i/j.ev, €177x6 = e?T€, dri<rav = eicv, e. g. 
iraifev&drifxev and Trai8€v&e?p.€v, p:vr)o~&eir)T€ and -d-erre, <pavetr)<rav X. H. 6. 5, 
25., irpoKpibeirio-av Ibid. 34., irep.(pfrelri<rav Th. 1, 38, and (more frequently) 
-&eiev (-eTer). 

8. The Attic Optative endings -tjj', -77s, -77, etc., and the third Pers. PL -cv 
(rarer -ri<rav) which appropriately belong to verbs in -pu, are used with verbs in 
-«, in the following cases : — 

(a) Most commonly in the Imperf. Opt. of contract verbs, e. g. ripuprjv, 
<piAoir)v, /jiicrSroirju ; 

(b) In all Futures in -«, e. g. <pavolr)v Soph. Aj. 313., ipolrj Xen. Cy. 3. 1, 
14, from the Fut. (pavw, ip£> ; 

(c) Somewhat often in the second Plup., e. g. iKire<pevyolriv S. 0. K. 840., 
vpoeA-nAvSrolris X. Cy. 2. 4, 17., irwo&oiri Ar. Acharn. 940 5 



142 VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [$ 116. 

(d) In the second Aor. trxoiV uniformly (ecrxov from ex«) ; still, not gen- 
erally in compounds, e. g. izapdax 01 ^ 1 ' 

9. The forms of the first Aor. Opt. Act. in -etos, -eie(v), -eiav, instead of 
-ais, -ai, -aiv, have passed from the ^olic Opt. in -eta, -ei as, etc., into com- 
mon use in all the dialects, and are employed by the Attic writers more fre- 
quently than the regular forms, e. g. fiovXeva-eias, -eie(j>), -eiav. 

Remark. The second Pers. Dual Act. of the Historical tenses often ends, 
among the Attic writers, in -t\v instead of -ov, e. g. &.yen\v PI. Symp. 189, c, 
&re$wn<r&rnv Euthyd. 273, e., ^ottjj/ 294, e., iXey^u L. 705, d., iKowwvn<rd- 
rriv lb. 753, a. On the Dialects, see § 220, 9. 

10. The Middle endings -<rai and -co, when immediately preceded by a 
mode-vowel, drop <r (§ 25, 1), and then coalesce, except in the Opt., with the 
mode-vowel, e. g. 

/SovAeu-e-crai jSouXeu-e-ot = fiovAei-r) 

fiov\€v-7)-(rai fSov\ev-r)-ai = fiovXtv-r) 

fiovtev-oi-co fiovAev-oi-o 

ifiovKev-e-co ifiovXev-e-o = efiov\ev-ov 

ifiov\evc-a-co if$ov\evc-a-o = if3ov\evc-a>. 

11. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Put. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers 
use a subordinate ending in -et, together with the ending -y, e. g. 0ouAeu-7? and 
-ei, &ov\€vff-r) and -et, j8ej8ou\et5<r-p and -ei, Pov\evfrf)C-r) and -ei, rpi^cri, and -et, 
TToiij and -et, 6\fj and -e?. This form in -et passed from the Attic conversational 
language, into the written language ; hence it is the regular form in the Come- 
dies of Aristophanes, but is avoided by the tragedians. Also Thucydides 
and Xenophon use it ; other writers, as Plato and the orators, employ both 
forms ; yet three verbs always take the form -ei, namely, 

fiov\o(JLai fiovAei (but Subj. fSovXy) 

o'Lofxai oUi (but Subj. oft?) 

tyofxcu Put. &//et. 

12. Together with the endings of the third Pers. PI. Imperative Act. and 
Pass, -irwcav, -aVoxrcw, -c&wcav, the abbreviated forms -6vrwv, -dvruiv, 
-<t&cdv, are used; and since they are employed very frequently by Attic 
writers, they are called Attic forms. These abbreviated Imperatives of the 
Active Voice are like the Gen. PI. of the Participle of each tense respectively, 
except the Perfect ; and the Middle form -c&wv is like the third Pers. Dual, 
e.g. 

Pres. Act. fiov\ev4Ta>cav and &ov\ev6vrwv 

Perf. " veiroifririoffap " ■nsitoi&6vT(i)v (Gen. Part. ireiroi^6Tuv) 

Aor. I. " fSovXevcdrwcav " fiovAevcduTwy 

Pres. Mid. fiovAevec&wcav " jSovAeueVdwi/ 

Aor. " CKttydc&wcav " CKetydc&wv. 
The Aor. Pass, ending -ivttov or -^rwv, abridged from -Jirwcav, is found in 
PI. Legg. 856, d. ireix<p&4vTwv, and lb. 737, e. hiavewbiiTuv (according to several 
MSS.). 



* 117 '] VERBS. — ATTIC FUTURE. J43 

13. Besides the simple form of the Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup Act a 
periphrasis, formed by the Perf. Part, and the Subj. or Opt. of Om (to be) \ 
«V, is very frequent, e. g. «««««„*, *, educaverim ; rmS ev K i,s dfe educa- 
vissem. let this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, more than a 
simple completed action ; comp. PI. Hipp. M. 302, a. d k<kmk&s r h 4 rerp*- 

repot at rovro T^rbow, examples of the simple forms are, fcraMfe,, PI 
Rp. 614, a , ****nr Polit. 269, c, ^re^oi X. An. 5. 7, 26., m^^imr 
A. ±i. 3. 2, 8, airoiiexurfKoi ib. 5, 23, fon^/coi ib. 5. 2, 3, raro^oi Th 8 
108., hfr MK ow ib. 2, 48. - The Imp. Perf. does not often occur in the Act ' 
e. g. yeycove, Eur. Or. 1220. 

14. The Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, append the personal-endings to the 
tense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj and 
Opt. (with few exceptions, which will be further treated below $ 154 9) 
but must also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle ' and 
c/wu, e. g. vcircuSevjxevos 8>, eV, educatus sim, essem. 

15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, of pure verbs ends in 
-vrat, -vto, e.g. feftofaeurrai, ifcfafaewro ; but in mute and liquid verbs this 
formation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually express this person 
periphrastically, by means of the Perf. Part, and **(,,), sunt, fc av , erant ; the 
older and middle Attic writers, however, sometimes use the Ionic forms -drat 
■aro (instead of-™,, -vto); the « of these endings is aspirated after the 
Kappa and Pi-mutes, and hence changes the preceding smooth Kappa or Pi- 
mute into the corresponding rough (comp. § 144) ; but this « is not aspirated 
after the Tau-mutes ; thus, 

V/J-o,, to rub, Perf. re'-rp^cu 3 P.Vwpfcfcw (for rtrptfimu) Pip. irerpictaro 
fheK-a, to twine, t^,^,, « m *4 X *rai ( « irArWroi) eWe'yaro 

raTT-u, to arrange, rt-ray-iM « rerd x *r M ( « rAwywu) eWyaro 

X«/»C-«, to V mfe, K+xApv-pu « «x«p»fiT«i ( » « x ^,8kt«) iK*x»ptS*ro 
t^p-o, to destroy, i-^ap-naL « ^parai ( « fy&ccpvrai) i^dpdro. 

16. The two Aorists Pass, follow the analogy of verbs in -fit, and hence are 
not treated here. 



$117. Remarks on the Formation of the Attic 
Future. 

1. When one of the short vowels a, e, 1, in the Put. Act. and Mid. of verbs 
in -o-o), -aopat, from stems of two or more syllables, precedes <r, certain verbs, 
after dropping <r, take the circumflexed ending -S,, -ovfiat; because it was fre- 
quently used by the Attic writers instead of the regular form, this is called 
the Attic Future, e. g. ixdco (usually iXaivu), to drive, ixd-a-o, Fut. Att. iXw, -£y, 
-?, -arou,-Qfiey, -fire, -wcri(u) • T eAe'a>, tojinish, reX4-V-u, Put. Att.rcAo), -e?y, - 6 r, 
'urou, -odfiev, -e?T€, -ovo*i(v) ; r e x4-<r-o/xcu (rc\4opuu), reXovfim, -e?, -€?tc«, etc ■ 
ml&, to carry, Fut. aco^-o-o,, Fut. Att. /co^xS, -«&, -««; - te ?rov, -«m^, *&*' 



144 VERBS. ACCENTUATION. [$ 118. 

iov(ri{v) ; Kouiov/xai, -ie?, -telrai, -io&ix&ov, etc. This Fut. is inflected like the 
forms of contract verbs. 

2. This form of the Fut. is found only in the Ind., Inf., and Part. ; never in 
the Opt., thus, TeAw, TeAe<V, t*XS>v ; but reKeffoifii. The verbs which have this 
form are the following: (a) i\dw (eAaiW), to drive; TeAeco, to finish; /coAe'w, 
to call; and, though seldom, dAe'w, to grind ; — (b) all verbs in -i(a (character. 
8) ; — (c) a few verbs in -d £w, very generally j3i/3a£o> ; — (d) of verbs in -pu, all 
in -a v v v y. i and also ajxtytivvvfjii, to clothe (a/j.(piw, -ie?s, etc.). A few exceptions 
to this Fut. are found even in the Attic dialect, e. g. ixda-a X. Cy. 1. 4, 20., e'Aa- 
covTas X. An. 7. 7, 55., Te\4o-ovaiv Cy. 8. 6, 3.. KaAeVets 2. 3, 22., vo/uicrovo-t 3. 
1, 27. (according to the best MSS.) \pr)<plo-eo-&e, Isae. de Cleonym. hered. § 51. 



$ 118. Accentuation of the Verb. 

1. Primary Law. The accent is drawn back from the end of the word 
towards the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. 
/SovAeue, fiovhevopuxi, fiovXevcrov, iravcrov, rvxpov, but fiovXtveis, fiovteveiv. On 
the ending -at, see § 29, E. 6. 

2. This law holds good in compounds, e. g. <p4pe Trposcpepe, ^eCye %K<pevye, 
Ae?7T6 air6Aenre ; also in words in the Subj., when they are not contracted, e. g. 
#caTa<rx«, KardcrxySi Kardcrx^H-^, 67rier7ra>, iiricrirris (but ai/afiw, airoo-Tw, SiaSw, 
7ra.pa.5a>, avapwuev, etc., on account of the contraction, avafidw, avafiduixev, etc.). 
Still, this rule has the following exceptions: (a) the accent cannot go back 
beyond the syllable of the preceding word, which before the composition, had 
the accent, e. g. airodos (air6 the preceding word being accented on the ultimate), 
<rvfjLirp6es, i-rrlo-xes, eVtSes (not &iro5os, 0-v/j.Trpoes, eirio-x^s, eirjSes) ; (b) the accent 
cannot go back of the first two words of the compound, as in the examples 
just quoted, and also o-vv4k5os, irap4v5es (not crvveicSos, but like e/cSos ; not 
ivdpevSes, but like ev&es) ; (c) the accent cannot go back of an existing augment 
(this holds of the Impf, Aor., and Plup. as well as of the Perf), e. g. irposeixov 
like zlx ov i irapeffxov like eo~x ov i Hvy 0J/ like i\yov, iffip like i\v (not irp6seixw, 
irdpeffxov, Qi)yov, e^rju) ; so also TrposrjKOt- like fj/coz/, a/Kilpyov like elpyov, but 
Imp. 'direipye, also a.<p?KTai, a<£?/cTO, like f/crai, Tkto. 

Exceptions to the Primary Law. 

3. The accent is on the ultimate in the following forms: — 

(a) In the Inf. second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut. 
Sing. Part, of the same tense as acute, e. g. \nre?v (from \tir4eiv), \ltt6v, -6v\ 
and in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, etVe, 
cA&e, evpe, Aa/3e, and 154 (but in composition, forenre, cbroAajSe, &ire\&e, efrtSe). 

(b) Also in the Imp. second Aor. Mid. as circumflex, e. g. Aa/3ou, frov (from 
ri&r)fju). 

Remark 1. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor. 
Act. draws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law, e. g. 
%K&a\e, e£fA&e, exSos, e/tSoTt, a.Tr65os, air65oTe, /xerd5os, /ue-raSoTe (yet not diro5os i 



^ 1 18. J VERBS. ACCENTUATION. 145 

/xerados, see No. 2), but iK&aXeiv, £K(Za.\d>v, iK\nre7u, 6'£eA&<4j/, etc. But in the 
Imp. Sing, second Aor. Mid. of verbs in -co, the circumflex remains on the 
ultimate in compounds also. e. g. in:&aAov, acpiKod, eKAnrov, iiriAa&ov, cupeAov, 
iuei/eyKov ; so in verbs in -ju, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla- 
bic preposition, e. g. irpodov, eVS-ou, a<pov ; yet the accent is drawn back, when 
the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition, e. g. cbroSou, KardSrov, 
airo&ov; but in the Dual and PI. of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all 
cases drawn back, e. g. e/c/3aAe<rd-e, airoAdfieo-fre, irp68oo-&e, ev&ea&e, ticpec&e, 
Karddreo-fre. 

(c) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -s (Gen. -ros), con- 
sequently in all active Participles of verbs in -fii, as well as in those of the first 
and second Perf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass, of all verbs, e. g. fiefiiov- 
AevKdcs (Gen. -6ros), irecprjucos (Gen. -oros), @ovhev&eis (Gen. -euros), rvirds (Gen. 
-euros), fords (Gen. -duros), ri&els (Gen. -euros), SiSovs (Gen. -Suros), Seinuvs 
(Gen. -vuros), diacrrds, iK&els, irpodovs, Gen. diacrr duros, i-K&euros, irpofiSuros. 

Eem. 2. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep- 
tion, e. g. iraifievaas, Gen. iraiSevaayros. 

(d) In the Sing, of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass. a,s circumflex, e. g. 
/SouAeufrcD, rpifSw (u> being contracted from -ew). 

4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : — 

(a) In the Inf. of Perf. Mid. or Pass., of first Aor. Act. and second Aor. 
Mid. ; also in all infinitives in -ucu, hence in all active infinitives according to 
the formation in -/j.i, as well as in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass, and 
of the first and second Perf. Act. of all verbs, e. g. rervcp&ai, PefiovAeva&ai, 
rtri/Aria&cu, ire(piAr}cr&cu, fxefxitrSrcio-Srai ; — (pv\d£aL, fiovAevo-ai, rifirfffai, <piAr)acu, 
/j.ioScco-<zi ; — Kiirecr&cu, eK&ecr&ai, 8ia$6cr&cu ; — fordvai, ri&eycu, 8id6uai, deiKUvuai, 
arrival, incrrjucu, &e?vcu, iK&e?uai, dovucu, [xeradovuai : — fiovhev&r}ucu, rpifirjucu j 
— /3e/3ot/Aet/KeVat, AeAcuTreVat. 

(b) In the Participle Perf. Mid. or Pass., e. g. PefiovAevfiiuos, -psv-q, -fxeuou, 
re7Lfxr]fj.4uos, ire<piXr]ixeuos. 

(c) As circumflex in the Dual and Plu. of the first and second Aor. Subj. 
Pass., e. g. PovAev&u,ueu. 

Rem. 3. The three corresponding forms of the Inf. first Aor. Act., Imp. 
first Aor. Mid., and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they consist 
of three or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished 
from one another by the accent, in the following manner : — 

Inf. 1st Aor. A. pov\ed<rui, Imp. 1st Aor. M. &ovAev<rcu, Opt. 1 st Aor. A. ^ovXexxrai, 
iroirjo-cu, Trolrjo-cu, iroii]aai. 

But when the penult is short bv nature or long only by position, the Inf. 
first Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt., first Aor. Act., e. g. 
0i/Aa£cu ; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. </>uAa£ai. 

13 



146 VERBS. SYLLABIC AUGMENT. [$$ 119, 120. 



$ 119. Further view of the Augment and Redu- 
plication. 

1. After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication 
($ 108, 3), it is necessary to treat them more particularly. 

2. As has been already seen, all the historical tenses (the 
Impf, Hup., and Aor.) take the augment, but retain it only in 
the Ind. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal: 

§ 120. (a) Syllabic Augment. 

1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem 
begins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing e 1 to the 
stem, in the Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication in the 
Plup. In this way, the verb is increased by one syllable, and 
hence this augment is called the syllabic augment, e. g. fiov- 

^evoo, Impf. Z-ftovXevov, Aor. e-/3ovXevaa, Plup. e-(3e-(3ov\evKeLV. 

2. If the stem begins with p, this letter is doubled when the 
augment is prefixed ($ 23, 3), e. g. peitra, to throw, Impf. eppmrov, 
Aor. €ppt\j/a, Perf. tppufra. Plup. Ippifaw. 

Remark 1. The three verbs $ov\ofj.ai, to will; 5vva.fj.ai, to be able; and 
IxehXcD, to be about to do, to intend, among the Attic writers take -r\, instead of e, 
for the augment ; still, this is found more among the later than the earlier 
Attic writers, o. g. i@ovA'f)&W and rrfZovX-hSriv ; idvvd/xrjv and ri^uvd^v, iSwfi&rjv 
and ifivvhSrqv (but always idvvdo-Srrjv) ; efxeWov and tffxeWov. The Aorist is 
very seldom rifj.e\\Tiaa (comp. X. H. 7. 4, 16. 26). 

Rem. 2. Among the Attic writers, the augment e is often omitted in the 
Pluperfect ; in compounds, when the preposition ends with a vowel ; in sim- 
ples, when a vowel which is not to be elided precedes, e. g. avafie^Kei, X. An. 
5, 2, 15 ; uaradedpa/j.^Kea'ay, X. H. 5. 3, 1 ; KaraXiXeLirro, X. Cy. 4. 1, 9; /cccto- 
ire7rra>/cei, Th. 4, 90 ; al <rvv&rJKai yeyevyvro, X. Cy. 3. 2, 24 (according to the 
best MSS.) ; but in the Impf. and Aorists, the syllabic augment is omitted 

1 According to analogy, we may suppose that e is prefixed to all verbs in the 
augmented tenses, whether the verbs begin with a vowel or consonant. If the 
verb begins with a consonant, e appears as an additional syllable, e. g. %-ivpaT- 
tov, but if with a vowel, € is assimilated with that vowel and lengthens it, if it 
is not already long, c. g. ayoo, Impf. eayov = ?iyov ; efre'Aw, Impf. ie&c\ov = fj&e- 
Xov ; 6k4\\co, Impf. i6Ke\\ov = ioneAAov. If the word begins with a long vowel, 
it absorbs e, e. g. 7]\d<TKc», Impf. i-f]\a(TKOv = ij\ao~KOv; a>&i((a, Impf. ido&t(ov = 
&&i(ov. When the verb begins with e, the augment e is sometimes contracted 
with this into ei, e. g. *t%ov, instead of ?ix ov - 



121, 122. 



TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 



147 



only in the lyric parts of the tragedies, and here nor often ; in the dramatic 
poi-tions it is rarely omitted, and only in the speeches of the messengers (pTjaeis 
ayyeXiKai) ; also at the beginning and middle of the trimeter, and likewise at the 
beginning of a sentence, and even in these cases hut seldom. The Impf. 
Xpyv? which, together with e%p^!/, is used in prose, is an exception. 



$ 121. (b) Temporal Augment. 

The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins 
with a vowel; it consist s in lengthening the -first s 4 cm -vowel. 
This is called the temporal augment because it increases the 
time, e. g. 



a becomes 


V, e. g. "£70 


h 


nj): 


('. f t yov 


Perf 


• 'fo<* 


riup. tfx eL,/ 


6 " 


V, " 


iKTciQca 




" 


TjKTVL^OU 




■'/jK-KiKa 


'•'' riXiriKeiv 


i ;; 


*> i; 


"ticerevca 






'irierevov 


" 


'iKerevxa 


'iKeTevxeiv 


o '• 


»i " 


bp-iXeo) 






oofxiXovv 


" 


u/j.i\rjKa 


•' WfjLLX'f]KeiV 


v " 


0, " 


'vPp((a> 




" 


*vPpi(ov 


u 


"ilfipiKO. 


'" 'vfipiKeiv 


ai " 


v-> " 


aipeco 




" 


fjpow 




fjprjKa 


wi ypy'iKav 


av ' : 


71V, tl 


avKeco 




" 


r\v\ovv 


41 


7]ij\r]Ka 


" 7]b\'f)KeiV 


01 " 


Ccl, ' : 


olKTifa 




" 


UlKTl^OV 


" 


GJKTlKa 


" &KTIKZIV. 



Remark. Verbs which begin with 77, I, v, 00, ov, and et, do not admit the 
augment, e. g. tjttoo^cu, to be overcome, Impf. tjttc^j', Perf. r'trrrffiai, Plup. 
7]TTrifx-qv ; : 'lit 6co, to press, Aor. 'l-rracra ; '07rj/Jw, to Zw// to sfeep, Aor. "incvuaa ; 
ox^eAew, to benefit, Impf. w<pe\sov ; ovrd(co,to wound, Impf. ovTo£b?/ ; ei/cw, 
to yfe/cZ, Impf. eTwroj/, Aor. e?£a ; €i/ca(co, to ftfen, is an exception, which among 
the Attic writers, though seldom; is augmented, e. g. e%Ka(ov, ei'Kacra, etnao-fiat, 
seldom iJKa£ov (e. g. Th. 6, 92. iJKa(ov, in the best MSS.), fjnaaa, iJKao-pcu. 
Also those verbs whose stem begins with eu, are usually without an augment, 
c. g. evxoy-ai, to supplicate, evxow, more rarely fivxopwy Dufc Perf. -^vy^ai (not 
wy/jMi) ; evpitneto, to find, in good prose, always omits the augment. 



$ 122. Remarks on the Augment. 

\ . Verbs beginning with a followed by a vowel, have d instead of 77, e. g. 
'oiw, (poet,), to perceive, Impfdioz/; but those beginning with d, ov, and ot fol- 
lowed by a vowel, do not admit the augment, e. g. 'a ri 5 {£<>/* at, to have an un- 
pleasant seAsatim, Irjrpf. 'ar^iCmw 5 aitaivw, to c%, -Impf. avWo? ; olaiciCv, to 
steer, Impf. »&»£(??; also oj/dAtV/cw, to eZesfra/, though no vowel follows d, has 
dydWo, aydAcoKo, as well as d^Aaxra, aW?\w/c«. But the poetic aeiSu (prose 
a?a>h to sing, and dWco (Att. oWw), to rush, take the augment, e.g. fefiov (prose 
£5oy), ^'i|o "(Att. rJ|o); ofo/*oi, to feeZieue, $6mv, etc. does not belong- here, since 
the following ot, is not a part of the stem. 



148 VERBS. REDUPLICATION. [$ 123. 

2. Some verbs also beginning with oi and followed by a consonant, do not 
take the augment, e. g. olnovpiw, to guard the house. Aor. ohcoipr,<ra: olvt£a>, to 
smell of ivine, Impf. o'lvi^ov, o'i v& ax, to intoxicate., Perf. Mid. or Pass, ohrwpems 
and <ivwp.4vos; olcrr pdu, to make furious, Aor. dXarpriaa. 

3. The twelve following verbs, beginning with e, have a instead of -q for the 
augment, viz. e<x«, to permit, Impf. efoj/, Aor. eta<r«; efrt£a>, to accustom (to 
which belongs also dwSa, to be accustomed, from the Epic e&-«) ; elV a, poetic 
Aor. (stem r EA), to place (in prose only, Part. Aor. Mid. eadp.€vos and el<rdp.evos, 
establishing, founding) ; eAiVcrw, to wm&; eA/tw, to draw; Aor. eiXKvcra (stem 
'EAKT) ; efAoj/, to to/.r. Aor. (stem 'EA) of cwpeSw; eirojiVt, to follow ; ipyd- 
(o/xai, to work ; ep-rrw, hpirv (co, to creep, to go ; car idea, to entertain ; e x w, to 
have (on the Epic elp.ai, see § 230). 

4. The six following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal, 
augment : — 

&yvv/xi, to break, Aor. ecc|a, etc. (§ 187, 1). 

aXicKo fxai, capior, Perf. kaXcoKa and riXcoKa, captus sum (§ 161, 1). 

av fid via, to please (Ion. and poet.), Impf. edvdavov, Perf. ea5a, Aor. 'iaoov 

(§ 230.) 
o up ecu, mingere, iovpovv, iovprixa. 
w&e'co, to push, iufrovv, etc. (sometimes without the augment, e. g. Siw&ovvto, 

Th. 2, 84; i&cfrnvav, X. H. 4. 3, 12 ; tifrei, PL Charm. 155, c). 
wveo/xai, to buy, Impf. iavovp.r)v [wvoifirjv, Lys. Purg. Sacril. 108. §4; e|o>- 

towto, Aeschin. c. Ctes. c. 33; avrooveiro, Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. icov-nard- 

ix-nv (see however § 179, 6.), Perf. iuv-np.au 

5. The verb eoprd £<o, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second 
syllable, Impf. kwpra^ov. The same is true of the following forms of the 
Plup. II.: — 

EIKH, second Perf. eWa, lam like, Plup. iuKeiv. 

eXirop-ai, to hope, second Perf. eoXira, I hope, Plup. iuXireiv. ) 

EPm, to do, second Perf. eopya, Plup. ewpyeiv. ) 

6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the 
same time, the Spiritus Asper of the stem being then transferred to the e of 
the augment : — 

6 paw, to see, Impf. k&pwv, Perf. eaSpa/ca, ewpap.ai. 

avoiyu, to open, Impf. avecoyov, Aor. avew^a (Inf. avot^ai), etc. 

aXia KOjxai, to be taken, Aor. e&Xuv (Inf. aXwvai, a), and yXcov. 



§ 123. Reduplicatio7i. 

1. Reduplication ($ 108, 4) is the repeating the first conso- 
nant of the stem with e. This implies a completed action, and 
hence is prefixed to the Perf., 1 e. g. Xi-XvKa, to the Fut. Perf., 

1 Strictly, we may say that the first letter of all verbs is repeated in the 
Perf, whether the verb begins with a vowel or a consonant. When the conso- 



123.] 



R DUPLICATION. 



149 



e. g. Kz-Kc<rprj<rofxaL (from Koo-fiia)), and to the PI up., which, as an 
historical tense, takes also the augment, e before the reduplica- 
tion, e. g. c- ( 3c-/?o ;AevKcir. This remains in all the modes, as 
well as in the Inf. and Part. 

2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem 
begins with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid ; but 
verbs beginning with p, yv, yX, /3A,i take only the simple aug- 
ment, except (3Xd7rT0) /3e/3Aa(£a, f3\aa<f>r)ijJuj fiefiXaaffarjixrjKa, and 
fiXao-ravw /3ej3Xdarr}Ka and ifiXdo-TYjKa, e. g. 
Auw, to loose, Perf. Ae-Av«:a 



Plup. e-Ae-Au/ceij/ 

re-frvKa (§ 21, 2.) " i-Te-bfaeiv 

ire-cpvTevKa (§ 21, 2.) " £-ire-<pvTeviceiv 

Ke-xdpevta (§ 21, 2.) " £-Ke-xopei>K€iv 

y4-ypa<pa ;: £-ye-ypd(peii> 

Ke-KAiKa " i-Ke-tcKiiceiv 

tce-tcpiKa '•'• e-KertcpiKtLV 

Trz-irvevKa " £-ire-irvevKeiv 

Te-ErXaKa (§ 21. 2.) " i-re-frxdiceii/ 

%pp«pa (§ 23, 3.) '• ippicpeiv 

i-yvwpiKa " e-yvwpiKeiv 

e-/3Aa/ceu/ca " e-jSAa/cewet// 

e-y\v<pa " £-y\6(peiv. 

3. Besides the verbs just mentioned beginning with p, yv, /3A, 
yA, the reduplication is not used, when the stem begins with a 
double consonant or with two single consonants, which are not 
n mute and liquid, or with three consonants, e. g. 



&uw, to sacrifice, 
(pvrevu), to plant, 
Xopzvoo, to dance, 
ypdcpco, to write, 
kXiuw, to bend down, 
Kpiva, to judge, 
irvea), to breathe, 
S-Aaa 1 , to bruise, 
piiTTco, to throw, 
yvapifa, to make known, 
/3Aa/ceua>, to be slothful, 
yXvcpoo, to carve, 



£r]X6a>, to emulate, 
|ej/Ja>, to entertain. 
\//aAAco, to sing, 
(TTveipw, to sow, 
icti(w, to build, 
TTTvaaa}, to fold, 
(TTpaTTiyeco, to be a general. 



Perf. £-Qf)\<aK<x 
" e-|eVcw/ca 
" ^ifaA/ca 

•' t-ffTTCtpKa 

" e-KTiica 

" e-crrpaTr/'yrj/ca 



Plup. £-£r)\(&Keiv 

" £-l-€V<i>K6lV 

" e-i^aA/fei^ 
" i-ffirapitziv 

" i-TTTvxeiv 

" i-o~Tpa.Triyr)Keiv 



nant is repeated, e is joined with it in order to vocalize it. If the verb begins 
with a vowel, the vowel is doubled and the two coalesce, if the initial vowel is 
short, and thus form a long vowel ; but if the initial vowel is long, it absorbs 
the other, e. g. 

dyw, Perf. properly &axa = ?ix a 

iyeipw, " " UyepKa = 'oyepKa 

ohceco, " " ooticrjKa = d)K7]Ka. 

Sometimes when the verb b ?gin< with e, the doixble e, instead of coalescing 
into -77, is contracted into -et, c. g. idw, Perf. efcwa, instead of rja.ua.. 

1 Words beginning with thWe letters are excepted on account of the diffi- 
culty of repeating them. 

13* 



1 o V E 8 H S . A T T C R E D fJP L i C A T i O N . J M 2 4 

Remark 1. The two verbs ju ; .u"^t^3 (.stem MNA), to remind, and tcrdo- 
jwat, to acquire, though their stem begins with two consonants, which are nor a 
mute and a liquid, still take the reduplication, fxe-jtyiquai, Ke-KTrifiat, i-pe-f.iyr,p.-qu, 
i-Ke-KT-fif/flv. The regular form eicrvj-ica, is Ionic, but it is found also in Acs eh. 
From. 792, and in Plato with /ce-K-r^ucct ; likewise in Th. 2, 62. irpos4kT7)pJi/a 
(as according to the MSS. it must probably be read, though elsewhere. Tli 
always uses k€ktt}/j.cu). Perfects formed by Metathesis or Syncope, are seem- 
ing exceptions to the rules of reduplication, e. g. o48p.i]Ka, ireivTapai., etc. (§§ 22, 
and 16, 8.) 

4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this 
liquid, but take « for the augment : — 

Xapfidvco, to take, Perf. eiXr)<pa Plup. el\"f)<peiv 

Xayxdvw, to obtain, " eiXrixa " etArjxetv 

Xeyco, (TvXXeya, to collect, " cruyeiAoxa, ffwelheyfiai " cweiA^xeiz/ 

'PEH, to s«</, '• dpt]Ka " elpr\Ktiv 

fietpofiai, to obtain. " e!p.aprdi (with rough breathing), i'< is fated. 

Rem. 2. The regular reduplication is sometimes found in the Attic poets, 
e. g. XeX-rjupe^a, tvAXsXe' ■/uf.'os, nlso in Xcn. iTriXeXeyp.4voi occurs, Cy. .3. 3, 41 
(Altorf, avreiXey p.4v,oi), smd ecAeAi?x&a», 11. 1. 6, 16. — AiaX4yo p.ai, to converse, 
has Perf. SieiAey^at, though the simple Aeyw, in the sense of to sa^, always 
takes the regular reduplication, XeXeypai, dictus sum (Perf. Act. wanting). 



§ 121. Attic Re duplication. 

1. Sever;? 1 verbs, beginning with a, e, or o, repeat, in the Perf. 
and Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of 
the stern. This is called the Attic Reduplication. The Plup. 
then very rarely takes an additional augment ; e. g. Sig^cooukto, 
X. An. 7. 8, 14; so rjK^Koeiv, but sometimes aKrjKoew. 

2. The verbs, which in the Attic dialect have this reduplica- 
tion, are the following : — 

(a) Those whose second stem-syllable is short by nature :•— 

a.x4co, -<£, to grind, ip.4co, -u, to vomit, 

(aX-r]XeKa) aX--f]Xeapai ip.-rjp.eKa ip.--fip.eaf.iai 

(aX-rjXeiceiv) a\-7]\4crp7]v ip-rjpeKeiv ip.-r]p4a pr)v 

ap6cc, -co, to plough, ixdeo (iXavvco), to drive, 

(ap-ripoica) ap-r)popai c-A-r/Aawa iX-r;Xapai 

(ap-TipSitetu) b.p-r\p6p.r\v iX-r)Xaxeiv iX-r\Xdp-nv 

'OMOfl, bp.vvp.1, to swear, 'OAEH, oXXupi, to destroy, 

6p.-wp.oKa bp-copocrpai oX-wXeKa Perf. TI. ftX-coXa ('OAX2) 

up-cop.6;ceiu bp-o)p.6crpT)v bX-wXeicnv Plup. II. b\S\Eii/ 



i 125.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS. 151 

i\eyx&, to convince, opirrco, to die/, 

(i\-'f)\eyxa) i\-'fj\eyp.ca bp-dipv^a bp-apvyfiai and i&pvyp.cu 

(ih-y^eyxtw) i\-7]\eyfM7jy bp-wpix^iy bp-capvy^rju and copvyfiyjp. 

Further: eAtVcrco, to wind, (e'A jiKij(a), eAr^Afyjuai (the rough breathing be- 
ing rejected), and in good usage among later writers. eiXiynai ; «£« fOAfl), 
to smell, 6d-oo<5a ; <pepa ('ENEKXlJ^ to carry, iy--fjyo^a, iv-^veypeai; i<r&iu ('EAil). 
to eat, id-'fjSoKa, eS-^SecTyUcu 5 &y«, to lead, Perf. usually ^a; ayfioxa (instead 
of ay-^yoxa, so as to soften the pronunciation) is later, and is rejected by the 
Atticists as not Attic, though in Lysias ; but Perf. Mid. or Pass, always fjyjtLai. 

(b) Those which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel 
long by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication 
(except epetSw) :-— 

aXeicpto, to anoint, aKovw, to hear, 

a\-r]AL(pa a\-'f]\i/xiJ.ai a.K-rjKoa jjnovar/Aat 

a\-r]\i<peiv a\-7}\L{ijj.7]i> rj k-tj k6 eiy tjicovo'jj.tji' 

3 EAET0fl, €pxopt.ai, to come, ipeidco, to prop, 

i\-rihv&a i p -rj p e 1 tea ip-ypeLcr/xai 

eX-r]Ki)^eiy ip-qpeiKeiv ep-ripeiafx-nv 

ayeipec, to collect, iyeipoo, to wake, 

ay-iiyepi-ca ay-riyep/xai (iy--f}yepKa) iy-Tiytpfxat 

ay--qyepK€iv ay-7]yep/j.7]v (iy-7]yepiceiu) iy-rjy 4 pfxr] v. 

So from iyeipco comes the second Perf. iyprjyopa (on account of euphony 
instead of ey-riyopa), I wake, second Plup. Act. iyprjyopeiv, I awoke. 

Remark 1. The forms included in parentheses are such as are not found 
in good Attic prose. 

Rem. 2. The verb ayca, to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
<pepcA), to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication ; here, however, the 
reduplicated vowel takes the temporal augment, and that only in the Ind., and 
the vowel of the stem remains pure : — 

&ya, to lead, Aor. II. tfy-ayov, Inf. hyaydv, x\or. II. Mid. T\ya.y6^r\v ; 
<pep 03, to carry (stem 'EiTK), x\oi\ II. rjv-eynoy, Inf. eVey/cely, Aor. I. f/f-ey/ca, 
Inf. iv-eynai, Aor. Pass. Tjv-ex&vv, Inf. iv-ex&vvcu. 



{ 125. Augment and Reduplication in Compound 

Words. 

1. First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the 
augment and reduplication between the preposition and the 
verb ; the final vowel of prepositions, except irept and 7rpo, is 
elided [$ 13,2, (a)]-; rvpo frequently combines with the augment 
by means of Crasis (s s 10), and becomes irpov; Ik before the 
syllabic augment is changed to i$ (§ 15, 3 ) ; and kv and crvv 



152 



REMARKS. 



[* 126. 



resume their v which had been assimilated (§ 18, 2), or changed 
($ 19, 3), or dropped (20, 2), e. g. 

cbro-jSaAAa), to throw from, Ira. OTr-efiaKkov Pf. a.7ro-^efi\r]Ka Pip. arr-e^e^K^Keiv 



7repi-/3aAAaj, to i/jrow around, 
irpo-fSaWw, to throw before, 

hc-$aKh<a, to throw out, 
ffvK-Keyw, to collect together, 
crvp-pLTTTca, to throw together, 
ey-yiyvo<j.ai, to be in, 
i/j.-/3d\Aoi), to throw in, 
crv-(TKeva(w, to pack up, 



irepi-efiaXAov 
r irpo-efiaXXov 
I irpovfiaKhov 
et-efiaWov 
crvv-eXeyov 
crw-eppitrrov 
ev-eyiyv6jj.r]v 
ev-efia\hoy 
avv-eaKevaCov 



irepi-fiefiXrjKa 

Trpo-fiefiXiiKa 

■xpo-{lel3\r)Ka 

eK-fiefiXriKa 

crw-eihoxa- 

<rvv-eppi(pa 

ey-yeyova 

ijj.-ISe&X'nKa 

o-vv-eo~icevaKa 



■xepi-ef$e$\i)Keiv 

Trpo-efiefi\r)K<Eiv 

irpovPefZATiKeiv 

i£-efiefi\riKeiv 

(rvv-ti\6xeiv 

avv-epp((peiv 

ev-eyeyoveiv 

ev-efiefiAriKeiv 



2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with 8v<s, take the aug- 
ment and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem 
of the simple verb begins with a consonant or with r) or w ; (b) 
but in the middle, when the stem of the simple verb begins 
with a vowel, except rj or u>, e. g. 

8vs-rvxe<0, to be unfortunate, i-Svs-rvxow Se-Sus-Tux^/ca i-Se-dvs-rvx'fiKeiv 
Svs-aireoo, to make ashamed, i-Svs-doTrovv Se-dvs-c&TrriKa e-5e-5vs-coTT7)Keiv 
dvs-apecrreci}, to be displeased, Svs-7]peaTov > dvs-rjpearrjKa dvs--npeaT7)Keiv. 

Remark 1. Verbs compounded with e3 may take the augment and redupli- 
cation at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit them at the 
beginning, and evepyeTeco usually in the middle, e. g. 

ev-rvxew, to be fortunate, Impf. tjv-tvx^ov, but commonly ev-rvx^ov 

eu-co%€Ouai, to feast well, " ev-coxe6fj.rjv 

ev-epyereca, to do good, " ev-rjpyereov, but commonly ev-epyereov, Perf. 

ev-ripyerriKa, but commonly ev-epyeT7]Ka. 

3. Third Rule. All other compounds take the augment and 
reduplication at the beginning, e. g. 

£/j.v&o\6yeov 
cfKodo/xeov 

Tims Trappy] a idCopai (from irappr}<rla, and this from irav and pr)<ris), to speak 
openly, Aor. e-TTappr\(Tiacra.jX'qv, Perf. TTe-iTappr]criaafj.ai. 

Rem. 2. 'GdoTroiew has the Perf. udoTreiToirio^rai, X. An. 5. 3, 1. Lycurg. c. 
Lcocr. § 139, has lTnTorerp6<p7]Kev. 



[xv^oXoyew, to relate 
olKQ^ofxecc, to build, 



!J.e-[xv&o\6yT)Ka 

OJK0S6/X7]Ka. 



') 126. Remarks. 

1. The six following words compounded with prepositions take the augment 
in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi- 
tion : — 



$ 126.] VERBS. REMARKS. 153 

ajj.Tr4xofJt.ai, to clothe one's self, Impf. i)/j.7reix6/j.r]v, 1 or afAirsix. Aor. i)/j.Tre<rx^w 2 
avexo/J.ai, to endure (not aye'xoij, " T)vzixo}xv\v ' : "nvzo-x "^ 

OL/xcptyvoew, to be uncertain, " 7]/j.<peyv6ovi/ and i)ix<piyv6ovv 

a.i/op&6a), to raise up, " rjvwp&ovj/ Perf. iji/cvp&caica " jivoop&oocra 

evoxAe'co, to molest, " ^vcax^ovu " rivux^W^ " i)vdoxhr]<ra 

irapoiuew, to riot, ' ; iirapyvovu ' ; Trenvapciv-qKa " iTrapc&vnaa. 

2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not 
compounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words, 
viz. 

StcuTaco (from Uaira,food), (a) to feed, (b) to 6e a judge, Impf. iSiyrwv and 
Sjtjtwj/, Aor. i5iJ]T7)(ra and diyT-naa ; Perf. 8e5<?7T77Ka ; Impf. Mid.' S^tco^tjv 

Sia/cove'co, to serue (from Sia/coj/os, servant), Impf. 4§lt)k6vovv and o*it]k6vovv, 
Perf. 5edir}K:6vT]Ka 

a,[j.<pio-l3vTew (from AM-H2BHTH2), to dispute, Impf. T)/j.<p€(T^']Tow and r/^^io-- 

3. Exceptions to the first rule. Several verbs compounded with prepositions, 
take the augment before the preposition, since they have nearly the same 
signification as the simple verbs, e. g. 

a/j.(piyi/o<Ea} {voice), to be uncertain, Impf. T)p.(piyv6ovv, or 7)/j.(peyv6ovv (No. 1) 

a/j.cpiei/vv/j.1, to clothe, Aor. rjixcpiecra, Perf. Tj/xcpiea-fiai 

iwiffraixai, to know, Impf. Tjixundix-nv 

acpir]/j.i, to dismiss, " acpiovv and i)<pioui/, or 7]<pieiu \piKa 

KaSi(u, to set, " e/cciAh^W (old Att. also /ca&r(oi/), Pf. «e/co- 

Ka&4£o/x.ai, to sit, " e«:ad-e£o,u77v and Ka&e(. (without Aug.) 

Ka&7)/J.ai, to sit, " iKa^i)/j.7]V and ko^t]jx7]v 

Ka&evSw, to sleep, " .^/cad-ei/Soi/, seldom Ka&riv8ov. 

4. Those verbs are apparently an exception to the first rule, which are not 
formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by deriva- 
tion from a word already compounded, e. g. 

ivavTiov/xai, to oppose one's self to (from eyai/Tios) Impf. rivavTiov/xrjv 

auriSiKeco, to defend at laic ( " cbrtSi/cos) " 7\vti()Lkovv and rjuTeSiKOW 

avTij3o\4ca, to hit upcn ( " avTtfio\-f)) ' : T)vrifS6\ovv 

i/xiropdca, to gain by traffic ( " i/xirop-n) " ^[x-wopav 

i/j.ire()6w, to establish ( " 4/j.iredos) ' ; r)/A7r48ow. 

5. Many verbs, however, which apparently are formed only by derivation, are 
treated, even by the best classical writers, as if they were compounded of a 
simple verb and a preposition. Thus, irapavoix4w, irap-nvoiiow and Trapev6/j.ovy, 
Traprivo/x-no-a, Perf. irapai/evS/x-nKa, although it is not from nrapd and avo/x4ca or 
vo/j.4co, which two verbs are not in use, but from the compound irapdvo/xos ; so 
further, iyxelpo) rfrom 'ErXEIPOS), to take in hand, Impf. ivex^povv ; iirt&v 
y.e u> (from 'Eni0TMO2), to desire, Impf. iTre^v/xovu; iu&v jx4ojxai, Aor. 4veStvjx-}\- 
&7]v, Perf. iure^v/j.7]/xai; KaT7jyop4co (from Kariiyopos), to accuse, Impf. Kary\y6- 
povu, Perf. KaTr)y6p7)Ka; tt po&v/j.ov/j.ai (from irp6Svfios), to desire earnestly, 
Impf. ■Kpov^vfj.ovjxriu and irpo^v/xovfj.7]i/; SO iyKca/xid(eiv, Trpo<p7]Teveiv, iveSpeveiv, 
*KK>:i]<Tid£eii>, UTTOirreveiv, iTTiT7]b'eveiv, i/xcpauiCeiu, (Tvvepyeiv, etc. 

1 So PI. Phaed. 87. 6, according to most and the best MSS. 

2 Eur. Med. 1128, and Aristoph. Thesm. 165. 



154 VE?JBS IN -(0. — DERIVATION OF TENSES. [$$ 127, 128. 



Formation of the Tenses oe Verbs in -w. 

$ 127. Division of Verbs in -w according to the 
Characteristic. 

Verbs in -co are divided into two principal classes, accord- 
ing to the difference of the characteristic (§ 108, 5) : — 

I. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel ; these are 
again divided into two classes : — 

A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, 
except a, e, o, e. g. irathev-co, to educate; \v-co, to loose ; 

B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is a, e, or o, e. g. 
Tifjba-io, to honor ; (f>i\e-co, to love ; /acg^o-co, to let out 
for hire. 

II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant; 
these are again divided into two classes : — 

A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine 
mutes, e. g. Xeiir-co, to leave ; ifkeic-(o, to twine ; ire'fe-co, 
to persuade ; 

B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four 
liquids, X, /x, v, p, e. g. dyyeXX-co, to announce ; ve/x-co, 
to divide ; <\>aiv-w, to show ; cffoeip-co, to destroy. 

Remark. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act., 
all verbs are divided into : — 

(a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not 
accented, e. g. Xv-w, 7rAeVco, etc.; 

(b) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumflexed in the first Pers. ; these 
are consequently contract verbs, e. g. rifxw, <f>i\a>, fj.i<r&w. 

§ 128. Derivation of Tenses. 

All tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, the inflection-endings men- 
tioned above (§ 113), being appended to this. The Primary tenses only have 
a distinct tense-characteristic (§ 110); this is always wanting in the Pres. 
and Impf., the mode- vowels and personal-endings being sufficient; but the 
Pres. and Impf. very frequently strengthen or increase the pure stem, e. g. 
Tinrr-w (pure stem TTn), a^apj-avw (pure stem 'AMAPT) ; the Secondary tenses 
never admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure stem, and without 
the tense-characteristic; yet, in certain cases ($ 140), they admit a change of 



$ 129. j FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 155 

the stem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which arc formed from a common stem, 
may be distinguished from each other and classed by themselves. Tenses, 
included in such a class, may be said to be derived from one another. The 
principal classes are the three following : — 

I. Tenses, which may strengthen the pure stem. These arc the Pre.", and 
Impf. Act., Mid., or Pass., e. g. 

(pure stem TT1I) tvit-t-go rvn-r-ofj-ai 

%-TVTT-T-OV i-TV1T-r-6(J.T]y. 

II. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These are the Primary 
tenses, e. g. 

(a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act., e. g. (v4-(ppao-Ka) ire-cppana, i-ire-(pp&- 
Kay] 

(b) Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. These do not have the tense-charac- 
teristic; from the Perf. Mid. or Pass, the Fut. Perf. is formed by 
rejecting -pou and annexing -<ro^.ai, e.g. ri-rv^fmi (instead of t4tuit- 
/iot), he-rv fxfir]!/, Terminal (instead of rerinrao^ai). The Perf. has 
a. short vowel, but the Fut. Act. and Mid. a long vowel, e. g. Avw, 
Ke\vKa, AeAi'fica, Autrw, Xvcrojxai, Seco, deSrjKa, Seoe^cu, Si'jcw, Brjaofxai ; 
so the Fut. Perf. has a long vowel, e. g. AeXv&ofxai, 5eG-f]crop.ai ; 

(c) First Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. Ttfyco Tifyo^ai 

t-rvtya i-Tv^/dfj.7]v ; 

(d) First Aor. and first Fut. Pass., e. g. i-rixp-Siiv Tv<p-Srr}o-ojxai. 
III. Tenses, which are formed from the pure stem without a tense-character- 
istic, may yet, in certain cases, admit a change of the stem-vowel. These 
are the Secondary tenses, e. g. 

(a) The second Perf. and second Plup. Act. c. g. re-rvir-a, i-re-rvir-eiy : 

(b) The second Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. e-Aa&-oi/, i-\o^-6/j.7}u from 7mv- 
&dva (pure stem AA0) ; 

(c) The second Aor. and second Fut. Pass., c. g. i-Tv-rv-nv, rvTv-rjao/iai. 

§ 129. I. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs. 

1. In pure verbs, both Barytoned and Perispomena, the 
tense-endings are commonly appended to the unchanged char- 
acteristic of the verb, e. g. fiovXev-ao), fte(3ov\ev-Ka. Pure verbs 
commonly form no Secondary tenses, but only the Primary 
tenses; the Perf. with k (m), the Fut. and Aor. with o- and £ 
(o-w, o-a, Srjv, ^a-o-jian). Pure verbs, however, are subject to the 
following regular change in the stem : — 

2. The short characteristic vowel of the Pres. and Impf., is 
lengthened in the other tenses, viz. 

i into f, e. g. /xTjvtw, to be angry, jx-nvi-a-w, i-pLJ}vI<ra, etc. 

v " v, " kq)Xv-(m> (v commonly long), to hinder, /ca>Ao-<ra>, Ke-Kei?A.ty«M, etc. 



156 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [§ 130 

c into 7], e. g. cptAe-co (<pi\S>), to love, <pikr)-<rw, 7rs-(pi\rj-Ka, etc. 

o " w, " jUicr^o-co {fiicr&£>), to let out for hire, {juoSob-crw, /j-e-ixia^oo-Ka, etc. 

& " 7], " Tifxd-o} (ti[a£>) : to honor, TifjL'/]-aco, Te-Ti/j.rj-Ka, etc. 

Remark 1. a is lengthened into a, when e, t, or p precedes it [comp. § 43. 

1, (a)],e. g. 

ect-w, to permit, id-coo, zlacra, etcuta, e'lafxai, eld&rjv ; ecma-w, to entertain, ken id- 
croo ; (pcopd-oo, to steal, <pccpd-dca ; but iyyvd-oo, to give as a pledge, iyyv-rj(rw ; /3oda>, 
to call out, fio7)<To/ji.cu, ifioTjcra (like 078077). 

The two following imitate those in -edw, -idw, -paw, viz. 

aAod-w, to strike, to thresh, old Att. Fut. aAod-crco ; but usually a\or)<ra>) 
a.Kpod-0/j.ai, to hear, Fut. aKpodffOjuai, Aor. f)Kpoacrdjxr]v (like a&poa). 

Rem. 2. The verbs x/ 3 « w » to give an oracle; xp^i«ai, to use; and tit paw, 
to bore, though p precedes, lengthen a into 77, e. g. xP'h ffo t xa h TpTjcrco. 

$ 130. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs ivith 
a short Characteristic-vowel. 

The following pure verbs, contrary to the rule (§ 129, 2) re- 
tain the short characteristic-vowel, either in forming all the 
tenses, or in particular tenses. Most of these verbs assume a 
o- in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and first Aor. Pass., and in the 
tenses derived from these, and also in the verbal adjectives; 
such verbs are designated by : Pass, with cr. 

(a) -tw. 

Xpico, to sting, Fut. xP^ rw J Aor. expicra, Inf. xpfcrai. Pass, with cr; (but xp^ a > 
to anoint, Fut. XP™ *, Aor. expicra, Inf. xpTcrcu, Aor. Mid. ixpi(rd/xr]v ; Perf. 
Mid. or Pass. /cexpi-cr-jucu, Kexptcr&at ; Aor. Pass. ixp?-cr-&w '■> verbal adj. 
XpicrTo's). 

Remark 1. iiratco, to perceive, of the Ionic dialect, belongs here (§ 230). 
The poetie aiw is found only in the Pres. and Impf. {"aiov, § 122, 1). 

(b) -yea. 

1. 'Auvw (also old Att. & vvrw ) to complete, Put. avtcw ; Aor. fyixra. Pass, 
with cr. 

apvw (also old Att. apvTw), to draw water. Put. apvffco; Aor. ^pva-a. Pass. 

with ff. 
/j.vca(0), to close, e. g. the eyes, Fut. [ixktw, Aor. c^uwra; but Perf. fie/jLvica, to le 

closed, to be silent. 
tttvw{v), to spit, Put. tttvctw, Aor. €7TTvcra. Pass, with cr (iTTTv-(r-^r]u), verbal 

adj. tttv-(T-t6s. 

2. The following dissyllables in -vw lengthen the short characteristic-vowel 
in the Put and Aor. Act. and Mid. and in Fut. Perf. Mid., and 5vw also in the 
Perf. and Plup. Act.; but they resume the sbort vcwel in the Perf. and Plup. 



$ 130.] TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. 157 

Act. (except Sva), Mid. or Pass., in the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and in verbal 
adjectives : — 

Svod, to* wrap up, Fut. Svarw Aor. eSvca Perf. Se'Sv/ca 848vf.ai Aor Pass, iSifrnv 
bva, to sacrifice, " Svaa " c&vcra " rebma T^v/xai " " irvbrju 

Kv a, to loose, " Aucrco " eAucra " \4\iaca \4\vp.ai " " iAv&rjv. 

Rem. 2. The doubtful vowel u is commonly used as long in the Pres. and 
Impf. by the Attic poets ; but in prose it must be considered as short; hence to 
be accented y.ve, irrve, Ave, etc., and not /Ave, tttvc, Awe, etc. 

(c) -aw. 

TeXao), to laugh, Fut. yeAaaoficu (seldom ytXaaw) ; Aor. iy4\a<ra. Pass. 

with cr. 
i\dco (usually iXavvoo), to drive, Fut. e'Actcrco (Att. eA<S), etc. See § 158, 3. 
Haw, to bruise, &Aacrco, etc. Pass, with a (re^Xa-cr-fxai, £&\d-<r-&r)v). 
kAow, to break, /cAacrco, etc. Pass, with <r (/ce'/cAa-cr-yucu, 4KAd-<r-&r\v). 
%aActco, to loosen, xaAatrw, etc. Pass, with a (£xaAd-<r-&riv). 
da/xdw (usually Safidfa), domo, Aor. iSd/xaaa. Pass, with cr. 
ire paw, to transport, to sell, Fut. irepacrco ; Aor. iirepaaa; Perf. ireiripaKa (but 

ircpdo), to pass over, Intrans., Fut. irepairco ; Aor. eVepdo-a). These seven 

verbs have a liquid before the chai*acteristic-vowel o. 
trirdca, to draw, (nracrco, etc. Pass, with cr (icnrd-cr-brjv). 
(Txdw, to loose, to open, (rxo-crco, etc. 

(d) -4a. 

1. Aldeofiai, to reverence. See § 166, 1. 

aKeofxai, to heal, a/ceVcytcu, rjKeadfir]]/; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ^/ce-cr-/xcu; Aor. Pass. 

T)K.4-(r-drriv. 
a A ecu, to grind, to beat, ctAe'-cr-co, Att., yet seldom &A<£ ; Aor. ^Aetra; Perf. Mid. or 

Pass. aA^Aecr/xcu (§§ 117, 2, and 124, 2). 
dpKew, to suffice, etc. Pass, with <r. 
e> 4 a, to vomit, Fut. e>eVw, etc. ; Perf. Act. eWe/ca ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, e/^ecr- 

fxai (§ 124, 2). 
(4 a, to boil (usually intrans., and £eWu,ui, usually trans.). Pass, with <r. 
|e'co, to scrape. Pass with cr. — reAe'co, to accomplish. Pass, with cr (§ 117, 2). 
rp4a, to tremble, -eara, etc.; verbal adj. rpe-ff-rSs. — X ea, » to P 0Mr - See § 154, 

Rem. 1. 

2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others the short vowel: — 
ai via (in Attic prose 4iraiv4a), to praise, Fut. alv4<ra ; Aor. fjveffa', Perf. jjveKa', 

Aor. Pass. yv4bt\v ; Fut. Pass, alveb-fi<TOfj.ai ; verb. adj. cuVe-rcfe, -t4os ; but 

Perf. Mid. or Pass, yvn/jiai. 
alp 4 03, to-choose, Aor. Pass, r}p4&r)v; also rjpr}Sriv; a!pr)<ra, rjprjKa, yprjuai. 
ya/x4a, to marry, Fut. ya/xa; Aor. ey-nfia; Perf. yeydfirjKa ; Aor. Pass, iyafxrifrnv 

(I was taken to wife). 
54 a, to bind, S-fjaa, e8r}<ra, id^ad/jL-rju ; but Se'Se/ca, Sidefxai, id4^r)u ; Fut. Perf. 

SeS^jcrOiUot is commonly used for 8&-f)<ro[j.ai (the latter is used by Dem. and 

later writers). 

14 



158 VERBS. -AOIUST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WJTH a. [§ 131. 

KoAeco, to call, Put. KaXicrcc, Att. /caAw (§ 117,2); Aor. eicdXeax ; Perf. Act. 

Kf/cA^/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. kckA^ucu, Jam called ; Put. Peri'. KCKtefjcrofiuu, 

I shall be called; Aor. Pass. SkXtj^w, Put. Pass. /cA^^co/iou ; Put. Mid. 

KaXodfxai ; Aor. Mid. £Ka,\ecrd/.L7]v. 
jro3-e&>, to desire, -rro^ecrofxai, Lys. 8, 18, PL Phaed. 97, a.; tro^eca, fsoc. 4, 122. 19, 

17; elsewhere, 7ro3-?jcrw, eVo&Tjtra; Perf. Act. 7re7F^^-?jKa ; Treird&rifAU'. ; Aor. 

Pass. iTro&ea&riv. 
•xovico, laboro, Put. irovi]trco, etc. (to w;or&) ; irovecrco (to le in pain) ; Perf. 7re7ro- 

y?7/ca in both senses ; Mid. and Pass, always have 77, e. g. tirovncrawv and 

iirovfi&rji', Perf. ireir6vT}{JLa.i. 

(e) -oco. 
'Apdw, to plough, Put. ap6<rw, Aor. fjpocra; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ap4]pofj.cu (§ 124, 
2) ; Aor. Pass. ripSfr-nv. 



§ 131. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and 
the Perf., Plup erf. Mid. or Pass, with o-. 

1. Pure verbs, which retain the short characteristic- vowel in 
forming the tenses, in the Aor. and Fut. Pass, and in the Perf. 
and Plup. Mid. or Pass, (also in the verb, adj.), unite the tense- 
endings S-qv, fxai, etc. to the tense-forms by inserting o- ($ 130), 
e- g. 

TeAe-o? 4-re\e-cr-Sr7]v re-reAe-cr-fiai 

TeA€-tr-3^(ro//cu i-re-Te\e-cr-fj.T]y. 

2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have 
a long characteristic-vowel in the stem, or lengthen the short 
characteristic-vowel of the stem in forming the tenses, have the 
same formation, viz. 

a Kov w, to hear, Aor. Pass. 7\Kov-cr-^-nv, Put. Pass. a.Kov-cr-^r]crofj.ai, Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, tftcov-tr-iiai, Plup. ^Kov-G-fx-nv ; tvctvca, to kindle; KeAeuw, to command; 
the Deponent SicnrapaKehevo/xcu, to arouse ; Kvctico, kvt\co, to scratch (KeKva.i-cr-iJ.cu, 
KeKurj-cr-fxai, iKvai-cr-Er-nv, iKwn-cr-Sr7]v) ; kvXico, to roll; Aevco, to stone (eAeu-tr-diji', 
Perf. seems to be wanting) ; |va>, to scrape; traico, to strike; ira\aica,to wrestle 
(iira\ai-cr-&r)i') ; tt\4u>, to sail; irpiw, to saw ; Trraico, to strike against, to stum- 
ble; paicc (poetic), to destroy ; creico, to shake; vca, to rain, Aor. Pass, v-tr-3n)v, 
I was rained upon, Perf. Pass, Tj-cr-fxai (i<pv-a-/j.euos, X. Ven. 9, 5), Fut. vtro/xcu 
(instead of v-ar-^-fi-cr-ofiai) ; eppeco, to send (only in compounds, e. g. elacp., 
eK<p., to lead in), Put. cpp^crcc, etc., Mid. cpprjcro/u.ai, Aor. Pass, icpp-h-cr-^rju ; x^^i io 
heap up (K€xco-cr-fiai, t'xw-ir-S'ijj') ; xpaw, to give an oracle (K4xpy-cr-iJ.ai, e'xp^-o"- 
dr?!/, § 129, Rem. 2) ; XP l0} > to anowtf [§. 130, (a)] ; tyavco, to touch (tyav-cr-puu, 
Hippbcr.). 



$ 131. J VERBS. — -AOltlST AKD FUTURE PASSIVE WITH <T. 159 

3 The following vary between the regular formation and 
that with o- : — 

yeww, to cause to taste, Mid. to taste, to enjoy, Perf. Mid. or Pass, yiyevp,cu (Eurip.); 

but Aor. Pass, probably iyev-a-foiv. Comp. yev/xa, but yev-tr-riov. 
op dec, to do, Put. dpdaw, etc.: Perf. 5i8pai<a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. oiSpd/xat and 

8eSpa.-a-iJ.cu (Th.) ; Aor. Pass. £dpda&r)v (Th.). Verbal adjective dpa-a-ros, 

dpa-a-rios. 

Srpavoo, to break in pieces, Perf. Mid. or Pass, ribpav-a-fxai (Plat, ri&pav[j.cu) ; 
Aor. Pass. £&pctv-a-&t]v. Verbal adjective frpav-a-rSs. 

kAcu'w, Att. /cAaw, to weep, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKXav/xai and KiicXav-a-p.au 

«Ae/o), to shut, Perf. Mid. or Pass. /ce/cAei/xat commonly, /ce/cAei-fT-yUcu Aristoph. ; 
i<iicAr)p.ai Tragedians, Tbu., sometimes PL, rarely Xen. ; Aor. Pass. e/cAef- 
a-£rnv, Attic tK\ri-a-&7}v (Th.) ; Put. Pass. K\ei-a-&l]aoixai. Verbal adjective 
K\ei-a-r6s, KXy-a-ros. 

koXovco, to maim, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKo\ovp.ai and K€it6\ov-a-/xai ; Aor. 
Pass. zko\ov-<j-&t)v and £k.o\ov&t]v, 

tcpovco, to strike upon, P 'erf. Mid. or Pass. /ce/cpou/ioi and (seldom) KeKpov-a-p.ai 
(X. H. 7. 4, 26) ; Aor. Pass. iKpov-a-fr-nv. 

vice, to heap up, Put. j/^o-w, etc. : Perf. Mid. or Pass, vivnp,ai (vivn-a-p.ai doubt- 
ful) ; but Aor. Pass. ivfj-a-^rjv (Arrian). Verbal adjective vnr6s. 

via (collateral form vf)&a)),to spin, Perf. Mid. or Pass, vivn-a-p.cu; but Aor. 
Pass. £vt]&7)v. Verbal adjective vqrSs. 

\pdcc, to rub, Perf. Mid. or Pass. eipr)p.ai and exp-n-a-p-ai ; Aor. Pass, ity-fi&riv and 
£ipr)-a-£rnv (instead of which the Attic writers use i^y/xai, Z^ix^W from 

4. The following verbs assume o- in the Aor. Pass., but not 
in the Perf. : — 

jjup.vr]aKco (MNA-H), to remind, Pf. p.iuvnp.ai, I remember, A. P. £p.vf)-a-&r]v 
irvicc, to blow, iriirvvp-ai (poet.) £irviv-a-8rr)v 

Xpdojxai (xpw^cu), utor, K.ixpW ai e'XP^" '"^ 7 ? 1 ' 

iravca, to cause ;'o cease, to finish, iriTrav/xai iirav-a-Srnv 

and iiraforiv, ■n-av&iiaop.ai Ion. and Th. Verbal adjective irav-a-xios. 

5. The following verbs, though they retain the short charac- 
teristic-vowel in the Perf. and Aor. Pass., do not assume o- : — 

Svoo, frvcv, Xvco [§ 130 (b), 2], ixdec [§ 130 (c)], alvicc, aipiw, 5ea> [$ 130 (d), 2], 
apocc [§ 130 (e)], x«o [§ 154. Rem. l], treyco, to excite (§ 230). 



160 



UNCONTRACTED AND CONTRACT VERBS. [$$ 132-134 



Paradigms or Pure Verbs. 

A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs. 

$ 132. (a) without o- in the Mid. and Pass. 



kwXvw, to hinder. ACTIVE. 




Pres. l/cc/Au-co 


Perf. 


Ke-K(ti-Av-Ka 


Fut. 


K00hv-(TW 


Aor. 


i-Kci)\v-(ra 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. KwAu-o/icuj Perf. 


Ke-Kc^Au-^cu 


Fut. /cwAv-aojuai 


Aor. 




PASSIVE. 


Aor. U-KwXv-Srqv j Fut. 


KOiAv &j)crofAcu. 



$ 133. (b) with & in the Mid. and Pass. ($ 131). 



Perf. S. 1. 


Ke-KeXev-cr-fiai. 




Impei-ative. 


Infinitive. 


Mid. 2. 


Ke-KeAeu-cat 




K6-Ke\ev-(ro 


Ke-itetev-a&ai 


or 3. 


ne-neXev-cr-Tcu 




Ke-KeAev-a&w 


Participle. 


Pass. 1. 


Ke-KeXev-a-fjLt&oy 






Ind. D. 2. 


Ke-KeXev-a&ov 




ics-KeAev-cr&ov 


Ke-Ke\€v-(r-fJLej/os 


3. 


Ke-KtAev-a&ov 




/ce-/ceAeu-(Tid-wj' 


Subjunctive. 


P. 1. 


K€-Ke\ev-(T-(j.e&a 






Ke-Ke\ev-(T-fxeyos 3> 


2. 


Kt-Kehev-a&e 




Ke-KeXev-a&e 




3. 


Ke-KeX^v-(T-jx4voi el(ri{v) 


Ke-K6\ev-a&co(ra) 


' or Ke-K€\€V-(T&Qw] 


Plupf. „ . 
Mid. or &1 i ; 
Pass 


i-Ke-Ke\ev-cr-iA7]v D 


i-Ke-Ke\€v-(r-iJ.e&oj/ P. 


£-Ke-K6\€V-<T-fJL£&a 


i-Ke-tceXev-ao " 


i-Ke-xehev-cSov " 


e-zce-zceAeu-CiS-e 


Ind." 3 - 


e-/ce-/ceAei»-0"-TO " 


i-Ke-KeKev-a&r;v " 


Ke-KeXzv-a-uevoi fjffav 


Opt. 


Ke-zceAev-cr-fieVos e'i7jv 




Aorist Pass. 


i-Ke\ev-a-&T}v 


Future Pass. KeA 


ev-cr-&r](rofAai. 



2 



B. Contract Pure Verbs. 
134. Preliminary Remarks 



1. The characteristic of contract pure verbs is either a, e, or o (§ 127) ; these 
are contracted with the mode-vowel following. The contraction, which is made 
according to the rules stated above (§ 9, 1.), belongs only to the Pres. and 
Impf. Act. and Mid., because in these two tenses only is the characteristic- 
vowel followed by another vowel. The Paragogic v in the third Pers. Sing. 
Impf. Act. disappears in the contraction. On the tense-formation, see §§ 
129-131. 



$ 134.] PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 161 

2. The contract forms of verbs in -aw in the Indicative and Subjunctive are 
the same ; contracts in -6ca have the same form for the second and third Pers. 
Sing, in the Indie. Opt. and Subj. viz. -o?s, -oi. 

3. The contracted Infinitive of verbs in -aw, which, in our editions of the 
classics, is more commonly written with an Iota Subscript, is without that letter 
in the ancient inscriptions, being contracted from -aey, e. g. tijaw, not Tijxav. 

4. If only one syllable follows the parenthesis in the paradigm, the termina- 
tion of the uncontracted form is the last syllable in the parenthesis, and the 
syllable after the parenthesis is the termination of the contracted form, e. g. 
Tiii{a-<a)5) == Ttytaw, tljjlw, rifj.(d-€iv)av = ri/xdeiv, Ti/xav; but if more than one 
syllable follows the parenthesis, the syllable, or syllables, after the last hyphen 
is the common ending of the contract and uncontracted forms, the uncontracted 
word embracing all the letters of the form except the vowel after the paren- 
thesis ; the contract, all without the parenthesis. 



14* 



162 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



[§ 135. 



135. Par a dig ms of 



ACTIVE. 



JS 


111 

5 rt Sj 






Present. 






Characteristic a. 


Chai*acteristic e. 


Characteristic o. 




S. 1. 


Tiy.(d-u)a, to honor, 


cpi\(4-w)a>, to love. 


/Mcr&(6-<o)to, to let, 




2. 


Ti/j.(d-Gis)as 


<pi.h(4-eis)e?s 


IJ.i<T&(6-eis)o7s 




3. 


Tifj.(d-ei)S, 


(piA(4-ei)ei 


/u.La^(6-ei)o7 


Indica- 


D.l. 
2. 


7ifj.(d-e)a-70V 


<pi\{£-e)ei-Tov 


liucr&(6-€)ov-Tov 


tive, 


3. 


Ti/j.(d-e)a-TOV 


(piX{4-e)e?-Toy 


[Al<T&(6-€)0V-T0I' 




P. 1. 


Tt,u(a-o)w-/xev 


(pi\{4-o)ov-ixzy 


fjucr&(6-o)ov-[x.ev 




9 


Tt^(a-e)a-T6 


<^iA(e-e)e?-Te 


fj.ta&(6-e)ov-Te 




3. 

8.1. 


Ti/.i(d-ov)ui-cri{y) 


cpi\(4-ou)ov-(Ti(y) 


jj.iaS{6-ov) OV-(Xl(l>) 




Ti / u.(a-a>)w 




<pi\{4-w)S) 


/j.ia&(6-a)w 




2. 


-n^a-ps)^? 




(pi\(e-7)s)ys 


/jua&(6-T]s)oTs 




3. 


7i,u(a-??)'£ 


Q 


(j>i\{e-ri)r) 


lXl(T&{6-ri)(H 


Sub- 


D.l. 




a 






junc- 


2. 


Ti ; u(a-?7)a-TOJ' 


f a 


(pLX(e-ri)rj-Toi/ 


jj.i(r&(6-ri)(*)-Tov 


tive, 


3. 


T^ufa-^Ja-roj' 


& <+)i/\(€-77)7J-TOJ' 


fxiaSr(6-r))co-Toy 




P. 1. 


Ti,a(a-a?)w-/i€v 


g. <(pL\(e-ci})6b-(J.ev 


fj.Hrdr(6-w)w-/xev 




2. 


Ti/^a-Tjja-re 


i \(pi\(4-7])'n-T€ 


/xicrS(6-r])£>-Te 




3. 


ri l u(d-a)xh-(Ti(i') 




<pi\{z-(ti)u>-(Ti{v) 


fj.i(T^(6-co)w-(ri{u) 




S. 2. 


Tijj.(a-s)a 




(ptA(e-e)ei 


j.u<rSf(o-e)ou 




3. 


Tijx{a-i)a-TOi 


cpi\(e-4)ei-Tca 


fxi(r&(o-4)ov-T(a 


Impera- 
tive, 


D.2. 

3. 


T£/.t(a-e)a-roy 


<pi\(4-e)e?-roy 

(pLA(e-s)€i-TG>V 


fj.ia&{6-e)ov-Tov 
fj.icr&(o-4)ov-Tav 


P. 2. 


ri i u(a-e)a-Te 


(pi\{4-e)e?-T£ 


i.ii(r^{6-e)ov-Te 




3. 


TLfj.[a-i)d-Tu>aav, or 


(pi\(e-4)ei-Tca<Tai' or 


[At(T&( o-4)ov-T<a(Ta.v 






Ti/i(a-o)a-yTO!i/ 


<pi\(e-6)ov-vra}i' 

(pi\[4-eiv)e7s 


or [ua&(o-6)ov-yray 


Infin. 




Tt/xfa-eu^ay 


f.u.a&(6-tiy)ovy 




Nom. 


TL t a{d-c-ju)<iy 


(plh{4-0)v)(l)V 


IAMr&(6-cdv)wv 


Partici- 
pie, 




ri/j.(d-ov)w-aa. \(pi\{4-ov)ov-cra 


l uL<rSy{6-ov)ou-ca 




Ttj.i(d-oy)cov ,(pi\(4-oy)ovy 


IxmtS[6-ou)ovv 


Gen. 


Tljx{d-o)(ti-VTOS \<bi\(£-o)ov-vTos 


jXl(T^f{6-o)ov-VTOS 






rifjL(a-ov)w-<j-!]s 




<pLA[e-ov)ov-{rr>s 


\/j.icrS(o-ov)ov-cr7is. 



I in p p r I act. 



five, 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 



4Tiu.{a-ov)wv 
6Tt.u(a-cs)as 
erlfi(.a-e)a 

i"i'j.{d-z)'-,-Toi> 
eri : 'j.ia-4)i-Tqv 
iri.'Mko)<i)-usi/ 
67£/*{a-t ).-• re 



£(pi\(e-oy)ouy 
i<j)(\(e-es)eis 
i<pi\(e-s)ei 

*L(piA(4-e)e?-Tov 
iipi\(e-4)ei-T7;i' 

C<ptk(4-0 ,OV-fJL£V 

4(pi\(4-z e?-rs 
e<bi.\(e-oy)ov:> 



ijx[(xSr{o-oy)ovy 
€ l uia^-(o-es)ovs 
£<j.l<T&{o-e)<jv \ 

ifjucr§( o-e ) ov-Toy 

4lJLl(Tb\0-4)0V-T7]y 

*/j.icrdr(6-o)od-/j.ey 
6/.ucr.v(o-e)oO-T€ 



135.| 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT 



163 



Co n t. r a c t Verbs. 



M 1 D D L E . 




Present . 




Characteristic, a. 


Characteristic e. 


Characteristic 0. 


rijj.(d-o)u-/iac 


<piA(e-o)ov-/u.cu 


/.a(r^i(6-o)oi-fj.ai 


Ti / u(a-77)a 


(piAl^r,)^ 


y.icrSr(o--!j)(n 


Ti/n(d-e)a-rai 


^)iA( e-g )e?-rai 


jj.i(rSr(o-k)ov-Tai 


Ti/x(a-6)u>-/j.e^jy 


d>iA(e-o')o?;-ue.d-o;' 


jj.Kj&{o-6)oi-u<dov 


Ti l u(a.-e)a-(r5ov 


^iA(e-e)er-cr^-oy 


fiicrd e-i)ui-a&oy 


Ti(j.('A-s)a-(r&oy 


<p(A(e'-5)6?-o-,d-ov 


( Ui<r.d-{ o- e ) or-a&ov 


Tijj.(a-6)u;- l ue?ja. 


(£;A(e-d)ov-U6.3-a 


r.'.(Trb( 0-6) ■>■>':- jxe&a. 


Tiu(d-e)a-o~Se 


^£A(e'-e)s?-o"-irs 


u.-.eri ' {6-i),'v. -aSrs 


ri.v.{d-o)ai-vTai 




^>iA(e-o}oD^Tai 


i'ic?;{ r- <)••_» -,Tv.i 


■Tt,u(a-ttj)«-/Aaj 


<^iA(e-w)w-aai 


u.i<j~<i{6-&)cj-;j.ai 


r/ / a(a-r?)| 




(piK[e-ri)fi 


fJ. : (Til[o-ri }o? 


riu(d-7])a-Tai 


« 


Cj>i\(e--n)? i -rai 


,u..t "> i g-tj )oj-to,i 


Ti}i{a-(&)d!>-]j.e&ov 


P" 


(f>i.\((-cd}:o-jj.s^roi/ 


,'L rr-i-l 0- .'} da-pe&ou 


Ttu(a-7i}a-a&js }■ •_- i <^tA( c-77 i ,-c;Vov 


fUCi${~6-fl)Q!-<rib0V 


1 un'a-TjJfj-o'^-Oi' | & ; <pi\{e-r)'~G-z"Jv 


/Ufcrdi r'- ; !j--o" :'j;' 


~Tiy.[a-d})u)-iLtta. gj. <t'tA.{ c-a' }J.)-ue-ia 


jU. r-i; b-J>j\i<-tJ-e ra 


f>u[d-Ti}a-<r&G 1 c 


<pi\(J-r,)? r (r-te 


uie&{ d"' 1 defr* 


Tiu(a-w)(i-fTa( J 


(pLh(4-u \ca-VTfu 
(piA(e-ov)ov 


(.Lif&l 6-w)co-UTai 


'/"<,<,( a.-ou )« 


p.lGr$\ G-0J)0V 


T(u(a-e)a-cr,3-&> 


<f>.i\(€-4)ei-&&a> 


/.;c",-j o-e')ou-<j,d-a) 


"r«,u(tt-e N i«er,§-o;' 


(pi\{i-<z)e?-a&o>.' 


ui(r't[6-s )oi-a&ov 


Tbii.[a-e)tt-&iu(ai* 


<£/A(e-e')ei-c",3-av 


f.it(T&{ b-4)ov-(T&a)V 


Tiu(d-e)a-<T&6 


0iAf e-ejEi-o-.-^? 


!.ii(T&{6-i)av-<r&e 


TLu(a-e)d-a'&a>crcii\ or 


cjti.\( f-e)ei'-cr,Oa'P"ay, of 


juia&( o-4)ov-cr&ee<ray, or 


Tt/.'.(a-e)a-<rr3-a'-.' 


</:<A( F-ejci-cSwy 


fjiiir&(o-4)'o&-(r\H»v 


r;-.i(a-. : )£-a"S-Gi 


<£jA(e-<$)ou-/.tes/os 


/.'.icr&( G-e ) ou-cr.S-cu 


-(/.<.( a-o)w-/.ie;'5 s 


^.icrS-^o-d ) ov-jxevos 


TifJ.{a-(r)oi3-fj.4'!/7i I <pi\(t-o)ov-fjJvr) 


[J.t(T&{ 0-0 ) o\j-pAw>-j 


T!f.i(a-6)u>-usyou < <pi?^(e-6)ov-/.te<sGS 


/j.io~&(o-o ) ov-[xeuov 


rifi[a-o)a-fjLevov 


ri)iA(6-o)oy-,u€j'oy 


ixi<r&( 0-0 ) ov-ll4uov 


Tifi(a-o)a>-fxeyr,s 


<^iA(6-o)ou-,aej/77S 


fj.i(T^(o-o)ov-fxev7js. 


Imperfect. 




lTi;iAc.-6)d)-ur]y' 


i(pt\[e-6)ov-!xr]U 


€fXl(r^(0-6)0V-fX7]U 


£rifi{d-ov)& 


i<pt\{4-ov)ov 


£lJ.L(rS(o-ov)ov 


ctiu( a- e }a-TO 


e^)iA(c-e)e?-TO 


i/j.LO~d-(6-e)ov-7 


Iri'fX (a- 6) do-jJL&oy 


e<£( A( e-o ) ov-jj.e&oy 


i/J.l(T&( 0-6 )0V-/A6&0V 


iTi/j.{d-e)a-<Tvoy j i<piX(4-e)e7-cr&0i/ 


ifj.ia&( 6-<z)ov-a&ov 


triu: c-6;a-a ( u?;y £(pi\{€-4)e(-a^r}U 


ijj.LC-&(o-e)ov-(T&r)i/ 


i-rijjA a-6) &-fj.€&a 1 £<pi\{z-6) ov-peSta 


£jU(jkr{o-6) ov-jxeSa 


£ri[j.(d,-£)a-(T&e i<piA(e-e)t?-cr&G 


£/j.i(t&{ 6-e)ov-a&6 


£rtfi{a-o)a VTO 




i(pi\{t-o)ov-!STO 


£/u.l(T^(6-o)ov-vtu 



J 



164 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



[$ 136. 




$ 136. With short Vowel 



ACTIVE. 



Tenses. 

Present, 

Imperfect, 

Perfect. 

Pluperfect 

Future, 

Aorist, 



Characteristic a. 



cnr{d-cc)cb, to draw, 

'4(TTT{a-0v)(tiV 

; effvaua 
iairakeu/. 
ffwaacj 
ecrrracra 



Characteristic 



TeA(4-w)a, to com- 

6T6A( €-ov)ovi>[plete, 

TtTeXcKa 

iTereAefceiu 

Tehee 

irdheffa 



Characteristic o. 



ap ( o'-o) ) a>, to plough 

¥lp(o-ov)ovv 

ap-i)poKa 

ap-7]p6Keiv 

apSaco 

ijpoaa 







PAS 


Aorist, 


f t<TTca-cr-ST]V 


[ ereAe-cr-d-?)!/ j rip6&7)v \ 


1 




Verbal adjectives : <nra-<r-Teos, -rea, -riov, 



136. 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



165 





— j 
Imp e rfe c t . 




Characteristic a. 


Characteristic e. Characteristic o. 




Tifx(a-ol)qj-fX7]y 

Ti t a(d-oi)oj-o 

TiiJ.(d-oi)oj-ro 

t i/j.(a-oi)qj-/j.e^oy 

TLjj. (d-oi)oj-<r&ov 

TifA(a-oi)a>-o-frr)v 

TLfx{a-oi)u>-jxe&a 

Tl/A(d-Ol)qj-<T&€ 
TL,u(d-OI.)q3-VTO 


(pi\(e-oi)oi-/j.riv 

(pt\(e-oi)o7-o 

cpi\(e-oi)o7-To 

<pi\(e-oi)oi-fxe&ov 

(pi\(e-oi)o7-a&ov 

<pi\(e-oi)oi-o-&7)v 

<pi\(e-oi)oi-/j.e&a 

(pi\[e-oi)o7-cr&€ 

cpt\(e-oi)o7-i/TO 


fj.icr& (o-o()o i-/A7}v 

[xio-&(6-oi)o7-o 

Ij.io-&(6-oi)o7-to 

/j.to-gr(o-oi)ol-fje&oy 

lxi(rd{6-oi)o7-o-&ov 

(xio-&(o-oi)oi-o-&r)v 

(j.io-&(o-oi)oi-fxe&a 

/j.icr&( 6-oi }o7-o-&e 

(j.ia&(6-oi)o7-i'To 












irecpoopa/jLcu 


Tre(pi\r)/J,at 


fj.efj.io'^wfj.ai 




eTeTip.r\ua]V 
eTrecpcopa^urju 


eire<pi\7jfj.7]v 


ejxe[j.ia&d}iA7}v 




TijxrfiTOjiai (poopkaoixai 
iTifj.7](rdfjL-riv i(pwpdad,ur]y 


<piA.T}<roiJ.ai 
e<pi\r)0-diJ7)i' 


/J-icrbcacrofxai 




efxio-&a}crd/j.r)i' 




TeTip.riaoij.ai Trecpupao-o/xai 


Tre<pi\T]cropLai ' (j.e/xia&uo'ofxai 


SIVE. 


| Future, | Ti(xr)&r]GO[j.ai cpupa&ricro/Aai | cpiXrj&'fio'ofj.ai f fu(r&w&ri(rofxai 


<pi\7]-Teos, -Tea, -Teov, fjioSca-Teos, -Tea, -t4ov. 



in forming the Tenses. 



MIDDLE 



Characteristic o. 



<nr(d-o)a>-nai 

eo-ir{a-6)di)-p.T]V 

eo~Tra-o~-(j.ai 

eaTrd-cr-firju 

cnracrofxai 

eo-jvao~dfj.t)V 



SIVE. 



Characteristic e. 



TeA.( 4-o)ov-fiai 
eTe\(e-6)ov-fiT)i/ 
t e t e \ e - <r - fi a i 
€T eTeXe-c-fXTiv 
TeXovjxai 
eTe\ecrd[j.7]V 



Characteristic o. 



ap(6-o)ov-/j.ai 

rip(o-6)ov-fj.r]i' 

ap-^po/xai 

ap-7]p6fxriv 

ap6o~o/j.at 

7)poadfit]v 



Future, | o~ira-cr-Sr'h<roiiai \ TeA.€-(T-frf;<ro^cu 



apofrfiaofxai 



TeXe-a-Teos, -ea, -eov, apo-Teos, -ea, -eov. 



166 REMARKS 0.\ THE CONJ. OF CONTRACT VERBS. [$ 137. 

Remark. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. Fas*, with a, see §§ 130, 
131 ; on the omission of the <r in aprjpof.iat, iipodrqv, see § 131, 5 : and on the Attic 
Reduplication in apjjpoficu, see § 124, 2. The further inflection of eenra-<r-/«M, 
ia-!rd-(X'j.<.T]v, rereKe-a-fMai, iTerc^4-(r- l u7]y, is like that of KSK4\ev-<T-fA,ai, § 133. On 
the Attic Flit., TeAeVw = TeA<£, -€?$■, etc., re\4cro l uai = TeAoC^cu, rekrj [el], 
-etcV, see § 117. 

$ 137. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract 
Ye rbs. 

1. The Attic dialect omits contraction only in the cases mentioned under 
§ 9, Rem. 3 ; but verbs in -4w with a monosyllabic stem, c. g. ir\4w, to sail, irv4a>, 
to blow, &4w, to run, etc. are uniformly uncontracted, except in the syllable -ei 
(from -eet or -eej. e. g. 

Act. Pr. Ind. ir\4(a, ir\s?s, irAe?, Tr\4ofxev, 7rAe?Te, ir\4ovcri [v), 

Subj. 7rAeo>, tt\4t)s, irAej?, ivXiufxev, ir\4r]re, ir \ 4 a <r i (v) , 

Imp. 7rAe?. Inf. irXelv. Part. tt\4o)v. 
Impf. Ind. %Tr\eov, eirXeLS, eirAei, iir\4o /j.e y, iirAelre, sirXeov. 

Opt. ir\4oip.i, 7T\4ois, etc. 
Mid. Pr. Ind. tt\4o jxai, irX4v, 7rAetTot, 7r A e <f /^e & o ^, icKetcrSfov, etc. 

Inf. TrAcTo-d-cu. Part. 7r A e J /x e j> o s. Impf. e 7r A e o /x 7] p. 

2. The verb 8 4w, to bind, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu- 
larly in compounds, e. g. to Sovy, rod Sovyros, 8ta.8ovfj.aL, Kar48ovv. But Se?, it 
is necessary, and 8 4ofxai, to need, follow the analogy of verbs in -4w, with a 
monosyllabic stem, e. g. to 84oy, o4o[xai, Sela&ai ; uncontracted forms of 84o/j.ai 
occur, instead of those contracted into -e i, e. g. 84erai, 84ea$at, id4ero, Xen., 
and sometimes also forms of other verbs belonging here are uncontracted, e. g. 
ZnAeey, X. H. 6. 2, 27 : ir\4ei, Th. 4, 28 ; (Tvv4x^v, PI. Rp. 379, e. 

3. Several verbs deviate in contraction from the general rules, e. g. 

(a) -ae, -aei, -ay, are contracted into -77 and -77, instead of into -a and -a, e. g. 
C(d-co) a, to live, (rjs, -(t}, -Cmoy, -(^re, Inf. £t>, Imp. £? h Impf. zfav, -ns, 
-7], -?iToy, -7)TT)y, -i)Te; — it e iv (a-a>) <a, to hunger, Inf. ireiyrjy, etc.; — Sii^" 
(d-u>)Si, to thirst, hityfjs, etc. Inf. Slippy ; — kj/(c£-)w, to scratch, Inf. /ci/j}?; 
— cr,u(a-o) <£, to smear, Inf. u/tijV; — i|/(a-a>) w, to r«6, Inf. ifr>; — XP («"°) 
w-fxai, to use, XPV' XPV Tal > XPV (T ^ al 'i so aTroxpw/xai, to have enough, 
a-TTOXpyicrSrat. ; — awoxpy (abridged from airoxpfi)-, it suffices, Inf. airoxpw, 
Impf an4xpv ', — Xpi"-' *) &, to give an oracle, to prophesy, xPV s i XP]h XPW- 

(b) -00 and -oe are contracted, as in the Ionic, into -u>, instead of into -ov, and 
-6rj into -w, instead of into -0?, c. g. p iy(6-w) w, to freeze, Inf. piywy 
(Aristoph., but piyavv, X. Cy. 5. 1, 11), Part. G. piy&vros (Aristoph., but 
fyiyovvrwy, X. H. 4. 5, 4), and piyuva (Simon, de mulier. 26), Subj. piy$ 
(PI. Gorg. 517, d.), Opt. jfcy^jj (Hippocr.). 

Remark 1. The Ionic verb I8p6u, to sweat, corresponds in respect to con- 
traction with f>iy6a>, to freeze, though with an opposite meaning: ISpwai, 
ZdfKpTiv, ISpwca, i8pwvTc$. 



$ 138.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF IMPURE VERBS. 167 

4. The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of the 
Opt. in -Tjv (§ 116, 8), viz. in the Sing., especially in the first and second person, 
of verbs in -ecu and -6oc, the form in -oiiqv is far more in use than the common 
form, and in verbs in -da it is used almost exclusively ; but in the Dual and 
PI. the common form is more in use. The third Pers. PI. has always the 
shorter form, except that Aeschin., 2. § 108, Bekk., uses doicoivcrau. 

5. The verb Xovu, to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac- 
tion in all the forms of the Impf. Act. and of the Pres. and Impf. Mid., which 
have -e or -o in the ending, e. g. eAov instead of eAoue, i\ov/j.€u instead of e'Aou- 
ofxev, Mid. Xov^ai (Aoei, Aristoph. Nub. 835. according to MSS.), Aovrai, etc., 
Imp. AoO, Inf. AoOcr&cu, Impf. 4Xov[iriv, i\od, iXovTo, etc., as if from the stem 
AOEX1 ; still, uncontracted forms are found, c. g. Xovopai, 4\ovovto (Xen.). 

Rem. 2. On the change of the accent in contraction, see § 30, 2. 



II. Formation of the Tenses op Impure Verbs. 

§ 138. General Remarks. 
Pure and Impure Stem. — Theme. 

1. Impure verbs ($ 127, II.) undergo a variety of changes in 
the stem. In the first place, the stem of the verb is strength- 
ened : — 

(a) Either by an additional consonant, e. g. tvit-t-cd, stem TTII: Kpd(-a), stem 
KPAr ; cppd£a}, stem <i>PAA ; and even by inserting an entire syllable, e. g. 
a/j.apT-dv-00, stem 'AMAPT ; 

(b) Or by lengthening the stem-vowel, e. g. <pevy-w, stem $rr; Atj^-co, stem 
AA0 ; T7}K-a>, stem TAK ; 

(c) Or secondly there is a change of the stem-vowel in some of the tenses; 
this change may be called a Variation (§16, 6), e. g. /cAeVT-co, 4-KAa.Tr-rjv, 
Ke-tcXocp-a ; comp. Eng. ring, rang, rung. 

2. The original and simple stem is to be distinguished from 
the strengthened stem ; the first is called the pure stem, the 
last, the impure: The Pres. and Impf. commonly contain the 
impure stem ; the Secondary tenses, when such are formed, and 
specially the second Aor., contain the pure stem; the remaining 
tenses may contain either the pure or the impure stem, e. g. 

Pres. tutt-t-w, to strike, Aor. II. Pass. 4 - rv-n-t\v Put. Act. rfy<a {rim-cra) 
" AeiVw, to leave, " Act. e-AtTr-ov " M Aefyw (AeiVcrw) 

(i (repawn, to kill, " Pass. 4-<T<pay-'nv " " ff(pd& {<r<pdy-<ra) 

« <paiv-<a, to show, " " 4-<pavnv " Mid. <p a v-ovfiai 

" <pSe(p-w, to destroy, " " 4-<p&ap-vv " Act. $>3>*p-w. 



168 IMPURE VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM. [$ 139. 

3. When a form of a verb cannot be derived from the Pres. 
tense in use, another Present is assumed ; this assumed Pres. 
may be termed the Tlicme (#4«x), and is printed in capitals, 
to distinguish it from the Pres. in actual use ; thus, e. g. </>euyw 
is the Pres. in use, 3?YPO is the assumed Pres., or the Theme, 
designed merely to form the second Aor., z-<$>vy-ov. 



\ 139. Strengthening of the Stem. 

1. The stem is strengthened, first, by adding another conso- 
nant to the simple characteristic consonant of the stem, e. g. 

ti/tttcc {twit), to strike, Aor. II. Pass. i-TV7r-7)v 

rd-rrw {ray), to arrange, " i-rdy-rju 

tcpd^w (upay), to cry, " Act. %-npay-ov. 

2. Yet the strengthened stem is found only in the Pres. and 
Impf. ; in the other tenses the simple stem appears, e. g. 

Pres. tvtttw Impf. eTvirrou Aor. II. Pass, irvirrjv Put. Tv\pw (rviraw). 

Remark 1. The characteristic of the pure stem, e. g. -k in TTTI-n is called 
the pure chai-acteristic ; that of the impure stem, e. g. ttt in tvitt-o}, the impure 
characteristic. 

3. The stem of many verbs is strengthened also by length- 
ening the short stem-vowel in the Pres. and Impf. ; this short 
vowel reappears in the second Aor., and in liquid verbs, in the 
Fut. Thus, 

& is changed into 77 in mute verbs, e. g. (e-ka&-ov) A#h» 

at in liquid verbs, " (<pa.v-u>) (paivw 

€i in liquid verbs, " ((p&ep-w) cpfreipa) 

ei in mute verbs, " (e-Xtir-ov) Xeiirw 

1 in mute and liquid verbs, " ( e - r p t $ - r\ v) rpi&ca 

v in mute and liquid verbs, " (i-<}>pvy- rjv) cppvyw 

ev in mute verbs, " (e-<p vy-ov) (psvyu. 

Rem. 2. This strengthening of the stem distinguishes the Impf. Ind. and 
Opt. from the same modes of the second Aor. ; likewise the Pres. Subj. and 
Impf. from the same modes of the second Aor., e. g. %Kpa£ov inpayov, Kpd(oi/xt 
Kpdyoi/j.1, Kpdfa Kpdyw, Kpd(e Kpdye ; — eAenrov zXittou, XelirotjAi Xtiroi/xi, Aeiirw 
\tirw, Ae?7re Xt-ire. 



§ 140.] VERBS. CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. 169 

§ 140. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel. 

1. The change or variation of the stem-vowel [$ 138, 1 (c)], 
occurs only in the Secondary tenses, with the exception of a 
few first Perfects. 

2. Most mute and all liquid verbs, with a monosyllabic stem, 
and with c as a stem-vowel, take the variable a in the second 
Aor., e. g. 

rp4ir-b), to turn, Aor. II. Act. %-rpa.ir-ov 

kX4tt-t-u, to steal, " Pass. 4-K\air-T]u 

rp4<p-a>, to nourish, " " 4-rpa.<p-r\u 

arpicp-w, to turn, " " £-<tt pa<p-r}v 

jSpe'x-w, to wet, " " i-Ppax-yv 

Sep-o), to flay, " " i-Sap-r]V 

creAA-w, to send, " " 4-o~to.\-tiv 

<rireip-a>, to sow, " e-crirap-yv 

ip&eip-w, to destroy, " " 4-<pfrap-i)j/ 

v4p.v-u>, to cut, " Act. C-TOjU-OC. 

The second Aor. era/xov (from r4fj.ua}, to cut), is very rare in Attic prose (Th. 1. 
81. Tdixwfj.su) ; regular erefj-ou ; the second Aor. £f$p4xnu (from /3pexc«>, to wet), is 
poetic and late ; common form 4fip4x&nv. The first Aor. Pass, irpecp&nv (from 
rpiirw), efrpecp&yv (fr. rpecpco), earpi^nv (fr. (rrp4(pw), belong more to poetry than 
prose ; iic\4(p&r)u (fr. k\4tvto)) Ionic and Eur. Or. 1575 (KAe^eis). Aepcu, <nrefpa>, 
and (p&eipo), have no first Aor. Pass. The variable a does not occur in polysyl- 
lables, e. g. tfyyc\ou, riyy4\r]u, &<ps\ou, 7}yep6fxr]u. 

Remark 1. As this variable vowel distinguishes the Impf. from the second 
Aor. Act., e. g. erpeTrou (Impf), erpaTTou (Aor. II.), in some verbs of this class 
(2, above), whose second Aor. Act. is not in use, the variable vowel does not occur 
in the second Aor. Pass., because that tense cannot be mistaken for the Impf, 
see § 141, Rem., e. g. &\4itoj, to see, Impf. e-p\eir-ou, second Aor. Pass. e-jSAeV- 
yv (first Aor. Pass, is wanting) ; \4ya>, to collect (in compounds), second Aor. 
Pass. Ka.T6-\4y-r]v, <Tvu4\syt)u (more seldom Aor. I. (rweXex&n", e|eA.ex&77»' ; with 
the meaning to say, always eAex^") ; so also Keir-w, to peal, i-\4ir-r)u (first 
Aor. Pass, wanting) ; tt\4k-w, to braid, usually £-ir\<Lit-nv> but also i-ir\eK-r}v 
Plat, (first Aor. Pass. iir\4x&w> Aesch. Eum. 259) ; <px4y-co, to burn, 4-<p\4yrfv 
(more seldom i^x^u) ; \p4yu, to censure, i-^y-rju, first Aor. Pass, wanting. 

Rem. 2. The verb ttA^ttw, to strike, when uncompounded, retains the tj 
in the second Aor. and second Put. Pass., but when compounded, it takes the 
variable a; thus, i-irX-fiy-yu, TrKnyf]<rofiai, i£e-ir\ay-7)U, Ka.T€-TrAay-r}u, 4K-ir\ay}}- 
aofMai ; o-tjttw, to make rotten, and rfca, to melt (trans.), also have the variable a; 
hence Perf. ff4ar}Tra, I am rotten, second Aor. Pass. iaairrju, second Put. Pass. 
<raTr4)<rofj,ai; Put. r^w, Aor. er^a ; second Perf. r4Tqtca,Iammelted; second Aor. 

Pass. ir&KVv; also first Aor. Pass. iriix&W, P1 - Tim - 6L b -> Eur - Su PP' 1033 - 
15 



170 VERBS. CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. [$ 140. 

3. Liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with e for a 
stem-vowel, take the variable a, not only in the second Aor., but 
also in the first Perf. Act., in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and the 
first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

ffreXXcc, to send, Put. areX-co Pf. s-tfraX-Ka e-o~raX-/xai Aor. e-ardX-^-nv 
(p&dpw, to destroy, Put. <p&ep-a> Pf. e-(p&ap-Ku e^fra/j-^uat. 

The first Aor. Pass. etrrdxSrov is poetic ; the first Aor. Pass, of depa, (rirtlpoe, 
(pfeipu is not in use ; hut instead of it the second Aor. Pass., thus, iSdpriv, 
io-jrdpyqv, ecp&dp-nv. The variable a does not occur in polysyllables, e. g. 
ijyyeXKa, rjyyeXfrrjv from oyyeAAw, ayrjyep/xai, Tiyep&yv from ayeipca. Comp. 
No. 1. 

4. Mute verbs, which have e in the final stem -syllable of the 
Pres., take the variable o m the second Perf. ; but those which 
have a, take ot; liquid- verbs, which have e or et in this syllable, 
take o, e. g. 

depKO/xai (poet.), to see, SeSopua depw, to flay, dedopa 

rpe<pct), to nourish, rdrpocpa iyelpco, to wake, iyprjyopa, I awoke, 

Xeiira, to leave, XeXonra o~7reipa), to sow, ecriropa 

7re&a>, to persuade, iriiro&a, I trust, (pSrelpw, to destroy, z<p&opa poetic, (e<p&apKa, 
prose). 

Rem. 3. Here are classed the following anomalous second Perfs. ; edw 
(Epic), elcogra instead of cT&a, to be wont, elw&evcu, elw&cvs, Plup. elw&eiv; — 
'EIAfl, video, oJSa, I know; — 'EIK.H, eoiKa, to be like, to appear, Plup. iyiceiv', — 
eX-jrca (poet.), to cause to hope, eoXira, I hope, Plup. iwXireiv, I hoped ; — 'EPrXl, to 
do, eopya, Plup. iwpyew; — priy-yvfju, to break, tppwya, lam broken (but on o-t]va, 
see Rem. 2). 

5. The following take the variable o in the first Perf. also, 
contrary to the rule in No. 1. 

KXe-n-Tw, to steal, first Perf. kekAo^o, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. /ce/cAe/^ai (very 

rare and only poet. KiKXap-jxai). 
\€7a>, to collect, first Perf. <rweiXoxa, ££etXoxa) but Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

<TvvelXzy/.iai. 
ire/Aira, to send, first Perf. irdirofxcpa; but Perf. Mid. or Pass, iriireixixai. 
Tpenw, to turn, first Perf. rerpocpa (like the second Perf. of rp4<pa, to nourish), 

and Terpacpa ; still, this last form is rare ; the more usual form is rerpocpa. 

The variable a in the Perf. Act. is not found elsewhere, and is probably 

here used only to distinguish it from T*Tpo<pa, Perf. of Tp4<pw. 

6. The folio-wing mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem, and 
with c for a stem-vowel, like liquid verbs (No. 3), take the 
variable a in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; still, the a is not found in 
the first Aor. Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs, e. g. 



$ 141.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. 171 

(TTpecpw, to turn, Pf. Mid. or Pass. 4o-Tpafj.fx.ai, but first Aor. Pass. i<TTp4(pfrt\v 
Tpeirw, to turn, " t4t pafj.fj.ai, " " 4Tp4cp&r)u 

rpecpca, to nourish, " " T4frpafj.fj.ai, " " ifrp4cpfr7]y. 

On k\4tttci}, see No. 5. 



$ 141. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses. 

1. The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in wanting the 
tense-eharacteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-endings (-ou, 
-6fxr]v, -t\v, -■fiarofj.ai, -a, and -eiu) immediately to the pure characteristic of the 
verb, e. g. 4-Xitt-ov, second Aor., but e-iraiZtv-ar-a, first Aor. ; partly, in being 
formed throughout from an unchanged pure verb-stem (except the Perf. which 
prefers a long vowel, see No. 2), e. g. Xelirco, Z-xlir-ov, (pevyco 4-<pvy-ou\ and 
partly, in taking the variable vowel, e. g. <rrp4<p<a £-o-Tpa<p-r\v o'Tpacp-rjcrofj.at, 
but i-<rTp4<p-frt}v (§ 140, 2). 

2. The second Perf. either lengthens the short stem-vowel t into I, a into -n, 
and, when it stands after other vowels or p, into d, e. g. 

tcpafa, to cry out, second Aor. 4-Kpa.y-ov second Perf. ic4-Kpay-a 

(ppicro-u), to shudder, stem: 4>PIK (t) " ir4-<pplK-a 

fraAXco, to bloom, Put. frd\-a " r4-frr}\-a) 

so, ir4<pr\va, \4\r)&a from $AN-a>, AA0-a> ; or it retains the long vowel or diph- 
thong of the Pres., e. g. ir4(pevya from cpevyw (but second Aor. Act. %<pvyov), 
T4rr\Ka, o-4o"nTra from ttj/ccu, a-fj-rrco (but second Aor. Pass. eTa/oji/, iadinjv, see 
§ 140, Rem. 2) ; a short vowel occurs only in the cases referred to in § 124, and 
§ 140, 4. 

Remark. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. could not be distinguished 
from the Impf, or at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., since this last form 
has a different ending from the Impf, and could not be mistaken for it, e. g. 

ypacpw Impf. 4ypa<pov A. I. eypatya A II. Act. want. A. II. P. iyp&<pr)v (A. I. P. does 

not occur in classical writers). 
k\Tv<o " 4k\Ivov " eK\lua " " A. II. P. 4kXivt)v (A. I. P. ii<\i- 

£rr)u in Aristoph). 
ipvxu " %t\i\>xov " eij/0£a u " " ityvxyv, Plat, (epvyrjv 

Aristoph. Nub. 152 [with the variation \pvx^<rv] and often in the later writers; 
A. I. tyux&rji', Plat.). 

3. The following points, also, are to be noted : (a) There is no verb which, 
together with the second Aorist, forms the three first Aorists; (b) There is no 
verb which has in use at the same time the second Aor. Act. and Mid. and the 
second Aor. Pass. ; but all verbs, which form the second Aor. have either the 
second Aor. Act. and Mid. only, or the second Aor. Pass. only. A single 
exception, in regard to both the particulars specified, is seen in the verb TpeVw, 
to turn, which has three first Aorists together with three second Aorists : irpairov 
(Ion.), irpa.Tr6[Ar)u, iTpaityv, erpe\pa (the common form in Attic), irpe^iafxriv 
(transitive, e. g. rp4^aarfrai els (pvyfjv, to put to flight), 4rp4^frr\v (used more by the 



172 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE-VERBS. [$ 142. 

poets, see § 140, 2) ; but in compounds, e. g. iTrtTpeQ&rji'ai, Antiph. 4. 126, 4. 
127, 5). 

There are but few exceptions to the statement under (b), since the second 
Aor. Act. and Mid. and the second Aor. Pass., occur but rarely, and mostly 
in the poet, dialect, e. g. irvirov Eur., and irihrrjv ; %Xiicov and eAr/r^j/ : iXeicpSnju, 
and very seldom iXnroixrjv. 

4. It is rare that a verb has both Aor. forms ; where this is the case, the two 
forms are used under certain conditions, namely : — 

(a) The two Aor. forms of the Act. and Mid. have a different meaning, i. e. 
the first Aor. has a transitive meaning, the second Aor., an intransitive. The 
same is true of the two forms of the Perf., where they are constructed from the 
same verb. See § 249, 2. 

(b) The two forms of the Aor. belong either to different dialects, or differ- 
ent periods, or to different species of literature, prose or poetry. Still, in some 
verbs, both forms occur even in prose, e. g. aTn)\Xax&rjv, and usually a.7rr]Wdyrjv f 
f$\a<p&rivai and fiXafSr^ai, both for ex. in Thuc. Several verbs in poetry have a 
second Aor. Act., which in prose have commonly a first Aor. only, e. g. ktsIvw, 
to kill, Aor. prose, eKTtiva, poet. Zxiavov and exrav, 

(c) The two Aorists stand in such a relation to each other, that the forms 
of one Aorist take the place of the forms of the other not in use, and in this 
way each supplies, respectively, the place of the other, as will be seen under 
the verbs t&t^u and diSw/xi. 



A. Formation of the Tenses of Mute-Verbs. 
$ 142. Classes of Mute Verbs. 

Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three 
classes, according to their characteristic ; in each of these 
classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres. and 
Impf. are distinguished from those with an impure charac- 
teristic (§ 139, Rem. 1) : — 

1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (/3, ir, <f> pure 

characteristic; 7tt ([§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 
e.g. 

(a) Pure characteristic: izkpm-w, to send; TpljB-w, to 
rub ; jpd(f>-co, to write ; 

(b) Impure characteristic : tvttt-q), to strike (pure char- 
acteristic 77-, pure stem TTTI) ; (Skairr-w, to injure 
(fi, BAAB) ; piTrr-cD, to hurl ((/>, f PI$). 

2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute (k, 7, % 



$ 143.] MUTE VERBS. REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERISTIC. 173 

pure characteristic ; era or Attic tt [§ 24, 1] impure 
characteristic), e. g. 

(a) Pure characteristic: irkex-a, to weave; a<y-co, to 
lead; rev-^-co, to prepare; 

(b) Impure characteristic: <§>pi<j<j-to, Att. <£/htt-g>, to 
shudder (pure characteristic k, pure stem $PIK) ; 
rdo-cr-co, Att. tcltt-co, to arrange (7, TAT) ; firjacr-Q), 
Att. jBrjTT-(o, to cough (%, BHX). 

3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (t, 6\ S-, 
pure characteristic ; f [§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 
e.g. 

(a) Pure characteristic: dvvr-co, to complete; aS-co, to 
sing ; 7refcr-G), to persuade ; 

(b) Impure characteristic : <f>pd£-co, to say (pure charac- 
teristic S, pure stem $PAA). 

$ 143. Remarks on the Characteristic. 

1. The following mute verbs in -7ttw and -<r<ra> (-ttw) form the Secondary- 
tenses, especially the second Aor. Pass., and have for their characteristic : — 

it: K\eTTT-oo, to steal; k6ttt-o>, to cut; rvirr-w, to strike (second Aor. Passive 
s-kXolit-i)v, etc.). 

)3: j8Aa7TT-<w, to injure, and KpiirT-a, to conceal (second Aor. Pass. £-fi\a$-r]v 
and i/3Kd<p&r}v, £-icptfS--nu and inpiKpfrnv). 

<p : l3dirT-u>, to tinge ; ^dm-u, to bury ; frpvirr-o), to break ; pdirT-<a, to sew to- 
gether ; f>iiTT-o>, to cast; (rud-rcr-a), to dig (second Aor. Pass. £-fia<p--nu, 
£-r acp-rjy, £-Tpv<p-rjv, ip-pacp-rju, £p-pt<p-r}u and £ppi<p&r]v, i-encacp- 
-nv). 

k : <pp(<T<r<a, to shudder (second Perf. ir4-<pplK-a). 

y. a\\d<T<rw, to change (second Aor. Pass. aWay-rjvcu, first Aor. Pass. 
oA\a%^fjfat, poetic), fxaa-trci), to knead (fiay-9\vai), bpxxraw, to dig (dpvy-rjvai 
and bpvx&rtvai), irK^crcroj, to strike (£-ir\i)y-T]i/, £^€-ir\ay-7]v), irpaaata, Att. 
irpoLTTto, to do (ire-irpay- a),(T<pd((a (Attic mostly (Tcpdrra}), to kill (£-<r<pay- 
t\v, rarely, and never in Attic prose, £o<pdx*rnv), ravo-co, to arrange (rdyeis, 
Eur., elsewhere irdx&w), (ppda-a-a, to hedge round ( £<ppay--nu and £<ppdx&w)- 

2. Two verbs strengthen the pure characteristic k by t, like verbs with the 
impure characteristic irr : — 

tt4kt-q) (commonly ire/crew, also Trdicai), to shear, to comb, Fut. 7re£«, etc. ; 

still, iceipeiv is commonly used for ireKreiv with the meaning to shear, and 

KTevi&iv and faiveiu with the meaning to comb; 
tIkt-w (formed from ti-tck-<o), to beget, Put. reopen, second Aor. Act. 

ereKov, second Perf. reroKa. 

3. The following verbs in -o-<ra>, -tt&> have a Tau-mute, not a Kappa- 
mute, for the pure characteristic: apfi6Tro) (non-Attic ap/xoCw), to Jit, Put. 
-6crw; — j8\ittco, to take honey, Fut. -icreo; — fipdo-vco (non-Attic fipdfa), to 
shake ; — epeacrw, to row, Fut. -eVa>; — ird<r<ra>, to scatter, Fut. -daw ; — irKaff- 
<r<0, to form, Fut. -d<rca; — it t leva), to husk, Fut. -Iffw ; — and Poet, If* drew, to 

15* 



174 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. [§ 144. 

whip, Fut. -d(TCD ; k v <x> cr cr a>, to sleep, Fut. -axrca ; X ever era), to look, Fut. Keicrca ; 
\icrcrofiai (poetic, especially Horn., also Xirofiai), to pray, Aor. iXLad/jLrjv, 
iXirSjx-nv ; vicrcro/uLai, v eicr cr o y.ai, to go, Fut. veicrofiai ; ko pvcrcreo, to equip 
(Epic Perf. K€-Kopv&-/j.ai). 

Here are classed derivatives in - <b r r a : A t ,u c6 t t a>, to hunger ; bveip&Trw, 
to dream ; inrvdoTrw, to be sleepy. 

4. The following verbs in - cr cr <a vary between the two formations : v d cr cr a, 
to press together, Fut. vd^oo, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, vivacrixai ; verbal Adj. vacn6s ; 
— acpvcrcrw (Poet.), to draw, Fut. -v£w, Aor. tftyvira, ^(piicrd/nyy. 

5. Of verbs in -(w, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-mute, commonly 5, 
there are only a few primitives, e. g. '4(ofxai, Poet., KaSefyfiai, prose, I seat 
myself, 7£«, commonly Ka&ifa, to seat; crxi(&i to separate; x*C a > alvum 
dejicere ; yet there are very many derivatives, namely, all in -dfa and most in 
-ifa, e. g. &ifa, sludfa, etc. 

6. Verbs in - £a>, whose pure characteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly y, 
are mostly Onomatopoetics, i. e. words whose sound corresponds to the sense ; 
the greater part of these denote a call, or sound, e. g. aid £w, to groan, Fut. 
aldi-w] a\a\d^co,to shout (av8d£acr&cu, to speak, Aor. wanting in Her.); ypvfa, 
to grunt; Koffoi, to squeak, to grunt (like a swine), Fut. /cot|&> ; Kpd(a>, to 
scream, Aor. enpayov ; npu^u, to caw, to croak; /j.acrTi£w, to whip; 6od(cc, to 
scratch ; ol/j.d!> £w, to lament, Fut. oljxd}^op.a.L ; oXoXv £oo, to cry out, to shout ; pvcr- 
To(a),to drag about; crrdCw and crTa\d£a>, to trickle; o-revdCw, to sigh; 
<rT7)pl£c0, to make firm; crrl(co, to mark, to prick; crvpl(a), to whistle (Fut. 
(rvpi^ofxai, etc.; crvpicru, etc., later, and not Attic) : crcpdCco (Attic mostly e<pdr- 
Tu),to kill ; cr <p v (a, to throb ; r pi (a>, to chirp (rerplya, Ion. and poet.) ; <p A v £00, 
to bubble, and the Poet. £ d (00, to prate, Fut. )3a|a>, third Pers. Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. /SejSa/cTai ; fi pi £&, to slumber (fSp7£ai) ; 5 at £00, to divide, to kill ; eAeAt^w, 
to whirl, to tumble; ivapi (a, spolio ; p e £a>, to do {Zopya). 

7. The following verbs in - (co vary between the two modes of formation : 
j3 a cr t a (co, to lift up, to support, Fut. -dcra, etc., Aor. ifiacrrdx^vv 5 — Sierra (a, 
to doubt, hiffTacro), from which the verbal Subst. Diarayfx&s and Sicrracris ; — vvcr- 
ra^co, to nod, to sleep, Fut. -daw, Aor. ivvcrracra, in the later writers wend^a, 
etc., e. g. Plut. Brat. 36 ; — iraiC<», to jest, Fut. Trai^ov/xai and vai^ofiaL, Aor. 
Att. iiraicra (in later writers e7rat|a, Triiraix^)-, Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. 7re7ratoytat 
(in later writers ireiraiyiiai, iiraix^nv) ; verbal Adj. iraicrreos ; — opTafw, to rob, 
Att. apTrda-o/xai, y'lpiracra, etc. (but in the Epic and Common language apirdfa and 
-aVa>, etc., second Aor. Pass. 7]pirdyrjp) ; — fiv(w, to moan, has H. 8, 20. iirej.i.vl-av, 
but in Hippocr. efivcrev. 

8. The following verbs in -^co have 77 for a pnre characteristic : /cAa^co, to 
sound, to cry. Perf. tce-K\ayy-a, Fut. K\dy£oo, Aor. eK\ay£a ; — 7rAa£co (poet.) to 
cause to wander, Fut. 7rAa7|a>, etc. Aor. Pass. iirAdyx&yv ; — craKiri £«, to Wow a 
trumpet, Fut. -fylw, etc. (later also -tVw, etc.) 



$ 144. Formation of the Tenses. 

Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and 
Mid. with the tense-characteristic a, and the first Perf. and 
first Plup. Act. with the aspirated 1 endings -a and -elv, when 
the characteristic is a Pi or Kappa-mute; but with the 

1 The Perf. Act. of all verbs properly ends in kcl, but where k is preceded by 
a Pi or Kappa-mute, that mute combines with k and is changed into the cor- 
responding rough. On the contraiy, a Tau-mute before k is dropped, e. g. 
TtrvTTKa. = TSTvtya ; TreirpayKa = 7re7rpd^;a, but Treirzaca instead of 7re7retS7ca. 



§ 144.] FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. 175 

endings -ica, -/ceiv, wh°.n the characteristic is a Tau-mute ; 
though the Tau-mute is omitted before k (§ 17, 5). 

Remark 1, For the change of a Tau-mute into <r, before [x in the Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, see § 19, 1 ; for the change of a Tau-mute into c before t, see § 17, 5, 
but this cr is omitted before <r of the personal-endings, e. g. Tr4ireL<Tfxai, -ctch, 
ir4<ppa<rfxai i -<rrai) but second Pers. Tr4irei-o'ai i ir4<ppa-<rai instead of ir4Trei(r-<rai t 
irecppaff-crat. The vowels a, i, v are short in verbs which have a Tau-mute as a 
characteristic before endings with the tense-characteristic <r and k (-ko, -iceiv), 
e. g. <ppd(a>, (ppaffa, ecppacra, ir4(ppa.Ka ; TrXdaraa, to form, ir\a<ra> ; vofxifa, to thirik, 
eV^uura ; KhvCja, to wash, kKvotu, etc. ; in like manner, short vowels remain short, 
e. g. apfx6£w, r\pfioKa. 

Rem. 2. On the changes which the mutes undergo by the addition of the 
endings beginning with <r, fr, fi, or t, and before the aspirated endings -a, -«V, 
see §§ 17, 2 and 3. 19, 1. 20, 1 ; on the lengthening of -e into -et before o- of 
verbs in -4pS(o or -4v&oo, e. g. <rir4p8-w, Put. (crTreVS-crco) oTreiVw, Aor. eWetCa, 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. eaireHr/xai, see § 20, 2 ; on the omission of <x in endings 
beginning with <r&, e. g. Katpixp&ai instead of KeKpty&ai (KeKpv<p<r&ai), ireirXex- 
&ai instead of irew\4£&cu, see § 25, 3 ; on the endings of the third Pers. W. 
Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., -a rat and -aro instead of -prai, -vro, see §§18, 
1 and 116, 15 ; on the variable vowel in the Secondary tenses, and in some first 
Perfects and Perfects Mid. or Pass., see § 140 ; on the Att. Put. of verbs in 
-dCw, and -i£w, e. g. fiifidfa, Put. {Sifi&<roi}, fiifiG), -%s, -£, -arov, -atxep, etc., ko/^co, 
Put. Koydffa, KOfxiw, -lets, etc., see § 117. 

Rem. 3,. When /x precedes a Pi-mute, which is the characteristic of the 
verb, e. g. in Tr4fnr-a, the fx is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, before endings 
beginning with p.; thus, ir4fxir-w, to send, ir4-irefx-fxai (instead of ir4-ire(xir-fxai i tt4- 
irefxfx-fxai), TreVe fxtyai, ir4irefxirTai, etc., Inf. Treir4fx<pdrai, Part, ireirtfifjiipos ; SO 
fcd/JLTTT-u}, to bend down, K4-Kafi-fxai (instead of K4-Kafxir-fxai, Ke-Kaixfj.-fj.ai). Also 
when two gammas would stand before fi, one y is omitted, e. g. arcpiyy-a, to tie, 
e-trcpiy-fiat (instead of e-<r<piyy-fiai), ecrcpiy^ai, %cr<piyKTai, etc., Inf. iacplyx&cu, 
Part. i<r<piyfx4pos ; so e£eA.e'7X w > t° convince, i^Xr'jXey/xai (instead of 4!-e\-f)Aeyxixai, 
Qe\i\yyfj.ai), i^XriMy^ai, etc. Both the fj. and y are here dropped to prevent 
the concurrence of three consonants. 



176 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



[§ 145, 



Paradigms or Mute Verbs. 
$ 145. A. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Pi-mute 

(ft 7T, </>.) 

(a) Pure Characteristic, j8, it, <p (Put. -\J/o>). 
rpTfiw, to rub. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Impf. 
Perf. 

Plup. 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 



Ind. Tptp-a> Subj. rpifi-w Imp. Tp?fi-e Inf. rprfi-eiv Part, rpifi-wv 

Ind. %-rpZfi-ov Opt. rpifi-oi/Ai 

Ind. (Te-Tpi/3-a) re-Tpi(p-a Subj. re-rpT<p-u Imp. not used, Inf. re- 

rpl(p-evcu Part, re-rplcp-dos 
Ind. (i-Te-Tpifi-elv) i-re-r pi<p-eiv Opt. re-rptcp-oifMi 
Ind. (rpifi-crw) rptyw Opt. Tptyoifii Inf. Tpiipeiv Part, rpitpcov 
Ind. e-rpi\pa Subj. Tptyta Opt. Tptycu/xcu Imp. rprij/oj' Inf. Tpfycu 

Part. Tp/if/as. 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. 
Impf. 



Ind. Tprfi-o/Acu Subj. Tpifi-a>/xai Imp. rpifi-ov Inf. Tpip-ear&cu Part. 

rpI^-6/j.^vos 
Ind. i-Tpi^-6fj.riu Opt. Tplfi-ol/Ariv 



Perf. 



Ind. 
S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



(Te'-TTH^-jitcu) 

TE-TpifA-fAai 

Te-rpnpai 
re-rpnr-rai 

TS-TpijX-fX&OV 

Te-rpupSov 
Te-Tpi<p-&ov 
Te-Tpifx-fxeSra 
Tt-rpicp-fre 

Te-rpiu.-p.ei/oi tl<r'i(v) 
or Te-Tpicp-arcu 



Imperative. 
(Te-rpifi-ffo) 
re-rpt^o 
re-rpicp-^ca 

T€-rpi<p-&ov 
Te-Tpi<p-&u>v 

r4-Tpi(p-&€ 
Te-Tpi(p-&ct>(rav 
Or re-Tpi<p-&oov 



Infinitive. 
(Te-TpTyS-^ot) 
Te-Tpt<p-&ai 

Participle. 
T^-rpijx-ixivos, -7], -ov 

Subjunctive. 
Te-rpifx-fxevos 5 



Plup. 


S. 1. 


i-Te-Tpi/uL-LL7]U D. i-re-Tpi/x-/j.e^ov 


P. e-re-rpifx-fxeha 


Ind. 


2. 


i-re-rpi\po i-Te rpicpSov 


i-re-rpi<p-&e 




3. 


i-re-Tpiir-TO £-Te-Tpl<p-&T)V 


re-rpi/x-fxevoi $\(Tav 


Opt. 




re-rpifj.-fj.evos e*it)v 


[or e-re-rpicp-dro 



Fut. 
Aor. I. 

F. Pf. 



Ind. rpityofxcu Opt. TprtyoiixTjv Inf. Tptyea'&at Part. rpt\p6fieuos 

Ind. e-rpi^dfi7]v Subj. rptyccfxai Opt. rpixl/aifnjv Imp. rplipai Inf. 

Tpixj/acr&cu Part, rpi^a^ei/os 
Ind. re-rpfyofxai Opt. re-rpt\l/oifj.r)v Inf. tc-t ptyea&ai Part. re-rpi\\/6- 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. I Ind. (e-rplf3-frr)v) e-rpi<p-frr\v Subj. rpi(p-&a> Opt. rpi<p-&eiriv Inf. 

Tpi<p-&rjvai Imp. rpicp-briri Part. rpi<p-greis, (instead of I. Aor. 

Pass., commonly II. Aor. Pass.) 
Fut. I. Ind. rpi<p-bi\(rofxai Opt. rpi<p-^7]aoifj.7]v Inf. rpi(p-&r]o~eff&cu Part. Tpicp- 

A. II. Ind. 4-Tptp-r)i> Subj. Tpr£-a> Opt. rptf3-eir}v Imp. Tpip-7)Si Inf. Tp<)3- 

771/01 Part. rpXfi-eis 
F. LI. Ind. rpip-rjo-ofxai Opt. rpi^-riaoifi-qv Inf. rpip-fiaeo-frai Part. TptfJ- 

rio-ofievos. 



Verbal adjective: (rpijS-Ttk) Tpnr-T<fc, -^, -^, rpnr-reos, -ea, -eov. 



$§ 146, 147.] 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



177 



§ 146. (b) Impure Characteristic, ttt in Pres. and Impf. (Put. -poo). 

kStttoo, to cut. 





ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE, f PASSIVE. 


Pres. 
Perf. I. 
Perf. II. 

Fut. 
Aoi\ I. 
Fut. Pf. 


KOTTT-OD 

(Ke-Koir-a) Ke-KO(p-a 

Ke-Koir-a (Horn.) 

(k6tT-(TCi)) KOlpO) 

e-Koipa 


KOTTT-OfMCU 

Ke-KOfx-/j.ai, like Te-Tpi/Ajxai 

A. I. i-K0(p-^7]V 
KO^/0/J.ai F. I. K0<p-&7](T0lJLai 
i-KO\f/d(J.7]V A. II. i-KOTT-TlV 

Ke-K6i\iojj.ai F. II. Koir-rjcroixaL 


Verbal adjective : kott-tos, -7j, -6v, kott-tcos, -Tea, -t4ov. 


icd/A 


Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
tt-t-o}, to bend down (KeKa^-fxai for KeKa[A/j.-fj.ai, § 144, Rem. 3). 


Ind. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


K€Ka/u.fxai 
KeKajxtyai 

K€Ka/ATTTai 
KeKafJL/J.e&OV 

KenaLMp&ov 

K€KCt.[J.<p&OV 

KeKa/xcp&e 
KeKa/j.fx4voL elai(v) 


Imperative. Infinitive. 

KeKafxtyo K€KdfA<f>&CU 

KtKd^u Participle. 

K€Kd[A.<p&uv Subjunctive. 

KeKafJ.fj.evos Si 
K£Ka/jL<p&e 
KeKa/j,<p&ecaav, or K&cdfAcp&wv] 


Verbal adjective : Ka/J.inr6s, -i], -6v, Kay.irr4os, -Tea, -Teov. 



$ 147. B. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Kappa- 
mute ( y, k, x)' 

(a) Pure Characteristic, y, k, %. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and 
Impf., (rar, Att. tt, rarer £ 

Tacrffco, Att. TaTTw, to arrange. 



irXeK-ca, to weave. 



Fut. -|a>. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Perf. 

Fut. 
F. Pf. 



7rAe/c-w 

(7T€-7TA6/0-a) 

7re-7rAex-a 
(rrAe/c-crco) 7rAe|a> 



MIDDLE. 



7r A e/c-OjUcu 

(ire-ir\*K-ncu) 

ire-irKey-fxai 

irKe^ofxai 

ire-trXe\ofj.ai 



ACTIVE. 



Taaar-ca 

(re-T ay-a) 

re-rax-a 

[rdy-aw) Ta|a> 



MIDDLE. 



Tao-ff-ofxai 

Te-TayiJ.au 

Ta^o/xai 

re-T a|ouax 



PASSIVE 



Aor. I. (e-Tr\eK-&r)v) e-TrXex-^VV j (e-Tcfy-Sbyj/) e-Tctx-^i' 

Fut. I. 7rA vX-^Tjcr o/xai Tax-&ro- fj.ai 

A. II. i-Tr\d:c-r)v and £-7r\ex-7)v e-Tay-7}v 

F. II. ! TT\aK-i\(ToiJ.ai Tay-r,(TO;j.ai 



Verbal adjective: ttAcktSs, -77, -^ ; irAen-Teos, -Tea, -Teov ; tuktSs, TaaTeos. 






178 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



[§ 148. 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 




racrcw, to arrange, and <r<ptyyu) (§ 144, Rem. 3), to bind. 


Ind. S. 1. 


rirayfiai 


tacpiy/jiat 


Imperative. 


2. 


Tera|ai 


eacpiyj-cu 


rera^o 


eacpiy^o 


3. 


T6TO/CTat 


ea<piyKTai 


t4tcix&co 


icrcpiyx&v 


D. 1. 


rerdy/xe^oy 


i(r<ply[jie&ov 






2. 


rerax&ov 


Z<T(piyx&ov 


Terax&ov 


ecr<ptyx&ov 


3. 


rirax^ov 


e(T(piyx&ov 


rerdx&wv 


£a<piyx&wv 


P. 1. 


Terdyfxe&a 


£<r<piyij.€&a 






2. 


reVaxd-e 


%<T(piyX&e 


t£to.x&* 


%ff<piyx&e 


3. 


urayixivoi €iffl(v), 


iacpiy/ieyoi etcrt(i/) 


TCTctx^w ffav, 


£<r<piyX&o)(rav, 




or rtrdxaTai 




or rerdx^dov 


or iacpiyx&oov 


Inf. Terdx&ai 


iacpiyX&ai Part. TerayfAevos 


iarcpiyfxeyos. 



Remark. The student will observe particularly the changes which take 
place in the inflection of the Perf. Pass, of these verbs : rirpiLL-fxai (instead of 
Terpifi-ncu), j8 before fx being changed into jii; rerpitycu (instead of Terpnr-acu), 
7T and o- forming \p ; rerpiir-Tai, the characteristic it remaining unchanged ; 
TeTpup-bov (instead of rirpnr-^rov), the characteristic -k being changed into <p, to 
be of the same order as the & following (§ 17, 2) ; so others similar. In like 
manner, reray/xai : rera^ai (instead of reTayarai), y and <r forming £ ; reraKTcu 
(instead of rerayrai), y being changed into k, to be of the same order as the 
t following ; rerax^oy (instead of Terayfroy), y being changed to correspond 
with &. 



§ 148. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Tau- 
mute (8, t, #). 

[a) Pure Characteristic, 8, r, fr. (b) Impure Characteristic in Pres. and Impf., 
(, rarer <r<r. — Fut. er«. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 


\pevd-<d, 


ipevS-o/xcu, 


(ppd£-<a. 


<ppd£-o[xai, 




to deceive. 


to lie. 


to say, 


to think, 


Impf. 


e-ipevS-ov 


i-ipev8-6fj.7}v 


e-<ppa£-oy 


£-<ppa(-6}xr)v 


Perf. 


(e-iJ/euS-Ka) 


(fE-ypevS-fxcu) 


(■7re-<£ paS-Ka) 


(ire-cppaZ-fxcu) 




e-ipev-Ka 


e-ipevcr-fxcu 


ire-cppa-Ka 


Trd-Kppaff-fjLai 


Plup. 


i-tyev-Keiv 


i-Tpevo"-/Ar}V 


i-ire-<ppa-K€iv 


4-ire-(ppdcr-/xr)v 


Fut. 


(t//eu8-(Ta>) 


(■tyev8-<rofj,cu) 


{(ppdh-ffw) 


(<ppdd-crofxai) 




Tpeixr-oo 


ypev-ao/xai 


<ppo.-crw 


(ppd-ao/xai 


Aor. I. 


%-\pev-ara 


i-^/ev-adfxriy 


Z-ippd-aa 


£-<ppa-<rdixi]v 


F. Pf. 




e-ipev-crofxai 




irt-tppd-troixai 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 


(e-^euS-^j/) 


i-ipeva-frnv 


(i-<ppd8-&7]v) 


£-(ppd(T-&7)V 


Fut. I. 




r//eu<r-^(To / uat 




(ppacr-frfio-o/xai 


Ver 


bal Adj. : (tyevS-r 


eos) ^/eva-reos, -re 


a, -reov ; <ppa<r-Tec 


s, -r4a, -reov. 



§ 149.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 



179 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 



Ind. S. 1. 


i €\pevar-fuu 


2. 


e^eu-cat 


3. 


€\pev<r-Tai 


D.l. 


4\f/ev(r-/ue&ov 


2. 


%\l/ev-a&ov 


3. 


€\pev-<r&ov 


P. 1. 


e^eutr-^ueiS-a 


2. 


€l//6U-0*3 - 6 


3. 


i^evtr-ixeuoi elcri(v) 



Imperative. 
ixpeii-cr&ca 

expev-ff&e 



Infinitive. 
i-\p€ucr-&ai 

Participle. 
i-\p€V(T-fj,eyos, -77, ■ 

Subjunctive. 
i-tpevcr-fxevos 3). 



or ityei-a&wv] 



Kemark. 2c6C«, to save, has in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. (reVco-^ioi from o&w 
(Attic), and o-eaw^cu, but Aor. eadSrqv, verbal Adj. <nc(rr4os. 



§ 149. Formation of the Tenses or Liquid Verbs. 

1. Liquid verbs (§ 127, II. B.) form the Fut. Act. and 
Mid. and the first Aor. Act. and Mid. without the tense- 
characteristic a (§ 20, 3) but the Perf. Act. with the tense- 
characteristic k, e. g. 

<r(pdk\(ti (stem 23>AA), Put. o-^aA-w, first Aor. e-o-^A-a, Perf. Z-cr<pak-Ka. 

Kemark 1. The endings of the Put. in liquid verbs, namely, -«, -ovfj.ai, are 
formed by contraction from -eVw, -iaoixai after the rejection of cr (§ 20, 3). The 
inflection of these contracted endings is like that of contracts in -ecu in the 
Pres. Act. and Mid.: <f)i\-£>, <pi\-oviAcu (§ 135) ; <r is omitted in the Fut. of liquid 
verbs, to prevent the harshness occasioned by the combination of that letter with 
the preceding liquid. The Put. Perf. is wanting in liquid verbs. 

2. The Present tense of Liquid verbs, with the exception 
of a few whose stem-vowel is e, is strengthened, either by 
doubling the characteristic X, or by inserting the liquid v 
after the characteristic ; also, by lengthening the short stem- 
vowel, as in all verbs in -ivco, -vvcd, -vpco, or by changing it 
into a diphthong (§ 16, 3), e. g. a^aX-X-co, refju-v-co, Kptv-co, 
afjbvv-o}, fcreiv-co, falv-o) (stems 2$ A Ay TEM, KPIN(l), 
3 AMTN(i>), KTEN, $AN) ; but fjuev-co, vifM-co with a pure 
stem. 

3. Except the Pres. and Impf. the tenses are formed from 
the pure stem, but the final vowel of the stem is lengthened 
in the first Aor. Act. and Mid. (see No. 5), e. g. acf>dW-co 
(X$AA), Fut. acfrak-cj, second Aor. Pass, i-a^ak-^v, first 
Perf. Act. e-a^aX-fca, first Aor. Act. e-a<fir)\-a. The second 
Aorists Act. and Mid. rarely occur, and scarcely at all in 



180 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. [§ 149. 



prose ; on the contrary, the second Aor. Pass, is more in use 
than the first Aor. ; the first Aor. is wholly wanting in many 
verbs. 

4. In liquid verbs with an impure characteristic, the 
ground-form of the stem is not borrowed, as in the case 
of mute verbs, from the second Aor., but from the Fut., 
since only a few verbs of this class form a second Aor. Act. 
and Mid. 

5. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes according as 
the stem-vowel of the Fut. is a, e, I, or v before the ending -co. 
In the first Aor. Act. and Mid. a is lengthened into rj, e into 
ei, I into I, v into v (§ 16, 3). Thus : — 



xies. 

o~<pdA\-w, to deceive, 




JC Ul. 

0~<pa\-5i 






-t\.Ul. 

k , -ff<pT}\-a 


naixv-w, to labor, 




KdfJ.-ov/u.ai 






wanting 


TZKfAaip < w, to point out, 




TeKp.ap-00 






i-TSKfJiTip-a 


(palv-w, to show, 




(pav-oi 






e-(p-nv-a. 


H. Class 


wi 


th e in the 


Fu 


ture. 




/xev-w, to remain, 




(j.ev-S) 






e-fxeiv-a 


0776AA.-W, to announce, 




ayy*k-S> 






tfyyeiA-a 


re/xv-w, to cut, 




T€fA-0> 






Wanting 


vefj.-u, to divide, 




ve/x-5) 






e-vei/x-a 


KTziv-w, to kill, 




Krev-S} 






e-KTetv-a 


l(j.eip-w, to desire, 




1 fie p-u> 






'l/xeip-a 


III. Class 


w 


ith t in the 


Future. 




TtAA-co, to pluck, 




Tl\-G> 






i-rlk-a 


Kpiv-w, to separate, 




KpXv-w 






%-Kplv-a. 


IV. Class 


wi 


th iJ in the 


F 


ature. 




(Tvp-w, to draw, 




(TVp-U 






e-avp-a 


afj.vv-0), to defend, 




a/xv v-u> 






^fxvv-a. 



Rem. 2. The following verbs in -cuvco of the first class take a in the Aor. 
instead of 7j, namely, l(Tx vai - vw ^ t° m <dce emaciated (ftrxz/di/a, lffX v ° LPal ) '■> xepSaiyw, 
to gain (eKepSdua, KepSavai) ; KoiXaluw, to hollow out (eKoiAdva, noiXavai) ; \evKaiuw, 
to whiten; opyaivu), to enrage; ireiraivw, to ripen; also all verbs in -paiva, e.g. 
ivepaivw, Fut. irepavw, Aor. tirepava, Inf. irtpavai (except reTpaivw, to bore, iTerp-n- 
va, TeTprjvcu), and all in -taivco, e. g. iriaivw, to make fat, iiriava, inauai (except 
piaivw, to stain, purivat, rarely puavcu). — The verbs o-t)ix.a\v<a, to give a signal, and 
icc&aipw, to purify, have both <rt\p.r\va.i (which is usual among the Attic writers), 
KaSrqpai, and <rr}fxavai, Ka&apcu. Also aXp<a, to raise, and aWofxai, to leap, are 
formed with a : apai, aAacr&at, but in the Ind. the a is changed into t\ on account 
of the augment, e. g. i\po., r)Xdp.riv (second Aor. T}\6i*t}v is not used in the Ind. 
and very rarely elsewhere). Comp. on a, § 16, 7 (a). 



$ 149.] FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 181 

6. The first Perf. Act. of verbs with the characteristic v 
(according to § 19, 3), must end in -<y/ca, e. g. /Aefilay-fca, 
Plut. (from fualvco instead of /le-fjiLav-Ka), Tretyayfca, Dinarch. 
(from <j>alv<o), irapai^vyKa, Polyb. (from irapo^vvw, to excite^). 
But the form in -<y/ca is found only among later writers. The 
best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by dropping the 
v, e. g. iceicpitca, fce/cXlica from Kpivco, kXtvco (so also KefcipSa/ca, 
among later writers, also fce/cep&ayfca, but /ceKephrjica, Dem. 
56, 30. from KepSalvco) ; or also, as in Krelvco, by using the 
form of the second Perf., e. g. aireicTova, in the sense of the 
first Perf. (eKTayica, 'i/cratca, from the time of Maenander), 
or, as in the case of verbs in -evco, by not forming any Perf., 
as, e. g. in [xevco, by forming it from a new theme, as fxeixe- 
vrj/ca from MENEfl. 

7. The three following verbs with the characteristic v 
drop that letter, not only in the Perf. and Plup. Act., but 
also in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, and in the first 
Aor. Pass. : — 

Kpiv<ti, to separate, KetcpiKa KeKpi/xcu iKpferfv 

icXfuw, to bend down, /ce/cAtKa /ce/cAtjuat ii<\1&r}v (the 2d Aor. eK\ivnv is rare). 

irXvuw, to wash, (ireirXiiKa) ireTrXvfiai iir\v&r]i/ (Hippoc.) 

Rem. 3. Tdvco, to stretch, and Kreivax, to kill, form the above-mentioned tenses 
from new themes, viz. TAH, KTANH, KTAH, thus : — 

rerana r4ra.iJ.ai ira&yv 

e/craKa (and e/cTay/ca) eKrafiai eKra&rfV (eKrdvfrriv among the later writers); 

yet the forms of Kreiuco here presented, are not Attic. The Attic writers use 
eKrom as the Perf. Act. (see No. 6), and instead of eKrafxai and inrd&riu, sub- 
stitute Ted-vTjKa and air&avov in passive phrases with wro and the Gen., or 
avyprj/xcu and avrjpe^rjv, without a preposition. 

Rem. 4. Kplv<i>, kKiuw, ir\vu<>), and Kreiuca, among the poets, often retain v in 
the first Aor. Pass, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. ekXivfrnv, 
iirXvvfrriu ; in prose, these forms seem to be doubtful, yet KareKXivfrq is found in 
X. Hell. 4. 1, 30 in all the copies. 

8. On the formation of the Perf. Mid., the following 
points should be noted : — 

Verbs in -alv<o and ui/«, usually drop the v before the endings beginning with 
fi, and insert <r to strengthen the syllable, e. g. <paiv-(a Tre<pa-a , -/j.aL 7re-</>a-(r-^e&a; 
ixpaivca v^acfxai; /xepaivca fj.efj.dpaa-fj.ai (Luc.) ; a-rtfj-aivu} crea-rifi.aafj.ai ; irepaivoi ireire' 
paafiai ; f>aiv(a eppaa-fxai ; iraxvuw ireiraxva-fxai ; tjovvoj r^dvafxai ; Xeirrvvw \e\eir- 
rvafuu'j o|iW &£t/<tyisu ; ^rjXvva) refri)kuo-fj.ai (Luc); iriaW ireiriavp.ai ; rpaxvuo> 

16 



182 PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. [§ 150. 

reTpaxvo-fiai (Luc); Xv/xatpofxai XeXv/xaafxevoi elarl(v)', /xiaiva /j.eij.la<Tfxai; but 
some verbs of this kind assimilate tbe v to tbe following fi, e. g. fypaiv-coj 
i^pafx-fxai instead of i^pav-/xai (also i^patr/j-ai), irapo^vvoo, Trapw^v/jLixai, aicrxvv-<d 
rftTxvwu (Homer) ; a very few verbs drop v among tbe later writers, without 
substituting a strengthening cr ; the vowel, however, is made long, e. g. rpaxw-a, 
to make rough, tz~t paxv-jJ.au also rerpdxvcrfxai and Terpaxv^ai. It is evident that 
in the personal-endings, except those beginning with /a, the v remains, e. g. 
, 7r4(pao , -/j.ai, Tr4(pav-(Tcu, ir4-(pavTcUy i^ripa/x-fiai, -avcai, -avrai, rjcrxvfji-ncu, -vvaai, 
-wren, -vh-il&ov (see <palv-(a and %-qpaivw, § 151) ; still, it is to be noted that the 
form of the second Pers. Sing., in -vcai, is rare ; instead of it the Part, with 
e? is used, e. g. irecpavixivos el, etc. 

Rem. 5. On the omission of <x in endings beginning with o-&, see § 25, 3 ; 
on the variable a, in the first Perf. Act. and Mid. and in the first Aor. Pass., and 
also in the second Aorists of liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and the 
stem-vowel e, see § 140, 3 ; on the Perf. of ayeipw, and iydpca with Att. Redup., 
see § 124, 2 (b). 

9. In the second Perf. (which, however, belongs only to 
a few verbs) the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is 
lengthened, as in the first Aor. Act, except in verbs with e 
in the Fut, which take the variable o (§ 140, 4), e. g. (fialv-co, 
first Aor. e-cprjv-a, second Perf. ire-$r]v-a' : but aTrelp-w, Fut. 
airep-cd, second Perf. e-cnrop-a. 

Rem. 6. Second Aorists Act. and Mid. are rare in liquid verbs, e. g. efia\ov, 
^aX6fXT]v, enavov, eirrdpov (doubtful in prose) from fidWw, nalvcc, Trraipa, Krei- 
vw ; Aorists are also formed from some irregular verbs ; a few verbs, also, have 
a second Aor. Pass., e. g. those with monosyllabic stems, as depu, iddp-nv, cp&ei- 
pa>, crreWco, (paivca, fxaivoo, kXivw, etc. 



§ 150. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs. 

ayyeWcc, to announce. 



ACTIVE. 


Pres. a77e'AAw Perf. I. ?iyyeX-Ka Perf. II. c-cp&op-a, perdidi, from <p&etp-o> 


Fut. Ind. 


S. 1. 


ayyeX-co Opt. ayy€\o7[j.i 


or ayyeAoiTjv 




2. 


a77eA-e?y ayyz\o?s 


" ayye\oir)s 




3. 


ayye\-e? ayyeXoT 


" ayyeXo(r) 




D. 2. 


ayyeA-e'trou ayyeXoTrou 


" ayyeXoiriTou 




3. 


ayyeX-e'tTOj/ ayye\oiT7)v 


" ayy<k\orr}T-nv 




P. 1. 


ayye\-ovfj.ei/ ayyeXoT/jLcp 


" ayyeXoirjfxev 




2. 


ayye\-e?Te ayyeAolre 


" ayye\oir]Te 




3. 


ayyeA-o vcri ( v ) ayyeAolev 


" ayye\o7ev 






Inf. ayye\e?v Part. ayye\S>v, 


-ovcra, -ovv 


Aor. I. 


j]yy£L\-a, ayytiXai, ayyel\cu/j.i, &yyei\ov, hyyeTKai, ayyeiXas 


Aor. II. 


Ind. tfyyeA-ov Subj. ayyeXco Opt. ayyeXoi/ju 


Imp. &77eAe 


(rare) 


Inf. a77eAe?^ Part. ayytX&v, -ovaa, 


-ov. 



§ 151.] 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



183 



MIDDLE. 


Perf. Ind. 


S. 1. 


tiyyeX-(j.ai 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 




2. 


ijyye\-<rat 


¥iyye\-cro 


T)yy4A-&cu 




3. 


jjyye\-rai 


7)yy4\-&a) 


Participle. 




D. 1. 


riyyz\-fie&ov 




T]yye\-fj.4uos 




2. 


tfyye\-&ov 


tfyye\-&ov 


Subjunctive. 




3. 


tfyyeA-frov 


7)yy4A-&wv 


j)yyeA-fl4vos & 




P. 1. 


i]yy4\-p.e&a 








2. 


ijyye\-&e 


jjyye\-fre 






3. 


riyyeX-ficuoi el(rl(v) 


riyyeX&toffav, or 7)yy4\-&a)v] 


Plup. Ind. 


riyyeX-fXTjv, -o~o, -to, -p.e&oy, 


-&ov, -frr}P, -fiefta, -3-e, 7}yyeX/j.4uoi ^crav 


Put. Ind. 


S. 1. 


ayyeK-ovftai 


Opt. ayy€\-oifj.7]V 


Infinitive. 




2. 


ayytA-r}, or -et 


ayye\-o?o 


ayyeA-ela&ai 




3. 


ayye\-e?Tcu 


ayyeA-o'iTo 


Participle. 




D. 1. 


ayye\-ovfxe&ov 


ayye\-ol/Ae&ov 


ayye\-ov/j.evos 




2. 


ayyeA-e?o-&ov 


ayyeh-o'tcr&oi' 






3. 


ayy€\-e?o~&ou 


ayyeX-oio~&T]v 






P. 1. 


ayye\.-ov/jie&a 


ayy€A-ol/j.e&a 






2. 


ayye\-ei(T&e 


ayyeA-o?<r&e 






3. 


ayye\-ovvTcu 


ayye\-o?i>To 




Aor I. 


Ind. 7}yyei\-d/j.r)v, etc. 




Aor. II. 


Ind. r)Yy€\-6iA7)v Subj. ayy4\-a>fxat Opt. ayye\-oifj.7]u Imp. 


(rare) 


ayye\-ov Inf. ciyyeA-eVd-cu Part. ayy€\-6fj.evos. 




Verbal adjective : ayye\-reos, -rea, -t4ov. 



$ 151. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to the 
stem-voivel of the Future. 

(a) with o in the Puture: tr^aAAw, fallo; (palvai, to show, Mid. 

to appear. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Perf. I. 
Perf. II. 
Put. 
Aor. I. 



o~(ptxAA-(a 
e-<T(paA-Ka 

cr<pa\-£>, 4is, et 
e-(T(pr}A-a 



MIDDLE. 



c^aW-opai 
e-a<paA-fAcu 

o-<paAovjxai 
wanting 



ACTIVE. 



(patu-co 
(ir4-<pay-Ka) 



MIDDLE. 



(paiv-o/j-ai 
ire-cpa.(r-/J.ai 



ire-cprjv-a, I appear, 

<pav-co (pav-ovfiai * 



e-cprju-a 



<E-(pT)V-a.[JLTlV 



1 I shall appear, a-rrocp., I shall affirm. 2 Prose airecp., it was affirmed by me. 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. 
Put. I. 
Aor. II. 
Fut. II. 



i-<T(pdA-frr}v (poet.) 

a<pa\-SfT](To^aL (poet.) 
i-cr<pa\-t]v 

0-<paK-7}(T0[ACU 



4-<pau-Srr)v, I appeared, 

(paj/-Sr-fi<roiJ.ai 
i-(pau-7]v, I appeared, 

(pdu-7](T0fxai, / irill aft 



Verbal adjective : crt/xxA-Teos, -r4a, -t4ov, ($>clv-t4os. 



184 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



[$$ 152, 153. 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of 
■paiv-w, to show ; ^tfpalv-w, to dry, and reiv-w (§ 149, Rem. 3), to stretch. 


Ind. S. 1. 
2. 
3. 
D. 1. 
2. 
3. 
P. 1. 
2. 
3. 


ir4--pao , -fxai 

ire-<pa.v-acu 

ire-cbav-Tai 

ire-cpd'T-ixe&ov 

ire <pav-&ov 

ir4-(pav-&ov 

■re-(pdo~-fxe&a 

Tr4-(pai'-&e 

-re-(paa-/x4voi elcri(v) 


e-^pafx-fxai 

e-^pav-o-ai 

e-^vpav-rat 

e-^rjpdfx-fxeSfov 

e-^ripav-^ov 

i-£ripav-&ov 

e-^7]pdfx-fxeba 

e-^ipav-^e 

e-^7]pafx-fx4voL elai(v) 


r4-Ta.-fj.ai 

r4-Ta-(rai 

Te-Td-ra/ 

re-ra-fxe^ov 

r r4-Ta-o~Sfov 

t4-t<x-(tSov 

Te-ra-fxe&a 

re-Ta-a^e 

Te-ra-VToi 


Imp. S. 2. 

3. 

D. 2. 

3. 

P. 2. 

3. 


{■j4-<pav-o~o) 
ire-(pdv-&co 
ir4<pav-&ov 
ire-cpdv-^cov 
ir4-(pav-&€ 
Tre-cpdv-frwcrav, or 
■re-tpdv-&wv 


(e-^rjpav-cro) 
i-£r)pdv-&u} 
e-\r,pav-bov 
e-\T)pdv-8nov 
e-\r,pav-&t- 
i-typdv-frcDtTav, or 
£-£ripdj/-&a>v 


re to.-co 
re-rd- o~&co 
r4-ra-(T^op 
Tt-rd-cr&wv 

t4-TO.-(T&€ 

t€-t d-a&cocrav, or 
re-rd-cr^ccv 


Inf. 


ire-'pav-^ai 
■re-(paa-fx4vos 


e-£r)pdv-&ai 


Te-rd-a&ai 


Part. 


e-^7ipafx-fx4vos 


Ti-ra.-p.4vos 



§ 152. (b) with e in the Future: 'Ifieip-co (Ion. and Poet.), to 
desire, and err 4 XX a, to send. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 
Perf. I. 
Put. 
Aor. I. 


lfxe(p-co 
'ifxep-na 
lfxep-a> 
'ifxeip-a 


ijj.elp-ofj.ai 
'ifxep-fxai 
lfj.ep-oufj.ai 
\fxeip-dfxt\v 


o~t4xX-(o 
e-araX-Ka 

iTTeX-S> 
e-creiX-a 


o~r4xX-ofxai 
e-trraX-fiai 
trreX-ov/xai 

i-0-T€l\-dfJ,7)V 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 
Put. I. 


ifx4p-$rr)V 
ifxep-$rt)o~ofxai 


e-cTTaX-^rjv 
0~TaXSr\ff0fx 


A. II. i-<TTa\-7)v 
ou P. II. araX-ijo-ofiai 


Verbal Adj. Ifxep-ros, -17, 
Remark. The inflection 


-61/, lfxep-r4os, -Tec 
of the Perf. Mid. 


1, -t4ov, arraX-Tos, araX-reos. 
or Pass, is like tfyyeX-fxai. 



§ 153. (c) With r and ij in the Future, 
(a) riXX-w, to pluck ; crvpw, to draw ; fxoXvvcc, to defile. 



Pres. 


riXX-co 


avp-cc 


/xoXvv-gd 




TiXX-0/j.ai 


avp-ofxai 


fj.oXvv-ofj.ai 


Perf. 


re-riX-Ka 


■re-avp-Ka 


(fjt-/x6Xvy-Ka) 




re-riX-fxai 


ae-trvp-fxai 


fj.e-fj.6Xvo~-iJ.ai 


Fut. 


t/A-o) rlX-ovfxai 


trvp-to cvp-ovfxai 


/xoXvv-w fioXvv-ovfxai 


Aor. I. 


e-rlX-a e-rlX-dfxr}v 


e-avp-a 4-avp-dfjr\v 


i-fioXvv-a 4-fxoXvv-d/xTjv 


A. I. P. 


e-riX-^rjv 


e-trvp-^rrfv 


e-fxoXvv-Srr)v 


F. I. P. 


TiX-dr,(ro/j.ai 


avp-^Tjaofiai 


fxoXvv-frf)o-ofxai 


Aor. II. and Fut. II. P. e-trvp-Tjv, avp-r.o-ofiat. 




Verbal Adj. nX-ros, tiX-t4os, cvp-rSs, avp-r4os, 


fxoXvv-rSs, fxoXvv-r4os. 


Remark 1. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or P 


ass. of Te-riX-fxai, a4-o~vp- 


fxai, is like rjyyeX-fxai, and that of fxe-/x6XvtT-fxai like 71 


■4-<pao~-fxai, that of rjax !*' 


fiai (from aiVx^-co, to shame), like e-tfpafx-fxai. 





§ 154.] PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. 



185 



(0) K\iu-o}, to bend down; irXvv-h), to wash, with v dropped (§ 149, 7). 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 
Perf. 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 


KKlU-W 

ic4-K\t-Ka 

kAw-w 

%-nAIv-a 


KAtv-0/u.ai 
k4-k7Ci-/juxi 
KA^v-ov/xai 
4-KKlv-d[xt]v 


irXbv-ta 

ir4-irkv-Ka 

irKvy-u 

t-TtXvu-a, 


irhvi/-ofJ.cu 
ir4-iv\v-(jiai 
irKvu-ovjxai 
i-ir\vu-dfj.T]v 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 
Aor. II. 


i-tcAt-&r)u Fut. I. KAl-frrjcrofJuu 
i-K\tv-r)v Fut. II. KhXv-i](Toixai 


i-TrXv-Srqv irAv-frfitTojAcu 


Verbal Adj. k\l-t6s, -77, -6v, kAi-t4os, -Tea, -t4ov, ttAv-tos, tt\v-t4os. 
Rem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. k4-k\X-hcu and ire-7rAv- 
nai is like Te-Ta-^cu, and corresponds with that of pure verbs. 



$ 154. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of 
single Verbs, both Pure and Impure. 

1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle 
form, e. g, aKovoy, I hear, Fut. axovo-o/xai, I shall hear, Aor. rjKovcra, 
I heard. See § 198. 

2. The following verbs in -awo or -aw and -«o, whose stem 
ended originally in -av ] and -ev (aF, eF), resume the v in the 
Aorist and Future ($ 25, 2) : — 

Kala (old Attic Kaw seldom, and without contraction), to burn, Fut. Kavaroo ; Aor. 

€Kav<ra ; Perf. ic4KavKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, k4ko.vij.cu ; Aor. Pass. tKavfrqv ; 

Fut. Pass. KavfrTicro/Acu ; verbal Adj. Kav<rr4os, kclv<tt6s, kolvtos; but second 

Aor. Act. 4Kay\v, I burned, Intrans., in the Ion. and later writers. 
K\ai<a (/c\'dco seldom, and without contraction), to iveep, KXavcroixai or KXavaov^ai 

(No. 3), KXavcrw late ; first Aor. Act. %K\avaa, etc. ; Perf. Pass. KzKXavjxai; 

Aor. Pass. 4K\avaSfrjv late. See § 166, 18. 
d-ew, to run, Fut. freixrofxcu or &ei»<roD/xcu (No. 3), 3-evcrco late; the other tenses 

are wanting. See rpe'xco, § 167, 5. 
v4b), to swim, Fut. vevcrofMai or vevcrodficu (No. 3) ; Aor. Zvevva; Perf. v4vevKa. 
7r\€0), to sail, Fut. TrKevaofj-ai, usually TrXevcrov/xai (No. 3); Aor. e7rA.ewa; Perf. 

ir4Tr\evKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. TreVAeucrjuat ; Aor. Pass. iirAevo-frriv ; verbal 

Adj. ■jrAeuo'Teos. 



1 The u in the Fut. of these verbs is occasioned by the reappearance of the 
Digamma (F) softened into the vowel v. The Digamma would regularly 
stand in the Pres. before the personal-ending w, but is omitted where it comes 
between two vowels ; it appears, however, in the Fut., as it there stands before 
the consonant <r. This is analogous to the disappearance, in the Pres., of some 
aspirate, perhaps h (comp. veho), in the Latin verbs fluo, struo, and the reap- 
pearance of the same in the Perf. before s, with which it combines and forms x. 

' 16* 






186 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. [$ 154. 

iryea, to blow, Flit, iri/eixrofxai or Trvevffovjj.ai (No. 3); Aor. eirvsvaa ; Perf. 

TreirvevKa ; late Fut. ?n/eucra>, and Aor. Pass, zituevo&riv. 
pew, to flow, Put. pevo-o/Acu ; Aor. eppevaa ; both forms extremely rare in the 

Attic, which uses instead of them pvrj<rofji.cu, ippv-nv (§ 192, 7), and so also 

the Perf. ippvijKa. 

Remaek 1. The verb xea> (x^Fa, x e " w )) to P our out i differs from the pre- 
ceding verbs: Put. x^j Put. Mid. x e '°<"°« ( see No. 4); Aor. ex ea > Subj. x«»> 
Inf. x e ' a 'j Imp- X e0J/ > X**™) etc ? Aor. Mid. ixed/A-nv ( see No. 7); Perf. Act. 
K£x^ Ka 5 Perf- Mid. or Pass. /ce'xfyu« ; Aor. Pass, ixv&w ; Put. Perf. x v ^ <T0 f xat 
(§ 223, E. 2). The forms with eu belong only to the Epic; Put. x e ^ w j Aor. 
exewa. 

3. The circumnexed Fut. in -ov/xat which properly belongs to 
liquid verbs only, is used by the Doric writers with other verbs 
also, whose Future would regularly be in -o-w or -o-o/xai, e. g. 
rv\j/(x), -ets, -etj -ovfxey, -etre, -ovvtcli ; TVij/ovfJLai, etc. ; this is called the 
Doric Fut. and is in common use in the following verbs, yet 
only in the Middle form, with the signification of the Fut. 
Act. : — 

(pevy-a), to flee, Put. (pevl-ovfxcu and (pev^ofxai 

■Kai£-w, to sport, " Trai^ovjxai u nai^Ofxcu 

xK' u i alvum exonerare, " x e(T0 ^l J - al - 

irltrr-oi, to fall, " ireorov/xai (riETH) 

irvvSavouca, to inquire, " ir<zvcrov[j.ai, usually irevffojxaiy 

and also in those mentioned under No. 2 : KXaia, ir\ew, irvew, viw, 

&£w. 

4. Future without the tense-characteristic. The Fut. of the 
following verbs, being without the Fut. characteristic a, and 
having the inflection of the Present, takes entirely the form of 
a Present, viz. : — 

e5-w, Epic, usually i<r&la>, to eat, Put. eS-o/xai; ttiv-w (mn), to drink, Fut. iri- 
opai ; x e ' w > to pour out, Put. x^'w, x«s» X«j etc - j Tut. Mid. xe'o^tai (see Eem. 1). 

5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of liquid verbs 
in -ovfxai without o- : — 

fidx-oficu, to fight, Put. fxax-ov/xai (formed from the Ion. fxax-eo-ofiai). 
kXo/JLai fEAfl), to sit, Put. (eS-ov/xcu) Ka&eS-ov/jLcu. 

G. The Fut. Perf. of the following verbs has an Act. form: — 

SvncrKoo, to die, Perf. Te&vr)K<x, I am dead, Fut. Perf. re^vri^co or -|ojuot, I shall 

be dead ; 
'((TTrifxi, to station, Perf. earn'tca, 2 statu/, Fut. Perf. ear^co or -£oficu, I shall 



$ 155.] VERBS. SYNCOPE. 187 

stand. 'E(Tt^|w and re&wfil-c* are old Attic ; iaT^o/xai and reSn/^o/xat. are 
only in the Attic, X. Cy. 6. 2, 17. 

7. The three following verbs, though not liquid, form the 
first Aor. according to the analogy of the second Aor., without 
the tense-characteristic o- : -— 

eliretv (second Aor.), to say, first Aor. e?7T-a; <pepco fErKfl), to bear, first Aor. 
tfveyn-a (second Aor. fyeynov) ; xeco, exea (see Rem. 1). 

Rem. 2. In the second Aor. zireffou, from riET-w {irlvr-u), to fall, the <r is 
not the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, the r having here been 
changed into o* (Dor. eirerov). The first Aor. e-n-eaa, is late ; in Eurip. Ale. 471 
and Troad. 294, the readings are not sufficiently confirmed. 

8. The following pure and impure verbs form the Perf. Subj. 
and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass, without the aid of the auxiliary 
dfxi ; the impure verbs by assuming an e as their characteristic 
in forming the tenses, become analogous to pure verbs : — 

KTa.-ofj.ai, I obtain, Perf. KeKrrjfxai, I possess, Subj. KtKTw/mi, -jj, -tjtcu; Plup. 
e/ce/cT^Tj//, I possessed, Opt. KeKTrj/j.7)i/, kckttjo, neKTrjio or K€Krepfi7]U, -$o, 

-CpTO. , 

fjufivficrKw (MNAH), to remind, Perf. /xe/j.v7]/xai, I remember, Subj. fiefivufiai, -77, 

-rjrcu ; Plup. £fjLe/xvf)fj,7)V, Opt. /j.e/xypfi'nv, -rjo, -pro or fj.e/j.ycp/xr)j/, -<£o, -$to, and 

in X. An. 1. 7, 5. fxefivoio (in all the MSS.). 
fidWw^to throw (BAA), Perf. PefiX-n/xai, second Pers. PI. Perf. Subj. StajSe- 

f3\rj(r&e, Andoc. p. 22. § 24. 
Ka\4w, to name, Perf. Ke/cA?7,ucu, lam named; Plup. eKe/cAY//^*/, Opt. K€KA.rj/x7)v t 

-770, -rjro. 

Rem. 3. iKrer/xrio'^ou may be found in PI. Rp. 564, c ; at present, however, 
the right reading is iKTeTfiJjaeo'&ov, according to most MSS. 



§ 155. Syncope. 

1. A few verbs, in some forms, sutler Syncope (§ 16, 8). 
E. g. the following words in prose : — 

irfTOfxai, to fly, Aor. iirrSfirfv, TrreVfrcu, Put. irT^tro/xai (e syncopated). 

tyeipa, to wake, second Aor. rryo6ix.r\v (also the Inf. eypeo~&cu with the accent 
of the Pres.), I awoke (rjyepStrju, I was awake), (ei or i syncopated.) 

epXofJ-ai, to go, second Aor. fjAfrov, Inf. i\fre?v, etc., from 'EAETOfl (u synco- 
pated), (§ 167, 2.) 

olfxai, to suppose, instead of oio/xcu, $i"7" instead of $6y.r)v. 



188 VERBS. METATHESIS. [5 156. 

2. This Syncope occurs most frequently after the redu- 
plication ; thus, e. g. 

a. In the Present : 
ylyvo/xai, to become, instead of yi-yivofxai, stem TENH. 
/aifjiuw, to remain, Poet., instead of jja.-jj.4va>. 

iriTTTw, to fall, instead of iri-Trerw, stem nETO. 
Trnrpd<TKw from irepdoo. 

b. In the Perfect: 

ireTavvvjxi, to spread out, iriirraixai; ireirTajKa (from IlETQ), to fall. 



$ 156. Metathesis. 

1. Metathesis (§ 22) occurs in the formation of the tenses 
of several verbs, most frequently in the Perf., Plup., first 
Aor. Pass., and first Fut. Pass, (seldom in the second Aor. 
Act.), sometimes also in the Pres., both for the sake of an 
easier or more euphonic form, and, in poetry, for the sake 
of making a syllable long by position. 

2. In the Common language, the following verbs are 
subject to Metathesis : — 

j8ctAAo>, to throw, Put. $ahG> (j3oAA7j<r&>, Aristoph. Vesp. 222); Aor. ZfiaXov; 

Aor. Mid. ifidx6fxriv; BAA: Perf. $4$\-r}Ka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. £e£A?j- 

fiat; Aor. Pass. efiX-hSr-qv; Put. Pass. &\t)&t)(t opou ; Put. Perf. fie^K-fjaofiat. 
da/j.da, usually dafxdCw, to tame, Fut. Sa/jLaara ; Aor. iSafiacra] AMA: Perf. ded- 

/j.7)Ka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. deS/x7)fj.ai ; Aor. Pass. iS/x-^Sr-nv, iZd/x-qv. 
Sifiu, to build (mostly Poet, and Ion.) ; Aor. Act. eBeifia ; Aor. Mid. ideifidpriv ; 

AME: Perf. 8 e S/j.7) k a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SeS/uTj^cu. 
frvftcrKw, to die, Aor. airi^avov ; Perf. t e 3- v r\ k a. 
frpctxx /c a>, to leap, Aor. e&opov. 

KaKiw, to call (Poet. kikXtjo-kw, like &v7]<tkw), Put. /caAw; Perf. /ce/cA?7/ca. 
Ka/n-uca, labor o, Aor. e/ca^uoj/; Perf. /ce/c^TjAca. 
<TK€h\w, ovceAeo), to make dry, second Aor. e<r/c A 771/; Perf. etr/cATj/ca; Put. 

a K\T)<ro (j. a 1. 
t4ixvw, to cut ; Aor. ere/xov, Perf. TeTyU7j*ca. 
rA^o-o/ioi, I will bear ; Aor. e t A 77 v ; Perf. t e t a ?j /c 0, from the stem TAAA. 

Remark. When the stem of the verb is dissyllabic, then the vowel trans- 
posed by Metathesis coalesces with the following vowel; (a) In inflection: — 

Kepd-vvvfxi (Poet. Kepd-o)), to mingle ; Put. Kepa<ra> ; Peif. Mid. or Pass. KtKpa- 

fiai instead of Ke-Kp4a-fj.ai; Aor. Pass. iKpab-nv. 
ir lit pd<r KM, to sell (instead of irnrepdaritu), iwr pedcncoo), from irepaw (hence Fut» 



$$ 157, 158 ] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 189 

Trepao-w) : Tevf.ireirpa.Ka, ir e ir p d/xa.] Aor. Pass, eirpa&rjj'] Fut. Perf. 

it kit p a. (To /j. a i. 
(rrops-vvvjxi, to strew; secondary form (rrpciuvv/xi (instead of o-Tpe6wv/j.i) ; 

Put. crrpcC (Tea ; Aor. ecrpaxra; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ecrrpcwuoi; Aor. 

Pass, e c r p w 3- 7} v. 
ire\a(o>, appropinquo, to bring to, ireXa&oo, ir\a&(a; Aor. Pass. iireXdcrSrnu ; 

Poet. Att. iirA&frr)}/] second Aor. Att. iir\a{jt.7)i>; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

Att. 7r€7rAdjUat. 
(b) The same holds also in the stem of the verb &pa.TTa>, to disturb (formed 
from TapdrTw, TpaaTTw), an Attic form of Tapdcraw ; Aor. z&pai-a. 



$ 157. Verbs in -co with the Stem of the Present 
strengthened. 

1. It has already been seen ($$ 138-140), that the stem of 
many verbs is strengthened in the Present ; but this strength- 
ening remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the 
modes of strengthening already mentioned, by r (ttt, kt), o- (cro-, 
£), and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are others, which 
will now be specified. 

Remark. All the forms which are assumed for the sake of constructing the 
tenses in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 138, 3). The abbreviations, D. M., 
signify Deponent Middle, and D. P., Deponent Passive (§ 102, 3). The fit, placed 
in parenthesis, shows that the form standing before it, is analogous to the con- 
jugation in -fj.1, to be treated below. See § 191. 

H58. I. Verbs, ivhose Pure Stem is strengthened in the 
Pres. and Imp/, by inserting v before the ending. 

Preliminary Remark. BaiVw lengthens the stem-vowel a into at ; eAoww, 
a into av] dvi/w and iriva, v and t into v and I. 

1. Bcuvco, to go (BA-), Fut. firjo-ofiaL ; Perf. pip-qua ($194, 2); 
second Aor. ep-qv (/«, $ 191); the Pass, occurs in compounds, 
e. g. avaPaCvo/xai, dvapePa/xai, 7rapa/3e/3a/ACH, avcPa$r)v, irapePaS-qv 
[H 130 (c), and 131, 5]. Verbal adjectives, paros, ^dreos. 

Remark. Pirst Aor. Act. e^ijffa, and Put. p-fiaa, are transitive, I brought, 
will bring, and belong only to the poetic, Ionic, and later writers. 

2. Sww, to go in, to go under, to put on. The unstrengthened 
verb ovw (kcitcouco) has in the Pres., in the Fut ovo-co and first 
Aor. Act. e'Svo-a, a transitive signification, to wrap up, to immerse, 



190 VERBS IN -CO WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [\ 158. 

to sink; (so also Perf. in X. An. 5. 8, 23, d-TroSeSvKcv ; ) Aor. 
Pass. e8w%; Fut. Pass. Sv^a-ofiai [$ 130 (b),2]. But the Mid. 
hvofxaty Se8iy/,ai, Svo-ojjloli, iSvadjxrjv, signifies to wrap up one's self, to 
go into, or under, to clothe one's self; likewise the Perf. Se'8-D/ea 
and the Aor. 4'cW (/u, § 191), have an intransitive signification, 
like Svofxai. Verbal adjectives, Svros, Svrios. 

3. eAaww, to drive (secondary form eXco, -£,% etc. poetic, yet 
also in X. Cy. 8. 3, 32. cta-eXa, Imp.) ; Fut. eXao-co (in later writers, 
though also X. An. 7. 7, 55. iXdaovTas), commonly Att. eXa>, -as, 
-a, Inf. eXav (4 117); Aor. r/Xao-a; Perf. cXijXaKa; Mid. to drive 
from me, Aor. rjXaa-dfxrjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. iX^Xd/xai ; Inf. eX^- 
XdaSai [$ 124, 2 (a)] ; Aor. Pass. rjXafyv [d in the tense-forma- 
tion, 4 130 (c) ; without <r, 4 131, 5]. — Verbal adjectives, cXdros, 
iXdrios (X. Hipparch. 2, 7). 

4. &vz/w and $&» (poet.), to rage, Put. 3tW, etc.; second Aor. Part. &v/Aevos 
(fit), raging. 

5. ttlvu), to drink, Fut. irio^ai (4 154, 4), among the later 
writers Triovjxai, but also, in X. Symp. 4, 7. 7rt€io-^e ; second Aor. 
eruov, Inf. Trtetv, Part, tticov, Imp. 7t2$l (4 191), poet., and seldom 
prose 7rie ; IIO- Perf. 7re7rw/<a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7re7ro/mi ; Aor. 
Pass. £7r6$r)v, Fut. Pass. 7ro#^o-o/xtu [44 130 (c), and 131, 5J. 
Verbal adjectives, 7totos, irorios. 

6. t/'vco, to jray, to expiate, Fut. rtcrw; Aor. erZo-a; Perf. Act. 
rertKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rencr/Aat, Aor. Pass. Itlo-B^v (4 131). 
Mid. rivo/jLai, to get pay from, to avenge, to punish, tio-o/acxi, erlo-d- 
fxrjv. Verbal Adj. rurriov. In the Pres. and Impf. the penult is 
long in Epic, short in Attic ; in the other tenses, it is long in all 
the poets. 

T/co, to honor, t*W, erlcra, TeTlficu, Poet. 

7. cfiSavai, to anticipate, Fut. c/>#^o-o/>uu, more rarely <£#ao-co, e g. 
X. Cy. 5. 4, 38. 7. 1, 19; first. Aor. tySao-a, and (in prose more 
seldom) second Aor. €</>#??v (/xt, 4 191) ; Perf. I^aica. In Pres, 
and Impf. d in Epic, d in Attic. 

8. tjfoivu (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., e. g. PL Phaedr. 246, c. 
Symp 211, a.), to perish (seldom to consume), Fut. (p&to-w and Aor. ty&o-a, trans. 
to consume. — Intrans., Put. <pSfiaofj.ai; Perf. *<p$fifxai, iQ&ivrai] Plup. and second 
Aor. tyfrifi-ny, Subj. <pfrlujtai, Opt. ^Ipriv, ffiro, Imp. tp&lcrfrw, Inf. QfrlaStat, 



$ 159.] VERBS IN -W WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 191 

Part. <j>&l/xevos, e. g. X. Cy. 8. 7, 18. ro?s <p^ifj.4vois, the dead (/it, § 192). Verbal 
adjective, <p&1t6s. 
Here belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a consonant : — 

9. Solkvo), to bite, Aor. ISa/cov ; Fut. S-^o/xai (late 8rj£a)) ; Perf. 
Aor. SeSrjxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SeS^y/xai; Aor. Mid. eS^a/x^j/ 
( Hippoc.) ; Aor. Pass. iS-^x^w > Fut. Pass. S-^^o-o/xai. 

10. KOLfjivu), to labor, to be weary, Aor. e/ca/xov; Fut. KafxovfxaL ; 
Perf. Ke'/c/^Ka ($ 156, 2). 

11. rifxvoij to cut, Fut. re/xw; Aor. ere/xov (e'ra/xov, § 140, 2) ; 
Perf. rirfjirjKa ($ 156, 2) ; Mid. to cut for one's self (something) ; 
Aor. Mid. ere/Ao/^v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rerfirjfjim (Subj. rer/A^o-- 
#oi/, $ 154, Rem. 3); Aor. Pass, exy-w^v; Fut. Perf. Ter^o-o/xat. 
Verbal Adj. rjxrjTos, tiay]t£os. S 

""X 

§ 159. II. Fer&s, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf by inserting the syllable v* 
before the ending. 

1. fiv-via), to stop up, Fut. fivo-oi ; Aor. efivaa; Perf. Mid. or fass. 
/Je/W/xcu; Aor. Mid. kfivo-aii-qv ; Aor. Pass. ifivo-$r]v ($ 131). 

Pres. jSucw, not used by the Attic writers. 

2. LK-viofiau (the simple is seldom used in prose, e. g. Th. 5, 
40. PL Phaedr. 276, d., the compound being generally used 
instead of it), a^>iK.viop.ai ) to come, Fut. d<£i£o/xai; Aor. d</>tKo/x?7i/, 
d<£tK€o-#ai; Perf. d^iy/ACti, d<jf>i)(#a6; Plup. aKpiyfxrjv, d^t/cro. Verb. 

Adj. IKT09. 

3. Kw-eu), to kiss, Fut. kuo-o>: Aor. ckvo-o, [§ 130 (b)]. But ^rpos- 
Kwe'oo, to worship, Fut. -TrposKwrjcro) ; Aor. irpo^Kvvqa-a (also poetic 
irpo^Kvcra, Inf. 7rpos/<ucrat). 

4. virta-x-vioixaL (v-Triorx-ofxai Ion.), strengthened form of v-Trix ^ 1 , 
properly, to /fo&Z o^e's self under, to promise, Aor. vTreo-x-oixrjv, Imp. 
vttoctxov ; but Fut. VTroa-xrjcro fxai ; Perf. vTrecn^aai. So, d/x,7ricr^x/o£!- 
/xai or aiATrixofJLcu, to clothe (from a^irix^, to surround), Impf. d/*,7m- 
^ov, Fut. a/xcjieio), Aor. ^/x7rto-^ov, djU7rio-xeiV, Fut. d//.<£e£o//,ai ; Aor. 
rjfX7rtcrx6jJir)V and r\pnrs.<TXPP<y\v ($ 126, 1). 






192 VERBS WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 160. 

§ 160. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Imjof. by inserting the syllable av, 
more rarely cuv, before the ending. 

a. av or aiv is inserted without any change. 
Preliminary Remark. All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a 
threefold stem, viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second 
Aor. from the pure stem, the Put. and Perf. from a third stem, consisting of a 
pure stem and an assumed e, which is changed in the inflection into t\ ; hence 
the Put. and Perf. are formed like the same tenses of verbs in -ew. — The a in 
the ending -dvw is also short in Epic (except in the three verbs, licdvoo, <p&dva>, 
and Kixd-va) ; but long in luavw in Attic. 

1. aioS-av-o[jLai (seldom aio-#o//,ai), to perceive, Aor. rjoS-ofx-qv, 
aicr#eo-#ai ; Perf. 7}xr$r)fxai ; Flit, ato-^ryo-o/xat ; verb. Adj. ato-^TOS. 

2. ajxapravu), to miss, Aor. rjfxapTOV (late rjjjidprrja-a) ; Flit, afxap- 
rrjo-o/xai (afxapT^o-w, only in Alexandrine Greek) ; Perf. fjfxdprrjKa; 
Perf. Pass. fjfxdprrjjxaL; Aor. Pass. rjfxapT^rjv (X. An. 5. 9, 21. 
Vect. 4, 37). Verb. Adj. dfxaprrjreov. 

3. a.7re^avo/xat, to be hated, Aor. aTnjj^ofxrp/ (poet. ^X"^°/ X? 7 V ) S 
Inf. d-7r€^eo-^at with irregular accent; Fut. a.7rex^o-o/mi ; Perf. 
o.7rrj)(S7][xat, I am hated. 

4. av£avu) (and au£co), to increase, Fut. av£rj<r<*) ; Aor. -qv^qcra ; 
Perf. rjvtqKa ; Mid. and Pass, to thrive, Perf. rjvfrjfxai ; Fut. d;^- 
o-o/xai and avtr}$r)vop.ai ; Aor. rpj^iq^rjv. 

5. fiXao-ravo}, to sprout, Aor. efiXao-rov (later k^Xda-rrja-a) ; Flit. 
j3XaaTr)<rio ; Perf. k/3Xdarr]Ka and /3e(3Xdo-Tr)Ka ($ 123, 2). 

6. SapSdvo), commonly in composition, /caraS., to s/eep, Aor. 
Kare&apSov (KdTaSapSei/Ta, Aristoph. Plllt. 300); Flit. KaraSapSrjoro- 
/xai; Perf. KaraSeSdp^rjKa. 

7. l£ava> and KoS^voi, secondaiy form of t£o), Ka#i£o). See 
$ 166, 16. 

8. KXayyavw, used of dogs, a secondary form of K\a£(o, to cry 
#w£, Fut. KXdyioi (KCKXay^o/xaL, Aristoph. Vesp. 930) ; Aor. €/<A.ay£a, 
acXayov, Eur. Iph. T. 1062; Perf. Kei<Xayya (old form K€KXr]ya). 

9. oioai/a>, olSaivoi (also otSaco, otSeco), to swell, Flit. otS^crw ; Perf. 

10. SXicrSava) (oXiaSaiva) used by later writers), to s/«p, Aor. 
ibXtaS-ov ; Fut. oXia^rjcroi ; Perf. <x>Xtcr$r]Ka (first Aor. wXto-^rjcra 
later). 



$ 160.] VERBS IN -6) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 193 

11. oo-focLLvofxai, to smell, Aor. <h<rcpp6p. W ; Fut 6<r<pp^(rofmi. 

Pres. ao-^oo-^was a rare Attic form; Aor. &><r$ m &mv and bvQpa.^vcu 
late. 

12. o^Aio-Kavco (rare Inf. 6'6W, Part. S0W), to be liable to a 
fine, to incur punishment (the double strengthening wk and Sv 
is to be noted) ; Aor. &<pXov (&<pX W a, Lys. 13, 65. and by later 
writers); Fut. o^At?™; Perf. (^A^a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
<x>cpXr)p.cu. 

b. av is appended to the pure stem, and v is inserted before 
the Characteristic-consonant. 
Preliminary Remark. The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem 
is changed into a long one, in inflection. The v is subject to the usual changes 
before the Pi and Kappa-mutes (§ 19, 3). 

13. ipvyyavu (instead of ipv-vyavoj) , ructo, Aor. Tjpvyov, Fut. 
ipev^op.at. 

14. #iyyava>, to touch, Aor. eSXyov; Fut. Slgofjuu. 

15. AayxaVa), to obtain by lot, Aor. &a X ov; Fut. X^opLai; Perf. 
el^a (rarely A&oyxa from AErX-, comp. TrirrovSa, mx&iv, ttcV- 
#os) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, d'A w <u (§ 123, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iX^ w . 
Verbal Adj. Xrjicreos. 

16. Xaixfiavo), to take, Aor. ZXafiov, Imp. Aa/?e and Attic Xafii 
[Hi 8, 3 (a)]; Fut. X^ofxau; Perf. elXrjcpa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
€t\rififim (§ 123, 4), (A&^« t Aesch. Ag. 876) ; Aor. Mid. iXaj36 M v ; 
Aor. Pass. IAt^-V ; Fut. Pass. \rj<pMjarofiat. Verbal Adj. A^ttto?,' 

A^TTTeO?. 

17. XavMvo) (poet, and also X. O. 7, 31, also A^ w ), to be con- 
cealed, Aor. 'dXaSov (I. Aor. eA^o-a late in simple words) ; Fut. 
At/o-co; Perf. XeXrjSa, I am concealed; Mid. XavMvop.au - ( Ion. and 
poet, also A^o/mt), in prose cttiA. (seldom cttA.), to forget, Fut. 
Xrjcropai; Perf. X£X Wf iai (§ 131); Aor. iXaSofxrjv; Fut. Perf. AcAt;- 
o-o/xat, Eur. Ale. 1981. 

18. XLp.7ra.v0), rare secondary form of AaVo). 

19. p.av^avoj, to /earn, Aor. ep,a%v; Fut. fmS^a-ofuu ; Perf. 
p.cpd$r]Ka. — The a remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are 
formed from the stem MA0E, according to No. a. Verb. Adj. 
/xa^ros, /xa^Teos. 

20. Trw-Javouai, to inquire, to perceive, Aor. i7rv$6p,r)v; Perf. 7re- 

17 



194 VERBS IN -W WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 161. 

irva fiai, Tre7rv<rai, etc. ($ 131) ; Flit. Trtvo-ofxaL (veiy rarely irevcrov- 
/xai, § 154, 3). Verb. Adj. 7rei;oTOS, 7reucrTeos. 

21. Tvyxa-vw, to happen, Aor. Irvyov; Fut. reu'lo/xai (TEYX-) ; 
Perf. T€Tvxr}Ka (TYXE- according to No. a). The transitive of 
this verb is the poetic revx^, paro. 

22. <pvyyava>, secondary form of </>evyto, to flee, Fut. <^ev£o/x.ai 
and -£ovfx<u ($ 154, 3) ; Aor. tyvyov ; Perf. 7re<£euya. Verb. Adj. 

<f>€VKTOS, -T€OS. 

23. x at/ Savco, to /W<i, contain (spoken of vessels), Aor. e^aSov; 
Perf. with a Pres. signification Ke^avSa; Fut. xeio-o/xai (stem 
XENA-, comp. hraSov, 7reicroyxat). 

$ 161. IV. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by annexing the two conso- 
nants, ctk or the syllable io-/c. 

2k is annexed, when the stem- characteristic is a vowel, and ktk, when it is a 
consonant ; Kv-io-Kw and xp7j-i'a-/coyuai are exceptions. Most verbs, whose pure 
stem ends with a consonant, form the Future, etc. according to the analogy of 
pure verbs, in -cta>, -ea>, and -6u>, e. g. evp-icricto, Put. evpTj-au from 'ETPE- ; a/j.fi\l(r- 
kco, Fut. aixfiXw-cTca from 'AMBAO-. Some of these verbs, in the Pres. and Impf., 
take a reduplication also, which consists in repeating the first consonant of the 
stem with t, and may be called the improper reduplication. Most of these verbs 
correspond to the Latin Inchoatives in sco : yiyvaxncco, 7)0d(TKa>, ynpao-Kca. 

1. dX-to-K-o/xat, to be taken, to be conquered, with this meaning, is 
used as the Pass, of alpeoi, Impf. ^Aio-ko/a^v; ( e AAO-) Fut. aAtoo-o/xai; 
second Aor. i'jXwv, Att. e<LW and yjXwv (pa, § 192, 9), I was taken; 
Perf. TjXwKa, and Att. eoAoHca and rpXuKa, I have been taken (Aug., 
$ 122, 4 and 6). The Active is supplied by alpelv, signifying, to 
take captive, to conquer. Verb. Adj. aAorros. Xen. uses both 
idXoiv and rjkuiv, An. 4, 4. 21. ; Thu. only kaXmv and iaXwKa: Plato 

also only eaAcoKa. 

2. afjL(3\io-KUi (seldom afxfi\6a>), to miscarry ('AMBAO-), Fut 
d/x/3Aoijo-6o ; Aor. f]/jL/3\(x)ora ; Perf. ^Sauko. ; Perf. Pass. r^i/SAoo/mi ; 
Aor. Pass. rjpplXuSyv. 

3. ava/3LU)aKO[jLaL, (a) to recall to life, (b) to live again, Aor. 
avefiioio-aivqv, I recalled to life; but second Aor. dve/Smv (pa, $ 192, 
10), 7 lived again. 

4. avaXto-KO) (also di/aAooo), to spend, to consume, Impf. avrjXicrKov 
(dvdXovv without Aug.) ; Fut. avaXwaoi ; Aor. avr'jXoxra and dvd- 



$ 161.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 195 

Aaxxa, KarrfvaXoxra ; Perf. avrj\o)Ka and avdXoiKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
avrjXoifxai and dvdAco/xai ; Aor. avakoiS-qv, dvrp\di$r)v ; Fut. Pass. 
avaXuSrjo-opcu. Thu. and the Tragedians preferred the unaug- 
mented forms ; Plato and the orators, the augmented. 

5. apio-Kw, to please, Fut. dpeo-co; Aor. r/peo-a [$ 130 (d)] ; (Perf. 
apripzKa in Sext. Emp. ;) Mid. with Accusative, to appease, to 
satisfy, Fut. dpeo-o/mi, Aesch. Suppl. 654 ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rjpzcr- 
fiat; Aor. Pass. rjpio-Srjv, Soph. Ant. 500. Verbal Adj. dpeo-ros. 

6. ftifipuo-Ku), to eat (Fut. Att. cBojjuu from iaSlw, second Aor. 
2<£ayov), Perf. Pe/3p<oKa; Part. ^pa>s ($194) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
Pefipoifxca (Aor. Pass. iPp&fojv, and Fut. Pass. PpudHjarofiai non- 
Attic ; instead, the forms of eo-^tw are used). 

7. yeyuviaKw (mostly Poet.), to call, to make known, Put. yeyooj/Tja-co] Aor. 
iyeydovycra ; Perf. yeycova, with a Present signification; — further, yeyaveiroOf 
Xen., yzyctivziv, Poet., seldom prose, e. g. PI. Hipp. M. 292, d, from the Prim. 
rEmNEfl. 

8. yrjpdcrKO} (or yrjpdw), senesco, to grow old, Fut. yr]pdaop,ai (sel- 
dom yrjpao-u) Plato) ; Aor. iyrjpao-a (in Aesch. Suppl. 901., Trans. 
to cause to groio old), Inf. y-qpacrat (instead of it yrjpavcu, from an 
old second Aor. iyrjpav, was preferred by the Attics, pa, $ 192, 1) ; 
Perf. yeyrjpaKa, I am old. 

9. ytyvcoa-KO) (ytvooo-Koo), cognosco, to know (rNO-), Fut. yvdxro- 
fxai; second Aor. eyvw (pu, § 191); Perf. 'iyvwKa; Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. cyj/Gxrpu ($ 131); Aor. Pass. iyvdxrS-qv ; Fut. Pass. yva)cr$r}- 
o-op-di. Verbal Aclj. yvtooTos (old form yvcoros), yvcooTeo?. 

10. SiBpda-KU), to run away (only in compounds, e. g. d7ro8., e/<S., 
SuxS.), Fut. 8pao-o/xai ; Perf. SiSpdKa; second Aor. e'SpaV (/u, $ 192, 

»■ 

11. evpLo-Kw, to find, second Aor. eupov; Imp. e£pe [$ 118, 3 
(a)]; CEYPE-) Fut. evprjaoi) Perf. t^a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
evp-qpLat; Aor. Pass. evpiS-qv [§ 130 (d)] ; Fut. Pass. €i>p7]^rja-op.ai ; 
Mid. to obtain, Aor. evpop.r]v (Aug. $ 121, Rem.). Verbal Adj. 
evperos, cvp-qrios. 

12. fjPdo-KO), pubesco, to become marriageable, Fut. f)(3r)o-o); Aor. 
rjfiqcra; Perf. ^St/kgi (rjfida), to be young, but dvrjPdai, to become 
young again). 

13. ^^k(d, commonly d-Tro^v^o-Ko), to <$e (Metathesis, $ 156, 
2), (©AN-) Aor. dwiSdvov (Poet. 'dSavov', Savuv, 61 #ai/6Vre?, the 



196 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 161. 

dead, aiso in prose) ; Fut. cmoScwovixai (Poet, ^avov/xat) ; Perf. 
ri^vrjKa (not a7roTedvr)Ka) both in prose and poetry, riSvafiey 
($ 194), etc., Inf. reSvdvcu; Fut. Perf. reSvrjfa ('$ 154, 6), and 
among later writers reSvrjiofxai, I shall be dead. Verbal Adj. 
Svryros, mortal 

14. Spwo-Kio 156, 2), to spring, to leap, Aor. ZSopov, Fut. 
SopovfACLL ; Perf. riSopa. 

15. IXavKopLCLL, to propitiate, Fut. tAao-o/xai; Aor. I. [Aacra/x7?v; Aor. 
Pass. IXaarS^rjv. 

16. pLeSvcrKO), to intoxicate, Fut. p,eSvaoi; Aor. ipieSvcra. But 
fjLtSvo), to be intoxicated (only Pres. and Inipf), borrows its tenses 
from the Passive, e. g. ifjLeSvo-Srp/ (§ 131). 

17. jxiixvrjarKw, to remind (MNA-), Fut. /xv^crw ; Aor. epLvrjora ; Mid. 
to remind one's self, to remember, also to mention ; Perf. p.ipjvqp.ai, 
memini, I remember, I am mindful (Redup. § 123, Rem. 1), 
Subj. tie/xvto/mi, -^, -^Tat ($ 154, 8), Imp. p.ep,vrj<To; Plup. e/Ae/xv^- 
/x-^v, I remembered, Opt. fjLepLvrjpirjv, -770, -77x0, or /xe/Ai/to/XTiv, -wo, -a>ro 
($ 154, 8) ; Fut. Perf. /xe/xv^o-o/xat, I shall be mindful (among the 
Tragedians also, I will mention) ; Aor. ijxvrjo-Srjv, I remembered 
(ipLvrjcrapLrjv Poet.); Fut. /xj^cr^cro/xat, I shall remember {o.Tvop\vv\- 

cro/xai, Th. 1, 137). 

18. 7ra(r^a) (formed from ttolSctku), by transferring the aspiration 
of # to k), to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. eiraSov; 
(IIEN©-) Fut. Tretcro/xat; Perf. TreVov^a. Verbal Adj. ira$7]T0<s. 

1 9. TrLTricrKU), to give to drink, Fut. 7ria-(o ; Aor. hrla-a. 

20. Trnrpao-Ku, to sell, rare in Pres. Act. (Fut. and Aor. in the 
Common language expressed by dTrcScoo-o/mi, arreho^-qv) ; Perf. 

Tri-rrpaKa ($ 156, Rem.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Triirpafxai (Inf. 7rc7rpao-- 

Sai, often instead of the Aor. ) ; Aor. k-rrpaS-qv ; Fut. Perf. Tre-H-pa- 
cro/xat in the sense of the simple Fut. 7rpa$rjcrojj,aL, which is rare 
and not Attic. Verbal Adj. irparos, Trpario^. 

21. crrepicrKco (seldom arepiu), awoo-repovvTas, Isoc. 12, 243, 
according to the Ms. Urb.), to deprive of, Fut. o-reprjo-ay ; Aor. 
iareprjaa ; Perf. iareprjKa ; Mid. and Pass. o-repicrKo/xat, (JTepovfxaL, 
privor; but o-rcpo/xcu, lam deprived, Fut. arepryo-o/Aai, rarer arTeprj- 
SrjcropLai ( tt7roo-rcpetcr^e, Andoc. Myst. 149); Perf. eo-Tepri/xcu ; Aor. 
io-TeprjSrjv. The simple occurs most frequently in the middle 
form ; in the Act., the compound a.7roa-T€ptcr/«o is more frequent. 






§$ 162, 163.] VERBS IN -CO WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 197 

22. rirpwa-Koi, to ivound, Fut. t/ouktco; Aor. erpwcra; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, rerpoifxai, Inf. TerpuicrSai, Part, rerpojfievos ; Aor. irpfjod-rjv ; 
Flit. rpco^Tycro/xat and rpoiaoaai. Verbal Adj. rpwros. 

23. cfxio-KU), to say, to think (Ind. and Imp. very rare), Impf. 
'icpacrKov; Flit. <}>rjcr(D', Aor. ecpyjaa. — (Pass. icpdaKero, S. Ph. 114). 

24. ^cur/ceo, to gape (XAN-, among the later writers x a ^ V0) )y Aor. 
e^avov ; Fnt. ^avovfiaL ; Perf. Ke^i/a, to stand open. 

Remark. In 8t5acr/c&>, tfoc-eo, the k belonging to the stem is strengthened 
by <r prefixed ; hence the k remains in forming the tenses, Fut. 8t§a|a> ; Aor. e'St- 
8a£a ; Perf. SeSiSaxa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dediSay/xai ; Aor. Pass. iSiddx^nv. 
Verb. Adj. SiSciktSs, -reos. The same usage is found in the Epic and poetic 
verbs, aAfr-fjo-Kw, &Aua7ca>, Aatr/cw. See § 230. 



$ 162. V. Verbs which have a Secondary Form in -$<o. 

Several verbs, particularly in poetry, have secondary forms in -£•&>, e. g. 
(pAeye&eiv, poetic (instead of cpXeyeiv), to burn; riyepedrovrai and yepe- 
froi/Tai, Epic, instead of aytipovrai and aeipovrai. Here belong also the end- 
ings -c&ov and -ad-ot/xt of the Impf, and -<£d-eif of the Pres. Inf., which are used 
even in Attic prose, e. g. dAe£a>, to ward off, tragic Inf. aAKoi&eiu (stem *AAK) ; 
a/jLvvca, to ward off, afj.vvd&<iiv, Impf. rmvi/a£roi> ; — StwKca, to pursue, Siwuc&eiv, 
Impf. e'Siw/cadw, also prose: — el'/cw, to yield, Impf. eiKa&ov, el/ta^oi/xi ; — e^w, 
to s/mi up, Impf. and Aor. etpya&ov ; — e%o>, to Aave, <rx&*"> (in Homer (rxe^eeiy 
as Aor.). 



$ 163. VI. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by prefixing a Reduplication. 

The reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the root with 
the vowel i. In the Epic and poetic dialects, there are also verbs, which take 
the Attic reduplication, i. e. they repeat the first two letters of the root ; see 
d/cax'C w » aira<pi(TKa, apaplarKW, § 230. 

1. f3i(3a£(D, to make go, to convey, Fut. Att. /3i/3w, -a?, -a (still 
also pL^do-ai, X. An. 4, 8, 8. 5. 2, 10). Verbal Adj. ^ao-reo?. 

2. ytyvo/xai (yivo/mi) instead of yiyevop:ai ($ 155, 2), to become, 
to be, (TEN-) Aor. iy€v6firjv (late Attic eycvrftrp/) ; Flit, yevijcrojaai 
(PL Parm. 141, e. yevrjaerai, fiet, and moreover yeve^yjo-ercu, efficie- 
tur) ; Perf. yeyei^ai, I have become, f actus sum, exstiti, and yiyova 
with a present signification, I am, implying lam by birth; eyevo- 
pi-qv and yiyova are also used as preterites of ei/xi, to be. 

3. 7riVru> (instead of irnrerui, § 155, .2), to fall, Imp. tvIttt^', 
(IIET-) Fut. 7reo-oD/>iat ($ 154, 3) ; Aor. hrzvov (very seldom first 

17* 



198 VERBS IN -CD WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [{$ 164, 165. 

Aor. en-ecra), § 154, Rem. 2 ; Perf. 7reVr(o/<a with irregular variable 
VOWel (Part. 7re7rra>s, 7re7TTcoros, Poet § 194, 5). 

4. TiTpdo), to bore, Fut. rpr]a<x> ; Aor. erprjo-a. More usual the 
secondary form rerpatvo), Fut. rerpdvH>\ Aor. irerprjva 149, Rem. 
2) ; Perf. rerprjKa, rerp^/xai. Verbal Adj. rprjros.' 

Several verbs of class IV (§ 161) belong here, as yiyvdxricw, and several verbs 
in -[11, as 8i8o>/«. 

§ 164. VII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem-vowel a is 
strengthened in the Pres. and Imp/, by t. 

Here belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic : ayaiofxai, to be in- 
dignant; Saico, to divide and burn ; fjiaio/xai, to rage; vaiu, to dwell. See § 230. 

§ 165. VIII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem assumes c in the 
Pres. and Impf. 

1. yafxio), to marry (of the man), Perf. yeydfxrjKa ; but Fut 
ya/xw; Aor. eyq^a, yrjfiat (lydp.-qo-a first in Menander, then in 
Lucian. ; ya/^o-euxs with the better reading yafirja-eCeis in X. Cy. 
8. 4, 20). Mid. yap.ovp.aL (with the Dat), to marry (of the 
woman, nubo), Fut. yap.ovp.ai', Aor. iyrjp.dp.rjv', Perf. yeydp.r)p.ai. 
Pass, in matrimonium ducor, Aor. iyap,rj3r)v, etc. [$ 130 (d), 2]. 

2. yr)$eo), Poet., usually Perf. yiyrjSa (also prose), to rejoice, 

Fut. yrjSycro). 

3. So/ceco, to seew, videor, to think, Fut. So'£w (So/070-w poet.); 
Aor. 28o£a (iSoKrjaa Poet.) ; Aor. Pass. KaraSo^ets, Antiph. 2. 116, 
2; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se8oyp.at (SeSoK^/xcu, Ionic and Eurip.), 
visus sum. 

4. KTvirew (Poet.), to resound, Fut. ->7<ra>, etc.; second Aor. cktvitov (Epic and 
j8. O. C. 1450) ; first Aor. €/cTi$7nj<ra (ib. 1606). 

5. p.apTvpeu), to bear witness, Fut. p-aprvprjaw, etc. But p.aprvpo- 
fiat, Dep. Mid. to call as witnesses. 

6. £uo€<o, to shear, to shave, Mid. £vpop.at. ; Aor. i£vpdp.r)v ; but 
Perf. i£vprjp.ai. 

7. w^ea), to ^wsA, Impf. id)$ow; Fut. wo-w and o^o-co; Aor. 
cwo-a, wo-ttt ; Perf. eWa late, Plut. ; Fut. Mid. wo-o/xat ; Aor. eoocra- 
firjv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ecoayxtu; Aor. Pass. Zuo-Srjv; Fut.. Pass, 
wo-^o-o/xat (Aug. § 122, 4). Verbal Adj. wo-tos, -reos. 






§ 166.1 VERBS IN -CO WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 199 



§ 166. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and 
Imp/., but which assume an e in forming the 
tenses. 

This change has taken place in the formation of verbs in -ecu, partly from 
necessity, as is the case with verbs whose characteristic is £, \p ; partly for the 
sake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the introduction 
of consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is ck, x& 5 an( l partly from mere 
choice or the desire of euphony, as in verbs whose characteristic is 8, t, £, A, 
p, it, k, x> o> o»> e> oi. The e is changed into 77 in inflection. Exceptions : 
ctiSoficu, &x&o[j.ai, and fj.dxofj.ai. [§ 130 (d)]. 

1. affiofiai, to feel shame, to fear (Pres. and Impf. old poetic, in the Common 
language al84ofxai), Impf. alS6/xr}i/ without Aug.; Put. al8e<rofj.ai and -f]o-o/j.ai 
(irraidecr&rio-ofxai, Eur. Iph. A. 889) ; Perf. -pSeo-fxevos, Dem. Aristocr. 646, 1 ; 
Aor. ■pheaa.jji-nv (with Ace), as a law-term in Attic prose, signifying to pardon a 
suppliant ; but also in poetry, signifying to be ashamed of to fear ; but in this 
sense ytiifffrnv is commonly used. 

2. a\iio), to ivard off, Act. seldom in prose, X. Cy. 4. 3. 2, aXig- 
€lv; Fut. dAe^o-co (Aor. yXigrjaa, Horn.) ; Mid. to ward off from 
one's self Fut. aXetj-rjorofxai (dAe£o//,tu as Fut. of 'AAEK- is rare, 
e. g. S. Or. 171. 539. X. An. 7. 7, 3) ; Aor. r]Xe& M v (^Xe^o-apjv* 
Horn, and X. An. 1. 3, 6. in all the best MSS.) (Inf. second 
Aor. dX/cd^etv, used by the Trag., § 162.) 

3. av£a>, to increase ; see av£dv(D, § 160, 4. 

4. ax$o/xai, to be vexed, Fut. d^Jeo-o/xai, and in prose usually 
dx^w-^cro/Atu (both with the same signification) ; Aor. ^^eo-^w 
131). 

5. j36o-ku), to feed, Fut. /Socr/ojo-co ; Aor. ifioo-K-qo-a ; Mid. intrans. 
to feed, to eat. Verbal Adj. fioros, fSoa-Krjreos. 

6. povXofxai, to wish (second Pers. ftovXet, § 116, 11), Fut. f3ov- 
X^aofxai ; Perf. pefiovX-qpiai ; Aor. iftovXrjSyjv and r}ftovXr)$7)v (Aug., 
§ 120, Rem. 1). 

7. Sew, to want, to need, usually Impers. Set, it is wanting , it is 
necessary ($ 137, 2), Subj. Serj, Part. Seov, Inf. Sav; Impf. e'Sei, Opt 
Seoi; Flit. Se^crei; Aor. £$€r](re(v) ; Perf. SeSeVK 17 ) ; Mid. Sio/xai, to 
need, Fut. Se^cro/mc ; Aor. eSe^^v ; Perf. SeSe'^/xai. 

8. e^eXa) and 9-eXu, to ivitt, Impf. ?/3eXov and e^eXov; Fut. 
e^eX^o-co and ^eX^o-co ; Aor. rjd-tXrjcra and e^eX^o-a; Perf. only 
rj&eXrjKa. 



200 VERBS IN -to WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$. 166. 

9. ctAco, eiXAto, i'AAto, also eiAiw, to press, to shut up, Fut ciA^o-to ; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. d\7)jxa.i; Aor. Pass. eiXrjSrp/. 

10. cXkq), to draw, Fut. eA.£w (which is preferred to the other 
form cA-Kvcrw from 'EAKYO) ; Aor. elXKvaa (§ 122, 3), IXxvo-ai 
(more common than uX£a) ; Perf. eiA/aka; Mid. to draiv to one's 
self, iXKvo-ofjiai, elXKvo-dfjLTjv ; Aor. Pass., Fut. Pass., and Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, only ciAkvo-^v, eXKva^aopiaL, zIXkvct p.ai. 

11. 'EIPOMAI, Aor. rjpopLrjv, I inquired, kpicrScu, epwfxai, ipoijjLTjv, 
ipov, ipopevos ; Fut. iprjo-ofuu. The other tenses are supplied by 
ipoirav; but the Aor. rjp^rrjcra is rejected. 

12. eppoi, to go forth, Fut. Ipprjcroi] Aor. rjpp-qara; Perf. rjpprjKa. 

13. evSoi, commonly KaSevSu), to sleep, Fut. Kad^evSijo-o) ; Aor. rare 
and late; Perf. wanting (Aug., §} 121, Rem. and 126, 3). Verb. 
Adj. Kafcvfyriov. 

14. ex ** to have, to hold, Impf. cT^oi/ ($ 122, 3) ; Aor. zoyov 
(instead of e-arcxov), Inf. ^X 6 "^ Imp. erne's, -n-apda-x^ according to 
verbs in pu (in composition also o^e, as Karaoke, irapdax^), Subj. 
o^p), -rjs, Trapacr^to, Trapacr^S, etc., Opt. a)(oi7}v (pu, § 192, Rem.), 
but in compounds 7rapdarxotp-h etc., Part, cr^tov; Fut. c^w and 

%-^crto; Perf. etr^Ka; Aor. Mid. ecr^OjU^v, Subj. tr^to/xat, Opt. cr^ot- 
/u/qv, Imp. (T)(o 9, irapdcrxov, Inf. cr^eo-»^at, 7rapacrxecr#ai, Part. ct^o/aci/os ; 
Fut. e£o/xai and cr^o-o/xai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, eo-^/xat ; Aor. Pass. 
icrx^w (not used in good Attic). Verbal Adj. cktos, and oftener 
poetic o^eros, -tcos. 

15. ci/'to, to C0O&, Fut. iij/rjcra) (Fut. Mid. It/^o-o/mi, Plat. Rp. 372, 
c.) ; Aor. ryi/^o-a; Aor. Pass. rjxf/rjSrjv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ^i/^p,ai. 
Verbal Adj. ecfiSos, or iif/rjros, ei/^reos. 

16. t^oj (Plat. Symp. 196, 6), commonly Ka$i£,a), to seat, to sit, 
Impf. UdS^ov, old Attic Ka#t£ov; Fut. Ka#uo (117, 2); Aor. 
ii<d$X(ra, old Attic Ka#io-a ($ 126, 3) ; (Perf. KeKa-^tKa;) Mid. JseaZ 
myself Fut. Ka#i£^o-o/mi ; Aor. €/<a $i(rdp,7]v, I seated for myself I 
caused to sit. But Ka#e£o/xai, JsmZ myself I sit, Impf. cKa^e^o/x^i/ ; 
Fut. KaSeSovp.ai. 

17. kt^Sco, to m<z&e anxious (Act. only Epic), Fut. KrjSrjcra) ; Perf. 
KeK-qSa, I am anxious ; Mid. Kr)8op.ou, to be anxious, in prose only 
Pres. and Impf; in Aesch. S. 138, is found Imp. Aor. Mid. 

KT^Secrai. 

18. kAcuw, to we<?£> (/<Aato seldom, and without contraction), 



§ 166.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 201 

Fut. KXavo-ofjLai, (i<\avcrovfxai, § 154, 2, in Aristoph.), rarer (in 
Dem.) K\air}<ra), or KXarjcro); Aor. e/cAaucra; e/cAaucra/x^v, S. Trach. 
153; Perf. kIkXclv fxai, and later KeKAcwoyxai ($ 131, 3). Comp. 
$ 154, 2. Fut. Perf. Ke/oVawrerai, Aristoph. Nub. 1440. Verbal 
Adj. kAcu;o-tos and /cAmiros, KAauo-reos. 

19. paxofxai, to fight, Fut. fxaxovfjiat, § 154, 5 (Epic and late 
prose ixa^croixai) ; Aor. e/xa^eo-ct/x-^v ; Perf. /x€fjbd)(r} /xat ; Aor. Pass. 
i/xa)(€(T^YjV late. Verbal Adj. xia^e-reo? and /xa^Teos. 

20. /xe'AAw, to intend, to be about to do, hence to delay, Impf. 
e/xeAAov and rjfxeXXov ; Fut. xteAA^o-a) ; Aor. ifieXXrjcra ; Pass. /xeAAecr- 
&u, to 6e _pw£ o^ delayed. (Aug., $ 120, Rem. 1.) Verbal Adj. 
/xeA.?7Teoi>. 

21. /xeAei /xot, curae mihi est, & concerns me, I lay it to heart 
(rarely personal /xeAto), Fut. /xeAipet; Aor. e/xe%7o-e(v) ; Perf. 
IA6jjl€\.7)K€(v) ; Mid. /xeAo/xax, commonly eTri/xeAo/xax (and e7ri/xeAoi)/xafc, 
but Inf. probably €7ri/xeAeo-#ai) ; Fut. hn^Xri<jo \xo.i (sometimes 
i7rL/ji,eXr}3-q(T0ixai) ; Perf. eTri/xe/xeA^/xcu ; Aor. iTre/xeX-qS-^v. Verbal 
Adj. iTUfAeXrjTeov. 

The compounds, e. g. fie-rafidXei, poenitet, are used as impersonate only ; sel- 
dom /jLerafxeAo/xat, to repent (Time), Aor. ix^Te^K^nv (late) ; fxe/xyjAws, caring 
for. 

22. xtv£o>, to swc&, Fut. fjLv&fjo-oj, etc. 

23. o£w, to me//, i. e. to em& <m odor, Fut. o£^orw ; Aor. <o£rj<ra 
(Perf. oSwSa with the meaning of the Pres. in Homer and the 
later writers, $ 124, 2). 

24. olofuu and oT/xcu, to £%m£, second Pers. ' ot« ($ 116, 11); 
Impf. u>6[A7]v and w/x^v ; Fut. ow/cro/xai ; Aor. ^q3-r}v s olrjSrjvai ; Perf. 
wanting. (Aug., § 122, 1.) Verbal Adj. ot^reos. 

The abbreviated forms, ol/xai, ^/j.rjv, are used in prose as a mere paren- 
thetic expression, like the Lat. credo, and hence are often employed "in an 
ironical sense ; o'lofxai, on the contrary, has such a sense, only when it is a 
governing verb ; still, this difference of usage is not fully observed even by the 
best Attic writers. 

25. ot'xo/xat, I am gone, have gone (with sense of Perf.), abii, 
Impf. <$x°M v (sense of Aor., also Plup.), I went aivay, had gone , 
Fut. olxqo-ofxai ; Perf. o^/xai, commonly as a compound, e. g 
Trapar^/xai, X. An. 2. 4, 1. in the best MSS., Ion. and Att. Poet. 



202 VERBS IN -(0 WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 166. 

oixoiKa (so originate, ot^a, otK-w^a, oi^-coko,, comp. the Epic oKw^a 
fromexco, $ 230). 

26. o<£a'A<D, to owe, debeo, I ought, must, Fut. 6<p€i\r}<rio ; Aor. 
ax^etX^cra ; Perf. ax^etA^Ka ; second Aor. cocpeXov, -es, -e(v) (first and 
second Pers. PL not used), in forms expressing a wish, utinam. 

27. 7rato), to strike, Fut. 7ratcra) ( Att. secondary form 7rai7Jo-w in 
Aristoph.) ; Aor. ejraio-a; Perf. -KknaiKo. (the simple late); Aor. 
Mid. i7raLcrdfjL7]v ; Pass, with <r (§ 131 v 2); yet instead of 7re7rcucr- 
^,ai and liraicrSriv, iTrXrffqv and 7r£7r\rryiJL<xL were commonly used. 
Verbal Adj. 7raio-7-eos. 

28. 7r£p8(0, usually TrepSo/x-at, emittere flatum, Aor. hrapSov ; Fut. 
7rapSy(rofxai; Perf. iriiropha (§ 140, 4). 

29. TreTo/Aou, to fly, Fut. (jrcTTJaoixaL, Aristoph.) commonly 71-777- 
cro/xac ; Aor. commonly in prose and in the Comic writers, c7tto- 
/X77V, 7rrecr«^ai (rarer hrro\p.r\v; eTrrrjv, tttw, 7TTaL7]v, irrqvai, 7rras, poet, 
and in the later writers (§ 192, 2) ; Perf. 7T€7rdrT7/xat (Aristoph.). 
— Syncope ($ 155, 1). 

30. o-KeWai (or o-KcAew), to dry, Aor. IvKk-qv (§ 192, 4), and Perf. 
<i(TK\r)Ka, and Fut. o-kA^o-o/xcu, intrans. to c£r?/ w£>, to wither. — Met- 
athesis, $ 156, 2. 

31. TV7TTO), to strike, Fut. Attic tuttt^o-w (rvij/a), Homer) ; (Aor. 
I. €TV7nrrj(ra late; €rv\(/a, Horn. • Aor. II. ervwov, Eur. Ion. 779; for 
the Aor. of this word, the Attics use lirara^a, hraura ;) (Perf. 
rervTrrrjKa, Pollux) ; Fut. Mid. Twr^oro/mi, Aristoph. Nub. 1382. 
Pass, blows loill be inflicted; Perf. rervfifjuaiy Aesch. (T€TV7rTr}fxai 
late); Aor. Pass. knmvp/ {krvTTr-q^yjv late). Verbal Adj. Tv-TTT-qrioq. 

32. -^aipia, to rejoice, Fut. ^aip^o-to (xaptjcropLai late) ; Aor. l^ap-qv 
(jit, $ 192, 8); Perf. Kc^ap^Ka (Ailstoph. and Herod.), I have 
rejoiced, and Ke^aprumi (poet.), I am glad. Verbal Adj. ^apro?. 

Remark 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -avw (§ 160), 
and inrio-xveoncu, of those in § 159. 

Rem. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed (§ 149, 6) ; still, 
they form the Fut. and the Aor. regularly, e. g. 

fiiv<a,to remain, Fut. /*«/<£; Aor. Zfieiva) Perf. /x e fi 4 vt] k a. Verbal Adj. 

fieverSs, fievereos. 
v4fjL(», to divide, Fut. vejxw ; Aor. eveifxa; Perf. veuefiriKa; Aor. Pass. 4ve- 
fi-f}Sfr]v. — Mid. ve/jLOfxai, Fut. vefxovfxar, Aor. ipsifidfirji/ ; Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. v^v4fji7}jj.<xi. Verbal Adj. vefxrjreos. 



$ 167.] VERBS WITH TENSES FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. 203 

$ 167. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different 
Roots, and which are classed together only in 
respect to Signification. 

1. atpeco, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Impf, ypow; Fut. 
alprjcroi; Perf. rjprjKa; Aor. (from C EA) elXov, eXetv; Aor. Pass. 
rjpeSrjv; Fut. Pass. alpeSrjo-ofxai [§ 130 (d)]. — Mid. to choose, Aor. 
elkopb-qv ; Fut. alprjaopat ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, jjprjfxat ; Fut. Perf. 
rfprja-ojxai, PL Prot. 338, b. Verbal Adj. cu/oeros, -reos. 

2. epxofjLai, to go, to come (only the Indie, of the Pres, in use in 
Attic, the remaining modes and the participials being borrowed 
from etfju ($ 181) ; thus, epxpfJiqi, to), lSl, Uvoll, uov), Impf. r)pxop,7}Vy 
commonly yuv and rja, Opt. tot/At ; Fut. elfii, I shall go (r}£oj, I shall 
come) ; — ('EAEY0-) Perf. ZXrjXvSa [$ 124, 2 (b)] ; Fut. eAeuo-o/xai 
almost exclusively poetical and later prose, still also Lys. p. 
165, §11; Aor. rjX%v, ZXSui, eA^oi/xt, iX£4 [$ 118, 3 (a)], iXStw, 
ZXSgjv. Verbal Adj. fxer^Xevariov. 

"Epxofiai has in common the signification of to come and to go ; the idea of 
coming commonly belongs to the form from i\&e?v, and the idea of going to that 
of etf/i. But in compounds, each of these three verbs expresses both ideas, and 
only the preposition limits it to the one or to the other signification. 

3. eo-#«o, to eat, Impf. rjcr^iov; (e'Sco, Ep.) Fut. ZBojjuu, (§ 154, 4) ; 
Perf. £8rj8oKa ; Aor. l^ayov, </>ayeu/ ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eS^Seo-jacu, 
(§ 124), 2; Aor. Pass. rjSia-^rjv. Verbal Adj. ideo-ros, eSeo-Teos. 

4. opdoi, to see, Impf. ioypojv ; Perf. ewpa/ca (Poet, also eopd/ca, 
Aug., $ 122, 6) ; Aor. (from 'IA-) elSov, t8o>, ISol/jll, IB4, § 118, 3 (a), 
l&<uv, ISojv. (On the second Perf. olSa, I know, see $ 195.) Fut. 
(from 'Oil) oi/fopH (2. Pers. oij/ec, § 116, 11). — Mid. or Pass. 6pw- 
(jlcu ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ecopd/xat, or £>/A[xaL, wif/ai, etc. ; Inf. <o<£#at; 
Aor. Mid. etSo'/x^v, theo-Sat, ISov (and with the meaning ecce, ISov), 
as a simple only Poet. ; Aor. Pass. &$$t}v, 6<f>$rjvai ; Fut. dfpSrjcr- 
ofjLaL. Verbal Adj. oparos and otttos, o7n-€os. 

5. rpe^w, to rww, (APEM-) Fut. SpafjLovfxat ; Aor. cSpa/xov; Perf. 
Se^pd/x-qKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eTuSeSpa/^/xat (X. O. 15. 1). Verb. 
Adj. SptKTeov. 

dpegojucu, e&pe£«, rare and poet. — Second Perf. only Epic dedpo/xa (APEMH). 

6. cpipa) (only Pres. and Impf.), to bear, ('OI-) Fut. oto-w (Aor. 
Imp. oto-c, oio-cTco, bring, in Aristoph., see § 230, under </>epa>) ; — 



204 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -fU. [§ 168 

CErKO, or 'ENErKfi) Aor. II. r/veyKov (rarer Aor. I r/vey/cai), -e?, 
-e(v), -o/xej/, -ere, -oj/ (and -a/xev, -are, -av), ($ 124, Rem. 2), Opt 
eveyKOLjAL, etc. (rarer -at/xt, etc.), Inf. eVeyKeiv, Part. eveyKwv (rarer 
eVey/cas), Imp. eVeyxe, -erco, etc. (and -arw, etc.) ; — ('ENEK-) Perf. 
eV^vo^a (§ 124, 2) ; Mid. to carry off, carry away, win, Fnt. oio-o- 
uai; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ivrjveypLai, (-y£ai, -yKrai, or IvrjveKrai) ; Aor. 
Mid. rjveyKdfjLrp/, eVey/cai, -ao$ai, -d/xeuos ; Pass, (a) to 5e borne, 
carried, (b) to Sear owe's se^ to hasten; Aor. Pass, rjvixfyv; Fut. 
kve^-qa-op.ai (rarer oicr^crojuai). Verb. Adj. omttos, oicrreos (Poet. 
<jE>epros). 

7. ^/u ($ 178), to say, Impf. e^v with the meaning of the 
Aor. also cpdvat and cpds (§ 178, Rem. 2); — ('EII-) Aor. dirov, 
et7ra), etVot/xt, ewre [$ 118, 3 (a)], (the other forms of the Imp. are 
rarely or never used, compound Trpoami), eforew, ebrwv (first Aor. 
etTra, not very frequent in Attic writers, more frequent ei7ras, 
very frequent ei7rare, rarely eTirav, Imp. dirov rarely, very frequent 
et7rdr<jo, wirarov, cMrcnw, and always eiWre ; all other forms want- 
ing in the Att). From the Epic Pres. elpto, come Fut. ip<b, Perf. 
eiprjKa, Perf. Mid. or Pass, elprjfmL ($ 123, 4) ; — ( C PE-) Aor. Pass. 
Zf>prj$7)v (cpp49rjv appears not to be Attic), pyj^yjvai, pySck; Fut. 
Pass, p-q^-qaropiai and elpr}<Top.<u. — Mid. only in compounds, Fut. 
a7repovpLat, and first Aor. aireLTraa-S-ai, to deny, to be wearied out, to 
give up, like airtnreiv. Verbal Adj. p^ros, prp-ios. 

Instead, of the Pres. <pwh other words are sometimes used, particularly in 
composition. Compare airayop^vca, I forbid, aire?irov, I forbade ; avTi\4ya>, I 
contradict, avreiirov, I contradicted, the compounds of kiireiv in the Aor. being 
more frequent than airr)y6pev<ra and avTeAe£a. So, ayopevco riva KaKws, I speak 
ill of one, but avreiirov naicus. 

§ 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -pn. 

1. Verbs in -/xt, the number of which is small, differ from 
those in -co, principally in taking different personal-endings 
in the Pres. and Impf., several also in the second Aor. Act. 
and Mid. ; and also in omitting the mode-vowel in the Ind. 
of the above tenses. The formation of the remaining 

* The first Aor. is preferred to the second, in the first Pers. Sing. Indie, when 
the next word begins with a consonant ; also in the persons of the Imp. which 
have a ; hence e^e-y/ce, but ivsyndTco. 



§ 169.] DIVISION OF VERBS IN -/Xt. 205 

tenses is like that of verbs in -ft), with a few exceptions. In 
omitting the mode-vowel, these verbs are analogous to those 
in -a&), -eco, and -o&>. 

2. In the Pres. and Impf., most verbs in -pu, with a mono- 
syllabic stem, take a reduplication (§ 163) ; this consists in 
repeating the first consonant of the stem with i, when the 
stem begins with a simple consonant or a mute and liquid; 
but, when the stem begins with <tt, ttt, or with an aspirated 
vowel, i with the rough breathing is prefixed to the stem. 
These verbs are the following : — 

2TA 'l-ffr-q-iii nPA iri-n-Trp7)-fu 

XPA Ki-xpVf" AE (dl-Srj-fu) Si5eWi(f) 

BA (pi-fa-pi) Qiftds 0E ri-frn-fii 

nTA '{-irra-fiai 'E 'Aj-/** 

nAA Trt-fx-TrXri-ixi AO Si-Sa-ixi. 

Remark. Most yerbs in -fii do not follow this conjugation throughout in 
the three tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs, 
riSy/xi, to put; '{<TTf}fii, to place; SiSou/xi, to give, and '(ri/ju, to send, have this 
conjugation most full, though even these have forms in use borrowed from the 
conjugation in -a, together with several forms of the inflection in -[u. See 
§ 172, Rem. 8 

§ 169. Division of Verbs in -pu. 

Verbs in -/-&£ are divided into two principal classes : — 

1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. 
The stem of verbs of this class ends : — 

(a) in a, e. g. 'l-a-Trj-fiL, to place, Stem 2TA- 

(b) " e, " ti-Stj-jiu, to put, " 0E- 

(c) " o, " Si-Sw-iUt, to give, " AO- 

(d) « i, " cTjur, to go, " 'I- 

(e) " a; " dfil, instead of ifffil, to be, " 'E5-. 

2. Such as annex to their stems the syllable -vvv or -vv, 
and then append to this syllable the personal-endings. The 
stem of verbs of this class ends : — 

A. In one of the four vowels, a, e, i, o, and assumes -vvv 

(a) in a, e. g. (ricedd-vvv-fit, to scatter, Stem 2KEAA- 

(b) " €, " Kope-vvv-fu, to satisfy, " KOPE- 

(c) " i, only Ti-vvv-fju, to atone, " TI- 

(d) " o, e. g. crrpdi-vuv-fxi,, to spread out, " 5TPO-. 

18 



206 VERBS IN -fit. — STEM OF THE PRES. STRENGTHENED. [$ 170. 

B. In a consonant, and assumes -vv. 

(a) in a mute, e. g. 5eiic-vv-fii> to show, Stem AEIK- 

(b) " liquid, " o^-vv-ixi, to swear, " 'OM-. 
Eemark 1. When a diphthong precedes the final consonant of the stem, 

that consonant is omitted before the -vv, except it be a Kappa-mute, e. g. 

cti-vv/jkai Stem 'AIP (comp. aip-u, ap-vv/xai) 

tial-vv/Ai " AAIT (comp. dais, Sair-6s) 

Kai-vvfj.cu " KAIA from KAA (comp. Perf. /ce/caS-^cu, KeKafffMCu) 

Krei-vvfit " KTEIN from KTEN (Put. ktcv-w) ; but 

deLK-vv/j.1, eipy-vv/xi, ^vy-vv/xi, oty-vvfju. 
Eem. 2. Verbs of the second class, — those in -v/xi, — form only the Pres. 
and Impf. like verbs in pa, and even in these tenses, only a part of the forms 
are in -v/xi, the others in -v<a; in the Sing. Impf. the forms in -va> are predomi- 
nant, and in the Pres. Subj. and in the Impf. Opt., these are the regular forms. 
The verb <rfie-vvv-pu, from the stem 2BE-, is the only verb of this class which 
forms the second Aor., namely, Z<T$r)v ; several verbs in -co, form their second 
Aor. according to the analogy of these verbs, e. g. Svco, %hiiv. 

$ 170. Characteristic-voivel and Strengthening of 
the Stem of the Present. 

1. In verbs of the first class, the short characteristic-vowel 
of the stem, a, e, o, is lengthened in the Pres., Impf, and 
second Aor. Act. : — 

& and e into 7), and o into a>. 
Still, in verbs in -e and -o this lengthening extends only to the 
Ind. Sing, of these three tenses ; but in verbs in -a, to the Dual 
and PL Ind. also, and likewise to the entire Imp. and the 
second Aor. Inf. Act. In the second Aor. Inf. Act. of verbs in 
-e and -o, e is lengthened into et, and o into ov, e. g. Set-vcu, Sov- 
vat. But in the same tenses of the Mid., the short character- 
istic-vowel remains throughout. 

2. Verbs in -v/xi, whose stems end in a vowel, and hence 
annex -vw, retain the short characteristic-vowel, except those 
whose stem ends in -o, e. g. o-t/ow-wu/ai (3TPO-) ; but verbs 
whose stems end in a consonant, and hence annex -w, are 
strengthened in the stem of the Pres. by lengthening the stem- 
vowel, namely, 

a becomes r), as in Tr-f)y-i>vfju, second Aor. Pass, iiray-riv 
a " at, " cu-vvnai instead of &pvv/xai, stem 'AP, 'AIP 
€ " et, " SeiK-vvfit, stem AEK, hence Ion. e£e£a 
v " ev, " (svy-vvpi, second. Aor. Pass. i£vy-r)v. 



t-(TTa-C0 = l-(TTW 


t-CTa-ps 


(TTa-CO = <TT« 


CTTa-7?S 


Ti-fre-ca = Ti-3-cD 


Ti-3-e-r?s 


5i-So-w = Si-Sa) 


St-So-7js 



$§ 171, 172.] VERBS IN -{JLL. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 207 

$ 171. Mode-vowels. 

1. The Ind. Pres., Impf., and second Aor. do not take the 
mode-vowel ($ 168, 1), and hence the personal-endings are 
annexed immediately to the stem of the verb, e. g. 

I'-ffTa- /xev i-Ti-&e-pzv e-So-jttev 

t-crd-fxe^a £-Ti-&e-/j.€&a i-d6-ixe^a. 

2. The Subj. has the mode-vowels o> and rj, as in verbs in -<o ; 
but these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel and 
form one syllable ; this coalescence differs from the contraction 
of verbs in -w, as follows : — 

dr\ and 077 coalesce into 7) and r} (not, as in contracts in -dec, into a and <j), 6-p 
coalesces into <£ (not, as in contracts in -6ca, into 01), e. g. 

i-arris l-ard-rj-Tai = l-aT7}-Tui 

(rrfjs 

Ti-£njs Ti-&4-ca-/jLcu = Ti-frw-fxai 

di-d<Ss 5i-86-r) =5= Si-Scp. 

Remaek 1. This form of the Subj. of 'ia-rrifxt and Tifrnfii is like the Subj. 
of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs, e. g. Tv<p&w, -ys, -fj, etc., tvtt-co, -fjs, -fj, 
from tvtt-to), (TTa-SfS), -fjs, -fj, from 'la-rrjfxi. 

Rem. 2. The S-ubj. of verbs in -Ofu is like that of verbs in -vw, e. g. dtiKvvw, 
-vrjs, etc. 

3. The Impf. and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel 1, 
which is annexed to the characteristic-vowel, and with it forms 
a diphthong, e. g. 

Impf. Opt. A. l-(Tra-i-t]v = \-<XTai--r\v Aor. II. A. gtcA-t\v Impf. M. i-a-Tal-fir)? 
tl-&€-i-t]v = Ti-frei-riv &d-7]v ri-&ei-/j.riv 

5i-So-i-r]v = 5i-doi-rjv do(-r]v di-doi-/j.7)v. 

Rem. 3. The Opt. of verbs in -e (tl^ti/xl) is like the Aorists Opt. Pass, of 
all verbs, e. g. ara-^el-r]v, rv<p-&ei-T)v, Tvir-ei-rjv. 

Rem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -v/xi, like the Subj. Pres., follows the 
form in -a, e. g. SeiKvvoifju. The few exceptions will be considered below. 

§ 172. Personal-endings. 

1. The following are the personal endings for the Act. : — 
(a) For the Indicative Present, 

Sing. 1. -fj.i 'l-arrr]-fj.L 

2. -s (properly -at) "-(rrrj-s 

-cri{v) (properly -ti) %-avit)-<fi{v) 



208 



VERBS IN -/ytt. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



[* 172. 



Dual 2. 

3. 
Pltir. 1. 

2. 



-TOV 
-TOV 

-/xev (properly -pes) 



'l-ara-rov 

'L-CTO.-TOV 
'{-ffTa-/J.eV 

'L-o'To.-re 

['{-aTa-VTi 'l-ffTa-cri(v)]. 



[-wi(j/)] (properly -vri) 

The ending of the third Pers. PL -vo-t(v) is changed into -acn(j/), and then 
is contracted with the preceding stem-vowel of the verb. Still, the Attic dia- 
lect admits contraction only in the stems ending in -a, thus : — 

from %-GTa-v<n is formed I-gtcuti (l-crrd-do-i) 

ri-&e-j/cri " Ti-beTtfL Att. Ti-be-ao't, 

" Si-So-vffi " 8t-8o0<n " Si-So'-act 

" SeiK-vv-vcri " Seizc-yucn " 8euc-v6-&ai. 

Remark 1. The uncontracted form in -eacri, -6a.cn, -va<ri, is the only one 
used in Attic prose, though it also occurs in the Ionic dialect ; the contracted 
form in -e7o-i, -ovffi, -vffi, is the usual form in the Ionic writers, very seldom in 
the Attic poets. But from "rjfii. (stem 'E), to send, this Attic form lao-i (con- 
tracted from t-e-aai) always occurs. 

(b) The personal- endings of the Subj. Pres. and second 
Aor. do not differ from those of verbs in -<o. 

(c) The following are used for the Impf. and second Aor. 
Ind.: — 

Impf. 'l-(TT7)-v i-Ti-frri-v 

'l-(TT7]-5 i-Tl-frrj-s 

'L-(TTt] e-TlSf] 

A. II. %-<TTt)-TOV e-&e-Tov 

4-(TT7j-T7jy e-^6-T7JJ/ 

e-GTTq-fxev e-&e-fxev 

z-<TTT)-Te e-fre-re 

i-(TT7\-aav €-fre-<rav. 

Rem. 2. The Ind. of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs is like the second 

Aor. eCTTT]V, e. g. eTVTT-TjV, 4-CTTcL-^7]y, -7)S, -7), -7JT0V, -TjTTIV, -T]fX€V, -7JT6, -TjCTaV. 

(d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor. 
(except the first Pers. Sing.) differ from those of the Opt. of 
the historical tenses of verbs in -w, only in being preceded by 
r) ; comp. the endings of povXevoLfju, (BovXevcraL^ etc. with those 
of 

arai-yv, l-o~Tai-r)V &el-7)v Ti-^ei-rjv doi-rjv 5i-Soi-r}v. 
Rem. 3. In the Dual and PI. Impf. Opt., the -n is commonly rejected in the 
Attic dialect, and the ending of the third Pers. PL -rjcrav is almost always 
shortened into -ev, e. g. 

ri^ei-rifMev = Ti&e?fj.ev tarai-rjTe = Iffrcure 

T&el-rjo'av = r&eitv H&ol-rjcrav = dido7ev. 



Sing. 1. 


•v 


2. 


-5 


3. 


- 


Dual 2. 


-TOV 


3. 


-rrjv 


Plur. 1. 


-fiev (properly -fji.es) 


2. 


-re 


3. 


-ffav 



$ 172.] 



VERBS IN 



■fXl. 



PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



208 



Sing. 2. 


-Sh 


3. 


-TCO 


Dual 2. 


-TOV 


3. 


-T03V 


Plural 2. 


-re 


3. 


-Tooffav 



(ri-te-bi) 


{M-do-bi) 


Ti-3-e-TO) 


5i-56-T(a 


ri-fre-Tov 


Si-do-rov 


Tl-&e-TWV 


5i-S6-rcov 


Tl-^€-T6 


St-So-Te 


Ti-Se-Tucrav 


di-do-TW&av 


Tl-&€VTG0V 


Si-SovTwy. 



The same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs, e. g. rrcudev&elrjficv = 
7rai8evfr-e?/A€i/ (wholly like T&el-qv). — On the contrary, in the second Aor. Opt. 
Act. of 'larri/xi, ri^ri/xi, SiScofii, the abbreviated forms are very rare, except the 
third Pers. PL, which is commonly abridged. 
Eem. 4. The forms diSwrju and Sc^tjv also occur. 

(e) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are : — 

(i'-(TTa-d-i) 

t-OTa-TO) 

'i-ara-rov 
t-ffrd-Tcov 

'i-(TTa-T€ 
l-<TTcL-TO0<TaV 

or l-o-TavTcov 

Eem. 5. The second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. rejects the ending -3-t, and, as a 
compensation, lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into 77, e into 
€i, o into ov, v into v, 

7-o-ra-fth becomes '/-cttj ri-&e-&i becomes rlSei. 

81-80-&1 " di-dov Sewc-i/v-d-i " debcvv. 

The ending -3-t is retained in the Pres. only in a very few verbs, e. g. <pd&i 
from (py/xt, fo&i from elfri, fth from eF/u, and some others ; it also occurs in cer- 
tain Perfects of verbs in -«, e. g. r&va&i. 

In the second Aor. of tI^tj/jli, fytu, and Sidw/xi, the ending &i is softened into 
s ; thus, d-e-di becomes 3-es, e'-frt = es, 86-&t = S6s ; but in the second Aor. of 
'la-TTjfxt, the ending -fri is retained ; thus, a-rrj-^i ; also in the two Aorists Pass, 
of all verbs, e. g. Tinrr)-&i, iraiSet&riTi. (instead of Trcu5ev&ii-&i, § 21, Eem. 3). In 
compounds of crrrifri and Pij&i, the ending -rj&i is often abbreviated into d, in 
the poet, dialect, e. g. irapaffra, airoard, irpojia, Karafia.. 

(f) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -vat. 
This is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic- vowel ; 
but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel (a being 
lengthened into rj, e into ei, o into ov, § 170, 1) ; thus, 

Pres. l-crra-mi ri-Sre-mt di-d6-vai Scik-vv-vcu 

Second Aor. arri-uai fret-vat Zov-vai. 

Eem. 6. The Inf. Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like ffrr^vai, e. g. rvirrj-mi, 
fiovheu&rj-uai. 

(g) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. participle are 
-vt<s, -vro-a, -vt, which are joined to the characteristic- vowel 
according to the common rules ; thus, 

l-ara-vTS — l-aras, 1-crTacra, l-crrav 
Tt-fre-j/TS = Ti-3-eis, -elcra, -eV 
Si-do-vrs == bi-Sovs, -ovaa, -6v 
detK-vv-VTs = 8eiK-vvs, -vera, -vv. 
18* 



eras, ffracra, crrau 
frets, fretb-a, freV 
Sovs, -ov<ra, -ov 



210 VERBS IN fXl. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. [$ 173. 

Kem. 7. The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like the 
Part. Tret's, or frets, e. g. rvir-eis, -€?aa, -eV, f3ov\ev&-ds. 

2. The personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs 
in -co, except that uniformly, in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and 
almost always in the Impf. Ind. and in the Imp., the personal- 
endings retain their full form, -o-at and -cro. Still, the following 
points are to be noted : — 

(a) The second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -a (as 'la-r^fii, dvuafxai), is only -acrcu 
in Attic prose ; the contracted form is found, from the earliest period, only 
in the poetic dialect, e. g. i-n-io-Ta from iiri<rra/xai in Aesch.. Svvtj (from the Ionic 
ending -eat) instead of Svva, in Soph, and Eurip. — In the second Pers. Imp. 
and in the Impf., 'icrrco seems to be only poetic; but, iirlcrrw, Tjiria-rco, Svi/w, 
i] Suva, are the regular forms in good prose, and the uncontracted forms 
scai-cely occur except in the poets and later -writers. 

(b) In verbs in -e, the contract forms in the Imp. Pres. are poetic and rare, and 
in the Indie. Impf. not at all in use; thus, Impf. eVifretro, Imp. Ttfrecro (t'&ov) ; in 
the second Aor., both of verbs in -e and -o, the contract are the regular forms, 
e. g. Indie, efrou, Imp. &ov ; edov, 8ov. In verbs in -o also, the uncontracted 
forms seem to be the usual ones in the Impf. and Imp. : ididocro, di5o<ro. 

(c) The contracted forms are uniformly employed throughout the Subj.; in 
the Opt., as in verbs in -&>, the a is always omitted, yet the form remains 
uncontracted. 

Rem. 8. The Sing. Impf. Act. of ri^-n/xi, is irl^r]v, 2 Pers. iri&eis, 3. eVi'frei 
(from TI0EH), iri&eis and e-r&et being more frequent than irifrrjs, irifrr]] on 
tTjyia, see § 180; the Sing. Impf. Act. of 8i8a>(xi is always iSiSovv (fr. AIAOH), 
iSidovs, etc. (X. An. 5. 8, 4. is to be read iSlSovs instead of ididws, according to 
the best MSS.) In verbs in -v/ii, the forms in -tec are usual throughout the Pres. 
and Impf, especially in third Pers. PI. Indie. Act., e. g. 8eLKvvovai(v), and 
the only forms in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., e. g. deiKi/vco, 6/j.uvw, <Tv/j./ui.iy- 
vvu], together with SeiKw/ja, v/j.uv^.l, auix/niyvvfj.i. — In Attic poetry, there are also 
contracted forms of rifrri/j.1 and 'l-mxi in the second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. 
Ind. Act., e. g. t&€?s, |e«, rtfre?, let. — But the Middle admits the formation in 
-vu only in the Subj. and Opt. 

Formation of the Tenses. 
§ 173. I. First Class of Verbs in -/w,c. 

1. In forming the tenses of the Act., the short characteristic- 
vowel is lengthened, both in the Fut. and first Aor. Mid., 
namely, a into -q, e into r\ ; also in the Perf. Act. of ri^/xt and 
trjfii, c is lengthened into ei, and o into co ; but in the remaining 
tenses of the Mid., and throughout the Pass., the short charac- 
teristic-vowel is retained, with the exception of the Perf. and 
Plup. Mid. and Pass, of TiSrjfxi and Zrjfxi, where the et of the 
Perf. Act. (reSeLKa, r^ei/xat, etka, elfxat) is retained. 

2. The first Aor. Act. and Mid. of riBr^t, trjfxi, and Si'Soyu, has 
k for the characteristic of the tense, not a; thus % 

e-&r]-K-a, TJ-K-a, c-Sio-n-a. 



§ 174.] VERBS IN -fJLl. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 211 

The forms of the first Aor. Act. eS-yjKa, tjkcl, and eSco/ca, however, 
are usual only in the Ind., and generally only in the Sing. ; in 
the other persons, the Attic writers commonly used the forms 
of the second Aor. ; in the other modes and the participials, 
the forms of the second Aor. were always used. 

Examples of the first Aor. in the PI. Ind. are: ib-fiKafiev, X. C. 4. 2, 15. 
iSwKafiev, X. An. 3. 2, 5. 0. 9, 9. 10. eSco/caTe, Antiph. 138, 77. eSwuav, X. Cy. 
4. 6, 12. edtj/ccu/, H. 2. 3, 20. a<p7JKav, Cy. 4. 5, 14. 

Also the forms of the second Aor. Mid. of rCS^fii, 07/u, and 
BCSwfii, are used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. ; 
r)Kajxy]v from fy/u occurs, though but seldom. On the contrary, 
the forms of the second Aor. Ind. Act. of TL^rjpn, tyfu, and oYSeo/xi 
(4'^r/v, rjv, !8cov), are not in use. 

3. The verb fony/u forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like 
verbs in -co, with the tense -characteristic a, e. g. e-arrj-cr-a, i-a-rr]- 
<r-dfxr)v. The second Aor. Mid. ka-rajx-qv is not used. Some 
other verbs, however, have a second Aor. Mid., e. g. e^ra/x^y, 
iirp Lafxrjv. 

Eemaek 1. The second Aor. and the second Put. Pass, are wanting in these 
verbs, also the Put. Perf., except in 'lar-nfii, the Put. Perf. of which is ecr-r^w 
and e(TT7)^o/j.ai, § 154, 6. 

Rem. 2. On the meaning of the verb "a-r-nfii, the following things are to be 
noted : the Pres., Impf., Fut., and first Aor. Act. have a Trans, meaning, to 
place ; on the contrary, the second Aor., the Perf. and- Plup., Act. and the Put. 
Perf, have a reflexive or Intrans. meaning, to place one's self, to stand, namely, 
ecrrrju, I placed myself, or I stood ; ear-qKa (with present signification), / have 
placed myself, I stand, sto ; ecrTriKeu/, stabam ; 4o-n7|a>, e<TT7i£o/j.ai, stabo (a<£eo"T7j|a>, 
I shall withdraw). The Mid. denotes either to place for one's self to erect, to stand, 
consistere, or to place one's self; Pass, to be placed. "EcrrTj/ca and ecnriKeiu usually 
take the place also of the forms eoTa/icu and k<rrdfj.T]v, which occur but rarely. 

$ 174. II. Second Class of Verbs in -pn. 

There is no difficulty in forming the tenses of verbs of the 
second class ($ 169, 2). All the tenses are formed from the 
stem, after rejecting the ending -wvpa, or -vvpn. Verbs in -o, 
which in the Pres. have lengthened the o into w, retain the <o 
through all the tenses, e. g. (XTpw-wv-pa, £c6-i/vv-/zi, pu-wv-pu, Fut. 
o-Tpu-aa), etc. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, in form- 
ing some of the tenses, assume a Theme ending in a vowel, 
e. g. opL-vv-pLi, Aor. w/x-o-o-a, from 'OMOO. The second Aor. and 
the second Fut. Pass, occur only in a few verbs, e. g. Itvy-vv-fu. 
See § 182. 



212 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN 



-/XL. 



[* 175. 



175. Paradigms of 



ACTIVE. 




p 


12 


B s 

111 

P rt S 
a ft 


2TA- to £>Zace. 


0E- to put. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to sAow. 




o 

EH 


1 














S. 1. 


'i-aT7]-/j.t. 


ri-^rrj-fxi 


Si-Sco-jiu 


de'iK-vd-fAi l 








2. 


'i-<TTT]-S 


TI-&1J-S 


di-Scc-s 


Sei/c-^u-s 








3. 


r l-(TTr]-at(v) 


Ti-&7)-(Tl(v) 


di-Sw-ai(y) 


Set/c-j/u-c^f) 








D.l. 
















2. 


'L-GTO.-T0V 


Tl-dre-TOV 


di-So-rov 


8ei/c-»'i'-T0i/ 








3. 


'L-ard-rov 


TL-&6-T0V 


Si-do-Toy 


8eiK-w-Toy 






P..1. 


"-(TTOL-fXeV 


ri-^e-fiey 


di-5o-[j.ep 


Sei/c-^v-^iey 






2. 


i-crrd-re 


TI-S-6-T6 


di-So-re 


SeiK-w-re 








3. 


l-(TTa-ai(v) 


ri-&e-d(ri(v) 


di-do-d(ri(v) 


8etK-vi5-dcrt(j/) 










(from lard-do- 1) 


and ri-&*7o~i(v) 


and 5i-8ov(n(j>) 


and Set/c-j'G(rt(v) 






S. 1. 


I (TTU 


Tl-&S> 


§i-8« 


8ei/c-w-&) 








2. 


l-o-Trj-s 


TL-frfj-S 


8t-5<£-s 


deiK-vv-ys 






J 


3. 


t-(TT77 


Tl-frfj 


8t-S<£ 


etc. 








D.l. 












£ 


S 


2. 


l-CTTTJ-TOU 


TI-&7J-T0V 


5t-S(J-TOZ/ 






s 


i& 


3. 


\-<JTT)-TOV 


TL-Srrj-TOj/ 


5i-5ciJ-Toi/ 






4 




P. 1. 


i-CTTcD-yUCV 


Ti-&a>-jj.ev 


b~i-fi a>-/j.ev 










2. 


l-CTTTJ-Te 


Ti-&r)-re 


Si-Soi-Te 










3. 


l-(Trw-(Ti{u) 


Tl-&U>-(Tl{v) 


8i-Sw-cri(j/) 








S.2. 


t-a-TTj 2 


rl-bei s 


8t-5ou 2 


Sei/c-i/u 2 










(from iVraSi) 


(from TiS-e&t) 


(from SiSoSri) 


(from Seinvv&i) 








3. 


l-crra-Tca 


Ti-id-6-TCi) 


Si-So-rco 


SeiK-vv-Tco 






g 


D.2. 


"-crra-rov 


ri-Sre-rov 


Si-So-to^ 


Sc'ik-vv-tou 






| 


3. 


i-crrd-rcoy 


TL-&e-TWV 


Si-So-Tajv 


deiK-VV-TWV 






P. 2. 


"-crrd-re 


Ti-3-e -T6 


8/-S0-T6 


Se'iK-i/v-Te 






3. 


l-ffrd-TOiHTav 


Tt-3-6-Toxraj/ 


Si-So-rwaau 


8eiK-jsv-TGo<rav 










and i-aTayTuv 


and ti-&4vtoov 


and 8i-5<Ww*/ 


and SeiK-uwrcov 




Infin. 


l-VTa-vai 


TI-&E-J/CU 


Si-SJ-^a: 


StiK-vv-uat. 




Part. 


l-aTcis, acra, av 


Ti-&eis, eurcc, eV 


di-dovs, ovcra, 6v 


deiK-vvs, vera, vv 






G. dvTos 


G. eVros 


G. (Wos 


G. -UVTOS 








S. 1. 


'l-(TTT}-V 


%-Tl-frllV 


i-di-Sovp 3 


i-SeiK-yvy 








2. 


'l-(TT7]-S 


i-ri-freis 3 


i-di-Sovs a 


i-deiK-vvs 








3. 


'1-ffTT] 


e-Ti-ftet 3 


e'-8i'-5ou 3 


i-SeiK-vv 






.£ 


D.l. 














"5 


2. 


'l-ard-Tov 


e-Ti-S-e-Tov 


i-dt-So-rou 


i-SeiK-vv-TOV 






Hs 


3. 


l-ara.-Tf\v 


£-Tl-\r4-T7)V 


i-di-d6-T7]v 


e-Sei/c-w-TTj?/ 






^ 


P. 1. 


'i-ard-/xev 


i-Ti-frz-fiej/ 


i-Si-So-fJLeu 


i-SeiK-vv-fiev 




■w 




2. 


'l-crrd-re 


e-Ti-id-e-re 


e-Si-80-Te 


i-8€lK-VV-T€ 




1 

1 




3. 


'i-ard-crav 


€-T/-&e-o-aj/ 


e-Si-So-cray 


e-de'iK-vv-aav 






S. l. 


l-arai-rjv 


Ti-3-ei-7jj' 


St-doL-rju 


deiK-vv-'oifu 




fl 




2. 


l-(rrat-r}s 


Ti-^€i-7JS 


Si-5oi-7?s 


SeiK-vv-ois 






-5 


3. 


i-<TTai-7) 


Ti-&ei-7) 


8i-8oi-7j 


etc. 






D.l. 














e 


2. 


l-ITTCU-TOV 4 


Ti-&ei-TOV 4 


St-Sot-TOI' 4 








e 


3. 


l-aTai-rrjV 


Ti-&ei-Tr]i' 


Sl-Sol-TT]V 










P. 1. 


i-VTCU-jASV 


TL-^€?-fJ.eV 


8i-8o?-yaev 










2. 


l-GTcu-re 


Ti-&e?-re 


Si-SoT-re 










3. 


l-<rrai-€V 


^ecially Seucvvov 


8i-8o?-ez/ 
(n(j'). Also Imp 






1 An 


d heiKv 


v-ca, -eis, etc., es 


f. iSeiKvvou, -ties, 


-M")» 


and the Part, usually 8< 


ikvu-cov, -ovaa, -( 


v(§ 172, Kem. 8 


). 2 § 172. Rem. 



$ 175.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fJLL. 213 

Verbs in -pi. 





MIDDLE. 




2TA- to place. 


0E- to put. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to show. 


'i-crra-fjuu 


riSe-fiat 


Si-So-fiai 


Se'iK-vv-fiai 


'l-ara-aai 


Ti-&e-crat 


Si-80-aai 


8eiK-vii-aai 


'i-ara-rai 


TI-&6-TCU 


di-do-rai 


8^'iK-vii-rai. 


l-(TTa-fl€&OV 


TL-&4-fx.e&ov 


di-do-fAe&ov 


8etK-v&-/j.e&ov 


'i-a-TCL-cr&ov 


Ti-3-e-<rdw 


di-So-o'&ov 


8elK-vv-a&ov 


'i-o-Ta-cr&ov 


Tl-&e-(T&OJ/ 


di-8o-o~&ov 


8eiK-vv-o-&ov 


l-(TTcl-fJ.edra 


Ti-&e-/xe&a 


8t-86-fx.€&a 


SeiK-vi-fiG&a 


'i-ara-o-fre 


riSe-abe 


8(-8o-(rfre 


Sdic-vv-a&e 


'i-ffTa-vTcu 


li-Ste-vrai 


Si-So-vrcu 


Seiic-vv-VTcu 


i-(TTw-fiai ° 


Ti-&to-n.ai 


8i-8w-/j.ai 


SeiK-vv-eofxai 


l-arvi 


Tl-frp 


81-8$ 


8euc-vi>-ri 


l-(TT7)-rai 


TI-&TJ-TCU 


8i-8u-rai 


etc. 


l-GTrJo-jAeSoV 


T L-&(t>-/J.£&OV 


8L-8d0-/J.G&OV 




i-VTri-ff&ov 


Tl-&r)-G&OV 


di-§oij-o~&ov 




l-crTrj-oSrov 


Ti-&rj-(r&ov 


di-dco-a&ov 




l-o-Tdo-fieSra 


Ti-Srca-jx^Sra 


8i-8a>-/j.e&a 




l-arr\-(T^re 


Ti-&rj-<r&e 


8i-8aj-cr&e 




l-aru-yrai 


ti-&u)-vtcu 


Si-Sco-vrai 




'1-(tt6.-(to and 


Ti-3-e-cro and 


8i-8o-(ro and 


8e'iK-vv-<To 


"-ffTO) 


Tt-3-ou 


8l-8ov 




i-<TTa-aS<a 


tl-&4-<t&<o 


8i-86-(r&co 


SeiK-vv-cr&u} 


X-ffra-oSov 


tI-&6-(T&OV 


8i-8o-o'&ov 


8eiK.-vv-<T&ov 


l-a-rd a&ay 


tl-&4-o'&c>:v 


81-86-afrtov 


SeiK-vv-cr&cav 


'I cna-cr&e 


Ti-3-6-0-^6 


8i-8o-<rfre 


Se'iK-vv-a&e 


l-crrd-cr^raxrav and 


Ti-&<£(r&o)crav and 


8i-86-<r&u)o'av and 


SeiK-vv-a&cecrav 


l-(TTa-(T&toV 


Ti-&e-cr&G0V 


Si-do-o&cov 


and 8etK-vv-o-&a>v 


'i-CTa-crSou 


Ti'-S-e-o-frcu 


8i-8o-a&ai 


de'iK-vv-a&cu 


i-<rTCi-fJ.£]/OS, 7), ov 


Ti-fri-fAevos, 77, ov 


8i-86-ixevo5, 77, ov 


SeiK-vv-fievos, 77, 
ov 


l-GTa-inqv 


4-Tl-&4-(AT]V 


£-8i-86-/Ar)v 


4-8eiK-VV-jX7\V 


'i-crra-cro and i-orco 


i-riSe-ao 


i-Si-So-ao 


4-8^'lk-vii-o'o 


'l-crra-To 


e-Tt-3-e-TO 


i-8i-8o-ro 


4-SeiK-vv-TO 


l-ffTa-ue&oe 


4-TI-&4-/J.G&OV 


i-8i-86-/j.e&ov 


4-deiK-vv-fA.e^ov 


"-(TTa-cr&oy 


4-ri-^e-aSrov 


4-8i-8o-o-&ov 


4-Be'iK-vv-a^ov 


l-(TTa.-(r&7)y 


4 Ti-be-oSriv 


4-8i-8o-a^rfv 


4-deiK-vv-o-&7)v 


i-GTa-fj.&a 


i-TL-&e-/xe&a 


4-8i-86-/j.e&a 


4-8eiK-vv-fie&a 


'i-vr a-abe 


e-Ti-^e-crd-e 


4-8i-8o-o-&e 


4-8eiK-vv-o-£re 


'l-<TT<X.-VTO 


4-tc-&€-vto 


4-8l-8o-vto 


4-8eiK-vv-vro 


l-crrai-fx'qv 6 


riSo'i-fir}!/ 7 


8i-8oi-[niv 7 


SeiK-vv-oifj.'nv 


l-arai-o 


Tt-3-oT-o 


8i-8o?-o 


SsiK-vv-oio, 


l-(TTCU-TO 


TL-Srol-ro 


8i-8o7-to 


etc. 


l-orTai-fie&ov 


Tl-^rol-fl^OV 


8i-8oi-/j.e^ov 




t-<TTa?-(r&oy 


Ti-&u?-(r&ov 


8i-8o?-a&ov 




l-a-rai-crSfvv 


Ti-&oi-a&r]V 


8i-8oi-o-&riv 




i-<TTai-/j.e&a 


Ti-3-oi-iCteS-a 


8i-8ot-[j.e&a 




l-(TTCU-<r&€ 


Ti-&o7-crSe 


8i-8o?-o-&e 




L-(TTCU-VTO 


TL-Soi-VTO 


8l-8o?-vto 





5. a § 172, Rem. 8. 
etc., see § 176, 1. * 



4 § 172, Hem. 3. 
On the accent in 



5 On the irreg. accent of iirlffjafiau 
4-rrio-Taio, etc. see § 176, 1. 7 § 176, 2 



214 



PARADIGMS OP VERBS IN 



-fll. 



[t 175. 



ACTIVE. 




m 
8 


to 


E <*• 


2TA- to place. 


0E- to put. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to sfow. 




H 


s 


» Pi 
















S. 1. 


e-arrj-v, I stood, 


(f-dtf-y) ^ A. I. 


(e-8a-v) ) A. I. 










2. 


€-(TT7]-S 


(e-frn-s) > used 


(e-5w-s) > used 










3. 


i-<jTf\ 


{%-bri) ) for it 


(e-5w) ) for it 








.§ 


D.l. 














8 


2. 


e-crrri-Tov 


€-&e-TOV 


%-8o-TOV 


wanting. 






~e 


3. 


k-CTT]-Tr)V 


£-&4-T7]V 


i-So-rriu 








^ 


P. 1. 


i- or T7j- /JLev 


e-t&e-jt&f 


e-8o-fxev 










2. 


e-o"Ti7-Te 


€-&e-T€ 


Z-So-Te 










3. 


€-(TT7}-<rav 


e-fre-ffav 


%-8o-o*av 








S. 1. 


<TT<ti l 


&« l 


8co l 










2. 


(TTrjs 


&V-S 


8<3-s 








s? 


3. 


(TTT) 


dv 


8$ 










D.l. 














e 


2. 


(TTrj-TOV 


&r)-TOV 


8w-rov 








S> 


3. 


(TTr]-TOV 


&rj-Tov 


8a>-rov 








50 


P. 1. 


(TTW-/X6V 


&ob-/j.ev 


5<w-fiey 










2. 


<TT7]-re 


&rj-re 


dco-re 






.H 




3. 


(ttS>-<ti{v) 


&W-(Tl(v) 


8w-(Ti(v) 








S. 1. 


(TTai-T)v 


^6i-7JV 


8oi-T)V 






6 




2. 


aTai-rjs 


Srei-rjs 


8oi-7]s 






^ 


J 


3. 


ctcu-tj 


frei-r) 


doi-7] 








D.l. 














e 


2. 


(Trai-riTov' 2 


&el-7)T0V 2 


8ot-7]TOP 2 








* 


3. 


(TTai-7]T7jV 


iS-et-^TTjj/ 


8oL-7]T7]V 










P. 1. 


(TTa.i-rjiji.ev 


&ei-7)IAev 


Soi-7]f.i.€V 










2. 


(TTO.l-7]T6 


3-61-T7T6 


doi-7]Te 










3. 


arai-ev 


3-et-ej' 


8o?-ev 








S. 2. 


crrr) Si 3 


&6S (S^t) 4 


80s (86?n) 4 








v 


3. 


<ttt)-tu> 


Sre-rco 


86-tw 










D.2. 


(TT7J-T0V 


Sre-Tov 


86-tov 








g 


3. 


(Ttt) -tcov 


fre-rav 


86-TOOV 








a, 


P. 2. 


arrj-re 


fre-re 


86-re 








3. 


(TTTj-Tcoaav 


^i-Tccaav and 


86-Two-av and 












and (TTavTuv 


freVTCDV 


86vTQ}V 






Infin. 


ffTrj-yai 


&e?-vcu 


80V-VCLI 






Part. 


cttcLs, aaa, av 


&eis, €?ca, iv 


8ovs, ovaa, 6v 








Gen. (TravTos 


Gen. bzvTos 


Gen. 86vtos 






Future. 


(TT7)-(TQ) 


frt)-<TW 


8&-o~<a 


Sella. 




Aorist I. 


e-<TT7](Ta, I 


e-frri-Ka 


e-So)-/ca 


e-5et|a 






[placed, 


Instead of these form.'', the 2d Aor. is 








used in the Dual, PI. Ind. and in the 










other Modes and Participials, § 173, 2. 






P 


erfect. 


e-(TT7j-/ca, 5 sto, 


Tc-3-et-xo ! Se-S«-/fa 


8e-8eixa 




P 


luperfect. 


e-<TTr)-K€iu and 


e-Te-&et-Keu' 


i-8e-8<&-Keu/ 


e-Se-Se/%eij/ 






d-(TT7)-K€lU 










Fut. Per/. 


e-(TTr)£c0 old Att. 


wanting. wanting. 


wanting. 




PAS 


Aor. I. 


e-a-ra-d-Tjj/ i-Te-&r}v s \ i-86-Str]v \ i-8eix-&VV 
mnds, e. g. airoaTw, eaSci, 8ia8u>, have the same accentuation as 


1 The compc 


the simples, e. g. cnroa-TUKn, e/c^Toj/, 8ia8a>fxev. 2 See § 172, Rem. 3. 3 In 


composition, TrapdcrTrj^i, TrapdcTa: a.Tr6crT7]&i, airStTTd, § 172, Rem. 5. 4 In 


composition, rrepi&es, evfres: airSSos, e/c5os; 7re/jfd-eTe, *k8ot€, §118, Rem. 1. 


6 See § 176, 3. 6 irtfrnv and re^cro/Mi instead of 4&4frriv and &efrfio~ofjicu, 



175.1 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fJLl. 



215 





MIDDLE. 




2TA- to place. 


0E- to pitf . 


AO- to #?z;e. 


AEIK- to sAom?. 




( i-GTa-fA7)v does 


6-&4-jnr}v 


4-d6-/J.7]U 






not occur, but 


e-&ou (from ed-etro) 


e-Sou (from eSocro) 






€-7TTa- J urji' 


e-i^e-TO 


e-So-TO 






6-77^0-^771/) 


4-&4-fj.e&ov 


i-§6-/j.€&ov 








e-&e-o-&ov 


<=-do-a&ov 


wanting. 






4-&4<r&7}i' 


4-d6-<T&7)V 








4-&4-/j.e&a 


i-86-/x€&a 








?-&e-cr&e 


e-So-crd-e 








6-^-6-VTO 


e-So-j/ro 






(o-tw-^ucu does not 


&U-IACU 7 


S6i-fj.ai 7 






occur, but irpiw- 


<&?7 


8<£ 






jxai, -rjy -rjTai, 


3-77-TOt 


Sw-rat 






etc.) 


3-r)-cr3-oz/ 
&7}-cr3-oi/ 

3-<£-j/Tat 


5cD-crS-ov 

5<£-(r3-€ 
bco-urai 






(aTat-jjirjv does not 


8roi-jx-r]v 8 


doi-fXTjy s 






occur, but irptai- 


3-o?-o 


8o?-o 






/X7]V, -aio -euro, 


3-o?-to 


SoI-to 






etc.) 


&oi-vto 


Soi-fAeS-ov 

8o7-aSoi/ 

dol-o-frqv 

8oi-fj.e&a 

Sot-crd-e 

867-vto 






( a-Ta-ao, or (ttw 


frov (from 3-eVo) 9 


5ov (from Soao) 9 






does not occur, 


be-o&w 


S6-(r&a> 






but Trpia-cro, or 


&4-CT&0V 


h6-cr&ov 






7rpi<tt) 


&4-a£n»i/ 
&4-cr&e 

&4-ff&w(ra.v and 
^4-a-^av 


ho-oSw 

So'-o-frcocrai' and 
86-(r&a)v 






( o-Ta-cr&ai ) Trpiacr. 


&4-CT&CU 


86-(T&ai 






( ard-fxeuos ) irpia- 


&4-fM€V0S, -7], -OV 


80-fJ.evos, -7], -ov 






Lievos 










(rr-q-ao/xai 


&7]-<T0/ACU 


8c6-0'0 / UOl 


Seii-oficu 




i-ar7]-crd/j.r]u 


(i-^7}-Kd-/J.T]u) 

Instead of these forms, 


(i-Soo-Kd-fir]!/) 
the second Aor. Mid. is 


e-8et|d^i77V 






used by the Attic write 


rs, § 173, 2. 






e-crTd- / uai,173.R.2. 


r4- & e i -/xai 


84-do-ua.L 


Se-Seiy-uat 
e-Se-Sety-^T}?' 




t-o-ra-fxrjv, § 173, 


e-T e- 3- e i -fj.T)i/ 


i-de-86-/j.r)v 




Rem. 2. 










e-(TT7;£o;uai, 10 


wanting. 


wanting. 


wanting. 


SIVE. 




i i'ui. I. | crra-Mio-of, 


LCU 1 T€-&7I(T0/Xai 6 


do-SrlicroiAai | Seix-d^croyucu 


§ 21, 2. 7 Also in 


composition, eVd-<£,i 


lat, -77, -tjtgu, etc., a7To5-(S,ua(, -77, -7/Tat, 


etc., e/cS<2,ucu, -!p, -6L 


rai, etc., a7ro5co/.iai, 


-<S, -«tcu, etc. 8 See § 176, 2. 9 In 


composition, Kard^r 


9u, air6&ov ; TrepiSov, 


airSdov] KaTd§ecr&e, irepl8o(T&e; ei/^ecr- 


3-e, irpSdooSre ; but « 


v&ov, elsSrov : Trpodox 


;, eVSoil, § 1 1 8, Rem. 1 . 10 § 1 54, 6, and 


$ 173, Eem. 2. 







216 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -fJLl. [$$ 176, 177. 



§ 176. Remarks on the Paradigms 



1. The verbs diva/Mai, to be able; iiriarafiai, to know, and xp^^^h to hang, 
have a different accentuation from "o-Ta/xai, in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., 
namely, Subj. hvvcojxai, iTricrru/xai, -ri, -tjtcu, -7)(t&ou, -7)cr&e, -oovrai ; Opt. Swai/jLtiv, 
£iri<jTaifA7)v, -aio, -euro, -cuvSov, -aiabe, -cuvto; so also 6i>a(/j.r)v, -aio, -euro (§ 177, 
4), and iirptd/xTju (§ 179, 6). 

2. The forms of the Opt. Mid. Impf. and second Aor. in -oi, viz. TiSoijA-nv, 
^o(/jL7]y, were preferred to those in -ei, viz. Ti&ei[x-r)v, -eto, -elro, etc., Sei/j.r)v, -e?o, 
-zito, etc. In compounds, the accent remains as in simples ; thus, £i/&oi/j.T)i/ 
(£i>&du.7)v), ivfrolo (eV&e?o), etc. ; so also in compounds of doifi-nv, e. g. 8iaSoi/j.7]u f 
SiadoTo, etc. 

3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup. : e-ffra-rov, 'i-o-Ta-jxev, 
e-ara-re, e-0Td-(n(j/), see § 193. 

4. Verbs in -vfii, as has been seen, form the Subj. and Opt. like verbs in -vco. 
Still, there are some examples where these modes follow the analogy of verbs 
in -jut.: ottos /at] Siaa-KeSdvvvrai (instead of -u7?tcu), PL Phaedon. 77, b. \\zi>xon6 
re recti ireyvvro (from -vlto, instead of -ioiro), Ibid. 118, a. 

5. In the later writers, e. g. Polybius, a Perf. and Plup. are found with the 
Trans, meaning, / have placed, namely, ecrd/ca, karaKeiv. 

Summary of Verbs in -pi. 

1. Verbs in -fj.i which annex the Personal-endings immediately 
to the Stem-vowel. 

$ 177. (a) Verbs in -a (l-aT-q-^i; 2TA-): 
1. KL-xpr)-fJu, to lend, to bestow (XPA-), Inf. Ki^pavai, Fut. xptf™, 
Aor. exprjaa. Mid. to borrow, Fut. xPW°f^ aL ' (Aor. l^PW^W in 
this sense is avoided by the Attic writers.) To the same stem 
belong : — 

2. xp^i & zs necessary, oportet (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. xpf), Inf- XPW<U> 
Part, (to) xp^ v (usually only Nom. and Ace); Impf. ixpw, or xpw (with 
irregular accent), Opt. xP e ' L7 l (from XPE-) ; Fut. xpy°~ raL * n Soph, (but not 
XPVO-ei). 

Inf. x?t\ v -> O.TTOXPW, in Eurip., by contraction from XP°- €IV - 

3. airSxpv, it suffices, sufficit; the following also are formed regularly from 
XPAil: d7roxp£<n(z/), Inf- airoxpw] Part, cnroxpws, -Sxra, -up ; Impf. airexpr) ; Put. 
cbroxpV 6 ' 5 Aor. airexpriar^v), etc. Mid. airoxpco/J-ai, to abuse, abutor, or consumo, 
Inf. airoxpr}o~&ai, is inflected like xp^op-^h § 1 29 > Pern. 2. 

4. dvLvrj/xt (with Attic reduplication instead of 6v6vt]/xl), to ben- 
efit, ('ONA-) Inf. ovwavai; Impf. Act. wanting, dxpiXow being 
used for it ; Fut. ovrja-oi ; Aor. wvrja-a, Inf. oi^o-ai (for it ovtjvoli, like 
a-Trjvat, in PL Up. 600, d.). Mid. SvLva/xai, to get benefit, be bene- 
fitted, Fut. ovrjaofxat ; Aor. wwj/iijv (civa/x^v later, but also in Eur. 
cWcr#e), -770-0, -Tiro, etc., Imp. ovrjvo, Part. oVry/xei/os (Horn.), Opt. 
6; o.ifjirjv, -aio, -euro ($ 176, 1), Inf. 6Vacr$ai ; Aor. Pass. wv-^S-qv rarer 



§ 178.] 



SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -fU. 217 

The remaining forms are supplied by 



instead of wv-qfJirjv. 
uxpeXuv. 

5. TTL-fj.-7rX7]-ixL, to fill, (1TAA-) Inf. 7ri/x7rAarai ; Impf. hri[vnXr\v ; 
Fut. irXrj(T(ji ; Perf. iri-TrX-qKa ; Aor. htXy]<ja. ; Mid. to fill for one's 
self, 7Tt/A7rAa^,ai, Inf. 7ri/A7rAacr#ai ; Impf. €7rLfX7rXdfxr]v ; Aor. brXrjcra.- 
fjcrjv; Fut. TrXrja-ofxai; Perf Mid. or Pass. 7re7rA77o-/xai ; Aor. Pass. 
€7rXrj<T$y]v (j 131); Fut. Pass. TrA^o-^o-o/mt ($ 131); second Aor. 
iTrXrjfjLrjv, Poet. Verb. Adj. 7tX^o-t€os. 

The fx in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted 
in composition, when /j. precedes the reduplication, e. g. ifxiriir\afj.ai, hut ivein/x- 
Tr\dfj.r]v. Contrary to this rule, however, forms with and without jm are both 
used by the poets, according to the necessities of the verse. 

6. 7TLix7rprjjjLL, to burn, Trans., in all respects like viinrk-qiu : 717377- 
<to), hrprja-a, ire7rpr]Ka, Tri7rpy]cr}xai, l-Trp-qcr^v, TrprjoSycroixaL, Tre7rprj(rofJLCU. 

7. TAH-MI, to endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting (instead of 
them v-n-op.ei/o), avi^ofxaC) ; Aor. erXrjv, (tAw,) rXairjV, rXrjSc, rAas 
(rXaaa) ; Fut. rA^o-o/xat; Perf. rirXyjKa. Verbal Adj. tXyjtos. (In 
Attic prose this verb is rare.) 

8. <f>r]-fxi, to say (stem <I?A-), has the following formation: — 

§ 178. 



Present. ACTIVE. Imperfect. 


Indi- 
cative 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


<pVfii l 

(pTJS 

<pr)(ri{v) 

(parou 

<pa.T6v 

cpa/xeu 

(pari 

(paai{v) 


Indi- 
cative 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P.I. 

2. 

3. 


%.<pT)V 

eipTjs, usually e^Tjo-^a 

%(pr, [(§116,2). 

e(pa.Tov 

i(pa.T7)v 

<E(pa/j.ev 

e(pare 

%<pa<xav 


Subj. 
Imp. 

Inf. 
Part. 


<pa>, <pf}s, (prj, (prjrov, (pwfx^v, 

(pT)T€, <pSi<Ti(v) 
(pa&i, or (pa&i (o-u/Afpa&i), (parco, 

(parov, (partov, (pare, (paTw- 

o~av and (pai/rav 
(pauat 
(<pds, (pacra, (pdv 

G. (pdvros, (pdarjs) 


Opt. 


<pair)v, (pairjs, (pair], (pair}Tou 
and (paiTov, (patr)T7]v and 
(patr-ny, (palri/JLev and (pa?- 
fxeu, (pairjre and (pa?T€, (paTev 


Fut. 
Aor. 


(pT)<T(ti 

i(py\(ra. 


MIDDLE. 


Perf. Ir 
Frag 

687,] 


np. Tre^ao-S-o? (PI. Tim. 72, d.), let it be said. Impf. Ind. ecpavro, Lys. 
m. 3. [X. Cy. 6. 1, 21, is a false reading] ; Inf. <pda&ai, Aesch. Pers. 
n chorus. Part, (pd^vos (rare), affirming. 

Verbal adjective, (par6s, (parios. 



1 In composition : avr[<pr\\x.i, <rv(j.(pr}[ju, aprl(pr]ai{u), <Tvfj.(p7](n{v) 1 etc., but avri- 
<pr)s (accent on ultimate), <Tv/j.^r)s, and Subj. avTHpw, hvrupfjs, etc. 

19 



218 DEPONENTS BELONGING TO VERBS IN -/At. [$ 179. 

Eemakk 1. In the second person (prjs, both the accentuation and the Iota 
subscript are contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the 
Pres. Ind. (except <pris), see § 33, a. 

Eem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to say in general, (b) to affirm, 
(aio) to assert, to assure, etc. The Fut. (pt'iarca, and Aor. %<pT}<ra, have only the 
last signification. The Part. <pds is not used in Attic prose ; still, ^ PI. Ale. 2, 
139, C. (pdures. 

Rem. 3. "With <prjfx.l the verb rj/xi, inquam, may be compared, which, like 
inquam, is used in the spirited repetition of what had been said ; the imperfect 
jjv, % is used in the phrases %v $ iy<a, said I, % S 1 '6s, said he, to describe a con- 
versation. 



$ 179. The following Deponents also belong here. 

1 . ayap.ai, to wonder, Impf. rrydpLrjv ; Aor. rrydoSrjv (rj-yao-dpiyjv, 
Epic and Dem. 18, 204) ; Fut. aydaropuu. Verbal Adj. dyaoros. 

2. Svvafiai, to be able, second Pers. Swao-ai [Svvrj from the Ion. 
Sweat, tragic and later, $ 172, 2, (a)], Subj. Svvoifiat ($ 176, 1), Imp. 
Swacro, Inf. 8vva<r$ai, Part. Svvdp.evos ; Impf. khvvdpvqv and rjSvvdfiTjv, 
second Pers. eoww (not iSvvaao, $ 172, 2), Opt. SwalpL-qv, Svvaio 
(§ 176, 1) ; Fut. Svvrjaofxai ; Aor. eSruwrjShqy, r]8vvr)$r}v and ZSvvdoSrjv 
(not rj&w&o-Srjv), the last Ion. and in Xen. (Aug., $ 120, Rem. 
1) ; Perf. Seow^/xac. Verbal Adj. Swaro's, a&Ze and possible. 

3. e7rto-ra/x,at (like tcn-axiai), to knoiv, (properly, to stowd w^ow 
something, to be distinguished from l^ia-rajxai), second Pers. 
e7r6arao-at (cTricrra seldom and only Poet.), Subj. eVio-rto/xai (II 176, 
1), Imp. c7rto-rw [seldom and only in the poets and later writers, 
brurrcuro, § 172, 2 (b)] ; Impf. ^7rto-Ta/x77V, ypricma [seldom and 
only in the poets and later writers, ^Tuo-rao-o, $ 172, 2 (b)], Opt. 
€7ncrTaL/xrjV, hria-raio ($ 176, 1) ; Fut. hr KTTiqo-o pat ; Aor. r)7ricrTr)Sr)v, 
(Aug., § 126, 3.) Verbal Adj. eWr^To's. 

4. epa/xai, to Zove (in the Pres. and Impf. only poetic, in prose 
cpdo) is used instead of it) ; Aor. rjpdaSrjv, I loved; Fut. ipao-Srj- 
crofAaL, I shall love. [Pass, cow/mi (from ipdoi), I shall be loved.] 
Verbal Adj. ipacrros. 

5. Kpifxap:aL, to hang, be suspended, 2^>e?ideo, Subj. Koettw/mt 
($ 176, 1), Part. Kpep.dp.evos ; Impf. eKpep^dpuqv, Opt. KpepLatpvqv, -aio, 
-airo ($ 176, 1), (Arist. Vesp. 298, Koe/xoio-^e, comp. /xapva/^at, 
$ 230, and pepyolpxpr, $ 154, 8); Aor. iKpefxdo-Snv ; Fut, Pass 



♦ 180.] 



VERBS IN -/U, 



219 



KpefjLaarSrjcroiJLai, I shall be hung ; Fut. Mid. Kpefjitfcrofxai, pendebo, 
I shall hang. 

6. Trpiaadcu, to buy, iirpiafjLrjv, second Pers. k7rpioi (an Aor. Mid., 
and found only in this tense, which the Attic writers employ 
instead of the Aor. of o»veo/xai, viz. ivivrja-dfxrjv, which is not used 
by them, § 122, 4), Subj. irpuayucu. (§ 176, 1) ; Opt. 7rpiatp.rjv 3 -aio, 
-euro ($ 176, 1); Imp. 777300; Part. Trpiap&vos. 



$ 180. (b) Verbs in -c (rt-^rj-fxi, ©E-). 

"I-rj- fu (stem C E-), to send. Many forms of this verb are found 
only in composition. 



ACTIVE, 



Pres. 



Impf. 



Perf. 
Aor. II. 



Ind. 'iri/j.1, 'Irjs, 'lr)o'i(u) ; lerov] 'le/j.ev, '/ere, lao~i(u) [U7<ri(u)]', 

Subj. «5, iijs, Irj] irJTOi/j lu/xey, lyre, iwart(v) ; a<pia>, acpirjs, acpir}, 

etc. 
Imp. Yet, tiroo, etc. — Inf. Uvai. — Part, lets, UTcra, Uv. 



Ind. 'low (from 'IEH), acpiow (rarer i}(piow, rare W, irpoUiv, ycpieiv), 
'lets, 'let, &</>tet (rarer 7)<£iet) ; '/e7w, terqi'; '/e^ey, 5feTe, U<rav, 
eupUarav (rarer ycpUarav). 

Opt. Uit\V (second Pers. PI. a<j>ioire, Plat.; third Pers. PI. cupioiev, 
X. H. 6. 4, 3). 



ef/ca. — Plup e'liceiv. — Fut. yaa. — Aor. I. t\ko. (§ 173, 2). 

Ind. Sing, is supplied by Aor. I. (§ 173, 2) ; Dual eTrov, acpeirou, 

c'tryv ; Plur. eT/xev, Ka^e?fxeu, etre, ai/elre, %ffav, commonly 

efo~av, a<\>eio~av. 
Subj. <b, ys, acpto, acprjs, etc. 
Opt. e'lrjv, e'lrjs, e'lr) ; elrov, a<pe?Tov, e'lrijv ; eifiev, acpeifiev, efre, a^>e?- 

T6, efej/, cupeiev. 
Imp. es, &£es, eVa) ; '4tov, &(perov, %ru>v\ ere, &<pere, ercoo-av and ?jtw, 
Inf. elVai, a(p€ivai. — P. efo, etaa, etcetera, eV, d^>eV, Gen. euros, e'lorys, 

ad>4vTos. 



Remark 1. On the Aug. of a<f>i7j/«, see § 126, 3. 

Rem. 2. The form of the Impf. V is very doubtful, and the forms 'lys, %t\ 
are very rare. The form Uiv has the ending of the Plup., like the Impf. of el/xt, 
to go ; it is Att. and Ion., a secondary form of 'low. 



220 



VERBS IN -fXl. 



P 181. 



MIDDLE, 



Pres. 



Impf. 



Aor. II. 



In d. "e/xai, 'leacu, "erai, etc. — Subj. lu/xai, a^iwfxai, ifj, acpirj, etc. 
Imp. 'Ucro, or lov. — Inf. ieo~&at. — Part. 14/u.evos, -77, -ov. 



U/j.r}v, "ecro, etc. — Opt. leiy.r)v, Att. ioifrqv, lo?o, a(pio?o, etc. 



Ind. tifx-qv Subj. S>fj.ai, acpw/iai, y, acpij, tjtcu, acprJTcu 

efcro, a0e?<ro Opt. Trpool/xriv, -o7o, -olro, -oifxe&a, -o?a&e, 

etro, cuftetTO -olvro (irpoeiTO, irpoei<r&e, irpoeTuro 

e'l/xeha, etc. are rarer forms) 

Imp. ov (a<pov, Trpoov), second Pers. PI. 
e<rd-e (a<p€cr&€, irp6e<r&z), eofta, etc.). 
Inf. eVd-cw. — Part, efitvos, -rj, -ov. 



Perf. etfuxi, /ie3-eT/iai ; Inf. efafrai, /xe&elcr&cu. — Plup. e"fX7)v, eto-o, cupeio~o, etc. 
— Put. 1/jirofuu. — Aor. I. 7]Kdfir]v (rare, § 173, 2). 



PASSIVE. 



A. I. efor}v, P. e&rjucu, etc. — Put. k&T)o~ojiai. — Verb. Adj.rnfc, kreos (&(peros). 



Rem. 3. Besides the two verbs ri^rj/xi and 'itj/jll, only the following dialectic 
verbs belong here, viz., 'AH-MI, AI-AH-MI (AE), (though 8i5ea<ri{v), from the 
last is found in X.) ; Sifyfjuu and AIH-MI. 



§ 181. (c) Verbs in -1, only et/xt ('I), to go. 

Preliminary Remark. The verbs eTfxi, to go, and elfil, to be, are pre- 
sented together (though the last, on account of its stem 'E2, does not belong 
here), in order to exhibit to the eye the agreement and disagreement of the two 
verbs in their formation. 





PRESENT. 


Ind. S. 1. 


elfii, to be 


Subj. & 


Ind.l. 


el/j.L, to go 


Subj. too 


2. 


el 


V s 


2. 


el 


Xrjs 


3. 


i<rri{v) 


V 


3. 


e7<rt(v) 


*V 


D. 2. 


icrrSv 


r)rov 


D.2. 


Xtov 


Kt\tov 


3. 


io~r6v 


%TOV 


3. 


Xtov 


%7)T0V 


P. 1. 


iafiev 


S/uev 


P. 1. 


Xjxsv 


Xcofiev 


2. 


6(TT€ 


t)t€ 


2. 


Ire 


tyre 


3. 


elo~i{v) 


3)Gl{v) 


3. 


%a(Ti{v) 


Xwo-i(v) 


Imp. S. 2. 


fo&i 


Inf. elvat 


Imp. 


X&i, Trp6s&i 


Inf. levcu 


3. 


earca 






(seld. irp6sei) 




D. 2. 


ecrov 


Part. &v, ovcra, 


3. 


Xrca 


Part. ld>v, lov- 


3. 


earitsu 


Up 


D.2. 


Xtov, irp6sirov 


aa, I6v 


P. 2. 


e<TT€ 


G. OVTOS, OVfft)S 


3. 


Xtwv 


Gen. Uvtos, 


3. 


eo~Ta>ffav 


(irapdov, ivapov- 


P. 2. 


i're, irposire 


lovo-ris. 




(rare earuv; 


o~a, Tvap6v, 


3. 


Xroiffav, or 


(irapiwv, irapi- 




tivTwv, Plat. 


G. irap6vTOs) 




Iovtwv (Xtcov 


ovcra, rrapiSv, 




Legg.879,b.) 






Aesch.E.32.) 


G. irapiSvTos). 



§ 181.] 



VERBS IN 



■jJLL. 



221 



IMPERFECT. 


Ind. 


Opt. 


Ind. 


Opt. 


S.l. 


?V, I was 


&nv 


S. 1. 


ijeiv or 77a, / went 


Xoifii or 


2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 
Fut. 1 


7>£a (§ 116, 2) 
%v (from ^e-j/) 

%(TTOV (fjrov) 

fj(TT7}v (^rrjv) 

yre (t^otc) 

■t)<rav 

ao/xai, I shall be, 
— Part. i(r6jx^vos 


€%T]s 2. rjeis and ifeicr&a Yois 
eft? 3. ??€i foi 
efyTOV D. 2. rjeiTov, us'ly tJtoj/ tonov 
etfrriv 3. yelrriv, " 77x771/ loir-nv 
efyuev (seldom eT^ej/) P. 1. petyuej/, " 77/xei/ toifxev 
ei7jTe(seld.poet. e?Te) 2. fjeire, " 77T6 fcnre 
e^Tjo'aJ' and efey 3. Tfeo-af (tJo-cw poet.) fatey 
etrp, or ecrei, earai, etc. — Opt. k<Toi\xi\v. — Inf. eVecd-at. 
— Verbal Adj. iareov, avveareov. 


Middle Form : Pres. Ufiai, tecrai or fy, Urai, etc., Imp. iecro, Inf. feo&ai, 
Part. Ufxevos; the Impf. ie/tu)?, fetro, etc., signifying to hasten, ought 
probably to be written with the rough breathing, which is strongly 
confirmed by the manuscripts, and to be referred to %u. — Verbal Adj. 
IrSsy Iriov, rarer Iti)t4ov. 



Remark 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of el/il, to be (except the second 
Pers. d), see § 33 (a). In compounds, the accent is on the preposition, as far back 
as the general rules of accentuation permit, e. g. wdpeifu, irdpci, trdpe(TTi(u), etc. 
Imp. irdpiafri, tvviaSi ; but trapr\v on account of the temporal augment, Trapea-rai 
on account of the omission of e (irapeVeTcu), irapsivai like infinitives with the 
ending -vat, 7rap<2, -fjs, -fj, etc., 7ra/>eiYe, irapelev, on account of the contraction ; 
the accentuation of the Part, in compound words should be particularly noted, 
e. g. irapdv, irapovcra, irap6v y Gen. irap6i/TOS (so also irapi&p, Gen. irapiouros). 

Rem. 2. The compounds of etfxi, to go, follow the same rules as those of 
elfii, to be ; hence several forms of these two verbs are the same in compounds, 
e. g. ivdpeifjLi, irdpei, and irdpei(ri(v) (the last being third Pers. Sing, of etfii and 
third Pers. PL of elfil) ; but Inf. irapiivai, Part, irapubv. 

Rem. 3. The form e?e v, esto, be it so ! good! shortened from eft? and strength- 
ened by a v, must be distinguished from the shortened form ehv instead of 
zi-naav of the third Pers. PL Opt. Impf. — A secondary form, yet critically to be 
rejected, of the third Pers. Imp. ijrea instead of e<TTa>, is found once in PL Rp. 
361, c, with the varying reading eara. — The form of the first Pers. Impf. is 
often 7^, among the Attic poets, and sometimes also in Plato ; the form jj/j.r)v is 
rare (Lys. 7, 34, X. Cy. 6. 1, 9). — The form of the second Pers. Impf. 9j s is 
found frequently in the later writers, and rarely in lyric passages of the Attic 
poets. — The Dual forms with <r are preferred to those without <r ; on the con- 
trary, TjVe is preferred to fare (Aristoph.). 

Rem. 4. The form of the third Pers. Sing. Impf. few instead of fja, from 
el/xL, sometimes occurs, even before consonants, Ar. Plut. 696. irposrjeiv (in 
Senarius) ; PL Crit. p. 114, d. (in the best MSS.) ; t)W, PL Crit. 117, e.' (in the 
best MSS.) ;.Trporjeiv, PL Tim. 43, 6 ; ainjeiv, ib. 60, 'c ; avfi&v, ib. 76, b. 

Rem. 5. The Ind. Pres. of eTvu, to go, has regularly in the Attic prose- 
writers the meaning of the Fut. I shall or will go or come ; hence the Pres. is 
supplied by epxoy.ai (§ 167, 2) ; the Inf. and Part, have likewise a Pres. and 
Fut. meaning. 



19* 



222 



VERBS IN -/U. 



[$ 182. 



II. Verbs in -fti which annex the Syllable vvv or vv to the 
Stem-vowel and append to this the Personal-endings. 

$ 182. Formation of the Tenses of Verbs ivhose Stem 
ends with a, e, o, or with a Consonant. 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends with a, 6, or o. 



Voice. Tenses. 


a. Stem in o. 


b. Stem in e. 


c. Stem in o («). 


Act. 


Pres. 


(TKedd-PVV-fU l 


K0p4-VVV-fXl l 


arpdo-vyv-fii l 




Impf. 


i-<jK&a-vvv-v l 


i-Kope-vvv-v l 


i-CTTpto-VVV-V i 




Perf. 


e-CKe'Sd-Ko 


K€-Kope-Ka 


e-crT/jw-Ka 




Plup. 


i-<TKe?)a-Ktiv 


i-Ke-Kope-Keiv 


i-arpd-Ketu 




Fut. 


(TKcda-ffw 
Att. oTeeScS, -as, -a 


Att. KopWy -els, -eT 


arpd-aca 




Aor. 


e-tr/ceSa-cra 


i-i<6pe-<Ta 


e-crrpw-ca 


Mid. 


Pres. 


(TKeSd-vtnJ-fiai 


Kopi-vvv-jxai 


CTp(0-VVV-fACU 




Impf. 


i-aKeSa-vvv-fJLTiv 


£-KOp€-VVV-fX7]V 


i-a-Tpw-t/vv-firjv 




Perf. 


£-(nc4da-<r-/xai 


Ke-K6p*-<r-fJUU 


6-crTp«-juai 




Plup. 


4-ffKedd-a-fj.Tjj/ 


e-Ke-Kop4-c-fiT)v 


i-arpu-jjuiv 




Fut. 




Kope-tr-o/Aai 






Aor. 




i-Kope-<r-d/A7)V 






F. Pf. 

Aor. 




Ke-Kope-cr-o/jLai, 




Pass. 


i-ffKeSd-ff-frriv 


i-Kop4-(r-&r}v 


4-<TTpd>-frr\v 




Fut. 


arK€5a-<r-frfi<ro/Aat 


KopG-a-frqcroiAai 


o-Tpw-frfiffOfxai 


Verbal Adj. 


ff/ceSo-cr-Tos 


Kope-<r-T6s 


<TTpw-r6s 




(T/ceSa-tr-Teos 


Kope-a-reos (rrpw-reos. 
- Kope-vyvw, i-Kopi-vvvov — GTpw-vvvWy i- 


1 And (TueSa 


■vvvco, 4(TKe5d-ypvou — 


crpa-vvvov (v a 


I ways short). 







B. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant. 



Pres. 


oh-\v-fii, x perdo, | 6\-\v-/j.cu, pereo, 


6/A-VV-/XL l 


6fi-vi>-/j.ai 


Impf. 


&A-\v-v l 1 w\-Av-/xr)v 


&/J.-VV-V l 


u}yrvv-p.r\v 


Perf. I. 


o\-w\€-/co ('OAEH), perdidi, 


dfi-Cti/AO-Ka 


ofi-cofio-fxai 




§ 124, 2. 


fOMon) 




Perf. II. 


6\-w\-a, perii, 


§ 124, 2. 




Plup. I. 


6\-a>\e-Kciu, perdideram, 


o/jL-ofiS-Keiv 


bfi-afiS-firju 


Plup. H. 


6\-a>\-€iv, perieram, 






Fut. 


6\-S>, -e?s, -ei 1 o\-ovfiai, -et 


ofx-ov/xai, -et 




Aor. I. 


fiJ\e-o-o 1 A. II. u>\-6(xt)V 


&IAO-<ra 


wixo-ffdfir\u 






A. I. P. Wfltff-r 


brjv (et w/xS^y) 






F. I. P. o,uo-cr-d 
buyv-Qv (always 


j}<roficu. 


i 


And 6\\i-o), &XXv-op — o/xj/u-o), i 



Remark. y O\A0^t comes by assimilation from 6\-pv/xi (§ 18, Rem.). For an 
example of a stem-ending with a mute, see SeiKuvfjn above, under the para- 
digms (§ 175). The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of 6/x.vv/xi is ofiwuocr/xevos. The 
remaining forms of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the <r among the Attic 
writers, e. g. dixu/xoTai, d/j.<t>[xoTo. 



$ 183.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -fJLL. 223 

Summary of the Verbs belonging here. 

The Stem ends, 
A. In a Vowel and assumes -vpv. 

$ 183. (a) Verbs whose Stem ends in a. 

1. Kzpa-wv-fxi (poetic secondary form Kipvda), Kipvrjpu,; Epic and 
poet. Kepaoi), to mix, Flit. Kepacrui, Att. K€pu> ; Aor. eKepaxra; Perf. 
K€Kp5.Ka ; Mid. to mix for one's self, Aor. eKe/oacra/x^v ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. KeKpa/jiai (KCKepacryaat, Aimer. 29, 13 ; Inf. KeKepaaScu, Luc. 
Dial. Meretr. 4, 4) ; Aor. Pass. eKpdSrjv, Att also ZKtpdaSrjv 
(Metathesis, $ 156, Rem.). 

2. Kpcjxd-vvv-jxi, to hang, Flit. Kpejxaa-o), Att. Kpe^to ; Aor. ii<p£fxa- 
o-a ; Mid. or Pass. Koe/xdVvtyxai, to /i£m<>- one's se££ or be hung (but 
Kpifxaixai, to Jiang, § 179, 5) ; (Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ke/cpe/xa/^at in 
later writers;) Fut. Pass. Kpep.aa3r}(Top.ai; Aor. iKpepLaaS-qv, J was 
hung, or I hung. 

3. 7rcra-wv-/xt, to spread out, to open, Fut. 7reracroj, Att. 7r€Ta); 
Aor. £7rerao-a (Perf. Act. 7rc7r€raKa, Diod.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
7re7rraju.at ($ 155, 2) (7re7reTao7*.ai, non- Attic and Luc.) ; Aor. Pass. 

€7TCTaO-^V. 

4. o-K€Sa-wv-/xi, to scatter, Fut. o-KeSao-co, Att. crKeSw ; Aor. ecnce- 
8eo-a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. io-KeSao-piai ; Aor. Pass. io-KtSdo-Srjv. 

$ 184. (b) Feros whose Stem ends in e. 

Preliminary Remark. The verbs evvv/u, <rj3eVpt;ji«, and also ^w/tt 
(§ 186), do not properly belong here, since their stem originally ended in <r, *E2- 
(comp. ves-tire), 2BE2- (comp. &rj8e<r-ros), Z&t- (comp. faff-T-fip, (wir-rpov, (dxr- 
rrjs, (w<t-t6s} ; but by the omission of the a - , they become analogous to verbs in 
-6 and -o. 

1. e-wv-pu, to clothe, in prose apL<picwvpu, Impf. apLcptivvvv with- 
out Aug. ; Fut. apcpiecru), Att. dfxcpiC) ; Aor. r)p,<pU<ra ; Perf. Act. 
wanting ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, •qpafufrpuu, rnjupie<rai, vj/jLtpUarai, etc., 
Inf. f)p.cpLi(T$aL ; Fut. Mid. d/x^ieo-o/xat. (Aug. $$ 126, 3. and 230.) 
The vowel of the Prep, is not elided in the Common language, 
hence also iTnioao-Sai, X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. 

2. {.e-wv-pa, to boil, Trans., Fut. £eo-a> ; Aor. e£ecra ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. e£eo-/Aca; Aor. Pass. i£eo$rp/. — (£eu>, on the contrary, is 
usually intransitive}. 



224 SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN fJLL. [§$ 185-187. 

3. Kopi-vvv-pu, to satiate, Fut. Kopicro), Att. KopQ> ; Aor. eKopecra ; 
Aor. Mid. lKopa<jdpx)v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKopea-fxai ; Aor. Pass. 

4. crfie-wv-fxi, to extinguish, Fut. <rf$i<r<o ; first Aor. eafieo-a, I 
extinguished; second Aor. ecr/fyv, J ceased to burn; Perf. Icr/fyKa, 
I have ceased to burn. — Mid. a/3iwvp,at, to cease to burn, intrans. 
Fut. o-^o-o/xat ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, eafieapLcu ; Aor. Pass. eo-/3eo-- 
#771/; Fut. Pass. a/Sea^rjaofxai. No other verb in -vu/xt has a 
second Aor. Act (§ 191, 2). 

5. o-Topi-wv-fXL, to spread out (shortened form aropvvpu, Poet, 
and X. Cy. 8. 8, 16), Fut. a-ropicro), Att. crropco; Aor. iaropco-a; 
Mid. to spread out for one's self. The other tenses are formed 
from o-Tpoivvvfxi ; iarpoicrdp.r]V ; ecrrpoipLac, iarpio^Tqv, OTparros (non- 
Att. eo-ropecr/Aat, io-TopeoSTjv, and io-ToprjSrjv) . See § 182. 

§ 185. (c) FerSs ivhose Stem ends in i. 

Ti-vvv-fxi (TI-), to pay, to expiate, Mid. ri-vuv-fiat, to get pay, to punish, to avenge, 
secondary Epic form of riva and rlvofuu. — In Attic poetry, the Mid. is often 
found, and with one v, rivvpai. 

§ 186. (d) Verbs in o, ivith the o lengthened into w. 

1. ^w-wv-pu, to gird, Fut. £wo-oo; Perf. 'd&Ka, Paus. ; Aor. egucra; 
Mid. to gird one's self, Aor. Mid. e^wo-a/x?^ ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
Ifrxr/Aai 131). 

2. pw-vvv-pii, to strengthen, Fut. pcoo-w; Aor. eppuxra; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. eppaipLOLt, Imp. tppaxro, vale, fareivell, Inf. ippcooS-ac ; Aor. 
Pass. ipp<x)cr<§7]v ($ 131) ; Fut. Pass, pooo-^o-o/zai. 

3. arpw-vvv-ixL ($ 182), to spread out, Fut. ar/xoo-co; Aor. eo-rpco- 
<ra, etc. See crTopeuvv-pa ($ 184, 5). 

4. xp(6-wi3-/xt, to co/or, Fut. xpwo-w ; Aor. e^owo-a ; Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. K9(pwcr/>tat ; Aor. Pass, i^pdxr^yjv. 

B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a Consonant and assumes -*/u. 

§ 187. (a) In a Mute. 

1. ay-vv-pcL, to break, Fut. a£o>; Aor. ea£a, Inf. a£at (Part. Lys. 

100, 5. Karediavres with the Aug.) ; second Perf. ectya, / am 

broken ; Mid. to 0mz& /or one's se^ Aor. la.&pfqv ; Aor. Pass, 
cayvyv (Aug., § 122, 4). 






$ 187.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -flL. 225 

2. SetK-vv'fja, see $ 175. 

3. etpy-vv-fju (or et/oyto), to shut in, Fut. etp£w; Aor. eTp£a, Inf. 
eXp£<u, Part. Ip&s (PL Polit. 285, b.), TrcpUpiavres (Th. 5, 11), 
£vv£p£avros (PI. Rp. 5. 461, b), Subj. /ca^eip^s (with the variation 
KaSipiys), PI. Gorg. 461, d; Aor. Pass, ctp^ryv; Perf. upyp.au 
(But etpyoy, eip£a>, eTp^a, etpxSyv, to shut out, etc.) 

4. £evy-n5-/u, to _;« together, Fut. £eu£w ; Aor. €£ev£a ; Mid. to 
join to or for one's self, Fut. £eu£o/*ai ; Aor. e^ei^a/^v ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass e£e/xypu; Aor. Pass. £t,€vx^V v » an( i more frequently 
Ztyyrjv. 

5. pLcy-vv-pu, to mix (/xfcryco, secondary form), Fut. //.i£a>; Aor. 
e/xl^a, /xt^at; Perf. /xe/xlxa (Polyb.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, fiipuyfuu, 
/xe/xt^at ; Aor. Pass. ip,L^rjv } and ipXyrjv ; Fut. Pass. pu)ftr}(rop.<u ; 
Fut. Perf. ju,€/u'£o/x.<h. 

6. oly-vv-p.i, usually as a compound : (The Attic use of the 
form otyvvp.1 is not certain) avoiyvvpu, Siocyvvpa (but instead, 
di/otyco, 8to4yu>, are more frequently used in the Pres. and dveuyov 
always in the Impf), to open, Fut. dvoi^oi ; Aor. avtwia, dvoi$at (in 
X. Hell, rjvotyov, rjvoi^a, signifying to put to sea, to weigh anchor) ; 
first Perf. dv£ux a > I have opened; second Perf. dve'wya, I stand 
open, instead of which Att. dvewy/^at; Impf. Mid. dveuyopvqv ; Aor. 
Pass, aveyxfyv) oivoix^rjvat. (Aug. § 122, 6.) Verb. Adj. ouolktIos. 

7. 6p.6py-vv-p.i, to wipe off, Fut. 6p,6p£(o; Aor. wpoptja; Mid. to 
wipe off from one's self; Fut. 6p,6p£opaL', Aor. &p.op£dpvqv ; Aor. 
Pass. (bpLopxSrjv. 

8. irrjy-vv-pu, to fix, fasten, freeze, Fut. tt^w; Aor. em^a; first 
Perf. Trhr-qxa, I have fastened ; second Perf. 7r£7rrrya, I standfast, 
am frozen ; Mid. 7r7Jyi/fyiai, J sta'c& yas£ ; Perf. Tr£irrryp,ai, I stand 
fast ; Aor. Pass. htdyt]v (more seldom l-n-rix^w) > second Fut. 
Pass. Trayrjcrofiai. Verbal Adj. TrrjKros. 

9. prjy-vv-p:L, to rend, Fut. prjiu>; Aor. Zpprjia; second Perf. 
t^pwya, Jaw rew£ (§ 140, Rem. 3); Aor. Mid. kpp-q&pvqv ; Aor. 
Pass, ippayrjv (Ipprjx^W rare) ; second Fut. pdyrjcrofLai. 

10. <j>pay-vv-pu (commonly <f>pda-a-oi, cfipdrrui, $ 143, 1), to break, 
Impf. typdyvvv (Thuc. 7, 74. S. Ant. 241); Fut. cppdgw; Aor. 
'd<f>patja; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Tr£<ppayp,ai', Aor. Pass, i<ppdx$r)v 
(Ztppay-qv first used among the later writers). 



226 VERBS. K€t/xat AND rjfiai. [§$188, 189. 



$ 188. (b) Verbs whose Stem ends in a Liquid. 

1. &p-vv-fxai (Epic and also in Plato), to take, obtain, secondary form of ctfpo- 
pai, and used only in particular phrases, to obtain, to acquire, namely, a reward, 
spoils, etc. Impf. Tipvip-nv. The remaining forms come from a'tpo/xai. 

2. KTeC-vv-fii, commonly written ktiWv/u in the MSS., to put to 
death, Att. prose secondary form of *««/<», is used in the Pres. 
and Impf. The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-. 
The v of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong ($ 169, 
Rem. 1). 

3. oX-Xv-fiL (instead of oX-w-pa), to destroy. See $ 182, B. In 
prose, only in compounds. 

4. 6/x-vv-ixi, to swear. See § 182, B. 

5. op-vv-fxu (poet), to rouse ($ 230). 

-6. (TTop-vv-fxiy to spread out. See o-Topiwvfu, $ 184, 5. 

§ 189. Inflection of the two forms of the Perf. Kelfiai 
and r/jAai. 

Preliminary Remark. The two forms of the Perf. Ke?/xai and ^fiai, 
are so essentially different, in their formation, from the other verbs in -/*{, that 
they require to be treated by themselves. 

a. Kct//,ai, to lie. 

Ket/Aai, properly, I have laid myself down, hence I lie down; 
then Pass. I have been laid down, I am lying down (e. g. av&Kei- 
yxai, I am laid up, i. e. consecrated, o-vyKttrat, it has been agreed 
upon, compositum est, constat, but crvj/re£ar<u v-n-o twos, it has 
been agreed by some one) ; this verb is a Perf. without reduplica- 
tion, from the stem KEI- (contracted from KEE-). 

Perf. 



Ind. Ke7jJMt, K&ffai, K&reu, Ketfieba, Keicr&e, Keivrcu] 
Subj. Keufxai, Key, /ce^rot, etc. 

Imp. Ktiao, /ceurfrw, etc. ; — Inf. KeToftca ; — Part. Kelpevos. 
Ind. iKeifjLrju, skshto, e/cerro, third Pers. PI. eKeivro. 
Opt. Keol/j.r)V, KeoiOy Keoiro, etc. 
Keiffoficu. 

Compounds avaKei/xai, KaraKeifxat, KaroKetcat, etc. ; — Inf. KaraKeioftai ; — Imp. 
KaTcS/cetao, ZyucHTQ. 



Impf. 
Fut. 



$$ 190, 191.] VERBS IN -0) WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -fit. 227 

$ 190. b. T H.fjiai, to sit. 

1. T HfjLai, properly, i" have seated myself, I have been seated, 
hence, I sit (Ion. and poetic, also used of inanimate objects, 
instead of iSpvfxcu, I have been fixed, established) ; this verb is 
a Perf. of the poet. Aor. Act. elo-a, to set, to establish. The stem 
is 'HA- (comp. ^cr-rat instead of ^8-rat, according to $ 17, 5, and 
the Lat. sed-eo). 

Kemark 1. The active Aorist-forms of cTira are dialectic (§ 230) and poet., 
but the Mid. signifying to erect, to establish, belongs also to Attic prose, ei<rdfji.r]v' } 
Part. ct<rd/j.ei/os (Th. 3, 58, ecr<ra/xepos) ; Imp. e'croK, eWcu (ecpe&crai) ; Put. poetic 
€<ro/j.ai, €(T<ro/xai (e^eWo/xeu). The defective forms of this verb are supplied by 



)UW. 



Perf. 



Ind. ^/*oi, ?i<Tai, ijcrrai, ^/xe^ra, ■fiofte, tivrcu ; 

Imp. ?i<ro, ifitr&w, etc. ; — Inf. fabou 5 — Part, ^fieuos. 

^fjt-rjy, ri<ro, riaro, fyuefra, fj<r£-e, fyro. 



Plup. 

2. In prose, the compound Ka.Srip.ai is commonly used instead 
of the simple. The inflection of the compound diners from the 
simple in never taking o- in the third Pers. Sing., and in the 
Plup., only when it has the temporal Augment : — 

Perf. Ka^Tifxai, icd&7)<rai, /cod^rou, etc.; — Subj. Ka&wfxai, kcc$7?, Kafrp- 

tcw, etc. ; — Imp. Kdfrn<ro, etc.; — Inf. Kcforjafrai; — Part. ko&4j- 
Hevos. 

Plup. iKafrnfiriv and Ka^fiTju, itcdfrriiro and Ka&rjaro, e/cct&7jTo and 

Ka&rjtrro, etc.; — Opt. Ka^oifirju, icd&olo, koSoito, etc. 

Eem. 2. The Opt. forms : ko&tihwi -V°> ■? T0 » etc - are doubtful. — The 
defective forms of rifiai are supplied by e£€°# at > or i&a&ai (prose /ca&e£e<rdxu, 
Ko&iCea&at). 

Verbs in -», which follow the analogy op Verbs in -/*«, in forming 
the second aor. act. and mld., the pres. and perf. ad. 

$ 191. I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 

1. Several verbs with the characteristic a, c, o, v, form a 
second Aor. Act. and (though rarely) a second Aor. Mid., ac- 
cording to the analogy of verbs in -/«, — this tense being without 
the mode-vowel, and appending the personal- endings to the 
stem. But all the remaining forms of these verbs are like 
verbs in -w. 

2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the 
modes and participials, is like that of the second Aor. Act. of 



228 



VERBS IN -CD WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -fXl. [$ 191. 



verbs in -/u. The characteristic- vowel, with some exceptions, 
is lengthened, as in Ivttjv, viz. a and e into rj, o into w, t and v 
into t and v. Tliis lengthened vowel remains, as in Zaryjv, 
throughout the Ind., Imp., and Inf. The third Pers. PL in --qo-av 
(Char, a) and -vaav shortens the vowel, when the poets use the 
abridged form in -v, instead of -crav, e. g. c/?ai/, e8w. The Subj., 
Opt., and Part., with some exceptions, which will be noticed in 
the following tables, are like verbs in -/u, e. g. fiaLr,v (a-Tatrjv), 
vfidiqv (Stirjv), yvotyv (Soirjv), yvovs (Sous). The Imp., like <rrr)$i } 
in the second Pers. Sing., takes the ending -#i, and the stem- 
vowel remains long through all the persons ; in compounds of 
fiaivoi, (3r}$i is also shortened into fia, e. g. Kara/ta, 7rp6f3a, ets/Jd, 
ZjJLfia, kirifBa. instead of Karafi-qSi, etc. 



Modes 


a. Characteris. a 


b. Characteris. e 


c. Characteris. 


d. Character. £ 


and 


BA-fl, jSatVw, 


2BE-n, frpivwu.1, 


TNO-Xl, yiyvc&cr- 


Sif-w, 


Persons. 


to go. 


to extinguish. 


Koo, to know. 


to wrap up. 


Ind. S. 1. 


e-firj-v, I went, 


%cr$r\v, I ceased to 


eyvwv, I knew, 


eSvv, I went in 


2. 


e-Pr,-s 


ecrfi-ns [burn, 


eypws 


zSvs [or under, 


3. 


Z-p-n 


e<x&il 


eyva 


eSv 


D. 2. 


e-fSt)-Tov 


eafirjTov 


eyvcorov 


eSvrov 


3. 


i-07)-T7]V 


iafirjTTii/ 


iyvccrrjv 


idvT7]V 


P. 1. 


e-f5r)-/J.ev 


e(rf$T}fxev 


eyvwfxev 


edvfiev 


2. 


c-jStj-tc 


€(TJ37)Te 


eyvare 


e5i)T6 


3. 


e-flri-crav 


e 'cr £77 crav 


tyvoocrav 


edvcrav 




(Poet. efiav) 




(Poet. eyvav) 


(Poet, m?) 


Subj. S. 


/3a>, Pfjs, Pjj x 


crfiS), f]S, ij J 


yv£>, yvys, yu(f l 


Uw, T)S, T) l 


D. 


(Stjtov 


crfirjrov 


yva>rov 


dv-qrov 


P. 


flwaej/, 7]Tc, 


cr^w/j-ev, 7)re, 


yvw/jLev, wre, 


Svwfiev, 




eocri(v) 


£)<ri(v) 


u>cri(v) 


Tjre, cocri(v) 


Opt. S. 1. 


fSai-qv 


fffSe'n)v 


yvo'i-nv 2 




2. 


fialris 


aj3eir]s 


yvoirjs 




3. 


fiairi 


cr/3ei77 


yvo'iT) 




D. 2. 


fiair]TOj/ et airov 


crfieirjTov et e?rov 


yvoiyrov et o'ltov 




3. 


fiaiT]T7\v et airrjv 


crfieiT]Tr)v Ct cittji' 


yvoiT)Ti)v et o'n-nv 




P. 1. 


f5a'i7)fj.tv et cufiev 


crfieirinsv et er/xej/ 


yvoirj/xev et oT/xev 




2. 


jSotrjTe et cuVe 


o-fleiTjTe Ct erre 


yVOLTJTe et 0?T6 




3. 


fialev (seldom 
^airjcrav) 


(r/3e7ej> 


yvoiev (rarely 
yvoirj crav) 




Imp. S. 


j8i)&l, -fjTO) 3 


CfiTJ^i, ^TW 3 


yvco&i, (OTO) 3 


Sv&i, vrca 3 


D. 1. 


fUrirov, 7JTWV 


crfirjTov, 7}twv 


yvcoTov, COTC0V 


Svtov, VTWV 


P. 2. 


Pyre 


crpijTe 


yvccre 


SDtc 


3. 


firiToocrav and 


crf$7)Tojcra.v and 


yvwToicrav and 


SvTcocrav et 




jSacrwy 


(TJSeVTWV 


yvovrwv 


dvVTWV 


Inf. 


firivai 


arrival 


yvwvai 


Svvai 


Part. 


/3cb, acra, dv 


crfieis, e?<ra, ei> 


yvovs, ovcra, 6v 


8vs, vera, vv 




G. fidvTOS 


G. crfievros 


G. yvovros 


G. Dvvtos. 


1 Compo 


unds, e. g. avafiw, ava&rjs, etc. ; airocrfiG) ; Stc^w ; araSua). 


2 Aeschyl. Suppl. 230 (215) crvyyvcprj ; but in tbe Mid. form crvyyvolro. 


3 Compounds, e. g. ava&r\Si, dvd^7]Te ; airocrfiTj&t, ; Didyvw^n ; avddv&i. 



$$ 192, 193.] VERBS IN -0) LIKE VEIIBS IN -fit. 229 

Remark. The Opt. form Svtju (instead of Svt-nu) is not found in the Attic 
dialect, but in the Epic (§227). 



$ 192. Summary of Verbs ivith a second Aor . like 
Verbs in -/xi. 

Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form : — 

1. SiSpdcrKw, to run away (§ 161, 10), Aor. (APA-) tSpav, -as, -d, -dfiev, -are, 
-avav (eSpav Poet.), Subj. Spto, Spas, Spa, Sparov, Spw/xeu, Spare, Spwai(u), Opt. 
Spait]v, Imp. Spa&i, -aVw, Inf. Spavai, Part. Spas, -acra, -dv, Gen. SpavTos. 

2. Trero/xai, to fly (§ 166, 29), Aor. (IITA-) eirrriv, Inf. irTrjvai, Part, irras] Aor. 
Mid. k-KTd\jL-r\v, TTTacr&ai. 

3. irpiaaSrai, see § 179, 6. 

4. <tk4a\w or <TK€\eu3, to dry, second Aor. (2KAA-) effKXrjv, to wither, Intrans., 
Inf. <TK\T)vai, Opt. (TKXalriv. 

5. <pba-vo), to come before, to anticipate (§ 158, 7), Aor. ecp^rjv, <p&r)vai, <p&as, 
<p&w, (p&airjv. 

6. Katw, to burn, Trans. (§ 154, 2), Aor. (KAE-) itta-nv, I burned, Intrans.; but 
first Aor. eKavffa, Trans. 

7. peco, to flow (§ 154, 2), Aor. ('PYE-) ippvrjv, I flowed. 

8. xa'P w > t0 rejoice (§ 166, 32), Aor. (XAPE-) ix^pW- 

9. aXlaKo^ai, to be taken, Aor. ('AAO-) riKtov and iaAwv (§ 161, 1), ahtovai, 
aX<2, -<Ss, -$, etc., aXoirju, aXovs (always d, except in the Ind.). 

10. fiioco, to live, Aor. ifittov, Subj. f}ia>, -wj, -<£, etc., Opt. $i<pi\v (not fiioi-nv, 
as yyotrju, to distinguish it from the Opt. Impf. fiioirju), Inf. fit&vai, Part, fiiovs 
[ov<ra, ovv\ ; but the cases of fiiovs are supplied by the first Aor. Part, fiidaas. 
Thus: avefiitov, I returned to life, from avafiiAffnofxai (§ 161, 3). The Pres. and 
Impf. of fiiSai are but little used by the Attic writers ; for these tenses, they em- 
ploy (a ; besides these tenses, only the Put. (■{jffeiv was in good use among Attic 
writers ; the remaining tenses were borrowed from Pi6a> : thus, Pres. £S ; Impf. 
efav (§ 137, 3) ; Put. ^idoaofxai, more rarely (fiato; Aor. e/3iW (X. O. 4, 18, has 
also ifiitoo-ev) ; Perf. fiefiltoKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. /kjStwTat, Part. ffe^ito/xevos. 

11. (pvto (v ovv), to produce, second Aor. ecpvv, Intrans., to be produced, be bom, be 
naturally, <pvvai, <pvs, Subj. (pxxa (Opt. wanting in the Attic dialect) ; but the first 
Aor. %<pv<ra, Trans. I produced ; Put. (pjxrto, Trans./ will produce. The Perf. 
ir4(pvKa, I am produced, also has an intransitive sense, so also the Pres. Mid. 
(pvo/xai ; Put. (pvcrofxai. 

Remark. Here also belong the forms trxej and (TxoLt}v of the second 
Aor. ecrxoy from e%w, to have (§ 166, 14), and tt?&i of the second Aor. zinov 
from Tr'ivto, to drink (§ 158, 5). 

§ 193. II. Perfect and Pluperfect. 

The Attic dialect, in imitation of the Epic, forms a few Per- 
fects of pure verbs immediately from the stem, e. g. AI-I2, to 
20 



230 



VERBS IN -0) LIKE VERBS IN 



-fit. 



[§ 193. 



fear, Se-Si-a, then rejecting the mode-vowel, in the Dual and PI. 
Ind. Perf. and Plup., and to some extent in the Inf., e. g. Se-Si- 
jxev instead of Se-8i-a-/x,cv. In this way, these forms of the Perf. 
and Plup. become wholly analogous to the Pres. and Impf. of 
verbs in -/«, e. g. i-ara-fxev. The stem- vowel remains short, e. g. 
SeSX/xev, rerXa^cv, TcrXamt ; but in the third Pers. PI. Perf, the 
mode-vowel a is not rejected, e. g. Se-oY-do-t ; with verbs in -aw, 
however, a is contracted with the stem- vowel, e. g. re-i-Aa-dcn = 
Te-rAa-o-i. 

Remark 1. Except the forms of AIfl and '(crr-nfii, all the Perfects of this 
kind belong almost exclusively to poetry, particularly to the Epic. The Sing. 
SeSia is not Attic. 

Rem. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, and, since it not only 
wants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -3-t in the second Pers. Sing., it is 
wholly analogous to the forms in -/«. So the Inf. Both append their termi- 
nations to the short stem-vowel ; Sedievai is an exception. The Subj. Perf. and 
the Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem-vowel is a, are formed like verbs in -/xi, since 
the Subj. Perf. admits the contraction of the stem-vowel with the termination, 
and the Opt. Plup. ends in -air}?, e. g. kcrrd-ca, kcrrw, --ps, etc., reTKairjv. The 
Part, of verbs in -dw contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -ds and -6s, 
e. g. kcrrac&s = kcnd>s, kcrTa-6s = kcrrds and kcrros, and also have a peculiar 
feminine form in -wcra, e. g. kcrracra ; all the Cases retain the », e. g. ktrranos, 
kardlxnjs, etc. 

Rem. 3. The form resolved by e is retained in some participles, in the Ionic 
dialect, e. g. kcrreas, standing firm ; so from r4^v-r\Ka, refrveds (never r&vc&s) 
together with Te&vnicds, is retained in the Attic dialect also. In these forms, 
to remains in all the Cases, e. g. 

kcrrecas, kcrrewcra, kcrrecvs, Gen. kcrrewTos, -c&crqs. 
renews, Tefrj/ewcra, re&vec&s, Gen. T^vewros, -cicrtjs. 

B4f}fiKa and T€TA7j/co never have this form of the participle. 





Perfect. 


Pluperfect 


Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Ind. S. 1. 


Se-St-o 


iStdteiv 


'E-2TA-A 




2. 


54-dt-as 


e8e8fety • 






3. 


S4-5l-e(v) 


e'SeSfet 






D.2. 


Se-Si-Tov 


icteSXrov 


U-crra-tov 


ecrraTou 


3. 


8e'-8i-Toj/ 


kdedtr-nu 


e-crra-rou 


kcTTaTrjv 


P.l. 


Se-Si-fiei/ 


iSeSifieu 


C-CTTa-fJ.€V 


ecrTcifiev 


2. 


8e-8i-Te 


idedXre 


e-<TTa-Te 


ecrrare 


3. 


de-Si-dcri(p) 


iSedXcrav (eSeSietrcu/) 


k-crTa-cri(v) 


ecrracrav 


Imp. 


8e-Si-&i, SeStru, etc. 


e-ara-^i, etc., 


3 Pers. PI. 


Subj. 


Se-di-ca, -77s, -77, etc. 


kcrrarucrav an 


I -dvTUV 


Inf. 


8e-8i-eVoi 


k-crra-vai 




Part. 


Se-Si-cfo, -v?a, -6s, Gen. -6ros 


k-crT(i>s, -wcra, 


-6s(-cisn 






Gen. -cZtos, 


-&JC77S 


Subj. Pf. 


kcrrw, rjs, -i), etc. 






Opt. Plup. 


ka-Tairjv, Dual kcrraityrov and -cut 
etc., third Pers. PI. kcraizv. 


ov, PI. kcrral-m 


xev and -aifxev, 



$$ 194, 195.] VERBS WITH A PERF. LIKE VERBS IN -/«. 231 

Kem. 4. The Opt. Plup. third Pers. Sing. SeStefy, PL Phaedr. 251, a. is re- 
stored according to traces in the MSS. The Plup. of '/ott^i, in this form never 
takes the strengthened augment et. — The Imp. Perf. €0"raih, etc., and the Opt. 
Plup. katai-qv, etc., are poetic only. But the Inf. ka-ravai is in constant use ; 
yet kcrrr\K4vai is very seldom ; also the Part, itrrcfo, -wcra, is far more frequent 
than 4<rT7;«£«;s, -via ; the neuter eo-rriKSs, on the contrary, is more frequent than 
kffTos. Instead of the Ind. Sing. Perf, Plup., and Part, of Se'Sfa, the forms 
of 848oiKa are more frequent ; besides the Indie. Perf. and Plup., particularly 
in the Sing., the Inf. and Part, were used. 



$ 194. Summary of Verbs with a Perfect like Verbs 

in 'fit. 

Besides the two verbs above, the following have this form of the Perfect : — 

1. ylyvopai, to become, TErAA (stem TA) : Perf. (Sing, yeyova, -as, -e), 767a- 
{xcv, yeyare, yeyda<ri(v), Inf. yeydfitv (Epic), Part, yeyds, yeywa'a, yeyc&s, Gen. 

767WT0S. 

2. paiva, to go, Perf. fle/STj/ccc, BEBAA: PI. jSe/Sa^ej/, -are, -a<n{v), third Pers. 
PI. Subj. 4nfcfiS>ffi{v) (PI. Phaedr. 225, e), Inf. fe&vai, Part. j8ej8<*s (X. Hell. 
7. 2, 3), j8ej8um (fcQwaa, PL Phaedr. 254, b), jSejScfo, Gen. fiefiwros; Plup. e£e- 
jScijuej/, -ut€, -aaav. These abridged forms are almost wholly poetic and dia- 
lectic (§ 230). 

3. Stv^ffKao, t0 di e t Te&wjKct, TE0NAA : PL re&vafiev, Tedvare, T&w<ri(v), Imp. 
re&va&i, Part. t&vtik&s, re^VTjKvia, T€&vt]k6s, or re&ve&s, re^yeuxra (Lys. and 
Dem.), re&ve6s, Inf. re&vavai (Aesch. rc&vavai from r&vaivai) ; Plup. ir&va- 
<rav, Opt. T&va'a\v. 

4. TAAft, to bear, Perf. TeTArj/ca, TETAAA: Dual rirXarov, PL rirXajx^v, 
t€tAot6, reT\a<ri(v), Imp. t4t\o&i, -ot«, etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. rerxdvat, but 
Part. T€T\r]Kdos ; Plup. iTerXa/xev, irerXare, ir4r\a(rau, Dual irirXaroy, irerXa- 
rrjv, Opt. rerXalijy. 

5. Here belong the two participles of, 

fiifipdio-Kw (§ 161, 6), to eat, Perf. j8e'j8pw/ca, poetic $e&p<6s, Gen. -wros. 
■jriirrw ($ 163, 3), to fall, ireirTUKa, Att. Poet, ireirrdis (comp. § 230). 

Remark. There are also found, in imitation of Homer, tceitpayiAcv and 
the Imp. Keitpax&h f™ m the Perf. iccKpaya (from icpafa, to cry out) ; also the 
Imp. 7re7retorfri, from ireVoid-a, to frus* (from 7re&«, to persuade), is found in 
Aesch. Eum. 602. See § 230. The Perfects oI8a and eot«« require a distinct 
consideration. 



$ 195. OlSa flme? eoiKa. 

1. OT8a, Perf. from 'EIAfl (second Aor. clSov, I saw, Inf. I8e7y, videre), 
properly Z Aare seen, hence Z fcnow; for the syllable 0?, see § 140, 4; for the 
change of 8 into <r in %<ttov, etc., see § 17, 5; for the change of 8 into <r in 
t<rfjL€v f see § 19, 1. Its inflection is as follows: — 



232 OTBa and ZoiKa. [$ 196. 



PERFECT. 



Ind. S. 1. 
2. 
3. 
D. 2. 3. 
P.I. 
2. 
3. 



oTSa Subj. cldob Imp. 

olofta 1 elSrjsr fo-3-f Inf. 

di8e(v) elSf) Xarca etSeVat 

Xcrov, icrov dSrjTOv, -tjtov %<jtov, forav 

fcr/uej/ tlda/xej/ Part. 

ftrr€ €tS7JT€ fore etSctSs, -v?a, -Js 

fcrdcn(j') €t8«cr((j/) fcrTtocrai/ 



PLUPERFECT. 



Ind. S. 1. 
2. 
3. 



7?8eij/ 2 Dual FL'jf&efpcjr (Poet, ^cr/iex/) 

778615 and -eurfrct * fjSeiTOU, Poet. yffTov 77'SeiTe ( " T^cre) 
775ei(r/) ySdrriv, " fj(TTr)V ijdeorav ( " fjcrav) 



Opt. Sing. eiSeirjv, -tjs, -r) ; Dual ei8e/7jTOf, -tjt^j/; PL elSeiTj/xcv (seldom €t'5e?- 

/iei'), €i8et7jTe, eiSeler (seldom etSeiTjcrcn/). 
Fut. e'ta-o/xai (Ion. €t8^<r«, though Isocr. o-uvetS7jo-ets), 7 s/ia^ ^now or 

experience ; sometimes also et'SeW, etScD, etSeiij^, have the same 

meaning. — Verbal Adj. loiiov. 



2woiSo, compounded of oISo, I am conscious, Inf. crwei84vcu, Imp. (rw«r&i, 
Subj. avveiSu, etc. 



1 § 116, 2, oldas scarcely occurs in Attic. 

2 First person 17877, second rjdri<T&a, third 77877, are considered as Attic 
forms ; yet rjSeiu, ^Seitrfra (also TySeis), rjdei, are found in the best Attic wri- 
ters. O'tda/lev, otSare, o"iZa(ri(v)\ instead of fa/Aey, etc., are rarely found in 
the Attic writers. Comp. X. An. 2. 4, 6. Antiph. p. 115, 3. PI. Ale. 141, 
e. Eur. Suppl. 1047. X. 0. 20, 14. oJSas occurs in X. C. 4. 6, 6. The 
shortening of the ei into e in the Dual and PL of the Opt. 77 Se^uey, is poetic 
and rare. S. 0. T. 1232. 



Remark. The Perfect, I have known, is expressed by eyj/w/ca, and the Aorist, 
I knew, by eyvav. 

2. "EoiKa, lam like, I seem, Perf. of 'EIKH (of this the Impf. cT/ce, is used in 
Homer), poetic elica instead of eoiKa, uk4vui instead of eoitcevai, and (instead 
of ioiKaa-i) the anomalous Att. third Pers. PL e'/£a<n, even in prose (Plat.), Part. 
ioLKws, in the Attic writers only in the sense of like; Att. duds and uneven 
(instead of coikc&s, ioticevcu) commonly in the dramatists, only in the sense of 
probable, likely, right; hence especially in the neuter sIkSs, as us €ln6s, as is 
natural; Plup. eV/cew (§ 122, 5), Fut. e^u (Ar.). 

Here belongs the abridged form toiy/xev, among the Tragedians, instead of 
ioiKafxei/ ; comp. Xcr^v. The poetic Mid. forms ^i"|ai (Eur. Ale. 1065), second 
Pers. Sing. Perf, and ijinro, third Pers. Sing. Plup., are constructed according 
to the same analogy. 

§ 196. III. Present and Imperfect. 

There are also some Present and Imperfect forms, mostly in the Epic dialect, 
which, according to the analogy of verbs in -fit, take the personal-endings 
without the mode-vowel. See § 230, under auvu, ravvu, ipvu, <revu, e8w, <p4pa> ; 
oluai (§ 166, 24), of the Common language, belongs here. 



$ 197.] DEPONENT PASSIVES. 233 



§ 197. Summary of the Deponent Passives 
($ 102, 2, 3). 

"Aya/xai, to ivonder, Zivafxai, to be able, np4fmfxai, to hang, 

alSeofiat, to reverence, SvsapecrTeofxai, to be dissat- \oi8op£oy.ai, to revile, 

vAa.oy.ai, to wander, isfied, fialvofiai, to be mad, 

afiiXXdofiai, to contend, iuavriSofxai, to resist, fj.€Tafi4Xofiai, to regret, 

avTi6o[xai (Poet.) adversor, iv^fvfi4ofxai, to lag to heart, (/.vadTTOfiai, to loathe, 
airovoeofiai, to be distracted, 4vvo4ofj.ai, to consider, vefieadofxai (Poet.), to be 

airopiojxai, to be perplexed, iinfi4Xofxai and -4ofxai, to justlg indignant, 
apiaroKpar^ofxaL, to have an take care, o'tofiai, to suppose, 

aristocracy, iirij/oeo/xai, to reflect upon, oXiyapx4ofj.ai, to have an 

apueoyai, to refuse iirio'Tafj.ai, to know, oligarchy, 

&X&o/xaL, to be displeased, epafxai (Poet.), to love, ireipa.ofj.ai, to try, 

fiovXofiai, to wish, €v&vfj,4ofj,ai, to be happy, irpo&vfj.4ofj.ai, to desire, 

f3pvxdofj.ai, to roar, €vXaf34ofj.ai, to be cautious, izpovoiofiai, to foresee, 

deofiai, to want, ewofj.4ofj.aif bonis legibus a4f3ofxat, to reverence (Aor. 

54pKo/xai (Poet.), to see, utor, io~4<p&nj/, PI. Phaedr. 

SvfJ.oKpaT4ofj.ai, to have a evirop4ofxai, to be opulent, 254, b). 

democracy, if/Sofiai, to rejoice, <piXoTifx4ofiai, to be ambi- 

8ia\4yofj,ai, to converse, &4pofj.ai (Poet.), to become tious, 
5iavo4ofjai, to think, hot, VTroTOTr4ofxat, to conjecture. 

Remark 1. The Aor. of several verbs have a Mid. as well as a Pass, form, 
e. g. avhi^ofiai, to lodge ; XoiSopeo/nai, to revile ; 6p4yofiai, to strive after ; irpayixa- 
revofuai, to carry on business (Pass, rarer) ; (piXo<ppov4ofj.ai, to treat kindly. Also 
several of the above verbs belong here, yet they more seldom have a middle 
Aorist, e. g. dya/xai, Aor. Mid. in Dem. alS4ofj.ai, see § 166, 1, afj.iXXdofj.ai, Aor. 
Mid. in later writers, apv4ofj.ai in Herod. Aesch. and in later writers, §ia\4yofxai 
in non-Attic writers, iTm>o4o/j.ai in later writers, XoiSop4ofiai, Aor. Mid. in Isae. 
6, 59, Tretpdofxai often in Thu., irpovo4ofj.ai, Eur. Hipp. 683. Paus. 4. 20, 1. <piXo- 
Tifj.4ofiaL in Isoc. and Aristid. — Several of the above list of verbs have a mid- 
dle as well as a Passive form in the Put. : al84ofiai, § 166, 1, ax&ofiai, § 166, 4. 
dia\4yofiai, to converse with, 8iaX4!-ofj.ai and rarer SiaXex^o-ofiat, 8iavo4ofxai, to 
think, itnfj.4Kofj.ai, § 166, 21. Trpo&vfj.4ofj.ai, to desire, irpo&vfir)0'Ofjai and rarer irpo&v- 
fj.T}Si\croiAai. Both H\8ofiai, to rejoice, and the poetic epayai, to love, have a passive 
form for their Fut. : r)o-frf}<rofj,ai, ipacrSt-no-ofiai, § 179, 4. 

Rem. 2. All the other Deponents are Middle Deponents, or are used only 
in the Pres. and Impf. 

Rem. 3. Among the Deponent Passives, are very many Active verbs, which 
in the Mid. express a reflexive or intransitive action, but have a Passive form 
for their Aorist ; on the contrary, a Middle form for their Puture, e. g. <po^4w, 
terreo, to terrify ; <pof3r\Sr)vaL and <pof3v.o~eo-&ai, timere, to fear. Here belong all 
verbs in -aiueiv and -vveiv, derived from substantives and adjectives, almost 
all in -ovu, and most in -i£eiv, c. g. ev<ppaiveiv, to gladden, evcppau^TJi/ai, eixppa- 
veicr&ai, and evippaj/^r-fjo'ea^ai, to be joyful, to be happy ; iveiraiveiv, to make ripe, 
Treirav&rjvai, ireTTav^icrSrai, maturescere, to ripen; al^x^eiv, to shame, alo-xw&TJvat, 
alo-xwe7aSfai (rarer alo-xw^aea^ai), to feel shame; iXaTTovv, to make less, 4Xar- 
Toodrivai, eAAaTTcocrea-d-ai, to be inferior, to be conquered ; xoAow, to make angry, 
XoXeo&r)i>ai, x°^o'e0'frat, succensere, to be angry; fiaXaici^eiv, to make effeminate, 
fj-ahaKioSrivai (rarer fiaXaKiaaffSrai), fxaXaKieioSai., to make one's self effeminate, to 

20* 



234 



ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE. 



[i 198. 



be effeminate ; bpyi&iv, to make angry, bpyioSrjvai, bpyieloftcu, and bpyto-frfio-ea&cu, 
succensere, to be angry ; there are veiy many others also, of which only those 
most in use will be mentioned here : — 

"Ayeiv (from avdysiv, come, avax&wai and avayayecr&ai, signifying to be carried 
to sea, in mare provehi, but Put. avd^ea&ai), ayeiptiv, ayvvvcu, a&poifav, aio'xvveiVy 
aviav, ctipeiv, aKKdrreiv (aWayrjao/nai, often also aAAa|e<rdxit), apfio^eiv, aaxoAeli', 
av^dvziv, a<pavi£siv; — fSdWtiv ; — daravav, Siairav ; — £&i£eiv, iTreiyeiv (^7rei%- 
&~nv), eariav, evwx*w | — t)ttclv (F. 7jTTr)^r}crouai and rarer rjTTTjrrofiai ) ; — Idpveiv; 
— Kivzlv, kKivgiv, Koip.av, KOfxi^eiu (KO/j.i<r^rjuai, to travel, but Kop.i<ra.(r&ai, sibi recu- 
perare, to recover for one's self), Kpiveiv, Kv\iv5eiy ; — \4yeiv, Xeiireii/, \vetv, 
hvireiv; — p.€&v(rKsiv, fxiyvvvai, fxip.v^o'K^iv ; — bpiysw (bpex^wai, and rarer 
bpe£a<r&cu), oppiav, bx*iv ; — irei&eiv (Put. ireiorop.ai, I will obey, but Tretar^a-o/xai, I 
will be persuaded), irnyvvvai, irXavav, ttKskziv, irA-fiTTeiv, iroMreveiv (also iroXirev- 
o~aa&cu), iroyeveiv; — p-nyvvvai, pwvvvvai ; — creieiv, <T-i)Treiv {aairrivai, aaTrr)(re<T&ai), 
CKefiauvvvcu, txirav, aireipav, arireipciv, areWeiv ((rraXr/vat, CTaA^o'etr&cu), arpe^eiv 
((TTpacpiiuai, <TTpa<prio'€<T&at), ar<pd\\eiv (cr<paArivcu, a-(pa\7]<reo-^ai, seldom ctpaKela- 
krai), <rci)(eiv (acodrrivcu, to save one's self, but aw<ra<r&ai, to save for one's self, sibi 
servare) ; — rapdrreiy, rspirsiv, Tpiireiv {rpairv,vai, to turn one's self, to turn, rp4\pacr- 
&ai, to put to flight), Tp4(p€ii/; — (paiveiv (<paur}uai, (pavricre&Sai and (pavzTa&ai, to 
appear, but <pav&r)vcu, to be shown), (pavrd(eiv ((pavTacr^rjcrea^ai), (pipeiv (eVex<JH}- 
vcu, olcrecr&ai and ii/ex&h <recr & a h rarer ottr^Tjcojuat), </>&etpetv (<p&aprjvai, (p^ap^aea- 
Sai [(p&cpeia&ai, Ion. and poet.J, <pofie?v ((f>o&ri<Te<T&ai and 4>ofiri£ro<rso-&ai) ; — ^eu- 
Setv (tyev<r&rivcu, ^/evcr^ao/xai, to deceive one's self, be deceived, but tyzvo-ea&cu, ij/eu- 
aaoftai, to lie) ; — x 6 "'- 



§ 198. Summary 
a 

"AiSw (<£8w), to sing, 
aicovca, to hear, 
aAaXafa, to shout, 
afiaprdva), to miss, 
airavrdw, to meet, 
a-rroXava, to enjoy, 
apirdfa, to seize, 
PaSify, to go, 
fiaivu), to go, 
flt6u>, to live, 
/SAeVw, to see, 
fioda), to cry out, 
ye\doo, to laugh, 
yrjpdcrKu, to grow old, 



yiyvwffKw, 



to know 



Sdnvw, to bite, 
dap&dvoo, to sleep, 
delo-cu, to fear, 
SzatTaw, to live, 
SiSpdcrKa, to run away, 
didbnw, to pursue, 
iyKccfj-idCw, to praise, 



of the Active Ver 
Middle Future, $ 

tlfily to be, 
iiraiveu, to praise, 
i<T&ta), to eat, 
&avij.d(<i>, to wonder, 
&ea, to run, 

&r)pda, frnpevw, to hunt, 
driyyavto, to touch, 
&vi)(TKO}, to die, 
SpuxrxGo, to leap, 
KafMUw, to labor, 
KAaiw, to weep, 
KAe7rra>, to steal, 
Kvp-dfa, to revel, 
\ayxdvu>, to obtain, 
Ka/j-Pduo), to take, 
XiXi^dw, to lick, 
p.avbdva>, to learn, 
j/e'w, to swim, . 
j/evca, to nod, 
olSa, to know, 
olp.(i(<a, to lament, 
oAoAv£a, to howl, 



bs most in use with 
154, 1. 

6/j.yv/xi, to swear, 

Spdco, to see, 

obpioj, urinam redere, 

Trai£w, to sport, 

ird<rx<>>, to suffer 

ir-nZdwy to leap, 

irivw, to drink, 

TriirTQ), to fall, 

irAew, to sail, 

TiWtt, to blow (but <rvfi~ 

7Tj/euerco), 
rrviycc, to strangle, 
7ro3-ew, to desire, 
TTposKvveca, to reverence, 
pzw, to flow, 
potyew, to gulp down, 
aydu), to be silent, 
(riooTrda), to be silent, 
(TKdoirTO}, to mock, 
inrovddfa, to be zealous, 
ffvpiTTw, to whistle, etc., 
tIktcd, to produce, 



$ 199.] PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 235 

rp*X w ) to run ) ra&dfy, to rail at, x^ <rKw i io 9 a P e > 

rp(£>ya>, to gnaw, (pevyw, to flee, X^C w i *° ease one's self, 

Tvyxavu, to obtain, tp&dva), to come before, ^wpew, to contain. 

Remake. Some have both the Active and Middle form for the Euture ; the 
Middle, however, is preferred, e. g. a'8a> (oVw non-Attic), apirdfy, Pi6a>, yr\pd- 
(<nc)a>, fiKeTTco, Siwko), dyKWfitdCto, iircuvew, bav/xafa, kAstttu, potyiw, GK&TrTU), 
riKTa, x<apw. — ®7}pdw, frnpevw, KoAafa are also used with the middle form. 
The following compounds of x^R*® nave an Active and Middle form in the 
Eut. : o7ro-, orvy- irposx^pew, but ava- and irpox<»p£o> have only the Active form. 



CHAPTER Vn. 

$ 199. Prepositions and Conjunctions. 

Besides the Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Numeral, 
Adverb, and Verb, there are also the two following parts of 
speech, viz. Prepositions and Conjunctions. On the forms of 
these nothing need be said ; hence these parts of speech are 
treated in the Syntax, so far as it is necessary. 



PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. 



PARTICULARLY OF THE EPIC DIALECT. 



A. ORTHOGRAPHY. 

§ 200. Digamma, or Labial Breathing F. 

1. The Greek language had originally, in addition to the Spiritus Asper (') 
and the Lingual Breathing <r, a Labial Breathing, 1 the sound of which corre- 
sponds nearly to the ~Eng.f or the Latin v. In accordance with its form (F), 
which is like one Gamma standing upon another, it is named Digamma (double 
Gamma) ; and as the iEolians retained it longer than the other Grecian tribes, 
it is called the JEolic Digamma. It has the sixth place in the alphabet, namely, 
between e and £ and is named Bad. Comp. §§ 26, 1 and 25, 2. 

2. This character disappeared very early ; but its sound was in some cases 
changed, in some of the dialects, into the smooth Labial £, e. g. fila, vis, Fls 
(later ft) ; in other instances, it was softened into the vowel v, and, after other 
vowels, coalesced with these, and formed the diphthongs av, ev, tju, ov, cov, e. g. 
pads (vdFs), navis, xeuoi (x*Fw) JEol., fiovs (f}6Fs), bovs, bos, Gen. bovis ; in 
others still, it was changed into a mere gentle breathing, which at the beginning 
of a word is denoted by the Spiritus Lenis, but in the middle of a word and 
before p is not indicated, e. g. Fls, vis, fr ; oFis, ovis, 6'is ; el\ew, volvo ; FpoSov, 
p6Zov, etc. ; it was also changed, in the beginning of some words, into a sharp 
breathing, which is denoted by the Spiritus Asper, e. g. '4(nrepos, vesperus; '4vvv(j.t, 
vestio. 

3. In the Homeric poems, no character denoting the breathing F any longer 
exists ; but it is very clear that, in the time of Homer, many words were 
sounded with the Digamma, e. g. fryvv/xi, &va}-, avdorffw, avSdvca, cap, ver, the 

1 " The Vau, or Digamma, an important agent in early Greek orthography, 
less, however, a principal than a subsidiary letter, retained much of its previous 
character of vowel-consonant, or, in the technical language of the Oriental 
schools, of quiescible letter. It was chiefly used as a liquid guttural, or aspirate, 
somewhat akin to our English wh, to impart emphasis to the initial vowel of 
words, and possessed the power, with certain limitations, of creating metrical po- 
sition. But these vague and indefinite properties, were not such as to entitle it to 
a regular or habitual place in the written texts of the popular Epic poems.. It 
was retained by the Boeotian states in monumental inscriptions till the 145 
Olympiad." — Mure's Hist, of the Language and Literature of Greece, vol. i, p. 85 ; 
vol. iii, p. 513. 



238 DIALECTS. [$ 201. 

forms of 'EIAfl, video ; eouca, e?Ko<ri, viginti ; etfia, vestis ; eliretv (comp. vocare), 
eKr)Aos, evpvfti, vestio ; kos and os, suus ; ov, sui ; 61, sibi ; etrirepos, vesperus ; oIkos, 
vicus ; olvos, vinum, etc. ; this is obvious from the following facts : (a) words that 
have the Digamma cause no Hiatus, e. g. irpb e&ev ( = irpb F4&eu) ; — (b) hence 
also a vowel capable of Elision, when placed before a digammated word, cannot 
be elided, e. g. \iirev Se I (= 54 Fe), curb '4o (= a7rb F4o) ; -*- (c) the paragogic v 
(§ 15) is wanting before words which have the Digamma, e. g. 8a74 oi (= Sa74 
Foi) ; — (d) ov instead of ovk or ovx, is found before the Digamma, e. g. inel 
oft k&4v 4<m x*P*' ia)V ( — °^ Fe&4v); — (e) in compounds, neither Elision 
nor Crasis occurs, e. g. Siaeiire/xev (— SiaFenre/xeu), aayf)s (= aFayi)s) ; — (f ) a 
digammated word with a preceding consonant, makes a vowel long by position, 
e. g. y&p 4&ev (where the p and the Digamma belonging to '4&ev make o long 
by position) ; — (g) long vowels are not shortened before words that have the 
Digamma, e. g. KaAAcf re arix^wv ko.1 e'l/xacri ( = ical Fei/j.a<rt), II. y, 392. 



§ 201. Interchange of Vowels. 

Preliminary Remark. The dialectic peculiarities in the change of vow- 
els, as well as of consonants, never extend to all the words of a dialect, but are 
uniformly limited to certain words and forms. 

1. The three vowels, €, o, &, called (§ 140, 2 and 4) variable vowels (rp4(pw, 
r4rpo(pa, 4rpd<pr)v) undergo various changes in the dialects : — 

a is used instead of e (Ion.), e. g. rpdirui, rd/xvaj, /xeya&os instead of rpeiroi, 
re/xvu, fieye&os ; so also Doric rpdcpco, o*Kiap6s, "Apra/xis instead of rpecpa, 
cmepos, "Aprefiis ; and in several particles, e. g. Una, r6ica, iroKa instead of 
'6re, r6re, ir6re. 

€ instead of a in the Ionic dialect, when followed by a Liquid, e. g. r4<r<repes > 
epffrjv, veXos, &4pe&pov (Ion.) instead of r 4 a capes, four, dpar\v, a male, vaXos, 
glass, fldpa&pov, gulf; also in many verbs in -da, e. g. <poir4<a, bp4<a (Ion.), 
instead of (poirdco, opdco. 

e instead of (Doric), e. g. efiSefi-fiKoi/Ta instead of e^Sofi^Kot/ra. 

a instead of (Ion.), in appadelu instead of bfipuHetv. 

2. The following cases are to be noted in addition : — 

The long a is a special peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in par- 
ticular, the so-called Plateiasm (i. e. the broad pronunciation) of the Dorians, 
e. g. afiepa, Kairos, a.8vs, Aa/iorrjp. The older and the later Ionic have softened 
this grave d into 77. The Attic uses both the Doric a and the softened 17, (§ 16, 
7). Comp. Dor. ap.4pa, Ion. 7jfi4pa, Att. 7]/j.4pa (with the Ion. 77 and Doric a) ; Ion. 
ao<piri, Dor. and Att. <ro<\>ia ; Ion. &&pT)%, Dor. and Att. &topa£. — So, also, in 
the diphthong av, among the Ionic writers a is changed into 77 : vi)vs, yprivs, 
instead of vavs, ypavs; likewise in the diphthong at in the Dat. PI. of the first 
Dec, rjs and pen (Ion.) instead of ats and aiai. — Still, in certain words, the 
Dorians retain the 77, as the Ionians do the d. 

7i instead of ei (iEolic and Doric), e. g. eafj-rjov, r?ivos, 6l;rja, so the Infinitive, 
e. g. XafiTJv, KaXrjv, instead of o"t]jxelop, ksivos, b^ela, XafSelv, KaXeiv. 

at instead of u (Doric), e. g. <p&alpo instead of <pfrelpw. 



$? 202, 203.] CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 239 

v often instead of o (JEolic), e. g. <rv<p6s, 6w/xa instead of <ro<p6s, ovofxa ; so in 
Homer &yvpis instead of ayopd ; and in the Common language, ivcovvfios, irarfj- 
yvpis, etc. 

co instead of ov before a Liquid and <x, and at the end of a word in the termi- 
nations of the second Dec, and in the stem of several words; — oi instead of 
ov before the breathing <r in the third Fers. PI. oicri(v) instead of ovai(v), and in 
the participle ending -oio~a instead of -ovaa, and in Mo7<ra and 'Ap4&oicra instead 
of Movcra, and 'Ap&ov<ra ; the above use of co instead of ov is Dor., yet not in 
Pindar ; the use of oi instead of ov is JEolic and Pindaric, e. g. 

T« €<f>ctj3w instead of tov icp-fjfiov, 3>v (also Ion. and Pindar.) instead of ovv, 
SaXos instead of SovXos, wpav6s instead of ovpau6s, fi&s instead of flovs ; — rxnr- 
roiai{v) instead of tvittovo'i(v), rinrroicra instead of Tvirrovcra, <pi\4oio~i{v) instead 
of <piXovo~iv, exoicra instead of exoucro. 

Some other instances will be considered below, in treating of the Declensions 
and Conjugations. 

$ 202. Interchange of Consonants. 

The change of consonants in the different dialects is according to the two 
following laws : — 

Coordinate consonants (§ 5, Rem. 4) interchange with each other; and cog- 
nate consonants (§ 5, Rem. 1) interchange with each other. 



$203. I. Interchange of coordinate Consonants. 

A. The Mutes : (a) The smooth Mutes tt and k. The interrogative and 
indefinite pronouns, irws, ir^re, iro7os, birdios, etc., are in Ion. kSjs, k6tc, etc. 

K instead of t : Trcfre, irore, Jjre, r6re, 6ttot€, ctAAore, are in Dor. irtJ/co, irona, 
8/ca, r6>ca, 6-k6ko. (Poet. ottokko), ctAAo/ca; so efaa (shortened from 2/co/ca) instead 
of QTa.v. On the contrary, t instead of k : Trjuos Dor. instead of k£vos, 4kc?i/os. 

it instead of t (iEol. and Dor.), e. g. ire/wre instead of ireVre. 

(b) The Medials /3 and y, e. g. jSA^x*" (Att.), penny-royal, is in Ion. yXrixwy 
fix4<papov, eye-lash, is yXe<papov. 

8 instead of 7 (Dor.), e. g. 5a instead of 7?) 5 hence A^r^p instead of 
Trjix^rrip. 
5 instead of $ (Dor.), b8eX6s instead of 6^eX6s. 

(c) The Aspirates 3- and t/>, e. g. &4}p, beast, StXav, frxlfieii', ov&ap, udder, are 
in Dor. c/>7jp, <pXav, (pxlfSeiv, ov<pap (uber) ; <p-fjp and cpxlpeiv also in Homer. 

X instead of 3- : ftfyta is in Dor. 2'x/ tia > anc * opvi^os, etc. (from opvis) is opvixos, 
etc. 

B. The Liquids : (a) The Liquids interchange with one another: v instead 
of X before 3- and t, often in the Dor. dialect, e. g. fjvfrov, frhnaros (Dor.) 
instead of fjX&ov, fieXTitrros; also (Ion. and Att. ) irXevfioov, pulmo, instead of 
irvf6jA<i)v t xirpov instead of vlrpov. 

p is rarely used instead of A, e. g. Kplfiavos, oven, Att., instead of kxI&oj/qs. 



240 DIALECTS. [$ 204. 

(b) The Liquid p and the breathing a in the later and often in the middle 
Attic : pp instead of the Ion. and old Attic pa, e. g. apo-qv and dppr\v, a male ; 
Kopat] and K6pptj, bach; but pp remains where the augment is used, and in com- 
position. 

$204. II. Interchange of cognate Consonants. 

"(a) The Palatals y and k, e. g. nvacpevs, fuller, is preferred by the Att. writers 
to the other form, yvatyeis. 

k and x in Setco/xai (Ion.) instead of Zexop.au 

(b) The Linguals $■ and t, e. g. avrts (Ion. and Epic) instead of av&is, again. 

Remark. In some words a change of the aspiration, from one syllable to 
the other, occurs, e.g. k&(£>v (Ion.) instead of x iT ^ y > evbavra, hie, eit&evrev, hinc, 
(Ion.), instead of ivrav&a, ivTev&ev; Kv&pr] (Ion.) instead of x^rpa, pot. 

a and t, e. g. Yloreioav, eirerov, etnan, rv, re (Dor.) instead of Tloaeioeov, eire- 
<rov, eUoai, o~v, ere. The Attic forms revrXou, beet ; rrjXia, sieve (from crjbca), 
rvpfir) (from avpoi), turba ; T-r\p.epov, to-day, and Tyres, this year (the two last only 
in the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers o-i\p.epov, eyres), 
are in the Ion. and Common language aevrKov, a-r]\ia, <rvpfi-q. 

<r<r and rr. Instead of <rcr, employed in the older and the later Ionic, in old 
Attic and in most other dialects, — the new and often also the middle Attic 
in most words uses tt, e. g. tcWco, yXaxxaa ; but Att. rdrrw, yX&rra. (But 
when ff<r results from composition, it remains unchanged.) Yet the Ionic 
forms prevail, not only in the older Attic writers, but are also found in other 
authors, some words always having era, e. g. irdaaco, to scatter; irr^aaco, to 
crouch; fivooos, a deep; irriaau), to husk; irrvaaca, to fold ; {Spdooea, to shake; 
irrcvaaco, to cower; epeaaca [iperTio is rejected), etc. 

c and v in the Dor. verb-ending -p.es, e. g. rvirro/xes (instead of the common 
form rWrop.ev, see § 220, 6) ; also ales Dor. instead of alev. 

aS instead of £" (iEol., so also in Theoc.) but only in the middle of words, e. g. 
fteXifftierat, p.eaocav instead of p.e\i£erai, p.e£oov or fxelfav, not at the beginning of 
words, nor if fr precedes, or a follows, e. g. p.ox^ovn, eTri<p&v£oioa. 

£and tt, avpirreiv, app.6rreiv (Att.) instead of avpi^eiv, ap(x6£eiv. 
Here belong : — 

| and a and go, e. g. \vv (Epic and old Attic) instead of aw ; di£6s and rpi£6s 
(Ion.) instead of Staaos, rpioo6s ; /cA.a| Dor. instead of n\a7s (K\e?s) ; even in the 
Eut. and Aorists, the Dorians, and also Homer, in several verbs use | instead 
of a, see § 223, 5. 

(c) The Labials <p and ir, — the first Att., the last Ion., — e. g. aa<pdpayos Att., 
aairdpayos Ion. So -ZEol. and Dor. ir, instead of <p, e. g. apmi ( iEol.) instead of 
afupi ; hence in the Common language, ap.tr ex* lv i ctc - 

p. and ir, e. g. nreM (iEol. and Dor.) instead of p.erd. 

(d) The double consonants £ and \\>, and the two single consonants of which 
they are formed, though transposed, in the JEol. dialect, e. g. onevos, aird\is 
instead of £evos, tyaAls, yet only at the beginning of a word. So crcp and ty, 
e. g. $4 Dor. instead of o<pe. 



$ 205.] CONTRACTION AND DIAERESIS. 241 

Change of the Vowels. 
» § 205. Contraction. — Diaeresis. 

1. In the Dialects, the following contractions, which differ from those men- 
tioned in § 9, are to be noted : eo and eou, sometimes also oo and oe are con- 
tracted into eu in Dor. and Ion. — not, as commonly, into ov ; so ao, aov, and 
oov (Ion.) are contracted into eu — not, as usual, into a and ov, e. g. <piAev from 
(piKiov = <piXov ; 7rAewes from irkeoues ; Tr\7ipevvTes from ir\7]p6ovTes = irKripovv- 
res ; idiKaiev from iSinaioe = iducaiov ; dpcvrevv from elpuTaov = clpwruv ; 76- 
AeOca from ysXaovaa = yeXucra ; Si/ccuei/a't from SiKaioovai = Sucaiovcrt. But 
commonly the Dorians contracted oe into o> (instead of ou), e. g. rvpoevra '= 
rvpoovra instead of rvpovvra, piyuv instead of piyovv. 

2. Ao, aov, and ao> are contracted in the Doric dialect into d (instead of &>), 
namely, in verbs in -da, in genitives in -ao and -dW, in substantives in -dW, 
Gen. -dot/os, and in proper names in -Aaos, e. g. (pvaavres, xaAa<n, yeAav from 
(pvcraovres, x a ^ ov<r h yeAdW; — toV Kopav from rdwj' Kopdcav — r&v Kopuv; — 
Yloo~€i8ai/, -avQS, Att. Tloo-eiS&v, -<avos, — Meve'Ads, 'ApKeaiAas, Gen. -a, Dat. -a. 

3. Ae and aet are contracted in the Dor. (but not in Pindar) into 77 and 77 
instead of d and a, in verbs, c. g. i<potT7], (poirrjs instead of icpoira, (poiras. See 
§222,111.(1).- 

4. The Attic dialect is the opposite of the other dialects, particularly of the 
later Ionic ; since, while the other dialects often avoid contraction, and the later 
Ionic commonly, the Attic almost always admits it. The tendency of the later 
Ionic towards un contracted syllables is so great, that it even resolves the long 
sounds (which are never resolved in the other dialects) into their simple ele- 
ments, e. g. (pL\4eai instead of cpiXrj, which had been contracted from <pi\er}. 
Epic poetry often uses, indiscriminately, contracted and uncontracted forms, 
according to the necessity of the verse, e. g. de'/cwv and 'dicwv. 

5. On the contrary, it is a special peculiarity of the Ionic dialect, that while 
it delights to avoid contractions, it still, in particular cases, admits them, where 
the Attic dialect does not, e. g. Ip6s (I), Ipevs, tpeiaao-^ai Ion., instead of leposj 
etc., and especially the contraction of orj into cc, particularly in the verbs fioav 
and vozlv, e. g. £j3wo-a, eVaxra (ayvdxr a<r Key Horn, from ayyoeoo), evvevcoKa instead 
of e$6ri<Ta, iySrjaa, evvev6y\Ka ; so bySutcovTa in Homer, instead of oydo-ffKovra. 

6. The opposite of contraction is Diaeresis (diaipecris), the separation of a 
diphthong into its vowels. Diaeresis is specially used in the JEol. dialect. 
The use of it in Homer, also, is not rare ; most frequently, in such words as 
separate the two vowels by means of the Digamma, namely, a'i in ird'is ; av in 
avTixfa breath (from &Fti/u)j avcrraXeos, dirty; ei in eivnea, to make like, ei/rro, 
tiKTov, iiKT-qu ; eu very often in the adverb iv (= ev, well), e. g. iii Kpiyas, ivKrl- 
fxeyos; when fi, v, p, or a follows ei) in compounds then they are doubled, e. g. 
e'SyUjueAtrjs, ivvvt]Tos, ivppoos, eiWeAjios ; o'i in Sis {6Fis, ovis), oto/uu (comp. opi- 
nor), b'i<rr6s, &i£a, wi^au (from olyvvfii). 

21 



242 DIALECTS. [$ 206. 



§ 206. Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Paragogic, 
Hiatus. 

1. In particular instances the Dialects differ from the laws of Crasis stated in 
§§ 10 and 11 ; namely, in the Ionic dialect and in Pindar and Theoc, the o of 
the Article coalesces with d and forms «, and with ai and forms a>, e. g. to dyak- 
ua = rioyaXfjia ; so tw\t)S4s, twvto, uvrip, wvdpes, &vSpuntoi, cfir6\oi, from to dA.73- 
&es, rh avi6, 6 dvi]p, ol dV5pes : ol av&pwiroi. ol aliroXoi. In Herodot. occur, &pi(TTOS, 
uvt6s, SAAot, with the smooth instead of the rough breathing (from 6 apiaros, 
6 avrSs, ol &W01) ; Homer uses Crasis seldom, namely, only in tipiorros, covt6s, 
TaAAa, ov/x6s (instead of £p6s), rovi/eKa, ovveKa (instead of ov eVe/ca) 5 Kayu> is 
doubtful. 

2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are : r&Xyeos, ruvrpw instead of rod aXyeos, 
t<£ dvrpoo ; so and e = to, ai and e = 77, e. g. 6 e\a<pos = &\a<pos, 6 e| = cl-|, teal 
i K = K ^ Kf Ka \ elire = Kyire, Kai idv or fjv == k^v, which last is also Ion. 

3. Ionic writers admit the common Crasis in ov, in the Masc. and Neut. of 
the Art. and in erepos, e. g. ovrepos, rovrepov. 

4. The use of Synizesis (§ 12) is very frequent in the Homeric poems: — 

(a) In the middle of words, it is oftenest found in the following combination of 
vowels (the vowels over which the line is placed being pronounced as one 
syllable, whether consisting of two or more vowels) : ea, ea, ecu, eas; eo, 
eot, eov ; eco, eca ; e. g. crri^ea, rj/xeas, &eol, xpvcreois, Te3recoTe ; much rarer 
in ae, ta, iai. 07, irj, 10, e. g. dedAeiW, Tr6\ias, ir6\ios', 00 only in 
fydoov] vot only in 5a/cpuoicn; t]i in 87710*0, dyloov, 8r}:oicn, rjia ; 

(b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels : 77 a, 77 e, 77 77, 
7j ei, 77 ov, 77 01 ; €i ov; a> a, w ov ; the first word is cither •#, 7), 877, fi-fi, and 
eW, or a word with the inflection-endings, 77, a, e. g. %, ov, 877 dcpyetSraros, 
/L177 &W01, dXairlvT) 7je ydjxos, acrf54aTu> ou8' wdV. 

5. Elision (§§13 and 14) is found very often in Homer, particularly as fol- 
lows : — 

(a) The a is elided in the PL Neut. and the Ace. Sing, of the third Dec, 
rarely in the Aor. ending -<ra, e. g. ctAen//' ipe Od. fi, 200; commonly in 
the particle &pa: 

(b) The e in e>e, fie, <r4, etc. ; in the Voc. of the second Dec, in the Dual of 
the third Dec, in endings of the verb, and in particles, c g. Se', re, Tore, 
etc. (but never in t8e'). 

(c) The 1 in the Dat. PI. of the third Dec; much rarer in the Dat. Sing., 
and only when it could not be mistaken for the Ace, e. g. x a ^P e & 6 T< ? 
tpvib' 'Odvcrevs, II. k, 277 ; in ct^u/xt, V/a/xi, and o~<pi ; in adverbs of place in 
r&t, except those derived from substantives ; in ei'/cocn ; finally, in all end- 
ings of the verb ; 

(d) The in d7rc», inr6 (but never in Trpd), in 5vo, in the Neut. of pronoun9 
{except t6), and in all endings of the verb ; 



§ 207.] LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 243 

(e) The at in endings of the verb fiat, rat, o-&ai (crai only in tV bXtynireKeuv, 
II. o, 245, and at in the Nom. of the first Dec. in o|e? bUvai, II. A, 272) ; 

(f ) The oi in fiot, to me, and in the particle, rot. 

6. The v paragogic (§ 15) is commonly rejected in Ion. prose, e.g. Tract 
eAe£a. 

7. The Hiatus (§ 8) is admitted by Homer in the following cases : — 

(a) In long vowels or diphthongs either in the Arsis of the verse, e. g. 
avr&4\ a> '05v\ ari'i; or in the Thesis, in which case the long vowel or 
diphthong is considered short, e. g. oXkoi e | <rav ; 

(b) When the vowel does not admit Elision, or but rarely, e. g. TraiSl &/xvvev ; 

(c) When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark, e. g. dAA' ava, et 
fiifiovds ye ; 

(d) In the Fern. Caesura (i. e. the caesura succeeding a short syllable) after 
the first short syllable of the third foot ; — as this caesura here divides the 
line into two parts, it is opposed to the close connection which would 
arise from eliding the final vowel, e. g. 

Ketv)) ] Se rpvcpd [ Xeta || a/i \ HcrireTO | x^pi ira | #€%, II. y, 376. 
rwv oi I e£ iyi \ vovro || e | v\ fieyd \ poicn ye | ve&\7], II. c, 270 ; 

(e) In the metrical Diaeresis, 1 after the first and fourth foot of the verse, e. g. 

eyxei' | 'iSo/xevrios ayavov AevKa\tdao, II. /x, 117. 

ire/xif/at eV 'Arpeidr) ' 'Aya.fi4ft.vovt \ ov\ov''Oveipov, II. /3, 6. Comp. £ 422 ; 

(f ) Where the first word has the apostrophe, e. g. Sevdpe e&aWev ; 
fg) Sometimes in proper names ; 

(h) Words, which have the digamma occasion no Hiatus (§ 203, 3), e. g. 
ov I 5e ovs I TrcuSas e | affKev (= ouSe Fovs). 

§ 207. Lengthening and Shortening of Voivels. 

1. The following vowels are lengthened : — 

A in Homer is sometimes lengthened into at ; this occurs in aleros, aid. ayal- 
o/xat, instead of aerSs, etc.; so also irapai (also KaraifSarai), in the tragedians 
Stat, and analogous to these, viral, instead of -rrapd, did, vir6. 

a into 77 in Homer, in rjepedwrcu, yiyep&ovrai, r^e/xSets in the Arsis, conse- 
quently on account of the metre. 

d into at before <r (iEol.) in the Ace. PI. of the first Dec. ; also in /x4\ais and 
rd\ats instead of /xek&s, rd\as, rats instead of rds, Ka\a?s instead of Ka\ds ; in 
Pindar, in the first Aor. Act. Part., e. g. rtyats, -ataa instead of -as, -aaa ; but 
always iras. 

Av into <ti'v (Ion.) in rpavfxa, Stav/xa and its derivatives : rpdo'vfxa, frccufxa, 
frav/jidCto ; and in pronouns compounded with aur6s into wv, e, g. ewvTov, aecav 
rov, i/xewvTov instead of kavrov, etc. ; so also twvto instead of ravrS. 

E into et in the Ion. writers before a Liq. in a number of words, e. g. e5W/ca 
(also in Attic prose), netv6s, (e?vos, o~Tetv6s, slpwrda. Homer lengthens e into 

1 Metrical Diaeresis, is where a word and a foot end together. 



244 DIALECTS. [$ 207. 

ei according to the necessities of the verse, in other words, also, which in Ionic 
prose have e, e. g. etV, vireip, irelpas, end, (ppelctTa (from (ppeap, a well) ; also before 
vowels in adjectives in -eos, e. g. xP v<T * i0 s ; in substantives and pronouns, e. g. 
aweios, i/ue?o ; in verbs in -ew, e. g. TeAetw, ttvg'm, also in e'/ws instead of ecos, 
until; sometimes .also in the Augment and Reduplication, e. g. elAj]Aov&a, eloi- 
Kvlai, Set'Sta, SetSe'xaTai. 

E into 7] (Horn, and Dor.), in the Dec. of substantives in -eis, e. g. fia<riAevs, 
Gen. -rjos, etc. ; further (also Ion.), in adjectives in -eios, e. g. fiaaiArj'ios, royal; 
likewise in single words, e. g. tcAy'is, KA-n'iSos (Ion.), etc., instead of KAels, and 
in very many substantives in a of Dec. I., e. g. aA-nfr-nir) instead of dArjfreta. 

H sometimes into at (iEol.), e. g. &valo~Kc>) instead of &vf)o~K(a. 

O into oi (Ion. and Horn.) before a vowel in several words, e. g. vol-n, iroi-nsis, 
Xpoiy, poi-f), etc. ; in the Gen. of the second Dec. in Homer, e. g. Seo?o instead 
of &eov, and in (polvtos, x°P olTV7r ' l ' r ]> 68oiir6piov, ayKolv?jo~i(v), and 7)yvolr)o~e(v). 

O is changed into ov (Ion. and Horn.) before a Liq. or Sigma, still only in a 
certain number of words ; and, in the Dor., before a Liq. into u>, e. g. 

it6pos Ion. Kovpos Dor. K&pos /x6vos Ion. fxovvos 

ovo/ia " ovvofxa " &vop.a "OAv/nros " OvAv/attos; 

also in the oblique cases of S6pv and youv. — But substantives, which have the 
variable vowel o, cannot be thus lengthened, e. g. trovos from ir4vop.ai, 86/xos from 
Sefiw. 

O into <a in Homer, on account of the verse, in Aitibwcros, K-nrueis, rpax&w, 
trwrdo/xai (and also Tpoxdw, TroTa.ofji.ai). 

T into ov often (Dor.), e. g. frovydr-np instead of ^vydrrjp. In Homer, in 
elkriAov&a. 

2. The Epic dialect can resolve contracted syllables, when necessary, 
namely, d into aa, a into aa ; 77 into en, etrj, 7777 ; <o into oa>, 000, cou ; particularly 
in the inflection of verbs, e. g. Spaas instead of Spas, Kpr\-nvov instead of Kpr\vov, 
6p6w instead of opw, yeAwovres instead of yeAcoures, Tjfic&ctio-a instead of 7)fia>o~a ; 
also (pocos instead of <pa>s, light (from <pdos), and proper names in -cpav, e. g. 
A-qjxocpowv. 

3. Another mode of lengthening a vowel in the Epic dialect is by resolving 
an original Digamma or a Spiritus Asper into a vowel, e. g. eSianAos and 'in-nAos 
(FeicnAos), ovpos instead of '6pos, bound; ovAos instead of '6Aos, rjeAios instead of 
riAios ; i'iaos instead of Icros ; etAtWw instead of lAtWco (comp. volvo), i)<Jos instead 
of ecus. In the Ionic, and sometimes in the Epic dialect, the <a (contracted 
from ao and aw), is resolved by e, e. g. (t/cerw) t/cerew instead of iKfrao, irvAewv 
instead of TrvAdwf. 

4. The following vowels are shortened : — 

At into d before a vowel, often in the iEol. dialect, e. g. apxaos, 'AA/cctos, 
instead of apxaTos, 'AA/caTos ; in Homer, in zrapos, erapr), eTaplfroSai. 

Et into € before liquids (Ion. and in Horn.), in the forms x e pt s > X e Ph from 
X^tp, hand, so also Att. x^P°^ v t X e P ai: > a ^ s0 (I° n - a nd Dor.) before a vowel, in 
Proparoxytones in -eios, and in Properispomena in -e?a ; in Homer, only in a 
few Fem. adjectives in -vs, e. g. 



$ 207.] LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 245 

iirir-fjSeos, -4r], -gov Ion. instead of -eios aicea instead of cw/ce?a from ukvs 
reAeos, -4-n, -gov " " -gios Pa&e7) " Pa&G?a " (HaSts 

evpdr} from Giipvs " " -e?a 8ao~GTj ' : ScwreTa " Scwus ; 

so also in Horn. 'Ep/j-ea instead of 'Epneta; also et in Ion. is shortened into e, 
when two consonants follow which make the vowel long by position, e. g. 
aTr65e£is instead of a.Tr6dei£is, /xg^wv instead of [xelfav, Kpiaaav instead of upe'icr- 
acov; finally (Doric) in forms of the verb, e. g. asfies instead of deiScty. 

Remark 1. In the iEol. dialect, et before a liquid is very often shortened 
into e, and the Liq. is doubled, e. g. ktgvvw, o-irippw, wreAAa, instead of ktgivoo, 
cirelpu), wTGiA-f]. 

H is changed into e in Horn, in apyhi, apy4ra, from apy-hs, -rjros, shining, and 
in the Subj. ending -gtg instead of -tjtg ; also -o/xev instead of -<xp.Gv, e. g. etSeTe, 
frcDp-ifiofiev. 

Oi into o often in the Dor. and iEol. dialects, e. g. tto£j instead of iroi&. 

Ov into o in Horn, in the compounds of irovs, e. g. ae\\6iros, aprliros ; often 
in Theocritus in the Ace. PI. of the second Dec, e. g. ribs Avkos instead of robs 
Avkovs ; also iEol. fioAAa instead of fiovA-f] ; so too in Horn. fiSAercu, p6Aeofre 
from fiovAouai. 

5. On the Ionic- Attic interchange of the vowels, see § 16, 5. 

6. The use of Syncope (§ 16, 8) is frequent in Homer, particularly in forms 
of the verb, as will be seen below ; he also has rlirre instead of tittotg, yAanro- 
(pdyos instead of yaAanrocpdyos. 

7. Apocope (airoKOTT-fj) is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
beginning with a consonant. It is employed by the Epic and Doric poets, 
sometimes also by the Ionic, and in a few single forms even by Attic prose 
writers. It occurs with the prepositions, e. g. avd, nard, irapd, rarely with wit6 
and birS, and with the (Epic) conjunction dpa. The accent is then thrown 
back; av before j3, ir, <p, p., is changed into &p. (§ 19, 3), e.g. apt. Pwp.o?o-i, 
ap./3a(veiv, ap. TteAayos, tip. <f>6vov, afifieyca; the t in icdr is always assimilated 
to the following consonant, except that the corresponding smooth mute stands 
before a rough mute (§ 17, 4), e. g. /ca8 8vvap.iv, kcltt tpdAapa, kolk KG(paArjs, Kay 
y6vv\ examples of a-n-6 and v-n-6 are, avirefi^eiy bfifiaAAGtv (Horn.); examples 
from Attic prose, ap.$aTns, ap.floAds, X. Cy. 4, 5, 46. 7. 5, 12, &p.rrwTis. 

Rem. 2. In the concurrence of three consonants, assimilation is omitted, and 
the final consonant of the preposition is rejected, e. g. /ca/crcwe, Kdo-x&e> ap.vd- 
crei, instead of KaKKravG, /caccrxe&e, ap.p.vdo-Gi. 

8. Prothesis (§ 16, 10) occurs in Homer, in affrcpo-n-h (o-rGpoirfi), l&e&a (d-eAw), 
gkgIvos (kg?vos), ipvop.ai (pvop.ai) ; Homer also often resolves the i^into the vowel 
«, namely, iepo-n, eeSm, ie'iKoari, e'tVros, ggiitov, i4xdop.ai, iepp.evos. 

9. Sometimes, for the sake of the metre, Homer inserts €, e. g. a8eA<pe6s, 
kgvgSs, instead of dSeA^os, kgvos] so also in the Gen. PL Eem. avTG<av, wpcorecov. 
To prevent the accumulation of short syllables, he inserts in several compound 
words an 77 in place of the short vowel, e. g. ravrjAeyeos, iirrjpoAos, G , vr\GTav6s i 
oktyn-n gAgw, iAa<p-nl36Aos, instead of ravvA., iirifi., gttlgt., oAiyoir., iAatyofioAos. 

21* 



246 DIALECTS. [$ 208. 

An i is inserted in Homer after 01 in oixouos instead of ofxoios, and in the Dual 
■oiiv instead of -oiv. 

10. The later Ionic, also, sometimes inserts e before a long vowel : (a) in 
some genitives of substantives and Fern, pronouns before o>, and in olros, rot- 
ovtos, and avros before long inflection-endings, e. g. avSpeow, x^veW, iiccivewv, 
TouTeW, aureW, aurew ; (b) in some forms of the verb before a long vowel, e. g. 
lo-riacri, ovviap-ai, dvveaurai; (c) some verbs in -w have forms as if from -ea>, 
e. g. /3 a A A. co <Tvixf5aXke6p.evos, virepfiaWeeip ; tti4£u irie^evfxevos (also in Horn. 
7u4£evv instead of iiriefeop) ; also etyee, eVei'xee, &<p\ee, from etyco, eVe'x&>, SxpXov] 
finally, the three following forms of the Perf. in -ee instead of -e : ot'xw/cee, 
07r^7T6e, ew^ee. 

§ 208. Change of Consonants. 

1. In the Ion. dialect, the rough breathing has no effect on the preceding 
smooth mute, e. g. cur* ov, tirriixepos, ovk ocriws, etc. 

2. In the Horn., Ion., and Dor. dialects, a 8 or fr remains before fx in certain 
words and phrases (contrary to § 19, 1), e. g. 65/x-f] instead of oo-fi-f), tS/xev, 6pxv& m 
fx6s, iireir&/j.ev, K€KopvSr/j.4vos ; also in the Horn, dialect, the v remains before <r 
(contrary to § 20, 2) in wards, avax&hiv, travavUri instead of iraaavUy ; 
finally x before fi (§ 19, Rem. 1) in anaxiJ-svos, acute. 

3. The Metathesis (§ 22) of p often occurs in Horn, and in other poets, e. g. 
Kpaoit] instead of Kapdia, heart, Kaprepos and updrepos, strong, KapriCTos, fidpSiCTos 
(from fipaovs, slow) ; also in the second Aorists zirpc&rov, e8pa&ov, eSpaKou (from 
irepfru}, to destroy, Sap&dva, to sleep, SepKo/xai, to see) ; here belongs also tf/j.fipoTov 
instead of ^\x.parov (= '^fxaprou, according to § 24, 2). 

4. Homer doubles a consonant (comp. § 23, Rem.) after a short vowel, 
according to the necessities of the verse in the following cases : — 

(a) The liquids and Sigma on the addition of the augment, mostly when 
there are three successive short syllables, e, g. eWa&ov, efifia^ov, ew/etw, 
eccreuo ; 

(b) In compounds also, the liquids and Sigma are doubled, e. g. ve6\\ovros 
(from veos and Aovw) ; dfi/xopos, (pi\o/j./j.ei8r)s ; avve<pe\os, ivj/wnros; 0c&vp- 
poos ; ivo-o-eXfios ; 

(c) In the inflection of the Dat. in -<n, and of the Fut. and Aor., e. g. v4kvo-<ti, 
Scvfxacrat ; /caAecrcra, ofj-ocrffai, (ppdaao/jLai, i£eit/icr<ra', 

(d) In the middle of several words, e. g. o<r<rov, t6o*<tov, onlo-aw, irp6(rcr&>, 
fiecrcros, j/e/iecrcra, j/e/xeo-aTi^eis, &vff<rav6eis. 

Homer doubles the mute ir in Interrogative pronouns which begin with dir, e. g. 
07T7ra)j, etc.; — k in TreXeKKov, 7reAe/acaa> ; — t in otti, oTTeo, ottsv; — 8 in edSeiae, 
TrepiSofiaacra, dSSees, 'dSSrjv. 

Remark. The doubling of p, which always takes place in the Common 
language when the augment is prefixed, and in compounds when a short vowel 
precedes, may be omitted in the Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the 
verse, e. g. %pe(ov from pefa, XP V<X ^P VT0S - For the same reason, one of the 
consonants, which is elsewhere doubled, is omitted in the Epic dialect, though 



§ 209.] QUANTITY. 247 

rarely, e. g. 'Qdvaevs, 'Ax^evs, (pdpvyos^ instead of 'OSva-cevs, 'AxiAAevs, 
(pdpvyyos. 

5. Homer often places a consonant before a short syllable, to make it long 
by position, namely, a v in vuvvfxvos, a-irdXa/xvos, idpvv&rj, afju/vi/frri, vire/xvr]fj.vKe] 
a t after v in irTotefxos, 7tt6Kis, irToAie&pov ; a & after x in X&<*/J.aAos, Siy&a, 
rpixSd, Terpax&d, and after A or p in LidAbanos, iyp-qyop&aan ; or he places a y 
before 5 in ipiySoviros, iy5oinrr)(re, and a er before p. and k in afwcpSs (also Att. 
§ 24, 4), <TK^dvvvfxi (comp. K.i§UT)[xi), afxoyepws (comp. fioyepws), <riu.€p8d\eos. 
Here belongs also the Epic prefix of fj. (= v, according to § 24, 3), before fipo- 
ros in composition, so as to strengthen the long syllable and give fulness to the 
word, e. g. afxfiporos, Teptyififiporos, and in a/xcpacrir} instead of acpaaiT). 

§ 209. Quantity . 

Preliminary Remark. Only a few general rules will be given here ; the 
quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned from 
rules previously given, or by observation. 

1. A syllable which has the vowels e or o, followed by another vowel or a 
single consonant, is short by nature, e. g. tIkos, &eos, fiorj. 

2. A syllable which has the vowel t\ or w, or a diphthong, is long by nature; 
so all contracted and circumflexed syllables are long by nature, e. g. "fipws, 
obpavos, &K(tiv (instead of cJkcov), iTi/ia (from eTt^de), iras, <x7ros, ipvxos, vvv. 

3. A syllable which has a doubtful vowel (a, i, u), followed by another vowel 
or a single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position, e. g. 'ael- 
dovres, Sai/iovtr), cpvrj, fiaxv, <pfcos, apyvpeos. 

4. A syllable which has a short or doubtful vowel followed by two consonants 
or a double consonant, is long by position ; e. g. licecr&ai, kKarbpLfiri, 5e£d(T&cu, 
eYjdicrTOS, (pvKKov. 

Exceptions to No. 3. 

(a) a of nouns of the first Dec, which have the Gen. in -as, is long in all the 
Cases in which it occurs, e. g. ^uepd, <pi\la, -as, -a, -op, etc. (Comp. § 45.) 

(b) a in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec, is long, e. g. Nom. Sing. 
\4aiva, Dual Aeaivd. 

(c) a is long in the Gen. Sing, in -ao and Gen. PI. in -dW, e. g. 'ATpet'Sdo, 
ayopaaov. 

(d) the ending -as of the first Dec. is long, both in the Nom. and Gen. Sing., 
and in the Ace PI., e. g. Nom. rapids, Gen. <nnds, Ace PI. d6%as. 

(e) a of masculine and feminine participles in -as is long; so also other words 
in -as where m or v have been dropped, e. g. aKovaas (aKovaaurs), a.Ko6- 
cracra, icrras, jSds; yiyas (yiyavrs). /xeAas (/xe\avs). 

(f ) a in the third Pers. PI. Perf. Ind. Act., e. g. reriKpacri. 

(g) v is long in the Sing, of the Pres. and Impf. Ind. Act. of verbs in -vlii, 
also in the masculine and feminine Sing, of the participle ; e. g. delicvvfii, 
iSeUvw, dsiwvs, deucyvcra. — Other exceptions may be learned by obser- 
vation. 






248 DIALECTS. [$ 209. 

5 In Epic poetry, a mute and a liquid (§ 27, Rem. 2) commonly make a 
syllable long by position ; tbe vowel is shortened, for the most part, only when 
the form cannot otherwise be suited to the verse, e. g. reixso-'iirXrjTa. 

6. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position: (a) 
when it ends with a consonant, and the following word begins with a conso- 
nant, e.g. kol&i | gov Tpw \ as; also (b) when the final syllable ends with a 
short vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with 
two single consonants, which are not a mute and liquid, e. g. ad/jL-f] \ ttiv, V | 
ovirca v \ irb (vybv \ r\yayev \ avfjp, II. /c, 293. But a mute and a liquid in this 
case, always make the syllable in the Arsis long ; on the contrary, the syllable 
in the Thesis, may be either long or short according to the necessities of the 
verse ; e. g. lit) [moi \ Scop' ipa \ rd Tvp6<pe \ pe XP V j °" e '^s *A(ppo \ SIttjs, II. y, 64 ; 
on the contrary, in the Thesis, avrap 'o \ irXrjo-iou \ earr] \ wet, II. S, 329 ; but 
frvtipd [ &V71toi> e | <Wa, rrd \ Aat 7re | Trpcofxevov \ cuo-p, II. 7T, 441. 

Rem. 2. In the names 2/ca,uaj>5p<>s, ZaxvvSos, ZeXeia, even otc and £ do not 
make a syllable long by position in Homer; so also IV | end o-k4 \ irapuou, Od. 
e, 237, occurs. 

7. A long vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word, in Homer, commonly 
becomes short before a word beginning with a vowel, when it is in the Thesis, 
but it remains long when it is in the Arsis, or when the following word has the 
digamma, e. g. rifxevrj \ ev fiev \ drecaiv, II. a, 358. vies, o | jxev Kred \ tov, 6 S* 
'dp | Evpvrov | 'AKTopi \ cows, II. /3, 621. avrap 6 \ eyvcp \ rj(riv e | v\ (ppeal \ <p(&V7) 
| oiv re {yaw = Ffj<rii>). But sometimes a long voAvel in the Thesis is not short- 
ened before words which do not have the digamma, especially in the fourth foot 
of an Hexameter, e. g. tgj fir) | ;xoi irare \ pas Tro&' o | fxoif] \ ev&eo \ Tifj.f}, II. 8, 
410, and before a punctuation-mark, e. g. Ke?o-&aI, | <xAA' iird \ fxwov, II. e, 685. 

8. A long vowel or a diphthong in the middle of a word before another 
vowel is but seldom shortened by the poets, and for the most part, in certain 
words and forms; thus, e. g. in Homer, iireiy ("""), e^iraios ("""), oTos (""), /3e- 
&\7)ai ["""), and often in the Iambuses of the Attic dramatists, e. g. oTos, iroTos, 
toiovtos, roiJsSe, otei (from ofafxai), tcoi<=1v ; and always before the demonstrative 
/ in pronouns, e. g. tovtovi, avraii. 

9. In Epic poetry, a short syllable in the Arsis is usually considered long, 
if it stands at the beginning of a word, e. g. aa-n-iBos \ 'dudfia \ rov irvp, II. e, 4 ; 
or at the end, in which case it is followed either by a liquid (A, /x, u, p), or a <r 
or 8, the sound of which is easily doubled in pronunciation, or by a word with 
the digamma, e. g. Kal ireSi \ a Aa> \ revvra, II. /i, 283. frvyare \ pd r\v {= Ft)v), 
II. A, 226. 

Rem. 3. A syllable in itself short, may be used as long or short in the same 
word, according as it is or is not, in the Arsis, e. g. -3 " Apes "A | pes fSporo | Xoiye ; 
— 'dvZpes v t j o~ao~iu and irXeiova \ ''iffaffiv. 

10. Not unfrequently in Homer, from the mere necessities of the verse, 
a short vowel is measured as long in the Thesis, when it stands between 
two long syllables. This occurs in the middle of a word, and oftenest with 
i, e. g. tW biro | 5e£i \ y, II. t, 73. rioi npo | Svfxi \ rj<ri, II. P, 588 ; this is rarely 
the case at the end of a word, e. g. -n-vKva \ pwyaXe \ -qv, Od. p, 198. tjj 5' im | 
fiep Top | yd> fiAoav \ pwirls \ io~Te<pd \ i/coto, II. A, 36. 



$§210,211.] FIRST DECLENSION. 249 



B. DIALECTIC FORMS. 

§210. Homeric Suffix <ju (<jav). 

1. In the Homeric dialect there is, besides the Case-inflections, a Suffix <pi(v), 
which properly and originally denotes the indefinite where, like the local Dat. 
(see the Syntax) ; it is also used to express other relations of the Dat., as the 
Dat. of the instrument, and with prepositions (such as in Lat. govern the Abl.), 
it expresses those relations of the Gen. which in Latin would be denoted by 
the Abl. 

2. The Suffix <pi is found with substantives of all the declensions, and is 
always annexed to the unchanged stem of the word : — 

I. Declension only in the Singular: (a) Dat. dyeX^-cpi, ay\ai7}<pi (in the 
herd), Svpijcpi, before or without the door (in several ancient editions ycpi is 
incorrectly written with an Iota Subs. -n<pi) ; (b) Gen. (Lat. Abl.) d-rrb 
vevprj<ptu laXXeiv (to shoot an arrow from the string), e£ eiiyrjtpi fropeTv (to spring 
from bed), KpaTepr\<pi fiir)<pi, II. <p, 501 (with great force), aft f/ot <paivop.4vT)- 
<piv, Od. 8, 407 (as soon as the morning dawned). 

II. Declension both Singular and Plural. All these forms, without respect to 
the accent of the Nom., are paroxytone (-6<piv) : (a) Dat. da.Kpv6<piv (with 
tears), /xrjo-rwp draXavros &e6<piv (an adviser equal to the gods) ; — (b) Geni- 
tive (Abl.) airb or etc TraacraX6(piv (to take from the pin), 4k &t6<piv (through 
the gods), air' oareScpLv (from the bones). 

III. Decision almost exclusively in the PI. $iv is here used with not a large 
number of neuter substantives in -os (Gen. -eos), also with KorvX-nddiu and 
pads, e. g. npbs KorvX7]Sou6(pi(v) (with the union-vowel o), to the arms, vav- 
<pi(v) (at the ships) ; in words in -os, the ending -os must always be restored 
to its original form -es, since <pi is always annexed to the pure stem ; thus, 
6x€o-(pt(v), aw oxeo'<£"( ,/ )> k^ opeff<pi(u),-dirb, Bid, e/c ffr^eff<pi(u). 

§211. First Declension. 

1. (a) The Epic and Ionic writers use t\ instead of the original long a (which 
the Dorians use) through all the Cases of the Sing., e. g. Tipa, -as, -£, -dv 
(Dor.) ; <ro<plr), -7?s, -p, -r)v, &vpi), -ijs, ve-qvirjs, -??, -t\v (Epic and Ion.) : so U-qve- 
XoTreirjs, UrjveXoirelri, from Tlriv4Xoireia, (pp^Tprj, Boperjs, Bop4y, Bop4r)v. 

Exceptions in Homer are 3-ed, goddess, -as, -S,, -dv, Nav<rii<da, *eid, also Alveias, 
Avyeias, 'Epfxeids, and some other proper names in -as pure. The Voc. of vv(j.<pt\ 
is vv/jupa instead of vv/xcp-n, II. y, 130. Od. 5, 743. 

(b) In substantives in -eia and -ota, derived from adjectives in -r}s and -ovs, as 
also in some other feminines, the short a in Attic is also changed into i\ in 
Ionic, e. g. dXT\bdt), aroiSefy, evirXotr), Kviffo-q instead of aX^ia, dvaideia, 
evirXoia, Kviffaa. 

(c) The Mo\. and some other dialects have -a instead of -ys, as the Masc. 
ending in the Norn. Sing., like the Latin. The Epic also uses this form, accord- 



250 DIALECTS [§ 212. 

ing to the necessities of the verse, in a great number of words, particularly in 
-to., e. g. t7T7r^Ta, alxwra-, Kvavoxalra., vecpeArjyepeja, l-Kir^Kdrd, jXT]rUrd, evpvoira. 
The Voc. retains the ending -d in all these words. 

2. The Gen. Sing, of masculines in -77s and -as originally ended in -do ; -do 
was then contracted into -co (Dor. into -d). In Horn, both the uncontracted 
and contracted form is found; he also resolves the -co, originating from 
-00, by means of e (comp § 207, 3) ; it is further to be remarked, that the -co 
in respect to accent is considered short (§ 29, Rem. 7) and the e is always pro- 
nounced with the Synizesis; -eco becomes -co when a vowel or p precedes (still 
AtVetew, II. e, 534). Thus there occur in Homer, 'Ep/j-eias, Gen. 'Ep/j.eiao and 
'Ep/netoo; Boperjs, Gen. Bopeao and Bopeco; 'Arpeidjjs, 'ArpeiSdo, and 'A-rpeiSew, 
iKirao and keVew ; ivfifiekioo, 'Aaico. In Homer, then, the Gen. endings of nouns 
in -as or -17s, are -ao, -co, or -eco (not -ov). The Gen. ending -eco, becomes, in 
the Ion. writers, the usual ending, e. g. iroXireco, 'Arpeldeco. 

3. The Ace. Sing, and PL of masculines in -r)s is commonly formed in the 
Ion. dialect like the third Dec, e. g. tov 8eo"ir6rea, tovs SecnrSreas from deenror-qs, 
-ov, MiA-TtdSeo from MiXrid^s, -ov. 

4. The Gen. PL of all the endings was originally in -dcov ; -dcov was after- 
wards contracted into -cov (Dor. in -av). Homer uses both the uncontracted and 
contracted forms, e. g. bedcov and &ewv, Trapeidcov and irapeicou. He can also, 
as in the Gen. Sing., again resolve, by means of e, the -we originating from 
-dcov] the ending thus becomes -icov, which is commonly pronounced with 
Synizesis, e. g. rrv\4a>v, 3-uoeW, ayopecov. The Gen. ending -day becomes in the 
Ion. writers, the common form, e. g. Movcrioov, rifiecov. 

5. The Dat. PL originally ended in -aio-i(v) ; this ending is found in the Dor. 
writers, in the Att. poets, and even in the older Att. prose writers ; in the Ion. 
writers, -aio-i was changed into -y<rt(v) and -t;s; and in the Att. and Common 
language, -aicri was shortened in -ais. In Homer, the Dat. PL ends in -rjcri, -77s, 
and -ais, yet the last is found only in Seals and d/craTs. 

6. The Ace. PL, in Mol., ends in -ats (as in the second Dec. in -01s instead 
of -ovs), and in Dor. in -as (as in the second Dec. in -os instead of -ovs), e. g. 
reus rivals (JEol.) instead of ras ri/xds (but Dat. PL riixaio-i) ; irao~as novoas 
(Dor.) instead of irdo-as Kovpas. 

§ 212. Second Declension. 

1. Nominative Sing. Proper names in -Xaos are changed in the Dor. dialect 
into -Ads (Gen. d, Dat. et), e - S- McyeXds instead of MeveAaos, Nt/coA.ds, 'ApKeal- 
Ads. 

2. Genitive Sing. Homer uses both the common form in -ov, and that in -010 ; 
the tragedians, also, in the lyric passages, use the ending -010. Theocritus has 
the Dor. ending -co and -010. 

3. Genitive Sing, and PL Some genitives are formed according to the 
analogy of the first Dec. (a) Herodotus has some Masc. proper names in -os 
with the ending -ea> in the Gen. Sing., e. g. Bdrreco instead of Bdrrov, Kpolcrtco, 
K\eo/j.^poT€co, MepPMapeco, and some Masc. common nouns with the ending 



$ 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 251 

-eW in the Gen. PL, e. g. TretrtreW; (b) The ending -du>v instead of the Ion. 
-eW belongs to the Dor. (comp. aiyav instead of aiyduv from a?|, § 213, 5). 

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect ends in -ouv instead of -oiv, 
e. g. tcfMouv instead of w^oiu ($ 207, 9). 

5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -okti{v). This form, as well as the 
abridged form in -ois is found in Homer and in all the poets, and in Ion. prose. 

6. The Ace. PL ends, in the Dor. writers (except Pindar) in -as and in -os 
(like -as in the first Dec, § 211, 6), e. g. ras v6ixas, v6{xos, so also ras \ay6s, the 
hares ; Mo\. in -ois, e. g. 7racro-aA.ois instead of -ovs. 

7. Attic Declension. The Gen. Sing, in the Epic dialect ends in -So, instead 
of -w, in n-qveAewo (II. £, 489 ; though most MSS. have II?jj/eAeou>) from lltivi- 
\ecos, and in IleTewo from neVeous. — In yaXus, sister-in-law, "Abas and Kws, the 
w originating by contraction, is resolved, in the Epic dialect, by means of o) 
hence ya\6<os, 'A&ows, k6ws, Gen. -<ta. On the words y4\as, idpus, tpws, see 
§ 213, 7. 

8. Contracted forms of the second Dec. are rare in Homer, namely, vovs only 
Od. k, 240 (elsewhere v6os), x«M«P> us > IL A > 493 ( but *» 138, X^Pp 00S ) and 
Xelfxa^poi, II. 8, 452, also Tldvfrovs, Tldvfrov, ITdV&w. Homer does not contract 
other words; in words in -eos, -coy, he either lengthens the e into ei (§ 207, 1), 
or employs Synizesis, as the measure requires. 

§213. Third Declension. 

1. In the Dor. uialect the long a here also takes the place of i), e. g- "«"» 
(xau6s instead of /ifr, Mv6s, etc., "EAAd*/, "EWaves, Troifxiu instead of iroipfr, Gen. 
-evos, veSras, -dros instead of vedrrjs, -titos. 

Afofy, &1P> £%"> and a11 names of persons in -t^/j, are exceptions to this 
Dor. usage. 

2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, tj commonly takes the place 
of the long o, as also elsewhere, e. g. &£$p7?£, oftjf, fyr?! instead of &wpd£, tyfig. 

3. The Dat. PL in the Epic dialect, ends, according to the necessities of the 
measure, in -tn{v), -(r<n(v), -e<ri(*>), and -e«r.<ri(v). The ground-form is -eo*i{v) 
and the strengthened form is -e<r<ri (y). This ending is always annexed, like 
the other Case-endings, to the pure stem, e. g. /cw-eovn (from K fav, Gen. kw-os), 
veici-etrtn (from v4kvs, -v-os). The ending -eiri(v) is found in Homer only in 
few* 0«ni x*ip&"> and ^dKT-e<rtu (from &>a|, amKr-os). In Neuters, which 
have a radical <r in the Nom., the <r is omitted when it stands between two 
vowels (§25, 1), e. g. eW-eoVi (instead of eVeV-eo-crt from rb tiros), Seird-eo-ffiv 
(from to SeVas). In stems in -av, - f v, -ov (aF, eF, oF), the v (F) must be 
omitted, according to § 25, 2; thus, /Brf-eovi instead of fi6F-ar<ri, ftnrtf-«r«r* 
instead of fcnrtiF-eeren. The ending -erci is annexed almost exclusively to 
stems which end in a vowel, e. g. Wkv-o-cti from »/e'/«/s -u-o's ; but also tpc-oyi 
from Tpis (-(5os) and commonly iroovf from vols (iro5-<fc). The Dat. form in 
-a<n never admits the doubling of or. — The ground-form -e<n is very common 
in the Dor. poets and prose-writers ; also the Ionic prose has this form fre- 
quently in stems ending in -v, e. g. p-fiv-etri. 



252 DIALECTS. [§ 213. 

4. The Gen. and D at. Dual in the Epic dialect, ends in -ouv (as in the 
second Dec, § 212, 4), e. g. irodo7iu, ~S,eip-f]uouu. 

5. The Gen. PL in the Ion. dialect often ends in -4wv, e. g. xi«W, avtipiwv 
(§ 207, 10). Theocritus has rav alyav (instead of roov aiywv) from rj a% a goat, 
after the analogy of the first Dec. 

6. The Epic dialect sometimes forms the Ace. Sing, of words in -vs (stem v) 
in o instead of v, e. g. evp4a irovrov, Ix&va, v4a from vavs. 

7. The words y4\ccs, laughter; Idpcvs, sweat; epos, love, which properly belong 
to the third Dec, in Homer follow the Attic second Dec. in some of the Cases, 
e. g. I8pa>, I8p$ instead of Idp&ra and Idp&Ti; y4\w and y4\oov, y4\a>, instead of 
ydXwra and y4\wri, epep instead of epcori. 

8. Words in -is, 1 Gen. -idos. The Horn., Ion., and Dor. dialects often 
inflect these substantives, particularly proper names, in -tos, e. g. fj.-fjvios, Horn., 
®4jxios, Herod., @4tios, Dat. 0eVr, Horn. Those ending in -is, -iSos, in the Epic 
dialect have the Dat. only in -i instead of -Si. Substantives in -t\ is, --niSos, 
are sometimes contracted in the inflection, by the poets, e. g. -jrap-qis, irapjjdos 
(instead of irapri'idos), Nrjprj'is, N^p^Ses. See § 54 (c). 

9. The Neut. ovs, uros, ear, is in Dor. £>s, wtos, etc., and in Horn, ovas, Gen. 
ovaros, PI. ovara; the Neuters, ar4ap,fat; ov&ap, udder, and ireipap, end, have 
-aros in the Gen., namely, ar4aros, ov&ara, irdpara, Trelpacrt. In the words 
repas, Kepas, Kpeas, the Epic writers reject t, e. g. r4paa, -dew, -deo~(ri(v) ; Kepa 
Dat.; PI. Kepa, Kepdcov, -aetrcrt(j/), and -a<ri{v) ; PI. np4a, npedoov, upewv, and Kpeiwv, 
Kpeaa-i(u). Among the Ionic writers these words, like Operas, etc. (§61, Rem. 
1), often change the a into e, e. g. Kepeos, n4psa, /cepeW, ret. r4pea, np4eorcri(v). 
See § 54 (c). 

10. In the words irarrjp, /.i-fiT-np, etc., Homer either retains or rejects the e 
through all the Cases, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. av4pos and 
avSpSs, av4pi and avdpi, etc., but only avdpuv, avdpdai and -iaai; yacr-np, yaa- 
r4pos, -4pi, and ya<rrp6s, yaffrpi, yaffr 4pa, yacrrepes ; Ai)f.iT)T7]p, -7]r4pos, and -qrpos, 
Ar]fjn}T4pa; Srvydrrip, -repos, and -rp6s, etc., SvyaT4pecr(ri{v), but frvyarpwv ; fJ-^rr]p 
and irarrip, -r4pos, and -rpos, etc See § 55, 2. 

11. In Homer, the word t'xwp, blood of the gods, has in the Ace ix<u> instead of 
iX«pa, and kvkcwv, o, mixed drink, has in the Ace Kviceu or kvkciw. See § 56, 
Rem. 1. 

12. In -avs, -evs, -o vs. Of ypavs, there are found in Homer only the Nom. 
yprjvs and ypn'vs, Dat. ypri'i and the Voc yp-qv and yprju. In the Ion. dialect, 
also, the long a is changed to -n ; thus, Gen. yp-qos, PI. 7p?jey ; this also appears 
in vavs, navis, see the Anomalies. — The word fiovs is regularly declined in 
Her., hence Nom. PI. fioes, Ace $ovs ; in the Ace PI. Homer uses both fiSas 
and fiovs. On the Epic Dat. fiSecrcri, see No. 3. In Doric, the Nom. is jSwy, 
Ace Pa>v, Ace PI. &a>s. This form of the Ace Sing., occurs also in the II. -t\, 
238, in the sense of buWs hide, a shield made of bull's hide. See § 57. 

1 The student may consult the first part of the Grammar, where similar 
words are declined ; references to the particular section will be given at the end 
of the paragraphs here 



§ 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 253 

13. In common nouns in -e6s, and in the proper name 'Ax^AAeus, 77 is used in 
the Epic dialect, instead of e, in all the forms which omit v (F) of the stem, 
this is done to compensate by the length of the vowel for the omitted v (F) ; 
thus, fiacriXevs, Voc. -eu; Dat. PL -even (except apicrT'f)ecrcrL(v) from apicrTevs), but 
fiao-iKrjos, -rfC, -r,a, -rjes, -i]cov, -r\as. Yet the long a in the Ace. -eu, -eds of the 
Attic dialect, again becomes short. Among the proper names, the following 
are to be specially noted : 'OSvtrtrevs, Gen. 'OSva-arjos or 'Odvarjos and 'O8vo-<reos, 
also 'OSvaevs (Od. ca, 398), Dat. 'Odvo-ii'i and 'OSwe?, Ace. 'OSuo-o-Tja and 'Odv<r- 
<rea, also '08uo-?7 (Od. r, 136) ; Il77Aeus, I^A^os and TlyXeos, IlTjArjt and n»7A«, 
Ur)X7Ja] the others, as \Arpeus, TvSevs, generally retain the -e and contract -eos 
in the Gen. by Synizesis, and sometimes -ea in the Ace., into -77 ; thus, TvSeos, 
-«, -ea, and -77. — In the Ion. of Herodotus, the inflection with 77 in common 
nouns is very doubtful ; in proper names, the e is regular, e. g. Ilepcreos, Awpiees, 
Qccxewv, AloAeas. 

14. In -77 s and -es, Gen. -eos. In Homer, the Gen. Sing, remains uncon- 
tracted. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, both the uncontracted form -ees, and 
the contracted form -eis is used for the Nom. PL The Gen. PL remains uncon- 
tracted (except when a vowel precedes the ending -eW, e. g. faxpv&v from 
£dxp?eW) ; so also the Ace. PL ending -eas. "Aprjs has in Homer "Aprjos and 
"Apeos,"Ap7]'i or "Ap-p, "Ape'i, "Apt] and *Apt}v, II. e, 909, ''Apes and "Apes (§ 209, 
Eem. 3). See § 59. 

15. In proper names in -KA77S, the Epic dialect contracts ee into 77, e.g. 
'Hpa/cAojs, -kXtjos (instead of /cAe'eos), -r\'C, -r\a, Voc 'Hpa/cAeis; but in adjectives 
in -07s it varies between -et and 77, e. g. ayaKKe^s, Gen. c\yaK\rjos, but e'i)/cAe?as 
(Ace. PL) from e'u/cAe^s, ivppe-fjs, Gen. ivppe?os. The Ion. and Dor. writers, and 
sometimes the poets for the sake of the verse, reject an e in these words, e. g. 
Tlepucheos, -ei, etc.; so also in Homer, SvsK\ed, II. j3, 115, and inrepdea, II. p, 330. 

16. In (a) -as, Gen. -aoj. In Homer, the contracted forms, t^>w Dat., and 
Mivw Ace. occur. — (b) -d>s and -«, Gen. -60s. "Words of this kind even in the 
Epic and Ion. writers, as well as in the Attic, always have the contracted form, 
except xpus an d its compounds, e. g. XP 00S > XP ot "» XP^ a ' — The Ion. dialect fre- 
quently forms the Ace. Sing, in -ovv instead of -«, e. g. 'lei, 'low, ^ds, 7701V. — 
The iEol. Gen. Sing, ends in -cos, e. g. offices, ^dircpcos instead of alSovs, 'Zaircpovs ; 
thus, in Moschus, tUs s Ax«s. See § 60. 

17. In (a) -as, Gen. -aos. In Homer, the Dat. Sing, is either uncontracted 
or contracted, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. yi\pd!i and 77 y /pa, 
Se7ra, creKa. But the Nom. and Ace. PL is always contracted, e. g. SeVa. — On 
those in -as, Gen. -eos, see § 61 (a), and Kern. 1. 

(b) In -os, Gen. -eos. The Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the 
verse, has sometimes the uncontracted and sometimes the contract forms, 
except in the Gen. PL, which is always uncontracted. The Gen. Sing, is also 
uncontracted, except in some substantives which contract -eos, as in the Dor., 
into -evs ; thus, 'Epefievs, frdperevs, yeuevs, &d/j.&evs, frepevs ; Dat. Sing, frepe'i and 
frepei, KoAAei and /cdAAei. Nom. and Ace. Plurals in -ea, commonly remain 
uncontracted, but they must be pronounced with Synizesis, i. e. as one syllable, 
e. g. ve'iKea, fieXea. — The Ion. dialect is like the Epic. — In crireos, KXeos, deos, 

22 



254 DIALECTS. [$ 214. 

Xpeos, the Epic dialect lengthens e, sometimes into e«, sometimes into 17 ; thus, 
Gen. <rirelovs, Dat. (nrrj'i, Ace. o-rreos and (rireTos, Gen. PI. cnrelwv, Dat. (nr4(xai{v) 
and (T7r7j6(r(ri(j') ; XP 60S an( ^ Xi 06 " 55 ; *Aed and /cAeTa. 

18. In -is, Gen. -10s; -us, Gen. -uos. The Epic dialect contracts those in 
-vs, in the Dat. Sing., e. g. 6i(v?, irAe^y?, j/e/cut; the Ace. PI. appears with the 
contracted or uncontracted forms, according to the necessities of the verse, 
though more usually contracted, e. g. Ix&vs instead of Ix&vus, Spvs ; vskvcls is 
always uncontracted ; the Nom. PI. never suffers contraction, but is pronounced 
with Synizesis. The Dat. PI. ends in -tWt and -uWdt (dissyllable), e.g. lx&v<r- 
ffiv and Ix&vzvaiV' See § 62. 

19. In -Xs and -t, Gen. -tos, Att. -ews; -us and -u, Gen. -vos, Att. -ea>s: — 

(a) The words in -?s, Att. Gen. -ecus, in the Epic and Ionic dialect, retain t 
of the stem through all the Cases, and in the Dat. Sing, always suffer contrac- 
tion, and usually in the Ace. PI. in the Ionic writers, and sometimes also in 
Homer (-u = -I, -las = -Is), e. g. ir6\is, tt6Alos, tt6\l, ttoAiv, tt6\1€S, iroXiuv, "k6\hti, 
ir6\ias, and ttoAIs. In the Dat. Sing, however, the ending -ei" and -et is found 
in Homer, e. g. irScrei and TrStrei from irSais : in some words, the 1 of the stem is 
changed into e in other Cases also, e. g. iirdx^is instead of iirdx^ias, <F7raA£e(n(j/), 
especially in tt6\is, which, moreover, according to the necessities of the verse, 
can lengthen e into 77 ; thus, Gen. wohios, iroXeos, and iroXrjos, Dat. ir6\e'i, ir6\*i, 
and ir6\7]'i, Nom. PI. 71-oAees and Tr6\T]es, Gen. ttoAiW, Dat. iroXiecrcri, Ace. iroAtos, 
ir6\eis, T^ATjas; from ois, ovis, Dat. PI. oUgg^v), oU(Ti(v), 6eai(y). See § 63. 

(b) The words in -vs, whose Gen. in the Attic ends in -ews, in the Ionic 
make the Gen. in -cos, e. g. Tr-ftx* *, except e7xeAus, Gen. -vos ; in the Dat. Sing., 
both the contracted and uncontracted forms are found in Homer, e. g. evpei, 
7T7)x e ') TAaTet. In the Nom. PI., the form can be either contracted or uncon- 
tracted ; in the Ace. PL, the uncontracted form in -eas is regular, which, when 
the verse requires, can be pronounced as a monosyllable, e. g. ire\ei<eas (tri- 
syllable). 

$ 214. Anomalous and Defective Words. — Metaplasts. 

1. T6vv (rb : knee) and o6pv (rb, spear, §68, 1), are declined in Homer as 
follows : — 

Sing. yovvaros and yovvos Sovparos and Sovpos Sovpari and Sovpl 

PL Nom. yovvara " yovva dovpara " Sovpa — Dual Sovpe 

Gen. yovvwv hovpwv 

Dat. yovva(ri(v) and yowto~cn(v) hovpa<ri{v) and 8ovpeffcri(j/). 
The form yowaacri (II. t, 488, p, 451, 569) has critically little authority. 

2. The following forms of ndpa (rb, head, § 68, 6) are found in the Homeric 
dialect : — 

Sing. Nom. leapt) Gen. ndp-qros Kap^aros KparSs Kpdaros 

Dat. Kaprjri Kaplan Kpari tcpdari 

Acc. Kdpi) (rbv Kpara, Od. fr, 92, and iirl /cap, II. ir } 392). 



vrjvs 


Dor. vavs 


ve6s 


va6s (also Trag 


via 


vat 

vavv and vav 




vae 




vaotv 


vies 


vaes 


veuv 


vaSov 



$ 215.] ADJECTIVES. 255 

PI. Nom. ndpSL Kap-fjaTa ; secondary form icdpyva 
Gen. Kpdrwv " Kap^vcov 

Dat. Kpacri(v) 
Acc. ttpdara " Kdpt\va 

3. ASoj (6, stone, Horn., instead of Xas), Gen. Aaos, Dat. \ai, Acc. Aacu/, Gen. 
PL Kdaiv, Dat. Aaeo'o'i(j'). 

4. Me is (6, month), Gen. ^7jj/os, Ion., instead of \i-hv, -6s, but also in Plato. 

5. Navs (rj, ship) is inflected in the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects as 
follows : — 

S. Nom. Ep. and Ion. vnvs 

Gen. vn6s (also Tragic) 

Dat. v-ni 

Acc. vrja 

D. Nom. Acc. Voc. vrje 

Gen. and Dat. veotv 
P. Nom. jo}es 

Gen. vnwv (vavcpi only Ep.) veuv 

Dat. vnval (vau^i only Ep.) jrf)ecr<ri(v), v4effai{v) vav<rl(v) 

Acc. vrjas v4as vaas. 

6. y Opm (6 77, ford), Gen. opvl^-os, Doric opj/tx-os, etc. (§ 203). 

7. Xefp (?j, hand), Ion. x e P^ y ) X 6 P'j X e P a > Dual x 6 */ 36 ) X*P°w (poet, also x^'po"'] 
PL x 6 / ,€y > X*P® v i X e P (r ' / ('') (x e fy J€crt ( , ')> an< l -ecro-^y) in Homer), x*P as - 

Remark 1. Metaplasm (§72) occurs in Homer in the following words 
&A/d/, 7), strength, Dat. olXkI (from Nom. 5 AAE) ; 'Af57/s, -ov, 6, Gen. &'i5os, Dat 
&181 ('AI2); 'AvTicpdr-ns, -ao, 6, Acc. 'AvTKparria ('ANTI* ATET2 ) ; loo K-f], 7], pur- 
suit, Acc. Itona ('IQH) ; iKfpivn, 77, battle, Dat. vfffiivi (va/xis) ; — TldrpoKXos, Gen 
narpSicAov and -k\tjos, Acc. -/cAop and -/cAtjci, Voc. -KXeis (IIATPOKAH2) ; a*/8pc£- 
•7ro5oj', rb, slave, Dat. PL av8pa7rj5eo-<n(j/) ; irpSsunrov, to, face, PL irposutrara, 
TTposcoTrao-i; vfos, 6, son, has from 'TIET2 and 'TI2 the following forms : Gen 
vlios and vfos, Dat. vie? and uft, Acc. w ea and via ; Dual ufe ; Nom. PL v!4es and 
v! e?s and ufes, Dat. vldai, Acc. vzeas and ufas ; — Oldiirous, Gen. Ot5t7r^Sao 
('OIAIIIOAH2). 

Rem. 2. The following are defective in Homer : Xirl Dat. and to. \?ra, linen ; 
At? and A?j/ = \4a>v and x4ovra ; p.do'Ti and jxdcrriv = /xdaTiyi and -a ; cttix^j 
o-Ttxes, aTi'xas, row ; ocrcre, r<i), Nom. and Acc. Dual, both eyes ; 6<pe\os, advantage, 
and fifios, pleasure, in the Nom. only; i\pa, something pleasing, and §4p.as,form, in 
the Acc. only ; rj\e6s, infatuated, Voc. f/Ae and rjAee ; finally, S«, /cpt, &A<pi, as 
Nom. and Acc. Sing., from which come the forms Sw/ia, house, KpiS-f], barley, 
&K<piTov, dried barley. 

§ 215. Ad je cti ve s. 

1. Some adjectives in -vs, -eia, -v, have sometimes in the Homeric dialect, 
the feminine form -ea or -erj ; viz. wicia (instead of o>/ce?a), fia&ia (instead of 
jBo^eTo) ; Gen. jSo&ojs (and /Sa&eiTis) 1 Acc. 0a&eV ; so also in Herodotus, -eo, 
seldom -em, e. g. fia&4a, -4i) and -eia, fiap4a, evp4a, l&vs, -4a and -eta, &i\\ea (from 
jSHjAus), 7//xtVea. 

Remark. In Epic and Doric poetry, some adjectives of this kind, and also 
some in -6 as and -i\eis, are of the common gender, i. e. they have but one 



256 DIALECTS. [§ 216. 

termination for the Masc. and Eem., e. g."Hpy St)Xvs iovo~a, II. t, 97 ; so ^Sus 
avr/jL-f], Od. ^u, 309, and the irregular ttoXvs: ttoXvv icp' vypi]v, H- k, 27; so 7]/j.a- 
&6eis, av&efiSeis, apyivSeis, irorf]eis, agreeing with feminine substantives. — The 
Epic IS? or 7)i)s, Neut. fyv (£v and eu only as an adverb), Avants the feminine 
form ; in II. a>, 528, is found Scapoav ola SiScaai kolkuv, erepos 8e ideau (sc. dwpoov), 
therefore idwv as the Gen. PI. Neut., unless perhaps from Sc&pow the cognate 
Soaecau is to be supplied for edW to agree with, as in dwTTJpes idcov sc. Sooswu ; 
the Gen. Sing, is i^os. 

2. Adjectives in -yeis, -riecra-a, -rjey, are often found in Homer in the contracted 
form -fjs, -rjcraa, -r\v, e. g. Tijxrjs (and rifii'ieis), riprivTa] those in -6 e is, -6e<ro~a, 
-oev, contract -oe into -eu, e. g. TreSia XwTtvvra. 

3. In the Epic dialect, iroXvs is regularly inflected in the masculine and 
neuter, viz. Nom. iroXvs and ttovXvs, Neut. iroXv, with the secondary forms 
ttoXx6s, iroXX6v, Gen. ttoX4os, Ace. ttoXvv and irovXvv, ttoXv and iroXXov ; Nom. 
PL iroXees and 7roAe?s, Gen. iroXewv, Dat. 7coX£o~i{v), ttoX£o~o~i(v), and 7roA.ee(ro"i(v), 
Ace. 7roA.eas and 7roAe?s. — The Ionic dialect inflects -rroXXos, -$, -6v, regularly 
throughout. 

4. Compound Adj. in -os (comp. § 78, 1.) often have in Horn, a feminine ending, 
viz. -7j, e. g. afravdrri, aafieaTT), iroXvcpSpftr), a.piQt]Xii] (but also apiQqXoi avyai, II. 
X, 27), a/jL(pi^p6TT], ayxtdXr], apyvpoirefa, apxpipiiTT] ; on the contrary, kXvtSs as a 
feminine is found in II. £, 742. Od. e, 422, from the simple kXvtos, -i), -6v. Also 
the ending -os of the superlative is sometimes found as feminine, e. g. oXoAraros 
oS/at], Od. 8, 442. Kara Trpdrarrov 6irwiT-f)v, H. Cer. 157. Comp. § 78, Eem. 1. 

5. Compound adjectives in -irovs, -now, Gen. irofios, in the Epic dialect, can 
shorten -irovs into -iros, e. g.^I/ns aeAAoiros, II. &, 409. rpiiros, II. %, 443. 

6. y Ep(r)pes from ipiripos, epvcrdpfMares and -as from ipvo-dp/xaros, are examples 
of Metaplastic forms of adjectives in Homer. 

$ 216. Comparison. 

1. In the Epic dialect, the endings -dorepos and -doraros are used for the sake 
of the metre, even when the vowel of the preceding syllable is long, e. g. 
di£vpa>Tepos, oi^xipdoraros, KaKo^eivwrepos, Xapcvraros. — ~'A.vi7]p6s, troublesome, has 
the Comparative avi-qpiarepov, Od. /3, 190, and axapis, disagreeable, axaptcrTepos, 
Od. v, 392. Comp. § 82, Hem. 6. Adjectives in -vs and -pos, in the Homeric 
dialect, form the Comparative and Superlative in -i<av, -iov, and -iittos, -vj, -ov, 
sometimes also regularly, e. g. iXax^s, little, ixdxio~Tos, yXvtcvs yXvuiwv, fiafrvs, 

fid&HTTOS, KvSpOS, KllSlO-TOS, o'lKTp6s 0?KTl<TTOS and olliTpOTaTOS, TTO.XVS irdxiCTOS, 

Tcpiafivs irp4o~fSio~TOS, auvs &mo~tos. 

2. Besides the anomalous forms of comparison mentioned under § 84, the 
following Epic and dialectic forms require to be noticed : — 

aya&6s, Comp. ape'ioois, Xoi'iwv, Xa'trepos (Ion. Kpiaaosv, Dor. Kapfxau), Sup. 

KapTKTTOS. 

k an 6s, Kandorepos, x^ l poTepos, x*P*' l0}V i X e P €L ^ TC P 0S (Dor. xepr?W, Ion. effcroov), 
Sup. i)KiffTos (II. v|>, 531, Avith the variation ^kkttos, which Spitzner prefers). 

oXiyos, Comp. bxifau {6xi(oues l\<ro.v, populi suberant statura minores, II. a, 
519); fi^wv, Bion, 5, 10. 

priiSios, Ion., Comp. ptfirepos (Ion. prjiuu), Sup. prjiraTos and p-fi'iffTOS. 

fipaSvs, slow, Comp. fipd<r<rwu, Sup. /HapdiaTos (by Metathesis). 

fiuKpos, long, fidcrawu; — vax^s, thick, irdacwv. 



I 217.] 



PRONOUNS. 



257 



Remark 1. The positive XEPH2 (x^PVh X^pva, X^PV^, x*/"7«) found in 
Homer, and belonging to xepeiW, always has the signification of the Compara- 
tive, less, base?; weaker. The PL 7rAees and (Ace.) ir\4as are found in Homer 
from the Comp. TrAeW. 

Rem. 2. In the Epic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
in many instances, are derived from Substantives ; some of these forms have 
been transferred to the Common language: 6 fZaaiXevs jScwnAevTepos ; to 
Kepdos, gain, Kepdiov, more lucrative, KepSurros ; to &\yo s, pain, aXyiwu, more 
painful, &Ay i<n os ; to plyos, cold, piyiov, colder, more dreadful, piytaros ; rb /cf)- 
S os, care, ktjSio-tos, most dear ; 6 rj nvcav, dog, nvvrepos, more shameless, nvvraros. 



§ 217. Pronouns. 



I.S.N. 


iyd> and (before a vow- 


ffv Epic; tv Dor. and 






el) iyctiv Epic; eyw 


JEol. ; Tvvn Epic 






and eycov iEolic 






G. 


ip.4o, i/nev, fiev (p.ev) 


rev Dor.; a4o (ffeo), 


eo (eo), ew (eu) Epic 




Epic and Ion. 


creS ((rev), Ep. and Ion. 


and Ion. 




e'ttelb Epic 


veto and reo?o Epic 


efo Ep. ; eetb later Ep. 




i/xe&ev Epic 


ae&ej/ Epic 


e'3-e^ (e&ej/) Epic 




i[j.evs, ifiovs Doric 


TeCs, reovs Dor. 


eovs Dor. 


d. 


ifioi,fioi (/jLOL),e/XOljEol. 


(Toi Epic 






ipjtv Doric 


tiv Dor. ; rei'v Dor. et 


iV Dor. (usually or- 






Ep. (usually Orthot.) 


thotone) 






roi (toi) Ep. and Ion. 


4o?, of (ot)Ep.( Reflex.) 


A. 


ip.4, p.4 (tie) Epic 


cr4 (ae) Ep. ; t4 Dor. 


ee, e (e) (as Neut. 11. 






tu (tu) Dor. 


a, 236.) 






t[v in Theocritus 


j/fr (vlv) Dor. (and Att. 

poet.) (Am, her, it) 
fiiv (fuv) Ion. (him, her, 

it; seldom PL) 
o-cpe Dor. et Att. poet. 


D.N. 


vG>'i 




fftyooiv (o~<pooii/) 1 




G.D. 


vSslv 


•Epic 


o^i, <r*rf 1 E ic 

ffCpiOlV, C(p(fV J 


c</>ajiV, ccpcciu } 


A. 


vSi'i, v& . 




a<pa>'i, acpdi J 


cr<poo4, acptoG > Epic 








o^w, 0"<£a> ) 


P.N. 


7]fi^s Epic ; fifths Ion. 


fytets Ep. ; vfx.4es Ion. 






aftes Dor. ; 'dfifxes Epic 


fyie's Dor. ; Cities Ep. 




G. 


r)/j.4wi> Ion. and Epic 


vfi4<av Ion. and Epic 


o~<p4ci>i/ (ffcpeGw) Ion. 




^ueiW Epic 


v/xeicav Epic 


and Epic 




ap.fj.4wy .ZEolic ; afiSiv 


vp.fi4(au iEol. 


crepctiv Epic 




Doric 




atyeiwv Epic 


D. 


f]fJUU, ■flfllV, TjfiLV EpiC 


fytiV, vtiw, uttiV EpiG 






&fj.p.i{v) Mo\. and Ep. ; 


vfifjLi(v) Epic 


o"<^t (tr</)i) Ion.; c^i- 




afuv and afiiv Dor. 




o-t(j/), [o-<j!)to-i(j/)],o-^)tV, 




afx,fj.ecri(v) JEol. 




(a(pLv),(T<pi(a<pi)^.; 
aa<pi JEol. 


A. 


fjfi4as Ion. and Epic 


fyie'as Epic and Ion. 


cr<p4as (cr<peas) Ion. 
and Epic 




rifias, Tjfids Epic 


Stias, utias Epic 


erects, cruras Epic 




ap.fi€ Epic ; cute Dor. 


vfifie Epic ; v/xe Dor. 


(«r(/)e) Epic (I1.T, 265.) 
a<r<pe iEol. 

those written without 


Remark. The forms susce 


ptible of inclination are 


an accent. 





22* 






258 DIALECTS. [$ 218. 

2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns, e/xavrov, o-eavrov, etc., are 
never found in Homer ; instead of them, he writes the personal pronouns and 
the pronoun abros separate, e. g. ejx abrSu, i/xol abrS, i/xev abrrjs, e abri\v, of 
abrji. When the pronoun abros stands first, it signifies himself, herself itself 
even. But the Ion. writers use the compound forms e/xecavrov, a-ecovrov, ewvrov, 
etc. Comp. § 207, 1. 

3. Possessive pronouns : re6s, \ -oV Dor. and Epic, instead of c6s ; eo's, -•#, 
-oV, and os, % '6v, suus, Epic ; a/xSs, -rj, -6v Dor. and Epic, 'dfxjxos, d/xfxerepos JEol., 
instead of Tjfxerepos ; vio'trepos, of us both, Epic ; v/x6s, -r), -6v Dor. and Epic, 
ijfxfios JEol., instead of v/xerepos : o-<putrepos, of you both, II. a, 216 ; <r<p6s, -f], -6v 
JEol. and Epic, instead of o-cperepos. 

4. Demonstrative pronouns : (a) 6 i] ro (Dor. a instead of rj) ; Gen. tw Dor., 
to7o and rev Epic, ras Dor. ; Dat. ra Dor. ; Ace. rdv Dor. ; PI. rot and rat Dor. 
and Epic ; Gen. rda>v Epic, rav Dor. ; Dat. ro1<n, rcucri, rfjai, and rtjs Epic ; 
Ace. rds, r6s Dor. 

(b) tide: Epic Dat. PI. ToisSeci and rotsdeo-cn instead of ToTsSe; Epic Dat. 
rourlSe instead of ro7sde is found also in the Tragedians. 

(c) ovros and abr6s: an e stands before the long inflection-endings in the 
Ion. dialect (§ 207, 10), e. g. rovreov, ravrerjs, rovrecp, rovreovs, abrer), abrewv. 

(d) enetvos is written in Ion. and also in Att. poetry Ke7vos, JEol. ktjuos, Dor. 
rrjvos. 

(ej On the Ion. forms ccbrSs, r<avr6 instead of 6 abrSs, rb abr6, see §§ 206, 1, 
and 207, 1. 

5. Relative pronouns : o Dor. and Horn., instead of '6s ; oto Ion. and Epic ; 
oov Epic seldom, erjs H- ""> 208 ; fo-i and ps instead of ah. Besides os, H\, the 
other forms of the pronouns are supplied, in the Dor. dialect, by the forms of 
the article, e. g. r6 instead of 6', rod instead of ov, rrjs instead of rjs, etc. The 
Epic dialect uses both forms promiscuously, according to the necessities of the 
verse. In the Ion. dialect also, the forms of the article are frequently used 
instead of the relative. 

6. Indefinite and interrogative pronouns: (a,) rls, rl: Gen. reo (reo) Epic 
and Ion., rev (rev) Epic, Ion., and Dor., Dat. reu (recp), rip (rep) Epic and Ion.; 
PI. &o-o~a Neut., ottttoT &acra, Od. r, 218, Gen. tcW (reav) Epic and Ion., Dat. 
reoiffL Epic and Ion. (rdl<ri, S. Trach. 984). 

(b) ris, rl : Gen. reo Epic and Ion., rev Epic, Ion., and Dor., reea Ion. 



(c) osris: Nom. cms, Neut. oTi,oVriEp. 
Gen. '6rev Ep. and Ion., oreo, 

Hrreo, orrev Epic. 
Dat. orecp, '6rcp Ep. and Ion. 
Ace. onua Epic, Neut. on, 

orri Epic. 



Neut. PI. onva Iliad. 
orecai/ Epic and Ion. 

dreoicri Epic and Ion., Srerjo-i Her. 
orivas Epic, Neut. ariva and aaaa Epic. 



§ 218. The Numerals. 

The JEol. and secondary form of fiia is la, fojs, fy, iav ; also t£, II. £ 422, is 
instead of evi. Avo and dva are indeclinable in Homer ; the secondary forms 



§ 219.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 259 

are doici (indecl.), doiol, Soiai, Soid, Dat. doto?s, doio?<ri, Ace. $oid> (indecl.), hoiois, 
-ds, -d. — Tltcrvpes, -a JEol. and Epic, instead of recrcrapes, -a. — AvdSeKa and Si/o- 
KaiSeica Epic, also SwSe/ca. — 'Eei/cocrt Epic, instead of etnoffi. — 'OydcoKoura and 
£vvf)KovTa Epic, instead of bydoi\Kovra, ZvevhKovra. 'EvvedxiXoi and SeicdxiXoi 
Epic, instead of ivvaKisx^oi and fivpioi. The endings -aKovra and -axoo-Loi in 
the Epic and Ion. become -iiKovra, -t]k6<tioi. The Epic forms of the ordinals 
are rpiraros, rerparos, efido/xaTos, oydoxros, Zvaros, and dvaTOS. 



The Verb. 

§219. Augment. — Reduplication. 

1. All the poets, except the Attic, may reject the augment, according to the 
necessities of the verse, e. g. AOcre, crTeiXavro, &4<rav, oparo, eAe. The Ion. 
prose, as well as the Epic dialect, may omit the temporal augment ; it may also 
omit it in the Perf., e. g. afj.fx.aL, epyacrfiai, olK-qfxai, which is done by the Epic 
writers only in &vaya and epxarai from eipyw. 

2. On the omission of the Epic dialect to double the p when the augment is 
prefixed, e. g. epe|as, and on the doubling the liquids, e. g. ecrtreua, see § 208, 
4, and Rem. 

3. a in the Dor. writers is changed into d by the augment, and o: suffers no 
change, e. g. 0701/ instead of ^yov, a'ipeov instead of rfpeov. 

4. Verbs which have the Digamma, in Homer take the syllabic augment, 
according to the rule, e. g. avMvw, to please, Impf. edvdavov, Aor. eaSou , — e?5o- 
fiai, videor, eei<rdfj.r\v , also in the participle ietadfieuos. On account of the verse, 
the e seems to be lengthened in eloiKv?a, evade (eFade) from avSdva. 

5. In Homer, the verbs olvoxoew and avddva, take at the same time both the 
syllabic and temporal augment, viz. iavoxoei, II. 8, 3, yet more frequently cpvo- 
X^ei ; eJji/daue and ^l/Save. 

6. The reduplication of p is found in Homer, in pepviraifxluos, from pvirScc, to 
make dirty. On the contrary, the Epic and poetic Perfects, efj.fj.opa from fxeipofiai 
and iaavfxai from <rev<a, are formed according to the analogy of those beginning 
with p, i. e. by Metathesis ; hence efi/xopa, etc., instead of fj.efj.opa. — The Epic 
and Ion. Perf. of Krdofiat is eKT-qfiai. A strengthened reduplication is found in 
the Horn, forms SeiSexarai and SetSe/cro. 

7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the 
reduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the simple 
augment e is commonly omitted; thus, e. g. Kdfj.ua, to grow weary, Subj. Aor. 
KeKafuo; KeXo/xai, to command, etceKX6fj.riv ; KXvw,to hear, Aor. Imp. k4kXv&i, 
KeftAure; Xayxdvoi, to obtain, AeAax " j Xafifidvw, to receive, XeXafieoftai ; 
Aav&dvw, lateo,to escape notice, XeXa&ov ; ireidrw, to persuade, ireiri&ov, Treiri&6- 
\L-r\v; repirw, to delight, tgt pair 6 /atii/ ; rvyxdvw, to obtain, rervKelv, t ervKea^ai ; 
<f>ENH, to murder, eireepvov, ■jreepvov ; cppd((a, to say, to show, irecppaBoy, eivecppaSov. 
Aorists with the Att. reduplication (comp. § 124, Rem. 2) commonly take the 
augment: 'APX1, to Jit, fjp-apov] 5 AXn, to grieve, ^K-axov\ aXe^w, to ward off, 
^X-oXkov, aXaXKeiv ; 6pvvai,to excite, tip-opov : ev'nrTO),to chide, ev-evlirov. Two 



260 DIALECTS. [$ 220. 

verbs in the Aor. take the reduplication in the middle of the word : viz. ivlirTw, 
T)v-TTrairsv, and ipvKco, to restrain, jjpv-KaKov, epu/caKeW. Comp. the Presents, 
ovtvrj/ju, anTaAAw, OTrnrrevw. 

8. In the Dialects, there are still other forms of the Perf. and Plup. with the 
Att. reduplication (§ 124); thus, e. g. alpew, to take, Ion. ap-alp-qua, ap-aiprjfMcu : 
axdo/xai, to wander, Epic Perf. with a Pres. signification aA-aArj/xai ; 'APfi 
(apapt<rK(a), to Jit, Poet. dp-dpa, I Jit, (Intrans.), Ion. dp-qpa; 'AXX1 {aKaxK^t to 
grieve, Epic and Ion. a,K-'f]X e l JLa h aic-dxvpvu > 'ENEKH {(p4pu>), to carry, Ion. eV- 
jjveiyijuu*, ipeiTTco, to demolish, Poet. ip--f]pnra, Epic ip-epiirro ; ipi£a), to contend^ 
Epic ip-Jipio-fjicu. 

$220. Per sonal- endings and Mode-vowel s. 

1. Eirst Pers. Sing. Act. The original ending -p.i of the first Pers. Sing., is 
found in the Epic dialect in several subjunctives, e. g. KTeivco/xt, aydywfu, Ti>xwfju, 
'tKUfj.1, i&eXwjAi, 'idco/xi. Comp. § 116, 1. 

2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. In the Dor., and particularly in the Mo\. and Ep. 
dialect, the lengthened form -o-fra is found (§ 116, 2). In the Ind., this 
belongs almost exclusively to the conjugation in -/it, e. g. ri^Tja-^a, (prja&a, 
o"idoi<rfra, TraprjaSfa. In Homer, this ending is frequent in the Subj., e. g. i&eAya- 
fra, etir-pcr&a, more seldom in the Opt., e. g. KAaioi<T&a, pdAoia&a. 

3. Instead of the ending - ets, the Dor. frequently has the old form -es, e. g. 
tvtttcs instead of tvtttzis ; so in Theocritus trvpiades — <rvpt£tLs. 

4. Third Pers. Sing. Act. In the Epic dialect, the Subj. sometimes has the 
ending -at (arising from -ti) appended to the usual ending of the Subj., e. g. 
i&eAr)cn(v), ayycri, a\d\Kri<ri; the Opt. only in irapa.<pSair)(ri. 

5. Instead of the ending -et in the Pres. Ind. of the Dor. dialect, the form -r\ 
is used, though seldom, e. g. Siddo-Krj instead of Siddcicei. In the second and 
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Act., Theocritus uses the endings -r)s, --n instead of -as, 
-e, e. g. ireTr6v&r]s, oJr&wj instead of ir4irov&as, oirccire. 

6. First Pers. PI. Act. The Dor. dialect has retained the original ending 
-/Acs, e. g. rvTTToiJ.es instead of TvirTOfxev (§ 204). 

7. The third Pers. PI. Act. of the principal tenses, in the Dor. dialect, ends 
throughout in -vti, e. g. tvtttovti (instead of tvtttov<ti), tv^ovti, tvtttwi/ti 
(instead of TvirToxri), TeTvcpapri, iiraiveovTi, i^airaTwvTi. In the JEol. and Dor., 
this ending in the Pres. and Eut. is -oio~i instead of -oven, e. g. 7repnru4oi(n(u), 
vaioi<ri(v). 

8. Personal endings of the Plup. Act. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, the 
following forms occur : — 

First Pers. Sing., -ea the only Epic and Ion. form (-77 old Att., § 116, 6), e. g- 
iT€&iiTrea, #8ea, ireTroi&ea instead of eTe3Tj7r€t»/, etc. 
Second " " -eas, e. g. ireSr-fiTreas, Od. &>, 90, instead of iTe&iiireis. 

Third " " -ee(f ), C g. iyey6vee, KaTaAeAoiiree, e/3ej8f)a>/ceej/ (not Horn.). 

Second " PI. -eaTe, e. g. awySeare, Her. 9, 58. 

Remark 1. The third Pers. Sing. Plup. Act. in -et, as well as the same 
Pers. of the Impf. in -ei, is found in Homer before a vowel with the v paragogic j 



§ 220.] PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 261 

thus, £<TTT)Keiv, II. ^, 691. fie^A-fiKeiu, II. e, 661. fr, 270. £, 412. SeSenn/rj/ceii', Od. 
p, 359 ; — foKtiv, II. 7, 388. 

9. The second and third Pers. Dual of the historical tenses are sometimes 
exchanged for each other. Thus in Homer, the forms -top and -tr&ov (second 
Pers. Dual) stand instead of -ttjv and -a-^riv (third Pers. Dual), e. g. Stci>Kerov, 
II. k, 364. Xa^ixraerov, II. c, 583. ^wprjaarea-^oy, II. v, 301. On this inter- 
change in Attic, see § 116, Eem. 

10. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Ind. and Subj., Impf. Ind. and Opt. Mid. or 
Pass., the first Aor. Mid. Ind., after dropping <r, remain uncontracted in the 
Ion. and often in the Epic dialect, e. g. iirireWeai ; Homer uses either these 
forms, e. g. \slireai, XiXaieai, a<piicr)cu, ipvcrffecu, 4iravpr)ai, vTreXvffao, iyeivao, or 
the contract forms, -77 (from -ecu), -ev (from -eo), -co (from -ao), e. g. eirXev, epx^v-, 
<ppd(ev, iKp4[xco. When the characteristic of the verb is e, it is very frequently 
omitted in the Ion. dialect, before -ecu and -eo, e. g. <ptX4ai instead of </>iA.eecK, 
<pi\eo instead of <pLX4eo ; so in Homer, 4kX4% II. <w, 202, yet with the variation 
€KAe' from kA4o/jlcu. Comp. § 222, B (3). — The ending -eo in Homer is 
lengthened into -eio, e. g. epeio, aire'io, and the ending -e'ecu is contracted into 
-e?at, in verbs in -e«, e. g. jj.v&e?ai, vetai. Homer sometimes drops <r in the 
second Pers. Sing. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, also, viz. ^nvqai (and (A.4/j.vr)), 
fi4fiXr)cu, effcrvo. 

11. The Dual endings -rrju, -a&iqv, and first Pers. Sing, -/x-qv, in the Doric 
are, -rav, -<r&av, -pav (§ 201, 2), e. g. i^pacrd/xdy. In the later Doric, the 
change of 77 into d is found, though seldom, even in the Aor. Pass., e. g. irvirdv 
instead of 4tvit7)v. 

12. The personal-endings -jxefrov, -fie&a, in Epic, as well as in Doric, Ionic, 
and Attic poetry, often have the original forms -{xea^rov, -^ecd-a, e. g. rvKToiAsff- 
&ov y TvirTSfiea&a. 

13. The third Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., in the Ionic and Epic 
dialect, very generally ends in -arai, -aro, instead of -vtcu, -i>to, e. g. 7re7rei- 
frarcu, ireiravarai, e'j8ej8ovA.euaTo, iffrdXaro ; very often also the third Pers. PI. 
Opt. Mid. or Pass, is -oiccto, -aiaro, instead of -oivto, -cuuto, e. g. Tvirroiaro 
instead of tvtttoivto, aprjffataTo (Homeric), instead of ap^aaivTo. Also the 
ending -ovto, in the Ion. dialect, has this change, though the before v becomes 
e, e. g. i^ov\4aro instead of ifiovXovro. In verbs in -du and -4co, the 77 in the 
ending of the Perf. and Plup. -t)vtcu, -rjuro, is shortened in the Ionic into e, e. g. 
oIk4o.tcu instead of $Kt\vTa.i from oIk4co, ireri^aro instead of ireTifxriuTo from 
Tifidw. Also instead of -wtcu, the Ionic dialect has -4arai (instead of -darcu), 
e. g. 7reirreaTcu instead of Tc4irTav7ai. 'AttIkcltcu, in Herodotus, from the Perf. 
a<p7yp.ai (Pres. a<piKj/4ofxai) is the only example in which the rule stated § 116, 
5, is not observed. 

Kem. 2. Two Perf. and Plup. forms are found in Homer with the ending 
•Sara 1, -Sccto, from verbs whose characteristic is not 5, viz. iXavvco (ixdco) 
iX^Xafiai iXyXadaro, Od. 77, 86, and a.KaxK«> aK*7X e / uc " aKriX^ aral y U- P> 637 5 the 
8 seems to be merely euphonic ; yet it is to be noted, that the reading is not 
wholly settled ; the forms ippddarai and ippaBaro (from paiva) must be derived 
from the stem 'PAZfi (comp. (SoWare, Od. u, 150). 



262 DIALECTS. [$ 220, 

14. The third Pers. PL Aor. Pass, -rjaav is abridged into -er, in the Doric, 
and also frequently in the Epic and poetic dialect, e. g. rpd<p€i/ instead of irpd^ 
(prjffav. In the Opt. this abridged form is regular in the Common language 
(§ 116, 7), e. g. Tv(p&e7ev instead of TV(p&eir)<rav. 

15. The third Pers. PI. Imp. Act. in -rwaav, and Mid. or Pass, in a&cao-av, is 
abridged in the Ionic and Doric dialect (always in Homer) into -vtoip and -<t&u>v 
(§ 116, 12), e. g. tvtttovtuv instead of TvirT4rw<rav, 7re7roi3wTO>f instead of ireiroi- 
freracrav, rvirrecr^wv instead of TvirrioSroicrav. 

16. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. co and rj, are very frequently 
shortened in the Epic dialect into o and e, according to the necessities of the 
verse, e. g. ?o/j.ev instead of fyuej/; <p&i6/j.e(r&a instead of -tfytedu; <TTp4cpeTai 
instead of -tjtcu (§ 207, 4). 

17. The first Aor. Opt. Act., in the iEolic dialect ends in -eia, -etas, -etc, etc., 
third Pers. PI. -eiav, instead of -ai/xi, -ais, -at, etc., third Pers. PI. -cuev. See 
§ 116, 9. 

18. Infinitive. The original full form of the Inf. Act. is -fxsvai, and with 
the mode-vowel, -4/u.evai, which is found in the Epic, Doric, and iEolic dialects. 
This form is sometimes shortened into -fxev {-4[xev) by dropping at, sometimes 
into -vat by syncopating [xe {e/xe). But in the Epic dialect, the ending -eiv also 
is found, formed from -4/xev, and in contract verbs, and in the second Aor., also 
the endings -4etv and -e7v. The Pres., Eut., and second Aor. take the mode- 
vowel e and the ending -fMev, hence -4/j.ev, e. g. TvirT-4-[Xiu, Twpe/xev, elire/jiev. — 
Verbs in - a &> and - 4 «, as they contract the characteristic-vowel a and the 
mode-vowel e of the Inf. ending -4/u.evcu, have the form -^evat, e. g. yor]/xeyai 
(yodca), (pi\r)/j.evai ((pi\ew), (poprj/xevai (<pop4w). — With the ending -rj/xevai corre- 
sponds that of the Aorists Pass., e. g. Tvnr)iievai instead of Tvirr\vo.i, doAAtcr 
frfi/xevai ; so always in the Epic dialect ; but the Doric has the abridged form in 
-rj/xeu, e. g. rviT7]jxev. — In the Pres. of verbs in -/«, the ending -/xev and -fievai is 
appended to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in the second Aor. Act., to 
the pure stem, e. g. Ti&e-fxeu, Ti&4-/j.€i/ai, Icrrd-fxeu, lard-/u.€Pai, 8i86-nev, 8i86-(j.evcu, 
8eiKvv-/j.eu, deiKvv-fievai] &4-[xev, &4-/Aevcu, 86-jazv, 86-/u.evcu] so also in Perfects 
derived immediately from the stem of the verb, e. g. reSrud/x^v, fiefiduev. The 
following are exceptions, viz. ri^-fjfi^uai, II. ^> 83 (with which the forms of the 
Pres. Part. Mid. rid^ei/os, kixw^os, correspond), 8i8ovvai, II. a, 425, also the 
Inf. second Aor. Act. of verbs in -a and -u, which also retain the long vowel 
(§ 191, 2), e. g. <TT7)-/A€vai, )8^-;uej/at, Sv-fxeuai, instead of arrival, 8vvcu. 

19. Besides the forms in -4fxevai and -4/iev, the Doric dialect has one in -ez> 
abridged from these, e. g. &yev instead of &yeii>; Fut. ap/xSaeu instead of ap/xS- 
treiv] second Aor. 18 4v instead of t'8e?v, Aa/3eV instead of Xafieiv, etc. In the 
Doric of Theocritus, the iEol. Inf. ending -r\v is found, e. g. x a *-PW, second 
Aor. Xafiriv, instead of x ai P* lv i ^-a&eiu. 

20. The Inf. ending of the Aor. Pass, -rj/xevai, -rj/xev, is abridged into -77? in 
the Doric writers, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. /xe&vcr&rii/ instead 
of -&?ii>ai. The Inf. ending of the Perf. Act. varies between -y\v and -eiv in 
the Doric and iEolic writers, e. g. re^eupriKriv, yey6veiv instead of Te&eaywj/cerat, 
yfyov4vat. 



$$ 221, 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 263 

21. Participle. The JEolic dialect has the diphthong oi instead of ov before 
<r in participles, and ai instead of d, e. g. tvtvtwv, rinrroia-a, ti'httoi/, Aa/3o?era, 
AnroTaa instead of -ovaa; Tvipais, -aiaa, instead of Tir^/as, -aaa (§§ 201, 2. and 
207, 1). The Epic dialect can lengthen the accented o into a in the oblique 
cases, e. g. /j.€/j.awTos, irecpvuras. — The Perf. Act. Part., in the Doric dialect, 
sometimes takes the ending of the Pres., e. g. irecppiKovres instead of netypiKdrcs. 



§ 221. Epic and Ionic Iterative form. 

1. The Ionic and particularly the Epic dialect, and not unfrequently, in 
imitation of these, the Tragedians, have a special Impf. and Aor. form with the 
endmg -ctkov, to denote an action often repeated, or continued. This is called 
the Iterative form. It is regularly without the augment. 

2. It is generally found only in the Sing, and in the third Pers. PI. Ind. of 
the Impf. «and Aor., and is inflected like the Impf. ; for in the Impf. and 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., the endings -ctkoi/, -o-kcs, <nce(i/), -<tk6ixtiv, -<r/coi/(eo, ev), 
-<TKejOi preceded by the union-vowel e, are used instead of -ov, -ojxriv, and in the 
first Aor. Act. and Mid. the endings -ao-nov, -ao-KS/xrjv are used instead of -o, 
-a>?i/, e. g. 

(a) Impf. Sivev-ecncov, freA-ecr/ces, ex-efT/ce^), 7reA-e<r/ceTO, $ogk-£(Tkqvto. In 
verbs in -d<o, -de<ncov is. abridged into -aa/cov, which, according to the necessities 
of the verse, can be again lengthened into -dao-Kov, e. g. viKdo~Ko/j.ev, vaierdao"- 
kov. Verbs in -eco have -e'ecr/coj/ and -ecr/coj/, e. g. Ka\e-e<77ce, fZovKoXtscTKe ; o%xv*o~- 
kou, irwAeo-Kero, KaAeV/cero ; when the verse requires, -eeo-Kov can be lengthened 
into -eteaKoVi e. g. veiKeieo-Kov ; verbs in -ow do not have this Iterative form 
among the older authors ; verbs in -fxi omit the mode-vowel here also, e. g. 
rl&e-o-Koi/, MZo-<tkov, deiKw-o-Kov ; in some verbs the ending -chtkov has taken the 
place of -eovcoj/, e. g. piirr-acrKou, KpvTTT-acrKov, from ptTrrco, Kpinrra:. 

(b) Second Aor. eA-etr/ce, jSaA-ecr/ce, <pvy-e<TKe ; in verbs in -/«, without a mode- 
vowel, e.g. crra-ffKe (= ecrr^), irapefidcrKG (= irape^rj), 86<tk€, StWe; also an 
Iterative form of the second Aor. Pass, is found, viz. cpdveo~ice instead of i<pdvr] 1 
II. A, 64. Od. ft, 241, 242. 

(c) Eirst Aor. i\d<r-a(ncei/, avtifo-affKev, &<T-a(Tit^ nvr)<r-do~KeTO, ayvd><r-a<rice 
(instead of ayvoi\<Ta<TK€ from ayvoica). 



§222. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs. 

I. The Epic dialect. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -aw, -4w, -6<o, are subject 
to contraction, but by no means so generally as in the Attic. The contraction 
is made according to the general rules, with a few exceptions, as will be seen in 
the following remarks. 

A. Verbs in -aa>. (1) In these verbs, the uncontracted form occurs only in 
certain words and forms, e. g. irepaov, KaTefficiaov, vaierdovcri ; always in uAaeu, and 
in verbs which have a long a for their characteristic, or whose stem is a mono- 
syllable, e. g. Si^oLwv, Treiv&av, expae, ixP^ eTe (f 1- ° m XP" w j to ott ac ^)' 



264 DIALECTS. [$ 222. 

(2) In some words, a is changed into e, viz. fievoipeov from /xevoivdco, tfi/reov 
from oWaa>, 6/j.6k\zov from SjxoKXaco. Comp. § 201, 1. 

(3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, the contracted syllable 
is resolved, as often as the measure requires it ; this is done by inserting a simi- 
lar vowel, commonly shorter, more seldom longer, before the vowel formed 
by contraction ; in this way, a is resolved into da or dd, and co into oco or coco 
(§ 207, 2). The short vowel is used here, when the syllable preceding the 
contracted one is short, e. g. (Spco) Sp6co] but if this syllable is long, the long 
vowel must be used on account of the verse, e. g. rjPcbcotra. The resolution does 
not take place with the vowel d before a personal-ending beginning with r, 
e. g. Spa-rai, bpa-TO. Thus : — 



(Spans) 


Spas 


Spaas 


(6 paw) 


opco 


Sp6co 


(Spdea&ai) 


opaa&cu 


Spaacr&ai 


(Spdovcra) 


opcocra 


Sp6coo~a 


(/xevoiudei) 


jxtvoiva 


fxevoivaa 


(fiodovcri) 


fioaxri 


/3 OOOJCTl 


(edris) 


ias 


eaas 


(Spdoijxi) 


Spcp/xi 


SpScffJLl 


(fxvdecr&ai) 


p.vao'&cu 


jxvaacrSai 


(Spaovcri) 


dpcocri 


Spcococri. 



Remark 1. In Od. £, 343, the form opriai (from Spdeai) occurs instead of the 
Sprjai, which Eustath. cites. In the following Dual forms, ae is contracted into 
77 : Trposavdr]Tr]v, o-v\i)T7\v, <rwavTr)T7]v, cpoiTt]T't]u instead of -drrjv ; so also in the 
two verbs in -eco, S^apTryr^v, aireLX^rrju instead of -eirrjv. 

4. When vt comes after a contracted vowel, a short vowel may be inserted 
between vt and such a contracted syllable, e. g. qficoovTa instead of 7]ficovTa, 
yeXcbovTts, pvcbovTo ; in the Opt. also, the protracted -cool instead of -co is found 
in ^^wol/jll (instead of rj^doifii = ^/3oyu). The following are anomalous forms: 
vaierdcocra (instead of -oWa), crdco, second Pers. Imp. Pres. Mid. and third Pers. 
Sing, Impf. Act. from SAG, to save. 

Rem. 2. On the Inf. in -yuevai of verbs in -dca and -4tv, see § 220, 18, and on 
the Epic-Ionic contraction of or\ into co, see § 205, 5. 

B. Verbs in- 1 co. To this conjugation belong also all Futures in -ew and 
-eofxai, all second Persons in -eo, -ecu, and -770:1, second Aor. Inf. Act. in -eW, 
and the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -eco and -eico. 

( 1 ) Contraction does not take place in all forms in which e is followed by the 
vowels co, co, 77, 77, 0:, and ov, e. g. cpikecofxev, cpi\4ot/.u, etc. ; yet such uncontracted 
forms must commonly be read with Synizesis. In other instances, the contrac- 
tion is either omitted according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. <pi\4ei, ip4co 
Put., brpvviovcra Put., jSaAeW second Aor. Act., irecreecr&ai Fut. Mid., fuyecotri 
second Aor. Subj. Pass. ; or contraction takes place, and then, when eo is con- 
tracted, it becomes eu (§ 205, 1), e. g. alpevfirju, avrevv, y4vev ; except avepp'nrTovv 
and inrSp&ovv. 

(2) Sometimes the open e is lengthened into ei (§ 207, 1), e. g. eVeAe/ero, 
ireKeiov, 7rAeieo/, bicveico ; — SajJ.dco instead of da/xcd, (Aiydr) instead of jxiyy 
(second Aor. Subj. Pass.). 

(3) In the ending of the second Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. or Pass., two Epsilons 
coming together are either contracted, as in the third Pers., e. g. pvfre-eai 
= fxv&eTai, like (xvfrelrai, velai, like v ferae, or one e is elided, e. g. (iv&4ai, 



$ 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 265 

irwXeai. This elision commonly occurs both among the Epic and Ionic writers, 
in the second Pers. Impf. and Imp. Pres. Mid. or Pass., e. g. <pofieo, atceo, curio, 
ifryeo. In such cases, the accent is on the penult, whether the word ends with 
-ecu or -eo (§ 220, 10). 

Eem. 3. On the irregular contraction in the Dual, see Rem. 1 ; on the Inf. 
in -^peuai, see § 220, 18. 

C. Verbs in - 6 w. These verbs follow either the common rules of contrac- 
tion, e. g. yowov/Acu, yowovcrhai, or they are not contracted, but lengthen o into 
eo, and then the forms of verbs in -6w resemble those of verbs in -dw, e. g. 
IdptioovTa, ISpcaovcra, virvdoovTas (comp. rifiwovTa, 4 above) ; or they become wholly 
analogous to verbs in -aw, since they resolve -oven (third Pers. PI. Pres.) into 
•o'airi, -ovvto into -6wvro, and -o?ev into -6wev, and consequently suppose a 
contraction like that of verbs in -dw : (apoovai) apovo-i dpSwcri (comp. 6p6wo~i), 
(Zii)i6ovTo) §t)Xovvto Stjiowvto (comp. bp6wvro), (dri'iooLev) Srj'ioTv $r]'i6wev (comp. 
op6wev). But this resolution into -6w or -wo is confined to such forms as admit 
it in verbs in -dw ; hence, e.g. the Pres. apo?s, apoi, dpovre, and the Inf. apovv, do 
not admit this resolution. 

II. Ionic dialect. ( 1 ) In the Ionic dialect, only verbs in - d w and - 6 w suffer 
contraction ; verbs in -ew commonly omit it, except the contraction of -eo and 
-eov into -ev, which frequently occurs (§ 205, 1), e. g. cpiXev/xev instead of (piXeo- 
fxev = (pi.kovp.ei/, ecpiXevu instead of ecpiXeov — i<piXovv, (piXev instead of (piXeov 
= <piXov. 

(2) The uncontracted forms exhibited in the table (§ 135) of the second 
Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Mid. or Pass, in -ey, -dp, -op, -eov, -dov, -6ov, e. g. 
(piXey, ripdr], /j.io~&6r], cpiXeov, rt/xdov, juo~&6ov, etc., are found in no dialect, and 
are presented merely to explain the contraction. For even the Ionic writers 
use here the contracted forms of verbs in -da and -6co, e. g. ripa, fiur&pt, rifiw, 
(xia&ov, etc. ; but of verbs in -ew, as also in barytone verbs, they do not use the 
endings -77, -ov, but -ecu, -eo, e. g. rvirr-eai, ervirr-eo, <piXe-eai, i<piX4-eo. — On the 
elision of e in the ending -eeo, see above, No. 1, B (3). 

(3) Verbs in -dw follow the common rules of contraction; but in the uncon- 
tracted form, the a is changed into e, e. g. opew, opeopev instead of bpdw, xpeerai, 
XptovTou instead of xp^ ra h etc - Comp. § 201, 1. 

(4) Ao in the uncontracted forms is frequently lengthened into ew (§ 207, 3), 
e. g. xpeWTca, eKrewvro, bpewvres, ireiped>p.evos instead of (xpdovrou) X9 UVTal t 
etc. 

(5) The change of the a into e, as in opew, explains the usage among the Ion. 
writers of sometimes contracting ao and aov, and also eo and eov in verbs in 
-ew, into -ev (§ 205, 1), e. g. elptiorew instead of elpwraov, yeXevcra instead of 
yeXaovaa, ayairevi/res instead of ayairdopres. So also in the Doric dialect, e. g, 
yeXevvn instead of yeXaovcri. This contraction into ev instead of ov is often 
found even in verbs in -6w, e. g. Siitaievcri instead of (Zucadovcn) diKaiovcri, 
SiKatevv instead of 5t/catoOV, idiKaievv, ffrecpavevvrai from o-Te<pav6w. 

(6) In Ionic prose, the Epic resolution is found but seldom in verbs in ~da> f 
e. g. Kop.6wcn, 7]yop6wvro, Her. 

m 



266 DIALECTS. [$ 223. 

III. Doric dialect. (1) Contrary to the common usage of the Doric, oe and 
aet are contracted into rj and tj (§ 205, 3), e. g. Tip.r\re instead of ri[xdere = 
tilults, <poiTJjs instead of tyoiras, bpr\v instead of bpav. The Inf. is written 
without an i subscript, as the uncontracted form originally ended in -aw, 
Comp. also II. 5, also § 134, 3. 

(2) The Inf. of verbs in -4xo has a double form, either the abridged form in 
-eV instead of -etu, e. g. ttoUv instead of iroielv, or according to the analogy of 
verbs in -da, a form in -yv (from -erjy), e. g. (piXijv instead of <piXeeiv == <piXelv, 
KOfffxyv instead of koct/xuv, cppovTJv instead of (ppovelv. 

(3) In the Doric and iEolic dialects, ~ao, -aov, and -aca are contracted into d 
(§ 205, 2), e. g. TreivaiJ.es instead of ireivajxev (Treivdo/xey), ireivuvTi instead of 
treiv(d-ov)a-<Ti, yeXav instead of yeX(d-av)av, (pvaavres instead of <pvo-{d-o)a-vres. 

Rem. 4. On the contraction into -ev instead of -ov, see § 205, 1. — A striking 
peculiarity of the Doric dialect, especially of the later Doric as used by The- 
ocritus, is, that it frequently has a long a even in the inflection of verbs in -ea, 
e. g. eirovaaa instead of eTt6vr\o~a. from irovea, icpiXacra instead of i<piX7]<ra from 
<piXea. 

$ 223. Formation of the Tenses. 

1. Besides the verbs mentioned (§ 130), the following also in the Homeric 
dialect retain the short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. Korea, to 
have a grudge ; veiKea, to quarrel ; ravva, to stretch ; ipta, to draw. On the con- 
trary, eiraivea, to approve, has eir^vrjo-a. 

2. In the Put. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. of pure verbs, which retain the 
short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, and in the same tenses of verbs 
in -£«, -<ro~a (-rra), the <r can be doubled in the ending, in Homer and other 
non- Attic poets (§ 208, 4), e. g. eyeXacrae, KOTecrcrd/xei/os, bixoffaai, erdwaffe, 
SiKaacai, K.6iiio~<re. 

3. The form of the Attic Fut. (§ 117) occurs in the Homeric dialect in verbs 
in -ifa, e. g. KTepiovo-i, ayXa'ie?<r&ai, together with the common Futures bpfxlaro-o- 
fiev, KOTTpiccrovTes, kov'ht<tovo~i{v). From verbs in -ea, -da, -va, Horn, forms 
Futures which are similar to the present of these words, viz. in verbs in -4a, he 
often uses the ending -ea instead of -eca, e. g. nopeet, II. fr, 379. aopeeis, II. v, 
831. fxax^ovrai, II. /3, 366 ; — in verbs in -da, after dropping er, he places before 
the vowel formed by contraction, a corresponding short vowel, e. g. avri6a>, 
eX6a<ri, da/xda. ; — in verbs in - v a, ipvovcri and rauvovai are found. 

4. In the Doric dialect, all verbs in - (a take £ instead of a in those tenses 
whose characteristic is <x, i. e. in the Fut. and Aor., e. g. Sind^a, dma^a, e'5i/ca£a, 
instead of Swao-a, e'St/ccwra. But the other tenses of verbs with the pure charac- 
teristic 8, follow the regular formation, e. g. edLKaoftriv, not eSindx&'nv- This 
peculiarity of the Doric appears even in certain verbs in -da, which, in forming 
the tenses, retain the short a, and in this respect are analogous to those in -(a, 
which likewise have a short vowel, e. g. yexda, eye?^a instead of iyeXacra, yet 
not vinda, viKa^a, but viKacra (Att. utKrjcra). In Doric poetry, the regular form 
of all these words can be used, according to the necessities of the metre. 

5. The following verbs in -Qu have, in Homer and the Ionic dialect, £ instead 



$ 223.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 267 

of <r, through the whole formation, viz. afipordgca, to wander; aXaird^a, to 
empty, Fut. dAa7ra£&>, etc. (so also Xenoph. An. J. 1, 29) ; Sv 0Tra\i(w, to shake; 
8a''i(a}, to divide, to put to death ; 4yyvaAi£w, to give ; iuapi(<o, to spoil a dead 
enemy ; &pv\\i (a, to break in pieces ; /xepfx-npl (a>, to reflect ; ir e A e fx i £a, to 
shake ; iro\efii£ci), to contend ; <x r v <p e A i £a> , to smite. 

6. Liquid verbs in -aivw, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with the 
ending -dva instead of -rji/a (§ 149, Eem. 2), have d in the Doric, and 77 in the 
Epic and Ionic. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and poetic dialect of 
all periods, form the Eut. and first Aor. with the ending -crw and -a- a, viz. 
KeAAco, to land (/ceAcrcu, comp. /ceWcu from ksvt4u, to goad) ; efAco, to crowd 
together (eAcrcu) ; Kvpca, to meet, to fall upon; apapio-Kco ('AP-H), to Jit (^pca, &po~ai) ; 
op-vv/xi, to excite (opera, <bp<ra.); Siacp^eipu}, to destroy (Siacp&epcrai in Homer); 
Keipu, to shave (eKepaa in Homer, but first Aor. Mid. eKeipdfxrjv) ; epvpea, to mix, to 
knead ((pvpaco, eepvpaa, ire<pvpcro(xai, Epic and old poetic; second Aor. Pass. 
iip&p-nv in Lucian, who also has the poetic Perf. ir4<pvpp.ai, while in prose, the 
verb <pvpdw, ifpvpaaa, ire^vpaixai, etc., is used). The Opt. oc^eAAetei/, Od. £, 334. 
II. ir, 651, is formed according to the usage of the iEolic. 

7. To verbs which form the Fut. without the tense-characteristic c (§ 154, 4) 
belong the following forms of the Epic dialect : fieo/ncu or Pelofxai, second Pers. 
$677, / shall live, perhaps from fiaivw, to go, to live, also from AAH, to know, to 
learn, and KEIH (Ke?fj.cu, to lie down), Srjw, Sfeis, Stio/aci/, Srjere (I shall view, find), 
and Kelio or k4u, K€i4/xeu, /cetW, /ceW. 

8. To verbs which form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic <r 
(§ 154, 7) belong the following forms of the Epic and poetic dialect: x*<*-> to 
pour out, %x* va (Homer; Att. e% ea ) I o" 6 ^) *° shake, z<ro~eva and icraevafi^v 
(Homer), a\4o/xai and aXsvofxai, to avoid, 7/AetWo, etc. (§ 230) ; Kaiw, to burn, 
€K7]a, eKeia Epic, eKea Tragic (§ 230). 

9. To verbs which have an active form for the Fut. Perf. (§ 154, 6), belongs 
also the Epic Kex a pV« (with Kexapyo-oficu), I shall be joyful, from x a 'V w ' 

10. The exchange of the endings of the second Aor. with those of the first 
Aor. (§ 154, 7) is somewhat frequent in the Epic dialect, e.g. /3aiV«, to go, 
4 /3 4} a €T 0, Imp. jS^creo ; Svofxai, to plunge, i 8 v <r e t 0, Imp. Svcreo, Part. SuaS/xeuos ; 
&yw, to lead, 'd^ere, a^eixev; iKu4ofxai, to come, f|oi/; 4\4y/j.-ny, I laid myself down 
to sleep, Imp. \e|o, A.e£eo ; opvv[xi, excito, Imp. opceo, opffev, <p4pw, to bear, 
o?<re (oT<T€ is also Att.), otarere, oiVeVw, olaovTwv, ol<r4fj.ev, ol<r4(j.evai; det'Sw, to 
sing, Imp. d e i <r e 0. 

11. Several second Aorists, in Homer, are formed by a Metathesis of the 
consonants (§ 156), in order to make a dactyle, e. g. '4hpa.Kov instead of eSapKov 
(from S4pKO/j.ai), eirpa^ov (from irepSna), eSpafrov (from dap&duco), ^fx^porov 
(instead of r^iapTou from afxaprdvca) . For the same reason Homer syncopates 
the stem (§ 155), e. g. ayp6jxevos from ayep4oSrai {ayeipa, to collect) ; eypsro, 
eypso (Imp.), iypoiro, eypecr&cu (with the accent of the Pres.), 4yp6/j.evos from 
4y€p4cr&cu (iyelpoo, to wake); mSy-riv, 4tttoij.71v, irr4(r&cu, irrofxevos (ir4TOfiai, to 
fly) ; e/ce/cAeTo, k4k\sto, KeK\6fxeyos (ic4konai, to summon, excite) ; ir4(pvov, eirecpvov 
(*ENn, to kill). 

12. In the first Aor. Pass. Homer inserts a v, according to the necessities of 



268 DIALECTS. [$ 223. 

the verse, not only as other poets (§ 149, Rem. 4) in Kpiva and k\(vw (SiaKpiv 
&7jTe, Kpiv&eis, e'/cAiVdTj), but also in IBpvca, to establish, and irviu), to blow [I8pvv^rnv 
and i<5pv&riv, ajAirvvv&ri) . 

13. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs 
as in the tense-formation assume an e (§ 166) or are subject to Metathesis 
(§ 156, 2), e. g. x«'P« KexapriKa (from XAIPE-H), /3aAAa> fiefiX-nica (from BAA). 
Except these, he forms only second Perfects (which belong commonly to 
intransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification) ; but even in pure verbs 
and in the impure verbs mentioned above, he rejects the k in certain persons 
and modes, and regularly in the Part. ; in this way, these forms become analo- 
gous to those of the second Perf. These participles either lengthen o and e into 
■n, e. g. fiePapiqojs, burdened (from BAPEfl), KeKoprjcas, satisfied (from Kope-vuv/xi), 
KeKorrjcos, enraged (from Korea}), ren-nds, troubled (from TIEH), rerX-nus, enduring 
(from TAAfl), Kenacprjcos, gasping for breath (from KA^EH), KeK/m-nus, wearied (from 
Ka.fx.voo), Tre-KTTi&s (from wTTjaaw, to Shrink through fear), r&wnobs, kskttiotl, /cexa- 
pr)&s (from x a ' L P w ) '■> — or ^ e y retain, though more seldom, the stem- vowel without 
change, e. g. j8fj6aws (from fiaivw, BAH), inyeyavla (from yiyvofxai, TAD.), Se5aa>s 
(from 5i5a(T/ca>, AAfl), 7re<7>tii;ra (from <pvoo), kuraoos (from '[o~Tr\fxi, 2TAH), fj.eixa.cis 
(with ne/j-aws and fxefxaSres from MAfl). The accented o of the oblique cases 
can, in the first instance, according to the necessities of the verse, be lengthened 
into co, hence re^vrjoros and -a>ros, re^i/rjora and -Soto., KeK/xrjOTa and -cora ; but 
when the Nom. has a short penult, ca is always used (except in eo-raSros), e. g. 
j8e£ao>Tos. The ending -d>s, formed by contraction, is resolved by e in Treirrecora 
(from iriiTTQ}), re&vewTi, and according to the necessities of the verse, e can be 
lengthened into ei, e. g. refrveiwros. The feminine form -wcais found only in 
fiefiao-a, Od. v, 14 ; in some feminine forms, the antepenult, which properly would 
be long, is shortened on account of the verse, e.g. apapvla (Fern, of ap-np&s from 
apapiffKoo), /j.e/xa.Kv?a (of fxefxrjKdos, from fx-nKaofxai), Te&aXv7a (of refr-nXoos, from 
fraAAco), XeXaKvla (of XeXrjKoos, from XacrKoo), ireTra&vla (from irdtrx®)- 

Remark 1. The form resolved by e, in the Ionic dialect, has become the 
permanent one with some participles, e. g. earecos ; so Te&vedos (never Te&vdbs) 
and Tefrv-nKcZs from refryrjKa, remains even in the Attic dialect. In these forms, 
the a> remains through all the cases, e. g. 

teredos, ecrrecoa'a, e&reoos, Gen. eareooTos, -doo^ns 
re&veobs, refrvecbaa, redrew?, Gen. re^vecoTos, -ooa-ns. 

Befi-nKa and rerXT]Ka never have these forms. Comp. § 193, Rem. 3. 

14. Some verbs, which in the stem of the Pres. have the diphthong fu, 
shorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect into v, in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and 
in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

irev&ofjLcu, to ash, tt e ir v cr fx a i ; creveo, to shake, Mid. and Pass, to hasten, eaav- 

/xai, first Aor. Pass, io-avfr-n v; revx® (poet.), paw, Perf. rervy/xai, Aor. 

e t u x & 77 j/ ; tpeiyoo, to fee, Perf. it e<pvy fxev os. 

Rem. 2. Xeco (formed from x*Foo, xeuco), to pour out, follows the analogy of 
these verbs, in the forms Kexvi<a, /ce'xfyiai, ixvfrnv ; these forms have been trans- 
ferred to the Common language also (§ 154, Rem. 1 ). Contrary to the analogy 



$ 224. CONJUGATION IN -[U. 269 

just stated, the v is long in the Homeric form Tr4iri>v/j.cu from irveco {irvsFca), to 
blow. 

Rem. 3. In Homer, Od. c, 238, the third Pers. Opt. Plup. AeAi/To instead of 
AeAviTo is found, according to the analogy of ir-nyvvro, dcuvvro. 

Rem. 4. The Homeric Perfects aKaxypevos, aAaA^evos, apr}pe/j.eyos, i\rj\dfji.c- 
vos. aKaxnvSv-h aAaArjaSrai, have the accentuation of the Pres. 

§ 224. Conjugation in -/xi. 

1. On the lengthened form of the second Pers. Tifrrjofta, Stdoia&a, see § 220, 
2; on the Iterative forms in -<tkov, see § 221 ; on the Inf. forms in -fxwai, -fiey, 
see § 220, 18. 

2. In the Epic, Ion., and Dor. writers, some verbs in -fxi in the second and 
third Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf, frequently have the contracted forms of verbs 
in -ew and -6<a (§ 172, Rem. 8), e. g. riSre?s, r&e?, 5ido7s, BlSo?, eVt^et, iSidovs, 
e'StSou, let; — contracted forms of 'icrTrijxi are very rare, e.g. i<nS. instead of 
"o-Triai, Her. 4, 103. In the second Aor. Opt. Mid. the Ionic writers have the 
resolved form d-eo iV??*'? as if from 0E£2, e. g. Trposfreoiro, Trpos&eoioSe. 

3. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -vy.i form an Opt., not only in the Mid., as 
sometimes in Attic writers, e. g. tiaivvro, II. co, 665. (comp. AeAuro, § 223, Rem. 
3), from daivvfiai, but also in the Act., e. g. ticSd/xty (instead of iKZvi-q^v) from 
e/cSuw, (ptirj (instead of <pvir\) from (pva; so cp&7o, <p&iTo Opt. of icp^ifjuju from 

4. The third Pers. PI. Impf. and second Aor. in -e-ccw, -r)-<rav, -o-crav, -a-ffav 
-v-trav, are abridged in the Epic and Dor. dialects into -ei/, -au, -ov, -vv, e. g. 
eTtid-ev instead of eTifrecrcw, e&ev, &eV instead of e&e<rav ; ecrdj', (rrdz/ instead of 
i<xvr\aa.v, <£>&d»/ instead of ecpfrrjorav, e/Jcw, ^dp instead of efirjcrav; e8i5oi', StSoi/ 
instead of eSt'Socav, eiW, 8oV instead of ZZocrav ; ec/wv instead of e<pv<rav. 

5. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. Act. has in Horn, the common form 
t'cT??, but H. i, 202. Kcfo'iara ; Trori&ei in Theoc. instead of irorfoes or Trp6s&es 
from TI0EH. — In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and second Aor. Mid. Imp., 
Homer rejects the cr and admits the uncontracted form even when it could be 
contracted, e. g. Saivvo, /xapi/ao, <pdo, <rvv&eo, !V&eo. — In the Ion. dialect, the first 
o of the ending -curat, second Pers. Mid. or Pass., is changed into e, after the 
rejection of the <r, e. g. iiricrTeai, Svveai, instead of eirla-Tcurai, Svvaaai; hence 
the contracted forms iiri<TTr) in the Ion. poets, and also Svyp (§ 172, 2) in the 
Tragedians. 

6. The short stem-vowel is sometimes lengthened before personal-endings 
beginning with p and v, according to the demand of the measure, e. g. Ti^jue- 
vos ; Sidovvcu ; so also SiSvfri, '{XrjSn instead of "Aa&i. 

7. The third Pers. Sing. Subj. has often in the Epic dialect the ending -<ri 
(§ 220, 4), e. g. ZSffi and 8c6j?<n (instead of 8£), jue&fycn. 

8. The contracted Subj. of verbs with the characteristic a and e, is sometimes 
resolved by e in the second Aor., Epic dialect, and regularly in the Ion. 

(a) Verbs in -a {"o-Tru-u) : — 

(IffTa.-) 1<ttu) Ion. i<rT6-ct), l(TT€-7]s, toTe-a^ei/, -e'-TjTe, -e-cocri 

(ffToi-) CTtt " CTT6-&J, CTTe-pS, 0"Te-WjU6J', etC. 

23*' 



270 



DIALECTS. 



[$ 224. 



Remark I. So also in Herod.: 71-poecrTeaTe and ea-reacri, kare&s, instead of 
-ctacn, -acos, Gen. ecrrewTos, Neut. £<rTec*>s, Fern, kareuaa. So also in the Att. 
re&vec&s (with t&vtik&s), Te&vewcra, re&vecas, Gen. re&vewTos. 

(b) Verbs in e {rldv/u) : — 

ti^-w Ion. rt&e-co, T&4-ris, Tifre'-ayiei/, -e-7jTe, -i-uffi 
ti&wlicu " ri^e-wfxai, Ti^e-77, etc. 

dw " fre-a>, i9-e'-7?s, &4-(i)fJi.€V, etc. 
&a>/xai " fre-w/xai, etc. 

Eem. 2. Here also the two Aorists of the Pass, of all verbs are like the 
verb Ti^ijfjLi, e. g. 

Tvirw, -rjs Ion. TU7rew, -ej;?, -eufxev, -4r]Ts 
Safiw, -rjs " Sctyieco, -4rjs, -eco/xev, -e7]Te 
eupe&eD, -77s " eupe&eco, -6775, etc. 

(c) Verbs in (StSw^ut) 5 the contracted second Aor. Subj. is resolved in 
Homer by means of «, e. g. 5ci>wai instead of 8w<rt. 

9. In the Subj. second Aor., Homer uses the following forms, according to 
the nature of the verse : — 





Contracted, 


Resolved and lengthened forms, 


Sing. 1. 


CTW 


creco, creico, /3eio,ucu 


2. 


GTrjs 


CT^S 


•3. 


(Trrj 


CT^p, e/J.Pr)r}, <p7]r], cpfrfiri 


Dual. 


arrjrou 


irap(TTr)eTov 


Plur. I. 


(rruLtev 


cTTew/xej/ (dissyllable) ardofiev, Kara^io/xev 


2. 


0"T7)t€ 


<TT^eT€ 


3. 


(TTto(ri(v) 


(Trewcri(j'), TrepurTrjcacri, 11. p, 95. 


Sing. 1. 


Sra 


3-eco, freiw, Safxeica 


2. 


&T)S 


^■eTys, &7777S, and ^efys 


3. 


&f 


^er?, £7777, a^/jp, and Liefreir} 


Dual. 


&TJTOV 


freitTou 


Plur. 1. 


frob/Aev 


3-ew/iev, &eio[xev 


2. 


&r}T€ 


8a,ueieT€ 


3. 


&G>(Tl(v) 


&ecocn(i/), &eicocrt(v) 


Sing. 1. 


8 CO 




2. 


8o3s 




3. 


S<£ 


8^77 en (y) and 5c6?7 


Plur. 1. 


8co/xei/ 


Scoo/xei/ 


2. 


Scot e 




3. 


5w<ri(v) 


8c6co<n(v) 



Rem. 3. The resolution by means of e is found in verbs with the stem- 
vowels a or e; the e is commonly lengthened, (a) into ei before an sound; 
(b) into 77 before 77 in verbs with the stem-vowel a; (c) sometimes into e«, some- 
times into 77 before 77, in verbs with the stem-vowel e. Verbs with the stem- 
vowel are resolved by w. 

10. The Impf. iriSfrjy, or commonly irt&ow, has in the Ion. the form iri&ea 
(like ireTvcpta Ion. instead of irervcptiv, § 220, 8), iri&ees, -ee, etc. 

11. In Homer, a shortened form of the first Aor. fcrTTjcrai/, is found, namely, 
eo-Tdcraj/, they placed. II. fx, 56. Od. 7, 182. <r, 307 ; also ea-rrjTe (with the variation 
eiTTTiTe), II. 8, 243, 246, instead of eVraTe (eoT^/care). 



$$225, 22C.J CONJUGATION IN -{JJ.. El/Xl, TO BE. El/A I, TO GO. 271 

12. Ill the third Pcrs. PI. Mid. or Pass, the v before the personal-endings -rot 
and -to is regularly changed, by the Ion. writers, into a (§ 220, 13), e. g. 

T&eaTcu, SiSoaTcu, iSeiKvvaro Ion., instead of riSrevrai, etc. 
But when an a precedes the v, the a is changed into e, and v into o, e. g. Iffriarax 
Ion., instead of 'io-tocutcu, lariaTo Ion., instead of "crravTo. 

13. The third Pers. Sing, in the Doric is -rt, e. g. 'forart, tiStjti, SjSwtj, 5et«- 
i/vti, and the third Pers. PI. ends in -v™, e. g. Io-toluti, TtfreVrt, SiSoj/rt, Sei/ci/tWi. 

14. The forms of the first Aor. Mid. i&rjKti/xriv and eSw/ca^rji/ and the Part. 
^Kafxeuos are found in the Ion. and Dor. writers ; on the contrary, the Att. 
writers use here also, the forms of the second Aor. Mid. The remaining 
Modes, as also the Part. Scoxd/xeyos^ are not found. 

15. From SiSco/u, Homer has a reduplicated Put. Siddxro^v and Sidwaeiv. 



§225. Ei>i ('ES-)> to be. 



PRESENT. 


S. 1. 
2. 

3. 

P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Indicative. 
ejAixl jEoI., instead of iff-fil 
icai Epic, also Eur. Hel. 1250. 

els Ion. 
ei^ri Dor. 

elfxev Epic and Ion. 
eVre regular 
edo-i{i/) Epic and Ion., ivri Dor. 


Subjunctive. 

1. ea> Ep. and Ion. /xereia) Ep. 

2. e-ps Ion. 

3. €3?, ipari(v), 77 o"*^), efy Epic, €77 
Ep. and Ion. 

PI. eoofxev, eyre, iWi Ep. and Ion. 


Imperative. 
S. 2. eo-o-o iEol. and Epic 
P. 3. iovToov Ion. 


Inf. efievcu, c/j-fxevcu, e/xev, efifxeu Epic 
^fi€u or %tes, clfxeu or elfj.es Dor. 


Participle, 
icov, iovaa, iou Ep. and Ion. 


IMPERFECT. 




iHcfrcafr'ye. 


Optative. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


ea (comp. iTi&ea), ^a, IW, eV/coi' Epic and Ion. 
e-qo-fra Epic, eas Ion. 

IV Ep. and Ion. TJr)u, ?jev, lo7ce(j/), Ep., ^s Dor. 
^\(TTt]v Epic 

^uev or ^es, eT;uei' or e?jiies Dor. 
eare Ion. 

eVay (iVeo-aj/) Epic and Ion. 5 eiaro (instead of 
fyro) Od. v, 106. 


Hois 

eoi Epic and Ion. 

e?re Epic 
eleir Epic 


Fut. eaofj.ai and eWo^ai, etc. Epic, according to the necessities of the verse, 


2. ecrecu. 3. effeTcu, itrelrai. 



$ 22C. ET/xt ('I-)> to go. 

Pres. Ind. S. 2. eTo-^a Epic, els Ion. Subj. Sing. 2. Pcrs. ? v <r&a Epic 
Zh/] 'i/xevai, Ifxev Epic 



/»«/)/! 7»cZ. S. 1. 
2. 
3. 



fjia (and 77W) Epic and Ion., f?W Epic 

■fy'tey (and f/ets), jes Epic 

i;*e (and jjet) Epic and Ion , %Ze{v) Epic, r?e(i/), 5fe(v) Epic 



272 DIALECTS. [$ 227. 

P. 1. f jjo/jiep 

3. fj'iov Epic, %'iaav and ri<rav Epic and Ion., Iffav Epic 
D.3. ZV^Epic 
Op*. S. 3. ioi Epic, i'er,7 II. t, 209. (eV and eft? II. o, 82. co, 139. Od. |, 496, 

come from et/Ai). 
iFu^. and J.o?\ iLfrc?. dtro/xai, eftraTo, third Pers. Dual hurdvSrnv, II. o, 544. 



Verbs in -w, which in the Pres., Perf., and second Aor. Act. and 
Mid., follow the analogy or Verbs in -fit. 

$227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 

In addition to the Aor. forms mentioned (§§ 191, 192), the poetic and 
especially the Epic dialect has the following : — 

A. The Characteristic is a Vowel. 

(a) Stem-Vowel a. {efi-nv, BA-) : 

/SaXXw, to throw, Epic second Aor. Act. (BAA-, efiXrjv) ^vjx^X-ljT-nv, Od. <p, 15, 
Inf. ^vjx^XriiJLsvai (instead of -rjvai), II. </>, 578 ; Epic second Aor. Mid. (ifix-q- 
/jl7]u) cBAtjto, £v[a/3\7}vto, II. |, 27, Inf. fiXTJa&cu, Part. fiX-rj/xeuos, Subj. ^v/x^Xrj- 
tcu, fi\7)eTcu (instead of pXrjrjTcu), Od. p, 472, Opt. fiXelo (from BAE-, comp. 
7rijU7rA77^t)) II- v i 288. Hence the Eut. j8A?'/o-o,ucu. 

ynpaw, or yr\pd<TKO), to grow old, second Aor. third Pers. Sing, iy-fipd, II. p, 197, 
KaTeyhpa, Hei'od. 6, 72, Inf. (Att.) ynpuvcu, Part. (Epic) y-npds. The d in 
iyfipa, etc. is used instead of 77 on account of the preceding p. See StSpdcricca, 
§ 192, 1. 

ure'ivov, to kill, Epic and poet, second Aor. Act. (KTA-) e/cTdj/ retains the short 
vowel ; thus, e/crd^e?/, e/CTdre, third Pers. PI. also cktolv instead of enTaaav, 
Subj. ktu) (first Pers. PL Kreco/xev Epic), Opt. KTairjy, Inf. Krdvai, (Epic KTc£,uei/, 
nrd^vai), Part, /eras; Epic second Aor. Mid. with Pass, sense, andicTaTo, 
/ctoV&cu, KaranrdijLeyos. 

ourdo}, to wound, Epic second Aor. Act. odra third Pers. Sing., Inf. ovrd/xeyaiy 
ovrdjxev (the a remains short as in e/cVdj>) ; Epic second Aor. Mid. ovrd/xevos, 
wounded. 

irexdfa, to approach, Epic second Aor. Mid. iirXrux-nu, (Att. i-jrXdLnrjv), 7tAt}to, 
7rA^To. 

TrXrj&co (7ri[XTr\r] /j.i), to Jill, Epic second Aor. Mid. ZirXt)To and 7tA?7to, IVa^i/to, 
also in Aristoph., who uses the following forms also : Imp. irXrj&o, Part. ifnrX-f)- 
//.evos, Opt. ijxivXriixii]u with the variation ZjxirXziixnv, as xp g fy from xp^(a^) and 
£Aeu) from e^Xri/xrjv (BAA-). 

irT7]aaui, to shrink with fear, Epic second Aor. Act. (ITTA-) (zttt7iv) KaTaTrrriTrjv 
third Pers. Dual. 

(p&dvco, to come before, Epic second Aor. Mid. cp&d/xevos. 

Remark. From i$nv (fiaivca) arc found in Homer the forms {Sarrju (third 
Pers. Dual) and vtrtpfiacrav (third Pers. PI.) with the short stem- vowel. 



$ 227.] VERBS IN -to LIKE VERBS IN -fU. 273 

(b) Stem- Vowel e (eo^, 2BE-): 

AACl. Epic, stem of 5iSao-/c«, to teach, second Aor. Act. (AAE-) iddrji/, I learned, 
Subj. daw, Epic 5ae:w, Inf. Sa^af, Epic Sa^/xei/ai. 

(c) Stem-Vowel t: 

<p&i-vw, to consume and to vanish, Epic second Aor. Mid. icp&tfi-nv, <p&{<r&ai, <p&l- 
jjlzvos, (p&ia&w, fp^-ixftaiy Opt. (p&i/A7]v, (pSf'tro. 

(d) Stem-Vowel o (ey;w, TNO-) : 

Pifipdo-KO), to eat, Epic second Aor. Act. efipwv. See § 161, 6. 
ttAww (Epic and Ion. secondary form of ir\4w), to sail, Epic second Aor. Act. 
^irAwv, eTrAvfAei/, Part. irAces, Gen. irKwvros. 

(e) Stem- Vowel u (e5yj/) : 

kAuo> (poet.), to 7*e«r, Epic Imp. second Aor. Act. k\v&i, /cAOre; and kzkKv&i, 

/ce/cAvre (§ 219, 7). 
AjJw, to loose, Epic second Aor. Mid. Kvro, AiWo. 
TTueco, to breathe, Epic second Aor. Mid. (IINY-, from irviFo), irvevw) d^irvvro 

instead of aviirvvro, to breathe again, 
(revu, to shake, Epic second Aor. Mid. iaavfX7]v, I strove, ecrcruo, crvro. 
%e'w, to pour out, Epic second Aor. Mid. (XT-, from xzFu, x^ w ) X^ VT °y X^^ vos ' 

B. The Characteristic is a Consonant. 

aWo/xai, to leap, Epic and second Aor. Mid. ahao, aX.ro, tiraXfievos, iiridhfievos, 

Subj. a\y)Tai. 
apapiaKU) ('AP-), to Jit, Epic apjxevos, fitted, 
yevro, to take, Epic, from FcAto, the Digamma being changed into y and the 

radical A before r into v (§ 203, B). 
yiyvofxai, to become, poet, eyevro, yevro. 
Sexoftcu, to take, Epic e5e/c<ro, Inf. Sex^ai, Imp. 5e£o. The first Pers. Sing. 

£Sey/j.T)v and the Part. Siy/xevos have, like the Perf. deSey/iai, the meaning to 

expect, await. 
e'AeAt^w, to Whirl, Epic eAeAt/rro. 

iKueo/xai, to come, Epic £kto, 'ik/j.<evos and licjievos, favorable. 
AEXn, to Z/e oWn, Epic iKeyfirju, eAe/cTo, to 7m/ one's se// c7oz<;n (same sense as 

i\e^diJ.7}u), Imp. Ae|o. — Aeyw, to co77ecf, to c/zoose, to count, Od. i, 335. iKiyfiifv, 

I counted myself, Od. 5, 451. Aekto ap&p.6v, he counted the number, 
ixiaivw, to soil, Epic padvSrnu (third Pers. Dual, instead of i/xidwo-b-nv). 
uio-yea (fiiyvv/n), to mix, Epic fxiKro. 

bpvvai (opuvfjn), to excite, Epic S>pro, Inf. gp&oi, Imp. opco, opaeo, Part, opfievos. 
7rct\Aa3, to brandish, Epic iraKro, he sprang. 

ircp&w, to destroy, perdo. Homer uses iripftai instead of irepb-afrcu. 
nHril (wfjywfu), to fix, Epic ttijkto, Kar^TrrjKro. 



274 DIALECTS. [$ 228. 



$228. (2) Per/, and Plup. Act. {Corny, hk 193, 194). 

(a) The Stem ends in a Vowel. 

yiyvojxai, to become; TErAA, Stem TA : Perf. (Sing, ysyova, -as, -e) Epic and 

poet, yeyajxev, -are, -dacri(v), Inf. Epic yeydpev, Part. poet, yeyws, yey waa, 

yeyds, Gen. yeywros : — Plup. Epic iKyeydrrju. 
Baivw, to go, Perf. fiefi-qica, BEBAA: Epic and poet. PI. fiePansv, -are, -a(Ti{v), and 

&epda<n(i>) ; third Pers. PI. Subj. ipfep&<ri (PL Phaed. 252, e), Inf. fepavai, 

Part. Epic fiefiatios (also Attic prose fie fids, Xen. Hell. 7. 2, 3), -via (/3ej3<2<ra, 

PL Phaed. 254, b), Gen. fePaaros (Att. Pefiwros) ; — Plup. i&cfi&fiLcv, -are, 

-avav. 
5eiSa>, to fear ; besides the forms mentioned (§ 193), the following Epic forms 

are to be noted: Seioi/neu, SeiSire; Inf. oeidl/xev instead of SeSteVat; Imp. 

SetSt&i, SeiStTe; — Plup. eSei'St/xev, ideidurav. 
epXo/j.ai, to come, Perf. Epic elX-qXov&a instead of iXr]Xv&a, PL elX-fjXov&Liev. 
Svt}(Tkgi>, to die, Perf. T&vr}K.a, TE0NAA : PL Tifrvafiev, T&vaTe, Te&va<ri(y), Imp. 

re&vc&t, Part. Te&wriKcbs, re&vr}Kv?a, t&vt)k6s or redreccs (Tefri/ewcra. Demosth. 

40, 24), T&vtds (Epic T&i/rjws, -wtos, -tjcJtos), Inf. Ted-vaj/at (Aesch. Te&j'aVcu 

from re&yaivai, Epic re^vd^ev, -dpevai) : Plup. ire&vacrav, Opt. Te&i/a'njv. 
TAAH, to endure (second Aor. erATjv), Perf. rirX-qKa, TETAAA: Dual t4tXo.tov; 

PL TeTXa^ej/, rerXare, T6TAa(Tt(j/), Imp. TerXa&i, -ara, etc., Subj. wanting, 

Inf. rerXavai (Epic TeTAa,uey), but Part. Epic tctA^s ; Plup. Dual eTeTActToy, 

ererXaryv, PL irerXa/xev, ireTXare, ireTXaffav, Opt. TerXairjv. 
MAfi, to strive, Perf. fx4 t aova; MEMAA : Epic /xefia/xei/, -ixrov, -are, -daai(r), Imp. 

/ie^drw, Part, fiefidcas, Gen. fxefxacuTos and /xe/xaSros, third Pers. PL Plup. 

Here belong the two participles of 
fHifipdxrKw, to eat (second Aor. efipwv), Perf. fiefipooKa, poet, fie&pc&s, Gen. -wros; 

7T17TTCO, to ^/aK, ITZTTTCaKa, EpiC 7re7TTeCOS, Att. pOet. 7re7TTC$S. 

(b) The Stem ends in a Consonant. 

It is to be observed in respect to the formation, that when the consonant of 
the stem comes before a personal-ending beginning with r; the t is changed 
into 3-, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. form, e. g. 
vei&oo, to persuade, ireTroi&a, to trust, Epic Plup. eiri-m&ixzv, Imp. in Aeschyl. 

Eum. 602, 7re7rej(r3t (instead of ireiriaSn). 

Remark. Thus the Epic form ireiroaSre, stem ITEN0 with the variable o 
(ITON0), instead of TrsiropStars from xdVxw, from ireTrou^are by dropping the 
connecting vowel a, comes ireiroufrTe ; and hence as a Tau-mute before another 
Tau-mute is changed into <r (§ 17, 5, comp. iS-re = 'tare), irzirov&Ts becomes 
•reTroiHT&e, and as v is dropped before a, ireiroaTe ; finally, this form, as has been 
seen, assumed the appearance of the Mid. form (Sre) and so became ireirocr^e. 

Perf. Ind. S. KeKpaya, -as, -e(v) (icpdfa, to bawl), Plup. e/ce/c/wyeiz/, -eis, -et 

D. 2. KeKpcLyarov Kenpax&ov iKSKpdyenov iiceKpax&ov 

3. KiKpa.ya.Tov KeKpax&ov £K€Kpayeirr)v iKeKpdx&W 



$ 229.] VERBS IN -w LIKE VERBS IN -fXl. 275 

P. 1. KeKpayafAev KtKpayixev ^KeKpayeifiev iKeKpayfiey 

2. KeKpayare iceKpax&e ineKpayeire iic4icpax&e 

3. KeKpayd(Ti(v) iK€Kpdyei<rav, -€<rav 
Imp. KdKpax&h -ax&w, -a%&e, etc. Inf. neitpayivai. Part. KeKpayds. 

So the Epic Perf. ^coya with the sense of the Pres. I command, &vwyas, frvoye, 
PI. frvwy/Aev; Imp. &/<»ye and &;/«%&£, aucoyerea and a»'c^x^' w > avw^fre and 
^yw%3-e; Subj. avwy-p) Inf. avaiye/xev ; Plup. fjj'w'yea, rjuctiyei ; Opt. ayctfyots. 

cyelpo}, to awaken, Perf. iyp-ftyopa (stem 'ErEP with the variable 0), I am awake; 
from this, Homer has the forms : Imp. iyprjyop&e instead of iypr}y6pare, Inf. 
iypny6p&ai (as if from iyp-ftyop/Acu) and iyp-qy6p^a(Ti(v) instead of iypt\y6pa- 
m{v) third Pers. PI. 

olda, I know, the regular forms o'tda/xev, o'ffiare, oWa<n(v) are found but rarely in 
the Ion. and Att. writers (§ 195, 1), second Pers. oJSas in Horn, and Ion 
(rarely Att, § 195, 1). The form id-fxev is Epic, Ion., and Doric. Inf. Xd^vai 
and %tei> Epic, Subj. iSe'u Epic instead of et&<2 (Ion. etSew), Part. I8via Epic 
and etSiua. 

Plup. 1. Pers. Sing. ?7$ea (hence the Att. rjSri) Epic instead of fjdeiir 

2. " " rjdSeis and 7764877$ Epic instead of rjdsts 

3. " " feiSei and Tjeufy? ^See(j'), Epic instead of 778a; — #et5e, 

Herod. 
3. " PL foa.v Epic instead of fj8e<rai'. 
Fut. eiSTjtrw Epic and also €'i<ro/j.at. 
eoiica, lam like, Epic, einrov (Dual), i'lKTrjv (Plup. Dual) ; hence in Plup. Mid. 
or Pass. ei'/cTo. 



$ 229, (3) Present and Imperfect. 

Finally, there are certain forms of the Pres. and Impf. mostly in the Epic 
dialect, which after the analogy of verbs in -fu, take the personal-endings with- 
out the Mode- vowel. Thus : — 

avi<a, to complete, in Theocritus: Impf. fryv-pes (instead of rivtofjiev), fa/v-ro (instead 

of TjuveTo). 
ravva, to stretch, to span, II. p, 393. t&vv-tcu (instead of Tavvercu). 
ip{/a), to draw, epvTai, etpvTO, tpvro, epvao, pva&ai (§ 230). 
<revo>, to shake, Epic Pres. (revrat and (by variation) o-ovtcu, Imp. <rov<ro and 

abridged <rov, croDo-fre, <rou<rdw (to move one's self, to hasten). The Imp. has 

passed into the common colloquial language. 
&a>, commonly ia&iw, to eat, Epic, Inf. edfxevai. 
<pep«, to carry, Epic Imp. (pepre instead of (pepere. 



276 DIALECTS. [$ 230. 



$ 230. Alphabetical List of Verbs in the Dialects 
to be specially noted. 

'Acta (aFdw), to hurt, to deceive; Horn. &rjvai\ the Att. Tragedians use the 
has the following forms : Aor. daaa following forms : aaaw and dcrcrw, 

and a<ra ; Pres. Mid. darcu, Aor. aaad- ??|a, a|at and iy|a, a£cu. 

fxr\v, Aor. Pass, dao-d-rji'. Verb. Adj. aico (Ep.), to /im?\ only Pres. and Impf 

aaros (a-daros). d'iov. Comp. indica. 

ayaiofiau, Epic and Ion. prose (§ 164) aKaxK® (Epic), to trouble, stem 'AXfl, 

and d7ao / uai (Ep.), to 6s angry at, and second Aor. ^'/caxo^ ; Fut. aKax^crca, 

in the Pres. Epic also to grudge, to first Aor. rjudxricra. ; Mid aKaxi£ojuai, 

envy, Fut. aydaopai ; Aor. ijycurdflriv. &xofiou or &xvv/jcu, to be sad, Aor. 

ayeipai, to collect, Epic second Aor. Mid. v^axo^w (§219, 7) ; Perf. d/c^x^a* 

ayepovTO, Part, dypo/aeuos (§ 223, 11); (§ 219, 8, comp. dp^pe^cu, opcope/aai) 

Plup. aynyeparo ; Aor. Pass. dyepd-n, and d/caxW", third Pcrs. PI. aKrjx^- 

third Pers. PI. dyepftej/; Epic Pres. Sarcu (§ 220, Rem. 2) and axrixtarai, 

Tiyepe&ofjLcu (§ 162). Part. aK-nx^^vos and aKax'Opevos, Inf. 

ayvoeec, to be ignorant, ~Eip. Aor. riyvoi'/jo-e a.Kdxv<r&ai (§ 223, Rem. 4); Plup. 

(§ 207, I), ayvwaao-Ke (§ 205, 5). Epic aKaxeiaro. 

&yvvfii, to break, Aor. Epic ^£a instead d/caxMei/os (Epic), sharpened, pointed, 

of ea£a ; third Pers. PL Aor. Pass. from 5 AKH, acwo, instead of d/cdy/wos 

dyev Epic instead of idynaau. (§§ 19, Rem. 1, and 208, 2). The x 

&yw, to /ead, Epic second Aor. Imp. comes from the Perf. Act. 

&£eTe, Inf. ale/xevai, a^i/xsv (§ 223, aicrj^ew, to neglect, Aor. dK^5e<re(j/). 

10) ; first Aor. Mid. a|a.(r,9-e, d^avro. aXdofiai, to wander about, Ep. Perf. dxd- 

aeiSu (prose a'Sw), to sm<7, Epic second Atj^cu (§ 219, 8), dXaX^/xeuos, dxdXr](T- 

Aor. Imp. dao-eo (§ 223, 10). &ai (§ 223, Rem. 4). 

deipw (prose a'ipca), to raise, Epic first dA&aiVw, to ?na/ce increase, Epic Aor. 

Aor. Act. deipa, Mid. b.eipdjj.7\v, Pass. ^ASai^e^). 

aepSrnv ; Epic second Aor. Mid. ap6- dAe|a>, to Zreep q/T, Epic second Aor. 

\xr\v from ai'pw ; Epic Plup. awpro ijXaXicov (§ 219, 7), (from 'AAKft), 

instead of fipro with the variable aXaXKziu, dXa.XK.6v ; Fut. dActA/c^cro. 

vowel, and transposition of the aug- aX4o,uat and aXevofxai (Epic), to s/iwn, 

ment ; Epic Pres. rjepeSro/xai (§ 162). Aor. yXevdfx-nv, Subj. aXe^Tai, Opt. 

'AHMI, ('AE-,) to Wow; in Homer, are: dAeWo, Imp. dAeW&e, Inf. dAetWfrai 

Part, dets, dei/ros; third Pers. Sing. and dAeW&cu (§ 223, 8). 

Impf. d-q, dei, Sidei fAEH) ; in the dAd^cr/cco, dx&icncco (Ion. prose), to /*ea/, 

other forms, the 77 remains contrary Fut. dA&e|«, etc. 

to the analogy of rforifii (§ 224, 6): aXiTaivw (Epic and poet.), to sin, Fut. 

&tjtov, arjuou, d^/xerai ; Mid. and Pass. dXtTrjact) ; Aor. rfXirov, o.Xit6ixt)v, aXi- 

&r]fxai, to blow, v6[Xivos Kal ai\ixevos, TeV&cu; Perf. dAir^ej/os, sm/W (§ 223, 

drenched ivith rain and beaten with the Rem. 4). 

wind ; Impf. Mid. arjro. aXXo/aai, to spring, Epic second Aor. 

aXbojxai and alSeofiai in Homer, to oe Mid. aAcro, etc. (§ 227, B). 

ashamed, to respect, Epic alS-fjaofiai, dXvKTew, to be in trouble, Epic Perf. dAa- 

■pSecrfrnv and ■pdeadixrji'. XvKT-nfxai (§ 219, 8). 

aXvvjXL (Ep.), to to/je (instead of cupi/v/Acu, olXvctkco (Ep.), to escape, dAu|co, ^'Au|a. 

§ 169, Rem. 1), only Pres. and Impf. dXcpaiveo (Ep.), to find, Sec. Aor. dX(pe?v. 

alpew, to take, Ion. Perf. dpaiprjica, dpai- afxaprduco, to miss, Epic Aor. ij/xfipOToi/ 

p-nixai (§ 219, 8); Epic second Aor. (§§ 223, 11, and 208, 3). 

Mid. yeVro instead of eAero (§ 227, dixirXaKiaricoo (Ep. and poet.), to err, Fut. 

B). hixir\o.K7)<Tu ; Aor. ^jxirXaKOV. 

d'tVo-co, Epic (d, but vrraQei, II. <p, 126 ; dj/Savw (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to please, 

l) instead of aW«, to r«s/i, Ep. forms : Impf. edVScu/oz/ (Herod.), eV&. and 

^i'|a. Subj. dt|w, Part. d'/'|as ; Aor. '/)i>8. (Ep.) ; Aor. eaSov (Herod.), a5oj» 

Pass, iftxdriv (also in Plat.), Iuf. dilx* (Ep.) ; Inf. dSely; Perf. cdSa; Fut 



$ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 277 

ad-f)<ra. — Aug., § 219, 4, 5. In The- Mid. Trans., to lead, %$r\<ra, ifyffi- 

ocritus ed5e; Ep. Aor. evadov (§§ 219, fxt]v ; second Aor. Mid. ifi-f,aero, Imp. 

4, and 207, 3). impfaeo (§ 223, 10). Ep. secondary 

avr,i/o&e, to spring up, Ep. Perf. with form : Pi(S6.(t&q:v, to stalk, strength- 

Att. Reduplication and the variable ened secondary form from fiaivoo ; 

o (§§ 219, 8, and 140, 4), from also 0Lp$, fiiPavra, pipaicru and (from 

'ANE0X2. ' BIBHMI) pipds ; finally, Imp. /3acr/ce, 

avrdw, to meet, Epic ^vrtov [§ 222. A and Inf. eVi^atr/ce^ei/. 

(2)J ; avvavT-riTiiv (§ 222, Rem. 1). f3d\\co, to throw, Ep. second Aor. efiAyv, 

avvoc, to complete, Epic Impf. in Theoc. i&k-fifMjv [§ 227, A (a)], Eut. jSA^cro- 

ai/vjj.es, 'avvTo (§ 229). /ucu ; Ep. Perf. fiePoArnxcu (used of the 

tfywya (Ep. and poet. Perf), to command, mind) ; but fid^K-q/xat (of the body). 

dv<ayp.zv, Imp. av^x^, etc. (§228): /Sapew (Ep.), to fee Aeauy, fiefiap-nctis (§ 223, 

Piup. -f/i/^ea (§ 220, 8). In certain 13). 

forms this Perf. is changed into the fiefipcv&ois (Ep.), to eat, instead of fii- 

inflection of the Pres., e. g. third fipdcxricois. 

Pers. Sing, dvdoyei, Impf. fywyov and fiiojxai and fido/nai, I will go, will live, 

dvooyov; Eut. di/ai|w ; Aor. ^V<a|a. Ep. Fut. /3e?7, fieS^a^ra (§ 223, 7). 

airavpdoi (Epic), to take away, Impf. fiido/j.ai (Ep.) instead of {Sid^ofxai, to 

aTTTjvpcoy, -as, -a ; first Aor. Act. Part. force, e/3nj<raTo, /3e/3nj/ce. 

cbrotfpas ; first Aor. Mid. dir-nvparo, fii&pdxjKu, to eat, Ep. Aor. efipwv [§ 227, 

Part. aTrovpdfiei/os. A (d)] ; Perf. Part. /3e/3pws, -wtos 

dira<pi(TKw (Ep-), to deceive, Eut. aTra<pr)- (§ 228). 

<r«, second Aor. Act. tfrcacpov, Opt. fiXaxTKco (Ep. and poet.), to #0, instead 

Mid. air d(po it 0. of /jlAwctkco (§ 18, 3), Aor. epLoXov, 

airzL\4<a (Ep.), to threaten, aTrei\r}T7iv /xoAetV, ixoXuiv (also X. An. 7. 1, 33, 

(§ 222, Rem. 1). fj.6\waiv) ; Perf. /j.epLfiAcoKa( instead of 

airSepae, an Ep. Aor., /ie hurried off, fte^eAw/ca) ; Fut. /xoAodficu. 

Subj. awoepcrri, Opt. airoepaeie. fiodw, to cry out, Ep. Aor. eyScoca instead 

a7TTo>, to j'om to, Ep. Aor. Pass, edcp&rj, of if3o7i(ra (§ 205, 5). 

^e// on. fiovAo/xai, to will, Ep. fioXerai, fioXecr&G 

apapia-KO (Ep.), to ,/ft, stem APH, first (§ 207, 4), 7rpo/3e/3ouAa, I prefer. 

Aov.?ip(ra, apacu (§ 223, 6) ; first Aor. Ppvxdo/j.at, to roar, Ep. Perf. /3e/3pxa, 

Pass, ap^ei/ instead of rfpfr-naav; sec- with the sense of the Pres. 

ond Aor. %\papov (§ 219, 7; also In- Ta/xeco, to marry, Ep. Fut. ya/xiw; Ep. 

trans, to be adapted, to please), more Fut. ya/xeVtreTcu, II. t, 394, willgive in 

usual than the first Aor. ; Perf. dpa- marriage. 

pa (Ion. dpripa) (§ 219, 8), I can fitted, ydvvfiai (Ep.), to fee glad, ydvvrat; Fut. 

Intrans., Ep. apapvla (§ 223, 13), Perf. yavvcr<rsTai. 

Mid. or Pass, dp^pe/xaL, dp-qp^tevos TAD,, Ep. Perf, yiyapixv, to have become, 

(§ 223, Rem. 4) : Aor. appeyos, adapted etc. (§ 228). 

(§ 227, B). yiyoova Ep. and poet. Perf. with the 

'APAn, apdofiai, to pray, Epic second sense of the Pres. to cry out; in Horn., 

Aor. ap-hp-evai, Od. x, 322. third Pers. Sing. y4yuve (also with 

dpwjxai, to gain (§ 188, 1 ). the sense of the Aor.), Part, yeywv&s, 

\AQ, Ep., (a) to blow, see a^jiu ; (b) to Inf. yeyeovep.ev ; PI up. iyeycovei. From 

s/eep, Aor. deaa, affa/jLev; (c) to safts- the Perf. a Pres. has been formed of 

fy (also Intrans. to be satisfied), Inf. which there are in Horn. : Inf. 7670)- 

*a/j.epai instead of aep,zvai ; Fut. dace ; ye?;/, Impf. iyeydsuevu. 

Aor. acra, acac-frccf. Verb. Adj. &xtos, yelvojxai (Ep.), to fee feorn, to fee produced, 

aros. Aor. Mid. to beget, to bear, Subj. yei- 

Eaiva, to walk, to go, Ep. forms : Perf. ueai instead of yeiuriai. 

Pefia/xei/, etc. (§ 228); second Aor. yivro, to seize (§ 227, B). 

Dual /3c^T7;i/, third Pers. PI. v-nipfia- yypdoe, to grow old, second Aor. iyfjpa, 

aav (§ 227, Rem.), third Pers PI. etc. [§ 227, A (a)]. 

i$av, frdv (§ 224, 4), Inf. fflpwat, yodca (poet.), to ivail, Ep. third Pers. PI. 

Subj. besides $u, etc. : fieia, Pr t y, /3ei- Aor. y6ou. 

o/*6j/ (§ 224, 9) 5 first Aor. Act. and Aaivvp.1 (Ep,), to entertain, to feed (in« 

24 



278 DIALECTS. [$ 230. 

stead of Salr-vvfii, § 169, Rem. 1), ere, to await (e. g. an attack, a wild 

Fut. Saiarw ; Mid. Saivvfiai, to feast, to beast), in the following forms : Se'xa- 

consume, second Pers. Sing. Impf. Ind. rai instead of Sexoircu (§ 220, 13), 

Saivv [Saivvo instead of iSaivvvo, II. /jl, 147, Perf. SeSey/xai with the 

§ 224, 5), third Pers. Sing. Opt. Sai- sense of the Pres., Fut. Se5e|o/xeu, 

vvro instead of -viro, third Pers. PI. excipiam, second Aor. Mid. eSeKro, 

SaivvaTo; Aor. iSaLcrdu.7]v. etc. (§ 227, B) ; Perf. Mid. SeSo/cTj^e- 

Satai, Ep., (a) to divide (§ 164), Put. vos, awaiting, lurking, II. o, 730. 

Sdaofxai; Aor. (also prose) eSacrajx-nv ; 5euo> (instead of Se-Fw), Ep. instead of 

Perf. Pass. 5e8a0>iGM, am divided, broken, Sea, to want, from which come iSeirn- 

SeSaiarcu ; (h) to burn, to inflame, Perf. ce, Ae wanted, drjcrev, he was in want 

S4S-ne, Ae burnt; Mid. to burn, 6fa.se, of; Mid. Seuo^cu, to 6e wanting, Fut. 

Intrans., second Aor. Subj. Sd-nrai. Sevhcrofiai. 

Zativdu) and Sdfxvinfj.L, Ep. secondary AIAHMI (AE-), Ep. and older Ionic- 
form of Sanaa), to subdue, from Att. (Xen.), secondary form of 84a>, 
which come third Pers. Sing. Pres. to bind, SiSeaai (Xen. An. 5. 8, 24) ; 
Sa/xva ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. iSd/j.va Impf. SiSt) instead of eSi'S-j], II. \, 105. 
and Sdfj.va, Sd/xvaaKe ; second Pers. Slfafiai (Ep. and Ion.), to seek; it re- 
Sing. Pres. Mid. Safiva; — Sd/xv-ncn, tains the 77 (contrary to § 170, 1, 
Sdfj.vaiJ.ai, etc. comp. 'AHMI) : iSifyro, idifavro, Si- 

Sap&dvw, to sleep, Epic Aor. iSpd&ov (rjcr&ai, Si&fitvos (in Herod.) ; Si(-nai 

(§ 223, 11). (Horn.), 8/£eai (Theoc.) ; Fut. 8t0j<ro- 

SaTeofxai, Ep. secondary form, used in fiai ; Aor. iSifradfj.-nv. 

the Pres. and Impf., from Saiofxai, to AIHMI ( AIE-). of the Act. only evSiea-av 

divide. ( third Pers. PI. Impf. ) , II. <r, 584, they 

AAH (Ep. and poet.), (a) to teach (= drove aivay ; Mid., to make one run, to 

SiSd<rKQ>), (b) to learn {= SiSavKOfxai); make free, oftener to scare, to 



to (a) belong the Ep. second Aor. (specially with the Inf.), Sievrai, U. 

SeSae (Horn.), e5ae (Theoc. and \ft, 475, SUcrfrai, H, fx, 304, Subj. 

Apoll.); to (b) SeSaus (Horn.), SeSd- Si-nrai, Siwiirai, Opt. Sioiro (comp. 

acri (in other authors) ; Ep. second ri&oiro). 

Aor. Act. iSd-qv, I learned [§ 227, A Sico (Ep.), to fee, Sie, SdSie, Slov, I fled. 

(b)]. from which Ep. Sa-na-o/xai, Se5o?'j- Sovirew (Ep.), to sound, Perf. SeSovirSros ; 

/ca, Se5a77,ueVos. From the Perf. a Aor. iSov-rr-ncra and 4ySoinrr)<ra (from 

new Ep. Pres. has been formed, SeSd- TAOTn-, comp. tvtttw and ktvtt4w). 

a<r&ai, Inf. Here belongs also the Svvaixai, to be able, second Pers. Ion. 

Ep. Fut. S-na {I shall find, meet with), Svueai; Aor. Ep. iSwdo-frnv and iSuvn- 

fais. Syofxev, S-nere (§ 223, 7). adunv (\ 179, 2). 

Searo (Ep.), it seemed, Aor. SodcrcraTo, 8vu>, to go in, to urap xip, Ep. Sufievai in- 

third Pers. Sing. Subj. SodcrcreTat stead of Svvai from eSvv ; Ep. second 

(instead of -77Tcn). Aor. Mid. Svaero, Sucreo, SvaSfxevos 

SeiSu), to fear, the Pres. occurs only in (§ 223, 10). 

the first Pers.. Fut. Seicro/xai ; Aor. 'Eye'ipa, to awake, Ep. Aor. eypero, he 

eSeio-a, Ep. eSSeura (as is probable awoke, etc. (§ 223, 11) ; Ep. forms of 

originally eSFeiaa), Perf. Ep. SeiSoina Perf. iyprjyopa are iyprjyop&e, etc. 

instead of Se'Soi/ca, and 8ei'5ta Ep. (§ 228). From the Perf has been 

instead of SeSia (§ 228). formed the Pres. iyp-nyopow, watch- 

SeiKvvfj.1. to show. Ion. (AEK) 8e|o>, eSe£a, ing, Od. v, 6, as if from iyfrnyopdu. 

etc.; Mid. SeiKPVfiai in the Ep. dialect eSco and e<r&a (Ep.), to eat (= eVd£a>), 

has also the sense, to greet, to icelcome, Inf. eSfievai (\ 229) ; Impf. eSov and 

to G&rn& to ; so also in the Perf. Set- eSeo-Kov ; Perf. iSrjSws ; Perf. Mid. or 

Seyfjai with the sense of the Pres., Pass. iS^Sorat. 

SetSe'xcvrai third Pers. PI. ; Plup. Sel- 'E0ft, from which come the Ep. e^uu, 

SeKTo, to icelcome. SeiSex aro - wont, accustomed, and the Perf. efcofra 

StpKOfxai, to see, Ep. second Aor. ZSpaKov (§ 140, Rem. 3). 

(§ 223, 11). 'EIAfl, 'lACl, Aor. elSov, I saw, Ep. t'Sov, 

S^xofJ-ai, to receive, Ion. SeKOfxai; in Horn. Inf. iSeeiv, Subj. tSw^t : Ep. Pres. 

this verb signifies also, to take, excip- Mid. etSsrai, it seems, elS6{x.zvos, ap- 



§ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 279 

pearing, making like; Fut. efcro^at; 4v4ttqj Or ivvirrw (Ep.), to say, to tell^ 
first Aor. eladpriv and cetera/*^, etcra- Impf. with, the sense of the Aor. 
fievos and 4ei<Tdj£€i/os (§ 219, 4) ; sec- eueirov, evi/eirov, Aor. evicrirov (comp. 
ond Aor. Id6/xr)u, I saw. ka-iro^-nv from '4-irofxai), Imp. evunres, 

EIKX1, third Pers. Sing. Impf. 4! K e, it Subj. iv'unra, Opt. 4v'ktttoi(xi, Inf. eViir- 
appeared, II. tr, 520 ; Perf. eoi/ca, 7 am ire<V, Fut. ivfyta and 4vi(nrt)(ra. 
like, Ep. third Pers. Dual ei'/croi/ and 4vr]vo2ra, Ep. Perf. from 'EN©n or 'EN- 
Plup. HiKT-nv (§ 228), Part, eWwsand E©fl with the sense of the Pres. and 
II. <p, 254. eiKws, ciKvIa and II. <r, 418. Impf., eVe^i/o^e, to s# on, II. £, 219. 
eloiKvTcu ; Ep. Plup. Mid. ^i'/cro and to lie on, H. Cer. 280. Comp. b.vi\vo- 
ei'/cTo, # was like. &e above. 

etXvco (Ep.), to cover, envelop, elxixrw, 4v'nrro) (Ep.), to chide, second Aor. iv 
e^KCfiai, third Pers. PI. eiKvarai] from 4vlirov, ^v-hraTrev (§ 219, 7). 
i\vco comes Aor. Pass. 4\V(7^r)v. 'iwvftt, to clothe, Ep. and Ion. elvvfii ; 

e?Aa>, to press, to drive, from which in Ep. Fut. eWw ; Aor. '4<r<ra and eVa, 
Horn, only cl\6ixsvos ; in the same ka<rdycr\v, eeWaro, ecracrfrcu ; Perf. 
author, etAew, iei\eov; the rest are eTficu, ettrai (and eWcu), el-rcti, etc., 
from 'EA, e. g. 4\<xav, Inf. eAo-ai and dfxzvos : second Pers. Plup. eWo, 
44\<rai, Part. eA<ras (§ 223, 6) ; eeA/xot, third Pers. e<rro and eecrro, third Pers. 
ic\fi4vos; second Aor. Pass. eaA.7?y Dual '4<rfrnv, third Pers. PI. claro ; — 
(from eAAo>), third Pers. PI. &\.«/, on eeWcn-o, eW-ro, comp. § 219, 4. 
&A.7)*/ai and aXri/xevai, aAeis. 4oik<z, I am like, § 228. Comp. 5 EIKfl. 

el/xi, to be, § 225. iiraica, to understand, Aor. iir-fi'icra (t), 

€?,ui, to go, § 226. Herod, and Apollon. (§ 130, Rem. 1 ) ; 

stpyw, to shut out, Ep. Impf. %pyc&ov the poet, aiw is found only in Pres. 
(§ 162). Comp. epycc. and Impf. 

etpo/Acu (Ep. and Ion.), to as&, Impf. iTravpicrKo/xai (Ep. and poet.), to receive 
e1p6/j.r)i> ; Fut. dpfoofxcu ; second Aor. advantage or injury from a thing, Aor. 
i]p6fMT]v, Subj. ipwfie&a, Opt. epoiro, *Tct\vp6}A?nv , £iravp4<r&cu (first Aor. eV^i/- 
Inf. epeo-3-at in Horn, with the accent pa/iTjj/ in Aeschyl. and in the later 
of the Pres. ; — Ep. secondary forms writers); Fut. iiravp^aofiai. Of the 
of the Pres. (a) ip4o/j.at, ip4e<rl$cu) Act. in the sense to touch, to injure, 
Impf. ipeovro; (b) 4p4<a, Subj. ipedo- Homer uses, second Aor. Subj. iirav- 
fiev, Opt. ipeoifxev, Part, 4p4cov. prj, Inf. £iravpe7v, iiravpefiev. 

'EIPTMI, see ipvw. 4iricrraiiai, to know, second Pers. 4iri<rrri, 

€?pa, Ep. and Ion., sero, to arrange in a Ion. poet. 
row, to string, first Aor. i£dpas, exse- eVw, as a simple, in Act. only Ep. in 
rens, Herod. 3, 87 ; Ep. Perf. Mid. or the sense tracto aliquid, to take care of 
Pass, eep/xai, iep/jL&os (in Herod, e/j- (II. (, 321); generally used as a 
fi4vos), Plup. eepro. compound, e. g. irept4irw, Sieira, etc., 

ei'pw, to say, Pres. only Ep., Fut. 4pw, second Aor. Act. 4<nrov instead of 
Ep. 4p4w. €<r-eTTou, in Homer iire&irov, imtrireTv, 

€i<ra, Ep. Aor., I placed, from the stem 4m<nr<av ; Fut. fyco, Ep. ecptyeis ; Mid. 
'EA- (comp. sed-eo), Opt. aj/ecrcu/xi, also as a simple, generally signifying 
Imp. etaou, Part. '4<ras (aviaavTes-; to follow ; Impf. Ep. kiro^-nv instead 
vird<ras, Her. 3, 126. 6, 103), Inf. 4<p4<r- of eiir6/j.r)v ; Fut. fyoncu ; second Aor. 
<rcu ; Aor. Mid. k(rdfx-t\v and 44<r<raTo, Mid. kcrir6ixriv, cririaSai, cttov (£tti<t- 
Part. £<pe<T<rdiJ.evos (Her. 1, 66. elcrd/xe- irov); Ep. forms: <rire?o, eaTreV&cu, 
yoi), Imp. ecpeaacu ; Fut. icpeaffea&ai. Subj. eairwixai, Opt. ca-iroifj.r]u, Inf. 

iXavvco, to drive, Pres. e'Actw, Ep. eAcfa ; kffiricr^ai and <nr4<T&<xi, Part. ka-irSjxe- 
Impf. Ep. eAwi/ ; Fut. Ep. i\6w<n vos. Herodot. has from TrepUiroo also 
instead of eAwo-t; Ep. Perf. £\-n\d- irepiecpfrovcu and irepityearfrai instead 
juews (§ 223, Rem. 4), third Pers. of irepie<p&T}(re(r&ai. 
Sing. Plup. £\7]KdSaTo (§ 220, Rem. epyw, commonly £4pya>, Ep., instead of 
2) ; Ion. Perf. eWjAoo-^at and Aor. etpyw, to shut in and shut out, with the 
Pass. i)Ad<r&7)v. secondary forms i4pyvv/j.i, 4pyd&w, 

i\e\l(w t to whirl, Ep. second Aor. Mid. 4epyd&oj, Aor. ep£a; Perf. Mid. or 
e'Ae'AtKTo (§ 227, B). Pass, eepyp-ai, third Pers. PI. epxarat, 



280 DIALECTS. [$ 230. 

third Pers. PI. Plup. iepxaro and Attic Redup.) ; Ep. Plup. iir&xaTo, 

epxaro j Aor. Pass, ipx&eis. they were closed, II. fx, 340. 

ep5w and pe£a> (Ep.), to do, Put. pe|co, T Hfxai, to sit, earcu, 'ia.ro (Ion.), and eta- 

Aor. eppe£a and e/?e|a, or ep£a>, ep£a ; rai, e'/aro Ep., instead of rjPTai, tjvto. 

Pei'f. eopya, Plup. icbpyeiv (§ 140, ^pw (Ep.), to sjVc, Perf. virejxviijxxiKe, to 

Eem. 3), Perf. Mid. or Pass, iepy/xe- let the head sink, II. x> 491- The 

fos, Aor. Pass, pex^eis, pex&V 1 "* 1 ' above form has the Att. reduplication 

ipetdw, to pi-op, Ep. Perf. ip-npeSarai i/x--n/xvKs (§ 219, 8), and is strength- 

(§219,8). ened by v (§ 208, 5). 

ipsiirw (poet, and prose), to tf»-oit> cfoit>n, Qepo/xai (Ep.), to war772 one's self, Fut. 

Ep. Plup. ipepiirro (§ 219, 8). frepffoftai (§ 223, 6): Aor. i^reprjv, 

ipidaivu) (Ep.), to fight, Aor. Mid. eptS??- Subj. frepew. 

o-ao-frai. <\hjAew (Ep. and poet.), to sprout, Eut. 

ep££a') to J&jfa, Ep. ipl£ofiai, Perf. Mid. &7}\.-f)(rco, etc.; Perf. re'd^Aa (TeMAina 

ipripiafxal (§ 219, 8). Ep. § 223, 13) ; second Aor. e.d-aAof. 

eppoo, to icander about, ~Erj. Aov. epcrcu, to ©Hllft (Ep.), to si«n, Perf. T^-nwa ; 

Awry away (§ 223, 6). Plup. eT6^7;7rea; second Aor. (from 

ipv&aiva (poet.), to redden, Eut. ipvSrr}<ru. TA<J>fl) eracpov. 

ipvicw, to keep off, Ep. second Aor. Act. &vf)<TKa>, to die, Perf. Te&vnKa, PI. re^o- 

y\pvK.a.Kov, ipvKaKeeiv (§ 219, 7). (xev, etc. (§ 228). 

epuo) and elpvw (Ion. and Ep), to c/raw, frpctxruw (Ep., Ion., and poet.), to spring, 

Eut. epvaw (crcr) and Ep. ipvovcri] Aor. z&opov ; Fut. bopov/xcu, Ep. &ope- 

Aor. epiaa (car) and eipwa ; Fut. o,ucu ; Perf. red-opa. See § 161, 14. 

Mid. ipvaofj.ai and Ep. ipveabcu] Aor. 'iSpcta (Ion.), to sweat, idpuari, Idpou/res, 

ipvad^-qv (ccr) and elpvad/xrju ; Perf. iSpuxra, iopcpyv (§ 137, Rem. 1). 

Pass, third Pers. PI. elpvarai, II. |, tV"i to senc? (Ep. and Ion.), Aor. eVa: 

75, and Plup.« efyvvro, II. <r, 69. eipu- Fut. 7j(r&), but Od. <r, 265, aveaei : in 

aro, II. o, 654 (of ships drawn to the Ep. and Ion. dialects, there are 

land, v long in the Arsis); Plup. several forms from the theme 'm, 

Mid. dpvro ((pdcryavov, had drawn the e. g. aviei instead of avi-nai Her., 

sword, v long in the Arsis), Od. x, %vviov instead of \vvUaav Horn., i/xe- 

90. — Secondly, the Mid. in Horn. Tiero and /xe^uert.ueVos Herod., instead 

and poet, takes the sense to save, to of fxe&iero, /xe&ei/xevos. 

shelter (from danger) ; in this sense iKveoiiai, to come, Ep. Pres. %ku> and 

thei*e are the following forms : epvcro, Impf. Tkov; Ep. Aor. T£ou (§ 223, 10) 

eXpvro and ZpvTo, which are to be and Iktq, etc. (§ 227, B). 

regarded as syncopated forms of the 'IAHM1 (instead of 'IAA), to be merciful. 

Impf. — The two following Mid. Of the Act. only the Ep. Imp. iAtj.^, 

secondary forms have also the sense be merciful (in addresses to the gods) 

of to guard: (a) Ep. 'EI^TMI, Inf. instead of 2Xa&i (§ 224, 6), as in 

elpv/Mevai, Hes. Opp. 816, Mid. to Theoc. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. lXr)Kr]o-i; 

guard, dpvarai instead of dpvvrai, Plup. Opt. Ep. tA^/coi ; Mid. poet. 

Inf. epva&cu, e?pvo~&ai; — (b) Ep., 'lAa/xai, to appease. 

poet, and, though very rare, Attic '{aa/xi (Dor.), to know, JfcTjs, Xo-ari, ¥<Ta.}xev, 

prose pvo/xcu, Inf. pdoSrai instead of Part. Xaas. 

pveoftar, Impf. third Pers. Sing. Kaiuv/xai (Ep.) instead of KalBw/xai 

cpvro, was watched, Hesiod. Th. 304, (§ 169, llem. 1) from the stem KAA, 

third Pers. PI. pvar instead of ipvov- to excel, Perf. KeKcurfxai', Plup. e/<e- 

ro (they protected) ; Aor. ippvadp-rju Kdar/xrjj/. 

and Ep. pvad/xr]u (but II. o, 29. pvcrd- Kaico, to burn, Ep. Aor. eKTja (Trag. 

/xt)v). eKea), Subj. K-fjo/xeu instead of -co/.iei/, 

epxo/xat, to go, Ep. Perf. etA?]Aou&ct, first Opt. third Pers. Sing, kticu, third 

Pers. PI. et'ArjAou^e^; Epic Aor. Pers. PI. K-fjaieu, Inf. /cf;at (in the 

•fpu&oj'. Odyss. also Ke7ai, Keio/xev, Ktiavres) ; 

€X<a, to have, Ep. Aor. ecrxefroi/, crx&ov Aor. Mid. eKr)d/xr]i/, icndixevos (in the 

and iffxov (\ 162); Ep. Perf. 6x^«a Odyss. Keid/xevos, Keiavro) ; second 

(for o/cwxa, k and x being trans- Aor. Act. iKa-nv (I burned^ Intrans.), 

posed, and the word having the Inf. /ca^/xei/cu. 



$ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 281 

ndy-vct), to weary one's self, Ep. /ceK^cos, /cAa£o, to sound, Ep. Perf. with the sense 
-wtos, -6tos (§ 223. 13), Ep. second of the Prcs. KeKArjya, KCKXrjycvs, PL 
Aor. Sabj. Kend/meo (§ 219, 7). KeKAriyovres (as if from KtKA-fiyco) ; 

ne?fj.ai, to lie, in Horn, aiovrai, as if from Aor. iK.Ka.yov. 

Keofjiai ; Ep. and Ion. /ceVrcu, /ceecr&cu ; /cAeuw, to sAw£, Ep. and Ion., KXrj'iw, Aor. 
second Pers. Sing. /ce?crai and /ce?cu, iKK-ificra (t), nX-ql crcu ; Perf. Mid. or 
third Pers. PI. kcivtcu and Ep. neia- Pass. /ce/cAi?i>cu (third Pers. PI. /ce/cAe- 
tcu and (Ion.) Kearai, Subj. Kew/nai, arai instead of /ce/c A^arou ) ; Aor. Pass, 
third Pers. Sing. wf/Tai ; Impf. /ceaTo 4KAr)i<r&7iv ; from the Ion. kAtj'/'w come 
and /cej'aTo Ep. instead of zkcivto ; the forms often found in the Att. 
/cecr/ceTo ; Ep. Eut. Keiw, /cea>, Keiccv, writers, viz. KArjcc, ewA^cra, KeKXyfiai. 
kccov, KtUjxev. /cAeco (Ep.), to celebrate, of which only 

Ketpco, to sAecrr q/j^ c;<if o/jfj Ep. Kepaw, KAeo/xai, Impf. e/cAeo instead of e«Aeeo 
^Kepira (<$ 223. 6), but iKeipdfxrjv. (§ 220, 10). 

kcAAw, to c/m'e, Ep. e/ceAcra (§ 223, 6). kAvw (Ep.), to /;<?ar, Imp. /cAve, /cAveTe ; 

KeAoficu (Ep. and poet.), to wv/e, Fut. second Aor. Imp. /cAOd-t, /cAi>re; and 
KeArjO'o/j.ai, first Aor. iKeXriad/x-nv ; k4k\v&i, kckAvts [§227, A (e)] ; the 
second Aor. e/ce/cAo J u7jj', etc. (<§ 223, Impf. 'inAvov is used instead of the 
II). Ind. Pres. 

uevTcca (Ep.), to prick, stimulo, Aor. koVtco, to strike, second Perf. tce/coira in 
Keuaai (§ 223, 6). Horn., instead of KtKocpa. 

Kepdvvvpn, to mix, Ep. Kepdco (Kep&vras) nopsuvvpu, to satisfy, Ep Fut. /cope'co and 
and Kepaica (Imp. /cepcue), Kipvdu (Kip- Kopeaw, Perf. KeK6pr]/xai, to which the 
vas, Impf. iKipva) and Kipv-qixi (Impf. Part. KeKop7}6s (§ 223, 13) in respect 
iidpvri, Kipvds) ; Ep. Mid. Kepcovrai (as to its meaning belongs, 
if from Kepa/uLcu) ; Impf. Kepouvro Ep. /core'cu and KOTeo/xai (Ep), to 6e angry, 
instead of iKzpcovTo from Kepdoj. first Aor. Part. Koriaas ; Perf. Part. 

Kepbatvoo, to gain, in Ion. and later wri- KeKorricbs (§ 223, 13) ; Mid. Fut. /cote- 
tei'S : iKep8r)(ra; Kepdrjcrea&ai and /cep- ao/xai (<nr); Aor. eKOTeo"a,ti7ji/ ((To - ). 
dav4o/u.ev in Herod. KpaC 1 ^ ^° &aW, c?-^ ow£, poet. Perf. /ce/epd- 

/cev&w (Ep.). to conceal, Fut. /cevtrco, Aor. 7a, K€Kpay/j.ev, etc. (§ 228) ; Fut. /ce- 
eKevaa ; Perf. K€Kev&a ; second Aor. Kpa^upai, Aristoph. 
eKv&ov, kv&ov, Subj. /ce/evfrw (§ 219, Kpaivco (Ep. and poet.), to complete, ac- 
7) ; Mid. only Pres. and Impf. complish, Ion. commonly Kpcuaivco, 

Kifiw, to make anxious, in the Act. only Impf. eKpaiaivov ; Ep. Fut. Kpavea; 
Ep. Fut. Kridrjaco ; Perf. zce/c^Sa, I am A01*. eKpyva and Ep. iKp-rmva, Imp. 
anxious ; Ep. Fut. Perf. /ce/caS^cro/xai, Kpr\vov and Ep. Kpr^vov, Inf. Kprjvai 
II. S-, 353. and Ep. Kp-qrivai ; Ep. Perf. Pass. 

Kiova,uai, Ep. secondary form of c/ceSaV- KeKpdavrai (Eur. KeKpavrai) ; Ep. Fut. 
yu^cu, to scatter, only Pres. and Impf. Mid. Kpaveo/xai. 

iduvjxai (Ep.) instead of Kiveo t uai, to stir KTeiva), to kill, Ep. Fut. Krcveaj (Ep. 
orce's se//, to 6e moved, Pass. Kivvfxevos. Part. KTaveovra, KaraKraviovcri(v) and 

Ktpvdca and Kipvr)[xi, Ep. secondary form KaTa/cTaj/eeud-e with the variable a; 
of KepduvvpLi, to mix, from which comes Aor. Ep. and poet, e/craiw ; Ep. 
the Part. Kipvds, Impf. <=Ktpj/a and second Aor. Act. e/cT&j/, etc. [§ 227, 
Kipi/77. A (a)]; first Aor. Pass, third Pers. 

Kixo-vo) and Kixdvofiai (Ep. and poet.), PI. eKrafrev Ep., instead of iKrdfrn- 
to reach, meet with, Aor. eK?xov, Fut. tray. 

Kixvcopah other forms not found in /cupe'w, rarely /cupw (Ep. and poet.), to 
the Att. poets; but Ep. Impf. eKt'xa- ,/mrf, to j-eac/«, Aor. ZKvpaa. [\ 223, 6), 
;w, second Pers. eKixeis (from and more seldom iKvpyaa, Fut. /cwpo-co 
KIXE-) ; second Aor. Subj. kjx^ ancl ancl more seldom Kvp-fjaco] Perf. Ke/cu- 
KiXeiw, Opt. Kix^iriv, Inf. f«X''i I/0U ) p7j«a. 

Part, /cixets and Mid. kix^vos ; Aor. Aayxdvw, to partake, Ion. Fut. \d£o/j.ai ; 
Mid. tKix-hvo-ro. Ep. Aor. Subj. AeAax« {§ 219, 7), 

Ki'w (Ep.), to ryo, only Pres. and Impf. Trans, to make partaker in the phrase 
The Part, /aw*/ is accented like Iwv ; dxuwra 7rup^s, to give the dead the 
Aor. /xeTeKia&ov (§ 162). /iowor of fire, i. e. 7??aA:e /u"m partaker 

24* 



282 DIALECTS. [$ 230. 

of; Perf. Ae\oyx« Ep., instead of MA& (Ep.), to strive for, Perf. with the 

eVA7jxa [Od. A, 304. AeAoyx" ' 1 ]- sense of the Pres., in Sing, fiefxova 

AAZTMAI (= \d(o/AM, to fa&e), Epic (comp. yeyova with TErAA), /j.4/xaTov, 

4Xoi(vTO. /ne/j.aij.ei', etc. (§ 228). 

Aa,Uj3dVw, to receive, Ion. xd^o/j-ai, AeAa- fieipo/nai (poet.), to obtain, Ep. e/j.fj.ope 

/8rj/ca, AeAd^ucu, AeAcfyt^cu, £\d,ucpfr7}v, third Pers. Sing. Perf. (and II. a, 

Aa^Mrreos; also Dor. AeAa^S^^a, but 278), third Pers. Sing, second Aor. 

Ae'Ad^ucu, AeAa^a: : in Dramatists Act. (Augment, § 219, 6) ; Perf. Pass. 

AeAT^/uu; Ep. Aor. AeAajSeVd-cu (§ 219, eifxaprai, it is determined (§ 123, 4). 

7). ^eAa>, commonly Impers. ^eAet, ?'£ con- 

Aai^dVco, Ep. oftener A77&W, to 6e hidden, cerns, Hay it to heart, Ep. Perf. /xe/tTj- 

concealed ; Ep. second Aor. Act. Ae, Part. /^^Aws; Ep. Perf. Mid. jtce/x.- 

Subj. AeAadw and Mid. K^Xab6jxi]v fiXerai and Plup. ixifx^Kero instead of 

(§ 219, 7); Perf. Mid. AeAaauai; in /ie/i^ATjrai, i/xe/xriA7]To, comp. /3Ac£a-- 

Theoc. \ao-&ruj.su (= A^o-^-^ai) in- w; yet these forms were more 

stead of Aad-eVid-cu ; e7nA7j,d-a> and properly considered as a Pres. and 

iic\Ji&u>, to cause to forget, Ep. Aor. Impf. 

iire\7](ra; e/cAeAadw. fieuoivdw, iievolvsov, § 222, I, A (2). 

\<L<tku> (Ep. and poet.), Aor. eAdjcoj/; /u.T]Kdo/xai, to bleat, Ep. Perf. jxifx-nKa with 

Ep. Perf. AeAijKa (poet. AeAdKa and the sense of the Pres., /te^d/cina 

e/cAeAoKa even in Demos.) with the (§ 223, 13); Aor. ixclkwu; from the 

sense of the Pres. ; Ep. Part. AeA??- Perf. the Impf. ifxe/j.-nKov is formed. 

K<&s, \e\a.Kv?a (§ 223, 13) : Fut. Aa/07- /xiahca, to stain, Ep. second Aor. fxidv- 

o~o(xo.l; first Aor. poet. £\dK-no-a, Ep. &771' (§ 227, B). 

Aor. Mid. \e\aKovro (§ 219, 7). fiiyvDfii] to mix, Ep. Aor. [i'ikto (§ 227, 

AEX& (Ep.), to cause to lie down, eAe|a, B). 

e'Ae|d^7jj/, / /az'a 7 myself down, I lay, I ixvudofxca, to roar, Ep. jttejuu/ca, Aor. 

rcstoo?, Ep. Aor. eKiyjx-nv, etc. (§ 227, B). e/AVKoy. 

\ova>, to wash, Ep. Aoea;, Koviw, Impf. Ncuw, Ep. and poet., to a^e//, first Aor. 

eAoueoj/, i\6eov ; Aor. Inf. AoeVtrat, ei/aatra, I caused to dwell ; Mid. with 

Part. AoeWas ; second Aor. Act. Pass. Aor., to seftto down : vdo-ao/mai, 

e\oov, third Pers. Sing. \6e Od. k aTrevao , ad/j.7]v, ivdo~&r)v. 

361, \6ov; Mid. Pres. Inf. AoiWd-at vernea (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to quarrel, 

and AoDcr,6-ai; Fut. Mid. AoeWctyiai; Fut. veiKeaw . Aor. ive'iKeaa (§ 223, 

Aor. Mid. Inf. AoeWa<r3-a< ; Part. 1). 

Aoeo-o-d/xsvos ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, r/^o), to zt-as^, Pres. and Impf. ; the other 

\4Aov/u.ai. tenses are formed from v'l-ktoi, which 

Au«, to foose, Ep. second Aor. Mid. among the later writers came to be 

Kvto,Kvvto [§ 227, A (e)] ; Ep. Plup. used in the Pres. and Impf. also; 

Opt. AeAtn-o (§ 224, 3). thus, Fut. vfyw, Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

Maivofxai, to rave (eKftoiVw, to ?na^e vivifi/xai, poet.; Aor. Pass, iv'up&rjv, 

raving, also Aor. '4jxy]va, Arist. ; doubt- Hippocr. 

ful X. H. 3. 4, 8) ; second Perf. ^4"?- viaaofj-ai (Ep.), to (70, Fut. via-ofiai (the 

j/a (Soph.), / am ravmg (Theoc. 10, form vsiaaofxai is rejected). 

31, lAtfxdviqfJLai) ; the Fut. is fiavovjxai 'OAT220MAI (Ep.), Aor. w^vadfxriv, to 

in Herod, (ixaur](ro[xai in the later be angry, oBvo-dfxevos ; Perf. oSaJSucr/xai 

writers). with the sense of the Pres. (§ 219, 8). 

lia.iop.ai (Ep.), to seek, Fut. /j.d<rofj.cu olSa, to know, § 228. 

(iiri/xdcaeTai) ; Aor. i/xaod/xriu. olojxai, to think; Ep. oX(*>, o'/'oj, 6'iop.at, 

jxavdrdvoi, to learn, Fut. in Theoc. /za&eO- wi6fj.riv, o'loito ; Aor. Mid. d'iad/xTju 5 

/iat (like /uaxoD^ai). Aor. Pass, wio'frnv, oia&eis. 

/j.dpva,uai (Ep.), to fight, only Pres. and ovofxai (Ep. and Ion.), to blame, ovoo-ai, 

Impf., like Svvafxat, but Opt. jxapvoi- third Pers. PI. ovourai, Imp. oj/o<to ; 

yu.7jv, Od. A, 513. Impf. wv6\xt]v, Opt. oi/oi/xriu, ovoiro; 

fidxo/J.a.1, to contend, Epic /xax^ovrai, Fut. ovSao/Acu ; Aor. uuocrdixTju and 

/xax^Tai, jxax^oiTo, f.iax*ou/To, Part. u>u6(tSt}v ; Ep. ovve(r&e (comp. ov\6/x- 

fxax^^^vos and /xax^ovfievos ; Ep. 6i/os), 11. w, 241, instead of oj'ecr&e 

Fut. paxricro/jLai and fxax^ofxai; Aor. and this instead of oVcKT&e from 'ON-; 

i/jLaxeo-dfjirjv. Ep. Aor. Mid. iovaro. 



$ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 283 

dpda, to see, Ion. opeco, Epic opo'co, Impf. first Aor. eirepffa (§ 223, 6) ; second 

tipeov ; Ep. second Pers. Sing. Pres. Aor. eirpa&ov ( § 223, 11); Ep. second 

Mid. Sprjai, third Pers. Sing. Impf. Aor. Mid. Inf. Wptau ($ 227, B). 

6/)7jto ; Ion. Perf. oirunra. 7r4ro/j.aL, to fly, second Aor. eVr^uTjj/, etc. 

'OPErNTMI, from which Ep. opeyvvs, (§ 223, 11). 

stretching oat ; 6p4y<a,to stretch; Mid. Trev&op.ai (poet, instead of ■Kvv^fdvoj.Lai), 

to stretch one's self, to reach after, Ep. Ep. second Aor. Mid. Opt. ireirvfroi- 

Perf. Mid. dpc!>peyp.ai, third Pers. PI. to; Perf. -7re7ruo>tcu (§ 223, 14). 

opupixarat (§ 219, 8), Plup. third ir&fyvov, enecpi/ov, Ep. second. Aor. Act. 

Pers. PI. opoopexaTo. of *ENn, to kill (§ 219, 7), Part. ir4<p- 

vpuvfii (poet.), to excite, Fut. opa-w, Aor. vosv with irregular accentuation; Ep. 

dbpaa (§ 233, 6); Ep. Perf. Intrans. Perf. Pass. irdcpaTai, ire(pd<r&ai ; Fut. 

upcapa (§219, 8), Subj. opdoprj, Plup. Perf. ire<j>r]o-op.ai (comp. SeSrjo-o/xat 

opwpei and apwpei ; Ep. Aor. tipopev ; from SeSe/xcu). 

Mid. 6pvvfxai, to rouse one's self, to stir, irfiyvvfiai, to fix, Ep. Aor. tttjkto, kut4- 

Ep. Fut. bpelrai, Aor. wp6p,y\v; Ep. tttjkto (§ 227, B). 

Aor. Mid. c«y>to, etc. (§ 227, B) ; Ep. iriKvap-ai, Eq. secondary form of 7reA.a£«, 

Perf. opwperai, Subj. 6pct>prjTai (§ 219, to c/raitf near, only Pres. and Impf. 

8). TrifnrATifAi, to fill, Ep. Aor. Mid. ttAtjto, 

bo-<ppaivop.ai, to smell, Ion. Aor. Mid. etc. [§ 227, A (a)]. 

6o-(ppai/ro. 7ri7n-&>, to fall, Ep. 7re7rreci;s (§ 228). 

ovrdw, to wound, Ep. Aor. oura, etc. iriTvaw and Tr'iTvnp.1, Ep. secondary form 

[§ 227, A (a)]. of ircTwOjw, to spread out, from 

6<pei\w, to owe, be under obligation, ought, which come Impf. irtVva instead of 

must, Ion., poet, (except in the dra- inirva, and Part, irnvas. 

matic dialogues of Att. writers), and Tr\r)<ro-a), to strike, Ep. second Aor. Act. 

in late prose o<peAoy, -es, -e, Ep. £iriTr\r\yov, Tr4-K\r\yov and Treir Arjy 6 p.rjv 

#<peAAoi>, ocpeXXov, in forms which (§ 219, 7). 

express a wish. ttAww (Ion.), to sail, Ep. second Aor. 

b<p4K\a> (Ep.), to increase, only Pres., Act. eirAwv, etc. [§ 227, A (d)]. 

Impf, and Opt. Aor. ocpeAAete;', Od. 7rWa>, to breathe, in Horn. Perf. Tz4iTvvp.ai 

fi, 334. (§ 223, Rem. 2), to be animated, intel- 

IlaAAco, to s/ia£e, Ep. second Aor. Act. ligent; second Aor. Act. Imp. &/j.tc- 

apLTreTTaKdou (§§ 207, 7, and 219, 7) and j/ue, second Aor. Mid. &[a.ttvvto [§ 227, 

second Aor. Mid. ird\ro (§ 227, B). A (e)] ; Aor. Pass. b.p.irvvvSrn instead 
rrdaxoo, to suffer, Ep. Perf. Part. -rrcTra- of ap.irvv$rn (§ 223, 12). 

frvi-p, as if from Tr4iraSa; Ep. Perf. TrW/crcw, to crouch, shrink from fear, Aor. 

7r67ro0-,d-e (§ 228, Rem.). eirT7j|a ; second Aor. KaTairTaKc&v, 

■Ka.Tkop.ai (Ion.), to tosto, to cert, Aor. Aeschyl. Eum. 247; Perf. i-xT-nx*, 

iira<rdfjL7]v ; Perf. Tr4ira.o-p.ai. Part. Ep. ireirTTj^s, wtos (§ 223, 13); 

7retd-«, to persuade, second Aor. Act. Ep. second Aor. KaTairT-hT-ni/ [§ 227, 

%m&ov, Aor. Mid. iTri&6p.7)u, only poet. A (a)]. 

in the Att. writers (tt&ov is a false PaiVa>, to sprinkle, regular Aor. eppcwa ; 

reading in Plat. Phaed. p. 117, a); Perf. Mid. or Pass. 4ppacrp.ai. In 

Ep. second Aor. Act. Tc4irfoov, Subj. Horn. eppaSaTcu (§ 220, Rem. 2). 

Treiri^ca, Opt. Treiri&otpu, Inf. 7re7rt3-e?y, p4(w, see ep5a>. 

Part. TreTn&<av, Imp. TreVi^e (§ 219, 7) ; friyeco (Ep. and poet.), to shudder, Fut. 

second Aor. Mid. im&6p.w, to frws£, piyrjo-ca; Aor. ippiyno-a; Perf. Ep. 

Opt. ireTn&oiTO ; from the second Aor. epplya. 

come Tn&r)crQi), to be obedient, Treinfrrjaa), 2ao'a>, (raw and ffoca (Epic), to save 

to be convinced, TT&r)o-as, obedient; on (= ad>(w) ; from crad'co Fut. craaW , 

eVeVi^ej/ and TreVeio-^t (see § 228). Imp. Pres. Act. (raw [§ 222, I, A 

ireAaCw, to draw near (Trag. 7reAc&co, (4)]; third Pers. Sing. ^ Impf. Act. 

■7rAad-w),Fut.ir€AdVw, poet, sometimes adov and tract) instead of eVaoe ; Aor. 

TreAw; Ep. Aor. Pass. €7reAa<r&7?j/, eVdWa; Fut. Mid. (raaVo,uc«, Aor. 

poet. Att. iTrXaSrnv, Mid. Ep. eir\j)p.T)v, Pass, icraw&yi' ; from (row Part. cr«- 

etc, Att. 4TT\a.fx.7}v [§ 227, A (a)]; ovtcs and Impf. crweo-Koj/ ; from <r6<a 

Ep. Perf. TreTT\-np.4vos, Att. Tr4irKap.ai. Subj. Pres. tron, (rows, coWi. 
7rep^w (poet.), to destroy, Fut. 7repo-co ; o-evw (poet.), to put in violent motion, 



284 DIALECTS. [$ 230. 

Mid. to haste, Ep. Aor. eo-creua and <peido/j.ai, to spare, Ep. second Aor. Mid. 

ffeva, i(T(reva.fj.r)u and (TevdjX7]v (§ 223, 7re(piSoip.7]u, ire<pi$ea&ai (§ 219, 7) ; 

8); Perf. eaavjuai (§223, 14); Plup. from <pd8o/j.cu comes ■7re<pid-f)<To/j.ai. 

4(Tav/xr}u ; second Aor. Mid. io-av/x-nu, <pepco, to carry, (peprs Ep. instead of 

etc. [§ 227, A (e)]; Aor. Pass, iaau- (pepere (§ 229); Ion. and Ep forms 

&r)u Soph., i^eo-vfrrjv Horn. — On the are : Aor. fjvetKa, eveiiccu, etc., rjveiKci- 

Ep. aevTcu, (tovtcu, etc., see § 229. /u.77^ ; Perf. ivrji/eiy/ncu ; Aor. Pass. 

(TKiSvajxcu. to scatter, Ep. secondary form "hueix&W, — Ep. second Aor. Imp. 

of (TK^avwixai, only Pres. and Impf. ofcre, Inf. olo-epev (§ 223, 10); first 

(TTepeco, to ro6, first Aor. Inf. crrepeVat Aor. avcdcrai, Herod. 1, 157 (comp. 

Ep. instead of o~Tepr)(rcu. 6, 66. av&io-ros instead of avfriaros). 

a-Tvyecc, to fear, to hate, Ep. second Aor. cpevyco, to flee, Ep. Trecpvy/xevos, escaped 

%GTvyov\ first Aor. eo-rv^a, Trans., to (§ 223, 14). 

make fearful. (p&dvu, to come before, anticipate, Epic 

TAm, Epic second Aor. reraydov, cp&d/j.ei'os [§ 227, A (a)]. 

seizing. (p&elpw, to destroy, Ion. Eut. Siacp^apeo/xai 

TAAAfl, to endure, Ep. Aor. irdXacra, instead of <p&apJicro[xai ; Aor. diacp&ep- 

Subj. raXda-aco ; second Aor. erA.^ era* (.§ 223, 6). 

(§ 194, 4); Perf. Te'rATjKa, TCTAa^ez/ (pSivw, to vanish, and Ep. <£&fco, to Cott- 
le 228), Fut. TXT)<roiAai. sume, and sometimes to vanish, perish 
ravixa (poet.), to stretch, Ep. TcWrat (Ep. first Pers. long), Eut. <pdi<rw; 

(§229). Aor. ecpfrlaa; Mid. to joemfc, Eut. 

Tapao-crw, to disturb, Ep. second Perf. (p^iaojxai ; Perf. €<p$np.cu ; Plup. e</>3-i- 

Terprixa, lam disturbed. P^v; Ep. Aor. icp&ifxrjv, etc. [§ 227, 

TEMft, to reacA, overtake, Ep. Aor. erer- A (c)] ; Ep. Aor. Pass, third Pers. PL 

fWV (§.' 219, 7). aTre^j^ei/. 

repTTw, to delight, Ep. irdpcp^rjv, irdpTrrji/, <pi\ta>, to love, Ep. Aor. i(pl\d[j.r]v ((pi- 

irpdiryji/, Subj. first Pers. PI. rpaireio- Xwvrai, <p7\cu). 

/xeu ; second Aor. Mid. iTpairojxiqu and <ppd(a>, to speak, Ep. Aor. ire<ppddov 

Tfrapir6fjLnv (§ 219, 7). (§ 219, 7). 

Tevx<a (poet.), to ??za^e ready, to obtain, epvpea, to knead, in prose, forms its tenses 

Eut. Teu|o> ; Aor. erev^a, Perf Ep. from cpvpdw, e. g. (pvpdav, etc., Aor. 

TeTeuxws, having obtained; Eut. Mid. Pass. icpvpaS-nis, Plat. Theaet. 147, c. 

rev^o/nai; Aor. Mid. Te^ao-^at ; Perf. (but 4<pvpSr)v, Aesch. Ag. 714); yet 

TeTvy/xcu (§ 223, 14), third Pers. PI. Perf. irecpvpjxai, and in Aristoph. 7re- 

Ep. TeTewx arat 5 I n f- Te^^x^-at j Plup. (pvpa/j.cu ; Fut. Perf. Tre<pvpcrecr&ai 

ireTvy/AYiv, third Pers. PL Ep. eTeTev- Pind., Epic and poet, (pvpaw, etc. 

Xaro; Aor. Pass. eYvx^; Fut. Perf (§ 223, 6). 

TeTevlo^at ; — Ep. second Aor. tetu- (pvw, to produce, Perf. 7re</>0/ca, Ep. third 

/cetj/, T6TVK0VTO, T€Tvk4ct&cu (§ 219, 7). Pers. PL ire(pvao~i, Part. Tretyvwras, 

TIEH, Ep. Perf Act. veTirjios, -6ios, TrecpvvTa (§ 223, 13); Impf. Ep. eVe- 

anxious, and Perf. Mid. / am anxious, <Pvkov. 

second Pers. Dual reTi-ncr&ov, Part. Xafouou (Ep.), to retreat, yield, Aor. Mid. 

T€Ti-n/j.evos. KeKaSouro (§ 219, 7); Aor. Act. /ce/ca- 

rivvvfiat, Ep. secondary form of rivojxai, Sou and Fut. /re/caS^cra;, Trans., to cfc- 

to punish; in Att. poetry with one pn'ye q/J ro6. 

v, Tii/vficu (§ 185). X a ' l P w i io rejoice, Ep. Fut. Kex a P"h°~ a > 

r/j.7]yca, Ep. secondary form of re/xva, Kex a P~ho-o/uLa.L ; first Aor. Mid. xV OT0 ; 

to cm?, first Aor. T/xri^as ; Aor. Pass. second Aor. K€X < xp 0J/T0 > Kexapoiaro 

third Pers. PL Tfidyev. (§ 219, 7); K e X apv^s (§ 223, 13); 

rpecpu, to nourish, Ep. second Aor. Perf. Kexapp-evos, Eur.; Verb. Adj. 

eTpacpov, I nourished, Perf. rerpocpa, x a P T ° s - 

Intrans.: Aor. Pass. irpdcpTjv, third xa^Sa^co (Ep.), to hold, to contain, Aor. 

Pers. PL rpdepeu. ix a ^ ov 'i Perf Avith the sense of the 

Qaivoti, to show, Ep. (pae'ivcav, enlightening ; Prcs. /ce'xa^Sa; Fut. x e ' l0 ~°/ xai (comp. 

Ep. Aor. Pass. £<padv$-qv ; Perf. Mid. €7ra,dw, -ireuro^cu). 

or Pass. irecpan-fiaL, third Pers. Sing, x 6 '^) /o P our out : ^P-? ^ ut - X e ^ w I ■^ or - 

■jrecpavrai : Fut. Trecp-ho-oficu) second ex eua j second Aor. Mid. x^ T0 > X^. ue " 

Aor. cpduio-Key, l\. A. 64. j^os [§ 227, A (e)]. 






$ 231.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 285 

SECTION III. 

FORMATION OF WORDS. 

§231. Primitive ivords. — Stems. — Derivatives. 

1. Words are formed, (a) by derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord- 
ance with certain laws. 

2. Those words, from which other words are derived, but which are them- 
selves underived, are called primitives (vocabula primitiva). Primitive words 
are either verbs (which constitute the greater part), substantives, adjectives, or 
pronouns. A primitive has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g. 
Tp4<p-CD, ypd<p-a>, (pep-co, Xey-co, \l&-os ; Ka\-6s ; i/x-4. 

3. The roots, i. e. the forms which remain, after the rejection of the inflection- 
endings, are all monosyllabic. Still, the roots do not always appear pure in 
the primitives, but often with a strengthened form, e.g. Sdn-v-to, iK-vt-ofiai, 
av£-dv-to, t v ( 7 ) % -dv-to, aX-io-K-o/xai, tti-tt pd-GKto. Comp. §§ 139, and 157, 1. 
Yet these strengthened forms extend only to the Pres. and Impf. 

4. Words which are derived (vocabula derivata) from primitive words, are : — 

(a) Either Stems, i. e. such words as are formed from primitives by merely 
assuming another inflection-ending, which is without any special signification. 
To these indefinite endings belong several of the third Dec, e. g. the gender- 
sign s (6 yv\p, ri Hip, 7] /37j|, r) tttv^, r\ vav-s, 6 y\ fiov-s, 6 r\ ira?-s, instead of 7rcu5-s; 
in many words the s is omitted, see § 52, 1) ; the endings -is (f} cirdv-is, v;ant, 
7) e'A7r-is), and -vs (6 ardx-vs, v lax^s) 5 also the endings of the first and sec- 
ond declensions, e. g. --n, -a, -os, -ov (vik-t], \\nr--n, pl(-a, ttXovt-os, voa-os, p6S-ov) ; 
finally, several adjective-endings, e. g. -os, -rj, -ov {<pi\-os, -rj, -ov), -vs, -e?o, -v 
(y\vK-vs, -em, -u), etc.; 

(b) or Derivatives, i. e. such words as are formed either from primitives, 
or from stems, by assuming a special derivation-syllable with a special l sig-' 
nification, e. g. xpuc-o-w, to make golden, to gild ; pi\-Ttop, orator ; ypa<p-iic6s, skilled 
in painting. 

5. The root is often lengthened in derivation (§ 16, 3), e. g. A^-77 (from 
\a&-e?v), x"h v (from xa^-e?;/) ; or it takes the variable vowel (§ 16, 6), e. g. rp4<p- 
w, rpo(p-r), rpocp-6s, rp6<p-ifxos, rpa<p-ep6s. A strengthening consonant (§§ 139, 
1, and 157, seq.) may also be added; or the final consonant A be doubled, e. g. 
KdWos from na\6s ; some stems also take a reduplication, e. g. ott-wtHj, e'S-wS-ifj, 
ay-toy-6s, Xi-crv<p-os (from 2E#-n, comp. o~ocp-6s). Other changes also may be 
made in the root, as has been shown in § 16. 

6. The change of e into (seldom into a) and of et into 01 (§ 16, 6) requires 

1 By comparing the examples under (a) and (b), it will be seen that the 
terminations of the former are not significant, while those of the latter are. 



286 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 232. 

special attention. It occurs, (a) in Oxy tones of the first Dec. in -f] and a of 
more than one syllable, e. g. rpo<p-ii, nourishment (from Tp4<p-a) ; fxov-i],a remain- 
ing (from jUeV-co) ; <pop-d, a carrying (from <pep-a>) ; a\oi<p-7), salve (from a\ei<p- 
ftjjj — (b) in dissyllabic Barytones of the second Dec, which denote what is 
done, or the result of an action, e. g. Xoyos, icord (from Key-w) ; <pov-os, murder 
(from <i>EN-n, comp. %ire<pvov) ; vop.os, a law (from vey.-u>) ; — (c) in dissyllabic 
Oxytones of the second Dec. in -/to's, and in dissyllabic oxytone adjectives of the 
second Dec. in -6s, which, for the most part, denote an active object and often have 
a substantive meaning, e. g. ir\ox-H-6s, plait of hair (from 7rAe'/c-a>) 5 &to\-/x6s, 
garment (from areW-w) ; iro/xTr-os, attendant (from Tre/xir-co) ; cro(p-6s, wise (from 
2E4>-X1, sapio) ; rpo<p-6s, nourishing, nourisher (from rpe(p-w) ; — (d) in monosyl- 
labic substantives of the third Dec, e. g. <p\6%, flame (from cp\ey-w) ; So'p|, 
antelope (from 84pK-o/u.ai) ; — (e) in oxytone substantives in -evs and adjectives 
in -as, which, however, have sometimes a substantive sense, e. g. rpo<p-evs, nour- 
isher (from Tp£<p-a) ; cnrop-ds, scattered (from a-irtp-eiv) ; Xoy-ds, chosen (from 
\4y-u) ; dpofM-ds, running (from APEM-X1, comp. Spa/A-ely) ; — (f ) in all derivatives 
of the forms mentioned, e. g. in substantives in -afj.os, adjectives in -ifios, verbs 
in -oo>, -ew, -6ca, -evca, -i£a>, e. g. ir\6i<-afxos; rp6<p-i/xos ; <p&ov-4a (from <p&6v-os), 
Sw/x-da (from 56/a-os, and this from 54/x-a), etc. 

Remark. The change of e into a (comp. § 16, 6) is found only in a few old 
poetic derivatives, e. g. Tpatp-epos. 

Rem. 2. Words derived from verbs are called verbals; those derived from 
substantives or adjectives, denominatives. 



A. Derivation. 

§ 232. I. Verbs. 

1. All derivative verbs end in -da, -4w, -ita, -6w, -vw, -euco, -d(a, -i£a>, 
-6(w, -v£w; -aivw, -vvu, -aipa), -eipcc. All these verbs must be considered 
as denominatives ; for though the stem-substantive for several verbs of this 
kind is not in use, yet the analogy of the other verbs requires that a substan- 
tive should be assumed as the stem of these also. Many of these derivative 
verbs, especially many in -ew and -aw, supply the place of obsolete primitives, 
e. g. </>:Aeco, Ti/nda). — On the formation and signification of derivative verbs the 
following points are to be noted : — 

(a) Verbs in -aw and -d^o, which are mostly derived from substantives of 
the first Dec, and those in -tfy which are derived from substantives and 
adjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since 
they denote either a condition or the exercise of agency or activity, e. g. roXfida, 
to be bold, from roAyua, boldness; x°^ w > to be an 9 r y, from x oA ^> 9 a ^> yodco, to 
weep, from y6os ; 8j/ca£w, to judge, from SIkt) ; iXTrifa, to hope, from iXiris ; dpi£oo, 
to limit, from opos; aiTtfa, to beg, from air-ns, beggar; sometimes those in -dca 
denote fulness, abundance, e. g. xo^^t t° be full of bile, have much bile. — Verbs 
in -d(oi and -I (a formed from proper names, express the effort to resemble 
single individuals or whole nations, in custom, nature, language, sentiment. 



$ 233.] DERIVATION OF VERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES. 287 

Such verbs are called Imitative verbs, e. g. 8wpid(co, to be a Dorian, i. e. to speak 
or think as a Dorian, Acopievs ; e\\T}ylfy, to personate the custom or language of a 
Greek, to be a Greek in custom, etc. ; /^Si^w, to be a Mede in sentiment. 

Remark 1 . Verbs in -ifa often signify to make something into that which 
the root denotes. See (c). 

Rem. 2. Verbs in -6fa and -i(ca are very rare, e. g. apfA6(ca, to Jit ; kprrufa, to 
creep. — By the ending -ct£o also, verbs are formed, which denote the repetition 
or strengthening of the idea expressed by the simple verb ; these are called 
Frequentative and Intensive verbs, e. g. pnrTd(w, to throw to and fro, jacto, from 
piirTO},jacio ; crevdfa, to sigh much and deeply, from arivoo, to sigh ; di«x(a> : properly, 
to liken again and again, to compare on all sides ; hence to infer, conjecture. 

(b) Verbs in -ecu and -eua are derived from substantives and adjectives of 
all declensions, and commonly express the intransitive idea of the primitive, for 
the most part, the being in a condition, or the exercise of agency, the practising of 
that which is signified by the primitive ; but they are sometimes transitive also. 
When the stem ends in -es, which is the case, e. g. in adjectives in -77s, -es, the 
es is omitted, and when it ends in -ev, the eu is omitted before the ending -eico, 
e. g. (piXew, to be a friend, to love, from <p(\os, cVruxew, to be unfortunate, from 
arvx'fis (stem arvxes), evSaifxovea), to be prosperous, from evdat/xwu (stem evdaifiou), 
ayopevw, to speak in public, from ayopd, market, /cocr^e'co, to adorn, from k6(Tij.0Sj 
PaciAevai, to be a king, from jScicnAeus. 

(c) Verbs in -6 a, which are mostly derived from substantives and adjectives 
of the second Dec, those in -aivco, which are commonly derived from adjec- 
tives, more rarely from substantives, and those in -ivw, from adjectives only, 
generally denote the making or transforming something into that which the primitive 
word signifies; in like manner several in -ifa, see Rem. 1, e. g. xP v<r ^ w i to 
make golden, to gild, from xP va 'os, 871X600, to make evident, from SfyAos, ayj/t£a>, to 
make pure, from kyvos, irXovjify, to make rich, to enrich, from ttAovtos, KoiKaivco, 
to make hollow, from ko?Aos, Aeu/coiVco, to make white, from \zvkos, fSapvvco, to 
burden, from fiapvs. 

Rem. 3. From the Fut. of several verbs, are formed verbs in -o-elw, which 
denote a desire for that which the primitive word signifies ; these are called 
Desiderative verbs, e. g. yeXacreiw, to desire to laugh, from yeAdco, to laugh, iroXe- 
/iTjo-eiw, to desire to engage in war, from iro\efxi(ci), irapaScocreiw, to be inclined to sur- 
render. There are also other Desideratives in -dw and -toco, e. g. Savarda), to 
wish to die, ix.o&r\Tid(a, to wish to become a disciple. 

Rem. 4. Some verbs in -cnca> have an inceptive sense [beginning to be), and are 
called Inceptive or Inchoative verbs, e. g. ynpdo-Kca, to begin to be old, to grow old; 
yeveidcrKa, to begin to have a beard ; r)f}d<rKco, pubesco. 

§ 233. II. Substantives. 

Substantives are derived: — 
1. From verbs and substantives, and express — 

a. A concrete idea, i. e. the idea of an active person (concrete nouns) : 
(a) With the endings -evs (Gen. -ecos) for the Masc, -eza or -kt a a for the 
Fern. 5 -T175? [-4rr]s, -Jttjs, -rr?js, -arris] (Gen. -ov) (mostly Paroxytones), -ri)p 
and -rap (Paroxytones) for the Masc, -rpia (Proparoxytones), -rpis, -ris, 



288 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 233. 

and -is (Gen. -tdos), -rzipa (Proparoxytone) for the Fern. ; -wv for the Masc, 
-aiva for the Fem. ; -ids for the Masc, -cats and -w'ivr\ for the Fem., e.g. 
iepevs, priest, Fern. Upeia, from iepos; wvAtjt^s and -77/7, flute-player, Fern. avAfj- 
To/a, avX-nrpls, from avAew ; aarrjp, deliverer, crcvreipa, from crc6£t> ; iroXirris, 
citizen, ttoATtis, from 7ro'Ats ; prjraip, orator, from f PE-fi ; Srepdireor, servant, Sepd- 
ircuva, from frdpwp ; olnerins, a slave, from o?/cos ; Stj^oVt^, one of the people, from 
Sottas ; oirXlr-ns, a hoplite, from ottXov ; arparidiT-ns, a soldier, from crpaTid. 

(£) With the ending -os (Gen. -oO), seldom, and only from verbs with the 
variable vowel [§ 231, 6 (c)J, e. g. iro[xir6s, attendant, from Tre/nira} ; 6 7) rpo<pos, 
nourisher, nurse, from Tpe<pcc ; ap&ySs, an ally, from ap-hyco. 

b. They expi-ess the abstract idea of action, i. e. action or energy apart from 
the person who manifests it. These are abstract nouns : — 

(a) From verbs : 

(a) with the endings -cris (Gen. -cecas) and (more seldom) -eta, substantives 
which denote the transitive or active idea of the verb, e. g. 7rpd|ts, actio, an acting, 
from irpcLTTw ; Troirjais, a making, from troUw ; doKip-aaia, a proving, from Soja/xa(a> ; 

(/3) with the ending -p. 6s (Gen. -ov), such as denote the intransitive idea of 
the verb, e. g. bdvp/j.6s, weeping, from oSvpo/mt ; 

(7) with the ending -fxa, such as denote the effect or result of the transitive 
action of the verb, e. g. irpayp.a, something done, fiurjp.a, monumentum, irotr]pLa, x the 
thing made or done ; 

(5) with the endings -p.7], -rj, -a (all for the most part Oxytones), and (from 
verbs in -evee), -eta, such as denote sometimes a transitive relation, and some- 
times the effect of that relation, e. g. TopA], a cutting, from re^vca ; aoid-f), song, 
from det'Sw, <p&opd, destruction; iraifieia, education; 

(e) with the endings -os (Gen. -ov), -tos (Gen. -rov) and -os (Gen. -ovs) 
such as denote, generally, an intransitive relation, also a transitive, and partly 
the effect of the action of the verb, e. g. \6yos, word, from Xeyca ; kwkvtSs, 
lamentation ; to k/?5os, care. 

(b) From adjectives (and substantives, which are sometimes used in an 
attributive sense) : — 

(a) with the endings -la, from adjectives in -os, and some in the third Dec, 
e. g. o~o(pta, wisdom (from o~ocp6s) ; evSaip-ovla, happiness (from evdai/xwu, Gen. 
-ov-os) ; 

(j8) -id (Proparoxytones) from adjectives in -ns and -ovs, whose stem ends in 
e and 0, with Avhich the t of the ending coalesces and forms ei and 01 (thus -eia, 
-otd), e. g. dA-^eta, truth (from aAr/.d^s, Gen. -e-os), ewoia, benevolence (from 
evuo-os, evvous) j 

(7) -o-vvt) mostly from adjectives in -oou (Gen. -ovos) and -os, e. g. <rw(ppo- 
crvj/7), modesty (from crdxppcov, Gen. -ov-os) ; hinaio-o-vvn, justice (from SIkpaos) ; 

(5) -T-ns, Gen. -T77TOS (commonly Paroxytones) from adjectives in -os and 

1 Nouns derived from the first Pers. Perf. Pass, denote the result of the action 
of the verb, e. g. (evpr)p.ai), evp-np.a, the thing found, the discovery ; those from tho 
second Pers., the abstract act, e. g. (ei/o^crat), evpecris, the act of finding ; those 
from the third Pers., the agent or doer, e. g (eup-nrai), evper'hs, the discoverer. 



$ 233.] DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 289 

-us, e. g. I<r6rr,s, Gen. -orrjros, equality (from ?cros) ; iraxvTns, thiclcness (from 
7raxvs) ; 

(e) -os, Gen. -eos = -ovs, from adjectives in -vs and -77s, and such as have 
the forms of comparison in -iuv and -uttos, e. g. rdxos, to, Gen. tolxovs, swift- 
ness (from raxvs), rpevdos, to, Gen. -ovs, falsehood (from ipevdrjs), alo-xos, t6, 
baseness (from alcrxpos, at&%itov) 5 

(() -ds, -dSos (only in abstract numeral substantives), e. g. 77 fxovds, unity ; 
dvds, duality ; Tpids, a triad. 

Remark 1. In abstracts in Ma, which express both a transitive and intran- 
sitive relation, from compounds in -tos and -ttjs (Gen. -ov), the t is commonly 
changed into <r, e. g. a&Ao&eTia and -<r(a (adAo& 6x775), a&avaaia (a&dvaTos), d/ca- 
&apo-(a, 6|uj8Aei|//a, etc. So also with adjectives in -10s, e. g. Mi\r)atos (M1A777-0S), 
eviavaios {hiavr6s). Comp. §§ 17, 6, and 234, Rem. 2. 

Rem. 2. The older Attic poetry sometimes makes the a long in the endings 
-eta and -01a, e. g. dvcuSeid, ivpovoid. 

2. From substantives alone, the following classes denoting the names of 
persons and things, are derived : — 

(a) Gentile nouns, i. e. the names of persons derived from their country, in 
-evs (Fern, -is, -iSos), -tnjs (Fem. -7tis), -arris (Fern. -arts), -tjttjs, -doTvs, e. g. 
Accpievs (a Dorian, one from Doris), Aeopis, ^v^ap'iTiqs, -?tis, ^TrapTidrns, 'Aiyivr)- 
tvs, 'HireipdoTns. Comp. § 234, 3 (g), etc. 

(b) Patronymics, i. e. the names of persons derived from their ancestors, with 
the endings -18775 (Fem. -is, Gen. -idos) ; also -iddris 1 ; but substantives of the 
first Dec. in -77s and -as, and many of the second and third Dec. whose stem 
ends in 1, and some others, have -a 8 77 s (Fem. -ds, Gen. -ados) ; these endings are 
appended to the stem, and where the stem ends in e, this e and t of the ending 
-idws combine and form a diphthong, as in TlrjXdSrjs, e. g. Tlpiafi-lSris, Fem. Upiafx-is 
from Xlpiajx-os, UvXeidris from ITtjAcus, Gen. YlvXe-eos, Kenpo7ridr]s from KeKpoxf/, 
Gen. -ott-os, Tlav&oidris from ndi/&oos, -ovs ; Te\a/j.wu-iddr)s from TeXajxdov, Alved- 
877s from Alveas, ©eariddris, Fem. ©eem-as from SeffTios. 

(c) Diminutives (frequently with the accompanying idea of contempt) with 
the endings -iov which is the most usual, -dpiov [-d<riov\ (seldom) and some 
few with the endings -vWiov, -uAAi's, -vdpiov, -v<piov (-dcpiov) (which 

belong mostly to the language of the common people and to comedy) ; is 

(Gen. -idos and -Idos), -tdiov (formed from -is); ic/cos, -i<TK-n {-'ktkiov, 

ixvt), -ix viov ) 5 id evs (but only of the young of animals), e. g. iieipdmov, youth, 

from fj.e7pa£, -an-os, iraid-iov, a little child, from ira7s, iraid-6s 5 — iraid-dpiov ; -dffiov 
instead of -dpiov only in icopdaiov (from n6pa, young woman) on account of the 
preceding p ; /xeipaK-v\\iov, a/ccwd--uAAis from 'duav&a, thorn, vf]o--vdpiov, islet ; 
fav-cpiov, little animal; XP V(T '^ ( P L0V fr° m XP vff ^ s ] — mvaK-is, little tablet, from 
7riVa£; a/xa^is, little wagon; vna-tdtov, islet, from vrj<Tos] ttpeddiov (instead of 
p -ddiov) from Kpeas, oliddiov (instead of oltct-idiov) from olma ; — v*avi-o~Kos, veavi- 
» 0-/07 from veavias; -{vkiov seldom, e. g. KOTvKiamov from uoTvK-n; -ix v V> 

1 This form is used, when the syllable preceding the Patronymic ending is 
long, otherwise the word would not be adapted to hexameter verse, since one 
jjhort syllable would stand between two long syllables ; thus, nrjArftdfjs, 

25 



290 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 234. 

-ixviov only in iroXixvr), Tro\ix vi °v from tt6\is, KvXixvr), kvKIxviov from kuAj£; 
— Xay-fievs, young hare, from Xaycis ; aer-iSeus, young eagle, from ae-ros. 

(d) Designations of place, with the endings -iov (in connection with the 
preceding vowels -aiov, -eiov, -<$ov) and -eiov, which denote the abode of the 
person designated by the primitive word, or a pluce consecrated to a divinity 
or hero 5 -civ (Gen. -u>vos), seldom -eciv, and -cav id, which denote the residence 
of persons or a place filled with plants, e. g. ipycurr'fip-ioif, workshop, from ipyacr- 
r-fip, and so others in -rrjpiov from -r-np or -rr)s ; sometimes also this ending is 
used with reference to vessels 7 e. g. iror^piov, drinking vessel; Kovpe?ov, barbells 
shop, from novpevs, -4-m (several in -iov [-eiov\ haye another signification, e. g, 
rpocpeTov, wages of a nurse, from Tpocpevs) ; Qrjaelov from Qnirevs, -4-cas, 'A&nvcaov, 
Movare?ov ; — avSpcov and yvvcwccvv, apartments for men and women; Ittttuv, stable 
for horses; podcav and podwvid, bed of roses; Trepurrepsuv and TrepiOTepcvv, dove- 
cote. 

(e) Substantives which denote an instrument or a means of accomplishing 
some object, with the endings -rpov and -rpa, e. g. £voTpa, curry-comb ; Si5a/c- 
rpov, tuition-money ; Xovrpov, water for washing ; \ovrp6v, bath ; also to designate 
place, e. g. opx^frrpa, dancing-room, instead of the ending -r?\piov. 

h 234. III. Adjectives. 

1. From verbs are derived adjectives with the following endings: — 

(a) With the ending -oj, which is annexed to the stem of the verb. These 
adjectives express the transitive, intransitive, or passive idea of the verb from 
which they are derived, e. g. <pav6s, brilliant, from cpaivco ; Xonr6s, the remainder ; 
the verb-stem of many is not in use, e. g. kcuc6s. 

(b) With the endings -ik6s, -77, -6v, and -ip.os, -ov, -i/xos, -rj, -ov or 
-o~ip.os, -ov, which denote ability, fitness, aptness. Of these, those in -ikos have 
a transitive signification, those in -ipos both a transitive and passive, e. g. 
ypa<p-ii<6s, Jit or able to paint ; rp6<p-ip.os, nutritive ; id-crip-os, curable. 

(c) A few with the ending -v6s, --ft, -6v with an intransitive or passive 
signification, e. g. 8ei-v6s, frightful (AEIfl), crep.-v6s, honored, honorable (aefio/jicu), 
arvy-v6s, hated, hateful (2TTm), iro&eiv6s (iro&eoo), desired. 

(d) A few with the ending -A 6 5 with a transitive signification, -ca\6s, -■{), 
-6v and (from verbs in -dec) -7)\6s, -rj, -6v with a transitive and intransitive 
signification, e. g. Sei-xSs, timid; e/nrcry-Aos (instead of iiarXayXos from e'/CTrATjcr* 
crca), frightful ; cpeid-co\6s, sparing; ffiyn\6s, silent; b.TrarnX6s, deceitful. 

(e) With the ending -ap6s, -d, -6v (from verbs in -dw and -aJLvw) with an 
intransitive signification, e. g. x«^«po'y, slack ; p.iap6s, stained; also in cpfrovepSs, 
envious; vocnr)p6s, diseased ; olarpSs, pitiable. 

(f) With the ending -p.ee v, -pov (Gen. -ovos) with an intransitive significa- 
tion, e. g. pvf}-pwv, mindful, memor (MNAft), vor)pccv, intelligent {voice). 

(g) With the ending --ns, -es (Gen. -eos), e. g. irA-fipvs, plenus. 

(h) With the ending -ds (Gen. -a5os) with a transitive, intransitive, or pas- 
sive signification, e. g. cpop-ds, bearing {<p£p<») ; Spopds, running (APEMH) ; \oyds, 
chosen (Aeycu). 



§ 234.] DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 291 

(i) With the endings -r6s, -rri, -tov, and -te'oj, -re a, -t 4ov (verbal 
adjectives) ; those in -to'j denote either a completed action like the Perf. Pass. 
Part., e. g. Ae/c-To's (from \4yw), dictus ; or the idea of possibility = English 
termination -He, which is their usual signification, e. g. opa-ros, capable of being 
seen, visible. In their formation, most of these follow either an existing or an 
assumed Perf. Pass., e. g. 

fiov\ev-co /Je-jSouAeu-Tcu fiov\ev-r6s, -tios. 

rt/xd-ca re-ri/xri-rai tl(at)-t6s 

(pcopd-w Tre-(p(t>pa.-rai (pwpa-Tsos 

<pi\4-<a ire-cplkri-Tcu (piAy-Tos 

Xe-o? fce-x^-rat xu-to's 

tt\4k-60 7T6-7rA€/c-Tai 7rAe/c-T<k, ~t4os 

\4y-u) Ae-Ae/c-Ttu AeK-Tos 

CTeA-A-w e-o-TaA-rcu o~toX-t4os 

rdv-a) (TA-H) re-Ta-Tat ra-reos 

di-Sca-fiL (AO-Xl) Se-So-rat 5o-tos, -t4os. 

Remark 1. Very many verbal adjectives, however, follow the analogy of 
other forms of the verb, not according to any definite rule, but take precisely 
such a form as suited the ear of the Greeks. Thus, for example, a considerable 
number followed the form of the first Aor. Pass., e. g. alpe-a, ■pp4-&r)v, aipe-r6s ; 
irav-w, i-Trav-(T-&r)v, Trav-cr-Tds, -t4os; xpa-o/xcu, i-xpri-^^Wi xpT)-<r-T6s, -t4os] 
<rrp£(p-<t), i-(rrpe(p-&r)v, arpeir-rSs ; ToeV-w, £-Tp4<pSr}P, rpeTr-Teos ; Tp4(p-<a, £-&p4<p- 
&rjv, frpeir-reos ; r /-(TT7j-/xt, icrra-^nu, crra-r6s, -r4os ; 4ircuv4-oo, £irr)v4-^rfVj iiraive- 
t6s ; — some the form of the second Aor. Act., e. g. e%w, e-cxe-roj/, 0-%6-tos ; 
alp4w, e'/Ae-Tov, eAe-r^s ; '(vfxi, '4-tou (commonly elrov), acp-e-reos, eV-e-ro's; t'i&t}- 
fii, e-Sre-rov, &e-r6s, -t4os; — some the form of the Pres. Act., e. g. fievca, fi4v 
€tov, /xeue-rSs, -reos; el/M, 1-tov, 1-t4os; so cnr-evxe-ros from 'ETXE-TON (e&xo- 
juai) ; hvva-r6s (dvuapcu) ; (prj/xl, (pa-rou, <pa-T6s. 

2. Adjectives are formed from substantives and adjectives : — 

By the ending -ios (in connection with the preceding vowel of the stem 
•cuos, -eios, -oios, -epos, -vios) and -ik6s (which, when v precedes, becomes -kos, 
and when z, often -ai<6s). These adjectives have a very great variety of mean- 
ings. They frequently indicate the mode or manner of the adjective idea, 
often also in a very general manner, that which proceeds from an object and is 
connected with it or related to it, e. g. ovpdu-ios, heavenly, pertaining to heaven ; 
Ka&dp-ios, cleanly (but Kc&ap6s, clean); £\ev&4pios, frank, liberal, liberalis (but 
eAeifoepos, liber) ; ayopcuos, belonging to the market-place (ay opd) ; &4peios, summer- 
like (&4pos, -e-os), alSoTos (aiBws, -6-os), rjpcfos and ijpwos; rpnriixvios; dov\uc6s] 
&ti\vk6s, fxaviaicds. 

Rem. 2. In some words the ending -cuos also -icuos occurs, e. g. x*P<r<uos, 
ffnoTaios and (tkoticuos. In several words the ending -aios (§ 17, 6) is used in- 
stead of -r-tos, e. g. <piXoT-i]cnos ((piASr-ns, -tjtos), kKovffios (eKct>v, -6uros). 

3. Adjectives are formed from substantives alone : — 

(a) With the ending -etos (mostly Paroxytones), which are formed from 
words denoting persons, especially from proper names ; but in respect to their 
signification they are like adjectives in -ik6s, e. g. avBpelos, belonging to a man, 
manly, ywcunelos, av&p&irtios, 'O/x^peios. 



292 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 235. 

(b) With the endings -eos = -ovs and -tvos, which denote the material 
of which anything is made, like the English ending -en, e. g. xp^-eos = XP V ~ 
aovs, golden; x^ K * 0S = X a ^ K °v s > brazen; \vX-ivos, wooden; ckvtipos, made of 
leather, leathern. 

(c) With the ending -Tv6s (seldom -ivos), derived from substantives. These 
express certain relations of time ; sometimes, also, an abundance or fulness, 
e.g. ea-irep-iv6s, vespertinus ; x^^r-H^s, hesternus ; bpsiv6s, mountainous (opos, Gen. 
-e-os). 

(d) With the endings -eis, Gen. -euros (always preceded by a vowel, -n, 
when the substantive from which the Adj. is formed, is of the first Dec, and 0, 
when it is the first or second); -pos, -ep6s, -inpos, -dAeos, which denote 
fulness or abundance, e.g. vX-h-eis, woody; irvpo-eis, fiery; alo-X'P^ s i base; vos- 
ep6s, and voff-rjpos, unhealthy ; pw/x-aKeos, strong. Exceptions to those in -eis, 
are SevBprieis from SevBpou, x a P^ from x«P iy - 

(e) With the ending -rip 10 s, which have the transitive sense of verbal sub- 
stantives in --np and -r]s, e. g. o-urripios, preserving, that preserves. 

(f) With the ending -a> 8-ns, Neut. -a>5es (formed from -o-ei87)y from e!8os, 
form, quality). These adjectives denote a quality or resemblance, but often 
also a fulness or abundance, e. g. <p\oy&Zins, resembling flame, fiery ; iroidS-ns, 
abounding in grass, g7-assy. 

(g) With the endings -ios (Fern, -id), -k6s, -lkos (Fern, -kt), -iK-h), -t\v6 s 
(Fern. -r\vr\), and when 1 or p precedes, -av6s (Fern, -avi)), -Ipos (Fern, -Ivn) ; 
these are Gentile adjectives, which are also frequently used as substantives, 
particularly those in -Tjf^s, -av6s, -?uos, which are formed only from names 
of cities and countries out of Greece, e. g. Koplv&-ios, -ia, 'A&nvaTos, -aia, X?os 
(instead of -iios from Xtos), 'Apye?os (from "Ap-yos, -e-os) ; Awcedaifiov-iKos ; Kv£uc- 
TjuSs, -t]vr\ (Kv(lkos), ~2,apSi-avos, -awn (HdpSeis, Ion. Gen. -i-cov), 'AyKvpavSs 
("AyKvpa), Tapavr-tvos, -ivn (Tapas, -avT-os). 

§ 235. IV. Adverbs. 

1. Adverbs are formed from verbs : — 

With the endings -Srjv or, when the primitive has the variable o,-dSr}v, 
which denote mode or manner, e. g. KpvfiS-nv, secretly (kpvtttu) 5 ypd^-5-nv, by 
writing, scribendo (ypdcpcc) ; o-irop-aS-nv, scatter edly, sparsim. 

2. From verbs and substantives : — 

With the ending -B6v or -aSiv, -r)d6i> (mostly from substantives). These 
also denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external form, e. g. 
ava<pavh6v, openly, aperte ; 810/cptSoV, distinctly; f3oTpvdov, grape-like, in clusters 
{^6rpvs), l\a86v, in troops, cater vatim ; ay e\r)86u, in herds, gregatim ; KvwnSop, 
like a dog. 

3. From substantives, pronouns, and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the 
three relations of place, viz., whence, whither, and ivhere, by the endings -frey, -8e 
(-ire), and -&i, e. g. ovpav6-&€v, from heaven ; ovpau6v-Se, into or to heaven, ovpav6- 
3t, in heaven; &Kho-&ev,from another place, aliunde, &\Ao-ce, to another place, alio, 
&W0-&1, at another place, alibi. — Rules in respect to the accent of those in -frw 



$ 236.] DERIVATION OP ADVERBS. 293 

and -<Sh : (a) Dissyllables are either Paroxytones or Properispomena, e. g. 
irpScr&ei/, yrj&ev, av&i; (b) polysyllables are Paroxytones, when the penult is 
short by nature, e. g. Aetr^^ej/ from AeV/3os, Kvirp6&ev from Kvirpos, ovpav6&ev, 
obpav6bi from ovpav6s ; exceptions : ofao&ev, oIko&i, evSo&ev, zt/8o&i> irdvTo&ev, 
&\ko&(zj', eKaaTo&ev, and some poetic words ; (c) polysyllables whose penult is 
long by position, are without exception Proparoxytones, e. g. svToaScv, ottkt&sv ; 
(d) polysyllables whose penult is long by nature, are Proparoxytones, when the 
primitive was a Barytone, e. g. e£a&ev (e|o>), erepw&ej/ (erepos), 'Aft^d-ey 
('Afrrjvai) ; but Properispomena, when the primitive was an Oxytone, e. g. 
UvSraSev (Ilu&c6), ept^ev (@pid). On the accent of those in -5e (-ere), see § 34, 
Eem. S. 

Remark 1. Words of the first Dec. retain their a or 77 before -Stev; those 
of the second, their ; and those of the third, the of the Gen. ending, e. g. 
'OAujUTrtd&ei/, ^irdpTTj-frev, otno-frev, &k\o-&ev ; but the vowels a, 77, and are 
often exchanged with each other, e. g. pi£6-&ei/ from p((a ; Meyap6&ev from 
Meyapa, rd. 

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -o>, and also others, append the endings to the un- 
changed vowels, e. g. 'dvco-frev, Kdra-bev, efa-&ev, c/ce?-£e*', eyyv-^i, evdo-frev, 
evdo-hri. Some forms of the comparative in -repos lengthen into «, e. g. 
a/xcpoTepw-Sev. In some of the above forms, a> can be shortened into o in poetry, 
and then rejected entirely, e. g. Qo-bev, trpoa-Srsu (instead of e£co&ei/, irpocrca&ei'), 
and in imitation of Doric usage, <r is often omitted before &, e. g. oir&ev, ckto- 
&ev (instead of oiria^ev, eKroff&ev). 

Rem. 3. The ending -5e is commonly appended to substantives only, and to 
the unchanged form of the Ace, e. g. aAaSe, to or into the sea (aAs), Tlv&wSe (from 
Uv^do), olK6vd€ only Epic, elsewhere olKade (from the stem 'OIH), as <pvya.Se (from 
$>YE) instead of (pvyfjvde which is not in use, 'EAevaTvdde). In pronouns and 
adverbs, -<re is appended instead of -8e, e. g. e«:e?-o-e, #AAo<re, ere'pwcre, ovdafi6<re, 
T7]\6<re ; more seldom in substantives, e. g. oi'/cocre. — In plural substantives in 
-as, <r8e becomes (e, e. g. 'A^rjva^, 077,3a£e ; but some substantives in the singu- 
lar, also, follow this analogy, e. g. 'OAu^Tria^e ; so the poetic adverbs, &vpa(e, 
to the door,foras, epa(e, %«i««C e > to ^ e ground, humum (from the obsolete sub- 
stantives, epa, %<¥"*» earth). 

Rem. 4. Instead of -5e or -<re, the Epic dialect has - 5 1 s also, e. g. x«/«t8i5r 
instead of x^^C*! d\Xv8ts instead of #AAo<re, and otKadis, domum. 

Rem. 5. Several pronominal forms with the usual suffix, have, between the 
stem and the suffix, the syllable a%, which is to be accounted for by the ending 
-o/cis coming before the aspirated relative, e. g. voAK-ax-^v (from -rroKAaKis 
and o&ej/), iravT-ax-6<re; this occurs also in most pronominal adverbs of place 
in -77, -ov, -01, e. g. dAA-ax-oC, alibi, iroAA-ax-ov, navr-ax-V, iroAA-ax-77, navT-ax-o?. 

§ 236. B. Compounds. 

1. Every compound consists of two words, one of which explains the other 
more definitely. The explanatory word usually stands first, e. g. vav-fiaxia, 
sea-fight, as is usual in English in composite words. The word which is explained 
by the other, shows to what class of words the compound belongs, i. e. whether 
it is a substantive or verb, etc. ; thus, e. g. vav-fiaxia is a substantive, vav-fiaxeiu 
a verb, vav-fidxos an adjective. 

Remark 1. The explanatory word takes the second place in the compound 
but seldom, and mostly in poetic words, e. g. deuridaip-wv, i. e. deicras robs 5ai- 
(lovas. 

25* 



294 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 237. 

2. Both words stand either in an attributive relation to each other ( = a substan- 
tive qualified by an adjective or by another substantive in the Gen.), e. g. Ka%- 
€ £/ a (= Kan)] e|is, bad condition) ; (TKiaypacpia (= crxias ypacprj), painting in light and 
shade; iinr-ovpis (= 'tmrov obpd), horse-tailed; or in an objective relation (= a 
verb, adjective, or substantive with the Case of a substantive in the relation of 
an object, or with an adverb in the same relation), e. g. liriroTpo<pe?v (= 'lirirovs 
rpecpetv), linroTpScpos; vavfxax^v (i. e. vaval /xdxear^ai), vavjxdxos, yav/xax'ta ; 
euTi'Xe?!', ewrux^s ; dvLardpai, dvdffTaros, avacrTeuris. 

3. The verb can be compounded with prepositions only, e. g. airo-, e/c-, dvn-, 
irpo-, ip.-, Sia-, Kara-, irapa-, irpocr-fiaiveiv : comp. § 237, 5 ; the substantive and 
adjective, either with substantives and adjectives, or with prepositions, or with 
separable and inseparable adverbs and prefixes, e. g. (To>ixaro-(pvXa^, r)8v-\6yos ; 
irepi-crracTis, did-\evKos ; ev-Tvxvs, av-alrios ; the adverb, with prepositions only, 
e. g. irept-CTTaSov. 

Rem. 2. All other compounds are formed by derivation from words pre- 
viously compounded, e. g. ev-rvx^y and ev-rvx&s from ev-Tvxys. 

Rem. 3. (a) Separable adverbs are such as are used alone, as well as in 
composition, e. g. ev, well; tt\t]v, except; a/j.a, at the same time; dyxh near; &pri, 
now. recently ; dyav (aya-), very; irdKiv, again; iraKai, long since; Sis from 8vo, 
bis, or the same as 5i'x<*> dis, separately ; irav, wholly ; evrvxelv, euri^s, prosperous ; 
ir\T}[Xjj.e\r)s (nAyy, /j.4\os), violating harmony; TrA7)/xp.e\e?i>, ir\e/j.p.4Ar](TLs ; a/xaTpo- 
xd<a, to run together, a/xar pox'ia ', ayxifSureiv, to go near to ; ayx&d\a.o-cros, man 
propinquus ; dpriSfa\r]S, now blooming ; dyacr&evris, dydppoos, dydwupos, very snowy ; 
■jraAi/j.f5\a<rTos, that buds again ; TraAaicpvTos, planted long since ; St^tAtot, two thou- 
sand ; dicp&oyyos, having a double sound ; irduaocpos, all-wise. 

(b) Inseparable adverbs are such as are used only in composition. They are 
as follows : — 

(a) ^ju.t-, half, semi, e. g. f)/m.i<pAeKTos, half-burned, semiustus. 

()6) Svs- expresses difficulty, adversity, or aversion, and is often the antith- 
esis of ev, e. g. Svstvx^u and evrvx^y. dus8ai/j.ovia, misfortune ; 

(y) a Privative (usually dv- before a vowel) has the force of the Latin in, and 
expresses the negation of the idea contained in the simple word, e. g. 
dacxpos, unwise ; drijuia, dishonor ; divcus, childless ; dvairios, innocens. 

(8) a Collective and Intensive, like the Latin con in composition, expresses com- 
munity, equality, or a collective idea, and hence also intensity, e. g. (commu- 
nity, especially in the names of kindred and companions) a8e\<pos, brother, 
from 8eA(/wy, womb; (equality) drdXavros, of the same weight ; direSos, even; 
(in a collective sense) dfrp6os, collected (&pew, bpeonAcu, to cry aloud), aoAA^s, 
collected (from aA-fts or d\r]s), dyzipw, dy 4\r) ; (intensity) are^rjs, intent, in- 
tentus ; &<tkios, very shady ; &fipofj.os, making a loud noise. 

Rem. 4. The Euphonic a (§16, 10) must be distinguished from the Collec- 
tive a, e. g. o-Taxvs and d<rraxvs, an ear of grain ; a-Tepoiri} and dcrrepowf], lightning. 



§ 237. Formation of Compounds. 

1. When the first part of the compound is a verb (§ 236, Rem. 1), the pure 
(sometimes also the strengthened) stem of the verb remains unchanged, if the 
following word begins with a vowel, e. g. <pep-avyfis, nei^-apx^y ; or the final 
vowels e, o, i, also the syllables <ri, e<r, eat, ao, are annexed to the stem of the 
verb, if the following word begins with a consonant ; c also is annexed when 



$ 237.] FORMATION OF COMPOUNDS. 295 

the following word begins with a vowel, e. g. Sa/c-e-fru/ios, Anr-o-raKTys and \e«r- 
o-Tc£/CT7?y, TepTT-i-Kepawos, iyep-cri-yeAws, (pep-ea-fiios, rafM-ecri-xpoiS, eAK-e(Ti-7re7rAos, 
fii^ofidpflapos (= fiiy-<To-fi,), ptycxriris (= piir-<r-a(rirts), irArjl^nnros (= TrAr\y-a- 
iinros). 

2. When the first part of the compound is a substantive or adjective, the 
declension-stem of the substantive generally remains unchanged, e. g. (first 
Dec.) viicri-<p6pos, ayopa-u6p.os ; (second Dec.) Aoyo-ypdcpos, l<r-7]{j.epos (by Elision), 
KaKovpyos (by Oasis), KayoofioAos (Aaydos) ; (third Dec.) atrrv-voLios, rjdv-Aoyos, 
fiov-cpopfios, vav-/xaxla ; irvp-<p6pos, [itXay-xoXia, iravr\yvpis ; in some, the union- 
vowel o is annexed to the stem, e. g. <rcafxar-o-(pvKa^ <pv<ri-o-k6yos, Sa5oG%os (by 
Oasis, instead of SqS-S-exos) ; in neuters in -os, Gen. -e-os, the e is elided before 
o, e. g. £i<p-o-<p6pos, or the declension-stem in -es [§ 61, (b)] is retained, e. g. 
reAes-cpopos'i so also in other neuters, e. g. Kepas-fiSxos, <pa>s-<p6pos. 

Remark 1. In the first Dec, however, the union- vowel o is often found 
instead of the declension-stem, e. g. 6iK-o-ypd<pos (81/07), Aoyx-o-<p6pos ; so also 
the ending -77 or -a is annexed even to words of the second and third Dec, e. g. 
Sava.T7}-<p6pos, aamfy-tySpos ; neuters in -os (Gen. -eos, PL -77) frequently vary 
between the and 77, e. g. ^Kpcxpvpos and £i.(p7i<p6pos, o~Kevo<p6pos and <TKevri<p6pos. 

Rem. 2. In some words of the third Dec, more seldom of the first and 
second, t is annexed to the pure stem, as, a union-vowel, e. g. irvpiirvovs, alyi- 
/3ot7js ; fAvarnroXos (jUuctttjs), pLvpitrvovs. In several words a euphonic a - (en) is 
inserted, e. g. pLoyo-a-TOKOSy &eo-(T-ex&pia, together with the regular d-eoexd/»a> 
fau-<r£-7ropos. 

3. When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes 
take place, which arise from the general rules respecting the change of 
consonants. 

4. Respecting the second part of the compound, it is to be noted, that the 
words beginning with a, e, 0, in composition regularly lengthen these vowels 
(if the last part of the compound is a simple) into 77 and o, e. g. (o) ev-hve/xos 
from <zv€fjLOSy CTpa.T7)y6s from 'dyoo, ev-f]vwp from aviip] (e) dvsy'iperpLos from iper- 
/x6s, 5vsr}Aaros from £\avva> 5 (0) auaxpeXris from 6<peAos, TravdoA&pos from oWv/xi, 
av<avvp.QS from ovo/xa, 

5. In relation to the end of the word, the following points should be noted: — 

A. In the Greek language, as has been seen (§ 236, 3), a verb can be com- 
pounded only with prepositions ; but if it is necessary to compound a verb with 
another part of speech, this is never done immediately, but by means of a 
derivation from a compound word either actually existing or assumed. Then 
the derivative-ending, commonly -ew, is regularly appended to this compound 
word : e. g. from 'linrovs rpi<peiv, to keep horses, the derivative is not tinroTpeQeti/, 
but by means of the compound substantive 'nnroTp6(pos, it is iinroTpo<p4<a ; so 
<&eo<rej8ea> fx'om &eo<refi'f}S, vavfiax&v from vav/xaxos, evrvx^v from evTvxfo. 

B. The compound is an adjective or noun : — 

a. The second part is derived from a verb, and has the following endings : 
(a) Most frequently -os, -ov, e. g. grnporpdepos, nourishing wild beasts, frnpSrpo- 

<pos, nourished by wild beasts. See § 75, Rem. 4. 
()8) -Tjs (-ttjs) or -as (Gen. -ov), -7?p (-ttjo), -reap, commonly used as 

substantives with a transitive signification, e. g. evepyerrjSy benefactor; 

voii<)S4t7)s, legislator; p.vpoir^Xv^, bpvi&oS-iipas, TrcuSoAerco/) ; 



296 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 237. 

(?) -is> - e S) commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, e. g. 

&eo<j)i\7)s, beloved of God; ev/xa^-^s, quick to learn, docilis ; evwpe-n-qs, 

becoming; 
(8) -s (-£), e. g. tyevSo/jLtxpTvs from MAPTTfl, vo/j.ocpv\a£. 

b. Or the second part is a substantive : — 

(a) An attributive relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the 
first containing a more definite explanation of the last. The substantive 
remains unchanged. The first part is an adverb or preposition, sometimes also 
a substantive or adjective, e. g. 6p:68ovAos, a fellow-slave ; (JovXi/xos, excessive hun- 
ger, bulimy ; aicpoiToXis, citadel. 

(b) An objective relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the 
last denoting the object of the first. This division includes a large number of 
adjectives, the first part of which consists either of a verb, or, though more 
6eldom, of an adjective, of a separable or inseparable adverb, or of a preposi- 
tion used as an adverb, e. g. Ssio-iSaifxcov == 6 tovs Sai/xovas ddaas, inixaipeKaKos 
= 6 toTs ko.ko7s iiuxa'ipoov, KaKodai/xoov = 6 Kanbv Sai/xova %x UiV > Svsepas, one ivho 
has an unhappy love, ev&eos = 6 tov &ebv iv eavrtS exoov, &ttoikos = 6 cnrb tov 
oXkov &v, airais = 6 Trcudas ovk tjQey. In all these examples the form of the sub- 
stantive remains unchanged, 1 where "the substantive has a form which is appro- 
priate for the Masc. or Fern, of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the 
substantive assumes a corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -os (Gen. -ov), -cos 
(Gen. -co), --ns (Gen. -ovs), -is (Gen. -idos), -cov and (when it ends in -v) -s, e. g, 
cvvSeiirvos (delirvov), a fellow-guest, ev&v8i.Kos (St/C7j), ctTi/nos (ti[at)), Sexv^pos 
(T)/j.4pa), <pi\oxpy]p-a.Tos (xprj^ua, xP^lP- ara )i acrro/xos {arSfxa), evyeoos (yy), having a 
fertile soil; \eiir6veoos (vavs), one who deserts the ship ; avoocpeArjs (to 6<pe\os), tivaX- 
kis (oKkt]), axprilJ-Qiv, aSaKpvs, Gen. -vos (t2> Sdicpv). 

c. Or the second part is an adjective : — 

The adjective retains its form, except that those in -vs commonly take the 
ending -77s ; the first part consists either of a substantive or an adverb, e. g. 
affrvyeiToov, near the city, urbi vicinus ; Traucrotyos or Trdacro<pos, -ov, very wise; av6- 
fioios, -ov, unlike ; TrpSSrjXos, -ov, &7]5^s from r]dvs, ttoSookt}? from ookvs. 

1 For example, SeurtSalfiwv is an adjective of two endings, the ending -oov 
being both Masc. and Fern., therefore the substantive da.1p.00v is not changed in 
composition ; but avvSenrvos takes a regular adjective termination, as the sub- 
stantive Suirvov has neither a Masc. nor Fern, ending. 



SYNTAX, 



SE CTION I. 
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 



CHAPTER I. 
Parts of a Simple Sentence. 

$ 238. Nature of a Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate. 

1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the ex- 
pression of a thought in words, e. g. To pohov ^d\\ec; 6 
av^pwiros ^vtjtos Igtiv. The conceptions of the mind are 
related both to each other and to the speaker. The con- 
ceptions or ideas themselves are expressed by Essential 
words (§ 38, 4) ; their relations to each other, partly by 
inflection and partly by Formal words. 

Thus, e. g. ill the sentence Tb Ka\bv p6dov SfaW-ei iv tc!> rod irarp-bs K^ir-a, 
there are five essential words : Ka\6s, p6Sov, fraAAeiv, irariip, ktjttos ; their rela- 
tions to each other are expressed partly by their inflection and partly by the 
Formal words r6, iu, t<£, rod. 

2. Every sentence must necessarily have two parts, a sub- 
ject and a predicate. The subject is that, of which some- 
thing is affirmed ; the predicate that, which is affirmed of the 
subject, e. g. in the sentences, to poSov ^dXkec — 6 av^pco7ro$ 
*&v7)t6<; ear iv, to pohov and 6 av^pwTros are the subjects, ^ak- 
\ei and ^vrjros eariv, the predicates. 

3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the 
sentence; the subject is subordinate to it and can be 



298 syntax. [$ 238. 

expressed by a mere inflection-ending of the verb, e. g. 
BlScD-fAi, (/) give. 

4. The subject is a substantive or a word used as a 
substantive, viz. a substantive pronoun or numeral; an 
adjective or participle used as a substantive ; an adverb 
which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article ; a 
preposition with its Case ; an infinitive ; finally, every word, 
letter, syllable, and every combination of words can be con- 
sidered as a substantive, and with the neuter article com- 
monly agreeing with it, can be used as a subject. The 
subject is in the Nom. 

Tb p 6$ov froAAet. — 'Ey 2o ypd(pw, <T v ypdcpeis. — TpeTs %X&ov. — 'O <ro<pb s eu- 
dai/xoov eari. — Of (p&ovovvres fuffovvrai. — O I it d A. a i av 5pe?oi l\<xav. — O / ir e p I 
M(\t iudr]V KaXus e/iax^orapro. — X. Cy. 8. 3, 42. Ovroi ovrcos tjSv iffri rb 
*X etv XP'hfJ-o.Ta, ws aviapbu rb airofiaXXeiv. — Tb 8i8d<TKeiv naX6v e<rriv. 
— X. R. L. 9, 2. eirerai rrj apery <r career & ai els rbv irXeiw xp6vov /xaXXov, fy 
rrj KaKia. — To el avubecr^Ss e<xriv. — Tb i\ra [xaKpSv icrriv. — Tb yvw&i ffeav- 
rbv KaXov eariv. 

Remark 1. In the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive, the 
subject is in the Ace, as will be seen § 307, 3. In indefinite and distributive 
designations of number, the subject is expressed by a preposition (els, nepi, Kara) 
with its Case, e.g. Els rerrapas fjx&ov, as many as four came (with round num- 
bers els also signifies about, at most). X. Cy. 8. 3, 9. ecrraaav irpwrou /xev ra>v 
Sopv(j>6pcov els rerpaKisx^tovs (about four thousand stood), e/ATrpoo-frev be rwv 
irvXSiv els recrcrapas, Slsx'lXiol Se eKarepco&ev rS>v -kvXwv. X. H. 6. 5, 10. 
e<pvyou els AaKedaifAova rwv irep\ 'Srdannrov Teyearwu ire pi QKraKoaiovs. 
So ko& eicdcrrovs, each one singly, one by one, singuli ; Kara, e&vn, singulae gentes. 

5. In the following cases the subject is not expressed by 
any special word : — 

(a) When the subject is a personal pronoun and is not particularly emphatic, 
e. g. rpd(pu>, ypd(peis, ypd<pei; 

(b) When the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro- 
priately belong to every subject, but only to a particular one, the subject 
being, as it were, implied in the predicate. Thus, olvoxoeie i in Horn, 
sc. 6 olvoxdos, the cup-bearer pours out the wine ; &vei in Her. sc. 6 frvr-fip. 
X. An. 3. 4, 36. eirel eyiyvcaffKOV avrovs oV'EXXt\ves /3ovXofxevovs airievai Kal 
SiayyeXXo/xevovs, eK"f)pv!-e (sc. 6 nfipvl-) ro?s "EAA7jcrt TrapaaKevdcraff&ai. So 
arrjixalvet rfj (raXiriyyi, eaaXir ty^e'v, sc. 6 (raXiriKrJis (the signal is 
[uxis] given by the trumpet). So we must explain words which denote the 
state of the weather or the phenomena of nature ; as v e i, it rains ; vi<pei, 
it snows, fipovra, aar pdirrei, sc. 6 Zeis. Th. 4, 52. effettre, there was 
an earthquake. X. Cy. 4. 5, 5. <rv(TKord£ei, it is dark; 

(c) The subject is easily supplied from the context ; thus, in designations of 
time, e. g. $\v eyyvs r\Xiov hvafxwv (sc. 77 rifxepa). r Hu ajx<pl ayopav irXri&ovaav 
and the like ; irapex^t poi, sc Kaip6s, it is time, it is allowed, one can = licet, 



§238.] SUBJECT. PREDICATE. COPULA 299 

e, g. Her. 3, 73. r]fx?v iraps^ei ava<7a><ra<r£rcu tV apxhv. In this way the 
word 6 Srzos is very frequently omitted in certain phrases, e. g. irpoar)- 
fiaivei, SC. 6 &e6s ; irpoxopt? /xol (sc.t& it pay par a), tilings prosper to me, 
I succeed, comp. Th. 1, 109. In such expressions as (pacri, \4yovcri, etc., 
the subject 'dv&pwiroi is regularly omitted, as it is readily apparent ; 

(d) Sometimes the subject is supplied from some word of the sentence. Her. 
9, 8. rbv 'l<r&(ihy ir^ix^ov Kai a<pi i\v wpbs TeA.ei - , SC rb Tet%os, they 
walled the Isthmus, and the [wall] was, etc. X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. Tropevcroncu 
€v&vs 7rpbs r a Pacri\sia, kcl\ $}u pev av&i<TTt)Tai, SC. 6 /SatnAeus. So also 
other Cases as well as the Nom. are thus supplied, e. g. PL L. 804, d. 
iraiSia %/>ct> jUe^os, ovSey ttw rwv roiovrwu (sc. TraiSwu) dia<pepwv ; 

(e) With the third Pers. Sing, of the verb, in a subordinate clause containing 
a general idea, and in definitions, the indefinite pronoun t I s is sometimes 
omitted. PI. Criton. 49, c. ovre avraSiKeTi/ 5e?, ovre ko.ku>s iroieiv ovSeva 
avSpuirwVy ovd' tlv otiovv ird(TXV ^ 7r ' gutcD?/, n °t even if an V one should 

■ suffer from them ; so often with the Inf. ; but if a participle stands in 
connection with the Inf., e. g. Eur. M. 1018. Koixpcos (pepeiv xph &vi\rbv 
out a avfxcpopisf the participle must be considered as the subject. 

Eem. 2. Such expressions as 8e?, X9"hi Scfce?, -irpiirei, e£eo-Ti{v), iv8ex €Tal {it is 
possible), KaAws, ed ex eL > e^et \6yov {consentaneum est), \eyerai {it is said), etc., 
the Greek language always considers as personal, the following Inf. or substan- 
tive sentence being regarded as the subject of these verbs. 

6. The predicate is a verb, an adjective, participle, ad- 
jective pronoun or numeral, or a substantive with the 
Formal word ehai ; elvai, in this relation, is usually called 
the copula, since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc. 
with the subject, and forms one thought, e. g. 

lb poSov frdWet. — 'O &v&p(0iros &vt]t 6s ecrrt v. — 'A&dvaToi etc iv ol 
§eoi. — 'H apeTJ) kclXt) i&Tiv. — 'Ay a&r) Trapaicpaxris itTTiv cTaipov. — Kvpos 
?jv fia<r i\evs. — Tovto rb irpay/xd iirri r65e. — 2u ■fjcr&a irdvrwv irpS>ros. 
— Ol &v8pe$ l\o~o.v rpels. 

Rem. 3. The finite verb denotes both the thing affirmed (id quod praedicatur) 
and the relation of the affirmation to the subject and speaker; the relation to 
the subject, is denoted by the personal-endings of the verb ; the relation to the 
speaker, by its Modes and Tenses ; e. g. the ending of the verb \eya shows 
that its subject is in the first person, and its being in the Ind. mode Pres. tense, 
indicates that the speaker asserts something directly, at the present time. But 
if the predicate is expressed by an adjective or substantive with elvai, the 
affirmation is denoted by the adjective or substantive, and its relation to the 
Speaker by elvai, e. g. evdaifj.ooi' elfil = evSaipou^-oo, evSaip-osu e? = evScu/xove-eis, 
cvdatfj.oi'es ecroi/Tou = ev8aifiovj)-crov(ni', though there is a difference between the 
two modes of expression. 

Rem. 4. It is necessary to distinguish between the use of ehai, as a Formal 
and as an Essential word ; in the former relation, it is merely a copula, con- 
necting the subject with the substantive or adjective, etc. (§ 238, 6); in the 
latter, it has the idea of being or existence, being in a certain condition, etc., e. g. 
%an &e6s — freos iariv &v {there is a God, God exists), as in Her. 3, 108. tov 
Selov 7) irpovo'vn 4<tt\ tov a a ao<p7}. 



300 SYNTAX. [? 239. 

Rem. 5. In order to give greater emphasis to the predicate, the simple idea 
expressed by the verb, is resolved into the participle and copula chat. This 
mode of expression, however, is more usual in poetry, though it is found also 
in prose, particularly in Herodotus, comp. Rem. 3. Eur. C. 381. irS>s c% ra\ai- 
ircvp', fre Trdo~x° ut € s Tade ; Id. H. 117. f)v o"irevdct>v. Her. 3, 99. dirap- 
veo jxev6s ecri. Id. 9, 51. r\ vt\<tos icrri dirb rod 'Acruirov deica (TTadiovs 
air exovo'a. PI. L. 860, e. el ravra outcos exovTd eo~Ttv. Dem. 01. 3. 
(v. 1.) 11, 7. ravT av eyv cok 6t es ficrav, they would have been convinced of these 
things. 

Rem. 6. The copula elvat is sometimes omitted, though commonly only in 
the Ind. Pres. ; elvat is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, but 
properly a verb. This ellipsis is most frequent in the following cases : — 

(a) In general propositions, observations, and pi-overbs. Eur. 0. 330. 6 fxeyas 
oXfios ov /j.6vtp,os ev fSpoTots. X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. tnpaTta yap rj pacTT-n (oSos) 
raxicrrii ; 

(b) Very often with verbal adjectives in -t4os, as also with other expres- 
sions denoting necessity and duty, e. g. dvdyicri, xP^^ v i ^ 4 fits, *Ik6s, 
also with Kaipos, &pa and the like. Dem. Ph. 3, 129, 70. tjjxlv y vivep rrjs 
i\ev&epias ay wv ttJTeov. Id. Cor. 296, 205. arifxias — ev 8ov\evovo"n rfj 
iv6xei (pepetv avdyKT}', 

(c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. eTot/nos, irpofrv/xos, ofosre, Svva- 
r6s, paStov, x a ^ e7r o f/ , 87)Aoj>, d^iov, etc. PI. Phaedr. 252, a. (rj 
$vxh) SovAevetv It 01^77. Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. eycb irdo~x* L v otiovv eroi- 
[io s. X. C. 1, 1, 5. drjXov ovv, oti ovk av (SccK-paTTjs) irpoe\eyev, el jxri 
iirio-TGvev a\-n&ev<retv. Comp. ib. 2, 34. Here belong also the expressions 
bavjxao-rhv octov, it is very wonderful (= mirum quantum), a\i.i\xavov oaov, it 
is quite impossible, inconceivable (= humane quantum), see § 332, Rem. 10. 
On obSels bsris ov (= nemo non), see § 332, Rem. 12. 

Rem. 7. The Ind. Impf. is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aeschin. Ctes. § 71, j/i»| 
ev fxeo-cp (sc. i\v) ■ koL ivaprifxev rfj vtTTepaia els ttjv eKK\r}o-'tav ; the Ind. Pres. also is 
not very often omitted after conjunctions, e. g. oirSre, iirel (comp. X. C. 1, 46) ; 
on the contrary, very frequently after on and ws (that), e. g. X. C. 1. 2. 52. 
Xeywv, cos ovSev ocpeXos. The subjunctive is but seldom omitted after the rela- 
tive bs &v, and especially after conjunctions, e. g. PI. Rp. 370, e. a>v av avrois 
Xpeia (sc. y). The ellipsis of the Opt. when dv belongs to it is more frequent, 
e. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. rls yap dv, ecpatrav, o~ov ye tKavcoTepos ire7trai (sc. efrj) ; Ib. 2. 
3, 2. %v fxev 7)/J.e?s viKcofjtev, StjAov, oti o'L re iroXefiiot av 7}(xeTepot (sc. e'tr)o~av). The 
ellipsis of the Imp. is very rare, e. g. S. O. C. 1480. 'ihaos, S> Saifxcov. X. An. 3. 
3, 14. to?s ovv &eo?s %ctpts (sc. ccttco), oti ov o~vv iroWrj pcofxr}, dhkd trvv oKiyois 
%A£rov. The participle is very often omitted, especially after verba intelligendi 
and declarandi, e. g. X. S. 3, 7. Srj\6v ye, oti <pav\os (sc. tov) cpavov/xat, but else- 
where also, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 15. aTOira \eyets teal ovdafxeos Trpbs aov (sc. ovTa), et 
nullo modo tibi convenientia ; even in such cases as Th. 4, 135. x* l f*<*>vos TeXevTcov- 
tos koL trpbs tap ^77 (sc. ovtos). The Inf. is often omitted after 8oice?v, rjyeTcr- 
Sat, vofj.i(eiv and the like, e. g. Th. 7, 60. fiovXevTea eSonet. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14. 
a.TTi6vTa fie ineXevcras to7s CTpaT-nyiKols (sc. elvat) vofxi^ojaevots dvSpdcrt StaXeyetr- 
Sat. 

$239. Comparison. — Attribute and Object. 

1. When the predicate belongs to the subject in a higher or 
lower degree than to another object, this relation is denoted by 
the Comparative, e. g. e O irar-qp /Jict'^v io-rcv, r/ 6 vios. — 'O 



$239.] COMPARISON. ATTRIBUTE AND OBJECT. 301 

cro<£os fxaXXov ^aipei rfj dperrj, rj rot? -^p^jxacrtv. And when the 
predicate belongs to the subject in the highest or lowest 
degree, as respects all other objects compared, the Superlative 
is used, and commonly takes with it a partitive Genitive, e. g. 

^WKpaTrjS TraVTOiV 'EAA^J/COV <TO<p(i)TOLTOS TJV. 'O <TO<pOS 7TOLVTIDV 

fxdXccrTa €7ri$v/xet tt}s apery)?. 

Remark 1. The Comparative is strengthened or more definitely stated in 
the following ways : (a) by en, still, even, etiam, e. g. jxeifav en, still greater ; 
(b) by fjt.aKp<£, 6\iyq>, 7roA.A.w, en 7roAA<5, oerw, Toaovrco; /ie'ya, 
6\iyov, iroXv, oerov, r oerov to, which show how much more or less of the 
quality expressed by the adjective is intended, e. g. iroXX<S fxeifav, -multo major, 
far greater, iroXXy en fxei(oves, multo majores etiam; (c) sometimes by jxaX- 
Xov. Her. 1, 32. /xaXXov oX^iurepos iari {far). 

Rem. 2. The Superlative is strengthened or more definitely stated in the 
following ways: (a) by /ecu, vel, even, e. g. /ecu fxaXiara, vel maxime, very greatly 
indeed; (b) by words denoting measure or the degree of difference, viz. rroXXy, 
(xanp <S, iroXi, Trap a iroXv, oer co, tog ovt a>, e. g, 7r o A A <£ dpicrros, multo 
praestantissimus, the best by far ; pa k pep Hpierros, longe praestantissimus ; (c) even 
by the Superlative: /xaXierra (rrXe^err ov and /xdy io-tov poet.), e. g. S. 
0. C. 743. ir A etc tov avSrpcvTrwv KaKierros. Th. 7, 42. pidXierra teivoraTos; 
(d) by the relative: a>s l (o7rws), on and r), oTos (§ 343, Rem. 2), e.g.ojj 
Taxio-Ta, quam celerrime, o r t /xaXierra, § dpio-rov, e. g. PI. Apol. 23, a. ir o A A a 1 
p.iv airex^eiai ,1101 yeyovaeri Kal olai x a ^ €1T & raral Ka ^ PapvTarai. X. An. 4. 8, 
2. x° 1 p' L0V olou x a *- elT( # Ta ' T0V 5 ( e ) by efs, raws, e. g. Her. 6, 127. ^Afre ~2pi.iv- 
ovpiS-ns ~2vj3apiT7]s, bs inl irXeler t ov 877 XA/877S els dv^p airi/ccro. X. An. I.. 
9, 22. Scopa irXelerra els ye dvrjp &v ixd/xfiave, he received the most gifts, at least 
considering the fact that he was but a single individual (C. Tusc. 2. 26, 64. amplitu- 
dinem animi unam esse omnium rem pulcherrimam) ; (f ) a peculiar mode of 
strengthening the Superlative, is by joining iv ro?s with it, in which case the 
Superlative must be repeated, e. g. 'O "Epos iv ro?s ir peer &vrar6s ierri 
(i. e. iv to?s irpeerfivrdTois overt), the oldest among those who are very old. Her. 7, 
137. tovtS fxoi iv to?o~i fre t6r ar ov epaiverat yevier&at. PI. Symp. 173, b. 
"S.o>Kpdrovs ipacrTTjs &v iv ro?s ptaX terra tcov t6t€. The construction with the 
Pem. is found only in Thuc, e. g. 3, 81. ((Tracts) iv rots irpcaTT) iyevero. lb. 
17. iv roij TrXelcrTOii vrjes. In such instances, ro7s must be considered 
as Neut. In like manner, the expression op.ota (6p.ena Ion.) ro?s was used 
with the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. eri^ovrat 5e 'Apdfitot iriaris dvSpcinrwv optola 
to7o- 1 p-dXterr a (sc. aefio/xivois), like those who respect very much, ut qui maxime. 
Th. 1, 25. xpn^aTcoj/ ovvdp.et ovres kot itceivov rbv x?°' vov ofioia ro?s 'EXX^vwv 
irXova LUTdrois. The Superlative is also intensified by joining a positive 
with it, e. g. 'Aya&uv iinrewv Kpdrterros, the best among the good horsemen = the 
very best. 

Rem. 3. The Superlative relation is often expressed more emphatically by 
negative adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, preceded by oi> (Litotes), 
instead of positive adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, e. g. oi>x vk terra, 
not the least, especially, ov KaKierros, ovk ixdx^o-r os, stronger than ptd- 
Xterra, freXrterros, pteyterros. Sometimes, also, it is expressed antithetically, e. g. 
ovx rJK terra, a A A a pi. dX terra. 

1 'ris, on are not in themselves intensive particles, but merely connect some 
part of Swa/xai understood, and in that way may be said to give intensity to 
the Superlative. Sometimes Zvvafxai is expressed, e. g. aevoepuv aviararai 
ierraK{J.4vos iir\ ir6\ep.ov &s idvvaro ndWiaTa. 

26 



302 SYNTAX. [$ 240. 

2. A sentence consisting of a subject and predicate may be 
extended by defining the subject and predicate more exactly. 
The word or words which define the subject more fully, is 
called an attribute, or attributive. The subject is more exactly 
described, therefore, (a) by the addition of an adjective (attrib- 
utive 1 adjective), e. g. to ko.\6v poSov; (b) by the Gen. of a 
substantive (attributive Gen.), e. g. 6 rov /3ao-iAecos Kfj-n-os, 
regis hortus (=regius hortus) ; (c) by a substantive in the same 
Case as the word which is more definitely described, e. g. 
Kvpos, 6 fiao-iXtvs. The explanatory word is here said to be in 
apposition with the word explained, and may be called an 
appositive of that word. The predicate (which is termed the 
object), is more exactly described, (a) by a Case of a substan- 
tive ; (b) by a preposition with a substantive ; (c) by the Inf., 
(d) by an adverb, e. g. e O o-o<pb<s 1-771/ aperrjv do-Ket. Ilcpt t^s 
TrarpiBos fta^o/xe^a. 'A7rcevat e7ri#i;/jUo. KaAws ypacptis. 



§ 240. Agreement. 

1. The finite verb agrees with the subject in Person and 
Number; the adjective, participle, pronoun, and numeral, in 
Gender, Number, and Case. The substantive, as a predicate, 
agrees with the subject only in Case; in Gender, Number, and 
Case, only when it denotes a person, and hence either has a 
particular form for the Masc. and Fern., or is of common gender. 
The same principle applies to substantives in apposition ($ 266, 
1). But when the substantive denotes a thing, it agrees with 
the subject only in Case, e. g. 

'E7o> ypd<pa), (rv ypd(peis, outos ypdcpei. — r O 'dv&pao-rros &vr)r6s iariv. — 'H apeTT] 
kolXt) Zen w. — Tb irpayfxa alaxP^ v £°~ TLV - — O* "EW-qves iroKejxiKWTaToi. 9)<rav. — ■ 
'O Ka\b$ irais, r) aocpri ywr\, Tb fiiKpbv t4kvov. — 5 E7e;/ecr&7jz/ tw &vSpe tovtos 
(KpiTias Kcti 'AA./a/3ia57]s) (pixrei (piKoTijxoTdTO} irduTccu^A^Tjvaicuv, X. C. 1. 2, 14. 
— Kvpos t\v fiaffiXevs. — Tofivpis i\v fiacrt\eta. — Kvpos, 6 flaaiXevs, T6/xvpis, 7} $a<ri' 
Xeia. On the contrary, t)]v frvyaTepa, 5eiu6v ti KaWos nal (Meye- 
&os, i^dyeev w5e elireu (his daughter a wonder in beauty and size), X. Cy. 5. 2, 7. 

1 When the adjective merely ascribes some quality to the substantive with 
which it agrees, it is called an attributive adjective, but when it belongs to the 
predicate and is used in describing what is said of the subject, it is called a 
predicative adjective, e. g. in the expression 6 aya&bs awf)p (the good man), aya- 
Srus is attributive, but in 5 avfip eVrt aya&6s (the man is good), it is predicative. 



§ 240.] AGREEMENT. 303 

2. The predicative adjective or substantive agrees with the 
subject as above stated, when the following and other similar 
verbs, which do not of themselves express a complete predicate 
sense, have chiefly the force of the copula : — 

(a) The verb v-rrdpy^iv, to be the cause of, to be, to exist ; 

(b) Verbs signifying to become, to increase, to grow, e. g. yCyvo- 
fiai, ecpvv, av^avofJiaL ; 

(c) The verbs fxivw, to remain, and KaT&mqv, to be established, 
appointed, to stand; 

(d) Verbs signifying to seem, appear, show one's self, e. g. 
coi/ca, cpatvo/xai, 8r)\ovfjLcu ; 

(e) Verbs signifying to be named, e. g. kclXov/jlcu, 6Vo//,a£o//,at, 
Xiyofxai, aKouto, to be called (like audire) ; 

(f) Verbs signifying to be appointed to something, to be chosen, 
to be named, e. g. alpov/xat, a.7roSet/<vu/xai ; 

(g) Verbs signifying to be regarded as something, to be recog- 
nized as something, to be supposed, e. g. vo/«£oju.ai, Kpwo- 
[iai, v7roXaix(3dvo/xai ; 

(h) Verbs signifying to be given as something, to be received as 
something, to be abandoned, cast off, and the like, e. g. 

Kvpos iyevero jSacnAeus twu Tlep&wv. — Tovrois 6 $(\iiriros jxiyas rjv^^ri 
(Dem.). — J AA/a/3ia57jy rjpd&r} <npa.T7\y6s. — 'Avt\ (piAow ical i-evccv vvv nSXcuces 
kcu freo?s ix&pol aKovovaiv (audiunt) , they hear themselves called flatterers, etc., 
Dem. Cor. 241. 

Eemark 1. When the verbs mentioned under (e), (f ), (g), (h), have the 
active form, they take two accusatives (§ 280, 4). 

Eem. 2. Several of the verbs above named, are also joined with adverbs, 
but they then express a complete predicate sense ; e. g. 'ZunpaT-qs i\v (lived) del 
gvv tois uiois. KaKws, Kan as icrriv (it is well, etc.). Aeivws %aav iv 
<pv\a.Krj<Ti ol BafivXwvioi (diligenter versabantur in custodia), Her. 3, 152. 
MaT77J/ ehai, to be in vain. Elvai, as well as the verbs ylyi/eo~&ai and -rrecpv- 
K.4vai, is very often connected with adverbs of place and degree, of which 
the corresponding adjective-forms are not in use, as S t % a, x^f'J) I k ci s, jxait- 
pdv, ir6pf><ti, iyyvs, it At) o~ iou, 6fj.ov, aAis, /xaWov, /xd\i<rTa, e. g. 
Tot<rt 'Afrqvaiwv (TTpa.T'nyoio'i kyivovr o 5i%a oX yvw/xai ( sententiae in diversas 
■partes discedebant), Her. 6, 109. 

3. When a Demonstrative, Eelative, or Interrogative pronoun, 
either as a subject or predicate, is connected with a substantive 
by the copula elvai, or one of the verbs mentioned in No. 2, 
the Greek commonly, as the Latin regularly, put the pronoun 
by means of attraction, in the same gender and number with 



304 SYNTAX. [§ 241. 

the substantive to which it belongs. So too, when the pronoun 
is in the Ace. and depends on a verb of naming, e. g. 

Outoj 4o~riv 6 avi]p. — Auttj 4<ttI irriy^ Kal apxh Trdvruiv t£>v KaKwv. — 
Ovroi St? ' ' Kfrrivouoi ye SIk7]v avr)]v KaXovaiv, aXXa ypa<p4]v, PL Eutyphr. 
princ. — Uapa twv irpoyeyevn^yav uavfrdvere • avr-n yap apiffri) 5 tSoffKO- 
Xia, X. Cy. 8. 7, 24. — Ti s eVrt irriy^ ttjs aperris ; — Tldvres ovroi v6/xoi 
etffiv, ovs rb irXrj&os o~vveX&bv Kal SoKi/xdo-av eypatye, X. C. 1. 2, 42. — 'Ec«/ ris 
(piXos fxoi yev6fj.evos eu iroie7v 4&4Xrj, ovros /xoi fiios 4crri (this is my means of 
life, hie raihi est victus) 3. 11, 4. 

Rem. 3. Yet the Greeks not unfrequently put the pronoun in the Neut. 
Sing., e. g. "Eari 8e rovro rv p aw is, PI. Rp. 344, a, where in Lat. it would 
be, Est autcm haec tyrannis. Tovr 6 4ariv fj S iKai oavvt], ib. 432, b. Tovro 
7T7J77/ Kal apxh KLi/riaeais, Phaedr. 245, c. The Neut. PI. is sometimes used 
instead of the Neut. Sing. "Eycoye <pT)!xl r a v r a [xku (pXvapias eluai, X. An. 
1. 3, 18. See § 241, Rem. 3. The neuter pronoun denotes the naturae of an object ; 
on the contrary, the pronoun that agrees with a noun, denotes the quality of the 
object. Hence there are cases where the two forms of expression cannot be 
interchanged, e. g. Ti 4o~n cp&6vos; quid est invidia? (what is its nature?) 
and t i s 4o~ri (p^rouos ; quae est invidia ? (ivhat is envy ?) The neuter demon- 
strative is also always used, when it is more fully explained by a word in appo- 
sition, e.g. Ov ro vr fiv evSaifiovia, u>s tome, KaKov airaXXayr], PI. Gorg. 478, c. 



$241. Exceptions to the general rules of Agreement. 

1. The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree 
with the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Constructio 
Kara avveaiv). Hence, after a collective noun in the Singular, 
when it is used of persons, as well as after the names of cities 
and countries, used for the inhabitants, and also with abstracts 
which stand for concretes, the Plural is used, and such a gender 
as belongs to the persons denoted by these words. 

Her. 9, 23. rb irXrj&os e7re jSo^&tj crav. Th. 4, 32. 6 aXXos crrparbs 
air 4 fiaivov. 5, 60. rb err p ar 6tt eSo v av^x^povv. 2, 21. iravrl rp6iru> 
avrip^KTro rj irSxis Kal rbv TlepiKXea 4v bpyfj elxov. With attributive adjec- 
tives, this construction is rare and only poetic, e. g. II. x> 84. <piXe t4kpov (Hec- 
tor) ; but it is very common in prose with a Part, which stands in a remoter 
attributive relation, e. g. Th. 3, 79. 4irl rr]u ir6Xiv iireirXeov 4v ttoXXt) rapaxrj 
Kal (p6fScp our as. X. Cy. 7. 3, 8. 3> aya&)i Kal Trio~rr) tyvx'fty <XXV ^ airoXi- 
ititiv Tj/xas. X. H. 1. 4, 13. 6 4k rov &areos ox^os ri&poio-frr} npbs ras i>avs, 
&av/xd(ovres Kal I8e?v flovx6(j.evoi rbv 'AXKifiiddrjv. It is very frequent 
with the pronouns, Th. 1, 136. cpevyei 4s K4pKvpav ws avrwu (sc. KepKvpal- 
ow) evepy4rr)s. 4, 15. 4s rr/u %ir dprrju us rjyy4x&7) to. yeyevr\fj.4va irepl TlvXov, 
e5o|e?/ ai)To?s (sc.toIs ^irapridrais). X. Cy. 3.3, 14. avyKaX4aas irav rb o~rpa- 
t loir 1Kb v eAe|e irpbs avrovs roidSe. Also with the relative pronoun ; see on 
adjective-sentences, § 332, 5. 



$ 241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGEEEMENT. 305 

Remark 1. When the subject is expressed by the Neut. article r6 or r d in 
connection with a substantive in the Gen. PL, the predicate is commonly in the 
PL, being conformed to the attributive genitive ; the predicative adjective or par- 
ticiple takes the gender of the attributive genitive. S. Ph. 497. t a t&v Sta/crf- 
poau rbu o'/w-aS' ^ireiyov ar6Xov (rfireiyois which has the Neut. PL rd for its 
subject would regularly have been in the Sing, according to No. 4, but is con- 
formed to the plurality in SiaicSvav). PL Rp. 8. 563, c. rb rwu byplay 
eXevbepdirepd icrriv (the Sing, iarlv is used on account of the Neut. PL 
ikev&zpwrepa, according to No. 4, while eAeuS-epcSrepa is conformed to the idea 
of frnpia contained in frriplwv). 

Rem. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is the following : 
When a substantive subject with an attributive substantive in the Gen. PL 
expresses periphrastically a substantive idea, as -tyvxh Teipeaiao, the Participle 
which stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agrees in Case 
with the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen., 
which expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. A, 90. ^A&e 8' iirl 
ipvxb Qrjfiaiov Teipeaiao xpv°~ eoy o-Kyjirrpov e%a)z/, the shade of the Thehan 
Teiresias came, having a go/den sceptre (here %x° iV agrees in number with $i>xVi 
but in gender with Tapeaiao). 11. /3, 459, bpvi&wv ir ere-nvwu e&vea iroXXa, 
zv&a Kal ev&a ttotwi/tcu ayaXX6[xevai irrepvyeaaiv. 

2. When the subject is expressed, not as a special and defi- 
nite object, but as a general idea, the predicative adjective is 
put in the Neut. Sing, without reference to the gender and 
number of the subject. 

(The English sometimes uses the words thing, or something. Sometimes the 
pronoun rl, or the substantives xpyf**** irpay/xa, are connected with the 
adjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, the English uses the 
article the). 

II. y3, 204. ovk ay abb v iroXvicoipaviT] {a multiplicity of rulers is not a gooa 
thing): eh Koipavos cotco. Eur. 0. 760. deivbv ol iroXXoi, KaKovpyovs OTav 
exaxn irpoaraTas. Id. M. 329. irX^v yap tzkvoov efxoiye (piXrarou ttoXis. Id. H. 
E. 1295. al /xerafioXal \virrip6v. Her. 3, 82. 77 /j-ovvapxiy KpdriaTov (a 
monarch)/ is the best thing, or most desirable). PL Rp. 2. 364, a. KaXbv ixkv rj 
<rc0<ppo<rvvT] re ical S iKaiocr vur\, x a ^ eiT0V ^vtoi koX iir iirouov. Also 
in abbreviated adjective sentences, e. g. Her. 3, 108. r\ Xeaiva, ibv lax v p&- 
rarov Kal & pacrvr ar ov, a7ro£ iv t<2 j8i<u tiktzi %v. PL Rp. 4, 420, c. ol 
b(p&aX/j.ol, icdXXio'r ov ov, ovk ocrrpeico ivaX^XL/xfievoi eitriv. Her. 3, 53. 
rvpavvls xpyi* a G(paXep6v. PL Th. 122, b. cv^jSouAr? lepbv xPVfJ-a. Dem. 
01. 1. 21, 12. euros (j.tv x6yos, av airy ra irpdy^ara, /xdrai6v ri (palverai Kal 
k ev6v. 

3. When the subject is an Inf. or an entire sentence, the 
Greeks usually put the predicative adjective in the Neut. PI. 
instead of the Sing., where the English uses the pronoun it, 
e. g. it is pleasant to see the sun. This occurs most frequently 
with verbal adjectives in -ro's and -re'os; with those in -rio% 
and many in -to<s, the Inf. is implied in the word itself, e- g. 

26* 



306 SYNTAX. [$ 241. 

afxvvrea kcrri twi, some one is to be helped ; iruna. icrrc rots </>iAois, 
friends are to be trusted. 

Her. 1, 91. rty TreTrpwfj.evr]V fxoipav a8vvar a ecrri (it is impossible) airocpvyeeiv 
Kal &e<p. 3, 83. 8 77 A a, '6ri Set eva ye riva i)p.ecov f3affi\ea yeveo~&ai. Th. 1, 86. 
ovs ov irapaSor e a ro?s y A&r)vaiois evriv, ov8e Kal Koyois 8 iaKp ir ea, &AAa 
t iucii prjT ea eV Ta%ei. 4, 1. aSuvora fc eV t£ Trapovri rovs AoKpovs ap.v- 
veoftai. 

Rem. 3. In like manner, the Greek very often uses the PI. ravra, rd8e 
(sometimes also eKetva), to express an idea in its whole extent or in the most 
general manner, the plural bringing before the mind all the particulars involved 
in the idea. Th. 6, 77. ovk "laves rd8e elaiv, ov8' 'EA\r)sir6vrioi, aAAa Aupirjs, 
it (this) is not lonians, etc. Aeschin. Ctes. p. 55. ovk eari ravra apxv (this is 
not an office). Id. Leg. p. 50. ravr' eariv 6 7rpo86rns, this is the traitor. PI. 
Phaedon. 62, d. 6 av6r\ros dv&pwiros rdx o.v olnSfeirj ravra, (pevKreov elvai airb 
rod SecnrSrov. In the English these plurals are generally translated by the 
singular, as this, that. 

4. The subject in the Neut. PL is connected with a verb in 
the Sing., inasmuch as a plurality of objects in the neuter, was 
regarded by the Greeks as one connected whole, the individual- 
ity being lost sight of. 

Ta («a rpex^i' — To Trpdy /xard ecrri Kakd. X. Ven. 12, 11. o~vv rfi 
ir6\ei o~ cl> £ e r a i Kal atr 6h\vr at ra o'iKe?a eKaarrov. Eur. M. 618. KaKov yap 
avdpbs S«p' ovncriv ovk ex e '« 

Rem. 4. Also in adverbial participial phrases, a neuter plural is joined with 
a participle in the singular, e. g. 8 6 | a v ravra, quum haec visa, decreta essent. 
X. An. 4. 1, 13. 8 6% av 8e ravra, eKr)pv£av ovrco iroieiv, when these things had 
been agreed upon, orders were given, etc. Yet, X. H. 3. 2, 19. 8o£avra 8e tou- 
t a Kal Ttepav&evra, ra /.lev arparei/fxara airr)\&ev. 

Rem. 5. There are some exceptions, however, to the rule just stated ; most 
of them may be referred to the following cases : — 

(a) When the subject in the Neut. PI. denotes persons or living creatures, 
the verb is very often put in the PI. in accordance with the Constructio 
Kara avveaiv. Th. 4, 88. ra re\rj (the magistrates) rwv AaKe8ip.ovicav 
op. 6 a avr a BpaaiSav e^eiv e p.i\i av. 7, 57. r ocr a 8 e /xera ' 'Afrnvaicov 
e&vr) earpdrevov. PI. Lach. 180, e. ra /x e ipaKia 8 i a\ey6/x ev o i 
eTrifj.ep.vnvr ai ^wKpdrovs Kal a(po8pa eir aivovai v. 

(b) When the objects contained in the plural are to be represented individu- 
ally rather than collectively, or when tbe idea of plurality composed of 
several parts (which may also have relation to different times and places) 
is to be made prominent, 1 e. g. X. An. 1. 7, 17. ravry rfj r)p.epa ovk e/xaxe- 
caro PaaiAevs, a\\' viroxocpovvTow cpavepa r}o~av Kal 'ittttwv Kal av&pcb-ircov 
t'X^V TfoWd (many trucks here and there). Cy. 5. 1, 14. ra (xox^^pa 
av § p (Jon i a Tvaff&v, olp.ai, ruv iiriSv/jt.iu>v aKparrj ecrri, Karreira epcara alri- 

1 It will often, therefore, depend upon the view in the speaker's mind, whether 
the Sing, or PI. is to be used. 



§ 241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 307 

uvTcti, the singular iart is used here because mankind is referred to as a 
class, but the plural alnwvTai, to denote that each individual blames love, the 
charge being made too, in a different manner and at different times. Th. 5, 
26. e£a> (praeter) tovtoiv Trpbs rov MavriviKbv Kal 'Eiridavpiov iroAefiov Kal is 
&\Aa afjLcporepois a/xapT-f) fxar a iyivovr o, mistakes of each of the two, at 
various points and times. X. An. 1. 4, 4. ^aav Se ravra Svo Teixv- 

(c) The non- Attic poets from Homer down, very often use the PL simply on 
account of the metre. 

Rem. 6. The plural subject, masculine or feminine, is connected in the poets, 
though rarely, with a verb in the Sing. Pind. 01. 11. (10.) princ. /xeXi'ydpves 
V/J.VOI vo-repow apxal Aoyccv reWer ai. This construction is very limited in 
prose- writers ; it occurs with ecrr i and i?v, but only at the beginning of a sen- 
tence (comp. il est cent usages), which then assume the character of impersonal 
expressions. Her. 1, 26. ecrri Kal fxera^v rrjs re TraAairjs tt6\los Kal rod vr\ov kirra 
CTaSiot. PI. Rp. 5, 462, e. zctti Kal iv rats dWais irSXetriv dpxovr4s re Kal Sfj^uos. 
In like manner the Greeks regularly say etmv, o'i, sunt, qui. See § 331, Rem. 
4. The construction mentioned § 242, Rem. 2, is very different from this. 

5. A subject in the Dual, as well as two subjects in the Sin- 
gular, very often have a predicate in the PL, e. g. Avoi o-rparw 
dve^cop^crav. T(ov avrdov Seovrat koll rj jvvt] koX 6 avrjp. The 
rule seems to be, that when the affirmation is made of each of 
the two separately, the Dual is used, but when of both together, 
the Plural, e. g. Mivws koX AvKovpyos vofxovs ZSeryv {each 
gave laws) ; f]8ovr) croi kol \v7rrj iv rfj 7roXet fiacrLXevcreTov. 

Rem. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken of, 
but only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally connected, 
e. g. Tr^Se, x e </> e > <^ Te > or sucn as we conceive to stand in a close and reciprocal 
relation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc. 

Rem. 8. The Dual very often interchanges with the PL, especially in par- 
ticiples, e. g. II. A, 621 . r o I S 1 Idpcc aire-tyvxovTo x iT & V( » v o-rdvT e itotI vvoi-f)v. 
PL Euthyd. 273, d. iysXacraT i) v d/icpoj fiAe-tyavT es els aXX-fjXw. 

Rem. 9. A subject in the PL sometimes has a verb in the Dual, when two 
objects mutually connected, or two pairs, are spoken of, e. g. II. 5, 452, sqq. ws 
§' '6re x ei f* a PP 0L TTOTa/Aoi, Kar 1 opecrcpi p 4ovt e s, is fxtcrydyKeiav a v /j. £ d \ - 
\ctov ofipifjov vdcop, . . &s tccv /jucryo/xevuv yevero laxh T6 tpAfios re (two streams 
running on opposite sides are compared with two hostile parties). II. &, 185, 
sqq. zdv&e re Kal (ri> U6Sapye, Kal Al&wv Admire re Ste, vvv fioi ttjv Ko/xid^v air o- 
riverov, — 191. aAA' icpofxapr elrov Kal crir evSer ov (two pairs). 

Rem. 10. The following points also are to be noted in respect to the 
Dual: — 

(a) A substantive in the PL is very often connected with the Duals Bico, 
Svo, but seldom Avith SvoTv. II. e, 10. dvco vUes. II. t, 4. &vefioi 
5wo. Aesch. Ag. 1395. Svoiv olfidy^iacriv. PL Soph. 244, b. irpos- 
Xpco/xej/oi SvoTv ovo/xacr iv. PL Rep. 614, c. Svo x^* H- ara ^X /" 6 '" 
va aXX^Xoiv] 

(b) The Duals toj, toIv, rc65e, rolvBe, tqvtoj, tovtoiv, avroj, avrolv, &, ofv, in 
prose are used both as masculine and feminine (i. e. they are of common 
gender), e. g. d/xcpco too 7roAee — Tcb yvua'iKe — d[x<po} tovtco tw rj/itpa — toIv 
yeveaeoiv — tovtco too Te'x^a — tovtoiv toIv Kivnaiow — tco odd. The Fern. 



308 SYNTAX. [$ 241. 

form of the article rd, is extremely rare, e. g. ra 8' ovv K6pa, S. Ant. 
769 ; oftener the form r a t v, X. H. 6, 4. 17. PL Tim. 79, d ; so e/c raiySe 
S* o«(roi!/ irapSevoiv, S. O. C. 445. Tatfra occurs Av. Pac. 847, but 
ravraiv is more frequent, e.g. ravraiv /mSvaiv, S. 0. C. 859 ]iK rav- 
to.iv, 1149: ravraiv 8e r atv Sia&'fiKaiv, Isae. 5, 15. Aura, S. Ant. 
570. Besides the pronouns mentioned, sometimes other attributives also 
in the Dual are used as of common gender ; the participle but seldom. 
PL Phaedr. 237, d. rj/xuv iv eKaarcp dvo rive icrrov iSea dpxovr e Kal 
dyovre, olv iir6fj.e&a — • rovrw 8e k. r. A. 

6. When the predicate is a substantive connected to the 
subject by elvai or any other verb having the character of a 
copula ($ 240, 2), the verb often agrees by means of attraction, 
as commonly in Latin, with the nearest predicative substantive. 

Her. 3, 60. rb /j.t)kos rod bpvyp.aros eirra arddioi eicri. 2, 15. at ®r}{lai 
AXyvirros i KaKeer o. Th. 3, 112. iarbv dv<a \6<pco r) 'lSofxevr] v\pri\(c. 

4, 102. rb ywpiov rovro, oirep i?p6repov 'Evvea 6 5 ol iicaAovvTo. Isocr. 
Paneg. 51, b. eo~Ti a. px i ^carara rav i&v&v teal /xeyiaras dvvaareias 6%oz/to 
^KvSrai Kal &pS.Kes Kal Uepcrai. So also in the participial construction, e. g. Th. 

5, 4. KaraXajx^dvovari Kal fipiKivvlas, ov 'ipvjxa iv rrj Aeovrivp. PL L. 735, e. 
robs fxeyiara i^r}jxapr7]K6ras, avidrovs 8e ovras, fxeyicrrr)v Se ovcav (3\dfi7)v 
Tr6\ecos, airaWarreiv e'lw&ev (instead of ovras). So also Her. 3, 108. 7] Xeaiva, 
ibv Xcxvporarov Kal frpacrvrarov, aira% iv rG> filcp riKrei eV, instead of 
iovffa. Comp. No. 2. A similar attraction occurs sometimes in sentences 
denoting comparison, e. g. ruv koivwv ri dpa Sievoov/xTjv, av ovdhv ab fxaWov, $ 
ris aXAos %x e h PL Theaet. 209. a. (e%6i here agreeing with ris instead of av). 
In Latin this is much more frequent. 

7. A superlative connected with a partitive Gen. commonly 
takes the gender of the subject, more rarely that of the partitive 
Gen. 

II. <p, 253. (cue-rot)) '6s& 'djxa KapnarSs re Kal &kio~tos 7rererjvcov. %> 
139. KipKos, i\a<pp6raros irererjvoiv. Her. 4, 85. 5 Tlovros ireAayeW 
airdvrccv irecpvKe ^uvfj-acridoraros. Menandr. p. 193. (Mein.) voarwv xoAe- 
TTuraros <p&6vos. X. C. 4. 7, 7. 5 /jAtos rbv irdvra %p6vov irdvrwv Kafjnrp6- 
raros &v Sta/xeVet. PL Tim. 29, a. 6 k6o~iaos /caAAtcrTos rwv yeyovorwv. 
Plutarch. Consol. 102. c. t\ \iirt] xa^frwoT?) 7rccdw. On the contrary, 
Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. o~v/j.fiovhos aya&bs xP 7 l°~ L l x - ( »> raT0V Kc ^ TvpavviK<a- 
rarov airdvrcav kt r\ fi d r ca v iarl (the Superlative here taking the gender 
of the partitive Gen. Kr-qudruv). 

Rem. 11. "When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed, the 
Masc. form may be used, referring to words denoting females; (in this and 
other similar irregularities, less regard is had to strict grammatical principles 
than to the general idea to be expressed,) e. g. '2,vve\r)\vSao'iv ws i/xe Kara\eXeifjL- 
jxivai a.Se\(pai re Kal aSeAcJnScu Kal avetytal roaavrai, wsr elvai iv rrj oIk'io, reacra- 
pesKaiSeKa robs i\ev&epovs {free men), X. C. 2. 7, 2. 'H ffrelpos ovaa fx6ax os 
ovk ave^erai riKrovras ctAAous, ovk eX 0V( * wttj reKva, she cannot endure 



$ 242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 309 

that other persons (Masc.) should bring forth young, Eur. Andr. 711. So also the 
tragic poets use the Masc., when a woman speaks of herself in the PI., e. g. 
S. El. 391 (Electra says of herself) irea-odfi^ , d xp?, iraTpl r ijjiwpov jxevo i. 

Rem. 12. Sometimes the first Pers. PL, or the Pers. pronoun first Pers. PI. 
is used, for the sake of modesty, instead of the Sing., the speaker representing 
his own views and actions as common to others. This usage, which is very 
frequent in Latin, is rarely found among the Greeks in the Common language. 
^a'AXiafiidSri, Kal ypeTs tt\\ikovtoi ovres Seivol ra, roiavra iifj-ev (I also was at 
that age sharp in these matters), X. C. 1. 2, 46. "Evi/oid iro& im7v iyevero (the 
thought once occurred to me), Cy. 1. 1, 1. Tlepl fieu odu r&v irpax&4j/Tooj/ eV t<£ 
irapSvri ravr z?x o l J - ev «ire?^. Among the poets, particularly the Tragedians, 
this use of the PI. is more frequent, and a transition from the Sing, to the PI. 
often occurs, e. g. Eur. H. F. 858. "R\iov inapTvp6fjie<r&a Spwcr', a Spau ov 
fiovAopai. Hipp. 244. a 1 5 o v fx e 3- a yap ra \e\ey/j.4va poi. 

Rem. 13. In an address directed to several persons, the Greek has several 
peculiar idioms : — 

(a) The Imp. Sing, eiire and some others, which denote an exhortation or 
animating call, e. g. 'dye, <p4pe, tSe, is frequently connected in the Attic 
writers with a Voc. PL, or with several vocatives, e. g. PL Euthyd. 283, 
b. dire fioi, S> ~2,u>KpctTes re Kal iifxeis ot &\Aoi. Dem. Chers. 108, 74. enre 
fxoi, fiovheve<r&e. 

(b) In an address directed to several persons, the predicate in the PL often 
refers to a Voc. which denotes only one of the persons addressed; this is 
done for the purpose of making the principal person prominent. Od. £, 
310. 'Kvtiuo, otiirccs scrriv virepcpidAoicn fiefr" b\s.tv Zaivvahai. /x, 82. vi\a 
l&vvere, (paiSt/u' 'O 8 u cr c e 0. X. H. 4. 1, 11. %r, %<pr\, vpe?s, S> 
'HpnnriSa, Kal 8 1 8 d <r k e r e avrbu fiovAri&rji'ai aircp ^eTs • ol /xeu 87? avacr- 
rdvTes iSiSaa-Kov. An interchange of the Sing, and PL often occurs 
among the Tragedians, when the chorus is either addressed by others, or 
speaks of itself, the poet having in mind, at one moment, the whole 
chorus, at another their leader, e. g. S. 0. C. 167. £e?voi, ^ S9it a8i/c7/~ 
&£) (To i TTicTTevcras. 

(c) The second Pers. Imp. instead of the third, is sometimes connected with 
the indefinite pronoun ris or it as t is, ov even with a substantive and 
rls; this idiom, which is not common, occurs mostly in the Attic dia- 
logue, e. g. Ar. Av. 1186. %c6pet (instead of x (a P*' lT(a ) 8eDpo rras inrr]p4- 
ttjs (every servant come hither): r6i-€ve (instead of ro^ev4rw) iras ris 
(every one use his bow). Hence, also, the transition from the third Pers. to 
the second, e. g. Eur. Bacch. 327. (345.) <rT€tx* TC0 ris a>s rdxos, iA&kv 
8e fraKovs tovsS', 'lv olowoaKoirei, /xox^-oh rpiaivov Kavdr pstyov '4[LivaXiv, 
Kal — [j.4&es. Comp. Larger Grammar, § 430, 2 (7). 



§ 242. Agreement when there are several subjects. 

1. When there are two or more subjects connected together, 
there is a double relation to be distinguished : — 

(a) The subjects are regarded as expressing multitude, and 
the predicate is referred to all the subjects equally ; then 
the predicate is in the Plural, and when there are but two 
subjects, in the Dual or even in the Plural (comp. $ 241, 



310 SYNTAX. [$ 242. 

5); the gender of the predicative adjective is determined 

according to the following rules : — 

(a) With words of like gender denoting persons, the 
adjective has the same gender; with words of dif- 
ferent gender denoting persons, the gender of the 
adjective is conformed to the masculine subject, 
rather than to the feminine or neuter, and to the 
feminine rather than the neuter; in both cases the 
adjective and verb are plural. 
(/3) "With words of like gender denoting tilings, the 
adjective is either in the same gender and in the 
plural, or is in the neuter plural; with words of 
different gender denoting tilings, the adjective is in 
the neuter plural. 
(y) When words denoting persons and things stand in 
connection, the adjective is plural and takes the 
gender of the words denoting persons, when the 
persons are to be considered as the more prominent 
idea, or the things are to be viewed personally ; but 
when both are to be viewed merely as things, the 
adjective is in the neuter plural. 

Kal Ar)&7] 5e Kal a&v/xia Kal SvsKoAia Kal fxavta ttoKK6.kls ttoKKois 5ia 
rrjv rov cru/xaros Kax^av els rrjv 5idvoiav e /attIttt ov <r iv, X. C. 3. 12, 6. 2a>/cpa- 
ret 6 /xi\r)T a yevoLi4v(a Kpirias re Kal 'AAk t >3 id5r) s irXelcrra /ca/ca r t\v 
tt6Kiv eironio~drr)v, ib. 1. 2, 12. 'Hpa/c Ar)s Kal ®r)0~ev s fx 6 v o i rS>v irpoye- 
yevrjfiewcov inrep rod fiiov rod rwv av&pdmwv a&Arjral Kar 4 err 7} <r au, Isocr. 
Pan. 212. Kal r) yvvr) Kal 6 avr)p aya&oi elaiv, PL Men. 73. At 54 irov 
r)fx4repal r a"\ox° l Ka * vijiria r4Kva e'tar evl jxeydpois it or i5 4y jxevai, 
II. )3, 137. 'Hs el5e irar4pa re Kal \xi\r4pa Kal a.5eA(povs Kal rrjv eavrov 
yvvatKa alxH-o-^<^ rov * yeyevt)ix 4vovs, iSaKpvaev, X. Cy. 3. 1, 7. 'H 
opyrj Kal ii affvveaia elcrl KaKai. — Sw^crros KaWos Kal I cr % v s SetAaJ Kal 
KaK$ £vv oiKovvr a it p 4irovra (patverai, PI. Menex. 246, e. 'Evy 4v eiai re 
Kal 5 v v a fi e i s Kal r ifxal 5rj\d iffrtv aya&a. aura, PI. ^Hu r) ay op a Kal rb 
irpvravjfiov Tlaptw Ai&a r) o~ k r] /j. 4 v a, Her. 3, 57. Ai&oi re Kal tt\Ij/^oi 
Kal |u\a Kal K4pa/xos araKrws efipififxeva ovZev xpvo'i/xd iariv, X. C. 
3.1,7. 'H rvxv Ka -l $>iAnnros r)ffav ruiv epycov Kvpioi, Aesch. 'H KaX- 
\i<XT77 troXireia re Kal b KaKKiar os aurjp A o lira, av rjfuu efrj 5ie\^e7u, 
rvpavvis re Kal rvpavvos, PI. Pp. 562, a. 

(b) Each subject is considered separately and by itself; then 
the predicate is confined to one of the subjects and 



§ 242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 311 

agrees with it. This construction is also used, when one 
of the subjects is to be represented as more prominent 
than the others. There are here three positions of the 
predicate: (a) before all the subjects; (b) after all the 
subjects ; (c) after the first subject. 

PL Lys. 207, d. <pi\e? ere 6 irari^p Kal i) \x-i\rr\p. Her. 5, 21. e'lirero <r<pi 
Kal oxvf-ara Kal frepdirovres Kal i) iracra ttoWt) TrapaffKevrj. X. R. Ath. 1,2. 
ot irev7]res Kal 6 Srjju.os irKeov e%€t. PI. Symp. 109, c. at rifxal avroTs Kal rh 
lepa ranrapdroov av&p&Trwv rjepavi^ero. Th. 8,63. ol ev rfj MiX^rq) Kal 5 
'Acrrioxos . . . e&dparr}0~ e. Th. 3, 5. MeAeas Aa/cwj/ acp iKvetr at Kal 
'Ep/xeLdevSas 0r/j8a7os. X. An. 2. 2, 1. $a\7vos <$x 6T0 Kc " °i &vv avr<p. 

Remark 1. Sometimes, the verb, though it follows different subjects, agrees 
with the first" subject, the remaining subjects being then represented as subor- 
dinate, e. g. X. An. 1. 10, 1. fiao* iXeb s Se Kal oi abv avry 8 id kcov e I sir i tt - 
rei. So also with the attributive adjective, e.g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. e-rrra bfio- 
\obs Kal rjixio fS6\iov 'At tikovs (the adjective here agreeing with bfioXovs 
rather than i)/xiofl6Aiov). Th. 8, 63. 'Aarioxos eTrv&ero rbv 2t pofxfiixidriv 
Kal r as vavs air e A 7? A u fr 6r a. 

Rem. 2. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., if several nouns in the 
PI. denoting things precede, when it is intended to represent those nouns as 
making up one whole, as a condition, state, etc., e. g. PI. S. 188, b. Kal iraxvai 
Kal x<**- a £ al K °d e pvaifSai e'/c TvXeoue^ias Kal aKoafxias irepl 'dkAqAa raiv roiov- 
T<av yiyverai epcoriKwu. 

Rem. 3. When the subjects are connected by tf — ij, aut — aat, Kai — ««/, 
et — et, oVre — oil re, neque — neque, the predicate agrees with the subject 
standing nearest to it, if each subject is to be regarded separately and by itself, 
e. g. i) our os y t) eKeTuos aAr)&r) \4yci, aut hie, aut illc vera dicit; but when the 
subjects are not considered separately or as independent of each other, but as 
expressing plurality, the predicate is in the PL, e. g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. h 
Arj/xocpcoi/ i) ©rjpnnriSrjs ex ovo ~ u 

Rem. 4. The attributive adjective commonly agrees with the substantive 
nearest to it, e. g. 'A/xcporepois oi avrol fpKOt Kal ^u/ifiaxia Karecrrrj, Th. 
But where perspicuity or emphasis requires it, the adjective is repeated with 
each substantive, e. g. irdvr es &vd pes Kal irao-ai ywa?Kes; or the con- 
structions stated under No. 1 are observed, e.g. 'HpaK\rjs Kal © 77 <r e b s jx6voi. 
U.arr)p Kal ix-f)ri)p Kal a.Se\<pol oiXj««A.wtoi yeyeur]fxevoi, etc. See 
examples under No. 1. 

2. When several subjects of different persons have a com- 
mon predicate, the verb (which is commonly plural) is in the 
first person rather than the second or third, and in the second 
rather than the third. 

'E^cIj Kal o-b ypdcpofjLev, ego et tu scribimus. — 'E7& Kal eKeivos ypd<pofxev, ego et ille 
scribimus. — '£701 Kal crb Kal eKeTvos ypdcpofxev, ego et tu et ille scribimus. — 2i> Kal 
eKeivos ypd<pere, tu et ille scribitis. — 'Eycb Kal eKeTvoi ypdepo/xeu. — 2u Kai eKelvoi 
ypdepere. — 'U[xe?s Kal eKeTvoi ypd<pO[xev. — 'Tfxels Kal eicelvos ypd<pere. 

Rem. 5. Sometimes also for the sake of a more forcible contrast, the person 
of the vei'b agrees with the subject nearest to it, e. g. X. C. 4. 4, 7. irepl rod 



312 SYNTAX. [§ 243. 

diKalov irdvv otfxcu vvv i%^ iV shreTv^ Trpbs a ovre <rv ovt av dXXos ovSels Bv- 
voar aureiire7y. PL Pliaedon. 77, d. ojxoos 5e jjlol SoksTs <tv re Kai ^,1/x/j.ias 
r/decvs av Kai tovtov Bia^pay^.arevcraa^ai (pertractare) rbv Xo^ov. X. All. 2. 1, 
16. av Te yap"EXXr]v el Kai 7j/j.e?s. Comp. Rem. 4. 



§ 243. Remarks on certain Peculiarities in the use 
of Number. 

1. The Sing, has sometimes a collective sense and takes the place of the 
PI. ; thus in the poets : Sdicpvov, a Kris, crraycav, crrdx^s, harvest, etc. ; 
in prose: Kvfia, i(T&7}s (like vestis), \i&os, irXiv&os, &/j.ireXos, rj ?ir- 
iros, cavalry, tj a a it is, a body of troops, etc. 

2. Entire nations, that live under a monarchical government, are sometimes 
designated in prose, by the Sing., e. g. 6 II 4 pays, the Persians, 6 'Apd&ios, 
6 Avd6s, 6 'A<r<rvpios, etc. This rarely occurs in respect to nations that 
have a free government, e.g. rbv "EXXrjva cpiXov irpos&ioSai, Her. 1, 69. Also 
the -words arpaTiwr-ns, ttoXiejjuos and the like, are sometimes used in the Sing, 
instead of the PI. 

3. The PL properly belongs only to common nouns, not to proper names, nor 
to the names of materials, nor to abstracts ; still, even such nouns in certain rela- 
tions take the PL, namely, Avhen they express the idea of a common noun : — 

(1) Proper names: (a) to denote several individuals of the same name, e. g. 
5vo KarvXoi; (b)to denote persons that possess the nature or the qualities 
of the individual named, e. g. PL Theaet. 169, b. ol 'Hpa/eAees re Kai 0?}- 
<r e e s, men like Hercules and Theseus. 

(2) Names of materials occur not seldom in the PL, since either the single 
parts, which make up the material, or the different kinds of a given material, 
are contemplated, e. g. aXes, salt; ipd/xa&oi, sand; irvpol ical Kpi&ai; 'dve- 
(jlos Kai vdara, oXvoi iro Xvr eXeis, oJvoi iraXaioi; |uAo Kai Xi&os, 
etc. 

(3) Abstracts in the plural have a concrete signification, since the plural is 
used when the separate kinds or circumstances or relations of the abstract idea, 
are denoted, or the manifestation of the abstract action, as repeated in different 
places or times ; hence also when the abstract idea relates to several persons, 
e.g. Herod. 7, 158. vfiip fieyaXai axpeXiai re Kai iirav p4 ffeis yeySvacri. 3, 
40. i/xol at ffal fxeyaXai ewruxiai ovk apicTKOVffi. So ex^fli inimicitiae ; <rrd- 
<reis, seditiones ; <p iXiai, raXanra piai, aerumnae ; Srdvaroi, mortes ; ^vxv 
Kai SfdXirr], &vfj.ol, animi ; <p6fioi, (p p out'] tre is, reflections; air e'x^-e ta i, 
dvSpiai, brave deeds; vyieiai Kai eve^iai rwv a-a/xdrcav, like valetudines, 
etc. ; 7r i c t e i j, testimonia ; evvoias dovvai, to show acts of kindness ; x°-P lT€ s » 
presents; in many cases, the PL denotes a plurality of parts, e. g. ttXovtoi, 
treasures, divitiae (ttXovtos, riches, abstract) ; yd/xoi, nuptiae; vvktcs, the hours 
or watches of the night, horae nocturnae ; racpai, funera, etc. So, e. g. in Eng- 
lish, How long these nights are ? when one night is meant. 

Remark. The Greeks commonly use the PL of Abstracts as well as Con- 
cretes, when they refer to a PI. Adj., the idea contained in the abstract term 



$ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 313 

being then applicable to several persons, e. g. nanol ras \pvxds; icaXol ra 
<x co (xar a; &pi(TToi ras (pixreis] Kal rals yvc^fxais Kal rols a cap curt 
a<pak\6j.uyoi, X. Cy. 1. 3, 10, 

4. When neuter adjectives, pronouns, and numerals are used as substantives, 
the Greek, like the Latin, always employs the PL, when several individual 
things, individual relations or circumstances, a whole which is represented as 
consisting of single parts, are to be understood by these words : the English often 
uses the singular here, as this, that (ravra, eKelva). Comp. § 241, Rem. 3. The 
Sing, of adjectives used substantively is put in the Neut., when an abstract idea, 
a whole as such, is to be expressed, e. g. rb Ka\6v, the beautiful in the abstract, 
rb kczkov, the bad. The PI., on the contrary, denotes a concrete idea, i. e. the 
different parts, classes or conditions which are implied in the abstract, e. g. ra 
Kdkd, res pulchrae ; ra /m/cct, mala, the evil deeds, things, etc. 

§ 244. The Article. 

1. The subject as well as every substantive, takes the 
article, when the speaker wishes to represent an object as 
a definite one, and to distinguish it from other objects of the 
same kind. The substantive without the article denotes 
either an indefinite individual, or it represents an abstract 
idea in the most general manner, without any limitation. 

"Av&pcoiros : (a) a man, as an individual, i. e. some one of the race of men; 
(b) man, a man, as a species; 6 &v&pwxos: (a) the man, as an individual, the 
man whom I have in view and consider as an individual distinguished from 
other men ; (b) the man, as a class or species, as I think of him as something 
definite and limited in respect to his entire nature or constitution; — yd A a, 
milk, rb yaXa, the milk (as a particular substance) ; <ro<pia, wisdom, rj ao<pia, 
the wisdom (viewed as a definite property or particular kind of wisdom) ; (pi\o(ro<p(a, 
philosophy in general, y\ <pi\ocrocp(a, as a particular science or a particular branch of 
philosophy. When the Inf. is to be considered as an abstract substantive, it has 
the article, e. g. rb ypd<peiv. But the abstract noun takes the article when 
it expresses a concrete idea, e. g. rj Gravis, the (particular) sedition; rb 
it pay [j. a, the (particular) deed; hence also the PI. at ffrd&eis, ra irpdy- 
y.ar a. 

Remark 1. Prom what has been said, it follows: (a) That the substantive, 
as the subject of a sentence, may stand with or without the article, according 
as it is intended to be represented, either as a definite or an indefinite object; 
(b) on the contrary, that the substantive, as a predicate, must be generally with- 
out the article, since the predicate does not denote a definite individual, but only 
the abstract idea of a quality in general. Her. 1, 103. k2/.| t) r\\xipa iysvero, the 
day became night. Isocr. Nicocl. 28, a. Koyos a\rj^s Kal v6fXLfxos Kal 8'tKaios tyvxys 
aya^r,s ical iriarris z'ihcaXov 4<rn. But when the predicate denotes a definite, 
a before-mentioned, or a well-known object (No- 6), it of course takes the 
article. Her. 1, 68. (rwepaXXero rbv ' , Op4<rrr}v rovrov ehai, he concluded that 
this was the Orestes, namely, the one before-mentioned. 5,77. ol 8' linroflSrai 
inaAeopro ol 7rax«?> the rich bore the name of (before-mentioned) fairo$6ra\. Iq, 

27 



314 SYNTAX. [§ 244. 

passages like X. Cy. 3. 3, 4. 6 /ikv Tavra elirav irap-{)Xao-ev • 6 5e 'Ap/ieyios ffv/i' 
Trpovire/nre Kal oi dXXoi Trdures 'dy&pumoi, ayaicaXovyres ibv evepyeTTjy, rbv 
dySpa rbu aya&ov. An. 6. 6, 7. oi §e dXXoi oi irapovres t&v ffTpariwTuv 
iTTLxeipovai fiaXXeiy rhv Ae^nnrov, auaKaXovures rbv ir p o5 ott] v, the article 
denotes, that the ideas expressed by benefactor, honest man, traitor, point to a 
definite action either before named, or well-known. — When the predicate is a 
superlative or a substantive with a superlative, the article is not used in Greek ; 
the English, however, uses it here. Oi $ao-nX7Tai eiffi tt ovnpoT ar oi av&pwirwi/ 
Kal d 5 iKuiraT o i {the most wicked, etc.), Dem. 25, 2. 'AvSpl KaXcp Kaya&$ ipya- 
ffia K par icrrr] earl yeupyia, X. Oec. 6, 8. Comp. § 241, 7. 

2. Hence the article is used to denote the whole compass of 
the idea, everything which can be included under the term 
used; one object is here considered as a representative of the 
whole class. 

'O dvSrpu-wos &j/7)t6s iorri, man (i. e. all men) is mortal. Xpr/ to avrb <p$ey- 
yea&cu rbv prjropa Kal rbv v6/j.ov, Aesch. Ctes. 16. 'H avSpeia KaX-fj 
ia-Ttp, i. e. everything which is understood by the idea of dvZpeia. Tb yaXa 
7]5v eo~Tiv. 

Rem. 2. Where the English uses the indefinite article a or an, denoting 
merely a class, as a man, or an individual of a class who is not distinguished 
from the others, as some man, it not being determined what man, the Greek 
omits the article ; hence ay&pccxos in both instances. 

Rem. 3. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where, according to the 
statement in No. 1, it would be inserted. This is the case: (a) In appellations 
denoting kindred and the like, where the particular relation is obvious of itself, 
or is sufficiently definite from the connection or the context, e. g. irarrip, /iriT-qp, 
vios, ddeXcpSs, values, yoveis, avr\p, husband, yvvi), wife, etc. Comp. the expres- 
sions, Father has said it, Mother comes ; (b) When two or more independent sub- 
stantives are united, forming one whole, e. g. 7ra?Ses Kal ywatKes (like English 
wife and child, horse and rider), ir6xis Kal olniai (city and houses), Th. 2, 72; (c) 
When common nouns are, at the same time, used as proper nouns ; these being 
definite from their nature or from usage, do not need the article, e. g. '/jXios, ohpav- 
vos, do-Tv, used of Athens, ir6Xts, of a particular city, known from the context, 
777, of a -particular country, fiacriXevs, of a particular king, commonly the king of 
Persia, etc. ; other like expressions are dve/ios, SraXao-aa, etc. The article is 
often omitted also with words denoting time, though this is generally the case 
only in connection with prepositions, e. g. dcp' -q/xepas, /tte'xpt vvktos, d/xa op&po), 
irepl tjXlov Svo-fxds, /xeTa 'ixiov aXcocriu. The omission of the article is altogether 
natural when a common noun has an abstract signification, or expresses an 
action, or the manner of an action, most frequently in connection with prepo- 
sitions, e. g. 7)ye?cr&ai &eovs, to believe in gods. 'Eirl deliryoy eX&e?y, to come to 
supper, to a feast, X. C. 1. 3, 6. 5 E<£' 'lirirov Uvai, horse-back. 'Eirl frrjpay i^ieyai 
(i. e. ad venandum), X. Cy. 1. 2, 9. Tl6Tepov e-rvio-Td/xevov V'°X € " / ^ (evyos 
Xa/3e?y KpetTTov, v) /x^ eTnaTa/xeyoy (ad vehendum), X. C. 1. 1, 9. 'Eirl vfcop Uvai 
(aquatum ire), Her. 3, 14 

Rem. 4. The names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and vices, often 
omit the article, even where they occur in a definite relation, since, as well- 
known appellatives, they have come to be used as a kind of proper names, e. g. 
TldvTa /lev ohv e/Loiye §OKe? to. KaXd Kal to. dyaSd dcr/cTjTa elvai, ovx ^Kiara 8e 
co> (ppocr vvn. X. C. 1. 2, 23. 'Eirel oiiv tu re SiKaia Kal to. dXXa KaXa Te Kal 
aya&d irdyra dpeTJj irpaTTeTat, SrjXoy elvai, on Kal 8 t k aiocrv y-n Kal r\ dXXt] naaa 
h.peT^i crotpla eo~Tl, 3. 9, 5. 'E it 1 a t ■}} /x rj dpa cocpia ecrTlv, 4, 6, 7. lAdXig-Ta yap 



$ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 315 

e/j.e/j.r)\rjKei avrS iwticrjs, Cy. 8. 3, 25. The omission of the article is natural 
also, when an abstract is to be represented actively, e.g. 'Ev <pi\o <ro<j>la Cwo-iv 
in philosophizing (in philosophando), PI. Phaed. 68, c. But where a particular 
art or science, etc. is to be distinguished from another, the article is used, e. g. 
■q pvropiKT], V apiSrjj.v,TLK-r). The substantives /j.4y€&os, 7r\r)&os, vtyos, e3- 
pos, fid&os, y4vos and the like, are very often found in the Ace. or Dat. 
without the article, as they are to be received as a kind of adverbial expression, 
e.g. 7roTa.iJ.bs KvSvos 6vo/xa, evpos ovo TrAe&pwv, two plethra wide, X. An. 1. 
2, 23. 

3. The article is very often used with common nouns to 
denote what belongs to an object or is requisite for it, what is 
due to it. 

X. Cy. 3. 3, 6. 'Evo[j.({s yap, et eKacrros rb (j.4po s a^U-Kaivov TroirjO'eie, rb Z\ov 
aurw Ka\a>s %x* lv {partem, cui praeest; centuriam suam). 8. 3, 3. vel/xas Se rovruv 
(ruv o~to\S>v) rb fj.4 pos eKdarca rwv r)yejx6vwv, e/ceAei/cez/ avrobs rovrois KO&fieTv 
robs aiiroiv cpiAovs (partem debitam). An. 7. 6, 23. aAAa, (pednrs av, e5et ra 
ivix v P a T ^ Te ^a/3etV, ws ^Se el ifiovXero iSvvaro av ravra i^airarav (the meas- 
ures requisite to guard against deception). 5. 6, 34. oi ffrpariurai rjireiAovv avr$ 
et \i)i\iovrai airo^iBpdo'Kovra, on rrjv diKrjv iirt&i)o-oiGv (the due, deserved pun- 
ishment). 

4. Hence the article very often takes the place of the posses- 
sive pronoun, when it is connected with such substantives as 
naturally belong to a particular person, mentioned in the sen- 
tence. In such cases, the English uses the possessive pronoun. 

Oi yoveis ra reKva o~r4pyovaiv (parents love their children). 'O o~rparr\ybs 
robs o~r par tear as iirl robs iroXefxiovs dyei (leads HIS soldiers). Kvp6s re 
KarairvSrio-as cbrb rod dpfiaros rbv & dip an a iv4Sv Kal avafias eVl rbv 
'linrov ra Tra\ra els ras %e7pas eAccjSe, X. An. 1. 8, 3. 

5. As the article may make one object prominent, by^ndi- 
vidualizing it and presenting it apart from others, it is often 
used, when an object is to be represented in a distributive rela- 
tion to the predicate of the sentence. 

Tlposanovo-i 5e fxia&bv 6 Kvpos viricrxv^rai dcbo-civ avri Sapeutov rpia fjiJ.ib'apeiKa 
rod (xrjvbs rS Grpan&r-n (singulis mensibus singulis militibus, three half- 
Darics a month to each soldier, comp. English so much the pound), X. An. 1. 3, 21. 
(comp. 5. 6, 23.) Aapembv enaaros o'taei rod fxrjvbs i)fiS>v (each of you shall 
have a Daric each month), 7. 6, 7. 'O 5e o-vvebio-fels rbv '4va ^w^ibv ev\ fyep 
irpoir4fj.7reiv, lire yd) Trapeir] iro\\d, Uvair av aXviras tw evl XP^°"^ at (singula panis 
frustra, to dip each morsel into the different sauces), Id. C 3. 14, 6. 

6. The article is properly and originally a demonstrative 
pronoun, and is still often used in a demonstrative sense. This 



316 SYNTAX. [$ 244. 

is particularly the case in Homer, where the article almost uni- 
formly has a pronominal relation. Comp. $ 247. 

The simplest use of the article as a demonstrative, is as follows : An object 
not before described or referred to, when it is first mentioned as an indefinite 
individual, does not take the article ; but when it is repeated, it takes the article, 
because it has been already referred to and is known, e. g. ElSou dvdpa • 6 5e 
avi]p fxoi eA.e|ej/. Hence the article is also used when the speaker points to an 
object, e. g. 4>epe fxoi, Si 7rcu, rb fi ifixiov (the book = this or that booh). In this 
relation, the article may be used with material nouns, e. g. Aos ,uoi rb yd\a (the 
milk, ivhich had been pointed out) ; and even when a part only of the material is 
referred to, the article is employed, though material nouns elsewhere are always 
without the article, as they contain no idea of individuality, e.g. Tlivto rod 
oXvov (of this wine). The article is often used in speaking of persons or things 
known and celebrated, where the Latin uses the pronoun ille, e. g. 6 Ka\bs thus, 
that beautiful boy ; this is very frequent with proper names. See No. 7. r/ Ore 
p.4p^r\s dyeipas tt)v a.vapi&/AT}Tov <r r par iav ij'K&ev iirl r))v 'EWada (that 
numberless host), X. An. 3. 2, 13. 

7. Personal proper names as such, i. e. so far as they in them- 
selves denote merely individuals, do not take the article. But 
they take it, when they have been already mentioned, and 
are afterwards referred to (No. 6) ; or even when they have not 
been before named, if it is intended to designate them as well- 
known and distinguished (No. 6). Plural names of nations, 
and also the names of countries, districts, and festivals, are 
both with and without the article. 

^uKpaTT) s ecprj. So also where an adjective is joined with a proper name, 
e.g.&ocpbs 2 o> KpdrTjS, the wise Socrates. ^Evinriaau Q-nffaloi AaKedaifio- 
viovs. 'APpoKO/LLas ov tovt iiroi-ncrev, aW* eVel fJKOve Kvpov iu Kl\ikI<z 
uvra, foacTTpetyas e/c $oiv'ikt)S irapa fia<ri\ea airriKavvsv, X. An. 1.4, 5. Ku- 
pov 8e /jLeraTre/jiireTai (Aape7os) . . avafiaivei ovu 6 Kvpos, X. An. 1. 1, 2. 'Airb 
rod 'lKi<r<rov \4yeraL o Bopeas t)]v Tlpei&viav apirdaai, PL Phaedr. 229, b 
(as well-known names). 

Rem. 5. When a noun in apposition, accompanied by the article, follows 
a personal proper name, the proper name does not take the article, e. g. 
Kpola os, 6 Tcbv Ai»8wj/ fiacriXevs. But yet when the article is used, e. g, 
6 KpoTaos, 6 twv Av$u>v fiao-i\€vs, it has a demonstrative sense, and desig- 
nates the proper name as one already mentioned or known. The noun 
in apposition is accompanied by the article, when it serves to distin- 
guish the person or thing mentioned from others of the same kind, or 
when the person or thing named is to be pointed out as one known, e. g. 
2wK-paT?7s, 6 <pt\oao(pos \ 2co«rpar77S, 6 'A&rjvcuos, Socrates, the philosopher, the 
Athenian ; Xeipiacxpos, 6 AaKeSa^uSuios ; on the contrary, the noun in apposi- 
tion does not take the article, when it expresses merely an adjective attribu- 
tive, e. g. Her. 1, 1. 'HpoBoros 'AAucapvacrcrevs, Herodotus of Halicarnassus. Th. 
1, 1. QovKv5iSr]9 'Afrnvaios, Tliucydides an Athenian, or of Athens. KXeducop 
'Opxo/xfaios, Cleanor of Orchomenus, X. An. 3, 2, 4. The "names of rivers are 



§ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 3l7 

commonly placed as adjectives between the article and the word TroT<z/j.6s, e. g. 
6"A\vs Trora/xos (the river Hahjs), Her. 1, 72. 6 AxeA^os- irora/xos, Th. 2. 102. 
iirl tov ~2,dpov Trorafj-ou, iirl rbv Tlvpa/xov noTa/nov, X. An. 1.4, 1. e7rl tov Y.v<ppd- 
T7)v -iroTafjiov, 11. npbs rbv "Apdfyv irora/xov, 19. Examples like the following 
are more seldom: iirl to) iroTatxtp KaKVTrdpei, Th. 7, 80. iirl rbv woTa/j-bv rbv 
'Epiveov, ib. 82. Sometimes the article is wanting : iirl Wapov TroTa/xov (accord- 
ing to the best MSS.), X. An. 1.4,1; eTri "Apiraaov iroTa.iJ.6v (according to the 
best MSS.), ib. 4. 7, 18 ; -Kora^bs 3,e\ivovs, 5. 3, 8. The names of mountains, 
islands, seas, cities, etc., are also placed between the article and the noun, when 
they are of the same gender or, at least, of the same declension as the nouns to 
which they belong, A r iz. 777, aKpov, opos, vrjo-os, etc., e. g. iwl t^v 1,o\vyztav koj/j.t]v, 
Th. 4, 43 ; Tb ~Zovviov &Kpov, 7*7 ®eo-Kpwr\s 777, 77 AtjAos vr\cros; tov ~S,K6^pov vpovs, 
Th. 2, 96; tov A"/j.ov upovs, Th. 2, 96 (<5 AT/xos) ; 77 B0A1877 \ifxvr\, Th. 1, 58. 4, 
103; v f 7 MeV§77 tt6\ls, Th. 4, 130. But if the gender (or declension) is not the 
same, they must be regarded as in apposition with the nouns to which they 
belong, and are placed before or after them, e. g. tw upsi rfj Tepaveia, Th. 4, 70 ; 
T7}v 'aKpav rb Kvvbs arj/xa, 8. 105; Tris"ldr]s tov opovs, 108; 77 Atjkv&os rb <ppov- 
piov, 4, 113 ; rb x° 3 p' l0v ai 'Eweo oSoi, 1, 100 ; ttV it6\lv tovs Tapcrovs, X. An. 1. 
2, 26. The article is seldom omitted, e. g. anb 'ApS-npwv ir6\ews, Th. 2, 97. 

8. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives, 
they regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The Eng- 
lish here either employs an adjective used substantively, as the 
good; or a substantive, as the speaker {-=the one speaking) ; or 
resolves the participle by he ivho,they ivho, that which (=to the 
Lat. is, qui). This usage is very frequent in Greek with all the 
participles. 

'O aocpos, the wise (man), a wise (man), 01 aya&ot, ol ko/coi, ol 8iKd(ovTes (those 
who judge), the judges ; ol KeyovTts, the orators; rb aya&ov, rb Ka\6v, to. Ka\d, 6 
f3ov\6/j.evos, quivis ; 6 tvx&v, whoever happens. 'O ir\e?aTa oxpeXwv rb Koivbv 
ixeyio-jcov ti/xcov a^iovrai. 'O TrXticrTa oxp e\T)o~ as rb k. fi. T. afyovTai. 'O 7rAe?- 
gto, oxps A 77 a" oiv t. k. jx.T. a^iw^rjo-eTai. — 'O apeTT]v %x (av TrAoure? fiev ovtoov 
(piAoov ttoWuv, 7rAouT€i 5e Kal aWwv fHov\o(j.evojv yev4o~&ai /cat ev [jiev irpaTTOiv e%et 
toiij a vvr\ cr 3- 77 cofj.4 vov s, ictv 54 tl cr(pa\rj, ov <riravi£ei twv ^8077^77 <r 6 v- 
t oiv, X. An. 7. 7, 42. But when the adjectives and participles are designed to 
express only a part of a whole, the article is omitted, e. g. aya&ot, good men ; 
(piAoo-ocpovvres, /j.a&6vTes ; KaKa Kal alo~xpo, tTpa^ev. 

9. Participles also take the article, when definite individuals 
are spoken of, in the sense of those, who ; a participle with the 
article is very often appended to a preceding substantive, in the 
form of apposition, in order to give prominence to the attribu- 
tive meaning, somewhat in the sense of eum, earn, id dico, qui, 
quae, quod, or et is quidem, qui. 

Her. 9, 70. irpwrot is?ikxrov Teyerjrcu is rb reT^os, Kal tt)V o~kt]vi]v tov MapSovlov 
ovtoi earav ol 5 1 ap-rrdcr av r e s (and these are theytliat robbed, etc.). X. C. 2. 6, 18. 
ov /xovov ol IdiwTai tovto Troiovffiv, ctAAoc Kal iroAeis a I twv T6 Kak&v ixaKiCTa 
iiri/neXovfievai, Kal ra a«Vxpa r\Ki(TTa it posiefx^vai iroWaKis iroAe/it/cwj 

27* 



318 SYNTAX. [$ 245. 

€Yoi»crt irpbs aW-qXas. 3. 5, 4. BoiwtoI fxzv, oi irpSo'&ev ovtf iv rfj kavToJv ro\- 
fx&VTes ' ASrrivaiois avzv AaKedai/xovioov re Kal toov 'dXkoov TleAoirovvncriwv avTiraT- 
TeoSrai, vvv aireiAovaiv avrol Ka& iavTovs i/xfiaAelv els T7jv 'Attlk^v. 

10. The Greek may convert adverbs of place and time, more 
seldom of quality, into adjectives or substantives by prefixing 
the article. In like manner a preposition with its Case may be 
made to express an adjective or substantive meaning. 

'H &vw tt6\ls, the upper city. 'O /nera^b t6ttos, the intervening place. Oi ivSdtie 
&v&pa)iroi or oi iv&dde. 'O vvv fiao~i\Gvs. Oi ivaXai o~o<pol avdpes. Oi r6re, the 
men of that time. 'H avpiov (sc. rjfiepa). 'H Qai(pvns fj.sTa.arao'Ls. 'O aei, an im- 
mortal. So to and to vvv, now, i. e. at the present time; to it d\ai, formerly, in the 
former time ; Tb irpiv, to ain'iKa, immediately. Oi irdvv tu>v o~tp<ztiwtuv, the best of 
the soldiers. Tb KapTtx tyvxos. 'H dyav d/xeAem. 'O o/xoXoyov/xevccs BovAos. Th. 
6, 80. TTjv aKivdvvws SovAeiav. So also Tb ird/j-irav and rb irapdirav, omnino, Tb 
KapTa, Tb irapairoAv used adverbially. Even: 'H twv yecpvpuv ov BtdAvais, the 
not destroying of the bridges. 'O irpbs tovs TLepcras ir6Xe/j.os. Oi irepl <piAoo , o(pia.v, 
the philosophers. Oi iv dcrTei. 'H iv Xeppov-fjaw Tvpavvis. 

11. The neuter article to, may be placed before eveiy word 
or part of speech, when the word is not considered in relation 
to its meaning, but is used only as a form of speech, or when 
a preceding word is repeated, without regard to the structure 
of the sentence in which it is repeated. The Greek, by prefix- 
ing the article, may give even to whole phrases the form and 
meaning of an adjective or substantive. 

Tb tvtttqo, Tb TvirTeis. Dem. Cor. 255, 4. v/j.e?s, & dvSpes 'A&rjvcuoi- Tb S 5 
vfxtls OTav elirco, ttjv 7tJa.ii/ Aeyw. PL Up. 352, d. ov irepl tov iirnvx^VTOS (de re 
levi) 6 \6yos {io~Tiv), aAAa irepl tov ftvTiva Tpoirov XP"h Cv v ' 

$ 245. Position of the Article. 

1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by 
intervening particles, e. g. fxiv, Se, ye, re, ydp, 8rj ; by the indefinite 
pronoun rls (in Herodotus veiy often), and by avros iavrov. 

Tbv jxkv &vb~pa, Tr\v 8e yvvaiica. When a preposition stands before the article, 
the prose-writers say either : irpbs 5e rbv avSpa, or irpbs Tbv 'dvSpa de, but not irpbs 
rbv Se avSpa. — Twv tls Tlepcrecov, Her. 1, 85. To7s avrbs avrov ir-^fxao'i PapvveTai, 
Aeschyl. Ag. 845. 

2. When several substantives are connected by kcu or re — 
KaC, there are two Cases: (1) the article is repeated with each; 
then the separate ideas expressed by the substantives are con- 



§ 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 319 

sidered independent of each other, or they stand in contrast; 
or (2) the article is not repeated; then the separate ideas are 
considered as forming one single conception. 

^wKparns ivdvra r)yeiro &eovs et'SeVat, rd re Xeyojxeva Kal irparrS/JLei/a Kal ra 
aiyfj Pov\ev6/j.eva (the first two members form a whole, but the last is contrasted 
with them), X. C. I. 1, 19. At padiovpyiai Kal e/c rod irapaxpv^ ydoval, 2. 1, 20. 
At iTTifj.eXetai r£>v koXSsv re Kaya&coi/ epycov, ib. Ta re cvp.<pepovra Kal Kexapur- 
p.eva, 2. 2, 5. Ot arparvyol Kal Koxayoi, An. 7. 3, 21. Tb p.eya\oirpeTres re Kal 
eAev&epiov Kal rb raireiv6v re Kal dveAevfrepov (hei*e the first two and also the 
last two form one single conception), X. C. 3. 10. 5. Tovs aypovs rovs eavrov Kal 
o'lKias, Th. 2, 13. Oi 7rat§es re Kal ywaiKes (so many MSS.), PL Rp. 557, C. 

3. When a substantive having the article has attributive 
expletives joined with it, viz., an adjective, participle, adjec- 
tive pronoun or numeral, a substantive in the Gen., an adverb 
or preposition with its Case (§ 244, 10), then the article has a 
different position according to the idea to be expressed, as will 
be seen from the two following cases : — 

(a) The attributive is joined with its substantive to express 
a single idea, as the wise man = the sage, and is designed to 
contrast the object denoted by its substantive with other objects 
of the same kind. In this case, the attributive stands either 
between the article and the substantive, or after the substantive 
with the article repeated ; or the substantive stands first without 
the article, and the attributive follows 1 with the article. 

ay abbs avi\p or 6 av)]p 6 ay a&6s or aui]p 6 aya&os (in contrast with the bad 
man). See Rem. 1. Oi -KKovcnoi -rroxlrai or ol rroXTrai ol irKoiaioi. (in contrast with 
poor citizens). 'O i[ibs rear-ftp or 6 Trar^p 6 ijx4s. Ol rpe?s dvdpes or ol duSpes ol rpe?s. 
'O ruv 'A&rivaiwv Srj/xos or o dr)/j.os 6 rwu ' 'A&iqi/alwy (the Athenians in contrast with 
another people). Oi vvv av&pwiroi or ol dv&pwTroi ol vvv. 'O irpbs rovs Ueparas 
ir6\eixos or 6 ir6\efxos 6 npbs rovs Tlepcras (literally the against the Persians war, i. e. 
the war against the Persians, in contrast with other wars). 'A7rb &a\do~<Tns rr/s 
'l&vwv. Tvpavvls r) ev Xeppovi]<Tcp. 'H ev "Zakaiuvi irpbs rbv Ilepanv vavfiax'ta, the in 

1 Where the attributive expletive consists of several words, or where the 
expletive is itself qualified by another expletive, it is usually placed after its 
substantive, otherwise too long a phrase would intervene between the article 
and its substantive ; such expletives involved the idea ofsome such phrase as, I 
mean, etc., e. g. nvkioSncrav ev rous K&fiais rals vnep rov iredlov rov rrapa rbv 
Kevr pirrjv irorafiov (they encamped in the villages [I mean] those above, etc.). Here 
Kaifxats is qualified by inrep iredlov, and this by rxapa Kevrpirrjv, etc., X. An. 4. 3, 1. 
Tpiros fiacrrbs Konrbs l\v, . . . 6 inrep rr\s eVl tw irvpl KaTaA-^&eurTjs (pvAaKrjs rrjs 
vvKrbs xmb rS>u ifrekSvrcov, here 6 vnep and what follows qualifies the word fiao~- 
ros, X. An. 4. 2, 14. 



320 syntax. [§ 245. 

Salamis against the Persian sea-jight, i. e. the sea-fight in Salamis against, etc. These 
last examples show that a substantive with its Case has an adjective force. 

Remark 1. In the first position (6 aya&bs dvrjp), the emphasis is on the 
attributive, e. g. AeT naiSeias Kowutvelv rb &?jXv yevos t\\juv t<?> toov dppevcav 
(yevei), PL L. 805, d. But in the second position (6 dvr)p 6 dyc&Ss), the idea 
expressed by the substantive is represented as a definite one or one already 
mentioned, or is contrasted with that of another substantive ; in the third posi- 
tion (aurjp 6 dya&6s), the idea expressed by the substantive is represented as in- 
definite, but in contrast with another. Tt diacpepei dvbpcaTto s ct.Kpa.Tiis ^rjpiov 
rod a.K par ecrrdr ov, X. C. 4. 5, 11. 'H apery] o~vveo~TL pi.ev &eo?s, cvvecrri 8e 
a v&p u> it ois to?s dya&o'is, 2. 1, 32. To dpicrrov ov robs v6/novs early lo~xv- 
eiv, dXX' dvopa rbv fxerd cppovTjcreoos fiacriXiKov, PL P. 294, a. AioiKovvrai at 
/u.ev rvpavvioes /cat oAiyapX'a' TO ?s r poirois roov ecp e err 7] k 6t w v, at Se 
TroXeis (republics) at d7jiu.0Kpa.T0v/Aevai rois v6/j.ois to7s Ke i/xevo is, 
Aeschin. 3, 6. To liririKbv to eKeivcav (sc. rcov 2/cuSw) ovtco /j.dx* T cu, to 
Se 7rA it iKbv t6 ye roov 'E A A r) v w v, &s eyw Xeyca, PI. Lach. 191, b. 'Eyo; 
fxev ovv eKeivovs robs dvdpas cpy][xl ov fjtovov raiv cr co /x d r w v roov t) fie r e pea v 
irarepas elvai, aAAa Kal ttjs iXev&epias rr)s Te 7]/u.erepas ical £u fXTravr cov, 
root/ iv rfjSe tt? fytreipca, PL Mcnex. 240, e. Aie^epxovrai rds re crv fxcpo p a s tcXs 
e/c toD iroXefxov r ov tt pb s aXX-nXov s tj/mv yeyevTffievas Kal rds acpe- 
Xeias rds e/c rr)s ffrpareias t 7) s e tt eKeTvov e a /x ev a s, Isocr. Paneg. 
43, 15. Sometimes the position varies in the same sentence, e. g. Tas fieyd- 
Xas 7]dovds ical t a. dya&d to. fxeyaXa 7) ireiSk Kal 7) KapTepia Kal 01 ev 
tw Kaipti tc6voi Kal kIvowoi irapexovrai {great pleasures and advantages), X. Cy. 3. 
3, 8. Hws irore i) ttKparos 5 iKaio avvr\ Trpbs doiKiav ttjv &k parov 
e%et ; PL Pp. 555, a. Then the second position does not differ from the first. 

Rem. 2. With a verbal substantive, the attributive expressed by a preposi- 
tion and its Case, is often placed after its substantive without the repetition of 
the article. So also, when an attributive explanation comes between the article 
and the substantive : 'H crvyKOjxihri e'/c r&v dypu>v is to dcrrv, Th. 2, 52. 'H vvv 
vjxeTepa 00777 is MtrvXrjvaiovs, 3, 44. Trjs tS>v yvvaiKoov cpiXias Trpbs robs avdpas, 
X. Hicr. 3, 4. Also the more definite expletives of an Inf., Part, or adjective, 
frequently are not placed between the article and these words: Ttjv crocpiav 
robs apyvpiov tw fiovXofAevu) irccXovvras crocpicrrds diroKaXovaiv, X. C. 1. 6, 13 
(instead of tous tV ao(piav . . . wwXovvTas, in order to make prominent the idea 
in ttjv crocpiav). 

(b) The attributive is joined with its substantive not to 
express a single idea, but is to be regarded as the predicate of 
an abridged subordinate clause ; then the attributive is not con- 
trasted with another object of the same kind, but with itself; it 
being designed to show that the object to which the*attributive 
belongs, is to be considered, in respect to a certain property, by 
itself, without reference to another. In this case the adjective 
without the article is placed either after the article and the 
-substantive, or before the article and substantive. 

'O avYip dya&6s or dya&bs 6 dv'qp, a good man (= ay abbs &v, the man who 
is good, inasmuch as, because, if he is good). Oi av&pooTroi fjnaovo-i rbv avSpa Ka- 
k6v or icaKbv rbv dvdpa, they hale the bad man, i. c. they hate the man, inasmuch 
as, because, if he is bad. (On the contrary, rbv KaKbv dvdpa or tov 'dvdpa rbv 
Ka/coV, the bad man, in distinction from the good ; hence, robs [lev dyo&ovs kv~ 



§ 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 321 

drpc&Trovs ayavui[JL€V, robs Se KaKobs /xiaovixey.) 'O {iaffiAebs f]84u>s x a p' L C erai to?s 
iroXirais ay a&o?s, good citizens, i. e. if or because they are good (on the contrary, 
ro?s aya&o?s iroXirais or rols ttoXirais rols aya&oTs, good citizens, in distinction 
from, bad citizens). c O &ebs rr\v i/^xV Kpar [<TTt\v rw av&pdncq> £v4<pvosv {a 
soul, as it is the most excellent), X. C. 1. 4, 13. Ot xmb rov tjXlov Kara\a(xir6p.zvoi 
ra xp^aTa /xeAdurepa exovtriu (a blacker skin; the blackness of the skin is 
the consequence of the KaraXafxirea^ai. virb rov rjXiov), 4. 7, 7. 'Eveirpi/jcrdv Te ras 
(TKiqvas iprj/xobs Kal ra xP"hl xaTa Si^piraffav (quia deserta erant), Th. 1, 49. 'A|i<3 
(postulo) tovs Sepdirovras ifiol (xev 'd<p&ova ra. i-mr^deia TrapaVKevdfetv, avrobsdh 
/j.i]8evbs roiroov airrea^ai (= %>sre avra &<p&ova eluai), X. C. 2. 1, 9. 

Rem. 3. If a substantive having the article has a Gen. or a preposition and 
its Case connected with it, the position under (a) occurs, only when the sub- 
stantive with its Gen., etc. forms a contrast with another object of the same kind, 
e. g. 6 rS>v ' A&r)vaia>v Srj/xos or b S?i/j.os 6 ruv 'A&rjvalcov (the Athenians in contrast 
with another people) ; the emphasis here is on the Gen., e. g. Ovk aXXorpiou riyelrai 
civai 6 'A^rjvai co v 8rjfjt.os rbv ©77/3 a/wj/ St) fxov, avap.i[xvr\aK^rai 5e koI ras 
ruu ir p oy6vct>v ra>v k avrov els robs ®T)fiaiovs it poy ovovs evepye<rias, 
Dem. (Psephism.) 18, 186. 'E&avarcv&rf vtto ru>v iv rfj ~%rcdprt\ reXwv, X. 
An. 2. 6, 4. On the contrary, the Gen. without the article, is placed either before 
or after the other substantive, when that substantive denotes only a part of that 
expressed in the genitive ; the emphasis is then on the governing substantive, 
e. g. 6 drifjios 'A&Tji/atW, or '"A^rjvaiwv 6 drj/xos, the people and not the nobles. 
Hence, with this position, a partitive and not an attributive genitive is used ; 
the Athenian people is not here considered in contrast with another people, but 
a part of the Athenian people is contrasted with another part of the same, viz., 
the nobles. Compare further, 77 ^ojKpdrovs <piXocro<pia or 77 <pi\oao<pia 77 ~2wKpdrovs, 
i. e. the philosophy of Socrates, the Socrattc philosophy, in contrast with the 
philosophy of another, e. g. Plato's, the Platonic, with 77 <pi\ocro<pia ^.uKpdrovs or 
~2,aoKpdrovs 7] <pi\o(ro(p(a, i. e. the philosophy of Socrates and not something 
else of his, e. g. his life. "D-sirep Ik I as ra Kdrco&ev (domus inf mas partes) 
lo~%vp6rara elvai Se?, ovrca Kal ruu tr pd^eoov ras a p % a s Kal ras viro&e- 
ffeis aXrj&us Kal SiKaias elvai Trpos^/cet, Dem. 2. 10. Tovrou ev e&peipe Kal iirai- 
devo-tv, ws doKe? ^ASrrjvaiooy r <3 ir Xi\&e 1, to the multitude, not to the intelligent, 
PI. Menon. 90, b. lb e?Sos rov iraid6s (contrasted with rovvoua rov irai- 
86s), PL Lysid. 204, e. 

Eem. 4. When the genitive of the substantive pronouns is used instead of 
the possessives, the reflexives ey-avrov, aeavrov, etc. are placed according to (a), 
e. g. Tbu ip-avrov irarepa or rbv irarepa rbv 4y.avrov, etc. ; but the simple personal 
pronouns p.ov, aov, etc. stand without the article, either after or before the sub- 
stantive with the article, e. g. 6 irar-fip fiov or p.ov 6 irar-f)p, 6 irari\p coy or gov 5 
irar-fip, 6 irar^p avrov (csuttjs) or avrov (avrris) 6 rrar-fip, my, thy, his (ejus) father, 

5 irarlip tjijlwv, v/xeov, v<£v, avroov, or rjfxwj/, vfxcov, vwu, avrwv 6 rrariip, our i your, 
their (eorum) father. But when the substantive has another attributive joined 
with it, these pronouns can stand between the substantive and that attributive. 
e. g. 'H irdXai t)\x5>v <pv<ris. In the Sing, and Dual, the enclitic forms are always 
used ; these never stand at the beginning of a sentence ; but in connected dis- 
course they can stand before the substantive which has the article. The Gen. 
of demonstrative and also of reciprocal pronouns, have the position of (a), e.g. 

6 rovrov (e/cetVou) irartjp or 6 trar^p 6 rovrov (eKeivov). Tfj aWtjXbov evi/oiq. The 
demonstratives are sometimes also found without the article after the substan- 
tive with the article, e. g. Ot avayKoiot e/ceiVow, Isae. 9, 10. To. iepa. sks'ivov, ib. 
36. ToO irarpbs rovrwu, 10, 3. T77 vvv vfipei rovrov, Dem. 4, 3. 

Rem. 5. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest 
with the adjectives a xp os } p.4<ros, eirxaroj. When the position mentioned 



322 syntax. [$ 245. 

under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attributive forms a contrast with 
other objects of the same kind, e. g. r) fj.eari irokis or ttoAis r\ ixea-q, the middle city, 
in contrast with other cities ; tj eVxaryj vrjcros, the most remote island, in contrast 
with other islands. 'Es rb eaxarov tpv/xa rrjs vrjcrov (in contrast with other ipv- 
fiaai), Th. 4, 35. When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b) 
occurs, the substantive is contrasted with itself, the attributive then only defin- 
ing it more fully. In this last case, we usually translate these adjectives into 
English by substantives, and the substantives with which they agree as though 
they were in the genitive, e. g. eVl t<£ ope: dicpw or eV &Kpw t« optt, on the top 
of the mountain (properly on the mountain where it is the highest) ; iv /xea-p rfj 
tt6\(l (seldom iv ttJ iroAet fJ.eo-n), in the middle of the city; iv iax^V ttj vr\vw 
or iv vfj(rw rrj itrxdrr)) on the horde?* of the island. 'Ez/ piaois rois TroKsjxiois 
air4&ave, X. H. 5. 4, 33. Kara fxeaov rbv kvkXov, Cy. 2. 2, 3. Ot Tlepacu Trepl 
&Kpais rais X e P a ^ X ei P l ^ as ^acreias exovatv, 8. 8, 17. 

Rem. 6. In like manner, the word /*6vos has the position mentioned under 
(a), when it expresses an actual atti-ibutive explanation of its substantive, e. g. 
6 /xSvos 7ra?s, the only son; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b), 
when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate, e. g. 'O rrais /xSvos or 
/x6vos 6 irais traifa, the boy plays alone (without company). Movnv twv av&pwirwv 
(y\wTTav) iiroiyaav [oi &eo\) oiav aphpovv rrjv <pwvf)v, i. e. 7] twv av&p. yXwTTa 
fi6vr] icTriv, %v iirolr)(Tav o'iav k. t. A., they made the human tongue only, capable of 
articulating sounds, X. C. 1. 4, 12. 

Rem. 7. When a substantive has two or more attributives, one of which 
limits the other (§ 264, 2), one position maybe as an English, e.g. Oi oAAot aya- 
&o\ av&pwTroiy the other good men ; or the limiting attributive with the article either 
stands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or the 
limited attributive with the article stands first, and the limiting attributive fol- 
lows with the article and substantive. 'O vavTinhs 6 twv pap fidpwv <rr pa- 
t 6 s. At aAAai at k ar a to crw/na t) 5 oval, the other bodily pleasures, PI. Rp. 
565, d. 'Ej/ to?s dAhois to?s ifioTs xcopiois, Lys. 281. (When 6 dWos is 
joined with an adjective used substantively, the article is commonly repeated, 
e. g. TaWa to. noAiTiKa, X. Hicr. 9, 5. Oi aWot ot irapaTvyxdvovTes, X. Apol. 
11.) 'H ovx TiKiara fiha-tyacra r\ \ iptdoSr) s v6cros, Th. 1, 23. 'Ev ttj tov 
Albs tt? fjLeyiarTT) e op ttj, Th. 1, 126. 'Es avTbv Tbv eVl to) o~t6/j.<zti tov \l/j,4vos 
Tbv eTepov irvpyov, 8, 90. 'Ev ttj apxaia ttj 77 jagt 4 pa, <pwvfj, PI. Cratyl. 
398, b. Tb iv 'Ap/caSi'a rb tov Aibs lepov, Rp. 565, d. The limiting 
attributive can also stand between the substantive and the limited attributive ; 
in this case the article is used before each of the three paits, e. g. to. tcIxv 
to, kavTwv to. fxaK pa aireTeXecrav, Th. 1, 108. (But the article is omitted with 
a limiting demonstrative standing between the substantive and the limited 
attributive, e. g. T?V tovtov TavT-nvl t\\v $sav\xao~T\}v Kt<pa\-ir\v , PI. Symp. 213, e.) 
Finally, if the limiting attributive with the article is placed first, the limited 
substantive and its attributive follow, both without the article, e. g. ripbs tcls 
irdpot&e o~v /xcpopas evdai/xovas, Eur. Hel. 476. TaAas iyw rf/s iv fxaxv 
£v/Af3o\rj s fiapeias, Ar 1 . Acharn. 1210. 'Anb twv iv ttj Evpcvirn ir6\cw'v 
'EW-nviSwv, X. H. 4. 3, 15. Tds virb ttj &paKV olttovaas iroXeis 'EAA77W- 
8 as, 4.8, 26. 

Rem. 8. When an attributive participle has a more definite expletive belong- 
ing to it, their relative position is as follows : — 

(a) 'O npbs Tbv ir6\efiov cupe&els ctt paT-ny6s. 

(b) 'O ct paTyybs 6 irpbs Tbv ir6\ep.ov alps&eis. 

When there are two of these more definite expletives, one stands either 
after the substantive or after the participle, e. g. TV 7rpbs EvfiovAov yivo/xivnv 
iriaTiv vfx7v y Aeschin. 3, 25. Twv Ka& u/j.as 7reirpayp.evwv KaKwv ttj iro'Xci, 
Dem. 18, 95. T?js vvv virapxovar)s ai)T(p hvvd^ws, 4, 4. Tas irap' vjxwv virap- 
Xovoas ai>Tcp Tifxds, 20, 83. 



§ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 323 

(c) 'O alpe&els -rrpbs rbv iroKefnov CTt p arrjy 6 s. Tfyv virdpxova av ry 

7roAei Si'vaftiv, Dem. 8, 10. 

(d) 'O alpe&els o~ r p arrjyb s npbs rbv iroXefxov. T)]v it pos ovo~ av adoj-- 
i a v t<5 irpdy/j-aTi, Dem. 6, 8. 

(c) 'O rrpbs rbv 7c6Kejj.ov ffrparrjybs alpe&eis (this position is most fre- 
quent, when the participle has two more definite expletives). Taj virb 
tovtov .fiXa-atpr) n'i as e i py\ /x 4 v as, 18, 126. A/ irpb rod crr6fiaros vr\ es 
v av/xax<>v <rai, Th. 7, 23. Tb irpbs AifSvrjv /x4pos r er p afj.fj.4v o v, 58. 
When there are two or more explanatory words belonging to the partici- 
ple, they are either placed between the article and the substantive, e. g. 
T^v r6re ®r]f3aiots pwfx-nv Kal d6l-av vtt dpxov<r av, Dem. 18, 98; or 
they are so separated, that one is placed either before the participle or 
after it, e. g. Oi izapa rovrov \6yoi rare pri&4vres, Dem. 18, 35. 
Tavrrjv r^jv airb rod r6irov ao~<pd\eiav inrdpxovcrav rrj ir6\ei, 19, 84. 

Bem. 9. When a participle used substantively has predicative expletives 
joined with it, these are placed between the article and the participle. Thus, 
for example, irporepos, Trpwros, vo-repos, vararos (he came first, etc.), becomes : 
6 irp6r epos (ivp&r os, iiarepos, var aros) a<piK.6fi€vos (he who came 
first); &KO0V afxaprdvei becomes: 6 &k<ov a/xaprdvuv, av8pe?os vofii^erai : 6 
a.vdpe7os vofxi^6fieyos] avrbs adiKe?: 6 avrbs adiKwv (one doing wrong of 
his own accord); toiovt6s iariv: 6 r oiovros &v; fi6uos icrriv : b fx6vos &v. 
When the predicative expletive consists of an adjective and substantive, the 
substantive is usually placed directly after the participle, e.g. irpuros reray- 
(j,4vos ra£ia px°s (he who had been placed as the first centurion). 

§246. Use of the Article with Pronouns and Numer- 
als, ivith and ivithout a Substantive. 

1. The article is sometimes used with personal substantive 
pronouns in the Ace, either when the personality is to be made 
prominent instead of the person merely, or, what is more fre- 
quent, when a person previously mentioned is referred to. On 
o 72-otos, see § 344,- Rem. 3. 

Tbv eavrbv 877 \4ywv fiaXa ffefxvws Kal £yKWfiid(wv (his important person), PL 
Phaedr. 258, a. Aevpo 877, ^ 8' '6s, ev&v Tjfxwv. Tlot, %<pi)v £y&, \4yeis, Kal irapk 
rivas robs vfj.as(i.G. Kal rives elalv ovroi, ovs A4yeis rifias), PI. Lys. 203, b. 

2. The article is used with a substantive which has a pos- 
sessive pronoun belonging to it, or the Gen. of a personal or 
reflexive pronoun ($ 245-, Rem. 4), when the object is considered 
as a definite one or as relating exclusively to possession ; the 
possessive is placed between the article and the substantive 
[* 245, 3 (a)]. 

'O ifibs var-hp, 6 abs \6yos, thy word (a definite or particular one), 5 ifxbs ira?s, 
my son (a definite one of several, or even the only, one) ; also 6 \6yos o~ov\ rbv 
aeavrov ixar4pa or rbv ixar4pa rbv aeavrov \ on the contrary, the article is omitted 
when it is to be denoted, that the object named belongs to the possessor in 
common with others of the same kind, or when the substantive with the posses- 



324 syntax. [$ 246. 

sive is a predicate or in apposition : i/xbs a$e\(pos or a.Sek(p6s fxov, a brother of 
mine (it not being determined which); i/j.bs ira?s or irals fxov ; oZt6s iari(v) 
adehepbs cros or ao~ek<p6s o~ov ; ovros, adekepbs ijxos or adekepos jxov. 

3. A substantive to which one of the demonstrative pronouns 
ovros, 6'Se, ckcii/os, and even avros, ipse, is joined, regularly 
has the article. As these pronouns are not considered as at- 
tributives, but either as substantives (he, the man), or are taken 
in a predicative sense {the man, ivho is here), they stand either 
before the article and the substantive, which is then in apposi- 
tion with the pronoun, or after the article and substantive [comp. 
$ 245, 3 (b)]; thus: — 

outos o avrjp or 6 avijp ovros (not 6 ovros avr)p), 
fJSe r) yvw/j.rj or rj yvcajxrj rjde (not r) ?;5e yy&paf) } 
e/ce?i'os o avrjp or 6 avrip ineTvos (not 6 eKelvos avr)p), 

avrbs 6 fia(TiAevs or 6 fiacrikebs avros (but 6 avrbs fiacriXevs [seldom (6) /3ao*i- 
kevs o auT^s] signifies ic/e??i r&r, the same king). 

Remark 1. The substantive does not take the article: — 

(a) When the pronoun is used as the subject., and the substantive as the 
predicate (§ 244, Rem.. 1), e. g. avrrj io~rlv avdpbs aperi) (this is the virtue of 
a man), PI. Men. 71, e. Avrrj earw LKavrj arrokoyla, Apol. 24, b. Kivncris 
avrrj fjLeyicrrr} 877 To7s"Ekkr)oiv iyevero (this was the greatest agitation), Th. 
1,1; hence a distinction must be made between rovrca tw oifiao-Kaka 
XP&vrai (they have this teacher), and rovrw StSacr/caAw xP& VTal (they have this 
man for a teacher). TeKfirjpicp rovrco xp&fievos (which signifies toOto iari 
reK/xr)piov, § ixprjro), X. C. 1. 2, 49. Tavrrjv yvatfxrjv e%&> (which signifies 
avrrj iarlv rj yvdo/xiq, r\v ex w )> ^- n - -■ 2 i 12 - ^ however, the predicative 
substantive is to be represented as a definite object or one before-men- 
tioned, it takes the article, e. g. 'Oirore (~2,wKpdrrjs) ri t<£ k6yw 8ie^ioi t dia 
ru>v jxaXicrra. dfxokoyovfxevwv irropevero, vofilfap ravr-qv rrjv aacpdkeiav 
elvai kSyov (hanc esse firmam Mam disputandi ration em, viz. such a mode 
as had been clearly shown by previous examples), X. C. 4. 6, 15. 

(b) When the substantive is a proper name, e. g. oStos, iKelvos, avrbs 'ZwKpd- 
rrjs. Ev^vdrjfxos ovroai, X. C. 4. 2, 3. ~Nacr]pdrov rovrov, Symp. 2, 3. 
Xap/j.(5rjs ovroai, 2, 19. Avrbv Mevcova, An. 1. 5, 13 ; or when a common 
name is used instead of a proper name, e. g. Avrov fiaaikecos, An. 1. 7, 
11. 'E-n-t yr)v rr)vde rik&ofxev (with the variation irrl rr\v yr\v r.), Th. 2, 
74. The article occurs but seldom, andvthen with a demonstrative force. 
Tt b~r)r eKelvov rbv ®akr)v &avjjt.d(o{j.ev ; Ar. Nub. 181. Tovde rbv 
'Imrirjv fxererrefi^d^a, Her. 5, 91. Comp. 8, 27. 

(c) When the idea of an object is to be expressed absolutely, the substantive 
without the article is joined with the pronoun avr6s. Comp. § 244, 1. 
Avrrj Sea-iroreia avrrjS Sovkelas, PI. Parmen. 133, d. Avrrjs imo-rrj- 
/xtjs ov /xerexo/xiu, 134, b. Ovk avrov deairorov dr)rrov, io~ri deo-irSrrjS, 
ineivov Sovkos icriv, 133, d. 

(d) When ovros a vr)p is used to denote emotion, especially scorn or con- 
tempt, instead of the pronoun ov. Ovroai avrjp ov iravaerai (pkvapuiv; 
EtVe pot, 2> ^ooKpares, ovk a\o~x vt/ V ovoixara frripevwv ; ( — blockhead, why dont 
you cease ?) PL Gorg. 489, b. Ovk oT8 drra keyeis, 3> 'SwKpares, ctAA' dWou 
riva. epara. 2. Ovros avrjp ovx irKOfievei ojcpekovfievos (= you, oh man, 
can you not bear to be benefited? lb. 505, c. 



$ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 325 

(e) In passages like Ouroi, ovs Spare, fidpfiapoi TroXe/nicvTepoi rjpuv %o~ovrcu, X. 
An. 1.6, 16, the relative clause supplies the place of the article. But 
there arc few passages like: $epe Aafiwv x ir & vcl -s ««* rovrovai and the 
following rovsde xfToii'as, X. Cy. 8. 3, 6, where the demonstrative is 
used like a deictic (that which points out) adverb (here, there). The poets 
very often omit the article where the prose-writers must use it. 

Rem. 2. When the pronoun ovros or £k*7vos belongs to a substantive having 
the article and an attributive, then these pronouns are often placed between the 
attributive and the substantive, e. g. At rwv TleAo-irovvno-iwv avrai vrjes, Th. 8. 
80. 'H arevT) avTT} odos, X. An. 4. 2, 6. 'O Aifibs ineTvos AeW, Ad. H. A. 
7, 48. So 6 avrbs ovtos iroAe/xos, Luc. de hist, conscr. c. 14. So also with the 
genitives pod, aov, abrov, etc. (§ 245, Rem. 4) ; likewise with iras, oKos, e. g. 6 
aya&os /jlov Tvarrjp ; r\ rSiv 'A&rivaiav iraaa (6'A??) ttoAls. 

4. A substantive with which tolovtos, tolosSz, toctovtos, 
ryAiKovros, are joined, takes the article placed according to 
§ 245, 3 (a), when the quality or quantity designated by these, 
is to be considered as belonging to a definite object, one before 
mentioned or known, or as belonging to a whole class of objects 
previously named. 

TAp' ovv Svvaio top toiovtov 'd/j.e/j.Trrov <pi\ov vo/xlfeiv ; (i. e. talem, qualis antea 
descriptus est). X. Cy. 5. 5, 32. Has civ ovv 6 roiovros av^p Siacp&elpoi robs 
v4ovs (i. e. talis vir, qualem descripsimus Socratem), C. 1. 2, 8. Twv roo~ ovrwv 
Ka\ r oiovrwv ayc&Siv vpuv KaX to?s aXkois 'A&rjvaiois exovres x°-P LV ( m relation 
to what precedes), Dem. Cor. 327, 305. 'Opa>v robs ttjAlkovtovs <pvXdr- 
rovras fxaXicrra ras yvvcuKas (relating to the preceding yepauS, but at the same 
time designating the whole class of the yepcuoi), X. R. L. 1, 7. So also when 
taken substantively : 6 roiovros, to: roiavra. On the contrary, the article must 
be omitted, when the object is indefinite : any one of those who are of such a 
nature, or are so great, e. g. Toiovtov dvSpa ovk av iircuvoiris. 

5. When ?ra?, -n-dvres, o\o<s belong to a substantive, the 
following cases must be distinguished : — 

(a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered 
as altogether a general one, the article is not used. 

Tlas 'dv&pwrros (seldom 'dv&pooTro's iras), every man (i e. every one to whom 
the predicate man belongs ; iravres av&pcoiroi, all men. So also o\7) tt6\is, a 
whole city, ivoKis o\y, a ivhole city. Then iras in the singular signifies each, 
every. Uas may often be translated by mere, or utter, e. g. 'O "Epcos iv ivda-n avap- 
Xiq Kal avo/jLia &v, PI. Rp. 575, a. Tidvra ayafrh k<x\ Ka\a aTrepyd(ovrai, Polit. 
284, a. 

(/3) When the substantive to which 7m?, Travre? belong, is to 
be considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes 
the article, which is placed according to $ 245, 3 (a). Here 7ra?, 
7rai/T€? are emphatic. 

28 



326 syntax. [$ 246. 

'H iraaa yrj, the whole earth ; oi irdvres iroX?rai, all citizens without exception. 
This usage is more seldom than that under (a). This construction occurs also 
with oXos, but it is still rarer than with iras, e. g. r) oX-q ir6xis, irSXis r\ oX-n, the 
whole city. Here the singular iras always has the sense of whole. Tleipaa&ai 
{XpTJ) K-oivrj au>(etv ryv iraaav Si/ceAiav, Th. 4, 61. "E8o£ev avrots ov robs 
vap6vras jx6vov airoKrelva 1 ., aXXa Kal rovs airavras M irvXr] vaiovs, 3, 36. Tb 
'6Xov avdyKr) to irdvra fJ-eprj eivat, PI. Theaet. 204, a. 'Av&pwiroiai yap ro?s 
tract KOivbv rov^afxaprdveiv, S. Ant. 1023. 'EKeivais fxoi (paiverai, tbsirep ra tow 
irposumov jx6pia %x el 7r l°^ s T0 ^Xov it p6scoirov, PI. Prot. 329, e. Hence it 
signifies, in all. Ue/xirovai x i ^ ovs tovs tt6.pt as SirXlras, a thousand hop- 
lites IN all. ~2,vveirX7]p&&r)aav vr)es at it a a at Se/ca /j.aXiara Kal eKar6v, Th. 3, 66. 

(y) When the words 77-as, ttolvtcs, intended merely as a more 
definite explanation, without any special emphasis, belong to a 
word denoting a definite object and hence having the article, they 
are then placed according to § 245, 3 (b). This is by far the 
most frequent use of ttSs, irdvra. The word oAos also is usually 
constructed in the same manner, in connection with a substan- 
tive and the article. 

Oi arpariwrai elXov rb ar par Sired ov airavor airav rb ar par direoov. 
Of ar par ia>rai irdvres or irdvres oi ar p ar i urai KaXws ejxax^aavro. 
Aia ryv it 6 X iv oXrjv or Sia '6Xi\v ryv irSXtv (simply through the whole 
city, whereas 8*a ryv oX-nv ir6Xiv, through the whole city). Aia&aivovai irdvres 
els rb Bv(dvnov oi ar par ia>rai, X. An. 7. 1, 7. El virb rrjs 'EXXaSos 
it a ays allots iir' apery &av/j.d£ea&ai, ryv 'EXXaSa ireipareov ev iroietv, X. C. 2. 
1,28. 

6. When e/cacrro?, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the 
article is omitted, as with 7ras in the sense of each, every, when 
the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as a general 
one ; but when the idea contained in the substantive is to be 
made prominent, it takes the article which is always placed 
according to § 245, 3 (b). 

KaTa rrjv rj jxepav eicdrrr-qv, Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or na& e Kaarrjv ryv 
yfiepav, every single day, but ovk bxiya earl koS' eKaaryv y/xepav (quolidie, 
each day, every day, general) roiavra bpav re Kal aKoveiv, X. C. 4. 2, 12. *A 
eKaarr) yXiKia. irposreraicrai iroielv, Sir)yr}a6/J.e^a, X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Tvpavvovv- 
rai inrb Seica avSpwv, ous AvaavSpos Kareoryaev ev eKaarrj iroXei, H. 3. 5, 13; 
but "O riav ev rr} yrj eKaarr] KaXbv r) aya&bv rj , /xefivfjaovrat, in every single 
land, Cy. 8. 6, 6. Kal yyejx^v fxev r)v 6 deair6rris eKaarys rys o'tKlas, An. 
7. 4, 14. 

7. When tKarcpos, each of two, a/x<^co and afx^orcpos, both, 
belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here 



$ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 327 

only two known, therefore definite objects can be spoken of. 
The article is here placed according to $ 245, 3 (b). 

'E7ri rwv TrXevpwv ettore/jwy, X. An. 3.2, 36, or eVI kfcaripwv rwv 
trXevpuv. To Ssra ap.(p6r epa or a/j.(p6r € pa to St a. 'AfKpolu rotv 
X^poTv or to 1v xzpolv a/x(po?v. Kafr 1 e /cot e pov rbv i sirXovv, Th. 
4,14. T$ url etcarepcp, X. Ven. 5, 32. 

8. In respect to the pronoun avros and the indefinite pronouns 
or numerals aA.A.09, ere/oos, 7roA.us, 7rAeict)v, 7rAeto-ros, the 
following points are to be observed : — 

(a) 'O out 6s signifies the same, idem, e. g. 6 avrbs izv^pojiros, idem homo ; rav- 
r6, the same; but 6 av&pcairos avr6s or avrbs 6 frvfrpcairos, homo IPSE. 

(b) ''AA.A.oj = alius, another, in contrast with ipse (avr6s) ; 6 &XXos = reliquus, 
the other ; ol &XX01 = reliqui, certeri, the rest, e. g. r) HXX-q "EAAas, reliqua Graecia, 
the rest of Greece, in contrast with some part before named; ol &XX01 fobpairoi, 
the other men or the others, in relation to definite individuals. ~*Q. 'Aptote Kal I 
&XX01 offoi r)re Kvpov (piXoi, Ariaeus and the rest. But 'O TXovs iTrecpavr) per' 
&XXcov, Glus appeared ivith others, in contrast with himself; — erepos = one 
of two (it not being determined which), or it forms a contrast with 6 avr6s and 
denotes difference or contrast; — 6 e 4repos == the other, i. e. the definite one of 
two, e. g. r) erepa %slp rfj kripa xp/Tat; ol eVepo i in reference to two parties. 

(c) The following cases of iroAus, no Wo I are to be distinguished: (o) 
"When iroXvs, -rroXXoi belong to a substantive without the article, as iroXvs ttovos, 
ttoXXti o-irovdr), iroXvs \6yos, iroXXol &v&pwTroi, an object is denoted as an indefi- 
nite one, e.g. UoXvv %x ov<Tai nkvov areXus rr)s rod ovros Seas airipxovrai 
{having much toil), PL Phaedr. 243, b. IT0AA0I &v&p wttoi rod ttXovtov 6p4- 
yovrai (many men, general) ; (£) but if the object is represented as definite, or 
one previously mentioned or known, the article is used with the substantive, 
and iroXvs is then placed : (1) as an attributive between the article and the sub- 
stantive, e. g. 7) ttoXXt] ffirovSr] rb aATj&eias I5e?v TreSiou (magnum illud, de quo 
dixi, studium, that great zeal, of which I have spoken), PI. Phaedr. 248, b. v CLi/ iripi 
rbv ttoXvv x6yov iiroieiro ' 'Ava£ay6pas (multum ilium sermonem, e scriptis ejus 
satis cognitum), 270, a. 'Ey tois iroXXals yeveffetri (among the many genera- 
tions mentioned), Phaedon. 88, a; ol iroXXol frvfrpcoiroi signifies either the 
many men named or a multitude of men belonging together, in opposition to the parts 
of the whole, hence also ol wo Mo I, the many, the multitude, the populace, plebs, 
or even the most, the majority (in contrast with the separate individuals), e. g. 
"Oo~a ol oXiyoi rovs woXXovs fir] weiaavres, aXXa. Kparovvres ypdcpovai (what the 
few prescribe to the many [the majority] not by persuasion but by force), X. C. 1. 2, 45 : 
rb woXv, the greater part, e. g. Twu woXefiioov rb fiev woXb efievev, fiipos 8' av- 
ruv airr)ura rots Kara to &Kpa (most of the enemy remained), X. An. 4. 6, 24. What 
is true of the Positive, is true also of the Comparative and Superlative. 'Ear 
<plXovs r) w6Xiv wcpeXetv Sen, woripca r) wXeiwv <rxoXr) roirav iwifieXe?<r&at, 
t<£ ws iya) vvv, r) t<£ ws cv fiaKaplfas diaireofievca (the greater leisure, considered 
as a definite thing, or as a definite whole), X. C 1. 6, 9. El iSidov, iwl rovrcp 



228 syntax. [$ 246. 

aveSiSov, oiras ipol 8ovs ix.e7ov fjdj airodoir) vpuv rb irXetov, An. 7. 6, 16. "Eirerai 
T7] apery a&^za&ai els rbu irXeiui XP° V0V MaAAov, rj tt? KaKia, R. L. 9, 2; ol 
•n-Keiovsoi'ToirXeov signifies the majority in opposition to the minority ( ol eAacr- 
o~ovs), therefore a definite whole; ol ir\e?cn oi, the most, to irXelaTov, the greatest 
part, also to be considered as a definite whole. — Or, (2) tto \vs is joined with 
the substantive having the article, and is placed according to § 245, 3 (b) ; 
iroXvs is then to be taken in a predicative sense, e. g. 'Eirel ewpa -n-oWa tcl 
tcpea (when he saw the flesh that it was much, the flesh in great abundance), X. Cy. 
1.3,6. 2<£icrt ivoKXa. to. airopa ^Vfx^e^-qKora (sc. bp&vres), Th. 1, 52. II oA- 
\)]v t^jv air lav el^oy (they had censure in great abundance, i. e. were very 
severely censured). 6, 46. 

(d) 'O A 1 7 o i, few, e. g. bxlyoi &v&panroi; ol bxlyoi, the few, i. e. either the 
few mentioned, or to be considered as a definite whole, viz., emphatically the 
Oligarchy, considered as a whole, in opposition to ol ttoWoi, e.g. Tlpeo-fieis 
ol MrjXtoi irpbs /xeu to ttXtj&os ovk tfyayov, ev Se Tats apxa?s Ka\ ro?s oXtyois 
Keyeiv enehevov, Th. 5, 84 ; but when only an indefinite idea is expressed by the 
word b\iyos, the article is omitted, e. g. Upo^o^rjvat. t^v ttoKiv vit bxiycav (by 
oligarclis, not by the Oligarchs). 

9. When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the 
article is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is 
indefinite, e. g. rpets avSpes rj\%v ; bat the substantive takes the 
article which is placed : (a) according to § 24.5, 3 (a), when the 
substantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea 
of a united lohole ; hence also, when the number of objects is to 
be represented as a sum-total, after the prepositions ajx<pi, Trc.pi, 
eis, virep ; but the article is here used most frequently, when a 
preceding substantive with a cardinal number agreeing with it, 
and without the article, is referred to. 

0/ Ttov fiacriXewv olvoxo'oi SiSbaai to?s rptal 8 aKTvAo is bxovvres t^jv 
<pid\r]v (with the three fingers, i. e. the three generally used), X. Cy. I. 3, 8. ^Hv, 
lire irekevra, a/Kpl ra it e urrj kovt a err] (he had reached about the sum of 
fifty years), X. An. 2. 6, 15. 'l7T7rers els rovs rerpaKisx^iovs avveXe- 
yovTo avrS, na\ ro£6rai els rovs /xvpiovs, Cy. 3. 2, 3. To?s KepKvpaiois rwv 
eiKoai veuiv ov irapovo-wv (referring to the preceding words ol KepKvpaTot 
etnoffi vavalv avrovs rpe\pd/j.evoi, Th. 1,49). 

(/?) But the article is placed according to $ 245, 3 (b), when 
the numeral without any emphasis, is joined with the definite 
object, merely to define it more definitely, and when the nu- 
meral had not been previously mentioned, e. g. 'E/xa^eVavro 
ot /xeTO. IlepiKAeous oTrXlrat ^lXlol or ^tAioi ol /xera II. ottAitcu, the 
hoplites with Pericles, a thousand in number, fought. 



§ 247.] ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 329 

Rem. 3. The article is frequently omitted with substantives which have an 
ordinal number joined with them, as the ordinal in a measure supplies the place 
of the article. Tpirov eros rep tto\4/j.o> ireAevra {he died the third yea?-), Th. 
2, 103. Comp. 3. 25, 88. 

$ 247. The Article as a Demonstrative and Relative 
Pr onoun. 

1. The article 6 t\ r6 had originally the-sense both of a demonstrative and 
relative pronoun. 

2. In the Homeric poems, the pronoun 6 % r6 has almost wholly the sense 
both of a substantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which refers to an 
object, and represents it as known or already spoken of, or brings it before the 
mind of the hearer, e. g. II. a, 12. 6 (he) yap ^A&e &ohs inl vr^as 'Axaicov. 29. 
rfy v (her) 8' iyeb ov Xvaw. Od. k, 74. ov yap /xoi &e[j.is earl KO/ut.t^ep:eu ovd' aTroire/x- 
ireiu avhpa rov (that man), os Ke &eo?<rii/ airex&V Tai jxaKapeo~o~iv. Hence, in 
Homer, the substantive is found in very many passages without the article, 
where later writers, particularly the Attic, would use it. Comp. II. a, 12 seq. 
with PI. Rp. 393, e. Yet there are, in Homer, evident traces of an approxima- 
tion or agreement of this apparent article with the real article, which was not 
fully developed before the time of the Attic writers. Thus in Homer, as in 
the Attic writers, it gives the force of substantives to adjectives and participles, 
e. g. 6 'aptaros, 6 i/LK7j(ras, 6 yepai6s; so also, rb irpiv, rb irp6o-&ev (prius) ; it is 
found in connection with a substantive and an attributive adjective or adverb, 
the attributive being placed between the aiticle and substantive, e. g. T&v wpo- 
repuv erewv, II. A, 691. Tbv 8e£ibi> '{-Kirov i|/, 336. Ol eVep&e &eoi £, 274. Tb abv yepas 
a, 185. Tb abv fievos a, 207 ; so it is used in case of apposition, e. g. Od. A, 298. 
Kal Ar]or)v eTdov r)]V Tvvoapeov irapaKoiriv. Od. |, 61. 'dvaKres ol veoi; further, 
"Avrvyes al Trepl oteppov, II A, 535. 'AvSpoov rS>v rare i, 559. Tle?s ol AoXioio, Od. a, 
497 ; also with the demonstrative, al Kvves a'fie t, 372 ; it also takes the place 
of the possessive pronoun, e. g. II. A, 142. vvv piev or) rov war pb s aeiKea riaere 
AcbfiT)!/ (of your father), and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. o, 218. 
eyKoa/xelre ra rei>x e \ eraTpoi, vnt fxeXaivr] (the Tei>x €a belonging to the ship). 

3. The use of the article as a demonstrative adjective, is not unfrequent in all 
the post-Homeric writers (§ 244, 6) ; but as a demonstrative substantive pronoun, 
it was retained, in certain cases, through every period of the language ; thus : — 

(a) Tb 84 (id autem, or on the contrary), very frequently at the beginning of a 
sentence; 6 pep (is quidem), 6 oe (is autem), ol Se (ti autem) very fre- 
quently at the beginning of a sentence; vpb rod (ir p or ov), formerly ; 
often Kal rov, r-nv, et eum, et earn, at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. 
X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. Kal rov KeXevaai dovvai. In connection with /cat, the 
Greek says in the Nom. : Kal os, Kal 'n, Kal o'l (§ 334), but in the Ace. Kal 
rbv, Kal rrjy ; seldom r 6 y e, id quidem, r w, ideo, and the like. 

(b) In such phrases as, rbv ical r6v, rb Kal r 6, this man and that man, this 
thing and tJiat thing ; ra Kal ra, varia, bona et mala. 

(c) It is used immediately before a sentence introduced by '6 s, 6a os or oTos, 
which sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjective, or 

28* 



330 syntax. [$ 248. 

especially, an abstract idea. This usage is confined mostly to Plato. 

PI. Phaedon. 75, b. opeyercu rod '6 iffTiv'iffov (= tov 't'aov ovtos), he reaches 

after that which is equal. Prot. 320, d. e/c yrjs koX irvpbs n'l^avTes teal tS>v 

off a irupl Kal yfj KtpdvvvTai. Soph. 241, e. ezre pnjX7)jxdTcov, eafre (pavrafffxd- 

twv avTwv r) Kai Trepl TdX v ^ v t u v, off ai irepl ravrd elcri. 

(d) In such phrases as, 6 jxiv — 6 8e, ol jx4v — oi Se, the one — the other, 

some, the others. Isocr. Paneg. 41. eis fxev tovs vfSpi^ovrzs, ro?s Se SoiAetW- 

res, treating some with contempt, and being slaves to others. Very frequently 

to ix iv — rb $e, ra /xiv — to 8 e, partly — partly, rrj fxep — rfj 5 e, 

on one side — on the other side. 

4. In the Homeric language, the demonstrative 6 ij to, is frequently used in 

place of the relative. II. a, 125. aWa to. pteu iroXleov i^ewpd^ofiey, to. Sedaffrcu 

(quae ex urbibus praedati sumus, ea sunt distributa). The relative use was 

transferred from Homer to the Ionic and Doric writers also ; so the Tragedians 

take this liberty, though very rarely. Her. 3, 81. t a fiev 'Ora^s e?7re, AeAe'x&w 

Ka/jLol TavTa • to 8' « t^ TtXrjSos dvuye (pepeiv rb tepdros, yvcafx-ns Trjs apiffT7)S 

rj/j.dpT7]Ke. Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 482. 



§248. Classes of Verbs. 

In relation to the subject, the predicate can be expressed 
in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, 
which are indicated by different forms : — 

(1) The subject appears as active, e. g. f O 7rat? ypdcfrei, 
to av^os ^dWec. — But the active form has a two-fold 
signification : — 

(a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is 
directed, is in the Ace, and therefore appears as pas- 
sive or as receiving the action, e. g. Tvtttco tov iralha, 
ypdcfxo ti^v liriGTo\r]v, — Transitive verb. 

(/3) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the 
subject, as To aifeos ^dWec, or when the verb has an 
object in the Gen. or Dat., or is constructed with a 
preposition, e. g. ^Kiri^vfjuo} Trp dpeTr/s, yaipw ttj aocfria, 
f3a$it(o et? tt]v ttoXlv, — Intransitive verb. 

(2) Or the subject performs an action which is confined 
to, or is reflected upon itself, e. g. TvirTOfxat, I strike my- 
self ; fiovXevo/jbat, I advise myself, or I deliberate ; tvttto- 
\xai tt]v K6(j)a\7]v, I strike my own head; KaTao-Tpe^ofiai ttjv 
<yr)v, I subjugate the land for myself ; d\xvvoixai tovs iroXefil- 



$249.] CLASSES OF VERBS. ACTIVE FORM. 331 

ou?, I keep off the enemy from myself, — Middle or Reflex- 
ive verb. 

Remark 1. When the reflexive action is performed by two or more subjects 
on each other, as Tvtttovtcu, they strike each other ; SiaKeXevovrai, they exhort each 
other, it is called a reciprocal action, and the verb, — Reciprocal verb. 

(3) Or the subject appears as receiving- the action, i. e. 
the action is performed upon the subject, e. g. 01 o-Tpartcbrai 
virb tcjv 7to\6[jli<dv i&Q)}fir)(rav, were pursued, — Passive verb. 

Rem. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the 
Greek has only two tenses : the Fut. and Aor. All the other passive forms 
are indicated by the Mid., since the passive action was considered as a reflexive 
one. 

Remarks ok the Classes of Verbs. 

§ 249. A. Active Form. 

1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion, 
besides a transitive signification, have an intransitive or reflex- 
ive sense. (So in English, as he leads, the birds move, the car- 
riage breaks, the snoiv melts, which have also a transitive sense ; 
so the Lat. vertere, mutare, declinare, etc.) 

'Axepwv iroTafjLbs isfiaXXe i is rty Xljxvi]v, Th. 1,46. 'H B6x^rj Xifivn i^ltf 
ffiv is SdXao-<rav, 4, 103. 'Eyyvs ?iyov ol "EXXnves (comp. to draw near), X. 
An. 4. 2, 15. So also avdyeiv, to go back, to withdraw; 5 idye iv, perstare, to 
continue, are found in prose. — 'EXaivetv or iXavveiv 'iirirca (X. An. 1. 8, 1), 
to ride; ivposeXavveiv, adequitare, to ride up to. — Many compounds of /HdXXeiv, 
e. g. ipfSaXXeiv and elsfiaXXeiv, to fall into, to empty (of a river) ; itcfidx- 
Xeiv, to spring forth, to put forth (of plants, etc.) ; /xer aPdXXeiv (like mutare), 
S lafidxXeiv, to cross over ; ir posfiaXXetv nvi, to make an attack upon; o-v/x- 
fiaXXeiv rtvl, manus conserere, to engage in combat with ; iir ifidXXeiv, to fall 
upon ; virepfidxXeiv, to exceed, to be prominent. — KXivetv and its com- 
pounds, e. g. eiriKXiveiv, to incline to something ; airoKXiveiv, declinare. — T peiretv, 
like vertere ; imrpeireiv, se permittere, to entrust one's self to. — ^Tpe<peiv (like 
mutare) and its compounds. — Tlraieiv, to strike against, to stumble; irposirraieiv, 
as fxeyaXas irposeirraiaav, they suffered a total shipwreck (Her. 6, 95). 'AttoA- 
X d t t e i v, to get off, escape. — Compounds of 5 1 8 6 v a i, as iv$id6vcu, to discharge 
itself (of a stream) ; eiri$if>6vcu, proficere, to increase, advance. — Compounds of 
lev a i, e. g. avievcu, to relax, be remiss; i<pievai (sc. eavrbv) \<jx v PV yeXcori (indul- 
gere), PL Rp. 388, e. Compounds of (xi<ryeiv, /xiyvvvat, as o-vfifxiayetv, 
commisceri ; irpos{xiyvvvai, to fight with, also appropinquare, e. g. irposejxi^av t$ 
Tei'xej, Th. 3, 22. Atpeiv, to get under way, set out (of ships, to weigh anchor), 
also compounds, e. g. ol fidpPapoi airrjpav e/c rrjs A-fjXov (to set sail), Her. 6, 99 ; 
avraipeiv (sc. x^pas) twl, to fight with, to withstand. — 2, v van re iv, manus con- 



332 syntax. ■ [$ 249. 

severe. — y Ex *iv> to land; %x* lv twos [desistere), Th. 1, 112 ; %x* lv with adverbs, 
as e3, ttaX&s, kclkcvs, like bene, male habere; e%eiz> a/^i ri, in aliqua re occupation 
esse ; irpos^xew (sc. vovv), attendere, to give one's attention to, or appellare, to land; 
Trpoe'xewj praestare; i-n-exeiu, se sustinere, or expectare, in mente habere, e. g. e7re?- 
Xoj/ o-rpaTeiWdxu ; /care'xetj', se retinere, also to /a/zd; itapex^v, e. g. t^ /aovo-ikt), 
musicae se dare ; airexew, to be distant from ; avrexew, resistere. — Tip drr eiv with 
adverbs, e. g. eS, kcikcos, or with the Ace. of adjectives, e. g. koKol, Kai<d, to fare 
well or ill. — Aiar pi fie iv (consumere), versari, to employ one^s self. — Compounds 
of <p4peiv, as duxpepeiv, to be different, differre; virepcptpeiv (eminere) ivXovtw. — 
'AvaXa/Ltfidveiv, rejici, recreari. — OIkciv, administrari, e. g. ir6Xis owe? (the 
state is managed). Plat. — T e A e v r a v, to end, to die. — KaropSrovv, to succeed. — 
NikSj/, to prevail, e. g. iviica 7) x € ' L P wv T ^ v yvoo{j.io*v (like vincit sententia), Her. 
6, 109. 5 E A A e i ir e i v, officio suo deesse ; airoXziireiv, to remain behind, etc. 

2. Several active verbs with a transitive signification, which 
form both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive, but in the 
second Aor. an intransitive sense : — 

Hvw, to wrap up, first Aor. eSOo-a, I wrapped up, second Aor. edvv, I went in, 
'lo-T7]/j.t, to place, " eo-rrjo-a, I placed, " io-rnv, I stood, 

(pvoo, to produce, " e<pvcra, I produced, " e<pw, I was produced, 

(T/ceAAw, to make dry, ' : (eaicyXa, poet. I make dry), " £o~k\7\v, I withered. 

So several active verbs with a transitive signification, which 
form both Perfects, have in the first Perf. a transitive, but in the 
second an intransitive sense : — 

iyeipu, to wake, first Pf. iyrjyepKa, I have awakened, see'd Pf. iyp-fjyopa, lam awake, 
oXKvfj.1, perdo, u oA<4Ae/ca, perdidi, " #Aa>Aa, perii, 

irei&o), to persuade, " 7re7rez/ca, I have persuaded, " ire-rroi&a, I trust, 
avoiyca, to open, " avewx a i I have opened, " avecpya, I stand open 

ii 187,6), 
irpaTTcv, to do, " iziirpaxo., I have done, " ireirpaya (sc. eu), / 

fare ivell. 

Moreover some second Perfects of transitive verbs, which do 
not form a first Perf, have an intransitive sense : — 

dyvv/xi, to break, second Pf. zaya, lam broken, 
pT]yvvp.i, to tear, ' : eppaiya, I am torn, 

tt\k(i3, to smelt (iron), " ririnKa, I am smelted, 

■n-fjyvv (xt, to fasten, " ireir'nya, I am fastened, 

o-i)irw, to make rotten, " aeo-nira, I am rotten, 

(palvco, to show, " ire(pr]ya, I appear. 

Remark 1. The Pass. aXio-KOfxai, to be taken, has an active form in the 
Perf. and Aor., viz., eaAw/ca, I have been taken, ed\wv, I was taken (§ 161, 1). 

3. Intransitive active verbs are sometimes used in the place 
of the passive. 



$250.] CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 333 

This is particularly the case with iro<rxe iv, iriirreLv, (pevyeiv, ed, na- 
nus anove iv, Sv-qo- neiv, more seldom r cXevTav. These active verbs 
with v-nb and the Gen. are very commonly used instead of the passive of such 
verbs as a.Swe'iv, piirreiv or fidxhtiv, Siuneiv, nreiveiv ; bvi'ianeiv in certain forms 
is always so used (§ 161, 13). Meydha Tre<r6vTa (eversa : were destroyed by) 
TrpqyfxaTa virb r) era 6va>v, Her. 7, 18. Aeivorepov ivo/xi^ov <dvai nanus vivb twv 
ttoKituiv anoveiv {audire, they thought it worse to be evil spoken of by the citizens), 
$ naXus vnep rrjs 7roAeojs airo$rvr\crneiv, Isocr. Paneg. 56,77. So€K7riirTeii/v7rJ 
tlvo s, expelli ab aliquo ; very often tpevyetv v-rro nvos, fugari ab aliquo, to be put 
to flight by some one, or in a judicial sense, accusation esse ab aliquo, e. g. ao-efizias 
<pevyeiv viro r tvos, to be accused by some one of impiety. Ev, nanus iraax 03 
vir6 crov, I am benefited, injured by you. 'EreKeirrjaav vir 'AS-nvalwv 
(interfecti sunt), Her. 6, 92. 

Rem. 2. It will be seen (§ 279, Hem. 5) that intransitive active verbs are 
frequently used in poetry in a transitive sense, e. g. ao-rpd-KTziv ai\as, fiaivetv 
iroSa. 

Rem. 3. The transitive active is not unfrequently used, when the subject 
does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be performed by another ; 
yet this usage is admissible, only when it is evident from the context or from 
the nature of the case, that the subject does not itself perform the action. X. 
An. 1. 4, 10. Kvpos rbv irapdSeiaov e|e/coi//e nal ra. fiaaiXeia nar 4 nav c ev, caused 
to be cut down. So frequently aironTeiveiv, frdwreiv, olnodo/j.e?v and similar exam- 
ples ; often also diddaneiv, iratSeveiv (comp.Pl. Prot.320, a. 324, d. Menon. 94, b). 



§ 250. B. Middle Form. 

1. The Mid. denotes an action, which is performed by the 
subject, and is again reflected upon it or is confined to it. Two 
cases are here to be distinguished : — 

(a) The Mid. denotes, first and most frequently, an action 
which the subject performs upon an object within its own 
sphere, i. e. upon an object belonging to the subject, connected 
with it, or standing in any near relation to it. In English, this 
relation of the Middle voice is expressed by a possessive pro- 
noun, or by the preposition to or for with a personal pronoun. 

Tiirrofxai, irv^dfirjv tV ne$aXi\v, I strike, I struck my own head {tvttt€iv n., to 
strike the head of another) ; Aouowd-cu rovs irodas, to wash one's own feet (Xoveiv r. 
ir., to wash the feet of another) ; aironpv^aa^at ra eavTod, to conceal one's own 
affairs ; irepipp^ao^rai x irS > va > smm vestem, to rend one's own garment (irepipfrrfccu, 
alius, that of another) : vapcurxfo&cu ri, to give something from one's own means, to 
furnish of one's self as vavs, hence also to show, e. g. evvoiav irapex^^ai (on the 
contrary irapexeiv nv\ -rrpdyfiara, <p6fiov, etc., to cause trouble, fear, etc., to some 
one); — airoSel£ac£rai ri, e. g. epyov, yvAfi-nv, Svva/jnv, to show one's own work, etc. ; 
iirayyelXao-bai tl, to promise ; in a reciprocal relation : veifxacr&al ri, aliquid inter 
se partiri, to divide something with each other, so /xeplaaa&ai ; — iroi-fjcacSal ri, to do 



334 syntax. [$ 250. 

or make something for one's self, e. g. elprjuTju, cnrovSds (iroielu, to do or accomplish), 
iroir]<Ta.(T&ai iroXefxav, to carry on war ; iiri/xeAeLav, to use care ; &yea&ai yvvcuKa, to 
take a wife for one's self to marry ; kXeaSrai ri, sibi sumere, hence to choose, prefer ; 
&pa<r&ai ri, to take up for one's self to (ay on one's self {aipeiv ri, to take up something 
in order to lay it upon another) ; alrrjcrao-^ai ri, to ask for one's self (alrelv, to ask) ; 
Trpd!;a.(r&ai xpVf J - aTl ^ Tiva, sibi ab aliquo pecuniam exigere ; [jLio&wcraa&cu, conducere, to 
hire for one's self (but /xtaSrucrai, locare, to let out) ; fjLGraTre/jupaa&ai, to cause to come 
to one's self to send for ; Karaarpeipaa&ai, KaTadovXaxraa&cu yr\v, sibi subjicere ter- 
ram ; avapT-ficra<T&ai riva, sibi devincire, to make dependent on one's self; cwroAucracr&ai 
riva, to free for one's self to ransom; Tropicraoftal ri, sibi aliquid comparare (iropl&iv 
ri rivi, alii aliquid comparare), KO/j.taa<T&cu, e. g. TlAaraiels 7raT5as Kal yvvouKas 
iKKCKOfiMr jxev oi -f\aav es ras 'A&->ivas, Til. 2, 78; nrycravbai, Trapa(TKevdffa<r- 
&ai ti, sibi comparare ; &ea&cu and ypd\paa&ai v6jxovs are used of one who makes 
laws for himself, or of a law-giver, who is himself, also, subject to the laws 
which he has made for others ; on the contrary, Srelvcu and ypdtycu v6[xov are used 
of one who is not subject to the law which he has made, or generally of one 
who gives laws to others, without expressing any further relation, e. g. "Exojs 
Uv elweTv, on oi &v&pomoi robs aypdcpovs v6/j.ovs e&evro] '£701 fxkv &eobs ol[xai 
robs v6jj.ovs rovrovs ro7s avSp&irois freivai, X. C. 4. 4, 19; — a/Avvacr&cu robs iroAe- 
/xiovs, propulsare a se hostes, hence to defend one's self against any one {afxvveiv, 
properly to ward off, then to help) ; rifMuprjaao-^at n, to revenge one's self on some 
one, to punish him (ri/xwpeTv rivi, to help one) : rpeipaa&cu, to put to fight; aTrwo-aff- 
&cu Kaicd, a se propulsare mala; airoTrefxxpaa^rai riva, a, se dimittere ; airo(rei<ra(r&ai 
ti, a se depellere; Trapcur-naaor^ai, deprecari ; Sta&eV&cu, airo$6cr&ai, to sell; airo- 
rptyaa&ai, cnrofiaAecr&ai., airoKpovcraoSai. Several Deponent Middle verbs also 
belong here (§ 102, 3). 

(b) The Middle denotes, second, but much more seldom, an 
action which the subject performs immediately on itself, so that 
the subject is at the same time, also, the object of the action. 
The English here uses the active verb with the Ace. of the 
reflexive pronoun, e. g. tuVto/xch, I strike myself; irvij/dixrjv, I 
struck myself. Here belong particularly the following verbs : — 

y Airdy£ai rivd, to strangle some one; air dy^aabai, to strangle one's self; 
rvtyaar&ai, k6i\i acr&ai, to strike one's self; icvipaa&ai, to bend one's self 
down; oiKiaaeb ai y migrare ; iir i@a\4 a&ai, to apply or devote one's self to 
something; irapa<rK€vdo-a(r&ai, se parare; rd£ao-&ai, to place one's self in 
order of battle, e. g. ovrco ^v KepKvpcuoi ir d^avr 0, Th. 1, 48 ; [but also to fix or 
establish for one's self according to No. (a), e. g. rd^aaSrai <popov, to agree to pay 
tribute;} ir pos&e<r&ai, se adjungere, to agree with; 'iaraaSrai (arrjvai, tardvai) 
and its compounds, to place one's self [but also according to No. (a), sibi ponere, 
to place for one's self, e. g. rp6naiov\ ; 6 pfxia aa&ai, ica&o p /xiaaa Stai, to land 
(comp. Tli. 4, 15): kv KAaxraa&ai, to encircle (comp. Th. 5, 72), but kvkAco&Tj- 
vai, to form a circle or place one's self in a circle; rpaire<r&at [not rpexpatrfrai, 
see No. {&)], to turn one's self [Th. 5. 29, 73) ; iyyvf}<fao-&ai y to pledge one's self ; 



$ 250.J CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 335 

it aia a(r&aL, to cease (from iravw, to cause to cease) ; Setijac&ci, to show one's 
self; particularly verbs which express an action performed by the subject upon 
his own body, e. g. A ova aa&at, vlipaa&at, aAeixpaabat, xp'coc&ai, 
£a> a aa&at, y v \lv da aa& ai, k<x Av ij/ct a&at, no a [j.r)a aa&ai, a/x<£ teaaa - 
&ai, ivdvaaa&at, i icdva aa&at, Keipaa&at, air o/xo p£aa&at, se abster- 
gere; a-iro/j,v£aa&ai, se emungere ; arroipf) cracr&ai, se abstergere ; are<pa- 
v (a a aa&at; ar eiAaaSai, to get ready, to Jit one's self out; also some few 
verbs which in the Mid. express internal, mental action, e.g. <pvAa£aa&at, to 
be on one's guard, to be cautious (but <pvAaTTety rtvd, to guard some one) ; tyrjept- 
a a aba t, to determine or decree by vote (but i\rn<pi£eiv, to put the vote) ; fiovAev- 
a aaSrat, to deliberate, to advise one's self (but fiovAeveiv rtvi, to advise some one) ; 
ysvaaa&at, to taste ( yevetv, to cause to taste, to give a taste of) ; r t/xca pr)aaa- 
bat, to avenge ; the reciprocals otanaraAvaaabat irpos rtva, to be reconciled 
to any one ; a v v b e a b a t, to bind one's self, to agree with any one ; aireiaaabat, 
to make a treaty, peace with; air o ax* vbat, to restrain one's self, to abstain 
from; several compounds of 't-nfit, e.g. ifieabat, to strive; bepieabat, to 
yield, be remiss ; /xebieabat, to neglect, be remiss ; avr tir o tr)a aabai rtvas, to 
strive for something; avr tAafieab ai rtv6s, to lay hold of something. Here^ 
belong, also, most Deponent Middle verbs (§ 197, Eem. 2). 

Remark 1. This immediate reflexive relation is expressed also : (a) by middle 
verbs with a Pass. Aor., e. g. otaAvetv, to separate, 8taAvbr)vat, otaAvaeabat, to 
separate one's self discedere (see § 197, Rem. 3); (b) by the active form, e. g. 
lierafiaAAetv, to change one's self (see § 249. 1) ; (c) by the active form with the 
Ace. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. itratuuv kavr6u, avapTuv eaurSv, to attach one's 
self to, to make one's self depend on any one ; arroKpinTTetv eavr6v, sbi&tv kavT6u, 
irapex eLV eavrSv, arroAvety havrov, to free one's self, arroacpdrreiv havrov, arroKrei- 
veiv kavr6v ; the Mid. then has the signification of the Pass. ; thus, irraive7abat, 
arroKTeiveabat, airoacpaTTeabat, laudari, inter fici, jugulari ah alio, and has for its 
Aor. and Put. a Pass. form. Sometimes the active form with the reflexive 
pronoun is used, even when the verb has a middle form. This mode of expres- 
sion is very natural in antithesis or contrast, e. g. 'Ebr)pevev airb 'imrov, otzo'tg 
yvfivda at kavr 6v re Ka\ t o v s 'Lit it o v s, X. An. 1 . 2, 7. 

Rem. 2. The Mid. in the same manner as the Act. (§ 249, Rem. 3), can be 
used, when the subject does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be 
done by another. There is this diffei*ence, however, in the two cases, that in 
the Mid. the action always refers, in some way, to the subject. 'O Trarrip robs 
iralb'as idtdd£aro ( iiratSe vaaro), which signifies either, the father educated the chil- 
dren for himself or, if it is clear from the context, he caused them to be educated 
(as X. C. 1. 6, 2 ; on the contrary, otSdanetv, iraideveiv are used without referring 
back to the subject, § 249, Rem. 3) ; iceipaabai, to shave one's self, or to get shaved. 
'Apye?ot a<p£a>v eluSvas it o ir) a dp.evot (having caused to be made) avebeaav is 
Ae\(poi>s, Her. 1, 31. Tlavaavias rpdirefav TI<spatK7)V Traperibero (caused to be set 
before him), Th. 1, 130. Ol AaKedaifxovtot K-hpvKa ire/j.\pavTes rovs veicpobs 8ie/co- 
HiaavT o (caused to be removed), 4, 38. 

Rem. 3. The reflexive relation of the middle to the subject, is often so 
slight, that in our mode of considering it, it almost disappears, and sometimes 
consists only in a very gentle intimation, that the action Avill be completed to 
the advantage or disadvantage of the subject, e. g. II. o, 409. owVe irork Tpwes 
Aavacov iovvavro cpaAayyas p-n^dfxeu o t (in suwn commodum) KAiaivat jj.iyrifA.euat. 
Hence the reflexive pronoun is not seldom used with the middle, particularly 
in antitheses, in order to bring out emphatically the reflexive sense which 
exists in the middle only in a general and indefinite manner, e. g. Uevo<pS>v 



336 SYNTAX. [$ 251. 

PovXevercu eavrS 6vo,ua kc1 dvva.jj.iv ir e p nro ltj a a.<r&ai (to gain a name aiid 
power for himself ) X. An. 5. 6, 17. 'E^eS ei^avro ras o.vrwv aperds, Isocr. 
Paneg. 58, 85. 'P^d-^uoi/ avroTs Kar ecrr r]aavT o rbv fiioi>, 63, 108. Tr/V 
ifiavrov yvcoa^v air o<p aiv 6 /jl€ v os, Id. Permut. 309. 22. 

Rem. 4. In many verbs, the active and Mid. appear to have a similar sig- 
nification : but on a closer investigation, the difference in the meaning is 
obvious ; the active expresses the action absolutely, or objectively, without any 
accessary idea; the middle, on the other hand, expresses the same action in 
relation "to the subject, or subjectively. Hence, the middle is employed when 
the literal meaning is changed into the figurative, e. g. StoitceTv of an outward 
arrangement, SioiK^b-ai of mental : 6pi(eiv literally, 6pi(ea&ai figuratively ; 
o-rab/xav only in a literal sense, to measure, but aTo& l uacr&ai also in a figurative 
signification, to weigh or measure in one's mind, aliquid secum perpendere ; (TKoireTv, 
to look at something, a-KOTrelabai, to look mentally, to consider ; so in derivative 
verbs in -evw and -euo,ucu, the active form is used absolutely, to be in a certain 
state ; the middle, on the other hand, signifies, to act the part of that which is 
indicated by the root, to show one's self as such, to Jiave the tendency or habit, to act 
as such, e. g. Trovrjpevw, to be bad, wovTjpevouai, to demean one's self badly ; iro\i- 
Teva, to be a citizen, TroXiTtvoixai, to live and act as a citizen ; rafxi^vui, to be a 
manager, Tafjuevo/jLcu, to conduct business, to arrange, especially in a metaphorical 
sense, e.g. robs v6/xovs: crrpaTevui, to undertake an expedition, used of a general or 
a state, o-TpaTevo/j.cu, to engage in an expedition, used of the soldiers. Derivatives 
in -i&ixcu correspond in sense to those in -evo/xai, e. g. aardCofxai, to demean my- 
self as a citizen ; x a P iej/T ' L C°/ jLaL i t° ac ^ Zft an agreeable manner. Still, derivatives 
in-ifw, from names of nations, reject the middle, e. g. Sooplfa, to demean myself or 
to speak like a Dorian. 

Rem. 5. Several verbs which in the active have a causative sense, in the 
middle have a simple intransitive sense, though some of them are constructed 
with an Ace. e. g. <po$?i<ra.i, to cause to fear, <po$-h(ra.oSa.i., to fear ; aXaxvvai, to 
make ashamed, ai<rxvve7cr&aL, to be ashamed, to feel shame; iropevcrai, to cause to 
go, to convey, Tropevcracr&cu, to go ; izepaiaxrai, to cause to pass over, irepaiuxrecrSraL, 
to pass over; Koi/xviaai, to cause to sleep, lull to sleep, Koi/xrj<Ta<T&a.i, to sleep; iravaai, 
to cause to cease, iravaaa^aL, to cease; ir\dy^ai, to cause to wander, 7rAay|ecrd-ai, 
to wander, etc. 

Rem. 6. The middle form, as already stated (§ 248, Rem. 1), is often used 
to express reciprocal actions. This is particularly the case with verbs signify- 
ing to contend, vie with, converse with, embrace, salute, to make an agreement or com- 
pact, e. g. fj.dxe<r&cu, to fight with : a/juWaa&ai, to contend with ; aywvi£e(rd-ai, to 
strive ; SiaKeyea&cu, to converse with ; aaird(ea$cu, to salute ; ravra auvTi&ea&cu, 
mutually to agree on these points ; o-jrovSas a-irevS^crbai or TroulaScu, to make a treaty 
(cnrovSds 7tols?v signifying to make a libation). So also, where the action is not 
strictly reciprocal, but where the idea expressed by the verb necessarily sup- 
poses two persons or two parties, as in questions and answers, e. g. irw&dvea&ai 
and epeaSrai, to inquire; cnroKpiveaScu and aTra^eijSecr^ai, to answer; <rvfx&ov\ev- 
ea&ai, to consult with one, ask his advice, and avaKoivovaSai, to consult one (avaxoivovv 
being especially used of consulting oracles). 

$ 251. C. The Passive. 
1. From the reflexive signification of the Middle, the Passive 
is derived. Here the subject receives the action from another 
upon itself, — permits the action to be performed upon itself. 
Hence the subject always appears as a passive or suffering 
object. 



$251.] CLASSES OF VERBS. THE PASSIVE. 337 

Ma.cTTcyovu.ai, (rj/jnov/xaL (vir6 twos), I receive blows, punishment, I let myself be 
struck; punished = / am struck, punished (by some one) ; ^XairTo/j-ai, dSiKov/xai, 
I suffer injury, injustice; diddcTKo/xai, I let myself be instructed, I receive instruction, 
I learn, hence viro tivos, from some one = doceor ab aliquo; ird^ofxai, I persuade 
myself or I permit myself to be persuaded, viro tivos, by some one = I am per- 
suaded. 

2. Yet, there are but two tenses, the Fut. and the Aor., which 
have special forms to express the passive sense of an action ; 
the remaining tenses are expressed by the Mid. 

3. Hence the following rule : The Fut. and Aor. Mid. have 
a reflexive (or intransitive) sense only; but all the other tenses 
of the Mid. serve at the same time for the Passive also. 

Remark 1. Still, the Fut. Mid. has sometimes a Pass, sense also. The reason 
of this may be found in a great measure in the shorter form of this Put. compared 
with that of the Fut. Pass. This passive use of the Fut. Mid. is found most 
frequently with Pure verbs ; much more seldom with Mute verbs, and very sel- 
dom with Liquid verbs (probably not at all in Attic prose). MatrTiyc&creTai, 
o , Tpcf$\&o~€Tai, SedrjcreTai, e/c/cai/d^treTcu TcecpfraX/xco, TeXevTcov irdvTa KaKc\ 
tto&uv ai/acrKivSv\ev^7icreTai, PL Pp. 361, e. T77 tcvv xPV^tccv crirdvei kccXv- 
crovTai, Th. 1, 142. "Hv tls PovXrjSrj Kaicbs yevea&ai. KoXaaSijcreTai Trj TcpeTcovcrr) 
Qr]fi.ia " 01 8e ayaSol t ij.lt) a ovt at to?s irposi]KOvcriv oAXois ttjs apeTrjs (but the 
brave shall be honored with the befitting rewards of valor), 2, 87. ITepi tcov crcpeTe- 
pcov cppovpicov, cos iirifiovXevcrofAevccv, iroXXaKts irpa.yjj.aTa ^Ixov, X. C. 6, 1, 
10. Elp£6/x€&a (includemur), X. An. 6. 6, 16. 'H yrj d5 cpvXa^eTai virb tcov 
cppovpovvTcov. Ouk dyvoovvTes, OTi £ v eS p ev o~ ivt virb tcov iroXefxicov, H. 7.2, 
18. Very commonly & 5 1 k t) ct /x a 1, dp |o /.cat. (from dpxco, impero), fiXaty o- 
juot, 3- piil/o /.cat. So always aXcacro/xat. Some verbs have both foi-ms 
of the future, as, e. g. cocpeXeTv, (-nfuovv, tTTepe?v, cpofietv, ayeiv ; ' then the Mid. 
form seems to denote a condition, the Pass, an action received. But in very 
many instances, the Pass, sense is only apparent, e. g. 'H ttSXls Ppaxea i]T&€?cra 
/neydXa £■>! /.neb cr st at, shall suffer great loss therefor, in contrast with frpaxia 
7)adr., Th. 3, 40. Sou favros, fieXTLov &pe\povT at nal iraid ever ovt at. (they 
shall grow up better and educate themselves), PI. Crito. 54, a. 

Rem. 2. The use of the Mid. Aor. instead of the Pass, is, in all instances, 
only apparent ; so Od. £-, 35. Kovpca Se Svco teal TrevTrjuovTa Kpivdtr&cov kotc\ 
Srj/u.ov, means, let them select for themselves (on the contrary, 48. Kovpco 8e Kpiv- 
&6CT€ 5ua> k. TrevT., the selected) . Hes. Sc. 173. Kairpoi Soiol ctirovpa/xevo 1 \pv- 
Xas, they had deprived each other of life. PI. Phaedr. 244, e. t$ dp&ws /xavevTi nal 
KaT acrxo/jcevco, " in fine frenzy " and in ecstasy. 

Rem. 3. It has been shown, § 197, and Rem. 3 (comp. § 250, Rem. 1), that 
the Aor. Pass, of very many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote a 
reflexive and intransitive action, e. g. ^oi/XofxaL, I icill, £&ovXr)&7)v, I willed; 
evcppatvcc, I gladden, cheer, evcppaivofj-ai, I am glad, eu cp pdv&rjv, I was glad. In 
a few verbs, the Pass. Fut. is used in the same way, e. g. '/jdo/jLai, I rejoice, 
ricrfrnv, I rejoiced, r)cr&r]crofj.ai, I shall rejoice. See § 197, Rem. 1. 

Rem. 4. The author or cause of the passive condition or^state is generally 
expressed by the Prep. vw6 with the Gen., e. g. O! o-TpaTtcoTai virb tG>v iroX- 
ffxicou idictix&ww- Instead of viro, irp6s with the Gen. is used, when at the 
same time a strong and direct influence of a person, or of a thing viewed as a 
person, is to be expressed, e. g. ' At ■i/xd£eo~&cu, a5i/ce7<r&cu irp6s tivos. Bavay- 

29 



338 SYNTAX. [§ 251. 

cinal rexvcu sIkStcos a5ol~ovvTai irpbs r£ov tt 6 A e eo v, X. 0. 4, 2; also Trap a 
with the Gen. is used, when the author is at the same time to be represented as 
the person from near whom, or from whose vicinity, or through whose means 
internal or outward, the action has proceeded ; hence used specially with tt4jx- 
irea&ai, diSoadrcu, axpe\e7o~&ai, avAA4yeoSai, Aeyea&ai, d t u.oAoye7cr&ai, o-nfxa'weo'^ai, 
iTTideiKyva^ai (demonstrari) , e.g. 'O ayyeAos iTr4/j.(p&ri irapa fiao- iA4oos (sent 
both by and from near the king). 'H fi€yi<rrn evrvj(ia tovtw t>2 avdpl irapa 
frewy deSorai. TloAAa xp'i]fj.aTa Kvpcp Trap a tSiv (piXcov o~ v v e i\ey fx4v a 
i)v. Ta Sapa tt 4 /xireTai tt a pa. t o v /3 a a lAev out o s, Her. 7, 106. Ta. tt a pa 
tSiv &ea>i/ ar\jxaiv6 fie va, X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. HapairdvTwv 6fxo\oye?Tai, 
An. 1. 9, 1. Ol/uai yap pe irapa crov aocpias irAr/p co&r) aeo-frai., PL Symp. 
175, e. 'E« is still stronger than irapd, used especially with verbs of giving ; yet 
it is seldom used by the Attic writers, e. g. 'E/cetVw avrr) y) x^P a * « J3ao-i\eoos 
iS 6^7], X. H. 3. 1, 6: in Her., however, e/c is very often used instead of viro 
simply. The use of v tt 6 with the Dat. is almost wholly poetic, e. g. da/xTjuai 
vtt6 t t v i ; in Attic prose only in certain connections, e. g. vlbs t/Trb t <£ irar pi 
r&pajj.fx4vos, PL Pp. 558, d. Tvyxdvei virb tt aiS or pi fi ?; aya&q) TreTraiBev- 
p.4vos, Lach. 184, e. When the passive condition is not caused by persons, but 
by things, the Dat. is commonly used (= Lat. Ablative), e.g. 'H ttoAis iroWaTs 
crvu(popa7s iirie^eTo, the city was distressed by great misfortunes. — The above 
usage corresponds with that of the Latin, the voluntaiy agent with a passive 
verb being put in the Abl. with the preposition a ov-ab, the involuntary agent 
in the Abl. without a preposition. 

Rem. 5. The Dat. of persons, however, is very often used, particularly with 
the Perf. tense, and regularly with verbal adjectives. The Pass, has in such 
instances an intransitive or reflexive sense, and the Dat. indicates the person by 
whom the action was performed, or for whom it was performed. While vtto 
with the Gen. denotes merely the author of the passive action, the Dat., at the 
same time, denotes that this action stands in relation to the author, e. g. "D.s 
p. o i irpSrepov SeS^AwTcu, i. e. as the thing has been before pointed out by me, and for 
me now stands as pointed out, Her. 6, 123. 

4. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that the Act., not merely 
of transitive verbs with the Ace, may be changed into the per- 
sonal Pass., like the Latin, but also the Act. of intransitive 
verbs with the Gen. and Dat. 

Qfrovovfiai vtt6 twos (from <p&ove7v ran, invidere alicui), i. e. I experience 
envy from some one, am envied (in Latin, on the contrary, invidetur mihi ab 
aliquo). X. Conv. 4, 29. icpe7rr6s/ ecrn it ktt e v G<r£rai virb rr\s TrarpiBos /xaWoy, ?} 
air lo-reTo-bai (from tti<ttsv(hv and airicrTew rivi), I am trusted, I am distrusted. 
Th. 1, 82. 7}ix(us far 'AfrrivaictiV in ifiovAe v6 fj.e&a (i-irifiovAevew twI). PL Ep. 

3. 417, b. Kal iTufiovAevovres, Kal i tt i /3 ouAeu 6 fiey o i Sid^ovcri iravra rbv fiiov. 
8. 551, a. aoTcetrat 5r] rb aet Ti/u.oo/j.ei'oi', a/iieAe?Tcu 8e rb aTijj.a£6[xsvov. X. S. 

4, 31. ovk4ti aire iXovfiai, a A A' r'/Sr] &7retAco aWois. So apx&yfct.., Kpar-n- 
Sr)vai, riyefAOvev&rivai, Kara<ppovri&r)vai vir6 twos (from &px*w, Kpa- 
Telu, riye/j-oveveiu, KaTa<ppove7v twos), iir t%e 1 prj&rjvai (from i-rnx€ipe7v twi). 
On K6TTT0jxai tt]u K^(paKr)v, eViTpeVo^ai Tr\v <pvAaKr)v, see § 281, 3. 

Rem. 6. The Greek may form a Pass, from other intransitives also, yet, for 
the most part, only when the subject is a thing, particularly a Neut. pronoun, 
or a Part. used, as a Neut. substantive, e.g. Kal [AiKpa. a/xapTiq^evTa (yel parva 
peccata), X. An. 5. 8, 20. 'Atv xv^^yTuu (rerum infeliciter gestarum), Dem. 
Cor. 298, 212. 'E7rl tovtois iyk &\r)&fvo/Xfvo is Si'5a>ft( cot tV i/i7jU de£lav 



$$ 252, 253.] tenses and modes. 339 

(ea conditione, ut haec vere dicantur), X. Cy. 4. 6, 10. 'Ev kv\ avdpl ttoKXwu ape- 
tcls KivSvveveff&ai (in periculum vocari), Th. 2, 35. Ov paSiov ra. virb troWobv 
KivSvvev^evra v(fi kvhs prj&Tivai, Lys. 5, 112. 



§ 252. Remarks on the Deponents. 

It has been seen above (§ 102, 3) that Deponents are simply verbs which 
occur either in the Mid. only, or in the Mid. with a Pass. Aor., and have a 
reflexive or intransitive signification : and, also, that they are divided into Mid. 
or Pass. Deponents, according as their Aor. has a Mid. or Pass. form. The 
reflexive sense of many Deponents is so slight, that they seem to be, in our 
mode of regarding them, merely transitive verbs, e. g. Sexo/xai ri, I take (namely, 
to myself) something, £pyd(o/j.al n, fJid(o/j.al riva, etc. Such Deponents are often 
used in a Pass, sense, particularly in the Perf. and in the Pass. Aor. Examples 
of the Pres., Impf, and Fut. in a Pass, sense are very rare, and are found only 
in such Deponents as have in single examples an active form, e. g. {iid£e<r&ai, 
aveTcr&ai. 

Yldura air e( pyacrrai tu> &e<2, PI. L. 710, d. Me/j.ifj.7]/j.evos (ad imitatio- 
nem expressus, made like), Her. 2, 78. Ev i vr e & v p. -n p. e v o v (well-considered), PI. 
Crat. 404, a. Nrjes ovk ixpt (r&V<r a " (adhibitae sunt), Her. 7, 144. 

Eemaek. Several Deponents have both a Mid. and Pass. Aor. ; the Pass, 
form has then a Pass, sense, e. g. eZe^dp-nv, excepi, i8ex&V, exceptus sum ; 
i&iaardfiiju, co&gi, efiidcr&riv, coactus sum; iKrrjcrdpr] v, mihi comparavi, 
£ktt)&ti v, comparatus sum (I was gained); 6\o<pvpa(rfrai, to lament, 6\o- 
<pvp&?ivai, to be lamented; aKecraa&ai, to heal, aicecr&riv ai, to be healed; 
air ok pivaaSai, to reply, air oupi&rivai, to be separated. In a few verbs only 
are both Aorists used without distinction of meaning (§ 197, Rem. 1). 



§ 253. Tenses and Modes of the Verb. 

(a) Tenses denote the relation of time expressed by the 
predicate, this being designated either as Present, Future, or 
Past, e. g. the rose blooms, will bloom, bloomed; 

(b) Modes denote the relation of what is affirmed in the predi- 
cate to the subject; this relation being denoted either as an 
actual fact, as a conception or representation, or as a direct 
expression of the will. The mode which expresses a fact, as 
the rose blooms, is called the Indicative ; that which denotes a 
conception, as the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive ; that which 
denotes the direct expression of the will, the Imperative, as 
give. 



340 syntax. [$§ 254, 255. 

§ 254. A. More Particular Vieiv of the Tenses. 

1. The tenses are divided, according to their form and mean- 
ing, into two classes : (a) into Principal tenses, which, both in 
the Ind. and Subj., always denote something present or future; 
(b) into Historical tenses, which in the Lid. always denote 
something past, in the Optative, something present or future. 

2. The Principal tenses are : — 

(a) The Present: (a) Indicative, e. g. ypdcpopev, scribimus; (/3) Subjunctive, 
e. g. ypdcpoo^v, scribamus ; 

(b) The Perfect: (a) Indicative, e.g. yeypaQapev, scripsimus ; (&) Subjunc- 
tive, e. g. yeypafoo/uLev, scripserimus ; 

{e\ The Future Indicative, e. g. ypdtyofxep, scribemus, we shall write; Subjunc- 
tive wanting ; 

(d) The Future Perfect Indicative, e. g. fiefiov\€v<rofiai, I shall have advised 
myself, or I shall have been advised ; Subjunctive wanting. 

The Subj. Aor. also belongs here, e. g. ypd^w, scripserim or scribam. See 
§ 257, 1 (a). 

3. The Historical tenses are : — 

(a) The Aorist: (a) Indicative, e.g. eypmpa, I wrote; (£) Optative, e.g. 
ypifyaifjii, I might write, or I might have written ; 

(b) The Imperfect: (a) Indicative, e.g. eypcupov, scribebam ; (j8) Optative, 
e. g. ypdcpoifxi, sa'iberem ; 

(c) The Pluperfect : (a) Indicative, e. g. iyeypdcpeiv, scripseram; (£) Optative, 
e. g. yeypd<poifj.i, scripsissem ; 

(d) The Optative of the simple Future, e. g. ypd^oiya, I would write, and of 
the Fut. Perf, e. g. /3e/3oi/Aeucroi / u7?J', Iicould have deliberated, or I would have 
been advised, when in narration (and consequently in reference to the 
past), the representation of a future action, or of one to be completed at 
a future time, is to be expressed, e. g. 6 tiiyyeXos eKsyev, on ol iro\4p.ioi 
viK-f)(roiev, the messenger said, that the enemy would conquer ; e\eyev, on 
irdvTa imh rov ffTparriyov eu /3 ej8o v Aeu cr o ito, he said that everything 
would be well planned by the general. 

§255. (a) Principal Tenses: Present, Perfect, Future, 

1. The Present Indicative represents the action as taking 
place in time present to the speaker. The Present is often 
used, in the narration of past events, for the purpose of a more 
vivid and graphic representation ; past time is then viewed as 
present. This is called the Historical Present. 



$ 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 341 

TavTTjy t)]v rdcppov fiacriXevs /J.eyas iroie? avrl ipvparos, iireidr] Trvv&dver ai 
Kvpov irposeXavvovTa, X. An. 1. 7, 16. r Hv tis Tlpiafuftav veararos UoXvdapos, 
'EKafins irais, ov in Tpoias i t uol Trarrjp Sidacr i TlpiafMOS iv do/xois Tpecpeiv, Eur. 
Hec. 1116. The Hist. Pres. is sometimes used even in passages which in them- 
selves, aside from adverbs like irori, irdxai (poet. irdpos), are considered as 
involving past time, e. g. Zwj/t elsaKovaas iraida, ov itc<ra>£ei ttotz, Eur. El. 
419. 

Remark 1. An action is often viewed by the language as present, which 
belongs, indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or in 
its results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following verbs particu- 
larly are used: (a) verbs of perceiving, e. g. aKova, irw&dvo p.ai, ala&d- 
vo/j.at, yiyvacrKa, fxav&dva (like Lat. audio, video, etc., and Eng. to hear, 
to see, to perceive, to observe), when the object of these verbs is to be represented 
as still continuing in the present ; (b) cp e vyw, I have given myself to flight, and 
I am now a fugitive, hence to live in exile; vikG> and Kpara (I am a victor, 
hence have conquered), r) t r S> [jl a i (I am vanquished, have been vanquished), a8iKa> 
(lam in the wfong, have done wrong), yiyvo/jiai (I am descended), etc.; (c) in 
poetry: (poveva (lam a murderer, have murdered, e. g. S. Ant. 1174), SrvnaKa 
(I am dead, have died, S. El. 113), t(kt«, yevvw (I am a father or mother, Eur. 
Ion. 356. Her. 209), etc. This usage extends to all the Modes and Participials 
of the Pres. as well as to the Impf. @e/j.io-TOKX4a ovk aKoveis avSpa aya&bv 
yeyov6ia; PI. Gorg. 503, C. Udvra irvv&avo fievos 6 Kpoicros eirefxtre is ^irdp- 
ttjv ayyeXovs, Her. 1, 69. li Se ; ab iKtivo aK-f/Koas, on Mvaol Kal HicriBai iv ttj 
fiaaiXeas X^P a KccTe'xoj/Tes ipvjxva Trdvv x w p' LC <- Svvavrai (ftp iXzv&epoi ; — Kal rovro 
y, €(£77, o-kovw, hast thou heard? ate ova, yes, I have known of it, X. C. 3. 5, 26. 
\A.7ra77eA.eT€ ''Apiaia, on 7]/xe7s ye viKaftev fiaaiXea, Kai, as opare, ovSels r)/x7v 
en /xaxerai, An. 2. 1, 4. Tav v iKavr av io~rl Kal ra eavTav aa^eiv Kal to rav 
7}tt a [xevav XajxfSdveiv, 3. 2, 39. Aapiov Kal TlapvcrdnSos Tra7$es yiyvo vt at 
Svo, 1. 1, 1. 

Rem. 2. 0'xoMa' and t)kw, with Pres. forms, are often translated in Eng. 
by Perfects, namely, oixofiai, I have departed, and t^/co>, I have come; yet 
oVxo^at, properly means, / am gone, and t}kw, I am here (adsum), e. g. MtV 
Xvttov, on 'Apdo-iras o?x eTal e ' LS T0 ^ s voXe/i'iovs, that Araspas is gone, has 
departed (= transfugit) to the enemy, X. Cy. 6. 1, 45. "Hkw veKpav Kev^/nava 
Kal (tkotov irvXas Xnrav, Eur. Hec. 1. "T/j.e7s i*6Xls a<piKve7<r&e, oiroi r)/J.e7s iraXai 
^Ko/xev, X. Cy. 1.3,4. 

Rem. 3. But the language often considers an action as present, which is not 
yet accomplished, but is either actually begun, or is begun in our mind, or pur- 
pose ; such an action is virtually future, though considered as present. Com- 
pare the English : I go to-morroiv, i. e. / shall go, I intend to go, and the like. This 
usage also belongs to all the Modes and Participials of the Pres. and the Impf. 
It specially holds of the Pres. of e 1/j. i, which, in the Ind. has regularly the mean- 
ing of the Eut, / shall go; the Subj. includes a Eut. meaning in itself (§ 257, 
Rem. 4) ; but the Inf. and Part, have both a Pres. and Fut. meaning. "Eire it a 
rd re vvv ovra iv ra irapafteLaa &rjpia Sida/xi coi, Kal &XXa iravroSaTra ffvX- 
Ae£&>, X. Cy. 1. 3, 14 (5ib~a}j.i, I offer). "EKaaros tis eireiSev zevocpavra 
i>iroo-TT)vai rrjv apxw (persuadere studebat), X. An. 6. 1, 19. MirvX-nvaioi hr\ 
m-ii8rvjj.vav as irpoS id o fxev-qv iarpdrevo-av (putantes parari ibi proditionem), 
Th. 3, 18. In like manner often the Pres. Part, after verbs of motion, e. g. 'H 
TrdpaXos is ras 'ASryvas eivXevcrev, anayy eXXov <r a ra ytyov6ra (for the purpose 
of announcing), X. H. 2. 1, 29. Kal t<S piyei air coXXv fte&o, Kal x/^v TrAeiCTTj 
pp (we expected to perish), An. 5. 8, 2. — Ok ev&bs b.(p^(Ta abrbv, obh^ &iretpt, 
dXX' ip-'ncrofxai abrbv Kal i | e t a or a, PI. Apol. 29, e.^ 'Eyel v Mavddpr] irapecr- 
xevd(cTo as air iov a a TvaXiv irpbs rbv di/Spa, e5e?T0 avTTJs 6 'Affrvdyns KaTaXiireiv 
rbv Kvpov, X. Cy. 1. 3, 13. 

29* 



342 syntax. [$ 255. 

Rem. 4. But also actions or events wholly future are sometimes indicated 
as present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker 
the action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when he is so firmly 
convinced of its occurrence, that it appears already present, e. g. 'Ev p.i% jjl&xV 
Tii*/8e t^v x^P av ir pos KTaa& e Kal iiceivyv fxaWov £ A ev&e p ovt e [you gain, 
vjill gain, and free), Th. 4, 95. *Hv &avrjs av, irals 65' e K(pevye i jxopov • <rov S 5 
ov &eAovo~r)s KaT&ave?v, ToVSe kt^uu, Eur. Andr. 381. 

2. The Perfect (Indicative) represents a past action in time 
present to the speaker ; the action appears as already accom- 
plished at the present time. Hence the Perf. represents not 
only a past action, bnt its present effects or results. 

Teypacpa rty £Tn<TTo\-f)v, I have written the letter, the letter is NOW writ- 
ten, whether written now, or some time ago ; the writing is the past act, the 
letter is the result still present. 'H ttoAls Zkt Krrat, the city was built (in past 
time), is NOW built, and there it now stands built. 'Aarvdyns rwv £v Mr)Sois iravruv 
Se<nr6T7]v kavrhv ireiroir) k ev, X. Cy. 1. 3, 18. OvSeV iari KepdaAedrepov rov 
viKav 6 yap uparuv a/xa iravra crvvt) piraite, Kal rovs dvdpas, Kal toss yvva?Kas, 
4. 2, 26. 

Rem. 5. Since the Perf. brings past time into close connection with the 
present, the Greeks in many Perfects contemplated less the peculiar act of 
completion, than its result as exhibited at the present moment ; and hence they 
used the Perf., in order to indicate a present condition or state that was occa- 
sioned by the completion of the action. As such a use of the Perfect does not 
belong to the English, we translate many Greek Perfects by our Present, where 
the present condition is more prominent than the past act ; the Plupf. of such 
verbs is then translated by our Impf., e. g. re&vyKa (I have died), I am dead 
(Eur. Ale. 557. t s&vao~ iv oi Savour es, those who died, are dead), ksktiiijjuu (I 
have acquired), I possess ; T&av/u.aKa (I have been wondering), I am astonished ; 
fiefiovAev/xai (I have taken counsel with myself), I am determined; Trecprjva (I 
have shown myself), I appear ; olSa, novi (I have seen), I know ; reb-nAa (I have 
blossomed), / bloom; ireiro&a (I have convinced myself), I trust ; fiefi-uKa (I 
have taken steps), I am going; fxe/uLurj/xai, memini (I have called to mind), I am 
mindful, or remember; KeKA-n/xai (I have been named), / am called, etc. The 
Pres. and Impf. of many verbs, especially such as express the idea of to sound, 
to call, are not used at all, or but very seldom, so that the Perf. and Plup. seem 
to take entirely the place of the Pres. and Impf., e. g. KtKpaya, I cry, properly, 
I am a crier ; /le/xvKa, I roar. 

Rem. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition or state 
produced by it, is more obvious in the Pass, than in the active. Comp. t) &vpa 
KeKAeiffrai, the door has been shut, and it is now shut. So particularly the 
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Imp. Pass, is often used, when one would command with 
emphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain fixed and permanent in its 
condition, i. e. not only that the action should be performed, but particularly 
that the result should continue, e. g. to ayKvpiov aveo-rrdoSco, let the anchor be 
drawn up and remain so ; AeAel<p&w, reliqnum esto. let it remain permanently ; TreTrei- 
pdoSco, let it. be tried ; vvv Se rovro reToA/j.7]crSco elireTv. So the Inf. in the Oratio 
obliqua, X. H. 5. 4, 7. i^oures 5e elwou, t))v Svpav KeKAeicr&ai, that it be shut, and 
remain shut. 

Rem. 7. The Perf. is used Avith special emphasis, even of future actions, the 
occurrence of these being affirmed with the same definiteness and confidence, 
as if they had already taken place. II. o, 128. Si 4<p& op as! you are lost, mil be 



4 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 343 

lost. So oXwXa, like peril, intern, actum est de me, it's all over with me, will be, 
etc. PI. Fhaed. 80, d. tj tyvx?] aTvaXXarrojxevi] rov aco/xaTos, ev&vs h* ian e<pvo"n~ 
Tai Kal airoXooXev. 

3. The Future (Indicative) denotes an action as future in re- 
lation to the present time of the speaker. The Greeks very 
often use the Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an 
Hist, tense, to express that which shall, should, must, or can be, 
where the Latin employs the Subj. ; the other forms of the 
Fut., particularly the Part., are also so used. 

~N6[aovs v-nap^ou 5e? toiovtovs, 8i wv ro7s /xev aya&o?s evrlfios Kal eXev&epos 6 fiios 
TrapacrKevcKr&'ficrzTai (should be obtained), rots Se ko.ko7s raireiv6s re Kal aX- 
yeivbs Kal afiiaros 6 alcav en av aKela er at (should be imposed upon them), X. Cy. 
3. 3, 52. Oi els r^v {SoxtiXik^v re-yyr]V Tvai5ev6fxevoi ri 8ia<pepovo~i rwv e£ avdyK7)S 
KaKoira&ovvTwv, eX ye ireiv^o' ovcri Kal St\pr}<rovcr i Kal p ty do-over t Kal ay- 
pvirviiaovai (if they must hunger, etc.), C. 2. 1, 17. y E8o|e rep Sri/xto rpidKovra 
&vb~pas eXeo~&ai, ot robs irarpiovs vSpovs £vyy p dip ova 1 i, ko& ovs ttoXit eveovfft 
(who should draw up laws, according to which they shoidd live), H. 3. 2, 3. 

4. The second person of the Fut. Ind. is often used to express 
commands, exhortations, admonitions, entreaties, and, in con- 
nection with the negative ov, prohibitions ; here the accomplish- 
ment of what is affirmed is not demanded, as is the case in the 
Imp., but is left to the choice of the person addressed, and is 
only expected. This differs chiefly from the Imp. only in being 
a milder form of expression. On the contrary, the Fut. is used 
with the negative ov, interrogatively, when, in a strong and 
indignant tone, the accomplishment of the action is expected 
necessarily. 

"Op a ovv Kal trpo^rvp.ov KariZeiv, edv irws irpSrepos euov XSr)S, Kai aoi <ppd- 
ffeis (you will communicate it to me = communicate), PI. Pp. 432, c. A Cls ovv 
iroi-haere Kal irei&eo-fre fioi (you will do thus, etc. = do thus), Prot. 338, a. 
Oi dpdereis rovro, thou wilt not do this, as I hope = do it not ; but ov 8pdo~eis 
rovro; wilt thou not do this? — do it. Ov iravo-n Xeycov; non desines dicer -e? 
instead of desine dicere. PI. Symp. in. ov irepifxeveis ; wilt thou not wait ? Dem. 
Phil. 2, 72. ov <pvXd£e<r&, e<\>n]v, oirws pJq Seo-irSrriv evprjre ; But when in this 
manner, a negative command is to be expressed, the negative \x.i\ is to be used 
with ov ; and when two sentences of this kind, one with an affirmative meaning 
and the other with a negative, follow each other, ov stands in the first sentence, 
/x-f) in the last. Ou ^ ^Xvap-fjereis ; Ov ^77 XaX-hereis, aXX' aKoXovb-fiffeis 
ifxoi, Ar. Nub. 505 (instead of ^ (pXvdpei, /.t.77 XaXei, aXX' aKoXov&ei). PI. Symp. 
175, a. ok ovv KaXe?s avrbv ical utj acprjcreis. 



344 syntax. [§ 256, 

5. The Future Perfect (Indicative) represents a future action 
as past, (completed) in relation to another future action; hence 
a future prior to another future. Such an action is future with 
reference to the present, past with reference to another future. 

Kal roiffi /ie jx 1 1 era i ecrdAa KaKolariv (the good shall have been mixed icith evil), 
Hes. Op. 177. 'H iroXneia reXeus k e ko cr /.i-na er ai, edv 6 toiovtos avrrju iirux- 
icoTrrj (pv\a£ 6 rovrwv eiricrr^ixav, PI. Ep. 506, a. As the Greek Perf. frequently 
denotes the present condition or result of a completed action, so the Put. Perf. 
frequently denotes t\\e, future condition or result of a completed action. Hence 
the Put. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated by the present tense 
of other verbs (see Eem. 5), must be translated by the simple Put., e. g. fie/j.vf)- 
(Tojiai, meminero (I shall have reminded myself), I shall be mindful, shall remember 
(but /uiUT](TOfj.ai, I shall remind myself) ; KeKrrjao/xai (I shall have acquired), I shall 
(but KTrjcro/j-ai, I shall acquire), etc. 



Eem. 8. The Put. Perf, like the Perf. (Eem. 7), is used instead of the sim- 
ple Put., to express a thing emphatically. Here as in the Perf. used for the 
Put., the speaker looks upon the action as already accomplished ; hence the 
Put. Perf. often denotes the rapidity and certainty of the action, the process 
or progress being left wholly out of view, e. g. $pd(e, Kal ireirpd^er ai (and it 
shall be [certainly, immediately] done), Ar. Plut. 1127; <piXos 7\\uv ovSels 
XeXeityerai (no friend will [certainly] be left us), X. An. 2. 4, 5. So also in 
the Inf. Avolv 'n rpiwv Tjfxepwv ravra TreTrpd^ea&ai, Dem. 19, 74. In the Act. 
the periphrasis fiefiovAevKks zaopiai is found. 

Eem. 9. The Put. Perf. is used in Greek only in principal clauses, and in 
subordinate clauses introduced by on and as (that), by e I used instead of on, 
and by &sre (so that), all with the Ind. In all other subordinate clauses, the 
Aor. Subj. (more seldom the Perf.) is used instead of it, in connection with a 
conjunction compounded of av, as idv, i-rvdv, eVe/Sav, orav, irplu ay, esr dv, os 
&v, etc., e. g. 'Eav tovto Ae|?7S (si hoc dixeris), a/xapT7]o-n. 



$256. (b) Historical Tenses: Aorist, Imperfect, and 
Phtp e rfe c t . 

1. The Aorist (Ind.) expresses past time, in a wholly indefi- 
nite manner, with no other relation, e. g. kypaxpa, Iivrote, Kvpos 
TroXXa ZSvrj ivLKTjaev. It thus stands in contrast with the other 
tenses which express past time ; still, so far as it indicates past 
time indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these 
tenses. 

2. Both the Impf. and Plup. (Ind.) represent an action as 
past, but always as having relation to another past action. But 
the Impf. expresses the action as contemporary with this other 
past action ; the Plup. expresses the action as already past 
before this other past action. 



$ 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 345 

y Ei> § (rb e 7r a t (e s , ey£> eypa<pov, while you were playing, I was writing. "Ore 
eyyvs %<rav ol fidpfiapoi, oVEAA-nves i/xaxovro. "Ore ol fidpfiapoi eTreA.7jA(5- 
& 6 c a v, ol "EAArji/es i fj-axovro. T6tc (or iu ravrr) rfj fxaxv) ol "EAArjves 
SfappaA^wrara i/xaxouro. 'ETreid'}] ol "EAArjves eire A 17 A.w&eirac, ot ttoAsimoi 
air err etpevyeo-ay. "Ore ot av/xuaxoi iirkr) o-ia(ov, oi''A&r)va?oi robs Uepcras 
iveviK-hkeaav. 'Y.yzypdtytiv rrjy iiricrToAr]u, I had written the letter (before 
the friend came). 

Remark 1 . It is to be noted that the Greeks freely use the Aor. instead of 
the Plup., when the relation of the past time to another past time can be easily 
inferred from the context, and no special emphasis- lies in this relation, e. g. 
'E7retSr; ol "EAArjves i Kr)A&oi/ (quum Graeci venissent), ol TroAe/uioi aiveive<pevye- 
aav. The Aor. is often employed even instead of the Perf, when the relation 
of the past time to the present need not be expressed emphatically. 

3. Hence the Aorist (Ind.) is used in historical narrations, in 
order to indicate the principal events, while the Impf. (Lid.) is 
used to denote the accompanying circumstances. The Aor. 
narrates, the Impf. describes. Hence in the narration of past 
events, the Aor., which introduces the principal facts, is very 
often interchanged with the Impf, which describes and paints; 
often, also, with the Hist. Pres., which, like the Aor., relates the 
principal events, and places them vividly in the present ; not 
seldom, also, with the Plup., sometimes with the Perf. By this 
interchange of the tenses, the narration has the greatest liveli- 
ness of representation, and the finest shades of expression. 

^H/ios 8' 'Ea)S<p6pos elcri cpScas epeW 4ttI ycuav, rr]fJ.os irvpKa'ir] i /xapalvero, 
ivavo-aro Se <pAo£ (the fire upon the funeral pile began to abate, and the flame 
ceased), II. ty, 228. Tobs -neArac-ras iSe^avro ol fidpfiapoi Kal ifiaxovro' 
eVel 8' iyyvs r)Gav ol orrATrai, ir pdrrovr o • Kal oi ireAraffral ev&bs e'lrrovro 
(the barbarians withstood the peltasts and continued to fight ivith them ; but when the 
hoplites drew near, they fled, and immediately the peltasts set out in pursuit), X. An. 
5. 4, 24. aw eft 7] T6* oZok^tco Kal i^amvrjs aiKpoTepca^rev robs 'A&rji/aiovs &opvf3rj- 
Sr)vai • Kal rb pXv evd>vvp.ov Ktpas avrwv, oirep 8)7 /cat rr p k e % <" p "h « e h ev&bs 
airoppayev e<pvye' Kal 6 Bpao~idas, vitox^pouvros r)5v avrov, ijrnrapiwu r<p de£ia, 
r ir p doo~ Kerai' Kal rxec6vra ainbv ol /j.ev 'A&T^aTot ouk aio~&avovrai, ot Se 
irArjo-tov apavres arrr)veyKav' Kal 6 pikv KAeW, ws to rrpwrov oh SievoeTro 
/xeveiv, ev&bs (pevywv, Kal KaraAr)(p&els virb MvpKiviov ireAraffrov, arrofrvrio' /cet* ot 
8e avrov ^varpacpivres brvAtrai r\p.vvovro k. r. A., Th. 5, 10. 'O fihv noAefios 
airduroiv rjfias rwv elprjixdvcav air e <rr ep-n /ce • Kal yap tol rrevecrrepovs 7T6irot7j/ce, 
ical iroAAovs Kivdwovs irofxeveiv r)vdyKacre, Kal rrpbs robs "EAArjuas 8ta£e/3A7j- 
Kt Kal rrdvra rporrov reraAanr do pr)Kev r)ixas, Isocr. Pac. 163, a. (The 
Perfects denote the result, the Aorist the event.) 

Rem. 2. Inasmuch as the Aor. Ind. represents a past action independently 
and absolutely, uncon lected with any other past time, while the Impf. Ind. 
represents a past action as always connected with another past action, being, 



346 syntax. [§ 256. 

consequently, employed in exhibiting an action in its duration and progress, and 
hence used in description ; accordingly the Aor. expresses a moment or point of 
time, while the Impf, denotes duration or continuance. The Aor. therefore 
describes a momentary action or a single action ; the action, however, described 
by the Aor. may be a continued or protracted one, but the writer in using the 
Aor. presents no such view of it, communicating merely the fact of the occur- 
rence. The Impf., on the other hand, describes an action in its continuance 
and progress, — not merely a single act, but a series of acts. It often depends on 
the choice of the writer whether the Impf. or Aor. is used. An action graphi- 
cally presented in its duration and progress by the Impf, can be stated histor- 
ically as a mere past act, by the Aor. And so. many actions stated in the Aor. 
might be more vividly described by the Impf, if the writer wished it. 

4. On the use of the Impf. and Aor. Ind., the following things 
are to be noted : — 

(a) The Impf. appears sometimes to stand instead of the Pres., since an 
action which continues into the present time, is referred to a past time in which 
it occurred, or was known to the speaker. Kvpos QeXavfei — iirl rbv XaXov 
7TOTau.6u, ovra rh evpos ir\e&pov, irX-iip-q 5' lx&vav /xeyaXwu Kal irpaicav, ovs oi 1,vpoi 
&cobs ivo/jLiCov Kal aSt/ceTi/ ovk eia>j/ (which the Syrians consider as gods, 
namely, as I then saw), X. An. 1. 4, 9. '"AQikovto irpbs rb MtjSicjs koXov[izvov 
Te?xos • — air e?x e ^ BafivAwvos ov iroXv, 2. 4, 12. Tj? Se irpwrr] ^uepa acp'iKOVTO 
iirl tow Trora/xou, bs & p i £e r-fju re twv MaKpa>vwv [x<*>pav] Kal tt?\v twu ~2kv&ivwp, 
4. 8, 1. 'A-rap, 2> kra7ps,ap > ov r65e -f\v to SeVSpov, icp" oirep riyes 7]/xas ; PL Phaedr. 
230, a. Ovk dp aya&bs to iroXiriKa TlepucXrjs "hv iic tovtov tov \6yov (namely, 
when he so appeared to us, consequently = ovk dp 1 aya&os iariv, u>s icpaiuero, 
he is not therefore distinguished, as he then seemed to be), Gorg. 516, d. — From the 
idea of duration or continuance contained in the Impf. several other relations orig- 
inate : (a) The beginning of an action, e. g. eVel iyyvs tyevovTo, i^aTrivvs oi fj.\v 
avTwv i t 6 1 e v o v, some of them began to shoot their arrows ; — (/3) habit or custom, 
e. g. avTbv o'lnep irp6s&ev iv p o s e/cu vo v v, Kal t6ts irposeKvunoau, those who were 
before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did it then also ; — (7) wish, endeavor or 
attempt, e. g. TrpooTos KXeapxos tovs ai>Tov o~TpaTiu>Tas e/3ta£eTo Uvai, Clearchus 
endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance. 

(b) The Aor. is often used in general propositions which express a fact bor- 
rowed from experience, and hence what is customary ; here a single fact which 
has been observed to be true in many instances, but not established as universal, 
is stated to be generally true, — the truth frequently observed in regard to a 
single event, is considered as holding "in the case of other similar events. In 
such cases the Aor. is usually translated into English by the present, or by the 
verb is wont, is accustomed, with the Inf. II. p, 177. aid re Aibs Kpeiao-wu voos 
alyioxoio, '6sre Kal ahKi/xov dvtipa <£o/3e?, Kal d<pei\er v'wnv j)r)'idiws (ivho 
inspires the brave man with fear, and bears off the victory). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. at p.\v 
yap TrKiLCTTai ir6\eis irposrdTrovari to7s iroXiTais (xrq k\£tttziv, /x^i apirdCeiu, Kal raAAa 
Ta rotavra wsavTws' 1)v 8e ris rovroou ri irapafiaivn, (jmiias avTciis iir efrevav 
(were accustomed to impose a penalty upon them). Dem. 01. 1(2). 20, 9. '6rav 4k 
irkeoi>e£las Kal irovripias *m, S>sirep ovtos ($i\nnros), t'crxucn?, 7] irpct>T-n irp6(pacns 
Kal fUKobv wraiafia airavra aveX a ^ Ti(J€ Ka ^ SteAuo'ej'. 



§ 256. j HISTORICAL TENSES. 347 

Rem. 3. When the idea of being wont to do, as found in the Aov., is to be 
made prominent, or when a native habit is to be expressed, the Greek uses the 
verbs <pi\eiv and £&eKeiv. Her. 7. 10, 5. <p i A e e i yap 6 Srebs to. virepexovra iravra 
KoAoveiv. 157. rm e3 fiovAev&evri TTp7}yfj.ari TeAewT'}/ ws to iir'nrav xP 7 )°' T h e^eAet 
i-myiveo&ai. 

(c) Hence in poetiy, the Aor. is often used in comparisons, instead of the 
Pres., since comparisons contain facts that are known and founded on often 
repeated experience. II. y, 33 — 36. &s 8' ore tIs re SpaKovra Idcbv irdKivopoos 
aTreorr] ovpeos ev fSricro-r)s, inr6 re rp6jxos e\\oj8e 7t»?a, a\p r av e%^ PV c f> 
SiXP^s re fxiv el\e irapeids ■ &s ccStjs /cad-' Ojj.i'Kov edv Tpwav ayepwx^v (sc. Ilaois). 
II. 7T, 482. tfpiire §', ojs ore tjs SpOs tfpnrev. 

(d) The Tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an impassioned or 
emphatic expression of a decision or determination, which has respect, indeed, 
to the present time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as having been 
previously established and settled in his own mind. The English often trans- 
lates such Aorists, in a very imperfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong 
especially verbs expressing strong- feeling or passion, e. g. aneirrvaa (I do 
abhor), eye A a a a (I cannot help laughing), eirrjveoa, cop.w£a, e&av fiaaa, 
a ir ci> p. o <r a, r\ a &i)v* S. Phil. 1434. a 8' av \df3rjs orb aKu\a rovde rod arparov^ 
t6^(uv ij.1001/ /Ui/77jU.e7a, Trpbs irvphv e/j.r)v kS/jll^s • Kal <ro\ ravr , 'A^iAAe'cos reKvov, ira- 
pyveo-a, this I counsel thee, this 1 have counselled thee. Eur. Med. 223. xph 8e 
£evov piev Kapra irposx^P^iv (se accommodare) ir6\ei oi>8' aorbv f)uea\ ftsris 
av&dSrjs yeyws irncpbs iroXirats earlv ajxa&ias viro {nee laudo, nee unquam laudavi). 
Hec. 1276. Polym. : Kal o-i\v yavdyK-q ira?8a KaadvSpav Sraveiv. Hecuba: aireir- 
rvo~a, this thought I do abhor = a thought which I have abhorred. 

(e) With like effect the Aor. is often used by Attic writers, apparently instead 
of the Pres. in urgent appeals or commands, expressed in the form of a question 
introduced by ti ovv ob or rl ov. The speaker wishes, as it were, to see the 
desired action already accomplished. X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. ri ovv, i(pn] 6 Kvpos, ov ical 
tV Sivafiw eAe|as fxoi (quin igitur mihi recenses ? why hast thou not yet told me of 
the forces'? instead of tell me forthwith !) 5. 4, 37. ti ovv, e(prj, & Ta8dra y 
ovxl Ta /.(.ev reixv <pv\aKfj %x v P a inoiriaas (why therefore have you not made 
the walls strong by a guard? = at once make them, etc.) ; PI. Phaedon. 86, d. el ovv 
ris vfMwu evwopdrepos e/xov, ri ovk aireK pivaro ; (is quam celerrinie respondeat, 
let him answer at once). The Pres. is also so used; yet the expression is then 
far weaker, e. g. Ti ovv, % 8 1 os, ovk epwr5.s\ (stronger than epebra, but 
weaker than Ti ovv ovk rtpcirrjoas or ^pov;) PI. Lysid. 211, d. Ti ox>v ov 
o'kottov fie v, X. C. 3. 1, 10. 

(f ) The Aor., like the Perf. (§ 255, Rem. 7) is used, when the speaker confi- 
dently considers a future event as already taken place. II. 8, 160 — 162. elwep 
yap re Kal avriK "OKv/xirios ovk ere\e<r(rev, I7e re Kal o^e reAe?, ovv re fieyd\<a 
airer iffav ovv o(pfj<riv Ke<pa\rjo-i yvvaitf re Kal reKeeoaiv (then have they paid a 
heavy penalty, then shall they pay). Eur. Med. 78. air<a\6p.eo-& &p\ el KaKbv 
irposoio-ofiev viov -rraAaK? (then we shall perish, if etc.). 

(g) The Aorist is very often used in all its forms to denote the coming into a 
condition ; this the Ind. always represents naturally in the past. BcwnAeua, / 



348 syntax. [$ 257. 

am a king, ifSacrlXevaa (not Iicas a king, but) I came to be a king, ivas made a 
king, fiaa iXevaas, having been made king, rex /actus. BovXwa), lam a senator 
(X. C. 1. 2, 35), povXevcras, having been made a senator, senator /actus (ib. 1. 1, 
18). Sou o-Tpar-nyho-avTOSy te duce facto (ib. 3. 5, 1). 'lax™, lam strong, 
(V^iiiraj, having become or been made strong, potens /actus (Th. 1,3). Avvn- 
3- e i s, potentiam nactus. 'Aabevrio-ai, to have become sick, in morbum incidisse. 
Kvpos T\ya<rSrn avrov (KXeapxov), X. An. 1. 1, 9. Cyrus came to admire him, ejus 
admiratione captus est. 



§251. Subordinate Modes. 

1. As the Aorist Indicative expresses a past action as inde- 
pendent and completed, having no relation to another past ac- 
tion ; while the Imperfect, always representing a past action in 
relation to another past, and being nsed in describing and paint- 
ing, presents the action in its duration and progress, so the 
same distinction holds in regard to the subordinate modes of 
the Aorist and Present : l The subordinate modes of the Aor. 
(Subj. Opt. and Impr.) together with the Infinitive and Partici- 
ple, are used, when the speaker wishes to represent the action 
by itself, as completed ; the subordinate modes of the Present 
together with the Infinitive and Participle, and also the Imper- 
fect Opt. are used, when the speaker, considering the perform- 
ance of the action, wishes to represent it descriptively in its dura- 
tion and progress. In this way the following modes stand in 
contrast with each other : 

(a) The Subjunctive and Optative Aorist with the Subjunctive Present and the 
Optative Imperfect, e. g. ^vyw^v and <pevya>/j.ev, let us flee. With 
(pvywfiey, the idea of fleeing itself is urged and is had in mind; with 
Qevycotxzv, I rather have reference to the performance and progress of 
the action ; the Aor. expresses the action with more energy, as it denotes 
an instantaneous, momentary act. The same distinction exists in all 
the following examples. Ti -koltio-co^v and Troia/xev ,• what shall we do? 
Ae7a>, ha p.d&r)S and 'Iva p.av&dvys , ut discas ; eXeyov, 'iva fid^OLS 
and Iva ixav&dvois , ut disceres. The Greek Subj. always refers to the 
/ature, and hence is never used, as in Latin, of the present and past, e. g. 
Laudat puerum, quod diligens sit or /uerit, because he is or has been. In 
subordinate clauses with bs av, eav, orav, etc. [§260. (a)], the Subj. Aor. 
corresponds with Latin Fut. Perf. (§255, Rem. 9). 'Eav tovto Xeyys, 
ajxapriicrri (si hoc dices or quotiescunque hoc dicis, errabis). 'Eav tovto 

1 The subordinate modes of the Imperf. are supplied by those of the Pres. 



$ 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. 349 

A e £ 77 s , a.fj.apT'ftc-p (si hoc ctixeris, if you shall have said). Comp. the exam- 
ples under §§ 333. 3. 337, 6. 339, 2, II. (b). The Impf. and Aor. Opt. has 
the sense of the present or future in clauses which express a supposi- 
tion, conjecture, or undetermined possibility, in prose commonly with &v, 
in hypothetical clauses with el; the Opt. in this sense is found in clauses 
denoting a wish, in final clauses, and in direct interrogative clauses, 
particularly in deliberative questions. Tovto pab'tocs av yiyvoiro or 
yivoiT , this might easily be done. See §§ 259, 3 and 6, and 260, 4. El 
tovto Aeyois or Ae^eias, afxa.pT6.vo is or a /xdpT is &v, if you 
should say this, you ivould err. See § 339, II, (a). Ezfte tovto yiyvoiTo 
or yevoiTo, that this might be! See § 259, 3. (b). "EAeyov, 'Lva 
ixavhav 01s or /xd^ois , ut disceres. See § 330, 2. Tis Toiavra viroAa/j.- 
f3dvo 1 or vtt oAafio i; who icould suppose such things ? See § 259, 3, (e). 
Ovk eixov, oiroi Tpeiroi/u-nv or t pair oifxyv , / knew not what I should 
do. See § 259, 2. The following case also belongs here : When the 
subordinate clauses in §§ 333, 3. 337, 6. and* 339, II, (b), arc made to 
depend on an historical tense, and the Opt. without dv takes the place of 
the Sub), with os dv, oTav, iiretb'dv, eav, etc., the Opt. has a future sense. 
Ovs av ?8a to. KaAa iiriT-ndevovTas, Ti/Ar)cra) (quos videro). "Ecprjv otis 
18 01 [A 1 to. KaAa iiriTT]o*evovTas, Ti/xrio'eiv (quos visurus essem). 'Eire id a v 
o-v (3ovAr} SLaAzyea&ai, crol SiaAe^ofxai (si or quotiescunque vis). "Ecprjv, 
iveiSr] o-v fiovAoio SiaAeyecr&ai, col 8iaAe|ecr&cu (si or quotiescunque 
velles, of the future). In other kinds of clauses, the Opt. of the Impf. and 
Aor. has a past sense, so that it corresponds with the Ind. of each of these 
tenses. Tio~aa<pepvr)s Sief3aAe tov Kvpov, ws e7rif3 ovAevoi avTw (that he 
was plotting against him). "EAe^av, oti Kvpos airo&dvoi (that C. was 
dead). 'OirSre oi "EAA-qves to7s iroAefxiois iirioikv or iTreA&oie v, airl"- 
(pevyov, quotiescunque impetum faciebant). 'Avafiiovs eheyev, a e/ce? 
ifSot (what he had there seen, a dependent question). Comp. No. 2, (b). 

(b) The Imperative Aorist with the Imperative Present, e. g. $vye and 
(p e v y e, flee. Aos and didov fxoi to fiifiAiov, give. M77 &opv /3 elYe , <5 dvdpes 
'A&riva'ioi, &AA' i/x/xeivaTe fxoi, oTs i8er}^r]v vfxwv, frt] StopvfSeiv icp' oh av 
A67W (the principal fact is here i/x/xeivaTe, the more definite explanation 
3-opviSeiTe) PL Apol. 30, c. '"EireiSdv airavra a.Kovo-r\Te, tcpivaTe, fx^ irp6- 
Tepov irpoAa/mPdveTe. Dem. Ph. 1. 44, 14. 'AAA', & ^Kparres, eTt teal 
vvv ifxol irei&ov Kal o-do&rjTi PI. Crito 44, b (= ifxol irei&Sfxevos o-c&hjTt, 
i. e. by a process of persuasion, save yourself). In precepts respecting 
the rules of life, etc. the Pres. is the natural and usual tense. Tovs fxlv 
Seobs (pofiov, tovs Se yoveis Tip: a, tovs Se (piAovs aiffx^vov, toTs 
Se v6p.ois -rreiSov, Isocr. Demon. 16. Comp. § 259, 4. 

(c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Present, e. g. 'E&eAw (pvyelv 
and (peiyeiv, I wish to flee. 'IicavSs eifxi iroirio-ai and iroielv ti. 
('H yevpyla) fxa&elv.Te pdaTf] idSitei eivai Kal rjSto'T'n e pyd£eo~&ai, X. 
Oec. 6, 9. AlpeT(!>Tep6v iaTi naAws airofrav etv , ?} Cv v a<o"x/>ws, Isocr. 
Pan. 95. Ov to ph\ Aa&elv to, ayaSa oil™ ye xaAeWf, &sirep to Aafi6vra 

30 



350 syntax. [$ 257. 

<r rep t\ h i) vai XuirrjpSv, X. Cy. 7. 5, 82. KeXevco ae 8oDj/cu and §i5ovat 
/not t& fiifixiov. KaXeaas 6 Kvpos'Apdo-jrrjv M^So^, toutoj/ eKeXevae 8ia<£u- 
Aa|ai ovT<5 t^i/ re yvvcuica Kal r\]v o~kt\vt)v, X. Cy. 5. 1. 2, with which, 
compare in 3. following: ravr-nu ovv eKeXevo-ev 6 Kvpos SiacpvXdrr eiv 
rbv 'ApdffTrrjv, ecas av avrbs Xafiy (to continue to guard, the subordinate 
clause necessarily implying duration in diatyvXarreiv). In the oratio obliqua 
after verbs of saying and thinking, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. is frequently 
used to denote what is past ; then the Inf. Aor., like the Ind. Aor., is used to 
denote the principal events, the Inf. Pres., like the Ind. Impf., to denote the 
accompanying subordinate circumstances, e. g. 'ASr-nvcuoi Xeyovo-i, SiKaiws 
e ^eXaaai (robs TleXacryovs)' KaroiK-qpievovs yap robs HeXaayobs virb rcS 
'T/jL-naa^ ev&evrev oppLewp-euovs, aSiKeeiv rdSe " (poirav yap alel ras 
o~<perepas Svyarepas re Kal robs ircudas eir v§wp ' ov yap elvai rovrov rbv 
Xpovov o~<pio~i Kca oiKeras ' okqos Se eX&oiev avrai, robs TleXaayobs inrb vfipios 
fiiaoSai <r<peas k. r. X. ( Oratio recta ; e^'nXao-ap.ev' oi yap IleXao-yol 
tjMkovu raSe- £<poirccv, etc.) Her. 6, 137. The Inf. Aor. has a 
past relation only after verbs of saying or thinking, and in the construction 
of the Ace. with the Infinitive with the article. "Evrav&a Xeyerai 
'AttSxXwu ittSelpai Mapo-uav xal rb deppia ape fxdcrai ev rep avrpep, X. 
An. 1. 2, 8 (cutem detraxisse — suspendisse, to have flayed, and hung up). 
Comp. No. 2, (c). Qav/xacrrbv (paiverat p.oi rb ireia &rj vai rivas, us 
'SwKpdr-qs robs veovs 8ie<p&eipev, X. C. 1. 2, 1 (persuasum esse quibusdam, 
that certain individuals had been persuaded). Tb pied e pi. lay rau iroXewv 
aXuvai iroXiopKia, peyicrrSy ecrri trrjpteiov rod Sia, rovrovs ir eio~&evr as 
robs $a>Keas ravra Tra^eTv, Dem. 19, 61. (But when by the Ace. 
with the Inf. with the article, a purpose is expressed, the Inf. Aor. has 
naturally something of a future relation, e. g. 'Eirep-eX-rifrni/ rod diSao-- 
Ka\6v fxoi riva yev ea&ai , I took care that I might have some one as a 
teacher, X. C. 4. 2, 4.) In all other cases the Inf. Aor. has the relation of 
present time. 

(d) The Participle of the Aorist with the Participle of the Present; comp. 
Xd&e (pvydiv with Xav&ave (pevyuv. TlepiercXtoov ^.ovviov, fiovX6p.evoi (p&rjvai 
aTriic6pievoi is rb &o-rv (wishing to come into the city sooner) Her. 6, 115. 
Tobs av&p&Tvovs Xyaopiev eir lire o~ 6vre s ( will secretly attack), X. An. 7. 3, 43. 
In all such examples the Aor. does not express the relation of past time, 
but merely the action of the verb taken by itself; the time is denoted by 
the finite verb with which the Part, is connected ; the Aor. Part., there- 
fore, denotes only that the subordinate action (expressed by the Part.) is 
contemporaneous with the principal action (expressed by the verb). Yet 
it is to be observed, that the Aor. Part, is commonly used to designate 
past time, e. g. Tavr elirwv a-rrefSr) = ravr elire Kal airefi-n. — It may be 
added here as a general principle, that while the Aor. Part, generally 
denotes past time, the subordinate modes of the Aor. and Present, of 
themselves denote no relation of time, the Aor., however, designating a 
momentary, the Pres. a continued action. 



$ 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. 351 

2. The subordinate modes and participials of the Aonst, form 
a contrast also with the subordinate modes and participials of 
the Perfect and Pluperfect ; the former denote an action abso- 
lutely, as past or completed ; the latter, on the contrary, in rela- 
tion to the subject of the finite verb; by this relation the sub- 
ordinate idea of the duration of the result of what is denoted by 
the verb, is naturally derived. In this way the following forms 
stand in contrast with each other : 

(a) The Subjunctive Aorist with the Subjunctive Perfect, e. g. 'Ecfcy cnrovdal 
yevtavr ai, &^ovaiv (e/ce?cre), ev&ev e|ou<n t« ewirr)Seia (if a treaty shall 
have been made), X. A. 2. 3, 6. *Ov av yvc0p1.fj.ot/ (kviov 18 77), acnrd(erai, kav 
/xrjSev ir&irore vir avrov ayd&bv ir eir6v&T) (whomsoever he recognizes, he 
greets, even if he shall have received no favor from him), PI. Rp. 376, a. 
'A^exe^e ru>v aWorpiav, %v acrcpaXecrrepov robs o'fcovs robs vfxerepovs avrwv 
K€KTrjcr&e, Isoc. Nic. 49. ( Comp. § 255, Rem. 5.) It has already been 
stated No. 1. (a) that the Greek Subj. always refers to the future. 

(b) The Optative Aorist with the Optative Pluperfect, e. g. Ol 'IvSol e\e£av, 
'6tl it e'juvj/eie trcpas 6 '\v8ccv fiacrihevs (had sent), X. Cy. 2. 4, 6. "ESeicrav, 
fi)] Kvrra ris &sirep kvct\v T}fx5>v e jxtt e it r co k 1 ( that some madness had 
fallen upon us, the effects still continuing), X. An. 5. 7, 26. 'AyncriAaos 

t'Se^Tj rrjs Tr6\ews acpelvai avrbv ravrrjs rr\s cTTpaTriyias, Xeyiov, 'on red irarpl 
avrov iroWa viry\ peri] koi r\ ruv Wlavrivewv iroXis ev rols irpbs MecTcrfjynv 
iroXefiois, H. 5. 2, 3. In what instances the Opt. Aor. is used of the 
present or future, and in what of the past, has been stated in No. 1, (a). 

(c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Perfect; comp. air oSavelv with 
Te&VTjKevcu. Tlarpbs Kvpos Xeyerai yeveff&ai Kafx^vaew, Tlepffcov f3a<ri- 
Aecos X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. Aeyerai &v8pa riva rcov M^Swj- €«7re7rA7jx3-at 
iroKvv 8-f) riva xpl> vi > v eirt t<£ /caAAei rod Kvpov (stood or continued amazed), 
ib. 1. 4, 27. Comp. § 255, Rem. 6. 

(d) The Aorist Participle with the Perfect Participle ; comp. airo&avibv with 
T&v-nKcbs, Plut. Aem. Paul. c. 36. extr. Uepo-ebs fj,ev ex et *«* vevi K V- 
fxivos (even tlmugh vanquished, in the condition of one vanquished) robs 
iraidas, AlfxiXios Se robs avrov (sc. Traldas) viK^ffas airef3a\ev = j/eviK-nrai 
fxev — exet Se — , evitcno-e fiev — aire&aXe Se. Perseus even though conquered 
still has his children ; Aemilius in his otherwise successful war, lost his. 

Remark 1. From the above explanation, it is evident why the Aor., though 
an Historical tense, has besides an Opt. a Subj. also: the Aor. Subj. stands in 
contrast, on the one hand, with the Subj. Pres. ; on the other, with the Subj. 
Perf. The Greek Put. has no Subj. as in Latin (e. g. Gaudet, quod pater ven- 
turus sit), because the Greek Subj. of itself denotes future time. But the Aor. 
has an Opt., which stands in dependent sentences after an historical tense, and 
consequently, in direct discourse, takes the place of the Ind. Future, e. g. 
"Hyyei\ev, ori iroAe/xioi viK^croiev (that the enemy would conquer). X. An. 7. 
1, 33. eAeyev, on eroifws eft? yyelabai abrols els rb AeATa KaXovfxeyov, eV&a iroWa 



352 syntax. [$ 258. 

Kal aya&a Xiityoivro {where they would receive). X. Cy. 8. 1, 43. em/neXe'iTo 
'6n<tiS yAyre affLTOi, fx^re diroToi irore ecr o iuto . (But evifxeXeirai, oirws .... ecrov- 
rcu). X. An. 4. 1, 25. e(p-q elvai dnpov, o el /jltj tis tt p o/caTo Xi) ty o it o , ab'vva.TQV 
eo~ecr&cu 7rapeX&e?v. (0 'ratio recta : el TrpoKaTaX-qtyeTcu, aSvvarov effrcu TrapeX&elv.) 

Kem. 2. Verbs of willing, refusing, delaying, entreating, persuading, com- 
manding, forbidding, hindering, of being able, and unable, expecting (irpos- 
Bokco, iirido^Ss elfit, zIkSs ianv, it is likely, to be expected), when they relate to a 
future object, are sometimes connected with the Fut. Inf., sometimes with the 
Pres., sometimes with the Aor. The Fut. Inf. is used, when the idea of futurity is 
to be made specially prominent, e. g. a condition continuing in the future ; the 
Inf. Pres., to denote a continuing or permanent condition, the idea of futurity, 
evident of itself, being left out of sight ; this Inf. is also used to denote the 
immediate occurrence of the action ; the Inf. Aor., when the idea of the action 
itself is made prominent. In English all three forms of the Inf., when the subject 
of the Inf. is the same as that of the governing verb, are translated by the Pres. 
Inf. : MeXXw ypd^/eiu,ypd<peiu, ypdrj/ai (I am now about to write, intending 
to write ). A^vv ar oi elo~ iv eirifxeXels e o~ e <r 3- a t { unable to become and continue 
careful), X. Oec. 12, 12. 'Advuaroi elaiv els eirifxeXeiau twv ko.t dypbv epywv 
iraidex'/ea&ai, ib. 12, 15. 'ASiiyaroi tjluv iaovrai ravrrju r))v eiri/neXeiav 
8 idax^V val y ib- 1 2 > 13. 'A vufldXXeT ai Trovr)ae t v ra deoi/ra, Dem.31, 9. 
'A&rjvcuoi ave pdxXovr o rb irav fxr) X aj/ V caabai, Her. 6, 58. 'EXTri^ei 
paSiws v/xcis e |a7r ar^ffe iv, Dem. 860, 54 {he hopes to deceive you). 'EXiridas 
Tcapex*Tai rifxas evSal/xovas Troirjaai, PI. Symp. 193, d. {he gives hope that he 
will make us happy). With verbs of willing or being able, the Fut. Inf. is more 
seldom than the Aor. or Pres. After verbs of saying, promising, swearing, 
thinking, the above threefold construction (Inf. Fut., Pres., Aor.) is used, but the 
Inf. Aor. regularly expresses something past (see No. 1), seldom what is future, 
e. g. Ot nXaraLrjs ev6 /xicr av iTn&e/xevoi paSioos Kparr) <r ai, Th. 2, 3, (se victores 
fore). 'AirSKpivai, S> ^AySpare' ov yap olfxai ere e^apvov yevecr&ai, a evavTiov 
'A$rr\vaioiv airdvTuv eiroiricras, Lys. Agor. § 32 {credo te negaturum). After verbs 
of saying, thinking, hoping, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. with dv, is often used in 
nearly the same sense as the Inf. Fut. without dv. See § 260, (5), (a). 

$258. B. A more particular Vieio of the Modes. 

The Indicative, the Subjunctive (Optative) and the Im- 
perative Modes [$ 253, (b)], are distinguished as follows : 

(a) The Indicative expresses a direct assertion, an actual fact. 

Tb p65oy fraXXe i. 'O irar^p yeypa<pe vr\v eiricrToX^v. Ot ttoX^/xioi 
airecpvyov. Ot 7roAtYat robs TroXe/xiovs v t kt) o~ ov ar iv. 

(b) The Subjunctive denotes a supposition, conception, or 
representation. The Subj. of the Hist, tenses is called the 
Optative. 

"lw/xev I eamus ! — Tt iroia>y.ep ; quid faciamus ? what shall we do ? Ovk ex«> 
(jttoi r pdnu/xai, nescio, quo me vertam. Ovk elxov, ottoi r pairoifirju, nescie- 
bam, quo me verterem. Ae7w, %v elSrj s, dico, ut scias, in order that you may know 
it. *EXe£a, tV elSelrfs, dixi, ut scires, in order that you might know it. 

(c) The Imperative denotes the immediate expression of the 
will, being used in commands, entreaties, etc. 



§ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 353 

Tpdipov and ypdcpe, write. BpccSecos ^kv cp'iAos yiyvov, yevofxsuos Se ireipS) dia/u.€- 
veiv, Is. Dem. 7. Tpaipdrw and ypacperco, let him write (§ 257, 1. b). The com- 
mand expressed by the Imp. is not always to be understood as a strong com- 
mand, entreaties, exhortations, and counsels, being also expressed by the Imp. 

Remark. The Modes exhibit the relation of an expressed thought to 
the mind of the speaker. Hence they denote nothing objective, i.e. they never 
show the actual condition of an action ; the Ind., in itself, does not denote 
something actual; nor the Subj., in itself, something possible ; nor the Imp., 
something necessary ; the language represents these ideas by special expres- 
sions, e. g. dA^ws, bvvaoftcu, Set, xpv* etc - The modes express subjective rela- 
tions solely, i. e. the relations to the mind of the speaker, showing how he 
conceives of an action. A mental operation is either an act of perception, an 
act of supposition or conception, or an act of desire. The Ind. expresses 
an actual perception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents 
as a reality, whether an actual, objective fact, or a conception ; even the future, 
which, in itself is something merely imagined, can be conceived by the speaker 
as a reality, and hence is expressed by the Fut. Ind. The Subj. expresses 
a conception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a 
conception, whether it has an actual objective existence, or is a mere mental 
conception. The Imp. expresses desire ; it denotes what the speaker conceives 
and represents as something desired, whether it be an actual objective necessity 
or not. 



$ 259. Use of the Subjunctive, Optative and Im- 
perative. 

1. The Subj. of the Principal tenses, the Pres. and Perf., as 
well as the Sub. Aor., alway relates to future time [$ 257, 1, (a)], 
and is used in Principal clauses : 

(a) In the first Pers. Sing, and PL in exhortations 1 and warn- 
ings, where the Eng. uses let, let us, with the infinitive ; the 
negative is here yJ\. 

(b) In the first Pers. Sing, and PL in deliberative 2 questions, 
when the speaker deliberates with himself what he is to do, 
what it is best to do ; here also the negative is /x?j. 

"lw/xev, eamus! let us go, suppose we go! Mrj Xwfxev. "A.ye (<pepe, ea) Ya/xcj/. 
<J>e'pe tSa? (come now, let me see), Her. 7, 103, <£>epe 577, if 8' os, ir e 1 pa&£> irpbs 
vjxas atroXoyiicraaSai, PI. Phaedon. 63, b. Such an exhortation is very often ex- 
pressed in the form of a question preceded by flouAety yet in this case, the 
subjunctive is a subordinate clause dependent on flouAet, e. g. BouAei ovu, hvo 
6:877 3-Wjuey ivei&ovs ; (do you then wish that we propose two hinds of persuasions = 
let us propose), PI. Gorg. 454, e. Ti iro ia>/.iev; quid faciamus ? what shall we 
do? Etna) i*ev, t) a tyw jx^v ; Eur. Ion. 771. In no? tis (ppovrtSos eA&rj; S. 

1 This use of the Subj. is called Conjunctivus adhortativus. 

2 Conjunctivus deliberativus. 

30* 



354 syntax. [$ 259. 

0. C. 170, r\s is used instead of the first Pers., where shall one go? ( = iro7 eAfrw 
or eA&cti fj.su, like iro? (ppeyau e\£rw ; 310). M77 epoopai ; shall 1 not ask? X. C. 1. 
2, 38. "Offa ol o\iyoi robs ttoWovs p^ ireio~avTes, aWa Kparovures ypd<povo~i, ttot- 
epov fiiav <pwpev, v) p)] <pupev elvai; 45. So also in indirect discourse, 
and in all persons. Obx ex«> o7roi t pdirwpev (I know not, whither I shall turn 
myself, what I shall do). Ovk Qovo-iv eKelvoi, ottoi cpvyao-i, X. An. 2.4, 20. Ovk 
old? el Su (to eKirw/xa), I do not know whether I shall give the cup, Cy. § 8. 4, 16. 

Remark 1. In the second and third Pers. the exhortation takes the form 
of a command or wish, and hence is expressed by the Imp. or Opt. Od. x> 77. 
eA&a^fc 8 aua. darrv, /3o?j 8' &Ki(TTa yevoiTo. Yet there are also passages 
in which the second Pers. Subj. stands in connection with dye and <pepe instead 
of the Imp., e. g. Qep', 8> TeKvov, vvv ko\ to ttjs vr\aov pd&r) s, S. Ph. 300. 

Rem. 2. On the use of the second Pers. Subj. with p-n to express a prohibi- 
tion, e. g. jx)} ypd\pt)s, ne scripseris, do not write, see No. 5. 

Rem. 3. A wish is very seldom expressed by e"&e with the Subj. instead of 
the Opt. E?id-' al&epos dva irTUKaSes o\vt6vov Sid irvev paros eAaxrt p (o si 
aves me sursum in aetherem per auras stridentes capiant), S. Ph. 1094 (without varia- 
tion). Comp. E^d-e Tives evval SiKaicoy vjxevaiuv ev'A.pyei (pavwai TeKVOiav 
Eur. Suppl. 1028. Ei9-' — alvxi-ov efSos clptI tov Ka\ov Aafiw (in some MSS. 
Xa)3e?u), Hel. 262. 

Rem. 4. In the third place, the Subjunctive is somewhat frequently used in 
principal clauses, in the Epic language, instead of the Eut. Ind., though with a 
slight difference of meaning. Both express a present conception of a future 
action ; but the Eut. Ind. represents what is still in the future as known and 
certain in the view of the speaker, while the Subj. represents what is future as 
merely a concession or admission of something expected. II. (, 459. nal 
7TOT6 tis eXirriaiv (and one may say, it may be expected or conceded that one icill 
say). II. 7j, 197. ov yap t'ls jxe Piy ye eKuv aenovra S'njTai (one will not force me 
away = I will not admit that one will, etc.). a, 262. ov ydp ttcc roiovs %$ov dvepas, 
ou5e ISufxai (nor do I expect that I shall see such men, nor am I to see ; ovSe 
6\pofxai, would mean, / certainly shall not see). Od. £ 201. ovk eoS> 5 outos di/yp 
diepbs fiporSs, ouSe yeuT]Tai. tt, 437. ovk eo-& outos dvnp, obb" eaaeTai ovde 
yevt\Ta.i (nor is it to be expected that he icill be). The frequent use of the Subj. 
with ovSe p-h in the Attic writers, is wholly analogous to the principle just 
stated. See under § 318, 6. 

2. The Opt. Impf. and Aor. is also used in principal sen- 
tences, to denote deliberative questions (i. e. such as express 
doubt and propriety), but differs from the Subj. in such ques- 
tions in referring to past time. 

Theocr. 27, 24. irohhoi p epv&ovro, v6ov 8' ejxbv ovtls eaSe * — Kai ri, <j>i\os, 
/3 e^ai/xi; ydfioi irX^ovariv aulas, i. e. quid facerem ? sc. turn, quum multi nup- 
tias mens ambiebant, sed eorum nullus mihi placebat, what could I then do ? The 
deliberative Opt. is very frequently used in indirect questions, in relation to an 
historical tense in the principal clause. 'Eir-npeTo 6 2ev2rns rbu iraiSa, el -rraio-euy 
avTov, X. An. 7. 4, 10 (whether he should put him to death). Oi 'Eivfidpvioi wep- 
ipavres es Ae\<pobs rbv Srebv iirfipovTo, el irapadoiev Kopiv&iots r^v ir6\w, Th. 

1, 25 (whether they should surrender the city). 



$ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 355 

Rem. 5. In the principle given, in No. 2, the act of supposition or conception 
belongs to the past, and this is the common use of the Opt. (the Subj. of the 
historical tenses), in subordinate clauses. But the Opt. is also used, where the 
act of supposition or conception is a present one. When a present conception is 
expressed by the subjunctive, e.g. tw/xev, eamus, t'l etiraiixev ; quid dicamus? 
then the realization of the conception may be assumed or expected from the 
present point of time. But when a present conception is expressed by the 
Opt. (Subj. of the historical tenses), the speaker places himself back, as it 
were, out of the present and the vivid connection, which exists between the 
present and the actual accomplishment, and represents the conception as one 
separate from his present point of time. Hence a present conception expressed 
in this way, very naturally suggests the subordinate idea of uncertainty. Thence 
arises the following use : 

3. The Opt. Aor. and Impf. (Subj. of the historical tenses), 
is used, in principal clauses, of present or future time in the 
following cases : 

(a) To express, in a general manner, a supposition, a present 
or future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, presumption 
or admission. The prose-writers here commonly use the modal 
adverb av with the Opt., $ 260, 2, (4), (a), but the poets very 
frequently use the Opt. without av. A negation is here ex- 
pressed by ov (ovk). 

*0 §e ai>TO aurcp av6jxoiov e'lrj kou Sidcpopov, cr^oA?? ye ttov tw &AAw ofAOiov -^ <pi\ov 
ye von o (that would scarcely be like or friendly to another, as one would readily 
admit), PI. Lysid. 214, d. 'AiroXo/xevris Se tt\s tyvxys tot ^§77 t^v (pvaiv ttjs 
aoSeveias eir tSe ikvvo t t6 awfia Kal Ta%£> aairev dioixoiTO (animo exstincto 
turn vero corpus imbecillitatem suam ostendat et intercidat, it is natural to suppose or 
assume, that the body icould give signs of xceahness), Phaed. 87, e. 

(b) To express a wish. A negation is here expressed by /x-j. 

B. Xi 304. /U7j /xav aairovSi ye Kal a.K\eia>s airo \olfj.r) v, may I not perish! S. 
Aj. 550. S> ttcu, yevoio iraTpbs evTvx^Tepos, to. 8' &AA' ofioios ! Kal yevoC av ov 
koko's, may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other things like him ! then 
you would not be wicked. X. Cy. 6. 3, 11. 'AAA', 3> Zev neyicne, Xafielv fxoi 
yevono ovt6v, cbs eyw fiov\o[xai, may I be able to take him. The wish is com- 
monly introduced by e?£re, el yap (in the poets also by el alone). Od. y, 205. 
el yap e/xol Toao-fivSe &eol Zvvajxiv nrapa&elev! X. Cy. 6. 1,38. el yap 
yevoiTol (In poetry ws is used like Lat. utinam. Eur. Hipp. 407. ws 
a 7r o A o it o irayKaKws ! ) 

Rem. 6. When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be 
realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used, e. g. E?&e tovto eyiyveTo ! 
et^e tovto eyeveTo ! utinam hoc factum esset ! O that this were done, or had been 
done I So w <p e A e s ypd^ai ! that you had written ! ( but I know that you have 
not). X. An. 2. 1, 4. aAA' w<pe\e /xev Kvpos (?iv ! that Cyrus were still alive! 
(but I know that he is not). Also eXSe, el yap, ws &<pe\ov, es, e(j/) with 



356 syntax. [§ 259. 

the Inf.. particularly in poetry. On the wish expressed by irm av with the Opt., 
see § 260, 2, (4), (d). On the infrequent use of the Subj. to denote a wish, see 
Rem. 3. 

(c) A command is also expressed in a milder way, in the 
form of a wish. 

Od. |, 408. rdx^rd poi iyh~ov etcupot elev, let my companions come within. II. 
K7]pv£ ris ol Mir o ire yepalrepos, let some herald follow. Arist. Vesp. 1431. 
epdoi ris t)V eicaaros elde'ir] rix vr i v - X. An. 3. 2, 37. el jxev ovv iXKos tij 
(34Atiov opa, aWws ex* T0} ' el Se fi-f}, Xetpiffocpos fiev rjyoTro. 

(d) The Optative is nsed to express a desire, wish, and 
inclination, in a general manner, without expecting the realiza- 
tion. A negation is here expressed by jitf. 

Theocr. 8, 20. ravrav (tV aipiyya) Kar&ei-nv (1 would be willing or desire 
to place)' ra 8e rw itarpbs ov KaTafr-qcrS}. Her. 7, 11. /xtj yap e"n)v 4k Aapeiov 
yeyouus, fj.^ rL^wp-qad/xepos "ASrnvaiovs, I should not be descended from Darius, 
unless, etc. 

(e) In direct questions the Opt. is used, when a mere admis- 
sion or supposition is expressed. 

(a) In Homer the interrogative clause then forms, in a measure, the protasis 
to the conditioned clause, i. e. to the clause depending on the condition ex- 
pressed by the question. II. 8, 93, seq. ^ pa. vv fxoi ri Tr/d-oto, Avudovos vie 
da'icppov ; T\a'i7]s Kev MeveXaco iirnrpoep.ej/ raxvv lov, iraai 8e tee Tpc&eaai X<*-P IV 
Kai Kvdos cLpoio, will you now listen to me, i. e. if you will, you would dare, etc. (the 
same as eX ri jxoi tt i&oto, rXai-ns /cey, etc.). Here tti&oio, etc. is the in- 
terrogative clause containing the condition, and rXai-ns, etc. the conditioned 
clause depending on the preceding. When the question has two members, the 
first, expressed by the Opt. without &v, contains the condition, the last, ex- 
pressed by the Opt. with &v, contains the conditioned clause. II. |, 191. ^ pa 
vv fJiol ri tt'i&oio, (piXov reKos, orri Kev ej7ra>, rje Kev apvnaaio KoreffaafJievn roye 
&v/j.<£ ; will you be persuaded by me, — or will you refuse ? (0) In the Attic writers, 
the Opt. is also used in a question without reference to a conditioned clause. 
These questions, however, always imply a negative. Aesch. Choeph. &AA.' 
viveproX/xov avSpbs (ppovnfj.a ris Xeyoi ; who could described — no one, i. e. who 
can you suppose could describe ? S. Ant. 604. redv, Zev, dvvaaiv ris avdpajv virep- 
fiacria k ar a ax ' •>' w ^° could restrain ? i. e. who can be supposed to restrain ? 
Arist. Plut. 438. &va% 'AiroWov Kal Seoi, no? ris cpvyoi, where could one fly ? 
Dem. Phorm. 921, 1. Kal offa fxev etire fxera rr\s a\r]&eias, prj xpv°~&e reKpaqpica ' a 
5' iipevcaro rb vcrepov, iziarorepa rav& vir o\d /3o/t e elvai ; haec vos veriora 
existimaturos quis putet ! PI. Pp. 437, b. ap oZv — Trdvra ra. roiavra rwv evavricav 
a\\T]\ois Sei-ns ; can you consider all such things to be opposite to each other ? i. e. 
can I assume that you, etc. 



$ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 357 

Rem. 7. The deliberative Opt. (No. 2) differs from this. 

Rem. 8. All the cases mentioned under (a) (h) (c) (d) (e), are to he regarded 
as elliptical sentences, which have originated from a conditional sentence like 
ei'ri exois, Solr)s 'dv [§ 339, II, (a)], if you had, you ivould give. 

(4) The following points in addition are to be observed 
respecting the Imp., [$ 258, 1, (c)] : Though the Imp. always 
refers to time present to the speaker, yet the Greek has several 
Imp. forms, viz., a Pres., Perf, and Aor. These forms, how- 
ever, do not express a different relation of time, but only the 
different condition or circumstances of the predicate. The dif- 
ference between the Imp. Aor. ypdij/ov and the Pres. ypdfa, has 
been explained, $ 257, 1, (b). The Imp. Perf. has always the 
sense of the Pres., with the accompanying idea of the perma- 
nence or continuance of the result, e. g. fxitxvqcro, memento, be 
mindful, remember ; y Svpa kck\€lct$(d, let the door be shut 
(and remain shut). See § 255, Rem. 5. 

5. In negative or prohibitive expressions with /xyj (ne), the 
Greek commonly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp. ; 
but instead of the Aor. Imp., the Aor. Subjunctive is used. 

Mr) ypd<pe or fj.rj ypd\prjs (but neither fir) ypdcpys, nor fxr] ypdtyov). Mr) 
ypacperco or fir) ypd^/y, ne scribito (but neither fir) ypdepy, nor fir) ypa^drcu). 
Mi) fioi auTiXeye or fir) fioi avriXz^y s, do not speak against me (but 
neither fir) avri\4yr)s nov fir) aurl\e^ov). Isoc. Dem. 24. Mr)8 4va (piXov iroiov 
irplv av H-trdcrys, rrcos Kexpyrai to7s irpSrepou (piXois. 36, 29. fir)8evl <rvfi(popas 
6vei8l<ry s' KOiur) yap r) tu%7J Kal rb fiiXXov a6parou. Th. 3, 39. KoXacr^rcacrav 
8e Kal vvv a£iws rrjs aSt/aas, Kal fir) tols fikv oXiydis r) atria irposre&rj, rbv 8h 
8r)fiov a it o X v <r r) r e. '"i 

Rem. 9. Yet sometimes in the Epic poets, though very seldom in other 
poets, fir) is found with the second Pers. of the Aor. Imp., e. g. II. 8, 410. t£ 
fir) fioi irarepas tto& dfioty ev&eo &v/i$. JIhe third Pers. is frequently found 
even in the Attic prose writers. X. Cy. 8. 7, 26. fir)8els 18 4tw. 

6. The third Pers. Imp. is very often used (the second more 
seldom), to denote that the speaker admits or grants something, 
the correctness or incorrectness of which depends upon himself. 
This is called the concessive Imp. 

0#to>s e'xeTO), ois av xiyeis (admit that it is as you say), P. Symp. 201, c. 
'Eot/ceTw 8? v / (r) ^vxv) £vfi<pvTq> 8wd/xet viroirrepov {evyovs re Kal r)vi6xov (grant 
that the soul is like, etc.), Phaedr. 246, a. Aeyeru} Trepl avrov, &s eKaaros 
yiyv&ffKei (admit that each one speaks of it), Th. 2, 48. 



358 syntax. [$ 260. 

Rem. 10. In the interrogative formula of the Attic poets: oTa& o 8pa<rov; 
— ol<r& &s iroir}(rou; (do you know tohat you are to do ?), the Imperative is to be 
explained as a transition, easy to the Greeks, from the indirect to the direct 
form of speech. It is also explained by considering it the same as dpaaou, 
olaSr' '6 ; do, — do you know what? The formula is a softer mode of expression 
than the Imp. Spaaov or iroi-naov. The use of the third Pers. Imp., not only 
in dependent questions, but also in other subordinate sentences, is accoi'ding to 
the same analogy. Her. 1, 89. vvv 3)v Troirjaou d>5e, el roi aoeV/cet, ra eycb Xeyw 
KaTiaov twv 5opv<p6pow iirl irdcrrjai rrjai irvXritri <pv\di<ovs ot Xey6vT<av — , &s 
v<pea (sc. xpi)p.o.Ta.) avaynaioos eX €t SeKarev&rivai tw Au (oj Xey6vru>u = kcli 
ovroi Xeyovrwv, who should say, or and let them say). Th. 4, 92. Se^at, 
2 t i — Karda-Snoa-au, they might obtain ! 

Rem. 11. On the transition of the third Pers. Imp. to the second, see § 241, 
Rem. 13, (c) ; on the use of the Fut. instead of the Imp., see § 255, 4, and on 
the Opt. with &u in the sense of the Imp., § 260, 2, (4) (b). 



$ 260. The Modes in connection with the Modal 
Adverb av (k£, kIv). 

1. The Modal adverb av (Epic Ke(v), Doric ko\, k<xv), denotes the 
relation of a conditioning expression or sentence to a condi- 
tioned one ; indicating that the predicate of the sentence to 
which it belongs, is conditioned by another thought either "ex- 
pressed or to be supplied. By the particle av, the realization 
of the predicate is made to depend upon the realization of 
another predicate. Therefore, where a predicate is accom- 
panied by av, the predicate is represented as conditioned by 
another thought ; av always refers to a condition. 

2. A complete view of the use of av cannot be presented 
except in connection with conditional sentences. Yet, as it 
is used in all kinds of sentences, it is necessary to explain 
its construction here. It is connected : 

(1) With the Fut. Ind. The predicate expressed by the 
Fut. Ind., seems to the speaker, at the time then present, 
always to depend on conditions and circumstances. Whenever 
this idea of dependence is to be made specially prominent, av 
(Epic kc) can be joined with the Fut. ; yet this construction is 
rare in the Attic dialect. 

Od. p, 540. el 8' 'OSucrei/s eX&oi — , altpd k e avu & 7rai81 fiias arror {aerai 
avfipuiv, he would punish. II. |, 267. oAA' ?&, iy&> 8e k4 roi Xapircov jxiav 
dwXoTepdwv 5(t>(Tct) 6irviefj.euai,dabo,scil.sitibilubuerit. X. Cy. 6. 1,45. v^picrr^v ovv 
voixifav ahr6v, el old' on dcrjxevos av irpbs dvSpa, oTos crb el, air aXXayi] a er at 
(so the MSS.). 7. 5, 21. '6rav he /col alaSrwvrai rj/xas evdov ovras, ttoXv av en fxaXXov, 
% vvv, axpeloi icovrai vnb rov 4iar€TX7JxSai (&v is wanting in only two MSS.). 



$ 260.] MODAL ADVERB dv. 359 

Remark 1. With the Pres. and Ferf. Tnd., &v is not used. Tor that which 
the speaker expresses as a present object, cannot at the same time be expressed 
as something, the realization of which is dependent on another thought. In 
those passages where av is found with the Pres. or Perf. Inch, either the reading 
is questionable, or 'dv must be referred to another verb of the sentence, e. g. Ova 
olS' av el TTeia-aifii (instead of et ireicraifxL 'dv), Eur. Med. 937 : so often vo[xi(co dv, 
oijxai dv and the like followed by an Inf., where dv belongs to the Inf. ; or it is 
to be considered as an elliptical mode of expression, as in X. S. 4, 37. eycb 8e 
ovtco TroWa e%a>, ws /nohis avra nal iycb & v avrbs eupicTKcc, I have so many tilings 
that I with difficulty find them, indeed if I should seek for them myself I should not 
find them. Nor is dv used with the Imp. For what the speaker expresses as 
his immediate will, cannot be considered as dependent on a condition. The 
few passages referred to in proof of the use of dv Avith the. Imp., are all, criti- 
cally considered,, questionable and prove nothing. 

(2) "Av is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses : the 
Aor., Impf. and Plup. : 

(a) To denote that something might take place under a cer- 
tain condition, but did not take place, because the condi- 
tion was not fulfilled. The condition is then expressed 
by et with the Ind. of the historical tenses. 

Et tovto eXeyes (e\e|as), rj fxdpraves (tj (xapres) &v, i. e. if you said this, 
you were wrong, or if you had said this, you would have been wrong, but now I know 
that you did not say it, consequently you are not wrong ; Lat. si hoc dixisses, 
errasses (at non dixisti; ergo non errasti). E? ti eXxo^ev, £8 (dopey 
(edo/xev) 'av, if ice had anything, we would give it to you, or if we had had any- 
thing, we would have given it to you ; si quid habuissemus, dedissemus. Also with- 
out an antecedent clause, e. g. exdp-ns dv, laetatus fuisses (scil. si hoc vidisses). 

Rem. 2. Here belong also the expressions, cp6u.r)v &v, eyva ns dv, 
ij ff&er 6 t is dv, cper6 tis dv, and the like, as in Latin, putares, crederes, diceres, 
cerneres, videres, you {one) would think, or you (one) would have thought. Here et 
irapriv, el eXeyev, el eldev, el eSvvaro, and the like, as conditioning antecedent 
clauses, are to be supplied. "Ev&a 877 eyvcc tis av rovs 6/j.orifiovs ireTrai8ev^e- 
vovs, cos 8e? (turn vero videres, then one might see, were he present), X. Cy. 3. 3, 
70. "EvSra 877 eyvco tis dv, bcrov afyov etV? rb cpiXeTcr&ai apxovra virb tcov apxope- 
vccv, 7. 1, 38. Ev&vs abv tovtois elsirrjdrjaavTes els rbv Trr]Xbv frarrov, 7) &s tis av 
tie to, jxeTeccpovs e^eK6pncrav tc\s apd^as (celerius. quam quis crederet), An. 1. 5, 8. 
'Eireppcbcr&r) 8' av tis Kanelva Idccv (one might be encouraged if he saw those 
things), Ag. 1, 27. 

Rem. 3. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, av is often omitted. Then 
the speaker has no reference, in his representation, to the condition contained 
in the protasis or antecedent, on account of which the action expressed in the 
apodosis or conclusion could not be completed, but he emphatically represents 
the predicate as an actual fact. X. An. 7. 6, 21. Efrrot 877 ns dv Ovkovv alax^vn 



fi-nv- vvv 8e vfuv KaXci tovs crweiUras. The ellipsis of 'av is most frequent in 
expressions which denote the idea of necessity, duty, reasonableness, possibili- 
ty, liberty, and inclination, e.g.xpyv, ^8ei, ticpeXov, with verbal adjectives 
in t«oj; with irposTJKt, Kaipbs ?) v, elicbs %v, naXbv ?iv, alcxpov ?jv, 



360 SYNTAX. [$ 260. 

&£iov %v, naX&S e?xe, ei-?iv, virrtpx^v, efieXXev, i fiovXo /xr)v. Lys. 
123,3. XP^* 7 5e ere, e'frep rja&a xPVO'tos, 7roAu fiaXXov fiTjvvryv yevia^ai ' ;/{)> 8e 
<rou ra ep7a (pavepa yeyev^raL ic. r. A., ?/o>f .oit^Af or _7/ou owy/if to /taue been 
(oportebat). X. C. 2. 7, 10. et /^.ez/ roivvv alo^xpov ri e/.LeXXov ipydcracrErai, Sava- 
rov avT avTOv irpoai per e ov -fjv' vvv 8' a ^ez/ SoKe? KaXXiara teal irpeirctideo'Tepa 
•ywai|if e7i/cu eirio-ravTai, &s eWe k. t. A., »?ors praeferenda erat. So also with 
the Inf. X. C. 1.3, 3. ovre yap &eo?s e<prj KaXws f^etf, el tcus /J-eyaXais 
frvcriais /j.aXXov -?? reus (TfxiKpals ex^pov, for he said it would not be proper for the 
gods, if, etc. Very often without an antecedent sentence, e. g. alcrxpov fjv 
ravra ttohhv, turpe erat, it would be base, ivould have been; i^rjv ravra Troielv 
licebat, it ivould be lawful ; KaXSj s el% e . Conip. with the above the use of the 
Ind. in Latin, where the Subj. might have been expected, in such expressions as 
aequum, justum, rectum est, it would be proper, longum est, it would be tedious, and 
the participle in dus in the conclusion of a conditional clause, as Si Romae 
Cn. Pompeius privatus esset, tamen is erat deligendus. 

Rem. 4. In all the above expressions, however, &v can be used ; so also in 
Latin, the Subj. is sometimes found instead of the Ind. Dem. Phil. 1. 40, 1. 
el yap eK rod TrpoeXyXv&OTOs XP^ V0V T " Seovra ootol avvefiovXevo'av, ovdev av 
vfias vvv edei fiovXev ea & ai. So also in Lat. the Subj. is used instead of the 
Ind. 

Rem. 5. The Pres. tense of xP"h-> ^ e '» ^posi\Kei, KaX5>s exet, etc., is used of 
things which can yet take place. Comp. possum commemorare, which implies 
that I still can do the act, and poteram commemorare, which implies that I 
cannot do it. 

Rem. 6. "Av is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind. 
of an historical tense of the verb kivSv vve iv, to be in danger, to seem, since 
the verb by itself implies that the action expressed by the Inf. connected with it, 
did not take place ; for what is only in danger of occurring, actually does not 
occur. Th. 3, 74. r) ttoXis e KivSvvevcre iracra 8ia<p£raprivai, el ave/xos eireyevero 
rfj cpXoyl iiricpopos is abrrjv, the whole city was or would have been in danger 
of destruction, if. Aeschin. c. Ctes. 515, R. el (ity Spo/xcp fioXis i£e<pvyoj.<.ev els 
AeXcpovs, e KiySweixra/Mev airoXecr&ai. So if in the apodosis, bxiyov, 
/XL k pod, rax a, nearly, almost, are joined with the Ind. of a historical tense 
in the concluding clause ; for what only nearly takes place, actually does 
not take place, hence the Ind. without av is appropriate in both these cases. 
Plat. Symp. p. 198, C. I^orye iv^vixov/xeyos, on aiirbs ou% otos t' eaou.ai ou8' eyyvs 
rovrcov ovfiev naXbv elire7v, wr' alffxvvqs oXiyov air oh pas cp x^ fir] v, el irrj eJx°^> 
I had almost fled for shame, if. Without a protasis, e. g. X. Cy. 1.4, 8. nai irws 
8iaTrr]8u)V avrcS 6 %-rnros mivrei els yovara, Kal fxiKpov Kanetvov e |ct pax"h *• '" 
o- e v. Comp. the Lat. prope (paene) cecidi, I came near falling. 

(fi) To denote that an action takes place (is repeated), in 
certain cases, and under certain circumstances. The his- 
torical tense in the principal clause is then commonly the 
Impf. The condition under which the action is repeated, 
is expressed by a subordinate clause with el, ore, etc. and 
the Opt. ; the condition, however, is often omitted. 
Elirev &v, he was accustomed to say, he ivould say as often as this or that happened, 
as often as it was necessary, and the like. X. C. 4. 6, 13. et Se ris avr<j> irepi tov 
avr iXeyo i, eVt" rrjv virSSeaiv eTravrjyev av travr a rbv x6yov, as often as 
one contradicted him, he would (he was accustomed, to) carry back the whole argument 
to the original proposition. 1. 3, 4. et 5e' ti 5 6j-eiev avraj (2a?/cpaTet) c^aiVea - - 



$ 260.] MODAL ADVERB av. 361 

SaiirapaTav Srsu>v, t\ttov av i-rreicr&i) irapa to. <T7]/j.aiv6/ J ieva iroiriffai, ?j tf tis 
avrbv eire&ev 6b~ov \aj3e?v ^ye/xova Tvcpxbv — dvA (iXiirovTos. An. 2. 3, 11. e f TiS 
avT<S Sokoit) rcav trpbs tovto TeTay/j-ivoov fiXaKeveiv, iiratev dv, he would beat 
him. 1. 5, 2. ol fxkv ovoi, eVei ns Sicokoi, irpoSpa/j-oures av e gt a<r av, as often as 
any one pursued them, they would stop (the Plup. having- the sense of the Impf. 
§ 255, Rem. 3). 3. 4, 22.. oirdre 5e oidcrxoiev at irtevpal rod irAaiaiov, rb fxiaov 
av e|€7r i^irXacrav. 

3. With the Subjunctive, to represent the future conception, 
which the Greek expresses by the Sub. [$ 257, 1, (a)], as con- 
ditional, and depending on circumstances. The following cases 
are to be distinguished : 

(a) The deliberative Subj. [$ 159, 1, (b)], takes dv, though but 
seldom in direct, more frequently in indirect questions, when 
a condition is to be referred to. 

Tl nor av ovv Xiycafiev; (ivhat shall we therefore say, if the thing is so 1 ) 
etc. PL L. 655, c. iyco yap tovto, 5 Hporay6pa, ovk (f/j.T]v SidaKTbv ifvai, crol Se 
KiyovTi ovk e'x<tf oiras av air io~tS> (i. e. et av \iyeis), I know not how 1 could 
disbelieve it, if you say so, Prot. 319, b. *Av S 5 av 7]fx.e?s viKob/xev, \e\.v/j.ivns T7Js 
yecpvpas oi>x e£ovo~iv ineTvoi, oirov av (p v y oi a i v, X. An. 2. 4, 20. Et di o~oi flij 
Soku, <ricfyai, iav (i. e. el av) t6Sc o~ol fxaWov ap iff icy, C. 4. 4, 12. 

(b) The Subj., which is often vised in the Homeric language instead of the 
Fut. Ind. (§ 259, Rem. 4), is frequently found with &v, which is to be explained 
in the same manner as with the Fut. Ind. [No. 2, (1)]. El 5e Ke pr} Scowo-iv, iyh 
Be Kev avTbs ekoo/j.ai II. a, 137 , then I myself will (without doubt) take it, less 
direct than the Fut. Ok av tol xP a ^ cr f x V xt^apis, II. y, 54. 

(c) In subordinate clauses. In this case, dv usually stands 
with the conjunction of the subordinate clause, or combines 
with the conjunction and forms one word. 

In this way originate idv (from el av), iirdv (from iirel dv), orav (from oVe dv), 
oirSTav (from 6ir6Te 'av), irplv dv, ev& av, o&i dv, ov dv, 'oirov dv, oT dv, oiroi dv, rj 
dv, oirn av, o$ev dv, oirSfrev dv, etc., ts dv (quicunque or si quis),oTos dv, birolos dv, 
oo-os dv, 6tt6(tos dv, etc. In all these expressions, a possible assumption is de- 
noted ; it is assumed that something is possible in the future ; the future occur- 
rence of it depends upon the assumption of the speaker, i. e. the speaker 
assumes and expects that it will be, e. g. iav tovto \iyns, if you say, sliall say 
this (viz. according to my assumption, or as I expect you will), afiapr-ho-p, you 
will be icrong. 

(4) With the Opt, but not with the Opt. Fut. 
(a) The Opt. with dv must always be considered as the principal clause of a 
conditional sentence, even if the condition is omitted, e. g. et ti exois, Sofojs &v> 

31 



362 syntax. [$ 260. 

if you had anything, you would give it (you may perhaps have something, and 
then you may give it to me). The Attic writers in particular, use this mode 
of expression, to denote firmly established and definite opinions and views of 
anything, and even to denote actual facts with a degree of reserve, moderation 
and modesty. A negation is here expressed by ov(k). Her. 3, 82. avSpbs evbs, 
rov apiarov (i. e. et apio~Tos efoj) ovdfv dptivov av (paveirj, nothing would seem 
better than. 7,184. dvdpes av elev eV avToicri reaaspes /xvpidBes Kal efrcocn, there 
may have been two hundred and forty thousand men. 5, 9. ykvo i to 8' av Tray iv 
T<p fiaKpcp xpdvcp, all might happen. X. Cy. 1, 2, 11. fr-npcovres ovk b a pi ar t\- 
<raiev, while hunting they would not breakfast = they do not breakfast. 13. 
iireiSau ra TreVre Kal e'iKoaiv erv SiareXeo'wa'iv, el-no- a v /J.ev av ovtoi irXsi6v ri 
yeyovSrcs t) TrevTrjKOVTa errj airb yeveas. PI. Gorg. 502, d. Arjjx-nyopia &pa ris 
io~riv 7) ttoitjtikt). Call. $aiverai. Soer. Ovkovv i] prjTopucr) drjfxrjyopia av e'trj. 
By the Opt. Avith av, Homer [§ 339, 3, (a) (/3)] and Herodotus often denote a 
supposition resj:>ecting something that is past. Her. 9, 71. ravra /xev ical (p&6vu> 
"av eivoiev, they might have said these things from envy. 1,2. sX-naav 8 s av 
ovtoi KpiJTes, these might have been Cretans. 

Eem. 7. If the Opt. is used without &v, as § 259, 3, (a), the action is ex- 
pressed with greater emphasis and definiteness, since the speaker has no refer- 
ence to the conditioning circumstances, which might prevent the realization of 
the thing conceived. Comp. pe~ia &e6s y i&eXcav Ka\ Tr]X6d-ev avdpa a a 6 a a i, 
the propitious deity, I think, can save, Od. 7, 231, and a a & <r a 1 av, could, 
might save, if he wished. Hence the omission of av in the freer language of 
poetry, is far more frequent than in prose, which has more regard to the actual 
relation of the things described. 

(b) So also the Opt. is used with av, as a more modest and 
mild expression of a command or request, since the thing de- 
sired is represented as dependent on the will of the person 
addressed and is thereby made conditional. Here also a nega- 
tion is expressed by ov(k). 

PI. Phaedr. 227, c. Xeyois &v instead of A676 (properly, you may speak, if you 
choose). Tim. 19, 0. olkovoit av rjdr) to jxerh raxna irepl rr)s TroXireias, you 
might hear then, instead of hear then. S. El. 1491. x w P°? s &v> y ou might go. II. 
0, 250. with a degree of irony, QepaTr — lo-x^o — / ov yap iycb o~eo (prjfu x e P ei <$- 
repov fiporbv aXXov e/x/j.(vai — ' tw ovk av fiaoiXrjas ava. ffr6fx %x <av ayopev- 
01s, Kai acpiv oveided re Trpocp 4 pois, vScrrov re (pvXaaro' is! instead of /at) 
ay6peve, etc., you should not harangue, nor be heaping up reproaches, etc. In the form 
of a question, X. Hier. 1, 1. dip &v fj.01 i&eXrjo-ais, 3> 'Upcov, 8ir)yf)(raofrai, a 
cIkos eldevai ere fieXriov ifxov ; it'ould you be inclined, viz., if I should ask you. With 
ov in the form of a question, II. e, 456. ov k av 87? rovV di/Spa fj.dxvs ipvaaio 
fiereXSfav ; might you not, could you not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him. 
In a sharper and more urgent tone as an exclamation, II. co, 283. ovk av Si) 
fxoi a/xa^av ecpoirXicra air e rdxicrra, ravrd rs irdvr eTri&elre, 'iva Trp-fjcraa)- 
fj.(v 65o7o f - would you not get ready the chariot, if I commanded it 1 



$ 260.] MODAL ADVERB av. 363 

(c) The Optative with av has the same force in interrogative 
as in other sentences, and may commonly be translated by the 
auxiliaries can, could, would. 

II. co, 367. eX ris ere tdoLro . . , ris av 8-n tol voos e^; how would you then feel 1 ? 
II. t, 90. ctAAa rl Kev p e£cu/it; what could I do? S. Ph. 1393. ri Stjt' av 7}/j.e?s 
8pa>/xev; Dem. Phil. 1, p. 43, 10. \4yerai ri Katv6v; yevoiro yap &.v ti Kaivd- 
repov, $) Ma/ceScoj' avrjp 'A&rjvaiovs KaTanoXe/xwu ; can there be any stranger news 
than — ? 

Rem. 8. Comp. iro? tis <pevyei ,- whither does one flee ? Arist. Plut. 438. iro? 
tis <pvyoL ; whither may one flee ? (more definite than with &v). Eur. Or. 598. 
iro? tis &v (pvyoi ; whither would one flee ? whither could one flee ? where in the 
world could he flee ? S. Aj. 403. iro? tis ovv <puyr) ; whither shall one flee or is one 
to flee ? 

(d) The Dramatists, particularly, often express a wish, in the 
form of a question, by 7rcos and the Optative with av, it being 
asked how something might, could, ivould take place under a 
given condition. 

Soph. Aj. 338. d> ZeG, — irws av rbv al/xvXwraTov . . oAeWas reXos h&v o lixi 
Kahr6s ; how might, could, would I die ? instead of, that I might die ! Eur. Ale. 
867. irws av bXoip.-nv; PI. Euthyd. 275, c. irws av Ka\ws <roi 8 irjyqa at- 
fir) v ; how can I appropriately describe to you ? that I could ! 

Rem. 9. But the Opt. in itself, as the expression of a wish, does not take 
the conditioning adverb &v [§ 259,3, (b)]. II. £, 281. S>s k4 oi avSri ya?a x& vot 
is not properly expressed as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus (S>s = 
ovroos) the earth should then open for him. 

(5) The Inf. and Part, take av (kc), when the finite verb, which 
stands instead of the Inf. and Part., would take it : 

(a) The Inf. with &v after verba sentiendi and declarandi, consequently the Inf. 
Pres. and Aor. with &v, instead of the Ind. Pres. and Aor. with &v, or instead of 
the Opt. Impf. and Aor. with &v in direct discourse ; the same principle holds 
when the Inf. is used as a substantive. The Inf. Perfl with &v instead of the 
Ind. and Opt. Plup. with &v, is more seldom. The Inf. Fut. with av is rare in 
Attic ; instead of it the Inf. Aor. or even the Pres. with &v is commonly used. 

Ei ti elxev, ecfrn, 8 ovv ai &v ( Oratio recta : ejf ti elxov, eSco/ca 'av), he said that 
if he had anything, he would have given it, dixit, se, si quid habuisset, daturum fuisse. 
Elf Ti ex°h ^nj, Sovvai &v (Or. recta : e?Ti exoi^i, Soiriv av), dixit, se, si quid haberet, 
daturum, esse. 5 E7a> Sokcc Se/ca/as a v Kara rr\s yrjs Karaduvai i/Biov, 3) dcp&rj- 
vai ovtq) Taireiv6s, X. Cy. 5. 5, 9 (Or. recta: SeKtzKis av air o&dvo i/.li rjSiov, ij 
6(p£retr)v), methinks I would rather sink ten times beneath the earth, than to be seen in 
this humble condition. 'Hyod/xai . . ovk av aKpirovs avrovs airco\o\evai, a.\\a 
t^v irposrjKovo-av SiK-nv 8e 8 a k ivai, Lys. 27, 8 ( Or. recta : ovk av airo\d!>\€- 
aav — iSeS(i>K€(rav &v). Ol/xai yap ovk av a-xapio'Tus fj.oi e | e i v, I think you 
would not be unthankfid to me, if I entreated the king, etc., ( Or. recta : ovk av «x«- 



364 SYNTAX. [$ 261. 

picrrcos [xoi ex olT€ or crxolyre, Du * not e|otTe, see No. 4). "Ova yap fxelfa 
hvvap.iv %x el V Q-PXVi Toaovrco [auWov dv ^yijaaro avrrjv Kal Kar an \r) l-eiv robs 
•noXiras, R.L. 8. 3. riws *X eLS "^pbs rb e&e\eiv av levai aKKrjros eirl Se?7rvov] 
(the same as ttws ex eLS Trpbs rovro on e&eAois au levai &k\7]tos £tt\ oelirvov;) 
Pi. Symp. 174, b. Ej oiv Xeyoip.i, ev o!5\ on 8 i\ p.rjy ope? v dv /xe (pairjs, PI. 
R. 350, e. 

Rem. 10. In Latin the conditioned Inf. is expressed as follows : 
ypdcpeiv dv = scripturum esse, yeypacpevai dv = scripturum fuisse, 
ypa^iai av = (a) scripturum fuisse, or (b) as Pres., scripturum esse, 
ypdipeiv av = scripturum fore. 

(b) The Participle with dv after verba sentiendi, or when the Participle takes 
the place of an adverbial suboi'dinate clause. The same principles hold here 
as with the Inf. The Fut. Part, with dv is rare in Attic Greek (the reading is 
commonly doubtful when it occurs) : instead of the Put. Part., the Aor. or 
even the Pres. with dv, is generally used. 

Her. 7, 15. evpiaKca 8e wSe av yiv6 /xeva ravra, el \dfiois r\\v ep.r\v o~Kevf)V 
(reperio, sic haec putura esse, si sumas vestes meas). X. C. 2. 2, 3. at noXeis 
eivl rots /xeyicrrois a8iKT}jxaai Qqfxiav frdvarov ireiroirjKao'iv, ws ovk av p.ei£ovos naKOV 
<p6&w tt)V aSuciav waver ovt es (existimantes se non gravioris mali metu injuriam 
COErcituros FORE, thinking that they could deter from crime by the fear of no 
greater evil). Th. 6,38. ovre ovra, ovre av yevS/xeva Aoyoiroiovcriv (i. e. & 
ovre earlv, ovr av y e v o t r o, they fabricate what neither is nor will be). Isocr. 
Phil. 133. E5 ftr&t fx-qdev dv /xe rovrwv e irix^<-P'ho' o.vr d o~e irel&eiv, el hvvaff- 
reiav fxovov Kal ivXovrov ewpwv e| avrwv yevr)a6fxevov (= '6n £tt €%6 iprjera dv). 
PI. Phil. 52, c. SiaKeKptfxe&a X°°pls T ° LS Te KaSapas rjdovas Kal rds crx^ ou dKa&dp- 
rovs op&ws av A.exS-ei<ros (= Kal a* crx*b*bv aicd&aproi bp&ws av \ex&&")- 
So, also, with the case absolute : X. An. 5. 2, 8. effKoire'iro, n6repov eYr) Kpetrrov 
airdyeiv Kal robs oiaPefirjKSras, 3) Kal robs oirXiras o~iafSifSd£eiv, ws aXSvros av 
rod x u p' l0v ( = vo/xi(wv, '6ri rb x w P l0V aXolrj 'av). 



$ 261. Position and Repetition of av. "Av ivithout a 

Verb. 

1. With the combination mentioned in 260, (3), c, as %s dv, irplv dv, small 
particles like de, re, /xev, yap, sometimes come between, e. g. bs 8' av. 

2. As dv repi-esents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be joined 
with the predicate, c. g. Xeyoi/xi dv, e\eyov dv ; yet it commonly follows that 
member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. PI. Crito. 53, c. 
Kal ovk oUi da XV P-ov av (pavetaSai rb rov ~2,witpdrovs irpdyjxa. Hence it is 
regularly joined to such words also as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to 
negative adverbs and interrogatives, e. g. ovk dv, oi>5' dv, oviror dv, ovSerror dv, 
etc. — ris dv, ri dv, rt 8' dv, ri B^r dv, ttws dv, ttcos yap dv, dp' dv, etc. ; — also 
to adverbs of place, time, manner, and other adverbs, which, in various ways 
modify the expression contained in the predicate and define it more exactly. 



$ 262.] ATTRIBUTIVE CONSTRUCTION. 365 

e. g. ivrav&a dv, t6t' dv, cIkStws dv, taws dv, rax dv, fxaXio-T' dv, ^kktt' dv, li6\is 
dv, trxoX.fi dv, padiais dv, paar dv, raxicr dv, arcpoSp" dv, TjSews dv, ndv (instead 
of Ka\ dv, etiam, vel), etc. 

Remark 1. In certain constructions, the dp belonging to the Opt. is re- 
moved from the dependent clause, and joined with the principal clause ; this 
is particularly the case in the phrase, ovk o!5' av el. PI. Tim. 26, b. iyk yap, 
a fxev X^ s rfKouaa, ovk av olda el dvvai/xrjv airavra ev Liv?iiJ.ri irdhiv \aj3e?v. 

Rem. 2. In certain parenthetic sentences, the dv belonging to the Opt. is 
placed first; thus particularly, dv ns eHoi, <pait}. PI. Phaed. 87, a. ri ovv (,) av 
(pairf 6 \6yos ( , ) en amarels ; 

3. "Av is very often repeated in the same sentence (k4 very seldom). The 
reason of this is two-fold : 

(a) It is used once at* the beginning of the sentence, in order to show, in 
the outset, that the predicate is conditional. This is particularly the case, 
when the principal sentence is divided by intervening subordinate clauses, or 
when several words precede the conditioned verb to which dv belongs. 8>st' 
dv, el a&evos Ad/Soi/xi SrjXaxrai fx av oV aureus (ppovoi, S. El. 333. 

(b) The second reason is a rhetorical one. "Av is joined with the word 
which requires to be made emphatic. If the rhetorical emphasis belongs to 
several words in one sentence, dv can be repeated with each. But besides this, 
&v can be again placed after the conditioned verb to which it properly belongs. 
PI. Apol. 35, d. ffatp&s y a p dv, el irel^oi/xi v/xas, &eov s av SiSdo-Koifxt fii) 
7]ye?<r&cu v/xcis elvai. Eur. Troad. 1244. atpavels av ovres ovk av i>/xvr]&e?ixev 
av Movcrcus. 

Rem. 3. Homer sometimes joins the weaker k4 with dv, in order to make 
the conditionality or contingency still more prominent. II. v, 127, sq. 'iaravTo 
(pdAayyes . . , as ovt dv Kev "Aprjs bv6aaiTo /xereKSrwv, ovre K 'A&riva'n]. 

4, "Av is very frequently found with a conjunction or a relative without a 
verb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context ; thus especially 
as dv, & strep dv el, irws yap dv, ttws 8' ovk dv, '6 strep dv and the 
like. $opov/xevos, & strep av el irals (i. e. wstrep av (po/3o?To, el trah efoj), PL 
Gorg. 479, a. 



CHAPTER II. 
§262. The Attributive Construction. 

Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea 
contained in the substantive to which they belong, e. g. 
to kcl\6v pohov, 6 /jueryas irals. The attributive may be : 

a. An adjective or participle, e. g. to fca\hv poBov, to 

& dXXov a^09 ; 

31* 



366 syntax. [$ 263. 

b. A substantive in the genitive, e. g. ol rov BivSpov 
Kapiroi] 

c. A substantive with a preposition, e.g. rj 7r p o ? rrjv 
it 6 X i v 0S69 ; 

d. An adverb, e. g. ol vvv dv^pco7roc ; 

e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Kpolaos, 6 fiacrcXevs. 



§ 263. Ellipsis of the Substantive to which the 
Attributive belongs. 
• 

When the substantive which is to he more fully explained by the attributive, 
contains a general idea, or one which can be easily supplied from the context, 
or is indicated by some word of the sentence, or, by frequent usage in a particu- 
lar connection, may be supposed to be known, then the substantive, as the 
less important member in the attributive relation, is often omitted, and the 
adjective or participle becomes a substantive. Substantives which are often 
omitted with attributive adjectives, are : au^pcciros, avbpuitroi, avr)p, dv8pes, yvvf] y 
yvvaiKes, xpypa, XP"hP- aTa i "Kpayixa, Tvpa.yp.ara, i)/u.epa, yr), x^>P a i H-o?pa, 686s, X €l P> 
yvw/nv, ^r}<pos, rex^n, 7roAe^os, etc. ; those omitted with the attributive genitive are : 
irarr)p, fJ.r)T7]p, vlos, ttois, bvydrrip, a.8e\(p6s, a.vr)p (husband), yvvi) [wife), olicla, 
oIkos, xupa, yv {land). The substantive is omitted with the following classes 
of words : 

a. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun, and participle. 

(a) Such as denote persons : ol frvnroi, mortdles; ol aotpoi, ol yeivd/j.evoi (instead 
of yovtLs) : ol exovres, therich; ol (pvKdrrovres {(pvKaKes) ; ol Sucd^ovres, judges; 
ol Keyovres, orators, etc. 

(j8) Such as denote names of things : (a) appellatives : to. rj/xerepa (xpvjuara), res 
nostrae; ra i/xd, res meae, everything ivhich relates to me ; ra. Ka\d, res pulchrae ; rb. 
Kand, mala (§ 243, 4), i) varepala, r) imovaa, r) Trpdcrr), 8evrepa, etc. (r)fj.4pa) ; r) 
TroXefxia (x&pa), the enemy's country ; r) <pi\la, a friendly country ; r) oIkovjx4vti (yr}), 
the inhabited earth ; i) avvSpos (yrj), a desert; r) eu&e?a {686s); rrjv rax't-o-rrjv, quam 
celerrime; tt]v %o-r\v (fxoipav) arrodidouai ; r) ire-H-poo/uewn (jxolpa); i) 8e£id,r) apiarepd 
(xeip); i) viKwaa (yvu/MTj) : r))v ivavriav (i\>r)<pov) rt&eor&at; r) prjropiKr] (rexvy)- 

(b) Abstracts : rb kcl\6v, rb ayd&6v, or rkyaSrov, the beautiful, the good; rb 
evrvx^s, good fortune ; rb auaic^rjrov, want of feeling ; rb kolv6v, the common- 
icealth (e. g. rwv 2a/xiW) : rb bapffovv, confidence. 

(c) Collective nouns denoting persons: to ivavrlov, the enemy ; rb inrnKoov, 
the subjects. Adjectives in -ik6v especially belong here, e. g. rb ttoAltlkov, the 
citizens ; rb ottXitlkov, the heavy armed; rb oikctikov, the servants; rb 'EWtjulkou, 
rb ftapfrapiKov, rb Itvttik6v, etc. The plural of adjectives of this ending is often 
used to denote a number, collection, or series of single events, e. g. ra TpcoiKa, 
the Trojan war ; ra. 'EAJ\.77vnca, the Grecian history; to. vaunted, naval war, but also 
naval affairs. 



§ 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE, 367 

b. The attributive genitive also is used without the governing substantive, 
e. g. 'AxQavSpss, 6 $t\iinrov (vlos), Mcua 7} "ArXavros (&vydrr\p) ; then with the 
prepositions ev, els and oc with the Gen. of a person to denote his abode, e. g. 
ev adov (oiicca) elvai; els adov (oIkov) e\&e?v ; els didaCKaXoov (poirav, to go to the 
tiacher^s; els TlXaruyos <poirS.v, ire/xireiv, to go or send to Plato's ; 4k SiSacr/caAwv 
aira\\drre<rSfC!.i, PL Protag. 326. c. to leave school ; els rr]v Kvpov (yw) e\&e7v; 
to rrjs rvxvs, the events of foHune ; ra rr\s irSXews, the affairs of state ; ra rod 
iroAe/xov, the whole extent of the war ; ra 'A^rjvaicou cppovelv, ab Atheniensium par- 
tibus stare; ra. T7?s opyrjs, ra rrjs 4p.Treipias, rb rwv e-Ki^vjxiwv [Uiat which pertains 
to anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc.) ; rb ran/ iraiSav, tJie custom of boys; 
Tb row aXteuv. 

c. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e. g. of vvv, ol Tore, ol 
■sraXai, ol ev&aSe (av&pairoi), ra. Oikol (irpd.yfx.arti), res domesticae, r\ k\r\s, (•fyuepa), 
the following day, etc. 

d. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposition 
by which it is governed, e. g. oi ko& rjfias, ol i<p>' tj/xcou, our contemporaries ; — c* 
afupl or irepi riva, e. g. U\drwua, signifies (a) a person with his companions, 
followers, or scholars ; oi a/xcpl neicriarparov, Pisistratus and his troops ; ol a/u.<pl 
QaXrjv, Thales and other philosophy's of his school ; T Apa Xeyeis r^v rS>v Srewv 
Kplo-iv, t)v ol irepi Keicpoira St' aper-qv eKplvau, which Cecrops and his tribunal 
on account of their excellence, decided, X. C. 3. 5, 10. — (b) more seldom the com- 
panions, followers, or scholars alone, without the person named. — Further, ol 
gvv rivi, ol ixerd nvos, the followers, etc. of any one ; ol vir6 rivi, the subjects of 
any one ; ol airo nvos, asseclae, or descendants of one ; ol ev &o~rei ; ol irepi <pi\oao- 
<piav ; ol irepi tt)v frftpav ; ol aixcpl rbv irSXe/xov, etc.; — ra. uapd nvos, intelligence 
respecting any one, or commands of any one; — rb tear ifie, rb eir' ejxe, as far as in 
my power, as far as in me lies. 

4 264. a. Attributive Adjective. 

1. The attributive adjective (participle, adjective pronoun 
and numeral), expresses a quality which belongs to an object, 
as the beautiful and blooming rose. On the agreement of the 
adjective with the word which it defines, see § 240. 

Remark 1. The participles \ey6[x.evos and K a\ov/j.evos are used, where the 
Latin has qui dicitur, vacatur, quern dicunt, vacant, etc., and the^ English the 
phrase so-called, as it is called, are called, etc., e. g. AaKeZaifxovioi rbv lepbv itaXov- 
fievov ir6\ekiov earpdrevaav (the Sacred war, as it is called, or the so-called Sacred 
war), Th. 1, 112. 2/cotiw, ottcos 6 Kahov/xevos virb rwv o-o<p\.arihv koo-^os e<pv 
((he Koa ix os as it is called by the sophists), X. C 1. 1, 11. 

Rem. 2. It has already been stated (§ 245, Rem. 5), that the adjectives 
aKpos, pea-OS, etrxaTos, must in certain cases be translated into English by 
substantives. 

Rem. 3. Many personal nouns which denote an employment, station or 
age, arc treated as adjectives, and the word avfjp is joined with them, if the 
man is to be considered in relation to his employment, station or age ; but 



368 syntax. [$ 264. 

the word avrjp is omitted, if the man is considered as merely performing 
the duties of a particular office or employment. Thus avrjp fiavris signifies a 
man who is by profession a prophet, and fidvris without dvr)p, a man who, for 
the time being, acts as a prophet ; thus dvrjp fiaariAevs, avrjp rvpavvos, avrjp iroi- 
fjLTjv, avrjp prjrwp, avrjp TvpeajSvTrjs, avrjp veavias, ypavs yvvr), etc. ; also in the 
respectful form of address among the Attic orators and historians, e. g. uvdpes 
diiccHTTai, &vb~pes <TTpa.TiS>Tou. So likewise with national names, e. g. avrjp "A&rj- 
vcuos, 'Aj3drjpiTrjs. This usage is still more extensive in poetry. See Larger 
Grammar, Part II. § 477. 

2. When two or more attributive adjectives belong to a sub- 
stantive, the relation is two-fold. The relation is : (a) coordinate, 
when each adjective is equally a more full explanation of the 
substantive; then the adjectives are commonly connected by 
Kaiy t€ — /cat; where there are several adjectives, the con- 
nective is used only before the last ; (b) subordinate, when a 
substantive with one of the adjectives forms, as it were, a 
single idea, and is more definitely defined by another adjective. 
In this case there is no connective between the two adjec- 
tives. The subordinate relation occurs particularly when pro- 
nouns, numerals, adjectives of time, place, and material are 
joined with other adjectives. 

^wKpdrrjs ayaSrbs nal crocpbs avrjp r)v. UoWol aya&ol dvdpes or rroAAol 
aya&ol /ecu aocpol dvdpes. IIoAAo Ka\d epya. 'O i fibs eraipos (To(p6s. 
Ovt os 6 avrjp dya&os. Tpe?s dya^ol 'dvSpes. Tb irp&Tov KaXbv irpay/xa. 
Od. i, 322, sq. iarbs vrjbs eeiKocrdpoio fieXaivrjs. 

Rem. 4. The numeral iroWoi is used in Greek, like -multi in Latin, 
generally in the coordinate relation, and in this way the idea of plurality is 
made emphatic, while the English commonly uses the subordinate, e. g. iroWa 
Ka\ KaXa epya, multa et praeclara facinora. The Greek and Latin is many and 
noble deeds, the English commonly many noble deeds. 

Rem. 5. In the Greek, the attributive adjective very frequently takes the 
force of a substantive, and the substantive to which the adjective properly 
belongs, is put in the attributive genitive. Here the following cases are to 
be distinguished : 

a. The substantive stands with the plural adjective which takes the gender 
of the substantive, e. g, oi xpi?crroi rcov av&pwrroov ; tc\ o-irovdcua raiv irpay/xdruv. 

b. The adjective which becomes a substantive is sometimes in the Neut. 
Sing., sometimes also in the Neut. PI. Th. 1. 118, oi 'A&rjvaZoi ewl fieya 
ex& n "°"z.v Svvdfiecos ( = errl fieyaKrjv Svvafiiv), had attained a high degree of 
power. Thus many phrases with rrav,^ e. g. els rrav kukov (in omne genus 
calamitatis) dcpixveloSai ; ev rravrl kclkov elvai ; els irav irpoeK-ijAvSe fiox&yp'ias- 
Moreover, the Neut, pronoun is veiy frequently joined with the genitive, espe- 
cially in prose. Th. 1,49. ^vverrevov is tovto dvdyKrjs, to this degree of 
necessity. X. An. 1. 7, 5. ev toiov tot tov kivSvvov. Dern. Ph. 1,51. els 
Tojy v fipecos eArjAv&ev. 

c. The substantive is made to depend upon the adjective in the Sing, which 
takes the gender of the substantive which it governs, instead of being in the 



$ 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 369 

Neut., e. g. r} iroXXr) ttjs TleXoirovvi]<rov instead of rb iroXv rrjs n. The word 
rj/xKrvs is most frequently used in this manner, often also iroAiij, irXsicav, 
irAeio-Tos and other superlatives, e. g. 6 ^[xicrvs rov xpdvov; i-rrl rfj rjfxio-eia 
ttjs yys. X. Cy. 4. 5, 1. Tre/xTrere rod air on tov ¥i/xto~V)/, twu aprcoj/ rovs 
Tj/J-io-eis. Th. 7, 3. rrjv irAei <ttt\v ttjs <tt par ices irapira^ : so ttoXX^j ttjs 
X^pas, rbu irXe?o~Tov rod xp6uov. Th. 1, 2. rr^s yrjs ?? apicrrr] aet ras /xera- 
jSoAas roil/ olKrjTopav e?x^. 

3. The Greek, like the Latin, frequently uses the attributive 
adjective to define the subject or object, not by itself, but only 
in reference to the predicate. In this way the designations 
of place, time, number, also a reason, condition, and manner 
can be expressed by adjectives, which agree with a substan- 
tive in gender, number, and case. 

a. Adjectives of place and order. Od. (p, 146. T£e (xvxoiraros aid in- 
stead of eV uvxoirdTw. Also, Trpwros, Trporepos (of hvo), uararos, voTtpos (of 
two), fxecros, reXevTcuos, irXayios, /xerewpos, aicpos, frupouos, &aXd(T(nos, etc. S. 
Ant. 785. <poiras vir e pnr out to s instead of uirep rbv tt6vtov. Th. 1, 134. 'Iva 
fj.7) virai&ptos TaXanrupolrj, that he might not suffer in the open air. Here belong 
also 7r as, %Kao~Tos, ktcdrepos, afxcpw, a/x<poT e po s, etc. § 246, 5, 6 and 7. 

b. Adjectives of time, e. g. o^ios, op&pios, eoo&Li/os, ecnrepios, vvxios, /xecouvKTios, 
frepiz/os, x^'C°' s » eapiv6s, x^ l t xe P lv ° s ^ etc ) especially those in -alos, e. g. SeuTepcuoy, 
rpnaios, etc., xp^ ulos {after a long time), etc. II. a, 497. rjepir] 8' av4$r\ fxeyav 
ovpav6v instead of -fjpi, she went earhj. X. An. 4. 1, 5. <t kot taiovs SieX&dv 
to 7re8tW, to pass through the plain in the dark. T erapTatos, Tre/xirraTo s atyt- 
Kero, he came on the fourth, fifth day ; x P <$ v i o s ?jX&ey, after a long time. 

c. Adjectives of manner and other relations, e. g. ol-vs, raxvs, al<pvi8ios, 
Ppafivs, virocnroudos, 'do-n-ovSos, opKios; ckwj/, i&eXovcrios, 'dutov, clokvos, ifreXovrris ; 
^o-vxos; ffvxvos, iroXvs, a&p6os, ttvkv6s, o"rrduios, /xovos, e. g. vir 6 arrovSo i airjfe- 
<rav = inrb <nroub'a?s, they wend away under a truce. Th. 1, 63. robs venpovs 
viroo"7r6vdovs aireSoa-av rols UoriSaLdraLs, they gave up the dead under the truce. 

Rem. 6. But when the qualifying words cannot at the same time express 
a quality of the subject or object, but belong solely to the predicate, the 
adverb must be used, e.g. icaXas aSeis, you sing beautifully (not KaXbs aSeis, 
for the person who sings beautifully, is not necessarily beautiful). When the 
Greeks expressed such designations of place and time, as properly belong to the 
predicate, by adjectives, it is to be explained as resulting from their vivid mode 
of conception. For example, earirepios fjX&e, vespertinus venit, he came (as it 
were) enveloped by the evening. 

Rem. 7. The distinction between irpZros {irp6Tepos, vcrrepos, tiara- 
ros), irpdrriv (ir poripav, v ffr 4pav, vo , rdrr}v), and irpwrou (7rpjT€- 
pov, vo-t e pov, vffTarov or vcrrara), fxSvos, (x6vt)v and fj.6vov r^v 
iin<TToX7]u eypatye, appears when the sentence is analyzed; irpS>ros, fiovos 
mean, i" am the first, the last, the only one of all who has written this letter, like 
primus scripsi ; ir p & t 77 v, varrdTTiu, fj.6vr\v ttju iivio-ToX^u eypa^a, this letter 
was the first, the last, the only one I have written; the adverbs irpwrov, irp6repov, 
etc., on the contrary, are used in stating several actions of the same subject, in 
the order in which they occurred, e. g. 'O irais vpQ'rov fieu t^v iiriaroX^v 



370 syntax. [H 265, 266. 

erypcopev, eireira eTrcucrev, varara 8e airier, or irpwTov, vcrrarov, for the 
first, last time; so the adverb povov places the predicate in opposition to 
another predicate, p.6vov iypatya. ti]v £ttio-to\t)v, I have only written the letter, 
(not sent it). 



$ 265. Attributive Genitive. 

The attributive genitive will be considered in treating the 
genitive, $ 275, Rem. 5. 

§ 266. c. Apposition. 

1. A substantive is said to be in apposition, when it is put 
in the same Case with another substantive or with a substan- 
tive personal pronoun, and even with a personal pronoun implied 
in a verb, for the sake of defining these words more fully ; if 
the appositive denotes a person, it is also put in the same gen- 
der and number, as the word which it defines, comp. $ 240, 1. 
An appositive referring to two or more substantives is put in 
the plural, when it is a common noun. 

Kvpos, 6 fia<Ti\evs. To/j.vpis, 7/ f$a<ri\£ia. 'E/ceTvos, 6 /Sac i\evs. X. Cy. 
5.2,7. ttjv frvyarepa, SeifoV ri KaWos koX fieye&os, i^dywu wds eiTrev. Th. 
1, 137. efiiaroKXri s H\kw irapa <re, 7, Themistocles, have come. Luc. D. D. 
24,2. b Se Matas rrjs "PirXavros Sian ov ov/j.ai avrols (instead of iycb 6 
Maias sc. vl6s). 

2. When a substantive is in apposition with a possessive 
pronoun, it is put in the Gen., since the possessive pronouns 
take the place of the Gen. of the personal pronouns. 

'Efxbs ( = i/xov) tov d.d-Aiou fiios, the life of me, wretched, ahxiov being here in 
opposition with ifj.6s. Ta/xa ( = to 4/xd) rod Zvo-ri)vov /ca/ca, the evils of me, un- 
happy one ! 277 rrjs KaWia-r-ns ev/xopcpia, thy gracefulness, most beautiful one ! 
In English, as the examples show, such a Gen. with the possessive may be 
often expressed by an exclamation, e. g. 'EXealpw tov o~bv tov a&xiov fiiov, I 
pity thy life, wretched one ! or by an accessary clause, e. g. I pity thy life, thou who 
art so miserable. So too the Gen. is put in apposition with adjectives which stand 
in the place of the attributive Gen. PI. Ap. 29, d. 'A&tjj/cuos &v ir6Xeas 
rrjs (xeyio'T'ns (instead of 'Afrnvwv, irSXecos), tt6\€cos being here in apposi- 
tion with 'ASrnvcuos which is equivalent to 'ASrnvwv. On the expressions 6 
TjjueVepos, vfMtTepos, o-cperepos avruv ir<nr)p, see the remarks on the pronouns. 

Remark 1. On the ellipsis of the words vios, iraTs, bvydrrip, yvvi), etc. in 
apposition, see § 263 ; on the use of the article in apposition, see § 244, Rem. 6. 
In the phrases ovo^d iarri tuu, ovofia riS-nixi (T&eiicu) riui and the like, the name 



5 206.] APPOSITION. 371 

itself, as an appositive, is put in the same Case, e. g. "Ovofxd iari fioi 'Ayd&ew, 
my name is Agathon. O irais eXeyev ovojxa slvou kavrai ^Aydbzva. 'Ei/rav&a fy 
ir6\is /xeydA.7}, ovojxa 5' avrfj Kopawrtj, X. An. 1. 5,4. ib. 2. 4, 13 and 25. Tavrrj 
rfj ^woiKia idre/xeSa irohiv ovofxa, PL Up. 369, c. (to this community we gave 
the name city, culled it a city). 'Av7?p Tr4vt\s Kal Sr)[iortKbs iKrrj<raro rty fiao-iXiKwrd- 
rr\v Kal freiordrrtv tv po s^y o piav, rbv Ainaiov, Plut. Ar. 2. (received the 
surname, the Just). (The Gen. also is used in the same phrase : ^cokiwv e/m'/craTo 
rfyv rod Xjotj err ov Trposriyopiav, Plut. Ph. 10. The Nom. also occurs: 
\A.j/??/3 yevSpevos Trposei\7](p€ r\\v iwv -Kov^pcau koivt}V £tr<avv[ji.iav o~v Kocpdpr 7} s, 
Aesch. f. 1. § 27.) See 269, Rem. 3. 

Rem. 2. A substantive in the Nom. or Ace. sometimes stands in apposition 
with the whole sentence ; in the Nom., when the appositive expresses a judg- 
ment on the whole sentence 5 in the Ace, when the appositive denotes a thing 
accomplished, a result, a purpose, or object, e. g. Eur. Or. 496. eVel yap i^Trvev- 
Utv ' Ay a/Lie/M/toi/ $iov, irArjyets frvyarpbs r-qs ifiTJs (caesus a Jilia mea) virep Kapa, 
— a¥o~ X l<rT ov ' fpyov! II. w, 735. tf ris 'Axcucuv (avrbv) ptyei x ei pbs ekebv 
ccrrb irvpyov, Kvypbv o\e&pov. Eur. Or. 1105. 'E\4vnv Krdvw/uLep, Me^eAew 

AU7T7JJ/ TTlKpdv (L C C&ST6 elvCU \V177)V TTLKpdv). AeSch. Ag. 225. eTA7J bvT^p 

ysuecrSrcu Svyarp6s, TroXefxtov apwydv (aSsre efocu apcaydv). In like manner, a 
Part, or adjective is sometimes added as a clause in apposition to a whole sen- 
tence, e. g. Ilei&et (' Airdhkcw) 'Opiarriu fir]r4p', % crfy' iyeiuaro, fcrelvai, irpbs 
oi>x air auras eu/cAe lav Kpepou (a deed that brings no fame), Eur. Or. 30. 
Kal 8-r) Trapelrai (solutum est) aaifxa, col /xeu ov (pi\ov Suppl. 1070. 

Rem. 3. The Inf. also is sometimes used as a clause in apposition with a 
word, especially with demonstrative and relative pronouns, so as to define 
more exactly an idea before expressed in a general manner. Ov yap iirl 
rovrco Kd&7]rai 6 oiKa<rrr)S, iwl r <3 Karax a -P i C*°~& ai T « SiKaia PL Apol. 
35, c, the judge does not sit for this, viz., for the purpose of compromising justice for 
favor. *A h% wposrerafcrai rfj fxavrucrj, iir i<r kott el> rods *Eparas Kal lar- 
peveti/, Symp. 188, c. 

3. With a substantive, expressing the idea of plurality, one 
substantive or even several substances denoting the parts of 
that plurality or whole, are often put in apposition, instead of 
being in the Gen. according to the natural construction. This 
may be called distributive or partitive apposition. Here belong 
especially the words ckco-tos, eKarepos, 7ras {every one), ol /jlcv — 
ol hi, aAAos aXkov {alius alium, one this, another that, one another, 
or mutually), aAAos a\\o$ev (alius aliunde, one from one place, 
another from another, or one on one side, another on another). The 
subject, which denotes the plurality or whole, may be implied in 
the verb. This kind of apposition is used when the whole is to 
be expressed with the greater emphasis, while with the Gen. 
the parts are to be made more prominent. 

Od. a, 424. S^ r4re /ca/c/ceiWres t$av oiK.6voz eKaffros (in suam quisque 
domum sese contulerunt, they went each one to his own house). Her. 3, 158. efxevov 
iu rfj kw'vrov rd^t eKaaros (in suo qiusque ordine manserunt). Th. 1, 89. olnlai 
a I /lie j/ 7roAAai (= rwu oikiwv iroWal) iTreTrrwiceaai', b\iyai §e irtpiri<rav. X. 
R.L.6, 1. eV rah aAAeas 7r<fa.e<n rwv eavrov tKa<rros Kal iraiSwv Kal olicercov Kal 



372 syntax. [$ 267. 

XpW < * TC0V &PX 0V0 ~ lv ( su * s qui s 9 ue h'beris imperant). Cy.3. 1, 3. SieSt'Spaer/co p 
jjSf) eKOCTOS eVl to eavrou, fiov\6p.eyoi to our a iiaroScbi' iroieTa&ai. C. 2. 7, 1. 
toj- airoptas ye toou <pi\wv t&s y.ev cV 'dyvoiav iTreiparo (2u>Kpdrris) yuca/xTj 
aKe7<r&ai, tos 8e $i eVSeicw StSacr/ccui/ nark 5wa/j.iv a\\r}\ois iirapicelu. PI. 
Charm. 153, 6. /ecu fxe us eldov elsiSura e£ a.TrposSoK7)Tov, ev&vs TrSppca&ev T\o"nd- 
£ovro &XKos dWo&ev (they ivelcomed me one from one place, another from 
another). Still, in this case the verb sometimes agrees, not with the appropri- 
ate subject, but with the words eKacrros, iras. X. An. 1. 8, 9. irdures ovtol Karb. 
%&pr) eV TrXcuoriu irA-qpei ay^-pwirwu eKaarov eSrvos iir opei ero. The parti- 
tive appositive is often accompanied by a participle. X. Cy.3. 1,25. evioi 
(pofSovfxevoi, fxrj \r](p&evTes airoSrauuxriv, virb rod <p6fiov irpoairo&vi]o~KOvo~iv, ol fxev 
p ltttovvt €5 kavrovs, ol 5e a 7r a y x o jx e v o i, oi 5e air o a <p ar r 6 {jlsvo i. 
Her. 3, 82. avrbs % kq.fr to s fiov\6/xevo s Kopvcpcuos dual yucajMrjai re vikuu, 
is ex&ea fxeyd\a aWrjXoiai airiK vio vrai. Here belong those passages, in 
which, after the principal subject, there is another subject in the Nom. with a 
Part, connected with it ; the latter subject, however, making a part of the prin- 
cipal subject. Th. 4, 73. (ol 'A&7)va7oi) 7)avxa(ou, Xoyi^ojxeuoi KaX ol 
ineiuwu ffT paT-nyol (x)} auriiraXou eluai o-<plo~i rbu KiuSvuou, the Athenians kept 
silence, since even their generals, namely, of the Athenians, supposed that, etc. 

Rem. 4. In the same manner in poetry, especially in Epic, but very seldom 
in prose, two objects (commonly in the Ace.) are joined to one verb ; the first 
of these denotes the entire thing, the other, that part of it to which the action 
of the verb is particularly directed, both being in the same Case. This figure 
may be called ax^^o. Ka& oXou k<x\ /u.epos, i. e. a construction by which 
the part is put in apposition with the whole, instead of the word denoting the 
whole being in the Gen. and governed by the word denoting the part. If the 
whole expresses a plurality, a distributive apposition may take place. Uoi6v 
are enos <pvyeu epnos oSSutccu, Od. a, 64, what a word escaped thee, thy lips! 
where epxos the part is in apposition with ere, the whole. Tpuas de rpS/xos 
alubs vTrr]Xv&e yvla eKao'rou, II. u, 44. 'Axcttcucr iv 8e fxeya a&4vos tjxfiaX 
cado-Tca Kaptly <xXXt]ktou TroXe^eiu r/5e /xdxecr&ai, II. £, 152, sq. 



CHAPTER III. 

§ 267. The Objective Construction. 

As the attributive construction (§ 262) serves to define 
the subject, or in general, a substantive idea, more fully, so 
the objective construction serves to complete the predicate, or 
define it more fully. By object, is to be understood here 
everything which, as it were, stands over against (objectum 
est) the predicate, i. e. everything which stands as the com- 
plement of the predicate and defines it more fully : (a) 



$ 268.] . THE cases. 373 

the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their Cases, (c) the Infini- 
tive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. 

Remark. The object completes the idea of the predicate, when the predicate 
necessarily requires an object, e. g. 'ETrifrvfiw rrjs apeTrjs. BovAo/j.cu ypd<peiv. 
The object defines the idea of the predicate, when the object is not necessarily 
required, e. g. Tb pSSov av&e? iv t<5 k^ttw. The predicate is thus defined by 
the specifications of time, place, degree, means, manner, and instrument. 



§ 268. I. The Cases. 

1. All the relations, which the Greek denotes by the 
Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, were originally consid- 
ered relations of space. 

2. The action of a verb, with which the substantive 
object is connected, is contemplated under the idea of 
motion. In this manner the object of the verb appears in 
a three-fold aspect : first, as that from which the action 
of the verb proceeds ; secondly, as that towards which 
the action of the verb tends ; thirdly, as that by or with 
which the action of the verb takes place. In this way 
three Cases originate : the Genitive, denoting the motion 
or direction whence, the Accusative, whither, and the Da- 
tive, ivhere. 

3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man- 
ner as those of space. Thus the Gen. (the whence-case) 
denotes the time from which an action is conceived as 
proceeding ; the Ace. (the whither-case), the time to which, 
or over which the action is conceived as moving ; and the 
Dat. (the where-case) the time in which an action is con- 
ceived as existing. 

4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as 
relations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the 
author), was conceived as a local outgoing of an action 
from an object (Genitive) ; the effect (the result, the con- 
sequence), as a motion towards an object (Accusative) ; 
the means (the instrument), as the resting of an action 
with or in an object (Dative). 



374 syntax. [§§ 269, 270. 



§ 269. Remarks on the Nominative and Vocative. 

1. The Nom. and Voc, so far as they do not express objective relations, 
cannot be considered as Cases ; the Norn, is the form for the subject, and the 
Yoc. is the form which is used in calling to or in a direct address to a person 
or a thing. But also the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined 
to the subject by the copula elvai, is expressed, as in other languages, accord- 
ing to the laws of agreement, by the nominative ; and even the objective rela- 
tion of an effect or result with the verbs mentioned in § 240, 2, is viewed in the 
Greek and Latin as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nominative. 

Remark 1. "With the verbs ovopLaCeiv, dvo/j.d(ecr&a.i and the like, the Inf. ehat 
is often added to the Nom. or Ace, and thus in some degree the relation of 
the effect or result is indicated. Her. 4, 33. to* ovo/xd(ov<ri ATjAtot elvat 
,r tiT€p6xnv re koI AaoSiKrju. 5, 99. arpaTriyovs dWous cwre8e|e (instead of &7re- 
5ei|e) Mi\r]aicoi/ eivai. 

Rem. 2. On elvai, and yiyveo-frat. with an abstract word, see § 284, 3 (9). 

Rem. 3. Since the Nom., as the Case of the subject, denotes an object as 
independent, the Greeks use it not only in the case mentioned in § 266, Rem. 
1, but even with verbs of naming in the active. Her. 1, 199. MvXirra Se 
Ka\eov<ri tt,v 'AcppoSirrju 'Aaavpioi, the Assyrians call Aphrodite, Mylitta. 

2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Voc. in a direct sum- 
mons or call ; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. contains an explana- 
tory exclamation, which takes the place of a sentence. Here belong particu- 
larly the following instances : 

(a) Outoj either alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a proper name, 
is often used when one calls out to another, in the sense, ho there ! hens tu : PI. 
Symp. 172, a. 6 $a\Tipevs, e<pr), ovros y Airo\\6S w po s, ov irepiixeve?s ; 
which means, see ! this is that Apolloolorus, the Phalerean, who comes there ! 

(b) Very often in this way, the Nom. with the article, is joined as an apposi- 
tive to a call or direct address. 

PL Symp. 218, b. oi 5e oltcer ai, na\ d tls aXXos earl fiefiTjXos re Ka\ aypol- 
kos, 7rv\as irdvv /xeyaXas tols acrlv iir&ecr&e (the same as, v/x<=?s Se, oIkstcu oures). 
X. Cy. 4. 5, 17. ?&l /j.£V ovv av, %<pt), 6 it peo-fivrar o s (instead of av, os el irp.). 



$ 270. (1) Genitive. 

The Gen. is the Whence-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a 
local relation, the object or the point from which the action of 
the verb proceeds, e. g. eiKew 68ov, ceclere via, to withdraw from 
the way ; (b) in a causal relation, the ground, origin, or author, 
in general, the object, which calls forth, produces, excites, occa- 
sions the action of the verb, e. g. imSy/Aia rrj<s apeTrjs ($ 268) ; 
aperrjs is here the object which calls forth, etc. the desire ex- 
pressed by eVi^u/ico. 



$ 271. J LOCAL RELATION OF THE GENITIVE. 375 

$271. A. Local Relation. 

1. The use of the Gen. expressing purely local motion is 
rare and only poetic, e. g. Et /xrj rovSt 7reio-avT€s Xoyto ay oiv to 
vtjo-ov (ab insula abducerent) S. Ph. 613; this relation is com- 
monly indicated by prepositions with the Gen., e. g. air 6, from, 
e/c, out of, nap a, from near an object, etc. 

2. But the Gen. very often expresses the relation of separa- 
tion, namely, with verbs denoting removal, separation, loosing, 
abstaining, desisting, ceasing, freeing, depriving, differing from, 
missing, deviating from. Genitive of separation. 

Prose words of this kind are : irapax^petv, virox^pe'iv, etiteiv and vireliceiv, 
viravicnaa^ai and e^icrTaff^ai, voa<pi£eiv, x w p' l C €tv i Biopi^eiv; acpievai, cupieoSai, 
airexeiv, airexear^ai, iraveiv, iravea&ai, KaiXveiv, ip-qrveiv, etpyeiv, \veiv, i\ev&epovv, 
arraWdTTetv, arepetv, airoffTepeTv arepeo'^ai, xvpow* iprifMovv, Stacpepeiv, afxapTd- 
veil/, a<pd\\eo-&ai, ypevSea^ai, etc. ; Biexeiv and airexeiv, to be distant, etc. 

Her. 2, 80. ol vecarepoi avrecov ToTcri irpeo'fivTe'poio'i avvTvyxavovres etnovffi 
ty}S 6Sov (withdraw) from the way). X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. vttox<*>P^v tou ire- 
Siov (to retire from the plain). Hier. 7, 2. ir apax<*> petv 6Sov. Symp. 4, 31. 
vwaviGT avr ai §e fxoi ¥)Zr\ koX frdiccov Ka\ oh oiv e^icravrai ol ir\ov<rioi 
(rise up from their seats and turn aside from the road). Vectig. 4, 46. air 4x ei 
t5>v apyvp eiav r) eyyvrara tt6\is Meyapa iro\v irXeiov tgov irevTaKoalwv ara- 
Sicav (is distant from the silver mines). PI. Menex. 246, e. eiriarr]ix-n x w P l C°* 
(levn 8 iKaio crvvqs (knowledge apart from justice). Ylavo^iai x^Aou (1 
cease from anger). Auco, airaWdrrca riva, kcikuv (I free one from evils). 
Her. 3, 81. yvdo/x-ns rrjs apicrr-ns r) /xapr-n ice (he has mistaken the best view) . 
5, 62. rvpdvvwv ?)Aev&e p oj&r) a a v. X. Hier. 7, 3. doice? /xoi rovrco 8 i a (pi- 
pe iv avrip tS>v a\Kav ((txov, t<£ ri/Arjs opeyeaSrcu (to differ from other ani- 
mals). — \pev8ofxai, a (pa\\o p.ai e Air i Bos, S6$ys, rvxys (to be cheated, 
to be deprived of hope, etc.). 'Acpirifii riva rrjs air i as. 'Airoffr e pia riva 
r£>v aya&wv. Trjs flao* iXetas ear eprjfxai. Comp. § 280, Eem. 3. 

Remark 1. Many of these verbs are often constructed also with the propo- 
sition arrS, e. g. e\eu£repovv, airaWarreiv ct7r<J (of persons, as eAev&epovv rrjv 
'EAAaSa ano rcov MrjSwv), \veiv, eXpyeiv, arzeipyeiv, ep-nrveiv. 

3. In like manner, the Gen. of separation is joined with ad- 
j ectives, adverbs, and substantives which express the same idea as 
the above verbs, e. g. eAev^epos, povos, xaSapos, kcvos, tprjfios, yvpvos, 
op^avos, i/aAo's — Scdcpopos, aWorpLos (with the Dat, disinclined), 
dAAoto?, erepos; with many adjectives compounded of a priva- 
tive ; with av€V, xupk, ttXyjv, €$10, Uds, Stxo-y nipav, etc. 



376 syntax. [$$ 272, 273. 

S. El. 387. at 5e crdpKes at Keval (ppevav aya\}xaT ayopas elaiu (bodies without 
minds). Her. 3, 147. aira^^s Kanwv (without suffering evils, \. Q. free from). 
Th. 1, 28. (piAovs iroielaSai erepovs rwu vvv ovtwv (to make friends other 
than, different from the present ones). X. C. 4. 4, 25. iroTepov robs Steovs yyij to. 
Zinaia vo/xo^eTelv, % &\Xa ruv ducaiwv. Cy. 3. 3, 55. anaidevTos p.ov- 
ct/cTjs (uneducated in music). So Sti/xos iiralvwu. Ave is, eAev&epia 
Kaicwv. Her. 6, 103. tt4 p-nv rrj s 65 ov (on the other side of the way). Dem. 
Phil. 1. 49, 34. rov iraax<ziv avrol nanoiis e|« yevrjaecr&e. 

4. Here belong verbs of beginning and originating, e. g. 
apxecrSai, apx^v, virapytw, Karapyew, e^apyew. 

*Apxe<r&ai rivos, e.g. rov tro A 4/j.o v, means simply to begin something, 
without any other relation: ~2bv to7s &eo7s apx e cr&ai xph "ravrbs epyov (to 
begin every work with the gods) ; but &px et,/ > virdpx^i-v, nar apx*iv have a 
relation to others beside the subject, i. e. they signify not merely to begin abso- 
lutely, but to begin before others, to do something first or before others, to begin first, 
hence to be the cause or author: Tobs i&eKovras (pvyris a"px*iv iro\v Kpeirrov 
crbv ro?s TroX^fj-lois rarrofidvovs, 3} iv rfj Tj/xerepa rd£ei, bpav (it is better to see those 
disposed to begin the flight [set the example of flight] in the enemies' ranks than in 
ours), X. An. 3. 2, 17. 'H rjfiepa ro7s "EAA^cn /xeydXav KaK&v &p£ei (will 
begin, be the cause of great calamities), Th. 2, 12. "firapxtiv a5tKa>v ipyuv, 
tvepyGffias. 

"Rem. 2. *Apx*cr&ai air6 rivos (or iro&ev) means, to proceed from a thing 
and to begin with it, e. g. dpxecr&aL airb rwv o-Tot%e.W, to begin with the first prin~ 
ciples. 

h 272. B. Causal Relation. 

The Gen. in the causal relation signifies, also, an outgoing, 
but not, as in the local relation, a mere outward relation, but an 
inward and active one, since it expresses the object by whose 
inward power the action of the subject is called forth and 
produced. 



$ 273. (a) The active Genitive, or the Genitive as the 
general expression of Cause. 

1. The active Genitive stands in the first place, as the Gen. 
of origin or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to 
originate from, spring from, produce from, be produced from, 
e. g. yiyvecrJai, cpvav, <pvvai, eTvat. Genitive of origin or author. 

Her. 3, 81. apicrruv av5pibv oltcbs dpicrra fiovXev/Aara yiyveo*&ai (it is 
reasonable that the best designs should originate with, from the best men, the av5pa>v 



$ 273.] CAUSAL GENITIVE. 377 

being active in, or the cause of the result). X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. Trarphs /xev Sfy 
AeyeTcu o Kvpos yzvea&ai K a/j. I3vcr ov, Uepacov jBaai\ecos (to be the son of 
Cambyses) ' 6 5e Ka/j.j3var)s ovtos tov Tlepcre&wv yiuovs i\v (sprung from the race 
of Persidae) ' fxrjTpbs Se 6/j.oXoye7rai Maud awn s ysv ia&ai. PL Menex. 
239, a. [Aias LL-nrpos -rravres atie\<pol (pvuTcs. Attributive Gen.: 'O tov 
jSatriAf'wj vlos t i. e. 6 (4k) tov fiacriXiws yevwn&els vl6s. Ta t£>v av&pc&irav 
vpayfiara. 

Remark 1. Commonly the preposition 4k, more seldom onrd, is connected 
with the genitive. 

2. The active Genitive stands, in the second place, as that 
object which has gained another, made its own and possesses 
it; the Gen. therefore denotes the owner or possessor. This 
Gen. stands : (a) with the verbs thai, yeviaS^at (to belong to), 
7roieio-Jai, to make one's own; (b) with the adjectives tStos (also 
with Dat), oi/ceTos (with Dat, inclined), Upos, Kvpto^. Possessive 
Genitive. 

Antiph. 5. 140, 92. to fieu aKovaiov afxapT-n/xa ttjs Tv-^-ns 4o~Ti, t2> 5e 
ckovoiou tt]s yj/c*>[A7)s (an involuntary fault belongs to fortune, a voluntary one 
to our own iv ill). Lys. Agor. 135, 64. iyevtTO 6 Evfx.dpT)s ovtos N ikokXcovs 
(belonged to Nicocles, was his slave). Th. 5, 5. 4y4veTo Meaarjur] AoKpwv Tiva 
Xpovov (belonged to the Locrians). Trjs avTrjs yuw/x-qs eluai (ejusdem sententiae esse). 
'Eavrou eluai (to be one's own master). Dem. Phil. 142, 7. fjv v/xav avTwu 
4Se\7i<rr)T€ yepea&ai (to be your own masters), non ex aliis pendere. Also eluai 
twos, alicujus esse, alicui addictissimum esse, to belong to some one, to be earnestly 
devoted to something, e. g. eluai QiXiirirov ; eluai tov fieXTio'Tov (studere rebus optimis). 
X. Ages. 1, 33. t)]v 'Acriau kavT&v iroiovvTat (they bring A. under their 
power). Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. r\ ir6\is rj/xwu Kvpia yeuo(j.4uy] toiovtcov aya- 
&au ovk i<p&6vr)ae to?s 'aXXois (having become the possessor of such advantages). X. 
An. 4. 5, 35. tfKovtrev a\>Thv (tov 'itvttov) iepbu eluai tov 'HAi'ou (sacred to 
the sun). 5.3, 13. 6 iepbs X"P 0S T V* 'Apr'e-filSos. Dem. 01. 1. 26,28. oi 
Kivdvvoi tSiv £<peo-T7)K 6toov (ducum) XSioi, /xioSrhs 8' ovk taTiv. 2.32, 16. 
TavT7]s Kvpios T7js x^P as ywfiorrcu. In the attributive relation: 'O 
tov (iacriXeas ktjttos. 'H 2w/cpaTOu$ aptT-n. IlaTTip N e ottto A 4/u.o v. 

Rem. 2. The Gen. is connected with \4yeiv, cpduai, vojxi^eiv, riye?o-&ai, npivsiv, 
vTvo\ap.$aveiv, as it is with thai. Dem. 01. 2. 34, 21. SiKalov xoKitov icpiva 
ttju to>u TrpayixaTW aooTt\piav q.ut\ ttjs iv tQ \4yeiu x a P LT0S aipe?o~&at. 

(c) Hence the Gen. with etvat denotes also : (a) the charac- 
teristic, peculiarity, habit, etc. of a person or thing, the charac- 
teristic, peculiarity, etc., being commonly expressed by an Inf. ; 
(/?) a property or quality, viz., price, measure, number, time, space, 
etc., also what is requisite for a thing. Genitive of quality. 

32* 



378 syntax, [$ 273. 

'A j/ S p6s earivaya^oved iroieiv tous (piAovs. In English this Gen. is 
translated in various ways, e. g. it is the business, manner, custom, peculiarity, duty, 
mark of a brave man ; it becomes a brave man ; it bespeaks a brave man ; a brave 
man is ivont, and the like. Dem. Phil. 1, 54. icaicovpyov ia-rl Kpi&evr airo- 
S-aveTj/, <r t par wy ov Se fxax^fxevov ro?s iroAe/xiois (it is the characteristic of a 
criminal to die being sentenced, but of a general to die fighting, etc.). 01. 1. 18, 2. 
ea"Tt twv al<r x P & v (Neut.), /xaWov Se twv al <r% icr twv, irdXewv, wv tfxev 
7T0T6 Kvpioi, <paivecr&ai Trpoiefxevovs. Chers. 102, 48. dotce? ravra /ecu Sa7r dvns 
jxeydx-ns /cat it 6v wv irohAwv kol\ wpay/xaTeias el vat ( this seems to be 
the mark of great expense, much labor). Aphob. 1. 814, 4. e/xe eirr £twv ovra 
(of seven years, i. e. seven years old). X. An. 7. 4, 16. ~2,i\avbs MaKecmos, eTwv 
oKTwicaidena &v, <TT]fxaivei tt? aaXiviyyi. 1. 4, 11. 6 Evcbpdrrjs iroTafxbs rh 
eipSs i(TTi Terrdpoov aTaSiwv I of four stadia in width = four stadia icide). 
Attributive Gen.: 8 4 k a /xvwv xup'iov, Isae. 2, 35 (a place of [costing] ten 
minae). The Gen. is but seldom used to denote other qualities, e. g. Tr\s avrrjs 
yvwjx-ns elvai, ejusdem sententiae esse, to be of the same opinion. fAA/a^aS^s) a\- 
A.oTe dXXwv earl \6ywv, PL Gorg. 4-82, a (is of different words at different times, 
uses different words, etc). 

Rem. 3. Here belong also the expressions rjyeTcr&ai, iroieTcr&ai, belvai iro\- 
\ov, irXeiffTov, 6\iyov, eAaxiVroi;, etc. (to consider of great importance, 
etc.), the worth of a thing being considered as a property. Usually, however, 
the preposition Trepi is joined with the Gen. 

3. The active Genitive stands, in the third place, as that ob- 
ject which embraces one or more other objects as parts belong- 
ing to it; the Gen. represents the whole in relation to its 
parts. Genitive of the whole, or the partitive Genitive. This 
Gen. stands : 

(a) With the verbs, elvau and yiyvecr#ai (to belong to, to be 
of the number of, to be numbered among) ; nSkvai, r i#eo- #cu, 
TroielcrSai, r/yeXcr 5at (to reckon or number among), and with 
many others. 

Th. 1, 65. Kai avrbs tf&eXe twv fxevovTwv elv a i, to be one of those remain- 
ing. X. An. 1. 2, 3. l\v ku\ 6 ~2,WKpaT7\s twc djxcpl Ml\t]tov ar par evo fxevwv 
(was among those who carried on war around Miletus, (TTpaTevo/.ievwv here denoting 
the whole, of which Socrates is a part). Cy. 1.2, 15. oi ay av iv to?s TeXeiois 
(aySpd&t) Stay evwvTai aveivi\r)Trroi, ouroi twv yepaiT epwv yiyvovrai (are 
reckoned among the elders). Dem. Phil. 3. 122, 43. r) Ze\eid iari ttjs 'A a las 
(belongs to Asia, is a part of). Plat. Phaed. 68, d. rbv Sdvarov r,yovvTai irdvies oi 
&\\oi twv /xeyio~Twv KaKwv el vai (among the greatest evils). PL Pp. 376, e. 
ix o v a ik tj s 8', eliroy, t'l&tjs \6yovs ; ad musicam refersne sermones? Phileb. 
60, d. <pp6vr)(Tiv ical ctAr^ 86$av r r q s avrrj s ideas r i & e /x a i (I consider prudence 
and true glory as of the same nature, ad eandem ideam refero). Ilp. 8. 567, e. it o i - 
e?(T&<xl riva twv Sopv<p6pwv. Her. 7, 6. KareAeye twv x?' n<r i xwv ( re ~ 



$ 273.] PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 379 

citabat vaticiniorum sc. partem). So redrew yqs (devastare terrae, sc. partem) ; 
iwiBaiveiu rr\s yys, to set foot upon. 

Rem. 4. With the partitive and attributive Gen., two cases are to be distin- 
guished: the Gen. denotes the whole either as a, plurality in relation to the indi- 
vidual parts, as TloKKol rwv av&pwTrwv : or as a unity in relation to a certain 
quantity, e. g. IleVTe rakavra apyvplov. This last partitive Gen. may be called 
the Gen. of quantity. Both these genitives <fccur very frequently: 

(a) With substantives, e. g. *2ray6ves vdaros (vSaros expressing the whole, 
and array6ves the parts); adfiaros (J-epos ; if with the name of a place, 
the country where it is situated is mentioned, the name of the country 
as denoting the whole, stands in the Gen., and usually before the name 
of the place denoting the part, e. g. c O o-rparbs acpiicero rrjs 'Attlktjs 
is Olv6r)v (into Oenoe, a part or city of Attica), Th. 2, 18 (never is ttjs 
""ArriKjjs Olu6r]v). 

(b) With substantive adjectives, in the positive, comparative, and supex-lative, 
when it expresses the highest degree ; with substantive pronouns and 
numerals : ol xpV°~ T °i T ^> v av&pcairaiv, ol ev (ppovovvres ra>v avSp&Trow (the 
useful, well disposed part of men) ; — iroWoi, bhiyoi, rivis, ir\doves, tt\€?<ttoi 
t&v avSpdnrwv (many, few, some, etc. among or of men). In addition comp. 
above, \ 264, Rem. 5. On the contrary, ol bvnrol duSrpwiroi, since the 
property of mortality belongs to the race ; tto\\o\ or oXiyoi 'dv&pamoi ex- 
presses a whole consisting of many or few (a great or small number of 
men); iroKkol or bxiyoi avSp&irwi/ denotes the many or few as a part of 
the whole ; so rpeTs ?/,ue?s r)ni€v, i. e. we were three in all, there were three of 
us ; rpeh rj/xai/ T)<rav, i. e. there were three of us (three out of our whole num- 
ber) there; 

(c) With adverbs : (a) of place, e. g. ttov, ttov, ttt], Tr6&ev, ov, r), ovdafiov, irav- 
raxv, Trdppo), and 7rpoVco (further), etc. Her. 2, 43. ovda/j-r) Alyvirrov 
(nowhere in Egypt). PI. Rp. 3. 403, e. eiSeVcu, '6 ttov yrjs icri (where 
inthe world). 'Ej/to v&a rrjs r)AiKias (at this age) ; ivravSra rod \6yov 
(to this point in the discourse or argument). 'Opare, oTTrpo<;\r)\v&ev ao~sAyeias 
(what a degree of insolence he has reached, quo intemperantiae progressus sit), 
Dem. TLavT axov TTi s yr)s, ubivis terrarum. Hop pea a o (pi as i\av- 
v€iv or T\Keiv (to advance further in wisdom). — (/3) of time, e.g. oif/e 
rrjs rj/j.4pas, rov xp° vou > T V * yXiKias (late in the day, late in life). 
T pis rr) s i) ft 4 pas. YLoWaKis ri) s rj/xepas. 

Rem. 5. By means of an abbreviation of the expression (comp. § 323, Rem. 
6), the partitive Gen. stands also with a superlative which belongs to the predi- 
cate. Her. 7, 70. ol e/c rris Aifiv-ns Al&ioires ov\6r ar ov rpix^o/xa %x ovo ~ l "* d v - 
rwv avSpdnrwv (properly instead of ov\6rarov twc rpixoofidrcav a irdures 
'av&punroi exovcriv). X. Cy.3.1, 25. irdvrcov r&v Seivav 6 (pofios ixd\io~r a 
KarairKrirrei ras tyvxds. 

(b ) With words which signify : (a) to take part in, partici- 
pate ill, share in, e. g. fierixew, pLireaTL jaoi, SiSoVai, jaeraSiSoVai, 
7rpos%Lb6vai, SiaSiSovai, Kowwveiv, ko iv over Sat, eTrapKeiv {to give a share 
of), o-wepyo?, a/xotpo?, etc. ; koivos and ia-09, which commonly, 
however, govern the Dat. ; — (/?) to touch (both physically and 
intellectually), to lay hold of, to be in connection with, to border on, 
e. g. Siyyavew, xj/avecv, airreoSai, SpaTTeoSai ; \api(3aveo~$oii, //.era-, 
<TvXXapi(3av€Lv, 4Vi-, a.vTi\a.p.fiavzcr$ai ; arvvaipev&ai ; e^eo-^at (to ad- 



380 syntax. [$ 273. 

here to, be next to, to border on), dvr-, 7repte^co-«9at, yXt^ecr^at; 
€7rt^copios, dSeAc£o<? (seldom with Dat), StaSo^o? (often also with 
Dat.), £&}<;, i<pegrj*s (more rarely with Dat.), irpoo-Stv, 'd/xTrpoo-Sev, 
o-TTio-dev, iA€Ta£v, and many other adverbs ; — (y) to acquire and 
attain, e. g. rvyydve.iv {to acquire and hit), Xayydvuv, e£-, i<f>tKvei- 
o-3ac, K\r)povofjLeLv (with Gen. of the thing, to inherit; with Gen. 
of the person, to be the heir of some one ; with Ace. of the 
thing and Gen. of the person, to inherit something from one), 
7rposr]K€L (/xot twos, I have to do with something, have part in) ; 
— (8) to strive to acquire somethi7ig, e. g. opeyeoSai, i<f>Uo-$ai, 
avTL7roL€i<r$aL, ivrpi-rreaS^aL (to turn one's self to something, to give 
heed to, to respect); o-ro^a^ecr^at (to aim at something'). Most 
of the words included under this rule have a partitive idea. 
Besides the Gen. several of the above verbs take also a Dat. 

Dem. 24, 49. rots 'olkovviv apaprdvoven p. ere ffri Gvyyvd) ii.r\s (those who err 
unwillingly obtain pardon ) . PI. Pol. 322, a. 6 dv^rpunros betas jii e t e <r % € /xoipas 
(participated in divine destiny). X.E. L. 1,9. rov fxev yevovs /cat rrjs Svvd- 
p.ews Koivwvovffi, ru>v he xPVH-drcov ovk avr iiro lovvr at (who share 
in the same origin and power, but do not lay claim to their property). Cyr. 7. 5, 78 
sq. &d\Trovs p.ev Kal \pvxovs Kal aircov Kal ttotoHv Kal vttvov avdyK-n 
Kal rois SovAois /JceradiSovai, it o Ae (xikt) s 8' e it i <r r i) fj. -n s Kal fjLeXerTjs 
ob /act aS or eov (to share heat, cold, etc.). C. 1. 2, 60. luKpdr-ns iraaiv a^oW 
eirripicGi rS>v eavrov (shared his effects with). Cy. 1. 3, 7. rSov Kpewv Sta- 
8 i 3 6 v a i rots Stepa-rrevrats (to distribute the flesh among the servants). PI. Phaedr. 
238, b. ra rovrwv a.c>e\<pd (horum similia). Hel. 4. 4, 6. (a£i6v icrri) r&v 
ye koAA(ctt tav Kal jxeyiarruv aya&wv 6 pey o pe v ov s a^ieiraiv or d- 
r-ns reAevrrj s rvx*tv (that they, desiring to obtain the most noble and val- 
uable acquisition, should meet a most honorable death). 4. 8, 18. t)v 6 SepcravSpos 
ov fx6vov av\r)T7]s aya&6s, ctAAct Kal aA/cTjs avr eiro tetr o (ad fortitudinem eni- 
tebatar). Th. 1, 8. e (pie p.e vo i rwv KepSwv oi j'lacrovs virejxevov rrjv ruv 
KpeicroSvwv SovAeiav (the inferiors desirous of gain, etc.). Cy. 1.2,3. irovnpov 
rivos t) alcxpov epyov ecptea&at. 3.3,10. eiraivovo'i Kal ao~ird£ovrai ol 
rotovroi (crv/xfAaxoi) robs dfioiovs, vofii^ovres ffvvepyobs abrobs elvai r ov koi- 
vov aya&ov (thinking that they are coadjutors in the common interest). PI. Symp. 
181, c. vfipecas dfioipos (without sharing in insolence). Menex. 241, c. epyov 
KOLvbv A a /c e 8 ai/xoviav re Kal 'Afr-nvatoov (common to the Laced., etc., like 
communis alicujus rei). "Air r o \iai r f/ s x 6 ' P ^ s ' Her. 1 , 93. \lpvrj ex eTal 
rov arj/xaros jxeyaXt] (borders on). 3, 72. epyov ex^e^a (opus aggre.dia- 
mur). Uepiexofiai r ivos (cupide aliquid amplector) . Th. 1, 140. rr\s yvev/x-ns 
rrjs abrqs exo^ai (I hold to the same opinion). 4, 10. avSpes oi ^vvapdfievo i 
rovde rod kivUvvov (who have taken part in this danger). PI. Pp. 2, 362, a. 
d\ri^eias ex^l-i-evov ( cum veritate conjunctum ) . Dem. Ol. 1 , § 20, ews eVrl icai- 



$ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 381 

p6s, dvTi\d8e<r&e rS>v irpaytxdTwv (capessere). Isocr. Nicocl. 22, b, c. eVetSr; 
ZvnTov yrdf,aro S t*v' X *s, dZavdrov 8h fxvs, ™pS> rgs +v X vs aZd- 
varov furfjwy KcerdKtireiir (since you obtained a mortal body, but an immortal soul). 
Tuyxdveiv, \ay X dveii> xpVfuLrav, evTV X (as — tv X w reAeimjs, bv6p.aTos, etc. X. 
C. 2. 1, 20. at did Kapreplas eiri/j.4\eiai (studia assidua) twv KaXwv re icdya- 
&£>v %pyu>v itiicveiff&ai iroiovffiv (make them attain noble and illustrious deeds). 
Isocr. Paneg. 80, 187. ovk i(pi K vod /xai t ov fxey4&ovs twv Trpayfxdrwy 
(non assequor). P. Crit. 52, c. ofa fcctfws robs \6yovs atftby, oSre j,^ 
ravvSfxeov, iurp4ir V (neither do you respect us, the laws). X. C. 4. 5, 11. 
SoKWfioi \4yw, ws hrtpl H]ttovi tup Sib tov vw/xaros ySovwv irdixirav ovdefltas 
aperrjs irpos^Kii (that no virtue belongs to a man who is a slave to bodily pleas- 
ures). Dem. in Aristocr. 690, 14. oZtoi K \i,poyopov<rt rrjs i> ( ,,r4 pa5 
86£ VS koXtuv 6fi e r4p W u dyaZcov. PI. Gcorg. 465, a. tov f,84os <tto- 
X d(eTai dvev tov BeATiarov. 

Rem 6. With verbs expressing participation, sometimes the word denoting 
a part stands in the Ace, e. g. X. Hier. 2, 6. ol Tvpawoc rS>v w W dSv 
"T"" m e Xovcr t . An. 7. 8, 11. ?„« ^ ^T«8o?e, to fx4pos xpm d- 
tuv According to the analogy of verbs of touching, verbs of entreating and 
supplicating, are connected with the Gen., which denotes the person or thing bv 
whom or by which one entreats or supplicates, e. g. Kiaa^ai, fern*™,, IkvkI 
Zat, since the suppliant, touching the knee or the image of the divinity, utters 
ms prayer. Od. 68. \iaaop.ai ^hv Zrjvbs 'OAvfxwiov i,bh ®4fju<rros (I supplicate 
Zeus), bo Xiaa^Zai iraTpbs, T 0K fav. Comp. II. k, 454 so. 6 u4v uiv LeA\ € 
| yeveiov X eipl ira^ir, tydpevos \i(r<re<r&cu. V ' 

Rem. 7. The poets connect many other verbs with the Gen., among which 
are those mentioned under (b) ; so any verb may govern the Gen., when its 
action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part only. II. „ 56 u e'<r- 
<rov8ovpbs e\d>v (having seized the middle of the spear). Od. y, 439 Bodv 8 l 
ayeTnv Kepacov (took by the horns). II. «, 197. {«^, 5e KO ar,s e'Ae 
n^\6i»w. In phrases, like kaBe?v yovvcov, farreabal Tiua yevdov, etc. the knee 
and beard are conceived as the objects, on which the person who touches and 
lays hold, hangs, and, as it were, depends. Here belong, also, in poetry : 

(a) Verbs denoting both physical and intellectual tasting, grasping, reaching 
to, and hence of striving after an object, e. g. iv^ a i^Zai cnco^Aov, 
Supuv, vdo-Tov (to seek the rock, gifts, a return). 

(b) Several verbs, which properly express the idea of a hasty motion towards 
an object, and then metaphorically are used to express an intellectual 
effort, and longing e. g. iireiy^Zai, dtfiSodw, impdteetr&tu, diraicrcreiv 
(rushing upon something, etc.). II. r, 142. lire ly 6 /xev6 s irtp "Apvos 
(hastening to, desiring the contest). II. |, 488. & Pf i4&ri V'AicduayTos 
(he rushed upon Acamas). II. £ 68. (x-fjTis vdv ivdpav i7riBa\\6 ue vo S 

IXtTOirioStV fAlfjLVeTO). 

(c) Verbs signifying to take aim, e. g. to^iv, SueovriCeiu (in prose with els 
and_with the meaning, to hit, to wound, with the Ace). II. p, 304. "E/ctojo 
f at f A * aj/T0S o-k6vt ice Sovpl <paeiv$ (aimed at Ajax). II. yl 855. 
i\ s dp dvcoyei To£sve iv. 

Rem. 8. According to the analogy of the above-named verbs of aiming and 
Striving, so we find Karh x Zovbs tppara irrfcu (to fasten the eyes upon the ground) ■ 
irXetv M 2a/xov, to sail towards Sanies, as if setting out for'it (on the contrary' 
iirl ~2.dix.ov, to Samos). — The Gen. of aim accurs in the attributive relation e. g! 
With 6d6s, v6cttos t6ttov tiv6s (way, return to a place). . , . 



382 syntax. [$ 273. 

Rem. 9. There also being here : (a) the adverbs ev$6 (Ion. l&v), straight- 
forward to something, fiexpt, to, up to; — (b) verbs of meeting and approaching, 
which, however, in prose, are commonly connected with the Dat. ; — (c) also 
adjectives and adverbs of meeting, approaching, nearness, e. g. avrios, ivavrios 
(though in Attic, only with the meaning contrarius, opposed to), irapair\ri<nos, 
which, however, are oftener joined with the Dat. ; avriov, ivavriov [before, in 
the presence of) ; iyyvs and TrXrjcriov with the Gen. of local nearness, but in a 
metaphorical sense with the Dat. Her. 6, 95. %x ov (dirigebant) ras vias l&v 
rod 'EAAtj sir 6 vrov ical rrjs QprjiK-ns (directly to the Hellespont). 2, 34. 
T) Aty vivros rr\s 6 pe ivr\ s Ki\tKias jxaXicrrd kt) avriri Keerai (lies opposite to 
Cilicia). Dem. Ph. 3. 117, 27. irX-no-iov Qy^wv ical 'A^rjvuv (near Thebes). 

4. In the fourth place, the active Genitive denotes the place 
where, and the time when, an action happens. The action or 
event belongs, as it were, to the place and the time, proceeds in 
a measure from them, and is produced by them ; hence the time 
and place are considered as causing or producing the action, or 
at least as the necessary condition of it. 

(a) The Gen. of place is almost exclusively poetic. 

H. p, 372. vecpos 8' ov cpaivero irdcrrjs ya'njs, oi>8' 6p4cav (not a cloud appeared 
on the plain, nor on the mountains). II. i, 219. avrbs 8' avriov TCev'Odvacrrjos 
&eloio toixov rod erepoio (by the other wall). Hence, especially, in Epic 
poetry, with verbs of going and motion, the space or way upon which the going 
or the motion takes place, and to which, as it were, this action belongs, stands 
in the Gen., e. g. II. 0, 801. ipxovrai iredloio (go through the plain). Xi 23. 
hUiv 7re5io 10. v, 64. 7re 8 io i o Slcvksiv opveov (to pursue over the plain). So 
the prose, Uvai rod irp6a<ti (to go over the forward way, to go forward). 

Rem. 10. In this way are to be explained the adverbs of place, ou,irov, oirov, 
avrov, ov8a.ij.ov, aWaxod, etc. ; and on the same principle also it is to be ex- 
plained that adverbs of place with the suffix & e v stand apparently instead of 
adverbs of place with the suffix &t, e. g. evSofrev, iyyvSev, rrj\6^ev, eKroa&ev, 
e. g. II. p, 582. "EKTopa 8' iyyv^ev lcrrd.ij.evos tirpvvev 'AiroWaiv. 

(b) The Gen. of time often occurs both in poetry and prose. 
Also the space of time ivithin which something happens, as pro- 
ducing the action, or the condition of it, may be expressed by 
the Gen. The Gen. expresses time indefinitely, denoting merely 
the period within which or in the course of which the action takes 
place, while the Dat. expresses definite time, o. point of time. 

"Av&rj &d\\ei rod eapo s, the spring is conceived as producing the flowei*s, and 
hence as the cause of them. Thus frepovs, in the summer time ; xzip&vos, in the win- 
ter ; r]jj.epas, in the daytime, in the course of the day, by day ; war 6s, by night ; SetA^s, 
oTrdopas; as Eng. of a morning, he did it of a fine morning ; also fiyvos, per month, 
monthly ; iviavrov, yearly, etc.; with attributives, e. g. rod avrod, rod irporepod, e/facr- 
rov, ctous, the same, the former year, etc. ; rrjs abrris rj/xepas, on the same day ; rip 
iiriovarrjs vvkt6s : rod eiriyiyvo/xevov &tpovs; ravrns ri)s y/xepas, in the courseofthis day 



$ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 383 

(but Dat. ravTTj rfj 7]fj.epa t in that clay). Hence the adverbial expressions apxris, at 
the beginning, and rou Xonrou, for the future. Her. 4, 48. "larpos tcros ael aurbs kwvry 
p4et Ka\ &4pous Kal x* ip&vos (alicays flows equal to itself in summer and 
winter). 6, 12. rou Xoiirou /xtj 7rei£-w,ue&a aurov. PI. Phaed. 59, d. i^XSrofxev 
rou 8ecr/j.Gi)T7iplov eo~ir4pas (at evening). Ou fxaapov xP^voo, cruxvou, ttoXXou, 
irXelarou, oXiyou XP^ U0V (^ n i within a short, long time) ; iroXXwv T]jxepS>u, iroiiv 
(within many days, years), etc. Her. 3, 134. raura bxiyou XP° V0V 4o~rai 
reXeu/xeva. X. An. 1. 7, 18. fiacriXevs ou /xax^rai 5 4 k a rj/xepuu. PI. Symp. 
172, C. ttoXX&v iraiv 'AydSoov iv&db'e ouk iirided7jfxr]Key. 

Rem. 11. By the Gen. of time, the Gen. absolute may be explained, e. g. 
r ou Ku pou fiaG iXeu ovr o s iroXXci re Kai naXd tpya uirb tuv Hepcrau eirpdx&V- 

Eem. 12. Prepositions are often used to define the relation of time more 
exactly, e. g. 4k iroXXou xP^ P0V y &$' 4o~ir4pas, iirl Kvpou, Cyri aetate, Std iroXXou 
Xp4>vou, 4vr6s or 4cra) iroXXou xpovou. Comp. the remarks on the prepositions. 

Rem. 13. The Gen. as well as the Ace. denotes continued or protracted time, 
but with this difference, that the Gen. denotes the time within any part of which 
the action may take place ; whereas the Ace. of time implies that the action is 
in progress during the whole of the time mentioned, e. g. ravrr]v t)\v rj/j.4- 
pav auTou rjuXi^TO, he encamped there during the whole of that day ; but with the 
Gen. the meaning would be, that, in the course of that day, sometime in that 
day, he encamped there. Gomp. § 279, 6, in regard to the difference between 
the Gen. and Ace. of time and place. 

5. The active Genitive, finally, denotes the material of which 
anything is made, formed, and, as it were, produced, or the 
source from which something is drawn; the material being 
viewed to some extent as the cause of the result. This Gen. 
stands : 

(a) With verbs of making, forming, and the like. 

Her. 5, 82. x a ^ K0 " iroi4ovrai ra aydXfj.ct.Ta (are made of bronze). 2, 138. 
iarp(afx4vr] 4ffr\ «55bs XiSrou (is paved with stone). Th. 4, 31. epu/xa avr6&i tfv 
Xi&av XoydBrjy ireiro 1 77 /x4v ou. In the attributive relation : eKireefxa £uXov 
(a drinking cup [made] of wood) ; rpdirefa apyupiou, o~T4<pavos uaniv&wv. 

Rem. 14. This relation is very often expressed by the Dat. also, and more 
: definitely by the prepositions eg and airo, also did with the Gen. 

(b) With words of fulness and ivant, e. g. rrhqSeiv, TrXrjpovv, 
■TTLjXTrXdvai, yeyxeiv, f^ptSetv ', vdcrcretv, adrrecv, zviropeiv, etc. ; arropeiv, 
■Trivecr^at, SeLoS'ai, Set, cm avi^eiv, \P1> e ^ c ' ' 7r ^ 0<; > ^A^p^s, pzcrTOS, 
7r\ov<TLO<s, Sacrvs, etc. ; Treves, ivBeip', aAis (sails'). 

X. Symp. 4, 64. o-eo-ayixevos irXourou ti\v tyuxhv eaojxai (shall be satisfied 
with riches). PI. Apol. 26, d. ra 'Ava£ay6pov /3i/3\ia y 4 fj. e l r ourcou rcov Xo- 
ycav (are full of these sayings). Evirope??, airopetv, ir4vea&ai, airavi(eiu ra>i/ 
Xprijxdroov (to abound in, to be destitute of 7ncans). X. Cy. 3. 1, 3. § ia&e6vrcav 
ical 4Xavv6vrwv ib ireSiov \xzor6v (full of persons running about). An. 2. 4, 



384 syntax. [$ 273. 

14. Sao" us SevSpoov {thickly set with trees). An. 1. 2, 7. irapdbeicros fieyas, 
ay pi wis &T\plwv ir\i)p7]s {fall of wild animals). 1. 4, 19. evTavba t\<jo.v 
K&iiai ivoXXal fiecrral ffirov ko\ olvov. Ill the attributive relation, e. g. 
deiras oXvov (a goblet of [filled with] wine). 

(c) With verbs signifying to eat, to drink, to taste, to cause to 
taste, to enjoy, to satisfy one's self, and in the figurative sense to 
have the enjoyment, use, and advantage of something ; eo-SUiv, 
cpayeiv, evcoxacr^at, iriveiv, yevav, yeveaSai, KopiaaorSai ; airoXavecv ; 
eo-nav (to entertain), etc. 

'Eo-^feij/ Kpeuv {to eat of flesh)] Kope<ra<r&ai (popfirjs {to satisfy one's 
self with food) , iriveiv oXvov {to drink of wine). X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. avayirn <roi 
air oyeveo-&ai tovtcov t 5>v it avr oo air wv {Spot par wr {to taste the various 
kinds of food). 1. 3, 10. Kal t'i Si), S> Kvpe, ra\ha fiifiovfievos tov ~2,aKav, ovk a. it ep p 6- 
cp-ncras tov oX v o v ; {why did younot gulp down the wine'?). C.4.3, W.airoKave i v 
irdvTwv t cov ayab&v {to enjoy all good things) ; but airoKave iv t iv 6 s t t, e. g. 
ay a&d or naxd, to receive good or evil from some one. X. C. 4, 3, 10. Ti aAAo (wov 
alywv re Kal o'i av teal t cS v &\K(i}V £a cov t off avT a ayaba airoKavei, 
ocra av&pcoiroi ,■ {what other animal receives so many advantages from goats, etc., as 
man?). Tevecrbai ti/jltjs {to taste, enjoy honor)] yevetv riva Tt/xrjs {to 
cause one to taste or enjoy honor). 

Rem. 15. The Ace. stands with verbs of eating and drinking: (a) when the 
substance is represented as consumed wholly or in a great quantity; or (b) 
when the common means of nutriment is indicated, that which everyone takes. 
Od. t, 347. KvKkw\p, rrj, irie olvov, eire\ cpdyes dvd po fie a Kpea {drink wine, 
since you eat human flesh). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ovk eKiriofiai avrbs tov olvov. 
1.3,6. Kpea ye euwxou { en j°y y our meat). 6. 2, 28. vdari ftefiiyfievnv ae\ 
Ti)V fid(av icr&iei [always eats maize). Ibid, fxera. be tov ctTtov lav olvov 
4ir iirivu> fiev, ovSev fieiov exovaa V ^> V XV avairavcreTai (spoken of a habit). So 
ecrbieiv Kpea and Kpecov, iriveiv olvov and oXvov. Hence iriveiv olvov is said 
of those whose usual drink is wine, but iriveiv oXvov, is to take a drink of wine, to 
drink some of the wine. Hence the Gen. with verbs of eating and drinking has 
a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or drink of something. PL 
Symp. 176, c. iroXvv iriveiv olvov. 

(d) "With verbs signifying to smell, emit an odor of something, 
etc. ; Trveiv, 6'£eiv, 7rpo?/3aA.A.ctv. 

"O^eiv Xccv (to smell violets)', fivpov irvetv {to emit the smell of myrrh) ; 
it pos fSaWeiv fivpov, irvetv Tpdyov, o^eiv Kpo fivcov. Ar. Ran. 341. 
cos i)0v fioi irpos eirvevae x oi P*' 1 °> v Kp ecov (so sweet was the smell of swine's 
flesh to me). 

Rem. 16. In poetry many other verbs are constructed with the Gen. of the 
material, e. g. diroo'Ti A/3e i v a\ei<paTos, (veKvas) irvpbs fi e i\iaa e fie v, 
Koveabai evppe?os irorafiolo. See Larger Grammar, II. § 527, Rem. 

(e) With expressions of remembering and forgetting : /xifAvrjcr- 
Koixai, to remember, /xi/xv^cr/co) (two. twos), to remind one of some- 



$ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 385 

thing, /jLvy/juDv, ajxvrjfxaiv, i7TLXav3-a.vofj.at, to forget ; hence also with 
XdSpa, XaSptws, and xpvcpa ; also with expressions of being ac- 
quainted and unacquainted with, of experience and inexperienc e, 
of ability, dexterity or skill in anything, e. g. e/>i7rapos, aireipos, 

i7no-T7]jJi(iL)V, eTricrra/xevo?, avc.7rio-rrjp.oiv, rpifiwv, avyyvwpuov, ahar)<$, eh-ai- 

Seuros, I8t(x)rr)<s ; aTretpw?, ^eVcos e^co ; with adj ectives ill - 1 k o s (derived 
from transitive verbs) which denote skill, aptness, etc.; also with 
Trapwjxat, to make trial of something. 

X. C. 2. 1, 33. Of yepcdrepoi rjSews t5>v tt aXai Sou irpd^eoov p.i\xvt] vra t 
(remember the past achievements). Antiph. II. a, 7. 'H iiribvfda rr\s rifiapias 
a/j.vr)[Aova tS)V k ivSvvcov Ka$i<rrri avrSv (rendered him forgetful of dangers). 
X. 0. 16, 8. TlS^ev ovv jSouAet Lxpfa/xal ere r 7j s yecapyias vir o /xi fx vq cr k e iv 
(to remind you of husbandry). Cy. 8.3, 3. Tod <p&6vov eireX eXTjcrro (had 
forgotten envy). Attributive: p.vt\\o), Xr)&r) twv kclkqov. (Mtfivn pal n, to 
keep something in mind.) ''E/j.Tre ipo s or iir 1 err) /j.w v el/A tt\s rex^V 5 (I 
am acquainted with the art). 'Airaidevros apeTTJs, ^ova iKr\ s (ignorant of 
virtue, music). Her. 2, 49. rrjs &vaias ravrrjs ovk aSa'fjs, a.XX' e juir e 1 pos 
(not ignorant of that sacrifice, but acquainted with it). X. Cy. 6. 1, 37. o~vyypd>- 
fiav t£>v av&pcaTrivui/ ir pay p.dr <av (pardoning , not knowing , human errors). 
— 'Awe I pus ex e iv ravTTis T7) s t 4 xv V s (to be unacquainted with this art). 
'Airoiretpaixai yvd>fir)'s (I make trial of an opinion). With the poets this 
use of the Gen. is still more extensive. II. 0. 411. tIktovos, hs pd tc irdo-ns e3 
ei5r? o~o<pir]s (who is well acquainted with all skill). X. 3. 1, 6. Trapacr Keva- 
gtikov tcov els tov TToX^fJiov tov crrparriybv elvcu XPV Kc ^ iropiarriKov twv 
iiriT-nSeiav ro?s (TTpaTicarais (skilful in preparing what is necessary for war, and 
capable of providing provisions). PL Euthyphr. 3, c. 8 i§ao~ naXucbs rrjs avrov 
<ro<pias (able to teach his own learning). PI. L. 643, a. t eXeios Tr\s tov Trpdy/xa- 
tos aperrjs (as it were, showing one's self perfect in a thing). Attributive: ip.irei- 
pia tt)s yea [xst pias, etc. 

(f) With the words of sensation and perception: anoveiv, 
aKp oacrSai, alcr&av ctrJai, 6o-<ppaiveo~ #cu. 

'A/couw ray Xoywv, fropvfiov (I hear the words, the tumult). X. H. 4. 4, 
4. ttjs Kpavyrjs rjafrovTo (they perceived the cry). An. 1. 1, 8. fiaffiXcvs 
t -?] s irpbs kavrbv err ifiovXrjs ovk ■po'^dvero (did not perceive the plot ). C. 2. 
1,24. rivwv ocrtppLvofievos r)o-&elr)s ; (what things would you desire to smell 1 ?). 
'Anoveiv $iK7)s (to hear a case at law) ; alcr 3" dv e<r 3- at -qSovuv, dcr[XTJSy 
3 pv |8 y, (3o7)&e ias. 

Rem. 17. The attributive Gen. has a much wider signification, e. g. ayeXXia 
rrjs Xiov, de Chio (tidings of or concerning Chios) ; iparrjais tivos (a question about 
something), like the Latin quaestio alicujus rei instead of de aliqua re. 

Rem. 18. 'Akovciv, vrraKoveiv, naraKove iv often take the Gen. also 
in the sense of to obey, and according to this analogy ire I fretrSfat (seldom in 
Attic) and &7ret3cu/; so also nar-fiKoos, vtt7)koos, take the Gen., mor^ 

33 



386 syntax. [$ 273. 

seldom the Dat. Her. 3, 62. irpoayopevei i]p.7v ~2,p.e pd to s pacriXyj os olkov- 
eiv (commands tis to obey king Smerdts). 101. Aapeiov /3 acr iAtjos ovSa/xa 
vttt] icovcrau ( they obeyed king Darius nowhere ) . 1.126. vvv §>v i/xeo irti&6/A€- 
vot yiveofte iAev&epoi (now therefore obeying me, be free). So Th. 7, 73. 

Rem. 19. The above verbs have the following constructions: (a) Gen. of 
the thing, as in the examples given. The Gen. denotes the material as a whole, 
of which one perceives, as it were, single parts, or the sense, the purport of which 
one perceives mentally. KloSdvopiai Kpavyrjs (I perceive, us it ivcre, the single 
tones of the cry) ; X. H. 4. 8, 19. aiff&effdai ttjs 'fiori&eias (I observe something 
of the help); — (b) Ace. of the thing; then it is denoted that one perceives 
the whole thing with his senses, or the thing in its totality. Th. 2, 94. 'Hj 
TJcrSroi/To rr\v fioinbeiav (ivhen they observed the help approaching = saw with 
their eyes = kwpuv). The Ace. of the person seldom stands with alcrbdveffSai ; 
when it does, the verb has the sense of ddevai (to know). X. Symp. 4, 36. 
AiffbdvopaL t vpdvv ovs r ivds, ot ovrca ireiv&ffi xp^l^drcou (/know some kings). — 

(c) Gen. of the person, which represents the person, as it were, as the source, from 
which the perception is derived. 'Akovw ~Sw k par ovs (1 hear Socrates, i. e. the 
words of Socrates). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. Ouk axpou/xevoi rov aSouros a/xuvere 
adeiu dpLcrra (not hearing the voice of the singer). Her. 1, 80. as off (ppavr o rd- 
X L(rra t&v Kafx-ijKcau ot "ttttol koI elSov auras biriffoa avecrrpecpou (as soon as the 
horses got scent of the camels). So ffvuirjpi (to understand), with the Gen. of a 
person, e. g. Her. 1, 47. not Kuxpov ffwinpi /cat ob (powevvros a/couco (I under- 
stand a mute) ; but with the Ace. of the thing, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. hi kpyinvicav 
ras rS>v Stezbv ffvjx$ov\ias ffwinpi (I understand the counsels of the gods). The 
verb alffSave ffSai is not constructed with the simple Gen. of the person. — 

(d) Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing : "Huovffa ~XcoKpdr ovs r ovr ov rbv 
Xoyov (audivi e Socrate hunc sermonem, I heard this conversation from Socrates). 
So also tI xaAeirbj' fjffSnffai rov pod @(ov ; (what have you perceived disa- 
greeable in my manner of life?) X. C. 1. 6, 4. ^.vvinpi ffov rbv Aoyov. — (e) 
Gen. of the person with a participle in the Gen., or with a subordinate clause 
which takes the place of the Ace. of the thing. 'Akovw 'ZooKpdrovs oiaAe- 
yop.4vov (I hear Socrates reasoning, nearly the same as axoioo 'SccKpdrovs SiaXo- 
you). X. H. 4. 2, 19. AaKeSaijj.6vioi ovk rja^dyouro it po s iovr (a v ruv iroAe- 
fxiwv (did not perceive the enemy approaching, nearly the same as rjff&dvovro ruv 
7ro\e/uiW rr]u irp6so§ov). The person is sometimes also contained in the parti- 
ciple, e.g. Th. 5, 73. rjcr&ovTo r e i x^C 0VT03 ' / (they perceived them building the 
wall, instead of rjcr&ovro avrSiV r e tX'C ' vru>v or or i r e ixi C 0l * v )- X. An. 
1. 10, 4. fiaffiXebs fJKOvffe T iff ff a<p e p v ov s, on ol "EXXvues viKcoev (heard 
from Tissaphernes that the Greeks were conquering, like ^Kovcre Tiacracpepvovs r)]u 
roJv 'EXX-r\vwu vitcnv). C. 4. 4,13. ovk alffbduopai ffov, 6tto7ov vopipov -7) iro?oi> 
oUaiov Xeyeis (I do not comprehend you, what you call according to law or according 
to justice). 

Rem. 20. Likewise the Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing, or the Gen. of 
the person with a participle in the Gen. or with a subordinate clause standing in 
the place of the Ace. [Comp. (d) and (e) Rem. 19], is used with verbs of seeing, 
hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing ; of judging, examining, and say- 
ing; of admiring, praising, blaming : bpav, beafffrai, ffKoirelv, birovoe?!/, iv 
voe?v,yiyv(*)ffKeLv, iiriffraffSai, elSeuai, iv&vp.e7ff&ai, etc. ; ttvv& d- 
veff^at, fxav&dveiv, Kpiveiv, e^er d^eiv, Xeyeiv, SnXovv, etc.: airo- 
oextff&ai (to receive the opinion of one, to agree in opinion with one) ; dyavbai, 
&avpd(eiv, eiraivelv, pi 4p<p eff&ai, i|/ eye i v. The Gen. denotes the ob- 
ject (commonly a person) in respect to which one perceives, sees, observes, 
knows, judges something, some action, external indication, or some single cir- 



$ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 387 

cumstance, etc. ; or of whom one learns, hears, affirms something ; or in whom 
one admires, praises, or censures something. 

X. C. 1. 1, 12. Tlpcorou jxeu avTwv (^WKpar-qs) iff k 6 ire i, irSrepd iroTe 
'jofilaavTes licavws ijdr] Tdv&pcoiriva eiSevai epxofrai 4irl to irepl toiovtwv <ppov 
ri^eiu, 3) ret p.hu avSpuireia irapevres, ra haijxSuia Se CKoirovures, i\yovvT a i ra. 
irposTjKovTa irpdrreii/ (he Jirst considered in respect to them whether, etc.). An. 3. 1, 
19. 5ia.d-6djjU.ej/os a u t S>v, oo-yv x^P av Ka ^ o'iav ex>"f (attentively con- 
sidering with respect to them, what a country they had). Cy. 7. 2, 18. eyv w Kal 
jxaKa droira e/.iov iroiovvros (he perceived in respect to me. that I teas doing an 
absurd thing, or eyuco ep.ov, on droira iroioir\v). PI. Gorg. 463, d. ap" ovv av 
ixaSoLS airoicp iva\xevov ; (instead of ap ovv dv jxov jxdhois, a airoKpivofJLai ; 
will you then understand my answer, i. e. learn from me ichat I answer ?). 465, e. A e- 
y our 6 s fxov fipaxea ovk ip.dv&av es (you did not understand me when I spoke 
briefly). The Gen. of the person alone. Ph. Phil. 51, c. eX fxov p.avb dveis 
instead of e'{ /xov /lav&dveis, a Aeyoo (if you comprehend me, understand what 1 
say). Th. 4. 6. eirv&ovr o rijs HvXov Kar e ik-n p./xevns, instead of iirv&. 
rr/s IluAou, on KareiXruxixsvn i\v (when they learned that Pylus wxis captured). 5, 83. 
ijo'&ovTo Tei^i(oi'Taii', instead of ija&. abrcvv, on Teix'i^oiei/ (learned re- 
specting them that they were building the icalls, i. e. learned that they were building, 
etc.). X. C. 3. 6, 16. evhv\iov rcov &\Kwv, ir6repd o~oi Sokovctiv 4irl ro7s 
roiovrois eiraivov /xaWov ?) \poyov rvyxdveiv (observe respecting the others, ichether). 
('Ev&v/Ae7aSai with the Gen. of the thing, for example rris %>pas, X. Ven. 8, 6., 
r&v roiruv, ib. 9, 4, signifies to have a regard for something, and belongs to § 174, 1 
(b); ev&v/j.e'to'Sai with the Ace. of the thing signifies to reflect upon, consider 
something, aliquid secum reputare.) PL Protag. 324, c. air 08 exovr ai ol aol 
iroXlrai Kal x a ^ K * ws Kc " o- kvt or 6 fxov ffv [xfi qvXevovr os ra. iroKiTind 
(receive the opinion of the brazier and shoemaker). Her. 6, 76. dyaa&ai rod 
'Epaffivov ob 7rpoS lSovt o s robs iroXirjras (to admire Erasinus because he did 
not betray the citizens). Th. 1, 84. to /3pa5£> Kal fxeKKov, o fxefxfp ovt ai ixaXiira 
7) fiuu, fj.r] alo-xvvecr&e (for which they chiefly complain of us). X. Cy. 3. 1, 15. el 
dyaaai rov irarpos, ?) bcr a ffefiovXevTai, rj o o" a it eir pax*> irdvv o~ol 
cvfAfiovKevw rovrov /j.i/j.€7cr&ai (if you admire my father either for the measures he 
has devised, etc.). Ages. 2, 7. ra5 5 abrov ayafxai, on ■KapeaKevdaaro (1 ad- 
mire this in him). 8. 4. eyw Kal tov to eiraivw 'Ay r) cr iXdov, to irpbs to 
apecrKeiv to7s "EKX-ncnv vivepiZeiv rr\v {SacriXecos £eviav (1 praise Agesilaus for this 
also). PI. Men. 95, c. Topyiov paXiara ravra ay a pa i (I particularly ad- 
mire this in Gorgias, or Gorgias for this). Theaet. 161, b. o iJoi/fidf&i tou 
eraipov, r6$e iariv (what I admire in a companion is this). Criron 43, b. <rov 
iraXai &aujua£a>, al fffrav6 fievos, &s r/Seajs Ka&ebdeis. Pp. 383, a. 7rdAAa 
'Ofiiipov eiraiv ovvr es aAAa toDto ovk iiraiveo~6fj.e&a (though we praise 
many other things in Homer). 

Kem. 21. In themselves, the above verbs take the Ace, e. g. 6pu> Tiva or ti, 
CKOircb Tiva or Tt, iiraiuci, tyeyco, /jLefxcpojAai, dyajxai Tiva or ti. 



§ 274. (b) Causal Genitive. 

The second division of the causal genitive includes the geni- 
tive, which expresses the cause or occasion, i. e. the object, 
which calls forth or occasions the action of the subject. This 
genitive stands : 

1. "With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the 
mind [verba affectuum), viz. : 



388 SYNTAX. 



[t 274. 



(a) Desire and longing for : ImSvpziv, Ipav, IpoyrtA ex«v or 
8taK£to"^ai ; Su/rt)v, ttciv^v ; 

(b) Care for, concern for, and *Ae contrary : qripAetoJMh 
^povri^iv, KJStaSai, rrepiopaaSai, Trpoopav, vrrepopav (to despise), 
rrpovoelv, pAo, y-cra^Xa, afxeXelv, oXiyupdv, cbetieaSat, ^V^ al 
(to toe a regard for, § 273, Rem. 20) ; 

(c) Pain, grief, pity: 6Xo<j>vpc(r$ai, 7rev£i/<ws £X etv '> ^ eav 
and olKrdpuv (with the Ace. of the person and Gen. of the 

thing) ; 

(d) Anger tmd indignation: 6pry%ecr$aL (with the Dat. of the 
person and the Gen. of the thing), x <^™s <f>ipeiv; 

(e) Envy: tfovw (with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. 
of the thing), «r«££dvu)S Suucciovfou; 

(f) Admiration, praise, blame; Saiywifriv and Sjurbax (with 
the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, sometimes 
also with the Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the person, 
which is governed by that thing, see Rem. 2), (foXow, c*8ai/i,o- 
vl&v, bmivw, /i^e^ai (ah with the Ace. of the person and 
the Gen. of the tiling). 

PI. Rp. 403, a. 6 bpbbs epcos irtyvm koct fiiov re koI KaXov aw<pp6va>s re 
Kal ixov<tikS>s ipav (to love what is well ordered and beautiful). 438, a. o&Sefc 
ttotov iTTibvixe7, a\\a % p V <r r o v ttotoO, ko! oh crirov, a\\a X PV<rrov 
eirov v&vres yap apa r&v ayabuv ivifrvfLodviP (no one desires drink, 
but wholesome drink, etc.). Symp. 181, b. ol <pad\0L ra>v hv&p&vw t<2 v a wfid- 

rwv t^aWou, $TS>vyv X S>v IP**" ( love tMr hodies more than their $ ° uh) ' 
186, b. to Mpoiov auofjioiiov iirt^v/xel koI ipa (desires and loves what is 
unlike). 216, d. 2w^ttjs ipwrinws SicS/ceiTai rwv ko.\S>v (is very fond 
of the beautiful). X. Cy. 3. 3, 12. (Kdpos) K h K eivovs Mqffep 4pariKws e X etv 
toG -^577 iroie'iv ti (made them desirous of doing something). X. 0. 13, 9. 
veivSxTi rod ivaivov oh% frr-rov Zviai rwv <*>ucrea>i/, % foAai r wv xrirtav re 
Ka \ -rrorwv (thirst for praise not less than others for food and drink). Attribu- 
tive, e. g. ^cos, iir&vfila aperr,s (amor, cupiditas virtutis, love, desire for virtue). 
Th. 6. 14. K7}de<r&ai. rris iroXetos (to be anxious about the city). Her. 3, 151. 
iiroXiSpKte (BaPvKwviovs) <p p ovr i Co vr as otter r rjs tt o\io p k'i V s (having 
no concern about the siege). 3, 159. rod clrov <Kp6opav (to have a care for, 
to provide food). X. Symp. 8, 33. ol ^6-yov aeppour i<rr e7v i^fxeyoi ovk 
altrxtvovrai ala X P^ ti -nouiv (those accustomed to be indifferent to censure). 
X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. Uepauy vo,uoi (dp X ovrai) rod Koivod ay a&od iiripe- 
Xoi/lepoi (having a regard for the public good). Me'Xei p.ol nyos {I 
have a care for something, some one). PI. Crito, 44, c. rl r)H?v t9)s ruv rroWwv 
5<J^77t fj.i\*i : (why do we care for the opinion of the multitude'?). 5. 1,21. 



$ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 389 

TafSpva Treipd.croi.iai Troieiv fx-nTtore /xer a/xe Xi) <rai rrjs npbs efxe 68 ov (that 
Gobryas shall not repent of his journey to me). Id. C. 1. 2, 9. virepopau iiroUi 
rwv Ka&tcrTcoTcav vS/xwv tovs ffvuouras [made his associates despise the ex- 
isting laws). Th. 4, 124. BpacriSas rr)s M4v8t]s ir e p iopd> fxe vos (solicitous 
about Mende). X. H. 5. 4, 1. &eo\ ovre to>v do" efiovvT wu, ovre rwv av6cna 
iroiovvToov a/xeXovcri (are regardless neither of the wicked nor the profane). 
Cy. 8. 7, 15. eavTov kt) Serai 6 irpovouv aSeXcpov (he who takes thought 
for a brother is anxious for himself). X. Ag. 7, 1. 'Ayyo-iXaos, oirov aero rr\v 
irarpiSa ri w<peXi)aeij/, ov XPV /J-drav i(p ei8 ero (did not spare his wealth). 
Attributive, e. g. <ppovr\s r&v iraiSccv (cura liberorum, care for children). So 
eTri/xeX-hs twos (caring for something). X. Cy. 5. 4, 32. 6 Kvpos aKoixras rod 
[xev ird &ovs tpureipev avr6v (pitied him on account of his suffering). 5. 2, 7. 
t\]v Ibvyarepa, irev&iKcos ex ovo ~ av tov a,8eX<pov r e&PT) kot o s, i^dycav 
3>Se elirev (grieving for her dead brother). Symp. 4, 37. rovrovs oiKreipa ttjs 
&yav %aAe7r^s v6<rov (I pity them on account of the disease) . Attributive, e. g. 
&Xyos eraipcoi/ (de amicis. for, on account of friends) ; moreover with adjectives 
also (though only in poetry), and especially with exclamations with or without 
interjections. Eur. Or. 413. ot/xoi 8 iwy/xwu, oh eXavvojxai raXas! (alas the 
vexations !). X. Cy. 3, 1,39. <pev rod avdpos (Oh what a man!). PI. Bp. 
509, c. "AttoXXov, dai/xovias vtt ep j8 oXt) s! X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. ttjs tv xf]s, to 
e^e vvv Khnhevra Bevpo rvx^w ! ( ill fortune, that I am called hither at this time !). 
Lys. C. Philon. 187, 11. Ka^ecrTTjKe ri e&os 8'iicaiov wacriv av&p&Trois, ra>v abrwir 
adiKT) fxdrwv fxaXicrra bpyi£eo~&ai to7s /xaXicrra 8vva/xeuois, fxr\ aSiKelu, to?s 
8e irevT]cnv t) a.8vvdrois r<p c&fxari avyyvujxnv e%eu/, Sid rb rjye'icr&ai aKovras ax/robs 
ajxaprdveiv (to be angry on account of the same ivrongs). (In poetry, the Gen. is much 
more frequent with verbs expressing anger, e. g. H. |, 266. 'BpaK\r)os irep ix^' 
ffaro, iraiSbs eoTo (wasangry on account of Hercules, his son). Od. o, 69. (Hoaeiddwv) 
KvkXwtvos Ke%(i\wToi, oc b<p&aX{xov aXacao-ev (is angry on account of the Cyclops). 
S. An tig. 1177. 7raTpi fir) via as cpouov (having been angry with the father on 
account of the murder). Eur. Or. 749. Xcrcas <roi Svyarepos frv/xov/xevos). At- 
tributive, e. g. xoA-os twos (ira alicujus instead of de aliquo, anger on account of 
some person or thing) $Sove?v tii/l rr)s ao<pias (to envy one on account of his 
wisdom). Th. 1, 75. d|joi ifffxev apxvs 7 6 V* exo/xev to7s"EA\7)<ti fxr) orvcas &yav 
e-KKp&Svws SianelcrSai (it is not just that we should be so much envied by the 
Greeks on account of our sovereignty). So also in poetry, (x e ya ip a>, e. g. Aesch. 
Prom. 627. ov fxeyaipco rov8e <roi Soopji/xaros (I do not envy you because of 
this gift). Attributive, e. g. <p$6vos tiv6s (envy on account of something). X. Cy. 
2.3,21. tovtov olv b Kvpos ayao-frels rr\s re irpa6TT)Tos Ka\ ttjs $t8ao~- 
KaKias Kal tijs err i /xeXe ias, eKaXeae /cat ravrrju t V Ta|«/ eirl rb dewov abv 
t« raZiapx? (having admired him on account of his gentleness, education, etc.). 
Symp. 4, 45. £??*£ ere rod ttXovtov (I envy you on account of your wealth). 
PI. Symp. 194, e. Soxodcri ivdures robs avdpwirovs evS aip.oviC^iv t&v aya- 
&£)/, Z) V 6 &ebs avTo?s alnos (to consider men happy on account of the good things, 
which, etc.). Ion. 530, b. iroXXaKis ye i(-nX(ti<ra i>p.as to\s pa^cotiobs ttjs 
rexv-ns. Dcm. Cor. 296, 204. tis ovuav ayd<raiTO tuv avSpvv eiteivvir 



390 syntax. [$ 274. 

rrj s kpeTris ; (who would not admire the valor of those men ?). Lys. Simon. 100, 
44. &av/j.d£w (id\i(rTa tovtov tt}s Siavoias (I admire his purpose). Id. 
Eratosth. 124,41. i& av/xaaa rrjs r6\pt]s tu>v Keyovrcov. So with ad- 
jectives, e. g. PL Phaedon. 58, e. eu Haip.<ov poi 6 avrjp i<paivero Kal rod 
rp6ivov Kal rwv \6ywv, us aSecos Kal yevvaiws ire^evra (the man seemed to 
be happy on account of his habits and remarks). 

Remark 1 . The Gen. with the above verbs is often governed by preposi- 
tions, especially ire pi, e. g. iirifie\e?o-&ai, (ppovri(eiv irepi twos. Some verbs 
which denote a state or an affection of the mind, do not govern the Gen.; thus 
Tro&€?v (to long for. to feel the want of), always governs the Ace, and so 
<pi\e?v, ayairuv, err e pyeiv (to love) ; the last two also in the sense of to be 
contented with, take the Dat. ( = Lat. Abl.). Several of the above verbs have also 
different constructions ; then they commonly express different ideas, e. g. 
<f>povri£eiv r iv 6s or it e p t r ivos, X. C. 1. 1. 1 1. 4. 7, 6. to be anxious for 
something, but {ppovri^tiv r i, scrutari, investigare ; — ir p ovoelv, irpoopav 
ri (to perceive beforehand, to consider beforehand); vie e po pav ti and tivos, 
despicere, in the same sense. In poetry, pe^ei sometimes takes for its subject 
a noun denoting a thing, in the Nom. ; but in prose, it takes only a Neut. 
pronoun in the Nom. The verb is then used personally: M^Xrjaovo-iv 8' 
4pol lir it ot, 11. k, 481. Tavra pkv oiiv & € cp p e A tj a e i, PI. Phaedr. 238, d. 

Rem. 2. The verbs &avp.d£e iv and &ya<r&ai have the following con- 
structions: ( Si) the Ace. of the person or the Ace. of the thing alone, when the 
wonder or admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole 
nature of a person or thing, e. g. &av[j.dfa rbv o-Tparr]y6v (I admire the general) ; 
fravpdfa r))v <ro<p'iav (I admire the wisdom) ; — (b) the Gen. of the person and the 
Ace. of the thing, when one admires something in a person (Rem. 20), e. g. 
fravpdfa ~2,ooKpdTovs ttjv crocpiav (I admire the wisdom in S crates, or the wisdom of 
Socrates) ; — (c) the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, when one admires 
a person on account of some quality, e. g. &avp.dfa Lcaupdr-n r?]s aocpias (I admire 
Socrates on account of his wisdom), see 1, (f ) ; — (d) seldom Gen. of the thing and 
the Gen. of the person depending upon it, when I Avonder at the quality of a per- 
son, or admire the quality of a person, e. g. £rav/j.d£a) ^wKparovs ttjs aocpias (I 
admire the wisdom of Socrates), see 1, (f ) ; — (e) the Ace. of the person, and in- 
stead of the Gen of the thing, a preposition, commonly iiri with the Dat., e. g. 
^avjxd^w ~2wKpdTr\ inl tj? o-ocpia. (I admire Socrates for, on account of his wisdom). 

2. With verbs signifying to requite, to revenge, to accuse and 
condemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as the cause 
of the requital, revenge, etc. Thus with rt/xwpeto-^ai (with the 
Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), also with judicial 
verbs of accusing and condemning, e. g. atnao-^ai, c7raiTiao-#ai, Stco- 
Ketv, eUayeiv, viraytiv, ypacpeoSai, TrposKaXeLcrSaL (all with the Ace. of 
the 2^^rson and the Gen. of the thing), hr^ikvai, lyKoXtlv, l-rmjKrrK- 
Tto-SaL (all three xwith the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the 
thing) ; cf>evyeiv (to be accused^ ; SiKa£av, Kptvuv, alpetv, to convict 
(all three with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), 
and u\.'a>vai, to be convicted. 

Her. 3, 145. robs i-micovpovs r ifxco pr\ cro fxai ttjs iv&dde airi^ios (will pun- 
ish the allies on account of the invasion of this land). (Seldom rip. cud e?v rtvl 



§ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 39] 

rivos, as X. Cy. 4. 6, 8. t ifXtopTi&eiv <roi tou iraiSbs vmarxvovucu, I avenge 
you for [the murder of] your son.) 'Etto.it ici(r&al riva <p6vov (to accuse one of 
murder). Her. 6, 104. (Mi\Tid5ea) ol ix&pol iSico^au Tvpavvihos ttjs kv 
Xeparovricrcti (prosecuted Miltiades for tyranny). 'Eire ^tevai tiuI <p 6 v o v (to pros- 
ecute one for murder). T pdcpeafrai ripa napav6 (Atoi/ (to indict one for illegal 
measures). Qevyeiv kKotttis, <j>6vov, a cr e £ e i a s (to be accused of theft, etc.). 
Kpive<r&ai a <r e fi e I a s. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. Tl4p<rai §iKa\(ov(ri nal iyK\r)fj.a- 
ros, ou eVe/ca &v&p<t)ivot. fxi(rovo'i fj.lv aW-fjXovs /uaAicrra, Zutd^omai 5e f//a(TTa, 
axa/)((rTiaj (condemn as a crime, ingratitude). C. 1. 2, 49. Kara v6fxov (e£e<rrf) 
irapavoias e\6vr i nai rhv irarcpa Srjarcu (it is lawful for one convicting his 
father of madness). Dem. Aphob. 846. iir ia ic-hirr e a&ai tlvi rwv iJ/ei/So- 
[xapTvpiwv (to prosecute one for false witness). 861, 58. (pevyeiv ^evSo- 
fj.apTvpia>v utt6 twos. 'A.\a>vai kAotttjs (to be convicted of theft). 

Rem. 3. Also the punishment for guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen. is to 
be considered as the Gen. of price (§ 275, 3), e. g. SavaTov Kpiveiv, KpiveoSrcu, 
Sic&Ktiv (to sentence, be sentenced to death). Sometimes the prepositions ir*pi and 
eVe/ca are joined with the verb, e. g. Sidneii/ two. -n-epl <p6vov : and ami with 
Tifj,wpe?o-&ai. "EyK.a\(kiv besides the above, has the following constructions : (a) 
the Dat. of person and Ace. of thing, to charge something upon some one; — 
(b) the Dat. of person followed by a clause with on or by the Inf. ; — (c) the 
Dat. of person alone, to accuse [§ 284, 3. (6)] ; — (d) the Ace. of thing alone, 
to bring as a charge. KaT-qyopeiis, to accuse, is construed: (a) with Gen. of per- 
son, sometimes with Kara and Gen. ; — (b) with Gen. of person, and Ace. of 
thing, to lay something to one's charge ; — (c) with Gen. both of person and of thing, 
sometimes with Trepi and Gen. of thing ; — (d) with Ace. of thing alone. 

3. Finally the Gen. of cause is also used in the following 
instances : 

(a) With tov fx-n and the infinitive. See § 308, 2, (b). 

(b) With the adverbs ev, Ka\as, per pi cos, and the like, also with us, 
7T w sy ott co s, t? , o 7r 7j, o v t (a s, to 8 e, to sa^TO) s, connected with the verbs 
ixziv and JjKetj/, sometimes also with eluai and other intransitive verbs, the 
object by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. KaAws 
eX« Trodtou (1 am well in respect to my feet). Her. 6, 116. 'A&rivaloi, as iro- 
S&v zlx ov i rdxto-Ta ifioii&eov is rb &<ttv (as they were able with respect to their 
feet, i. e. as quickly as their feet would carry them). 5, 62. xf")^« r w *5 tjkov- 
res (well off for, to have a plenty of means). So e3, KaXas, /xtTpitos e%eij/ fiiov, 
<ppzvtov, yevous, dwafxeus (to be well off as to the means of living). Ot "EWrjues 
ovTus €lx o,/ ofiovoias rrpbs aA.A77A.ous. X. Cy. 7. 5, 56. ovtu Tp6irov 
€X €ls iy ou are taus i n respect to circumstances, you are in such circumstances). H. 
4. 5, 15. us t&xovs enao-Tos clx*v (as each v:as able in respect to swiftness, as 
quickly as each was able). 



392 syntax. [$ 275. 

$ 275. (c) Genitive denoting certain Mutual 
Re lations. 

The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by 
which certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation 
of the ruler to the subject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a 
subject, and a subject a ruler, an inferior, a superior, etc., the 
one may, in a measure, be considered the cause or occasion of 
the other. Hence the Gen. is used : 

1. With verbs of ruling, superiority, excelling, surpassing, sub- 
jection, inferiority : ap^etv, Kparetv, Secnro^uv, rvpavvetv, rvpawevew, 
(rrpaTTjyeiv, hnrpo-n-eveiv, eTna-Tareiv, fiacrikzveiv, rryefxovzveiv, rjyua-^ai, 
etc.; with the adjectives ey/cpar???, axparys ; — also with 7r/>oe^etv, 
avi)(eLv } TrepielvciL, Tr€.piyiyv&r$a.i i 7rpo<jra.reiv, vTrepfiaWeiv, virepcfiipcLV, 
7rpo)Tevetv, 7rpecrj3aj€LV, TrpOKptvuv, Trponp-av, TrXeoveKTeZv, etc. ; — rjTTa- 
crSat, vcrrepuv, vvTepi&w, IXaTTOvcr&ai, pLeiovcrSou, fxtcoveKTeiv, vcrrepov 
elvai, rjTTOva. cTyai, etc. 

Her. 7, 97. rod vavT ikov io-Tpar-hy eov oi'5e (these had the command of 
the naval forces). 3,15. iirirp ott€ ve iv Alyvirrov (to be the governor of 
Egypt). Th. 1, 69. 6 Aoyos rod epyov eKpdrei (the report exceeded the 
thing itself). X. Cy. 1. 1,2. dpxovr e s jjl(v el<ri Kal oi PovkoAoi twv &o<av, 
Kal ol 'nrirocpopfiol ruv 'iirircav, Kal irdyres Se oi KaAovfxevoi uojxeis, £>v av Itria- 
raTaxri £wwv cikotcos au 'dpxovres tovtwv vojal^oivto (all those called 
herdsmen might properly be considered the commanders of those animals of which they 
have the ride). 1. 2, 8. (oi Tlepaai robs iralSas) d&do-Kovcnv iyic par els elvai 
yacrrpbs Kal irorov (teach them to be masters of their belly, etc., temperate in 
eating and drinking). 4. 1, 14. e/xol 5h Sokc? ttj s jxeyio~T7)s tjSoutjs ivoAb 
IxaXicrra av/j.(pepeiu zyKparri elvai (to be master of able to control the greatest pleas- 
ure). 5. 1,14. tol /xox^njpa ay^pcoirta Traawu, olp.ai,ru>v iir iSv /xlu v aKparT) 
iaTi (depraved men are subject to, not able to control all their passions). Her. 6, 61. 
Ka\\io~T ev a e i rb iraibiov Tra&ecav ruv iu ^irdprr) yvvaiKwv (will surpass 
all the Spartan women in beauty). Th. 1, 81. ro7s ottAois avr&v Kal rco irArjS-ei 
virep<p £ po jxzv (are superior to them in arms, etc.). X. Ag. 5,2. 'AynaiAaos 
7]yeiro dpxovTi irposriKeiv ov p.aAaKia, aAAa Kaprepta, ruv ISicaruv 7r e p leTvai 
(that the commander ought to excel the privates, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 19. rdx^i irf- 
pieytvov avrov (you excelled him in despatch) . PL Gorg. 475, b. o-Kexpwfxe^a, 
apa Avirr) vire p fid A A e i rb aduce?u rod dS i k e? aSra i, Kal aAyovai jxaAAov oi 
adiKovvres, ^ oi adtKov,usvot (the Ace. is more usual with virepfiaAAeiv). L. 752, 
e. Trpeafieve iv t w i/ toAAwv iroAeai/ (to take the precedence of many 
cities). So also oe'xeffS-ai tivos usually with a participle, to endure, per- 
mit, properly to hold one's self up over one). PL Apol. 31, b. dj/e'xecrfrcu ruv 
Qiiteiav a./j.€Aov/x€U(av (to permit domestic affairs to be neglected) . Rp. 564, e. 



$ 275.] ' GENITIVE CASE. 393 

oxik av£x* Tal T0 ^ &VAa \4yovros. 'Hrraa-^ai rcov 4ir&vfuu>v (to be sub- 
ject to one's desires). Dem. Cor. 308, 244. ovdafxov rjTT-nSrels airTJX&ov r &v 
rrapa $tAiinrov it p 4 <r /3 e a> v (being overcome by or yielding to the envoys). X. C. 
1. 3, 3. 'XuKpaT-ns 3wtas frvcov fxiKpas airb /xiKpwv ovdev rffelro fxe 10 v a Sa i rcov 
airb -koXKuiv KaX /xeyaKav iroWa KaX fxeyaXa frvovrcav (did not think that he was 
inferior to those making many great sacrifices, etc.). Hier. 4, 1. fxeyaKov aya- 
&ov fie to i/fKTei (comes short of a great good). 'T(rrepe7v rrjs fxdxvs (to come 
after the battle). "Terr epi£e iv rwv Kaipwv (to be behind opportunities, to foil 
tousethem). 'Terr epi^eiv tcov epycav. X. Hier. 1, 18. ravTn tt} ev^poavvv ttjs 
4\iridos fie iou e kt ov a i rvpavvot ruv ISlwtwv. 2, 1. fie to ve ktovvt as 
KaX citoov /col irorcav KaX oxpwv (coming short of food, etc.). 

Remark 1. 'Hye fiov eve iv and 7)ye7cr&ai in the sense of to go before, 
to show the way, with 6d6v expressed or understood, govern the Dat. ; Kparelv in 
the sense of to conquer, regularly governs the Ace, but in the sense of to be 
master of, potiri, to rule, have the command of the Gen., e. g. Kpare?v robs tto- 
Kefiiovs (vincere) ; Kpateiv r f/ s %copas, rr\s ir6 A.eai s, rS>v 4 vavr Laiv, r&v 
4ir t&vfiiwv, rov opovs (all in Xen.). 

Rem. 2. That in which one excels another, in prose, is usually put in the 
Dat., but is often expressed by prepositions, e. g. iv rtvi, eXs ti, Kara rt, 4irt 
rivi. — With f)TTaoftai vtt6 is often joined with the Gen., e.g. Th. 1, 62. rb 
(TTpaTSiredou f) a car o virb r wv 'A& r nv a.i<a v. 

2, The Comparative and adjectives in the positive with the 
force of the Comparative, e. g. numerals in -ao-ios and -irkovs; 
Sevrepos, Treotrro'?, etc., take the object by which the comparison 
is expressed in the Gen. Genitive of Comparison. 

X. An. 7. 7, 41. ouSev votiifa avdpl KaWiov elvai KTrj/xa ov5e Xafiirpor e pov 
aperrjs KaX 5 iKaioavvn s KaX yevvaiSr-nr os (I do not think that man has 
any possession more beautiful than virtue, etc.). X. Cy. 7. 5, 83. ov S^ttov rbv 
&PXOVTO. twv apxofievwv tr ovq p6r e pov irposijKei elvai (it does not become a 
commander to be more base than his subjects). Eur. Med. 965. xp v<T0S ^e Kpeia- 
aoiv [ivptcuv \6ywv fipoTo7s (is better than a myriad of words). Her. 7, 48. 
rb 'E\\r]viKbv arpdrevfia (paiverai ir o\Aair\4)cr tov iffeoSai rov r] fierepov 
(that the army will be much more numerous than ours). 8. 137. SiirX^arios 4yevero 
abrbs ecavrov (he was twice as great as before). 6, 120. {tare pot airiKOfievoi 
rrjs o-vpfioKris tfieipovro bfiws &eT)<ra(r&ai robs M-fjdovs (though they came later 
than the battle, after the battle). Obdevbs Sevrepos (second to, inferior to no one). 
OvSevbs varepos. Tuv apKovvTwv irepirrb. KT-f}(rao-&ai (to acquire more 
than enough). 

Rem. 3. Sometimes the object of comparison is denoted, like a space-rela- 
tion, by irp6 and avri with the Gen., or by irapd and irp6s with the Ace. See 
prepositions. 

3. With verbs of buying and selling, e. g. wvexcrSai, ayopa&tv, 
7rpiacr#ai, KTacrSat, 7rapaAa/x./3aveiv ; 7r(oAetv } d7roStoW#ai, 7repi8tdoo-#ac, 

SiSdVai ; — also with verbs of excJianging and bartering, e. g. 



394 syntax. [$ 275. 

aWoLTTew, aWdTTecrSaL, Sia/>iei)8eo-$ai, \vecv, etc. ; — with, verbs of 
valuing, e. g. tl/jlolv, TL/xaaS^aL, TroieivSai, a^iovv, a£iovcr$ai } and with 
the adjective a£ios. Genitive of price. 

Her. 5, 6. (ol ©p^i'/ces) wp4opt ai ras yvvouKas irapa rac yop4wp xP r ll x ° l - ro}V 
p. e7 a \up (buy their wives at a great price). X. C. 2. 1,20. r 5> v irovav traXov- 
<riv ripup irduTa raydfr' ol &eoi (sell all good things to us for toils). Cy. 3. 1, 36. 
crv 84, S> Tiypdvrj, \4£ov jxoi, ir6ffov av irpiaio, iosre tt)p yvvcuna airo\afie?p 
( what would you pay to regain your wife). 'Eycb (jl4p, £<pr), S> Kvpe, kclp tt} s tyvxv s 
tt p iai/j.T]v, &sre /x^irore Xarpevcrcu ravrr^v (I would buy her at the expense of my 
life). II. £, 236. Teu%e' &p.<-if$ep, xpv&ea xoXKeiav, eKarS/xPoi ippea&oiwp (was 
exchanging arms, golden for brazen, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 37. k<x\ crv Se, S> 'App.4pis, 
airdyov T-ir\p re yvvcuKa. kolX avTobs ircudas /x-ndep avTWP Karate is (nulla re pro 
lis deposita, having paid nothing for them). Ol aya&ol ovdevbs ap k4 pd ovs rfy 
tt/s irarpidos i\ev&epiap ap r aWd^aivT o (the good would exchange the freedom 
of their country for no gain). 11. A, 514. l-qrpbs yap b.v)]p ttoWwp avrd^ios 
&Wwp (is worth as much as many others). Her. 3, 53. 6 AvK6(ppup ovde av a- 
Kpiffios Tjijiaxre top (p4popra ttjv ayye\ir)v (thought the one who brought the 
message not worthy of an examination) . 6,112. ifxaxopro ai-icos \6yov (worthy 
of praise). 'A^iovv riva t ifirj s (to consider worthy of honor). X. Cy. 2. 2, 17. 
eya>7€ ovdep apiaccTtpop pop-ifa tcop ip avfrpwrrois elvai tov t wp Jf a w v t6v re 
KaK.bu koX ayafrbv a^iovvSai. Tip.ap tip'l twos and riud twos, e. g. S 4 k a r a- 
\dvTwv, tov SravaT ov (to fine one ten talents, to sentence one to death, to con- 
sider one worthy of punishment). So the Mid., used of the accuser: r ip.aa^rai 
tlvl apyvpiov, &avaT ov, to impose a fine, or penalty of death upon one ; com- 
monly, however, diirnv is here supplied. 

Rem. 4. With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usually 
considered like a relation of space, and is denoted by clpti with the Gen. 

Rem. 5. The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen. \ 262, b.) expresses a 
much greater variety of relations, than the Gen. with verbs. For where two 
objects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutual 
relation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, seems 
united with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. Hence the 
rule : When two substantives are connected with each other, the substantive ivhich 
completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in the Gen. As ad- 
jectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to the substantive, 
many adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from which they are 
derived, take the Ace, e. g. tcpaTio-Tov irarpbs 'EW-qpcop Tpacpeis (sprung from, 
like natus alicujus), S. Ph. 3. 

Rem. 6. The attributive genitive is called the Subjective, the Objective, 
or Passive genitive, according to the mode in which it originates in the sen- 
tence : 

(a) It is called the Subjective Gen., when it originates from the subject of 
the sentence or from a Gen. depending on elfcu and yiypea&ai. It always de- 
notes something active (instead of passive), the cause, author, hence also the 
possessor, the whole in relation to its parts, e. g. ol tov B4p8 pov Kapirol (arising 
from t2> S4p5pop <p4pei napirovs), the fruits of the tree, the fruits which the tree 
produces. Tb ttjs ao<plas /raAAos (arising from r\ o~o<pia irap4x^i naWos or 
rj aocpia KaXi] iffTiif OV KaWos iarl ttjs <ro<plas), the beauty of wisdom, the 



$$ 276, 277.] accusative case. 395 

beauty which wisdom causes. Ta rod 'Op.'hpov iroi-fifiara. 'O rod (3a<r lAews 
vlos. 'H rod avSpbs aperr}. 

(b) It is called the Objective or Causative Gen., when it originates from the 
object of the sentence, i. e.-when it takes the place of the object of an intransi- 
tive verb, e. g. rj rr/s a o (pi as iir i&v fxia, the desire for wisdom (iin^ufxco rrjs 
<ro(p(as, the (rocpias being the cause of the iiri^vp-w) ; 6 rrjs dperrjs epccs, vir- 
tutis amor, the love of or for virtue (ipu rrjs apeTrjs) ; evvoid rivos, good-will 
towards one (eilvovs elp.i rivi) 5 cirip.4\eia r€>v ir oAe jxiko>v epywv, cura rerum 
belhcarum (£irip.€\ovp.ai tcov iroKepuKcov epyow). 'H twv FT Acer aiewv iiricrTpa- 
reia instead of irpbs tovs IT., the expedition against the Plataeans. Th. 1, 108. 
iv airoPdcrei rrjs 777 s instead of €7rt rr t s yrjs, in disembarking on the land. 

(c) It is called the Passive Gen., when it originates from the passive object 
of transitive verbs in the Ace, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of a 
transitive verb, and so denotes the thing affected or caused by the transitive 
action, e. g. 7) t5js wokea s ariais (from ktI&i t^v tt6\lv), the city being that which 
is possessed. 'O ttjs iiricrr o\tj s ypcupevs (from ypdepet iiriaToA'hv), the iiri<r- 
T0A77 being the object acted upon. 'H rwv naAcov 'ipywv irpa^is. 

Rem. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives expressing dif- 
ferent relations. Her. 6, 2. 'lariaios viredvve twv 'luvcav t)]v TjyepLoviiqv tou 
irpbs AapeTov iro\4 fiov the command of the Ionians in tlie war against Darius. 

$ 276. (2) Accusative. 

The Ace. is the W/iither-case, and hence denotes : (a) in the 
local relation, the goal, limit, or point to which the action of the 
verb is directed, e. g. a<rrv {jloXclv, to go to the city ; — (b) in the 
causal relation, the effect, consequence, object produced; also 
the object put by the action in a passive condition, i. e. the object 
on which the action is performed. 



§ 277. A. Local Relation. 

The Ace. in its local relation (Ace. of local termination), denotes the local 
limit, place, or object towards which the subject moves. Hence this Ace. is 
used with verbs of motion, going, coming, etc. 5 yet this usage is found only in 
the poets, especially in Homer. Od. 7, 162. oi pi^v airotxTptyavres e/3av v4as 
apupieAiaaas (they went to the ships). II. a, 317. Kvi<ro"rj 5' ovpavbv f/ce (arose to 
heaven). Od. a, 176. iroWol X<xav avepes rjudrtpov Sw (came to our house). S. 0. T. 
35. do-rv KaSfielov p.o\eTv. Eur. Med. 7. M-hdeia irvpyovs yrjs eirkeva 'icwA/ctas. 

Remark. In prose, and usually also in poetry, a preposition is joined with 
the Ace, which defines still more definitely the relation indicated by the Ace, 
e. g. els, in, into, as, to, /card, downwards, avd, upwards, vtrzp, over, iirl, upon, irepi 
and ap.(pi, around, round about, fierd, into the midst, after, irpos, to, into the presence 
of, irapd, near to, vir6, under, e. g. Uvai is tV it6\lv, irpoeA&e'iv ws rbv PaaiAea, 
irepi or apupl r^v it6\iv fiaiveiv — iirl rbv &p6vov avafiaiveiv — e'Afreu/ pera Tpwas 
— Uvai irapd jSacrtAea — Uvai irpbs 'OXvpvirov — Uvai virb yaiav. 



396 syntax. [$ 278. 

B. Causal Relation. 

$278. (a) Accusative denoting Effect. 
l.The Accusative denoting effect is used as in other lan- 
guages, e. g. ypdcfuo i7ri<jTo\r}v. The original and simplest form 
of the Ace. of effect (of the object produced), is where a verb, 
either transitive or intransive, takes the Ace. of an abstract 
substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or 
has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pro- 
noun or an attributive clause commonly belongs to the Ace. 
This is often called the Cognate Accusative. 

PL Symp. 181, b. outos iariy (6 epws), hv ol (pav\oi tu>v avhp&ivoiv ipSxriv 
(ivhich bad men love). PL L. 680, e. fiacr i\siav iraoSiv SutaioTaTyy f3a<ri- 
\sv 6 pevoi (ruling a kingdom). Prot. 325, c. in ipe\ovyrai Trdcrav iiri/jie- 
\eiav (they care for with all care, bestow all care upon). Dem. Aph. 845,4. 
5eo/u.ai v/xcHy SiKaiav Serjcriy. X. An. 1. 3, 15. crparyyncoyra i/j.h 
TavT-nv ryv tr t parriyiav (to be general of this command, army). 6. 3, 6. e v t v - 
XV^av tovto to evTvxVf*"- (were fortunate in this good fortune, obtained this 
advantage). Id. H. 7. 1,5. TrXeiarovs Kal /xeylcrrovs ay wy as 7] ycavi a jj. 4 vol 
Kara. baXarray iXax^Ta jxkv airorervxynaT^, irXe^crra 5e Karap&witaTe (having 
contended in the greatest contests). Andoc. Myst. 5. 31. apa ffd/xevoi ras jxeyia- 
ras a. pas v/.uv. So Ka\as irpd^iSTrpaTT^iv; ipyd(eabai %pyov koKov; 6.p%^v SiKaiav 
apxyv, alffxpav SovXeiav SovXevew ; /xeyay 7r6\tfjLov iroAe/j.e?v ; xaAe7T7?j/ vSaov voa^tv. 
'Ek5t]ij.ous ffrpareias i^yeaay (like c£o8ov i^Uvai). Th. 1, 112. AaKedai/j.6- 
vioi rhv Uphv KaXovfieyov tv oK^ixov iar par eu <r av (like arpareiay arpaT^veiy). 
So opKovs bfjivvvai, aa&eyelv yScroy, £?iv fiiov. X. Hier. 6, 7. irolov 5e riva virvoy 
eKoifAw. If the idea of the verb permits, the passive construction also can 
be used, e. g. 'O oi/cetos rj/juy irSXe/xos ovtws £ir o\s fi-fj&r] (our intestine war 
was so warred, so managed), PL Menex. 243, e. KaAot irpd£eis irpdrTovrai. 
So also with adjectives, e. g. Kaicol iva<rav Kaniav, PL Ep. 490, d. In certain 
phrases, such as <pv\aKas (pvXaiTeiv, excubias agere, <p6pov (<p6povs) (pepeiy, tribu- 
tum solvere, Trofnrrjy irofATreiv, pompam ducere, the substantive can stand without 
an adjective, because here the substantive is used in a special and pregnant 
sense. 

2. In place of the substantive from the same stem as the 
verb, or of a similar signification with it, an attribute of such 
cognate substantive, can also be used ; in this case, the' verb 
frequently has a pregnant sense, since it contains, at the same 
time, an additional idea. 

Ni/cSi/ (idxyv = yiK-qv fidxys (to conquer a battle, i. e. to win a battle) ; so 
'OAujuTria (= 'Ohv/ATricuv yitcnv) v ikclv (to conquer in the Olympic games), Th. 1, 
126. NiKau vavfiaxlas = vlicnv vavnax&v (to gain a naval victory), 7, 66} 



$ 278.] accusative case. 397 

viKav yvcop.r]v, sententiam vincere, vinav St/c 77 ^ (to carry one's opinion , one's 
suit, triumphantly); like Svp.a Srveiv is : ra e tt iv'ima (kpd or Svjxara), evayyi- 
Ata, Siafiar iipia, yev4&\ia, ra AvKata, ydp.ovs &veiv (to offer a 
sacrifice on account of victory, a festive offering, etc., i. e. to celebrate the victory, etc. 
by a sacrifice); rb Uepcr ikov copxe?To (danced the Persian dance), X. An. 
6. 1, 10; ravra (avvb-hixara) av v &e pie vo 1 (having made these agreements); 
ravra ( = opKous rovrwv) b p.6cravr es (having taken these oaths) ; rapdrr e lu 
■jrohepiov == rdpayp.a iroXe/xov (to stir up war, turbando bellum concitare, as it is 
said, bellum miscere), PI. Rp. 567. a. Passively, ir6Ks[xos vpbs robs 'ApLcpitrtrels 
irapdx^V, Dem. Cor. 277, 151. 

3. The following constructions, likewise, mostly confined to 
poetry, deserve special notice ; in these, also, instead of the 
substantive from the same stem as the verb or with a kindred 
signification, the attributive of such kindred substantive is put 
in the Accusative : 

(a) Verbs signifying to shine, to burn, to flow, to pour, to shoot or spring forth, 
e. g. acrr pdirr e iv yopywirbv o~4\as = dar pairiiv yop. cr4\aos (to lighten a 
fearfully bright light, i. e. casting a bight and terrific light), Aesch. Pr. 356 ; 
& d A A. e 1 v fiiov (germinating, producing the means of life), Pers. 61 7. 'Epe/*- 
vbv alp? *8ev<ra (I poured out black blood), S. Aj. 376. ~2rd£eiv Sditpva, 
alpca, \dfiireiv creAas, pelv yd\a (all confined to poetry). 

(b) Verbs which express sound, laughter, panting, and smelling ; here, instead of 
the substantive, commonly an adjective merely, or even a pronoun is used, 
e. g. <p&4yyecrfrat dcr&ev4s, rairetvov = <p&oyybv do-frevr}, etc. (to sound 
feeble, etc.); rjdb (= yobv y4\ccra) yz\av (to laugh heartily) ; i]Sv irvelv (to 
breathe sweetly) ; p.4vta irvei ovres 'Axaioi breathing spirit); 'Apea irvstv 
(Maitem spirare) ; o^eiv 7)8x1; &epiv6v Te /ecu Kiyvpbv inr-nx*? (0 tokos) 
rep rwv TeTriycw-xopcp (resounds summer, etc., with a summer-like and shrill 
sound, comp. Lat. aestivum sonat, vox hominem [= sonum hominis] sonat), 
PI. Phaedr. 230, C-'Ai/e/cdyxaire re p.aKa aapSoviov (burst into a sardonic 
laugh), Rp. 337, a. 

(c) Verbs signifying to see, to look. Od. r, 446. ads irvp (= 84py/xa irvpSs) 6<p- 
fraXpLolo-L 8e8opKdt>s (looking fire, flashing fire). So £Ae7reti/, Sep/ee- 
cr&at *'Api\v = p\4/j./j.a "Apeos (to look war, terror) ; bpav aA/071/ (to look 
courage or boldness) : 84pitea&ai 8eiv6v, ap.ep8a\4ov, raicepd (to look terri- 
bly, etc.); (p6Pov &\4ireiv (to look fury). II. a, 105. KaK baa6(xevos 
(looking evil, with a threatening look, comp. Eng. looking daggers). P, 269. 
dxpeloj/ 18 civ, looking foolish. PI. Ion. 535, e. nXaiovrds re na\ oeivbv 
£/j.fS\4irovras. 

Remark 1 . By this use of the Ace. numerous adverbial expressions can be 
explained, the place of the Ace. with its accompanying adjective being sup- 
plied either by a pronoun alone (rovro, r68e, ravra, rdSe, ri, ri, ov84v, p.-no4v, 
h, o, etc.), or by a neuter adjective, e. g. Tawrd \vneia&ai. na\ ravra x<up* iV 

34 



398 syntax. [$ 279. 

toTs iroWo7s (to grieve at the same things, and to rejoice at the same), Dem. Cor. 
323, 292. Qav/xaara eKirAr)TT0VTai {are wonderfully astonished), PL Symp. 
192, c. To k par i a to. fjv&naav (were most flourishing), Th. 1,19. So fiaKpbv 
Khateiv ; 7r avr a ev^aijxoveiv ; wcpeheTv, PAaTTTeiv, (tjiaiovv fxey aKa, fx.iKpd' } 
evepyereiv t a (ieyio~Ta, tjov yeXav, fxeya or ft.eyd.Aa (ppoveiv, ajxapTaveiv^ 
de?a&ai, diacpepeiv Ti, etc. 

Rem. 2. Here also belong such adverbial expressions as : x°-P LV {gratia, for 
the sake of), x&P LV *, u V v i G"h v {^ea, tua, gratia), dwpedv (gratis), bcoTivyv, npolica, 
fj.drT]u (incassum). So also tovto, ravra (therefore), t'l (why), b' (therefore). Eur. 
Hec. 13. veu>T.aTos S' i\v Tlpta/nidcof o /ecu fie yr)s inre^eirejx^av. PI. Prot. 310, e. 
dA\' avra. Tad to, vvv H\KOi irapa. ere (on this very account). 

4. The Ace. denotes also the effect merely aimed at, the de- 
sign of the action ; yet almost always with neuter pronouns or 
adjectives merely, whereas with substantives a preposition, as 
ds, Trpos, i™, is commonly used. The following verbs, in partic- 
ular, belong here : 

Xprjo-fral rivi ti (originating from xpyo~&ai twl xP^ av )-> io use something 
for something; irel&eiv (originating from irei&eiv Tiva ire'io'iv), eiraipetv, 
iiroT pvve iv, irpoKa Ae l(r&ai, avay nd£e iv Tivd ti, etc. Ouk e%a>, o ti 
Xp^co/xai avT$. T1877 XPV " 6 fie&a tovtw ; (for what purpose shall we use 
him, what use shall we make of him?). Trj Kp-qvp'Ta irAeiarTov a£ia exP& VT0 
(ad res maximi momenti), Th. 2, 15. Ileio~&7J vai t)]v avax^pvo'iv, to be 
persuaded to a retreat (instead of the usual construction els t. avax&p-)-, ib. 21. 
TavTa <re iiroT pvvu (I excite you to this) . ' Aire pxo {Mai, irplv virb <rov ti fieT- 
£ov avayKacr&T\vai (before I am compelled by you to anything more severe), PL 
Phaedr. 242, a. Tovto ovk eirei&e tovs Qcanaiias (did not persuade the Pho- 
caeans of this), Her. 1, 163 ; but eiroTpwetv els fiaxw- 

Rem. 3. The Ace. of design or purpose, is transferred to the manner according 
to or in which something takes- place. Here the fundamental idea is that of 
Striving for an object. Thus Tpoirov, tovtov tov TpSirov. (hunc in modum, in this 
manner), -rrdvTa Tpoirov, Tiva Tpoirov, SiKrjv (in morem, according to the manner of, 
like), ofioia (in like manner), eVirjjSes (consulto), rdxos and koto Taxos (celeriter). 
Commonly, however, prepositions are used with such adverbial expressions. 



$279. (b) Accusative of the suffering Object, i.e. the 
Object upon which the Action is 'performed. 

Only those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin, 
take some other Case than the Ace, or are constructed with 
prepositions. 

1. The verbs ox^eAetv, ovivavat, dvLvaoSau, fSXaTrruv, a&iKexv, lvo)(- 
Xeiv (commonly with Dat), vfipi£,eiv, Av/miveo-^cu, A<o/3ao-$cu, <rt- 
veorSaa, AoiSopeiv (to chide) ; evarefiexv, a<Tzfielv ; Ao^av, h/eSpeveiv ; tl- 
[uopeurSai. ; #€pa7r€U€iv, Sopvfopelv, e7rtrpo7rcv€tv (to provide with a 



$ 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 399 

guardian)) KoXaKCvew, SuiTreveiv ($GJ7rreiv Poet.), TrposKvvuv; 7rei- 
Seiv; d/xct^eo-^at (Poet, respondere), remunerari ; <£vAaTrecr#ai, 
€u/\.a/3eicr#ai ; fXLfxetcrSat, tprjXovv (to emidate). 

X. C. 1.2, 64. (2w/cpaT7js) (pavepbs %v Srepatrevoov tovs &eovs (evidently 
worshipped the gods). Aesch. Ctes. 618. t'is Uv eXn Srifxayccybs toiovtos, ostls rbv 
fiev 8t)[xov frwirevo-at SvvaiTo, tovs Se Kaipovs, ev oh i\v tra^ecr&at t^v -k6Kiv, 
airSdoiTo ; (as would be able to flatter the people) . Tlel&eiv to ir\r)&os (topersuade 
the multitude). X. Hier. 4, 3.ol ttoXItcu 8 opv<po pova i /xev aW-hAov s 'avev maStov 
(keep guard over each other). R.L. 12,5. /j.eTa(TTpaToire5evovTai ye (ot AaKeSaif/ovtot) 
/uV wave*. KaX tov alvecr&at tovs iroXejxiovs eveKa, KaX tov axpeKe'tv Tobs 
(ptkovs (for the sake of injuring their enemies, and assisting their fiends). C. 4. 3, 
1 5. eKeivo Se a&v/j.a>, <5ti fxoi 5o/ce? t a s tuv frewv evepyeo-ias ovtf av eh iroTe av- 
bpdmwv amicus x<*P l0 ~ lv a/xeifieff^ai. Her. 6, 138. i\6xv c av t a s twv 'A&nvaiwv 
yvva?Kas. Th. 1, 32. UXeiffT apxov, t b v Aewvidov, ovtol fiacriXea Kal 
veov eri, eirerp 6ir eve v (6 Uavo-avias). X. H. 5. 1, 17. t'i Vjdiov, $) /u.v8eva 
avStpdnrav KoXaxeveiv p^)Te "EWyva, fx.r]Te fidpfiapov, e'lveKa /jnoStov; — 
Tlpo SKvveiv fSao~i\ea. PL Rp. 334, b. wcp eXelv /xev tovs <pl\ovs (SoKe7) 
■f] SiKaioavvn, fiKairT eiv 8e tovs ex&pov s. 'Ad iKe7v tovs <pi\ovs, 
vfipi^eiv tovs iratSas. HoWanis KaX SovXoi t i/jlu povvTai tovs a8t- 
kovs 8eo-ir6T as (take vengeance on their unjust masters). X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. oi 
<pv\anes e\oi56povv avTov (but the Deponent Aoi5ope?o'&ai tiui, to reproach). 

Remark 1. Some of the above verbs take a Dative or a preposition with 
its Case: (a) axpe\e7v tiui but very seldom, and then in the poets; (£) 
atiiKelv els, irp6s, and irepi Tiva; (y) ao-e/3e?u els and irepi two.) evae- 
fie?v eh t iv a, irepi, irpSs Tiva; (8) \v fiaive o-& ai tivi frequently; (e) Ao>/3S- 
o~&ai tivi sometimes ; (() v$pi£eiv els Tiva often ; (77) eir it poirev e iv tiv6s 
somewhat frequently (§ 275, 1). 'Apeo~Kecv takes the Ace. only in the sense 
of to satisfy, but the Dat. in the sense of to please. 

Rem. 2. Aape'icr&ai tivi ti (donare alicui aliquid, to present something to 
some one), is the construction in Attic prose, not Swpeicr&ai two. tivi (donare 
aliquem aliqua re, to present one with something). 

2. Verbs signifying to do good or evil to any one, by word or 
deed, e. g. evepyeTeiv, KOLKOvpyuv, KaKOTVoulv ; tvXoyelv, KaKoAoyetv ; 
ev, KaAa>?, KaKois Aeyetv, ehrexv, airayopevcw. 

S. Aj. 1154. biv&poDTre, fir] Spa tovs Te&vnK6Tas /ca/c cDs (do not injure the 
dead). X. Cy. 1. 6, 29. KaKovpye7v tovs (pi\ovs (to harm one's friends). 
Ev epyeTetv t^v irarpiSo (to do good to one's country). X. C. 2. 3, 8. irws S* 
tt.v eyk a.veirio'T'fiiJ.wv et-qv ade\<pw xpy<r&ah iirurT&pevds ye KaX eZ Key eiv t b v eZ 
XeyovTa, KaX ev iroieTv Tbv ev iroiovvTa; rbv [x4vtoi koX \6ya> koX epyca 
ireipdo/xevov ep.e avtav oi>K tiv dvvaifi.7]v o\jt ev Key e iv, ovt ev it ie7v (know- 
ing how to speak well of one who speaks well of me, and to do good to one who does well 
to me ; but I should not be able to speak well of or to do good to one ivho, etc.) In- 
stead of the adverbs €u and KaKas with TtouTiv, etc., the Greek uses also the cor* 



400 SYNTAX. [$ 279. 

responding adjectives ; hence icaAa, xaita irotelv, \eyetv riud {to do good 
or evil to one, to say good or evil of one). See § 280. 

3. Verbs signifying to persevere, to await, to wait for, and the 
contrary, e. g. /x-eveiv (like manere), Treptpiveiv, Sapptiv, Kaprepeiv; 
(pevyeiv, a.7rocp€vyeiv, a.7roSt8pd(TKeLV, hpaircrev^iv. 

Mfy (pevye rhv klvSuvov (do not flee from danger). &appe?T<- SrdvaTov (fidenti 
animo expectate mortem). X. An. 3. 2, 20. ras fiev fidxas Srappelre (bravely 
stand or endure the battles). Cy. 5. 5, 42. e5f riyis <re ti/xwotlv, avracnrd^ov Kai euwxet 
avTovs, 'Iva <t e ical frapp iioraxriv (that they may confide in you, ut fiducia te 
complectantur). O 8ov\os aired pa rhv Secr-TroTT? v (ran away from his master). 
PI. Symp. 216, b. 5 pair eT tvoo ovv avTov Kal (pevyaj (I run away from him, 
etc.). Dem. I. Thil. 50, 37. ol twv irpayfj-aTccv naipol oil \x.kvova t t\\v rjiAeri- 
pav fipadvTTJTa (do not wait for your slothfulness). 

Rem. 3. After the analogy of (pevyeiv, other verbs also, which contain 
the idea of fleeing, e. g. those signifying to turn bach from, to retreat from, to 
abhor, are constructed with the Ace, though but seldom, e.g. viroxwpe'iv tov 
o'xAov (to retire from the crowd) ; iit<nrivai kivSwou (to shrink from, shun fear) ; 
iKTpzirzfffrai, vireKTp4ireo-frai, t>7re| epxeo"&ai, air oo~t pi <pzo~ fr ai. 
Qappetv tivi signifies to have confidence in something (fldere aliqua re). 

4. Verbs of concealing and being concealed: Xav^dvetv, Kpv-rr- 
t€lv (celare), KpvTTTeo-SaL; — also the verbs (pS-dvetv {antevertere), 
Aei7reiv, e 7r i A e i tt e i v {deficere) ; — verbs or particles of sivearing, 
the person or thing by which one swears being in the Ace. 

PI. Up. 365, d. freovs ovt€ \avfrdveiv, ovre fiidcraoSai dvuar6u (to escape 
the notice of be concealed from the gods). Kpinrreiv rivd ri (to conceal, any- 
thing from any one), see § 280. Her. 6, 115. irepiiirX&ov ^ovviou ^ovKo^voi 
(pfr-Tjvai robs "Afr-n vaiov s airiK6/j.evoi is to aarv (wishing to anticipate the 
Athenians). 'EirLheiirei /ue 6 xP^ V0S i V Vjxipa (fails me). X. An. 1. 5, 6. to 
o~t paTev /xa 6 (t7tos iir e X lit e. ''O/j.vv/xi irdvTas freovs (I swear by all the 
gods). Hence fid, ov fid, vol fj.d, v^ Ala. 

Re^i. 4. Also the two impersonal verbs Set and xp'i, in the sense of to 
need, are constructed with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or person, 
of which or whom one is in need ; this construction, however, belongs only to 
poetry, c. g. Od. a, 124. fj.vfrrjo'eai, ott so a e XP"h (y ou w ^ te ^ °f what you are 
in need). Aesch. Pr. 86. avTov yap a e Se? Tipo fj.-nfriws (you yourself need 
Prometheus). Ae? with the Dat. of the person belongs to prose and poetry, e. g. 
PI. Mcnon. 79. b. 8e? ovv a o i Tr\s avTrjs epcor-naeoos (you need the same inquiry). 
In the sense of necesse est, opus est, with an infinitive, the Ace. of the person is 
common with both verbs, e. g. 8e? (xpv) <re TavTa iroieiv : the Dat. is much more 
rare, and with xpv seldom even in poetry. X. C. 3. 3, 10. e? trot Seoi fiidd<rKeiv. 
Comp. X. O. 7, 20. S. Ant. 736. a\Xa> yap ?) >ol XP^I 7 6 r vs^ dpx^v 
X$oi>6s. 

5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the mind, 
e. g. <fio{3ei<TSau, Seto-ai, TpCiv; axa-yyv taSai (revereri), alScicrSai; Sus- 
ypaxvuv ; iKirhqTTe.<r$aL, Ka,Ta7rA.^rr€o-#ai ; 6\o<}ivp€(T$ai (filiserari). 



$ 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 401 

X. C) r . 8.1,28. fxaWov t ovs alSov/iei/ovs aid ov vr a i tojv avaidwi/ ol 
&v&pwTTOi (respect the respectful). An. 1. 9, 6. Kvpos dptcrov irore iiri(pepo- 
liiv-nv ovk erpeaev (was not afraid of a bear). Cy. 3. 3, 18. (ol iroXefnoi) 
/xaWov 7]fias (pofirjo-ovTai, '6rav aKOixrcoaiv, on ovx o>y (pofiovfxeitot Ttri\cfCO- 
/xev ah t ovs otttoi Ka&yt.ievoi (will fear us, hearing that we shall not crouch with 
fear on account of them). A.ia%{tvo(ii.ai rbv Sre6v (I feel ashamed before the 
god). R. L. 2, 11. alSelo- &ai robs apxovras. Cy. 1. 3, 5. kcsI o~4, 8> 
tt dmr e, /xv a arr 6 /xevov r avr a ra /3 pd> jxar a opw ( I see that you are dis- 
gusted icith, loathe this food). PI. Symp. 173, c. toiij eralpovs e'Aeco. Dem. 
Cor. 290, 185. k ar airXayrjvat rbv $i\nrirov (to be panic-stricken by 
Philip). In poetry this use of the Ace. is much more extensive. 

Rem. 5. Verbs which express the idea of motion, sometimes take (as transi- 
tive verbs) the Ace. of the thing put in motion by them, as a passive oliject ; 
this construction is used in poetry, seldom in prose. The following 
verbs especially belong here, fiaiveiv, a.'iao'eiv, /repay, 7rAe2V pitrsiv, 
ffTrevd e iv, etc. S. Ant. 1158. ri>xv Kar ap p e iv e i rbv evrvxovvra 
{fortune sinks the fortunate man). 'E nfiaiv e iv, iirai'a o~ e iv iroda (to put out 
the foot, move the foot quickly); a'to-o-eiv X*P a (furiously to set or move the 
hand to) ; /3 ao~ iv, ir6S a tt e p a v, all poetic. Th. 6,39. Kan a cirevde iv (ac- 
celerare). In this way, verbs expressing sound, in the pregnant sense of putting 
an object in motion and causing it to sound, are sometimes constructed with the 
Ace. II. A, 160. "ttttoi /ceii/' t>X* a KpoT aXi^ov ava TTTo\e/j.oio yetyvpas (rattle 
the chariots, hurry off the chariots with a rattling sound). Her. 6, 58. \ef$t)ra 
Kpor eovc i (rattle the kettle, strike it again and again). So also in a pregnant 
sense, the poets say, &ebv x°P evelVi > eAicrcret;/ (deum choreis, saltando cele- 
brare). Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 552. 

6. With verbs of motion, the space or ivay passed over is put 
in the Ace., these being the objects on which the action of the 
verb is performed; so also the time during which an action 
takes place (in answer to the question, How long?), is put in 
the Ace, as being the Object measured by the action; so too 
measure and iveight (in answer to the question, Hoiv much?), 
are put in the Ace, these also being the objects on which the 
action of the verb is performed. 

Balveiv, rcepav, epireiv, it o p ev e a£ra l 65 6 v (to go the way, etc., comp. 
itque reditque viam). Eur. Med. 1067. &AA 5 el/J.i yap 5)] r X-n/xov e <tt drr\v 
656v (will go the icay). X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. (jL7}ti ra SvsfSara iropevov, aAAa 
KeKevi aoi robs rjytjxovas r tj v pa,o"r-r\v (odov) rjyelo-^ai (do not march over 
the difficult places, but command your guides to lead over the easiest road). An. 4. 4, 
1. 67r opev^rj aav Cia rr\s 'Apjutevias TTtdlov airav /ecu \eiovs yrjAocpovs 
(marched over a plain, etc.). R. Equ. 8, 10. y)v 6 (xev (pevyrj i -k I rod Xtzttov irav- 
roia xwpia (per varia loco). Cy. 1.6, 43. ayeiv (arpariav) 3) crrevas ?) 
irXarelas odovs. Dem. I. Phil. 49, 34. dyav /ecu (pepcav robs ir\4ovras Sd- 
Xarrav (sa iling tl trough the sea). Xpovov, rbv % p 6 v o v, for a time, ( different 
from XP°VV> avv XP^w, in, by time, gradually), vi/icra, r^ipav (during the night, day). 
Her. 6, 127. ■)) 2v£ap« W^ rovrov rbv xP^ov fxaXtara (was flourishing 
34* 



402 syntax. [$ 279. 

during this time). X. An. 4. 5, 24. KaraXa/xpdvei rr\v frvyarepa rod Kcc/idpxov 
evvdrr]v r)/j.e pav yeya/j.r)/j.evr]v {who had been married nine days). Cy. 6. 3, 11. 
Kal x&es Se Kal rpirrjv r)jxepav rb avrb rovro err parr ov. Dem. Phil. 3. 116, 23. 
'[(rx v<rav ^ 6 ' Tt Ka ^ ®vBa?oi tovs reXevraiovs r ovrov<rl xpcfj'ous /nerd rr-,v 
iv AevKrpois fJ-axv^ {during these last times). Her. 1,31. aradiovs rrevre Kal 
t eo~o~e paKOvr a SiaKOfjiio-avres diriKovro is rb lp6v {having passed over forty-Jive 
stades). 6, 119. airexeiv Se/co Kal Sir] Koviovs o-raSiovs {to be distant two 
hundred and ten stades). 6, 135. MtXridSris direrrXee Tldpov rroXiopKrjo'as re e£ 
Kal etKoo~i rjfxepas. "Ecpeaov airex^i dirb ^.dpSecov rpioov r)ixepwv 65 6 v. X. C. 
3. 6, 1. ovSerrw e^Koaiv err] yeyovcbs (like viginti annos natus, twenty years old). 
Here belongs the Ace. with Svvacr&ai, to be worth. Her. 3, 89. rb BafSvX&viov 
raXavrov Svvarai Evfio'iSas I /3S o jx-I] Kovra five as {the Babylonian talent 
is worth [weiglis as much as, amounts to] seventy Euboean minae). 

Rem. 6. In poetry, the Ace. of the local object is sometimes used even with 
verbs denoting rest, e. g. KeloSai, arrival, r)oSai, baao-eiy, Ka&i(eiv, etc. (instead 
of eV with the Dat., as in prose). Here also the Ace. represents the space as 
the object acted upon, or taken possession of, e. g. S. Phil. 145. {r6rrov ivposiSeiv 
e&eXeis) ovriva Ketrai {quemjacens occupatum tenet). Comp. Larger Gram. 
Part II. § 554, Rem. 3. • 

Rem. 7. The following prepositions are joined with the Ace. to define more 
fully the extension in space and time, viz., dvd,from a lower to a higher place, 
e. g. dv a. irora/xbu rvXeiv, aua. vvKra ; — Kara, from a higher to a lower place, e. g. 
Kara rrorajxbv TrAetV, Kara rbv fiiov ; — afupl and irepi, round about, e. g. Paiveiv 
aiJ.(pl (or rrepl) rrjv ttSXiv, d/xcpl rbv x ei l x ® ua i lve P'- T " MrjSiKa ; — vtt6, under, v(p* 
rjXiov, virb vvxra, sub noctem ; — vrrep, over ; — rrapd, near by, along, by the side of, 
e. g. rrapd rbv rvorap.bv rropeveoSrai, reap' oXov rbv fiiov ; — irri, upon, e. g. irrl vcora 
SraXaaa-ns rrXelv, irrl rroXvv XP^ V0V 5 — ^"> through, e. g. Sid Sdifxara fiaiveiv, Sid 
vvxra ; — jxerd ravra, postea ; — rrpbs earrepav, towards evening. 

Rem. 8. From this use of the Ace. to denote space, time, and quantity, 
very many adverbial expressions have originated: (a) rr)v raxio-rrjv (6S6v), 
celerrime ; rrjv rvp<jorr)v, primum ; rr\v evhelav, recte, straight forward ; fxaxpdv, far ; 
dXXrjv Kal aXXrjv, sometimes here, sometimes there, etc. II. \p, 116. rroXXa S &v au- 
ra, Kar avr a, rr dpavr d re, S6x Hid r r)X&ov {they passed over many up hills, 
down hills, straight and cross ways ; — (b) o-fi/xepov, to-day ; avpiov, to-morrow ; dpxyv, 
rr)v dpxw, properly, at first, omnino ; reXos, rb reXevraiov, finally ; veov, lately ; 
rrpSrepov, rrpoorov, rb rvpwrov, rb rvp'iv, rb avr'iKa, ravvv, rb rraKai, rb iraXaiov, rb 
XonrSv, etc.; — (c) rroXXa, saepe; rd rroXXa, plerumque ; rroXv, fxeya, fxeyaXa, fie- 
yiara, oXiyov, /xiKpov, fxiKpd, (rvxvd, fiaKpd, iffov, roaovro, irdvra, etc. So also 
fxriKOS, rrXr}&os. 

7. Finally the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs 
and intransitive adjectives of every kind, to explain and define 
their meaning more fully. Here, also, the Ace. represents the 
object as acted upon or suffering, since, it denotes the object to 
which the intransitive action of the verb or adjective, refers 
or is directed. This Ace. is used most frequently in specifica- 
tions relating to the body and the mind. This is called the Ace. 
of more definite limitation, sometimes the Ace. of synecdoche. 



$ 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 403 

Her. 2, 111. Kdjxveiv robs o<p&aA/xovs (to be pained in or in respect, to the 
eyes). 3, 33. ras (ppeuas vyiaiveiv (to be sound in mind). X. C. 1. 6, 6. a\ye?i/ 
robs ir6das (to have pain in the feet). 4. 1, 2. (pavepbs l\v 'ZwKpdrns oh rwv ra. 
ac&fxara irpbs 8>pav, aWa rwv ras ypvx&s irpbs aper7]u ev TrecpvKSrccu 1 ecpie/xevos 
(that he ivas not desirous of those well-constituted in body for beauty, but of those well- 
adapted in mind, etc.). PI. Rp. 453, b. bia<pepei yvurj avdpbs rh\v <pvo~iv (woman 
differs from man in respect to her nature). 462, d. 6 av&pcoiros rbu ZattrvKov 
a\ye? (is pained as to, has a pain in, his finger). Ka\6s iart ra 6/x/xara (is 
beautiful as to his eyes, has beautiful eyes). Ka/cJs eVrt r •}/ v \p v x "h v. So aya&6s, 
o~o(p6s, (pp6vi{Mos, xP'^ a ' l l X0S i XP r l°~ T ° s i btKaios, etc., with the Ace. 'Aya&bs r exvnv 
rivd. Her. 3, 4. $dvns Kal yvcafxrjy iKav6s, Kal ra it o\e fxia a\Ki/xos "f\v. X. 
Cy. 2. 3, 7.aueo~rr] QspavAas rb a up. a ovk aepv^s, Kal r^u ^^x^v ouk ayevvel 
avdpl ioiK&s. 8.4, 18. Seivbs ravr-nv r^v r exvnv. So Savjxao~rbs rb /xe- 
ye&os, rb KaWos (wonderful for his size and beauty, of wonderful size and 
beauty). The English commonly uses prepositions to express the force of this 
Ace, viz. in, in respect to, of; or when it stands with an adjective, the English 
sometimes changes the Ace. of the thing into a personal substantive, and 
makes the adjective as an attributive agree with it, e. g. aya&bs rexvnv, a 9°°d 
artist, comp. Eng. he is a good shot, i. e. marksman ; or the prepositions of or with 
are placed before the substantive denoting the thing, and the attributive ad- 
jective is made to agree with that substantive, e. g. veavias Ka\bs rrjv tyvxw, of 
or with a lovely spirit. 

Rem. 9. Sometimes the prepositions els, irp6s, Kara, are joined with the Ace, 
in which case the relation is analogous to an Ace. of space, denoting direction, 
as bio.tpepeiv efo ri, e. g. els aperrjv. X. C. 3. 5, 1. evbo^orepa rj irSXis els ra 
iroAefxiKa eo-rai. ~Xo<pbs irpos ri. — On the Dat. see § 285, (3), (b). 

Rem. 10. From this use of the Ace, many adverbial expressions have orig- 
inated. Thus the expressions of measure : eupos, fyos, /xeye&os, fid&os, p.rJKos, 
irAri&os, api&p.6v ; also yevos, ovofxa, /xepos, rb cbv /xepos, irp6<pao-iv, under pretence, 
rb aAw&es, yvdo/xyv e/xriv. Her. 6, 83. KAeavdpos yevos ecbv $iya\evs cur' 'Ap- 
Kabi-ns (being a Phigalian by birth). 7, 109. Aifxvn eovcra rvyxdvei wsel rpirjKOvra 
crabiwv r))v irepiobov {in circumference). X. An. 2. 5, 1. fxera ravra a<pi- 
kovto eirl rbv Zdfiarov Trora/xbv rb el po s rerrdpwv irAeStpow (four plethra in 
width). 4. 2, 2. oi fxev eiropevovro rb TrXri&os els Stsx'A' 04 ( two thousand in 
number). — Moreover rovvavriov, ravavria, on the contrary ; ra\\a, in respect to 
other things ; rb b\ov, omnino ; ap.<p6repa, rovro (ravra) /xev — rovro (tavra) be; 
ohbev, in no respect; rl, in some respect; iro\hd, irdvra, etc. — lb eV e/xe, rov-ir' 
ifie, rovni ae, rb els i[xe, quantum ad me (te), as far as it relates to me, etc. 



J 280. Double Accusative. 

In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the 
Ace, with one verb : — 

1. When, in the construction given under § 278, 1, the verb 
•has a transitive sense, as ^Odav <j>iXelv, then the idea of activity 
consisting of the verb and a cognate substantive (with which 



404 SYNTAX. [§ 280. 

an adjective usually agrees), being blended into one, may at 
the same time be extended to a personal object, e. g. <£iA.G 
jxeyaXrjv tfaXlav (= (pckoj) rbv rrcuha. 

Her. 3,88. ydfxovs robs ir pcbrovs iydfj.ee 6 Aapelos Kvpov dvo &uya- 
repas, "Aroaadv re Kal "Aprvcrr wv-nv {contracted very honorable marriages 
with the two daughters of Cyrus). 154. eeovrbv Acafiarai Adfi-nv dv^Keo-- 
r o v (maims himself with an incurable maiming, maims himself incurably). Th. 8, 
75. & p Ktocr av robs ffr par idras robs [xeyio'T ovs o pKovs (made the sol- 
diers take the most solemn oaths). X. Cy. 8. 3, 37. ifie 6 itar^p rr\v rwv iraidwv 
-ir a ideiav eiraiSevev ( educated me in the education of boys ). PL Apol . 1 9, a. 
MeA-nros fie eypdtyar o rty ypacpyjv ravr-nv. 36, c. eKaffrov evepye- 
relv r\\v [xeylarrjv ev epyecriav. Her. 1, 129. 8e?7r v ov r6 ( = o) fj.iv 
i^oiviae. Th. 1,32. tt]v v av fxa.x' ia - v a.ir eaxr dfieb a Kopiv&iovs (like 
viK-nv vitcav), we repelled the Corinthians in the naval battle. PL Gorg. 522, 
a. ivoAAa Kal rjSea Kal iravroSaird ev&x ovv vfxas. Especially with 
verbs of naming, after the analogy of ovofxa bvofid^eiv nvd: X. O. 7, 3. KaAov~ 
or I fie rovro to ovofxa. (they called me this name, by this name). PL Pp. 471, 
d. av aKaAovvr es ravra rd ov6\xara eavrovs. 

Remark 1 . Instead of the substantive denoting the thing effected, the Ace. 
of a pronoun is frequently used. X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. raAAa fj.ifj.ovfj.evos rbv 
2a«w. An. 5. 7, 6. rovro v/xas i^airaT7i<rai. This is especially the case with 
verbs of praise and blame, of benefit and injury, after the analogy of eyKwfiiov 
iyKWfxid(eiv nvd and the like. PL Symp. 221, c. iroAAa fxev ovv dv rts Kal aAAa 
exoi 2ooKpdY>ni/ eiraiveo-ai (one could praise Socrates for many other things). 
Pp. 363, d. ravra 5?) Kal aAAa roiavra ey kw fxid^ov a i dtKaioavv^v. 
MeyaAa, /xiKpd, irAetoo, fxei^co axpeAetv, /3 Adirr e i v, ddiKelv riva. 

2. Expressions of saying or doing good or evil (which generally 
contain an Ace, or its equivalent in an adverb, of the thing said 
or done), take the object to which the good or evil is done, in 
the Ace, e. g. aya^a, kolXol, KaKa 7roie.1v, tt pa.TTt.iv, epya£e- 
orSai, Xeyav, ei7reiv, etc. r iv a (to do good, etc., to some one). 

X. 0. 5, 12. 7} yrj robs apiara S e pair ev ovr as avr}]v TrAelara dya&d 
avr iir o i6? (returns the greatest advantages to those who cultivate it best). Her. 8, 
61. r6re Srj 5 ®efxiaroKAer\s Ke1v6v re Kal robs Kopiv&iovs iroAAa 
re Kal KaKa eA.676 (said much evil of him and the Corinthians). X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. 
ovoeirdorroTe eiravovro iroAAd KaKa. rj/xas tt 1 o v v r e s (never ceased to do much 
injury to us). 

Rem. 2. Instead of the Ace. of the object acted upon or suffering, the Dat. 
is sometimes used, which is considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvan- 
tage (Dativus commodi or incommodi). Dem. Aphob. 855, 37. ri a 1 ttoitjctwo-iv 
01 fidprvpes ; (quid tui iibi prosiut testes?) X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. irpooKoirei, ri a 1 
Troir,aouaLi/ oi dpx^uevoi (consider what your subjects will do eor you) ; on the con- 
trary with ae (what they will do TO you). An. 4. 2, 23. -navra eiroirfffav rots 
dirodav ovaiv (showed all honors to the dead). Cy. 7. 2, 27. ? i}v ravra fj.01 
iroi-ftffjis a Aey eis (if you perform for me what you promise). So also in the sense 
of, to do something with some one, as PL Charm. 157, c. ovk av l^o^ey, '6 ri ttoioT- 



$ 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 405 

fiiv a- 01. But the Dat. often depends upon the adjective, e. g. Dem. Cor. 243, 
55. SiaTeXe? irpaTTcov Kal Xeyav ra fieXTLCTTa r $ S^/xcp (continue to do and 
say what is best for the people). 

3. With verbs : (a) of entreating, beseeching, desiring, inquir- 
ing, asking : alrecr, a.7raireu/, Ttpdrreiv (to demand) , etsTrparreiv, 
TrpaTTeo-Sat ; ipwrav, ipeoSai, t^eratpw, iaropeiv, avurropclv ; — (b) of 
teaching and reminding : SiSdaKtiv, 7raiS£*W, dvapupLv^aKetv, vtto- 
lAifivrjo-Keiv (with both of these the Gen. of the thing is more 
usual) ; — (c) of dividing and cutting into parts : Saieo-Scu, 8uu- 
puv, Te/Avew, 8iavi/jLuv, KOTavcficiv ) — (d) of depriving and taking 
aivay : crTepeiv, a7roo-T€petv ; areptcrKeLv, avkdv, dcpaipeicrSaL ; — ( e) of 
concealing or hiding from : Kpv-nrf.iv (i<ev$eiv Poet.) ; — (f ) of put- 
ting on and off, clothing and unclothing, surrounding with : kv- 
hveiv, €kSv€iv, ap,<pMwvvai, 7r€pij3dWe(T$ca. 

Her. 3, 1. irep-^as Ka/j.fSvo'Tis is AXyvivTov K-fjpvKa a^T ee "Afxacr iv frvyarepa 
(asked Amasis for his daughter). 58. ecu to us eKarbv TaKaw a errpv^av 
(demanded of them a hundred talents). X. C. 1. 2, 60. ovdeva TrwTrore /xio-^bv 
Trjs (Tvvovo-'ias i ir pa|ar o ~2,wKpa.T7]s (never demanded a reward of any one for 
his instruction). H. 4.1,21. 'Hpiinridas cure? tqv 'AyrjcriXaov SirXiTas 
T€ es SisxiXiovs Kal ir eXTatrr as aXXovs t oltovt ov s (asks of Agesilaus 
about two thousand hoplites, etc.). Cy. 6. 2, 35. to. els Tpo<p$)v 5 4 out a e|eTa- 
fere tovs v<p' vpuu (inquire of those under you respecting the things necessary for 
food). Eur. Hipp. 254. iroXXa. SiSacr/cet yap jx 6 ttoXvs P'lotos (teaches me 
much). Antiph. 5. 131, 14. 6 XP^ V0S Ka ^ V iftreipia to. /jlt] KaXcos exovTa 
ckS lS do~K€i tovs avbpujTTovs (teach men what is notproper). Her. 1. 136. 
iraiSevovcr i tovs 7ra?5as Tpla fxovva (they teach boys three things only). 6, 
138. yXSurirdv re t^v , Attik^v Kal Tp6itovs tuv 'A&rjvalwv eSlSaiTKOv 
tovs tra?5as. X. An.3.2, 11. av a fivfio-ca vfxas Kal r ovs k ivBvvov s(I will 
remind you of the dangers). Hier. 1, 3. vir e fivno'ds fxe tcl iv t£> ISlcctiko) fiicp. 
Her. 7, 121. t pets fxoipas 6 aepfys da<rdfievos irdvTa tov tre^bv ltt pa- 
t6v (having divided all the land army into three divisions). Te/xveiv, 5 Lai pel v t i 
fie pr], noipas (to cut, to divide something into parts). X. Cy. 7. 5, 13. 6 Kvpos r b 
gt paTevfxa KaTeveifxe SoSSe/ca fieprj (divided the army into twelve parts). 
PI. Polit.283, d. dteXtvfieu avT^v (t^v fxeT prjT iktjv) dvo fxep-n. X. Cy.4. 
6,4. tov fxSvov /xoi Kal cp'iXov iralSa acpelXeTO ttjv if/ux^ (deprived my 
only child of life). Eur. Hec. 285. rbv irdvTa 8' oXfSov fipap %v fi acpei- 
XeTo. Dem. Aphob. 839, 13. t^v Tifiijv d-woo-Tepel /ie (robs me of honor). 
Phil. 54, 50. ra TjfxeTe pa 7] /.Las air octt e p e? (6 &iXnnros). KpvirTco a e Tb 
a r v x V /* a (I conceal the misfortune from you). Eur. Hipp. 912. ov p.7]v <piXovs 
ye, k&tl /xaXXov ? n (piXovs, KpvirT eiv SiKaLoy ads, irdrep, 8vsTrpa£las. X. 
Cy. 1. 3, 17. -jraTs fxeyas /xiKpbv ex^f X l ™ ya > erepov nalSa {xlk p 6v, p.ey av 
ixovra x^cova, e/cSucros avTdv, Tbv fxev eavrov eKetvov T)p(pieo~c, Tbv Si 
iKtlvov avrbs iv4o~v(a large boy stripped another small boy of his large tunic and put 



406 SYNTAX. [$ 280. 

his own tunic on him). Her. 1, 163. re7xos ire p ifiaXea&ai t)]v it6Xiv (to 

surround the city with a wall). 

Rem. 3. Several of the above verbs are sometimes otherwise constructed, 
commonly, however, with some difference in the sense expressed; thus, alre?v 
Ti it a pa tlvos; ipwrau r iv a ire pi rivos; with verbs of dividing and cut- 
ting into parts, not unfrequently the preposition els, sometimes also Kara, 
is joined with the Ace, e. g. rovs TroXiras els e| ixoipas hieiXov ; or the word jxepos, 
etc., is governed directly by the verb, and the object to be divided is put in the 
Gen., depending on p.epos, etc., e. g. 8vo p.oipas Au5a>j/ -ndvToov hielXev (he divided a 1 ! 
the Lydians into two parts), Her. 1, 94; passively, SdoSeica TLepaav cpvXal diyprjvTcu 
(the Persians are divided into twelve tribes), X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Verbs of depriving 
and taking away, have the following constructions : 

(a) airoffrepetv and a<paipe?(r&ai with the Ace. of the thing alone, e. g. 
IlcDs av outos efreXoi r a aXX6r pia airoarepe?!/ ; (how could he be willing to 
take away the things of others ?), X. Ag. 4, 1. XaXafai r-a naXws ey voter - 
fj.eva (provisa) /cat it eir oit\ p.ev a acpatpouvrai (take away, destroy 
the provisions), 0. 5, 18 ; the Ace. of the person alone is but rarely found ; 
thus with acpaipe?<r£rai (to rob, take from), e. g. Andoc. 4. 32, 27. rots 
itoXirais ovk e£ foov xp^rat, aXXa rovs p.ev acpai po v p. ev o s, rovs Se 
tvtttoiv ovSevbs a^iav rrjv Srip-OKpariav airocpaivei. 

(b) crrepelv, air ocr epetv, or epiane iv, a<pai p ela&al rivd ri very 
often. 

(c) vrepelv, airoGT e pelv rivd rivos, like spoliate aliquem aliqua re, to 
deprive one of something, see, § 271,2; but a(paipe?cr&ai very seldom 
has this construction, and indeed only in the sense of to restrain, to pre- 
vent. Ot bi\n£6p.evoi acpaipovvrai ras p.hv Kvvas rod evpelv rbv Xaya>, 
avrobs Se rrjs wcpeXeias, X. Ven. 6, 4. 

(d) a<paipe?(rdrai, airocrre pe?v with the Gen. of the person and the Ace. 
of the thing ; they then signify to take something from some one, to withdraw 
something from some one. This is a more rare construction. Ot irXeoveKrai 
rS>v &XX&V acpaipovp.evo i xP'h( JLara eaurovs doKouai irXouri^eiv 
(taking their property from others, seem to enrich themselves), X. C. 1. 5, 3. 
~S,v p. p, ax i as a (pat. pov p.evov ttjs irSXecas (= twc. iroXirwv) Dem. 
Cor. 232, 22. El ti fiovXovrai iiriT^eveiv KaXaiv, ovhevbs airocrr epei 
(to Kvvnyeaia), X. Ven. 12, 8. "Ostis,^ dXXwv eavrbv aw oar epcov, 
aacpaXeias 8e?rai (properly, aliis se subducens, i. e. ab aliis desciscens ; eaurbv 
is here to be considered as the Ace. of the thing), Th. 1, 40. 

Rem. 4. On the double Accusative with the verbs irei&eiv, eirorpvveiv, eirai- 
peiv, irpoKaXeiadai, avayKa(eiv, see § 278, 4. 

4. An Accusative of the object acted upon, and an Accusa- 
tive of the predicate (which is often an adjective), is used with 
the verbs mentioned under $ 240, 2, when they are changed 
from the passive to the active ; hence two Accusatives stand 
with verbs signifying to make, to constitute, e. g. TroieLv, nSevai, 
reddere; to choose, to appoint, e. g. alpelcrSai, creare, etc.; to consider, 
represent, and regard as something, to declare, to know, e. g. vc/xt- 
te.Lv, rj-yeXa-S-ai, etc. ; to say, to name, to praise, to chide, e. g. Xiyeiv, 
6vop.d£eiv, KaXeiv ; to give, to take, to receive, e. g. 7rapaXafie.lv 8£~ 
X«r#ai, etc, ; to produce, to increase, to form, to teach, to educate. 



$ 281.J ACCUSATIVE CASE. 407 

Kvpos robs cpihovs eno'iyae irKovaiovs (made his friends rich). Uai- 
Seveiv t iv u oodpov (to educate one wise, i. e. make wise by education ). N o fi I - 
(etv, -qyelaSrai riva dvSpa aya&6v(tothink,regard,consideroneagoodman). 
Dem. Cor. 5,43. ol &erra\ol Kal Qrjficuoi <p{,\ov, evepyerrjv, awrr\pa rbv 
$i\nrirov rjyovvro. 'Ovofid^eiv r iva (rocptpr rjv (to call one a sophist). 
Atpe?(r& ai riva <rr parrjySu (to choose one a commander) . X. Cy. 5. 2,14. 
rbv Y cafipv av avvSenrvov it apeXafiev. Dem. Chers. 106, 66. ir6\ews €70*76 
irXovrov T]y ov (j. ai ffv fifidxovs, iricrriv, evvoiav. Andoc. 3. 24, 7. rj 
zlprjVT) rbu 8 rj fx v rwv 'A&rjvaiocv vi\/7)\bv oj p e Kal Kar e err) cr e v Icr x v p6v. 

Rem. 5. On the use of the Inf. elvai with the Ace., see § 269, Rem. 1. 



$281. Remarks on the use of the Accusative ivith the 

Pa ssive. 

1 As the Greek considers the passive as a reflexive (§ 251, 1), it follows that, 
on the change of the Act. to the Pass., the Ace. may remain with every transitive 
verh which in the Act. takes an Ace. of a thing as the object acted upon, e. g. 
(K6rrrou(ri ra /xeTaira), k 6irr ovrai ra fier wira, which may mean, either that 
they strike themselves on the forehead, they strike their forehead, or they let their forehead 
be struck, they are struck on the forehead ; Her. 7, 69. 'Apdfiioi £eipas vir e£<a cr- 
fi e v 1 e Cray, Alfrioires Se TrapSaXeas re Kal Xeovreas ivafji.fjt.eUoi (the Arabians 
were girt with the zeira, but the Ethiopians were clothed with leopard and lion-skins). 

2. Hence, when the verbs mentioned under § 280, 1 and 3, which in the Act. 
govern two accusatives, are changed into the Pass., the Ace. of the person or of 
the object acted upon, is changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing, or the 
effect remains, (a) Ovros fievroi 6 eizaiv6s iari Kah6s, b v ab vvv eiraive? vir 
avSpwv a^iav irio-revecr&ai (this is honorable praise by which you are now praised), 
PL Lach. 181, b. T pav fxar icrSrels wo\\d (sc. rpavjxara), (wounded with many 
wounds), Th. 4, 12. "Ovo/xa rb fiev irpwrov ZdyKXrj tfv vnb rusv Si/ceAdV K\tj- 
&e?(ra (f) ~S,iKeXia), 6, 4 (was called by its first name). 'H apiais, %v eKpi&r) 
(to which he was condemned), Lys. Agor. 134, 50. Ta fie yi err a r ifif]^7iv ai, 
S. 0. Pv. 1203. Aecrfibv Svse^vvo-rov ekKerai Se&els, Eur. Hipp. 1237. 
So axpe\e?<r&ai, (rifiiovabai fieyaXa, f3\dirrecrSrai iroKXa. — (b) Mov fftK^v virb 
Adfnrpov iraiS evbels, prjr op iktjv Se vir'' Avr icpuvros (having been educated 
in music and rhetoric), PI. Menex. 236, a; so SiSax^Vvairexvnv vir ^ ri vos 
(to be taught an art by someone); epwrrf^rrjvai r^v yvcifirjv vtto rivos (to be 
asked an opinion). Trj Kal olivets ra avr a fxepr] S lavefit) 3-^tw (be di- 
vided into the same parts), PL L. 737, e. 'Tirb Pa<ri\e<as it eir pay fievos t obs 
(pSpov's (having demanded the tribute), Th. 8,5. 'A cpaipeb fj va 1, air ocrr ept]- 
&T)vai r))v apx^v vtt6 rivos. Kpv<p^rrtvai r 1 (celari ahquid). Tie ip&rjvai 
r^v avax<»pr)<riv(^21%,4r). ' AfjHpievwff&cu x^a>va occurs only with the mean- 
ing to put a garment on one's self but not I let myself be clothed by another, the garment 
was put on me by another; but evSv^vai x™va (to be clothed with a tunic) is in use. 

3 As the Greek may form a personal Pass. (§251, 4), of every intransitive 
verb, which has its object in the Gen. or Dat., e. g. afxeAov/xai, fyieA^diji', <p&ov~ 



408 syntax. • [$$ 282, 283. 

ovjxai, ecf>&owfi&r)v ; so may it also with such transitive verbs as have, together 
with the Ace. of the thing, a Dat. of the person, the Dat. of the person being 
changed into the Nona., but the Ace. of the thing remaining. Th. 1. 1, 26. ol 
7wv 'A&rji/aiwi' enr ir er papev o't rr)v tpvXaK-qv (quibus custodia demandata 
erat, those of the Athenians who had been entrusted with the guard, from eiriTpeirca run 
t^v (pvKaKi]v) . 5, 37. ol Kopiv&ioi ravra eir e err a\fxe v o i auex^povy 
{having been commanded these things) : 1, 140. el ^vyx^pvo'ere, Kai a Wo ti pe?- 
(oj/ ev&us eTTiTax&V ceo-&e (you will be commanded something greater). X. 
An. 2. 6, 1. ol o-Tparrjyol airo t jx-n & ei/re s ras Ke<paAas ereXevT7]aav. 



§ 282. (3) Dative. 

1. The Dat. is the Where-case, and hence denotes: (a) in a 
local relation, the place at or in which the action of the subject 
occurs; — (b) in a causal relation, the object upon which the 
action of the subject shows itself or becomes visible — the ob- 
ject which shares in or is concerned in an action. — This object 
is : (a) a person, or a thing considered as a person, e. g. /?o?7&o 
tols 7roAtrats or rfj ttoXgl; (fi) a thing, or an object considered as 
a thing, e. g. dyaAAo/xat rrj viktj. In this "way the Dat. may be 
treated under three divisions. In the first, the Dat. is regarded 
as a local object, in the second, as a personal object; in the 
third, the object is a thing, and is called the Dat. of the thing or 
instrumental Dat. 

§283. A. Local Dative. 

1. The Dat, as a local object, designates the place in {by, 
near, at) which an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al- 
most exclusively poetical ; in prose, prepositions are commonly 
joined with the Dative. 

II. i, 663. avrap 'Axt-XXevs evde p^ KXiffi-qs evirrjKTov (slept in the corner of 
the tent), it, 595. 'EXXadi olxia vaicav (dwelling in houses in Hellas), fi, 210. 
Kvpa iroXvcpXolaPoio SaXaccrns alyiaXw fxeyaXcc fipefxerai (roars upon the 
shore). S. Trach. 171. (e<pr)) t?> iraXaiav (pnybv av^aai irore AwScopl (that the 
beech tree once uttered an oracle at Dodona). Here belong the Locative forms very 
common in prose, viz., Mapa$£>vi, "E\ev<r?ui, Uv&o?, "loSr/xo?, oucoi, 'AS-nvntri, 
UXaraiacn, etc. (at Marathon, etc.) : also, ravrrj, TfjSe, here, y, where. So also, 
Od. o, 227. TlvXioicri /xey e£oxa Sahara va'icov. 

2. Hence the Dat. is used also with the attributive pronoun 
avro?, to express the idea of together with. 



$ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 409 

Her. 6, 32. ras ir6\ias iveTrl/xtrpacrav avroTcr i ro7<r i Ipotcri (they burned 
the cities together with the temples — cities, temples and all). X. H. 6. 2, 35. at 
airb 'S.upaKovavv v?]es airacrat eaXcoaav avrois avS pa a iv (the ships were taken 
together with the men). 

3. The local relation is transferred to the time in which some- 
thing happens, and then from the time to the circumstances 
under ivhich something happens. Hence the Dat. denotes the 
time (definite) and circumstances of an action. 

In prose with rifiepa, wkt(, fxqvt, ere*, iviavT$, &pa and the like, in connection 
with attributive demonstratives, ordinals, and adjectives, as irp6repos, vcrrepos, 
iiri&v, TrapeA&cZi/ and the like. The Dat. therefore usually expresses definite 
time. TrjSe Trj vvkt'i, ravT-n Trj 7) fie pa, i kg ivy Trj ripe pa, rrj avr-p 
vvkt'i, it o\Ko?s erecrt, rpirca fxr]vi, t 77 avTjj So pa, r o> iirtSvTi ere*, 
e ice i vco t eS e t e 1, r u> vctt 4 pw ere 1, t v r ci> r u> ec tavrtp, etc. X. An. 
4. 8, 1. tt; 7r pcirr) 7} pep a acpiKovTO in] rhu iroTafj.6u (the first day or on the first 
day). Also &pa x^ l ^ vos ( J " n time of winter), vov/j.r]via (at the time of new moon) ; 
likewise, Ylava£rr\vaiois, Aiovvalois, Tpaycp$o7s Kaivols, at the time of the Panathenaea, 
etc. The preposition iv is joined with the Dat. : (a) when the substantive 
stands without an attributive, e. g. iv vpepa, iv vvkt'i, iv Srepei : often also when 
a demonstrative stands with it, e. g. iv rovrw t$ iviavrcp ; (b) usually, when a 
space of time is to be indicated ; hence with substantives in connection with 
cardinals and the adjectives 6\iyos, fipaxvs, /j.iKp6s, iroAvs, etc., e. g. Sii)yayov 
iv rpicrXv r\yi.4pais (in three days, in the space of three days), X. An. 4. 8, 8 
Od. I, 253. 67rA.eOjU.ei/ Bope'r? ave/u.(p aKpae't KaKco (with a good wind) . II. o, 
418. t<5 o-e K.aitrj a? cry t4kov iv /xeyapoicnv (under an evil destiny). Her. 6, 139. 
iireav fioper) avefj-co avT7)/j.epbv vrjvs e^avvcrp e'/c tt)s ifxerep-ns is ttjv yfierepriv, 
r6re irapahucTOfiev (when a ship shall come with a north wind). 



$ 284. B. The Dative as a Personal Object. 

1. Both the Dat. of the person and of the thing denote an 
object, upon or in which the action of the subject shows itself 
or becomes visible ; both denote an object which participates 
in, or is concerned in, the action of the subject; accordingly, 
the language regards the Dat. of the person and of the thing 
as the same. The distinction is merely this, that the former is 
a personal object, or is considered as such, and consequently 
has the power of will ; the latter is a mere thing, or is consid- 
ered as such, and of course without will. As the idea denoted 
by the term where, is intermediate to that denoted by whence 
and ivhither, so the Dat. (the Where-case), when it is a person, 

35 



410 SYNTAX, [$ 284. 

stands in contrast with the Ace. (the Whither-case) ; when it 
is a thing, in contrast with the Gen. (the Wlience-case). 

2. The Ace. denotes an object effected, accomplished by the 
action of the subject, or the object acted upon; the Dat. of the 
person, on the contrary, denotes an object merely aimed at by 
the action of the subject and sharing in it; the action of the 
subject is indeed employed on the object and becomes mani- 
fest in it, yet it does not make it a passive object, but the ob- 
ject itself appears in distinction from the subject as active; 
between the subject and the object a reciprocal action takes 
place. The Gen. denotes the immediate cause; the Dat. of the 
thing, on the contrary, a mediate, indirect cause (the ground, 
the means, the instrument); the Gen. denotes an object as 
calling forth and producing the action of the subject; the Dat 
of the thing, only such an object as exhibits in or upon itself 
the action of the subject. 

Remark 1. In poetry a local limit or object is very often considered as a 
person, and is indicated by the Dat. ; this sometimes occurs, though but seldom, 
in prose. II. o, 369. irao-i &eo7au/ x^P as oLuiaxovTes {raisiny up the hands to 
all the gods). So aXpzaSrai, iiraipea^ai dopv tiv'i. II. e, 709. \ifj.v?) K€K\iiJ.i- 
vos KiTpiaidi [dwelling at the Cephisian lake), tj, 218. irpoKaKicrcraTo x&P^V (^ e 
challenged to the contest) . Th. 1, 13. 'Afie^oKA^jSofiioij fJAdev. 3,5. avrots 
MeAe'as A.6.KWV a<piKV<TiTai. 

Rem. 2. From this use of the Dat., the fact may be explained, why many 
verbs of motion compounded Avith the prepositions ds, irp6s, eVi, etc., take 
their object in the Dat. ; also why most adverbs with the Dat. (or Locative) in- 
flection [§ 101, 2. (b)], may express both the relation of rest (local Dat.) and 
the direction whither (personal Dat.), e. g. xa^af, humi, humum; so, likewise, the 
adverbs in -n, e. g. &AA?7 ; those in -a, e. g. &v<*>, Kara, etc. ; those in -o i, e. g. 
ireoo?, humi, humum ; ii/rav&o?, hue and hie (but of, oiroi, tto7, always denote the 
direction whither). 

3. Most verbs, winch take the personal Dat., as the object 
sharing or participating in the action, express the idea of associa- 
tion and union, e. g. ScSovat, Trape-)(eiv, vTrurxyeiorSou, dp7ra£av ri tlvl. 

The following classes of words, therefore, govern the Dative: — 
(1) Verbs expressing mutual intercourse, associating ivith, mix- 
ing with, participation, — Dative of communion, e. g. ojxiXttv, 
fivyvvvai, lAiyvvoSca, kolvovv, KoivovaSaL, KOLvonvecv, oV, KaTaXkarruv 
{to reconcile), Si-, KaTaWaTTeoSai (to reconcile one's self to), £cvov- 
<r$ai, cnrivSeoSai or cr7rov8as TroieicrSai, 7rparretv (agere cum aliquo) ; 
€t7reti/, Xeyeiv, SiaXeyecrSai, (.v^crSai, KarapaaSai, etc.; also adjec- 
tives and adverbs, sometimes even substantives which express 



§ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 411 

a similar idea, e. g. kolvos, owrpcxjSo?, <xiyz<£a)V09, avyyevr)?, p\era(.Tio<; ; 
many other words of a similar signification, compounded with 
crvv and //-era, also with iv, 7rpos, and napd. 

'O/ntAet rols aya&ols a v&pco-nro i s (associate with good men). Her. 3, 
131. 6 Ae(xoKT]dr]s IIoAu/c pdr et &fxi\r)(re. 6,21. iroAtzs avrai fxaXiara aA- 
\i}\ri<Ti e|e ivAfr-na av (cultivated hospitality with each other). — Eijxofiai 
rols &cols (I pray to the gods). X.H.2.2, 19. airevoe <r&a i 'Afr-nvaiois (to 
make a treaty with the Athenians). 3.2,20. aW-hKoi s airovoas ivoi-ntrav- 
ro (they made treaties with each other). Isocr. Paneg. 42. 9. at irpd£eis at Trpoy*. 
yevnp-evai Koival Traaiv r\\xlv Kareteicp&ricrav (common to us all). On the 
Gen. with kolv6s, see § 273, 3, (b). 

(2) Verbs of contending, litigating, vying with, e. g. ipfeiv, 
liaxeo-9-ai, 7roAe/>teiV, aywvL&aSai (usually rrpos two), 6\/<a£ecr$cu, dp.- 
<fnsl3r}T€iv, orao-ia^av, etc. ; also of going against, encountering, 
meeting and approaching, and the contrary, as those of yield- 
ing, e. g. v7roarrjvai and v<pi<TTacr$ai ; drtavrdv, xntavrdv, vTzavridt^iv, 
7rkricnaXf.lv, 7reAa£eii/, iyyi^eiv, etc. ; ei/ceiv, vttzlkuv, xwpeiv, Trapa^oypeiv, 
etc. ; the adjectives and adverbs TrXrjo-ios, ivavTto<s, 7reAas, etc. 
(seldom eyyus). 

Of'EWrjves avSpeius rols Xlipaais i p. ax 4 a avr o (fought bravely with the 
Persians). Mr; ei'/cere toTs iroAefilois (do not yield to the enemy). Xpfy 
rols ex^poTs Tr}sr)p.erepas (x^pas) it apax<*> py<r at, Isocr. Archid. 118, 13. On 
the Gen., see § 271,2. 'Tiro err ijvai avrols (Uepaais) 'Afr-nvaloi ro\p.-fj- 
aavres, iviicno-av avrovs (having dared to encounter them), X. An. 3. 2, 11. 'T<piar- 
raorfrai |u p.<p opals, Th. 2, 61. "Op.oiov bp.oia> ael ireAa^et (like always 
draws to like), PI. Symp. 195, b. "I^ovro avr tot To7<ri AaKe<5aip.ovioiai (encamped 
opposite the Lacedaemonians), Her. 6, 77. Tvpavvos a-iras ix&pbs iAev&epia Kal 
v6p.ois iv avr i os. On the Gen., see § 273, Kem. 9. 

(3) Verbs of commanding, entreating, counselling, inciting, en- 
couraging ; of following, accompanying, serving, obeying and diso- 
beying, trusting and distrusting, e. g. rrpo^rdrr^iv, hnrdrrziv, Tra.pa.i- 
vCiv, TrapaKeXcveaSai, etc. (but KeXevetv with Ace. and Inf.) ; errea-^ai, 
aKoXovSelv, StaSe'xeo-^at (to succeed to, take the place of) ; Tret^cr- 
#ai; vTraKOvecv, aireiSeiv, marreveiv, 7r€7roi$evai, etc.; the adjectives 
and adverbs aKoAovSos, olkoXovSus, eVo/xeVa)?, SidSoxos, kgqs, e<£e£»}g. 

X. Cy. 8. 6, 13. TOVT03V £y (instead of a) vvv vp.lv irapaKeXevo p.ai ovoev 
rols oovXois -rrposrarra) (I enjoin upon the slaves none of these things which 
I now command you). Her. 3, 88. 'Apdfiioi oudap.a Kar-f) Kovffav iirl oovXoavvT) 
lie pari at (never obeyed, were never subject to the Persians). 6,14. ivavp.dx^ov 
avr)KovffT-fi<ravT€s rolat arpar-rjyolai (they fought in disobedience to their 



412 SYNTAX. [$ 284. 

commanders). X. Cy. 1. 1, 2. tcls ayeXas ravras 45oKov/j.eu Spav /xaWov i&eXovo'as 
ire i&eff&ai rots uo/xev<r iv, ^ tovs avSrpwirovs rots &pxov o~ i (more willing 
to obey their shepherds, than men their rulers). 8.6,18. t<£ rj/xepiv^ ay y 4 \ca 
(<pacr\) tou vvKTtpivhv SioSexeo'&at [that the night messenger succeeds the one for 
the day). PI. Rp. 400, d. evXoyia dpa Kal evapixoaTia Kal evo-xyv-oavvn Kal evpvb' 
fiia evn&eia aKo\ov&e?. Eur. Andr. 803. Kaxbu KaKcp oidoox°v. PI. 
Phaed. 100, c. o-KSnei St? to. e£r}s €Keivois (consider the things next in order 
to those). 

(4) Expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness 
and unlikeness, of agreement and disagreement, e. g. loimivax, 
o/jlolovv, o/JLOiovcrSai, oyxotos, 6/xotcos, iVos, i'crcos, ip.<p€prj<; and irposfaprjs 
(similar) , TraponrXiijcnos, 7raponr\r}cr[<D<;, 6 avros (ide?ri), ap.a', Btd(f>opos 

(discordant, hostile), $id<ji(j)vo<s; and very many words compounded 
with ofAov, crvv, jxerd, e. g. ofxovoeiv, o/xoyXujTTOs, opLcow/xos, o-u//,</>a)V€tv, 
crvjJL<f>u)VO<s ) crvvuiSos. 

Her. 1, 123. tos 7rad-as Tas Kvpov rrjai ecovrov 6 /xo iov /xevos (likening, com- 
paring the sufferings of Cyrus with his own). 6, 23. 6 'Prjyiov Tvpavvos o id<popos 
(iiv) ro?(Ti ZayKXaioiff i (was hostile to the Zancleans). X. Cy. 7. 1, 2. anr- 
\t<r/j.4voi iravres i)(rav oi irepl rov Kvpov ro?s avrots rep Kvpw oirXois (were 
furnished with the same arms as Cyrus). 5. 1,4. dfiolavraTs dov\ais €*%€ 
rr]v ia&rjra (ndv&eia). 7. 5. 65. 6 cionpos avio~o7 tovs ao~&eve7s to?s lo"x v ~ 
po?s iv t<5 Tro\€/j.cfi (makes the weak equal to the strong). Isocr. Paneg. 43, 13. 
Xa\e7roV iariv to-ovs tovs \6yovs rep fieyi&ei tuv epywv i£evpe?v. Th. 1, 49. 
7) vav/j.ax'ia ^ e C° V- a X ia Tpo(r<pepris (^v). 

Rem. 3. On the Comparatio compendiaria with expressions of likeness and 
similarity, see § 323. Rem. 6. On the Gen. with iyyvs, irX-no-iov, § 273, Rem. 9. 
The coordinate copulative particle Kai, is not seldom employed with adjectives 
of likeness and similarity instead of the Dative. Her. 1, 94. AvSol v6/.ioi<ri fihv 
irapaivX-no-ioKTi xP^ 0iVTai K «* "EXA^ves ( = "EAA77<n or rois 'EXXrjvwv), the 
Lydians and Greeks have similar laws, instead of the Lydians have laws similar to 
the Greeks. So eV ftro>, Icra, 6/j.oiws, usavrws, Kara lavra Kai, etc. PI. Ion. 500, 
d. ovx dfxoiws TreTroirjKao-i Kal "Ojxnpos. Comp. similis ac, atque. There also 
occur, particularly in Attic prose, the particles of comparison, ws, &sir€p with 
Xaos, 6 avrSs. Dem. Phil. 3. 119, 33. rhv avrbv rpSirov, Sjstt e p, k. t. X. 

(5) Expressions signifying to be becoming, suitable, fitting, 
to please, and the contrary, e. g. Trpi-n-eiv, dp/xoTrav, 7rposrJK€Lv (with 
an Inf. following), TrperrovTois, a7rp€7rw<;, cikos icrrtv, etKoxws, dpeV/cctv 
(avhdvew Ion.). 

PI. Apol. 36, d. ti ovv Trpeire i avo pi tr 4vnr i ,■ (what then is becoming a poor 
man'?). Her. 6, 129. kwvTtp apeo-rcos opx^ero (he danced pleasing himself '). 
X. Cy. 3. 3, 39. ap 4o~ ksiv vfi7v trzipuvrai (they endeavor to please you). 

(6) Verbs signifying to agree ivith, to assent to, to reproach, to 
be angry, to envy, e. g. opioXoyclv, etc.; fxi/Kpea-BaL (to reproach; 



$ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 413 

fii/xfao-Sai nva means to blame), XoiSopeio-Sat (to reproach), l-mri- 
fxav, iyKaXecv (tlvl tl), IttlkoXuv (tlvl tl), iTmrXrjTTUv, 6VcioY£av, ivoxXdv 
(more seldom with the Ace), etc. ; SvfjiovcrSaL, fipLixovo-Sai, ^aXc- 
TraiveLv, etc. ; (fiSoveiv (tlvl twos, § 274, 1, more seldom rtvC tl), 
fiao-Kawav (to envy ; /?ao-KaiWv rtva, to slander). The Ace. of 
the thing very often stands with the Dat. of the person. 

Her. 3, 142. €70; to (= a) rep ir4\as iir nr\-()<ro~oi, aiirbs Kara. Svvafiiv ov 
Troi-f)(ra> (what I rebuke in my neighbor I will not do myself). Th. 4, 61. ov rols 
&PXSW Povkofievois fte fj.<po/xai, a\Ka ro?s viraKoxisiv er o i/xor 4 po i s ovo~iv 
(I do not reproach those wishing to rule, but, etc.). Dem. 01. 2. 30, 5. r)vti!>x^ei 
7]ix.1v 6 $i\nnros (gave trouble to us). X. An. 2. 5, 13. Alyvirriovs, oTs p.d\io-ra 
vjj.a.5 vvv yivwaKw r^vp.(ap.4vovs, /coAa<re<r&e (with whom I know you are angry). 
Cy. 1. 4, 9. 6 &*?os avnp iho idopeTr o, rrjv frpaavr-nra Spwv (reproached him). 
4. 5, 9. Kva^dpns i fi p i/xovr o t a> Kvpcp Kal rots Mrjdois rtp KaTahnr6vras 
abrbv ip-ny-ov olx^^ai (was wroth with Cyrus, etc.). 

(7) Verbs of helping, averting, and being useful, e. g. aprjyeiv, 
oljxvvuv, aXi^uVy TL/xcDpelv, fiorjflexv, i-mKovpeiv, d7roAoyeto-#cu, Xv(TLT€- 
Aeti/, hrapKUv, ^paio-fiew and the like (but ovtvavat and a></>eAeu> 
with Ace. $ 279, 1.) ; also several verbs compounded with 
crvv, e. g. <rv[x<fi£peiv (conducere), o-vparpaTTeLV, avvepyelv, etc., and 
many adjectives of the same and similar significations, and 
the contrary, e. g. xfrrjo-ifws, fiXafiepos (but fiX6.TrTt.Lv with Ace. 
$ 279, 1.), <fjiXos, e^oo?, 7roX£[ALos, etc. 

X. R. L. 4, 5. api]^ov(Ti rrj iroA.ei iravrl a&evei (they assist the city with all 
their strength). Cy. 3. 3, 67. (al yvvawes) iKsrtvovcri irdvras /xrj (pevyeiv KaraXnrSv- 
ras, aX\' ap.vvai Kal avrats, Kal t4kvois, Kal o-<plaiv avrois (to de- 
fend them, their children and themselves). 4.3,2. rovrois yap <paaiv avdyKnv 
ehai irpo&v/Aas a\4^€iv (they say it is necessary to defend these). Eur. Or. 922. 
('OpeffT-ns) r?^eA.7j<re rip: aptly irarpi, KaK7)V yvvaiKa kol&sov KaraKravwv 
(wished to help his father). PI. Ap. 28, c. el t i/aw p-f}<r e is Uarp6K\<a rep 
kraipep rbv <p6vov (if you shall avenge the murder of your friend Patroclus, i. e. 
if you shall avenge for him). 

Rem. 4. The words <pl\os, ix&pts, tto\4 p.ios are also used as sub- 
stantives, and govern the Gen. X. An. 3. 2, 5. robs iKtivov ix&lo-r ovs 
(his bitterest enemies). Hence the Dative stands, in general, with verbs and ad- 
jectives of all kinds, when the action takes place for the advantage, favor, honor, 
harm, disadvantage of a person, or an object considered as a person (Dativus 
commodi et incommodi), where the English uses the prepositions to or for. Here 
belong particularly the rites performed in honor of a divinity, e. g. opxeloSai 
rois &e6i<> (to dance in honor of the gods) ; <rre<pavov<r§ai &e« (to crown one's self in 
honor of the gods). Her. 6, 138. 'A p t 4 /j. i 8 i 6prr]v ayeiv (to keep a feast in honor 
of Diana). The Dative with kXvclv (Poet., especially Epic), is also to be re- 
garded in the same way : k\v&i (jloi, listen to me favorably. Here belongs, also, 

35* 



414 SYNTAX. [$ 284. 

the phrase, mostly poetic, Se'xeo-S-ai ti rivi, to receive something from some one, 
since it involves the additional idea that the reception of the thing will be re- 
garded as a relief, as agreeable, etc. to the person. Od. 71- , 40. &s apa cpwwfjcras o l 
€'8e|aTo x^Xkcov *7X 0S (received from him [as a favor to him] the brazen spear). 
See Larger Gramm. Part. II. § 597, Rem. 3. 

(8) Verbs of observing, finding, meeting ivith something in a 
person. 

'T7T oXa.fJ.fidi'e tv 5e? ro> toiovto), oti eu^&Tjs ris &i/&poowos (scil. icTTiy), PI. 
Up. 598. d. "Erepa 877, ws eot/ce, to?s <p vAal-iv e vp r) Ka/xev, 421, e. (dapffovffi 
jxaMa-ra iroXe/xioi, orav to7s evavriois Trpdy/xara nal ao-%oAtas ivvvSdv wvr ai 
(when thexj perceive troubles and hindrances in those opposed to them), X. Hipp. 5. 8. 

(9) The Dative stands with co-ri(v) and eto-t(v), to denote 
the person, or tiling considered as a person, that has or possesses 
something. The thing possessed stands as the subject in the 
Nom., but the verb is translated by the English have, etc., and 
the Dat. as the Nom. So also with ytyveo-Jat and v-jrap^v (to 
be, exist), also with l'8tos and dAAoVpios. 

Kvpw -t\v fxeydx-q fiaffiXeia ( Cyrus had a great kingdom ). — Tots irXovcriois 
TroWix Trapa/AV^La (pacriv elvai, PL Rp. 329, e. T Hiraj' Kpoi(rq> Svo iraiSes, 
Her. 1, 44. When the above verbs are connected with a predicative abstract 
substantive, they may be translated to prove, to serve. Xaipicpuv ifiol (-n/xia 
fxaWoy, 3) w<p4\e id icmv, X. C. 2. 3, 6. (Ch. mihi detrimento potius est, quam 
emolumento, is an injury, proves an injury rather than a benefit). 

Rem. 5. The possessive Dat., or the Dat. of the possessor, is to be distin- 
guished from the Gen. of the possessor (§ 273, 2). The Dative is used, when 
it is asked, what the possession is (what has one ?), and the possession desig- 
nated is contrasted with other possessions, e. g. Kvpa> i\u /neydx-n fiacriXeia, 
Cyrus had {among other things also) a great kingdom; the Gen. is used, when it 
is asked who the possessor is (whose is this ?), and the possessor is contrasted 
with other possessors, e. g. K vp ov ty /j.eyd\rj &a(ri\eta, to Cyrus (and not to 
another) belonged a great kingdom. The Dative describes the pei\son as one to 
whom the possession has been imparted, divided, given, and under whose con- 
trol it now is ; the Genitive, as one who has gained possession, from whom the 
possession has proceeded. 

(10) The Dat. is used universally when an action takes place 
in reference to a person, or a thing considered as a person, so that 
the person in some way shares or participates in it. Here be- 
long the following instances : — 

(a) In certain formulas, the Dative designates the person to whose judgment, 
consideration, or estimate, an idea is referred, and thus it first gains a definite 
authority or value ; i. e. the assertion is made in view of the judgment, etc. of 
the person to whom the matter had been submitted. This Dat. therefore shows 
when and under what circumstances the assertion is true, e. g. Her. 1, 14. aXrj&ti 5e 



$ 284.] DATIVE case. 415 

\6yw xp€w/*eVa> ov Koptv&icav tov §nfxo<riov £<tt\v 6 Srn<ravp6s (recte aestimanti hie 
thesaurus non est Corinthiacus, in the judgment of one estimating the matter correctly, 
it is not the CorintJiian treasury), Th. 2, 49. rb efa&ev aizTo/x4vu> cufxa ovk dyav 
Sep/xbv l\v {the external part of the body, when one touched it, in the view of one touching 
it,was not very hot). Here belong especially the Datives dsfidvTi, e|«Wi, avafidvTt, 
i/TrepfiavTi and the like, with local specifications. Her. 6, 33. anb ^Iwvl-qs kira\Aa(To~6- 
fxevos 6 vavTiubs ffrparbs to. eV apicrTepa isirAeovrt tov 'E\\-nsir6vTov aipee iravra 
{the naval force subjugated all parts of the Hellespont, upon the left as one sails into it, 
or with respect to one sailing into it). X. Cy. 8. 6, 20. (Kvpos) Xeyerai naTao~Tptya<j&at 
ir6.vra.Tb. eSvn, oaa 'Zvplav elsfidvTt olice? fxexpl epv&pas &a\d<To-ns {which dwell as 
one enters Syria [from the entrance of S.] to the Red Sea). Also the expression &s 
<rvue\6vT i etVeTj/, to speak briefly, to say in a word, properly to say it when one 
has brought the whole together into a small compass, has comprehended the whole, e. g. 
"Avev apxdvTwy ovdev av ovre Ka\6v, ovts aya&bv yevoLTO, ws fxhv avve\6vT t 
enrelV, ovdauov, X. An. 3. 1, 38. 

(b) So also the Dat. of the person often stands in connection with ws, in 
order to show that the thought which is expressed, is not a general one, but 
has its value only according to the opinion of the person named. X. C. 4. 6, 4. 
6 Ta irepl tovs &eovs v6/xifxa elSws op&us av tj /x? v evaeffis wpiff/xevos efy {nos- 
tro judicio, in our opinion). S. 0. C. 20. /xanpav ydp, ws y4povri, irpov<TTd\7js 
6d6v {you went forward a great way, for an old man, as an old man would view it). 
Ant. 1161. KpeW yap "r\v Qt\h<tiT6s, is i/xol, itot4 {in my opinion). PL Soph. 
226, c. Tax^lav, ws ifxoi, CKe\piv iiTLTaTTeis. Her. 3, 88. ydfxovs tovs irpcvrovs 
eyd/xee Uepcrrjo'i 6 AapeTos {matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima, con- 
tracted very honorable marriages, in the judgment of the Persians). Altogether 
usual in the phrase &£t6s elfxl tiv6s tlvi, or even without the Gen., &£t6s 
el/xl tivi {lam of value in the estimation of some one). X. C. 1. 2, 62. i/xol fxhv 
dr) ~2,wKpaTif]S toiovtos &v eSoKe: Tifxyjs ai-tos zlvat Trj ir6\e i fxaWov, 7) fravdrov 
(rather merits honor than death, in the estimation, in the view of the city). PI. Symp. 
185, b. ovtos iaTiv 6 Trjs Ovpavias &eov epoos Kal ovpdvios Kal ttoWov d^tos Kal 
vr 6 K e i Kal I 5 i u> t a i s. 

(c) Here belongs the use of the Dat. of a person with BovAofxevco, Tjdofxevcv, 
ao-jxivw, iXiro/xevw, ax&ofxevci), Trposdexo/xevw and the like, in connection with 
verbs, most frequently with elvat and yiyve<r& at. Such a participle gives 
definiteness to an otherwise indefinite assertion. El Tavrd cot fiovKo/xeva 
io-Tiv {if this is to you wishing it, if this is your wish). Ovtos fxot rjdo/xevco 
air-f)VT7)(rev {he met me to my joy). Her. 9, 16. rjdofxevo t<r tv rj/xtv o't \6yoi ye- 
y6va(ri. Th. 6, 46. t£ Ni/c/a it po sS exo/xe veo "hv rd irepl twv 'EyecrTaicov 
{were as Nicias expected). PI. Rp. 358, d. &AA' opa, e5f <roi f$ov Kofxeva) (sc. 
io-Tiv), a \4ycc, whether what I say pleases you). 

(d) The Dat. of the personal pronouns, first and second persons, is often 
used, not because they are really necessary for the general sense, but to show 
that the statement is made in a familiar, humorous, and pleasant manner. This 
is called the Ethical Dat. {Dativus ethicus): X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. 6pS>v St? Tbv K6<rp.ov 
rov Trdirirov, i/x^Xeirwv avT$, '4\eyev {6 Kvpos)- ^Cl fXTJTep, ws KaXos fioi d irdir- 



416 SYNTAX. [$ 284. 

iros (0 mother, how beautiful grandfather is, in my eyes). 15. fju S4 jxe KaraXiirris 
iv&dde, Kal /xd§co iirireveiv, orau fxkv eV Tlepcrcus &, ol/xai a oi eat'ivovs tovs ayc&obs 
to ire(iKa padioos viK7\o~eiv (to gratify you, / think I shall easily surpass those 
skilled in foot exercises). 

(11) The Dative often stands with the Perf. Pass, (rarely 
with other tenses of the Pass.), to denote the active person or 
agent. The Pass., in this case, expresses a state or condition, 
and the Dat. represents the author of this condition at the same 
time as the person for tuhom this condition exists, while by vtto 
with the Gen., the author merely is expressed. 

Her. 6, 123. 5s p.oi irporepov SeSrjAwTat (as has been before shown by me). 
Dem. Aphob. 844, 1. Set 8i7jyrj0-ao-&ai ra tovtui it eirpay p.4va nepl rj/xwu (it is 
necessary to describe what has been done by him). 01. 1. 26, 27. rl it 4 it paicr at 
ro7s &K\ois ; (what has been done by others ?). In this way a Perf. Act., which 
is wanting, may be supplied, e. g. ravrd p.oi AeAe/cTcu (I have said this). 

(12) So also the active person or agent stands regularly in 
the Dative with verbal adjectives in -tos and -t£o<s, [$234, 1, (i)], 
both when they are used, like the Latin verbal in -dum, im- 
personally in the Neut. Sing. : -rov, -riov, or PI. -to, -rca (§ 24 1, 
3.), or when they are nsed personally, like the Latin participle 
in -dus ; those derived from transitive verbs, i. e. snch as govern 
the Ace, admit both the Impers. and the Pers. construction ; 
but those derived from intransitive verbs, admit only the im- 
personal. The impersonal verbal Adj., in addition to the Dat. 
of the agent, governs the same Case as the verb from which 
it is derived. 

T2> CTparevfjia eu€7ri&6Toe ?iv iuTav&a toTs tt o\€/j.io i s (could be easily 
attacked by the enemy), X. An. 3. 4,20. *Ao-k7}t 4ov (or -Tea) iffri aoi r^v 
apzriiv (you must practise virtue or virtue must be practised by you). '"Etti&vij.t)- 
t4ov €<tt2 to?s avSr punrois rr\s apeT?}s (there must be a desiring by men, men 
must desire virtue)., 'E7r i^e ip-qri o v i<rri a o i rS £pyu> (you must attempt the 
icork). $rjfx\ 877 &ot)St)t 4 ov ehai roh irpdy/j.aaii' vp.?u (I say that you must 
render assistance), Dem. 01. 1. 14. 17. KoAcktt 4ov i<rrt a 01 rov ixv^pwirov 
(you must punish the man). 'A<r ktjt 4a iari o~oi rj aper-h. 'fl</>eA.7JTea a 01 ?j 
tt6\is eo-TiV, X. C. 3. 6, 3. So the Deponents (§ 197), e. g. /xi jx-ht 4o v Z<jt\u 
hp.'iu tovs ayabovs (from /itp.elo'&ai riva) or ^i^tjt 4oi elolv rip.1v oi aya&ol 
(you must imitate the good) . 

"Rem. 6. The verbal adjectives of those verbs whose middle form has a Pass, 
as well as a reflexive or intransitive sense, have, likewise, in the impersonal 
Neut. form with iari, a two-fold signification ; and when an object is joined 
with them, a two-fold construction, e. g. it eio-r 4ov iarXv r\p2v avrov (we must 



$ 285.] DATIVE CASE. 417 

convince him) from ire&co rivd ; and ire icrreov iarlv t)jx7v ro7s vSjjlois {we must 
obey the laws, obtemperandum est a nobis legibus) from irei^o/xai nvi, obtempero 
alicui ; airaWaicr eov early rjfjuv avrbv rov kolkov {we must rid him of the evil) 
from aTraWarretu riva rov kcucov ; and airaWaur e ov £<rr\v r]fx7v rov av&pdoirov 
{we must get rid of the man) from aTraXXdrrea^ai rivos {to get rid of something). 

Rem. 7. Not unfrequently, however, the verbal adjectives in -re 6s, among 
the Attic writers, take the active person or agent in the Ace. also, as these ver- 
bals have the force of the impersonal verb Set with the Inf., e. g. PI. Gorg. 
507. d. rbv fiov\6fJ.evov evSai/xova elvai cu(ppoo-uvTf]V d ico Kr e ov Kal aOKf)- 
reov {whoever wishes to be happy must seek and practise sobriety). Often, also, 
the construction of verbal adjectives is changed into the Inf. ; in this case the 
agent must necessarily stand in the Ace. X. C. 1. 5, 5. i/xol fxev 8o/cet. . . e'Aeu- 
&epa avopl evicrbv eivai /x^ tvx&v SovKov roiovrov 8 ov\evovra 8e . . . 
licer eveiv robs &eovs k. t. A. 



$285. C. The Dative of the thing {Instrumental 
Dative). 

1. The Dative of the thing expresses relations which in 
Latin are denoted by the Ablative. The relations expressed 
by this Dat. are : 

(1) The ground, reason, or cause, e. g. cp6j3ip a7rrj\%v % evvoCa, 
dSiKia, <£oj3o>, vftptL iroidv ri ; especially with verbs denoting the 
State of the feelings, e. g. ^a/peiv, ^oW«$ai, aydWeoSai, iTraipeo-- 
#ai, \v7T€Lar$ai, aviaoSai, aXyuv, ix-, KaraTrX^TTeaSai ; $av[Aa£ew ; 
cA7ri£av ; crrepyav and dya7rdv, apto-KecrSat, dpKetcr^at (all four : to 
be content, to be pleased ivith something) ; ayavaKrelv, SusxcpaiVew, 
^;aA€7ra)9, fiapews <pip€iv, ax#€{r£ai ; aurxyve<rSai y etc. 

X. C. 1.3, 1. ot &eol ra7s irapa ruv evae^eardruv ri/xa7s fxaXiara x -' 1 P ov ' 
a i v {are especially pleased with the honors from the most devout). Her. 478. 8 1 ai- 
ry ovSa/ius iipeo-Kcro 2kv&ikj} {was by no means pleased with the Scythian 
mode of life). Th. 4, 85. Sfavfj.d(co r rj airoK\ei<rei /xov ruv irvhav (I am 
surprised at the shutting of the gates against me). 3, 97. i\irl(eiv r $ rvxv 
{ to hope in fortune ). 2 t e p 7 w ro7s irapov<riv {I am content with the present 
things). 'Ayairw ro7s inrdpxovo-iv aya£ro7s. XaXeirws <pepu> rots 
irapoda-i tt pay pav 1 {I am troubled by the present state of affairs), X. An. 1 . 3, 3. 
Alffxfoopcu ro7s ireirpayfievots {I am ashamed on account of what has been done) , 
C. 2. 1,31. Pl.Hipp.maj.285.e. eU6rws <r o i x ai P 0V<TLV ot AeuteSai/Aifooi, are 
iroAAa elo6n. 'AyaWofiai rfj vikv. Uo\Ko\ ay avaKr ov <r i r<2 &a- 
vdru. Avsxepoiyw ro7s Xoyois. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 14. ayairri aas ro7s 
ireirpayixevoisr)o-vxlai> o-xfoe 1 ' 'I (TX^eiV t o ?5 o-w/iocr*, X. C.2. 7, 7. So 
also with adjectives, e. g. laxvpbs X € / ><r ^» Ta X vs "^oaiv, etc. 

Remark 1. The preposition hri t on account of, at, is very often joined with 
the Dat. ; thus commonlv, x aXe ™ s <P*P* iV "" T ""' &« M /"*C«" * m T y m 5 ovsye- 
paiva usually with the" Ace, § 279, 5; we also find ayairw, arepyw, Qapews, 
XoActtcus <pep<o Ti. 



418 SYNTAX. [$ 285. 

(2) The means and instrument, by which an action is accom- 
plished. Hence the Dat. also stands with xPV a ^ aL ( ui ^) an( i 
its compounds, and with vojxi&w (to be accustomed to). 

BdWeiv Xlfrois (to throw with stones = to throw stones). 'AKovri^eiv alxna'is 
(to hurl ivith spears = to hurl spews). X. Cy. 4. 3, 21. 6 /xeu i-mroKevravpos 
$vo?v 6 (p&a \jxo7v Trpoewparo Kal hvotv &roiv ^Kovev • eyw Se r err apff i 
fj,eu 6<p&a\/AO?s reKjU.apovfj.ai., r err apa i Se wcrl irpoaio'^o'ofxai • 7roAAa 
yap <pao~i Kal 'iirirov avSpamois rots 6(p&a\fxo?s Tvpoopwvra S77A0W, -iroWa Se 
to?s wo~l TrpoaKovovra o-njxaiveiv (the centaur saw with two eyes, and heard with 
two ears; but I shall see with four eyes, etc.). 18. irpovoelv fxey ye e£a> trdvra 
rfj av&pwrrii/r) yv<ap.y, rats Se x*P°~^ v 6ir\o(pop7)o~<t), Sid^ofxai Se rip 'Lit- 
ttcx>, rbv 5' evavriov avarpfyca rfj rov 'Lttttov pw/xw. X. C. 4. 2, 9. at rwv 
cotyuv avo*p5>v yuw/xai apery irXovri^ovo-i robs KeKr-nfievovs (enrich with virtue 
those who possess them). Her. 3, 117. oZtol 3>v, o'Uep efxirpooSev eca&ecrav 
Xpao~&ai t<£ vSari, ovk exo^res o- VT V XP (r ^ ai > <r v p <p o p rj fx e yd XT} St- 
oxff'wi'Toi (those who before were accustomed to use the water, not being able to 
use it, experienced a great inconvenience). Dem. Cor. 277, 150. Kevfj irp ocpdaei 
ravrrj Karaxp&- But Kar axp^o"^ ai and d iaxpv°~&&i in the sense of 
consumere, to kill, as ti-ansitive, govern the Ace. Comp. Her. 6, 135 ; Antiph. 1. 
113, 23. With xp^ff^a' a second Dat. often stands, by means of attraction, 
or els with the Ace. or the Ace. of a pronoun or neuter adjective (§ 278, 4), 
to express the design or purpose, e. g. xpw^uoi o~oi it i a rep <p(Xq>, as in the 
Lat. utor te fido amico, I have thee for a true friend). X. An. 1. 4, 15. v\xiv 
iricrr or drois xpvo~ erai Kal els <ppovpia Kal els Xoxayias (will employ 
you as the most faithful both for guards and commanders). Her. 4, 117. (fxaurf oi 
~2avpo/j.drai vofxi^ovai ~2,Kv&iKrj (are accustomed to use the Scythian language). 
Th. 2, 38. a.ywo'i Kal frvffiais Sier'no'iois v ofxi£ovo~ i. 

Rem. 2. The Dat. is very often used without o~iv in military expressions, 
with reference to a retinue or force, in order to represent this as the means bv 
which something takes place ; this usage is found particularly with verbs of 
going and coming. Such Datives are o-rpara>, ar6Xa>, irXr}&ei, vavo~l(v), 'ittttois, 
o-rparid>rais, etc. (In Latin the Abl. without cum, as magno exercitu venire, to 
come with a large army). Her. 5, 99. ol 'Ad-nuatoi airiKearo e%Kocri vrjvat (came 
with twenty ships). Th. 1, 102. 'AfryvaToi f)X&ov irX-nSfei ovk bXiyea (with not 
a small number). 4. 39. oi IleXoirowqaLoi avexu>p-t)0~av r $ a r pare? eK ryjs TLvXov. 
X. Cy. 1. 4, 17. avrbs ro?s "ttttois irposeXaaas irpbs ra r&v MtjScdv (ppovpia Kare- 
fxeivev (having rode up with the cavalry). An. 7. 6, 29. SappaXews r)jxiv ecpe'nrovro 
oi 7roAe'/itoj Kal 'nririKui Kal ireXr acrr i k cp. 

(3) The following relations also may be considered as the 
means, and are expressed by the Dat. : (a) the material of 
which (= with which) anything is made ; — (b) the rule or 
standard, according to which anything is measured, judged of, 
or done; hence the Dat. stands particularly with verbs of 
measuring, judging, inferring, e. g. orafyao-&u, yiyvuaxuv, eucd- 



$ 285.] DATIVE CASE. 419 

L,zlv, Kpiveiv, Texfxaipeo-SaL ; also in general, to express a more defi- 
nite limitation, to denote in ivhat respect a word is to be taken ; 
thus, for example, with verbs signifying to be distinguished, to 
excel, to be strong and powerful, and the contrary ; also with very 
many adjectives (instead of the Ace. of more definite limita- 
tion, § 279,7); — (c) the measure, by, according to which an 
action is defined or limited, especially with comparatives and 
superlatives, as well as with other expressions, which include 
the idea of comparison, in order to denote the degree of 
difference between the objects compared; — finally, (d) the 
ivay and manner in which anything is done {How ?). 

Her. 3, 57. r] uyoprj teal rb TTpvTavr\iov Tlapica Xi&co T\<TKr\\x4va (l\v) {were decora- 
ted with Parian marble). On the Gen. of the material, see § 273, 5. Her. 2, 2. 
roiovrw (TTa^fir) o~&\xev oi tr p-fjy par i (ex tali re judicantes, having judged 
from or by such a circumstance). 7, 16. rrj <rfj 4<r&r\Ti t eK[j.aip6 fxevo v (ex 
tua veste judicium faciens). X. Cy. 1. 3, 5. rivi 877 <rv t e Kfj.aip6fj.evo s, & 
area, ravTct x4yeis; (judging by what rule, do you say this?). 3. 3, 19. ai (J-dxat 
Kpivovrai fxaXXov Tats i^uxoij, fy rats rutv <ra>/j.dTwv piti/xais (are decided 
more by courage, than strength of body). H. 7. 3, 6. ovtoi wduras avfrpdirovs 
vtt ep fie p\-f)Ka<r 1 r 6Xp.rj re koI fiiapia (have surpassed all men in daring 
and brutality). C 2. 7, 7. lo-%veiv to is ffdfj.ao' 1 (to be strong in body). Cy. 
2. 3, 6. iyw oi/re irotriv et/a t«x") o&tg x e P (TLl/ lo"X v P^ s ' Hence t<£ 
Iovti, Tj? aX-n&da, t<£ x6yw, t$ epyy (according to the nature of, etc.) ; also yv&fxr) 
<r<paXrjvai, tyevcr&rivai (to be deceived in opinion), Th. 4, 18, Her. 7, 9. Her. 1, 184. 
'Se/j.ipafj.is yeverjxri ttsvts irp6T ep ov 4y4veT0 ttjs NiTtaKpios ( was before 
Nitocris by five generations). So iroXXy, bxiyai, fjutcptp, togovtw, '6crtp pieiQwv 
(greater by much, by little, by so much = much greater, a little greater, so much greater, 
etc.). Her. 6, 89. vo-Tepiorav r]fi4pri /j,ifj ttjs o-vyK<-i(j.evT)s (a day later than 
was fixed upon, later by a day, etc.). 106. ir6x 1 Xoyifx-n rj 'EXXas yeyove ao~- 
deveo-T 4pr) (has become weaker by [the loss of] a distinguished city). So with 
irp6 with the Gen., and /xeTa (after) with the Ace, e.g. A e'/ca erect irpb ttjs 4v 
^.aXajxtvL uav/xaxias (before the battle of Salamis by ten years, i. e. ten years before, 
etc.). 'E|t7KO(TT(jj eret fieTa 'IXiou aXwo-iv (sixtieth year after the sack of 
Troy). Here belong, also, Ctuxiovv tivol x^iais 8paxp-a-ts,StavdTt? (to 
fine one [with] a thousand drachmas, etc.), and the like. Her. 6, 136. 6 8rj/j.os 4 Cv ~ 
fiiwae (tov MiXTid8ea) koto tt> a.8utlt)v ttsut^ko VTa TaXavTotcri (fined 
him fifty talents ) . Th. 4, 73. t <5 /3 e A t 1 c t « toG oitXitikov pXaQ&rjvai (jactu- 
ram facere, to suffer defeat by [the loss of] the best portion of the heavy armed force). 
II. 7, 2. Tpebes fxeu icXayyrj t 4voTrrj t X<rav, opv&es &s (advanced with a noise and 
aery). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. (oi v6fioi) irpooTdTTOvo-i p.)) $i* els olttiav irapievai (forbid 
to enter a house by force). So ^opv^w, Kpavyfj, ySoj? o-iyfj iroietv ti (to do something 
with a noise, etc.) ; oiicy, 4-mfj.eXeta, 8r)/j.oola (sc. 68$), I8ia (68$), w4(r) (68$), Koivrj 
(68$), in common, t$ t P 6ttcp rot^Be.j K0(u8r}, properly with care, hence, entirely, 



420 syntax. f? 286. 

quite; ffirovSy, with pains, aegre, scarcely, hardly ; &A\r}, ravrri, Sixfj, duplici modo, 
eiKJ7, frustra. Comp. § 101, 2, (b). 



$ 286. II. Substantive Object ivith Prepositions, or 
the Construction of Prepositions. 

1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whith- 
er, where, and the causal relations, which were originally- 
considered as local relations, so the prepositions express 
another local relation, viz., the extension or position of 
things in space, — the juxtaposition of things (by the side 
of, over, around, ivith), or the local opposites above and 
below, within and without, before and behind. Prepositions 
therefore denote the relative position of the things described 
by the substantives which they connect ; and the relation 
expressed by them may be called the relation of position. 

2. The Cases connected with the prepositions, show in 
which of the local relations, whence, whither, where, the 
preposition is to be understood. 

Remark 1. Thus, for example, the preposition irapd denotes merely the 
local relation of near, by the side of by ; but in connection with the Gen., e. g. 
^Afrc ir a pa rov )3<xcr t Ac w s, in addition to the idea of nearness, it denotes, 
at the same time, the direction whence (he came from near the king, de chez le 
roi) ; in connection with the Ace, e. g. fj e i it a ph. rbv /3a<rt Aea, at the same 
time, the direction whither (he went into the vicinity or presence of the 
king) ; and in connection with the Dat. e. g, IV r -n it a pa t<£ fi aa i Act, it de- 
notes simply the place where (he stood near the king). 

3. Prepositions are divided according to their construction : 

(a) into prepositions which govern the Gen.: aVri, before (ante), air6, from 
(ab, a), 4 k, out of (ex), irpo, before (pro) ; 

(b) into those which govern the Dat.: £v, in (in with abl.) and avv, with 
(cum). 

(c) into those which govern the Ace: avd, up, els, into (in with ace), «j, 
to; 

(d) into those which govern the Gen. and Ace: Sid, through, icard, down 
from (de), virep, over (super), /nerd, with; 

(e) into those which govern the Gen., Dat., and Ace: a/j.(pl, about, iirl, 
upon, irapd, by, ire pi, around (circa), np6s, before, and vir6, under 
(sub). 

4. Prepositions are divided according to the relations of posi- 
tion which they denote : 



$287.] prepositions. — 'Avri, irpo. 421 

(a) into such as indicate a juxtaposition: irapd and aficpi, near, iir(, at 
and upon, avv and peTa, with; 

(b) into such as express local opposites : iiri, upon, avd, up, virip, over, 
and vtt6, under, tcard, down (under), irp6, tr p6s and avri, before in 

front of, and the improper prepositions oirio-Srev, after, behind; 4v and 
els, in, within, and ck, e|, from, out of; Sid, through, and ire pi, around, 
outside ; cb s, to, up to, and a. ir 6, from, away from. 

5. The relation of position expressed by prepositions is trans- 
ferred to the relations of time and causality, e. g. Ot 7roAe/uoi 
a,7ro tt]S 7r6Xeois a7recpvyov. 'Airb vvktos a.7rf}\$ov (from 
night, immediately after the beginning of night). 'Atto £v(/.- 
yua^tas avTovo/xoi eicrtv (from, by virtue of the alliance). 

6. Each preposition has a fundamental meaning, which it 
everywhere retains, even when it is connected with two or 
three Cases ; but it receives various modifications according to 
the different Cases with which it is connected, because the 
local relation varies with each Case. Comp. Rem. 1. The 
fundamental meaning of prepositions is most evident, when 
they express, local relations ; it is generally quite evident in those 
of time also ; but in the causal relations, it is often very obscure. 

Rem. 2. Originally all the prepositions were merely adverbs of place. See 
§ 300, 1. The prepositions enumerated in No. 3, may be called Proper prepo- 
sitions, inasmuch as during the cultivated period of the language, they either 
were not used at all, or but very seldom, as adverbs of place, without a sub- 
stantive ; accordingly, they have the regular functions of prepositions : they 
differ from the Improper prepositions : of these latter, the following classes 
may be named : (a) both adverbs of place and other adverbs, which, though 
they regularly have the functions of adverbs, are sometimes, in connection 
with a substantive, used as prepositions, e. g. airSirpo&ev, dvev, Sixa, a/j.a; — (b) 
substantives in connection with the Gen., e. g. Slktju, instar, %dpiv, gratia, eVe/co, 
on account of. 



I. Prepositions with the Genitive only. 

$287. (1) 'Avtl and -n-po, before. 

1. 'Avtl (Lat. ante, before, in the face of, opposite, etc.), orig- 
inal signification: in the face of (before, over against) (1) in 
a local sense (in prose seldom) ; (2) in a causal or figurative 
sense : (a) in adjurations, instead of the common word irpos 
with the Gen.; — (b) with expressions denoting comparison 
(e. g. with the comparative), valuing, iveighing, requital; hence 
with words of buying, selling, bartering, value, worth, likeness or 

36 



422 syntax. [$ 287. 

unlikencss, preference ; — (c) of the cause or ground, when it 
expresses the idea of making compensation, as in av& ov, avS' &v, 
for what ? wherefore ? — (d) of substitution, giving an equiva- 
lent, etc. 

(1) (Tb x w P iQV e<TTi) dacrv irirvcri 8ia\eiirov(rais p.eyd\ais, av^ av ecrrrjKSres 
frvfipes rt av irdcrx oiev % viro rwy tyepotxevuv Ki&wv, 9) virb rav KvKivdovfxevav ; (be- 
hind which, since the trees stood before the soldiers), X. An. 4. 7, 6. (2) (a) 
'Aj/tI iraiSav TwvSe . . . liceTevo/xev, sc. ere (for the sake of as it were standing 
before), S. 0. C. 1326. (b) (AvKovpyos KareipydffaTo) ev ty} iroAet alpeTioT e pov 
dvai rbv na\bv Srdvarov avrl alvxpov fiiov (is better than, is preferable to a 
disgraceful life), X. E. L. 9, 1. Trjv TeXevTijv avrl ttj y tu>v Qavrav eraTypias 
7}XKd^auTo (exchanged death for the safety of the living), PI. Menex. 237, a. Uarrip 
vlbv avrl irdvTav tuv &Wwv xP r ll JL °' T 0)V TpoTifxa. So alpe7er&ai ti avri 
tivos, instead of the common tiv6s. Ti]v e\ev&epiav eKoiix-nv av avrl av exa 
irdvTcov (in place of all which I have), X. An. 1. 7, 3. (d) AovXos avrl Seer- 
tt6tov (a slave instead of a despot). 'Aj/t2 tj fie pas vbj- iyevero, Her. 7, 37. 
'Avt\ tov /xdxecr&ai ireifreer&ai e^eAei, X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. 'Avri is never used 
of time. 

2. II po, original signification: on the foreside (pro, prae, be- 
fore, figuratively, in behalf of), (1) local; — (2) of time; (3) 
causal and figurative : (a) in behalf of (for the good, for the 
weal) ; with expressions denoting comparison (hence with the 
Com. degree), valuing, estimation, like dvrt, but always with the 
accompanying idea of standing before, preference ; hence it is 
used to express preference in general ; — (b) of an inward, 
mental cause, occasion, inducement (only Poet.) : on account of, 
prae, e. g. II. p, 667. 7rp6 <ji6/3oto (prae metu, for fear, on account 
of fear). 

(I) Mtucoa 7] urjeros Ke7rai ir pb Meydpav, Th. 3, 51, (2)Tlpb rj/xepas ctarf/A- 
bov. (3) UavTes a£ic&crovcri ere ir pb ai)Tav fSov\eveer&ai (desire you to consult for 
them), X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. MaxeoSai, airoSrave7v irpb rrjs it a.T pid o s, SiaKivSv- 
veveiv irpb fiaer i\e a s (for, in behalf of , onds country), X. Cy. 8. 8, 4. Aucaio- 
repov Cop.-t]v koX KaKKiov eivai irpb rod (pevyeiv re Kal air oS tS pder Ke iv vtre- 
Xeiv rfj ir6Xei SUrjv i)vtiv av r rdrrr\ ( 1 thought it more just in preference to fleeing, etc.), 
PI. Phaed. 99, a. II pb iroWov iroi-fiaaa^al ti (to esteem before or above much, 
i. e. very highly). Upb iroKXav xP r \l l °- T(av Tifx-fjcraar&ai ti (to value before much 
wealth). (Tovtov) irpb irdurcov % P V P <*• T u v Ka ^ "" 6 v » v irpia(/.irfv av <pi\ov 
fj.oi eivai, X. C. 2. 5, 3. TLpb tovtov Tebvdvai av /u,a\\ov e\oiro (for him), PI. 
Symp. 179, a. 'Eiraive7v irpb 8 iKaioer vv t\ s adudav (to praise injustice before, 
rather than, in preference to justice), Ep. 361, e. 

Eemark. The reason that the prepositions avrl and irp6 are not con- 
nected with the Dat., like prepositions of the same meaning in other languages. 



$288.] prepositions. — 'A7to, c/c. 423 

but with the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language regards the 
relation denoted by before, in front of not merely as local, but implying action, 
a relation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions virep, irpSs, 
Sid, afi<pi, ire pi, iirt, biro with the Gen., since the Gen. represents the 
place as the cause or occasion of the action, and hence likewise, a relation of 
dependence. See § 273, 4. 



$288. (2) 'A7ro, from, and ig, ck, out of. 

Preliminary Remark. These two prepositions denote an outgoing, a re- 
moval, departure, but air 6 denotes a removal from the exterior of an object, while 
4 k (e I), always implies a going out from within a place or object ; and in the 
causal relation, the former denotes a remoter cause, the latter, one more direct. 

1. 'A7ro (ab), from, denotes: (1) in a local relation: (a) re- 
moval from a place or object with verbs of motion, also of free- 
ing, and the like, e. g. Xvuv, iXtvSepovv, also of missing ($ 271, 2), 
hence, cwro (tkottov ; then it is transferred to mental failures, as 
in a.7r eA7rtScov, airb yvvfxqs, aliter ac sperabam, putabam (as if 
aberrans ab ezspectatione, ab opinione) ; (b) distance from a 
place or object with verbs of rest; — (2) of time, going out 
from a point of time : from, after ; — (3) causal or figurative : 
(a) of origin, as with elvai, ycyvecrSai ; (b) of the ivhole in rela- 
tion to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to. it ; (c) of the 
author with Pass, verbs instead of vtto ($ 251, Rem. 4), but al- 
ways with the accompanying idea of on the part of; (d) of the 
occasion or cause; (e) of the material; (f) of the means and 
instrument; (g) of conformity. 

(1) (a) 'Airb ttjs ir6\€(0S airicpvyov ol iroXefiioi. (b) 'O \6yos ovk airb 
rod <tk oirov cSoijep elprjtrStcu, X. S. 2, 10. (Al iraXcual iroAeis) airb &oA.a(T 0-775 
juaAAop cpici(r&7](rai> (at a distance from the sea), Th. 1, 7. (2) \A7rb touttjj rrjs 
rj/xepas, airb vvktSs, aft hair 4 pas; airb rwv ffirwv (after the meal), X. R. 
L. 5, 8. (3) (a) 'A it b 'A \ k fi a i w v o s /col avrts MeyaK\4os iyevovro tca\ ndpra 
Xafiirpol (very distinguished men sprung from), Her. 6, 125. (b) Tas rpiripeis, 
a'lirep ^rrav avr§ airb rwv KaraAei<p&ciffwv (which he had of those that were 
left), Th. 4, 9. To airb T7js Seipijs (ornaments for the neck, necklaces), Her. 
1, 51. So ol airb fiovArjs (qui sunt a consiliis, those who belong to the council) ; 
ol airb TlXdrwvos (the pupils of Plato, the Platonics) ; ol airb ttjs 'AkoSjj- 
jh(oj, etc. (c) 'Eirpdx&V "' avrwv oiiSev epyov afroAoyov (was done by 
them, on the part of ), Th. 1, 17. (d) 'A trb S iKa locvvns (by, on account of), 
Her. 7,1 64. T$ airb rwv iroKe/xlwu <p6$w (metu ab hostibus, fear of from the 
enemy),X.Cy.S.3,53. 'Aft eavrov (from his own impulse), (e) Tptyeiv rb 
vavTiKbv airb irposoSwv (by revenues), Th. 1, 81. (f ) 'Airb rwv by.erepwv 
vyTiV irotefj.e'i (QlAuriros) orvfifidxvv (sociorum vestrorum ope), Dem. Ph. 1.49, 



424 SYNTAX. [$ 288. 

34 ; hence many adverbial phrases, e. g. airb (Trofxaros, cWo yKcaTT-ns et7re?i/ (by 
heart, by word of 'mouth) ; airb cnrovSrjs (zealously), (g) 'Att' Ov\v/j.ttov ovpe- 
os nakiovTai Ob\v/j.irir)voi (are called from, derive their name from mount Olympus), 
Her. 7, 74. 'Airb ^v^^axias auToVcyicu (by virtue of), Th. 7, 57. 

2. 'E£ €K (ex), out of (opposite of iv, in), denotes (1) in a 
local relation : (a) removal either from within a place or object, 
or from immediate participation or connection with a place or 
object, with verbs of motion; hence an immediate succession 
of one object after another; (b) distance with verbs of rest: 
ivithout, beyond (Epic), e. g. ck /?e\eW, extra telorum j actum ; — 
(2) of time, immediate outgoing from a point of time; then 
especially the immediate development of one thing from anoth- 
er, an immediate succession of two actions ; — (3) in a causal 
and figurative sense : (a) of origin; (b) of the whole in relation 
to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it, often with the 
accompanying idea of choice and distinction; (c) of the author 
with passive or intransitive verbs, instead of v-rro, almost ex- 
clusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, seldom in Attic 
prose; (d) to denote the occasion or cause; (e) of the material; 
(f) of the means and instrument; (g) of conformity ; according 
to, in consequence of, by virtue of, after. 

(1) 'E/c ttjs ir6\ews airriX&ov, e'/c t 77 s /xdxvs e<pvyov (out from the city, 
out from the battle, while euro would merely signify away from) ; e/c yr,s ivav- 
(xaxrivw (out from the land). PI. Polit. 289, e. ol 8e ir6\iv e'/c ir6\eas aWdr- 
rnvres Kara &d\a.TTau /col ire(fj (changing from city to city). Apol. 37, d. Ka\bs oV 
fioi 6 /3ios elr\ aAA^j/ e'£ dw-ns it 6 Ae cos hjietfiofieva} (comp. ex alio loco in alium 
migranti). (2) 'E £ y p.€pas (ex quo dies illuxit, as soon as it was day) ; e/c tov- 
tov (sc. xpdvou) immediately of ter this; e'/c vvkt6s or e/c vvktu>v; e/c iroi- 
Scov (from very childhood); e'£ vffripov (subsequently); e/c tov Xoiirov. 
Her. 9, 8. e'| 7j/j.4pr)s is ripLepyv ava(ia\\6/j.evoi (ex die in diem, delaying from 
day to day, day after day). 1,87. e/c Se al&pir)s Te Kal vr)ve p-i-ns avvedpa- 
p.et> i^airivvs vetpza (immediately after fair weather, etc.). Th. 1, 120. e/c pikv 
elp-fivji's Tro\efxe7v, e/c Se it o\4p.ov irdhiv %vfx$7\vai (to go to war after peace, 
etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 17. 8 abs TraTT]p iv rjjSe rfj p.ia rj/xepa e'| deppovos Guxpptav 
yeyev7)Tai. (3) (a) Elvat, yiyvecr&cu e/c rivos (to be descended from some one, 
in indicating more direct descent, while euro may be used of one more remote), 
(b) 'E| \A.&7] i/cu'wi/ ol ZpiaToi (the best of ). (c) Her. 3, 62. to ivTeTa\p.eva in 
tov Mdyov (the things commanded by Magus). lb. irpoSedooftcu e'/c TIpr)£do~Treos(to 
be betrayed by), (d) 6, 67. ec^eirye Ar]/xdpr)Tos e'/c ^.irdpT-ns e'/c roiovde bpei- 
Seos (on account of '). So e'/c iraurbs tov vov (with all the heart); e/c {ilas 
and the like. Her. 2, 152. e'/c rys oipios tov bv^ipov {in consequence of ). (g) 



$ 289.] prepositions. — *Ev, avv. 425 

PI. Criton. 48, b. 4k t£>v bfxoXoyovixivMv rovro a-ice-rrriov (in accordance 
with icliat has been admitted). So dvojj.d£eo&ai e k r i v o s (to be named after or for 
some one, like virtus ex viro appellata est, is called or takes its name from vir). 
'Ek rod ; why ? 

Remark. The adverbs which, in the character of improper prepositions, take 
the Gen., have been already considered, in treating of the Gen. Besides these 
adverbs, the following substantives, as improper prepositions, take the Gen. : 
a. 8 i k t] v (Senas, Poet.), instar ; — b. % & P <■ v -> gratia, for the sake of, commonly 
placed after the Gen., seldom before it. Instead of the Gen. of the personal 
pronouns i/xov, (rod, etc., the possessive pronoun, as an attributive adjective, is 
regularly used with x°-P lu -> e - £■ e W> a W X&? iV i inea,tua gratia; — c. eVe/ca 
(eVe/cej/ even before consonants, as kveica even before vowels in the Attic writers, 
eiVe/ca and eiveicev, Ionic, but not wholly foreign to the Attic dialect, ouvsKa in 
poetry), causa, gratia. The Gen. more frequently stands before than after kveica. 
It very frequently signifies, with respect to, concerning, in regard to. Her. 3, 85. 
Sdpaee r ovrov e'/^e/ce, with respect to this, be of good courage. It often denotes 
a remote reason, e. g. by virtue of, by reason of. PL lip. 329, b. et yap i\v tout' 
aXriov, Kav iycb ra avra. ravra iireirovSir) even a ye yf)pws,i.e.by reason of old 
age ; — d. e kt) r i (poetic only), by or according to the will of (a god), Aibs kK-nri, 
Homer and Hesiod. In other poets it has the signification of kveica. 



$289. 2. Prepositions with the Dative only. 'Ei/ 
and crvv (J;vv). 

1. 'Ei/ (ivi Poet., eiV and dvi Epic) denotes that one thing is 
in, upon, by or near another. In general, it indicates an actual 
union or contact with an object, and hence is the opposite of 
ck. It denotes ( 1 ) in a local relation : (a) the being in, inclosed 
in, encircled, surrounded by; used with reference to place, cloth- 
ing, persons : in, among, in the midst of, and with verbs of speak- 
ing, before, in the presence of {coram) ; then it is transferred to 
the external and internal state or condition in which one is taken, 
or is found, by which he is, as it were, surrounded ; — also to the 
business in which he is engaged, to persons, in whose hands or 
power something is placed; it also denotes (b) the being upon 
something, and (c) the being near a thing, particularly of cities, 
near which (in the territory of which) something took place, 
especially a battle ; — (2) of time ($ 283, 3) ;— (3) in a causal 
and figurative relation: (a) of the means and instrument ; (b) 
of the manner ; (c) to denote conformity : according to, in con- 
formity ivith. 

(1) (a) 'Ei/ rfj iv6\ei, iv ry v-nav, iv ^.irdprri rodro iyevero. PI. L. 
C25, b. avdiravXai ev rols vty-nKols Sevdpecriv elffi (TKiapai. 'Ev oTrAots, 
iv t6£ois Siarywvi&ff&cu; iv iff&rjn, iv crre<pdvois (crowned); iv rots 

36* 



426 syntax. [$ 289. 

av&pcvTTOis {inter). Dem. Chers. 108, 74. TifiSbeos ttot iKe?vos iv vfj.?v idr}- 
(XT\y6p-qcrev {in our presence). 'Ev iroXe/xw, iv epya, iv Sairi, iv <po$w, iv 
opyfj elvai. PL Crito. 43, c. Kal &\\oi iv roiavrais ^vfi(popa7s a\icr- 
Komai {are taken in, involved in such calamities). Phileb. 45, c. iv toiovtois 
voff-t)p.a(Tiv ix6fievoi. Gorg. 523, b. iv tt a err, evSaifJ-ovia, otKe7v ( to live in 
the enjoyment of all prosperity). Her. 2, 82. ot iv iroiricrei yevojxevoi {those who 
have been in poetry = poets). Th. 3,38. o! iv vp&y patri {those engaged in 
state affairs = the ministers). X. Cy. 4. 3, 23. ol fiev dli iv tovtois to7s \6- 
yois ?)<rav {were engaged in these discourses). PL Phaed. 59, a. iv (piKocrocpla. 
ehai. Ol iv yewpyiais; iv rex^V ^vai. Hence various adverbial ex- 
pressions have originated, e. g. e v 'icrw elvai (to be equal) ; iv 7)8ovrj /xoi icrriv (it 
is pleasing to me) ; so also with ex €lv an( * Toieiaftcu, e.g.iv 6fj,ola>, iv i\a(pp<2 
7roie7<rSai (to esteem equally, to esteem lightly). 'Ev ijioi, iv cr o i icrri ti (penes me, 
te, it is in my power, etc.) ; hence the phrase iv eavrcp elvai (to be in one's senses, 
sui compotem esse) ; (b) iv opecr iv, iv 'iirirois, iv & povo is; (c) 'H iv Mav- 
riveia p-axv { tne battle near). — (2)'Ez/ tovtco t<*> x P ° v V 5 * v V (ivhile, 
during); iv irevre ripiepais (during, in the space of). — (3) 'Opav, opacr&ai, 
iv ocpbaA/xoTs, Poet, (to see, be seen with the eyes) ; then in other connections 
among the poets, iv -rrvpl Kaieiv, iv 8ecr/x$ Srjcrai, iv x^P '^ AajSetV, Horn. 
(to bum with fire, etc.). In prose, especially in Xenophon, iv is used to denote 
the means, in the expressions 1-qXovv, h~r\Xov elvai, crrj/xaiveiv ev tivi. X. Cy. 1. 
6, 2. oti /xev, S> Tval, ol &eoi ere r iXea> re Kal ev/xevels ire/xirovcri, Kal iv lepols Srj- 
Xov Kal iv ovpavio is cr-nixeiois (is evident both by the sacrifices and the signs 
from heaven). 8. 7, 3. icrr] \x-i] vare fxoi Kal iv lepo7s Kal iv ovpavlois 
a r] fxeio is Kal iv olwvoTs Kal iv <p"i) fxats, a r ixpvv iroieiv Kal a ovk ixpw. 
'Ev 8ik?7, iv cri<airrj. Th. 1, 77. iv to?s 6/xoiois vo/xois ras Kpicreis 
iroieTv (according to the same laws). So iv /xepei (according to his part, in turn). 
'Ev ipoi, ev aoi, iv iKeivw (Poet.), ex (according to) meo, tuo, illius judicio. 

2. 2w (£w mostly old Attic) corresponds almost entirely with the 
Latin cum, and the English with; it always expresses the idea of 
union, participation and accompaniment : ( 1 ) in a local relation 
often of an accompaniment which implies help or assistance ; — 
(2) in a causal sense to denote : (a) the means and instrument ; 
(b) the manner; (c) the measure or rule, by which the action 
of the verb is measured, as it were, or defined ; (d) conformity. 

(1) 'O arpar-qyos crvv rols err par icar ai s avex&pT)crev. — ~2,vv &€<£ (with 
the help of God). 2uy r ivi elvai or yiyvecrbai (to be on the side of one, of one's 
party). "Zvv tivi /xdxecrSai, to fight in company with one, to aid one in fighting, 
(2) (a) X. Cy. 8. 7, 13. 7) kttjctis avrwv (sc. tcicttuv cpiXwi/) icrriv ovSa/xas crvv 
rfj fii a, aXXa fxaXXov crvv rfj evepyecria (not by violence, but rather kindness). 
(b) Tlpo'ievai crvv Kpavyrj, crvv yeXcori iX&e?v (ivith a shout, etc.). X. Cy. 
3. 1, 15. tv6repa 5' r)yfj, S> Kvpe, 6,/xeivov elvai, crvv tw cr w aya&<£ ras rifxcaptas 
iroie?crfrai, 3) crvv rrj cry (yfiia; (with, for your advantage, or for your injury). 



$290.] PREPOSITIONS. — 'Ava, eis, ws. 427 

(c) 1. 3, 17. <rvv T(£ v6ixcp o 3 v iiceXevev ael tov SiKatfT V r\v tyr\<pov Ti&ecTid-at 
(to vote with, in accordance with the law), (d) 2 vv rep v 6fj.co t^v -^rjtiov T&e<r,d-e. 
~2bv t$ SiKaico. 

Remark. Of the adverbs used as improper prepositions, there belong here 
apa (una cum), and several which are constructed also with the Gen., as has 
been seen, in treating of the Gen. and Dat. 



$290. 3. Prepositions with the Acc. only: 'Ava, eis 

and ws. 

1. 'Ava [on, up, upon) signifies from a lower to a higher place, 
and is directly opposite to Kara with the Acc, which signifies 
from a higher to a lower place ; the use of dva is more frequent 
in poetry than in prose. It is used (1) in a local relation : (a) 
to denote a direction towards a higher object; (b) to denote the 
extension from a lower to a higher point, from bottom to top : 
throughout, through, both with verbs of motion and rest; — (2) 
in a temporal relation, to denote continuance or a period of time : 
per (seldom) ; — (3) in a causal sense to denote manner; then 
particularly in a distributive sense with numerals. 

(1) (a) Od. x» 132. 5 (pi\oi, ovk av Stj tjs av opcro&vp-nv avaftairi (up to 
the lofty gate). This use is rare and only poetic ; in prose only in the phrases 
ava rbv TTOTa/xov, ava p6ov 7rA.e?j/, up the stream (the opposite of Kara. 
irora/xSv, down the stream) ; (b) II. v, 547. (<£>Aei|/) ava vara freovcra Sta/xirepes 
(ab infima dorsi parte usque ad ceruicem) ; so ava Scifxa, ava. arparSv, ava /xaxw* 
ava '6/m\ov, ava &<ttv, ava. frvpov (through the house, through the army, etc.), 
all in Homer*, Her. 6, 131. Kal ovTw'AXKfxaicovidai ifidtxr^-narav ava rr]v 'E\- 
\dda (throughout Greece). X. Vect. 5, 10. ava iraffav yyjv Kal frdAarr av 
elp-fivy iarai. Hier. 7, 9. ava. arSfia ex el " ( io have continually in the mouth). 
(2) Her. 8, 123. ava rbv ttSXc/xov tovtov (throughout). So aya iraaav 
r)\v riixepav, per totum diem (the substantive must here have the article; 
without the article ava iracrav 7]fj.epav, signifies daily, day by day, aj-a irav ei-os, 
every year, yearly, see No. (3) and § 246, 6), ava vvura (per noctem, all night 
through). 7, 10. ava x?& vov e|eupoi tls &v (in the time). (3) 'Ava, Kpdros (with 
all one's might) ; ava /j.4pos (by turns) ; ava irav eros (quotannis). X. An. 4, 6, 
4. "EW-nves inopiStrjaav kirra (TTa&fxovs ava irevre ir apacr ay y as ttjs rjfiepas 
(Jive parasangs daily). 

Remark 1. In the Epic and Lyric, languages, avd is constructed with the 7 
Dat. also ; instead of it iv is elsewhere used, e. g. ava GK-iyKTpip, &p.co, Tapydpa, 
&Kpu> in Homer. So efiSei 8' dvex crKdnTw Aibs ahr6s, Find. 

2. Efe (es Ionic, Doric, and old Attic) is only a modified form 
of eV, and denotes the same relations of position as are ex- 






428 syntax. [$ 290. 

pressed by Zv, but always in the direction whither; hence it is 
used of motion into the interior of an object, up to, into the im- 
mediate presence of; in general to denote the reaching a definite 
limit. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a local limit; (b) a 
limit in quantity : about, up to; (c) extension; (d) in the sense 
of before, in the presence of, coram, but with the idea of the di- 
rection whither ; — (2) of time, to denote a temporal limit: till, 
towards ; (3) in a causal sense : (a) of a mental aim, object or 
purpose ; (b) of the manner ; with numerals either in the sense 
of about or in a distributive sense ; (c) in general to express a 
reference to something : in respect to. 

(1) (a) 'Ievot els t)]v tt6Xiv\ so also of persons with the accompanying 
idea of their habitation or country. PI. Apol. 17, c. els vpas elsievai, i.e. 
els rb SiKa<TT7]piov elsievai. X. An. 4. 7, 1. iiropevfrnvav els Ta6x<>vs (went 
into the country of the Taochoi). Among the Attic writers, also in a hostile 
sense: contra, in. Th. 3, 1. icrrpdrevaav is rrjv 'At r iktjv (into, against At- 
tica). "With the verbs avXXeyeiv, awayeipeiv, a.Xi(eiv and the like, the Greeks 
use els, where we say, to assemble at or in a place. Comp. § 300, 3. (b). Th. 
2, 13, rS>y TleXoirovvrjaicev ^vXXeyopevcav re is rbv 'lo'&pbv Kal iv 68<2 ovrcov. 
Comp. 4, 91. 8,93. So the Latins say: congregari, convenire, etc., in urbem. 
(b) Th. 1,74. vav s is ras rerpaKocrias. (c)'Ek &aXacrcrr]s els SaXaaorav. 
PI. Gorg. 526, b. eh Kal irdvv iXXSyipos yeyovev els robs &XXovs°EXX7ivas, 
'ApicrTeid-ns (among), (d) Aoyovs Troie'icrSrai els rbv Srjpov (to speak before, in 
the presence of the people). PL Menex. 239, a. ol ivarepes iroXXa 57? Kal KaXa, epya 
anecprivauTO els it auras avfrpdoirovs (before all men). (2) 'Ej yeXiov Ka- 
r aSvvra ( till sunset ) , Homer ; hence els ecrir epav ( towards, till evening, proper- 
ly to evening as a boundaiy) ; so in prose, els r\\v bar epaiav (till the following 
day, on the following day) ; els rpirrjv ripe pav (till, on). (3) (a) 'Expyaaro ro7s 
Xpvpaariv els rr)v ir6Xtv(forthecity). Ets ti; (for what?) ; els Kepdosn 
Spau (to do something for gain), (b) Els KaXbv r)Keis (opportune); els raxes 
(quickly) ; els Zvvap.iv, according to one's ability ; els e KarSv (about a hundred 
or by hundreds, centeni), especially in the arrangement of soldiers, e. g. els $vo 
(two deep, two by two), (c) &avpd£eiv, iiraivelv rwa els r i (to admire, praise one 
with respect to, on account of something) ; so Siacpepeiv rivos els dp er-nv, <pp6vipos, 
ev86xip.os e?s r i, els irdvra, in every respect; fSXerceiv, airofSXeireiv e I s ra 
tt pay par a, like irpSs. 

3. e Os (ad), to, does not like the other prepositions, denote the 
relation of position, but only the direction whither ; it is used 
only of persons or of the names of cities, when they stand for 
the inhabitants. 

Th. 4, 79. BpaaiSas acp'iKero ws TlepS'tKKav Kal els rrjv XaXKiducfjv (came to 



$291.] prepositions. — Aia. 429 

Perdiccas). Dem. Phil. 1. 54, 48. irpeo-feis Trewofx<pev ws&aai\4a. Th. 8, 
36. tftcovros ws r^ju MiXrjTov (ad Milesios). 

Eem. 2. This ws is to be distinguished from that which stands with els, iwi> 
and irp6s with the Ace. (ws eis, ws eVi, ws irp6s rtva). This latter ws is not a 
preposition, but it expresses a supposition, just as when it is joined with the par- 
ticiple, and does not denote an actual direction to a place, but only one sup- 
posed, and hence intended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. abpoi(ei ws in] tovtovs to 
(TrpaTev/xa (quasi his bellum illaturus, he collects as if against these). Hence this 
ws also stands with the prepositions governing other Cases, e. g. Th. 3, 4. 
skitXovv iiroiTiaavTo rwv vewv ws iirl v av/xaxia (as if for the purpose of fight- 
ing a naval battle). 1, 134. ol 8e iroirjcrdfxei'ot x a ^K°vs avSpiavras Svo ws avil 
Tlavaaviov ave^eaau (quasi essent Pausaniae loco, as if in the place of Pau- 
sanias). 



4. Prepositions with the Genitive and Accusa- 
tive: Sia, Kara, virep, jtiera. 

§ 291. (1) Ata, through. 

1. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (2) to denote a mo- 
tion extending through a space or object and again coming out : 
through, and, out again, out of (Homer expresses this relation 
still more distinctly, by uniting the preposition Ik or 7rpo with 
Sia, e. g. Od. p, 460. Sick [xeyapoco dva^copetv) ; (b) to denote ex- 
tension through something, but without the accompanying rela- 
tion stated under (a) of coming out of the object; on the Gen., 
see $ 287, Rem.; — (2) of time, to denote the expiration or 
lapse of a period: after, properly to the end of a period, through 
and out; — (3) in a causal sense, to denote origin (rare) and the 
author (very frequent) ; (b) to denote quality (possessive Gen.) 
in connection with ttvai and yiyvea^ai ; (c) the means, both of 
persons and things; (d) manner; (e) worth (rare); (f) com- 
parison (rare). 

(1) (a) Her. 7, 8. fieXAw 4\av OTpaTOV 5 * ot rrjs Evpcairys eVl ryv 'EAAaSa. 
2, 26. Sie^eXSrwu Sia ira<r-ns Ew pAir-n s. 7, 105. e£rjAawe rbv arparbv 
Sia rr/s ©pTf-'iK-ns iirl tV e EAAa8a. 3, 145. Biaictyas Sia. rrjs yopyipys 
(having crept out through the prison), (b) Od. p, 335. Sih v>i<rov I6v, Sia. ir e - 
5 i o v (per campum ) . X. Hier. 2, 8. 5 1 a iroKefilas iropevecr&ai ( to march through 
the enemy's country). Figuratively in the phrases, dia 5 iKaio avvn s Uvai (to 
go in the way of justice, to go through justice, i. e. to be just) ; Sia. rod Siitaiov 
iropeve<rfrai; Sia <p6$ov epxeoSai (to fear), Eur. Or. 747. AicL <pi\(as Uvai 
nvt (to be friendly to one), X. An. 3. 2, 8. (2) At' Ztovs (through, for a year) ; 
Sia iroWov, /xanpod, bxlyov x?^ov (through, for a long, a short time); 
also Si 6\lyov, Sia iroWov without xP ivov y or 5l * XP& V0V ^A&* (he 



430 syntax. [$ 292. 

came after a long time) ; tiia iravrbs rod XP^ V0V Toiavra ovk iyevero [during 
the whole time)) ti i a r) fie pas, Sia vvktSs (through, throughout the day, etc. 
So also of an action repeated at stated intervals, e.g. Sia. rpirov erovs 
crwrjeaav (every third year, tertio quoque anno, always after three years, through 
and out again); Sia irefiirrov erovs, Sia. irevTe eTwv (every fifth year, 
etc., quinto quoque anno) : S la rpirrjs rjfiepas. (3) (a) Aia, fia(ri\eav irecpvuus 
(descending from a continued line of kings, owing one's birth to kings), X. Cy. 7. 2, 
24. Yldvra Si eavrwv irpaTreaSrai (to accomplish everything by themselves); 
Si eavrov KTrjaaaSrai ti. (b) Aia. <p6fiov ehai, S i ex& P as yiyvea&ai rti/i, 
Si epioos, opyrjs, acr<pa\eias ehai or yiyve<r&ai (to be in fear, to be hostile, 
to be angry with, to be safe), (c) At 5 6 (p& aXfiwv tpav (to see with the eyes). 
PI. Theaet. 184, c. ^Koirei, airSupicris irorepa op&orepa, $ bpufiev, tovto elvai 6<p&a\- 
fiovs, 77 S 1 ov opwfiev, nal § an6vofA.ev, £>ra, r) 8 1 ov aicovofiev. (The Dat. denotes 
the means used, tiid with the Gen. the active means.) "Exeiy Tiva tit' opyrjs (to 
be angry with) ; Sia % eip wv €%etv (to work upon, to be engaged in, to handle) ; 
also of persons, e. g. "Eirpalav ravra tii Evpv/xdxov, Th. 2, 2. (d) Aia 
<nrovtirjs, Sia rdxovs rroie?v ri (with earnestness, earnestly, etc.). (e) S. 0. C. 
584. Si oitSevbs Trote?o-&ai (to consider of no value), (f ) Her. 1, 25. freris 'd^iov 
Sia, irdvTcov to>v apaSrrifidT a>v (in comparison with, among). 

II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation to denote extension 
through a place or object: through, throughout (only poetic) ; — 
(2) of time to denote extension through a period of time, 
throughout ; — (3) in a causal sense: (a) to denote the reason, 
mediation: on account of, ob, propter, by; (b) of the person by 
whose means something is effected. 

(1) (a) Eur. Hipp. 762. tiia ir6vriov Kv/xa eiropevffas ifj.au Tkvaocav 
(through the wave of the sea). (2) A ta vvKTa. (3) X. An. 1. 7, 6. eari fiev 
ilfAv 7] apxh V Tarpaa irpbs fiev fieo-nfiPpiav fiexpis ov Sia. Kavfia ov Svvavrai 
olitelv &v&pwTroi (on account of the heat). 4. 5, 15. Sia ras roiavras olv 
audynas inreXelirovTS Tives rccy arpaTiwruv. (b) An. 7. 7, 7. St* r)fias avv 
&eo7s exeTe r^vSe t))v x^P av (ty your means, mediation). KokoI SoKovfxev elvai 
Sia tovtov (hujus culpd). 



$292. (2) Kara, from above, down. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) of motion from 
a higher to a lower place (desuper, deorsuni) ; (b) of a direction 
towards a place or object situated beloiv : down to, down upon, 
down under (on the Gen., see $ 287, Rem.) ; (c) seldom of rest 
in, upon or at a place or object ($ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal 
and figurative sense, to denote the cause or occasion. 



$292.] prepositions. — KaTa. 431 

(1) (a) II. a, 44. firj Se kut Ov\v/j.ttoio Kap-r\vwv (down from the heights). 
Her. 8, 53. efip'nrreov kosvrovs Kara, rod Tei'xeas Kara, (b) Her. 7, 6. aapa- 
vi(ecrdra.i Kara rrjs SraXacr a -n s (to disappear down under the sea). 235. Kara- 
dedvKevcu Kara rrjs &aAao-ar)s. X. An. 7. 1, 30. evxop.ai fxvpias iu.4 ye 
Kaia. yrjs bpyvias yeviaSfai (to be sunk under the earth). So figuratively of a 
direction to a lower object, as ro^eveiv Kara r i v o s, iraleiv Kara rivos, to 
shoot at something, to strike at something (the preposition denoting the direction 
towards the mark, viz., down)] rvirreiv Kara. Kopp-ns, on the head (§ 273, 
Rem. 8) ; (c) Her. 1, 9. Kara vcorov yevevbai (to come behind, to be behind). 
Th. 4, 32. Kara, vdorov elvai (in the rear). 33. Kara vdorov Ka^ear-nKevai. 
(2) Aeyeiv Kara tij/os (dicere de aliqua re) ; in this connection, the idea of hos- 
tility especially is expressed by the preposition, e. g. Keyeiv, \6yos Kara rivos 
(against one). X. Apol. 13. tyevSea&ai Kara rod &eov (to say anything falsely 
of or against the God) ; but also in an opposite relation, Dem. Phil., 2. 68, 9. 'o Kal 
fjLe^icrTSv eari Ka& vfMwv iyK<&p.iov (in honor of you). Aeschin. Ctes. 60. 
oi Kara. Atj p. off 3- evov s erraivoi. ^kottcTv Kara rivos (secundum, in respect 
to). Plat. Phaed. 70, d. pvq Kar avdr pdnrwv o-kSttci p.6vov rovro, a\ka Kal 
Kara ^diav iravrwv Kal cpvrav. So also in Attic adjurations and oaths, 
e. g. evxeoSai, 6p.vvvai Kara r i v o s, for example, l e p w v reAei w v (Th. 5, 47), 
to sivear by unblemished victims (as it were holding the hands over them) ; so 
also evx*(T&ai Ka& eKarop-firis, Kara f5o6s. 

II. Ill a local and temporal relation, Kara with, the Ace. is 
directly opposite to dvd, in respect to the point from whence 
the motion of the action begins ; but it agrees with avd in de- 
noting the direction to an object and the extension over it. 
The use of avd is more confined to poetry, but Kara has no such 
limitation. (1) In a local relation : (a) to denote the direction 
of the action to a lower object; (b) to denote extension from 
above to beloiv, from a higher to a lower object : throughout, 
through, over ; (c) in the historians in the sense of e regione, 
over against, opposite to ; — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
or duration; — (3) in a causal sense: (a) to denote purpose and 
design ; (b) conformity, and the respect in which anything is con- 
sidered, and hence also a reason: on account of; (c) an indefinite 
measure (about) ; (d) the manner ; hence also with the distribu- 
tive specifications of number. 

(1) (a) BaAAeti/ Kara yaarepa (to strike on the abdomen), and the like in 
Homer. Her. 3, 14. irappaav ai irap&evoi Kara robs irarepas (to the fathers 
sitting) : then of the course of a stream, Kara p6ov, down the stream (see avd). 
Her. 4, 44. (Scylax cum suis) eirXeov Kara trorap.ov irpbs i)u> re Kal tjAiov ava- 
roXas is frdXaaaav. (b) Her. 3, 109. ai ex^vai Kara irao-av rr]V yr)v elffi. 
Kara yr)v, Kara SraXa<r<rav iropevea&ai (through, over, by), (c) Th. 2,30. 



432 



SYNTAX. 



[§ 293. 



Keircu 7) Ke<pa\Xf]via Kara 'Anapv aviav {opposite to). (2) Kara, rbv av- 
rbv xpoVoj/, Kara rbv it por epov ir6\efj.ov (during the same time, etc.); 
ol Kara riva (contemporaries of any one). (3) (a) Her. 2, 152. koto Atj'itjv 
iKivKwaavras (having set sail for the purpose of plunder). Th. koto &eav i]K^iv 
(spectatum venisse). Kara ri; why? wherefore? (b) Kara vo/jlov, Kara 
\6yov (ad rationem, pro ratione,in conformity with, according to) ; Kara yv<x>- 
liT)V t^]V €/x r f]U. Her. 2, 3. Kara r^v rpocprjv ra>v iratScov roaavra eAeyov 
(in respect to nourishing the boys). Her. 1, 85. Kara, rbv Kprjrripa ovrcos ecr^e. 
Kara ti (in some respect, quodammodo) ; tear' o v 5 e v, Kar a ir dvr a (in no, 
every respect) ; Kara rovro (hoc respectu, hence propter hoc) ; Th. 1, 60. koto 
(piKiav avrou o I TrXelaroi in: Kopiv&ov ffrpanurai i&e\ovrai ^vveo-rrovro (on ac- 
count of his friendship). Dem. Chers. 90, 2. ovs Kara, robs v6/novs icp' v/luv 
iariv, orav f$ov\T)oSe, Ko\d(eiv (to punish according to the laws). Kara <j>vo-iv 
(secundum naturam) ; koto Svva/j.iv (according to one's ability, to the best of one's 
ability); Kara. Kpdros (with all one's might), (c) Kara k^-t]Kovra iri\ 
(about sixty years); Kara. fxiKp6v (gradually); /cot' bxiyov, Kara iroAu, 
Kara -rroWa (by fay-), (d) Ka&' rja-vx^av (quietly); Kara. rd%os (quiclly); 
avvrvx'i-av (casu, by chance); Kara rb lff%vpov (per vim, violently); 
Kara jj.4 pos (in order, in turn). Her. 6, 79. airoivd lari Svo p.viai Kar dud pa 
(viritim, for each man) ; Kara k tafias (vicatim, by villages) ; koto firjva (sin- 
gulis mensibus, every month, monthly); Ka& rj/xepav, %v ko& %v (one after the 
other, one by one, i. e. singly) ; Ka& kirrd, septeni. 

Remark. Very many verbs compounded with Kara, are constructed with the 
Gen. to denote the person who caused the action, and towards whom it is directed, 
e. g. KaradiKafa, KarayiyvuxTKO), KaraKpivoi, KaTatyr)<pi£oixai rivos, to give judgment, 
bring a charge, pass a vote against any one ; Kara\\ievdojxai rivos, to lie against any 
one ; KOTayeAw rivos, to laugh at, to deride one ; Kara<ppovu> rivos, despicio aliquem. 
An Ace. very frequently stands with these, e. g. Kar^yopeiv ri rivos, to accuse 
one of something, xarayiyvwaKeiv ri (as dvoiav, K\oTr-hv) rivos, KaraKpiveiv nvbs 
hdvarov, KarabiKa^eiv nvbs Srdvarov, Kara\l/r]<pi£eo~&ai rivos deiAiav. 



$ 293. (3) c Y7rep, super, over. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote resting, 
abiding over or above a place or object (§ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in 
a causal sense : (a) for, for the good of; (b) to denote an inter- 
nal, mental cause, instead of the more usual v-n-6 with the Gen. ; 
(c) with verbs of entreating, imploring: for the sake of some 
one ; (d) to denote cause; in connection with rov and the Inf. 
to denote purpose, which by the language is considered as the 
cause; (e) in general to denote in respect to, instead of the 
more usual 7rept with the Gen. 

II. With the Ace. : over, above and beyond, used in relation 
to space and time, and also to measure and number. 



$294.] peepositions. — Mera. 433 

I. (1) X. C. 3. 8, 9. 6 rjAios rod Srepovs virep 7)/j.wi/ Kal rwv areyuv iropev- 
6fievos (TKiav avrwv irapex* 1 (passing over us and the houses). Her. 7. 69. 'ApaP'iow 
Kal Al&iovwv rS>v virep Aiyvirrov olicrifievuv fjpxe 'Apad/jL-ns (who dwell above 
Egypt). 'Tirep Sra\daar]s oUeTv (properly to dwell beyond the sea, i. e. on, by 
the sea). (2) (a) Mdxe<r&cu virep t?is irarpiSos (to fight in defence of some- 
thing, as if standing over it); virep ttjs 'EKXddos bdvaros (death in behalf 
of for Greece); iroAireveaSai, arpar-nyelv virep tivos (in alicujus gratiam) ; 
virep rwv irpaypdr(avairovh'd£eiv,§e?)oiKevai virep r iv 5 (timer ealicui). (b) 
virep irev&ovs (for, because of grief ). '(c) II. co, 466. Kal /j.iv virep irarpbs 
Kal fx.rjTepos rju/c^o to Xtaaeo Kal reKeos (entreat him for tjie sake of his 
father, etc. (d) PI. Symp. 208, d. virep aperrjs abavdrov Kal roiavrijs 
8 6£t)s ev kXcov s irdvres irdvra iroiovaiv (on account of , for the sake of imper- 
ishable distinction, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 52,43. virep rod ^77 ira^e?v KaKws 
virb QiAiirirov (for the purpose of not suffering evil, etc.). — II. Her. 4, 188. piirre- 
owi virep rbv 86/j.ov (over the house). Seldom of mere extension, as rots 
®pa£l to?s virep 'EAAr) sir ovr ov o'lKovai (the TJiracians dwelling beyond the 
Hellespont, i. e. on the Hellespont); virep r)]v rjXiKiav (beyond one's years, 
age); virep ovva/xiv (beyond one's power); virep av&puirov (beyond man, 
i.e. beyond what could be expected of him). Her. 5, 64. virep ra reaaepd- 
kovt a err] (beyond, more than, forty years). 



§ 294. (4) Mera, ivith. 

I. Mera, allied to /xecro? (in the middle, betiveeri) denotes the 
being in the midst of, being among persons or things. With the 
Gen., fjLerd denotes an intimate connection, a participation, a 
sharing in (comp. /xere^etv) ; the Gen. denotes the whole, of 
which the subject of the sentence constitutes a part; it conse- 
quently differs from avv with the Dat, which merely denotes 
the connection (association) of one object with another, with- 
out the one being considered a^partof the other (comp. o-uve^etv). 
It is used (1) in a local relation: in the midst, among ; then to 
denote an active participation in aid of some one : with ; — (2) 
in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote the means or 
manner ; (b) conformity. 

(1) Eur. Hec. 209. per a veKpcov Kelao/jiai (to lie among the dead, and one's 
self to be dead). PI. Ep. 359, e. Ka&TJaSrat. /xera, ra>v &\\av. Merd tivos 
/jdx*(r&ai (to fight in active participation with one). Dem. Phil. 3. 117, 24. per a 
toiv rjSiK-niJieuuv iro\efj.e?v (to participate in carrying on war ivith those who had 
been injured). Ehat, arrival /xerd rivos (to be on the side of one). PI. Ep. 467. 
e. o-wfrfjo-ovrai, fiera irpeafivreptav riye/xSvav eir6fj.evoi (they follow the 
older leaders, and as it were, hold fast to them ; wholly different from eirea&ai 
fjxrd riva and avv rivi). (2) (a) Th. 1, 18. per a kivovvuv ras peAeras 

37 



434 syntax. [$ 294. 

noiovfieuoi (i. e. surrounded 'by, in the midst of dangers). X. C. 3. 5, 8. fier 
apeT77 y irpwreveti/ (as it were in an intimate connection with virtue). Dem.Phil. 
3. 130, 74. vfuy ol irpoyovoi tovto rb yepas inT-fjcravTO Kal KareALTrov fierh ttoA- 
\a>v Kal p.f-ydAu>v Kivhvvuv. (b) Isocr. Archid. 129, 66. rovs v6jxovs, /uefir' 
wv oIkovvtcs eudaL/xouearaToi ruv 'EAA-f)i/cav ^aau (agreeably to which, t&v vofxav 
iX^uevot, Jegibus quasi adhaerentes). PL Ap. 32, c. fxera rod v6/xov Kal rov 
8 a t k a i o v (ffxrju p-aAAou /xe SetV h'laKiv'Bvveveiv, t) /xzSr v/xwu yevecr&ai {XT} 8'iKcua 
PovAevofievcou (in conformity zuith law and justice). 

II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) (Poet.) to de- 
note a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv- 
ing to be united with a person or thing, in a friendly or hostile 
relation, and generally to denote a succession in space ; (b) to 
denote a local extension between two objects, in the prose 
phrase /xera veipas *X eiv Ti > to have something in hand; — (2) 
(prose and Poet.) to denote succession in time and in order: 
after, next to, next in order ; — (3) in a causal sense (only Poet), 
to denote purpose and conformity. 

(1) '\Kicrbai ix era Tpwas Kal 5 A%aious (to come into the midst of the Tr. 
and Gr.). II. p, 460. aicraow casr alyvmbs (A era x?l vas (among the geese). 
Seldom used of things. II. 0, 376. os/xe fxer an prjKroy s epiSas KalveiKea 
fSaWei (into the midst of contention). Brjvai /xera Nearopa (to go to Nestor, 
properly into a connection with him ) ; /3r) Se /xer 'Ido/xevrja, (to go to Idomen. 
to follow after him, properly to go into the engagement or battle with him ), II. 
v, 297. II. v, 492. Aaol eirou&, &set re fxera. kt'iAov ea-ireTO /xrjAa (behind the 
ram). (2) Me-rct rov rod iraidbs frdvarov, X. (after the death). Mera 
ravra (after) ; the Ace. often has a participle agreeing with it, e. g. Her. 1, 34. 
juera ~2,6\bova olx^H-^vou (after the departure of Solon). Me3-' vjxepav 
(interdiu, in the day time, properly after the break of day), X. An. 4. 6, 12. 
KaKtlvos eAajSe /xer i/xe devrepos (second after me), Cy. 2. 2, 4. Tl6Aw (e?%ov) 
tV irAovffiwTaT-nv iu rfj 'Acrta /xera BafiuAwva (the richest next to Babylon), 7. 2, 
11. (3) Od. a, 184. ttAuv fxera %aAK($j> (ad aes petendum). Eur. Ale. 67. 
Evpvcr&ecos Tre/xxpauros 'lirireiov fxera oxVf^ - (f or i a ft er a chariot). II. o, 52. 
t<3 Ke Hocreiddav ye . . . al\pa /xeraarp4\peie v6ov fie to. <rbv Kal ifxbv Kyp, 
(agreeably to, according to, your desire and mine). 

Remark. Merd is constructed with the Dat. only in poetry, particularly in 
the Epic, to denote merely local union or association in place ; in prose, iv and 
avv are used instead of it. It commonly stands with the plural, or with the 
singular of collective nouns ; the words with which it stands may denote per- 
sons, or things considered as such, and the parts or members of animate things, 
e. g. jx€t abavdrois, with, among ) pera crrparw ; ^uera X 6 P a ' L i ^oai, yevvffi, ya/xepr)- 
Acus (in the midst of), between, /xcto <ppecriu, in the mind, [xeTa v-qvai, Kv/xaai ; p.era 
■Kvoifis av4/Aoio> Homer. 



^ 295.] prepositions. — 3 AfA<f>i, -n-epL 435 

5. Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, and 
Accusative: afxcfii, 7rc.pi, k-rvi, Trapd, rrpos, vtto. 

§ 295. (1) 'A/x</>i and -n-epL 

1. The prepositions d/x^t and irepi express nearly the same 
relations of position: around, about; afxcpt, on both sides, Trept, 
on all sides; they also agree in their use, though the use of 
afxcfic is rarer, and is more Ionic and poetic than 7repi, which ex- 
presses a far greater variety of relations and has a more gen- 
eral application. 

2. 'A/xcjiL denotes in general the surrounding of something 
(on both sides), the being near and close to something. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote re- 
moval from that which surrounds (Poet.) ; (b) to denote dwell- 
ing or rest around something ($ 287, Rem.), though but seldom; 
— (2) in a causal sense, to denote the occasion or cause : about, 
for, on account of, though but seldom in prose, rrepc with the 
Gen. being generally used instead of it. 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation (Poet, only), to de- 
note rest around, at, near, among ; — (2) in a causal sense (very 
seldom in prose, indeed not at all in Attic prose) : (a) to denote 
the cause or occasion, as with the Gen., with this difference, 
however, that with the Dat., the relation of causality is con- 
sidered as wholly local; (b) to denote an internal and mental 
reason (Poet). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation, to denote local 
extension : about, around, on; — (2) to denote time and number 
approximately or indefinitely ; — (3) in a causal and figurative 
sense, to denote a mental dwelling upon an object, taking pains, 
and being employed about it. 

I. (1) (a) Eur. Or. 1460. a/x^J irop<J>vpe<» v iriirXcav £l(p7) o-irdcravTes (from the 
garments ivhich were around the sword), (b) Her. 8, 104. a /a (pi Tavrrjs oIksovcti 
rrj's it6\ios (dwell around this city). (2) Max^^ca a/xepi rivos (for, on account 
of some one, or something). X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. els naipbu rjKeis, ottcos ttjs S/ktjs clkov- 
aris nvapcbv T r qs afx<pl rod irarpSs (about, relating to your father). II. (1) Te- 
Xa^v ap.(pl o-T-h&eo-o-iv (around the breast), II. /3, 388. y A/j.(pl KXdSois e(€o-&ai 
(to be surrounded by branches, to sit among). (2) (a) II. it, 565. a/xcpl vettvi 
KarareSfv-ncarL /j.dxe<r&at (about, on account of a dead body). II. y, 157. a/j.<pl 
yvvaiKl aXyea itdcrx^v. Her. 6, 129. ol nvqarriptt epiv elxov 0,/j.cpl {xova-iKJ). 



436 syntax. [$ 295. 

62. <^>oj8rj3-els apupl rfi yvvaiKl (respecting). 3. 32. a p. (pi rS Sravdra 
avTrjs di£bs Xeyerai x6yos. (bj 'A/xcpl (p6ficp (prae metu, for, on account of); 
a pup I frv/xo) (prae ira). III. (1) X. Cy. 6. 2, 11. (avXXeyeTcu) to crrpdrevixa 
a.p.(pl rbu Hcikt coXbv ttot apt. 6 v. 2. 4, 16. Te&TjpaKa dp.<pl t a opia 
(around, on the borders). Hence also of the persons around any one, as in ol 
a/j.<pl riva, see § 263, d. (2) 'Apicpl rbv x el f x ^ >va (about winter); apicpl 
SeiXyu (sub vesperam, about twilight); apicpl robsfxvpiovs (circiter). (3) 
v E%eiv a/x<pi n (to be employed about something), e. g. a/xcpl delirvov, a-pup" '{nirovs, 
ap/xara. 

3. Ilept signifies all round, round, in a circle. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling or 
rest around an object. This use of it is confined to poetry, and 
even here is very rare ; comp. $ 287, Rem. — (2) in a causal and 
figurative sense : (a) to denote the cause or occasion, a respect, 
in a great variety of connections : about, concerning, for, on ac- 
count of, in respect to; — (b) to denote a mental cause: for, from, 
on account of, prae, though but seldom ; (c) to denote the rela- 
tion of a person or thing to that which belongs to them, which, 
as it were, surrounds them and refers to them (Gen. of the 
possessor) ; (d) to denote ivorth and superiority. 

(1) Od. e, 68. avrov rerduucrTO irepl crireiovs yXacpvpoTo ripcepts (there 
the vine was stretched around the cave). 130. rbu pu\v eywv ecrdwcra it epl rpSirios 
fiefiacoTa. (2) (a) Max ecr&cu, airobaveTv irepl rrjS irarpiSos (for, on account 
of) ; with verbs denoting a physical or mental perception, dicoveiv, eidevai, etc., 
with verbs of saying and asking, e. g. Xeyeiu irepi rivos, x6yos irepi nvos, with verbs 
of anxiety, fear, and such as express all other affections, e. g. (pofieTcr&ai irepl 
■kclto'iSos, iirip.eXe'icr&ai, eiriixeXeia irepl riuos (to fear for one's country). Dem. Phil. 
1,52,43. 7]-apxi] rod iroXepiov yeyevy^ai irepl rod r i fxco p rj a acr &ai 3?lXiirirov 
(with respect to taking vengeance on Philip), (b) riepl bpyrjs (prae ira, on ac- 
count of, because of anger), Tb. 4, 130. (c) Ta irepi riuos (the affairs, fortune, 
circumstances of any one, etc.) ; ol irepi tluos (those belonging to any one, asso- 
ciated with him, and as it were surrounding him). Dem. Phil. 1. 50. 36. ev ro?s 
irepl rod ir oXe p.ov ko.1 rfi tovtov irapacrKevy araura diraura (sc. ecrriv) (in 
matters pertaining to the war), (d) In the Common language, irepl iroXXov, 7repl 
irXeiovos, irepl irXelcTTOV, irepl oXiyov, irepl eXarrovos, irepl iXaxio~rou, irepl ovdevbs 
iroielcrSai or riyeloSal ti (to value high, higher, etc.) ; so also irepl iroXXov ecTTiv 
7] put/ (of great value). 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling 
or rest around or near something, with the idea of surrounding 
or encircling it (seldom in Attic prose) ; (2) in a causal sense : 
(a) like a^t with the Dat., but much more frequently; (b) to 
denote an external or internal reason or cause (Poet.). 



$296.] prepositions. — 'Ettl. 437 

(1) Her. 7, 61. irepl rrj<ri KecpaXycr i elxov ridpas. PL Up. 359, d. irepl 
rrj x e£ P' xpuo-oDj/ daicrvAiov (pepeiv. (2) (a) Maxeffdat 7repi rti/i {for some- 
thing, some one), (Poet.), in prose especially with verbs of fearing : Th. 1, 60. 
dedi6res irepl t$ x «?*<*> {fearing for the town). 4, 70. delcras irepl Ue\o- 
irovvnal ois. 6,9. irepl t<£ e/xavrou ffSfxari o/3/5co5a). PL Phaed. 114. d. 
S-appecv irepl tiui {to be of good courage about something), (b) (Poet.) Tlepl 
XapfAari, (p6fio), a&ei/ei, odvvn {prae, for joy, fear, etc., as it were surrounded by 
them). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: around, (a) to de- 
note motion round about something, into the circle or vicinity of 
an object (Poet.) ; (b) extension around, in or at, through some- 
thing, with verbs of rest ; — (2) of time and number stated in- 
definitely or approximately ; — (3 ) in a causal or figurative sense, 
to denote a mental dwelling about an object, taking pains with 
•it, being employed about it; also in respect to. 

(1) (a) II. k, 139. irepl <ppevas tf\v& lcoi\, the clamor came round his mind; 
(b) Her. 3, 61. Kap-fivcrr) XP 0V K 0VTI "repl A tyvirrov eiravt<TTeaTai 'dvSpes Ma- 
yoi {round in Egypt). 7,131. 6 fieu irepl Uiepl-nv dierpifie rj/xepas avx^ds. 
Th. 6, 2. $kovv Qoivlices ire pi iraaav t^v ~2iKe\iav 'dupas re iirl tj? Stahdoar) 
airo\afi6vTes Kal ret. eiriKelfxeva urjaidia {in Sicily around on all the coasts). 
Hence of ire pi riva {those around any one, connected or associated with him) ; ol 
irepl UXdrwva (§ 263, d). Comp. a/x<pl. (2) Th. 3, 89. irepl tovtovs 
tovsxP^vovs {about). Tlepl jxvplovs {about). (3) Ol irepl fiovam^v 
oures, ol irepl rrju yew/xerplav SiaTpifSovTes, <rirov§d£eiu irepl ri {those oc- 
cupied about, tvith music, etc.). 'AfieXoos ex^v irepl t iv a. X. An. 3. 2, 20. 
i^a/xaprdueiu irepl riva {with respect to). 1. 6, 8. dducos irepl riva. C. 1. 1, 
20. auKppove'iu irepl robs freovs. Al irepl to crw/xa ySovai) ra irepl r^v 
aperi]v {the essence of virtue, what pertains to it). 



§ 296. (2) 'Etti', upon. 

With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote rest upon 
a place or object, bordering on a place, the place being regarded 
as the point of support, that on which the action leans, hence : 
upon, at, near to ($ 287, Rem.) ; (b) a direction to a place ($ 273, 
Rem. 8) ; — (2) in a temporal relation to denote the time in or 
during which something takes place (§ 273, Rem. 12) ; — (3) in 
a causal and figurative sense : (a) with verbs of saying, sivear- 
ing and affirming before any one (as it were leaning or resting 
on some one) ; (b) to denote the occasion or author, especially 
in the phrase, to be named after some one or some thing ; (c) 

37 # 



438 syntax. [$ 296. 

conformity, with' verbs signifying to examine, to judge, to con- 
sider, to say, and to show ; (d) dependence or resting on some- 
thing, a steadfast abiding by (on) something; (e) the manner; 
(f ) the purpose, which is then considered by the language, as 
the canse, with the verb rax^yjvat, and the like, to be set over 
something, and in certain phrases. 

(1) (a) PI. Menex. 246, d. ovt iirl yrjs, oti& virb 777s. Her. 7, 111. rb 
fiavTifiov tovto ian iirl tS>v ov pitav r S>v vi\>r\XoT ctr wv, 6, 129. iirl 
rrjs r pairi^ys opx^o.To [danced upon the table). 2, 35. ra &x& ea °' L V L * V 
&v5pes iirl twv KecpaXeuv (popeovat, at 8e yvvaiices iirl ra>v &fxaiv. X. 
An. 4. 3, 28. aevocpouv ire/j.\pas 'dyyeXov /ceAeuei (avrovs) avrov fxeivai iirl tov 
Trora/JLOv (at, near the river), (b) Th. 1, 116. ir\e?v iirl ~2d/xov (to sail for 
Sainos). X. Cy. 7. 2, 1. iirl Zdpdeav (pevyeiv. Dem. Phil. 3. 123, 48. ava- 
X<^pe?u i.lr' otnov (to return homewards). (2) Hex - . 6,98. iirl Aapeiov iyev- 
6to 7rA.e'« KaKOLTfj 'EWdSi (in the time of, during the reign of Darius). X. Cy. 1. 
6, 31. 67rt rav 7) fx er e pcau it poy ovuv. So iir" ifxov, i <p* tj/xwi/, i(p' 
v ix wv (mea, nostra, vestra memoria, in, within my memory, etc.). The Gen. often 
stands in connection with a participle, but always with the present; hence iirl 
often denotes the duration of time, &.g. iirl Kvpov fSaa i\evovT s (during 
the reign of Cyrus). (3) (a) Aeyeiv iirl SiKao'Twv, iirl /xaprvpuv (before, 
in the presence of properly, resting or leaning upon). Dem. Cor. iirco/j.6aavro 
iirl tu>v <tt pa.T'nywv (took an oath in the presence of the generals). Similar to 
the preceding is, Her. 9, 11. eiirav iir' opuov (said on oath, quasi substrato vel 
supposito jurejurando, leaning or resting on the oath), (b) Ka\e?oSai. iiri tivos 
(to be called after one). Her. 7, 40. Nicraloi. KaXeovTai. 'Itttvol iirl rovSe (fortius 
reason). 74. iirl Avdov t ov *At vo s eaxov T> *\ v iirccvv/xinv. T^v iiruivvfxiav 
iroieioSai iirl tivos (to be called, to take a surname from one). 'E</>' eavrov (of 
one's own accord, sua sponte) ; iirl irpocpdaecos (simulations, under pretext). Aeyeiv 
iirl tlvos (dicere de aliqua re). PL Charm. 155, d. iirl tov ica\ov \tyuv 
iraih6s. (c) ZvTetv ti iirl tivos, Kpiveiv ti iiri tivos, CKOireiv ti eiri ti- 
vos, \4yeiv ti iirl tivos, eVt8e7|cu ti iiri tivos, etc. (to judge something accord- 
ing to a thing or person, as it were resting upon). PI. Rp. 597, b. fiovAei ovv, ecpnv, 
iir' avTcav tovtoov tov p.ip.r)TT}v tovtov ^TjT^o-wfxev, t'ls ttot io~Tiv ; (visne, ad 
haec ipsa imitatorem istum exiga?nus?) (d) 'E <p' iavTov, iavTav, T)p.S>v au- 
ra) v, i avrrjs (by one's self, separately, of one's own accord, properly, resting or 
depending on one's self, independent of others). X. An. 2. 4. 10. of'EAA-nves 
vcpopwvTes robs fiapfidpovs avTol e </>' iavTuv ix&povv 7jye/j.6vas exovTes (marched 
by themselves). Her. 5, 98. olicsovTas tijs ^pvyivs x^P^ v Te Kdl Kd>pnnv in iav- 
twv (by themselves). 4, 114. o'lKeufxev in rj/xicov avT&v. Here seems to 
belong the phrase so frequently found in the Attic historians: 'E(p' iv6s, 
iirl Tptwv, t (-TTapcav TtTdx&ai, GTr\va\., one, two, three men deep or in file, 
properly to be placed or stand on one, the row resting or leaning on one, 
etc.). Dem. Phil. 1.42,7. av Kal vp.e?s iirl t r, s t oiavTvs i&e\r)arrjTe yev- 
cofrcci yv<ap.ins (firmiter adhaerere huic rationi). 9. (QlKnriros) oi>x o16s t io-riv, 



§296.] prepositions. — Ettl. 439 

%X WV a KaTto-TpairTcu, fiiveiv iirl tovtcov {cannot remain with, satisfied with 
those things which he has conquered). Phil. 2. 66, 3. KwXixraiT av £k<hvov irpdr- 
reiv ravra, e<?>' a>v icrri vvv (quibus nunc studet). So fxei/eiv iirl avoias. (e) 
Dem. Cor. 230, 17. cure SiKaieos, ovt itf aArj&eias ovSe/xias elp-nfieva 
(stated neither with justice nor in adherence to the truth, as it were, resting on 
truth), (f) Her. 5, 109. 4-k ov erax&T^ej/ (cui rei praefecti sumus). Dem. Cor. 
266, 118. iirl rov & e apiicov Karaa-ra^ds (placed over the theatre-money). 
Hence ai iirl ruv irpay/xdrwy (those placed over business, those at the head of 
affairs). 

II. With the Dat, (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the 
tarrying or resting upon, or (b) more frequently, at, by or near a 
place or object ; — (2) of time (mostly only poetic) ; — (3) in a 
causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote dependence : penes, 
in the poiver of; — (b) a condition under which something takes 
place ; (c) the purpose, design, or determination ; (d) the goal or 
limit ; (e) the reason, with verbs expressing an affection of the 
mind (§ 285, Rem. 1). 

(1) (a) Th. 1, 56. (TloT&auaTcu) o\kovo~iv i-wl t$ 'lo'^ficp rrjs UaW-frr]?. X. 
An. 7. 4, 4. Oi Qpaites ras aXcoireKiSas in I reus K€(paXa?s (popovffi Kal toTs 
w <T (, Kal (eipas fj-expl tuiv irodcov iirl roiu '{ttttoov %xovo~iv, wear fox-skin caps on 
their heads and ears, and have cloaks reaching to their feet when upon their horses 
(iirl with the Dat. purely local; but iirl rwv 'lirirwv, inasmuch as the horses are 
considered as active), (b) Her. 7, 89. oi QoiviKes rb iraXaibv titneou iirl rrj 
'Epvfrprj &a\do-(rr) (upon, by). So also where one thing is said to be along 
with anothei*, or in addition to it, e. g. io~&leiv iirl t<3 o-'itoo otyov (to eat the 
oipou with bread); iirl t<$ a ir (a irluziv (to drink with one's food); iirl t 77 kv- 
Xiki qSeiv (to sing over one's cups). Hence, iirl tovtois (upon, in addition 
to this, i. e. besides) ; finally it is also used to denote a succession of things in 
time and space. Od. tj, 120. oyxvn eir' oyx "V ynpdo-K^i (pear on pear). X. 
Cy. 2. 3, 7. aveo-Tr) iir avT<$ QepavAas (after him). $6vos lv\ <p6v<a (murder 
upon murder), Eur. (2) 'Eirl vvktI (II. &, 529), in, during the night, comp. 
§ 283, 3, (b). (3) (a) Dem. Chers, 90, 2. e^' vp.?u icm (tovtovs) Ko\d(eu/ 
(penes vos, it is in your power, etc. ). (b) 'E ir I r ovt co, iir' obdzvi (hac, nulla 
conditione, nullo pacto, on this condition, etc.). Her. 3, 83. 6 7ri rovrqs xnr^iaTa- 
ixai rrjs apxvs,eir wre vir ovSeubs v/xewv ap^ofxai. Hence of price, e. g. iirl 
fiio~&<p (on condition of for, a reward); iirl /j.eyd\ots tokois Savei&a&ai 
(to borrow on high interest); iirl tvoctw (at what price) . (c) Her. 1, 68. iirl ko.k<p 
av&pcbTrov o-iSvpos avevprjTai (in perniciem hominis). So e7rl tovtm (hoc con- 
silio, for this purpose, with this design). X. S. 1,5. UpcoTayopa. iroXv apyvpiov 
SedwKas iirl o-o<pia (ad discendam sapientiam). PI. Ap. 20, e. xpevBeTal re 
Kal e7r} diaPoAfj tj? ifxrj \eyei. Hence 01 iirl rals /xr)xaua?s (those 
placed over the machines) ; oi iirl to7s it pay fx. a cri (those intrusted with business)^ 
iirl t<£ ^eoopiK(f &v (charged with the money for the public shows). Dem. Cor. 



440 syntax. [$ 297. 

264, 113. (d) Aeyeiv ini rivi {to pronounce a eulogy on one); vS/xovs &4<r&at 
c7ri tip i (for). And so op o/xd^Lu or K<zXe7v ri eiri tivi (nomen alicui impo- 
nere, to call a person or thing something). PL Ep. 470, b. iirl /xev rrj rod oiiceiov 
€X&pa o-rdo-is KSKXrirai, e7rl Se rfj tou aXXoTpiov ir6Xe/xos (to hostility at home, 
the name insurrection was given, i. e. hostility at home was called insurrection, that 
abroad, war). Also, against, in a hostile sense. Her. 6, 88. to irav jx-nxavrio-a- 
abai e7r 5 Alyivf)Tr)(ri (against the Aeginetans). Th. 1, 102. ttjv yzvo\x£vr\v 
4tt\ t<$ M^Soj ^vjxjxaxi-o-v. (e) TeXav, /xeya cppovelv, fiaivea^ai, ayavaKTeip, etc. 
iirl tivi (to laugh at, be greatly elated at, etc.). 

III. With the Ace, (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote the 
local limit, the direction or motion to or upon a place or object; 
(b) extension over an object: over, upon; — (2) of time : (a) to 
denote the temporal limit (up to, till), also the limit of quantity 
(about) ; (b) extension over a period of time (during) ; — (3) in 
a causal and figurative sense: (a) to denote purpose, design; 
(b) conformity, manner ; (c) in respect to. 

(1) (a) 'Avafiaiveiv eft 'iirirov, eirl Sp6vov. PI. Crit. 112, e. (ol 'A&nvcuoi) 
iirl it a <r a v Ev pcoirrjv Kal 'A a i a v k<xt& re acc/xaToov KaXXr) ical kclto, ttjv twv 
ipvx^y nravToiav apeT^v eXXSyi/xoi §ffav (over all Europe, etc.). 'Eirl 8e£id, in 
apicrT epd (upon the right, left, to the right, left). (2) (a) 5 E<£>' effirepav (until 
evening); (b) eir\ iroXXas 7j/xepas, eft rijxepav. Th. 4, 1. to "P-hyiov eirl 
ttoXvv xP^vov io-Tacriafe ( for a long time) . 94. ot oirXlTai iirl oktw nav to 
o~TpaT6iredov eTa^avTO (by eights, eight in file). 'EttI fxiya, iroXv, irXeov, /J.e?Cov, 
fiaXXov, jxaKpov, eirl t6o-ov, eft ocrov (greatly, especially, much rather, etc.). Terc£%- 
Sai iirl noXXovs (many in file). (3) (a) Her. 1.37. eirl &r)pav Uvcu (venatum 
ire). 3, 14. e7rl vdaip Uvcu (aquatum ire). Hence e7rt t'i; wherefore? In a 
hostile sense, e. g. crTpaTevecrfrai eirl Avdovs (upon, against the Lydians) ; eXav- 
veiv iirl Tlep eras; (b) e7r' Icra (equally, in the same way). Her. 3, 71. rfyv 
eTrixeiprjo-iv TavTTjv jxt) ovtco o-vvTaxvve afiofaws, a XX* iwl to (X w (p po veffT epov 
avTrjv Xdjxfiave (more according to reflection, more considerately), (c) PI. Pp. 370, 
b. dia(pepct)v eirl irpa^iv. Tb eV i/j.4 (quod ad me attinet). 



$ 297. (3) Ilapd, by, near. 

Hapd denotes nearness to something : by the side of, by, near. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a ]ocal relation with verbs of going 
and coming, to denote a removal from near a person (Poet., 
also from near a thing) ; — (2) in a causal sense, to denote the 
author. 

(1) 'EXSelv ivapd t ivos, like the French de chez quelqu'un (from near some 
one, from some one). (2) (a) yet almost purely local: Her. 8. 140. ayyeXi-n 5}«et 



$297.] PREPOSITIONS. — Hapd. 441 

ir a pa fiao~ i\r\os (comes from the king, with the accompanying idea that it was 
done by his direction). So Trapa is regularly used of ambassadors, e. g. &yye\oi, 
Trpeo-ffeis Trapd tivos, ayyiXKeiv Trapd tivos, ra Trapd tlvos (the commis- 
sion, command, etc., from any one) ; (b) with passive verbs (see § 251, Rem. 4) ; 
(c) with verbs of learning and hearing, e. g. fiav&dveiv Trapd twos, attovziv irapd 
tlvos; (d) Hap" eavTov, kavTuv (sua sponte, of one's own accord); (e) with 
verbs of giving and the like, e. g. Trap' kavTov didovat. (from himself, i. e. from 
his own resources). 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote chvelling 
or rest near a person (Poet, also near a thing) ; — (2) in a causal 
or figurative sense, to denote the possessor ; then also in relation 
to the judgment or opinion of a person. 

(1) "EffTr] Trapa. t $ fiao~t\e?. (2) IIoAAa xPVP-^Ta napa t<£ PacriXe? 
i)v. Her. 3, 160. Trapa. Aapeitv Kpnr} (judice Dario, in the opinion of). 1, 
32. -nap i/j.oi (meo judicio, in my opinion). 86. tovs irapa o~<pi(ri avToTcri 
doniovTas ohfSlovs. Dem. 01. 1. 18, 3. toctovtco &avfxao~TOTepos Trapa irao'i po- 
{Ai^eTai (6 &i\nrTros). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a 
direction or motion to a person so as to come beside or near 
(Poet., also of a thing) ; (b) a direction or motion near a place 
and by or beyond it : along, along by, by, beyond ; (c) extension 
near a place or object {along, per), generally to denote indefi- 
nite nearness (by) ; — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
(during) ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote 
dependence, the possessor (penes) ; (b) a comparison and estima- 
tion ; hence (c) conformity, with verbs of considering, showing, 
and the like ; (d) a reason or cause (wholly like pro2?ter, by vir- 
tue of, on account of). 

(1 ) (a) Her. 1, 36. 2oAa>y is Puyvirrov airiKeTO Trap a "A fid a- 1 v koL $)? Ka\ is 
idpVis irapa. Kpo7crov. (b) riapa ttju BafivXwva irapiivai (along, near, 
by Babylon). From this have originated various ethical expressions, e. g. irapa 
fioipav (near fate and by it, i. e. against, contrary to fate) ; irapa do£av (praeter opin- 
ionem, contrary to expectation) ; trap i\irida, irapa (pvaiv, irapa to dinaiov, irapa tovs 
opKovs, irapa Uvafiiv. (It is the opposite of wrara, e. g. «rara fxolpav, Svvafxiv, ac- 
cording to.) Hence it has also the signification of besides, praeter, e. g. irapa 
Tavra ( praeter haec) ; (c) Her. 9, 15. Trapa tov 'AacoTr6u (along the Asopus). 
Dem. 01. 1. 24, 22. i) tvxv trapa irdvT iffri Tct twj- av&pwirwv irpdypaTa 
(per omnes res dominatur). Her. 4, 87. ovtos KaTeAei<p&i7 Trapa tov vr\6v 
(near). ^T^vat irapd Tiva (and Trapa tivl). (2) Uap yuepav, irapa 
tov v6\€ ft ov (during);, Trap a t) ]V tt6o-iv (inter potandum, while drinking). 
So also of single points of time, during which something takes place, e. g. 



442 syntax. [$ 298- 

irap' abrbv rbv Kivdvvov (in ipso discriminis tempore, in the very moment of 
danger). (3) (a) Isocr. Archid. 126. wfxoXoyeTro irapa tovtov ysvia&ai ttjv 
ownpiav avrdis (constabat, in hoc iis positam esse salutem, that their safety depended 
on him). Her. 8, 140. irvv&dvecrSe tt]u vvv irap i/xe iovaav dvvajj.iv (is in my 
power, with me), (b) Her. 7, 20. usre /xt)T6 top Aapeiov (o~t6\ov) rbv irrl liKv&as 
irapa, tovtov (sc. rbv cttoXov) fxijShv (paivtoSrai (in comparison with this). So 
irap' bxiyov irouuoSrai ti (to make of little account). Ylap bxiyov, iraph. 
fiiicpov, Ppax v i nearly, almost, irapa iroXv, by far, Trap ovdev Ti&ea&ai, 
(to make no account of) ; after comparatives and expressions implying compari- 
son, as &XXos, %repos, Sid(popos. Til. 1, 23. r)Xlov inXetyeis ttvkv6t e pai irapa 
to. e/c tov irplv xpovov /j-vn^ovevS/ieva (more frequent in comparison with those men- 
tioned informer times). PI. Phaed. 93, a. ovSe fxi)v iroie?v ti, ovSe ti irdo~x eiv dXXo 
irap" a fa> iiteiva r\ iroir) v) irdo-xV- Hence of alternations: rjfxipa irap' r)ix4pav 
(one day in distinction from another, day by day, every other day, alter nis diebus, also 
icap TJ/xepav alone). Often with the accompanying idea of preference, prae, 
praeter. X. C 1. 4, 14. irapa. to, &XXa C^«> ^sirep beoi, ol av&punroi jSiotcu- 
ovo~i (in comparison with, beyond^ other animals), (c) 'Opw, o-kottw ti irap' &XXo 
t i (to consider something in conformity with another thing, in comparison with it, 
properly, holding it near to something). Dem. Aph. 1.824,34. irapa rbv Xo- 
yov, ov aTro(p4povcriv, imdei^w (in conformity with, properly, holding an object near 
to another.) (d) Dem.1.43,14. ouSe $iXnriros irapa. ttjv avrov p do /u.7] v roaov' 
tov eirev^nTai, oaov irapa ttjv r) fxeT e p av ajji.4Xet.av (on account of his own 
strength). So irapa tovto, propter ea, irap" 6, quapropter. 



$ 298. (4) Up 6s, before. 

IIpos (formed from 7rpo), denotes before, in the presence of. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote a direction 
or motion from the presence of an object, especially from the 
situation of a place ; — (2) in a causal relation, to denote an 
active person, as it were an outgoing from the presence of a 
person exercising power, or of an object considered as a person, 
(a) of derivation; (b) of a . person or thing to whom or which 
something belongs {quality, peculiarity) [$ 273, 2, (c) (a)] ; (c) 
of the author or cause. 

(1) Her. 3, 101. oIk4ovvi irpbs v6tov avepov (toward the south, properly 
from the south). Comp. a meridie instead of ad meridiem. 107. irpbs /j,eo"n fi- 
f$pi-ns 'Apa/3t7j io~ri (lies towards the south). X. An. 2. 2, 4. eirea&e ra r)yov^ii- 
vu>, tol fx.€V virofyyia exovres irpbs tov iroTafj.ov (towards, on). (2) (a) irpbs 
iraT pos, irpbs fir]Tp6s (on the father's or mother's side), (b) Upbs yvvaiic6s 
io-Tt (it is the manner of women) ; irpbs S'iktis io-riv (it is conformable to justice). 
X. An. 1. 2, 11. ovk r)v irpbs tov Kvpov Tp6irov, ex ovra hh airodiSovat (was 
not in accordance with the custom of Cyrus). Antiph. 2. 121, 2. y) jjl\v 86%a twv 



$298.] prepositions. — Ilpog. 443 

irpax&zvTav irpbs twv Keyeiv Ovvafievoiv i&riv, tj 5e a\7)Sreta irphs tcov 
SUaia teal offia irpaffffSi/roov. Also, elvai irpSs tivos (to stand or be on the 
side of one). Th. 4. 92. xph Tn<nevff(u>Ta.s ra &6$ irpbs rj^uv €(re<r&cu, 6/j.6ffe 
X&pTJ(Tcu to?s irote/jiiois (trusting in God that he will be on our side). Hence PI. 
Hipp. 1, 285, b. 8o/ce*V fxoi rbv \6yov irpbs i/j.ov Xiyeiv (for my advantage). 
(c) to receive, to have something from some one, then with passive verbs (§ 251, 
Rem. 4), intransitive (§ 249, 3), and in phrases of a passive sense. Her. 2, 139. 
KaKov tl irpbs frewv ?j irpbs av&p uinav \a/u.fidvet.v. X. An. 7. 6, 33. ex a > J/ 
eircuvov iroXvv irpbs vfxuv atreiropev6(x.r]v (having much praise from you). Her. 
1, 61. aTi/j.d£eff£rcu irpbs Tie iff iffr par o v. X. An. 1. 9, 20. <pi\ovs bixoKoyelrai 
Kvpos irpbs irdvTcov Kparicrros 8t] yevevSai frepaireveiu (is admitted by all). Oec. 

4, 2. at PavavffiKal KaXov/xeuai ado^ovurai irpbs r S>v ir6\ewv (are held in no esteem 
by the cities). Her. 1,73. Taura irpbs Kva^dp e<a ira&6vTes (from Cyaxeres). 7, 

5. ffrpaT-qXaTee iir\ ras 'A^rjvas, 'iva \6yos ere %XV Tpbs av& pc&ir wv aya&os 
(ut lauderis ab hominibus, as it were, in the presence of men). With forms of swear- 
ing and protestation, e. g. irpbs &ewv (per decs, properly, before the gods). 

II. With the Dat, to denote divetting or rest near or by an 
object; also of being busily engaged in or ivith a thing; finally, 
in the sense of besides, in addition to {praeter). 

Th. 2, 79. is fjidxv^ KaSriiXTavTaL oi ' 'hSrnvaioi irpbs avrfj tt? ir6\ei. Ehai, 
yiyveaStcu irpbs irpdyfxaffi Ilpbs toutoj, irpbs tovtols (praeter ea). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) of the situation 
of a place : towards [where the Gen. also may be used, see No. I, 
(1)] ; (b) of the direction to persons, or things considered as 
persons, sometimes also to places, both in a friendly and in 
hostile relation; (c) of extension; — (2) to denote time indefi- 
nitely ; — (3) causal and figurative : (a) to denote the purpose 
or object ; (b) conformity ; hence (c) the reason or cause {prop- 
ter) ; (d) a comparison, for the most part with the accompanying- 
idea of superiority ox preference (prae, praeter); (e) in respect to. 

(1) (a) Tlpbs /xeffrip.ppiav, irpbs effirepav (towards). Th. 2, 55. (77777) 
irpbs Yle\oir6vvnffov opa.. (b) X. An. 5. 7, 20. epxovrai irpbs i]fj.as (to 
us, properly, come before us). 7. 6, 6. v/xas irpcol 'd^ojxev ir pb s ain ov s. 5. 4, 5. 
diaffw&rji'ai &ov\6(jL&a irpbs tt)v C E A A a 5 a (i. e. irpbs robs "E\Kr]vas, to go in safety 
to Greece). Aeyeiv, ayopeveiv, i£eT&(etv ti irpos riva (to speak before, to one)] 
ffirovb'ds, o-vfifiaxiav iroieiff&cu irp6s riva (with one); /j.dxeff&ai, iro\efxe7u irpos 
riua (against one). These phrases everywhere imply the meaning to come 
into the presence of before the face of any one ; also, \oyi(e<rSca, ffnetyaffbai, ffico- 
ire'iu, eV&u/ieio-a-cu irpbs eavrov (secum reputare) ; likewise, (^wKpar^s t» 
irpbs xttpuva koL Sepos Kaiirduras ivovovs KapTepiKcararos (against), 
X. C. 1. 2, 1. (c) ^.vKpdr-ns ye nal irpbs tovs &X\ovs av&pcairovs tUfffiov 



444 syntax. [$ 299. 

T77 itSxgl 7rape?x 6 (among other men, etc. the preposition here extending the idea) 
ibid. 61. (2) n pbs y\fx.epav [towards daybreak). (3) (a) Dem. Phil. 2. 71, 
23. iravroSaira. evpr]/j.€va ra?s ir6Xeo'i irpbs (pvXaKrjv Kal awr-npiav (for a guard, 
etc.); (b) Her. 1, 38. irpbs r^v otyiv ravrrjv rbv yd/xov rovrov ecnrevaa (in 
accordance with this view). So Kpiveiv ri irpos r i, Xeyeiv irpbs x&P lv -> '"'pbs 
rb 7]S6, irpbs rb ay afro v. Also, irpbs fiiav (violently, against the will), 
irpbs avdyKi)v, irpbs rjSov'hv, irpbs an pi fie lav (accurately, in conformity 
with accuracy, etc.). (c) n pbs ravra (properly, in accordance with this, hence 
for this reason, therefore), (d) X. 3. 5, 4. fj rcov'Afrrjvaioov S6£a (reraireivwrai) 
irpbs robs Boiarovs (in comparison with the renown of the Boeotians). So 
also to denote an exchange, e. g. PI. Phaed. 69, a. rjdovas irpbs rjSovhs koI 
Xviras irpbs Xviras Kal cp6fiov irpbs (p6ftov KaraXXarrecfrai, real peifa irpbs 
iX arret), fcsirep vop.icrfx.ar a (to exchange pleasures for pleasures, etc.) . (e) 1,ko- 
ireiv, fiXeireiv irp6s ri (to consider with respect to something); Siacpepeiv irpbs 
aperyv, KaXbs irpbs dp6fj.ov, irpbs iraX'nv, reXeos irpbs aper-ftv. 



§ 299. (5) e Y7ro, sub, under. 

I. With, the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a mo- 
tion out from a lower place : forth from under, away from under 
(more obvious in the Horn. W/c with Gen.) ; (b) to denote a 
quiet rest under an object (§ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal and 
figurative sense : (a) to denote the author with passive and in- 
transitive verbs (§ 254, Eem. 4); (b) an outward or inward 
(mental) occasion, influence; (c) a mere instrumental cause, 
means, manner. 

(1) (a) Od. i, 140. avrap eirl icparbs Xipevos peei ayXabv vScop, KpJjwn virb 
o-rreiovs (from under the grotto). t\, 5. virb air-fivns Xveiv 'lirirovs (from under 
the chariot). X. An. 6.4,25. (aevocpuv) Xafiwv fiovv virb afj.d£rjs o-cpayiacrdfj.- 
evos i{io-f}&€i. (b) II. &, 13. eXd>v fiiv ptyoe is Taprapov . . .rjxi fid&iarov inrb 
X&ov6s io-n pepe&pov (under the earth). 'Tirb yrjs oIk<Tlv. (2) (a) Krdvecr- 
frai vir6 rivos, airo&ave7v iir6 rivos (to be slain by one), (b) X. An. 5. 1, 
15. Ae^Liriros aire&avev virb N iKavdp ov. 7. 7,23. jxiya fx,oi 5o/ce? eu aKoveiv 
virb avfrpcaircov (to hear himself well spoken of by men). 3. 4, 11. airwXeo-av 
r)jv apxV v^rb Hepo-wv MrjSoi. (lost the government by the Persians = spoliati 
sunt imperio a P.). 7. 2, 22. alriav ex« vtto rivos (= accusor ab aliquo). Her. 

0, 104. virb rod Kav/xaros oi /j-vp^Kes a<pav4zs yivovrai virb y%v (under the in- 
fluence of the heat, on account of the heat). Th. 2, 85. virb ave/xoov Kal virb 
airXoias evSierprtyev ovk bxiyov %p6vov (on account of the winds, etc.). 'Tit* 
avdyK7)s (from necessity). 'Tirb /xefrr] s fiaiveafrai, Tl. 'Tirbpiyovs. Her. 

1, 85. virb Seovs Kal KaKov (puv^v epp-q^e (spoke from fear and grief ). So 
virb x a P&s, (p&ovov, opyrjs, aireipias, a coepp oav vns, acppoavvif s, etc. 
(c) Her. 7, 21. tbpvffffov virb fiaffriycav (dug under the lash, that being the 



$300.] prepositions. — c Ytto. 445 

means) ; also of persons : 9, 98. virb ktjpvkos irpowySpeve (under the help of the 
herald, i. e. praeconis voce) ; particularly of the accompaniment of musical in- 
struments, e. g. Her. 1, 17. io-TparzveTO virb <r a Kiriyy co v. So vir' avAov 
Xopeveiv, virb <po p/xiyy cov, virb rvfAirdvcov, etc. 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote a quiet 
rest under an object ; — (2) causal and figurative : (a) to denote 
the author (almost exclusively poetic, see $251, Kern. 4) ; (b) 
to denote the means, as with the Gen., but only Poet. ; (c) to 
denote subjection. 

(1) 'Tirb yfj thai] with mountains, at the foot of, e. g. virb Tfj.w\<a (at the 
foot of Tmolus). 'Tirb r <2 'T p.r\ <t ay. (2) (a) Aa/mriuai vi?6 tivi, iriirTeiv 
vir6 rivi (to be conquered by one, etc.), Horn, (b) 'Tirb fiap&ira) x°P* velv i 
vir' ai>\<2, etc. (to dance to or by the music of the lyre), (c) lioielu ri vir 6 rivi 
(to subject something to one), send iroie?(r&ai ti ixp' I aura? (to subject something to 
one's self, sibi subjicere). Her. 7, 157. rrju 'EAAaSa vir' ewvrcp ivoi4)o-a<rSai. Th. 
1, 110. htyviTTos virb j8 a a i A eT iyeuero (tvas under the power of the king). X. 
Cy. 8. 8, 1. Kvpos robs v<p' kavrw &sirep kavTOv iraidas irl^a (those subject to 
him). 

Ill With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote the 
aim, direction or motion toivards and under ; (b) extension under 
an object; — (2) of time : (a) in an indefinite specification of 
time (approach to a point of time) ; (b) extension in time 
(during) ; — (3) causal, to denote subjection. 

(1) (a) 'Uvea virb yr\v (to go under). X. An. 1. 10, 14. virb avrbv (rbv 
\6<pov) (TT-fjcras rb arpdrevp.a ire/j.irei Avkiov. (b) Her. 2, 127. vireaTi. oi/c^/xaTa 
virb yrjv (are under the earth). 5. 10. ret, virb t\]v 'dptcrov aoUvra So/ceet 
etVat (the parts beneath the north pole). X. An. 7. 4, 5. kv reus virb rb opos kc&- 
ficus. (2) (a) 'Tirb vvKTa (sub noctem, towards); virb r)f\v irpcoTijv iire\- 
frovcrav viucra] so also inr6 ti (aliquatenus, in some measure), (b) Her. 9, 51. 
virb t^v vvKTa (during). (3) X. Cy. 1. 5, 3. (6 'Acravplcov (SaaiAevs) diaire/M- 
7rei irpos Te rovs v <p' eavrbv irdvras, Kal irpbs Kpolcrov. 6.2, 11. 6 avWoyos 
twv virb fiaff iXea fiapfidpuv. 



$ 300. Remarks on Peculiarities in the use of the 
Prepositions. 

1. The proper prepositions were originally (except ou, to) adverbs of place 
(§ 286, Rem. 2), i. e they denote the local relation of an action ; in this way 
nearly all are very often used in the Homeric language. This use is also fre- 
quent in Herodotus, but in good Attic prose, only irpbs 5e, koL irp6s, praeterea 

38 



446 



SYNTAX. 



[$ 300. 



Od. £ 40. iroXXbv yap airb irXvvoi elcri iroXrjos. i, 116 — 118. u?]<ros — rerd- 
vvcttcli vXijearcr, e v 8' cu7es aireipeaiat yeydacriv dypiai. Also in Her., e. g. 3, 39 
ev 8e 8)? /ml Aefffiiovs eTXe (among them, i. e. iritis). II. <r, 562. jxeXaves 8' ay^ 
fiSrpves fjcrav (grapes were thereon). Od. i, 184. 7repl 8' «vA'/} u-tyr\X)) 8e8}j.r,To /m- 
ra>pvx^(T(TL Xi&oLaiv. a, 66. fcs 7r e/> I ^.ez/ vcW earl fipoTWf (he is beyond, i. e. eminent 
above). fr, 44. r<p yap pa &ebs ire pi d&Kev aoiS-nu (in a special manner, especially). 
II. <r, 529. KTeivov 8' eirl /j.r)Xo/3orripas (in addition, besides). Also not rave in 
Her., eirl 8 e (thereupon, turn)] per a 8e ( postea), Her.; irpos 76, irpbs Se 
very common from Homer downward, also in Attic poetry and prose. 

Remark 1. Sometimes two prepositions stand together in poetry, most fre- 
quently in Epic, the first of which always has an adverbial meaning, but the sec~ 
ond may be connected as a preposition with the Case of a substantive. Aia. ir p 6 
{through and out) : II. p, 393. rdvvrai Se re ira<ra (fioeirj) dia. irpo. 'Afityl ire pi 
{round about). Od. A, 608. ap.<p\ irep] ar^eaaiv. 11. <p, 10. 0x^0.1 8' d/mcpl 
irepl ixeyaK' laxov. /3, 305. a/j.<pl irepl Kprjwnv. TlapeK (with the Gen. near 
to, with the Ace. near by. along by), e. g. Od. t, 116. it ape k Xifxevos. /a, 276. 
oi\\a 7rape£ r^v vrjcrov eXavvere vr\a fxeXaiuav. Hape£ (as a Paroxytone) often 
in Her. with the meaning besides, e. g. 3, 91. irdpe£ rod apyvpiov. 'TireK 
{from under, out from under), in Homer; also Her. 3, 116. Xeyerai inreK twp 
ypvKcov aprrd^eiv ApifxauiTovs (sc. rbu x? v(T ov). 'Air oirpb (pepeiv, II. it, 669, 679. 
Tie pi ir pb. II. A, 180. irepl irpb yap eyx^'i &vev (around and before) . • 

Rem. 2. Also the improper prepositions eveita and xapiv, though very 
seldom, are connected with the proper prepositions, as in Eng. on account of, for 
the sake of, airb &ot)s evena (for the cry 's sake). Lys. Evandr. 793. irepl rw» 
ev oXiyapx'ia ap^dvrav e v e k e v . 

2. Since prepositions in composition retain their original meaning as ad- 
verbs of place, and as the older language habitually uses the prepositions as 
adverbs of place, it follows of coui-se, that the ancient language often employs 
the simples, and separates the preposition' as an adverb from the verb, where 
the Attic writers regularly use the compounds. The two following instances 
must be distinguished : — 

(a) Tliose instances where the preposition is separated from the verb. II. y, 34. 
v ir 6 re rpSjxos e XX a fie yv7a. y, 135. irapa 8' eyx^a jxaKpa ir eir-ny ev. 8, 
63. eirl 8' e^ovrai Seol aXXoi. 8, 161. e/c re Kal dipe reXe7. iS", 108. ous 
{'{irirovs) 7tot' air Alveiav eXojxinv (eXeaSai rivd ri, II. ir, 56). 

Rem. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged mode of expression, where 
several sentences follow each other, which consists in using the compound, 
which should stand in each sentence, only in the first,\vhile in the others 
the preposition merely is repeated, e. g. II. i|/, 799. Kara fxeu 8oXlxo<tkiov eyxos 
&rjK is ay£>va (pepwu, Kara. 8' aairida Kal rpvtyaXeiav. Often also in Her., 
e. g. 8.33. Kara /meu eKavcrav Apv/j.bv irSXiv, Kara. 8e XapdSp-qv (where, how- 
ever, the first may be taken as Tmesis. See Rem. 4). 

Rem. 4. In the later periods of the language, and particularly in the Attic 
writers, the prepositions are so closelyuconnected with the verbs, that both 
m'ngle and form one whole. It is only from this time that there is what may 
be properly called Tmesis, i. e. the separation of a verb, by means of one or 
more intervening words, from the preposition in connection with which it forms 
one whole or one idea. The Tmesis of compound verbs is found somewhat 
often in Her. ; also in Pindar, and in other poets, seldom in the Attic poets in 
the lyric choral songs, and still more seldom in the dialogue ; but when it does 
occur, only a particle comes between the two parts of a word, so that the unity 



$ 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PEEPOSITIONS. 447 

of the idea is not destroyed. Her. 7, 15. "Eep^s avd re eSpa/ue e« rrjs ko(tt]$ 
nal Tre/xiret dyyeXov. 8, 89. airb p.ev e&ave 6 arpa-rt]y6s. Eur. Iph. Aul 1365. 
Si tip 6\cb\ap.e v. The Attic prose remains free from this license, with a few 
special exceptions, e. g. Th. 3, 13 p.)] |u v Kaxws iroie7v avrovs /xer 'Ab-nvaiwv, 
aWa £vveAev&epovv (so as to make the contrast emphatic). PI. Gorg. 520, e. 
avr' ev Troie7v and el ev iroi-fjcras to.vtt)v tt)v evepyeaiav avr' e5 rreiaerat. 
PL Phaedr. 237, a. I>vfj. fxoi Aa/3e<r&e tov /xvdov (take part). 

(h) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the Case of its sub- 
stantive. Here also, throughout Homer, the preposition exhibits its original 
adverbial meaning, and belongs to the verb ; the verb and the adverbial prepo- 
sition together, form one verbal idea, and this, not the preposition alone, gov- 
erns the Case. II. e, 292. rov 8' airb /xev yXaxraav rape (Gen. of separation). 
i, 382. ir\e7<rra 86/m.ois iv KT-f]fx.ara Kelrat (lies within the house), o, 266. a/xcpl 
Se x°" Tai &p-ois al'aaovrai, on the shoulders about (local Dative), ir, 291. iv 
yap ndrpoKXos <p6fiov r\K.ev 'dirairiv, he cast fear into all (Dat. of limit or aim, 
§ 284, Rem. 1). So the Ace. denoting local aim or object (§ 277). II. &, 115. 
T& 8' els ajKporepw Ato/xriSeos 'dp holt a {St\tt)v (entered the chariot). Ace. of the 
object receiving an action (§ 279): II. j8, 156. 'A 3- 77 v a i 77 v "Hprj irpbs p.v&ov 
eenrev (addressed, spoke to Athene). 

Rem. 5. In the second case (b), a Tmesis is admitted only when mere par- 
ticles, like fxr\u, Se, re, pd, ydp, txp\ 8' &pa, come between the preposition and the 
Case of the substantive, — a very frequent usage of the post-Homeric period, 
and even in the Attic writers. Comp. Rem. 4. 

3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, particularly" of the Homeric language., 
that it often connects pi*epositions followed by the Dat., with verbs which ex- 
press the direction whither ; and. on the other hand, prepositions followed by 
the Ace, with verbs whose signification presupposes a quiet resting in a place 
or object. This construction arises from a blending of two ideas, since the 
speaker either conceives and expresses, along with the moment of motion, the 
moment of the rest which succeeds ; or along with the moment of rest, the moment 
of motion which precedes. Hence this may be called the pregnant Construction. 

(a) The verb of motion involves the idea of the rest ivhich succeeds, when preposi- 
tions with the Dat. stand instead of prepositions with the Ace. The moment of 
rest (the relation to the continuing result of the action) must then be regarded 
as the predominant one. The principle above stated holds with the following 
prepositions : — 

With ev, particularly in the Epic language. II. e, 370. 7] 8 s ev yovva<ri 
it i ir re Aidovris 8? " AcppoSir-n (she fell on her knees, and then lay on her knees). Od. 
a, 200. iyiio p-avrevcrofiai, ws ivl &V/J.W aSdvaroi fi dWova 1, II. K, 743. 
tfpnre 8' ev Kovir\a iv ( fell into the dust and lay there). In prose, n&e v at 
ev x € P <r ' LV like the Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. first: 
is Se To"}\paiov Kare<pvyov, and then ol 8' iv t <2 'Upaicp KaTaire(pevy6res 
i£rje<rav (those who had fed and ivere then in the Heraeum). PL Euthyd. 292, e. 
iv ravTT) rrj airopia i v eir e n t cone iv. (Cacs. B. G. 5, 10. naves in littore 
ejectas esse. Sail. Jug. 5. in amicitia receptus). — Also with a p. (pi and nepi 
with the Dat. instead of the Ace. II. A, 17. KvviJ.7Sas fxev -rrpSira tt e pi kvt] p.y- 
ffiv iSrrjKev (he put the greaves around his legs, so that then they set fast to them). 
Od. &, 434. it. p. (pi irvpl arrival rp'nroSa. With ini: II. a, 55. rq> yap 



448 SYNTAX. [f 300. 

€iri <ppe<r\ brjice Sea \euKco\evos "Hpy (like ev ^pect (S-eT^aj). With irpds- 
Od. i, 284. pea fiev jxoi /caTe'a|e nocreiSaaiv evoaix&oiv, "irpbs tv 4t pr\ <r i /3 a A. ft? v, 
289. cw 8e 5vu} jxaptyas, wsre o~Kv\aKas, ttotI yair) KOWTe. So fiaWeit 
ttoti yair). — With v it 6, in prose, in the phrases, v it 6 tivi y iyvecr&ai (to 
come under the power of any one, and continue under his power) ; it oielv t i vtto 
tivi (alicui aliquid subjicere) ; iroiela&ai v(j> eavTtp [sibi subjicere, §299,11, 
(2) (c)]. 

Rem. 6. In the following and like examples from Homer, the Dat., without 
doubt, expi-esses the relation of aim or object: x e ?P as laWeiv em c'itu, r\K<xi fieXos 
iirl tiul, ire/Aipou oveipov irri tivi, eXavvetv 'iiritovs iirl vnvaiv, TiTaiveff&ai To\a eVi 
tivi, aWeo-frcu etri tivi, fxaxeo'^ai iiri . tivi, iveTe<T&ai eV av&eaiv. See § 284, 
Rem. 1. 

(b) The verb expressing rest involves the idea of the motion which precedes, when 
the preposition e I s stands with the Ace, instead of the preposition i v with the Dat. 
The moment of the preceding motion must then be regarded as predominant. 

II. o, 275. i(pdvr) X?s els 6S6v (came into the road and appeared). Her. 4, 
14. cpavrjvai is Upo k 6v vn a ov. Eur. Iph. T. 620. a\\' els a v ay Kt\ v Kel- 
fie&a (to come into and to be in). Her. 3, 62. irpor/ySpeve <tto.s is fxecrov tci, 
ivTeTa\fj.eva (placing himself in the midst and there standing). Very frequent in 
prose is irapeTvai els t6ttov Tivd (to have come to a place, and to be present 
there) ; comp. " he is in church, in town, or on the land," in which the idea of 
previous motion is necessarily supposed. X. An. 1. 2, 2. irapr)<rav els Sap- 
Sets (came to Sardis and were there). Her. 8, 60. ej tt)v ~2,a\a)x7va vireit- 
Kenai vfxlv Tettva Te kcu yvvcunes (to carry to Salamis and leave there in safety). 
PL Rp. 468, a. tov £a>vTa els tovs iro\e /niovs o.\6vt a, i. e. els tovs 
iro\e/j.iovs -ireaSvTa a\covai. 

(c) Verbs signifying to hang, to attach to, to suspend, etc., as Kpe/xavvvvai, avap- 
tclv, ere-, Kara.-, avabelv, avdwTeiv, alupelcrd-at, are connected with the prepositions 
air 6 and e/c (as in Lat. with ab and ex), in order to express, together with 
the idea of suspending anything to a place, the idea of hanging down from or 
depending from a place. 

Od. ,&•, 67. Kad 8' e/c it a<T a a\6<p i k p 4 /xaa e v <p6ppt.iyya Xiyeiav (he hung the 
lyre on the peg, so that it then hung down from it). X. H. 4. 4, 10. Uao-i/j.axos 
KaT a7ir)a as airb Sevdpwv tovs 'lktvovs [asto. twv i&eAovrcov ijei ivavTiov toIs 
'Apyelois (having fastened the horses to the trees). X. C. 3. 10. 13. baspaxes e/c 
twv wij.wv Kpe jxdfxev o i (hanging upon the shoulders and depending from them). 
So avaprav ti etc tlvos. Her. 4. 10. e/c tcov £a) err r) pcov (popelv (piahas (on the 
girdles, so that the bowls hung down). In poetry, this usage is very widely 
extended. See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, (c). 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, as Avell as prepositions, are sometimes used in a 
pregnant sense : (a) adverbs denoting rest instead of those denoting the direc- 
tion whither. S. Trach. 40. Kelvos 8* oirov (instead of '6iroi, quo) ft e /3 77 «• e v, 
ovBe\s o78e (no one knows where [whither] he has gone). X. H. 7. 1, 25. dirov 
f5ou\r}5s?ev i£e\&e?v. — (b) adverbs expressing the direction whither, instead 
of adverbs expressing the relation where. Eur. H F. 74. iro? iraTrip airecrTi 
yrjs; 1157. iro? KaKoov ipr)jxiav evpa> ,■ (quo me vertam, ut requiem inveniam?). 
Arist. Av. 9. ottoi yr)s ia/xev ; (ivhither [where] are we?). Dem. Chers. 102, 50. 
7to? av a8v6p.e&a; (quo nos vertamus, ut perniciem vitemus?). Phil. 1. 51, 40. 
6 -rrXriyels cul ty)s TrXrjyris exerai, Kav 'eTepuxre naTa^r) tis, eKeta e elcriv at X e ?P* s ' 

(4) A second peculiarity in the construction of prepositions is, when the 
article (alone or with a substantive) in connection with a preposition and its 



$ 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PREPOSITIONS. 449 

Case, has a substantive idea, and when the preposition eV, which expresses the 
relation where only in the most general manner, should be used, this preposition 
is changed either into air 6 and e« or into els, attracted, as it were, by the 
verb, expressed or understood, Avhich denotes either the direction whence or 
whither. This construction may be called the attraction of prepositions : — 

(a) 'Air 6 and e/c instead of iv, or irap a with the Gen. instead of ir a pa 
with the Dat. Ol i k rrjs ay op as dv&pcoiroi air ecpvyov (instead of ol iv 
rrj ay o pa frvfrpwiroi airecpvyov e/c ttjs ay o pas (those IN the agora fled FROM it). 
X. H. 4. 6, 4. irdvTes ol e/c twv aypwv ^AKapvaves ecpvyov is to oVtt? (in- 
stead of iravres ol iv rots aypo?s ecpvyov e/c t So v aypojv is Ta ao~T7]). Th. 
1, 18. ol e/c rrjs &XXr)S 'EXXado s (rvpavvoi) virb AaKeSaifAOvlaiv KaTeXv- 
&r}ffav. 3.22. rja&ovTo ol e'/c t&v irvpyuv (pvXaKes (the guards UPON the 
towers perceived it from the towers). 7, 70. ol airb to>v tear aar pea fxdr wv 
ro?s aKovriois ixp&vro (those upon the decks used their darts from the decks). 
PL Apol. 32, b. v/j.e?s robs 5e/ca aTpaTnyovs tovs ovk aveXo fx evovs tovs in 
rrjs vau/xaxl-as iPovXea&e a&p6ovs Kpiveiv (you wished to condemn all at once 
the ten commanders its the naval battle, who did not carry off the dead from it). 
Phaed. 109, e. ol e/c rrjs 3- aXarr-ns /'x^-ues avaKvirrovT es (the flsh in 
the sea coming up out of it). Dem. Phil. 3. 114, 15. tovs e'/c ~Zepf)iov Tei- 
Xov s crrpaTidoTas e£e'/3 a Xev. X. An. 1. 1, 5. ostis 5' acpiKvoIr o rau irapa 
/3ao"tAea>s irpbs outoV (instead of ruy irapa fiaaiXe? ovtwv irapa fiaaiXeoos 

a.(plKV0?T0). 

Rem. 8. The same principle of attraction holds, also, with adverbs of 
place, e. g. e'/ceTd-ei/ and evdo&ev instead of eVe? and evtov. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 15. 
ayvoe? rbi/ iKe7&ev ir6Xe/j.ov Sevpo rj^ovra. X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. 'iva i\aaov ra oif/ca8e 
tto^oIt}. See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, Rem. 2. 

(b) Els instead of iv (far more seldom). Her. 2, 150. eXeyov ol imx^pioi, 
ws is t\\v ~%vpnv ttjv is Aifiv-nv i k8 id ot 7] Xifxvr] avr-n virb yr\v (empties into 
the Syrtis which is in Lybia). X. H. 1. 7, 29. 'Epao-iviS-ns (iKeXevev) iirl tovs is 
yiiTvXi)vT)v iroXefxlovs ttjv Taxlo~Ti)v irXeTv airavTas (against the enemies in 
Mitylene). 

5. On the repetition and omission of prepositions, the following things are 
to be noted : — 

(a) In a series of coordinate substantives, the preposition is either repeated 
before each single substantive, when each single idea is to be considered sep- 
arately and is to be made emphatic, or when the contrast or difference between 
the ideas is to be denoted, e. g. PL Tim. 18, c. /c cn-a T€ irSxejxov Kal KaTa tV 
'aXX-nv Zianau ; or the preposition is placed only before the first substantive, and 
omitted with the others, when the ideas are meant to express one whole, 
whether they are of the same kind or different, e. g. X. C. 1. 4, 17. ire pi t£>v 
ivSdde Kal ire pi t&v iv AlyvirTca /col iv 2t/ceAta (ppovTi^eiv (instead of 
Kal irepi twv iv 2t/ceAi<x). 2. 1, 6. ay vjxvdcrTcas ex* 1 " "* p 6 s re tyvX 7 ! K a ^ 
SaXin). X. H. 1. 1, 3. airo" re t&v veoov Kal rfys yr/s. PL Phaed. 99,' 
a. i) ire pi Mey apa 1) Bo loot o vs. 

(b) When a substantive connected with a preposition, is folloAved by a rela- 
ative pronoun standing in the same relation with the substantive, the preposition 
in prose is often repeated before the relative, but more frequently omitted : 
PL Symp. 213, c. w ! eKelvov tov xp^vov, a<p' ov tovtov ijpdcr^rjv. X. Hier. 1, 

38* 



450 SYNTAX. [$ 300. 

11. ol IZiwrai (cives) epxovTai els iroXeis, as tiv (ZovAoovTai, frea/AaTav eveKa. X. 
S. 4, 1. iv t<2 xptv<i>i $ v\xwv aKovco. (Comp. in Latin Cic. Fin. 4, 20. Zeno negat 
Platonem, si sapiens non sit, eadem esse in causa, qua tyrannum Dionysium).' 

(c) The preposition is very often omitted in questions and answers, e. g. PI. 
Soph. 243, d. ire pi 8e tov /xeyiffTOv re Kal apxyyov Trpcarov vvv ffKeTTTeov. 
Theaet. Tivos 5-)? Keyets ; X. S. 5, 5. otff&a ovv, ecpr}, 6cp&aAfx£>v tivos eveKa 
8eo,ue&aj ATjKov, ecpr], otl tov opav. 

(d) The preposition is commonly omitted with a word in apposition. X. 
An. 5. 5, 3. ol "EWriues a(piK0VT0 els KoTvccpa, tt6Xiv 'EWr^vida. Comp. 4. 
8, 22. 5. 3, 2. 6. 2, 1. But when a greater emphasis rests upon the word in ap- 
position, as is particularly the case, when it is used to explain a preceding 
pronoun, then the preposition is regularly repeated. X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. {<pi\iav 
Kaj3ois av) Trap' i Ketv cov, olfxai, ecpr], Trap a, tS>v {x-nZeTrore TroXefxiuv yeyevqfxe- 
v<av {you might acquire friendship from those who have never been enemies). PL 
Prot. 358, b. al eirl tov tov -Kpa^eis aizaffai, iirl tov aAvircos £rjv Kal rjSews, 
ap ov KaXai ; (all the actions pertaining to this, viz., the living without grief, are they 
not praiseworthy ?) : also in clauses expressing comparison, subjoined by as, 
wsTrep, the preposition may be either omitted or repeated. PI. Rp. 330, c. 
ire pi to. xP'h l J - aT a o"irov$d(dvai.u, w s epyov eavrwv. PL Trap r)/xas (poiTas, 
&s Trap a <pi\ovs. But when the member expressing the comparison pre- 
cedes the other, the preposition stands with the first member only, if the parti- 
cle of comparison is us; but the preposition is repeated, if it is & sire p. PL 
Rp. 1. 4, 14, e. Se? &s tt e pi firjTpbs Ka\ Tpocpov ttjs x^P as a-iwveiv (i. e. irepl 
TTJs x^P as )' X. Cy. 1. 6, 4. is Trpbs (pt\ovs ovTas jxol tovs &eovs ovtw 
Bia.iceiiJ.ai. — PL Phaed. 82, e. (tj \pvxr) hvaytca^eTai) &sirep Si' elpyjuov Sia 
too o~a>/j.aTOs o~Koire7o~Sai to, ovra. 

6. The natural position for prepositions is directly before their substantive, 
or before the attributive belonging to a substantive, e. g. irpbs tov avdpa, Trpbs 
Tbv aocpbv &v5pa. But this position is often changed in the following instances : — 

(a) When a particle follows the substantive, as ye, fxev, yap, /xev yap, Se, oh, 
also fxey ovv, av, Kal, etiam, to'ivw, taws, also olfxai used as an adverb ; these 
small words often come between the preposition and the substantive, e. g. it 
fiev elprjvrj, ev fxev yap elprjvn. 

(b) The preposition irpos in oaths and exclamations is separated from its 
substantive. Soph. O. C. 1333. irp6s vvv ere Kp-nvcov, irpbs &ea>v 6/j.oyvtav 
ahco Tri&eoSai. So in Latin, per te deos oro. 

(c) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is sub- 
ject to anastrophe ; in Attic prose, this takes place only with Trepi when con- 
nected with the Gen., but here it is very frequent. PL Rp. 469, b. irpwTov pey 
avd pairoS iff /xov tx ep i ; it is also separated by other words, tier. 6, 101. 
tovtov o~<pi efieXe tt e p i. PL Apol. 19, C a> v ey<b ovfiev ovTe jxeya ovTe ffuue- 
pbv tt 4 p l e-Kaiw. Sec § 31, IV. 



1801/302.] TRONOUNS. 451 

CHAPTER IV. 

^301. The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At- 
tribute, and Object. 

The subject, predicate, attribute, and object are expressed 
oy pronouns, when these members of a sentence are not 
designed to represent objects or qualities themselves, but 
Kmen it is to be denoted merely, that an object refers either 
;o the speaker himself, or to the person addressed, or to 
mother person or thing. 

2. All the rules which have been given on the substan- 
tive and adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective 
pronouns ; still, some remarks are here subjoined on the 
use of the pronouns. 

§ 302. I. Personal Pronouns. 

The substantive personal pronouns, as the subject (in the 
Noni.) : iyo>, av, rjfxets, etc., and also the adjective (posses- 
sive) pronouns, as attributives, e. g. i/xbg 7raTr}p, are used in 
Greek, as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic ; 
rence particularly in antitheses, but also, for the sake of per- 
spicuity, e. g. Kat crv raura hrpa^as. Kat 6 cros 7rarr]p aireSavev. 
Eya> fjLtv oara/xi, (rv Se fieve. But where this is not the case, 
they are omitted, and the substantive pronouns are expressed 
3y the endings of the verb, and the adjective (possessive) pro- 
louns, by the article prefixed to the substantive, e. g.Tpcu/xD, 
YpdcfreLS. C H p-rir-qp dirk fxot (my mother). 01 yovei? arepyovai 
ra TtKva (their children). 

Remark 1. The distinction between the accented and the enclitic forms of 
:he personal pronouns, e. g. e/xov and /xov, etc. (§ 87), lies in the greater or less 
emphasis with which they are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented 
forms are always employed, for example, in antitheses, e. g. ifxov (xhv Kareye- 
\aae, <re Se iiryueo-ev. — The personal pronouns are often used instead of the 
reflexive (No. 2). On the use of the Gen. of the substantive instead of the 
adjective (possessive) pronouns, see Rem. 4. On an appositive in the Gen. 
joined with a possessive pronoun, e. g. fi/xerepos avrS>u irari\py see § 266, 2. 

Rem. 2. The adjective personal pronouns more commonly have a subjective or 
active sense, e.g.e^ &ov\i) {my counsel, i.e. one which I originate, not one which 



452 syntax. [$ 302 

relates to me) ; but sometimes they take the place of the objective Gen. and then 
have an objective or passive sense. Od. A, 201. crbs iro&os, a desire for thee 
(like Ter. Heaut. II. 3, 66. desiderio tuo instead of tui). X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. 
evvoia iced (piXia rfj 4/j.rj (benevolentia et amove mei, from good will and love TO me) 

2. The reflexive pronouns always refer to something already 
named, to the Subject or Object, since the person or thing to ! 
which the reflexive refers, stands in contrast with itself as an 
object or attribute : — 

(a) In relation to the subject: 'O <ro(pbs eavrov Kpare?. 2u creavrop apecr- 
Keis. 'O nous eavrbv eTraive?. Ol yovels aywrrSxTL robs e a v r G> v iraifias. 
IVaJ&i a eavr 6 u. Ouros 6 aviip irdvra hC eavrov nep.a&rjK.ev . 'O arpar-qybs 
virb rwv eavrov ar par icorwv aire&avev. 

(bj In relation to an object of the sentence : X. Cy. 1. 1, 4. Kvpos drfveyne 1 
rwv dXXwv fiacr iXeoov, ruv apxas 8i eavroou nr-ncrap-evuv. Ar. Nub. 384. 
airb cravrov eyd> a e St5a|ou ( per te ipsum) . 

(3) The reflexive pronouns may also be used in Greek, as in 
Latin, in the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive 
and of the Participle ; also in such subordinate clauses as stand 
in a close relation to the principal clause, particularly in clauses 
expressing design, and in dependent interrogative clauses, as 
well as in all other subordinate clauses which do not contain 
the sentiment of the speaker, but the sentiment of the subject 
of the principal sentence. Also in this case the reflexive! 
refers either to the subject or to an object. When the subject 
of the principal clause and the subject of the subordinate 
clause (or of the Inf.), are different, the reflexive may refer 
either to the former or to the latter, its particular reference 
being determined only from the context. In the cases men- 
tioned under this rule, the English often uses the personal 
pronouns him, her, it, etc. instead of the reflexive. 

'O r v paw os vo[x'i£ei robs iroXlras viri)perelv eavrcp. X. Cy. 1. 1, 5. Tcoy 
eSrvoov rovrccu ^p^eu (Kvpos) ov& eavrcp dfxoyXwrrwv ovricv, ovre aXX^Xois. 
C. 1. 2, 8. iirlareve (2 o> k p a r 77 s) r5>v ^vvovrwv eavrcp robs airoBe^a/xevovs, 
airep avrbs idoKi/j-afev, els rbu ivdvra fiiov eavroj re koX aXXrjXois (piXovs dya&obs 
ecrea&aL. 52. 6 Kar-fjyopos e<pi) rbv 2 a k p drrju avaireiSovra robs veovs, cos avrbs 
e'i7) ao<pojiar6s re Kal aXXovs iKavcoraros iroirio-ai crocpovs, ovrcc Siari&evai robs 
eavrcd avvovras, wsre /u.-qh'a/xov Trap" avro?s robs dXXovs elvai irpbs eavr6v (in, 
comparison with him). Th. 2, 92. ra vavdyia, baa irpbs rfj eavraiv (yfj) t\v, avel~, 
Xovro (= Ta vavdyia ra irpbs rrj eavroov yrj ovra). Her. 8, 24. 00*01 o~ov arparov 
rod e avrov i\-rav veKpol e&atye. Comp. the examples in Rem. 3. 



§ 302.] pronouns. 453 

1 4. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun air 6s, 
-rj. -6 : viz., avrov, -rjs, airw, -rj, avrov, rjv, -o, avrdv, or even 
those of a demonstrative pronoun, are universally employed, 
when an object does not stand in contrast with itself, but 
with another object, e. g. 6 7tarr]p anw (to him, the son) I'Soo^e 
to fiifiXiov. ~%ripyoi avrov (him). 'A-m^o/oiai avrov (from him). 
The pronoun avrov, etc. is merely the personal pronoun of the 
third person, but is much weaker than the demonstrative 
ovto9 ; wherefore, it does not, like ovros, usually stand first in a 
sentence. 

Rem. 3. The personal pronoun ov, of, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense 
in the Attic writers (but, in the Ion. writers and in the poets, also the meaning 
of the personal pronoun). But it is regularly employed, only when the reflex- 
ive relation has respect, not to the nearest subject, but to the remoter one. It 
is in general much more freely used than the compound reflexive, since it is 
also employed where the connection with the principal clause is much looser, e. g. 
'O Tvpavvos vopi.i{ei robs iroXiras virrjpere?v ol (but not o rvpavvos x a P l C erai 0L )' 
X. An. 7. 5, 9. 'Kpa.K\eldT]s elsayaycov robs aXXovs arparriyovs irpbs ~2,Kev&r]v Xeyeiv 
■' iiceXevev avrov s, on oiidev av firrov o~<pe7s aydyoiev tt]v crpandv, t) p,evo(pwv 
(se ducturos esse). Th. 5, 73. oi 'A&^j/cuoi o>? i£4nXivev (6 *Ayis) curb <r(pa>v 
rb o~rpdrevfx.a, Ka& Tjavxiav io~wSn)crav. 6, 32. ^vvsirevxovro ical 6 aXXos, '6/j.IXos, 
■ rwv re iroXirwv Kal e? ris aXXos evvovs irapriv o~(pio~i. Even after yap, e. g. X. H, 
1.7, 5. ol o-Tparr\yo\ jS/mxea eKaaros aireXoyr]aaro • ov yap irpovre&ri o~<pio~i x6yos 
Kara, rbv v6jxou. But Thucydides and some later writers use it, also, in relation 
to the nearest subject, e. g. Th. 7, 5. 6 rvXiiriros ireix^C 6 to?s Xi&ois XP^^ V0S ^ 
ovs ol 'ASrrjvaToi irpoirapefSaXouTo & (pi civ. The forms of, o-(picri and crfyas 
have sometimes also the meaning of personal pronouns : of, him, her (e. g. X. 
Cy. 3. 2, 26) ; o-(pio-i, to them (e. g. X. H. 6. 5, 35) ; a- (pas, them., e. g. Th. 5, 49), 
when the object to which they refer, is more important in respect to tlfe sense, 
i than the subject of the sentence. Still, it is to be remarked in relation to the 
* use of this pronoun, that in place of it with a reflexive sense, the compound 
i reflexive k avrov, -rjs, etc. is commonly employed; and in place of it with 
t the sense of the Pers. pronoun third person, the corresponding forms of avr 6 s 
i are used by the Attic writers. The form ov (ov) is used in prose only in PL 
I Symp. 174, d. Ep. 617, b. 617, e.; I (e) 327, b. 617, e. Symp. 175, a. c. 233, 
lb.; ol occurs far oftener (seldom accented o?), andc^eTy, o-(pa>v, o-(pio-i, 
: a (pas, somewhat often. 

5. In the instances mentioned under No. 3, the correspond- 
ing forms of air 6s are very frequently used instead of the 
reflexive pronoun ; this is always the case where a member of a 
sentence or a suborinate clause is not the expression or senti- 
ment of the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the senti- 
ment of the speaker (writer). 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. (Oi iroXe/Aioi) ev&vs a(pi)(rovo-i r))V Xeiav, iirsifiav ffiaal rivas eV 
avr ovs iXavuovras (contra Se). C. 4. 7, 1. T^ eavrov yvd/x-qv aire(paivero 2wk- 
odrrjs irpbs robs SfiiXovvras avT$. Apol. 33. (2o)Kpdrr)s) iyva> rov in tfv rb 
redvdvat avrw KpcTrrov etvai. 



454 . syntax. f$ 302. 

6. In compound reflexive pronouns, the pronoun avros either 
retains its exclusive force, or loses it, i. e. it is sometimes em- 
phatic, and sometimes not. 

(a) Isocr. Panath. 16, 242. SUai6u ecrri cpiXovs /xev iroie?aSrat rovs 6/jlolcos av- 
ro7s re (or o~<pto~i re avro7s) Kal ro7s dXXois xP w t x * l/0VS i <po(3e7o-&at Se ical 
Sedieuai robs irpbs acpas /xeu avrovs (or eavr ovs) olKei6rara SiaKeifxeuovs, 
irpbs Se rovs aXXovs aXXorpicos (se ipsis and se ipsos). Th. 4, 102. iiroiKovs 
acpcou re avrcou Kal rcou dXXcou rbu f3ovXofj.euou irep-ipaures. 1, 60. ire/xirovoii' 
e avrcou re eSeXovrhs Kal rcou aXXoou TieXoirovvno-icov fjucr&cd veiaaures. 8, 8. icp' 
e avrcou Zteuoovuro dXXco ar6Xcp irXe7u (soli per se). The Nom. avros is some- 
times added to strengthen this exclusive or emphatic force (comp. in Lat. Cato 
SE IPSE interemit), e. g. PI. Phaed. 94, e. ovre yap au 'Op.i]pcp 6/j.oXoyo7/j.eu, ovre 
avrol r\\x7v avroTs. — (b) Ot ffrparicorai irape7xov eavr ovs (or acpds 
avrovs) dudpeiordrovs (se). Th. 7, 82. irapeSoaau ol irdures o~(pas avrovs (or 
e avr o vs) (se). 

Eem. 4. The reflexive possessives are either used alone, e. g. Dem. c. Nicostr. 

4, 1250. rcou xP r H X( *- T ' j3V o" 04 T ^ p efxcov /a'xpw- c. Nausim. 11, 993. SiKaiorepov 
drjirov ra i) peer epa 7]p.as eariu exeij/, 3) rovrovs. C. Boeot. 2, 1010. vp.e7s atvav- 
res robs vfxer e povs ira7Bas dyairare. Ot iroX7rai ra a (per e pa acd(eiu eireipcou- 
ro] or with the addition of the Gen. of avr 6s according to § 266, 2; or in- 
stead of the possessives, the Gen. of the compound substantive-reflexive is 
used; indeed in Prose, this is uniformly the case with the Sing. (mine,thine,his, 
thus 6 e p. avr ov, a" eavr ov, eavrov irar-i/p, and not 6 epbs avrov, 6 abs avrov 
Trary'ip, which last mode of expression is found only in poetry), and with the 
third Pers. PL, it is more frequent than the possessive : but the possessives are 
commonly used when the pronoun is plural (our, your), except in the third 
Person. Hence as follows : — 

5. rbu ejxavrov (creavrov, eavrov) irarepa not rbu ep.bu (o~bu) avrov it. 
T7)V e/xavrov (ffeavrov, eavrov) fx-qrepa not r^]U ep.T]u (o~T)u) avrov p.. 
ro?s ejxavrov (aeavrov, eavrov) x6yois not ro7s e/xo7s (o~o7s) avrov X. 

P. rbu rjfxerepou avrcou irarepa very rare rbu e/xcou avrcou ir. 

rrju v/xerepau avrcou p.t]repa very rare rrju v/xau avrcou jx. 

ra, rjfxerepa avrcou ap.aprrnj.ara very rare ra, tj/aqou avrcou a. 

rbu cnperepou avrcou irarepa more frequent rbu eavrcou irarepa, but never 

rbu acpcou avrcou ir. 

Here also the Pronoun avr 6 s either retains its exclusive or emphatic force, or 
loses it: (a) 'O 7ra?s vfipi(ei rbu eavrov irarepa (SUUM IPSIUS patrem). 'T/j,e7s 
vfipl(ere rovs vpcer e povs avrcou irarepas (VESTROS IPSORUM patres). Ot 
ira78es vf3pi(ovcri rovs e avrcou irarepas (suos ipsorum p). X. Hier. 3, 8. iroWovs 
Se Ka) virb yvuaiKcou rwu eavr cop rvpduuovs SiecpSrap/xeuovs (evpi)(reis) (alsuis IP- 
SORUM conjugibus). X. An. 6. 1, 29. (uofxi^co) fsris eu iroXe/xco cou (rracrtafet irpbs 
ccpxoura, rovrou irpbs rr\u eavrov acorr)piau arao-i.d(etu (contra SUAM IPSIUS 
sahxtem). In order to strengthen the exclusive or emphatic force, the Pronoun 
avr 6s is frequently added: avrbs rbu ep.avrov, etc. ; avros is also sometimes 
placed between the article and the reflexive of the third Pers., e. g. Aeschin. 
Ctes. 85, 87. KaraXeKvKe ri)U avrbs avrov Svuao-reiau. — (b) Th. 2, 101. 
~2,Tparou'iK-r}u, rr\u eavrov dheXcp'QU, Sib'coo-i ~2,ev£rn (SUAM sororem). Aeschin. 
fals. leg. 30, 40. irpbs rrju PovXtju rbu dSeXcpbu rbu ifxavrov KalrbudSeXcpiSovv 
Kal rbu larpbu eire^a. Th. 6, 21. iroXv dirb r%s tj fxerepas avrcov fxeXXo/xev 
irXsiv (a nostra patria). Lysias. yyovurai oviceri rots crcperepots avrwv a/x,ap- 



$ 302.] pronouns. 455 

Ti)fia<rt rbv vovv bfias irapQetv. Her. 5, 87. (\eyov<rtv) elpwTav eKa.ffT-qv aviewv 
(tS>v yvvatKwv), okt) eXr] 6 ecovT r)s avnp [ubi suus vir esset). X. H. 4. 4, 17. oi 
AaKedatfi6uioi t&v eavTuu crvfifidx^v KaTe(pp6vovv. 

Rem. 5. It is very rare in good classical authors, that the Gen. of Pers. Pro- 
nouns refers to the nearest subject, e. g. PI. Lach. 179, c. afrtd>fie&a robs irari- 
pas rjficav, oti rjfids fiev eluv rpv(pau (instead of tovs r) fieT e povs irarcpas or 
robs rjfierepovs avT&v v.). Antiph. 1, 1 1 4. 4ycb 8' bfias virep tov ivarp6s fi o v 
f.e&veaTos out ov fiat (instead of virep tov ifiavrov iraTpos). Th. 4,8. 4irl tccs 
iy Trj KepKvpa vavs cr<pcov eirefityav (instead of 4irl tcls 4v t. K crepe t 4 pas 
ovtwv v, or Tas eavTwv v.). 

Rem. 6. The pronoun avTbs with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after 
both the substantive and adjective (possessive) personal pronouns, whether its 
exclusive power be retained or lost, c. g. r)fiwv avrcov, ifiiv avToTs, cr<pas avTovs, 5 
vfierepos avT&y Trari)p, etc. In the Attic writers the exceptions to this position 
are extremely few, e. g. X. Cy. 6. 2, 25. vvv to. 47riTi]Seia (r)fias) de7 els tt]v 
odbv crvo~Kevd£ecr&ai avTols Te Vfi7v, Ka\ 6tt6ools TeTpdirorrt xp^fie^a. But in 
other writers, also, such exceptions are quite rare, e. g. Her. 5, 91. crvyytvuo-Ko- 
fiev avToTat r\fitv ov iroirjo-acri 6p&a>s. This position is never found with the 
third Pers. PL, consequently never avTobs a (pas instead of ocpas avTovs. 
But when the Pers. pronouns are used without their reflexive force, then avT6s, 
in its exclusive or emphatic sense, may either precede or follow the personal pro- 
noun : (a) avTov 4fiov (fiov), avT<£ 4fioi (fiot), avTbv 4 fie (fie), avTobs 7]fias, etc., 
e. g. PL Phaed. 91, a. at>T<£ 4/iol oti fiaXicTTa 56£et ovtws ex^tv. Symp. 220, 
e. ovvdieacoo'e Kal Tcfc oirha Kal avTbv 4 fie. X. C. 2. 9, 2. r)decos y dv (sc. $-pe- 
\l/aifit Tbv avSpa), ecprj, cl fii] (pofioifiriv, ottcos fir] 4ir avTov fie TpdiroiTo.— (b) 
4fiov avTov, 4fio\ aurw, ere avT6u, rificov avT&v, etc., e. g. Dem. 01. 3, 36. irfaey 
aXAo&ev laxvpbs yeyovev r) Trap'' r)fiobv avT&v $l\tiriros] X. C. 3. 8, 9. tov 
§epovs 6 rJAtos virep r)fiS>y avT&v Kal tcou CTTey&v iropev6fievos crKtdv irapex* 1 - 
Cy. 5. 5, 20. ce fiev avTov dcprJKa. 6. 1, 14. crTeyat r)fi7v avTo7s elaty. PL 
Apol. 41, a. efioiye Kal avTqj &avfiaoT7} ay efoj r) StaTptfSr) avT6&t. 

7. The reflexive pronoun is very often used instead of the 
reciprocal pronoun, in all the persons. 

Dem. C. Olympiod. 1169. t6& r)(i7y avTo7s dta\e£6fiefra. PL Rp. 621, c. 
c SiKatoavvnu fieTa (ppov-fjcrecos iravil TpSirca 4iriTr)devaofiev, 'iva Kal r)fi?v avToTs 
f (piXot 3>fiev, Kal to?s &eo7s. Bys. 114. 4Treth'dv bfiiv 4yw ft-qvicroi}, irpbs xifias av- 
nobs Tpetyeo'&e Kairena Ka& eva eKao~TOV vfi?v avToTs a7rex&r)crecr&e. X. C. 
'3. 5, 16. <p&ovod(Ttv eavTols fiaWov, r) to7s aWois av^rpcairots. 

Rem. 7. Both the reciprocal and reflexive pronoun is used when the action 
• refers to an object that has been named. Both consequently express a reflexive 
idea, and are related like the species and genus ; since now the genus includes 
i the species, so the reflexive may take the place of the reciprocal, in cases 
where it is readily perceived that several persons so perform anything together 
that the action appears as reciprocal. But when the reciprocal is antithetic to 
eavTbv eKacrTos, but the reflexive used for the reciprocal, to 'aWovs, it is 
clear that the reciprocal must then necessarily stand, where the antithesis 
eavTbv eKacrTos is either expressed or implied, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. fiaWov 
XULpovcrtv 4irl tois aWrjXcou KaKoTs, t) to?s avTcav ISiois aya&o7s (i.e.-?) 4irl 
to7s avTov eKaffTos aya&o7s), they rather rejoice in each other's einls, than in their 
own good, i. e. than each one in his own. PL Phaedr. 263, a. afi<pisfir)Todfiev d\- 
\i"l\ots Te Kal r)fi7v avTo7s. On the contrary, it is natural that the reflex- 
ive should be regularly used, where other persons (aWovs), either expressly or 
by implication, are contrasted with the reflexive, e. g. Isocr. Aegin. 387. irepl 



456 syntax. [$ 303. 

irXeovos 7} [J. as avrovs r]yov/j.e&a, ^ robs a.8eX(povs (we think more of ourselves 
than of [others] our brothers), de Pac. ol ixkv (&erraXol) crept a iv avr ots iroXe/xov- 
aiv (inter se, non contra exteros hostcs). With the Nom. avrol added, e. g. X. M. 
1. 5, 9. (Se?) crKoiretv oirws rwv 'EXX-nvcov /nrjSeues lo~xvpol cbcriv, aXXa rrdvres acr&t- 
vets, avrol iv eavroTs o~racrid£ovres. So 6/j.oXoyela^ai, afx(pis/3r]Te7cr^ai, 8i- 
evex&V v & l i ivavrlov elvai and Tvpdrreiv crcplcriv ai>ro?s or eavro7s. But 
when neither the one nor the other antithesis exists, then the reflexive and the 
reciprocal are used without distinction, often in the same sentence, merely for 
the sake of variety, e. g. X. C. 2. 6, 20. (p&ovovvres e avrovs fxiaovcriv oAAtj- 
Xovs. 7, 12. avrl vcpopw/xevuv eavras rjSews aXX-f] Xas ewpuv. 

8. The reflexive pronoun of the third Pers. often takes the 
place of the reflexive of the first and second Person. The re- 
flexive then denotes not a definite person, but only confines the 
reflexive force to the subject; hence it has often merely the 
meaning of tSios ; the particular person, to whom it refers, must 
be clearly denoted by the construction of the sentence. 

X. C. 1.4, 9. ov8e yap rr\v eavrov [= creavrov] av ye i^vx^v Spas (his own soul ; 
aeavrov is a false reading). 2. 1, 31. rod Se irdvrcov r]8icrrov aKovcr/xaros iiraivov 
iavrrjs [= aavrrjs], avrjKoos el (self praise) . Andoc. de myst. avrbs, fj.ev avrbv 
airwXXvov (instead of ifuarrSv). PI. Prot. 312, a. crb Se ovk av alaxwoio els robs 
"EXXrjvas avrbv crocpicrrTjv irapex^v ; Isocr. Paneg. SLereXecrafxev acrracrtacrroL irpbs 
o~(pasavrovs. X. H. 1. 7, 19. evp-no'ere a (pas avrovs 7]fj.aprrjK6ras ra fj.e- 
yicrra is &eovs. 

Rem. 8. In the Epic language, this usage occurs also with crcplffi and o'j 
(suus). II. k, 398. (pv£iv fiovXeioir e jxera crcpicriv (instead of fiedr" vjxiv). 
Od. i, 28. ovroi €7 co y e rjs yaiys 8vvap.ai yXvicepdorepov izXXo ISecr&ai. 



§ 303. II. The remaining Pronouns. 

1. OvTOS, OVTWS, TOLOVTOS, TO(TOVTO<;, aild O 8 £, CO 8 €, TOL- 

6sSe, roo-osSe, are commonly used with this distinction, that 
the first four refer to what immediately precedes, the others, to 
what immediately follows. 

Her. 6, 53. ravra (the foregoing) /xev AaKe8aifi6vioi Xeyovcri — rd8e (the 
following) Se — iyk ypd<poo. Th. 1, 53. ol fiev 5)/ (Koplv&ioi) r o tavra elirov • 
— ol Se 'A&rjva'ioi r o i d S e aireitpivavTO. 

Remark 1. Still, not seldom ovros, r oiovr os, rotr ovros, ovrws 
refer to what follows ; far more seldom '6 8 e, roiosS e, r ocr6s8e, 3>8e refer 
to what goes before. X. C 1.2, 61. Alxas bvojxao'rbs iir\ rovra yeyove (by 
what follows). Th. 2, 34. £>8e fxev SrdirTovai (in reference to what precedes). 
But often '68e,w8e, etc., are so used that they represent an object as present, as 
it were before our eyes, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 3, 35. e'yd> Se vjuv fxev irapaivwv, iroiovs 
rivas XPV &vai iv rS> roi$8e, alcrxovoi/nriv 'av (= m PRAESENTI wum statu). 
Regularly, however, ovros precedes the relative clause, e. g. ovrSs io-nv, 



$ 303.] pronouns. 457 

%v e?8es avdpa. — When ovtos and itceTvos are used in opposition to each other, 
the latter refers to what is more remote, the former, to what is nearer, though 
the reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Latin hie and Me. 

2. The adjective demonstratives are often used in poetry, 
especially in Epic, and sometimes in prose, instead of the 
adverbs here, there, according to § 264, 3. 

Od. a, 76. aAA' HyeS", r]/j.e?s o'ISe wepi(ppa(d[)ij.efra iravres (let^us HERE deliber- 
ate). 185. vt)vs 8e fxoi ?j 8' eCrrjK^u tV dypov vocrcpi ir6\r)os (stood there in the field). 
Od. cr, 239. ws vvv^lpos e/cetVos eV avAeiycri&vpricni' tiarac (there). Th.l, 53. rifxas 
tov s8e ivpwrovs Aa/3oVres xP^ <Ta(T ^ € &S TroXefxiois (nos, qui HIC sumus). PI. Rp. 
327, b. 7ip6/j.7)v, '6itov €ii7]. Ovtos, e<p7], OTTKT&6J/ TTpos^px^Tai (here he comes be- 
hind thee). Hence in the Attic poets au^p '65 e instead of iy<a, e. g. S. 0. T. 
1464, and ovtos in prose instead of <rv, e. g. PL Gorg. 489, b. ovroal avfy 
ov iravaeTat. (pKvapS/v ; instead of <ru oh iravo'r] ; 

Rem. 2. In the Epic language, where two sentences, whose subject is not 
doubtful, follow each other, the subject is often repeated in the second by '6 y e 
with a certain emphasis, in order to bring out prominently the identity of the 
subject for both sentences, e. g. II. )8, 664. alrpa 8e vrjas ztrrit,*, iroAvu 8' '6 ye 
(idemque) Kabu ayelpas jSf? tyevywv iirl tv6vtov. II. o, 586. ' ' Kvt'iKoxos 8' ov fj.elye, 
&o6s irep iuu 7roXefj.io-Tr}s, aAA' oy 'dp' erpece. So also in the Epic language and 
particularly in Her., far rarer in the Attic writers, when a series of actions fol- 
low each other, 6 8e is used with reference to the same subject, where we may 
translate 6 8e by, on the contrary, then, etc' Her. 6, 3. tV (x.zv yevofiivr\v avTo7cri 
ahivv ov ud\a e|e0cuz/e, 6 8e %\eye <r<pi (on the contrary). X. An. 4. 2, 6. ol Se 
. . . ivTav&a efievov, as Karexovres to &Kpov • I 8' KaTeixov (iidemque). This 
usage very often occurs in Horn, and Her. in disjunctive clauses : 7) — 3) '6ye. 
Od. /3, 327. ij Tivas Ik UvXov ££ei dfxvvTopas . . . , $ oye nal ~2,irapTT}Sev. Her. 
2, 173. Aafroi tw tf tol /jxu/eis, 3/ '6 ye b.Tr6ir\r]KT0s yevSpevos. 

3. The use of the pronoun avTos is as follows : — 

(1) Autos properly means av ros, again he, and then self, ipse, 
e. g. 6 vlbs avros or auro? 6 vlos, the son himself. It can also 
refer to the person implied in the predicate, e. g. au-ros a-reftr). 
So avro tovto or tovt avTo, hoc ipsum, this itself {not another). 
When .used with e/cacrro?, auros always precedes. Her. 7, 
19. $£X(ov auros e/caoros ra TrpoKeLfxeva Sai/oa XajSeiv. 

(2) In the oblique Cases, it is used for the third person of 
the personal pronouns (§ 302, 4). 

(3) In connection with the article (o awos), it means the 
same, idem ($ 246, 3). On the position of the article with 
auros in connection with a substantive, see § 246, 3. 

Rem. 3. Horn, and Her. often use a v r 6 s in the place of the reflexive pro- 
nouns of the three persons. Od. 8, 247. &\\<* 8' uvtov (instead of iavrbv) 

39 



458 syntax. [$ 303. 

(purl KaraKpvirrcov jjio-Kev. (, 27. crol Se ydjuos o~x&6v icrriv, 'iia xph KaAa jxkv 
avrrjv (instead of cravrr]v) evvvo'Srai. Her. 7. 10, I. rb 5e uvrolai eveo~ri 
b~eiv6v, e/xe aoi S'iKai6v iari <ppd(eiv (quid autem in nobis timendum insit). 

Rem. 4. From the exclusive or emphatic force of this pronoun, the following 
specific significations arise : (a) self in contrast with another, hence alone, solus 
(ipse, non alius) ; /xovos, on the contrary, in contrast with several. X. An. 4. 7, 11. 
d\\ov oi>5eva (irapaKaAecras) x^P^ avr6s (goes alone); (b) even and self, like ipse, e. g. 
Avrbs 6 ^,'jjKpd.T-qs iSaKpucrev (even Socrates, Socrates himself ) ; so Kal avros, 
ovf? avros, velipse,ne ipse quidem; (c) self in contrast with foreign sad, of himself, 
etc., sponte, like ipse ; (d) in Homer especially, avrSs often forms a contrast with 
another object, expressed or understood, this object being different from that de- 
noted by avros, as the soul in distinction from the body, or the body in distinction 
from the soul, e. g. II. a, 4. a v r o v s 8e kAwpia TeD%e Kvve<raiv (made them [their 
bodies, not their souls] a prey), or a man in distinction from his affairs, or asso- 
ciates, etc. Hence avros is sometimes used of a lord, master, e. g. avrbs e<pn ; 
so also avr 6, id ipsum, often in connection with a following adjective-clause ; 
(e) it is used with a proper name and an ordinal from rpiros upwards, to de- 
note the number of official associates with the person named, who is generally 
the principal one, e.g. Th. 1, 46. Kopiv&toov crrparnybs i]v 'EevoKXeiSns ir 4 /xirr os 
avros (Xenoclides was the commander of the Corinthians with four associates). 

4. The indefinite pronomi ris when joined with adjectives, 
indefinite numerals, and adverbs, is used like the Latin quidam, 
to bring out distinctly the idea expressed by these words, some- 
times making them more, sometimes less emphatic, according 
to the meaning of the word or the connection of the discourse ; 
but with pronouns and cardinal numbers, it corresponds to the 
Latin fere (almost, about, someivhat). 

Meyas ris avr\p (some great man), p.iKp6s ris, ttus ris, %Kacrr6s ris, ovdels ris, bxiyoi 
rives, ivot6s ris, ivScros ris, fipaxv ti, iyyvs ri, crx^^ ti, irdvv ri,-jravrdirao~i ri, iroAv 
ri, ohdev ti, ird\ai ri, Siacpepovrws ri. Aeivnv riva Aeyeis 8vvap.iv rrjs dperrjs 
elvai (incredibilem quandam vim, a kind of incredible power). X. C. 1. 1, 1. ?/ 
ypa(pr] Kar avrov (~XwKpdrovs) roidde ris ?jv (haec fere, was nearly, was for 
substance this). 3. 6, 5. Ae£ov, irocrai rives elo-i (sc. at irpSsob'oi rfj ir6\ei), tell 
me about how much the revenues are. So ovrco ri, or ovrco, wSe ttoos (sic, fere, 
nearly thus) ; rpeis rives (about three, some three or so). 

Rem. 5. The regular position of the pronoun r)s, as an enclitic, is after the 
word to which- it belongs, e. g. dvr\p ns, Ka\6s ns av-hp. But sometimes, in con- 
nected discourse, it precedes, e. g. ecrn roivw r i s evrjSnis \6yos. On the rela- 
tive and interrogative pronouns, see under adjective and interrogative sentences. 

Rem. 6. The indefinite pronoun one, any one, is usually expressed in Greek : 

(a) by ris, e. g. Ovk dv ris evpoi dvSpa aocpcarepov (one would not find, etc.); 

(b) by the second Pers. Sing. Opt. with dv, and the Ind of a historical tense 
with dv, when it is intended to represent the subject as indefinite, e. g. (pains 
dv (dicas, one may, can say); vop.i(ois dv (credas, one might suppose). e?8 e s 
&v (videres, one might have seen); riyrjo-u) dv ( putares, etc.). The English, 
however, frequently translates the second Pers. by you, e. g. you may, can say. 



§§ 304, 305.] pronouns. 



459 



§ 304. Prospective and Retrospective Use of the 
Pronoun. 

1. The personal pronoun ov, of, e,/xiv, and the demonstrative 6, tj, t6, are fre- 
quently used in Homer to direct the attention to a following substantive, and 
as it were to prepare for it. II. v, 321. abrUa r<2 p.ev eireira tear 6<p&a\/j.wv 
%eeu ax^vv, Tlr}\elS7) 5 Ax*A7jt. II. 0, 249. 'Iva \xiv rravcreie tt6uolo, d?ov 
'Axi^\rja. 

2. In the same way, the Neut. of a demonstrative is used to prepare for a 
following substantive, or a following Inf. or entire sentence. PL Apol. 37, a. 
tqvtov Ti/j.5jfj.ai, eV ivpvra.veica a it 7] crews (lam deemed worthy of this, viz., a 
maintenance in the Prytaneum). X. Cy. 8. 7, 25. ri rovrov /xaKapidorepoi/, rod 
yfj fiix&yvai; (what can be more blessed than this, to mix with the earth ?) ; PI. 
Gorg. 515, e. a\\h rode fioi elire iirl rovrw, el Xeyovrai 'A&7]va7oi Sia 
TlepiK\ea fieXriovsyeyovevai. Dem. Phil. 1. 41, 5. diSey . . . rovro 
KaXus eKewos, or i r avr a [x.ev icrr iv air avr a ra x a p' ia a&Aa rod tto- 
Kefjiov Kelfieua ev /xeorcv. Comp. § 266, Rem. 3. 

3. On the contrary, a demonstrative pronoun, particularly abr6s, is fre- 
quently put in the same sentence after a preceding substantive or pronoun, 
partly for the sake of perspicuity, e. g. when between the Case and the verb 
which governs it, there is an unusually long intermediate clause, and partly for 
the sake of rhetorical emphasis. Such a pronoun again resumes the preceding 
substantive or pronoun, and either recalls it to the memory, or fixes the atten- 
tion particularly upon it. Her. 3, 63. 6 Se fioi May os, rov (= ou) Ka/j.f}vo-r)s 
eirirpoTTov rS>v oik'kov airedel-e, ovros ravra everei\aro (Magos, whom Cambyses 
appointed steward of his domestic affairs, he gave me these commands). Th. 6, 69. 
a I oliciai rod izpoacrreiov iiraX^eis Xa/xfidvovcrai, avrai v-Ky\p%ov epu/xa. So 
also with the personal pronouns, in which case the pronoun which resumes a 
preceding one, is regularly an enclitic form. Eur. Phoen. 507. e/xol [xev, el k<xI (xtj 
Ka& 'EXXrjuaiv x&dVa re^pdjifie^r' (educati sumus), aXX' otv tvverd /xo i doKe7s Xeyeiv. 



CHAPTER V. 

The Infinitive and the Participle as an Object 
and Attribute. 

§ 305. A. The Infinitive. 

The Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract 
substantive idea, but differs from the substantive in the fol- 
lowing respects : 

(1) The Inf. without the article can be used only as a Nom. 



460 SYNTAX. [$ 306. 

(either as a subject, or in connection with £o-ti(v) as a predicate), 
and as an object in the Accusative ; 

Subject :"E7reTcu tt? aper?7 <r <£ £e cr&a i ets rbj/ 7rAeuo x/ ?0 ' J/0J/ M«^-Aov, ?) tj; /ca/a'a 
(to 6e preserved for a longer time results rather from bravery than cowardice), X. E. 
L. 9, 1. Predicate: Tb Un-nv 5i56uai irdrepou tc6.<jx* iv T ' L etrrii/, ?} 7roieiv; 
PI. Gorg. 464, d. Object: BovXofiai ypdcpeiv. See § 306. 

(2) Yet it so far retains the nature of the verb, as 

(a) It denotes, by different forms, the different circumstances 
of the action : duration, completion, futurity, and has active, 
middle, and passive forms. 

Tpdtyeiv, scribere, yeypacpevcu, scripsisse, ypatyai, scripsisse or scribere (§ 257), 
ypdxpeiv, scriptwum esse ; fiov\eve<r&ai, to deliberate or be advised, jSeySouAevcrd-ai, 
to have deliberated or have been advised, fiovXevaaa&cu, to have deliberated or to de- 
liberate, &ovXev&iivai, to have been advised or to be advised, etc. 

(b) It retains the government of the verb, i. e. it governs the 
same Case as its verb, e. g. Tpdc^eiv liruTToXrjv, i—iSvixziv tt}<s 
apeTrjs, /xd^ecr&ai rots TroXe/xtots; 

(c) It has an adverb for its attributive expletive, and not, as 
in the case of an actual substantive, an adjective, e. g. KaAw? 
aTToSaveiv (on the contrary, koAos Sdvaros). 

The Inf. will first be considered without the article, and then 
with it. 



$ 306. 1. The Infinitive, as an Object, without the 
Article. 

1. The Inf. is used, as the complementary 1 object in the 
Ace, to express something aimed at or effected: — 

(a) With verbs of willing and the contrary (verba voluntatis), 

e. g. (3ov\ofJiai, i$iX(±>, LiiXXw, IitiSvlku), d£ito, $lko.lQ), fyrii), 7rpoS'Vfiov- 
jxat, 7rp6$v(J.6s elfju, kTrv^eipui, TreiptoLiat, fiovXevoixou, 7rapacrK€vdt,ojxat, 
ixrj-^avw/xai, toX/jlQ), v7ro/jLevu), etwS-a, etc. — SeoLiat (to entreat), i/cereixo, 
Trapaivoi, kTrvriXXoi, irapo^vvoi, 7T€i«9co, crvLifiovXevu), vovS^era), KeXevu), 
TrposTaTToo, etc. — itb, (rvy^wpd, d/xeXco, etc. — SeSotKa, (^o^ovjxa-^ 

1 The verbs which take an Infinitive after them, are usually such as do not 
express a complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other con- 
struction, to complete the idea. The Inf.. therefore, is the complement of the 
verb on which it depends. Other verbs take a Participle for their complement. 
See & 309. 



$ 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 461 

cfitvya), avafiaWofxai, SkvCj, etc. — a.7rayopev(D, Kare^a), KojXvoi, etc. ; — 
7]<rv)(iav, Trpd.yp.ara, acr)(a\iav, 6)(Xov Trape^co nvi, i£ov<jiav SiSorai, and 
the like. 

Bov \o fxai y pd(peiv. 'Ett l&v fxSi iropzvea&ai. To\fia> vir o jx4v e iv 
rhi> k(v8vvov. Uapaiva aoi y p d(p e iv. 'Av aft d\Ao p.ai croi air o Kpiv e o~& ai. 
PI. Gorg. 457, e. <po fiovfxai 8 ie\4yx ei " crs - Phaed. 98, d. a/j.€\u> tojwj 
a\7)&u>s alrias \4yeiv. Dem. 01.3. 16, 25. ris av avrbv e-rt /ccuAucret Seupo 
fiadi^e iv ; X. Ag. 1, 7. 'AyncriXaos inretTTT) ao~ %oA.i av avrcp (t<£ ySatnAet) 
vape^eiv arpar^veiu inl rovs "EWyvas. Dem. Chers. 102, 53. 7} <r v x i <*• ^ 
tto lover iv exe'iva) ir parr eiv, on fHovAerai. 

Remark 1. On the difference between the Inf. and the Part, with cuVxu- 
veo~&ai, aldeTcr&cu, Trepiopav, ^px 60 " 1 ^" "? iraveiv, iravTO?ov yiyvea&ai, irapao'Kevd^ea- 
&ai, ireiparrScu, see § 311. Verbs of preventing and hindering, and the like, have 
the following constructions: (a) (not very frequent) Etpyui ae airi4vai. Ov 
KooXvca o-e airi4vai. (b) (usually) EVpyoo ae (x)] airievat according to § 318, 
7: and after a preceding negation: 'Ao-Tvdyns, on 84ono avTov 6 Kvpos, ovSev 
iSvvaro o.vt4x*i- v I^-V ov x a p' c (e°~& a h X. Cy. 1. 4, 2. according to § 318, 9. 
(c) Tov 8 pair er si) e iv (ol 8eo~iroT<xi tovs ot/ceVas) 8eo~/j.o?s air ei pyov o~ i, X. C. 
2. 1, 16. (d) lias ao~Kbs 8vo dvSpas e£ et tov fxrj tear a 5 v va i, X. An. 3. 5, 11. 
(e) (seldom) M4\\oy.ev tovtovs etpyeiv, Sste fxr} Ovv aa& ai fiKdirreiv r)p.as, 
ib. 3. 3, 16. (f) Tbv TzXeiaTov op-iKov rwv ipi\wv elpyov to /jlt) to. iyyvs Trjs 
ttoKscos na.Kovpye'tv, Th. 3, 1. according to § 308, Rem. 1. (g) very fre- 
quently after a preceding negation : Ovk air eixovTO ovd' curb rwv <pi\wv to 
fxr) oi>xl ir\eoveKTz?v nap ainwv iretpaa^ai, X. Cy. 1. 6,32. according to 
§ 318, 9. 

Rem. 2. The verb Trei&eiv,to persuade, regularly takes for its object a sub- 
stantive-sentence, expressed by the conjunction &>s and a finite verb ; it takes 
the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) more seldom. X. C. 1. 1, 1. TroWdxis i&av/j.a<ra, 
Tiart itoTe KoyoLS 'A&rjvaiovs eTreicav ol ypatydfxevoi 'ScoKpaT-nv, wj al-ios e?7] 
SavaTov Trj iroXzi. 

Rem. 3. In order to express more definitely the idea of something which 
is to be done, effected, etc., the Greeks sometimes join the conjunction &sre 
with the Inf. governed by verbs of this class. Her. 7, 6. aveirettre Eep£ea, 
&sTe tto u' e iv TavTa (to do this). Sometimes, also, in order to make the pur- 
pose or object more emphatic, ottos, wj with the Subj., Opt. or Fut. Ind., is 
used. So in Attic prose, the verbs Trpo&v/j.e7cr&ai, 8iavoe?o-&ai, fxrixavaoStai, irapa- 
KeAevecr&ai, Sia/ceAeuecrd-cu, Trapacntevd£ea&ai, are connected with oirccs and the 
Put. Ind. 

(b) With verbs of thinking, supposing, saying, and the con- 
trary (verba cogitandi, putandi, et dicendi), e. g. Aoyt£eo-#ai, 
TjydoScLL, vop.i^iv, iXirL^ew, eu^eo-^at, SoKetv, KCvSvvevtLv, etc. — Aiyetv, 
cpdvai, etc. — dpvetcr^cu (to deny), a-mo-reiv, etc. 

Nop'fu a/xapTelv (I think [to have erred] that I have erred). 'E\irt(co 
evrvxyo- eiv (I hope to be happy). AvT-n y 5J|a Ka\as doitei exei^. Th. 3, 
74. 7] tt6\is iKivSvvevo-e irao-a S tacpSrapyj vai. Aeyco eltievai tuvtu {1 
say [to know] that 1 know this). 

Rem. 4. On the difference between the Inf. and Part, after the verbs 

39* 



462 syntax. [$ 306. 

aKOveiv, eldevai, iTriaracrSrai, fxavSaveiu, yiyvwcKeiv, jxifiv^aKea^ai, Trvv&dueoSai, 
ala&dvea&ai ; ZeiKuvvai, air o<p aiv eiv, SrjXovv, ayyeXXeiv, cpaivea&ai, eoiKevai, see 
§ 311. 

Eem. 5. It will be seen (§ 329), that, after the verbs above mentioned, the 
object may be expressed also by a complete substantive-sentence with &s or on. 

(c) After expressions denoting ability, cause, power, capacity, 
ox fitness (verba facultatis), e. g. o\Wfuxi, Swaros, aSvvaros, olos r. 
el/XL, e^co, (possum) — eartv, Trdpecrnv, c^ecrrtv, evecrrtv (licet) — 7toigj, 
hLairpaTTOfxai Kare.pyd^op.ai, KaraaKevd^o), etc. — Seivos (poiverful, 
capable, fit), Ikclvos, IrriT-qheios, kclkos, tjttcjv, atrtos ei/u, etc.; — after 
verbs of choosing, appointing, naming, educating, teaching. 

AvvafJ.a.1 iroielu ravra. Her. 2, 20. ol errjO'tai 'dvefxoi elo~i atrioi irXrj- 
&veiv rbv irorajxov. 7. 129. avcovv/.LOvs robs aXXovs el v a i iroieei. 5, 97. 
arpar-nybv air od e^avres avrwu elvai TfteXav&iov. OT6s r el/xl iroielv 
ravra. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. ris av aov ye iKavdor e pos irelaai ; 3, 18. 8eiv6- 
r epos 8 i 8 da ice iv. Ho iw ae yeXav. Aioda km ae y pd<p e iv. 

Rem. 6. On -noielv with the Part., see § 310, 4 (b). 

Rem. 7. The relation of the result, the thing to be effected, which is expressed 
by the Inf. with these verbs, is sometimes stated more definitely by adding the 
conjunction cosre. PL Prot. 348, c. aov v ar ov vjxiv, &sre Ylpci3ray6pov 
rovoe ao<pu>rep6v nva kXeaSai. So often in Plat. iKavbs Sisre. X. Ag. 1, 
37. eiroi-naev (sc. Agesilaus), iosr duev (pvyrjs Kal fravdrwv ras iroXeis dia- 
r eXea a i. 

(d) The Inf. is also used after the verb rr^vKevai, after the 
impersonal verbs and phrases Trpos-qKei, irpknei, o-vfi/Satvet, Set, xpy> 
avayKolov, Slkollov, ox^eXt/xov iariv and the like ; after verbs of 
giving, taking, going, sending, and many others ; after adjectives 
of various significations, e. g. agios, $lkcuo<s (worthy, worth), r]8vs, 
paSto?, x aAe7r ^ an d many others ; after abstract substantives, es- 
pecially in connection with elvai and yiyvecrSai, as dvdyicq, eA.7us, 
o-xoX.rj, iopa ecrrlvj to express a purpose or determination, a result 
or effect. 

Th. 4, 61. irecpvKe rb av&pwTreiov Slo. iravrbs dpx* lv (lev rod etnovros, <pv- 
Xaaaea&ai de rb eiriov (men are so constituted as always to rule those who yield, 
but to guard against those who assail). "UKOfxev /Jt.av& due iv (ad discendum). 
Th. 2, 27. ro?s Alyivrjrais ol AaneSai/xovioi eooaav Qvpeav olKelv Ka\ rrjv yrjv 
ve/iea&ai. PI. Apol. 33, b. bfxoiws Kal irXovaicp Kal irevqri Trapex w ^V-avrbv 
epovrav. X. An. 5. 2, 1. rb rj/uLiav rod arparev/naros Kar eXiir e Eevocpwu 
tpvXdrreiv rb arparoiredov. *A£/os eari &av fxd{e a$r ai. Her. 4, 53. 
Bopva&evws iviveabai rjdiaros eari (dulcissimus ad bibendum). 6, 112. reus 
9fv rota i "EXX-nai Kal rb ovvo/xa rb Mr]Swu <p6j3osa.Kovaai (a terror to hear). 

Rem. 8. Homer makes the Inf. depend on adjectives also, to express the 
same relation as is denoted by the Ace. of more definite limitation (§ 279, 7). II. «. 



§ 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 463 

437. &eieii> 8' dvefioiaiv 6p.o7oL {'liriroi) {equal to the winds in speed). In a 
similar manner, the Inf. ehai in the phrase kuwu elvai, must probably be 
explained (witting so far as it depends on my being or nature, as far as depends on 
me. i. e. actually willing). Her. 7, 104. e/ccci/ re eTvai ouS' av /jLovvo/xaxeoi/xi 
(could I have my own choice, or so far as concerns me, I would not fight even in 
single combat). PI. Phaedr. 252, a. ofrev or] en over a elvai ovk diroheiireTai r) 
ipvxv- This phrase is used but seldom in affirmative sentences. 

Rem. 9. As the poets say &avp.a lb~ea&ai (a wonder to see), so also in prose, 
the complementary Infinitive 6 pav, elsopdv and ISeiv, are sometimes 
joined with verbs of appearing and showing one's self X. Cy. 5. 4, 11. (re irrava- 
Sreaao/xevos r]a, otto?6s tls (paivrj loe?v 6 TOLavT-qv ^i>Xh v %X WV (I came to see 
what sort of a looking person you are, you, who have such a soul). 

Rem. 10. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that, instead of the Pass. Inf., it 
commonly uses the Inf. Act. or Mid., with the adjectives mentioned under (c) 
and (d), e. g. Svuar6s, &£los, etc., and with substantives e. g. &avp.a, (p6/3os, and 
with verbs of giving, etc. Such Infinitives, the English translates both actively 
and passively, e. g. Tavra paSid iari /xa&eTv (these things are easy to learn or be 
learned). Ka\6s io~rii/ lb*e7v ( pidcher est visu, he is beautiful to see or to be seen). 
Th. 1. 38. a|zos Sav fxdaaL. PL Phaed. Xoyos Svi/arbs KaT avor\a ai (capable 
of being understood). The active subject of the Inf. is easily supplied, in all 
examples of this kind, e. g. he is beautiful for us to see. A Dat. is often ex- 
pressed with such an Inf., e. g. PI. Rp. 599, a. pdSia iroielv fj.r)v el Son tt\v 
a.Ar)&€iav. So ~2,0}Kparns rrdai irape?x e,/ eavrbu ipoorav (he yielded himself to 
all to question, i. e. he permitted all to question him). 

Re3I. 11. Prom the use of the Inf. after verbs of willing, ivishing, entreating, 
and imploring and the like, the following peculiarities in the use of the Inf. are 
to be explained : 

a. The Inf. is very frequently used in the Epic writers instead of the second 
person Imperative, sometimes also instead of the third person ; instead of the 
second person, not seldom also in other poets, and even likewise in Herodotus 
and in the Attic prose-writers. The Inf. must then be considered as the object 
depending on the Imp. of a verb of willing, which is to be supplied, e. g. £&eAe. 
Hence when predicative expletives are joined with the Inf., these, inasmuch as 
they refer to the subject av contained in the omitted Imp., are put in the Nom. 
The Imp. is also often interchanged with the Inf. Od. a, 290, sqq. voaT-n- 
aas 8rj eireira <piAr)v is Tvarplh'a ya7ai> ar\p.d re oi xeDcu, Kal iirl KTepea Kre- 
pe'i^ai . . .Kal avtpi yvrepa oovvai (and then having returned to your dear father- 
land, heap up a-mound, etc.). II. /3, 75. vjxeis 8' dhAo&ev d\Kos ip-nrveiu iirteaaLV. 
II. (, 89-92. r) Be . . ot£aaa k\t)75i Stvpas Upolo d6/j.oio, rrerrXov . . &e?vai Ad-??- 
uairis iirl yovvaaiv 7)vk6/j.oio. Her. 6, 86. av or) fxoi Kal ra. xP r )l laTa 8e£ai, Kal rdSe 
to. avyfioXa <ra>Ce Aafic&v bs 8' av ix av Ta-vra airaiTer), tovtw dirodovvai (ei 
redde). Th. 5, 9. av 8e, KXeaptda, al<pvi$iws ras irvAas avoi£as iireKSfeTv 
ical irrelyea&ai ws Tax^Ta £vp,/uE,ai. 

b. When the Inf. refers to the third Pers., its subject as well as the accom- 
panying expletives of the predicate, are commonly in the Ace. This Ace. 
with the Inf. is to be considered as the object of a verb of willing, which is to 
be supplied, e. g. evxayai, 80s, iroiei, or of a verb denoting what ought to be. must 
be, e. g. xM> Se?; so with wishes, entreaties, precepts and compacts. II. r>, 179, sq. 
wSe 8e tls errreoTcez/, Idibv els ovpavbv evpvv Zev rrdrep, i) h'iavra Xax^v, V 
TuSeos vl6v, r) avibv fraaiXr)a rroKuxpvaoLO UvKf\vqs I (grant or cause that 
either Ajax may obtain it by lot, etc.). Aesch. Snppl. Sreol iroTCnai, p.r) p.e dovXeias 
rvx^v. X. Ven. 6, 11. rbv 8e k v vny er r\ v i.x 0VTa e|t€>oi iXacppdv 
eV^Ta 67Ti to Kvvriyeaiov , r b v 8e dp Kvwpb v kirea&ai. 

c. Hence the Inf. is sometimes used in reference to the first and second Pers., 
in questions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. 5 fiaaiAev, K6repov \4yeiv irpbs 



464 syntax. [§ 307. 

<re ret, poicav rvyxdvu, $) ffiyap iv t£ irape6vTi XP^ V V >' [shall I speak or be si- 
lent?). Od. k, 431. a Se?Aoi tt^o- 5 ifxev; ri kclkuv l/xeipers tovtwp ; {whither to 
go, i. e. whither are you to yo?). 

d. Finally, the Inf. is used instead of the Opt., with at yap, d&e, as the ex- 
pression of a wish. Od. w, 375, sq. at yap, Zed re ir&Tep . . , rolos ewv toi 
X&iQ>s iv 7)fi€T4pouri 86/j.oicri, revx* eX®" tipouriv, ecpea-Tafie vai Ka\ a/j.vpeiv 
&}>8pas fAvncrrripas. (instead of etyecrrai-nv k. ap.vvoijxi). 



$ 307. Nom., Gen., Dat., and Ace. with the Infinitive. 

1. Most verbs which take the Inf. have, in addition to this 
object, also a personal object, which is put in the Case that the 
verb requires, e. g. Aco/aou <rov eA^eiv. ^,v fJbf3ovXevw aoi 
crco^poveiv. 'Ettotovvco ere /xa^ecr^at. 

Remark 1. So also KeXeieiv, which signifies to impel, to urge, hence to 
command (jubere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Ace. and the 
Inf., e. g. /ceAeuw <re ypa<psiv (jubeo te scribere). 

2. When predicative expletives, consisting of adjectives or sub- 
stantives, and referring to the personal object of the govern- 
ing verb, are joined with the Infinitive, they are either put by 
attraction in the same case as the personal object, or in. the 
Accusative without attraction. 

(a) Gen. with Inf. Aeo/xal <rov it po&i/xov elvai (I beg you to be zealous). 

Aeofxai aou it po&vfxov eluai. X. H. 1. 5, 2. Kvpov 
ibeovro ws it po&v fxor <£t ov Trpbs top TroKefiop yevea&ai 
{begged C. to be as zealous as possible in the war). Her. 6, 
1 00. 'A 3- 7j v a i a> v iSe^rjaav acpiai f}or)&ovs yepecr&ai 
{requested the Athenians to aid them). If the Gen. is fol- 
lowed by the Inf. accompanied by a more definite ex- 
pletive, this expletive is always put in the Ace, e. g. 
Lys. 118. Seofxai v/xa>p Kara^r)cpi(racr^ai (deojxvr\(TTOv, ip- 
&vfj.ov/nepov s, oaos fxoi 6 aywv ianu [I pray you to 
condemn Th., considering, etc.). Th. 1, 120. avdpobv aya- 
&wp i<TTLV, aducov/uepovs e| elprjvrjs iroMjxeip {it is the 
characteristic of brave men, when injured, to exchange peace 
for war). 

(b) Dat. with Inf. 'Xv/n^ovXevco cr o i it p o S v fx co eluai {I advise you to be zeal- 

ous). ~2,vtAfiov\zva) aoi it po&v fxov elvai. X. An. 2. 1,2, 
e5o£e to?s tccv 'E\\-f]P0)u err p aTrjy ol s avaKevacafi- 
epois a slx ov lcc ^ e | o 7r A t a - a p.e u o ls irpoieuai. X. 
Hipparch. 7, 1. iravrl Trpos-iycei apxovri (ppovijxa 
elvai {it becomes every ruler to be prudent). X. An. 1.2, L 
aevia T\K.eiv trapr\yyeiKe \a$6vTa tovs dvZpas {com- 



$ 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 465 

manded Xenias to come, having taken men). 7. 1, 21. vvv 
croi QevTiv avSpl yevea&at. (you can show yourself a man). 
X. Cy. 2. 1, 15. e^e&Tiv vp?v el fiovAea&e, A a/3 6 vt as 
oirXa els k'ivSvvov epfialveiv. 
(c) Ace. with Inf. 'Eitot pvvw <re tt p 6& v p o v elvai. KeAeuw a e irpo'&u-. 
(jlov elvai* 

Rem. 2. The Ace. in the examples under (a) and (b), may be explained by 
considering the object of the governing verb, e. g. deopai vp.a>v, as being at the 
same time the subject of the Inf., i. e. this object stands in a two-fold relation, 
being both the object of the governing verb, and the subject of the Inf. (see 
Eem. 3 ), e. g. Aeopai up.au [v pas] fion&obs yevev&ai (I beg you that you will aid). 

Rem. 3. Verbs which take the simple substantive object, in the Gen. or 
Dat., sometimes take, in the construction with the Inf., this object in the Ace, 
the object of the governing verb and the subject of the Inf. being united in 
one. This construction is used when the ivhole action of a person and not the 
person himself, is made specially prominent, Lys, Fragm. S. 3, p. 144. Seo- 
p. a l ovv vpas avyyv&p-qv eyeiv (I beg therefore that you icould pardon). Th. 4, 
97. irpoayopevca avTovs eV tov lepou air l6vt as airo<pepecr&ai rd acperepa 
avrwv (instead of avro7s airiov&iv airocp.), I give orders that they, going out of the tem- 
ple, should carry their effects with them. So irapayyeWw, airayyeXXoo, TvposraTTco, 
SiaKeKevopai <re cnvievai. X. C. 4. 7, 1. HooKpaTvs avr dptceis ev ra?s irpos-qKOv- 
o~ais irpd^eaiv aur ovs (robs 6 piXovvT as avr<S) elvai i tv e p e A e It o. So also 
the verbs e I it e ?v, A e y e i v , cp p d (e i v, (p a> v e tv in the sense of jubere, are con- 
structed with the Ace. and the Inf., in the Attic poets. S. Ph. 101. \eyco a y iyeb 
SoAw $L\0KTrjT7]v Kafietv. Also ir p o s /? ic e i, ir p eirei, e£ eari, crvpfiaivei, 
£vp<popov io-ri with Dat. or Ace. ivith Inf., Set, xpv (§ 279, Rem. 4). The 
Ace. is necessary, when the statement in the sentence does not refer to a 
definite person, but is altogether general in its nature. PI. Ion. 539, e. ovk av 
irpeiroi ye i ir i Kr\ <r p ova elvai patycadav &vdpa (it icould not be fitting that 
a rhapsodist should be forgetful). 

3. Besides the case already mentioned, the Ace. with the 
Inf. is used in Greek, as in Latin, in the following case also. 
When a subject with its predicate, as c O dya#os dvrjp euoai/Aovei, 
is made the object of our thought or will, the subject is put in 
the Ace. (tov ayaSbv avSpa) and the predicate in the Inf. (evSac- 
jxovetv, e. g. No/xt£co tov aya&bv avSpa evSat/ji ov el v (I believe 
that the good man is happy). If the predicate is an adjective, 
participle, or substantive with dvou ytyvea^at, etc. (§ 240, 2), as 
c O ayaSbs avrjp evSac/juov eo-Tiv, then these words also are put in 
the Ace, e. g. No/ai^w tov ayaSbv avSpa evSatfiova elvat. 

4. But when the subject of the governing verb is at the same 
time the subject of the Inf. also, the subject of the Inf. is not 
expressed in Greek, as it is in Latin, by the Ace. of a personal 
pronoun, but is wholly omitted ; and when adjectives or sub- 
stantives stand with the Inf. as expletives of the predicate, 
they are put, by attraction, in the >7om. 



466 syntax. [§ 307. 

Crtofxai a/xaprelv (I believe I have erred, or that I have erred, credo me errasse). 
Oi'et a/xapreTv (you think that you have erred). OUrat aixapreiv. OlSfx&a a/xapruv. 
0'iop.at evSal/xwv elvai (I think lam happy, or that I am happy, credo me beatum 
esse). Oi'et e vS ai /xoo v thai. Oterai evdai/xwv elvai. OiS/xeSra tvdaljxo ves 
clvai. 'O (TTpaTTjybs ecpr] irpoSv fxo s elva.i iirifiori&tlv. 

Rem. 4. If. however, Avhere the subject of the goveiming verb and of the Inf. 
is the same, the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is particularly 
the case in antitheses, then the Ace. with the Inf. is used, as in Latin, e. g. Her. 
2, 2. ol AlyviTTioi evofxi^ov e cc vr ov s irp&TOvs yevea&ai irdvrwv av&pd!>Trwv (se, non 
alios homines). 1, 34. KpoTaos iv6/xi(e ecovrbv elvai irdvTwv oXfiicaTaTov. But 
instead of eavr6v, where there is a contrast between persons, avr6s (= se 
ipsum) is likewise used, by attraction. Her. 7, 136. Eep^-ns ovk ecprj 6/xolos ecreaSrai 
AaKedai/iLouioKXi • Keivovs /xev yap ffvyx.4ai rh irdvrwv dv&pwTrwv vS/xi/xa, airon- 
Teivavras K-tipvKas, avrbs (ipsum instead of se ipsum) be ravra ov iroi-f)o-eiv. 
Th. 4, 28. KA.eW ovk £<pri avTos, &AA.' eKeivov (NiKiav) crrpaT-nydv. So also by 
means of attraction the personal pronouns iy<a, av, rj/xels, v/xe?s, cr(pe7s, are 
joined with the Inf. 'Eirofxvva) o~oi . . ?) fx^v iyco fiov\ecr&cu av fxera aov (airo- 
havziv), I swear to you that I would rather, etc., X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. El o'/ecd-e Xa\Ki5- 
eas ttjv 'EWdBa awffeiv, v/xe7s 8' airoSpdaecr&ai rd irpdy/xara, ovk op&as olea&e. 
Dem. Ph. 3, § 74 (if you think that the Chalcidians will save Greece, and that 
you will escape the trouble of it, etc.). (Ol iv 2a/xw €<paffav) tt6\iv atyiaiv virdpxeiv 
~2,dfxov ovk acrSrevrj . . kcu Swa^wTepoi elvai acpels . . iropifcar&ai to e7nT7]deia 
twv iv rfj ir6\et, Th. 8, 76. — Sometimes the enclitic pronouns are used without 
any special emphasis. PI. Pp. 400, b. ol/xai /x e aK-nKo4vai. — When the governing 
verb has an object, and this object is at the same time the subject of the Inf. also, 
then the Inf. merely (without the Ace.) is used, but the predicative expletives 
are put in the same case as this object. OvS' av r ovrois eirio-Tevov e fx- 
ixSvois ea eff&ai, X. Cy. 3. 3, 55 (/ would not even trust these that they will be 
steadfast). OiSecl avStpwiruv vcpeifx-nv av ovre fieAriov ov^ T)Oiov i/xov /3e- 
j8 look ivai, X. C. 4. 8, 6 (to no one would 1 grant that he had lived better, etc.). 
When the object of the governing verb is also the object of the Inf., this also is 
used only in the first place, but is omitted in the second. 2a>/cpar7?s, e<pT) 6 
KaT-ftyopos, tovs irarepas irpoTrr]AaKi£eiv eSiScunce, iret&eav /xev rovs cvvovTas 
avrcf) aocpevrepovs iroizlv rwu Tvarepwv, X. C. 1.2,49 (persuadens discipulis suis,se 
eos sapientiores reddere patribus). 

5. When the governing word is an oblique Case of a parti- 
ciple, the predicative expletives which are connected with the 
Inf., are put, by attraction, in the same Case as that participle. 

PI. Apol. 21, b. -fiA&ov eiri riva twv Sokovvtodv aocpwv elvai (veniebam ad 
aliquem eorum, qui se sapientes esse opinabantur). Her. 1, 176. twv vvv AwiW 
(pafxeycav p.avSiwv elvai ol nroWoi eiai iirrjXvo'es (eorum Lyciorwm, qui se 
Xanthios esse dicebant). X. Cy. 6. 1, 34. (Kvpos aveyeXaaev) iirl tu> Kpelro- 
vi rod eparos (pdaKovTi thai (at the one affirming that he was above the influ- 
ence of love. 

6. The Ace. with the Inf., like the Inf. alone, is used after the 
following classes of verbs and expressions : (a) of willing and 
the contrary [$ 306, 1, (a)] ; (b) of thinking, believing, saying 
[$ 306, 1, (b)] ; (c) of causing, choosing, appointing, naming 



$ 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 467 

[$ 306, 1, (c)] ; (d) after impersonal verbs and expressions sig- 
nifying must, ought, should, it happens, e. g. Set, irposr]K€.i, 7rpe7ra, 
e^eoriVy €7n€LK€s, kolXov, k<xkov (etc.) icTTtv, (Tvixf3atveL. 

'Ao'Tvdyns fiovAo [X€vo s rbv ircuSa us rjdKTTa S e lit v elv rrposriyayes avr§ 
iravTo^aira f5p&(xaTa, X. Cy. 1. 3. 4. Nofxi^oo vfxas ef.iol eTvai Kal irarpida Kal 
(pi\ovs Kal av/x/xaxovs, X. An. 1.3, 6. 'EAttl^oj eiceiuovs eA&etV Trpbs ah 
(xaWov, ? /) irpbs e/xe, X. Cy. 2. 4, 15. Tbv fxiaSbv vir iv x v *^ T ° civtoTs oAi- 
yuv rj/xepwv e kttX e w v irape ere a" 3- at, X. An. 7, 5,9. Tbu fieu Ka\bv /ca- 
7 a 3- by cii>5pa evSal/iova eTvai <pr)/xi rbv Kal irovripbv 'a&Xiov, PL 
Gorg. 407, e. KpetTTOv (sc. eari) crbi/ iro\\o?s oIkovv t a ao~(paKws apKovvTa 
e^eti', 3) fxo vou S lair w [xevov ra twc ttoXitoov iniKivovucus irdvTa Ke kttj or- 
&oi, X. C. 2. 3. 2. 

Rem. 5. With the impersonal verbs and expressions above mentioned, the 
.Ace. wii/i the Inf. is not to be regarded as the grammatical object, but as the 
grammatical subject of the sentence ; but logically, i. e. in respect to the sense, 
the Ace. with the Inf. must even here be regarded as the object, and the im- 
personal expressions as transitive verbs, e.g. AoKe7 /xoi (= vo/xifa) Kdpou 
o-ocpdoTaTov yeveo-frai. Thus it can also be explained why the Greeks and Lat- 
ins in quoting a phrase, e. g. evdaifxova ehai, felicem esse, $aai\£a ehai, regem. 
esse, use this construction. 

- Rem. 6. The Greeks are fond of changing the impersonal construction into 
the personal, by elevating the object into a subject, making the impersonal 
expression personal, and referring it to the person of the subject. By this 
construction, the subject is rendered prominent ; while in the construction of 
this Ace. with the Inf. the whole idea of the sentence is made the principal 
thing. This is the case: (a) with AeyeT ai, ayy4 A Aercu, o /xoKoyelT ai 
and the like; (b) with SoKel, it seems; (c) with <r vfxfiaiv ei, accidit ; where 
this last verb is used personally, the subject stands before it. while with the 
Ace. and the Inf., it follows the verb; (d) in the phrases diKaiov, d^iov, 
iirioo^ov, o vvarou, afxrix av ov, %aAe7rc)j/ iariv, etc.; (e) in the phrase 
roaoiirou Se'w with the Inf. followed by wsre with the Inf. or Ind. (tantum 
abest, ut — wi) so far is it from, and iroWov Sew with the Inf. 

AeyeTai rbv jSctCiAea airotpvysiv and A ey era i 6 (3 a a iXev s airocpvyeTv. 
X. Cy. 5. 3, 30. 6 'Acrcrv p ios els ttjv x^P av efxfidkkeiv ay yeKXeT ai. Her. 
3, 124. eSoKei oi rbv irarepa XovcrSai fxev virb rod Aios, xptecr&cu Se virb rod 
'HXiov. X. An. 3. 1,21. AeAucr^ cu fxoi Soicei /ecu i] i-Keivcov v fi p i s Kal 7] rj /x ere' pa 
viroipia. PI. Phaed. 74, a. ap o l v ov Kara irdura ravra a v /xfi ai v e i t )\v avd- 
fxvr) <r iv dual /xev dc/>' 6/xolcvv kt\. 67, c. k d&apo~ is thai ov tovto £v/x&aive i. 
— A i icaios ei/xi tovto ivparreiv instead of oiKaiov eVrt ^te tovto irpdmiv. A i - 
Kai6s el fx i eiuai i\ev&epos. Her. 6, 12. e 5 7rt8o|ot rwvrb tovto -rreio-eo-^ai elo~i. 
X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. a 1 10 i y£ £o fxev tov yeyeurjfxeuov irpdyfxaTOS tovtov diro\avaai ri 
aya&ov. Isocr. Paneg. 76, 168. t oo~ ovt ov deovaiu e'AeeTv, wstc Kal (xaWou 
Xo-ipovoiv iivl tois aKKiiKcov KaKoTs (so far are they from pitying ,- that they rather 
rejoice even, etc.). 

Rem. 7. The personal construction with the verbs So/ce?*/, ioiKtvai, Ae'-yecr&cu 
and the like, extends also to clauses with w s, expressing comparison, as is the 
case in Latin with ut videor, ut videris. etc., instead of ut videtur. PI. Rp. 426, b. 
ovk iiraiveTTis el, ecpnv eyev, ws eoiKas, rwv toiovtoou dfSpwf (you do not praise, as 
it seems [instead of as you seem] such men). X. An. 1. 10, 18. 1)o~ai>- 5' <x5tcu, ws 
iXeyovTo, TeTpaicoffiai afxa^ai (these chariots were four hundred, as it was said). 
6. 3, 25. ol Tcohejxiot. Se', 5s f rjpuu iddKovv, tovto SetVo^Tes air9j\&ov. 



468 syntax. [$ 308. 

Eem. 8. On the Ace. with the Inf. in exclamations, see § 308, Rem. 2. On 
tin and us after verba sentiendi and dicendi, see § 329. 



§ 308. II. Infinitive with the Article. 

1. The Inf. with the article is treated in all respects like a 
substantive, and, indeed, is such, since, by means of the article, 
it can be declined through all the Cases, and is capable of ex- 
pressing all the relations, which are indicated by the Cases of 
the substantive with and without prepositions. On the contrary, 
it here also, as in the Inf. without the article [§ 305, (2)], re- 
tains the nature of a verb. 

(a) Tb ypdcpeiv, rb ypd\pai, rb yeypa<pevai, rb ypdtyeiv. (b) Tb iiriffro- 
\}jv ypdcpeiv, rb rrjs aperrjs iiri^vixeiu, rb ro7s iroXefiio i s fj-dx^c^ai. 
(c) Tb ica\us ypdcpeiv, rb KaXus airo&ave'iv {honorable death). Yet pronouns 
in the Neut. Sing., as attributive adjectives, are joined with the Inf., e. g. Plat. 
abrb rb airo£rvr)o~Keiv. By prefixing the article, whole sentences can be 
represented as one extended substantive-idea. 

2. "When the Inf., whether as a subject or object, has a sub- 
ject of its own and predicative expletives, both the subject and 
expletives, as in the case of the Inf. without the article, are put 
in the Ace, because the Inf., even as a subject, is considered 
dependent (§ 307, Rem. 5). When, however, the subject of the 
Inf. is not different from the principal subject of the sentence, 
it is not expressed, and the predicative expletives are put, by 
attraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the 
sentence, i. e. in the Nom. 

(a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. rb afxaprdveiv avfrpdoirovs 
ovras ovoev, oTjxai, Sravfiacrrov (that men constituted as they are should e?r, is not 
strange) ; here rb a\x.aprdveiv which is the subject of ear I, has av&pdmovs for its 
own subject, and ovras as its predicative expletive. 7. 5, 82. ob rb /jltj A a - 
jSetj/Ta aya&a ovru ye xa^^v, wsirep rb Aa/3 our a o-reprj^rrjvai \v- 
irr)p6v. 

(b) Genitive : (a) as the object of verbs and adjectives or as an attributive 
of a substantive. X. An. 1. 3. 2. KXeapxos fxiKpbv i^eepvye rov/j.7] Kar arr er- 
pwhr\vai (just escaped being stoned to death). Cy. 1. 4, 4. as Se irporjyev 6 
Xpdvos aorbv (rbv Kvpov) o~vv rep /jieyeSei els wpav rod it post] /3 ov yeveafrui 
(as time advanced him to the period of [becoming a man] manhood) ; here the Inf 
yevea&ai, which is used as an object in the Gen., has its predicative expletive 
irp6sT]fiov in the-4.ee. 1.5, 13. ri oiv eariv 1) rov aAe'£a<r<d-cu hiKaiorepov, t) 



$ 308.] INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 469 

rod ro7s <pl\ois ap-fjyeiv KaAAiov ; C. 1, 2, 55. 'ZcoKpdrrjs irapeKaAei eiripieA- 
ctcr&at rod &s <p pov ip. ct>ra-Tov elvai Kal a> (pe Ai/xccTar o v. Very fre- 
quently tov, tov p.i\ is used to denote a purpose, object: in order that, in order* 
that not [§ 274, 3, (a) J, since by the language, as is frequently the case, that 
which calls forth the action, is substituted for that which is to be done, or for 
the result. Th. 1, 4. Mivws to ArjariKOv Ka&rjpei £k tt?s &aAa<r(T7)s rod ras 
?i r cs68ovs piaAAov levai abr<p (in order that his revenues might come in bet- 
ter). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ol tuv fiacriAewv o\vo%6oi els ttjv apiarepav (o'tvov) eyx*dp.e- 
voi KaTafipocpovcri, tov 5tj, el (po.pp.aKa eyx^oiev, p.}) Avo~ ireAeTv avTOis (in 
order that it may not be well for them, if they mingle poison with it). 6, 40. to v p.ij 
8 lacpevyeiv tov Aaywv £k twv Siktvcov o-kottovs Ka&iaT-ns. (P) With prepo- 
sitions, e. g. a v t i, instead of, or in the sense of the Latin tantum abest, ut — ut, 
£ k, from, in consequence of, p. era, in connection with, irp6, for, ir e pi, in order that, 
especially eveKa and virep in connection with p.-f], in order that not, in order 
not; also &vev and x w P^> without, p.expt(s), until. Th. 1, 69. avrl tov 
£ireA&e?v (invadere) avrol ap,vveo-&ai flovAeo'&e p.aAAov eirtSvTas. X. H. 3. 
4, 12. 6 ' ' Kyrja'iAaos olvtI tov eiri Kapiav lev at, ev^rvs TavavTia airocrTpexj/as 
eiri Qpvyias eiropeveTo. Hier. 4, 3. 8opv<popovo~iv eiri tovs KaKovpyovs virep tov 
p. 7) 5 e v a tcov ttoAitcov fiiaicp SravaTcp air o&vn ff k e iv. 

(c) Dative : (a) As the object of single verbs and adjectives, e. g. airio~ru>, 
TTLo-TevQ), eowa, opotos, avavTios, very often as the instrumental Dat. X. Ap. 14. 
airiaTovcri rip ep.e r er i p.r\ o~ Sai virb 8aip.6vav (do not believe in my having been 
honored, that I have been honored). PL Phaed. 71 , c. t <£ (yv iari ti evavTiov, &sirep 
rip eypriyopevai to KaSevSeiv ; (is there something opposite to living ; as sleeping 
is to waking). X. Hier. 7, 3. doxe? tovtw Siacpepeiv avrjp tS>v dAAcav ^cccov , t <p 
TipLTJs op eyea&ai (seems to differ from other animals in this, that), (fi) With 
prepositions: ev, in, eiri, on the condition that, in order that, because, trp6s, 
besides. PL Gorg. 456, e. irapedoffav eiri TcpdiKa ices xpy°~& al tovtois 
(to?s SirAois) irpbs tovs iroAep.iov<> (they put them [arms] into their hands in order 
that they might use them aright). S. Aj. 554. ev t $ (ppovetv — ^Slo-tos pios. 

(d) Accusative : (a) Sometimes as the object of transitive verbs. PL Gorg. 
522, e. avTO to airo&vJ]0~ Keiv obdeTs cpofieTrai (no one fears death itself). 
(/3) With prepositions: eiri, els, ir p 6 s, in order that, in order to, in relation to, 
Kara, in relation to, irapd, in comparison, especially 5 id, on account of because 
that. X. C. 1. 2, 1. 2w/cpaT7js 7rpos to p.erpicav 8e?cr&ai ireirai8evp.evos (^v) 
(was trained to have moderate desires). Cy. 8. 1,3. p.eyio-Jov ay a&bv to irei&apxe'iv 
(paiveTai els to KaT air paT t e iv Ta aya&d. With attraction : X. Ven. 12, 
21. 7/ apeTi] iravTaxov irdpecTTi Sia to etvai a&dvaro s (on account of its 
being immortal, because it is immortal) ; here aSdvaros is attracted into the 
case of aperf, instead of being in the Ace. Cy. 1. 4, 3. 6 Kvpos diet, to (piAo ■ 
p.a^r]S elvai iroAAa tovs irapSvTas avrjpc&Ta, Kal oaa ai>Tbs 07r' dAAwv (sc. avr\- 
pwTaTo), Sia to ayx'i-vovs elvai Ta%o aireKpiveTo (because he was fond of 
learning). 

Remark 1. Many verbs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con- 
structed with an Inf. merely, sometimes take also the Inf. with the article t 6, 

40 



470 SYNTAX. \j 309. 

even when they would have their ohject. if a substantive, in the Gen. The 
addition of the article gives greater emphasis to what is expressed by the Inf. 
X. C 3.6,6. t b irhovaiwrepau rr\v ttoAiv tt o i e7v auafi a A o v p. e£a. Th. 3. 1. 
rbv 7rAe?(TTOj/ o/xihov ruv \pi\£>v eTpyov rb [x^ ra iyyvs rr\s ttoAsus Kanovp- 
yc?v {etpyeiv rwd tivos). But when a preposition precedes an Inf., the article 
can never be omitted, because then the Inf. becomes an actual verbal substan- 
tive. 

Rem. 2. As the Ace. of a substantive, so also the Inf. with the Ace. of the 
article, is used in exclamations and questions implying indignation. In poetry, 
however, the article is sometimes omitted Avith the Inf. X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. i:ce?vos 
iravv avia§e\s elirs irpbs kavrov Trjs ti>xvs, rb i/xe vvv K\t)&4vra devpo 
r t»x e ' v ! {that I have just now been called hither !). "Without the article : Aesch. 
Eum. 835. i/j.e rrafreTv rdde, (pev, efit iraXaiocppova Kara, yav olne7v, arte- 
rov, <pev, ixvaos ! 

Rem. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in which 
the article to is placed before the Inf thai which stands in connection with an 
adverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as adverbial 
Accusatives. See § 279, Rem. 10. The Inf. elvai denotes a state or condition, 
e. g. rb vvv elvai, the present state, condition, and as an adverbial expression, 
with respect to, or according to the present state of affairs, pro praesenti temporis 
conditione ; rb r 77 pepov elvai, pro hodierni diei conditions. X. An. 1. 6, 9. 
rb Kara rovrov elvai {so far as he is concerned). H. 3. 5, 9. rb jnec in' 
e iceivois elvai airoXdiKare {so far as it depends on them). 



$309B. The Participle. 

1. The Participle represents the idea of the verb as an adjective 
idea, and is like the adjective, both in its form and in its attrib- 
utive use ; for it has three genders, and the same declension as 
the adjective, and cannot, more than the adjective, be used in- 
dependently, but must always depend upon a substantive, and 
hence agrees with it in Gender, Number, and Case. The Par- 
ticiple denotes either an active or passive condition, but the 
adjective, a quality. 

2. On the contrary, the participle differs from the adjective, 
in retaining, like the Inf., the following properties of the verb : 

(a) The participle has different forms to denote the different 
circumstances of the action : duration, completion, and futurity, 
e. g. ypdcfuDv, writing, yeypa^w?, ypa.il/a9, one who has ivritten, ypdxp- 
<x>v, one who will ivrite (§ 257, Rem. 3) ; 

(b) The participle has Act., Mid., and Pass, forms, e. g. ypdij/- 
as, ypa\f/apLevos, ypacpets. 

(c) The active and middle (deponent) participle governs the 
same Case as its verb, e- g. ypdcfmov i-TrLcrroXyjv, km^vpiwv rrj<s 
ap€TYJs, fxa^op.evo'S rots 7roXe/xtots. 



$ 310.] THE PARTICIPLE. 471 

3. The participle is used as follows : — 

(a) Either as an immediate attributive qualification of a sub- 
stantive, e. g. 6 ypacpwv 7rats or 6 7rats 6 ypdcpwv, the writing 
boy ; or in connection with eti/at, as a predicate ($ 238, Rem. 5), 
e. g. to poSoi/ avSovv eo-rtv (£4e rase zs blooming). 

(b) As the complement of the verb, e. g. e Opu rw 7ra?8a 
rpe^ovra. 

(c) To denote such an attributive qualification of the sub- 
stantive as is expressed in English by placing the participle 
after the substantive, or by the relative who, which, and the 
verb, e. g. Tvvrj ns opvtv el^e kolS iKaarr]v rj/xepav wov avrrj r lkt ov- 
er a v {alien laying, or which laid an egg daily). 

(d) To denote, adverbially, subordinate qualifications of the 
principal action, e. g. Kvpos yeASv earey (said laughing, or 
laughingly). 

Remark. As the use of the participle, mentioned under 3, (a), is explained 
in §§ 264, 1. and 238, Rem. 7, and as No. (c) has no further difficulty, only the 
usage mentioned under 3, (b) and (d) now remains to be considered. 



§310. I. The Participle as the complement of the verb. 

1. As the participle is an attributive, and consequently ex- 
presses an action as already attached or belonging to an object, 
only those verbs can take a participle for their complement 
which require, as a complement, an action, in the character of 
an attribute, so attached or belonging to an object, that this 
object appears in some action or state. The action or state de- 
noted by the participle is, therefore, usually prior to that denoted 
by the verb with which it is connected, sometimes coincident. 

2. The construction is here evident. The Participle agrees 
in Case with the substantive-object of the principal verb, 
this object being in the Case which the principal verb re- 
quires. 'A/couw ^o)Kpa.TOV<s and rjKOVcra. 7rore ^oiKparovs 7repl 
<fiiX.(x>v StaXeyopievov. Xaipco o"ot and ^aipco crot eA^o'vn. 
'Opo) avS-pcoTrov and opw avS peenrov rpe^oi/ra. 

3. But when the subject of the principal verb is at the same 
time its object also, as Oi6a (eyeb) e/^aurw SvrjTbv ovtcl, then the per- 
sonal pronoun, which would denote the object, is omitted, and 
the participle is put, by means of attraction, in the same Case 



472 SYNTAX. f$ 310. 

as the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the Nom. (Comp. 
$ 307, 4), e. g. olSa SvrjTos &v. For more examples, see No. 4. 

Remark 1. Yet the Ace. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the 
object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is to be 
made emphatic. Comp. § 307, Rem. 4. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. ovx, a Kpeirrwv jjSei #*/, 
ravra TvpovKaXeiro robs avuSuras, a/\A' aivep ev tjSei eavrbv rjrroua out a, ravra 
i£?ipxe. 5, 10. irepie7Sov avrovs yf]pa aSvvdrovs y euo /xe vov s {they pemnitled 
themselves to become enfeebled by old aye). 

Rem. 2. With vivo id a, o- vyy iyvd> a- kw 4fj.avT<p, the participle can 
either refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun 
which stands with the verb ; if the participle refers to the subject, it is put in 
the Nom., if to the pronoun, in the Dat., e. g. crvvoida (avyyiyvcoo-Kw) e/Aavrcj> ev 
Troi-fjaas or o-vvoiSa efxavrw ev iroi-ho-avri (I am conscious that I have done well), PL 
Apol. 21, b. eyib £vvoi8a ifxavrq) a o <pb s &v (I am conscious that I am ivise). 
22, d. 4/j.avTcp £vvrjdeiv ovSev iir i err a/xe vie. But when the subject is 
not at the same time the object, but is different from the object, then the object 
with its participle is either put in the Dat., e. g. crvvoibd croi ev iroi-haavri, — - 
X. S. 4, 62. Ti fxoi crvv oicr&a roiovrov eipyatr pt,eva> ; {quid me tale commisisse 
scis ?), or (though more seldom) the substantive is put in the Dat., but the partici- 
ple in the Ace, e. g. eyco a o i crvvoiba eviroir)cravTa. X. 0. 3, 7. ey<x> a o i vi- 
vo id a eir\ fiev kco^wSoov &eav kcu irdvv irpcat aviardfxevov, koX irdvv uiKpav 6Dbv 
@ab"i£ovra teal i/xe avaireiSovra irpo&v/uws crvv&eao~&ai. Also Xav&dvca 
efxavrbv ttoiwv r i {I conceal myself doing something, i. e. / do something secretly). 
X. An. 6. 3, 22 (ol hnrels) eAa&ov avrovs eirl ra> \6(pu> yev6 p.evoi (reached 
the height unobserved). — With ioitcevai, to appear, to seem, to be like, and 
o/xoiov elvai, the participle in relation to the subject, sometimes stands in 
the Nom., though more frequently in the Dat., and with o/xoiov elvai, in the Dat. 
almost without an exception. X. H. 6. 3, 8. e oik are rvpavviai fxaXXov r) tto~ 
Xireiais r)S6fxevo i. An. 3. 5, 13. o/xoioi fjcrav Srav /xd^ovr es. PL Menon. 
97, a. ofioioi ecr/xev ovk dp&a>s a> [xoXoy-q ko cr i. Rp. 414, C eoiicas, ecpr), 
qkv ovvr i Xeyeiv. See § 311, 9. 

4. The verbs and expressions, with which the participle is 
used as a complement, are the following : — 

(a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the 
senses or by the mind, e. g. opav, aKoveiv, elSivat (to know), eTuo-- 
rao-d-at (to know), p.av^dvetv (to perceive), yiyvoia-Ke.iv (to know), iv 
S-vpLecoSaL (to consider), 7rvv$dv€cr3-cu (to perceive), olcrSdvecrS-ai, 
pLLpLvrjo-KcaSou, l—i\G.v$av€<r$ai, etc. 

Th. 1, 32. 7]fie7s adv varoi opocifxev ovres TrepiyevecrSrai (we see that we 
are unable, etc.). 'Opw ere r pexovr a. 'AKoveiv with the Gen. when one 
hears with his own senses, or with the Ace. when one learns by hearsay. 
X. C. 2. 4, 1. ^Kovcra 1,wKpdrovs trepl <piXav 8 laXeyo fievov (I heard 
Socrates discoursing concerning friends). H. 4. 8, 29. IJKovcre rbv Qpacrv- 
fiovXov irpos lo.vra (he heard that. Tlirasybulus was coming). Cy. 1.4,25. 
Kafj-fivo-ns "qKOvcrev a.vb'pbs tfdr) epya $ tax* ip i(6fxevov rbv Kvpov. 
Old a &vr)rbs cov (I know that I am mortal). OlSa &v& pair ov &vnrbv 
ovra. Her. 3, 1. <2 fiacriXev, 8 i afiefiArj/A ev o s virb 'A/xdo-ios ov pav&dve is ; 
(do you not see that you have been deceived?). 40. 7)8v nvv& a ueo~&ai &i/8pa 






§ 310.] THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 473 

<pi\ov kcl\ £e?vov e 3 ir pj]ff o* out a. X. Cy. 1.1,2. &v&p(airoi eV ovSevas /j.a\\ov 
avularai/rai, ?) eVt rovrovs, ovs av a'tafravTai dpx^v avrwv iir i^e ip ovvras 
(whom they know are endeavoring to rule them). With the Gen. [§ 273, 5, (e)l. 
4. 4, 11. fj (r&7]ff a i ovv irwirore fxov ^/evdo/xapTvpovi/Tos r) crv ko <pav- 
tovvt o s. 

(b) Verba dcclarandi, i. e. verbs which signify to declare, to 
show, to make clear, and the like, e. g. SeiKvvvai (to show, to ex- 
hibit), SrjXovv, SrjXov iroietv, cpaivew (to show), (patveoSac (to show 
one's self, apparere), SrjXov and cpavepbv etuat, iXey^eiv, i^eXiy^etv, 
(to prove, to convict), oWlo-kgo-Sou (to be convicted), itoiCiv {to rep- 
resent), tvpLo-Keiv (to find), etc. 

PI. Phaed. 101, c. r) tyvxr] a&dvaros 4>alve7ai ova 1 a (the soul appeals to be 
immortal). Her. 6, 21. ''AS-nvaloi 8r)\ov eirolrjcrav u7re pax&* o~&4vre s rrj 
MiXyrov aKdtxrei (made it evident that they were exceedingly grieved on account of the 
capture of Miletus). Isocr. Evag. 190, d. ro7s Troivraiis robs &e ob s otov r earl 
tv o i ?] a a i h a\ 8 ia\eyo /xeyovs kcu ffwayooui^o^ivovs, ols av fiou\r)§a>- 
o~iv (the poets can represent the gods both conversing, etc.). Dem. Aph. 1. 819, 20. 
paSicos i\eyx&ycr er ai \p ev§ 6 p.<=vo s (ivill easily be convicted [that he falsifies] 
of falsehood, or if he falsifies). 

Rem. 3. Instead of the impersonal phrases SrjXov ian, (pavepov ian, cpaiverai, 
apparet, the Greek uses the personal construction (comp. § 307, Hem. 6), e. g. 
b~rj\6s 6i" i, <pav e po s eijui, (paivo /uai r-)]v irarpida ev iroir) a as (I am evi- 
dent having done well, i. e. it is evident that I have done well for my country). X. 
An. 2. 6, 23. o~r 4 pycov cpavepbs p.zv r) v ovtieva, orw 8e cpairj (piAos elvcu, tovtco 
evS-nAos eyiyvero inr ifiovAevcov (he ivas evident loving no one, i. e. it teas 
evident that he loved, etc.). PI. Apol. 23, d. KardS-nXoi ylyvovrai irpos- 
tto to v fxevo i /xev elSevai, e 1 8 o t e s Se ovSev. 

(c) Verba affectuiim, i. e. verbs which denote an affection or 
State of the mind, e. g. yaiptiv, 7/Seor5ai, ayaAAecr^ai, ayarrav (to be 
content), a^ea^at, dyava/creu/, cuSeto-#ai and alo-yyveoSai (to be 
ashamed) , pLerapieXeia^at, pierapceXeL, opyi£ecr$at, fiapvvecrSai, paStcos, 
^aXeTrcos (pepetv, etc. 

X. IT. 6. 4, 23. 6 &ebs noWatas x a ' l P el ro ^ s P^ v pucpovs fieyd\ovs iroiwv, 
tous Se /xeyaAovs piKpovs (rejoices io make the small great). Hier. 8, 4. SiaAey^/i- 
ei/oi re ayaA\6/j.e&a to?s irpoT^TLiJ.r\jxivoLs fxaWov, t) to7s £k too 'io-ov r)fuv 
oven (we are proud to converse with, those preferred in honor, etc.). Th. 1, 77. adt- 
Kov(j.evoi ol 'dvbpoDiroi. fxaWov bpyi(ovTcu, r) ^ia(6fM€VO i (men are more 
indignant when they are injured than when they suffer violence). 4, 27 (ol 'ASr-nvcuoi) 
p.tr e /x4 Xour o ras o-TTovo'as ov oe^dfieuoi. 5.35. tous e/c rr]s vr\o~ov Sea- 
p.u)Tas /.izTtfxeXoi/TO airoS e S co k6 t e s. Eur. Hipp. 8. rificafievoi x a ' L ' 
povffiv (ol §eo\) avSpuTTcw' biro (rejoice to be honored). Xatpoo aoi £\&6vt i 
(I rejoice that you have come). PL Rp. 475, b. inrb (rpiKporepoov kqX (pavXorepwv 
r i/xw fxevoi ay air Si a iv. 

40* 



474 SYNTAX. [§310. 

(cl) Verbs signifying to be satisfied with, to be pleased ivith, to 
enjoy, to be full of e. g. reprreaS^ac, i/jLTTLTrXacrSai, jxearbv ctrai, and 
the like. 

Od. a, 369. vvv fxev Zaivvp.evoi t epirdo p,e&a (let us delight ourselves in 
feasting). II. cc, 633. eVel r dpirr)o~av is aXXrjXovs opdcovres (when they were 
satisfied at looking at each other). S. 0. C. 768. /xeffrbs r) v hvp.ovp.evos. 
Eur. Ion. 924. ov toi crbv &x4iroiv ip.iriTvXap.ai it p6 soottov. Her. 7, 146. 
ineav ravra &wev p.evo i e co a t TrXrjp e es. 

(e) Verbs signifying to overlook, to permit, to endure, to per- 
severe, to continue, also to be iveary, to be exhausted, e. g. Trepi- 
Ka$- els- icpopav, rrpoUoSai (to neglect, to permit), avi)(eo-^aL KapTt- 
ptlv, vTropiiveiv, XiTrapeiv (per sever are), Koifxvav, aTrenrelv, etc. 

Her. 7, 168. ov irepioirr 4rj earl r) 'EXXds clttoXXv p.4vr] ( Hellas is not to be 
permitted to be destroyed). 101. el "EXXrjves vrco p.ev 4ovo~ i x e </° as *p-ol avrae t - 
p 6 /j.e vol (will venture to withstand me). 9,45. Xitt ap4er e p.4v ovres (con- 
tinue to remain). 3, 65 (vp.lv iiricrKTiirToo) p.)] ir e p i i' 8 eiv rfyv f)yeLiovir)v 
out is is Mrjdovs tt e p i e XSr ov cr av (not to permit the hegemony to return again to 
the Medes). Isocr. Archid. 125, 47. airel-K oip.ev av olkovovt 4 s re Kal 
x4yovres, el rcdcras ras roiavras irpd^eis i£erd£oip,ev (we should be iveary 
of hearing and speaking). An. 5. 1, 2. airelprjKa tfSr) cr vcr Keva(6 p.evos 
Kal fiadiCcav Kal rpe^oiv Kal ra oivXa (p4poov Kal iv rd^ei loov Kal cpvXaKas 
cpvXarr wv ical p.axo p.evos (I am weary of packing up, walking, running, etc.) < 
Th. 1, 86. robs £v jxfxdxov s ov tt e p ioip 6p.e & a a§ lkov p.4vov s (will not 
permit the allies to be injured). 2. 73. 'A&wvaloi cpaaiv, iv ovdevl 7} p. as irpo4cr- 
Srai a 5 lkov p.4vovs. PI. Gorg. 470, c. fify Kap.r)S (piXov dv5pa ev e pyer cov 
(do not be weary of doing good to a friend). For dv4 xe<r&ai with the Gen., 
see § 275, 1. 

(f ) Verbs signifying to begin and cease, cause to cease, to omit, 
to be remiss, e. g. dp^ecr&at, virdpyeiv ', rraveiv, iraveoSai, A^yeiv, 
SiaXXdrTeiv, cxTraXXaTTecrScu ; p.e$Ucr$ai, XuirecrSai, eKAeiVeiv, irnXei- 
Tteiv, etc. 

Her. 6, 75. KXeop.4vr)S irapaXaficbv rbv crtSvpov, 'apx^ro 4k tcov Kvy)p.4wv 
ecavrbv X w /3 dop. e vo s (began to mutilate himself). Uavca ere adiKovvra (I 
cause you to cease doing wrong). Tlavop.al ere aSucaiv (I cease to do wrong to 
yon). X. O. 1, 23. (at iTi&vp.lai) alici^opevai to. erdop.ara rcav av&pwirwv ical 
rds ipvxas Kal robs oXkovs ovirore X r f)yovcriv, esr av apyjacnv avroov (never cease to 
torment). Kal aXXa ye b~'f] p.vpla iir iXe iir to xiycov (to omit in speaking). 'O 
ay a^rb s ovk i XXe Itt er a l eu tvolcov robs evepyerovvras eavr6v (does not fid to 
do good to his benefactors). PL Phileb. 2(5, b. 186, 1). ap^opai airb tt,s larpiK?)S 
Xeywv. Mcnex. 249, 1). rous TeXevr-ijcr auras r i /.<. co o~ a ob^eirore eKXe'nrei 
(r, ir6Xis)- 






$ 310.] THE PARTICirLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 475 

(g) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish one's self, 
to excel, to be inferior, to do tuett, to err, e. g. zvTvy&v, vikclv, Kpa- 
rexv, rjTTacrSat, ev iroieiv, ajxapToivetv, olSlkzlv, etc. 

Pier. 5, 24. ev iTroirjcras airiKo jxev os (you did well in coming, that you 
'•me). Th. 1, 53. aSt/ceTr g iroXe/xou apxovr e s Kal criropSas Aw ovr e s (you do 
wrong in beginning tear, etc.). 2, 71. ou 5 'maia iro ie7r e is yr\v tt)v TlXaraieoov 
err par evour e s. 'A/xa p t a v e is ravra iroi&v (you are in fault in doing this). 
PL Phaed. 60, c. e5 y iiroi-no'as ava/xv-fia as /xe (you did well in reminding 
me). X. Hier. 11, 14, sq. irdvras (robs (piXous) ireipoo vinav ev ttoiwv eav 
yap robs (piXous uparrj s eu iroiwv, ou fxr] o~oi duuoourai dvrexeiv 0L iroXe/xioi (to 
endeavor to excel all in doing good). An. 2. 3, 23. oi>x t)ttt]<t 6 fxeSra eu 
iroiov ure s (toe will not be inferior in acts of kindness). 

(h) The verbs 7reipao-#ai (especially in Herodotus), to try 
or attempt something, irapacr Kev a^ea ^ at (usually with ws and 
the Fnt. Part.), and the Ionic phrases 77-0AA09 cI/xl, e.'y/<ei/xai, 
ytyvofxai, to be urgent about, to lay it to heart, to consider im- 
portant. 

Her. 7, 9. eV e ip7]bf]v iir e X avv ccv iirl robs avdpas tovtovs (I attempted to 
march against). PL Phileb. 21, a. eV trot ireipwfxe&a fSacravi^ovr es ravra 
(let us try to examine these). Th. 2, 7. 01 'A&nva'ioi ir ape a nev d(opr o is 
iroXe/j.-fjo-oi'T e s (were preparing to wage tear). Without cos: 18 (01 UeXoirov- 
vno'ioi) irpos^oXas irap e a neud^ovr o ir o ir) cr 6 /xevo i. X. H. 4. 1, 41. irapeo'- 
Keud^er o it o p euo~6 fxeu o s. Her. 7, 158. 6 YeXoav TvoXXbs ivetceiro 
Xeyoov (spoke urgently). 9,91. iroXXbs f\v Xicr <r 6 jxevo s 6 £e?vos (entreated 
earnestly, was all entreaties). 1, 98. A-nioKvs r\v iroXXbs virb iraurbs avSpbs 
alu eo fxevos (was much praised). 7. 10, 3. rr avT o?o i eyevovr o ~2,Kv&ai 
Se6 /xev oi 'Iwvoov Xvaai rbv ir6pov (earnestly entreated the Ionians to break down 
the bridge). 

(i) Certain expressions, mostly impersonal, e. g. it is fit, use- 
ful, profitable, good, agreeable, shameful, it is to my mind, and 
the like. 

npe'7ret /xoi aya&$ ovti and aya&oj thai (it is proper for me to be good). 
Th. 1, 118. i-n-npdorojv rbv &e6i/, el (sc. aiiTols) ir Xe /xov <r iu 'dfxeivov earaL 
(whether it will be better for them to engage in war). PL Alcib. 1, 113, d. ctkoivov- 
(Tlv, d-rrorepa ffvpoiaei irpd^acriv. After these expressions, however, the 
Inf. is more frequent, since the action of the dependent verb is not considered 
as already attached or belonging to the person, but as first resulting from the 
action implied in the above impersonal expressions. 

(k) The verb 4'xetv, in the sense of to be in a condition or state, 
has an active, middle, or deponent participle joined wi+h it, in 



476 SYNTAX. P 310. 

order to express the continued condition of the action (similar 
to the Latin aliquid pertractatum habere). 

Her. 3, 65. d6\u> ex ovo ~ L uvttju (rrju r)ye/j.oulr]v) kt 7] crdfxeu oi (propei'ly, 
they have themselves as those who have acquired the hegemony, i. e. they have acquired 
and still possess, comp. principatum partum habent). X. An. 1. 3, 14. iroXAa 
XP^p-ara exofiev avr) pn o,k6t e s {we have plundered much property and still 
have it). 4. 7, 1. x w P La 4 K0VU lo~xvpa °' L Taoxot, eu oTs Kal ra iiriTnSeia irdura 
elxov auaKeKOfj.iaiJ.euoi (into ivhich having conveyed all their provisions they 
had them there, or, as this idiom is more commonly expressed in English, into 
which they had conveyed their provisions). Dem. Phil. 3. 113, 12. Kal 4>epas nxpifav 
cos (pikos els &erra\lau eA&oou e%'ei Kar aAafiwu. (On the contrary, ex® 
Xeyeiu, I can say). 

(1) Finally, the participle is used as a complement with the 
following verbs: (a) ruyxavco, to happen; ((3) XavSavw, to be 
concealed; (y) S tareXu), Scaytyvo/xaL, Stayco, to continue; 
(8) cfiS-dvo), to come btfore, to anticipate; (e) oi^o /xat, to go 
away, to depart. In English, most of these verbs are often ren- 
dered by an adverb, and the participle connected with them, 
inasmuch as it contains the principal thought, by a finite verb. 

Her. 1, 44. 6 Kpolaos <pouea rod iratSbs eXauSave Poctkoju (Croesus nour- 
ished the murderer of his son unwittingly, without knowing it). Aidyw, 
diare\w, Siayiyuofiai KaXa iroiau (I ALWAYS, continually do what is 
honorable). 1, 157. <£x eT0 <pevyoju (he fled away)., 6. o'ixo/J.ai <p*p<>>u (I 
carry away). Th. 4, 113. ervxou 6ir\7rai. eu *n? ayopa Ka&evdo vt e s as 
ireuTTjKoura (about fifty hoplites were then, just then sleeping in the agora, hap- 
pened to be, were by chance, sleeping). Tvyxduw is always used, where an event 
has not taken place by our intention or design, hut by the accidental coopera- 
tion of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things. In English 
it can sometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance ; often it 
cannot be translated at all. X. Cy. 1. 3, 12. x a ^ irov V* d\\ou <p&ao~at rovro 
ir 17)0- aura (it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate him 
in doing it). Her. 4, 136. ecpSrjaau iroAAy oi 'Sicv&ai robs Tlepcras eirl tV ye- 
(piipau eir iko fxeuo i (anticipated the Persians much in coming to the bridge, came 
to the bridge long before the Persians). Also the conjunction irplu ri (or r] alone) 
with the Inf. can follow (p&dueiu, e. g. Her. 6, 116. e<p&7]0~au airiK6[xevoi, 
irplu t) tovs fiapfidpovs H]Keiu (they arrived before the barbarians came). Ov 
(pSdueiu followed by Kal, Kal ev&vs, may be translated by scarcely — when, no 
sooner — than, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. 58, 86 (ot AaKe8aifj.6uioi) ovk ecp&rjaau irv- 
&6/j.euot rbu irepl rrju ^Attik^u 7r6\e/j.ou, Kal irduroju rwu aWcou a/j.e\r)o-auTes 
tjkou yjxiv afxvvovvTes (the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard of the war in Attica, than 
they left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely heard when, etc.). So in 
the phrase, ovk au cp&duocs iroicou ri (you should do nothing quicker,!, e. 
you cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly). X. C. 2. 3, 11. ovk au cpfrduois 



$ 311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 477 

\4yoov; (you could not be too quick in speaking = speak quickly). 3. 11, 1. ovk 
av (p & avoir , ecpr), atco\o& ovvr e s ,• (will you not follow immediately ? = 
follow immediately), ovk av ,<p&dvo is 7re palvav ; (= statim reliqua conclude). 

Eem. 4. With Xav&avziv and (p&dveiv the relation is sometimes re- 
versed, the pai-ticiples of these verbs being used as the complement of the 
governing verb. X. Cy. 3. 3, 18. (p&dvovT es ^'Stj Sr/oGjUei/ rrjv e/ceiVoj/ yrjv 
(we ravage their country, anticipating them = we anticipate them in ravaging their 
country). 6.4, 10. ^ Se Xabovffa avrhv crvv ecpeiirer o (she followed unknown 
to him). 

Eem. 5. The Part, of the verb elvai, connected with adjectives or sub- 
stantives, with several of the above named verbs, is sometimes omitted, even 
when elvai is an essential word ; thus after Verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. 
Dem. Ph. 1. 45, 18. e IdiSos evrpeire?s v/xas (knowing that you are ready). 54, 41. 
iau ev Xeppovrjato ir v & t] o~ 3" e QiXiirirov (sc. ovra, if you should learn that Philip 
is in, etc.); very often with (paivopiai, not seldom also with rvyx^-vto, 
8 1 a r e X a>, 8 i a y i y v o p. a i, e. g. X. C. 1 . 6, 2. dvvTr6§7)r6s re k<x\ axircov Star eXe?s. 



§ 311. Remarks on the interchange of the Participle 
and Infinitive. 

Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with the 
Inf., yet with a different meaning. 

1. 'Akovg iv with a Part., implies both a direct perception by one's own senses, 
and an indirect one, though certain and well-grounded ; with the Inf., it im- 
plies only an indirect perception obtained by hearsay, e.g. A/couco ahrov 
SiaXeyo p.evov (i. e. ejus sermones auribus meis percipio). Kap.$vo-ins 
tfKOvae rbv Kvpov dvdpbs f/S77 cypa 8 ia.% e ip i £6ia evor. See §310, 
4, (a). But X. Cy. 1. 3, 1. i8e?v iire^v/xei 6 'Aarvdyns tov Kvpov, on rf Kove 
(ex aliis audiverat) KaXbv Kaya&bv avrhv etVcu. 

2. ElSevai and iirio-Tacr&at with the Part., to know; with the Inf. to 
know how to do something, to be able. Old a (i-rr io-rafxai) &eobs ae^o/x- 
evos (I know that I honor the gods) ; but Eur. Hipp. 1009. iiricrr apt. ai 
&6ovs crefieiv (I know how to honor the gods, I can honor the gods). S. Aj. 
666. eio-6p.eo-^a f.izv &eo?s e'Ueiv. — Also vop.i(eiv in the sense of 
to be assured, to know (elSevai), has a participle connected with it ; still this 
occurs very rarely. X. An. 6. 6, 24. vofxi^e S\ iav e/xe vvv diroKrdvns . . 
'dv$p* LyaSrbv diroicreivocv (be assured that, if you slay me, you slay a good 
man). 

, Mav&dveiv with the Part., to perceive ; with the Inf. to learn. Mav&d- 
vco co<pbs &v (I perceive that I am wise); aocpbs elvai (I learn to be 
wise). X. Cy. 4. 1, 18. fxa^rjo-ovrai ivavr lovafrai (ro?s rruXe/xiois). 

• Tiyv dxriceiv with the Part, to know, to perceive ; with the Inf. to learn, to 
judge, to determine. T iyv<t>cr ko> ay a&ovs ovras ro7s crrparicorais robs 
ay a v as (I know, I perceive that the prize-fights are useful, but aya&obs 
slvai., I judge that, etc.). X. Apol. 33 (^toKparvs) eyvto rod in (rjv rb 
re&vdvai outw KpeTo-aov eivai (judged that it was better for him to die 
than to live longer). Isocr. Trap. 361, d. eyvcoaav Tlacritova i/xol irapaZovvai 
ihv 7ra?Sa {they concluded to give up, etc.). 

. Alo-frdveo-Srai with a Part, to perceive, to observe, to understand, to learn ; 
with the Inf. to think, to imagine (opinari). Alo-^dvo/xal ere fi4ya irapa 
fluatXG? SwdfAGvov (I perceive that you have great influence with the king). 






478 SYNTAX. [$311 

Th. 6, 59. at cr&avS /xevo s avrobs jxeya irapd fiacri\e7 Aapeico Svvacr&ai 
5, 4. obiter l £ttI robs aWovs epx^rai, aicrSr6jxevos ovk av irei&eiv avrovs 
(OPINANS, se lis non esse persuasurum). 

6. TIvvS dvecr&ai with a Part, to hear, to perceive; with an Inf. it is used 
with the same difference of meaning as in the case of dxoveiv. Tlvv&d- 
vofxai ae Xeyovra (I hear you saying). Lys. Meom. 184, 17. irvuSra- 
vojxai re avrbv Xeyeiv, cos dae&co KaraKvcov rds frvaias (ex ALUS 
audivi). X. H. 1. 4, 11. dvi'ix&V ^ KaracrKoirf) rcov rpir\pcov, as eirvv&dv e- 
ro AaKedaifj-oviovs avro&i it apacr Kevd^e iv. Th. 5, 55. irvSofJie- 
voi r ob s Aaitedai{J.oviovs e |e err p ar ev arSr ai. 

7. Me fxv ri cr Sr a i with a Part, to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf. to con- 
template doing something, to intend, to endeavor. Mef.Lvrip.ai ev Troir)o-as 
robs -KoXiras (I remember to have done good) ; ev 7roirjcrai (I strive, wish, to 
do good). X. An. 3. 2, 39. fxefx vr\ ffbco dvrjp dya&bs elvai (remember, 
strive, to be a man). Cy. 8. 6, 6 (ot trarpdirai) o ri av £v rfj yfj eKacrrn na\bv 
r) dyaxrbv fi, fie fivr) cr ovr ai icdl devpo air oir e /xir e iv. S. 4, 20. p. e fx v r) cr t) 
oiaic pi&rjvai irepl rod naWovs [thou wilt prepare to contend with me). 

8. $ aiveabai with a Part, to appear, apparere, to show one's self; with an Inf. 
to seem, videri. 'Ecpaivero K\aiwv (it was evident that he wept, or in 
English we often use the adverb, evidently: he evidently wept; ecpaivejo 
KXaieiv (he seemed to weep). X. S. 1, 15. Ka\ djxa Xeycov ravra airefi.vrrer6 
re (o yeXcoroiroibs) na\ rfj <pwvfj cracptos KXaieiv ecpaivero (he seemed to 
weep, but did not weep). 

9. 'E o i k e va i with a Part, in the Nom. to appear ; with a Part, in the Dat. to 
be like (§ 310, Rem, 2) ; with the Inf. to seem ; J Eo( Kare rvpavviai /xdXXov, 
r) iroXireiais yd 6/xev oi (you appear to enjoy, you evidently enjoy, etc.) (comp. 
No. 8). PI. Pp. 444, c. e oi icas OKvovvn Xeyeiv (you are like one in doubt 
in speaking = you seem to speak like one in doubt). X. Hier. 7. 1. eoiicev 
e(prj, fxeya ri elvai r) rifiA] (honor seems to be something important). Cy. 1. 4, 
9. iroiei, ottcos fiovXei • crb yap vvv ye tj/xcov eoncas fiacr iXevs elvai. 

W&yyeWeiv with a Part, is used of the annunciation of actual events ; 
with an Inf. of the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed. 
Dem. 01. 2. (3). 29, 4. dir-nyy eX&rj $i\nnros vf/uv ev &paKr) rpirov r) re- 
raprov eros rovrl 'Upalov re?x os 7r oXiopiccov (a settled fact). X- Cy. 1. 
5, 30. 6 'Aaavpios els rrjv x^P av * fxfi aXXeiv dyy eXXerai (whether he 
had made an actual irruption or not, is uncertain). 

11. Ae iKvvvai and cnrocpaiveiv with a Part, to show, to point out ; with an 
Inf. to teach. V E 8 e i £ a ere a 8 iKr\cr avr a (1 showed that you had done wrong). 
X. An. 2. 3, 14. dcpiicovro els Kcb/xas, oSev air eS e i\av ol 7)ye/j.6ves X a /a Pa- 
ve iv rd eiurr)oeia (where they pointed out to them that they might obtain pro- 
visions). Dem, Cor. 271, 135. (rj fiovXy Alvx'ivyv) na\ it p o86rrjv elvai 
Ka\ KaicSvovv vffiv air etpaiv ev (docuit). But the Inf. is likewise used 
with ZeiKvvai, when the object of this verb is not to be represented as 
something perceived, but only as something possible, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 17. 
KivSvvevaeis £tt iS e7£ai, o~b fxev XP 7 1 (TT ^ S renal <pi\d8e\<pos elv ai, eneTvos 
5e cpavAos re nal ovic d^ios evepyeaias. 

12. A-nXovv with a Part, to make evident, to show ; with an Inf. to say, to an- 
nounce, to command. A-n\S) cr e dSiKovvra (I make it evident or show that 
you do wrong). X. Ag. 1,33. Kiqpvy/xari £St}\ov, robs p.ev eAev&epias 
8 e o fxev ov s cos irpbs av/uL/maxov avrbv tt ap elvai (edixit, nt adessent). 

13. Uoie7v with a Part, to represent [§ 310, 4, (b)] ; with an Inf. (a) to cause, 
(b) to suppose, to assume. Tioiw ere y e\uvr a (1 represent you laughing). 
TloiG) <re yeAdv (I cause you to laugh). PI. Symp. 174, c. dnK-nroy 
i-Trolncrtv ('Onrjpos) e\&6vra rbv M e v e K e w v iirl rr/v bolvnv (represents 






$ 311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 479 

Menelaus coming unbidden to the feast). X. An. 5. 7, 9. iroico 8 1 ifxas 
i ^airaTT] &evT as Kal KaTayorjTev&evTas vw ejxov f/ /c e i v els $acrii 
(I -will snjjpose, I will put the case, will assume, that you having been deceived 
come to Phasis). 

14. Al(rx^" /e<r ^ al ari d alSeTa&ai with a Part, to be ashamed on account of 
something which one does ; with an Inf. to be ashamed or afraid to do something, 
to abstain from doing something through fear or shame, to be prevented from doing 
something by shame. Al ax^vo fiai /ca/ca ir p a r r a> v rbv (piXov (lam ashamed 
of doing evil, or that I do evil to a friend) : alax v vo \xai /ca/ca ir parr e iv 
rbu (piXov (I am prevented by shame from doing evil, etc.). X. Cy. 5. 1, 21. 
tovto jxev (sc. airo8i56vai X° L P LU A i ^? 7rw /" e §vvacr&ai) ovk alo~ x vv ° l*- *- 1 Xe- 
y cav rb 8e • 'Eav /nep7]re Trap ijj.ol dirodwact), tovto, eii 'i'o~Te, otl alo~x vv ' oi (xr}v 
av elireTv. S. Aj. 506. atheaai fiev iraTepa Tbv abv ev Xvypw ynpa irpo- 
Xeiirwv. X. S. 8, 33. tovtovs yap av e<pt] oXeoSai /xaXiaTa aid e?o~&ai 
dXXrjXovs dir oXeiir eiv. 35. alS ovvt at tovs irap6vTas an oXe lir e iv. 
P. L. 9, 4. iras <xv tis alcrx^v^ eir] Tbv Kanbv cvcfk^vov it apaXafi e?v. 

15. Uepio pav [§ 310, 4, (e)] is sometimes, though seldom, constructed with 
an Inf. also, without any marked difference, as avyxcop^p, iav, e. g. Th. 4, 48. 
ov8' els Lev ai ecpaffav KaTa. dvvajxiv it e p i6ip e o~ & at ovS e v a (they said they 
would not permit any one to enter). 'Eir it p eir e iv, to permit, is commonly 
connected with an Inf., rarely with a Part. X. An. 1.2, 19. TavTTjv tt\v 
X<*>pav eir e t pe\p e o tapir da ai toTs "EXX-rjacv ( permitted the Greeks to plun- 
der). Isocr. Pac. r) itoXis avToTs ovk eir it p e\p e l it ap a/8 aiv ov o~ i Tbv 
vijxov. The verbs av ex*o-&ai and viro /xeve iv with the meaning of 
audere, are constructed with the Inf. Her. 7, 139. KaTa/xeivavTes avea- 
Xovto Tbv iiri6vTa errl tt\v x&pw 8 e£ao-&ai (dared to withstand the enemy 
making an incursion into their country). 

l(3.*Apx e o-frai with a Part., when it has the meaning to be in the beginning of 
an action (in contrast with the middle or end of an action), or also when 
the way and manner, in which the beginning of an action takes place, is to he 
stated ; with an Inf , to begin to do something, to commence (something intended, 
aimed at), "W p^avT o to. Teixv oiKoSo/xovvres and oIkooo /j.e?v. Th. 

1, 107. ijp^avTO Kal to, /uaicpd Telxv 'A&rjvaloi ol koS o /xe7v. X. Cy. 8. 8, 

2. ap|o jxai 8 t Sacr icwv e/c tcov Ereioov. C. 3. 1, 5. iro&ev 7? p£aT 6 o~ e 8 i- 
odaKeiv TTjv (TTpaTrjylav. 5, 22. diroTe iraXaieiv rjp£a) /j.av&dv e i v. 6,3. 
elirov t)/juv, e/c tlvos 'dp^rj tyjv iroXiv eve py eT e7v. 5, 15. 'A&r)va?oi dirb 
TOiV iraTepwv 'dpx°VTai /caT a<p povetv twv yepanepoov. 

17. Have iv with the meaning to hinder, is constructed with an Inf., e. g. PI. 
Pp. 416, C. Tas olKrjaeis Kal ttjv aK\7]v ovaiav ToiavTTjv avToTs irapecrKevdcrSrat 
(Se?), tjtls (JLT)Te tovs (pxiXaKas as dpicrTovs elvai iravaoi avTovs kt\. 

18. Tlei pacr&ai with a Part., to make trial of anything, to practise [§ 310, 4, 
(h)] ; still this construction is rare ; with the Inf. to attempt to do something ; 
Trapao- Kevd(ea&ai is very often also connected with the Inf. The 
Ionic phrase iravTolov yiyveo-^at, is constructed with the Ace. and 
Inf. Her. 3, 124. iravTolt] eyeveTO /jlt] air odj] [Aijo- ai Tbv TLoXvKpd- 
rea (she used every expedient, etc.). 

Eemakk. By comparing § 306 with § 310, it will be seen that the Inf., as a 
complement of the verb, denotes something aimed at, intended, something ef- 
fected, while the participle, inasmuch as the idea expressed by it is prior to, or 
coincident with that of the verb with which it is connected, implies the actual 
existence of the idea designated by it. The participle, therefore, implies that 
the action denoted by it actually takes place, while the Inf. does not. 



480 SYNTAX. [$ 312. 



§ 312. The Participle used to express Adverbial or 
Circumstantial Relations . 

1. In the second place, the Part, is used to denote such an 
attributive qualification of a substantive, as will, at the same 
time, define the predicate of the sentence more exactly. In 
this case, the Part, expresses the adverbial relations of time, 
cause, motive or purpose, condition and concession, manner. 

The English often uses a Part, in this case, e. g. he said laughing (ye\S>v); 
the city, besieged by the enemy, suffered much distress (iroXis virb tcov -KoXefxitov it o - 
\io pKovfj.4vn). Instead of the Part., the English often uses either a subor 
dinate clause with the conjunctions when, after, while, since, because, as, inasmuch 
as, in order to, if, although, or a substantive with a preposition, e. g. Kvpos tV 
tv6Xiv eXtov avriX&ev (after Cyrus had taken the city, he returned, or after taking 
the city, etc.). 

2. In English we often translate the participle by a verb, 
connecting it with its own clause by one of the above-named 
conjunctions, using as a subject either the word with which the 
participle agrees, or a pronoun referring to it. 

Oi i?oXep.ioL (pvyovr es inrb tuv iroXe/xitov eSi^x^VC^^ (when the enemy fled, 
they were pursued by the enemy, or the enemy fled and were pursued). Tot? 
Hep crais els T771/ yyv els/3 aXova iv ot "EXXyves Tjuavriw^rjaav (when the 
Persians made an irruption into the country, the Greeks ivent out against them). 

3. In the examples given under No. 2, the participle always 
agrees with a substantive or pronoun which is connected with 
the principal verb, either as subject or in some other relation, and 
may then be called the dependent participle. But very often the 
substantive with which the participle agrees has no connection 
with any verb, but stands alone in the Genitive. This is called 
the Genitive absolute or independent, because it has no gram- 
matical connection with any other word in the sentence. 

X. 0. 4, 2. Ttov <r to fxar wv &7jXvv ofxetov, ical at ipvxal ttoXv apptocrrSrepai. 
yiyvovTai (when the bodies are exhausted, the animal spirits become weaker). 

Remark 1 . The Genitive absolute can never be used when the action refers 
to the subject ; in this case the participle must always be made to agree with 
the subject. It is otherwise in Latin, on account of there being no active par- 
ticiples in the past tense ; the Latin must, therefore, use the Abl. Absolute, 
even when the action refers to the subject, e. g. oi ar par tu>Tai t)-\v ttoKlv /co3-e- 
\6vTes els to o-TparSiredov avex^pW^v (milites, urbe DIE.UTA, in castra se re- 
ceperunt, after the soldiers had taken the city, they returned to the camp). In this 



9 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 481 

example, the actions denoted by the participle and the verb, both refer to 
arparicorai, and therefore the Gen. Absol. could not be used. 

Rem. 2. The reason why the Greeks chose the Gen. absolute, has been 
seen in treating of the Gen, § 273, Rem. 11. Subordinate clauses also may be 
used mstead of the participial construction, either for the sake of greater em- 
phasis, or for perspicuity. 8 

4. The Participle as described under 2 and 3, is used to 
denote : — 

(a) A specification of time, where the English uses subordi- 
nate clauses, with the conjunctions ivhen, while, during, after, 
since, or a substantive with a preposition. 

X^C. 1. 2, 22. ivoKkol rd xpWara auaXdo a av r e s, av Trp6cr&ev aird X 0VT0 
Ksp8S>v, alvxpa vo^ovres elvai, rovrwv ovk aTvi X ourai {after wasting their money 
after, when they had wasted). An.' A k 06 a air i ravra ro7s arparnyoTs rb ivMp. W a 
Xapivs iSoKe? (when the generals heard this, on hearing this, after hearing this, they 
thought the device ingenious). So the frequent circumlocution with Troikas 
in the sense of thereupon. Her. 6, 96. iv4irp V( rav koI rd iph ku! tV ir6te v > ravra 
! 8h voijio-avres iirlrhs a\\as vlr\<rovs dvdyovro (thereupon they set sail for 
the other islands) ; or with the repetition of the Part, of the preceding word. 
Her. 7, 60. irdvras ro6rco r$ rp6ircp f|„ pifr ^ <r av ■ ap l& ^ a avr e S 8^ Kara 
fovea SUraacTov (in this way they numbered all; thereupon they arranged the 
army by nations).^ Gen. absolute, X. H. 5. L 9, vavf,a X ias irpbs r%v ae^vrfv 
yevofitvns, reVr apas rp^peis Xa^dvei Tcpy^iras (a naval battle having been 
fought by moonlight). 4. 58. iiroQaiv ovtos rod i,pos, 'Ay W iKaos K\ivowe- 
r^s f>v (when the spring appeared). II. «, 88. oVrts i [xzv (u>vr o s Ka\ M x &ovl 
SepKop.e'voio vol Koi\ V s irapa vyval ftapeias X e7pas eWeref (while I live, as long 
as Hive and look upon the earth). 

Rem. 3. The following participles, which may be sometimes translated in 
English by adverbs^ also belong here : (a) d PX 6f*evos, in the beginning, oriai- 
nauy. ^ in.^ 4, 64. cnrep /ecu ap X 6fj.evos elirov. (This is to be distinguished 
n om ap^ajieuos air 6 rtvos, which may be translated, especially, before all. 
1 lie i^art. ap^evos agrees, for the most part, in Number, Gender, Case, with 



the substantive which is more exactly defined, e. g. PI. Rp. 600. e. ovko£v t &&. 
Iiev airo yvjipov dp^a^evovs irdvras robs it o it] r lkov s jjn^rds el&£. 
\w aperrjs eij/cu (that all the poets, particularly Homer, etc.). Sometimes, how- 
ever, the Part, dp^evos agrees with the subject of the sentence. PI. Symp 
1/3, 6..ZoKsis fioi arexvas itdvras av&pdtirovs aSrXiovs ijyeicr&cu ttAV 'ZaKo&rovs 
awbffov aptanevos,you seem to me to think all men unhappy except Socrates 
particularly yourself). — (0) T e A e v r a, v, properly ending, finally, at last. PI.' 
lip. 362, a. reXevrwv irdvra Kara ira&cbv dvao-KLvSvXevSffjo-erai. X. An. 6. 3, 8. 
rekevrwvres kuI curb rov vdaros elpyov (robs "EWrjvas) oi ®pd K es (at last the 
iracians kept the Greeks from the water).— (y) Aiahnrhv X p6vov, after 
>ie time, after a while, subsequently, or Sia\. iroXvv, bxiyov X p., iirio~xbv KoXbv 
Xpwov, p.iKp6v. PI. Phaed. 59, e. ov iroAvv ovv xpovov iirL(r X cl>v fae. 

Rem. 4. The Part, in the Gen. sometimes stands without a subject, when 
the subject can be readily supplied from what goes before, or when the subject 
is indefinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words irpdyfxara ypWa, 
. 6p»panroi, etc., used in a general sense, may be understood. Th. 1, 116. Tlepi- 

41 



Th 
some 



4g 2 SYNTAX, [$ 312 - 

f Sof Also in the Sing. Th. 1, 74. ^ 5,A«&<*to ? , *n eV to* ,«,« 
Ac > Lath? cognlto, edicts petlto, etc., instead of postamm cogmtum est, etc. 

Rem 5 In order to define the time more exactly, the preposition i*l is 
frequently connected with the Gen., yet only when the Part, is m the Pres. 
2 e 'EttI Ktfpou /Bao-*Xt*^rbs {while Cyrus icas king) See § 296, 

12) The relatio/of /»« «&*» is sometimes made more definite by the prep- 
1,(2). ineieiauoiit / ^ § ^ & M ^^ 

s£e6 294 II (V The relation of indefinite time expressed by about nearly, 

^ indicated by i>*6 with the Ace, e. g. fiirb rft* *p4T VV iire\S>ovaav 

/J™ U 299 'III (2)1 the coincidence or coHtem/JoraneoHSwess of one thmg with 

another is expressed ij a M « with the Dat, e. g. W frty 5ja<p»<r xovjy 

turn est). 

iiU (aT^n as man c//«). Her. 9, 57. k«1 & M a *aT« A a/SoVres y^earc 
££ I " as they had colne up with the enemy., they pursued them closely). Th. 

' Hem 7 In order to denote more clearly and emphatically the succession of 
W La cogence or result, the following adverbs are very often appended 
to the predicate of a sentence: 2,tkS&o, o»t.(s), oSt« S v a,Se X. C. 

c^ra' K ^h ^elr, ^J (c*%*% > m manj, the most heauUful features of 
each, in tuis way you make the entire forms appear beautiful). 

(b) A cause or reason, where the English often uses subor- 
dinate clauses with since, because, as, inasmuch as, or a substan- 
tive with a preposition. 

X C 1 2 99 tto\Xo\ rh XP^ ara avaXdxravTes, &v Trp6<r&ev hirei X ovTO icepSav, 
«l<rxP«vo^l}o V Tss el.cn, ™W ovk h^ X ourai (many having squandered their 
estates, did not abstain from those gains from which they before abstained, because 
they accounted them base). Th artrtfeia fe»«r & rfc x «6p«, ttoAA^ kcU a 7 ^r,s 
o tf cr„ s (Me3/ ingftf ofttain supplies Jnm the place, since, because, inasmuch as, it was 
extensive and fertile). 

(c) A motive, purpose, or object, where the English uses the 
Inf with to, in order to, or a finite verb with that, m order that, 
so that. Generally, only the Fut. Act. Part, is used to denote 
this relation; sometimes also the Pres. Act., (* 2o5, Rem. 3). 



§ 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 483 

This usage occurs most frequently with verbs of going, coming, 
sending. 

Her. 3, 6. tovto epxot^ai <ppdo~a)v {I have come to say this). 6, 70. 4s AeA- 
<pobs %pr\a6 /xev os tv xP 7 l aTr ip' l Q T o pever at (he goes to Delphi to consult the 
oracle, in order to, that he may consult, etc.). X. C. 3. 7, 5. cr4 ye didd^uv 
wpfujjuai. n e /j.ir (o o~e x4%ovt a (I send you that you may, to, in order to, say). 

(d) A condition, where the English often uses a subordinate 
clause with if; or a concession, where the English uses a sub- 
ordinate clause with although, though. 

X. Cy. 8, 7, 28. tovs (piXovs ev e pyeT ovvt e s fcu\ tovs ex&pobs Svvfjo-ecr&e no- 
Xa(eiv (if you confer benefits on friends, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 41, 2. twv a&Xr)- 
twv Sis rccravTT)v pw/x-nu \afS6vT<av, ovSev av irX4ov yevoiro toIs 'aXXois, tubs 
Se avSpbs ev <p po vr) cravT o s, airavTes av airoXavaeiav oi (5ovX6fj.evoi Koivwveiv ryjs 
e/ceu/ou Stavoias. X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. cos bxiya Sv v a fj.e vo i irpoopav av&pwiroi irepl 
rov [xeXXovTos iroXXa. einxeipovfxev irpdiTeiv (although men can foresee little, yet, 
etc.). 

Eem. 8. When the Part, expresses a concession, the particles Kai (neg. ovS4, 
f.tr)54), Kalirep, k at toOto, are commonly joined with it. X. An. 1. 6, 10. 
TrposzKvvr)<Tav COp6vrr\v) Kaiirep elS6Tes,OTi eirl fravaTw dyoiTo (although they 
saw, that). Eur. Ph. 1618. ovk av irpoSoir]v ovS4irep rr pdcrcr eov naicus. PI. 
Pp. 404, b. ' OfjL7]pos ev ra?s tSjv rjpdoow eo~TiaGeo~iv ovre lx&vo~iv aurobs earia, Kal 
toOto eirl fraXaTTT) ev'EXXrjsirovTcp our as (and that too, though they were, etc.). Tavr a 
in such connections, may often be governed by the verb ivoi4a> : and he did this, 
although they were, etc. The words ofxoos, elra, Kara, tire it a, k aire it o., 
are often added to the predicate of the sentence. Her. 6, 120. vo-Tepoi Se oTrt- 
KOjxevoi tt\s <rv[j.l3oXris t(j.eipovTO '6fj.cos d-erjaaoSrai tovs MySovs (although they 
came after the battle, still they desired to see the Medes). PL Charmid. 163, a. vir o - 
& 4 p-ev o s aaxppoo'vvrjv eivai rb to. eavTov irpaTreiv, eireiTa ovS4v (prjcri kcoXvslv 
ical tovs Ta. twv aXXouv irpaTTovras crcocppoveTv. "O fiw s is often in poetry 
joined to a Part., e. g. Aesch. S. 712. ireifrov yvvaiQ Kaiirep ov crTepyav 0/j.ws, 
or (what also sometimes occurs in prose) is placed before the Part., e. g. PL 
Phaed. 91, c. 'Xip.p.ias <pof$eiTai, p.i] tj \pvxh op.ws Kal SeioTepov teal KaXXiov "bv 
tov (Tu>/j.aTos irpoairoXXv7)Tai (that the soul, though more god-like and beautiful than 
the body, icill nevertheless perish). 

(e) The manner and means, where the English sometimes 
uses a participial noun with a preposition. 

re Aw j/ eTirev (he spolce laughing). X. Cy. 3. 2, 25. Xr)'i(6p.evo i (cocriv 
(raptu vivunt, they live by plundering). C. 3. 5, 16. irpoaipouvTai. paXXov outoo 
KepSaiveiv air'' aXXriXcov, $) avv cc(peXovvT e s avTovs ( prefer to gain some advan- 
tage from each other, rather than by assisting themselves). Isocr. Panath. 241, d 
Tobs"EXX-nvas eSiSa^av, bv Tp6irov Sloikovvt es tos aiiTwv iraTpiSas Kal irpbs ovs 
iroXepovvTes p.eyaXr)v t V 'EXXaSa iroi-fjcreiav. So often xpeo^evoy with the 
Dat, where the English may use the preposition with, e. g. voXXfj rex^V 
Xpoii p.evos tovs iroXep.ious iviK^aev (conquered the enemy with great tact). 

Rem. 9. Here belongs the phrase Xijpels exw> or m a question, rt 



484 syntax. [$ 312. 

A 77 pels ex w; i» ©• 3/ 0?( & e<? J° trifling so, or wAy f/o yo« keep trifling so ?, exw here 
expressing the idea of duration. PL Gorg. 490, e. ttoTcc virpd-fifiara <pXvape?s 
%X C0V > i u ' nat shoes are you always prating so mwh about ?). Here belong also the 
Part, (pe pSfieuos, and cpepcov used intransitively, summo studio, maximo impetu, 
dedita opera, with verbs of motion. Her. 8. 91. o.fws 8e f^es tous 'A^gyafoys 
Siacpvyoiei/, cpe p6 ixevo 1 (cum impetu delati) iseiwrTov is tovs Alyivr,ras (as often 
as they escaped the Athenians, rushing on violently they fell into the hands of the 
Aeginetae). 8,87. (yavs) dLcoKOfxeur] virb rys 'Attz/cv]s cpepovcra ive/3aXe vrfl' (piXiri 
(cum impetu aggressa est amicam navem, being pursued by the Attic ship, made a 
violent attack on a friendly ship). Aeschin. Ctes. 82. is tovto cpepcov nepiecrT-nae 
ra irpdyixaTa (he designedly brought things to this state). Comp. ib. 90 and 146. 

Rem. 10. In like manner the Greek employs the participles %x a}V i dycov, 
(pjpwu, Xaficbv, where the English may use the preposition with; e%coj/ is 
used both of animate and inanimate objects, which may be in the possession of 
any one, dycov of animate objects, cpepcov of inanimate, Xaficbv of both, e. g. X. 
Cy. 1. 3, 1. epx^Tai 7] Mavddwn npbs rbv irarepa Kal rbv Kvpou rbv vlbu trover a 
(with her son Cyrus, etc.). So 6 Kvpos £icpos cpepcov irpos-nXacrev, 'Lizirov dycov 
?iX&ev, 'nnreas Xaficov tovs TroXe/xiovs KareUco^ev. The Homei'ic and Poetic 
language often connects the participles ex wv i cpepcov, Xaficov, and dycov with verbs 
of giving, placing, etc., in order to present the idea of the action that preceded 
the giving and placing, graphically, as it were, before the eyes of the hearer. 
II.77, 305. ScoKe £tcpos apyvporjXov crvv KoXew re (pep coy Kal iv^ecrrqj reXa/xcovi 
(bringing he gave, he brought and gave a sword studded with silver). 

5. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Accusative is also used, 
but for the most part only when the Part, has no definite sub- 
1 ject, consequently where the verb from which the participle 
comes, is impersonal, e. g. i£6v (from l^eam, licet), quum liceat, 
liceret, ivhile, ivlien, since it is or teas allowed; or with impersonal 
phrases, e. g. alaxpov ov {quum turpe sit, esset, while, because, 
since it is or ivas shameful.) The idea of extension in time, which 
is expressed by the Ace. ($ 279, 6), is, in this construction, trans- 
ferred to the state or condition of an object; the conjunctions 
ivhile, when, express this corresponding relation. 

ia); Accusative absolute. PL Menex. 246, d. fifuv i^bv Cf\v /xt) KaXcos, KaXcos 

} dtpwufXe&a /xaXXov reXevrav (since it is not in our power to lire honorably). Protag. 

358. d. OTav avdyKacrfri) 8vo7v icaKcnv rb erepov alpe?cr&cu, ovdels rb /xe7(ov alprjcre- 

Tai,.i£bv rb eXarrov (alpe7a£rai), no one will choose the greater, when it is in his 

power to choose the less. Her. 1, \29."ApTrayos, irapebv avrco fiaaiXea yevecr&ai, 

&XXcp 7repie3-7j/ce rb icpdros (when it was in his power to become a king). 5,49. 

■trapexov (quum liceat) Trjs Acr'n)s irdcrr]s dpx^v evirerecos, &XXo ri aip-ijerecr^e ; 

Th. 5; 14. (ol > A5r)va7oi /xere/xeXovTO, on jxerd to. iv TivXco (yevo/xeva), KaXcos ira- 

pacrx6v, ov £vvef3r)crav (whejtm favorable opportunity presented itself). So virdp- 

*i%.bv,j)U}Aia Herat,- liceret ; Seoy, > quum opus (necesse) sit, esset; 8 6£av avrois (quum 

''■'-~^ s -rfffiit • s// ovre^et, when it )>l eased them, when they had decreed) ; Sokovv (quum 

, .'%$l$$*!''- cidi-ji^ir): it p s.^K&y (quum decent, deceret). Passive participles: 

'1^^125. 5 e5 y/xevo y S'e avrois, ebSbs fxev db~vvara $v inixeipe7v attapacT- 

k^b^olaiv (and though they had determined, it was not possible for them, etc.). E I p 77 - 



,, w _•_,. 






$ 312.] THE PARTICIPLE. 485 

[xeuou (quum dictum sit, esset). Adjectives with 6u, e.g. StjAov 6u (quum 
appareat, appareret) ; d8r}Xou ov, Svuarbu 6u, ad vuarou 6u. Also some- 
times without 6u, e. g. 5 r\ Xou, auay Ka?ou. 

(b) Accusatives absolute. Though the participles of impersonal verbs usu- 
ally have no subject joined with them in the Ace. Absol., yet a neuter pronoun. 
not a substantive, may be joined with them as their subject. Her. 2, 66. 
ravra y iv 6 Lieu a, ireuSea ,ueyxXx robs Alyvrrriovs KaraXaixfixuei {when this 
is done, the Egyptians are filled with great grief). Th. 4, 125. ^'S^ a/j.<porepoLS 
/j.eu Bokovu avax^pelu, tcvpw&eu Se ovSeu (sed quum nihil decretum esset) , ex<*>- 
povu eir oXkov. X. H. 3. 2, 1 9. 8 o^aur a 8e ravra Kal irepau&eura, ra. /j.hu 
arparevfxara aTrrjXSreu [when these things had been agreed upon and accomplished). 

Rem. 11. The Genitives absolute, however, are more frequent than the Ace, when 
a neuter pronoun is joined with the impersonal verb. X. H. 1. 1, 36. 86 £ a v r o s 
r ovrov wxero (hac re decreta, this having been agreed to, when this had been, etc.). 
7, 30 and 5. 2, 24. § o^dur ecu rovrccu. Cy. 4. 5, 53. r ovt ov crvuS okovu- 
tos (ace. to the best MSS.). 4.5.53. r ovrov ovrus ix ovTOS - Aho 8o£- 
av ravra (from e5o|e ravra) occurs. X. An. 4. 1, 13. 8d£au ravra, iter)- 
pv£av ovTb) -kokuv {when this was approved, they gave orders by the herald to do ac- 
cordingly). With such impersonal verbs as contain the subject in a measure 
in themselves, the Gen. is used, e. g. vouros, o-aXiri(ouros [§ 238, 5. (b)]. 
Elsewhere the Gen. but very seldom occurs with impersonal verbs and phrases, 
e. g. X. Hipp. 4, 2. adr)\ov our o s, el ktX. 

6. The particle of comparison o>s, is connected both with the 
dependent Part. ($ 312, 3), and also with the Gen. and Ace 
absolute, when the idea expressed by the Part, is to be in- 
dicated as a representation, as a subjective view, opinion, oj 
purpose of the actor or speaker. This ws has the same signifi- 
cation as a Part, of a verb of thinking or saying, followed by 
an Inf., or Ace. with an Inf. The English can express this d>s 
by the expressions thinking, intending, with the intention of, 
saying, or by as though, as if under the pretence that, because. 

(a) Simple Participle. X. Cy. 1. 1, 1. ot rvpauueiu Hix^p'ho'avres, kclu biro- 
Gouovu X9^ vov &PX 0UT€S 8iayeucouraL, &av/j.d£ourai, ws o~o<poi re Kal evrvxeTs ye- 
yewniieuoi (properly, as those are admired, who are wise men = uo[ll(6 jxevoi 
o~o<poi re ko.1 evrvxeh yeyeurioSai, thought or reputed to be wise). PI. Rp. 329, a. 
ayauaKTovcriv, & s fxeyaXwu ni/cau a7r e o~r e p-n fxeuo t (i. e. r)yovfj.euo 1 fj.ey. r. 
aTrearep?io-&ai {as if they had been deprived, thinking they had been deprived). X. 
An. 1. 1, 11. 'E/ce\ev<re {Up6^euou) XafSoura du8pas on irXeio-rovs irapayeueoSai, 
ws is Tie La-Idas fiovXofxeuos o-rpareveoSaL {pretending that, under the pretence 
that, saying that, he wished to march against the Pisidians). 'as is very often 
connected with the Fut. Act. Part., when a purpose in the mind of another 
is expressed. X. An. 1. 1, 3.'Apra£ep£-ns o-vKXafJ.L3a.ueL Kvpou ws airoKreuwu 
{arrests Cyrus for the purpose of putting him to death). The writer here states the 
view or purpose as it existed in the mind of Artaxerxes, and not his own yiew 
of the matter. So also very often with irapao-Kevd^ea^aL, § 310, 4, (h). 

41* 



486 SYNTAX. [§ 312 

(b) Genitives absolute. X. H. 7. 5, 20. TraprjyyeiXep avrols TrapacnceuaCecr&ai, 
us /xdxvs iao/j-ei/ris (i. e. Xeyup p-dxw ecre<T&ai) (he commanded them to pre- 
pare themselves, because, as he said, or saying that, there was to be a battle). 5. 4, 9. 
iKripvTTOv 4£iipai iravras Qwfiaiovs, as tup Tvpdppup t eSri> e ut up (quia tyranni 
mortui essent, because, as he said, the tyrants were dead). Th. 1, 2. is 'laviav &Vre- 
pop, us oux iKaprjs ovcrrjs ttjs 'AttlkT^s, airoiKias i^trefj.^av (i. e. pop.i Copts s 
ovx iKavrjy zlvai) (afterward sent colonies to Ionia, thinking that Attica was not large 
enough). 

(c) Accusative absolute. X. An. 5. 2, 12. 6 §e rols irtXTaffTais irucri iraprjy- 
yeXXe 8i7iyKvXup.spovs levat, bj, bir6rav o-npA]pri, anovTifav hey <T ov (he com- 
manded all the peltasts to advance, ready to shoot, saying, that it would be necessary 
for them to hurl their javelins, etc.). PL Pp. 425, a. to?s ruxtrzpois iraialu ip- 
vop.uTepov ev&bs iraiSias /ue&e/rreoj', u s, irapavSp.ov yiyvo/x4vr]s avrrjs, 4ppo/xovs re 
Hal (TTrov&aiovs ai/dpas av^duea^ai dhvvarov op. Sows 4£ > 6p, us rrapop, etc. 

(d. Accusatives absolute. X. C. 1. 2, 20. Sib Kal robs vh?s oi irarepes airb 
tup irop-npup ap&puirup e'lpyovaip, u s t\\p pkp tup xp-na-rSiv d/xiXiap daK-naip 
ovaav Trjs aperrjs, ttjp 8e tup -Kovnpwv KaraKvffiv (assured that, knowing that, 
the intercourse with good men leads them to practise virtue). 3, 2. euxeTo ~2.uk- 
pdTTjS Trpbs robs &eobs atrXus raya^a Sidovai, & s robs &eobs KaXXiGTa 
el86ras (thinking that, convinced that, the gods knew what was best). This con- 
struction is very common, and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the 
one mentioned in No. 5, (b). Perhaps this construction is not absolute, but 
depends upon a verb of perception to be supplied, indicated by us. 

Rem. 12. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with us, oc- 
curs with the verbs eldepai, e-rriar aa&ai, poetp, <=x eiv J v. (& jx r) v, Sia- 
Kficr&ai ttjp ypu /u-n p, <p p o pt i ^eiv, also sometimes with Xeye ip, and the 
like verbs, with which, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. of the substan- 
tive with a Part, or the Ace. with an Inf., would stand as the object. The 
consequence resulting from the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by 
ovrw(s) joined to the predicate. X. An. 1. 3, 6. us i/xov ovp Ioptos, oir-n av 
Kal up.e7s, ovrca ?V yv&vnv e%6Te (as if then I shall go, etc., seeing then that 
I shall go, so form your opinion, i. e. be assured that I shall go wherever you go, me 
iturum esse, quocunque etiam vos, statuite). Cy. 2. 3, 15. us olv 4/j.ou ye Kal 
ayupiov/xepov Kal, 6wo7os &v tis 8>, Kara t^p a£iav p.e Ti/xap a|i uff opt o s, 
our cos, €(pr), &> Kvpe, yiypuaKe. PI. Cratyl. 439, c. 8 laporj&epT es us 
i6vrwp T€ arrdprwp ael Kal pz6prup (reputantes, omnia semper ire et jiuere). 

Rem. 13. Instead of d>s, &sTrep (quasi) is sometimes joined with the Part. 
In order to bring out emphatically an objective (actually existing) ground or 
reason, the particles are (are dr)), seldom oTa, oTop (in the Ionic writers, 
also, & sre), in the sense of inasmuch as, because, quippe, are connected with the 
participle. Her. 6, 59. are ttvkpov 46ptos rov a\aeos, ovk upup oi iprbs 
robs 4kt6s (because the grove was thick). X. An. 4. 8, 27. are fre u/j.4pup 
tup kraipuv, 7roXX7) (piXopziKia iyiypero (because the hetaerae were looking on, 
there was much rivalry). 5. 2, 1. oi KoXxoi, are i kit e irr oik ot e s [4 k] tup 
oIkiuv, koXXoI i\aap a$p6oi Kal birepeKaSriPTO eVi tup dxpuv (inasmuch as they had 
been driven out of their houses, etc.). Th. 2, 5. ■?\aap Kal ap&puiroi Kara tovs aypovs, 
ola a.7rpos8oKT)Tou KaKov 4p elp-qun y tpojxsp o v. PL Charm. 153, a. olop Sia, 
Xpovov a<piyp.4p o s aa^ipus ya 4irl rds j;vP7]&eis Siarpi^ds. 



§ 313.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 487 

$ 313. Special peculiarities in the Participial con- 
struction. 

1. The Norn, of a Part, often refers to a preceding substantive in the Dat, 
Ace., or Gen., when the Dat., Ace, or Gen. in the preceding clause denotes the 
object in a grammatical point of view, but the subject in a logical respect, e. g. 
in doKe? /xoi = iyia Tjyov/xai, I think. This is a species of Anacoluthon 
(§ 347., 5). 

(a) Dative. Th. 3, 36. edo^ev avro?s (i. e. i\p7i<pLo , avro, voted) ov robs ica- 
pSvras ix6vov airoKreivai, aXXa Kal robs airavras MirvXrjvalovs, 4tt lk aXovvr € s 
rV aXXrjv airoo-Taau k. t. A. (as Sallust. Jug. 102. populo Romano melius visum — 
rati). 6, 24. epws iviireae iraariv (= iire&vfxovv travres) o/xoicos iKTrXevcrai' 
ro?s /xev ir p eo~ fivr 4po is ws . . Karaarpexpofxivois i<p' a eirXeov, . .roTs $' iv 
TjXiKia . . ev 4Xir iS e s ovres trw&rio-zoSai. — (b) Accusative. Eur. Hec 970. 
al8a>s jx I'xet (= al8ov/xai) iv r<SSe iroip-w r vyx^v ovo-' "v el/xl vvv. — (c) Geni- 
tive. Her. 4, 132. Aapeiov fj yvwp.7) %t\v (= iylyvwoicev) ej/cafac. Th. 4, 
23. ra 7T6ol HvKov vn a p. (p or 4 pea v Kara Kpdros iir oX e p.e7r o (=Ta 7reol II. 
a/xcporepoi iiroXefxovv), 'AS- 77 va7o i /xhv . . ri\v v?\crov ir e p lttX 4 ovr e s . . , IleA- 
oiro v vi]o~ loi Se iv rfj 'H7reipw o~ t par ott e§ evo/x e vol (comp. § 266, 3). — 
Sometimes also the Ace. and Dat. of the Part, is constructed according to the 
sense of the preceding phrase or clause, and not according to its grammatical 
form, e. g. S. El. 479, sq. vireari llol &pd<ros advTrvSwv kXi/ovct av dpricos 
oveipdrcov (instead of &pdaos xC e%et KXvovcrav). Th. 1, 62. ^v yv&p.i\ 
rod 'A pier re cos (= e'Soije red 'A p iar e?) to p.\v Liefr kavrov arpar6iredoj/ 
%X° VT i * v T< ? 'Ic^w iiur-np^v robs 'A&rjvaiovs. 

Remark 1. On the Nom. of the participle in the partitive apposition, see 
§ 266, 3. — The Nom. of the Part, sometimes stands in a sentence alone, with- 
out a finite verb, so that the Part, apparently, but only apparently, takes the 
place of the finite verb. The finite verb must then be supplied from the pre- 
ceding or following sentence. Her. 1, 82. AaKedaixiovioi ra ivavria rovrccv 
s&evro voliov ov yap ko jxccvr e s irph rovrov arrb rovrov ico/xuv (sc. vop,ov 
e&evro). So also conjunctions stand without a finite verb. e. g. el, idv, bray, 
etc. X. C. 2. 1, 23. 6pci> ae airopovvra, iroiav 65bv irrl rbv (iiov rpdiry- iav ovv 
ijxl cplXr]v ir o njadfxevo s (scil. rrjv iirl rbv fiiov 6§bv rpdrrr;). In very many 
passages, however, the Part, may be explained by inserting t-ljxt. 

2. The genitives absolute sometimes occur where the subject of the participle 
is not different from the subject of the predicate or an object of the predicate ; here 
it is to be noted, that the subject of the participle is often wanting, since it can 
be easily supplied (§ 312, Rem. 4). The reason of this peculiar construction 
is commonly found in the effort to express the member of the sentence with 
greater emphasis. 

Instead of the Nominative. Th. 3, 13. fior}&T)cr dvr cov vxiwv irpo&v/xws 
ttSXiv irposXriiieoSe (you aiding, you will more readily, etc.). 70. Kal is x6yovs 
Kar ao-rdvr civ (KepKvpalcov) ityrjcpio-avro KepKvpaToi (the Corcyraeans having 
had a conversation, determined). X. Cy. 1. 4, 20. ravra eiirovros avrov I'SoiJe 
ti (sc. avros) \4yetv ry 'Ao-rvdyei. Instead of the Accusative. Her. 9, 99. ol 
Hdfxioi, a.iriKop.4vcov 'A fr 77 v aiaiv al%p.aX<lor <mv . .rovrous Xvcrduevoi ivdv- 
ras aTroTr4fxirovo~L . . is ras 'A&'hvas (when the Athenian captives had come, the ISami- 
ans having ransomed them, send all back to Athens). Instead of the Dative. Th. 
1, 114. Kal is avrrjv 8iaf5e&7)Koras ijSri lie p 1 kX 4 ov s . .riyyix&r) avr<$ 
(UepLKXe?) (when Pericles had crossed over into it, it was announced to him). 

Rem. 2. These examples must be distinguished from those in Homer, where 
the Gen. of a Part, follows a Dat. of a pronoun, or the Dat. of a Part, follows 
a Gen. ; then instead of the possessive Gen., Homer sometimes uses the Dat. 



488 syntax. [$$ 314, 315 

Od. i, 257. 7ifi?i/ 8' avre KareKXdcr&r) <pi\ov r)iop Se ktolutuv <p&6yyov re fiapvv 
avrou re ireXupov ( = rj fx a> v fir op). 458, sq. t<£ k4 ol ijKicpaX6s ye diet, (nreos 
&WvSis &\hr] &zivoj.i.4vov paioiTo Trpbs ovSe'i. II. |, 140. 'ArpetS^, j/vj/ 8r) ttov 
'A % i A At) o s oAobv /c^p ^Tj^et e^l aTr)Srecra , i (p6vov kcu (pv£av 'A^cucDj/ 8 epico fxevcc. 



CHAPTER VI. 
§314. The Adverbial Objective. 

The objective construction, finally, is expressed by adverbs. 
Adverbs denote the relation of place, time, manner, the quantity 
of a predicate or attribute, or of another adverb, e. g. iyyvSev 
7)\$€V, X^ s a-n-i/Sy], k a A cos aTreSavev, 7roAAaKis rj\$ev; adverbs 
are to be viewed in a measure as resembling the Cases of sub- 
stantives, since by these also, as has been seen, the relations 
just mentioned are expressed. Hence it is evident why most 
adverbs have a definite Case-inflexion, e. g. ov, where, dvo), kcxtco, 
61, olkol, irrj, 07rr), etc. ($ 101, 2). 

Remark. In addition to the above adverbs, the language has other adverbs, 
which do not, like those mentioned, define the predicate more exactly, but ex- 
press the relation of the predicate to the subject. These are called Modal 
Adverbs. They'denote the certainty or uncertainty, the extension or limita- 
tion, the affirmation or negation of the proposition ; or they exhibit the propo- 
sition inteiTOgatively. Several of them have been changed from adverbs to 
mere suffixes, and hence always depend on a particular word, which by them 
is made emphatic. The interrogative adverbs will be treated under the sub- 
ject of interrogative sentences. Of the other adverbs alluded to, the following 
deserve a more particular consideration. 

§ 315. A. Ar], hrjTa, S^yjv, SrjS^GV, hrjirovS-ev, Sac. 

1. At) is the abridged form of 77877, being conformed to it in usage ; but it 
can never, like 7^877, stand as the first word in a sentence (except in the Epic 
8-)? t6t€, turn hero, 877 yap, jam enim), but is used only as a mere suffix (§ 314, 
Rem.). It denotes in general that which is certain, sure, settled, a reference to 
something known (already, now, even, precisely, exactly) ; it is not used of a par- 
ticular time exclusively, but may refer to any time. It is very often employed, 
in order to denote a consequence which follows of itself, nothing further being 
taken into the account. Tavra, a vvv S 77 Xeyeis [just now, at this very time) ; a 
vvv 877 ekeyes (just now, just then). X. Cy. 4. 1, 23. vvv 877 av orjXdoaeis, el 
akri&rj eXeyes (now certainly). Ovhev St) itanbv Treir6v^aiJ.ev (nihil jam or nihil 
dum, thus far, as yet, up to this time). Ovhev 8 77 icaicbu ireiaoixe&a (nihil jam = 
further). With an Imp. or hortative Subj., it signifies, now, then, now then, I pray. 
X. C. 1. 2, 41. SiSa^o v 5rj trphs toov &ewv (now then teach, teach then, I pray). 






$ 315.] At}, SrJTa, $tjv, SrjSev, StjirovSev, Sat. 489 

"Iwfiev 877" (now then let us go, come now). After relatives, it often denotes a ref- 
erence to a thing which is known. X. Hier. 11,8. Kal irpt&ov p.\v ev&bs Ka-reip- 
ya(r;xevos au e'ivs rb (piAe7a£raL virb roou dpxoy.ei/o}v, oo drj ah ivi&ufj.uiu rvyxdveis 
(quod, uti satis constat, expetis). Hence in eidt'i (since now, qitoniam, i. e. quum 
jam), because now, puisque, in respect to something conceded, known ; as 877, 
seeing that, quandoquidem, el 877, si jam. if now. In a series of sentences con- 
nected by Kai, 877 is placed after the word which is to be made emphatic. PL 
Men. 87. e. vyieia, cpafiev, Kal Icrxvs K-ol xahhos ical ttKov t s St/. So Kal rb 
8 7) fJLtyLO-Tov ; further, ah\os re — k a I 8 77 Kai. Her. 1 , 30. els AXyvirrov a-nUero 
irapa "Ap.d.aiu, Kal 8 77 Kal es 'Sdpb'ts irapa Kpo?aov (and even also, and moreover 
also to Sardis). — Ti ovv 8 77; (why therefore, I pray ?) Has ovv 877; (how now 
then, how, I pray ?). 

2. In general, 877 is very often used in order to render emphatic and define 
more exactly, the word after which it stands : precisely, exactly, even (in English 
often indicated only by the tone of voice). X. Cy. 2. 3, 13. fxeya (ppovovaiv, 
on ireTraidevvrai 8^7 Kal ivpbs Kifxbv Kal irpbs Styav Kal irpbs plyos Kapiepelv (just 
because they have been taught, because they have been taught, forsooth). PL Prot. 
320, a. SeSicas irepl avrov, /j.-}] 8ia<p&ap-p 8 77 wjf 'AAK£/3iaSou (lest he should be cor- 
rupted, forsooth). "With adjectives and numerals, it has either a limiting or en- 
larging sense, according to the nature of the adjective or numeral, e. g. p.6vos 
d'f) (quite alone), iv /3paxe? S77 (in a very short time), aoSev)]s S77 (very weak), 
ttoAAoI S77, ttoWcLkis 5 77, KpaTLaToi 8 77 (the very best, confessedly the best). With 
a pronoun, it expresses the distinction, importance, prominence of a person or 
thing as known, e.g. eKe?vos 8 77, that (ivell-known) man, av St) ravra ero\/j.riaas ; 
(did you especially, you of all others dare this ?) : ovra 877, ivrav&a 8 77 : so with oth^r 
interrogative pronouns, X. C.4. 4, 10. Kal ttoTos 877 <roi, ecpr], ouros 6 Koyos eariv ; 
(what kind of reasoning, I ask, I pray ?). Eur. Med. 1012. r i 8 77 Karrj<peis o/x/jxt 
Kal SaKpvppoe7s ; So Ti 877 irore ; (what then in all the world?). Tis 877 ovv ; 
(who then now, who I pray?). With an indefinite pronoun, it increases the in- 
definiteness, e. g. a\\oi 877 (others, whoever they may be), oaos 877, dirSaos 8-/7, osris 
877 (some one or other, any one whatever, nescio quis), (j)v ottooov S77 xp° vov (I know 
not how long). With conjunctions and other particles, it signifies : (a) even, 
precisely, e. g. as S77, ira 877, indeed, just exactly, just even; (b) truly, assuredly, 
when a thought is to be expressed with assurance and decision, e. g. 7) 877, 7? 
fid\a 877, «:al 877, S77 irov, certainly indeed, assuredly, ov 877 irov, yet surely 
not at all, certainly not, yap 877, for surely. 

3. A-TjTa, which is formed from 8 77, serves like S77, only in a higher degree, 
to render prominent, and more exactly define the word, which stands before it. 
It may be joined with all the parts of speech, in order to define them, whether 
it be to extend or restrict them. It is very often used after interrogatives, e. g. ri 
877T 1 , e-n-eihav rovro yev-nrdi; (quid tumdemum dicetis, quum hoc factum erit ?). It 
is also quite frequently employed in answers (even so, precisely so, certainly so). 
Also, r h firjra, yes, forsooth, ov Sri ra (minims vero, no, by no ?ncans), p.r. S "7 r a 
(nay, do not), e.g. fxy hi)ra $pdorr,s radra: Kai S'ora (and forsooth, and truly). 

4. The enclitic h-fty is a Doric particle, but it also appears in the Epic Ian 



490 SYNTAX. [$ 316. 

guage. In Homer, Srr)v has always an ironical sense, like the Attic dr)irov, 
without doubt, certainly. II. j8, 276, ov &niv /xtv ird\iv avns dvf)aei &vubs dyr)j'ocp 
veineieiv fiaaiArjas bveiSeiois eweeaaiv. 

5. A7]bev (from §77 and &r)v) almost always expresses scorn, irony (scilicet, 
truly, indeed) ; it is very seldom used as a mere explanatory particle. X. Cy. 4. 
6, 3. awsTrs/j.ypd,u7]V (rbv vlov), fxeya <ppova>v, on 8r}&ev t?is fiaaiAscas &vyarpbs 
b\poi/xvv rbv i/xbv vibv yaixirnv (because, forsooth, I should see my son the husband of 
the king's daughter). 

6. AriTrov^eu (from 5r)irov and &r)v), I hope so indeed, I suppose, certainly 
(nempe, ironically). X. Cy. 4. 3, 20. eyu S 1 , r)v 'nrirevetv fxd^co, orav jxkv iwl rod 
'{irirov yevtc/xai, to. tov lir-KOKevravpov S-fjTrov&ev dLairpd^Ofxai (I shall, as I hope, 
act the part of a centaur). 

7. A at is a lengthened form of d-fj (as vai of vr)). It is used only in the 
phrases ri 8ai ; ttccs Sai ; it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder (ichat then? 
Jww so ? am' tu ? itane ? itane vero ?). 



§316. B. Confirmative Adverbs. 

1. Mtjv (Dor. and Ep. /xdv) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, as- 
severation, truly ; often also, like vero, it is used adoersatively : still, but. But it 
cannot stand as the first word in a sentence, as it commonly depends on another 
word, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly on particles. 
Its use with particles is as follows: (a) ^U /xr)v, surely, certainly, hence used 
particularly with oaths, asseverations, or solemn promises. X. Cy. 4. 2. 8. to 
tvktto. SiSooaiv avroTs, 1) /xtjv cos <plXois nai ttktto?s xP^ ae<7 ^ al &vto7s (that he as- 
suredly would treat them as friends). — (b) Ov fxrjv, fxr] /xrjv, truly, assuredly 
not. — (c) Kal ix.7) v, and indeed, yea surely, nay more. PI. Phaed. 5S, e. Kal 
jxrjv eywye ^avjxdaia eiraSov irapayev6/xevos. Kal jxr)v is often used, when a 
new assertion is adduced to strengthen or corroborate the meaning. Od. A, 
582. Kal jx^v TdvraKov elseldov; so. often in the dramatic writers when atten- 
tion is to be directed to the entrance of a new person : and see ! and lo ! Also 
Kal /xtjv Kai, et vero etiam, and indeed too ; k al /x^v ovSe, and indeed not even. 
— (d) 'AAA a jxr) v, at, sed vero, but indeed, but assuredly. In a question, Tt 
fxrjv j 7tws fxyv; quid vero? quid quaeso? what indeed ? what I ask? 

Remark. Instead of fxr)v, the Ionic writers employ the shorter form /xev, 
which, as well as /xr)v and /xdv, is found in Horn. also. Even in the Attic dia- 
lect, /x 4 v is sometimes used instead of /xr)v, e. g. in an answer. X. C. 1. 4, 4. 
irorepa yud)/xr]S epya Kpiveis ; Upeirei fxevrd eir cocpeXeia. yiyvo/xeva yvco/xrjs epya 
eluai. This confirmative /xev, instead of /xr)v, occurs in the following con- 
nections : (a) Mevroi expresses confirmation, surely ; very often in antitheses, 
like vero, to denote a limitation; thus, Kal /xevroi, ov /xevroi, a A Act /x eu- 
ro 1. — (b) Mevovv or /xev ovv, sane quidem, quite certainly, yea indeed, is 
used, for the most part, only in replies, e. g. irduv /xev ovv; very often when 
some correction is made. X. C. 2. 7. 5. ol irapa aol rovrcov ohhev eirio-ravrai 
Troielv; Uavra /xev ovv (but do those with you know nothing of these things? 
yes, everything, immo vero omnia). So ov or /x 77 /xev ovv, immo non. — (c) 
Mej/5-fj or /xev drj, quite certainly, yea indeed ; always in the phrases r) /xevdijy 



$ 317.J EMPHATIC SUFFIXES Trip, y£, toL 491 

ov fxeuSr), ak\a /xevdr], Kal /nevdr), ye pt.ev — 5^ instead of r) firju 8*7, 
etc. On the concessive /xev, see § 322, 3. 

2. ^H expresses confirmation (profecto). In order to strengthen it, /j.f)v is 
often joined with it. ^H irov, surely indeed, often ironically. The Epic 'rJToi 
like r), expresses assurance : surely, certainly. 

3. N u in Epic, expresses also an asseveration, hnt generally in an ironical or 
scornful manner (like the Attic Srjirov), indeed, forsooth, certainly, nempe. 

4. N ri, the Lat. nae, expresses an asseveration, but only in affirmative sen- 
tences, e. g. v)} rbu Aia, in truth, surely. — From vr\ is formed the lengthened val 
(as Sai from S?j), which has the same meaning, and is often used with fj.d. — 
Ma likewise denotes an asseveration; in affirmative sentences: val pa rbv 
Aia ; in negative : ov fxa rhv Aia. But where fxa Aia stands without a nega- 
tion, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear from the context 
and from an accompanying adversative particle, that the sentence is to be un- 
derstood as negative, like X. C. 3. 13, 3. 



§ 317. C. Emphatic suffixes 7rip, ye, roi. 

1. Hep is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb irepi, 
through and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of irep is through and 
through (throughout). Uep agrees with ye in that, like the latter, it gives empha- 
sis to the word with which it is joined, but it differs from ye, in making the 
emphasis extensive (consequently denoting the measure, size, the extent of the 
idea) ; ye, on the contrary, makes the emphasis intensive (consequently de- 
noting degree, the inward strength or force of the idea). In the Common 
Language, irep is not used alone, but in relation to another thought. Hence it 
is often connected with conjunctions and relatives, e. g. osirep, throughout, en- 
tirely, the very same who, oaosirep, altogether as great as, precisely as great, 616s irep, 
entirely, exactly of such a character as, etc,, oirov irep, just where, wherever, o&ei/ 
trep, just whence, whence soever, ecas irep, up to the very time, as far as, until, eirei Trep, 
since, eireiSr) irep, forasmuch, seeing that, whereas, elirep, if indeed, if even. In Eng. 
the meaning of both particles is often given by merely emphasizing the word 
to which they belong. 

2. r e denotes intension, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus ren- 
ders an idea emphatic and distinguishes it from others ; it may be used either to 
augment or restrict the force of a word, e. g. eyca ye (1 indeed, I for my part, 
however it may be with others), <rv ye, out 6s ye, iroWa ye, oKiya ye, etc. It 
depends, like the enclitics, on the word whose meaning it renders emphatic. 
In connection with relatives and conjunctions, it serves to confirm or complete 
the preceding statement. Thus, osye, who or which indeed, who certainly, qui 
quidem ; us irep ye, just as indeed ; ely e, if indeed, if however, siquidem ; after 
adversative conjunctions: aairoi ye, aXXa ye, etc.. and yet indeed (like 
quamquam quidem, verum quidem), ye makes an antithesis prominent, since it 
defines more exactly, limits or corrects what precedes. X. C. 1. 2, 3. /ecu rot 



492 SYNTAX. [$ 318. 

ye obdeircoirore vKeax eT0 8iSa(T/caA.os elvai rovrov (CERTAINLY Socrates made his 
pupils useful men, although, etc.). Te is very often used in replies and answers, 
in order to indicate that they either confirm, augment, complete, limit, or 
correct, the thought contained in the preceding question. 

3. Tot (enclitic) means surely, certainly, certe, and serves also to render an 
object marked and prominent. It is often connected with pronouns, e. g. ey<& 
rot, iywye rot, I surely, I most certainly, rj/xeTs rot, ravrd rot. It is particularly 
employed in quoting general propositions and proverbs, since by it an assertion 
is referred to a general truth and thereby confirmed. Theogn. 74. iravpoi r o i 
ttoWcov tthttov exovcrt v6ov. With adversative particles, e. g. Kairoi, tamen, 
quamquam (properly and surely), fxevroi, tamen (§ 316, Rem.), ardp rot, 
a A. A a toi, but certainly. Also, ovroi (jx^rot), certainly not, ydp roi, for 
indeed, for certainly, froi — tf, still stronger tfroi ye — y, either indeed— -or. 



§ 318. D. Negative Particles ovk and fxrj. 

1. Oi (like its compounds, e. g. obBe, oiire, ob dels, etc) is an objective 
negative; fx4] subjective,!, e. ob is used when something is denied absolutely, 
independently, by itself {objectively) ; p,'h (and its compounds), on the contary, 
when something is denied in reference to the conception, view, or will of the 
speaker or of some other person (subjectively). Both are commonly placed before 
the words to which the negation is to be applied. On the position after the 
word to be negatived, see § 15, 4. 

2. Hence ovk stands : (a) in all sentences containing a direct assertion, wheth- 
er these are expressed by the Indicative or Optative ; hence also (b) in subor- 
dinate clauses with on and is (that); (c) in simple interrogative clauses, 
both direct and indirect ; (d) in subordinate clauses denoting time, with '6re, 
iireiS-f], etc.; (e) the ground or reason, with on, Stort, iirei, etc.; (f ) the 
consequence, with &sre either with the Ind. or Opt.; (g) in adjective clauses, 
with os, osris, etc., which denote a concrete, objective attributive explanation ; 
(h) when an absolute negative meaning is to be given to a single word in a 
sentence, e. g. ovk aya&6s, ov kclkcos; in this case ob sometimes changes the 
idea of the word to an opposite sense. 

(a) Tovto ov yiyverat, ovk eyevero, ob yevr](rerai. Tavra ovk au yiyvotro. 
— (b) OlSa, or i ravra ovk eyevero. "E\eyeu, or i rovro obx ovrws elx^v. — 
(c) Tis ovk atVxweToi (or ovk av alcrxvvotro) KaKa Xeycov rbv aya&bv dvdpa; 
— ^Ap' ob &avfxd(ets rbv 2w/cpctT7/ ; — Ob dpdaets rovro] — Ov irept/xeve?s (§255, 
4). — $rjs, % ov; or <prjS,$ob cpys ; — Ae^ov, el (whether) obx tffxapres ravra 
Ae£as. On the dependent double question, see No. 3. — (d) "Ore ovk ?]XSfov 
ol 7ro\e/xioi, o! "EAAyves 7]crvxa(ov. — (e) "On oi fidpfiapot obx rjrr-hSrqo'av, oi 
"EWrjves ra opr) ob KareKnrov. — (f) X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. raxv ra Srnpia av7]\doKei 
(Kvpos), (Lsre 5 'Aarvdyns ovKer e?x e v abrtp avWeyeiv frripia. — (g) 'Avfjp, 
t>v ob k eJ8es. 'Avnp, %v ob k av frav/xdCots. 

3. M-f) on the contrary, stands : (a) with commands, warnings • hence with the 



$ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND fxr]. 493 

Imp. and with the imperative Subj.; (b) with wishes and exhortations; (c) in 
deliberative questions [§ 259, l..,(b)j ; (d) in clauses denoting purpose, with iVa; 
etc. (also with ottos and the Indie. Fut.) ; (e) in conditional clauses, with el with 
the Indie, or Opt., edv, oTav, irrdv, ews dv with the Subj., oTe ye = siqui- 
dem ; so also in subordinate clauses which denote a repetition, whether they are 
introduced by a temporal conjunction, or by el, edv, or by the relative, etc. : 
(f) in clauses denoting consequence or residt, with tisre and an Inf.; (g) in 
adjective clauses with '6 s, ostis, etc., which imply a condition ov purpose, in 
general when a subordinate clause contains an idea which is expressed only as a 
conception, supposition ; hence when the idea of a class or species as such is more 
precisely defined, and the sentence may be resolved by is, qui with the subjunctive 
(— ita comparatus, ut) ; (h) in the second member of a dependent disjunctive 
question {whether — or not), ov as well as fir) is used. PI. Phaed. 70, d. (nce^a!- 
fie&a, err 5 apa ev a8ov elalv ai tyvxed reXevTrjcrdurcav t£>v dv&pcorrcov, ei're ical o v. 
Crit. 48, b. (TKerrTeov, rroTepov Sikcuov i/xe ev&evde Treipao-&ca ei-ievcu, fir) dcpievTuiv 
'ASrrjvaicav, r) ov Sikcuov. PI. Pp. 339, a. el a\r)&es (h \eyeis), r) fir), ire tpdao fiat. 
fia£re?v. Phil. 21, b. tovt avr6, el r) x^P eLS f $ P-h X a ip els > ai/dyicn 8-hrrov <re 
ayvoelv, Kev6v ye 6vTa rrdo-ns (ppovf)aecos. Isae. 5, 14. ov de? vfias 4k tcov tov ko,- 
rriy6pov \6yoov tovs \6yovs KaTafiav&dveiv, el tcaAa>s vfiiv KeivTcu, r) fir), aAA' 4k 
tcov v6fi<cu tovs tov KaTr)y6pov Xoyovs, el op&cos vfias SiSd^ovai to irpciyfia, r) o v. 
But in those dependent questions, in which there is merely a distinction between what 
is, and what is not, fir] is used, when the predicate of the first member is not repeated, 
but must be supplied ; but o v as well as fi i), when it is repeated. Dem. Cept. § 142. 
\oy(o-ao-&e Trpbs vfias avTovs, rl re o-vfi/3r)aeTca. Kct.Te\pr)(picrfievois vfuv tov v6fiov Kcd ti 
fir). X. C.3.6, lO.oTtr&a, 6rr6crai Te (pvAaKal erv'iKaipoi elcrt kou oirocrai fir), kcu 6rr6aai 
Te (ppovpol iKauol elai kcu ottSo-oi fir) elffi. Aesch. 1, 27. 6 vofio&eT-ns 8iappr)8r)v 
arredei^ev, ovs XPV Sr)fir]yope?v kcu ovs ov Se? Keyeiv ev tw 8r)ficp. — M77 is also used 
in direct and indirect interrogative sentences, which express fear, anxiety on the 
part of the inquirer, and hence require a negative answer; (i) in forms of 
swearing, and not seldom when one swears that something shall not happen, but 
sometimes also, when one swears that something has not happened ; in the latter 
case, the feeling by which the denial or abhorrence is expressed, is denoted 
by fir). 

(a) Mr) ypd(pe, fir) ypd\pys (§ 259, 5). — (b) Ei'&e fir) ypdcpois ! — M77 tovto 
yevoiTO ! — M 7; 'iw/xev ! — M^ ypdcpcofiev ! — (c) PI. Symp. 213, a. a\\d fioi Ae- 
yeTe, elslcc, r) fii); crvfnrtecr&e, r) ov ; Rp. 337, b. rrws Aeyeis ; fir) drroKpivooficu ; 
(shall I not answer thee 1 ?). — (d) h.eya>, 'Iva fir) ttoitjs. — (e) El fir) Xeyeis. — 
'Eav fir) \eyns. — "Orav TavTa fir) yevr)Tai. PI. Prot. 345, e. hs av fir) kcckci, 
■Kotfj eKdou, tovtcou <prjcr\v eiraiveT-qs eJvai (as often as one does not willingly do evil, 
etc.). X. Cy. 2. 3, 20. el (oTe) fir) dXKo ti <rrvovb'ai6Tepov irpdrToiev, ravrr) Trj 
ircuoia. exp&vTo (as often as, whenever, they were not engaged in more important busi- 
ness). — (f ) PI. Phaed. 66, d. to awfia rjfias eKTr\r)TTei & jt e fi^) tivvaoSrai vn avTod 
ica&o pav Ta\r)&es. — (g) PI. Ap. 21. a. fir) olSa, ovSe otofiat eldevcu (= et Tiva. fir) 
olSa). Hence '6 t 1 fir), unless, nisi (properly ovoev oti fi-fj, then generally instead of 
el fir)), '60-01 fir), except those who not. Her. 1, 32. ev t<3 fiaxpS xp^r ^oWd fiev eo~Ti 

42 



494 SYNTAX. [} 318. 

Ideau, to (= a) fxr) ris iSreXei [multa, quae ita sunt comparata, ut, one can see many 
things of such a nature that he would not wish to see). Andoc. 3, 41. \pr)(piaaoSfe 
r o tavr a, e| cov fxrjderr ore v[x1v /xerafxeXi)aei. — (h) M77 rebvrjKey 6 irarrip ; 
(my father is not dead, is he ? = is it not to be feared that my father is dead ?). 
$o/3ov/xai, 1X7) 6 ira.T7]p r&vr)Kev ; {I fear that my father is dead, I am anxious to 
know whether my father is dead). Mr) Spdo-eis rovro; (you will not do ii his, will 
you ?). Mr) SeiXol ioS/xeba ; (we shall not be cowards, shall we ? shall we be cow- 
ards?). Mr) voaeTs ; ^Apa jxr) vocreis ; (you are not sick, are you?). — (i) Ar. 
Eccl. 999. p,a rr)v 'AcppoS'ir-nv . . fxr) 'yd a a<pr)aw (I will not let you go, the thing 
shall not be). Aor. 194. ixa yr)v . . fxr) 'yoo vor)ixa Ko/x^orepoy rJKovo-d rrcc, Beware 1 
1 have not listened. Mr) is not unusual with the Inf. X. An. 7. 6, 18. b/xuvta 
vjx?y &eovs arvavras Kal rraffas fxrjSh a i/xol iSia u7reo"X6TO 1,ev&r)s ^X €LV ' 

Eemakk 1. In all the instances above given, except (a) (b) (g), ov is used 
when a single word in the sentence is to be made negative, e. g. O v <pu/xev ,- 
negemus? Isocr. Paneg. 71, 6. XafiSvres e|a/asxi/\Jous r&v 'EXXi)ucov, oi iv reus 
avTwv ovx oToi t i)crav Cw (nequirent) ; hence in the combinations ovSsls 
osris oil) ovSeuhs or ov ov, etc. (§ 332, Rem. 12); so also in ovk eo-fr' 
6 ttccs ov: for these expressions are, as it were, blended in a single word, like 
nullus non. El ov daxret. (recusabit). Dem. Cor. 320, 283, &sr ov fj. e fx v r) cr - 
&ai (= oblivisci). Moreover el can stand with ov, when the clause takes the 
place of a causal sentence. 

Rem. 2. On ovk "av Xeyois ravra, instead of ^7? Xeye, see § 260, 2. (4) (b) ; 
on ov Spdaeis rovro (instead of fxr) dpdavs) and ov dpdoreis rovro: (— do this 
indeed), see $ 255, 4. 

4. Mi) is regularly used with the Inf. But after verbs of thinking : ohfxai, vo- 
uifa, viroXafxfidva, Sokco, as well as after <pr)/xi and anovoo, ov is commonly used, 
since the Infinitive (Ace. with Inf.) in this case has the force of an affirma- 
tion ; much more seldom after other verba putandi et dicendi. When, however, 
these verbs are in the imperative, or in the imperative Subj., or in another con- 
struction Vihich requires /xi), then fj.i) follows. 

PI. Theat. 152, b. elicbs o'ocpbv dvdpa fxr) Xr)peiv. X. C. 2. 1, 3. rb fxr) cpevyeiv 
robs tvoi/ovs. 1. 1, 20. &av[xd(w, oiroes irorh err eio'&r) o~ av : 'Afrnvcuoi ~S,coKpdrr)v 
rrepl robs &eobs fxr) aa(ppoveiu. An. 7. 6, 18. bfxvvco vfxiu, fxrjd' a i/xol lb"ia 
inresx eT0 2euS-7?s *X elv - X. C. 1. 1, 19. (ol rroXXol) olovrai robs &eobs ra jxkv 
eldei/ai, to S' ovk dSevcu. 2. 4. ravrr)V rr)v %fyv (vivendi rationem) rrjv rr)s ipvxris 
imjxiXziav ovk i(XTroo~i£eiv e <J> 77. 1. 15. marevoou &eo?s was ovk eTvcu &eobs 
ivofxi^ev; X. C. 4. 8. 2. 0^0X0761101 ovSei/a ttcc roov fxvr)[xovzvo(xevccv av- 
bpchrruv KdXXiov Sdvarov iueyKelv. More frequently fxi), as: Isocr. Phil. 109. 
w /xoXoyovu /xrjdevbs rrdiirore roaovrov rrpayfxaros Sta/xapreiy. Id. Dem. 22. 
v 6 /xi(e [ir)8ev eluai rwv av&pwirlvwv fiefHaiou. 

Rem. 3. When an abstract substantive or substantive adjective stands in- 
stead of the Inf., then either ok or fxr) may be used, according to the nature 
of the clause into which the substantive or the substantive adjective may be 
resolved, e. g. Ar. Eccl. 115. deiubv 8' lar\v r) /xr) e/XTreipia (==■« fxi) ris eV- 
riv efxrreipos). Th. 1, 137. ypd\\ias rrjv rwu yecpvpwv ov didXvo~ iv (= oti or 
&s [lhal\ at yscpvpai ov SieXvdrjo-av). 



$ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND pcrj. 495 

Rem. 4. "With some verbs, e. g. fydvai, oUo-frai, a£iovv, vi?ktxv^<t- 
3-ai, the negative, which properly refers to the Inf., is usually joined with the 
finite verb, thus ov (py/xi, like tiego, I deny, refuse. X. An. 1. 3. 1. oi arpanco- 
rai ovk ecpaaav Uvai rod Tvp6croo (negaverunt se ituros esse). Th. 2, 89. £vveKaA- 
sva (v^as), ovk a^iwv ra (x^ Seiva iv oppuSiq zx eiJ/ {desiring that you should 
not fear what is not to be feared). 

5. With the participle or adjective, fx i\ is used only when these can be re- 
solved by a conditional clause, or when they stand in a connection which 
requires /x-f) ; in all other cases, ou is used. O v 8wdjxevos, one who cannot, or is 
unable, ov fiovAo/xevos, nolens, ovk avayKa7ov, unnecessary, ra ov KaAa fiovAev- 
fxara, turpia consilia ; 6 ov Triareicov (one who does not believe, is qui non credit, or 
quum (since) non credit, or quia non credit) ; 6 ov cpiAoo~o<p£)v (is qui non philoso- 
phatur) ; 6 fi)) merreveev (if one does not believe, si quis non credit). X. An. 4. 4, 
15. outos yap iSSKei Kal TrpSrepov ttoAAo, tfdr] aATi&evcrai roiavra, ra ovra re cos 
ovra, Kal ra fx^j ovra us ovk ovra (if anything was not, he represented it as not 
being). So 'H ao&La ruv deiv&v Kal /xt) deivcov avSpeta icrriv, PL Ol8d ere ravra 
o v iroi-fjcravra. "H77etAe r\\v ttSaiv o v itoAiopK^eio-av. Protag. 360, d. used 
in philosophical definitions of an ideal assumption ; on the contrary ra ov Seivd 
objective, used of actual dangers. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. tv av yvSxri dwdjxevov /xev x<*P lv 
cnroSiScVcu, /xt] airodifiovra fie, KoAd£ovo~i rovrov lo~xvp£)S (= idv riva nrX.) (whoever 
they knew capable of repaying a kindness, if he did not repay it, they, etc.). 3. 1, 16. 
ri yap av . . xp^l^air' &v ris lcrx v PV 77 avdpeico /xtj awcppovi (= et /xt] o'axppojv ei7)). 

6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or adverbs, e. g. any 
one, any how, any where, at any time, ever, etc., these are all expressed negatively. 
These negative expressions neither destroy nor strengthen each other, as they 
do not stand in an opposite relation, but each of them is to be considered inde- 
pendent. The negatives must be of the same kind, i. e. either compounded 
of ovk or (xt). Double negatives in Latin, English, and the modern languages, 
destroy each other, but not in Greek. 

PI. Up. 495, b. a/xiKpa (pvcris ovSev /xeya ovd e-rror e ov$4va ovre ISiojt7]v 
ovr e tt6\iv dpq (a mean nature never does anything noble either for any private 
individual or for the State). Hipp. Maj. 291, d. (rb koK6v) o /x-n SeTrore cucr- 
Xl'bv fxrjda/xov ix7]Sevl (pave7rai (which never antwheke seems to any one 
displeasing). Lysid. 214, d. 6 KaKbs ovr aya&£, ovre KaKca ovdeirore els 
aAySri (piXiav epx^raL. In like manner the simple negative (ov, fxrj), which in 
this case must always precede the other negatives, is so connected with its 
compounds that neither lose their force ; hence ovk iartv ovdev (there is not 
anything, there is nothing) ; so also the negative parts are joined with the nega- 
tive whole, e. g. Oi Svvarai ovr e3 Aeyeiv ovr eS iroieTv robs (piAovs, he can 
neither — nor ; in like manner also ou8e, fx 77 5 e, not even, ne — quidem, are used 
in a negative sentence, e. g. ov hvvarai ou fie vvv ev noie?v robs (piAovs (he is not 
able, not even now, to benefit his friends). 

Rem. 5. If the finite verb is connected with a participle, the negative, when 
it refers to both, is usually placed with the Part., though only when the Part. 
precedes the verb. Th. 1, 12. fxeriz ra Tpou/ca rj 'EAAas en [xeravio-Taro Kal Kar- 
WKi(ero, 2>sre fir} ?/<7 vxda ao~ a av£r)&nvai (i.e. &sre fx^] i)(Tvxdaai Kal /xrj 



496 SYNTAX. [$ 318. 

avfr&rjvai). "Where the negative is so placed, it must be considered as belong- 
ing to the whole sentence, and not to a single word. 

7. Ov pi) Avith the Subj. or Put. Indicative, is elliptical, since with ovk a 
verb denoting anxiety or /ear, which is sometimes also expressed, must be sup- 
plied, and pi) must be referred to this verb. Hence ov pi) is used, when the 
idea to be expressed is, it is not (ov) to be feared that (pi)) something will happen, 
e. g. ov ((pofiovpai) prj 7<=Vt7tcu tovto (non vereor, ne hoc fiat, this certainly 
will not happen). PL Crit. 46, c. ev ?o~&i, oti ov pi) aoi £uyx&pi)o~c0 (be assured, 
that I do not fear that I shall make concessions, i. e. be assured, that I certainly shall 
not make concessions to you). In a question with the second Pers. of the Put. 
Indicative. Ar. Nub. 505. ov prj XaXi)<reis, aXX" a.KoXov&i)creis epoi: I shall not 
expect that you will talk = do not talk (§ 255, 4). 

8. After verbs and expressions of fear^ anxiety, uncertainty, doubt, distrust, — 
denying, hindering, abstaining, — preventing, forbidding, contradicting, the Inf. 
with the negative pi) commonly follows instead of the Inf. without pi), the 
Greek repeating with the Inf. the negative idea implied in these words, for the 
purpose of strengthening the negative view of the sentence. This use of pi) 
is sometimes regarded as pleonastic ; but it is entirely in accordance with the 
frequent usage of the language in employing two negatives for the purpose of 
increasing the negative force of the sentence; hence, when a negative was 
contained in a preceding word, it was not unnatural to join a negative with 
the Inf. that followed. 

KuiXvca o'e prj ravra iroielv (I prevent you from doing this). Her. 3, 128. 
AapeTos an ay op ev e i v/juv j.irj dopvcpopeeiv 'Opoirea (Darius forbids you to act as 
a body guard to Oroetes). 66. 6 TIpr)£dcnrris e^apvos r)v prj airoKTelvai 'Spepo'iv 
(denied that he killed Smerdis). Th. 3, 6. ryjs pep ^aXdaarjs elpyov prj xPV^ai 
rovs MiTvXrjvaiovs. 5,25. aw e o~ %ovr o prj eirl ttju eKarepcop yrjp arparevaai 
( they abstained from marching into the country of each other ) . ( But alaxvvopai 
prj TToizlv tj signifies, I am ashamed not to do something, X. An. 6. 5, 4.) 

Rem. 6. When expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt and the like, are followed 
by ixT] with the Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), pi) must be considered as an interrogative, 
numne, whether not, and may often be translated by that; 1 e. g. dedoiKa, pi) awo- 
hdvn (metuo, ne moriatur, I fear whether he will not die = that he will die) ; e'Se- 
5o'lk€lu, /xri diroSdpoi (metuebam, ne moreretur) ; SeBoiKa, pi) reSrvnusu (ne mor- 
tuus sit. I fear whether he has not died, is not dead = I fear that he has died, is 
dead). On the contrary, /xrj ov with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt.), is used after 
the above expressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will not 
take place, or has not taken place ; e. g. SedoiKa, pr/ ovk airo&dvy (ne non mo- 
riatur, I fear that he will not die) ; iSeSoiKeiu, pi) ovk airo&dvot (ne non morere- 
tur, I feared that he would not die) ; SeSoiKa, pr) ov re&prjKep (ne non mortuus 
sit, that he is not dead). 

1 In expressions of fear, there is always a double idea in the mind, the fear, 
that something will take place, and the hope that it will not. This double idea 
both the Greek and Latin seem to indicate by using a negative after verbs of 
fear, the negative being referred to a verb of hoping understood ; but as the idea 
of fear only is expressed in English, the negative is* rendered that. Hence Ae'Soi- 
ko, pr) airo&dvr) (metuo. ne moriatur, I fear that he will die, but hope that he will not). 



$ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND fXrj. 497 

9. Even when, instead of the Inf., the conjunctions on, ws with the finite 
verb follow expressions of doubt and denial, the negation is sometimes repeated 
in the dependent subordinate clause by oi>. 

X. R. Ath. 2, 17 apv elff&ai. toIs &XXois, oti ov irapr\v (to deny to others that 
he teas present). PI. Meno. 89, d. '6n 5' ovk effTiv eiriaTtiix-q, ffKtyai, idv <toi 
Sokcv zIkotws airiffr e?v (but consider whether I seem to you justly to doubt that 
this is knowledge). Dem. Onet. 871, 14. ws 8' ovk eKe?vos eyecjpyei ttjv yrjv, ovk 
rjovvar apwn&rivai (he could not deny that he cultivated the land). Isoc. Archid. 
§ 48. ovdels av ToXfx-fjffeiev avT enre?v, ws ov t)]v efxireipiav piaXXov robv &XXwv 
exo/xev. 

Rem. 7. So even after ov /xaXXov (or when the clause in which LiaXXov 
stands, has a negative sense), ov is sometimes used, which in English is pleo- 
nastic. Comp. the French, where after a Comparative que ne is regularly 
used, e. g. II donne plus que vous n' avez donne, for the purpose of giving em- 
phasis to the idea of diversity (consequently a negative idea), which is contained 
in the Comparative (the gift of one is different from, not like that of the other). 
Her. 4, 118. Tj/cei 6 Ilepo-qs ovoev ri uaXXov iif rjfxeas, r) ov Kal iirl i/fxeas 
(does not come against us more than against you). X. H. 6. 3, 15. tj olv Set ( = ov Be?) 
eKelvov rbv xpovov dvajxeveiv, ews av vrrb irXri&ovs Kanwv dve'nrw/xev, [xaXXov, ?) ovx 
ws Toix^o-Ta tt]u elp-fjvrjv ■KoirjaaoSai ; in Th. 3, 36. the negation is contained in [xerd- 
void ns fy avTo7s (they repented — they no longer approved). UXrjv ov is some- 
times used in a similar manner. X. R.L. 15, 6. eSpas -rravres inraviaravTai [ZaffiXe7s, 
irX^v ovk e<popoi (all the kings rise from their seat, except the ephori). 

10. Mtj ov with the Infinitive is used instead of the Infinitive without nega- 
tion, with the expressions mentioned in No. 8., when the negative ov or 
another word which may be considered a negative, precedes fx$] ov. Mr) ov is 
here merely equivalent to the simple /x^i, and hence is not expressed in English 
where (xr) would not be (comp. No. 8, above). 

Ovoev KwXvei ffe fxrj ovk diro^aveiv (nothing hinders you to die, from 
dying). X. An. 3. 1,13. el yevrjao/xe&u e7rt /3aciAe?, tl i [xir oS wv ( = ovoev e/x- 
ttoowv) jxT) ovx^i (vpas) v/3pi(o/xevovs airobavelv (what hinders us from dying after 
being treated with insult); Vect. 3, 7. ov SvseXTris si fit. to fx$] ou^l Trpo&v- 
[xws av robs iroXiras els Ta Toiavra elscpepeiv (I am not without hope that the citizens 
would contribute for such purposes). Cy. 2. 2, 20. alcrxpov (■= ov KaXbv) ov 
dvnXeyeiv, fx^n oi»xi Tbv irXe7ffra Kal ttovovvto. Kal w<peXovvTa to koivov, tovtov 
Kal fxeyiffrwv d£iova&ai. 

Rem. 8. It is seldom in this case that ivi\ is used instead of ^n ov with the 
Inf. With the real negative expressions, o i> diiva/xai, aovvaros, ovx olds 
r el/J.i, ovdeLiia ixrixavh effri (= ov o~vv<zt6v sen iv), ov irei&w, ovx 
'6ai6v iaTiv, ovk €Ik6s iariv (it is not probable), ov <p-ny.i, and the like, 
and also such as avoia, av6r)r6v i&T't, the following Inf. is actually made 
negative by the accompanying fxrj ov (sometimes also by /x-f] alone), since the 
above expressions, when separated from the negative connected with them (or 
the a privative), have no negative force. Ou Svvafxai /xr) ov Troie7v (non pos- 
sum non facere, I cannot not do, i. e. / must do). X. Apol. 34. ovre jx^ fxe/xv^a^ai 
8vva/xai avrov, ovre fxefxvr)fxevos fxrj ovk eiratve7v (I must think of him, and if I 
think of him I must praise him). PI. Rp. 427, e. ovdev Xeyets- av yap vireaxov 
£r]TT]cr€iv, cds 011 x off 16 v ffoi ov jx)] ov fio-qSeiv diKaioffvvn els ovvafxiv iravrl 
rpdiroj (since it would not be right for you not to render assistance). Her. 7, 5. v k 

42* 



498 SYNTAX. [$ 319. 

eiKiis iffri 'A&rjvaiovs ipyaaafj.ei'avs TroWa rjHiri KaKa. Tlzpffas, fir] ov hovuai 5i- 
Kas, rwv (= wv) iiroiriaav (it is not right that the Athenians should NOT atone for 
their injustice). PI. Symp. 218, Q.-navv av6r\rov r)yov/j.ai elvai o~oi /at) ov koI 
tovto xapi£eo~dai (non sanum judico tibi hoc NON gratificari). Ov (pr),ui rovro fj.r) 
ovtus %x* lv (nec-O id sic se non habere, I deny that this is not so). — Also after the 
expressions 8eii/bi> zlvai, a I a xP^v, a I a x v vt]v el vat, alax^ veo~&ai, 
which contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with fxr) ov, when it is to be 
made negative. X. An. 2. 3, 11. wsre irao-iv alo~x vv ' r \ v 6?j/cu, fxrj obx^ 
o-vo~irovdd(eiv (so that all were ashamed [= none were willing] not to be busy). — 
Sometimes fxr] ov occurs after negative sentences with participles also, in the 
sense of if not, except, instead of the usual fxj]. PI. Sys. 212, d. ovk %<tti (pixov 
ru (piKovvTi ovSev fx.7} ovk avTKpiKovv (nothing is lovely in the eyes of the lover, 
except that which returns love). 






SE CTION II. 
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE 






CHAPTER VII. 
§ 319. A. Coordination. 
When two or more sentences stand in a close connection 
with each other, there is a two -fold relation to be distin- 
guished. They are either so related to one another as to 
exhibit a unity of thought, though each is, in a measure, 
independent of the other, e. g. Socrates was very wise, 
Plato also was very ivise ; or so, that they are wholly uni- 
ted, the one defining and explaining the other, the one 
being the dependent member of the other, e. g. when the 
spring comes the roses bloom. The first kind of connection 
is called Coordination, the last Subordination, and the sen- 
tences Coordinate and Subordinate. In coordinate sen- 
tences, therefore, the members are independent of each 
other, but in subordinate sentences, one member is de 
pendent on the other. 

/ came, I saw, I conquered. — Coordinate. 
When I came, I conquered. — Subordinate. 



$$ 320, 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 49 ( J 

Remark 1. The coordinate as well as the subordinate conjunctions are 
properly used only to connect whole sentences ; hut when several sentences 
have single members in common, these common members are usually expressed 
hut once. In this way the sentences are either contracted into one sentence, the 
suhject or predicate common to the sentences being expressed hut once ; or 
there is at least an abbreviation of the sentences, each sentence having its own 
separate suhject, but the predicate common to the sentences being expressed 
only with the suhject of one sentence. Oi "EWrjve s ro?s iroXe/xiois i-ire&ev- 
to ical Ka\a>s ejuaxecraj/TO. Sw/cpar^s /cat UKaToov crocpol ?j<rav. Oi /.<. e v "E A - 
A 77 v e s irapa rov iroraixov, oi 8 e II 4 p a a 1 iv opeaiv io~TpaToire8evo-avTO. 

Rem. 2. In respect to the grammatical form of connection, all coordinate 
sentences are alike ; they are all treated grammatically as principal sentences ; 
but in respect to their meaning and logical relations, they may be different. 
For every thought which forms a complementary member of another thought, 
can be expressed in a coordinate sentence, as was always the case, in the ear- 
liest use of language, e. g. Tb tap ^A&e, k al ra p6Sa av&e?, instead of ore to 
eap ^ A3- e, to. p. a. (the spring came and the roses bloom, instead of when the spring 
has come the roses bloom). 



§320. Different forms of Coordination. 
Coordination consists either in expanding, contrasting, or ex- 
cluding a thought. The first is called copulative coordination, 
the second adversative, the third disjunctive. Sentences also 
which stand in a causal relation to each other, may be coordi- 
nate, and are called causal coordinate sentences. 



$ 321. I. Copulative Coordination. 

1. A copulative coordinate sentence is one in which two or more thoughts 
which are considered independent, are so united together, that the thought ex- 
pressed in the coordinate sentence, gives a greater extent to the thought of the 
preceding sentence. A copulative coordinate sentence is either annexive or 
enhansive ; in the former, a second thought or clause is merely joined to a pre- 
ceding one ; in the latter, the statement made in the sentence applies with more 
force to the second member than to the first. An annexive coordinate sentence 
is made : — 

(a) By Kai, et, and, more seldom in prose by the enclitic re, que, and; 
icat and t4 have, in general, the same difference of meaning as et and que. 
K a l connects members of a sentence equally important, or those in which the 
one following is stronger than the one preceding ; hence it often strengthens or 
enhances the idea of the preceding member or is a more full explanation of it 
(ac,atque,et quidem) ; re appends some addition ivhich belongs to the preceding 
member ; in prose, words are seldom connected by a simple re, but sentences 
much oftener. — (b) in a more emphatic and definite manner by Kai — Kai, 
et — et, both' — and, not only — but also, more seldom by t e — re] the difference 
between the two in this case is, that with the former (/cat — /cat) the single 
members appear more independent and forcible, than with the latter (re — re) ; 



500 SYNTAX. [$ 321. 

hence the former is used., when the memhers are of different kinds or are anti- 
thetic ; — (c) by r A — Kai, both — and, not only — but also, when it is to be indi- 
cated that the connected members stand in an intimate connection with each 
other; by the stronger k a i, the second member is emphatically joined to the 
first ; they often correspond with the Lat. quum — turn, when the discourse pro- 
ceeds from the general to the particular and more important. 

^ccKpdrrjs k a I TlXarcov cro(pol -!)<rav. PI. Apol. 23, a. 77 av&pcoTrivr] crocpia bxiyov 
nubs a£ta earl k a I ovdeuOs. So ttoXXo. k a I irownpd, nroXXd k a I jxeyaXa ; hence 
Kal ravra, and that too. X. An. 3. 2, 16. direipoi ovres rcov -iroXe/xicou to t e irArj&os 
djxerpov bpwvres, op.ws eroXfxrjo-are levai els avrovs. PI. Phaedr. 267, a. Iiaiav Se 
Yopyiav r e edaojxev evBeiv; — "AvErpwiroi Kal aya&ol Kal KaKoi (but not Kal kclkoI 
k a I Tvovqpol ) . K al Tvevvres k al irXovaioi. Kal xPVI xara K a I duBpes. Kal vvv 
Kal aei. Kal irpara Kal varara. X. C. 1. 2, 4. (^wKpanqs) rod o-co/xaros 
avros t e ovk rj/xeXei, ro6s r a/xeXovvras ovk iirrjvei. KaX6s re ical aya&os. In 
antitheses: ' Ay a&d re Kal /ca/ca (the good as well as the evil),xpW'oi re Kal 
■novnpoi, rd r e epya 6/u.oicos Kal oi x6yoi. YLoXXa r e Kal KaXa. epya aTreBei^aro. 
Her. 6, 114. iroXXoi re Kal ovj/ofxaaroi. "AXXoi re Kal ^caicpdrris [quum alii, 
turn, S.). Her. 6, 136. MiAnadea eo~x oj/ * v o~r6[xan o'i re dXXoi Kal fxaXicrra 
Edv&nriros. Hence aAAws re Kai (quum aliter, turn, not only in other respects, 
but also), especially (but aAAws re without Kal signifies praetereaque, adde 
quod, i. e. and especially). The connection is expressed still more strongly by 
re — Kal 877 Kai (quum — turn vero eliam). PI. Rp. 357, a. 6 TXavKwu aei re 
avBpeioraTos &>v rvyxdvei rcpbs airavra, Kal 877 Kal rore rod ®paffvp.dxov r\\v 
aTr6pp7]o-iv (desperationem) ovk aireSe^aro. — It is to be observed that, after a/xa, 
77877, ovttoo, ob (pSdvca and the like, a coordinate clause with Kai or re — Kai often 
follows, instead of a subordinate clause with ore. X. An. 7. 4, 16. 77877 re Bih 
rov 6p6(pou ecpaivero irvp, Kal ~S,iXavbs ct)\xaivei rfj aaXiriyyi (the fire already began 
to appear through the roof, and [when] Silanus gives notice with his trumpet). Isocr. 
Paneg. 119 a /a a rj/xels Te rrjs apxys aTreo-repovfxe&a, Kal ro7s"EXXr]aiu apxh rSov 
itaKwv iyiyvero. 

Remark 1. Kai has this strengthening, intensive force also, when it stands 
at the beginning of a question, where the interrogator takes up, with surprise, 
the remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the nul- 
lity or absurdity of the other's statement. X. Cy. 4. 3, 11. aAA' e'fooi ris dv, 
on iralBes ovres efxdu^ravov ; — Ka! irSrepa iraxBes elo~i (ppovi/xdorepoi, &sre /xa&elv to. 
(ppa(6/xei/a Kal heiKvvfxeva, 7) a^Spes ; = ac multo minus prudentes sunt. So espe- 
cially Kal ir us; PI. Ale. 1, 134, C Bvvairo dv ris ixera8ih6vai, $> /j.7) ex^i] — Kal 
ttus : == ac minime quidem. 

Rem. 2. If more than two numbers succeed each other, they are connected 
in the following manner: (a) with the first member the connective is omitted, 
and the other members are annexed by Kai repeated; (b) Kai — Kai — Kai, 
etc.; (c) re — re — re, etc.; (d) re — Kai — Kai, etc. X. Cy. 1.4, 7. dpKroi 
re tvoKKovs 77877 irAriaidaauTas diecp&eipav ical Aeoures Kal Kairpoi k a I irapb'dAeis • 
al Be eXafpoi Kal SopKaBes Kal oi dypioi vies Kal oi hvoi oi dypioi deivels eiaiv; (e) 
re — re, etc., icai (Epic.) Od. 7, 413. 'Execppav re ~Zrparios re Uepaevs r 
"Aprjros r e Kal avri&eos &pacrv/x'f]Sr]s. (f ) re — re Kai — Kai, etc. (seldom) X. 
C. 2.2, 5.yvv$] inroBe^afxeuT] re <pepei rb (popriov rovro, fSapvvojxevy) re Kal KivBvvev- 
ovcra . . k al . . k ai ktA. After k a i two members, considered, as it were, one 



$ 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 501 

whole, can follow with re Kai. Her. 7. 1. (iirera^e eKdaroicn) k a\ peas re 
Kal alrov Kal irXo?a. X. An. 4. 4, 2. (kw/xti) fieyaXr) re ^j/ /cal fiacriXeioi/ T6 
e?xe T(o aarpdrrv, Kal eVt Ta?s irXeiarais oi-Kiais rvpaeis eirTjaav. — But Kai — t e 
are never used as corresponding particles, in Attic Greek ; where they are 
found in this position, the member introduced by re, is subjoined only as a"mere 
addition to the preceding one. Th. 1, 54. Kopivbioi jxei/ Kpar-r\<ravTes . . Kal dv- 
dpas exovres alx^aXclorovs ovk i\d<r<rovs x*AiW, vavs re ( praetereaque) Karadv- 
aavres irepl efi'Sou'nKouTa ear-ncrav rpoTraiov. As infrequently, likewise, is Kai — 
t e used in the sense of etiamque. 

Rem. 3. As an enclitic, r e must always rest upon a preceding word, and indeed 
on that word, to which re specially belongs in the member to be connected. But 
where the article, the attributive genitive and prepositions are used, re commonly 
stands between these and the word it connects, e. g. r d re daipa, it e p i re elprjwns 
Kal TToXefxov, 2co Kpdr ov s re ffocpia Kal dper-q. If -re belongs to the whole 
sentence, it is usually joined to the first word of the sentence. Her. 6, 123. 
o'inves ecpevySu r e jov irdvra XP°' U0V T0 ^s rvpdvvovs, e«r jj.7)xavT}S r e rr\s rovrcau 
e^eXiirov ol Yleiaio-rpaTidai ttju rvpauuida. It is, also, often joined to the predi- 
cate of the sentence, if that precedes, although it would stand after another 
word. X. C. 3. 5, 3. cp {qua re) iroXXol iiraip6/xevoi it por peirovr ai re aper^s 
eTri/j.eXeTo'&ai. Kal aXKi/j-oi yiypea&ai (instead of dperrjs re eV.). 

Rem. 4. In the Epic writers (and in imitation of these in the Lyric writers 
also, though more seldom in the latter, and in the Attic writers in only a few 
fragments), -re is very frequently joined with conjunctions and relative pro- 
nouns, in order to represent, in a more definite manner, the mutual relation 
and intimate connection between the corresponding members (as well — as, 
as — so). This re either stands in both of the members, in which case the first 
Te' refers to the following member, anticipating it, as it were, and the second 
refers back to the preceding; -or more frequently it stands in only one of the 
corresponding members ; thus often eiirep re — t e, or eitrep — t e'; fxev re 
— 5e' Te or aXXa r e, as on this side, so on that, or fxeu — Se' re (aXXa Te); 
pieu Te — Se' (a A Act); also the whole of the first member can be omitted, and 
be supplied by the mind, from what precedes; thus Se' Te, a A Act Te, also 
often without the corresponding p.ev: Se' — Te; Te' — Se'; re — avrdp; then 
Kai re, atque, yet moreover, when the corresponding member is contained in 
what precedes (not only — but also). 11. i, 509. rhv Se fxey wvrjvav, Kai r eKXvov 
ev^a/xeuoLo. Also osre, he, who (not only in the poets, but also sometimes in 
Herodotus), ostls re, o16s re, oaros re ( = roios, olos ; rocros, ocros, of such 
a nature, so great, as much as), & s re, so as, so that, ws ei re, dr e, jjvr e, o it w s 
re, ore re, then, when, obi re, "va re, there, where. In Attic prose, the fol- 
lowing combinations still remain, viz., olos re elfic with the Inf., signifying 
I am in the condition, &sre (so that), wseire and esre (le.es 6 re), quoad. 
Moreover, i ire ire, postquam, as used by Herodotus, should also be mentioned. 

Rem. 5. Kai is originally an adverb, also, even, etiam.. But the idea of 
emphasis which is expressed'by k a i, also, even, necessarily supposes a reference 
to another clause, e. g. Kal 6 ^wKpdr-ns ravra eXe^ev (sc. ov ix6pov ol &XX01, or 
&sirep Kal oi aXXoi). According to the nature of the corresponding member to 
be supplied, the emphatic Kai may have either a strengthening (even, yet, entirely, 
etc.) or a weakening force (even only, only even), e.g. Kal KarayeXas p.ov (you 
even laugh at me). Kal <rv ravra eXe^as (even you said this) ; — Kal paXXov (yet 
rather), Kal rpis, Kal ndpra, (very much), Kal irdvv, Kal iroXvs (not much), 
Kal bXiyov, Kal p. l k p 6 v (but little), Kal iras — Kai ttoXo.i (even long ago), Kal 
X&es, Kal avr'iKa, Kal vvv or en Kal vvv — Kal ws, Kal ovrcos (vel sic), — 
K al p-ouos, Kal eh. With questions, e. g. Dem. Phil. 1, 53. ri xph Kal irpos- 
doKav ; (what is only to be expected even?) (= nihil plane expectandum est) 
In Homer, after a temporal protasis, this Kai often introduces an apodosis, 
and may then be translated by immediately. II. a, 478, ^/xos 8' rjpiyeveia 



502 SYNTAX. [$ 321. 

cpdvn podoftaKrvXos 'Udirs, Kal r6r eiYeir dvdyovro p.^ra arparbv evpvv 'Axcuwj/. 
The use of Kai in such concluding clauses, shows that the two clauses are co- 
ordinate, and Kai may be said to have its usual connective force, though that 
force cannot well be expressed in English. 

2. If the annexive coordinate sentences are negative, they are connected : — ■ 
(a) By o v 5 e (fx 7j S e), not — nor, when a negative member precedes ; (b) by 

Kal ov (teal fx-f)), and not, when an affirmative member precedes; this is the 
regular form in Attic prose ; but in the Ionic and poetic writers ovSe or fxrjde 
can also be used here ; (c) in a more emphatic and definite manner by otfre 
— ovre (ixr)re — ^re), neque — negue (neve — neve), neither — nor; (d) by 
ovre — re (seldom r a i), negue — et, — on the one hand not — and on the other ; 
as not — so also. 

X. An. 1. 4, 8. ovk eyooye avrovs 5jctS|a>, ou5' epe? ovdeis, a>s eyes} avrovs KaK&s 
ttoiS). C. 3. 7, 9. Siareivov fxuXXov irpbs rb aavrcp irposexeiu, Kal fx)) d/xeXei ruv 
rrjs ir6Xews. Dem. Cor. 254, 85. (paiuo/xai eyw x<*P LT0S Tervxyicibs r6re Kal ov 
[xefjupe&s ovde n/xcopias. Th. 3, 14. errafxvuare ..Kal fxrj wpovo-^e rjfxds. PI. 
Lysid. 207, e. ecocnv &pa,ffe a, fiovXei TTOielv Kal ovSev eirnrXijTrovo'iv, ovde 
diaKooXvovai iroieiv wv av eTrifrv/xrjs. — Oi/re &eoi, ovre av&pairoi. — X. An. 2. 
2, 8. fayoaav . . jtiTjTe irpoHwo'eiv aXX-fjXovs av/xfxaxoi re e<reo~&ai. 5. 1, 6. ovre 
dyopd eanv iKavf], rj te x®P a ^oXefxia. Th. 1, 118. ol AaKehaijx6vLoi aia&ofx- 
evoL ovre eK&Xvov, el lit] eirl flpaxv, 7]0~vxa(6v r e rb irXeov rod xpdfov. 

Rem. 6. The following connective forms are more rare, and belong mostly 
to poetry, viz., oijre — ov, ov — ovre; re ov — Te; ovre — re ov ; in the 
two last forms ov combines with the verb and forms, as it Avere, one thought. 
Th. 2, 22. 'EKKXrjaiau re ovk eivoiei . ., r-i\v re itSXlv etyvXaaae (he called no 
assembly and guarded the city); 1, 126. otfre eKelvos en Karevonoe, r6 re 
fxavrelou ovk ecnjAou ; ovre — ovSe, neither — and not, which is found often in 
prose also. 

Rem. 7. OuSe expresses either an antithesis (but not), or it serves to con- 
nect a new clause (and not, not even). When ovde — ovde follow one another, 
they are not to be considered correlative particles and translated neither — nor, 
but are to be translated not even — and not. X. C. 3. 12, 5. eS yap fofri, on 
ovde ev aXXra ovdevl dyavi, ovde ev irpd^ei ovdefxia jxetov e|eis did rb fieXnov 
rb 0-w/j.a irapeaKevdo-^ai. Ovde as a connective in negative sentences, 'corre- 
sponds to Kai in positive sentences, mentioned in remark 5, and signifies not 
even, ne — guidem, e g. ovd' 6 Kpdnoros eroX/xwcrev avr$ /xdxeo-frai — ovde eh 
(ne unus guidem), ovd' &s (ne sic guidem), etc. 

3. An enhansive or emphatic coordinate sentence, as has been seen (Rem. 
5), is expresssed by the simple /cat, but more definitely by: — 

(a) ov \x6vov or ov [xovov tin (also ou% or i fxSvov) or /x^j on — 
dXXa Kai, not only — but also. (Ovk on originates from ov Xeyoo, on, as 
fir] or i from /x^j Xeye, on.) HaKpdrns ov \x6vov aocpbs i\v, ctAAci Kal aya- 
h6s. PI. Symp. 179,h. virepaTTO^wfjaKeiu e&eXovaiv oi epoovres, ov /x6vov ori 
dvdpes, ctAAa Kal yvvaiKes. X. C. 2. 9, 8. o u% ot i /xovos 6 Kpircou ev rjcrvxia 
1)v, ctAAct Kal ol (piXoi avrov. Cy. 8. 1, 28. fx)) yap '6 r i dpxovra, ctAAa Kal 
ovs ov <pofiovvrai, fxdXXov robs alBov[x4vovs alSovvrai rS>v avaidwv ol frvfrpooirot. 






$ 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 503 

Rem. 8. Ov p.6vov — aAA.cS without real is used, when the second mem- 
ber includes the first, whether the second is stronger than the first in extent or 
degree. Isocr. Phil. 5, 146. ov p.6vov irrl Tovrtov avrobs utyei tt,v yvwp.y\u Tavrrjy 
exodus, ixAA' e7rl irdvTtov djn.oicos. Panath. 37. ov [xovov av evpc&eirjv 
im i oh vvv Xeyofxevots Tavrrjv %x 0iV T ^* / Stdvoiav, ctAA' 6/j.olcos £ttI iravroov. 
X. C. I. 6, 2. 1/j.a.Tiov i)i.i<pieo-cu ov /xovov (pavXov, a A Act to avrb frepous re 
Kal x ei / J -^>^os. 

(b) Ox>x ottws — ctAAct /ecu', not only not — but even, or ovx ottcos or (xt) 
'6 ir & s — a A A 5 o u S e, not only not — but not even. ('Ottois = hoia, I say not or ( Imp. ) 
say not how, which involves the idea, I say not or say not, that not.) Also /j.t) on 
(followed by a A A' ovSe) is used in the sense of not only not, when both clauses 
have a common predicate, and this stands in the last clause. Dem. Cor. 271,1. o v x 
oi7 to s X° L P LV a-vTots (to7s 'A&rivaiois) e%eis ctAAa jjuoStoffas ffeavThv Kara tovtoovI 
TTo\iTevr) (non modo non — sed etiam). Dem. Phil. 2, 67. (robs ©nfiaiovs 7}ye7ro) 
ovx $ 7rtt >S' avTiirpdl-eii/ Kal SiaKtoXvaeiv, a. XX a Kal avcrrpaTevo-eiv. Isocr. 
Plataic. 586. ovx oirws rrjs koivt\s iXev&epias /xerexofxev, ctAA 3 ovde fiovXetas 
fxerpias 7}^ito^r)p:ev rvx^v (non modo non — sed ne — quidem). X. Cy. 1.3, 10. 
fir] oiTtos bpxzioScu iv pvSjxq, a A A 5 ou5' 6p&ovoSrai iSvvaa&e (non modo non 
saltare poteratis, sed ne rectis quidem pedibus stare). Isae. 10, 1. iyeb /j.t) '6ti 
virep aXXov, a A A 5 ov8h inrhp ifxavrov TTtoiroTe hinnv ISiav e'ip7]Ka (as in Latin: 
non modo de alio, sed ne de me quidem unquam causam dixi, instead of non 
modo non, the Latin using non modo — sed ne — quidem, instead of non modo 
non — sed ne — quidem, when both the clauses are negative, and the common 
predicate of both is in the latter clause). 

Rem. 9. When ovx ° Tl — a A A' ovde has the sense of not only — but not 
even, the predicate of the first member contains a negation, or at least has a 
negative sense. Th. 2, 97. ravrri (rfj S/cuSw lo~xvi) aSvvaTa (sc. eVnV) e|- 
iarovo-&a.i ovx on ret iu rfj Evptoirr), a A A 3 o v 8 5 iv tt} 'Aaia, e&vos. (Scytharum 
potentiae non modo Europae imperia exaequari non possunt, sed ne Asiae quidem 
gens). Dem. 702. ou% on twv ovtwv aneo-T eprj fxriv &v, a XX' ov8' av 
tCtfv. (In aireo-T€priiin]v is contained the idea: non habei'em.) Also /at) or i 
followed by ctAA' ov84 is used in a similar manner, since a negative precedes /jlt) 
oti. X. C. 1. 6, 11. Tr)v oIklolv 7] aXXo tl tov KeKTiicrai, vo/mifav apyvpiov a^iov thai, 
ovSevl av p. 7) on TTpoiiKa So'nis, ctAA' ou5' eXairov rr\s a£ias Xafitov (you 
would not only not give your house to any one gratuitously, but not even for a less price, 
than it is worth ; properly you would give to no one, not to say, gratuitously, nay not 
even for a less price, etc.). 

(c) Qv(k) — ctAAa Kal, not — but even; ov(k) — ctAA 5 ou5e, not — nay 
not even. Dem. Mid. 24. ov Trovr\p6s, a A Act Kal irdvv xpja'TC'S'. X. C. 2. 3, 8. 
rbv Kal X6ycp Kal epyco iretptoixevov ip.e aviav ov k av SwaifiT/jv ovx ev Xeyeiv our* 
eS iroie?v, a A A 3 ovde iveipdo-ojxai. An. 1. 3, 2. (SapeiKobs) Xaficov ov k els rb 
?8iov Kare^refXTiv i/xoi, a A A' v 8 e Ka&7i8vTrd&r)0~a, aXX' els vp.a.s iSarrdvtoV. 

(d) OuSe — p.^ '6ti, not even — not to say, much less (ne-quidem — nedum). 
X. Symp. 2, 26. /cat ov8\ avairveiv, (mt) oti Xeyeiv tl 8vvno-6p.e^a (we shall be 
able not even to breathe, to say nothing of speaking, or much less to speak). 



504 syntax. U 322. 



§ 322. II. Adversative Coordinate Sentences. 

1. An adversative coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses that stand 
in opposition to each other, are united and form, one thought. 

(a) The opposition is of such a nature, that the thought expressed in the 
coordinate clause either wholly abrogates the thought of the preceding clause, 
since another thought is substituted for it ; this is done : (a) by placing the 
conjunction a A A. a {but) in opposition to a preceding negative; (b) by placing 
the conjunction a A A. a together with the negative oi in opposition to a pre- 
ceding affirmative ; in the last case. aAAa may be translated and, or be wholly 
omitted: (a) oi>x °* irKovaioi tvda.ifj.oves elo'iv, a A A 1 ol ayaboi. (b) 'EKel&ev, 
a A A' ov tc eV&eVSe iipirdcrfrn (he ivas seized there, and not here, or not here). 

(13) Or the opposition is of such a nature that the thought in the coordinate 
clause merely limits or restricts that in the preceding clause. The limitation is 
expressed by 5e, aAAa (but), ardp (avrdp, Epic), kcl'itoi, fxivroi, o/xas. 

2. A e most generally has an adversative force, and hence can express every 
kind of contrast or opposition. In respect to its signification, it ranks, like 
the Lat. autem, between the copulative connectives (t4, Kai) and the adversa- 
tive (aAAa, etc.), since it contains both a copulative and adversative force, and 
hence either opposes one thought to another (adversative), or merely contrasts 
it (copulative). Hence it is very frequently used in Greek, where the English 
uses and. The new thought being different from the preceding, is placed in 
contrast with it. 

3. The mutual relation between the concessive and adversative clauses, is 
commonly expressed by the concessive /j, 4 v, which, as it denotes concession 
and admission, points forward to the limitation expressed in the second member 
by 8 e. As Se' can denote both a strong and slight contrast, so the signification 
of fx4v is sometimes stronger and sometimes weaker. 

4. The original signification of /x4v (arising from /xtju, § 316, Rem.) is truly, 
in truth ; yet its signification is not always so strong as this ; indeed, in innu- 
merable places its force is so slight, that it cannot be translated at all into 
English. Tb fxev u<p4\i/xov na\6v, rb 8 e PAa&epbv alaxpou. Th. 3, 63. diecp&ei- 
pav TlKaraiiwv fxev avreov ova iXaaaovs diaKoaiccv, 'A&rji'a.iwv Se trevTe Kal 
eltcocriv. 

5. Mel/ — S 4 are especially used in the following cases : — 

(a) With divisions of place, time, number, order, and persons, e. g. 'Ei/Tav&a 
fx4v — e'/ce? S e, eV&a /x 4 v — ivha S e', Tore /x4v — Tore S e, rrore \x4v — 
7roTe S e, at one time, — at another, sometimes — sometimes, &AAore /x 4 v — aA 
AoTe 5 4, aua \x4v — dixa S e', sometimes — sometimes, 7rp£>Tov \x4v — e7retra 
8 4, rb fx 4 v — tb Se', ra jx4v — ra Se and tovto jx4v — tovto S4, partly. — 
partly on the one side — on the other, both — and, not only — but also, 6 fxev — 6 
8 e', hie — ille. 

(b) When several predicates belong to the same object, and also, when sev- 



§ 322. J ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 505 

eral actions refer to the same object. S. Ph. 239. rycb yevos p.4v elfit rrjs irep- 
ippvrov ^Kvpov, TrAe'w 5' is qIkov, av8wfiai 8 e ira?s 'A X i\ews NeoirrSXe/xos. So 
also in a principal and subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. oi isef3a\ov piv is r^v 
'Aa-irjv, Ktfifieptovs iizf3aX6vres e/c rvjs Evpcoirys, rouroicri 8 e iirto-TrSfievoi <pevyov<ri 

OVTOt) is T7]V M.T]8ik}]V X®? r l V hiriKOVTO. 

c. Where the same or an equivalent word is repeated in two different clauses. 
X. C. 2. 1, 32. iycb avveifii fiev Sreo7s, crvveifii 8" avSrpdnrois ro7s aya&o7s. 
1. 1, 2, 2<aKpdrr)s &va>v (pavepbs i\ iroXXaKis fiev o'ikol, noXXaKis 8e iirl 
ruv koivwv tt)s ivoXews fdcofioov. Yet this principle is not always observed. 
U4v is regularly omitted, when Se Kal follow, e. g. 2. 8, 5. xaAeTrSj/ ovroo 
ri itoirjaai, uisre fir)8ev dfiapre7v, xaAe7rSi> 8e Kal dvafiaprrjras re Troriiaavra 
fj.7] ayvcvfiovi Kpirrj irepirvxe7v. 

_ Remark 1. When fiev stands in an adjective or adverbial clause, it is some- 
times repeated, for the sake of emphasis, in the corresponding demonstrative 
or concluding clause. Her. 2, 121. koI rbv (i. e. ov) fiev KaXeovai Srepos, 
rovrov fiev irposKvviovai re Kal ev iroiovai • rbv Se x eL / J -& ua K - T - K. So also, 
when, instead of the adjective clause, the Part, with the article is used. Isocr. 
Paneg. 52, 60. r£ fiev virepeveyKSvn r)\v dv&pwTrivriv cpvaiv ('HpaK\e7), . . rovroo 
/Lieu (EvpvoSebs) iirirdrruv . . SifTe'Aeo-ez/. So also sometimes two preceding 
fievs, correspond with two following Se' 's ; this always implies a strong emphasis. 
PL Apol. 28, e. iyoj ovv 8eivd dv e'ir] elpyao~fievos, £> avSpes 'ASnqi/cuoi, el, ore 
fiev fie oi dpxovres erarrov, ovs i)fie7s e'iXeoSre dpx^v fiou, Kal iv Uoridaia. Kal iu 
AficpnrdXei Kal iirl A77A1&J, rore fie v ov iKetvoi erarrov efievov — Kal iKivSvvevov 
diro^ave7v, r v S e &eov rdrrovTOS, ws iycb cp-fi&rjv r.e Kal vireXafiov, (piAoaotyovvrd 
fie 8e7v £r\v Kal i^erd^ovra ifiavrbv Kal robs dKXovs, ivrav&a Se (pofSi]Sels 7) 
^dvarov % d\Xo briovv irpdyfia Xiiroifii rrjv rd^iv. Yet this parallelism is but 
seldom found so regularly carried out. 

Rem. 2. On the position of fie v — Se, the following points are to be no- 
ticed : They are commonly placed after the words, which are opposed to each 
other ; yet they are often to be refen-ed to the predicate or to the whole clause. 
X. C. 1. 1, 10. Kal eXeye fiev (2&>/<paT7?s) ws rb iroXv, ro7s Se f3ovXop.evois ihfiv 
h-KOveiv. An. 3. 4, 2. e7rad-e fiev ovSev, iroKAa Se KaKa. iuofiiae iroirjtrai. 
When a substantive or adjective is connected with the article or a preposition, 
fiev and Se' are commonly placed between the article and the preposition, and 
between the preposition and substantive or adjective, e. g. irpbs fiev robs <pi- 
Xovs — it pbs S' ix&povs ; yet this conformity is by no means observed in cor- 
responding members, e. g. X. C. 1. 1, 12. ra fiev dvSfpcaireia irapevres, t4 
8aifi6via. Se o~Koirovvres r\yovvrai rd Trpos'fjKovra irpdrreiv. 2, 24. 8 id fiev 
Kakhos — 8 id 8vvafiiv Se. Or inversely, Isocr. Paneg. 64, 114. iv ra?siroA- 
ireiais fiev — iv Se reus o-vv&7)Kcus. 

Rem. 3. It is evident that any other adversative connective instead of 8 e, 
can follow fiev, e. g. &AAa, drdp, etc. But in place of the adversative connec- 
tives, sometimes also the copulatives re, Kal, are used, by a kind of anacoluthon, 
or the construction is entirely changed, no reference being had to the preceding 
fiev. 

Rem. 4. The adversative connective which would be expected to follow 
fiev, is sometimes omitted, although there is a corresponding adversative mem- 
ber. This is the case, when the word expressing the contrast is such, as of 
itself without Se', to make this contrast sufficiently manifest, as e. g. with 
evrav&a fiev — e'/ce?, and almost always with tt pur ov fiev — eireira. 
Secondly, even the clause expressing the contrast, can be wholly omitted, in 
which case, it must be supplied by the mind (fiev solitarium). Her. 3, 3. Key 

43 



506 syntax. [$ 322. 

crtu oSe 6 \6yos, ifiol peu ov -iribauos (to me improbable, perhaps probable to 
Others). 'Eyw p.eu ovk oT5a ; us p.eu \4yovoiu ; ravra jiev fywr ^yyei\4 
tis; ol/xaL p.4u, iiyovp.ai p,4u, So/ccD p.4u, ovk otSa p.4u and the like, I 
INDEED, CERTAINLY, think. 

Rem. 5. On account of its general signification, 54, like autem, frequently 
connects sentences even, which stand in a causal relation to each other; then 
'the hearer or reader can gather from the context the particular mode of con- 
nection. Thus 5e very often expresses the reason, and is used instead of yap. 

Rem. 6. In questions, Se has either an adversative force, when the interro- 
gator gives vivacity, by omitting the concessive member, e. g. X. C. 2. 9, 2. Kal 
6 2. Ewre p.oi, %<pw, <b Kpiraiv, Kvvas Se ipecpets, 'iua ffoi robs \vkovs airb twp irpo- 
fiaTcav arrepvuooo-i, j (you are unwilling to support a man who could protect }'ou 
from your enemies, and yet do you keep dogs ?). Or, 54 has a copulative force 
and continues the question which had been interrupted by the answer of the 
Other, e. g. X. C. 3. 5, 2. ovkovu olcr&a, e<pr], on TrArj&ei fj.hu oiiSeu pieiovs elalu 
'A&rjvcuoi Bolcctwu; — OlSa yap, ecprj. S^jnara Se aya&a Kal xa\a irorepou 4k 
Boiwtcov o'iei irXeico au e'/cAex^mt, % ^1 'A&wuwu. The same principle holds in 
answers. 

Rem. 7. Kal — Se (in the Epic writers Kal $4 not separated), and, though 
more seldom, the negative ob5 4 — 5 4, in which connection 54 has an adver- 
bial force, can be translated by and on the other hand, and also ; and on the other 
hand not. X. H. 5. 2, 37. oi Te aXKoi ■Kpo&v/j.oos rw TeAeima virrip4rovu, Kal tj 
To>i/ Qwfiaiau Se tt6\ls irpo&vpias £vv4irep.ire Kal oirX'nas Kal iirir4as. An. 1. 8, 20. 
Kal ov5eu oi>5e tovtou TraSelu ecpaoau, ov5* aAhos Se toiu 'EKAtjuccu iu TavTn rrj 
H-axV ^raS-ey ovSels ob54u. 

Rem. 8. In the apodosis, as in principal clauses, 54 has a double force, either 
adversative, or merely contrasting (copulative). Sometimes \x4u stands in the 
first member. 

a. The adversative Se'in the apodosis, denotes the contrast between that and 
the protasis. It is used : (a) after hypothetical antecedent clauses, though 
aAAa also is often found instead of 54; (/3) after relative antecedent clauses, 
and such as denote comparison, (a) X. Cy. 5. 5, 21. aAA 5 et /xr)5e tovt, e<p-n, 
fiovXei airoKpiuaa&ai, crb Se Tovurev&eu \4ye (say on the contrary). (/3) 8. 5, 12. 
ttsirep ol 07tA?tcu, ovtco Se Kal ol ireXracrTal Kal ol ro^orai (so on the other hand). 

(b) After a temporal protasis, 54 commonly has a contrasting or merely copu- 
lative force, though sometimes adversative also (very often in the Homeric lan- 
guage, also in Herodotus, but seldom in the Attic writers) ; this 54 may often 
be loosely translated by then. Od. A, 387. avrap eVel tyvxas fx4u d7^e(^«:eSa(r , #A- 
\v5is akhy ayur\ TlepcrecpSueia yvvaiK&v freAvrepduv, ??AiS-e 5" iirl ■tyvxh 'Ayap.4p.uoi/os 
'ArpeiSao. So ocppa — r6(ppa 5 4, ottStg — 5 4, '4ccs — 5 4. X. An. 4. 1, 2. eVei 
Se acpiicovTO, ev&a 6 p.eu Tiypns 7TOTo.p.bs iravraTracnu aivopos ~r\u 5ia to fid&os Kal p.4- 
ye&os, Tcdpo5os (transitus) Se ovk %v . ., i5oKei Se ro7$ arpaTLwrais 5ia tS>u bp4<au 
iropevT4ou eivai (then, or on the contrary). As Se'is used after the protasis, so also 
in like manner after participles, which supply the place of a protasis. PI. 
Symp. 220, b. Kai irore ouros irdyov o'iov SeivoraTov, Kal iravroov . . £v e i\iy~ 
p4vwv robs iroSas ds iriXovs Kal apvaxiSas, outos 8' iu tovtois e^'et %x wv ladriou 
. . oi6u7rep Kal irp6npou elw&ei (popeTu. X. C. 3. 7, 8. &avp.d£co gov, el 4ksiuovs pa- 
Stcos X € ipov p-zvo s, tovtois Se p.7]54ua rp6irou o'tei 5vui)0~eo~Sai irpos<su<EX&Wai. 

6. 'AAA a (Neut. PI. of aAAos), but (sed, at), yet, however, generally expresses 
difference and separation. It always stands at the beginning of the sentence. 
According to the nature of the preceding member, it either abrogates what is 
affirmed in that member (see No. 1 ), or it restricts and limits it (yet, however). 



§ 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 507 

He is indeed poor, but brave — he is not brave, but cowardly ; (here the clause but 
brave restricts the one preceding, and but cowardly wholly denies or abrogates 
the idea of brave). Tovto rb irpay/xa u<p4\ip.ov /xiv iariv, aAA' ov k<x\6v. The 
use of aAAa is very frequent in objections ( = at), also in questions, when the 
question expresses a contrast, or when an objection is introduced in the form 
of a question. Dem. Cor. ri yap Kal /3ov\6fj.euoi fiereTrefxirea-^ av abrovs, iirl 
ri]u elpr)isr)i> ; d A A' virr)px*v airacriv. 'A A A 3 iir\ rbv ir6\€fx.ov ; d A A' avTol Trepl 
elp'fivrjs ejSouAevecri&e. Eur. Med. 325. Aoyovs ava\o?s • ov yap av ireiaais Trore. 
"'AAA' e'|eAas /xe, Kovdev albiaai Arras ; " very frequently dAA' ?} — ; but 
really — ? X. An. 7. 6, 4. /cat o'l elirov 'AAA' t) drifiaywye? 6 avrjp robs dvdpas ; 

Rem. 9. 'AAAa is used in negative, non-concessive clauses, when by it the gen- 
eral signification of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted by an excep- 
tion. Here aAAd" is the same as -k\t\v or ei /jltj, nisi, and can be translated into 
English by except, than. In the first member, dAAos (eVeposj is commonly 
placed, e. g. obdels d\\os, dAAa, and this dAAos points forward to the following 
dAAa, corresponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. iv r<2 p.i<rrjp it A A 77 pXv tt6\is obde- 
jxia oirre <pi\la, oijTe 'EWrjvis, aAAa ®paxes Kal B&vvoi (between there is no other 
friendly or Grecian city [there are none] except Thracians and Bithynians). 

Rem. 10. In the frequent combination of d A A' t)' after a preceding nega- 
tive, or after a question implying a negative, or even after the addition of 
aAAos, eVepos to the negative, consequently, ovk, obdev dAA' f? ; obShv &A- 
A 0, d A A 5 f? ; v 5 e v e t e p v, a A A' r\ ; ri aAAo, d A A' 77 ; ct A A ti (with a pre- 
ceding interrogative pronoun), dAA' 77, — dAA' seems to be merely dAAo, but 
on account of its close connection with 77, it appears to have changed its ac- 
cent (d\\b f)') and to have lost it (dAA' ^'). X. An. 7. 7, 53. apyvpiov jxev ovk 
€%&>, dAA' 7) p.LKp6u ri. 0. 2, 13. ovre aAAos ircaTrore jxol Trape&x* T"d kavTov dioi- 
Ke?v, dAA 5 77 av vvv\ e'&eAeis Tcapix^ v - PL -Phacd. 97, d. obShv aAAo CTKOireiv 
Trpos-fiKeiv av&pwirco, dAA* 7) rb apicrrov Kal rb /SeATJcrroz/. 

Rem. 11. Also the following elliptical expressions are to be mentioned: 
ov firju aXXa ox ov p. 4vr t aX\d, yet, veruntamen, ov yap dAAc£, then 
certainly, certainly. These must be completed by joining with the negative the 
verb of the preceding clause, or in place of it, such expressions as tovt iyeve- 
to, tovt io~Tiv. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. 6 hiros iriirrei els y6uaTa, Kal fXLKpov KaKelvov 
e|eTpax7/A£(ref • ov fJ.r)v (scil. i^eTpaxv^io'ev) dAA' iir4p.€Lvev 6 Kvpos p.6kis irws, 
ical 6 'iinvos i^avecTTT}. 

Rem. 12. 'AAAa is, moreover, used to denote a transition to a different or an 
opposite thought ; this is the ease in exhortations and exclamations, in general, 
when the discourse is suddenly interrupted, and something new is quickly in- 
troduced, e. g. dAA' evTvxoivs ' [well then !) — dAA' &va (well now) — dAA' e?a! — 
also when one answers or replies quickly and decidedly, e. g. dAAd fiov\op.ai, 
well. 1 will. 

1. From the adverb av, on the contrary, again, rursus, and dp a, igitur, have 
originated the Epic avrdp and the prose drdp. They always stand at the 
beginning of the sentence, and have the signification of 5e or dAAd\ but ; yet, as 
it seems, with this difference, that, on accoiint of their composition with 'dpa 
(igitur), they tire more closely and intimately connected with what precedes. 
-Menoi has been already treated (§ 316, Rem.). KaiToi, yet, verum, sed 
tamen: atqili (§ 317, 3), is used especially, when the speaker wishes to correct 
something he had said; the Latins use quamquam in the same way, e. g. 
KaiToi rl 077A"; (quamquam quid loquor ? , and yet why do I speak?). "Op. as 



508 syntax. [$ 323. 

(from bfi6s, equal, like), nevertheless, yet, however, places the second clause, as an 
unexpected one, in opposition to the first. Th. 6, 50. Adjxaxos p.ev tcCto eltrwv 
'6 [x (as irpose&eTO Kal avrbs rf} 5 AA/ci/8ta5ou yvwjxn. 'AAA. 5 opus is still stronger. 



$ 323. Ill Disjunctive Coordination. 

1. A disjunctive coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses composing 
the entire sentence, are united into one whole, one of which excludes the other ; 
hence the one can be considered to exist only when the other does not. This 
disjunctive relation is denoted by : — 

"H, or, aut, vel, or more emphatically and definitely by tf — *)', and when the 
first member is to be made emphatic, f\Toi — ^, aut — aut, vel — vel, either — or ; 
sire — eVre (with the Ind.) or edvre — edvre or dure — dvre (with the 
Subj.), sive — sive, whether — or, when the speaker wishes to indicate, that he 
does not know whether he should decide for the one or the other ; on the mode 
used in these hypothetical disjunctive clauses, see § 339. 

'O ira.T7]p, % 6 vlbs avrov aire&avev. — *H 6 Trar-np, 7) 6 vlbs avrov atre&avev. Th. 
4, 118. el 5e ri vfuv e?re KaWiov, elr e SiKaiorepov rovrwv Scwe? elvai, Uvres is 
Aa.Ke8aiiJ.ova SiddaKere. PI. Rp. 493, d. eXr' ev ypa<piKr), etr' ev fiovaiKy, etre 
8 7) ev iroXiTinfj. Apol. 27, C. eXr ovv Kaivd, eXre iraXaid. 34, e. eXr ovv 
a\r)&es, eXr ovv ij/evSes. Rp. 453, d. &vre ris els KoXvjxfi-qbpav [xiicpav eiMireo-n^ 
& v r e els to /xeyiarov ireXayos /J.ecrov, ofxws ye vel ovfiev ijrrov. 

Remark 1. The following forms, also, are sometimes used: ei — eXre 
(si — sive); el re — el 8 e (sive — si vero), when the second member contains 
something opposite to the first; e'l're — ^; ^ — e'lre (seldom and only Poet.) ; 
tfre but once (poetic). 

Rem. 2. The disjunctive connectives 77 — 7?, in the Epic writers, very seldom 
in the Tragedians, are united with /j.ev and Se : r^xev — r)8e. In this case, 
they do not have a disjunctive, but like Kal — Kai, re — re, a copulative force. 
Instead of rj5e, ISe is also used according to the necessities of the verse. II. e, 
128. ocpp^ ev yiyvuio-KTjs rjfxev &e6v, 7/ 8 e Kal 'dvSpa, both — and, not only — but 
also. 

2. The particle *)' is not only used to denote the disjunctive relation, but also 
in expressing comparison, in which it does not exclude, or express the opposite 
of the preceding member, but only expresses separation or difference. As in its 
disjunctive relation, one tf corresponds with anothei*, so here tf stands in rela- 
tion to a word, which expresses a difference, e. g. &\\os, ovSels d\\os, a.Wo?os, 
evavrios, XSios, Siacpepoo, etc.; also in relation to comparatives, as well as to all 
words which have the force of a comparative, e. g. diirxdo-ios, irpiv, (pbdvca, etc. 
PI. Phaed. 64, a. ovdev &\Xo avrol eiriTr)devovo-iv, rj airofrvrjcrKeiv re Kal 
re&vdvai. 

Rem. 3. The comparative 7)' is sometimes used after the omitted fxaWov or after 
a positive. This is the case after expressions of willing, choosing, and the like, 
because these contain the idea of preference ; thus after (3oi>Aeo-&ai, £&e\eiv, 
al pela&ai., a'lpeoiv Sovvat, eirt^v/xe 7v, 8 e^ e crd-cu, Q-qretv, AucriTcA- 
«?v (=*potius esse). II. a, 117. jSovAo^' 4y& \abv cr6ov efx/xevai, tf airo\4o&at. 



$ 323.] DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 509 

Lysias de aff. tyr. 1. <f7i to Out Kepdaiusiu, r) Tj/xas Trei&eiv. X. Ag. 4, 5. ('A-yrj- 
o~iXaos) y pel to Kal <rbu r<2 yeuuaicv /j.eiov<=KTe?u, r) avu r<£ dSt/cw irX4ou '4x eiv ' 
Andoc. Myst. 62. re&udvai uo/j.i(ovo~a XvaireXelu, r) (tju. 

3. The other member of the comparison is joined to the Comparative by rj, in 
the same Case as the comparative, and ivithout a verb, when both members have the 
same verb in common. When this is not the case, the second member must stand 
as a complete sentence with its subject and predicate ; commonly, however, merely 
the subject is expressed, but the predicate omitted ; often also after the omitted 
copula, by attraction the same Case is used as in the first member. Instead of r\ 
the Gen. also can be used (§ 275, 2), most frequently for the Norn, and Ace, 
often also for the Dat. But the Gen. is avoided, when the use of it would occa- 
sion ambiguity ; it must be avoided when the time of the two clauses is different. 

Eur. Or. 1148. ovk %<ttiu obfilu k pet o'er ou, r) cpiXos (Tacp-fjs, ov rrXovros, ov tv- 
pauuis. 'O (piXocrocpos /xdXXou im^vfieT rrjs Coipias r) tcou XPV^drcou. Xapi(6/Ae&a 
fxaXXou toIs ayc&ois r) rails KaKois. ^iXov : ueu piaXXou robs dya^obs r) robs kclkovs. 
Isocr. Pac. extr. toij uecare p is Kal /xaXXou atcfidCov <riv, r) 4yc6{s<.'.aK/j.d- 
£co), irapaivS}. Th. 7, 77. rjdw Tiues Kal 4k 5e iuot 4 pas u r) roiwuSe io-<i>&-no~av 
{from a more dangerous situation, than the present is). II. a, 260. rjSr) yap ttot 4yk 
Kal dpeioaiu r)4irep v/jl?u dud pder 1 u a>/xi A 77 era {with braver men than you 
are). Her. 7, 10. ab fx4xXeis eV dud pas o-rpaTeveoSrai iroXv dfj.eiuouas, r) 
l:Kv&as. Eur. Or. 715. iriarbs 4v KaKols du^p Kpeicracav yaXr) vns vav- 
riXoKTiv eisopdu (instead of rj yaXf)wn). Th. 6, 16. TrposTj/cet /j.oi fxuXXou ere- 
pcou . . dp%£iv (instead of 7) ki4pois). 7,63. ravra ro?s oirXiTais ovx V <r a v 
twu uavroou napaKeXevo/xai (instead of r) to7s uavrais). Od. 1, 27. ovroi eycoy€ 
7} s yairjs 8vva/j.ai yXvKepdorepou aXXo ld4<T&ai. X. Cy. 2. J, 1 2. 4/u.ol 80/cet 
Kvpos, ovsrivas dv 6p% dya^ovs, <piXe?u ovSeu tjttov eavr o r (instead of r) 4av- 
tqv). Her. 2, 134. MvKepluos nvpa/xtda direX'nreTo iroXXbu e y J. a goo tov warp 6s 
(instead of r) 6 iraT-fjp, or properly instead of rrjs tov rrccrpSs). 

Rem. 4. With irXeioou, ixdrrcov, irX4ov, eXarrov, /u.c?o v, when they 
stand in connection with a numeral, r\ is commonly omitted, without change 
of construction, i. e. the Case is the same as if there was no comparative in the 
sentence (comp. decern -plus or amplius homines). PI. Apol. 17, d. uvu iyia rrpca- 
tou errl 5iKao~Tf)piou duafZefirjKa, err} yeyovics vXeica e^So/xr)Koura {annos plus 
septuaginta natus). X. An. 6. 4, 24. oi'vmreis diroKTtivovai twv di/dpwu ou ixzlov 
irevTaKoo-iovs. Th. 6, 95. r) Xeia eirpd&r] raXdurcoi/ ovk eXarrov ir4vTe Kal cJ'ko- 
civ. X. Cy. 2. 1, 5. liririas fj.hu &|et ov peTou dio-/j.vp(ot)u. With the Nom. and 
Ace. nx4ou, eXarrou, the numeral specification can also stand in the Gen., e. g. 
"Ex<» ov ttx4ou {'4XaTTou) S4Ka -raxdurwu. The Greek can consequently say : (a) 
irXziovs {eXdrTOVs, /meiovs) r) 8eKa 7]fJ,4pai ; (b) irXtiovs S4Ka rj/jiepwu ; (c) irX4ou r) 
5e'«:a rj^pai ; (d) ttX4ou 5e«:a r)/j.4paL. It will be observed from several of the 
above examples that irx4ou, neiou, etc. stand as mere adverbs in the Ace, with 
substantives of a different gender and number. 

Rem. 5. Sometimes, also, the particle rj is found with the Gen. Such exam- 
ples are to be explained in a tAvo-fold manner. The Gen. either expresses its 
own appropriate relation, being wholly independent of the comparative, e. g. 
PI. L. 765, a. /j.7) eXarrou r) rptaKOura yeyouws 4rS>u [just as the Greek says 
ylyue<r£rai rpidKoura 4rS)U § 273, 2, (c)] ; or the Gen. is a preparative demonstra- 
tive pronoun, with which the clause introduced by ij may be regarded as an 

43* 



510 SYNTAX. [$ 323 

appositive or explanatory clause. Od. £, 182. ov fiev yap rovye « pelcrcro i> 
KaX apeiov, t) b& bjxocppoveovre voi]p.aaiv oIkov i^-qrov avrjp 7?5e yvvn ( = rov ore 
— eXn-rov). 

"Rem. 6. (Comparatio compendiaria). In comparisons, instead of comparing 
the attribute of one object with that of another, the Greeks often compare the 
attributive of one object with the other object itself to which the attribute 
would belong. In this case the Gen. is regularly used. X. Cy. 3. 3, 41. x&P av 
ex eT6 ovSev ^rrou rui&v (instead of rr\s ri/xerepas) eurl/xov. Moreover, in ev- 
erv other comparison, this mode of expression is often employed, e. g. H. p, 51. 
a'lfjLari 01 hevovro K.6p.ai Xapir ec a iv 6/j.o7ai (instead of reus rwv Xaplrcov). 
Comp. the examples under § 284, 4. This mode of comparison, though not 
strictly correct, is frequent in English, e. g. he has an expression like his father, 
instead of like his father's. 

4. When two attributes or predicates (adjectives or adverbs), belonging to 
the same object, are compared with each other, then both are put in the compar- 
ative, and the last is annexed by ij. 

©otto) y, 3) aotydor epos, celerior, quam sapientior {more swift than wise, or 
not so icise as swift). PI. Rp. 409, d. irAeovaKis irovr)po7s, 7) xPV°" r o7s evrvyx&voiv 
GO<p ut epo 5, r) a /u.a& e a r e p s done? elvat avrqj re na\ ahAois. Her. 3, 65. 
iiroivca rax^repa, 77 a ocpur epa {celerius, quam prudentius). 

5. The subject is compared with itself, i. e. the subject exhibits at some time 
a quality in a higher degree than usual. In this case, the Gen. of the reflexive 
pronouns i/xaurov, aeavrov, eavrov, is used with the comparative, and the pro- 
noun avros with the pronoun of the third person. The other mode of ex- 
pression by t] is not admitted here. 

BeATiue elp.1 i fxavr ov. Be\riuv el a e avrov. BeXrioiv iarrlv av- 
rbs eavrov. Th. 3, 11. ovuarwrepoi. avrol avrwu eylyvovTO. In like man- 
ner, the superlative is used in connection with avros and the Gen. of the re- 
flexive pronouns, when the subject is to be represented, as, at a given time, 
exhibiting the quality belonging to it, in the highest degree (in a higher degree 
than at any other time). "'Apiaros avrbs eavrov. 'Apio-rrj avrr) eav- 
rrjs. X. C. 1.2, 46. e?&e aoi, S> UepiKXeis, r6re o~vveyev6[xriv, ore 8 e iv6r ar s 
aavrov ravra f/oSa (ichen you surpassed yourself in these things, when you had the 
highest distinction in these things, higher than at any other time). 

6. The following is a peculiar mode of comparison : When an object in re- 
lation to some quality is compared, not with another object, but with a whole 
thought (sentence), this thought is compressed into one substantive idea, and 
this substantive is put in the Gen. depending on the comparative. Here, also, 
the other mode of expression by ^7, does not occur. 

Her. 2, 148. ^crav at ttv parties \6yov /j.e(oves [oratione majores, i. e. ma- 
jores, quam ut oratione explicari possit). Th. 2, 50. yevo\x.evov Kpelacrov \6yov 
rb elSos rrjs voffov {the nature of the disease being too severe to be described, severe 
beyond description). Upay/xa i\iriSwu Kpetrrov {too great to be hoped for, 
beyond hope). Instead of substantives, participles are also used, e. g. deovros. 
PI. Rp. 410, d. ot yvjxvacriKrj axparui xP r l a ° l -l x * v01 ay p icor e p 1 rov Seoul os 
airofiaivovaiv. 



§ 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 511 

7. When it is to be indicated, that a predicate or an attribute is in a higher 
or lower degree than could be expected, in proportion to another object, then 
the comparative is constructed with v) Kara, or (though seldom) •}) irpos 
with the Ace. (=quam pro). 

Th. 7, 75. p,et£co ?} Kara SaKpva iziirov&a (I have suffered too much for 
tears). PI. Ep. 359, d. vetcphs p-ti^tov 3) tear dvbpcotrov (a dead body greater 
than in accordance with a human being, greater than could be expected for a human 
being, too great for that of a human being). X. H. 3. 3, 1. ("Ayis) ervxe <r e/xvo- 
repas $ Kara dvSr pco-nov racprjss Comp. Liv. 21, 29. proelium atrocius, 
gnam pro numero pugnantium, editur {more bloody than could have been expected 
considering the number). 

8. If the predicate or attribute is represented as being in so high or low a 
degree, that another cannot coexist with it, then the comparative is used with 
$) costs and the Inf., e. g. Ka/ca p.ei(co l\v, $) costs KXaieiv, evils greater 
than one could weep for). X. An. 1. 2, 4. rjyqcrdp.euos thai 7) cos eVl IletaiSas rty 
TmpcvTKevtjv (having thought that the armament teas too great to be [greater, than to 
be] against the Pisidians). 3. 3, 7.fipaxvrepa t\k6vti(ov •>} cos iL]iKve7tT&ai tcov acpev- 
Sovt]tcou (threw too short a distance to reach the slingers). See § 341. 3, (a). 

Eem. 7. The comparative is frequently used without the second member of the 
comparison, and can then be translated by giving a strong emphasis to the 
positive, or more frequently by joining the adverbs too, pretty, somewhat, a little, 
right, to the positive. (Comp. English, too sweet, pretty,' somewhat, a little warm.) 
This usage is found when the second member is evident from the connection ; 
but very frequently, also, when such thoughts as, than it was before, than was 
before, than ivas usual, proper, right, becoming, were more or less distinctly before 
the speaker's mind. Her. 3, 145. Maiavdpico Se rep rvpdvvco i\v ddeXcpebs virop.- 
apy6repos (hebetioris ingenii, very dull of perception, a little crazy). 6, 108. 
7)fj.e7s e KaaT e pco oik eofxev (we dwell too far, very far from you). So particu- 
larly the neuters dp-sivov, fieXriov (better than is right), ndXXiov, fxaXXov, x^p ov i 
afoxiov, k&kiov ; also vecbrepov, more seldom Kaiv6rspov, (since kcxiv6s is used synony- 
mously with vecbrepos) and the like, especially with a negative, e. g. ov tcaXXiov, 
ovk aixsivov, ov Kcixiou, ov KpeiTTov, ov x^P 0V i ov piiov (not so easy, as it seems), etc. 
Her. 3, 71. ■koissiv avTiKa p.01 So/ce'ei kcu p.^ virepfioAecrSat.- ov yap dp.sivov (for 
this would not be better, than if we did it immediately). PL Phaed. 105, a. iraXiv 
Se avap.ip.vr\tTKov • ov yap x e ^P 0V noXXdnis a/coveu/. Finally, also, when antith- 
eses are compared with each other, e. g. To x*' l P ova "KoXXols irXsico icrrl rcov 
dp. e 1 v 6 v co v (the worse is more in number than the better) . 



$ 324. IV. Causal Coordinate Sentences. 

1. Finally, those sentences are coordinate, the last of which denotes either the 
ground, cause, or consequence of the preceding sentence, or the conclusion from it. 

2. The Greeks denote the ground or reason by ydp, which is never the first 
word in a sentence, but is commonly placed immediately after the first word. 
Tap is compounded of ye and dp a, and hence denotes proof confirmation, 
(ye, yes, certainly), and at the same time, an inference, or conclusion (dp a, igitur, 
now, therefore). Hence, according as the one or the other meaning prevails, 



512 SYNTAX. [$ 324 

ydp may express : (a) a ground or reason, (b) an explanation, (c) a confirmation 
or assurance; and hence it may be translated: (a) by for, (b) /Aa£ is, for ex- 
ample, (c) indeed, certainly. 

PL Phaedr. 230, b. v\\ r V "Hpav, Ka\?j 76 77 Karayuyf] • 77 Te 7 a p irXaravos 
avrr) /mX' aix(pi\a(pr)s re /cal uiJ/tjAtj {yes, certainly = for). Tap has its explana- 
tory sense, especially after demonstratives and the phrases reKpL-hpiov Se, jxaprv- 
piov Se, <T7)p.elov 5e, SrjXov 8e scil. eori, (SeLKW/xt. 5e, ed-nXcaae Se, C/ce^ao'i^e 5e, and 
the like. It expresses confirmation or assurance, particularly in rejoinders and 
replies. X. C. 3. 5, 10. apa Xeyeis rrjv tu>v &ewv Kpiariv fy ol irepl KeKpoira St' ape- 
ttV eKpivav ; — Aeyw ydp, yes, certainly. 10, 2. e/c iroXXwv crvvdyovres to e| e/cacr- 
tou KaXXiara, ovras oXa to ffcafxara KaXa Troierre (paivea&ai ; — Tloiov/xez/ 7 a p, 
e077, o^tws {certainly, we do so). — In addresses, ivishes, commands, and ques- 
tions, the meaning of 7 op, as denoting inference or conclusion, clearly 
appears. Arist. Ran. 251. tovtI irap' v/xwv Xap.$dv(n ; Aeiva yap 7reicr6/j.e- 
&a\ {am I so treated by you ? well ! then we shall have hard things to bear !) Ko- 
kws yap e£6Xoio\ may you perish then! So, el ydp, eX^fe ydp. X. C. 1. 7, 
2. OTi 8' dXr)Srj eXeyev, a>Se eSiSacrKev • 'Ei^u/x^eS-a 7ap, €077, ^ tm ptii &v aya- 
&bs avXrjrrjS 5oKe?v fiovXoiro, ri av avr<3 Troi-nreov etif] ; {now then let us consider). I. 
4, 14. ov yap irdvv aoi KardSrjXov, on tt apa. r d aXXa £a>a a>sirep Seol av&pcoTroi 
fiiorevovai ,- is it not then clear to you ? (nonne igitur — ?). II. a, 182. T Ipt &ed, ris 
yap ere &ea>v ep.ol dyyeXov f/Kev ; {therefore who then has sent you?). X. C. 2. 3, 
17. Kal 6 XaipeKparris elirev 'Eav ovv, e/xou ravra iroiovvros, eKeivos fj.r]dev fieXricov 
yiyv-nrai ; Tt yap dXXo, e<prj 6 ~2,wKpdrr]s, $ KivSvvevcreis, k. r. X. ; {what else 
then will happen except that you will run the risk, etc.?) Dem. Ph. 1. 43, 10. 
yevoiro yap av ri icaivSrepov, 7) MaKedwv dvyjp 'A&rjvaiovs KarairoXejxwv ; {why, 
can there be a greater novelty ?). So, Tt 7ap; quid ergo? Kal ri ydp ,- and how 
then? Tiuts yap; and nr6&ev ydp; as an emphatic negative answer = by no 
means. IIcSs yap ov; (instead of it, irS&ev 8e ov is used with an antithesis) 
as an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 13. ovkovv 6 p.ev to Sinaia irpdr- 
twv diKaios, Se to dSiKa adiKos ; Uu s yap oft ; {is he, therefore, who does what 
is just, just, but he who does what is unjust, unjust ? to be sure, how not?). 

Remark 1. The explanatory sentence with 70^ very often precedes the 
sentence to be explained, particularly in Herodotus, e. g. Her. 6, 102. Kal, fjv 
yap 6 Mo.pa,^wv eiriTrjdewTaTou x u> P l0l/ T ^ s 'Atti/ctIs ivnrrrevffai, is tovto aepi KaTq- 
yeero 'Ittttltis {and, for Marathon was the most suitable place in Attica for the cav- 
alry, Hippias led them to this place). So especially with aXXd ydp, at enim, but 
certainly, really, indeed, aAA' ov ydp. PL Apol. 20, c. 7)f3pvv6/j.riv dv, el T\Tno-rdyL-r\v 
touto- aAA' oh yap iirio-Ta/j.ai [I should be proud, if I knew this, but certainly I do 
not know). 

Rem. 2. The two sentences, the preceding explanatory one with 70^, and 
the following one whose meaning is to be confirmed, are often so closely con- 
nected with each other, that the subject of the last is transferred to the first, 
and its government made to depend on it. Th. 8, 30. xo?s iu rfj 2a/xw 'A&77- 
vaiois irposacptyfAei/ai yap 7) a av Kal o'iko&6v aXXai vrjes Kal aTpar-qyot, Kal ras 
airb Xlov -rrdaas Kal ras aXXas £vvayay6vres i /3o vXovr 0, etc., instead of ol — 
'Adrjvaloi — e,3uvXovro, avrols yap, k. r. X. 

Rem. 3. Kal ydp commonly means for also, rarely etenim, but sometimes 
the Kai corresponds to a following Kai, thus nam et — ct. 






$ 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 513 

3. The consequence or inference is denoted : — 

(a) By dpa (hence, then), which never stands as the first Avord in a sentence, 
though commonly near the beginning, also sometimes emphatically at the end. 
It expresses a consequence which conies as a matter of course, which is wholly nat- 
ural. In many passages, it hardly admits of translation into English, since it 
often implies only a very slight consequence, and merely refers to something 
mentioned, to something existing in the context, or only in the conception of 
the speaker, in conformity with which the thing is in the state in which it is 
affirmed to be. Hence it is very often used like the English indeed, as it seems, 
in such explanatory causes as more exactly define, or distinguish, something 
before said, or pointed out. 

Luc. Jup. trag. 51. el eiai {Soopoi, elal Kal &eoi- a\\a fi^v elal fioofxoi- elalv dpa 
Kal &eol (then there are, consequently there are gods also). X. Cy. 7. 3, 6. ravra cutovaas 
6 Kvpos iiratcraro a pa tov p.t\pov (when he had heard of the death of his friend, 
then he smote on his thigh, as was natural). It is often connected with an 
Impfi, when, in consequence of a better view of the subject at present, one is 
undeceived in regard to a former opinion, e. g. 1. 4, 11. S> iraloes, &s dpa 
i<p\vapov/Li.ev, 6Ve ra ev t<2 irapa^sicroj &7]pla e&rjpa>/.iev • 6/j.oiov efxoiye SoKei 
elvai, oiovtrep e'[ Tts Seoea/xeva (wa &7]poj7] (now how childish we were then, as I now 
indeed see). 1.3, 8. 2ct/ca oe, cpdvai tov 'AuTvdyqv, rv olvoxo'?, ov iyo\) jxaAicTTa 
ti/jlw, ovdev oiSoos ; 'O 5e 2a/cas apa Ka\6s re tiv irvyxave, Kal Tifxijv %x wv "^posd- 
yeiv tovs Seojxevovs ' Ao-Tvdyovs (now the Sacian happened to be beautiful, the Sacian 
was beautiful, as it seems). 9 d> 5a«:a, air6\w\as • eK^o.\a> ere e/c tt\s tl/xtis' ra re 
yap aAAa, (pdvai, gov naXXiov olvoxo'fjcrco, Kal ovk eKiriofxai avrbs tov olvov • ol 8' 
apa to)v jSacnAeW olvox^oi — icaTappocpovcri. Dem. Cor. 232, 22. eToXpa Aeyeiv, 
cos apa iya — /ce/ccoAiz/cws eir\v tt\v ttqKiv (t^v elprjvrjv) iroiyo-aoSai (that I indeed, 
that I, as it seems). Hence the use of yap and the strengthened form yap 
'apa. — Ei dpa and el fxr) apa correspond to the Latin si forte, nisi forte, if 
perchance, unless perchance, the inferential force of dpa being reduced to a mere 
conjecture, and are often used ironically. X. C. 1. 2, 8. 7ra>s av ovv toiovtos 
av)]p oiacp&eipoL tovs veovs : el [XT] dpa r\ tt\s dpeTr\s em/xeAeia dia(p&opd 4o~tiv 
(properly, that if such an excellent man can corrupt the young, then we must draw 
the conclusion that, etc.). So also, el d p a, num forte, whether then, whether per- 
chance. X. C. 4. 3, 9. o-KOirS>, el apa ti eCTt to?s &eo7s epyov, v) dv&pwirovs &e- 
paireveLv (whether perchance, forsooth, the gods have any other employment than, etc.). 
''Apa stands very often in interrogative sentences. Aesch. S. 91. ris dpa 
ovaeTar, ti'j J' d p y eirapKeaei Stewv ; (quis igitur defendet ? quis igitur arcebit ?). 

Rem. 4. "Apa seems to be derived from the verb 'APfl, i. e. to be adapted, 
suitable, and hence to express the inward relation, the immediate connection 
of two thoughts, and in such a manner that one seems, as it were, to be en- 
tirely fitted to the other, — the one perfectly corresponding to the other 
(= precisely, exactly, just). In this sense it is used in Homer, e. g. II. tj, 182. 
£k S' e&ope KXyjpos Kvverjs hv dp' ^e\ov axnoi, precisely the one which, just the one 
which, tt) /j. os dpa, just then, o t dpa, just when, tot d p a, precisely then, el 
a $7 dpa, if not precisely, & s dpa, exactly so ; ovk — , a A A' dpa, not. — but 
just; eirei pa, since just, yap }> a, for just. Homer uses dpa, in general, in 



514 SYNTAX. [$ 325. 

order to connect thoughts together, which are intimately related, and are de- 
veloped from each other. - 

Rem. 5. The lyric, tragic, and comic writers also employ the lengthened 
form apa instead of apa. Thus el a pa, etr' a pa, instead of el apa, etT* 
&pa. On the interrogative apa and on &pa in a question, see § 344. 

(b) Ovv (Ion. &v), which commonly has the second or third place in a sen- 
tence, means, consequently, hence, therefore [ergo, igitur) ; it appropriately points 
out the effect of a cause, the necessary consequence of what precedes, and is ac- 
cordingly far stronger than &pa, but is also used in a more general sense. 

Rem. 6. O 3 v is used as a suffix to pronouns and conjunctions, and in this case 
also, retains its conclusive sense : octtis olv, 'dsirep olv, oaoi olv, fxev olv, yovv, 8' olv, 
aAA' olv, eft-' olv, yap ovv. It expresses a conclusion, a setting aside of every- 
thing else, and a persisting in that which is affirmed ; hence it may express also 
confirmation and assurance. So o <r t t 5 ovv, sire p ovv, whoever he may be then, 
ba-oi ovv, how many so ever then, /xev ovv, yes indeed (§ 316, Rem.), yovv, cer- 
tainly, surely, ovkovv, truly, certainly not, §' ovv, a A A 5 ovv, arap ovv, but 
surely, eXre ovv, be it this or that, yap ovv, for surely, el 5' ovv, if then. 

Rem. 7. Ovkovv, a.s a, Paroxytone, means: (a) non ergo, without inteiTO- 
gation (consequently ovk in connection with the syllogistic ovv, ergo) ; still in 
this sense it is also written ovk olv; (b) nullo modo, nequaquam, by no means, 
without interrogation (consequently ovk in connection with the emphatic suffix 
ovv) most frequently in answers, e. g. X. O. 1, 9. ovkovv efxoiye Boks?. — Ov- 
kouj', asa Perispomenon : (a) in a question : nonne igitur ? nonne ergo ? X. C. 
2. 2, 12. ovkovv, ecprj 6 2., Ka\ rep yehovi f3ov\ei av apeaKeiv; — "Eycaye, e<pn. 
Also in this case it is written ovk I v, as well as ovkovv; the latter has been 
adopted in modern times, yet it is to be limited to such questions as involve a 
special emphasis in the negative, and so ovkovv is equivalent to nonne certe ; 
like S. Aj. 79.' ovkovv yeXoos 'i}§xrTos els ex&povs yeXav ; (b) without interrogation, 
ergo, igitur. X. C. 3. 6, 6. ovkovv, ecpn, to /uev irAovaiwrepav ttjv -k6\iv iroieiv 
avaPahov/uiefra. This last arises from its use as an interrogative, and ovkovv is 
in this case properly nonne igitur ? The frequent use of this interrogative form 
has caused a gradual weakening in the interrogative tone, and thus its sense 
has become obscure, e. g. is it not true therefore we shall put off? (= conse- 
quently we shall put off). 

(c) Totvvv, which never stands as the first word in a sentence, is derived 
from the Epic t <S, therefore, and the slightly inferential or deductive vvv, now, 
which is derived from the temporal adverb vvv; it is used: (a) to make 
a transition; thus especially, Ka\ roivvv, and now, en roivvv, moreover 
then; (b) to mark a conclusion, therefore now, so then. Toiyap (from the Epic t<S, 
therefore, and yap) corresponds to the Latin ergo, therefore, but is poetic ; still 
stronger is roiydpToi, just on this account, precisely so, and to lyapovv, on this 
account then. They commonly stand as the first word in a sentence. 



§ 325. Asyndeton. 

1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction (ao~w- 
Sercos). Only some of the more prominent instances will be mentioned : — 

(a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. II. %, 295. (of Hector) arrj 
Se Kara(pr]aas, obS" &AA' e^e fxeihivov eyxos' Av'icpofiov 5' ewraAei \evKao"!ri8a, fxaK- 
pbv avaas yf t e e fj.iv 86pv pjxKpov. — (b) Asyndeton is very common in explana- 






$ 326.] PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 515 

tory clauses, which are elsewhere connected by 'dpa (therefore, then, that is) and 
yap. The second clause gives a more exact explanation of what was stated 
only in a general, indefinite, indistinct manner in the first. So particularly 
when there stands in the first clause a preparative demonstrative, e.g. tovto, rode, 
ovtws, £Se, etc. X. An. 3. 2, 19. kv\ pJi/cpirpoexovaiu r)/xas oi hrireTs- cpevyeiv avroTs 
a<j<pa\£<TTep6v icrriv, ^ rj/Mt/. — (c) Related to the above is the asyndeton in the 
beginning of a discourse or new paragraph, which is intended to strengthen a pre- 
ceding thought. PL Phaed. 91, C. 'AAA' Weov, ecp-n. YlpwTov pe viro/j.v?](TaTe 
h eAeyere, iav p.)] <pa.ivoip.cu p.ep.vnp.4vos. — (d) The connecting particle is often 
wanting, but is, in a measure, involved in another word. This is the case es- 
pecially with demonstratives, e. g. ovtods, t6<tos, to?os, etc., as in Latin with sic, 
talis, tantus, etc. — (e) Before t« roiaura, cetera, a A Act, oi dtAAoi in the 
enumeration of several objects, Kai is very commonly omitted, as et before ce- 
teri, alii, reliqui, in Latin, when these words have a collective sense, i. e. when 
one would include in these expressions all which is still to be named in addi- 
tion to what has been already mentioned. PI. Gorg. 503, e. olov el fiovAei ideiv 
robs faypd<povs, tovs oiKoSopLOVs, robs vavTr-nyovs, tous &A\ovs iravras 8-np.iovp- 
yovs. — (f ) In antitheses, which are to be represented as taking place equally, 
and without distinction, the conjunctions are omitted. PI. Prot. 319, d. avfi- 
/3ovAevet irepl tovtgop 6p.oioos piku t4ktoov, 6p.oiws 5e %aA«:eus (TKUTorSpios eparopos 
vavKX-npos, irAovcrios irtvns, yzvvouos b.ysvvi\s. In poetry, particularly in Epic, 
two or four adjectives, belonging to one substantive (of which each two 
form a whole), or even three, are often placed together, without a connec- 
tive, if they are merely ornate epithets which, as it were, paint and vividly 
describe the object. II. ic, 140 and 802. eyxos fipi&v, p.4ya, <TTi($ap6v, KSKopv- 
<pp.ivov. Od. a, 96. /caAa 7re'5(Aa, ap,(ip6cna, xpycreia. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

B. Subordination. 

§ 326. Principal and Subordinate Sentences. 

1. When clauses, which together present one united thought, 
are so related, as to their import, that the one is a dependent 
and merely complementary or limiting member of the other, 
then their connection may be expressed either by coordinate 
conjunctions, as Kai, Be, yap, apa, etc., e. g. to 'lap rjkSt, ra Be poBa 
avSzi {the spring came, and the roses bloom) ; or in such a man- 
ner, that the clause, which merely completes or limits the 
other, is manifestly in its outward form, a dependent, or a sim- 
ply completing or limiting member of the other, e. g. ore to 



516 SYNTAX. [$ 326. 

lap r)\9e, ra po'Sa dv^et. This mode of connection is called 
Subordination, and the clauses or sentences Subordinate. 

2. The clause to which the other as a complementary or 
limiting member belongs, is called the principal clause ; the 
complementary or limiting clause, the subordinate clause, and 
the two together, a compound sentence. Thus, for example, in 
the compound sentence, "Ore to lap rjX^e, ra p6Sa dv#et, the clause 
ore to lap rj\$e, is the subordinate clause, the other the principal 
clause. 

3. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of a substantive 
(substantive subject or object), or of an attributive adjective, 
or of an adverb, and hence must be regarded as substantives, 
adjectives, or adverbs, expanded into a sentence; accord- 
ingly, there are three classes of subordinate clauses : sub- 
stantive, adjective, and adverbial clauses. 

Thus, for example, in the sentence, " The victory of Cyras over the enemy 
was announced," the subject may he expanded into a subordinate clause, 
viz., " That Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ; " further, in the 
sentence, " Sing to me, Muse, the far-wandering man," the attributive far- 
wandering, may be expanded into a subordinate clause, " avtipa /xoi zvveire, 
Movtra, TroXvrpoirov, o s jxaXa iroXXa TrXayx&'n" {who has wandered far). 
Comp., " He announced the victory of Cyrus over the enemy," with " He an- 
nounced, that Cyrus had conquered the enemy ; " " In the Spring the roses bloom," 
with, " when the Spring is come, the roses bloom." 

Remark 1. The use of subordinate clauses in Greek is not so common 
as in English, since the Greek makes a much more frequent use of Participles 
than the English. Comp. " when the enemy had come," with twv iroXe/Aioov 
iXSovTwv ; " when he had done this, he went away," with ravra irpa^as airzfir) ; 
" Cyrus, who had conquered the enemy, came back to the camp," with Kvpos 
tovs iroXe/xiovs viK-haas ets rb (nparoir^ov avrjXdrzv. 

Rem. 2. To substantive clauses belong also dependent or indirect inter- 
rogative clauses ; for these form the object of the governing verb, e. g. " He 
asked me whether my father had returned, i. e. concerning, or in regard to, the return 
of my father ; " He showed, who had plotted the conspiracy, i. e. he showed the 
author of the conspiracy ; " " He wrote me, when he should depart, i. e. the time 
of his departure," etc. Still, as the Taws relating to dependent and to direct 
interrogative clauses, are often blended together, both will be treated in a 
special section in the sequel. 

Rem. 3. The subordinate relation of the dependent to the principal clause, 
is indicated in Greek by conjunctions, and also by the relative pronoun, which in 
an adjective clause has the meaning of an adjective. The conjunctions are 
correlatives, i. c. relatives which stand in a reciprocal relation to demonstra- 
tives in principal clauses, e. g. O 5 r 6 s ianv 6 b,vr\p, b v e75es. T b ^6Sou, o av&e? iu 
t<w K7]ira>, ko.XXi<tt6v iariu. y EAe£e t out o, or i 6 av&pwrros aSfduarSs iartv. 
Totos — Oios; oaoo — r ocrovrcp. 'lis £\e£a, ovrws cyeuero. Outgo Ka- 



$ 327.] SEQUENCE OP TENSES. 517 

\&s irdvra eirpa^v, cbsre eTratvov /neyiarov &£ios i\v. "Ore 5 Kvpos tf\&G, 
t6t e rcdvTts fieydXccs ix a P r l <rai/ - "E^etve p.^xP L tovtov, ov 6 fiacrtAevs eV^A.- 
frtv. A substantive may also stand instead of a demonstrative correlative, 
e. g. eV tovtu rcf XP<W>J ore (instead of r6re, ore). Still, when the reciprocal 
relation is not to be brought out emphatically, the demonstrative is commonly 
not expressed, e. g. "EXe^ev, otl 6 av&pooiros a&dvaTos £<niv. KaXws iravra 
eirpa^ev, cosre ktX. "O t e 6 Kvpos tfX&e, irdvTes p.eydXccs ixdp7]o~a.v. ^E^ueij/e, 
/xe'xpi ov 6 PaaiAevs iTrrjA&ev, etc. Even both pronouns may, in certain cases, 
be omitted, e. g."Efj.eipe, ^XP 1 & fiaaiXevs iirriX&ev. 

Rem. 4. The form of the demonstrative, in the principal clause, either 
actually expressed or understood, determines the nature of the suboi'dinate 
clause. The substantive demonstrative denotes a substantive clause ; the ad- 
jective, an adjective clause ; the adverbial, an adverbial clause. But the 
subordinate clauses themselves have special characteristics by which they 
may be distinguished from each other, viz., the introductory conjunctions and 
the constructions connected with these. 



$ 327 a . Sequence of the Subjunctive Tenses in Sub' 
ordinate Sentences. 

1. For the use of tenses in subjunctive subordinate clauses, the 
following general rule applies in Greek, as in Latin : — 

The tenses of the subjunctive subordinate clause correspond 
to those of the principal clause ; i. e. a principal tense (Present, 
Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect) in the principal clause, is fol- 
lowed by the subjunctive in the subordinate clause, and an his- 
torical tense (Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist) in the principal 
clause is followed in the subordinate clause, by the Optative, 
i. e. the Subjunctive of the historical tenses. 

Tovto X4yw, tovt6 fjtoi XeXeicTai, tovto Ae'|&>, 'Iva y lyvdo cr kt\ s (yv$s) t 
hoc dico, dixi (Perfectum praesens), dicam, ut cognoscas. Tovto eXeyov, tovt6 
{Mot e'AeAe/cTo, tovto e\e£a,'[va y lyv cocr ko is (yvo 1 1\ s), hoc dicebam, dix- 
eram. dixi (Perfect. Histor.), ut cognosceres. Ovk exw, otvol Tpiirwfiai (Tpd- 
irai/j. a i ), non habeo, quo me vertam. Ovk elxov, ottoi t pttr oip.7)v (Tpairoi- 
fxr]u), non habebam, quo me verterem. Of iroAefuoi irduras, otco Uv ij/Tvx Q}0 ~h 
KTslvovaiu. Oi TToAe/JLioi rrrduTas, otu> iv Ti>x 0lei '> %kt eiv ov. 

2. But it is to be observed that the Greek confines itself less 
regularly to the above rule, than the Latin, but has much 
greater freedom. Very often in lively narration, the Greeks 
refer the predicate of a subordinate clause directly to the 
present time of the speaker, without any regard to the principal 
clause, so that, therefore, an historical tense in the principal clause 
is followed by the same mode ( Subj.) and the same tenses which 

44 



518 SYNTAX. [§ 327. 

accompany the principal tenses. The dependent clause or dis- 
course then assumes the character of independent or direct dis- 
course (an objective mode of expression) ; the speaker, in his 
lively conceptions, brings the past into present view ; the past 
becomes present to him. See § 345, 5. 



§327 b . Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses. 

The use of modes in the different kinds of subordinate 
clauses, will be considered in treating these clauses each by 
itself. Here, only those characteristics will be noticed which 
are common to several kinds of subordinate clauses. 

1. There is very often an attraction of the mode, a subordi- 
nate clause which forms an intermediate member of another 
clause, taking the mode of this clause. 

(a) This occurs with the Indie, of the historical tenses in those subordinate 
clauses, which form an intermediate or accessory member of a hypothetical 
proposition with el and a preterite Indie in the Protasis, and a preterite Indie, 
with av in the Apodosis [§ 339, 2, I. (b)]. X. C. 1. 4, 14. (fobpanros) ovre Pobs 
av e~x<»v vcopa, avSpwirov Se yv&prjv, iSvvaT av irpdrreiv, a e fiovXer o (as in 
Lat. efficere posset, quae vellet). 3. 5, 8. el ifiovXo pe&a xpvpaTwv S>v ol aXXoi 
e?x o v avTiiroielcr&ai (si vellemus expetere opes, quas alii haberent). Isocr. Paneg. 
19. ixpvv (robs pJjTopas) py irporepovirepl tcov opoXoyovpevuv ffvpfiovXeveiv, irplv 
irepl ra>v dpcpisfi-qTovpevuv Tjpas i$i5a£av (oportebat . . priusquam . . docuissent). 
PI. Gorg. 506, 6. rjSzcos av KaXXiKXe? tovtco en 5 ieXey6 prj v, ews avra . . 
cnredcoKa (usque dum reddidissem) . Prom this maybe explained the use of 
the Indie. Imperfect or Aorist in final clauses after an Indie, of an historical 
tense with or without av. See § 330, 5. 

(b) Very often with those subordinate clauses which are intermediate or ac- 
cessory members of optative clauses, i. e. clauses expressing a wish ; hence with 
adjective, adverbial, or final clauses, as members of a clause expressing a wish, 
or as intermediate members of an optative proposition expressed conditionally. 
II. p, 640. ett] 8' ostis eraipos anayyeiXeie rdxHTTa UTjXeidr) (0 that there 
were a friend to announce as quick as possible). Ar. Vesp. 1431. e pdoi ris, ^v 
enao-Tos elSe'iy rexvrjv. PI. Phaedr. 279, C. to xpwov irXrj&os eXy poi, '6ffov 
p. ■fire (pepeiv, p-r)r b\yeiv 8vvair &XXos, 2) 6 critxppwv. II. a, 464, sqq. at yap 
fj.iv bavdroio 8vs7]x*os £>8e 8v vaiprjv v6o~<piv a-rroKpvxj/ai, ore piv popos alvbs 
iitavoi. — X. S. 8, 17. vis piaetv dvvair &v, ixp" ov eldeir) KaX6s re Kal aya- 
&bs vop.i(6pevos. C. 4. 6, 7. it£>s yap &v ris, a ye pfy eiriar air o, ravra ao'pbs 
eXrj; PL Phaed. 72, c. el air o&vr) o~ k oi pev iravra, o a a rod £rjv per aXafio i, 
iireiSr) Se airofr dvo i, pevoi ev tovtco tQ axVP^^i to. re^vecora Kal pr] irdh.iv 
avafi iwo~ koito, dp' ov ttoXXji dvdyKt) reXevrcovra iravra re&vdvai Kal prjSev £rjv ; 



§ 327.] MODES IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 519 

X. 0. 1, 13. etTis XP$ T0 T V apyvpla), &sre komiov rb crai/ma e%oi, wus av eTi 
to apyvpiov avf<p a(peAi/j.ov e%r) ; S. Ph. 325. &v/xbv yevoiro X €L P^ irKrip&cral 
TTore, %v al MvKrjvai yvolev . . , '6ti XV StfCpos avSpwv aAKifxwv fx^T-qp ecpv. Eur. 
T road. 698. 7r at 5a T^vSe TraiSbs iicfrpety.ais a v, Tpoias /xeyiaTov QDCpehrjfx', iV oX 
ttotc e/c crou yevo^evoi ira?Bes"lAiov irdAiv KaToiKioreiav Kcd iroAis yevoiT en. 
X. All. 2. 4, 3. ovk iirt,o-Td/j.e&a, o t i PaaiAevs rjfxas airoXeaai irepl ivavTbs 'av 
tto 17] era it o, 'Iva Kai toIs aAAoLs"EA\rj<TL (pofios- etr) eirl fiao-iAea \x.iyav crTpaTev- 
eiv (according to the best MSS.). Comp. 3, 1, 18. X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. el 5r? Tret'r 
ffats eiraivelv ae iroAAovs, oir w s 8o£av A d /3 o i s, dpTi e^rjiraTrjKcbs e'ir]s civ. Comp. 
2. 4, 17. But since the Optative in a clause expressing a wish as well as the 
Optative in hypothetical propositions, has a present signification (§ 259, 3), ac- 
cording to § 330, 2 the Subj. must properly follow after the final conjunctions, 
as is frequently the case. PL Apol. 28, d. am'iKa Te&valr\v, Xva p.ri ev- 
fraSe p.4vco KarayeXaaTos. X. An. 3. 1, 38. oXoj.icu av v/j.as p.eya hvr\o~ai Tb o~Tpd- 
Tev/j-a, el iTriiJ.eAri&ei'nTe, '6irws clvtI tS>v a-rroAcoAoToov as Tax^Ta aTpaT-nyol 
a.VT maT ao~T a&Gxr lv. Cy. 3. 2, 28. xp r )l J - ara Trposyevea&ai %ti av ySouAot- 
fir]v r)/j.?v, '6 it <as ex w p-ivSbv a<p&6vws hib~6vai. Also with jxi) (whether not = 
that). An. 1. 3, 17. ty<b OKVoirjv fxev av els to. irAoTa i/xfiaiveiv, a tj/mv doirj, /y.7] 
rjuas avTais tois Tpir)peo-i k «t ad very, </> o /3 o l[xrjv 8' av t<£ r)ye/.wvi a> 8olr] eVeo"- 
&ai, [ATI r)/xas ay ay rj, o&ev oi>x oT6v Te ecnrcu i£eA&e?v, 

Remark. But in substantive-clauses with otl or &s, that (§ 329), and in 
dependent interrogative clauses, after a conditioning or conditioned Ind. of 
the historical tenses, the Ind. of the principal tenses remains ; also after an 
optative principal clause, since these clauses have but a loose connection with 
the principal clause, and hence they readily assume the form of direct discourse. 
X. An. 5. 1, 10. el /xev rjir io~t djxeSra (ra<p&s, otl ?j£ei Xeiplo~o(pos, ovSev av 
eSei 5>v jxeWco Aeyeiv. (So in the best and most of the MSS. instead of r]£oi.) 
Dem. 19,40. %y pa<pov av Siapprjdrjv, r)AiKa v/xas ev ir o tr) o~ a, el ev rjSeiv Kal 
Tr]V 0-v/A/j.ax'iav jxol yevrjO'oiJ.evriv. — Dem. 16, 4. ov8' av els avTeiiro i, ws oi 
a u [j.(p e pe i rfj ir6k€i, Kai AaKedai/xoviovs aa&eveTs elvat Kal ©rjfiaiovs. X. An. 3. 
2, 36. et vvv a7ro5etXid-et77, Tiva XP^l vyeTa^ai (ducere) tov irAaio~lov, . . ovk 
av . . fiovAevea&ai rifxas Seoi. 

2. The Subj. and Opt. are used in subordinate clauses to de- 
note indefinite frequency or repetition; the Subj., when the prin- 
cipal clause contains a principal tense (Pres. or Fut), the Opt., 
when the principal clause contains an historical tense (usually 
the Impf.). This relation in Greek is regarded as a conception, 
inasmuch as the idea of repetition arises from bringing single 
actions together in conception. The conjunction or relative of 
the subordinate clause is translated by as often as. 

II. jQ, 391. h v Se k iyebv airdvev&e /ttaX 7 ? 5 i&eAovTa voiiffoo p.ijxvd^eLV irapa. 
vrjvffl Kopcovlaiv, ov ot eireiTa 'dpKiov iffaelTai. cpvyeeiv Kvvas r)ff oleovovs (as often as 
I shall observe). X. Cy. 3. 3, 26. orciTav (ol fidppapoi Pacrike?s) o~t paToire- 
Seitovrai, rdeppov TvepiftaAAovTai evirercos 8ia ttjv TroAvxeipiav. C 3. 1, 1. o ti 
fxkv {%0iKpaT7]s) avrbs eldelrj, ivdvTeov irpoSvpLOTaTa iSldao'Kev, ot ov 8e avrbs 



520 syntax. [$$ 328, 329. 

aireipdrepos ety, irpbs robs iiricrrafievovs tfyev avrovs. An. 6. 1, 7. oirore ol 
"E\Xt]U€S rois 7roAe/xtots iiri o i ev, padicas airecpevyoi'. 4. 5, 30. Sir ov "Eevocpwv 
it apt o i KCt>fJ.7)v, irpiirero irpbs robs eV reus kc*>/j.cus. 1 . 9, 1 8. e % ris ye rt Kvpw npos- 
rd^avri tcakws inrr] per 7] a" e ley, ovdevl Trcairore axapivrov eiWe ryv Trpo&vfiiav. 



§ 328. I. Substantive-Clauses. 

Substantive-clauses are substantives or infinitives expand- 
ed into a sentence, i. e. they have the force of a substantive, 
and stand as the subject, as well as the attribute or object of 
a sentence. Comp. $ 326, 3. 



$329. A. Substantive-Clauses introduced by otl or 
<x><5, that. 

1. Substantive- clauses introduced by otl and ws, that, 
express the object of verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. bpav, 
aKOvew, voelv, /JLav^dvecv, yiyvoxTKew, etc. ; Xeyeiv, SrjXovv, SeiKvwcu, 
ayyiXXecv, etc., [$ 306, 1, (b)] ; in the second place, subordinate 
clauses introduced by on, express the object of verba affectuum, 

e. g. 9-avfAat,€LV, ax$€o~$aL, ayavaKreiv, alo-^yvecrS^aL, /x,e/x<£ecr$ai, etc. ; 

on is also used to introduce a subordinate clause, which con- 
tains an explanation of the principal clause, or of a single word 
in it. 

Remark 1. 'Cls, properly, how, differs from on, in expressing the thought 
more indefinitely and undecidedly, than on ; hence &s is used particularly after 
verbs of believing, thinking, and after negative verba sentiendi and declarandi. 
— After verbs of believing, thinking, judging, hoping, promising, swearing, denying, 
the Inf. or the Ace. with the Inf. usually follows, very seldom or i or & s ; after 
verbs of saying, mentioning, and the like, both constructions occur with equal 
frequency; after verbs of knowing, showing, send the like, either on or ws 
follows, or a participle, or, under certain conditions, the Ace. with the Inf. See 
§311. Sometimes, also, 07tc«js and the Poet, o u v e k a, also o&ovveK a in the 
Tragedians, are used nearly in the same sense with on, that. 

Rem. 2. When a subordinate clause refers to a Pass, verb or to an imper- 
sonal phrase with ecniv, e. g. Sr t Kou, deivov, a\o%jp6v eanv, and the like, it stands 
as the grammatical subject. 

2. The predicate of this substantive-clause may be ex- 
pressed : (a) by the Ind., (b) by the Opt., (c) by the Opt. with 
av, (d) by the Ind. of Hist, tenses with av. 

3. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when the statement is 
to be represented as a fact, something certain or actual. Par- 






$ 329.] SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 521 

ticularly is the Ind. used regularly, when the verb of the prin- 
cipal clause is a principal tense (Pres., Perf., or Fut.). 

4. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when the statement is 
to be represented as a conception or supposition, therefore, par- 
ticularly, when ivhat is stated as the opinion of another is to be 
indicated as such ($ 345, 4). When the Ind. interchanges with 
the Opt., then one thought is represented as a fact, the other, 
as a mere thought or conception, something uncertain. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 7. ot 8' eXeyov, on 'dpKTOi iroWovs %8r) irX-^GidaavTas ie(p& e i - 
pav. Th. 1, 114. iiyyeX&T], ot l Meyapa a.(p4crTi]Ke, Kal UeXoirovvfjo-LOi p.4x- 
Xova iv isfiaXXeiv is t^v 'Attik^iv. Her. 3, 140. TrvvSrdveTai (Hist. Pres.) 5 2u- 
Xogcuv, is 7] fiao~i\ri'ir) it e p leXrjXv&o i is tovtov tov dvfipa. X. An. 1. 1, 3. 
TLGGacpepvns SiafiaXXei (Hist. Pres.) tov Kvpov irpbs tov adeX(p6v, ws iirifiov- 
Xevoi avTCf. Cy. 1. 1, 3. ore jxkv drj Tavra iveSfv(j.ovfxe^a, ovtoos iyiyvcoGKO/xev 
irepl avToov, us avfrpwirco tt6(Pvk6ti irdvTccv tcov aXXcav paov e?r) £ct>wv, '/) av&pck- 
ircav dpx^v. An. 2. 1,3. ovtoi eXeyov, on Kupos fihv t4&vt)K6v, 'Apicuos §e 
ir ecpevy cb s c'/tj Kal x4yoi, oti TavTrjv ttt\v r)jx4pav Tepi/xeiveiev av avTois. 

Eem. 3. When the Ind. Irnpf. instead of the Opt. follows an historical tense 
in the principal clause, the mode of expression resembles the form of direct 
discourse, since the Ind. of direct discourse remains, e. g. aevo<pwv eXeyev, '6tl 
bp&oos yTLwvTO Kal ai/Tb to epyov uvto7s /xapTvpoir), X. A. 3. 3, 11. (oratio recta : 
op&as alriavTcu). See § 345, Rem. 5. But when the Ind. of the principal 
tenses follows an historical tense in the principal clause, then the subordinate 
clause assumes wholly the coloring of direct discourse (§ 345, 5). Hence it 
sometimes happens, that the form of the oblique discourse is either partially 
or wholly changed into that of the direct. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. ivrav&a §}) tov 
Kvpov yeXa&ai re e/c toov irp6cr&ev Scucpvoov Kal eliveiv avT(p a.Tri6vTa frappelv, oti 
it ap4 GTai ai)To?s oXiyov XP°' V0V ' ^STe opav Goi i^effrai Kav fiovXrj aaitap- 
8a.fj.vKTd. Hence oti maybe used, when the exact words of another are quoted 
in the same form in which they Avere spoken by him, when in Eng., a colon or 
marks of quotation are used, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. elire S", '6ti • Els Kcupbv ^Keis 
e<pi), he said: "you have come at the right time." An. 2. 4, 16. TLpo^vos 
elirev, '6ti- Auto's dfii, tv (fiTch. It is used even before the Imp., e. g. PI. Criton. 
50, C icrous av einoiev (oi v6[xoi), '6ti' ^D. 2<£/cpaTes, /at] &av/Aa£e ra Xey6[xeva. 

5. The Opt. with av is used, when the statement is to be 
represented as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, 
or as an undetermined possibility [§ 260, 2, 4, (a)]. 

X. An. 1. 6, 2. Ka.TaWa.yels Se ovtos Kvpca, elirev, el ai>T$ So 117 linrias X 1 ^' 1 ' 
ovs, t 1 tovs ivpoKoraKaiovTas lirireas ^ KaTaicdvoL av ivedpevaas, ? q £wvTas 
■xoXXovs avT&v eXoi, Kal kccXvo- eie tov Kaieiv iivi6vTas. Cy. 1. 6, 3. fj.4/ivn/j.ai 
aKOvaas ttot4 gov, '6 t 1 cIkotcos a v Kal irapd &ewv irpaKTiKcaTepos e ty, wsirep Kal 
irapd dv&pwirccv, ostls /U7?, 6ir6Te iv airSpois e'tr], tots KoXaicevoi, aAA' '6ts to. dpiGTa. 
irpaTTOi, t6tc fj.d\iffTa twv &eS>v fxe/xviSTo (Sstis fi-i] ktK. instead of e3f tis (X'fj 
ktA.). Dem. Aphob. 851, 22. otSa, tin irdvTes &v 6 fxoKoyfiGaire. 

44* 



522 syntax. [$ 329. 

6. The Ind. of the Hist, tenses with av is used, when the 
affirmation is to be represented as a condition, whose actual 
existence or possibility is denied p 260, 2, (2) (a)]. 

Dem. Aphob. 830, 55. el /j.ev 6 iraTiip 7}Trto~Tei tovtols, 8?]Xov, oti ovt av 
TaXXa eir er p eiv e v, ovt av rav^' ovtw KaTaXnroov abrols ecp pa£ev. Lys. C. 
Agor. 137, 75. ovBeiroTe ireiaeis ouSeVa av&pwnwv, cos $pvvix<>v cnroKTeivas a<pei- 
&7)S &v, el jxt) /xeyaXa rbv oT^lov twv 'A&r)va(wv Ka\ avr)Keo~Ta nana elpydaw. PL 
Pp. 1. 330. ®eiM<TTOK\r)s aTrsKplvaro, oti ovt av avTbs lepicpws wv bvofxaaTOS 
ey ev €T o, out 5 enelvos 'A&rjvaTos (wv). 

Pem. 4. Impersonal forms of expressions are often changed into those which 
are personal, the subject of the substantive-clause being transferred to the 
principal clause and the impersonal expression becoming its predicate. 
Comp. ^ 307, Rem. 6, and 310, Rem. 3. Th. 1, 93. koI StjAtj tj olicoSopla 
en ko,} vvv ea-Tiv, oti KaTa airovSyjv eyeveTO. X. C. 4. 2, 21. (doice? 6 tolovtos) 
SijXos vrj At" elvai, oti a oi'ero et'SeVcu ouk oloev. X. O. 1, 19. or t. itovnpoT- 
aToi elcri, ov8e ae Xav&dv ov a iv. 

Rem. 5. In the place of a substantive-clause introduced by oti or ws, the 
Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) or the Part, may stand after verba declarandi and sen- 
tiendi. That there is a difference of meaning between the construction with 
the Inf. and that with the Part., has been seen in § 311 ; but the difference be- 
tween the construction with a Pai't. and that with on or ws, is only in form. 
The difference between the construction with oti and ws with the finite verb 
and that of the Inf. (Ace. with Inf.) is, that in the former, the affirmation is 
more objective and definite (as a fact) ; in the latter, on the contrary, subjective 
and indefinite (as an assumption). Hence verbs which express a merely sub- 
jective meaning, as, oXeabai, ooneTv, iXiri^eiv, and also (pdvai (i.e. 
verbs which denote such a subjective view), are constructed almost exclusively 
with the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.), very* seldom with oti or ws. That the distinc- 
tion between the three modes of construction is very often unessential, is clearly 
seen from the fact, that examples are found in which the same thought is ex- 
pressed by the same writer in different places in each of the three forms, e. g. 
Her. 6, 63. e^ayyeXXei, ws ol ivais yeyove. 65. ore ol e^rjyyeiXe 6 oltceTr/S 
Tra78a yeyovevai. 69. ore avrw av iiyyeX^-ns y ey evt] fxevo s. 

Rem. 6. The verbs /xe/j-vtifxai, olSa, aicovco and others of similar mean- 
ing, are not unfrequently followed by an adverbial clause, introduced by oVe, 
instead of a substantive-clause introduced by oti or ws. This construction 
seems to have arisen from an ellipsis, as tov xpovov, e. g. /xep.vn/.iai (tov xpovov), 
ore ravra eXe^as, as in Eng. / remember vert/ well WHEN the war broke out. X. 
Cy. 1. 6, 8. /j. e fi v 7) fj. a l Kal tovto, ore, aov Xeyovros, avveooKei Ka\ efxol inrep/xey- 
e&es elvai epyov to KaXws dpxetv. Dem. 01. 2(3), 29, 4. jx efxvn cr&e, or an-ny- 
yeX^rj $i\nnros -nepwpKwv. , Comp. memini, quum darem ; vidi, quum prodiret, 
audivi eum, quum diceret. 

Rem. 7. Verbs expressing emotion (No. 1 ), instead of being followed by a sub- 
stantive-clause introduced by on or ws, are often followed by a subordinate clause 
introduced by a conditional or interrogative el, if whetker, when the object of 
admiration, etc.. is not to be represented as actually existing, but as merely pos- 
sible, or as still a matter in question, e. g. Savf.Ld(w, St'i tuvto yiyveTai and el 
TavTa yiyveTo.i. Attic politeness, -which often blends in its language a coloring 
of doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of expression, frequently employs 
this form even in settled and undoubted facts : in this case el has the force of 
oti. Aeschill. Ctes. ovk ayarra, el fxy uik'i-jv e8wxsv (lie is not satisfied, that). 
LI. Lach. 194, a. ay av & <r u> ei oitfxe&l a vow fx); o76s t eij.Ci eliceiy. Rp. 848, 



§ 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 523 

e. W8e e&av [Aatra, el ev aper-qs Kal trocptas rtSrrjs p.epeL ri]v aSiKiav, rr,v 5e 5V 
Kaioavvqv ev ro?s evavriois. Dem. Mid. 30, 548. ovk fj trx vv&7], el tolovto 
Kaxhv iirdyei rco {that he brings such a calamity upon one). 

Re ^r. 8. Instead of otl ovrcos, the relative as, that, is often used, and 
instead of otl t o lov t os or otl t 6 cos, the relatives olos, oaos. PL 
Phaed. 58, e. evdal/xcov )xol 6 avr]p ecpaivero, cos aSecos Kal yevvaicos ireXevra {that 
he died so fearlessly, etc.). Her. 1, 31. ai 'ApyeTaL ifxaKapi(ov r)\v \xy\repa, o'lcav 
reKvcov eKvp7]o-e {that she is possessed of such children). 



§330. B. Final Substantive -Clauses, denoting pur- 
pose anal result, introduced by cog, Iva, etc. 1 

1. The second class of substantive- clauses are those which 
denote a purpose, object, or a result. These clauses are intro- 
duced by the conjunctions Iva, cbs, ottws (6$ pa, Poet), Iva 
fxrj, cos /a 17, oVcos fxrj. 

2. The mode in final clauses is commonly the subjunctive 
or optative, since the purpose or object is something merely 
imagined or conceived. When the verb of the principal clause 
is a principal tense : Pres., Perf., Fut.,or an Aorist with the sig- 
nification of the present [$ 257, 1, (a) and (b)], then the final 
conjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the purpose, etc., 
is followed by the Subj. ; but when the verb of the principal 
clause is an historical tense : Impf , Phip., Aor., then the final 
conjunction is followed by the optative (but never by an Opt. 
Fut). 

Tavra ypdcpco, yeypacpa, y petty to, 'lv eX&ys {ut venias, that you may 
come). Ae|oj/ (with the sense of the Pres.), iV elSco (die, ut sciam, that I 
may know). Tavra eypacpov, iyeypdcpeLV, eypatya, 'lv eXboLS (ut ve- 
nires, that you might come). II. A., 289, sq. aAA' i&vs eXavvere ficowxas 'lirirovs 
icp&ifxcov Aavacov, 'lv vireprepov ei>x os &pt)o-&e {ut gloriam vobis paretis) ; but, 
II. €, 1 — 3. ev& av Tvdeidrj Aio^Sei' UaXXas 'A8rr]vn ScoKe fievos Kal frdptros, 'lv 
%k§t]Xos \xera. iracnv 'ApyeioKTi yevoiro, t'5e KXeos ecr&Xbv dpoLTO (ut clams 
fieret et gloriam sibi pararet). r, 347. Jupiter said to Minerva, aAA' £h ol veKrap 
re Kal afx^potriyv epareiVT)V arrd^ov (with the sense of the Pres.) evl crrriSrecrcr', 
'Iva /.IT) (xlv Xi/xbs 'iK-nTat (ut ne fames eum occupet) ; but, 352, rj 5' 'Ax'Afji' veK- 
rap evl crryiSetTtri Kal a/j.L3pocrtr}v epareiv^v err d if, 'Iva /jltj /xlv Xip.bs arepir^s yov- 
va§" 'lkolto (ut ne occuparet). Dem. Cor. 239,39. yeypacpa ifuv, 'Iva jxt) 
eirl irXe?ov evox^veSe Tepi rovrcov. X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. rt ovv, ecprj 6 Kvpos, ov 
Kal tt]v h~vvap.iv eXe£ds /iol [=Ae|o»/ poL, § 256,4, (e)], ottcos — & ov XevcZ- 

1 For practical reasons both kinds of subordinate clauses are brought together 
here, although they properly belong to adverbial clauses denoting purpose. 



524 syntax. [$ 330. 

/xe&a, oiroos av dpiara dycavi^olfxe^a; 1. 2, 3. (e'/c ttjs twc TlepTaiv iXev&epas dyo- 
pas KaXov/j.evr)s) ra (xev covia Kal ol ayopcuoi air e Atj Xavrai els aXXov tSttov, a> s 
ft.)) /xiyvvrjTai 7] tovtcov rvpfir) rfj rwv ireiraidevfj.evccv euKocr/xia. 15. 'iva Se 
aacpecrrepov 8 7] X toSfj iraoa r) Uepaccv iroXireia, fxiKphv eirdv e 1/j.i [paucis repe- 
tam). 4, 25. Ka[xfSvo~y}$ rbv Kvpov air e KaXe i, Sir cos ra iv Hepcrais eirix&pia 
e7r ireXoi-n. PI. Apol. 28, d. avrUa rebvai-nv (with the sense of the Pres.), 
"va [AT] ev&dZe fj.e v co KarayeXacrros. 

Remark 1. The Subj. often follows an historical tense : (a) in vivid nar- 
ration, where past actions are regarded as present (objective manner of repre- 
sentation, § 327, Rem. 2) ; (b) when the purpose or effect is to be repre- 
sented as continuing in the present time of the speaker, (a) Her. 1, 29. ~S,6xccv 
air eSr] fir) a e erea 5e/ca, 'iva 877 fir) riva rcov v6jxccv dvay Kacr&fj Xvcrai rwv 
(=wy) e&ero (Solon was absent ten years, in order that he might not be compelled, 
etc.). 7, 8. avXXoyov Ylepcreccv tccv aplcrrccv eir leer 0, 'iva yvec/xas re irv&r)- 
rai crcpeccv Kal avrbs ev iratri etivn ra &eXei. Th. 4, 1. Kal e s e fi e fSXi) Ke tr av 
d/xa es r^v 'Prjytvccv ol AaKeSaifx6vioi, "va fir) (01 'Pr)y7voi) eirifi 017 & w cr 1 to?s 
Meaanviois. — (b) Od. A, 93. riirr air', to Svarijve, Xnrwv <pdos ijeXioio tfXv&es, 
oeppa ISr) veKvas Kal drepirea x&pov. Her. 7, 8. dtb vfxeas vvv eyco crvveXe^a, 
'iv a to (=0) voeco irp-ficraeiv vir ep&e cojxai vf.au. Dem. Phil. 3, 117,26. ras 
iroXeis avrcov irapypnrai Kal rerpapx't-as Kar e o~r rjcr ev, "va (XT] /xSvov Kara tt 6- 
Xeis, dXXa. Kal Kara, eSrvn 8 vXevcocr iv. PI. Crit. 43, b. eir'nTjdes o~e ovk eyei- 
pov, 'iva oas rjdiaTa 8 idyrj s. 

Rem. 2. On the contrary, a preceding principal tense, or an Aor. with Pres. 
sense, is sometimes followed by an Opt. : (a) when the present of the principal 
clause is an historical present, or when, in the use of the Pres., the speaker has 
at the same time contemplated a past action ; Eur. Hec. 10. iroXvv Se crvv i/jol 
Xpvabv e k ire /xir e 1 Xa&pa irarrjp, 'Iv ', e'iiror 'iXiov reixv irecroi, ro?s (waiv eXi) 
iraial /xt) o-irdvis fiiou. X. An. 4. 6, 1. tovtov 8' 'Eiricr&evei . .irapaSiScocri (pv- 
Xarreiv, oircos, el KaXcos r\yi]crairo, ex^v Kal tovtov air i 01. Ar. Ran. 24. auroj 
fiadiCu) Kal irovw, tovtov 8 1 ox&), 'Iva firj r aXair aiir & potr o, fxrjS' &x& os 
(pep 01 (I let this one ride on an ass = / placed him on an ass, in order that he 
might not suffer hardship), (b) when the speaker adduces the intention or pur- 
pose which a person entertains, not as coming from his own, i. e. the speaker's 
mind, but from that of the person himself, so that the intention is indicated as 
one that had a previous existence; PL Rp. 410, b. ap ovv, %v 8' iydb, & TXav- 
Kcav, Kal ol Ka&unaVTes jxovcriKfj Kal yv/j.vao~TiKrj ivaio*eveiv ou% ov eveKa rives o'iov- 
rai Ka& larda iv, 'iva rfj fiev to acofia & epair ei) 1 vr 0, rij 8e rrjv ^1/^771/; 
(the view of the lawgiver, i. e. his purpose). X. An. 2. 4, 4. faces Se ttov (/3a- 
aiXevs) ?) airoo-K&KTei ri ?*) diroreixK el i "> s diropos e%7\ 7? 6$6s (the view of the 
king), (c) when in the principal clause, the Opt. stands with or without &v 
[§§ 259, 3, (a) and 260, 2, (4), (a)], then an Opt. commonly follows, for the con- 
ceptions in the principal and subordinate clause are represented as separated 
from the present time of the speaker (§ 259, 3) ; still, a Subj. may follow by 
attraction of the mode, since the present sense of the Opt. is assumed. See 
§ 327b, 1. (b). Theogn. 881. elp-hvi) Kal itXovtos exoi ir6Xiv, oeppa per dXXtov 
k ofxird^o ifj. 1. Soph. Aj. 1217, sq. yevoi/J.av, 'Iv' vXaev eireari irdvrov irpofi- 
Xrj/j.' aXii(Xvo~TOv — , rets lepas oircos ivposeiiroifjiev 'Afr-ftvas. 

3. When two or more final clauses follow each other, the 
Subj. sometimes interchanges with the Opt. The two clauses 
are then placed in a kind of antithesis to each other, the former 
representing the result of the purpose or aim as certain; 



$ 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 525 

the latter, without this accessory idea, and consequently as 
uncertain, undetermined, or only derived from what precedes. 

II. o, 597, sq."EKTOpL yap ol frvfibs ifiovXero Kudos 6pe£at Uptafxtdri, %v a vrjvffl 
Kopcavifft &eo"rn5ahs irvp e/^aAr/ aKafxarov, &4rtdos 8' i^alfftov ap))v iracrav 4tti- 
KpT)ueis. Her. 9, 51. is tovtov Sr) rbv %S>pov ifiovXevffavro \xeraffry\vat, 'Iva 
Kal vdart ex^o-i xpSff&cu a<p&6vu>, Kal ol lirirees acpeas fxi] fftvoia.ro. 8,76. 
TwvSe Se e'lveKev avr\yov (ol TLepffat) ras vrjas, 'iva S77 T0?ffi"EW7]ffi jiujSe (pvyeetv 
il-rj aAA' airoXafxep&evres iv rrj ^,a\a/x7vt 8o?ev Ttcrtv rwv eV 'ApTefxifficp. 

4. The modal adverb av, referring to a conditioning clause 
(generally not expressed), is sometimes joined with the final 
conjunctions ws and o7rws (more seldom Iva). 

Od. e, 167, sq. irefjupo) Se rot ovpov 6-rriff^ev, &s /ce /ttaA' affKr)&r}S ffrjv irarplSa 
yaiav 'tK-nat, at zee &eol y e&eAaxrt. 3", 20, sq. nai fxtv fxaKp6repov Kal -rraff- 
ffova 3-F//C6 Ideff&at, 8>s ksv $aty}Kefffft cpiXos iravreffffi yiv otro (sc. el irpbs robs 
&air)Kas acpiKOiro). Her. 3, 44. i8er)&7), ok (as av Kal Trap' kcavrbv irejxtyas is 2c6- 
ixov Seotro ffrparov (ut, si opus esset, exercitum a se peteret). X. Cy. 5. 2, 21. 
Sta rrjs ffrjs x^P as &£ ei s 7]fxas, oircas av elS w fxev, are ds? cptXia Kal iroXe/xta 
vo/xlfctv (in order that, when we set our foot on the land, we may know, etc.). H. 4. 
8, 16. eBcoKe xp-^jxara 'ArraA/aSa, oircas &v, TrATjpw&evros vavr ikou virb 
AaKeOat/xovtoov, o'i re 'Abrjva7ot Kal ol ffvix/xaxot avrav [xaXKov ttjs elp^vns 
Trpo s S eo IV TO. 

5. The final conjunctions Iva and cos (more seldom oVco?), 
are connected with the Ind. of the historical tenses, when it is 
to be indicated that the intended purpose is not accomplished, 
or is not to be accomplished. In this case, in the principal 
clause, the Ind. of an historical tense stands both with and 
without av. See $ 227 b , 1. (a). 

Ar. Pac. 135. ovkovv ixpyv °" e Tlrjydffov £ev£ai irrep6v, oircos i(palvov to?s 
&eo7s rpaytKcorepos. PI. Criton. 44, d. et yap ucpeXov ohi re ehat ol ttoKKoI ra 
[iey terra /ca/ca i£epyd£eff&at, 'Iva olol re $\ffav av Kal aya&a. ra [xey terra, Kal 
KaXws av el%e. Lys. Simon. 98, 21. e'/3 ov \6fX7] v 5' 'av ~2,tjxctiva r^v abr^v 
yvdofxrjv, ifjtol eX et,/ > ^v ^(porepcov rjfxwv aKOvcravres ra\r]&r) paStcas eyvwre ra 
S'tKata. 

6. Verbs which express care, anxiety, considering, endeavor- 
ing or striving, effecting, and inciting, e. g. hri^\€io Sac, <j>povrt- 
£eiv, SeSteVat (JivXaTreiv, cr/<07reu/, (TKeiJ/aaS-at, fiovXajeaSai, bpav, 7rotei^, 
TrpaTTC.iv {curare), pirj-xavacrSai, TrapaKaXuv, irapayyiWeiv, 7rpoei7retv, 
aireio-^at, a^tovv, aye (up then), and the like, are followed by the 
conjunctions oVws (o7rws fj.rj), sometimes also by ws, either 



526 SYNTAX. [$ 331. 

(according to No. 2) with the Subj. and Opt., or with the Put. 
Ind., when the accomplishment of the purpose is to be repre- 
sented as something definitely occurring and continuing. 

X. Cy. 1.2,3. ot TlepcriKol v6fxoi iir i/xeXovr'ai, (Situs t)]v ap%V fi^j toiov- 
tol e (tout a i ol 7roA?Tcu, dloi ( = ctisre) Trovnpov r) alaxpov epyov icpiea^ai. 3. 2, 
13. cb ? 5e KaAws e|et ra ifxerepa, %v (piAoi yevr)cr&6, ip.ol [xeArjaei. Dem. 01. 
1. 21, 12. gk OTrelcr&e rovro, a 'dvSpes 'A&riva7oi, ottojs (xt) \6yovs ipovffi 
fiSvov oi Trap* vjxwu TrpecrfZeis, aAAd Kal %pyov ri SeiKVveiv HI- ova v. PI. Ion. 530, 
b. & y e 877, o it cos Kal to. Tlava&rjvaia v ikt)o~ o fxey. The Fut. Ind. also stands 
very often after an historical tense, according to § 327, Rem. 2 ; far more rare 
in this case is the use of the Put. Opt. X. Cy. 8. 1, 43. eTre^eAe Tto 8' oircas 

fl7]T€ &0~ITOL, IAT)T€ 'OLTTOTOI TT0TS tffOlVTO. 

Rem. 3. Sometimes '6 w a $ & v is connected with the Fut. Ind., and is then 
to be referred to an implied condition. Her. 3, 104. ot 'IvSol Tp6iroj tolovtw 
Kal (ev£ei xpec^/xej/oi eKavvovffi iirl top XP V<T0U AeAoyKr/j.evojs, 'Sums av Kav/xaTcuv 
tojv 8repp.0Ta.Tuv iSvTwv eo~ ovt a i iv Trj apirayfj (i. e. otov KavjxaTa &epp.6TaTa fj ). 

Rem. 4. "O n oj s or '6 it w s fj. -f) with the Rut. Ind., sometimes refers to a 
word to be supplied, viz. '6 pa, 6 pare, vide, videte. X. An. 1. 7, 3. ottojs ovv 
eaeo-^re 'avSpes a^ioi ttjs iAev&epias, (see) then that ye are men worthy of liberty. 
PL Menon, 77, a. aAA' otwj jxt] ovx olos t eaofxai iroAAa ToiavTa Xzyeiv. A 
similar ellipsis occurs in the phrase, 8 e? o~ y (sc. o-Koire7v) ottojs in the Attic poets. 
Soph. Aj. 556. 8e? <r' ottojs ivaTpbs Sei'|eis eV e'x^pots, olos e| o'iov Wpd(pr]s. 

Rem. 5. Verbs expressing care, anxiety, are very often followed by ottojs 
(sometimes also by & s) 'av with the Opt., in order to express the idea of anx- 
iety, solicitude how something might happen [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. In this case, 
ottojs and ws are clearly adverbs (how). X. Cy. 2. 1,4. fi ovAeva6p.e^a, 
ottojs av apiGTa ay oj vi £o i p. e&a. 



§331. II. Adjective -Clauses. 

Adjective-clauses are adjectives or participles expanded into 
a sentence, and, like adjectives, serve to define a substantive 
or substantive pronoun more definitely. They are intro- 
duced by the relative pronouns os, tf, o, ostls, tjtls, o rtj 
oto?, etc. 

Oi TToAe/jLioL, o'i a-rreepvyov (= ot air o<pvy6vT g s TroAe/uLioi). Ta TrpdypLaTa, & 
'AAe^avfipos eirpa^ev (to virb 'AAe^dvdpov tt pax& ^vt a Trpdyp.aTa or ra tov 5 AAe£- 
dvdpov TTpdyjuaTa). 'U ttoAls, iv rj 6 Tieio-'io'TpaTOS Tvpavvos t)v ( = r) vtto tov 
Heio-io~TpaTov t v p av v ev& elax tt6Ais). 

Remark 1. Homer often uses the pronoun '6 s in a demonstrative sense. 
R. dp, 198. aAAa Kal ts Sei'Sowe Albs p.eyaAoio KepavvSv. So also, o'i — o'i, these, 
those, the one, the other. In the Attic writers, as well as in Ionic prose, this usage 
is^ confined to the following instances: (a) Kal '6s, Kal f), instead of Kal 
ovtos, Kal avTT). X. Cy. 5. 4, 4. Kal ts €|a7raT7?&ets SiojKei ava Kpdros. 4. 5, 



$ 331.] ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 527 

52. Kal o'i yeXaffavTes elirov. Antiph. 1. 113, 16. Kal 77 uireVxeTO. In the oV 
lique Cases the article (§ 247, 3), is used instead of it, e. g. Kal t6v, et eum. — 
(b) os fx4v — o s 8e in Demosthenes, yet. very seldom, often in later writers, 
and earlier in Doric writers, as well as in Hippocrates ; and it occurs not only 
in the Nom.. but also in all the Cases of the Sing, and Plural. Dem. Cor. 
248. iroXeis 'EXX-nvidas as [xev avaipuv, els as 8e tovs (puyddas Kardyoov. — (c) 
bs Kal bs, this and that, it not being determined who, any one that you please 
(very seldom). Her. 4, 68. ras fiao-iXri'ias larias iiriopKTjcre os Kal bs, exclu- 
sively in the Nom. (in the Ace. tov Kal t6v, to Kal to, see § 247, 3). — (d) in the 
phrase r) 8' o s, ^ 8' H\, said he, she. 

Rem. 2. The reciprocal relation in which the substantive stands to an ad- 
jective-clause, and an adjective-clause to a substantive, is expressed thus : a 
demonstrative adjective pronoun or the article 6 f) t6 standing in a principal 
clause, refers to a relative adjective pronoun standing in a subordinate clause, 
and the latter, on the other hand, refers back to the former, e. g. ovtos 6 
avftp, ov eioes, to podov, b av&e?. So also, t o iovt o s, oTos, t o'o~ovt o s, 
oo- os (§ 326, Rem. 3). But when the object, to which the relative refers, is to 
be represented as a general one, then the article is omitted, and the relative 
refers immediately to the substantive, e. g. avhp, bs KaXos iariv (= avrip Ka- 
x6s). When the relative refers to a personal pronoun, then the relative takes the 
place of the demonstrative, e. g. iy<&, os — av, os, etc. When the personal pro- 
nouns have no special emphasis, they are omitted, and the relative refers to 
the person indicated by the inflection of the verb, e. g. KaXccs i-Koiriaas, bs TavTa 
errpa^as. 

Rem. 3. The demonstrative, to which the relative refers, is often omitted, 
and not only when the Cases are the same, but when they are unlike, if the 
pronoun has no special emphasis ; hence especially when the omitted demon- 
strative denotes some indefinite object, and is equivalent to tIs, some one, or 
when the relative os, ostis, may be resolved into siquis. Eur. Or. 591, 3. yd/xoi 
S 5 oo-ois fxev ev tt'ltttovo'lu fipoToov, (tovtois SC.) /naKapios alcvv • ols Se /n-rj iriirTov- 
o~iv ev, (ovtol SC.) ra t evSov eicrl ra Te &vpa£e Svstvx^s. Th. 2, 41. ovdhv 
Trposdeo/JLevoi ovTe'OpJ]pov tiraiveTOv, ovtg (tivos SC.) ostis eirecrt, [xkv to avTiKa. 
Tep\\/eL ktX. 

Rem. 4. When the relative is used substantively, i. e. when it refers to a sub- 
stantive pronoun, either expressed or understood, then the adjective-clause, 
like the adjective standing without a substantive, has the meaning of a sub- 
stantive, e. g. ^HX&ov o'i dpiffTOL ^crav = f/X&ov ol dpiffToi (sc. Hvdpes). — 
Here belongs also, the formula eo-Tiv, ol, av, oh, ovs, a. This formula has be- 
come so fixed, that commonly neither the number of the relative has any 
effect on the verb Zgti, nor does the tense undergo any change, when the dis- 
course relates to past or future time : thus it has assumed entirely the charac- 
ter of a substantive-pronoun (svioi), and also, since io-Tiv may be connected 
with every Case of the relative, has a full inflexion, e. g. 

Nom. iff t iv o'i (= ev to i) airecpvyov 

Gen. %gtiv S)V (=evitov) aTreax eT0 

Dat. eo-TivoTs (=iviois) ovx ovtcos H8o£ev 

Ace. io-Tiv ovs (= iviov s) cnreKTeivev. 

The Nom. IV t iv o'i is rare, for example, X. Cy. 2. 3, 1 8 ; in place of it, commonly 
slalv o'i. Th.2. 26. KXeSiro/j-iros ttjs Trapa^raXaaaiov e ct iv a iSywae. So in the 
question, ecrti/ o'lrives; X. C. 1.4. 2. io-Tiv ov st iv as av£rpd>irwvTe&av/j.aKas 
€7r} o~o<pia ; in Xenophon i\v also occurs. An. 1. 5, 7. ^Uv 8e tovtcov t&v (rrad-- 
fxiov ovs irdw fxaKpovs tfhawzv (and some of these marches which he made, were 
verij long, or he made some of these marches very long). H. 7. 5, 17. toov TroXefj.(wv 
7) v ovs vTvoair6vZovs airedoo-av (there was some of the enemy which they restored by 
truce, or they restored some of the enemy by truce). 









528 syntax. [$ 332. 

Eem. 5. In like manner, the following phrases, formed with eanv, are 
used wholly as adverbs with reference to all relations of time. 

iffTiv '6 re = eviore, est quando, i. e. interdum, e. g. eanv ore e\e£ev ; 

eariv 'iva or oirov, est ubi, i. e. aliquando ; 

eo'riv ov or evh a, est ubi, somewhere, in many places ; 

ov k e <r & oirov, nunquam ; 

ecrriv rj or oirr), quodammodo, in many places ; 

ov k ear iv oiroo s, nullo modo, ov k ear iv oiras ov, certainly. 

ear iv o it as; in the question, Is it possible, that? 



$332. Agreement of t He Relative Pronoun. 

1. The relative agrees in Gender and Number with the sub- 
stantive or substantive pronoun (in the principal clause) to 
which it refers ; the Case of the relative, however, depends on 
the construction of the subordinate clause, and hence is deter- 
mined either by the predicate, Cx Dy some other word in the 
subordinate clause, or it stands as the subject, in the Nom. 

'O avrjp, b v eloes, (pl\os fxov eariv. 'H aperr), r) s ir^vres ol ayaSrol iiri&v/xov- 
atv, /xeya c\ya&6v eariv. Ol arpanuirai ols i/xax^ad/xe^a, av5pei6raroi r)aav. 
®av/xd£o/xev Sw/cpctTTj, o v r) ao(pia ixeyiarrj r)v. ^Eiri&v[xov/xev rrjs aperrjs, r) 
irnyr) eari irdvrcov rS>v KciKav. 

2. The person of the verb in the adjective-clause is deter- 
mined by the substantive or substantive pronoun (expressed or 
implied) to which the relative refers. When the relative is 
connected with the first or second person, then the English uses 
the form, I am the one who, I who, Thou who, etc. 

~"E.yd>, b s ypd<pu, av, o s ypdcpeis, 6 avf)p or eKeivos, bs ypdcpei. Th. 2, 60. 
ifxol toiovtca) dvSpl opyi^ea^e, bs ovdevbs otojxai r]aawv elvai. Isocr. Paneg. 
irus ovk rjSr) SiicaiSv eariv r)fxas eiraivelv, o'lrives rr\v apxV Karaax^v 
r)h vvr)&r) jxev; X. Cy. 5. 2, 15. nal oj/aa ye iroXv fxeifav r) v fxer epa rr)s ejj.r]s, 
o'lye oiKia xpy°~& e TV Te * a * ovpavw. Hence after the Voc, the second per- 
son is regularly used, e. g. iiv&pccire, bs r)/xas roiavra natch eiroirjaas. 

3. Wlien the relative refers to two or more objects, it is in 
the plural, and agrees in Gender with the substantives, when 
they are of the same Gender ; often, however, it is in the neu- 
ter, when the substantives denote inanimate objects. Comp. 
t 242, 1, (a), 03). 

Th. 3, 97. r) /xdxVj Sict>^eis re teal viraycoyai, iv oTs aix(porepois yaaovs r)aav ol 
'ASrjvcuoi. X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. (Kvpos) dpeev (rbv irdirirov) KeKoa/xrjfxevov kol\ 6(p&aAfxu>v 
v7roypa(f)fj , kcu xP^.uaTOS ivrptyei nal KO/xais irposSerois, a 877 v6/xL/xa r)v iv Mrjdois. 






$ 332.] AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 529 

Isocr. Panath. 278, b. ravra eiiroy, ov irpbs r)]v evaefieiav, ovde irpbs r^v diKaioo-v- 
vnv, ovSe irpbs r^v <pp6v7)<riv airo&\tyas, a <ru dirj\£res. 

4. If the substantives are of different gender, then the rela- 
tive, when persons are spoken of, agrees in gender with the 
Masc. rather than the Fern., etc. ($ 242, 1) ; but when things 
are spoken of, it is usually in the neuter. 

Od. /3, 284. Srdvarov Kal Kr/pa /j.e\aivav, bs Sy <r<pi <rx^6v earn. Isocr.de 
Pac. 159, a. r)K0jxev eKKXi)<nd(ovres irepl re iroXe/xov Kal elp7)vr)s, a /J.ey(arr)v ex« 
Svvafj.iv ev rep f3icp rccv av&pcoirwv. Dem. Cor. 317, 273. eXiridcov /cat (yXov Kal 
rifxcvv, a irdvra -Kposr\v ro?s r6re irparrofxevois vir e/xov. PI. Apol. 18, a. ev eKetvTj 
rfj cpcovrj re Kal rep rpSircp ev olsirep ire&pd/xfj.r)v. Sometimes, also, the rela- 
tive takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. %v Se r^v 
elpT)vr)v ironjo-cv/uLe&a, jxerd iroWrjs acrcpaXeias rrjv tvoXlv olK-nao/xev, airaXXayevres 
iroXefxccv Kal KivZvvwv Kal rapaxv *> eis % v v *> v "^P * aXXi\Xovs KaretrrTj/xev. 

5. The following exceptions occur to the rule stated under 
No. 1, respecting the agreement of the relative : — 

(a) Constructio Kara ervveenv (§ 241, 1), not often in prose 
with the names of persons, but frequently with collective nouns, 
or substantives which are to be considered as such. 

Her. 8, 128. irepi£ oaixe o/xIXos — , o$ avriica rb r6^ev/xa XafiSvres — ecpepov 
i-rrl rovs crrpar-qyovs. Th. 3, 4. rb rccv 'A&rjvalcov v avr ik6v, o$ wpfxovv ev rfj 
MaXea. PI. Phaedr. 260, a. irXrj&ei, o'iirep StKaaovcri. 

Remark 1. The following cases belong here : — 

(a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Sing., but the rela- 
tive in the PI, when it does not refer to a definite individual of the class, but 
to the whole class, and in this way takes the signification of olos. This usage, 
however, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. /x, 97. Krjros, a /xvpla 
j8o'<7/cei dydcrrovos 'Afxcpirpirif]. PL Pp. 554, a. avx,u?ip6s ye Tts cov Kal curb iravrbs 
irepiovcrlav iroiov/xevos, frrjcravpoTroibs h.vi\p, ov s 877 (cujusmodi homines) Kale-naive? 
rb irXTJ&os. 

(b) On the contrary, a relative in the singular refers to a PL substantive, 
when the relative has a collective signification, e. g. osns, bs &v with the Subj., 
quisquis, quicunque. II. A, 367. vvv ad robs ttXXovs eirieicrofxai (persequar), 
ov Ke Kixt'iU' So in particular, irdvres, osns or bs &v (never irdvres o'irives, but 
always irdvres ocroi or osns), e. g. Th. 7, 29. irdvras e^rjs, or to evrvxoiev, Kal 
ira75as Kal yvva7Kas Kreivovres. PL Rp. 566, d. ao~ird(erai irdvras, $ av 
irepirvyxdvr). 

Rem. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender 
of its substantive, when the idea contained in the substantive is not to be con- 
sidered as a particular one, but as general (§ 241, 2), or when the relative is not 
so much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sentence. S. 
0. T. 542. §p ovxl /xupov eart rovyxelprifxd crov, &vev re irX-fj^ovs Kal cplXwv rv- 
pavviSa frnpav, b xp^l^^iv & aXiaKerai. 
45 



530 syntax. [$ 332. 

(b) Connection of the Dual with the Plural ($ 241, 5). 

To) xeipe, as o #eos C7U to <rvXXaix(3dv€tv dAA^Aatv l-jroL-qcrev, X. 
C. 2. 3, 18. 

(c) When a predicative substantive, in the adjective -clause, 
is in the Nom. ($ 240, 2) or in the Ace. ($ 280, 4), the relative, 
instead of agreeing in Gender and Number with its substan- 
tive, by a kind of attraction often takes the Gender and Num- 
ber of the predicative substantive, which is considered the more 
important. 

Her. 2, 7. 77 SSbs Trpbs t)w TpeneTai, rb (= $) KaXeerai Tlr]Xovo- iov 
(rrSfxa. 5, 108. tt)v aKp-nv, o'l tcaXevvTat, nXy'iSes tt)s Kinrpov. 7, 54. 
neper itibv £i<pos, rbv (=bv) an ivdnriv KaXeovcrt. PI. Phaedr. 255, c. r) 
rod pevjxaTOS iiceivov 7n)yr),bv 'l/xepov Zebs Tavv/j.7}Sovs epwv wvo/xacre. Phileb. 
40, a. x6yoi si<riv £v ktcacTTQis T)ixwv, as i Air id as 6vo/j.d(o/j.ev. 

Rem. 3. So also, when the relative does not follow its own substantive im- 
mediately, but a predicative substantive, it sometimes agrees by means of at- 
traction with the latter, as being the more important, instead of agreeing with 
the former. PI. L. 937, d. Kal Slkt} iv avSpdnrois Trias ob KaX6v,% Tvavra i)u4- 
puKe to av&pwinva ; Goi'g. 460, e. ovdeiroT av (tr) r) prjT op mr) &5ikov TXpay- 
p.a, '6 y ael Trepl SiKaioovvrjs robs \6yovs ttoi^lto.1. 

6. When the relative would be in the Ace, and refers to a 
substantive in the Gen. or Dat, then, when the adjective-clause 
has almost entirely the force of an attributive adjective, the 
relative commonly assumes the form of its substantive, i. e. the 
relative takes the same Case as its substantive. This con- 
struction is called attraction. Attraction also takes place, when 
instead of the substantive, a substantive demonstrative ($ 331, 
Rem.), is used. The demonstrative, however, is omitted, when 
it contains no special emphasis. By means of attraction, the 
substantive is frequently transposed and stands in the adjective- 
clause. See No. 8. 

Th. 7, 21. &ywu aivb r wv Tr6Xewv wv tVejcre (= twv Treio~&€io~wv) crrpaTiav. 
X. Cy. 3. 1, 33. o~bv r o?s &7)0~ avpols oTs 5 Trarrjp KaTeXnrev (= tois virb tov 
irarpbs KaTaXeicp&elaiv). 2. 4, 17. Sttotc ov 7rpoeAr)Xv&ot7)s abv y exois Swd/nei. 
3. 1, 34. iyw vttio-xvov/jlcu, t)v 6 Srebs e3 SlBw, O.V& w v av i/xol 8av6io"ns &X\a TrXeio- 
vos &.£ia evepyeT-fjcreiv (instead of avr\ TovTwv,d). 'PI. Gorg. 519, a. orav to, ap- 
Xaia TrposaTvoXXvuio-L Trpbs oTs Ikt^oovto (instead of Trpbs tovtols, a). Phaed. 70, 
a. (r) tyvx?)) airr)XXay/j.4vr) tovtwv twv KaKwv wv ab vvv b~t] 8ir)X&es. Isocr. 
Paneg. 46, 29. wv tXafiev arraaiv (xeTeSwKtv (instead of tovtwv a). Evag 198. 
toioutou e&eo~iv o'lois Evayopas fiev 4ix*v. Th. 5, 87. e/c twv ivap6vTwv 
ko\ dav 6puT« (instead ©f koI 4k tovtwv, a 6paTe). The preposition is frequently 



$ 332.] ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE IRONOtW. 531 

repeated, e. g. Dem. Chers. 96, 26. c\(f> uv ayetpei Kal irposaire? Kal Jtoorelfeai, 
airb Toircnu didyei (instead of awb tovtoiv didyei wu ayeipei or d <*>' wy 
ayeipei — Sidyei without airb tovtwv). 

Rem. 4. By attraction, the adjective-clause acquires entirely the nature of 
an adjective or participle, which combines with its substantive to form a single 
idea, and which also agrees with it in form, e. g. x a ' l P M rais iiricrroAa?s 
aTs eypatyas ( — x^pca rais virb aov ypcxpelaais iirio-roAaTs). The blending of 
the adjective-clause with its substantive by attraction, is still more clear and 
beautiful, when the adjective-clause is transposed and stands in the place of the 
substantive, e. g. x a ' l P w a ? s zypatyas iiricrT oAals. 

Rem. 5. When predicative substances or adjectives belong to an attract- 
ed relative, these also must be attracted. Dem. Cor. 325, 298. e>e ovre itaipbs 
irposijydyeTo S> v znpiva SiKaioov Kal ffv (J.<p e po v r o> v rfj irarpihi ovShv irpoSov- 
vai (instead of a eKpiva diKaia Kal <ru/ji.(pepouTa). Ph.2. 70, 17. ols ovcriv iifxer- 
epois ($iAnriros), tovtovs acrcpaXcas k4kth]tcu. 

Rem. 6. The Nom. and Dat. of the relative very seldom suffer attraction. 
Th. 7, 67. iroAAal (v/jes') pacnai is rb fiAaTTTecr&ai a<f>' w v rjfuu irapecrKevacrrai 
(instead of airb tovtoov, a). X. Cy. 5 4, 39. 'qyeTO 5e Kal twv kavrov rwv re 
ttkttcoj/, ols rjdero, Kal 5>v (for eK.eiucop, ols) rjirlarei iroAAovs (i. e. secum duxit 
multos suoram, et Jidorum, quibus delectabatur, et eorum, quibus diffidebat). 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, also, sometimes suffer attraction, the relative 
adverb taking the form of the demonstrative adverb, or, when instead of the 
demonstrative adverb a substantive precedes the form which expresses the 
direction denoted by the substantive. Th. 1, 89. SteKo/xi(ouTo ev&bs (sc. ivTev- 
&ev) ofrev (instead of ou, ubi) vire^euro iraidas. S. Ph. 481. i/ufiaAov p' oirr) 
&eAets dywv, is avrAiav, is irpdopau, is irpvpuiqv oiroi (instead of ou, 
ubi) riKLCTTa ,ueAAto robs irapdvras aA/ywetV. 

7. The relatives otos, oo-os, osTtsouv, tjXikos, are attracted 
not only in the Ace. but also in the Nom., when the verb eTi/cu 
and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause, 
e. g. otos <rv et, otos e/cetvos or 6 ^coKparr/s ecrrt (such as you are, such 
as he or Socrates is). This attraction is made in the following 
manner. The demonstrative in the Gen., Dat., or Ace, to which 
the relation refers, is omitted, but the relative is put in the Case 
of the preceding substantive or (omitted) substantive demon- 
strative, and the verb etvat of the adjective -clause is also omit- 
ted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the Case 
of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause 
has, in all respects, the force of an inflected adjective ; the 
connection of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still 
more complete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in 
the adjective-clause ; for example, in the full and natural form 
of the sentence ^apt^o/xat avSpl tolovto), otos o-v et, by omitting the 
demonstrative tolovt<d, to which the relative otos refers, by at- 
tracting otos into the Case of the preceding substantive avBpC, 



532 syntax. [$ 332. 

and by omitting et of the adjective-clause and attracting the 
subject crv into the Case of the relative, we have the common 
form ^apL^o/jLac avSpl olio o~ol, or, by transposition, x<x/h£o/xcu olio o-ol 
avSpl. In English the above relatives may be translated by as 
or such as. 



Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



ip5> o'lov aov dv8 p6 s 
Xapi^ojxai o'lV °~ ot dvSpi 
eiraivca of ov ah dvo pa 
epw o'ito v v /j.wv dvo pcov 
XapiC°l- LaL o'iois v jj.1v avopda iv 
iiraivco o'lov s v/mas dvd pas 



ipto o'iov aov 
Xapi£o/j.ai o'ito o~oi 
eivaivto oJov a e 
ipS> o'ito v v fxwv 
Xap't-C ^ 1 o'iois vjxlv 
eiraivto o'iov s v fids. 






Th. 7, 21. ivphs avfipas roXfxnpovs o'iovs Kal 'A^rjraiouj (instead of oloi 
'A&rjvaioi eloriv). Lucian. Toxar. c. 11. ov cpavKov to epyov, dvSpl o'ito o-ol tto\- 
e/jnaTr} ixovofxaXTJo-ai. PL Soph. 237, C. o'ito ye ifiol Travrdiraaiv diropov 
(sc. eari, instead of tic toiovtcc, 616s ye iyca elpn, aivopou iaTiv). Her. 1, 160. 
e7rl ixia&$ oar co d-f) (mercede, quantulacunque est). PL Pp. 335, b. eaTiv dpa diKaiov 
dvSpbs fiXanretv Kal out iv ov v avfrpwiucv (instead of av&pcbirccv Kal Sstisovv 
io-riv). X. An. 6. 5, 8. eaT-naav airexovres oaov it evr eKaioetca aradiovs 
(instead of Toaovro, oaov elal it. arddioi). 

Rem. 8. Attraction also takes place, when olos or oT6s re, is used in- 
stead of wsre, and is constructed with the Inf., signifying, I am of such a na- 
ture, character, that (is sum qui with the Subj.), hence / can, am accustomed, am 
ready (§ 341, Rem. 2). Dem. 01. 1. 23, 19. (trepl avrhv $l\tmras ex^) rotov- 
rovs av&pci>7rovs o'iovs (xe&vaSfevT as 6 p% € ' v&a i. Luc. Hermot. c. 76. 
Srffli'K^ t o iovt a o'ito jxi]Te hvirela&ai p-hr 6 pyiCea&ai. The demon- 
strative is commonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. /u6 vr) v tt}v twv avSpumtoV 
(yh£>TT av) e-Koinaav (oi Seol) o'iav ap&povv t e ttjv epeovrjv, k. t. X. 

Rem. 9. When the adjective-clause has the signification of a substantive 
(§ 331, Rem. 4), the article is sometimes placed before the attracted olos, 
t}Xiko s, and in this way, the adjective substantive-clause acquires entirely 
the force of an inflected substantive, e. g. 

Nom. I o oTos av avqp oi oloi vfxe7s dvdpes 

Gen. tov o'iov aov avopos Ttov o'iav v/ntov avSpobv 

Dat. rip o'ito aol avdpi . 

Acc. I rov oTov ah avdpa 

X. Cy. 6. 2, 2. ol oToi irep v/j,e?s dvdpes iroWaKis Kal id fiov\ev6/j.eva Kara- 
(xavbdvovaiv (men like you). H. 2. 3, 25. yv6vres to?s o'iois 7)/j,?v re Kal 
vpitv x a *- 67r V voKireiav elvai ov/xoKpariav (such men as we and you). Ar. 
Eccl. 465. eKeivo heivbv rolaiv 7]\'iKoiai v$v (instead of rn\iKovrois, tjAikoi 
vcp ia/j.ev). 

Rem. 10. A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex- 
pression as & av /xaarbv oaov irpovx<£pyo-e = fravfj-aarSv iaTiv oaov Trpoi>x&- 
pvae (mirum quantum processit, instead of mirum est, quantum processerit). 
Even in PL Rp. 351, d. fxerd ISpuTos & av/xaar ov '6aov (instead of &av/j.aar6v 
ianv iJ.e& oaov). Hipp. M. 282, c. xP 7 ^i uaTa e^«j3e Srav/xaaTa oaa (instead 
of bavfxaarSv ianv, Sera). Her. 4, 194. oi Se (sc. tt'i^vkoi) a<pi dcp&ovoi '6a oi 
ev tois ovpeai yivovrai. Also in the adverbs Srav/xaaT ojs to s, &av paaicos 
co s, etc., e. g. &avfj.aaitos us 0^X10576701/6 (instead of Sfav/j.dai6y eariv, tos ab\ios 
yeyove). PL Phaed. 66, a. virepcpvus u>s d\nSr) heyeis. Symp. 173, C. 
vir e p<f>vu s tos x ai P (a '> instead of virepepves ianv, £os x a ' l P u - 



tois oiois v/juv avbpaaiv 
tovs o'iovs i>fj.as avfipas. 



§ 332.] INVERTED ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE. 533 

Rem. 11. Sometimes an attraction takes place in the adjective-clause di^ 
rectly the opposite of that mentioned under No. 6, the substantive being 
attracted into the Case of the relative which refers to it, instead of the 
relative into the Case of the substantive. This is called inverted attrac- 
tion (Attractio inversa). This attraction occurs most frequently, when the 
substantive of the principal clause attracted by the relative, would stand 
in the Norn, or Ace. S. Tr. 283. rdsd' (instead of c«5') asirep elsopas, e| 
oXIiiwv &(r)Aov evpovaai fiiov, rjKov(Ti irpbs <t4. Lysias pro bon. Arist. 649. t^ v 
ovaiav (instead of y\ ovaia) %v KareAnre tw vh7, ov irAeiovos atfa iffriv. X. H. 
1. 4, 2. eAeyov, on AaKeSaifiSvioi trdvrcav wv Seovrai ireirpay6res efcv ivapa /8a- 
criKiws. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun is found in the principal 
clause, to supply the Case of the substantive which is attracted into the Case 
and into the clause of the relative. PI. Men. 96, c. ujj.oAoyfiKaiJ.tv, irpdyfxa- 
rosov /iTjre 8iddo~KaAoi, /j.-f]Te fiadrrjTal elev, tovt o didaKrbv fiij elvau 

Rem. 12. This inverted attraction is very common with ovSels Ssns 
oit after an omitted icriv. PI. Prot. 317, c. ovSevbs Srov ov irdvrwv av 
vjxwu KaSr yAiKiav irar^p s"n\v {there is no one of you all whose father I 'might not be, 
considering my age). Phaed. 117, d. KAaicav koL ayavaKToov ovSeva ovriva ov 
KareKAavo'e rwv irap6vTcov. Dem. Cor. 295, 200. irepl wv ovSeva KivSvvov 
'6vtiv o v x virefxeivav oi irpoyovoi. In this way the phrase ovdel s o sr is ov 
appears as a pronominal substantive (nemo non), which can be declined through 
all the Cases, e. g. 



Nom. 


oi>8 els 


'6st is 


ovk av ravTa Troificreiev 


Gen. 


ov8 evbs 


'6tov 


o v KareyeAaaev 


Dat. 


ov8 evl 


'6tw 


ovk a-neKpivaro 


Ace. 


ovd eva 


ovt iva 


ov KareKAavaev. 



Eem. 13. The inverted attraction is also found sometimes with adverbs of 
place, the demonstrative adverb taking the form of the relative. S. O. C. 
1227. firjvai /cetd-ej/ o&ev irep t\k<;i (instead of Ke7o~e, o&ev). PL Crit. 45, b. 
iroAAaxov yap Kal &AAoo~e Siroi a\v a<piKT}, ayuTrrjaovcri <re (instead of aAAaxov 
Sttol). 

8. The adjective-clause very frequently stands before the 
principal clause ; then, when the relative refers to a substan- 
tive, the substantive is transferred from the principal to the 
adjective -clause (though it is not generally placed immediately 
after the relative), and is governed by the verb in the adjective- 
clause. This change of the substantive into the adjective- 
clause is called transposition. When the attributive relation 
expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be made emphatic, a 
demonstrative, referring back to the substantive which is joined 
with the relative, is supplied in the principal clause ; this 
demonstrative, however, is often used for perspicuity also. 
The substantive can also be transposed, when the demonstra- 
tive stands before the adjective-clause. 

*Oj 7]ixas TroAAa aya&a iiro{r}<rev, ovros aire&avev, or o s T^ias iroAAa ayaba 
iiroirjo-ei/, aire&avev, or outoj enrebavev, bs ripxis ktA., or airebavev, bs ktA. — 
"Ov dSes &v8pa, ovt 6 s ianv, or outoj ianv, bv eTSes dvdpa. PI. Lys. 
222, d. iraAiv &pa, ovs rb irpwrov A6yovs aire(iaA6fj.e$ra irepl (piAias, els rod- 

45* 



534 syntax. [$ 333. 

to us elsTr<BTrTCi>KaiJ.ev. Em*. Or. 63, sq. r}V yap Kar o'btovs eXup\ or Is Tpotav 
errXei, irap&ev ov . . ravrri yeyn&e. 

Rem. 14. When attributive adjectives belong to the substantive, they are 
frequently separated from their substantive in the principal clause, and intro- 
duced into the adjective-clause, when they serve at the same time to explain 
more fully the adjective-clause or are to be made emphatic. Or the substantive 
together with the' attributives is introduced into the adjective-clause. Some- 
times also the attributive adjective remains, while the substantive with which 
it agrees, is transferred to the adjective-clause ; then the attributive is emphat- 
ic. Eur. Or. 842. irSrvi 'HAeVrpa, x6yovs anovaov, ovs <roi dvsrvx^^s r,KU) 
(pepcov (hear the words which I bring to you as sad, i. e. the sad words, etc.). Th. 6, 
30. ro?s birXois Kal oat] &XXt) irapafficev}) £vveiirero, 7rp6repov e'iprjTO ktX. 
(instead of Kal rfj aXXrj Trapacncevfj, ocrr)). Eur. H. E. 1164. tjkw £bv & XX o is, 
ol Trap' 'Aawirov poas /xevovcriv evoirXoi yrjs ' A&Tjvaiwv Kopoi. Ar. Ran. 889. 
erepoi yip elaiv, oto-iv eu^o/tai freois - 

Rem. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the relative 
clause refers, is sometimes attracted into the subordinate clause, and depends 
upon that clause for its government. In this case also, the transposed apposi- 
tive serves to explain more fully the adjective-clause. Od. a, 69. KvkXoottos 
KexoXwrai, ov 6(pSaX/j.ov aXawcrev avri&eov UoXixpr) jxov (whom Ulysses 
blinded, although he was the god-like Polyphemus). PI. Hipp. Maj. 281, c. ri rrore 
rb airiov, on ol iraXaioi inetvoi, a>v bvSuara fJLeyaXa Xtyerat trrl aocpia, 
II t t t aKov Kal Biavr os, (paivovrai airexo^voi rwv ttoKltikwv Trpd^av ; 

9. When the adjective -clause has another clause subordinate 
to itself (or a participle used instead of such clause), the two 
are commonly united, the relative, instead of taking the con- 
struction of its own adjective-clause, taking that of the subor- 
dinate clause, i. e. the relative has the construction which the 
omitted demonstrative of the subordinate clause would have 
had ; in such cases there is no relative connected with the ad- 
jective-clause. 

Isocr. de Pace p. 16, 168. av&pcbirovs alpov/ji&a robs jx\v air6XiSas, robs 8' avro- 
fiSXovs, ols o-rrSrav ris irXeiov a fiia^bv 8i8o>, fxer eKeivwv icp' rj/j-as 
aKoXovhricovaiv (instead of o'l, oir6rav ris avrols SibcS, aKoXov^-haovcriv). 
PI. Pp. 466, a. on robs (pvXaKas ovk cvdai/xovas iroiol/xev, oTs i£bi> irdvra 
%X elv ra t&v it oXir a>v, ovdev ix 0lev 'i (instead of o", i£bv avrdls — , ovdev 
exoiev). Dem. Phil. 3, 128, 68. iroXXa. av elireTv exoiev 'OXvv&toi vvv, a r 6r el 
TrpoeiS ovro, ovk av air&Xovro (instead of o'i, el ravra ToVe irpoeiS., ovk av air.). 



$ 333. Modes in Adjective- Clauses. 

1. The Indicative is used, when the attributive relation ex- 
pressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as actual 
or real, e. g. rj 7roA.is, r) KrLtprai, rj €KrtaSr], $} KTurSyjcreraL. The Flit. 
Ind. is very frequently used (even after an historical tense, 






$ 333.] MODES IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 535 

$ 327, Rem. 2), to denote ivhat should be done or the purpose 
(§ 255, 3), e. g. arpaT-qyovs alpovvrai, ot tuj <3>iAi7r7ra) TroAe/^o-ov- 
cr t v (Z/<*ey choose generals wJlo should carry on war, or to carry 071 
war). Also after negatives, the Greek employs the Incl., where 
the Latin has the Subj., e. g. Trap i/xol ovSeis, 6<stl<s pJq Ikovos 
io-TLv Icra ttoiciv i/xot (nemo, qui non possii). 

2. The Ind. is also used, as in Latin, in such adjective- 
clauses, as are introduced by the indefinite or generalizing rela- 
tives, e. g. osn?, quisquis, ootis 8rj, quicunque, ocrris Stj ttots, ocros 
8rj, ocros ovv, quantuscunque, ottoctos, ottcktosovv, etc. 

Her. 6, 12. SovXrji'riv viroju^Tvai, %tls e <r r a i, qualiscunque erit. X. An. 6. 5, 
6. ZSraTTTov, 5 it 6 govs 4tt eXdfj.fi av zv tj CTpaTid. Here the idea of indefinite- 
ness is denoted by the relative ; but it is otherwise, when this idea is contained 
in the predicate, see No. 3, and 4. 

Remark 1. The Fut. Ind. with k4 (only Epic) is used, when it is to be 
denoted, that something will take place in the future under some condition 
[§ 260, 2. (1)J. II. i, 155. iv 8' avSpes vaiovai iroXvpprjves, iroXvfiovTai o'l k4 e 
hwTivricn &ebv &s r i/j.r)<r ov <r iv (who will honor him, if he shall come TO 
them). 

3. The relative with av, e. g. os av, rj av, o av, osns av, etc., is 
followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is 
a principal tense (Pres., Perf, or Fut.), if the attributive rela- 
tion expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as 
one merely conceived or assumed. Hence it is also used in in- 
definite specifications of quality or size, and also to denote 
indefinite frequency {as often as, § 227 b , 2). The adjective- 
clause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, i. e. 
as one which expresses the condition under which the action 
of the principal clause will take place ; and the relative with 
av can be resolved into the conjunction lav with tU or any other 
pronoun followed by the Subj. 

X. Cy. 3. 1,20. ovs av (= £dv Tivas) fieXrlovs rives kavT&v 'qyr)(ro> vrai, tovtois 
voXXdicis K<xl 'dvev avdyKrjs i&eAovai Tr<zl&((T&ai. 1.1.2. av&pwiroi eV ovSevas ixaXXov 
(Twicrravrai, % £tt\ tovtovs, ovs av ( = £dv rivas) atarfr ojvt ai dpx^v avrwv £mX" 
eipovvras. 7. 5, 85. o v s av 6 pco ra KaXa. Ka\ raya^a 4iriTT)5evovTas, tovtovs Tifi-f]- 
o'co. 8. 8, 5. dfjLoTot rives yap av oi Trpocrrdrai Scrt, toiovtol >ca\ ol vir' civtovs 
ws eVt to ttoXv yiyvovTai. Her. 6, 139. 7) ITu^itj <r<p4as {iteXevei) 'k^vaioKTL Siicas 
SiSdvai Tavras, ras (== as) av avrol 'ASTji/cuoi Si/catr axr i (quaSCUNQUE — 
constituerint). II. j8, 391. ov 84 k eyoov airdvevSre pax^s £&4xovTa vo-i\a<a 
fjLi/j.vdC€iv tvapa vr\vo-\ Kopcaviffiv, oij ol eireira dpKiov iaaehai <pvy4eiv K&vas ffi 
oluvovs (as often as I perceive or shall perceive). 



536 syntax. [$ 333. 

Hem. 2. The Subj. is also used, when the adjective-clause forms a member 
of a comparison, viz. when the attributive idea expressed by the adjective-clause 
is the condition or assumption, under which the object to which the adjective- 
clause refers, belongs to the comparison. In this case, the principal clause 
may have either a principal or historical tense. II. u, 179. 6 8' auV eireaev, 
fxe\ir) ws, If) t opeos KOpv<prj . . xaAKw rafA.uofj.4urj rzpeua x^oul (pvWa tr e A a cr arj. 
p, 110. &sre \?s r\vy4ueios, ou pa kvuzs Te nal auSpes atrb crra^tou) Sioovrai. 

Eem. 3. The modal adverb a v is so closely united with the relative, as to 
form with it one word, as in Srau, iirdu, etc., § 260, 2. (3) (d), and hence should 
be separated from the relative only by smaller words, such as Se. This &u is 
very frequently omitted in the Homeric language, often also in the Tragedians, 
and sometimes in Herodotus, seldom in the Attic prose- writers. 

4. The relative {without av) is connected with the Opt., in 
the first place, with the same signification as when followed 
by the av and the Snbj. (No. 3), but referring to an historical 
tense in the principal clause. Hence it is used in general and 
indefinite statements; also in expressing indefinite frequency 
($ 227 b , 2), — in which case the verb of the principal clause is 
usually in the Imp/, or in the Iterative Aor. Here, also, the 
adjective-clause may be resolved by ei with the Opt. 

Th. 7, 29. Trduras e£r)s '6 rep {= tt tivi) iurvxoiev, Ka\ iratdas nal yvuaTicas 
KTeiuovres. H, /8, 1 88. '6vr iva ( = e? riua) fx\u /3a<nA?)a na\ e£oxou dudpa k i % e ti\ 
rbu V ayauois iireeo~ffiu iprjrv a a a /ce irapacrrds. 198. bu 8' av 8f)fiov r duBpa 
3f8ot, fioSwurd r itpevpoi, rbu (rKi)irrpa ixdaacr k e. Th. 2, 67. irduias yap 
di] Kar dpxas rod rroAtfiov ol AaK&aifxouioi, bcrovs (= el riuas) \df3o leu iv 
tt} Sa\d<ro"p, cos iroAefiiovs 8 i 4<p&e i p ou. X. Cy. 3. 3, 67. Ik er eiov a i [Hist. 
Pres.), '6ra> ivrvyxa-voieu, fj.7] (pevyeiu. 

5. In the second place, the Opt. {without av) is used without 
reference to the tense of the principal clause, when the attrib- 
utive relation expressed by the adjective -clause is to be repre- 
sented as a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption. Then, 
the adjective-clause is to be considered as an uncertain, doubt- 
ful condition [§ 259, 3, (a)]. 

X. Cy. 1. 6, 19. rov fxeu avrov \4yeiu, a fxrj catpus elSeir}, (peldeoSai 8e? (he 
must beware of saying anything, which he does not know, or if he does not know it). 
For examples of Optatives used by means of an attraction of the mode, see 
§ 327b, 1. Ar. Vesp. 1431. epSoi ris, r) u eKacrros ei Set 77 r4xur)u (any one can 
practise the art with which he is acquainted (— if he is acquainted with it). 

6. The Opt. with av is used, when the attributive relation ex- 
pressed by the adjective-clause is to be represented as a condi- 
tional supposition, conjecture, assumption, or undetermined possi- 
bility [§ 260. 2, (4) (a)]. 



§ 334.] ADJECTIVE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 537 

X. C. 1. 2, 6. Sco/cpaV^s Tobs XafxfiduovTas ttjs SfAihlas (JuffSbv avopairooio~Tas kavToiv 
cWe/caAet, 8ta to avayKcuov avTois dual. SiaAeyecr&cu, imp" §>v av \dfSoizv tbv 
/j.htS6v (from whom they might or could receive a reward). PI. Phaed. 89, d. ovk 
icr-Tiv o r t &i/ tis /J-€?^ou tovtov Kcuibv ird&oi (there is no evil which any one could 
experience greater than this). 

7. The Ind. of the historical tenses is used with av, when it 
is to be indicated that the attributive idea denoted by the ad- 
jective-clause could exist only under a certain condition, but 
did not exist, because the condition was not fulfilled [§ 260. 2, 
(2), (a)]. 

Od. e, 39, sq. tt6\?C oc' av ovoeTroTe-Tpolns i^i]paT 'Oovaarevs, e?7rep arrf}- 
{xoov r)\&€, Xax^v airb \r}'toos aiaav. Eur. Med. 1339. ovk iwriv 7) tis tovt 
av 'EWrjvls yvvr) er\r\ (quae sustinuisset hoc). PI. Apol. 38, d. oTs av (\6yois) 
e7retcra, ei u>^7]v b~e?v diravra ■Koieiv /cat Xeyeiv. On the Ind. of the historical 
tenses in intermediate clauses of a conditional proposition, see § 327*>, 1. (a). 

Rem. 2. On the Inf. in adjective-clauses, in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 6. 



$ 334. Connection of several Adjective- Clauses. — Interchange of 
the Subordinate Clause with the Adjective- Clause. — Relative 
instead of the Demonstrative. 

1. When two or more adjective-clauses follow each other, which either have 
the same verb in common, or different verbs with the same government, the 
relative is commonly used but once, and thus the two adjective-clauses are 
united in one, e. g. avr)p, bs iroAAa /xev hya&a robs (pi\ovs, voWa 8e /ca/cct robs 
7roAe,iuous e7rpa£ei/ — avi)p, bs reap' tj/mv r]v /cat (bs) virb rrdvTcov ityihtiro — avrjp, 
bv i&av/j.d£oiJ.ev Kal (bv) iravres i(pt\ovv. But when the adjective-clauses have 
different verbs governing different cases, generally, the Greek either omits the 
relative in the second adjective-clause, or introduces, in the place of the rela- 
tive, a demonstrative pronoun (mostly avros), or a personal pronoun: in this 
way the relative clause is changed into a demonstrative one, and acquires the 
nature of a principal clause, (a) Od. t, 110. dfiireXoi, aire 4>4povo~iv olvov £pio~- 
Ta<pv\ov nai (sc. as) o~(piv (Ku/cAc^Trecrcrt) Aibs ofxffpos ae£et. Isocr. Panath. rbu 
x6yov, b v bxiyu) fj.ev irpSrepov fiefr r)8ovrjs SnjA&of , /xiKpcS 8' varepov ^ueAAe ae 
\vivi)o-eiv (and which was to grieve me). Lys. Dardan. 166. oTs v/j.e?s xaptero-fre 
Kal (SCO us) Trpofrv^OTzpous iroffjcreTe. Dem. Cor. 252, 82. avT&v, ovs r) jxkv 
tt6\ls ws ix&pobs . . airr)Aa(T£, <rol 8e f)o~av (pi\oi (sc. o'l). X. An. 3. 2, 5. 'Apicuos 
Se, bv r)(Jie?s rj^eKo/xev jSacnAea /ca&tcrrdVat /cat (sc. a?) idccKa/xev Kal (sc. wap' o v) 
iAd/30/j.ev mcrrd . . , rifias robs Kvpov <f>i\ovs /ca/caJs ttoizIv ireipaTat. — (b) PI. Rp. 505, 
e. o 877 Sic&Kei fxhv airao-a tyvxrj Kal tovtov zvtKa ixdvTa irpaTTei. Dem. Phil. 3. 
123, 47. AaKeSaifiSvioi, ot &a\aTTr]s fj.ev i)px ov Ka ^ yv s a7ra<T7js, jSacrtAea 8e av\x\xa- 
Xov €?xof, ixpiffTaTo 8' ovSev avTovs (instead of ovs ovohv v<p(o-TaTo, quibus nihil non 
cessit). X. Cy. 3. 1, 38. ttov 6Ke?v6s Igtiv 6 aur)p, bs o~vve&r)pa i)(uv /cat av /xoi 
ud\a 486kcls frav/xdCeii' avT 6v. 

2. The adjective-clause frequently takes the place of other subordinate 
clauses, e. g. ®av/j.aaTbv Trotets, bs r)(x7v \x.\v ovolv 8i8ws (in that or BECAUSE 
you give us nothing), X. C. 2. 7, 13. The adjective-clause is very frequently used 



538 syntax. [$$ 335, 336. 

instead of a hypothetical adverbial clause (comp. § 333, 3) ; so also instead of 
an adverbial clause introduced by Sue; the last case occurs : — 

(a) after ovtcos or a>5e. Dem. Chers. 100,44. ov yap ovtcd y ev-f)frr)s 4(TtIv 
vjjlwv ovSeis, os VTroXafxfSdvei {neither is there any one of you so simple, as to 
suppose). X. Cy. 6. 1, 14. ris ovtods iax v p6s y os Ai/xw teal piysi hvvaiT au 
fxax&V-tvos o~Tpa,Teve(r&ai ; 

(b) after to iov to s, tt} \ikovtos, too- ovtos. In most instances, these 
demonstratives are followed by the corresponding relatives olos, oaos, 
which, like the adverbial clause introduced by &st€, usually have an Inf. 
depending upon them. X. An. 4. 8, 12. aAAa jxoi Soicel tocovtov x w p' 1 ' 
op KaTaax^P (sc. r]/uas), oaov e|a> tovs ecrxorous \6xovs y eu e o~Sai twv 
7ro\efxicov KepaTow (it seems to me best that we should occupy so much ground, 
as that, etc.). PL Apol. iyci) Tvyxdva &u t o iovt o s, olos virb tov &tov 
rp 7roAet de$6o-&ai. 

3. The relative pronoun serves not only to connect subordinate clauses with 
the principal one, but it is also used to connect clauses generally, inasmuch as 
it takes the place of a demonstrative which would refer to a word of the pre- 
ceding clause. This mode of connecting sentences belongs to the Latin as 
well as to the Greek, though it occurs very rarely in the latter compared with 
the former. Thus in Greek, e. g. it is altogether common for clauses to begin 
with TavTa Se elnSvTes, Tavra 8e axov&avTes, yue-rci 8e TavTa, e/c tovtuv Se, ws Sh 
TavTa iyevero, etc, where the Latin generally uses the relative qui. 



$ 335. III. Adverbial Clauses. 

Adverbial clauses are adverbs, or participles used adverbially 
($ 326, 3), expanded into a sentence, and, like adverbs, express 
an adverbial object, i. e. an object which does not complete the 
idea of the predicate, but merely defines it, e. g. ore to lap ^A^e, 
(totc) tol avS-rj $d\Xu. 'Os eAe£as, (ovtws) eVpa^as. 

$336. A. Adverbial Clauses or Place. 

Adverbial clauses denoting place, are introduced by the 
relative adverbs of place, ov, rj, 0V77, o-n-ov, h$a (ubi) ; 6'#ev, evS-ev 
(unde) ; 61, 6V01, rj, oirrf {quo), and, like adverbs of place, express 
the three local relations, where, tvhence, and whither. The use 
of the Modes in these clauses, is in all respects like that in 
adjective-clauses ($ 333). 

Her. 3, 39. '6kov t&utrete ffTpaTevecr&ai, irdvTa ol e%cfy>ee evTvxws (indefi- 
nite frequency). Th. 2,11. eVeo-fre (iicelo-e), oiroi &v tis rjyrjTai. X. An. 
4. 2, 24. /xax^fj-euoi 5e ol tto\4(xioi Kai, oirr) e f 77 VTzvbv x w ?' l0V -> irpoKaTaKafi&dvov- 
Tes 4kc!>\vov tcls irapoSovs (Opt. on account of 4k(x>Kvov). Cy. 3. 3, 5. £&-f)pa 
'67rovTrep 4 iriTvyx dvo 1 ev &r)piois (wherever). PI. Apol. 28, d. ov &v ris 
iaxrrbv r<£|p, iurav&a Set (levoirra Ku/Sw/zitcw. 



$ 337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 539 



$ 337. B. Adverbial Clauses of Time. 

1. Adverbial clauses denoting time, are introduced by the 
conjunctions ore, ott6t<z, d>s, rjvUa (when), lv w, eco? (ivhile) ; orec, 
eirtLSr} (postquam), e7raS?) Toyivra (irpoiTOv), or o>s rd^icrra (as soon 
as), i£ ov, ££ orov, also i£ &v, ex quo, and acfi ov (since) ; irpiv, irplv 
r\ (priusqiiam) , ewg, ea>s ov, ets o, esre, /^e^pi or a^/ot ov, ^XP L orov, 
ft^pt (ta7/, until). 

2. On the use of the modes, the following points are to be 
observed : — 

3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented 
as a fact; hence in speaking of actual events ox facts. 

Her. 7, 7. ws aveyvcixr&ri aeptys crrpaTetWfrcu iirl tt]v 'EAAaSa, ii/^avra 
o-rpaTT/nji/ iroieerai (when Xerxes was persuaded, etc.). 1, 11. ws v/xep-n rdx^ra 
4yey6vee (quum primum, as soon as). X. H. 1. 1, 3. ifxaxouro, ^e'xpts oi 
'AStiucuoi avzirXsvcrav. An. 1.3, 11. koX ecos fxei/ofxeu ai/rov, (TKeirTeov fJ.oi 
done? elvcu, ottws us aa(pa\e(TTaTa [x^vovfj-^v. 

4. The conjunction ews (till), is followed by the Ind. of the 
historical tenses, when an object is to be represented as unat- 
tained or not to be realized. Comp. $ 327 b , 1, (a). 

PL Gorg. 506, b. rjdeus h.v KaAAt/cAel tovtw in 8 1 eAcy 6 /xr] v, ews avrcp 
a it e 5 w k a ( us que dum reddidissem ) . 

5. The Subj. is used, when the statement is to be indicated 
as a conception or representation, and must be referred to the 
predicate of the principal clause, the verb of which is in one 
of the principal tenses. In the Common Language, the con- 
junctions take the modal adverb dv, e. g. orav, birorav, tjvlk dv, 
lirdv (kirrjv), eTretSav, iv a> dv, irplv dv, ecos dv, /xe^pt dv, esr' dv [§ 260, 
2, (3), (d)]. 

6. Accordingly the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions 
from orav to irplv dv, when the statement of time is also to 
be represented, at the same time, as the condition under which 
the predicate of the principal clause will take place. But with 
the conjunctions which signify until, the Subj. expresses a limit 
expected and aimed at. The Subj. is also very frequently used, 
to denote indefinite frequency (§ 333, 3). 

PI. Prot. 335, b. iireiSau <ru f}ov\rj dia\4yecr&ai, us iyu hvvafxai 'iiriffboii 
T<fre <rot Sia\4^oftai (whenever you wish to, if at any time you wish to dieaowae^ 



540 syntax. [$ 337. 

etc.). Th. 1, 21. oi &v&pwiroi, ev $ dv iroXefxwai, rbv irap6vra ir6\e/j.ov del 
peyiarov Kpivovcriv. X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. ttoXiv ovttu) edpanas dvrirarrofxevnv 
irpbs 7n$\«/ erepav, fym> eTreiBdv tjtttj&t?, irapaxprjua ravrr) avrl rod /xd- 
XeoSrai Trefoea&ai e&ehei. 3. 3, 26. OTr6rav (oi fidpfiapoi Bao~i\e?s) err par o 
ireSevwvr ai, rdeppov irep ifiaWovr ai evirer&s Old t))v irohvx^ipiav (as often 
as). Dem. Ph. 3. 128, 69. etas dv crdo^rirai rb GKacpos, r6re xph KC & ravr-nv 
koX Kv$epvr\rr\y itpo'&vp.ovs elvai (dum servari possit). 

Remark 1. The Subj. is also used in the Epic language, when the adver- 
bial clause forms a member of a comparison, since a case is then supposed 
(comp. § 333, Rem. 2). II. |, 16. as S 1 ore rrop<pvpri ireXayos . . as 6 yepav 
appaive. o, 624. ev 8* eirecr', as ore Kvpa &orj ev vrjt it 4 a r\ c i v. 

Rem. 2. On the Subj. after an historical tense instead of the Opt., and on 
Urav, 4-jrdu, ir p\v dv, etc. with the Opt. in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 
Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The mode of connection by Sre, S-n-Sre, irpiv, etc. without dv with 
the Subj., occurs only in the Epic language frequently, sometimes also in 
Ionic prose, and not seldom in the Attic writers with /xexpi ana " irpiv. 

7. The Opt. is used with conjunctions of time, without av, just 
as the Subj. is, but referring to an historical tense of the princi- 
pal clause. When the Opt. is used to denote indefinite fre- 
quency ($ 327 b , 2), an Impf. or an Iterative Aor. usually stands 
in the principal clause, and the conjunctions ore, ktrd, etc. (ex- 
cept those which signify before and until), are translated by as 
often as. 

H. k, 14. avrdp St' is v?\ds re tdoi teal Xabv 'Axatav, iroWas e/c KecpaXyjs irpo- 
&e\vp.vovs eA/cero x a ' lTas ( as often as). Her. 6, 61. okws (= ore) eveiiceie 
T) rpocpbs (rb iraidiov), irp6s re r&ya\p.a 'Lara Kal eXiffffero rty &ebv ct7raA- 
Aa|at rrjs Svs/xopcptrjs rb TraiZiov (as often as). X. An. 6. 1, 7. Snore oi"EWr]ves 
ro7s 7ro\efj.iois iiriotev, pab'ias eirecpevyov (as often as the Greeks made an at- 
tack, whenever they made an attack). Od. e, 385. & p a e S' ivl Kpanrvbv Boperjv, irpb Se 
Kv/xar ea£ev, eas '6ye *atr?Kecrcri <pi\r]per/j.oio-i /xiyeir} (but opvvcri ftope-nv Kal 
dyvvffi KVfxara, eas dv . . piyfj). PL Phaed. 59, d. irepiep.evop.ev endcrrore, eas 
ayot%(&ei7j rb dea/xarripiov. 

Rem. 4. On dv in the principal clause, see § 260, 2, (2), (j8). 

8. Moreover, the Opt. without av is used with conjunctions 
of time, without reference to the time of the principal clause, 
when the statement of time is to be represented as an uncer- 
tain and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture, or 
assumption; also, generally, when the subordinate clause forms 
a part of a principal clause expressing a wish. 

PL Am at. 133, a. SirSre rb cpi\oo~o<pe?v alo~xpbv Tjyrjcr aipr\v eivai, ouS' dv 
&v&pwTrov vopiaaipi ipavrbv ehai (when I shall assume, if I shall ever assume). X. 
Cy. 3. 1, 16. 7r«s dv r6re TvXeiffrov dfyoi yiyvoivr oi dv&paTtoi, oirSre ddtKovv- 



§ 337. J ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 541 

res aXio~Koivr o [when they are, if they are, convicted of acting unjustly) ; — II. 
(T, 465. at ydp pav Savdroio Si/STJxedS a>5e Zvvaip.r\v vo<f<piv awoKpvipai, '6r e fxiv 
/xopos alvbs Ik duo i. 

9. The conjunction Trptv (irporzpov rj), besides the construc- 
tions already mentioned, is also followed by the Inf. The dif 
ferent constructions of irplv are to be distinguished as follows : 

(a) "When a past event, one that has actually occurred, is spoken of, the Ind. 
of an historical tense is used (No. 3). The principal clause is negative ; yet it 
is sometimes also affirmative, when irplv signifies until ; thus often in the Tra- 
gedians and Thucydides (in the latter irplv 8-f] and irplv ye S?j). 

(b) When a future, merely conceived action is spoken of, which can be con- 
sidered as the condition of the principal clause, the Subj. is used, when the sub- 
ordinate clause refers to a Pres. Perf. or Put. in the principal clause ; but the 
Opt., when the subordinate clause refers to an historical tense in the principal 
clause (No. 5 and 7) ; yet only when the principal clause is negative, or contains 
a question implying a negative. 

(c) But when the action is to be represented only as a conception, a conceived 
limit, not as an independent occurrence, but only as a subordinate matter, and a 
casual or incidental designation of time, the Inf. is used (= irp6 with the Gen.). 
Hence the Inf. can stand both for the Ind. of an historical tense, and for the 
Subj. or Opt., both after an affirmative and a negative principal clause, when it 
does not serve to define more fully the subordinate clause. 

Isocr. de Big. 348, b. ob irporepov iiravaavro, irplv r6v re irarepa e/c rod 
o'rparoireSov p.er eirep.^avr o, Kal rcov (piXcov abrou robs p.ev aireKreivav, 
robs 8' 4k rrjs irSXeoos O-efiaXov. X. An. 6. 1, 27. ob irp6o~frev eiravaavro 
iroXep.ovvres, irplv eiroli)ffav iracrav r)]V ^6Xiv 6p.oXoye?v AaKe5aip.oviovs 
Kal abrwv rjyepSvas elvai. — Eur. Med. 279. ovk frireifxi irpbs S6p.ovs iraXiv, 
irplv &v o~e yaias repp6vccv e£# fiaXoo (= eav p.)} irporepov o~e eKfidXco). 
X. An. 5. 7, 12. p.^ aireX^rjr e, irplv av aKovcrrfre. II. cp, 580. 'Ayfjvoop 
ovk e&eXev (pevyeiv, irplv ir e iprjo" air 'A^iAf/os (= el p.7) irp6repov ireipi]- 
crairo). X. An. 7. 7, 57. oi eTTir^deioi ev rap arparoiredcp (abrov) e5 e ovto p.7) 
aireX&e?v, irplv airaydyoi rb ffrpdrevpa Kal Oifipccvi irap ad oil]. — Her. 6, 
119. Aapelos, irplv p.ev alxp^aXcirovs y evec&ai robs 'Eperpieas, eve?xe C(pi 
Seivbv %6Xov. 7, 2. eaav Aapelca, Kal irpSr epov fj fiao'iXevo'ai, yeyovores 
rpels iraides. X. An. 1. 8, 19. irplv ro^evpia el;iKve?o-&ai, eKKXlvovaiv oi 
fZdpfiapoi Kal (pevyovcri. 10, 19. irplv Kar aXvff ai rb o'rpdrevpa irpbs dpiffrov, 
fiacriXees icpdvrj. 4. 1,7. iirl rb aKpov avafiaivei Xeiplcrocpos, irpiv riva alff- 
heaSai rcov iroXep.lwv. Cy. 7. 1, 4. irplv bpav robs iroXep.lovs, els rpls 
aveiravcre rb arpdrevp-a. 2.2, 10. ir&avol ovroos elffl rives, S>sre irplv eldeva i rb 
irposrao-oS/xevov, irporepov irei&ovrai. With attraction (§ 307. 4) : ib. 5. 2, 9. 
(iroXXol av&pooiroi) aTvoSv-ftcrKOvo'i irporepov, irplv SrjXoi y ev ea&ai, oloi -^crav. 

Bbm. 5. The Homeric 7rapos, when it is not used as a mere adverb, is al- 
ways constructed with the Inf. 11. or, 245. is 5' ayop^v ayepovro, irdpos Upiroio 
p.eSeo'frai. 

46 



542 syntax. [$§ 338, 339. 

C. Causal Adverbial Clauses. 

$ 338. I. Adverbial Clauses denoting Ground, Cause. 

1. Such adverbial clauses as express the ground or cause in 
the form of temporal adverbial clauses by the temporal 
conjunctions ore, oTrore, ws, €7ret, quoniam, picisque, because, 
since, eTrethrj, quoniam, and ottov, quandoquidem. In these adver- 
bial clauses, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode ; but the Opt. with 
av may be used according to § 260, 2, (4) (a), and also the Ind. 
of the historical tenses with av, according to k 260, 2, (2) (a). 

II. <p, 95. fir) fie ktuu, e7rei ovx S/xoyd(TTpLos"EKTop6s sl/xi (quoniam swn). 
X. An. 3.2,2. xaAe7ra ra irapovra, bir6re avdpwv arpaT^yw!/ toiovtwu trre- 
p6fxe&a kcu Aoxayui' ical crrpaTiwTwv (since we are deprived of such generals, etc.). 
Dem. 01. 1, in. ore ro'ivvv 7av& ovrcos €X 6t > TposiiKsi Trpo&vjAais iSeKeiv aKOveiv. 
X. C. 1. 4, 19. ~2.ceKp6.T-ns ov p.6vov robs o~vv6vre.s iSoKei iroieiv, oirSre virb twv 
ap&pwTToov opyvTO ait^x^^rai Ttov avoaioov re /cat adiKcev, a\Aa Kal oirSre iv ip^jxi^ 
efcv, iirelirep f]yf)<raivTo (x-nHev txv irore £>v irpaTToieu &eovs dia\c&s?v. — PL 
Prot. 335, d. Stomal ovv crov irapajAsivai ypuv, ch s iyca ovo' $t,v evbs i'iZlov anov- 
craifxi f n gov. — II. o, 228. vir6ei£eu x^pzs i/J-ds, iirel ov Kev aviSpwri y ire\' 
4o-&r] (since, if he had not escaped, the thing would not have been accomplished with- 
out effort). 

Remark. 'Eirei also introduces interrogative and imperative clauses, 
where we must then translate it by for. For the explanation of this use. see 
§ 341, Rem. 4. 

2. Such adveibial clauses as express the ground or cause in 
the form of substantive clauses by the conjunctions on and 
8 tort (arising from Sia rovro, on) and the Poet. ovveKa (arising 
from tovtov eVe/ca, o) or oSovvetca (instead of orov eveKa, o). 
The Ind is here, also, the prevailing mode, when the statement 
is not conditional. 

PI. Euthyphr. 9, e. Spa rb ocriop, 8 r i oai6v e cr r i y <pi\urai inrb ruv &ewi>, ij, '6ri 
<p i A e t t a i, 00161/ iari ; 

$339. II. Conditional Adverbial Clauses. 

1. The second kind of adverbial clauses are the conditional 
clauses, which are introduced by the conjunctions el and idv 
(rjv, av, which must not be confounded with the modal adverb 
av). The principal clause expresses what is conditioned by the 
subordinate clause, or the consequence and effect of the sub- 



$ 339.] CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 543 

ordinate clause. As the conditioning clause precedes the con- 
ditioned, the cause, the effect, the subordinate clause is called 
the introductory clause or Protasis, and the principal clause, the 
conclusion or the Apodosis. 

2. The Greek has the following modes of expressing condi- 
tionality : — 

I. In the first place, the condition is expressed as a reality or 
fact, as something certain, and hence by the Indicative. Two 
cases are here to be distinguished : — 

(a) The Protasis has et with the Ind., and the Apodosis, 
likewise the Lid. Then both the condition and conclusion 
are considered by the speaker as a reality or fact, and hence 
as certain, whether the thing be so objectively or not. The 
result is very frequently a necessary one. If the Apodosis 
contains a command, the Imp. is used, and when this command 
is negative, the Subj. also ($ 259, 5). 

E I rovro \4yeis, afxapr dv eis. — E t &eos £ <rr i, cro<p6s ecrr iv. — X. Cy. 
1. 5, 13. el ravra eyw \4yw irepl vfxS>v aAAa yiyvaxrKwv, i/xavrbu 4 £cnraT a 
(here something is spoken of, which in his heart the speaker wholly denies). — 
EiTt eX eJS > °" ^ s - — Et tovto TreTroir] Kas, iiraive?cr&ai d^ios e 1. Her. 3,62.5 5eV- 
irora, ovic eari ravra a\r)&4a, okqos (== on) kot4 aoi 2/xepSts ade\cpebs 6 abs iiraviff- 
rrjKe • eya yap avrbs e&aipd fiiv x e P°~l ttj<tl e/xeavrov • e I fx4v vvv oi re&vewres aveff- 
r 4 a a t, ir po sd 4 kg 6 roi Ka\ 'Aarvdyea rbv MrjSov e-Kavaar-^aecr^rat • ei 8° ear i, 8>s- 
irep irporov, ov fir) ri roi en ye eKeivov ve&repov aua(i\a(rrr)<Tei (here in the first con- 
ditional clause, something is spoken of, the opposite of which the speaker is per- 
suaded is true). — EX ti elx e > K °l eStSou. — Ei tovto eir err o if) Ke is, {v/xlas 
&£ios i)<r&a. — Ei ifipS vrr\ a e, Ka\ r) crrpa\pev. Ei touto Ae£eis, apap- 
rija-rj. X. Cy. 2. 1, 8. e if ti ireiffovrai Mt)8oi, is Hepcras to Seiubu r)^ei. 7. 
1, 19. ei (p&do~ o fxev robs Tro\e[xiovs KaraKrauovres, ovSels rifxav air o&au e?- 
rai. 

(b) The Protasis has et with the Ind. of the historical 
tenses, and the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense 
with av', then the reality, both of the condition and con- 
clusion is to be denied. This form is used only of the past, 
or where there is a reference to the past; here it is affirmed 
that something could take place under a certain condition, 
but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. The 
use of the tenses is the same as in simple sentences. 
See $ 256. 

Here the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of expression 



544 syntax. [§ 339. 

itself, for the Ind. of the historical tenses necessarily always denotes a past 
occurrence or fact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to say, it con- 
sists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the past and applied 
to the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to what is not a reality in 
the present. The past reality expressed in the conditional clause stands in 
opposition to another present reality (either expressed or to be supplied from 
the context), which contains precisely the opposite of that past reality, e. g. 
if the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. e. if the enemy had come, we should have 
been destroyed, but now the enemy has not come ; from this contrast it 
is now inferred, that the assumed fact if the enemy came, did not take place. 

£i rovro eXeyes, rjfxdpraves tv (si hoc dixisses, err ares, if you said this 
you erred, or if you had said this, you would have erred ; but you have not said it 
consequently you have not erred). PL Apol. 20, b, c. rls, t)v S 1 iydb, Kal iroBa- 
tt6s ; Kal ir6ffov SiSdffKei ; Evrjvos, e(pr], S> ~Z&Kpares, Haptos, irevre fj.vwv. Kal eytii 
rbv Evrjvov ifxaKapura, ei ws a.Xr)&ois e%ei ravrr\v rrjv rexvnv Kal ovras ifj.fj.eXws 
StSaovcej * eyu yovv Kal avrbs e Ka XXvv 6 fxt]v re Kal i) j8 pvv 6fxi\v &v, el 
7/ 7r iff r dfirju ravra' a A A' ov yap iiriffTajxui, 3> avdpes 'AfrnvaToi (here also 
something past is spoken of, as is evident from e/xaKdpLcra). 31, d. el eyw 
iraXai eirex^ipV " '« irpdrreiv ra icoXiriKa irpdryfia? a, irdXai av air oX(i>Xr) Kal 
ovt av v/xas axpe Xt)kt), ovr av ijxavrdv. Th. 1, 9. ovk av ovv vr)ffccv eK par e i 
('Ayafxefivuiv), el fxA] ri Kal vavTiKbv elx*v (he would not have ruled over the 
islands unless he had a fleet ; but he had a fleet, consequently he could also rule 
over the islands). PI. Gorg. 516, e. el r)ffav dvdpes ayaSroi, ovk &v irore ravra 
eiraffxov (if they — Cimon, Themistocles, and Miltiades — had been good men, 
they would never have experienced this injustice). X. Cy. 1. 2, 16. ravra ovk av 
iSvvavr o (ol Hepffai) iroieTv, ei /j.7) Kal Siairy fxerpia expcDvTO. 3.3,17. el 
fxev (xei&v ris klvBvvos e /x eXXev j)fuv elvai e/cet (sc. ev rf] iroXep.la) , t) iv&dSe (sc. 
iv rfj cpLXia), tffuss rb acrcpaXecrrarov r) v a v alpereov vvv Se tffoi fx.ev eKelvoi (ol 
k'ivSvvol) effovrai, tfv re ev&dbe virop.ivcofxev, rjv re els r\\v eKeivcov (r&v TroXefxicov) 
lovres vTravrwfiev abrots (here also a past action is spoken of: as long as we were 
unarmed, and therefore were in greater danger in a hostile than in a friendly 
country, it was necessary for us to remain here ; but now, since we are armed, 
the danger here and there will be equal). 8. 3, 44. aXrj&r), e<pr\, Xeyets' el ydp 
roi rb ex eLU ovrcos, wsirep rb Xa/J.j3dveiv, r)5v r)v, tvoXv av 8 ie<$> e pov evdaij-Lovia. 
ol ttXovctloi rwv irevqrcov (in reference to the preceding conversation). An. 7. 6, 
9. 7]/xe7s fxhv, a AaKeSai/j.ovi.01, Kal iraXai av i) jxev Trap' v[uv, el jxr) p.evo<puv Sevpo 
7i/j.as iteiffas airyyayev. Lys. defens. Call. 102, 1. el p.ev irepl &XXov rivbs rj 
rov ff&fxa'Tos KaXXias i)ywvl^er o, e£i)pKei &v /j.oi Kal ra. napa ruv aXXcov 
elp-queva' vvv §e /hoi 8 o k e7 alo~xpbv elvai fj.)j &or)&7Jffai KaXXiq. ra 8'iKaia. Pm - g. 
sacril. 109, 15. el /iev alffxpbv ^v fxovov rb Tcpay/xa, Hffcos &v ris roov irapiovrwv 
7) /j.e Xrjff e • vvv de ov nrepl aiffXvvT)S, aXXa irepl rr)s ixeyiffrrjs ^Tj^tas eKivdvvevov. 

Remark 1. On the omission of &v in the Apodosis, see § 260, Rem. 3. On 
the Ind. of the Hist, tenses in the intermediate clause of such a proposition, 
§ 327b, l. (a). 






$ 339.] CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 545 

II. The condition is expressed, in the second place, as a 
conception or representation. The Greek has two different fo'ims 
to denote this relation : — 

(a) The Protasis has el with the Opt., and the Apodosis, the 
Opt. with av. (The Fut. Opt. is here not used.) By this form, 
both the condition and the conclusion are represented as a 
present or future uncertainty, as an undetermined possibility, a 
mere conjecture, assumption, or supposition, without any refer- 
ence to the thing supposed being real or not real, possible or 
impossible. 

E 1 r i e % o t y, 8 o I 1] s av (si quid habes des, if you had anything, you would 
give it ; here it is neither assumed nor denied that you have anything, but is 
merely a supposition. Et tovto Xeyois, afxaprdvo is 'av (if you should say 
this, then you would err). — PI. Symp. 175, d. ed av £%°'j 6i ' toiovtov et-q 7] 
crocpia, &st etc tov ir\r)peaTepov els rbv Kevdorepov f>eiv rj/xaiv, iav aTTTca/jie^a aWrj- 
Xoov ' el yap ovtcos e% 6t Ka ^ V ^o<pia, ttoWov rifxS>jxai ttjv irapa crol KardnXuriv. 
Lysid. 206, c. e'l uoi i&eArjtrais avrbv Trotrjaai els Aoyovs iX&e?v, Xffws av dv- 
vaifxrjv aoi eVt5e?|cu, a XPV a-hry SiaAeyecr&ai. Menex. 236, a. nal rt av 
ex 015 elireiv, el SeoL ere Aeyeiv; Hipp. Maj. 282, d. ei yap e IS e iris ocrov 
apyvpiov etpyacrfxai, ^avjxdcrais &v. Ion. 537, e. et ae ipoijxr]v, el (whether) 
rfj avrfj rix v V yiyvaxTKOfxev rfj api&fA-nriKfj ra avra eyca re Kal <rv, ^ ctAA.77, (pa'njs 
av 8-fjirov rfj avrfj. 5. 6, 9. Kal 6 Tlap&evios afiaros" ecp' %v eXhoirz &v, el rbv 
"A\vv 5 LafiairiT e. 6.2,21. ei Kara\nr6vres ra, <TKev-n ev to; epvjxvcS x^P'-V 
ws els p.a"xw irapeGKevacrfAevoi Xoifxev, taoos av to. iepa fxaWov Trpoxopoir) 
rjfjuv. (Of the assumption of something past, in Herodotus [§ 260, (4) (a)] 7, 
214. eiSei7j &>v Kal ewv p.7] MrjXievs ravrrjv rr]v arpairbv 'Ovt}TT]s, ei tj X^PV 
iroWa wfJiiAri k& s etrj, Onetes ?night have known this way, if he had been very 
familiar with the country). 

(b) The Protasis has idv {r\v, av) with the Subj., and the 
Apodosis also, the Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fu- 
ture (also the Imperative). By this form, the condition is rep- 
resented as a conception or supposition, the accomplishment of 
which, however, is expected by the speaker, and is regarded as 
possible. The conclusion resulting from the subordinate clause, 
is represented as certain (necessary). 

Rem. 2. As the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, £dv with the Subj. 
almost wholly corresponds to e I with the Fut. Ind. ; the only distinction is, 
that by e t with the Fut. Ind., the form of the condition implies that the action 
will actually take place in future : but by id v with the Subj., the form of the 
condition implies that the actual occurrence of the action is merely assumed 
or expected by the speaker. The reason for the use of the Subj. is not to be 
found in the conditioned relation itself, which it is necessary to express, but in 

46* 



546 syntax.^ [§ 339. 

the fact, that, aside from this relation, it is used to denote a concession expected 
by the speaker (§ 259, Eem. 4). 

'Eoc tovto Xey-ps, apap tt) o"n, if you say this, shall say it, you will err. 
(Whether you will actually say this, I do not yet know; but I expect, I as- 
sume that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.) 
— 'Eac tovto Xe^ys, apapTi) a r\ (si hoc dixeris, errabis). Dem. 2, 14. airas 
Xoyos, av airfj ra 7rpd.yfj.aTa, pdrai6v ^i (paiveTai Kal Kev6v. PI. Bp. 473, d. eav 
/j.7] ?) ol <pi\6cro(poi /3 a a iXevo~wa iv iv tcus Tr6Xeo'iv, r) ol fiaaiXrjs Te vvv Xeyop- 
evot Kal dvvdffTai (piXo <r o (pi) o~ a> <r i yvncricas Te Kal iKavoos, Kal tovto els TavTbv 
£v pir e ay, Svvapls Te ttoXltlk^] Kal cpiXoaocpla, ovk f ctti KaKuv iravXa to2s ir6Xe' 
o~i. Lysid. 210, c. eav fj.hu dpa aocpbs yevy, S> tto.7, irdvres aoi (piXoi Kal irdvres 
col oIksTol eaovrai. X. An. 1. 8, 12. kqlv tovto, e<pr), viKtvpev irdv& r)p7v 
7re7roirjTat. 

Eem. 3. 'Eac with the Suhj. and el with the Opt. are also used to denote 
indefinite frequency. Comp. § 327*>, 2. In the place of idv with the Subj., el 
with the Opt. occurs, when the conditional clause is made to depend on an 
Hist, tense. Still, see § 345, 4. On idv with the Opt. and el with the Inf. 
in oral, obliq., see § 345, Eem. 4, and No. 6. 

3. Besides the common forms of the Apodosis already men- 
tioned, which correspond to those of the Protasis, the Apodosis 
is very often found in a form that does not correspond to the 
Protasis. This interchange of forms gives great delicacy of 
expression. The following cases occur : — 

(a) The Opt. with &v in the Apodosis, very often follows e* with the Ind. 
and edv with the Subj., when the conclusion as uncertain, doubtful, an undeter- 
mined possibility, is to be contrasted with a condition which is certain, or which 
is expected or assumed as certain. But the Greek, particularly the Attic dialect, 
very often employs this form of the Apodosis with a degree of civility, even 
when speaking of settled convictions [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. 

(a) El toCto Xeyeis, apapTavois &v (if you assert this, you would err). 
PI. 30, b. ei pev oiiv TavTa Xeyccv a tatp &e t p a tovs veovs, tovt av eXy fiXafiepd. 
Ale. II. 149, e. Kal yap av oeivbv eXy, el trpbs to Zuipa Kal Tas frvatas ano fiXeir- 
ovaiv rjpwv ol Sreoi, aAAa p)f irpbs tt\v Tpvxi)v, 'av tls oaios Kal SiKaios &v Tvy- 
X& V V- X. C. 1. 2. 28. el 2o)/cpaT7js aw<ppovwv o ieT eXei, irws av SiKaicos Trjs 
ovk ivovarjs avTcp icaKias aWiav ex oi 'i Th. 6, 92. el iroXepiSs ye &>v C(p68pa 
e^Xa^Tov, Kal a v cp'iAos &v iKavws axpeXo it] v. 

(13) X. Apol. 6. %v oe ala&dvwpai X e ' l P UJ/ yiyvifJ-evos Kal KaTafxep.- 
(p w pa i ipavrov, irws av eyw av r)oeas $iot evoipi; PI. Menex. 239, C. e a v 
oiiv r)pe?s en ix^ ipw pev Ta avTa Xoya ^iXw Koapelv, Tax ^ LV oevrepoi cpaivoi- 
pe&a (then ice should be inferior). 

(y) El with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the 
denial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. with &v is used in speaking of 
the past, instead of the usual Ind. of the Hist, tenses with olv. This use is not 



$ 340.] ELLIPSES OF THE PROTASIS. 547 

frequent, and is found only in Homer [§ 260, (4), (a)]. II. fi, 80. el fiev ns 
rbv oveipov 'Axai&v aAXos evio~Trev, \pevdos k e v cpalfiev kcu v o <r <p i^oifie- 
&a fiaWov vvv 8' ?5ev , hs fiey apicrros 'Axaicov evx 6Tac eivai {if another had 
told the dream, ive should pronounce it false, and not believe it). II. e, 311. nai vu 
Kev ev& air 6\o tro aval; ai/Spwv Aluetas, el fi^} dp' o|u vor\ae Aibs &vyar}]p 
'A(ppoSiT7) {and JEneas icould certainly have perished there, if Aphrodite had not 
observed it). Comp. § 388. p, 70. [On el with the Opt. in the Protasis and the 
Opt. with &v in the Apodosis, in speaking of something past, in Herodotus, see 
No. II. (a) at the end.] 

(b) On the contrary, the Ind. in the Apodosis sometimes follows el with the 
Opt. X. C. 1. 5, 2. el 5' eVt reXevrf] tov fSiov yevSfievoi f3ov\otfie&d rep 
eiriTpetycu $) TraiSas dppevas rraiBevcrai, r) frvyarepas irap&evovs diacpvXa^ai, r) XPV~ 
fiara $iacrcv(rai, ap' a£,i6Tucnov els ravra r\yn o*6 fie&a rbv UKparr) ; 

(c) The Ind. of the historical tenses with &v in the Apodosis follows : — 

(a) sometimes ei with the Ind. of a principal tense, if the condition is re- 
garded as a fact or something actually existing, while the conclusion is consid- 
ered as not real or actual. X. Hier. 1, 9. el yap outco ravr e%ei, 7rc7>s av tto\- 
Xol fiev iirefr 6 fiovv tvpavvetv . . , iroHs Se iravres i£-f]Aovv av robs rvpdwovs ; 
{if this is really so, why should many strive after sovereignty, and all esteem tyrants 
as happy?) Eur. Or. 565, sq. el yap yvvaTnes is t<$5' ^^ovcriv Sfpaaovs, &v- 
dpas (poveveiv, Karacpvyas Troiov/xevai is reKva . . , Trap' ovdev avrais -f\v av oKkvvai 
iv6<reis ; 

(13) rarely idv with the Subj. (PL Phaedr. 256, c), but very often it with 
the Opt., when, in the Apodosis, an action is to be represented as repeated in 
past time [see § 260, 2. (2), (&)], but seldom when the reality of the conclusion 
is to be denied, e.g. X. Cy. 2. 1, 9. el exoifJ-i, &s rdx«rT av orrXa iiroiov- 
\x.t\v iracri Hepcrais ro?s irposiovcriv. PI. Ale. I. Ill, e. el fiov\7}& eir] fi ev elde- 
vai fiT] p.6vov, iToiloi av&pooTToi elcriv, a\?C 5tto?oi vyieivol, t) vocrcvdeis, apa ttcavol av 
r)crav SiSdcncaXoi ol ttoAXoI ; 

(d) The Ind. of a principal tense in the Apodosis, is sometimes contrasted 
with the Ind. of an historical tense in the Protasis : (a) affirmatively: Dem. 
Cor. 293, 195. et fiera. rav &r)fialoi)V rjfuv ayccvt^ofievoLS ovrcas e'tfiapro { fato 
constitutum erat) Trpd^ai, ri x?h irposSoicav ; — (j8) negatively: Th. 3, 65. el 
fiev yap 7]fie?s avrol irpos re rr]v tt6\lv iK&6vres ifiaxo P-e&a (pugnavissemus) 
Kai t\\v yrjv iSriov fiev {devastassemus) cos iroXepaoi, aS ikov fie v el 5e dvSpes 
vfioov ol irpcaroi . . iireKaXecravTo {advocaverunt), t'i d5 ikov fiev. 



§ 340. Remarks. 

1. Ellipsis of the Protasis. The Opt. with dv often stands without the 
conditional Protasis ; yet this is contained in an adjective-clause, or in a par- 
ticiple, or, in general, in a word of the sentence which may be expanded into a 
conditional Protasis, e. g. in the adverb ovrcas, in a preposition, or it is indica- 



548 syntax. [$ 340. 

ted in what precedes or follows. *Os ravra Xeyoi (= erJf Tts rai/Ta Ae^o')) 
ajxapr dvoi dv ( whoever should say this, if any one should say this, he would err). 
Tavra \4j-as (= et <rv Xe£ais) d/xaprdv ois dv. Ovrw y (= et ovrta 7c 
Troi7]<rais) av d/xaprdvo is. Very often, however, the Protasis is actually 
wanting ; particularly, general Protases are almost always omitted, since they 
can be easily supplied by such phrases as : if one wishes, if it is allowed, if 1 
can, if circumstances should favor, e. g. BovXoijj.r)v dv (scil. et Swai/x-nv), velim 
'HSeous av aKovcrai/jii, often also, the conditioned Apodosis must be supplied, 
as the conditioning Protasis, e. g. Her. 9, 71. a\Xa ravra fiev Kal <p&6vw av 
etiroiev (sc. ei etiroiev). Comp. § 260, 2, (4), (a). So also, the Ind. of 
the historical tenses with dv is often used without a conditional Protasis 
e. g. Tavra Xe^as ^fxapres dv. "Ayeu o~eio-fxov ovk av rovro avvefi-n 
'EPovXS/x-nv dv or e fSovXi) &r\v dv (sc. et itivydfiriv), voluissem, vellem, (differ 
ent from fiovXoi /x-nv av, as vellem from velim). "Ev&a 8)7 fyvws dv (see* 
TrapTjo-fra), turn vero videres. See § 260, Rem. 2. 

2. Ellipsis of the Apodosis. On the contrary, the Apodosis may be omitted 
in certain cases : — 

(a) In the expression of a ivish, e. g. e?d-e rovro yivoiro (sc. evrvx^s av 
etV), that this might be! e3f&e rovro iyevero (sc. evrvxhs av ?jv) f that 
this had been ! Comp. § 259, 3, (b), and Rem. 6. 

(b) Often in excited, impassioned discourse (Aposiopesis). II. o, 340, sq. etVroTe 
S 5 avre XP ei ® e/*«b yevnrai detKea Xoiybv d/xvvai rols dXXois — . 

(c) When the Apodosis may be easily supplied from the context. This oc- 
curs in Homer in the phrase et 8' ibeXeis with or without an Inf. II. <p, 
487. et 8' i&eXeis iroXe/xoio Sa-fj/xevai (sc. dye, /xdxov e/xoi) • 6<pp ev el^ijs. 
Very often also in Attic writers, where two conditional clauses are placed in 
contrast by et (e' av) /xev — et (iav) 8e /xij; in the first the Apodosis is 
omitted, since it contains a thought which can be easily supplied, and the dis- 
course hastens on to the following more important thought. PI. Prot. 325, d. 
Kal iav /xev eKwv Trei&rjrai (sc. KaX&s exei) • et 8e fx-fi, — ev&vvovaiv aireiXaTs Kal 
irXriyals. 

3. A partial ellipsis of the Protasis occurs in the Homeric phrase et 8' aye, 
i.e. et Se fiovXei, dye. II. 0, 524. et 8' dye roi KeipaXfj Karavevo~o/xai. Also 
when el 5 e' or e t 8' & y e is used as an antithesis, where a verb must be sup- 
plied from the context. H. o, 302 ; t, 46. dXX' aXXoi /xeveovo'i KaprjKOfxowvres 
'Axaioi, cIsSks irep Tpo'i-nv diairepcofxev • el Se Kal avroi (sc. /xr} jxeveovo~i), (pevyov- 
ru>v avv vnval <p'iX-nv is irarpida yaiav. 

4. Et 8e' instead of et 8e /x-h and et Se \x-t\ instead of et 8e'. When two 
hypothetical clauses are contrasted with each other, e I 8 e is often used instead 
of et 8e pA], since the opposed or contrasted member of itself abrogates 
the first member. PI. Prot. 348, a. Kav fxev fiovXr) en ipasrav, eroi/xos elfxi 001 
Trapixtiv (sc. ifxe) diroKpivo/xevos ' iav Se fiovXri, av i/xol irapdo~x* Of V ou w ish to 
propose further questions, I am ready to reply, but if you do not wish, etc.). On the 
contrary, a negative clause is followed by et Se /x-h,' instead of et 8e, this form 



j 



$ 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 549 

being very common in abrogating or expressing the opposite of the preceding 
clause. X. Cy. 3. 1, 35. irpbs toov Erewv, /xtj ovtw Xeye • el Se (x-t) (otherwise), ov 
Srappovvrd fxe e^eis. 

5. When el /x-f) has the meaning of except, another et is sometimes sub- 
joined, thus el /j.}] el, like nisi si, except if, unless, the predicate of el /x-f] being 
omitted. PL Symp. 205, e. ov yap to eavToov, olfxai, e/cacrroi ao~Trd£ovTai, el /x^) 
et ris to fxev aya&bv olKelov /caAe?. 

6. "Ay in the Protasis with et and the Opt. or the Ind. of the historical 
tenses. Sometimes &v is found, also, in the Protasis, so that it contains a con- 
dition for the Apodosis, but it is itself dependent on another condition, com- 
monly not expressed, but implied, e. g. el Tovra Xeyois &v means : If you should 
say this under circumstances (== in case circumstances require, in case an oppor- 
tunity should present, in case one should ask you), etc. X. Cy. 3. 3, 55. tovs 5' 
airaidevTovs iravTaivao-iv apeTrjs &av/j.d(otfX l dv, eX TiirXeov av o> <pe\-f] o~ e le \6- 
yos Ka\ais prj&els els avdpaya&iav, 7j tovs airai.b'evTOvs /xovctik?]S acr/xa fxd\a Ka\ws 
daSev els /xovtiktjv. PL Prot. 329, b. eyw etivep &X\q> tco avfrpdoiroiv irei&ol- 
[xi)v &v, Kal arol irei&o/xai (si ulli alii, si id mini affirmet, fidem habeam). 

7. When Kai is connected with el (edv), the hypothetical Protasis contains a 
concessive meaning, and the Apodosis, an adversative meaning : the Protasis 
denotes a concession; the Apodosis, often in connection with '6[xas, tamen, 
denies the expected consequence, and places another consequence in opposi- 
tion to that expectation. Kai either follows el, — el Kai or precedes it, — Kal 
e I — . In the first case, Kai means also, and refers not merely to et, but to the 
entire concessive clause, and et Kal means although. In the last case, Kai 
means even (enhansive), and refers only to the condition, and Kal el means 
even if, e. g. el Kal &vt)t6s el/xi, although I am mortal ( conceding what is actu- 
ally the case, Kal el a&dvaTos tfv, even if I were immortal (conceding what is 
not the case). S. 0. R. 302. -n6Xiv fxev, el ical jx^ /3AeVets, <ppove?s 5' ofxws, o'la 
v6aw \vvectTiv, etsi (quamquam) caecus es, vides tamen, quo in malo versetur civitas. 
Aesch. Choeph. 296. Kel fx'}) ireiroi&a, Tovpyov ecrT eypacrTeov, etiamsi non fido, 
perpetrandum facinus est. To the et (edv) Kal, the negative et (eoc) /xr]84 
corresponds; to the Kal el (edv), old' (ixyb") el (edv). 

Remark. Concessive clauses are far oftener expressed in an abridged form 
by the participle, either alone, or in connection with Kai, Kaiirep, etc., § 312, 4, 
(d) and Rem. 8. 



$ 341. III. Adverbial Clauses denoting Consequence 
or Effect. 

1. Adverbial clauses, denoting consequence or effect, are 
adverbs of manner expanded into a sentence, and are intro- 
duced by the conjunction a>sre (more seldom o>s), which refers 
to the demonstrative adverb ot>TO)(s), either expressed or under- 
stood, in the principal clause, e. g. ovra> KaXos ia-nv, wsre Sav- 



550 SYNTAX, [$ 341, 

[jLa^eo-SaL ( = Sav [jLavLCDs KaA.09 ecrnv). Yet these clauses often 
have also the meaning of a substantive or Inf. in the Ace. and 
denoting an effect, and must then be considered as substantive- 
clauses. In this last case, the relative wsreof the subordinate 
clause corresponds to a demonstrative substantive-pronoun, 
either expressed or to be supplied, e. g. rovro, in the principal 
clause, e. g. 'Ave7reio-e Eep£ea tovto, o>st€ rroiiiev ravra (Her.). 

2. The Ind. is used in these clauses, when the consequence 
or effect, is to be indicated as a fact, something real and actual. 
The negative is in this case (ov, § 318, 2). 

Her. 6, 83. "Apyos audpecu ixVP^V ovrcc, &sre ol SouAot abrewv %ffx ov 
irdvra ra irpriyjxara. X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. Kvpos raxv Kai ra kv rep irapa8ei(rq> &r)pia 
avrjX&Kei, wsre 5 'Aarvdyns ovk£t elx ev abrw avWeyeiy frypia. 15. out (as 
r}<T&7) rrj r6re Sripa (0 'Acrrvdyvs), &sre det, 5ir6re olov re d-n, <rvvei-rjei red 
Kvpca, nal &\\ovs re ttoA\ovs Trap eAdfi (Save. 

3. The Inf., on the contrary, is used, when the consequence 
or effect is to be represented as merely a conceived or supposed 
one, inferred from the inward relation of things, or assumed as 
possible. (On attraction with the Inf., see $ 307, 4, and on the 
negative, § 318, 2.) The particular cases where the Inf. is used, 
are the following : — 

(a) "When an effect or consequence is specified, which results from or has its 
ground in the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1 . 2, 1 . in Se irpbs rb juet- 
piwv 5e?cr&ai ireTraidevinej/os i\v ^wKpdrns ovrcas, & sr e irdwv fxncpa KeKr^fxivos irdvv 
fixdlas ex 6 "' apKovvra. Cy. 1. 1, 5. iSvvdcrSn Kvpos iir&vp.lav i/j.fiaA€?v roaav- 
tt)u rod irdvras abrcp x a p' L C e(T ^" x '-) & s T € "ei rrj abrov yvwfxri a^iovv KvfSepvdcr- 
&cu. 2, 1. cpvvcu d Kvpos Aeyercu cpiAori/xSraros, wsre izdvra fxkv ir6vov avar- 
Arjuai, irdvra Se klvSvvov vtto p.e?vai rod siraiveloSai eVe/ca. For the same 
reason, ^ £jte (quam at) is used with the Inf., after a comparative. Pier. 3, 
14. Si 7rcu Kvpov, ra fxeu oiK^i'a fy fxe^co Rand, 7) wsre avaKAaieiv (greater than 
that any one can bewail, i. e. too great for one to bewail). X. C. 3. 5, 17. cpo^ov/xai 
dei, fn'i ri p.e7(ov % &sre (ptpew Sv vao-$rai kcmov rrj irSAei avixfifj. Hence 
Sjte with an Inf. may also he used to explain a preceding clause, e. g. Th. 4, 
23. JleAoTTouu7]aiOL iu rrj rjireipcp arparoiredevcrd/xevoL, Kal 7rposfioAas iroiov/xevoi rep 
Tef%et, crKOTTovvres Kaipov, e'l ris irapaireaoi, wsre robs au^ pas ffworai (watch- 
ing for an opportunity, if any should occur, by which their fellow-citizens could be 
saved). X. C. 1. 3. 6. 'b rols irAeicrrois ipywheo-rar6u icmv, Sjte epvAd^aa&ai rb 
vwep rbu Kaipbv i/.LiriirAao'&ai, rovro pabtws irdvv ^.wKpdr-ns iepvAarrero. 

(b) When the consequence is to be repi'esented as one merely possible. X. 
An. 2. 2, 17. Kpavyrjv -iroAArjv evoiovv KaAovvres aAArjAovs, wsre /cat robs iroAeixt- 
qvs knoveiv (ut etiam hostes audire POSSENT), wsre 01 per iyyirara rwv iroAefxl- 



$ 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 551 

uv Kal e<pvyov (a fact). 1.4, 8. ovre airoTrecpevyaoriv • ex« yap rpirjpzis, &sre 
e\e?v rb iKeivuv ir\oiov. 

(c) When the consequence or effect includes, at the same time, the idea of 
purpose or aim. Th. 2, 75. irpoKaXvix^ara el^e deppeis Kal 5i<p&epas, &sre robs 
gpya£o/j.evovs Kal ra £v\a pt-rire nvpcpopois 6'io-rois fidWeor&ai, eV dcrcpaXda Te 
elvai (so that those at work and the wood might not be hit, etc.). Dem. Cor. ^ 81. 
TroWa /xev av xP^f xaTa e8«/ce QiXiffriS-ns, o&st' ex ei,/ 'Q-psov (ut obtineret 
Oreum). 

(d) When the consequence is to be indicated at the same time as a condition of 
the statement in the principal clause (under the condition, that, or it is presupposed, 
that). Dem. Ph. 2. 68, 11. i£bv avro7s ra>v Xoittwv dpx^v 'EWrjvcov, w sr avrovs 
viraicov eiv fiacriAe? (quum possent ceteris Graecis ita imperitare, UT ipsi dicto 
audientes essent regi, since they could rule the rest of the Greeks, provided they 
themselves obeyed the king). X. Cy. 3. 2, 16. Kal rovro iiriffra, e<pr], S> Kvpe, on 
iyci, wsre aTreXaarai XaXdaiovs airb rovroov rS>v &Kpwv, iroAAairAdcria av eSwKa 
Xp^lfJ-ara, uv av vvv ex ets Trap ip.ov. 

(e) When instead of an Inf. alone, the Inf. with &sr<- is used for the sake 
of emphasis. Th. 1, 119. (ioe-q&r) aav) eKaaroov ioiq, &sre \pr)(pi aaa&a i 
rbv TroXe/xov. 2, 101. avairei^ erai inrb ~2,evSov . . , S> s r eV rdx^i a,Tre\&e?y. 
6, 88. Kal olKopiv&ioi euSbs i\\/T}<piff avr o avrol irpa>TOi, usre irdar] Trpo&v/xia 
afxvveiv ktX. X. H. 6. 1, 9. Kal 'A&r)va7oi, oh ixdvra iro ir\aai ev dv, &sre 
o~vpi.(j.axoi r)/j.7v yevea&ai. 

(f) In general, when the speaker, without respect to the objective relation 
of things, apprehends, in his mind, solely the causal connection between the cause 
and the effect. In this way, a consequence actually existing may be expressed 
by c&sre with an Inf. X. An. 1. 5, 13. ijAavvev iirl robs Mevcovos (arpartwras), 
S'jT eKeivovs i kit eirXrJx^ « l K al avrbv MeVwra Kai rp4x* lv ^ Ta oirXa. 

(g) In oblique discourse. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. (rbv Kvpov) ^baxv^ws was irpose- 
veyK€?v Kal ivdovvai r\\v (pid\r]V r<2 Ttdirna, &sre rfj /j.r]rpl Kal rep 'Aarvdyei tcoXuv 
yeXara Trap acrx * ?V. 

Rem. 1. When the Inf. connected with wsre depends on a condition, the 
modal adverb av is subjoined to the Inf. [§ 260, 2, (5), (a)]. Th. 2, 49. rd ivrbs 
ovras e/caieTO, asre rfiicrraav is voap ipvxpbv acpds avrovs piirreiv. X. An. 
6. 1, 31. Kai )xol ol &eol ovras iv ro7s lepoTs iar]u,T]vav, & sr e Kal I5iarr)v av y va- 
vai, on ravrrjs rr)s fj.ovapx'ias airexeo~&ai /xe Set (i. e. Kal e? tls l5icorr]s etV;). 

Rem. 2. Instead of &sre with the Inf. or Ace. with Inf., a relative, particu- 
larly oTos, '6 cros, is very often used in connection with the Ace. with Inf., 
this relative corresponding to a demonstrative, particularly roiovros, roaovros, 
either standing in the principal clause or to be supplied. PI. Crit. 46, b. e'ycb — 
roiovros ( sc. ei/xi), oTo s rwv e/j.6iv fxrjoevl &\\cp it e i S e o~&ai, -?; rw \6ycp. X. 
Cy. 1- 2.3. ol TleporiKol v6fxoi eTUfieXovrai, oiroos tt]v apxh v ^ r o lovroi iaovrat 
ol Tro\7rai, olo i wovripov rivos 7) alaxP ^ *pyov i(pi€0~&at. X. H. 6. 5, 7. r 1 0- 
toj 6 ~2,rdo~nnros r)v, olos fxr\ fiov Kea&ai ttoAXovs diroKrivvvvai ra>v ttoXituv. 
Th.3, 49. 7) pikv ecp&acre r oaovr ov, '6 0" ov Tldx^ra av eyv <a k ev at. rb ^(piaua. 
1. 2. vefiSfievoi ra avrcav eKao-roi, o a v aTro(riv (so far that they could live on 
them). On the attraction in this mode of expression, see § 332, Rem. 8. 

Rem. 3. Special mention must be made here of apparently independent 



552 syntax. [$ 341. 

parenthetic clauses, which often occur, and which are introcaced by ws (seldom 
wsre) with the Inf. In this way the Inf., particularly of verbs of saying', thirk- 
: ng, judging, hearing, is used with ws for the purpose of expressing restriction or 
limitation. That, of which such a subordinate clause expresses the consequence 
or effect, must be supplied, e. g. tolovtw rpSirw. Th. 4, 36. ws fiiKpbv fxeydxw 
e'lKaaai {to compare small with great). So ws twos elirelv (especially with 
was and ovSeis), ut ita dicam, propemodum dixerim, ws trvveXdvr i eliretv, lit 
paucis absolvam, ws ye fxoi doKelv, ut mihi quidem videtur, properly tali modo 
ut mihi videalur, ws 4 fj.e ed fjiefiv%crbai {as far as I well remember), ws ye 
ovrwal a ko vera i {so far as we hear). Such clauses are very often expressed in 
an abridged form without ws, e.g. o v rw<r \ aKovaai, SoKeTv 4/xoi, ov iroX- 
A<£ x6yw elire7v, especially hxiyov, /uticpov Se?v,ita ut paulum absit, and 
in the still shorter form, oxiyov, prope, paene. — According to the same analogy, 
oaov, '6<ra, o ri connected with an Inf., are used instead of w s. (Rem. 2), e.g. 
c 6aov ye fi eiSevai, as far as I know, quantum sciam (properly pro tanto, 
quantum scire possim), S r i /x eldevai. In like manner, ws with the Inf. is 
used in Herod, in sentences which express a limitation. 2, 8. to S>v 87? enrb 
' r .lXiovTr6Xios ovKeii iroXXbv x° 3 P l0V i ws e?j/at Alyvirr ov {ut in Aegypto, for 
Egypt, i. e. considering its whole extent). 

4. The Opt. with av is used when the consequence or effect 
is to be represented as a conditioned supposition or presumption 
[§ 260, 2, (4), (a)] ; finally the Ind. of the historical tenses is 
used with av, when it is to be stated, that the consequence 
would take place under a certain. condition [$ 260, 2, (2), (a)]. 

Isocr. Archid. 130, 67. els roffavTi)v afxi^iav 4x-nXv&acriv, 5jt' 01 fiev KeKT7][j.e- 
voi ras oiiaias t)0~iov av els t)]v fraXarrav ra acperep' ahrwv 4 /J. fiaXXo lev, ^ to?s 
deop,euois iir ap nee e lap. PI. Menex. 236, d. croi ye Set xapt^ec^ai, wsre 
Kau bxiyov, el fie KeXevois airodvvra bpxT}<raoSai, x a P lcrat V 7 ?' / & v < — Symp. 
197, a. (jlo.vtik7)V 'AirSxXwv avevpev, 'Eirt&vjj.las Kal"Epwros riy efMOvevcravros, &sre 
Kal ovtos "Epwros av el'rj fxa&r)T7is. — Dem. Cor. 236, 30. ovk av wpKiCpjxev 
$iXnnrov, wsre rrjs elpS]VT]s av 8 ir\ fj.a pr-f] k e 1 Kal ovk av a/xcpSrepa e?X e > Ka ^ 
T7]v elpr]vr)v, Kal ra. ywpia. X. Ag. 1, 26. ivavres iroXe/xiKa oirXa KareffKeva^ov, 
&sre tt]V ttSXiv ovtws av Tiy^ffw iroXe/xov ipyaaTTjpiov etvai. 

Rem. 4. The Opt. without av is used only in the case mentioned in § 227b, 
1, (b). When wsre is connected with the Imp., or the imperative Subj. \\ 269, 
1, (a)], the dependent discourse is suddenly changed, with rhetorical emphasis, 
into the Oratio recta. Dem. Phil. 3. 129, 70. ypd<pw de, thsre, av fiovX-na&e, 
Xe ipor ovhaare {I ask that you would decree, if you wish, properly : decree, if 
you wish). So, likewise, wsre can be connected with a question. Dem. Aphob. 
858, 47. el 6 iraTrjp Tyirl(XTei tovtois, SrjXov fri ovt av raXXa iTrerpeirev, ovt av 
eKeiv ovtw KaraXnrwv avrols e<ppa£ev } &sre ir6&ev K<ra(Tiv; {ergo unde scie- 
runt ?) Comp. § 344, Rem. 6. 

Rem. 5. Instead of wsre with the meaning ita or ea conditioner ut, the post- 
Homeric language also uses e^' £>re (more seldom 4 </>' w), which refers to 
the demonstrative 4ttI tovtw in the principal clause, either expressed or im- 
plied ; either the Fut, Ind., or the Inf. are here used, e.g. Her. 3, 83. 4wl 
tovtw 5e vTve^i(TTajj.ai tt}S b.pxys, 67r' &j r e vir' ovSevbs v/xewv ap£o/iai. X. 
H. 2. 2, 20. iiroiovvro elpT]VT]v, eft £ ra re fiaKpa reixt] Kal rbv Ueipaia Ka£reX6v 
ras AaKetiai/noviQis e-wecrSai. 4, 38. 01 8e SirjXAc^av, 4$' tj> r e elpijvrjv ex 61 "- 






$ 342.J COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF MANNER. 553 

D. Adverbial Clauses denoting Manner and 
Quantity. 

§ 342. I. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Manner. 

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quality and man- 
ner, compare the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to 
quality and manner, with the predicate expressed in the adver- 
bial clauses. They are introduced by the relative adverbs, ws, 
W9TC, ws-n-ep, o7t<ds, which refer to a demonstrative adverb, e. g. 
ovrcos, in the principal clause, either expressed or understood. 

2. The use of the modes in these adverbial ^lauses corre- 
sponds with that in adjective clauses (§ 333), e. g. Aeyas ovrus, 
ws (jf>povets (you speak as you think). Zevs SiSwcnv, O7r<os e#e- 
A.et or o7rws av eStXy (§ 333, 3), iKdcrno (gives to each, as he 
ivishes). Very often a>s av or ws-rrep avis used with the Opt. 
(§ 333, 6). PL Phaed. 87, b. i/xoi yap So/cet 6/xotco? A.eyecr#ai 
ravra, &<57rep av tis 7repl avSpomov vcfjdvrov TrpzcrfivTov a7ro$av6vTO<s 
Xiyoi tovtov tov Xoyov. 

Remark 1. In comparisons, either the Present tense is used, since the com- 
pared object is placed in present view, or the Aor. [§ 256, 4, (c)]. In respect 
to the Modes, it is to be noted, that in Homer, the adverbs of comparison a s, 
S> jit, 7)v'T6, are connected either with the Pres. or Aor. Ind., when the com- 
parison is stated as an actual fact, or with the Pres. Subj., or commonly with 
the Aor. Subj. (§ 333, Rem. 2. ; the Aor. Subj. often retains the appearance of 
the Fut. by the shortening of the mode-vowel). R. k, 183. as Sh nvves irepl 
/j.7)\a Svsw prj <r ovrai eV av\ij — , &s twv vriSv/xos virvos airb {Jkecpdpouv oAdt>\ei. 
p, 434. (osre CT77A77 /j.4vei e/xireSov, tit iirl TVfj.0co auepos ecrrrjKei. k. 485, sq. 
d)s Se AeW jxi]Koi(Ttv a<rr]fj.oiuToi<Tiv iire?&ci)i/ ctfyeffiv 7) otecrcri nana <ppoveow ivo- 
pov cry &s y.hv ©prjiKas avSpas iircpx^o TvSeos vl6s (as it may happen that a lion, 
etc.). 

Rem. 2. Ovtods [&s) — ws are used in wishes or asseverations, the clause of 
comparison, introduced by ws, expressing the asseveration or protestation. 
Thus in Latin, ita me dii ament, ut ego nunc laetor, may the gods love me, as 
I rejoice, = may the gods not love me, if I do not rejoice, or as sure as I wish the 
gods to love me, so sure I now rejoice. II. v, 825. ei yap iycbv ovtco ye Aibs ttoas 
aly 16x010 e%t\v . . , ms vvv rj^epri f?5e kcmov (pepei 'Apyeiotcri Tract (xaXa (ivoidd that 
I were the son of Zeus as truly as this day brings evil to all the Greeks). 

Rem. 3. In clauses introduced by ws, ftsirep, 5jTe, an attraction of the 
Case sometimes occurs, particularly in the Ace. Lys. Accus. Agor. 492, 136. 
0v8a.iJ.0v iariv 'Ay6parov 'A&rjva'iov elvai asirep p acrv /3 ovKov (should be 
such as Thrasybulus is). But the Nom. is often found, for which a verb must be 
supplied from the context. Dem. Mid. 363. expW avrbv t« ovto. avakiaKovja 
& sir e p e 7 c<5, ovrco p.hv a(paipe7cr&ai rfyv v\.kt\v. 

Rem. 4. An appositive is often used with d>s denoting comparison, as in 

47 



554 syntax. P 343. 

Latin with ut, for the purpose of explaining the predicate of the principal 
clause. This d> s, ut, expresses either comparison or limitation, and in the first 
case is to be translated by as, in the latter by for ; the former occurs, when it 
is presupposed that the object connected with cb s possesses in a high degree 
the thing affirmed in the predicate of the sentence ; the latter, when it is pre- 
supposed that the object possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed by 
the predicate of the sentence, S. 0. R. 1118. Aa'L'ov yap ^v, direp ns a\\os, iricr- 
t6s, oij vofxevs av-np (ut pastor, as a shepherd ; the fidelity of shepherds be- 
ing presupposed). But Th. 4, 84. f]v 5e ovSh advvaros, wsAaK€OaLfj.6vios t 
eltrelv (ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian ; it being presupposed of Lacede- 
monians as a thing known, that they were not great orators). 



$ 343. II. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 
Quantity . 

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quantity, compare 
the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to quantity or 
degree, with its predicate. The compared predicates are con- 
trasted either as equal or unequal to each other. 

2. The equality of the predicates is expressed in the folio w- 
ing manner : — 

(a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative oo-w 
(ocrov), which refers to the demonstrative Toa-ovno (rocrov- 
tov), in the principal clause. 

X. Cy. 8. 1, 4. r off ovto v diatpepeiv 7)/xas Set tS>v dovAcov, offov ol fxev dovAoi 
&kovt€s ro7s 8ecnr6Tais v-Kv\pzTovffiv (it becomes us to excel slaves as much as slaves 
unwillingly serve their masters). 

(b) The adverbial clause is likewise introduced by ocry 
(o a- o v), which refers to the demonstrative too-ovtu (too-ovtov), 
in the principal clause ; the predicate of both clauses, however, 
stands either in the comparative or superlative. 

X. An. 1. 5, 9. (Kvpos) vo/jitfav, offco /xev av frarrov eA&oz TOffovrca 
airapaffKevao'TOTi'pto fiacriAe? /xax^ff^ai (quo [quanto] celerius — eo [tanto] 
imparatior, thinking that the quicker he came, the more unprepared he would find 
the king to fight). 0. 7, 42. ocrca av Kal i/xol koivgw6s, ko! iraifflv olkov (pv\a£ 
d/xeivcav ylvp, roffovra> Ka\ r i/xiwrepa 4v t$ o'ikcv ecn? (quo [quanto] melior 
— eo [tanto] honoratior, the — so much the). Hier. 1, 19. '6 <r a> av TrXeia ns ira- 
pa&r\rai ra. irepnra roov luavwv, roffovru bciffffov Kopos efxiriirTei rrjs iSwSrjS. 
Th. 8, 84. off co fiaXiffra Ka\ i\ev&epoi i\ffav vavrai, roffovrto Ka\ Srpaffv- 
rara irposireffSvres riv fuoSbv airrtTovv. The Superlative may also stand in 
the first member, the Comp.^in the last. Dem. 01. 1. 21, 12. offco y ap I to t- 
^6 rar' avrcfi (t<£ x6ytp) SoKOvjxev XPV (T ^ ai t roffovrw fxaWov airiffroOffi 
TrdvTts avT<f. 



$ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 555 

Remark 1. Sometimes to<tovtco is omitted, especially when the relative 
member of the comparison follows. PI. Gorg. 458, a. fj,e?£ov yap avjb aya- 
&bv 7)yov/j.cu, ocrcairsp fAe?£ov aya&6v iariv avrbv airaAAayrjvai ko.kov tov /xe- 
y((TTov fj &AAov airaWd^ai. Also after the omission of oaw — roa ovtu>, both 
clauses may be blended into one, e. g. X. C. 4. 1, 3. at ipurrai doKovdai dvai 
(pvaeis jxaKuna iraiSeias deourcu. 

Rem. 2. A comparative clause, introduced by &s, oircos, y (as), tiffov, and 
expressing a possibility, often serves to strengthen a superlative. X. C. 2. 2, 6. 
iiri/x^KovvTai ol yovels Trdvra tvoiovvtss, ftirovs ol Trcades avroTs yevwvrai iij Svva- 
rbv jSeATttrroi (as good as possible, quam fieri potest optimi). Cy. 7. 1, 9. rj 
av Sv ]/cofx.ai rdx^cra (as quick as possible). For the like purpose, also, 
of os, '6ti are used in connection with elvai. X. C. 4. 8, 11. iboicei toloutos 
elVcu, oTos av eXri 'dpicrrSs ye avyjp evdai/xoveo'Taros. The following 
elliptical expressions originate from the omission of the verb: is dpi err a 
olov %a\eTr <j3t ar ov, '6i 1 /ictAtcra, etc. (§ 239, Rem. 2). In the same 
manner, the expressions &s dAy&cos, in fact, really, &s drexvas, utterly, ws irdvv, as 
iirl to tto\v, plerumque, are to be explained ; also &s <zKa<rToi, i. e. eKaaroi, ws 
eKaarToi ?icrav. 

3. The inequality of the predicates compared, is expressed 
by appending to the Comparative a coordinate clause with the 
comparative particle r\. See h 323. 

Rem. 3. The relation of quantity is expressed by comparing the predicate 
of the principal clause, in respect to its magnitude or degree, with the conse- 
quence or effect of that clause, the consequence being expressed by a subordi- 
nate clause with usre and the Inf. If the degree of the predicate in the prin- 
cipal clause stands in an equal relation with its effect, then the predicate of the 
principal clause is in the positive, e. g. ovtws dv8pe?6s icrriv, &sre &av- 
^a^eo-^a:. But if the relation is unequal, i. e. if the predicate of the princi- 
pal clause is represented as one which exists in a higher degree than another 
standing with it, then the Comparative is used with ?) &sre and the Inf., e. g. 
ra naKa ixei^w icrriv, rj &sre av a/cAoie iv (greater than that one, i. e. too great 
to be bewailed). See § 341, 3, (a). 



CHAPTER IX. 

§ 344. I. Interrogative Sentences. 

1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence 
or dependent upon it, e. g. Has the friend co?ne ? and i" do not 
know whether the friend has come. The first is called a direct 
question, the last, indirect. Both may consist either of one 
member, or of two or more members, e. g. Has the friend come, 
or Has he not yet come ? Do you not know ivhether he is come or 
whether he is not coming ? According as the question refers to 
an object (person or thing) or to a predicate, the questions are 
divided into nominal and into predicative questions, e. g. who 



556 syntax. [§ 344. 

has done this ? (nominal question) , and hast thou written the 
letter! (predicative question). 

2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in which the 
inquirer wishes to receive an answer on a single word in the 
sentence (subject, attributive, or object), are introduced by the 
substantive, adjective, or adverbial interrogative pronouns, rts, 

7TQIOS, 7TOCTOS, 7TOTepOS, 7TO)?, TTTj, 7TOV, TToSl, 7TO$€V, 7r6(T€ } etc. If the 

nominal questions are indirect, then they are introduced by the 
interrogative pronouns (§ 93, Rem. 1.) compounded with a 
relative : osns, ottoios, O7roo-os, 07rorepos, 07ra)s, oir-q, oirov, 07ro$€V, 
OTroart, etc. 

Tls ^A&ej/; — Ti 7rote?s; — Tlo?6u ce %iros <pvyzv epicos bhSvrcov ; — FIcDs Ae- 
76is ", — n^cre (pevyere ; — Ou/c oTSa, #STis icrriv. — Ou/c oTSa, Sirwj rovro rb 
Trpayfxa eirpaj-ev. 

Remake 1. Often, however, the indirect question takes the character of 
the direct, and then the direct interrogative pronouns are used instead of the 
indirect. Sometimes, indeed, in clauses that immediately follow each other, 
the first clause takes the indirect interrogative, the last more seldom, the direct. 
Ovk olb~a, rls ravra eirpa^ev. X. C. 4. 6, 2. elire (xol — iro76v ri vofxi^is evcre- 
freiav elvai; yet there follows immediately, ex 6 '* °^ v cwglv, otto? 6s ris 6 eixre- 
fiys iariu; Comp. Rem. 2. PI. Crit. 48, a. ovk dpa tj/juv ovrw cppovriareov, ri 
ipovcriu ol iroWol 7]fxds, ctAA 3 o r i 6 iira'ioov trepl rcov ducalwv nal dS'iKwu. X. C. 4. 
4, 13. ov yap ala&dvo/j.ai o~ov, otto? op v6fj.ijj.ov, r/ tvoIov hinaiov Keyeis. — In 
indirect questions, the simple relative is sometimes used, instead of the indirect 
interrogative, e. g. os instead of ostls, oTos instead of dnoios, etc. 

Rem. 2. The adverb irore, like the Latin tandem, is sometimes appended 
to the interrogative, in order to express the impatience or desire of the inquirer 
for an answer, or to denote wonder, or emotion in general. X. C. 1. 1, 2. 
tto'lu) ir or ixp'ho'avro TeK/nypia) ; [what proof, I pray, did they bring?) 1. ?roA- 
XaKLs ebavfxaffa, riffi ttotg \6yois 'A&r)vaiovs eireiaav ol ypa.ipdfji.ei/oi ^.wKpdrriv, 
cos &£ios sXt) fravdrov rrj iroXei. R. L. 1, 1. i&av/j.acra, 6ru> Trore rpoirw rovr 
iyevero. 

Rem. 3. The article is prefixed to the interrogative, when one of the speak- 
ers has mentioned an object or quality, in order to define it more exactly, while 
the other does not expect this more exact definition, but interrupts the dis- 
course, and, by means of the article referring to that general definition, asks 
"what that means." PI. Phaedr. 277, a. Sco/cp. NO*/ 8r) 4Ke7va ^'877, 3> 3>a78p€, 
8vvdfJL6&a Kplveiv, rovrwv w/j.o\oy7]/j,eva}v. <2>. Ta iro7a; (in inference to the 
preceding e/cetVa). 279, a. 2«Kp. Neos en, £> <£a?5pe, "laoupdrrjs' b fxivroi fxav- 
revofxai Kar avroi), \4yeiv e$eAo>. <3>. T b iro7ov 877; So Ta iro7a ravra 
Xeyeis ; From this mode of expression, that is to be distinguished, in which a 
substantive with the article or a demonstrative follows an interrogative with- 
out an article. In this case, the inquiry relates to the nature or quality of an 
object already existing. II. tt, 440. tto7ov rbv fxvSov eenres ,■ which the 
Eng. translates by means of two sentences, " What is that word, that thou 
hast spoken 1 " The word is already spoken, and the other now asks what it 
means. Her. 7, 48. 8aifj.6vie a.vdpwv, Ko7a (= 7ro?a) ravra \eyeis elvai hvo /not. 
■7ro\€fxL6rara; [what are these two things which you say are most hostile to me?) 
PI. Gorg. 521, a. iirl iror epav ovv fxe irapaKaXzis rr\v frepdireiav rrjs irotews ; 
(= irorepa i<rr\v 77 frepdireia, £<p' H\v pte napaKa\e7s ;) 



§ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 557 

Eem. 4. In order to make the subject matter of the question emphatic, when 
there is an antithesis, or a transition in the discourse, the words which denote this 
subject matter are often taken from their own sentence and placed first with t i 
8 e, and then the predicate of the proper interrogative clause is commonly placed 
with a second interrogative. PL Rp. 341, d. ti 8e Kv$epvi]T7)s ; 6 bp&Cbs kv- 
$epvr\T-ns i/avTO>v apxoou iffr'tv, 7) vavTins ; Gorg. 502, a. t( Se 6 ivaT^p avrou MeXrjs ; 
■fj irpbs rb $eXTio~Tov f5Xiir<av iSdicei croi Ki&apu)8e?v ; 

Rem. 5. The expressions, rl fiafruv, ri Tra&dv, cur 1 ? why? always ex- 
press disapprobation or censure of that respecting which the question is asked. 
The former implies that the thing censured was done designedly ; the latter that 
it was done accidentally, e.g. Ti /xafribv tovto iiroi-nffas / (what has come into 
your mind to do this, with what object in view did you do this ?) Tt ira&cbv tovto 
itrol-no-as ; (quid expertus hoc fecisti ? what happened to you that you did this ?) PI. 
Apol. 36, b. t'l a£i6s elpn irc&eiv, $) a7roT?o~ai, '6t 1 /xa&cov eVnjj ySico ovx yo'vxiav 
?iyov ; ( what punishment do I deserve, that 1 purposely have had no rest in my life ? ) . 

Rem. 6. A rhetorical turn of the Greek language, of frequent recurrence, 
consists in suddenly changing a subordinate clause, introduced by a conjunc- 
tion, into a direct interrogative clause, yet in such a way that the earlier con- 
struction remains unaltered. In such a case, the Eng. changes the subordinate 
clause into the principal, and the principal into the subordinate. X. C. 1. 4, 
14. o~v 8e a/ji.<poTeptov tcov irXeicrTov a^ioov T6Tu%7j/ccbs ovk otei o~ov Sreovs eTTL/xeXe?cr- 
&a£, aXX' 0-to.v t'i it o t7j cr co a 1, vo/jueis avTovs o~ov (ppovTi^eiv ; (but what must the 
gods do, to make you believe that they care for thee ?). Dem. Phil. 1. 43, 10. it6t€ 
& XPV 7rp«|eTe ; iireiSav tl yevnT ai; (but what must take place if you are to 
do your duty?). Hence the elliptical expressions, 'Lua t{ ; us tI/ (sc. yevn- 
tcu) to what purpose, for what object? '6tl tL/ (sc. yiyveTai), on what ground? 
So also in the adjective-clause, e. g. PI. Phaed. 105, b. et yap epoio pe, § av tl 
iv tw acafxaTL eyy evr\T ai, hepphv ecrTcu, ov tt)i> aacpaXrj croi epa> air6Kpio~iv (if 
you would ask in what condition of body he must be, so that it might be warm ?) So 
also ri ov is inserted in the midst of clauses without change of construction 
(nihil non). Dem. Cor. 241, 47. v^pL^o/xevcov Kal t'i kolkov oi>xl Traax^Tav 
iraaa rj olKOVfxevy] fiecrTT] yeyove irpoSoTwv. 

Rem. 7. The Greek may place two, or even more interrogatives, without 
tcai, under one common predicate, e. g. Has tl ap av ayuvL^oifxeba ; (how and 
what?). [Comp. Eng. '•'•what and what manner of time," two. % irolov KaipSv, 1 
Pet. 1 : 11.] PI. Rp. 400, a. Trola 8' otto'lov fitov fiifxyfiaTa, ovk €%« XeyeLV 
(what imitations and. of what life?). Dem. Cor. t'ls t'lvos oXti6s ecrrt; So 
also with the relative. Isocr. Archid. 124, 42. t'ls ovk oTSev, i£ o'lcav ^vfxcpopwv 
els oarjv evSai/xoviav KaTecn-no'av. 

Rem. 8. Both the relatives and interrogatives in Greek are very often con- 
nected with a participle. Thus a great brevity in expression is effected ; the 
Eng. in this case changes the Part, together with the interrogative or relative 
belonging to it, into a principal clause, and the finite verb into a subordinate 
clause. X. C. 3. 7, 3. t^v 5e 4fi))V 8vvapt.LV, ecp-n 6 XapfiiS-ns, iv iroiq) epya> /ca- 
Ta/j.a&cb v TavTa fiov KaTayiyvdocrKeLs ; (by what work hast thou learned my ability, 
so that thou couldst pass such a sentence about me?). The Greek may also insert 
an interrogative clause between the article and the participle belonging to it, 
and in this way blend the two questions into one. X. C. 2. 2, 1. KaTa/j.e/j.d&r)Kas 
ovv tovs tl iTOLouvTas to ovofxa tovto airoKaXovo'i ; instead of KaTa/j.e/u.d^7]Kas, 
Tivas tc> ovojxa tovto aTroKaXovaiv, Kal tl ttolovo'lv ovtol, ovs rb ovofia tovto airoK- 
aXovaiv ; 

3. Predicative questions, i. e. those where the inquirer de- 
sires only an affirmation or denial to his inquiry, are expressed 
in English merely by placing the finite verb first and by the 

47* 



558 syntax. [$ 344. 

accentuation, e. g. Art thou sick? Hast thou seen thy friend? 
In Greek, also, the predicative question is indicated, in the first 
place, merely by the tone of the question and the position of 
the words, the word on which the stress of the question lies, 
being placed first in the sentence ; still this mode of expression 
is not very common; it is used most frequently, when the ques- 
tion involves a certain degree of emotion. 

Od. e, 204. ovtu) 8t) oi/coVSe <pi\r\v is irarpida yaiav avr'iKa vvv efreAets Uvai ; 
This is found very often with negatives, e.g.OuK i&4\eis \kvai; 

4. In the second place, the predicative question is introduced 
by certain interrogative s ; this is the more common usage. In 
indirect questions, these interrogatives are translated by ivhether. 
When the predicative question consists of more than one mem- 
ber, and of such a nature that one member is excluded by the 
other {disjunction, § 323), then one of the interrogatives stands 
in the first member, while rj, or {an), stands in the second and 
following members. 

5. The interrogatives in the predicative questions are the 
following : — 

(a)' T H implies an asseveration (§ 316, 2), and hence is used when it is sup- 
posed that that which forms the subject of the question actually exists. X. Cy. 
1. 4, 19. -f\ ovtoi, 3> 7ra7T7re, iroXsfxio'i eiatv, ot icpear-fiKaai to?s 7]p4jxa] IloAe^ioi- \xiv 
toi, e(/)7j. PI. Pp. 341, e. ?i op&ws (Toi Sokw, ecpnu, av eliretp ovtw \eyu>v, ^ oij ; 
'OpSws, e<pn. Very often used in connection with other particles, e. g. pA\v 
(§ 316, 1), 877, l-h ttov (§ 315. 1, 2), S^ra (§ 315, 3), apa, yap [§ 324, 2, 3, (a)], 
Kai, ttov (§ 316, 2), 7rou apa. X. 0. 4, 23. rl \eyeis, 3> Kvpe ; ^ yhp &ir 
rals aals x e P a ^ ^ovtwv ri icpvrevcras ; (Now did you actually plant any of these 
with your own hands ?). ? H ydp; (is it not true ?). PL Hipp. Min. 363, c. ij yap, 
5 'linrla, idi/ ri ipccraae ^wKpdrrjs, airoKpive? ; ? H ttov; (surely? surely indeed?). 
PI. Lysid. 207, d. ^ ttov, -f)v 8' iyco, 3) Avert, acpo^pa (pi\e7 ere o irar-rip nal 7] jx^r-qp] 
Udw ye, t 8' '6s. Still, ^ it o v is also used when the inquirer would express 
doubt whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned. 
Eur. Med. 695. % ttov Tsr6\p.nK ipyov aXcrx^Tov Td'Se ; (has Jason indeed, 
actually dared this thing ?). 

(b) ^Apa (only post-Homeric) originates from the inferential dp a, igitur 
[§ 324,3, (a)], and hence implies the idea of consequence, effect ; by frequent 
use, however, the appropriate meaning (igitur), becomes weakened and ob- 
scured : hence the inferential particles dp a, ovv are sometimes added to a 
question introduced by apa. ^Apa leaves it undecided, whether the inquirer 
expects an affirmative or negative answer. Hence, when it is to be definitely 
indicated, that either an affirmative or a negative answer is expected, then in 



$ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 559 

the first case, ap ov (nonne), is used; in the last case, apa pi) (num., whether? 
is it not?) ; /xi) always expresses solicitude, fear. X. C. 3. 6, 4. ap" ecprj 6 'ZwKpdrrjs, 
cbsirep, cpiXov oIkov el av^rjcrai fiovkoio, irAovcnoorepov abrbv iirixeipoirjs av iroirjcrai ; 
IIoi/ /xev oZv, ecprj. 10,1. apa, ecprj, d> Uappdaie, ypacpiKi] ecrriv rj eiKacria 
rciov opwfxevoov ; — 'AArj&rj A e ye is, ecprj. 2.6,16. ap' ovv oTcr&d rivas, ot avoo- 
cpeAeh ovres wcpeAi/xovs hvvavrai cp'iAovs ■xoie7a£rai ; Ma Af ov drjr' ecprj. 3.13, 
3. ap' ovv, ecprj, Kal o'lKerai crov &x&ovrai "nivovres re avrb Kal Aovofxevoi avrcS ; 
Ma rbv At", ecprj (profecto non aegre ferunt). 4. 2, 22. ap' ovv 8ia rrjv rov %aA- 
tceveiv a/xa&iav rod ovSfxaros rovrov rvyxdvovaiv ; Ov Srjra. 1.5,4. apa ye 
o v xph trdvra avSpa, rjyrjad/xevov rrjv eytcpdretav aperrjs thai KprjmSa, ravrrjv 
irpwrov ev rfj ipvxf) KaracrKevdcracrStai ; (nonne certe). 2.6,34. apa /xrj 8za/3aA- 
Aecr&ai S6^eis vir' euov ; 4. 2, 10. ri Se 5r? t3ovA6/xevos ayaSbs yevecr&ai, ecprj, & Ev- 
Svb*r)jxe, crvAKeyeis ra ypd/x/xara ; — T A pa /xrj larpos ; ecprj • — Kal 6 Ev&vdrjfxos ■ 
Ma At", ecprj, ovk eycoye. 0. 4,4. Spa prj alax^v^rcapev rov Uepcrav ^acriKea 
/xt/x-ncracrSrai ; Double question : PI. Euthypbr. 9, e. dp a rb ocriov, on ocriSv ecrri, 
cpiXeirai virb rwv &ecov, 'rj, on cpiXeirai, ocriSv ecrri ; (is then that which is holy loved 
by the gods because it is holy, or is it holy because it is loved ?) 

(c) Maij/ (probably originating from fi-h and the confirmative ovu, § 316, 
Rem.), corresponds entirely to the Latin num, is it not ? is it so ? whether ? and 
hence always leads one to expect a negative answer. For the sake of perspi- 
cuity, the particles ovv and /xr) are often added, e. g. /x£>v ovv, /xwv /xi). But 
if the negative oh is added to fxwv, then the question is affirmative (nonne). PI. 
Lysid. 208, c. aAA' dpx^i- tIs crov ; "Ode rraiSaycoySs, ecprj. Ma>v SovAos &v ; (but 
not a slave, is he ?) Eur. Hec. 754. ri xprj/xa [xacrrevovcra ; fxeov eAev&epov aldva 
&ecr&ai ; pddiov yap earl trot. Hecuba answered : O v drjra • robs KaKobs Se rifxca- 
pov/xevrj alccva rbv £v/xiravra dovAevcrai 3-eAco. Eur. An dr. 82. fxoov ovv SoKe7s 
o~oi cppovricrai riv ayyeAcov ,• PI. Phaed. 84, C. ri, ecprj, vyuv ra Xex^evra ; fx 5> v 
fj.r] SoKeT evSeaJs Xeyea^aL; — 'Ev ols ri XPV V "KOielv efxe ; jxwv ou% airep iwoiovv; 
(nonne, quod faciebam ?) 

(d) There is the same difference between ov and /xtj when used without 
S.pa, as when used with it, see (b) : i. e. ov is used in affirmative questions, /x-fi in 
negative. , Ok e&eAeis levai; (non or nonne vis ire ? do you not wish to go ?) PI. 
Prot. 309, a. oif crv fxevroi 'Ofxrjpov eiraiverr]s el; (are you not in fact an eulogist? 
on /xevroi, see § 316, Rem.). On ovkovv (nonne igitur) and oHkovv (nonne 
certe) in a. question, see § 324, Rem. 7. X. C. 4. 2, 10. dAAa [xt] apxireKruv 
fiovhei yevecr&ai ; Ovk ovv eycoy, e<pr). 'AAAa fj.7) yeco/xerprjs eiri&vfxeis, e<prj, 
yeveoSaL aya&6s ; Ovde yecouerprjs, ecprj ktA. 2, 12. /x^ ovv, ecpr] 6 Ev^vSrj/xos, 
ov dvvwjxai eych ra rrjs SiKaiocrirvns epya e^riyhcracr^rai ; (shall I not be unable, etc.? 
the negative ov belongs to the single word Svvca/xai). This interrogative /x-n is 
used very often in an indirect question, after expressions of considering, ask- 
ing, inquiring, of solicitude and fear. It appropriately means, whether not, but in 
Eng. can be often translated by that. X. C. 4. 2, 39. cppovri(ca, /xr] Kparicrrov 
fj ixoi criyav (I am anxious whether it is not best). For more examples of fxr) and 
also for the construction, see § 318, Rem. 6. 

(e) Elra and eireira, and more emphatically k a r a, k 'awe it a, introduce 



560 syntax. [§ 344. 

questions of astonishment, indignation, and irony. They express antithesis or 
contrast, and yet, since they show that an unexpected conclusion has been 
drawn from a previous thought (§ 312, Eem. 8). X. C. 1. 4, 11. el "toSn, eepn, 
'6ri, el vofxi^oip.i &eovs av&pcviroou ri eppovri^eiv, ovk av d/xeXoivv avruv. 2. "E it e i r 
ovk oUi eppovri^eiv ; oi irpwrov fiev piovov ru>v £acov &v&peoTrov op&bv dvecrrvarav KrX. 
(and yet do you not think that they do care for men 1 ?). Cy. 2. 2, 31. K&ireira 
roiovrov ovra ov epiXe?s avrov j 

(f) Uorepov (ir6repa) — 1j (Homer % — ij) is used like the Latin utrum — 
an, in direct and indirect double questions. Uorepov is sometimes omitted in 
the first member. X. C. 2. 3, 6. Kal 6 HeaKparys eep-n' It ore pa Se, & XaipeKpa- 
res, ovdevl apeerai Svvarai Xaipeepuv, r) ecrriv oTs Kal irdvv apeerKei; Cy. 3. 1, 12. 
ri Se, t)v xPW aTa noWa, exV> eas TrXovreiv, t) irevnra iroiels ; C. 1.4, 6. ravra 
ovrec TrpovovriKws TTZTrpa.yiJi.eva, airopeis, tt or epa rvxys, t) yvwjxns epya early ; 

(g) "A Wo r i tf (arising from &XXo ri iern or yiyverai, % or yevoir av, ij) and 
&XXo Ti,has the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4. 7, 5. dx Xo ri t) ovoev 
KecXvei irapievat ; (does anything else than nothing hinder = does anything hinder ?) 
PI. Hipparch. 236, e. a Wo ri ovv o'l ye epiXoKepSels epiXoveri rb KepSos ; 

(h) y H, like the Lat. an, is properly used only in the second member of the 
question ; but often the first member is not expressed in form, but is contained 
in what precedes or may be easily supplied from it. "U can then be translated 
by perchance. X. C. 2. 3, 14. iravr dpa o~v ye ra iv av&pdnrois ep'iXrpa eTrierrdpie- 
vos iraXai aTreKpinrrov • t) onvels, eepr\, ap^ai, p.)) alcrxpbs (pavfjs, idv rrporepos rbv 
dSeXepbv ev Troifjs ; ( = i) apa — cnreitpvirrov, t) oKvets — •;) 

(i) El and idv [with the Subj., comp. § 339, 2, II, (b)], whether, is used only 
in indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in double questions, and de- 
notes a wavering or doubting between two possibilities ; but often only ono 
member is expressed, while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. 
Hence el and idv are especially used after verbs of reflecting, deliberating, inquir- 
ing, asking, trying, knowing, and saying. The connection must determine whether 
the interrogative sentence has an affirmative sense (whether — not), or a nega- 
tive one (whether). X. An. 7. 3, 37. CKerpai, el 6 'EXX-nvcov vo/jlos naXXiov exet, 
(whether — not). C. 1. 1, 8. ovre rep crrpar-nyiKcp SrjXov, el (whether) ervpiepepei 
crparvye?v ovre rep iroXiriKep SrjXov, el (whether) erv/Jiepepei. rrjs iroXeeas 
irpoerrareiv • ovre rep KaXyv yfj/xavri, 'Lv eveppaivnrai, SyXov, el (whether — 
not) did ravrnv dvidcrerai, ovre rep dvvarobs ev rrj iroXei tevdecrrds Xaflovri otjXov, 
el (whether — not) Sid rovrovs arepr^rerai rr\s troXews. C. 4. 4, 12. crueipai, idv 
ToSe col fxdXXov a peer an. PL Apol. 18, a. deo/uai vp.wv rovrep rbv vovv irpose- 
Xeiv, el SiKaia Xeyeo, r) fxr). — On el after verba affectuum, see § 329, Rem. 7. 

Rem. 9. Very frequently, especially in Homer, verbs which express some 
action, are constructed with this deliberative idv with the Subj. and el with 
the Opt. (Epic e3f zee, at zee), in which case a verb like ffKoireiv, ireipdcrfrai, 
is to be supplied by the mind. Th. 1, 58. UoriSaidrai eirepctyav fiev Kal trap 
ASrjvaiovs irpeerfSeis, eX ireas tt e i er e i a v (having sent envoys to the Athenians [to see, 
to ascertain] "whether they could persuade them). II. v, 172.yXavm6eav 5' l&vs epepe- 
rai /xevei, r\v riva tt eepvy dvSpevv. 

(k) Eire — e?re are used in indirect questions like el — tf, except that 



$ 344. J INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 561 

by efre — ei're the indecision and hesitation of the speaker between two possi- 
bilities, are made more prominent. S. Ant. 38. /ecu oei^is rdxa, e?T evyevfo 
neepvKas, sir ia&Awv kq.k-{\. The poets also say drs — 77, or et — etVe, or they 
omit the first elVe altogether. 

6. On the use of Modes in interrogative sentences, the fol- 
lowing points are to be noted : The Ind. is used in direct and 
indirect questions ; it is also used after pr) in indirect questions, 
when the interrogator wishes to express his conviction, that 
that which is the object of his anxiety or fear actually exists. 
The Subj. and Opt. are used in deliberative questions [$ 259, 1, 
(b), and 2] ; but the Opt. also (after an Hist, tense), when the 
question is to be represented as the sentiment of another ($ 345, 
4), and also when the question depends on a clause expressing 
a wish ($333, 5). The Opt. with av and the Ind. of the histor- 
ical tenses with av, are used as in principal clauses, § 260, 2, 
(2) and (4). 

Tl hey e is j (Also in questions expressing wonder or astonishment, the 
Greeks use the Ind., e. g. ireos olda; (how could I know 1 ?) — Etire, '6ti Ae- 
yeis; Th. 3, 53. (po@ovp.6&a, p.'r) ap.<porepoov ?? p-aprrj icap-ev. X. Cy. 3. 1, 27. 
opa, p.)] itcdvovs av derjaei ce (Too(ppovi^eiv ert p.a\\ov, r) r)p.as vvv ide-ncrev. Tt 
e'lircop.e v; (what can we say, ichat are we to say ?) — Ouk oloa, o t t elirwuev 
(I know not what we can, shall say). Od. e, 473. odSco, pLrj fr-qpecrcriv eAap Kal 
Kvpp.a y euoo p. at. (that I shall become). X. C. 4. 2, 39. <ppov7i(co, p.)) KpaTurrov 
■q p.oi (Tiyav ( whether it is not best). Ovk elxov, 'on oi r pair oip.t]v. PI. Up. 614, 
b. avafiatovs ekeyev, a e'/ce? t 5 o i (what he had seen there). 9 Apd p.oi ifreA-ncrats 
av elireTu (sc. e'/ ere epcorw-nv) ; X. An. 6. 1. 28. iKtivo ivvow, /u,t/ \iav av rax" 
craxppov icr3- e 1 77 v. C. 4. 2, 30. irphs ah cWo/3Ac-7ra>, et p.01 £§r eATjcr ais av 
i£r)yri<Ta(T&ai (sc. et /3ouAcno). — ^Apd ere eiveicra av (sc. ei' a 1 ravra eAe|a) ; 
(persuasissemne tibi?) X. Apol. 28. cru 8e', S> cpiKrare 'AiroAAoooope, p.a\Kov av 
efiovAov p.e opav diKaioos, >n aSiKcos airo&vfjo-KOVTa j (vellesne?) Ovk old ejf &e 
e ire tcr a 'a v. 

Hem. 10. On p.r) (ivhether — not) with the Opt. after a principal tense, see 
§ 345, Rem. 2. On the Ind. of the principal tenses, and also on the Subj. af- 
ter an historical tense, see § 345, 5. When the Subj. is followed by an Opt., then 
the latter, as in final clauses (§ 330, 3), expresses the more remote thought. II. 
■tt, 650. sq. <ppd(eTO &vp.<£ . . p.ep/xrjpi(aiu, 7) 7?5tj Kal kzivov. "EKTwp x aAtc V 877 cocr?/ 
air6 t 6!>p.ojv reuxe' e A 77 r cu, rj en ical irhrjoveffo-iv ocpeAAeiev irSvov alirvv. 

7. The answer made to predicative questions by yes) is com- 
monly expressed by repeating the word which contains the sub- 
stance of the question. The answer made by no, is usually 
expressed by prefixing ov to the word which contains the sub- 
stance of the question. Yes is also expressed by vat, vr) rov 



562 syntax. [§ 345. 

Aia, 7rdvv, Kapra, cv and the like, (farj/Ai, cf>rj(A eyw, eyw with- 
out <f>r)fJLi', and wo, by ov, ov <f>r)/xt, ovk eyw. Commonly also 
strengthening adverbs are joined with the words which answer 
a question: ye ($ 317, 2), e. g. eyioye, ovk 4'ywye; yap ($ 324, 2), 
rot (§ 317, 3), ixivrot ($ 316, Rem.), oSv [§ 324, 3, (b)], ^aev- 
o{5j/ ($316, Rem.). The answer to nominal questions is made 
by naming the object respecting which the inquiry is made. 

Eur. Hipp. 1395, sq. 6 pas fj.e, 8e<riroiv, &s exa>, Tbu afrXiov; — 'Opw. lb. 90, 
sq. ol<r& ovv, fSpoToiffiy us Kab£o-T7}Kev vo/xos ; — Ovk olSa. X. C. 4. 6, 14. 
<py s (tv aixeivoo iro\'iT7]v elvai, %v crv iiraiveis, rj %v iyd ; — ^» 77 /x I yap oZv. 



§ 345. II. Oblique or Indirect Discourse. 

1. When the words or thoughts of a person, whether the 
second or third person or the speaker himself, are again re- 
peated, unaltered, in precisely the same form as they icere 
stated by us or another person, then the discourse or thought 
quoted, being independent of any view or representation 
of the narrator, is called direct discourse (oratio recta), e. g. I 
thought: peace has been "concluded. The messenger an- 
nounced: peace has been concluded, — or without a preced- 
ing verb : peace has been concluded. 

2. When the words are not repeated in the precise form in 
which they were first spoken, but are referred to the rep- 
resentation of the narrator, and thus are made to depend 
upon a verb of perception or communication (verbum sen- 
tiendi or declarandi), standing in the principal clause, the 
discourse is called indirect {oratio obliqud), e. g. We believed, 
that peace was concluded. The messenger announced, that 
peace was concluded. 

3. The principal clauses of direct discourse, to which also 
belong clauses introduced by coordinate conjunctions, e. g. 
Koi, Se, yap, ovv, kclltol, etc., are expressed in oblique discourse, 
when they contain a simple affirmation or an opinion, and de- 
note something which happens, has happened, or will happen: 
(a) either by the Ace. with the Inf. ($ 307, 6), or by on and 
is with the finite verb ($ 329), or even by the participle \h 310, 
4> ( a )3> e - g- 'E7r^yy€{Ae tovs 7roXe/x6ovs Lizo^vytiv — OTl ol 



§ 345.] OBLIQUE OR INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 563 

TroXe/xiot 6,7rocfivyoL€v — tovs TroXcfJLiovs aTrcxfrvyovTas; "when 
they express a command, wish, or desire: (b) by the Inf. and 
in continued oratio obliqua by 8e2v, xpw a <> with the Inf., more 
seldom by the Inf. alone., ($ 306), e. g. "EAe|e rot? o-r/oaTiwrat? 
€7ri#ecr#ai rots 7roAe/xiois {oratio recta, e7n$ecr#e). 

Remark 1. Intermediate clauses of the oratio obliqua. and particularly such 
as are connected with the preceding by yap, although they are grammatically 
principal clauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the Opt. without any 
conjunction to introduce them ; commonly a sentence expressed by on or &s 
with the Opt. or by the Ace with the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7. 3, 13. eXeyov iroXXol 
Kara rajrd, on iraurbs a*-ja, Xiyoi 2ev,cbjs • x et ^^ ydp e It), koX ovre o'tnao'e diro-KXeiv 
rcf fSouXoixesw SvvaTiv eXrj, k. t. A. H. 3. 2, 23. d-KOKpivafjihwv Se r&v 'HAeiW, 
on ou iroiT]aetau nxvra- i-iriXy'iSas yap %x oi * v Tas ttSXgis ' eppovpav ecprji/av ol 
ecpopoi. 

4. The subordinate clauses of direct discourse, undergo no 
change in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical 
tense in the principal clause, they take the Opt. in the place of 
the Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre- 
sented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub- 
ordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of 
the person spoken of, and not that of the narrator. "Av, which 
is joined with the Opt. and Ind. of the historical tenses, still 
remains in" indirect discourse. 

X. An. 7. 1, 33. (KoipardSris) eXeyev, '6n eroifxos e?r] T}yeio~Sai axiTols . ., ev&a 
iroXXa Ka\ ayaSa X^oiuro {oratio recta: eroLjj.6s el/xi . . , ev&a Xtyecr&e). Ag. 1, 
10. Ticrcra<p€pvT]s &p.ocrev 'AyrjaiXdcv, el o-ireio~aiT o, koos eA.&oiey, ovs tt4(x~ 
\peie irpbs @ao'i\4a ayye.Xovs, Stair pd£eo~&ai avrcp dcpefrrtvai avrou6fj.ovs ras if Trj 
'Affia irSxeis 'EXXrjuiSas (oratio recta : Hav (Tiretari, ecas av eXSwaiv, ovs ire/Aipa . . 
diarrpd^Ofxai). 

Rem. 2. "When, however, the subordinate clauses of direct discourse would 
be expressed by the Ind. of an historical tense, the Ind. remains even in indi- 
rect discourse, because the Opt. would leave it undetermined, whether in direct 
discourse the Ind. of a principal tense, or the Ind. of an historical tense had 
been used. X. An. 7. 7, 55 ot o-rpancorai eXeyou, cbs sLzvotywi' 6tx 0LT0 npbs 2eu- 
&i]v olni)o-u>v Kai a vtr etr x 6T ° avroi airoXr]ip6 l uepos (oratio recta: H. oi%eTo irpbs 
2. a vir 4o~ x er ° diroXrj^o/aeuos). X. C. 2. 6, 13. yfcovaa, on UepiKXris iroXXas 
(iiradds) eirio-rairo, as iiraSwu rfj ir6Xei iiroiei avTr)u <piXeiv ahr6v (oratio recta: 
n. iiriararai, as . . eiroiei). But subordinate clauses with on (quod, quia) fol- 
low the principal rule (No. 4). X. H. 7. 1, 34. €?xe (rieAo7ri&as) Xeyeiv, us Aa/ce- 
Saiiu6vioi Sid rovro TroXepA}0~Giav ahroiis (to7s &r)@aiois), on outc e SreXi)a ai ev 
fxer 'AyqaiXdov iX&e'iv eV avr6v (rbv jQacnAea), oratio recta: A. Sid tovto iiro' 
X4jxt](rav, c 6n ovk i)&eXT\o~av. The reason why the Greek avoids the Subj. in 
indirect discourse after a principal tense, is, that it always uses its Subj. only 
with reference to the Future [§ 257, 1, (a)]. But the use of the Opt. after a 
principal tense is inappropriate, because this, as being the Subj. of the histor- 
ical tenses, always accompanies the historical tenses. There are, however, a 
few single examples, in which the Opt. follows a principal tense. But then a 



564 syntax. [$ 345. 

thought is quoted as the sentiment of another, who, at the moment of quota- 
tion, is to be represented as one no longer present. Her. 7, 103 op a, p^ /xdrnv 
k6/xttos 6 x6yos 6 eipripi.e'vos eX-n [whether the statement made was not idle boasting). 
X. Oy. 2. 4, 17. &v tis e/ce?cre e^ayyei Xv dij, a s iyw /8 o v X o I p. r\ v p.eyaXr\v frf)- 
pav TToir,aai (if any one announces there, that J JNTENDED). C. 1. 2. 34. el p.ev 
yap (rr,v rav X6yav rexvnv) CTVl ' T0 ' s bp&as (Xeyo/xevois tivai vop.i(ovres a/re'xetr&at 
KeXevere), STjXov on dtpeKreov eXy rov op&as Xeysiv [if you mean that philosophy 
is net to be used in reasoning right, it is evident that it was your view, that we 
must abstain from reasoning right). Hence if the Greek, after a principal tense, 
wishes to represent a statement as the sentiment of another person, it must use 
the Ace. with the Inf. instead of on with the Subj. Thus, e. g. the English 
phrase. He says that we are immortal, is not to be expressed in Greek by Xeyet, 
on 7)/j.e?s b&dvaroi ap.ev, or on rj. a&. elp.ev, but by Ae^et rip. as d&avd- 
tovs el pa i. — In hypothetical Protases with el and the ind.. the Ind. remains. 

Bem. 3. The oblique discourse is sometimes used even in the subordinate 
clauses of direct discourse, when the speaker wishes to bring forward an ex- 
pression or thought, not in his oivn person, but as the sentiment of another. Her. 
7, 2. etrraaiaCpv (ol Tra7Ses), 6 piev ^Aprafia^dvns, Karon ■Kpecrfivrar6s re eXr) irav- 
rbs rov yovov, not on vopii^6jxeva el 7) irpbs rrdvrav dv&pdoirav, rbv Trpeafivrarov 
tV apxV ^X eLV ' Ee'pl??* Se, as 'Arocravs re ttcus eXv, Kal on Kvpos eXr) 6 Krrj<rd/x- 
evos rotcri nepawai rr\v eXev&nplnv : 

Eem. 4. When the Opt. of oblique discourse is used instead of the Subj. of 
direct discourse, all the conjunctions may be connected with &v. Th. 8, 54. Kal 
i\l/vcpicravro irXevcravra rbv TleiaavSpov Kal SeKa dvSpas pier avrov irpdcrcreiv, S rr ■p 
av avrols SoKoiv &pio~ra h£eiv. X. H. 2. 4, 18. 6 jxdvns Trap-fjyyeiXev avroh, pi)j 
TrpSrepov imri&ea&ai, rrplv av rwv crcperepav 7} rceaoi ris, 77 rpwSreirj. 5.4, 
47. eiceXeve rrpoKaraXafietv re &Kpov Kal (pvXarreiv, ecus av avrbs eX&oi. 

5. Very often, however, in Greek the oblique discourse takes 
the form of the direct, since even after an historical tense in 
the principal clause, the predicate of the subordinate clause is 
expressed by the Ind. of the principal tenses and by the Subj., 
as in direct discourse. The actions and representations be- 
longing to the past, are thus transferred to the present time of 
the speaker, and assume a more direct and definite character 
than if they were stated in the form of indirect discourse 
($ 327, Rem. 2). 

X. Cy. 2. 2, 1 . del pXv olv iirepieXero 6 Kvpos, oir6re crvaKr)vo?ev, Sir as ei>xapi<r- 
r6raroi \6yoi i pi fix -n&r) era vr a 1. Comp. § 327, Rem. 2. H. 2. 3, 2. eSo^e r$ 
8'hp.a rpiaKOvra kXeabai, 0? robs irarpiovs vo/xovs £vyy p d\p v cr 1, /ca&' ovs iro- 
Xirevaovcri. Her. 1, 1G3. i Ke Xev e rrjs eavrov x^PV^ oiKeiv, kov fiovXov 
rai. Th. 2, 4. ol YlXarairjS e fiovXevovr 0, eXre KaraKavcovoriv, ftsirep 
exouo-i;/, ifiTTprjaavres rb oXK-np-a, eXre n &XXo xp^^ovrai. 1, 107. e8o£e 8' 
auT0?s aKetyaa&ai, Sra rp6ira acrpaXecrrara 8 tan pev crovr ai. Her. 1, 29. 
SpKioiai p.eydXoiai /car elxovr 'A&nvaloi, SeKa erea xpTjcrea&cu vSfxoiai, robs &v 
aepi ~S,6Xav Sr}rai. X. Cy. 4. 5, 36. robs linrcas e K eXevv e (pvXarreiv robs dya- 
yovras, eas &v ris o"t\\xdv)j. H. 2. 1, 25. Avcravdpos Se rds rax^ras rav veav 
("KdXevcrev cTrecr&ai ro?s 'A&7]valois' eneiSav Se eKfiacri, Kand6vras '6 Tt 
iroiovaiv, diroirXe'lv. On on, as (that), see § 329, 4 and Rem. 3. 






§ 346.] ELLIPSIS. — BRACHYLOGY. 565 

Eem. 5. The Imperfect (seldom the Plupf.) Indicative, referring to the his- 
torical tense of the principal clause, is sometimes used instead of the Pres. 
(Perf ), in a subordinate clause which is associated with other subordinate 
clauses in the Opt. X. An. 1. 2, 2. Kvpos robs (puydSas e/ce'Aeucre abv avrw crrpa- 
revecr&ai, virocrx^evos avro7s, el KaKoos ko.t air pd^eiev, i<p' a 4 a r parev e ^ o, ^ 
trpoaSe v Travaaa&ai, irplv avTobs Karaydyoi ofxaSe. (Oratio recta: edv Karairpd^cc, 
4<p y a (TTpar€vop.ai, ov irp. rraucro/JLai, irp\v av bjxas Karaydyoi). But the Ind. is also 
used in the subordinate clauses of oblique discourse, when the narrator intro- 
duces his own remarks and explanations into the statement or thought of 
another, or when the thoughts in the subordinate clause do indeed belong to 
the statement or idea of another, but are to be exhibited as definite facts or as 
general truths, or when the thoughts of the other are to be represented, at the 
same, time, as those of the narrator. In oblique discourse, the Ind. and Subj. 
are often interchanged with the Opt. Then there is a mingling of the direct 
and indirect discourse in order to form a contrast between the certainty, reality, 
fact, and directness expressed by the two former, and the uncertainty, possibility, 
mere conception, and indirectness denoted by the latter. X. An. 2. 3, 6. e\eyov 
on elicora SoxoTev Keyeiv /3acnAe?, koI fyicoiev Tjye/xSvas exovres, °^ avrovs, 
iav at o-rcovDal y evcavr ai, a£ovaiv, ev&ev e^ovai ra eirirrjSeia. 3. 5, 13. 
ftfioioi l]<rav &av;Ad(ovres, biroi irore r pety ovrai oi "EWrjves, Kal ri 4v v$ 
eX 0l * v - 

6. The Greek can also use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of 
the finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses. 

Her. 6, 117. avSpa ol doxeeiv &ir\lrr)v avricrrrjvaL fxeyav, rod (instead of ov) 
rb yiveiov r\\v acnrlSa Tracrav cuidfeiv. 6, 84. S/cu^ay (sc. (petal) robs vo/xddas, 
iffei re vcpi Aape7ov e s flaAe7v is r)]v x&pr\v, \xerb. ravra fie/xovevai jJ.iv riffaff' 
&ai (postquam invasisset). Th. 4, 98. ot'A&rjvcuoi ecpaaav, el fxev eiwrXeov 81/P77- 
& rival ttjs ifceivoov nparr\o'ai, rovr av ex^v ( SI omnpliorem illorum agri partem in 
suam potestatem redigere possent se earn retenturos). See Larger Grammar, 
Part II, § 849. 

Rem. 6. The spirited mode of representation among the Greeks, and the 
desire to make past events appear as present, often changes the indirect dis- 
course into direct, or the direct into the indirect. In the first case, there is of- 
ten an interchange of person, comp. ^ 329, Rem. 3. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. ivrav&a 
877 rbv Kvpov yeXdcrai re 4k ra>v irpScrktev SaKpvoov Kal elire7v avTcp airi6vra frafyeTv, 
on Trapearai avrois b\lyov xp^vov &sre Spav c 1 i^earai, Kav jSouA.77, aaicap- 
dap.v<reL On the contrary, An. 7. 1, 39. 4\&cbv Se K\eavdpos' Md\a /xo\is, e(pr], 
$i.airpa£dp.evos rjKW Xeyetv yap 'Ava£ifiiov, '6n ovk iirirrjdeiov eXi), k. t. A. 



III. Special peculiarities in the construction of 

WORDS AND SENTENCES. 

$ 346. Ellipsis. Brachylogy {Zeugma). Contraction. 
Pleonasm. 

1. Ellipsis is the omission of a sentence or a part of a sen- 
tence which is logically subordinate, and hence of less impor- 
tance, but viewed grammatically, must necessarily be supplied 
in order to express an idea or thought. The idea of the omit- 

48 



566 syntax. ~ r (§ 346. 

ted woid can only be of a very general and indefinite nature^ 
and is frequently contained in the idea of the qualifying word, 
as, e. g. ol Svtjtol (sc. aV#pw7roi), r} avpiov (sc. rjfjiepa), or is evident 
from the context or frequent usage, as e. g. in eis SkWkoAov 
levai. In like manner, the omitted sentence must express a 
general idea, and hence one which may be readily supplied, or 
one which is indicated by the context. The single instances 
of Ellipsis have been noticed in the course of the Grammar. 
See Index under Ellipsis. 

2. Ellipsis is to be distinguished from brevity of expression 
or Brachylogy. In Ellipsis, there is an actual omission of an 
element, grammatically necessary to express an idea or thought; 
but in Brachylogy, there is not a real, but only apparent omis- 
sion of such an element, that element being in some way in- 
volved in the sentence or in a member of it. The simplest 
instances of brevity of expression have already been presented 
($319, Rem. 1). The following additional instances may here 
be mentioned : — 

(a) One form of a verb must often be borrowed from another. Th. 2, 11. 
(d£iovo~i) T7]v tuiv -nkXas [yw) Srjovv t) tt\v kavroop bpdv (sc. $r]ovfj.ev7]p). 

(b) In antitheses, one member must often be supplied from the other. Dem. 
01. 3. 30, 17. £Trpd£a/j.ev fuel's (sc. npbs eice'ivovs) Kai iiceluoi Trpbs y/xas eip^vrjv. 

(c) From a negative word, an affirmative one must often be borrowed ; this 
takes place most frequently, when an antithetic clause is introduced by an ad- 
versative conjunction. Her. 7. 104. 6 v6/xos dvwyei iwvrb del, ovk Hop (pevyeiu 
ouSei/ ttXyj&os av&punrav e/c /J.dxvs aXXd (sc. auuyoop) \xkvovras eV rfj Ta|ei iiriKpa- 
TeW, r) airSWva&ai. PL Apol. 36, b. ape Xt) a as, S>i> ol iroXXoi (sc. iirifxeXovv- 
tcu). So from ovdeis the idea of efs or eKao-ros is to be borrowed, as in the fol- 
lowing sentence, from ou5' els, the subject of the first clause, (h or ettao-ros is to 
be borrowed as the subject of the second clause. PL Symp. 192, e. ravra dicov- 
ffas ov5' av els QapvyStiri, aXX y drex^cos oXoit'' du aK7]Koeuai K. r. X. 

(d) From a following verb with & specific meaning, a verb with a general 
meaning must be borrowed, e. g. Tloulv, £pyd£so-§ai, ylyueoSrai, elvai, cvfi^aii/eiv : 
This is the case in the expi-essions, ri aXXo ¥i, — ovSev dXXo tf — &XXo 
ri V,, instead of ri aXXo Troie? or %trnv or the like, r) '6ti. Th. 3, 39. rl &XXo 
ovToi, •/) tTrefiovXevaav ; 4, 14. ol haxeo'aip.opioi aXXo ovo'ev 7) e« yrjs ivavpid- 
Xow. 

(e) When two verbs connected together have a common object, even if they 
govern different Cases, the Greek usually expresses the o^j-cct but once, and 
makes this depend on the nearest verb. Indeed, the object of a clause is not 
unfrequently transferred and made the subject of the following clause, without 



§346.] ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. ZEUGMA. 567 

its place being supplied by a pronoun. X. O. 4, 8. tovtois p.h> x&pw T V &*■- 
\t)v it p o sri&r) a t Kal Sc&pois Kocrp-el (sc. avrovs). PI. Gorg. 460, c. ov Set 
roTs iraiSorpifiais iy KaAe?v ovd' i k fi a A A e i v (sc. avrovs) e/c rav iroXewv. 
Up. 465, a. irpeo-fZurepca v ecor e pcov irdvrav "dpxkiv re Kal KoAa£e iv (sc. 
avroiis) Trposrerd^erai. Th. 5, 54. ('Apyeloi) i s e fiahov is rr)v 'Eir iSau pi au 
ital idrjovu (sc. avT-f)i/). This case occurs most frequently where a partici- 
ple is connected with a finite verb. Th. 1, 20, t£ 'l-mrdpxv rtjv Tlauafrn- 
uaiKrqu Tro/.LTT7]j/ S t a k o o~ p. o v v t i arc 4kt eiv au (sc. avr6v) (while Hipparchus 
was arranging the Panathenaic procession, they killed him). lb. 144. tovtois 
airoKp iudp.euoi airoir e pi.\p co p.eu (sc. avrovs). But sometimes the Case is 
made to depend on the more remote finite verb. Th. 2, 65. oaou XP° V0V 
tvpovo-Tfi (YlepiKArjs) rrjs 7roAecos . . , affcpaXUs diecpvAa^eu avr-nu, Kal iyeuero 
(sc. avr-f)) in iKeiuov p-ey'iarr}. X. An. 2. 5, 24. ravra (Tiaaatyepuris) elirctiu edo£e 
rip KXedpxV a\7)&7i Aeyeiu, kcu elireu (sc. 6 KAeapxos). 

3. An important figure of Brachylogy is Zeugma, i. e. a con- 
struction in which a verb, that in sense belongs only to one 
subject or object, is connected with several subjects or objects. 
The verb, however, must always be of such a nature as to ex- 
press an idea which may be taken in a wider or more limited 
sense. 

II. y, 326. rix 1 ^dffrw 'iinvoi aepcrlirodes Kal irouc'iAa revx^ eKeiro (to lie, as 
well as generally to be in a place, to be in store). Her. 4, 106. ioSrira Se (pop 4- 
ovffi 71-77 ^Kv&iKrj bp.oif]v, yXcao-arau Se Idirju (they wear garments like the Scythi- 
ans, but have, or speak a language of their own). A compound verb is often 
used in a pregnant sense, since along with the signification of the compound, 
the signification of the simple is at the same time to be included. Th. I, 44. 
ol 'AStivcuoi. p.er eyucocrau KepKvpaiois ^v/ipax^au p.rj Troi-f]cracr^ai (instead of p.e- 
reyvcoaau Kal eyuoocrau) CHANGED their minds and determined not to form an 
alliance with the Corcyraeans. 

4. Contraction in coordinate clauses has already been spoken 
of ($ 319, Rem. 1) ; this is more seldom in subordinate clauses, 
though frequent with those introduced by os-n-ep, wsirep. 

Eur. Med. 1153. (piAovs vo p.i^ovo J> ovsirep au ir6ais cre&eu (sc. uop.iQn). PI. L. 
710, d. nxdura o~x^ou air eipy a&r ai r&> &ew direp (sc. airepyd^erai) orav fiov- 
krj&r} hia(pep6vrois ev irpa^ai riva it6Kip. So also el or et7rep ris or &AAos ris or 
e'lTrep irov, e'lrrep -Kore, etc. Her. 9, 27. rjpuu ecrri 7roAAa re Kal ev exoura, el reoi- 
o~i Kal aAAoiai 'EAAtjucdu. 

5. Pleonasm is the use of a word, which, in a grammatical 
point of view, is superfluous, the idea conveyed by it having 
been already expressed in what precedes, either by the same 



568 syntax. [§ 347. 

or by another word. The desire of perspicuity or emphasis is 
commonly the cause of Pleonasm. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. o'l, $v eV itcetvovs ^ety iAavvwfxeu, viroTe/j.ovuTai 7]y.as ckei- 
vol 3, 15. ir^ipdaofxai rep Trdirircp aya&wv hfTrjewv Kpdrioros &v lirirevs (rvjx^.a- 
Xe?;/ avr <£. 

Remakk. Grammatical Pleonasm is to be distinguished from the rhetorical, 
which consists in the use of two or even more words of a similar signification 
to strengthen an idea or make it more palpable (a) A verb with an abstract 
substantive, as fxdxw fidxeff&ou, irSXe/xov iroAe/xei ; — (/3) A verb with a partici- 
ple, as (pevywv e<pvye, diirov Asyccv ; — (7) An adjective with an abstract substan- 
tive in the instrumental Dat., as fieye&ei fieyas, irAri&ei iroAAoi ; — (8) An adjec- 
tive or adverb with an adverb (mostly poetic) as ol6&ev ohs (wholly alone) ; — 
(e) Synonymous adverbs, as tv&vs irapaxprjua, irdAiv av&is, ael avvexS>s ; — (Q 
The part is very often joined with the whole by nai or re, for the purpose of 
making the part prominent, as "Eicropi fx\p kolI Tpcccri (Horn.); Zeu kcu 3-eoi 5 
*A8rvvaiot kcu 'IcpiKpdrrjs ; (77) For the sake of emphasis, the same thought is 
often expressed twice, once positively and then negatively, or the reverse, as 
Ae£w irpbs iifxas Ktxl ovk airoKpvxl/o/xai (Dem.) ; II. a. 416. iirei roi alcra [xlvvv&d 7re/j, 
ovTL jxdha SijP (since your life is short, and not very long). See Larger Grammar, 
Part II. § 858. 



$ 347. Contraction and Blending of Sentences. 
Anacoluthon. 

1. In the contraction of a compound sentence, sometimes 
the verb which is common to the principal and subordinate 
clauses, is placed in the subordinate clause and made to 
agree with the subject of that clause; in this way the two 
clauses are much more closely united, than in the common 
mode of contraction (§ 319, Rem. 1). 

X. Cy. 4. 1, 3. avrbs oi§a, oTos Ijw to. jxkv yap aAAa (scil. iiroizi) tiaairep, olfj.ai, 
Kal ivdvTes vjx^ls i ir o i e it e. 

2. When a participle stands in a sentence with the finite 
verb, the parts of the sentence are frequently blended with 
each other, by making the substantive which would be gov- 
erned by the participle, depend upon the finite verb, as the 
more important part of the sentence. Comp. Larger Grammar, 
Part II. $ 856, b. p. 609—611. 

Soph. El. 47. ^77€AAe 8' ttpnq) TrposT&els, instead of 'dyyeAAe irposri&els '6pKov. 
X. Cy. 1. 6, 33. 8Va>s o~vv toiovtw e&ei efrtcrd-eVres Trpaorepoi TroA?Tcu yevoiv- 
ro ; «&ei is here governed by avu and connected with yivoivxo, instead of being 
in the Dat. depending on i&ia&ei/Tes, which would have been the natural con- 
struction. X. Cy. 7. 1, 40. ovtol Se iireidr] TjTropovvTo, kukAw irdvro&ev ttoitj- 



§ 347.] CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. 569 

ffd/xevo i, wsre opacr&at ra SirXa, virb reus acnr'icriv iKabr]vro (instead of kvkAov 
iroiricrdjxevoL iKa^rjuro). 2. 3, 17. to?s 5' erepois elirey, '6tl fiaWeiu Se^croi auai- 
povfj.4vovs ra?s fiwAois. 

3. A very common mode of blending the principal with, the 
subordinate clause, in the manner of attraction, and one which 
belongs to almost all kinds of subordinate clauses, consists in 
transferring the subject of the subordinate into the principal 
clause, and making it the object of the principal clause. 
(Comp. nosti Marcellwn, quam tardus sit, instead of quam 
tardus sit Marcellus). 

Her. 3, 68. ovtos irpwros vtr6irr ev cr e rbv Mdyov, ws ovk efy 5 Kvpov ~2.jj.4p- 
his (he first suspected the Magian, that he was not Smerdis the son of Cyrus = sus- 
pected that the Magian was not, etc.). 80. elfSere rrjv Ka/xfivcrew vfipiv, eV 
Hcrov iirel-rjX&e (see the insolence of Cambyses what a pitch it reached == see what 
a pitch the insolence, etc.). 6,48. air^ireiparo twv 'EXXrjvwu, '6 ti eV vu> 
exoiev. Th. 1, 72. rr}V <r<per4pav tt6Klv i&ovAovro (TTj/xaiveiv, 'Scrrj dri Svua- 
ix.iv. X. Cy. 5. 3, 40. ol fyxovres avrwv iir ifxeXeicr&wv, oirws <rv<rKevacr[x.4voi 
wen -navTa. In the same way also, when the subordinate clause forms the ob- 
ject of a substantive in the principal clause, the subject of the subordinate 
clause is frequently transferred to the principal clause, and is put in the Gen., 
as the object of that substantive. Th. 1, 61. ^A&e 8e kclL to?s 'A&rjvaiois ev&bs 
7] ayye\ia rwv tc6\zwv, on aepearracri (the report immediately reached the 
Athenians respecting the cities, that they had revolted = the report reached the Athe- 
nians, that the cities had revolted). 97. afia 5e Kal rrjs apx^s a-jr6d e t£tj/ exe: 
tt)s rwv 'ASrrjvatwv, iv o'iw rpoirco Karecrrt]. So also a substantive on which an 
Inf. depends is often attracted by the verb or substantive which governs the Inf. 
Th. 3, 6. rr)s ba\dcrcT7]s elpyov fir) XPVC^ L tovs MirvKrivaiovs. 5, 25. 
iiri^vfiia twv avSpwv twv e/c rr)s vhcrov KOfj.icracr&ai. PL Crit. 52, b. ouS J 
£Tri&v[x,ia o"€ &\Ar)S Tro\ews, ovd~ &\Awv v6fxwv eAa/3ej/ — el84vai. 

4. The principal clause is frequently blended with the sub- 
ordinate clause, by making the former, as a substantive- 
clause introduced by 6Ve or cos, or still more frequently, as a 
substantive-clause expressed by the Ace. with the Inf., depen- 
dent on the subordinate clause. 

X. An. 6. 4, 18. ws yap iyw ¥) no vera nvos, on K\4av5pos e/c Bv&vrlov ap- 
fj.ocrT7)s jCteAAet ri£eiv (instead of ws fJKOvera, KA. jiteAAet rj^eiv), for as I heard 
from some one, that Cleandros is about to come, etc. = for Cleandros is about to 
come, as I heard from some one. Her. 1. 65. ws eV avrcA AaKeSaifxSvioi \4yover i 
AvKovpyov eiriT poirever avr a 4k Kpr]Tr]s ayay4er&ai ravra. 3. 14. ws 
Se Xeyerai inr' Alyvirnwv, daupveiv fxev Kp oterov. 4.5. ws 8e ~%Kv&ai 
\4yoveri, vec&rarov airdvrwv £&v4wv eJvai rb <r(p4repov. 

48* 



570 syntax. [$ 348. 

5. Anacoluthon (from a privative and aKokovSos, -ov, following) 
is a figure used to denote a change in the construction. It 
takes place when the construction with which the sentence 
begins, is not continued through it, but changed into another, 
which grammatically does not correspond with the former, but 
logically, i. e. in relation to the signification and meaning, is 
like or similar to it. The cause of Anacoluthon may be attrib- 
uted to the vivacity of representation among the Greeks, or to 
their desire of perspicuity, brevity, strength, or concinnity (pro- 
priety or keeping) of discourse. There are two kinds of Ana- 
coluthon : (a) grammatical, (b) rhetorical. There are also in- 
stances where it evidently originates from carelessness and in- 
attention. The grammatical Anacoluthon, which is, for the 
most part, caused by attraction, has been treated in several 
places in the course of the grammar. Only two instances of 
the rhetorical Anacoluthon, need now be mentioned : — 

(a) A very natural and frequent instance of Anacoluthon is, where the word 
which gave rise to the whole thought of the sentence, is placed as the logical 
subject in the Nom. at the beginning of the sentence, but after the interruption 
of the sentence by an intermediate clause, is made the grammatical object of 
the verb of the sentence. X. Hier. 4, 6. tisirep ot a& A 77 tcu oi>x, orav Ifiiwrwv 
yevwvrai Kpe'iTTOves, rovro avrovs evcppaivei, ciAA 5 orav rcou avr ay (aviardv yrrovs, 
rovr ai>Tobs avia (instead of rovrq> evcppaivovrai — avi&vrai), as the athletes, when 
they are superior to common men, this does not elate them, but when they are inferior to 
their competitors, this gives them pain = as the athletes are not elated when, etc. 

(b) In order to make the contrasted ideas in a sentence prominent or em- 
phatic, they are often placed in the same form at the beginning of their respec- 
tive sentences, although the natural construction of each would necessarily be 
different. PL Phaedr. 233, b. roiavra 6 epoos eirideiKwrai. • Svsrvxovur as 
ukv, a /j.7) \vTrrjv ro7s aWois irapex^h aviapa 7roteT vofxifav, ev.rvxovvras 8e 
Kal ra. /j.7) rjSovris a|:a nap' endi/cci/ iiralyov avayKa(ei rvyxduav (instead of trap 
evTvxowToov 8e Ka\ ra. /j.tj TjdourjS a£ia iiraipov avayKa&i rvyx^veiv, or evrvxovvras 
Se Ka\ ra /j.7) tjS. a|. tiraiveiv avayKa^i). 



CHAPTER X. 

$348. Position of Words and Sentences. 

1. The intimate relation between the members of a sentence 
and between one sentence imd another, and 1he connection of 



$ 348.] POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 671 

these so as to form one thought or idea, are expressed as has 
been seen, partly by inflection, or by formal words ($ 38, 4) 
which supply the place of inflection, partly by the accent and 
position of the members of a sentence and of the sentences 
themselves. As the accent can be made prominent only in 
living discourse, and commonly agrees with the position, only 
the position needs to be treated. 

Eemaek. The position of particular parts of speech, as the pronouns, 
prepositions, etc., has already been stated, in the sections where these are 
treated. See the Index under Position. 

2. There are two kinds of position : the usual or grammati- 
cal, and the rhetorical or inverted. The first denotes the 
logical and grammatical relation of the members of a sentence, 
and of the sentences themselves to each other, and the union 
of these in expressing a single thought or idea; the second 
makes one member of a sentence, which is specially important, 
more prominent than the other members, by giving to it a posi- 
tion different from the usual or grammatical order of the words. 

3. The usual or grammatical position of the words in Greek 
is the following : — 

The subject stands first in the sentence, the predicate last; 
the copula et/xt stands after the predicative adjective or sub- 
stantive ; but the attributive follows its substantive ; the object 
is placed before the predicate; the objectives, i. e. the qualify- 
ing statements or circumstances, are so arranged, that the most 
important one is placed immediately before the predicate, and 
the other objectives precede this, following each other in such 
order as they would naturally be joined to the first objective, 
the one suggesting itself last to the mind being placed before 
one already existing ; or in other words, the broader limitation 
usually precedes the narrower, the less necessary, the more 
necessary. 

Kvpos, 6 fiatfiAevs, KaAas a-rre&avev. Kvirpiot irdvv Trpo&vfxcos abrcp crvuearpdr^u- 
aav. Hals /xeyas — at/^p aya&os — 6 ircus 6 fi4yas — 6 avrjp 6 aya&os — o 7rcus o 
tov Kupou — 6 ir6\e(j.os 6 irpbs robs Uepaas. But the Inf. or the Ace. with the 
Inf. and the Part, follow the governing word. See the examples under §§ 306, 
307, 310. Ol "EKAiqi/es robs Tlepcras tviicqcrav. Ol "EWriues iv Mapa&obvt tovs 
Ilepaas iuiicriaav. OfEAAyves ravTij rfj v/J-^pa iv MapaSccvi robs Hepaas ii j/ i.Kr)aau. 
In this way, the adverb of place and time commonly precedes the causal ob- 



572 syntax. [$ 348. 

ject (t6tg or TavTrj tt? fifiipa tovs II. iviKt]o-av), the personal object precedes 
that denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Ace. {rbu ireuda ttjv ypa/x/iaTiKTfV SiSdaKw 
— r<2 TraiSl rb fiifixiov UZwfxt), the adverb of time the adverb of place (tot€ or 
ravrr} rrj ^jxipa iv Mapa&oivi tovs IT. ivUr]o-av). The adverb of manner, even 
when another word is the principal objective, usually stands immediately be- 
fore the predicate, e. g. ol "EWrjves ravTr) rfj rjixepq iv Mapa&wvi tovs Tl4po~as 
Ka\£> s iv'iKT}0 , av. 

4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the 
position of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose 
place they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective-clause, for 
example, occupies the place which the adjective would take 
and so of the others. 

PI. Phaed. 50, e. o &vpwp6s, 'Ssirep elca&ei viraicotie iv, el7re 7repi/j.eveiv, 
X. Cy. 3. 2, 3. 6 Se Kvpos, iv § o~ we\4yovr o, i&vero' iwel 8e /caAa i\v 
to. it ph. avT<2, avveKa\€0~e tovs re twv Hepawv rjye/j.6vas Kai tovs twv MtjScijv. 
'E7T€t 8e ofxov ?i<rav, eAe|e ToiaSe. Yet the substantive-clauses, even when 
they express the grammatical subject, stand after the governing verb. Ibid. 1 
4, 7. ot 8' e A e 7 o v, '6t t &p ktoi ttoXXov s •$? 8 e 7r A 77 c idcr auras 8 i4(p&ei 
pav. 

5. In the rhetorical or inverted 1 position of words, the predi 
cate is placed before the subject, the attributive before the sub 
stantiveto be defined, but the objective, particularly the adverb 
is placed after the predicate. 

'AyaSbs o avrip. 'O fiacr iAei> s Kvpos. 'O irpbs tovs Tlipffas TrSXe/xos 
'E/^ax^aavro /caAws. Th. 2, 64. cpepeiv re xp'h Tare daipovia av ay naloo s, to, 
re airb t&v iroXe/xiwy av8 p eicos. 

6. When the subject is to be specially distinguished, it is 
placed at the end of the sentence ; and when two words in the 
same sentence are to be made emphatic by their position, one 
is placed at the beginning, the other at the end of the sen- 
tence, e. g. IlagSv dpei-oiv ^ye/xcov iartv rj €var£/3eia. Gener- 
ally, both the first and the last place in a sentence is considered 
emphatic, when words stand there, which, according to the 
usual arrangement, would have a different position. 

7. Inversion is still more frequent in subordinate clauses 
than in the case of the words whose place they take, perspi- 
cuity often rendering such an inversion necessary. Substan- 

1 This inverted position is a species of Hyperbaton, a construction by which 
the natural order of words and sentences is inverted. 



$ 348.] position or words and sentences. 573 

tive-clauses with or.i, ws (that), and final substantive-clauses, 
are placed before the governing verb, when the ideas they 
express are to be brought out prominently. 

"Otl fieyas £k /xiKpov 5 QiAiiriros TjvtflTai, irapaAetya). — "iva. ffacpeo'repov driAafrp 
■Kaaa rj Tiepawi/ iroAireia, fXiKphv iirdueifxi. The inversion of adjective-clauses 
(ov tides &udpa, ovros iariy) has been already treated, § 332, 8. Inversion is 
not used in adverbial clauses of time and condition, since these, according to 
the common position, usually precede the principal sentence. 

8. When a word in a subordinate clause is to be made more 
prominent than the others, it is sometimes placed before the 
connective word (relative, etc.) which introduces the clause, 
e. g. roiavr icTTt kcu raXXa, ircpl i/xov a ol ttoWol Xiyovcnv. 

9. A means of rendering a word specially emphatic by posi- 
tion, is the separation (Hyperbaton) of two words which would 
be naturally connected together, as forming one thought, by 
introducing one or more less important words between them. 
By this separation, only one of the two words is commonly 
made emphatic, though often both even, especially when both 
stand in an emphatic part of the sentence. 

Dem. Phil. 3, 110. ttoAAuv, 5 avdpes 'A&tjvcuol, \6ywv yiyvo/xeucov. X. S. 1, 
4. olfxcu ovv tcoKv av T7jj/ KaTacrKGvrjv fioi Aafxirporepau (pavrjvcu (instead of ttoAv 
Xafxiv porepav.) This separation (Hyperbaton) very often takes place even in sen- 
tences as well as in case of words. This consists in placing the principal 
clause, as the one less important, within the subordinate clause, and thereby, in a 
logical point of view, making it secondary to the subordinate clause. PI. Prot. 
331, d. to yap AevKbv roJ p.eAavi iarw own irposeoiKe (instead of iariv yap oirr) 
rb \svk6v, etc.). X. C. 3. 11, 10. (piAeiu ye [i\\v e5 olS' on iTricrracrai (instead of 
eS oTS' on (piXeiv, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 53. &sre irepl fxkv ttjs eV TO?s"EAAricri dvua- 
are'ias ovk 615' oircos av tis aacpeo-repov im<Se?£ai 8vvr)&elr]. Dem. Phil, ovtoi [xev 
yap apxovres ov iroAvs xp'^ vos e 'l °^ • • 'h^Stov. 

10. Ideas that are alike or similar, or especially such as are 
antithetic or opposite, are made emphatic in their position, by 
being placed near each other. 

Thus avrbs avjov, etc. e. g. f) irdAis avr^ trap avrr\s 5iKr\v A-fityeiat. 
X. Hiev. 6, 2. ^vvtjv fxei/ r]KiKi(t)Tais f)86 fxevos r)Sofj.4vo is ifxoi. PI. L. 934, d. 
(AaivouTat. iroAAol ttoAAovs Tp6irovs. Hence, &AAos &AAo, alius aliud : 
&AAos &AA0&1, alius alibi, &AAos &AAoo-e, alius alio, &AAos &AAo&ev, 
alius aliunde, &AAos 'aAAy, alius alia (sc. vid), etc., of which the English 
makes two sentences, the one did this, the other that, etc. 



APPENDIX A 



VERSIEICATION. 

§ 349. Rhythm, Metre, Arsis and Thesis. 

1. Rhythm (pv$/xo$) is the harmony produced by the alternation of 
long and short syllables, accompanied by the recurrence of an emphasis 
at intervals ; when the emphasis occurs at fixed intervals, the rhythm be- 
comes meter, each one of the intervals forming a metre or measure. 

2. The emphasis with which particular parts of a verse are pro- 
nounced, is called the Arsis, and the corresponding weaker tone with 
which the other parts are pronounced, the Thesis. The former implies 
an elevation of the voice with an accompanying stress (§ 29. 1.), the latter, 
a depression of the voice. The terms Arsis and Thesis are also trans- 
ferred to the particular syllable or syllables on which they rest, and 
hence the syllable on which the emphasis falls is called the Arsis. The 
Arsis is often called the metrical ictus, or merely the ictus. 

3. The Arsis is naturally on the long syllable of a foot ; consequently 
in the spondee ( — ) and the tribrach ( v "~~), the place of the Arsis can 
be determined only by the kind of verse in which they are found. In 
every verse, the original foot determines the place of the Arsis in all the 
other feet which are substituted for it. Hence, as the second syllable of 
an iambus is long, and as the Arsis naturally falls on the long syllable, 
the spondee in iambic verse would have the Arsis on the second syllable, 
thus - — ; so also in anapaestic verse. But as the first syllable of the 
foot is long in the trochee and dactyl, the spondee in trochaic and dac- 
tylic verse takes the Arsis on the first syllable, thus - - . Again, as a 
short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, and as in a long 
syllable the emphasis or ictus necessarily falls on the first of the two 
units composing this long, it is evident that, in iambic verse, the tribrach 



$ 350. J VERSIFICATION. 575 

would take the Arsis on the second syllable, thus u w " ; and in trochaic 
yerse on the first. So where the dactyl takes the place of the spondee 
with the Arsis on the last syllable, the arsis of the dactyl is on the first 

short, thus - w w ; but where the anapaest stands for the spondee (-' -), its 

Arsis is on the first short, thus ~ w - . 

$ 350. Metrical Feet. 

1. The portions into which every verse is divided, are called 'feet. 

The feet are composed of a certain number of syllables, either all 
long, all short, or long and short together. 

A short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, every short 
syllable being one mora or time, and every long one two morae. 

The feet used in poetry may be divided, according to the number of 
syllables, into four of two syllables, eight of three, and sixteen of four 
syllables. 

The dissyllabic feet are four : 

« « Pyrrhich l (tvttov) 

Spondee (tww) 

w - Iamb (rvn-wv) 
— - Trochee (tvttt€) 

1 Derivation of names of feet. — Pyrrhich. This was so called from 
the celebrated war-dance (irvppixv): i n which it was used, as being rapid and 
energetic. — Iamb. From Idirrco, to abuse; because Archilochus the inventor 
used it in violent invectives. — Trochee. From Tpe'x&>, to run ; because of its 
running, saltatory style. — Tribrach. Tph Ppaxvs, because consisting of three 
short syllables. — Spondee. So called, because it was used iv reus o-irovdcus, in 
sacred rites, from its slow, solemn sound. — Dactyl. 'Airb rov SciktvAov ; because 
it is, like the finger, composed of one long joint and two short ones. — Ana- 
paest. From avaTraiw, to strike back ; because the Ictus was contrary to that of 
the Dactyl. — Amphibrach. 'Apcpl fipaxvs ; because the short syllables are on 
each side of the long one, (an<pi) — Cretic Because much used by the Cretans. 
— Bacchlus. Used in the Dithyrambic Games in honor of Bacchus. — Antibac- 
chlus. The converse (avri) of the former. — Proceleusmatic. From KeXevaua, the 
boatswain's call or command ; because rapidly uttered. — Paeons. Because 
used in the Paeonic Hymns. — Choriamb. Trochee or Choree + Iamb. — An- 
tispastus. 'AvTitriraco, to draw to the opposite side ; because, being converse of 
the former, it appears to draw the Trochee to the other side of the Iamb. — 
Ionicus a majore, Ionicus a minore. Feet much in use with the Ionian s ; a majore, 
when beginning with the long syllables ; a minore, when beginning with the 
short ones. — Epitrite. Most probably from ini and rplros ; because, in addition 
to (iTri) the 3d syllable, it has a short one over. — The Diiamb is an Iambic 
syzygy, admitting the Spondee in the first place. — The Ditrochee is a Trochaic 
syzygy, admitting the Spondee in the second place. 



075 VERSIFICATION. f$ 350. 

The trisyllabic are eight : 

" u " Tribrach (Jtvttov) 

Molossus (rwrrco/xai) 

*._.•« — Anapaest (r€ri><£a>s) 

— ~ " Dactyl (Tt>7TTete) 

* — " Amphibrach (erwrw) 

— " — Cretic (tvttto/xcm) 
Bacchius (ri;7r^Ta)) 

" Palimbacchius (tvttty]tz) 

The tetrasyllable are sixteen : 

» ^ « - Proceleusmatic (er^7rero) 

_ . Dispondee (rvcfrS-eirjrqv) 

w — " — Diiamb (eru7rro/x^v) 

— " — " Ditrochee (rt)7rreTw<Tav) 
" — w Antispast (J.Tv$>$r]Tov) 

— w " — Choriamb (7-u7rro/xei/ov) 

y ~ — Ionicus a minori (eTeru/x/^v) 

— * "Ionicus a majori (rui//ai)ae#a) 
_.« o w fi rs t Paeon (r7j7rTo/Aevos) 
w - " " second Paeon (eTV7rrcre) 
" " - « third Paeon (irirvif/o) 
" w ^ — fourth Paeon (hv7r6jJL7)v) 
" first Epitrite (eTVif/aaSrjv) 

— * second Epitrite (<o rv7roi}crat) 

— " — third Epitrite (jv^rjcroixai) 
" fourth Epitrite (rvcfiSeLrjcrav) 

2. Simple metres are formed by the repetition of simple feet ; com- 
pound, by combining the simple feet with each other. 

Simple feet consist of but one Arsis, and one Thesis, e. g. " ", " " ", 

"""", -'", -" u , etc. 

Compound feet consist of two Arses and Theses, of which one Arsis 
and Thesis, taken together, is considered as a single Arsis or Thesis, e. g. 






WW WW _^_w ? w_._ j Qr . 

Of the simple feet, only those which have a long syllable in the Arsis 
and a short one in the Thesis, give natural variety, e. g. - ", - " ", " -', 
""-'. Hence the trochee and dactyl, the iamb and anapaest, are consid- 
ered as the fundamental feet of all rhythm. The other feet may be 



$ 351.] VERSIFICATION. 577 

combined with these by resolving a long into two short syllables, or by 
contracting two short into one long syllable. 

4. Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are not measured by sing" j 
feet, but by dipodies, or pairs of feet, two feet being necessary to mate 
an independent metre or dipody. Hence, four iambs make an Iambic 
dimeter, and six an Iambic trimeter. Dactylic verse, on the contrary, 
is measured by the single feet ; six dactyls, therefore, form an hexameter, 
and five a pentameter. 



§ 351. Caesura. 

Caesura (a cutting) is the separation, by the ending of a word, of syl- 
lables metrically connected, — or the cutting of a metre by the ending 
of a word, before the metre is completed. 

Remark 1. The design of the Caesura is to give variety and harmony to 
the verse ; for if each metre or foot terminated with the end of a word, there 
would be only a constantly recurring monotony. But the Caesura, by pre- 
venting a uniform coincidence between the ending of the metre or foot, and the 
ending of a word, promotes the variety, beauty, and harmony of the verse. It 
is not inconsistent, however, with the rhythm of the verse that the ending of 
the foot and the word should sometimes coincide ; this coincidence is called 
metrical Diaeresis. The principal Diaereses are after the first, second, third, 
and fourth foot. 

tftf&iov • | avrap 6 \ toictiv acpeihero \ ySffTifMoi/ \ tffxap. 

There are three kinds of Caesura ; 

1. Caesura of the foot. 

2. Caesura of the rhythm. 

3. Caesura of the verse. 

(1) Caesura of the foot is where the word ends before a foot is com- 
pleted. 

Ni/07 j eras i$£ | A.ei errtiye | prjv ip.l | ou<a6 \ ayecrSa:.. 
In this line there is a Caesura of the foot after each of the syllables eras, 
A.«, prjv, and Ka8'. Only two cases of this Caesura can occur in a dac- 
tyl ; for the word either ends after the Arsis, - | w ~, and forms the mas- 
culine Caesura, or in the Thesis, - w | °, and forms the feminine or trochaic 
Caesura. Thus the Caesuras after eras, Aei and p-qv are masculine, that 
after ot/caS' is feminine or trochaic. 

(2) The Caesura of the rhythm is where the Arsis falls on the last 
syllable of a word, and thus separates the Arsis from the Thesis. In the 
line above quoted, the Caesura of the rhythm occurs after the syllables 
eras, Act and prjv, the Arsis falling on each of these and being separated 

-I ( ) 



578 VERSIFICATION. . [$ 352. 

from the following Thesis by the Caesura. This Caesura can take place 
only in such feet as have the Arsis on the first syllable. 

(3) The Caesura of the verse is a pause introduced to render the re- 
citation more easy. This is also called the Caesural pause, and divides 
the verse into two parts. 

In several kinds of verse this Caesura has a fixed place ; this is the 
case in the Trochaic, Iambic, and Anapaestic tetrameter, which have their 
natural Caesura at the end of the fourth foot. See under these verses 
below. Other kinds of verse may have more than one Caesura, the 
place of which is not fixed. In Hexameter verse, however, the Caesura 
of the verse more usually occurs after the Arsis of the third foot. Thus, 

KiAAav re t,a^iiqv, || TeveSotd tc l<f>L dyacrcrets, 
or in the Thesis of the third foot, thus, 

Kat tot€ Sr/ Sapcrrjae, || kclI rjvSa /xavrts d/xv/Jioiv. 

Kem. 2. The three kinds of Caesura often occur together ; for example, 
after the syllable t\v of (a&£y)v, there is the Caesura of the foot, of the rhythm, 
and of the verse. 



§ 352. Different kinds of Verse. 

1 . A verse is often named from its predominant foot. Thus Dactylic 
verse is so called, because the dactyl is the predominant foot, and Iambic 
verse, because the iamb is the predominant foot ; so Trochaic, Anapaestic, 
etc. "Verses are also named from their inventors, as the Sapphic, from 
Sappho, Alcaic, from Alcaeus, etc. ; likewise from the kind of composi- 
tion in which they are used, as the Heroic, used in describing the 
achievements of heroes, also from the number of measures, as monometer, 
dimeter, trimeter, hexameter, etc. 

2. A verse is called acatalectic, when it has its full number of feet or 
syllables, as trimeter iambics, w — u — | ~ — !>"- [■« — w — . A verse is called 
catalectic, when one or two syllables are wanting to complete the verse, 
as the trimeter, w - - - | ~ -' " - ( u - w . In dactylic verse, if the last foot 
wants one syllable, the verses, are called catalectic on two syllables, e. g. 
_' -v_v^_w. if two syllables are wanting, catalectic on one syllable, e. g. 
_ww_ww_ t Verses in which the last dipody (a pair of feet) wants an 
entire foot, are called br achy catalectic, e. g. " — w — | w — w — J v •*. Verses 
which have one or two syllables more than enough, are called hypercala- 
lectic, e. g. « — « — J « — « — ] « ~ « — « . 

Remark. When the regular rhythm of a verse is preceded by an unem- 



H 353 — 355.] versification. 579 

phatic introductory syllable, such syllable is called an Anacrusis, an upward or 
back beat; when there are two such syllables, forming an introductory foot, 
they are called a Base. The anacrusis and base belong to lyric verse. 



§353. View of the different kinds of Verse. 

The most usual kinds of verse are those which consist of the repeti- 
tion of the same foot. Of these the most frequent are the Dactylic, Iam- 
bic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic, 

§ 354. Dactylic Verse. 

The fundamental foot in this verse is the dactyl, the place of which 
may be supplied by a spondee. 

§ 355. Hexameter. 

The Hexameter was employed by the Greeks at an early period, and 
is the metre of Epic or Heroic and Pastoral poetry. 

The Hexameter consists of six feet ; the fundamental foot is the dac- 
tyl, the verse being formed by five repetitions of the dactyl with a dis- 
syllabic catalectus. The sixth foot is usually called a spondee ; but when 
the last syllable is short, it may be considered a trochee. 



In each of the first four feet, a spondee may take the place of the dac- 
tyl. The fifth foot is regularly a dactyl ; but sometimes it is a spondee, 
and the line is then called a spondaic line, as 

Ov yap eyo) Tpcocov eVe/c' rj\v$ov al)(fX7]Tao)V. 

- ?.H --I - *'-i- -'- 1 — 1-- 

The principal Caesura in Hexameter verse occurs after the Arsis or in 
the Thesis of the third foot, and is called the Penthemim ; sometimes also a 
Caesura occurs after the Arsis of the fourth part, which is called the 
Hephthemim. This Caesura in the fourth foot is commonly preceded by 
one in the second foot, which is called the Triemim. The Caesura oc- 
curring at the end of the fourth foot is called the Bucolic Caesura, from 
its use in pastoral poetry 

'AAA' 6 /xh/ Al9-L07ra<; || jaerCKta^c rr]X63 ? eoVTa? 

Ai/Spa fxoi eVve7r€, Movca, | [ TroXvTporrov ps /xaAa iroXka, 

' H Aia? 1 1 rj 'l8o//.evet)s 1 1 r) 8tos '08uo~crevs 

'Hye/xoVajv, j| ogttis ol aprjv \\ erapoto-iv a/jivvai 

Mi/xva^ctv 7rapa vqvo-l Kopwvio-tv, \\ ov ol hreiTO., 



580 versification. [H 356, 357. 

The beauty of Hexameter verse is promoted by varying the feet by 
an interchange of dactyls and spondees, and by introducing these in dif- 
ferent places in different verses. For the same reason it is desirable that 
the Caesuras should occur in different places in different lines. 



$ 356. Pentameter. 

This verse is divided into two parts, each of which consists of two 
dactyls and a catalectic syllable, thus, 

MrjSe $vpa£,€ KeXev || ovk e^eAovr Uvai. 
Spondees may take the place of the dactyls in the first half, but not in 
the second, because the numbers at their conclusion should run more 
freely, instead of being retarded by the slow movement of the spondees. 
The long syllable at the end of the second half can be short. The 
Caesura is here the same as in the Hexameter, except that there must be 
a division, by the ending of the word, in the middle of the verse. When 
the word, however, has more than two syllables, Elision may take place. 

This kind of verse is commonly found only in connection with Hex- 
ameter, a Hexameter and Pentameter following each other alternately. 
A poem composed of these two measures is called Elegiac, being at first 
devoted to plaintive melodies. 

"Apn fie yevofievov £o)a? f3pecf>o<; rjpiracre Aat/xcoi/ Hexam. 
Ovk oTS' cit dya$oiv 1 1 airtos, etVe kclkwv, Pentam. 

A.TrXrjpuiT 'A'tSa, ri //.€ vqiriov f/pirao-as a<pv(o ; Hexam. 
Tt o-7reu8eis ; ov croi || 7ravres 6<£eiAo/xe$a ; Pentam. 



§ 357. Dactylic Tetrameter . 

The dactylic tetrameter catelectic on one syllable consists of three feet 
and a syllable. 

noAAa Bpordv Sia/xa/3o/xeva. 

The dactylic tetrameter catalectic on two syllables consists of three feet 
and two syllables, which may form a spondee or trochee. 
<$>aiv6p.evov kolkov o'lko.8 ayeoS-at. 

-> -I.- -I -"I -' - 

The dactylic tetrameter acatalectic consists of four feet ; instead of a 
dactyl, in the last a cretic is admissible. 



$ 358 361.] VERSIFICATION. 581 

Yttv oSwas dSaw, xnrvc 8' aXyicov. 

.'-;>; I -"I --J- --• 

Makr, aye KaAAio7ra Svyarep Aios. 



$ 358. Dactylic Trimeter. 

The dactylic trimeter catalectic on one syllable consists of two feet 
and a syllable. 

"Ev#ev ae£o/Aevov. 

The dactylic trimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of two feet 
and two syllables, which may form either a spondee or trochee. 
lEivpei Kv/Jiara 7roVra>. 



$ 359. Dactylic Dimeter. 

The dactylic dimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of a dactyl 
and a spondee or trochee. 

^acr/mra arpovd^liiv 

TouxS' 6fJLO(f>ti)VOV. 



The dactylic acatalectic dimeter consists of two dactyls, and usually 
stands in connection with tetrameters. 

Ot)s vtto ret^ecrt. 

$360. Trochaic , Iambic and Anapaestic Verse. 

It has been already observed (§ 350, 4.) that Trochaic, Iambic, and 
Anapaestic verse is measured by dipodies, i. e. by pairs of feet. Hence 
verses of two feet, are called monometer, of four, dimeter, of six, trime- 
ter, of eight, tetrameter. The Latins named these according to the 
number of feet, and not by dipodies. Thus a verse of four feet was 
called quaternius, of six, senarius, of eight, octonarius. 

$ 361. Trochaic Verse. 

The Trochee is the predominant foot in this verse. The last syllable 
of each dipody may be doubtful ; hence the last foot of each dipody may 

49* 



582 



VERSIFICATION. 



[M 362, 363. 



be a spondee. Therefore, a spondee is admissible in every even place 
(2, 4, 6, 8). The Arsis or long syllable of every foot can be resolved 
into two short ones, and hence, a tribrach can stand in every place ; a 
dactyl and anapaest can stand in the even places, instead of the spondee. 
A dactyl is not admitted, however, except in a proper name, and then 
may stand in all the places but the fourth and seventh. 

A trochaic tetrameter acatalectic would then present the following 
scheme : 



r r r r 

ft ' t 

ill I 



Remark. Trochaic verse has a rapid saltatory metre, and is used especially 
in the choral parts of Comic Poetry, when the Poet wishes to infuse more than 
ordinary wit and spirit into the colloquy, to arrest the spectator's attention and 
vary the grave monotony of the Iambic. 1 



§ 362. Trochaic Monometer . 

The trochaic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet. It is gener- 
ally found in systems of trochaic trimeters. 
%vfiap(Zfiv 9 



§ 363. Trochaic Dimeter. 

The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. 
KoAp(t8o? tc yas c.volkol. 



The trochaic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable. 
It is usually found among acatalectic dimeters. 

Kat Skv^s o/xtA.o<?, dl yas (acatalectic). 
"Ea)(aTov toitov afxcpl Mat- (catalectic). 
(otlv exovat Xt/jLvav. 

1 See Manual of Greek Prosody, by L. P. Mercier. 



« 364, 365.] 



VERSIFICATION. 



583 



§ 364. Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a syllable 
(two dimeters, the second catalectic). Its Caesura is at the end of the 
second dipody, and is often omitted by comedians, but rarely ever by 
tragedians. 

TrySe 7ra? eVov, Sico/ce 1 1 kcu tov avSpa. irvvQavov 
"At rives Trjpov/xev v/jlols || tjv yap y tis e£oSos. 



Remark. The Trochaic tetrameter acatalectic, which consists of two tro- 
chaic dimeters acatalectic, and the trochaic pentameter, which consists of nine 
feet and a syllable, are very rarely used by the Greek poets. 
Elf tis auSpwu euTv%7j(rats ^ crbu evSo^ois ae&kois, 
2uj/ freaS ydp rot cpvrev&els o\fios av&pwiroicrt. irapp.oy(i>Tepos. 



§ 365. Iambic Verse. 

The fundamental foot in this verse is the iamb. Instead of the first 
iamb, every dipody may have a spondee. Hence a spondee is admis- 
sible in the odd places (1, 3, 5, 7). 

Again, as the long syllable of every iamb may be resolved into two 
short syllables, a tribrach may stand in every place, except the last ; and 
as the last syllable is common, a pyrrhic is admissible. In the odd places 
a dactyl or anapaest may stand instead of a spondee. 

Hence the iambic trimeter or senarius, would present the following 
scheme : 



r r r 

ii ill 

r i i 



Remark 1. The dactyl, however, is most frequent in the first place ; it occurs 
in the third place only when the first syllable of the foot is followed by the 
penthemimeral Caesura, or when the word is a monosyllable. The dactyl oc- 
curs in the fifth place only in Comedy, where it is admitted in all the uneven 
places. 

Rem. 2. The anapaest is admitted only in the first foot, except in Comedy 
and in proper names ; in these cases it is admissible in all the feet except the 
last. The anapaest in the first foot must be included in one word, except in 
case of the article or preposition and its Case. The anapaest in proper names 
must not be divided between two words. 



584 



VERSIFICATION. 



[$$ 366—368. 



Rem. 3. The Iambic is the opposite of the Trochaic, being a steady, grave, 
but easy metre, and was applied to the stage as best adapted to the language 
of ordinary life. 1 






§ 366. Iambic Monometer. 

Iambic monometer consists of two feet. Its use is very rare, and it 
occurs mostly in systems of dimeters, 

Kat tols k6\oi<s 

- -J r -'• 

§ 367. Iambic Dimeter. 

Iambic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. 
''OSev So/xotcrt rots ejaot? 

--'£*■ 7 II— 'I--'- 

Iambic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable. 
©eAw Xiyetv 'ArpeiSas, 
Xcupoire Xonrov rjplv 



r r r 



This verse is commonly found in systems of acatalectic dimeters. 

$368. Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic, commonly called 
Senarius. 

This is the most noted of the Iambic verses. It consists of six feet 
O reKva, K.6.S/XOV rov irakai via. Tpo<prj t 
'iKTrjptoLs KAaSoicriv i^€crr€{X[xeuoL ; 
*AAAcov Slkov€LV, avrbs a>8' cA^Au^a 



r r i f 

/ / / / 



The tragedians admit a dactyl only in the first and third foot ; they ad- 
mit an anapaest chiefly in the first foot, but in proper names, in any foot 
except the last. 

MeveAo)? ''EXivrjv 6 Se KADrat/xv^crTpas Ae^os, 
Horajxuiv re 7rrjyat, ttovtldiv re KV/xaroiv 
Ovk apt^fxov aXkws aAA' vircprarovi Qpvywv 

i'P. 



See Mercier. 



$$ 369, 370. 



VERSIFICATION. 



585 



The most frequent Caesura here is in the third foot (Penthemim). 
This Caesura, however, is often neglected, others being used, or some- 
times, none. 

'E^^pcov a$u)pa 1 1 Swpa kovk ovrjart/Jia. 
The Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot (Hepthe- 
mim). 

'E7ret Trarrjp ovtos cros, || ov Sprjveis det'. 
The Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent. 



$369. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The iambic tetrameter is very much used by the comedians. It con- 
sists of seven feet and a syllable. The Caesura is usually at the end of 
the fourth foot, but is sometimes omitted. The scheme is nearly the 
same as the trimeter iambic. The anapaest occurs in the seventh foot 
only in case of a proper name. 



- I I ^ J vL|«^ w/ U "v wC« ««« 

/ / / 

t ' r '"■/■'/.'-■ r f / 



Ov <f>r)cri xp?)vat rovs viovs 1 1 acr/cetv • iycb Se <prjjxi, 

--' h- II--I — ll--l;-'lh-'h 

The iambic tetrameter acatalectic is but little used by the Greek 






$ 370. Ana]jaestic Verse. 

1. The anapaest is the predominant foot in this verse. But by uniting 
the two short syllables in one long, the spondee may be substituted for 
the anapaest. Again, the second long syllable of the spondee may be 
resolved into two short syllables, and hence a dactyl take the place of a 
spondee. 

2. In Anapaestic verse the most usual system is the dimeter, consist- 
ing of a greater or less number of perfect dipodies, followed by a 
pair of dipodies, the second of which is catalectic. This catalectic dime- 
ter, consisting of three feet and a syllable, is called paroemiac (jrapoi- 
/xtat) from its use in proverbs. The anapaestic verse is, therefore, al- 
ways terminated by a catalectic dipody, and also by a long syllable ; i. e. 
if the final syllable is not long by itself, it is made long by its position 



586 



VERSIFICATION. 



[N 371—373. 



with respect to the next line, the scanning being continuous, and an an- 
apaestic series being constructed as if there were but one verse. The 
following is the scheme for an anapaestic tetrameter catalectic. 



/ / / A / / I / 

" ~ ~ ""* " ~~ - - i "~ 

/ / / / / 



Remark. An anapaest does not follow a dactyl in the same dipody ; gen- 
erally a dactyl does not follow an anapaest or spondee in the same dipody. 
The third foot of the paroemiac is usually an anapaest ; but a spondee is some- 
times found. The dactyl does not occur in the sixth and seventh feet. The 
Anapaestic metre was the favorite one for martial music. 



§371. Anapaestic Monometer Acatalectic. 

The anapaestic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet. 
GDvyaTrjp, ws ^pr^, 

§372. Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalectic. 

The anapaestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. The legiti- 
mate Caesura occurs after the second Arsis, at the end of the second foot. 
But the Caesura is often found after the short syllable which follows the 

Arsis. 

\A7r0Aets pH, a7roA.ets. I [ ov Karapvijus 
JJpoorif3rj pcavia. J | tl<s 6 Trrjhrjcras, 
Urepvyoyv iperpLOLcriv 1 1 ipeacropiivr]. 



r / / / 

/ / r. ■ . f 



§ 373. Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic. 

The anapaestic dimeter catalectic {paroemiac) consists of three feet 
and a syllable, and has no Caesura, the Caesura not being used in the 

paroemaic. 

EtAero x^pas i<pop€vew 

Aia tov crbv irpwKTOV 6<p\rjcrei. 



§374. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



587 



§ 374. Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The anapaestic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a sylla- 
ble, being formed by adding the anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroeintac) 
to the anapaestic dimeter acatalectic. This verse is also called Aris- 
tophanic, from its use by Aristophanes, though not invented by him. 
The spondaic paroemiac, which sometimes occurs in the regular system, 
is not admissible in the tetrameter. 

The Caesura is at the end of the fourth foot, sometimes, though rarely, 
after the short syllable immediately following. There is generally also 
an incisure at the end of the second foot. 

Hpocpel tls act rwv opvLSoiv 1 1 /xavTevo/JLevip 7repl rov tt\ov ; 
Iltos 8' vyUiav Sojcrcwcr' clvtols. 1 1 ovcrav 7rapa tolctl $eo2<riv J 
Taw apyvpicov • ovtol yap tcracri. 1 1 Xeyovcn Se rot rdSe 7rayres. 



Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic does not seem to have been used by 
the Greek poets. 



APPENDIX B 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

1. For the convenience of those who may wish to read some of the 
earlier editions of the Greek writers, the following table, containing old 
forms of some of the letters, and also abbreviations of certain words 
or parts of words, is subjoined. 

2. No. I. contains certain single letters or elements, which are of con- 
stant occurrence in the compound characters, and are found nowhere else. 
No. II. contains characters, the elements of which would not at once be 
obvious, and for this reason alone they are not placed alphabetically in 
columns III — VI. Indeed, the characters in Nos. I. and IE. might all 
have been arranged alphabetically in columns III — VI. The characters 
in columns III — VI. are arranged alphabetically ; the initial letter of 
these characters, by the aid of those in No. I., will be readily known. 1 



See Robinson's Buttmann, p. 466. 



588 



TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 



7^ 

a 



ft 



I. 

e x 



IV, 



eivctc 






v. 



01 



oiov 



ii. 

~oy yap yap « *t eA ??v ov t© v 

III. 

2^i afo 

<ty aX 

fy *p 

p^T* xara 
J(?^' TtecpccAcciov 



A? 



o e a 



oV *ai 



T4 



"^p «P 

CuS\9 auxo 

rffyy 

y*f7«9 
ft 7** 
yfy yev 

$ 7*9 
Sjy yivexcu 

yo> y$t> 

XJ 790 
<£# d<| 

2^$& <3Va 
<%& &a 



arvr 01/T05 
/C^j/iapa 

^ 7l£p 
7T 7T£p2 

^ no 



juty" [icctcov 

/J&V fA€V 



(^ aa 

o3( g&cci 

G GO 

CJT OTt 

as 00 

Q> ceo 

>r xaig 



VI. 

5^§> javd-a 

* T 

\ 
TO 

ToV 



TO!/ 



TOl/ 



t 

n 

r 

r 

3S ™ 

** *» 

T xcov 

V VI 

tw vv 
rfjsr vn 
# & 

c5 » 



I. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



N. B. The figures refer to sections. K. is used for remark 



Abbreviations, Appendix B. p. 588. 

Ablative expressed by Dat. 285, 1. 

Absolute, Case Absolute, see Cases. 

Abrogation of clauses by aXka 322, 6. 

Abstracts 39, in PL 243, 3, (3). 

Absorption of Diphth. in Crasis, 10, 
4,5. 

Acatalectic verse 352, 2. 

Accentuation 29 ; change and re- 
moval of the accent by Inflec, 
Compos, and Contract. 30 ; in 
connected discourse (Grave in- 
stead of the Acute), in Crasis, 
Elision, Anastrophe 31. Accent, 
of first Dec. 45 ; second Dec. 49 ; 
third Dec. 65 ; adjectives and 
participles 75 ; words ending in 
vg, sla, v 76, II ; ag, iov 78. B. 
7, and 29, R. 5 ; lav, ov 78, B. 9, 
and 65, 5 ; tj?, sg 78, B. 11 ; verb 
118. 

Accusative 276 sq. ; local relation, 
limit, aim 277 ; of the object pro- 
duced with a verb of the same 
stem or one of a cognate signifi- 
cation (fid/rjv (idxw&txi> ; &jv (llov) 
278, 1 and 2 ; with verbs denot- 
ing to shine, to flow, etc. 278, 3 ; 
object, design 278, 4 ; manner 
278, R. 3 ; of the object on which 
the action is performed or the 
oO 



suffering object 279 ; with verba 
signifying to profit, to hurt, etc. 

279, 1 ; of doing good or evil to 
any one, etc. 279, 2; to persevere, 
to wait for, etc. 279, 3 ; to turn 
back, flee from, etc. 279, B. 3 ; to 
conceal, to be concealed, to swear, 
and with (p&uveiv, Xtinsiv 279, 4 ; 
with du, XQV 279, B. 4 ; fiuLveiv, 
nXuv, etc., which denote motion, 
etc., with verbs of sacrificing or 
dancing in honor of any one 279, 
B. 5 ; denoting an affection of 
the mind 279, 5 ; of space, time, 
quantity 279, B. 8; (xaXog %a 
hfifxata, aXyei ri]v xfqp«A?p) 279, 
7 ; double accusative : cpiXw 
cpiXlctv as, etc. 280, 1 ; xalu, 
xaxoi noib), kiyoj as 280, 2 ; with 
verbs of beseeching, asking, teach- 
ing, reminding, dividing, depriv- 
ing, concealing, clothing and un- 
clothing, surrounding, etc. 280, 
3 ; with verbs of appointing, 
choosing, educating, naming, etc. 

280, 4 ; in the a/iipa xatf oXov 
v.. fiigog 266, B. 4 ; Ace. in 
adverbial expressions, e. g. (xa- 
jcqov xXaiscv, [xsyu %uIqsw 278, 
B. 1 ; X^ lv i Sa^sav, tovto, 
therefore, 278, B. 2 ; tovtov %6v 



690 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS, 






tgorrov, dlvqv, ofAoia 278, R. 3 ; 
Ti)v ji&xiai^v ; uyxr t v, etc; nolla, 
saepe, uliyov, etc. 279, R. 8; 
svfjog, vtpog, ralla, etc. 279, R. 
10 ; with Pass, verbs 281 ; with 
verbal Adjectives in riog 284, 
R. 7. . 

Accusative with Inf. 307 ; instead of 
Norn, with Inf. 307, R. 4 ; instead 
of Gen. or Dat. with Inf. 307, R. 
2 ; as a subject after key era l, do- 
xsl, etc. 307, R. 5 ; with the Art. 
see Inf. ; with exclamations 308, 
R. 2 ; in the subordinate clauses 
of the or alio obliqua 345, 6. 

Accusative with the Part. 310, 2 ; 
absolute 312, 5 ; with mg 312, 6 ; 
Ace. of Part, instead of another 
Case 313, 1. 

Active verbs 102, 248, 249. Comp. 
Transitive ; with the meaning to 
cause to do 249, R. 3. 

Acute accent 29, 4 (a). 

Addition of consonants 24. 

Adjective (and Part.) 74 sq. ; Dial. 
215 ; Accent. 75 ; of three end- 
ings 76, 77 ; of two endings 78, 
79; of one ending 80; Com- 
parison of 81 ; used as a Subs. 
263, a ; Attributive 264 ; as Subs. 
with the Gen. (-17 nolli] rr t g yijg 
instead of to noXv Ttjg yijg) 264, 
R. 5 ; instead of the Adv. 264, 3. 

Adjectives Verbal, see Verbal Ad- 
jectives. 

Adjectives Numeral 96, 2. 

Adjective Substantive Clause 331, 
R. 4. 

Adjective pronoun used as a Subs. 
263, a. 

Adjective clauses 331 ; several con- 
nected together 334, 1 ; inter- 
changed with other subordinate 
clauses 334, 2. 

Adverb 100 ; formation 101 ; com- 
parison 85 ; expressed by an ad- 
jective 264, 3 ; as expressing an 



objective relation 314 sq. ; used 
as adjectives 262, d ; as substan- 
tives (ul vvv) 263, c ; in a preg- 
nant sense (vnot yr,g ea^sv, etc.) 
300, R. 7 ; (o ixffi&tv ntlsy.og 
dtT(jo r t $ei instead of 6 r/.sl 71.) 
300 R. 8 ; adverbs of place at- 
tracted 332, R. 7 ; inverse at- 
traction of Adv. of place 332 
R. 13. 

Adverbial correlatives 94, 3. 

Adverbial clauses 335 sq. ; of place 
336 ; time 337 ; cause 338 ; con- 
dition 339; concession 340, 7; 
consequence or effect 341 ; way 
and manner 342 ; quantity with 
ocro), oaov 343. 

Adversative coordinate clauses ex- 
pressed by 8s\ aklu, etc. 322 ; 
negative adversative coordinate 
clauses 321, 2. 

Agreement 240 sq. ; of the Attrib. 
Adj. 264, 1 ; of the Rel. Pron. 
in Gend. and Numb. 332 ; in 
Case 332, 6. 

Alphabet, history of, 2 b . 

Anacolutlion 347, 5 ; in the Part, 
construction 313, 1, (a). 

Anacrusis 352. R. 

Anapaestic dimeter acatalectic 372. 

Anapaestic dimeter catalectic 373. 

Anapaestic monometer acatalectic 
371. 

Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic 
374. 

Anapaestic verse 370. 

Anastrophe 31, IV. 

Anomalous substantives third Dec. 
67 sq.; Dial. 214; verbs 157 sq. 

Answer yes or no 344, 7. 

Aorist 103 ; Aor. Pass, with a 131 ; 
first Aor. Act. without a 154, 7 ; 
second Aor. with a 154, 8 ; sec- 
ond Aor. Act. and Mid. accord- 
ing to analogy of verbs in /n 191 
sq. ; Aor. of some verbs with 
both a Mid. and Pass, from 197, 









INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



591 



R. 1 ; Aor. of some Mid. verbs, 
whose Fut. has a Pass, from 197, 
R. 3 ; second Aor. Act. with In- 
trans. meaning and first Aor. Act. 
with Trans, meaning 141,4. — 
Syntax 256 ; iterative meaning 
256, 4, (b) ; in comparisons 256, 
4, (c) ; instead of the Pres. 256, 
4, (d) ; Aor. with %l ovv oh 
256, 4, (e) ; instead of the Fut. 
256, 4, (f) ; to denote the com- 
ing into a condition 256, 4 (g) ; 
signification of the Aor. Subj., 
Opt, Imp., Inf. and Part. 257. 

Aorist, first and second Mid. always 
reflexive (or In trans.) 251, 3 ; 
Aor. Subj. in subordinate clauses 
instead of the Fut. Perf. as used 
in Lat 255, R. 9. 

Aphaeresis 14, 5. 

Apodosis 339, 1. 

Apocope 207, 7. 

Aposiopesis 340, 2, (b). 

Apostrophe 13, R. 1. 

Apposition 266 ; in Gen. with Poss. 
Pron. (ifjbg tov a&Uov (ttoo) 266, 
2 ; Distrib. or Partitive apposi- 
tion 266, 3. 

Arsis and Thesis 349, 2 ; place of 
349, 3. 

Article 91 ; 244 sq. ; demons, and rel- 
ative 247 ; as proper article 244 ; 
with common nouns 244, 2 — 5 ; 
with abstracts, nouns of material, 
proper names 244, 6 and 7 ; with 
the Adjective and Part, used as 
substantives 244, 8, 9 ; with ad- 
verbs of time and place, used as 
adjectives 244, 10 ; with pro- 
nouns and numerals 246 ; (ret 
ir t g nokeoig, oi ntql Tivct, ol vvv 
av'&Qixmoi) 244, 10. 263 ; with 
every word or part of speech 
244, 11 ; position 245 ; with nag, 
blog 246, 5 ; with cardinal num- 
bers 246, 9. 

Article omitted with common nouns 



244, R. 3 ; with abstracts 244, R. 4 ; 
with propernames 244,7; with Adj. 
and participles 244, R. 8 ; with 
demonstrative pronouns 246, R. 1. 

Article with the subject and predi- 
cate 244, R. 1. 

Article in apposition 244, R. 6. 

Article repeated 245, 2. 

Article in place of the Poss. pro- 
noun (o narrjQ instead of ifiog 
jr.) 244, 4. 

Asper, see Spiritus. 

Aspirate before another aspirate 
changed to a smooth 17, 4 ; 21, 3. 

Aspirates 5, (a). 

Asyndeton 325. 

Atonies 32. 

Attic second Dec. 48 ; Attic Redup. 
see Redup. 

Attraction of Gend. 240, 3 ; Numb. 
241, 6 ; with Prep, and Adv. 300, 
4, comp.300,3; with the Inf. 307, 
4. 308, 2; with wgit, 341,3; with 
the Part. 310, 2; of Modes 327 b ; 
of the relative 332, 6 ; of oiog, 
uaog, rjllxog, 332, 7 ; inverted 
attraction 332, R. 12; with ovdslg 
ogxig ov ; with adverbs of place 
332, R. 13; attraction of the 
relative in position 332, 8 ; at- 
traction of the relative in a 
clause subordinate to the adjec- 
tive clause 332, 9 ; attraction of 
the Case in comparative sen- 
tences introduced by wc, m^tisq, 
wgjs 342, R. 3., comp. 344, R. 7. 
and 324, R. 2. 

Attribute 239, 2. 

Attributive relation of sentences 
262, sq. 

Augment, 108, 3 ; 119 sq. and 219 ; 
in compounds 125 and 215, sq. 

Blending of two or more interroga- 
tive sentences into one (rig xlvog 
aXnog iyevsro) 344, R. 7. 

Bracliylogy 346, 2. 



592 



INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 



Barytones 29, R. 7, (f). 
Bucolic Caesura 355. 

Caesura 351. 

Cardinals 96, sq. 

Cases 41; Synt. 268, sq.; Case 
Absolute: Gen. Abs. 312, 3; 
Ace. Abs. 312, 5. 

Catalectic verse 352, 2. 

Characteristic of the verb 108, 5 ; 
of the tenses 110 ; pure and im- 
pure 142, 2 ; of verbs in pi 1 70. 

Circumflex accent 29, 4. 

Classes of verbs 102. 248. 

Clauses, principal and subordinate 
326 ; substantive clauses 328 sq.; 
adjective clauses 331 ; adverbial 
clause 335. 

Comparatio compendiaria 323,11. 6. 

Comparison of adjectives 81 sq.; 
Dialects 216 ; of substantives 84, 
R. 4. 216, R. 2; of adverbs 85. 

Comparative degree 239; strength- 
ened and more definitely stated 
239 ; use of i] and of the Gen. 
-with the comparative 323, 2 sq. 

Comparative without a second mem- 
ber of the comparison 323, R. 7.; 
apparently used instead of the 
positive 323, R. 7. 

Comparative r, and the compar. 
Gen. 323 sq. ; compendious com- 
parison 323, R. 6. 

Comparative subordinate clauses 
342, 343. 

Composition of words 236. 

Compound words 236 sq. 

Concessive clauses 340, 7. 

Concretes 39. 

Conditional sentences, see si in the 
Greek Index. 

Conjugation 107 sq. ; in oo 115 sq. ; 
in p.i 168 sq., in the Dialects: 
in w 219, in pi 224. 

Conjunctions 199, 319. 

Consequence, clauses denoting, with 
aga, ovv, xolvvv, etc. 323, 3. 



Consonants 3, 2 ; division 5 ; mova» 
ble at the end of a word 15 ; chan- 
ges 17 sq. ; metathesis 22 ; doub- 
ling 23 ; strengthening of and ad- 
dition 24 ; expulsion 25, 3 ; omis- 
sion 25 ; final consonant of a 
pure Greek word 25, 5 ; inter- 
change of consonants in the dia- 
lects 202—204 ; changes of in 
the dialects, 208. 

Coordinate attributive adjectives 
264, 2. 

Coordinate sentences 319 sq. ; cop- 
ulat. coordinate sentences (xs — 
y.al) 321, 1, a; negative (oI'ts, 
olds) 321, 2; (ov fjovov — ullu y.al, 
etc.) 321, 3. adversative coordi- 
nate sentences, (psv — 8s) 322, 1 
— 5; {alio.) 322, 6; disjunctive 
(v — V> etc.) 323 ; reason, cause 
(yag) 324, 2 ; consequence or 
inference (uga, xoIpvv) 324, 3. 

Copula slvai 238, R. 6. 

Copulative coordinate sentences 321. 

Coronis 10, R. 1. 

Correlative pronouns and adverbs 94. 

Crasis 10 sq.; in the Dialects 206 ; 
in relation to the accent 31, II. 

Customary, wont, 256, 4 (b). 

Dative 282 sq. 

Dative local (where ?) 283, 1 ; («) 
avxdlg xdlq mnoiq 283, 2. (/5) 

QXQCXXM, OXolo), Tlh'j&SL, VWVOl, 

etc. 285, R. 2 ;' of time (when f) 
xqIxtj r^sqex ; of the condition 
under which anything happens, 
283, 3. 
Dative as a personal object 284 ; in 
a local relation (whither) with 
verbs of motion (v.vi%siv %UQuq 
ol(j(xvu>) 284, R. 1 ; Dat. of com- 
munion 284, 3 ; with verbs ex- 
pressing mutual intercourse, as- 
sociating with, participation 284, 
3, (1) ; with verbs of contend- 
ing, approaching, yielding ; with 



INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 



593 



the adjectives and adverbs, nXr}- 
aiog, evuvxiog, nelag (tyyvg) etc. 
284, 3, (2) ; with verbs of com- 
manding, entreating, counselling, 
inciting, following, serving, obey- 
ing, accompanying, trusting, with 
the adjectives and adverbs, wxo- 
lov&og, diadoxog, e|»]s, etc. 284, 
3, (3) ; with expressions of like- 
ness and unlikeness 284, 3, (4) ; 
with expressions denoting to be 
becoming, suitable, pleasing 284, 
3, (5) ; of agreeing with, blam- 
ing, reproaching, being angry 
with, envying 284, 3, (6) ; of 
helping, averting and being use- 
ful 284, 3, (7) ; with all verbs 
and adjectives when the action 
takes place for the honor, advan- 
tage or disadvantage, etc. of a 
person (Dativus commodi et in- 
commodi) 284, 3, R. 4 ; with 
verbs of observing, finding, meet- 
ing with something in a person 
284, 3, (8) ; Dat. of possession 
with uvai and ylyvscr&cu 284, 3, 

(9) ; instead of Lat. Dat. (ali- 
quid mihi est honori) 284, 3, (9) ; 
when an action takes place in 
reference to a person 284, 3, 

(10) ; ethical Dat. 284, 3, (10), 
(d) ; with Pass, verbs 284, 3, 

(11) ; with verbal adjectives in 
xog and rsog instead of vno with 
the Gen. 284, 3, (12). 

Dative of the thing, or instrumental 
Dat. 285 ; of the ground or rea- 
son with verbs denoting the state 
of the feelings 285, 1, (1); of 
the means and instrument with 
XQi)(J&txi and vo^lQuv 285, 1, 
(2) ; manner, material, standard, 
rule and measure 285, 1, (3). 

Dative with the Inf. 307, 2, (b). 

Dative with the Part. 310, 2. 

Dative of participle instead of anoth- 
er Case 313, 1, (a). 



Declension of the substantive 41, 3 ; 
first Dec. 42 — 44 ; quantity and 
accent 45 ; Dialects 211 ; second 
Dec. 46 — 48 ; accent 49 ; gen- 
der 50; Dialects 212; third Dec. 
51 — 69 ; quantity 64 ; accent 65 ; 
gender 66 ; Dialects 213 ; anoma- 
lous nouns 67 sq. 214; defective 
nouns 69. 214, R. 2. 

Declension of adjectives and partici- 
ples 74 — 79, see adjectives. 

Declension of pronouns 87 sq. 

Declension of numerals 99, 5. 

Defectives of the third Dec. 69, 73, 
2. 214, R. 2. 

Demonstrative pronouns, see Pro- 
nouns. 

Denominative verbs 232, 1. 

Deponents 102, 3 ; Passive Depo- 
nents 197, Syn. 252. 

Derivation of words 232 sq., of ten- 
ses 128. 

Derivatives 231, 2, 4, (b). 

Desiderative verbs 232, Rem. 3. 

Diaeresis 4, R. 6 ; in the Dialects 
205, 6 ; metrical diaeresis 351 R. 

Dialects page 13 ; 202 sq. 

Diastole 37, 2. 

Digamma 5, 2, (a) ; 25, 2 ; 200. 

Dimeter 360. 

Diminutives 233, 2, (c). 

Dipody 350, 4. 

Diphthongs 4, 3. 

Disjunctive coordinate sentences 
323. 

Distributive apposition 266, 3. 

Division of syllables 36. 

Double consonants 5, 4. 

Doubling of consonants 208, 4. 

Dual number 41 ; 106 ; with a PI. 
verb 241, 5 ; interchanged with 
the PI. 241, R. 8 ; Dual verb 
with a PL Subj. 241, R. 9 ; Dual 
of the Fern, with the Masc. (rov- 
xw %a TS%va) 241, R. 10, (b). 



Elision 13 sq. ; in the Dialects 206, 



•50* 



594 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



5 ; elision in respect to the ac- 
cent 31, III. 

Ellipsis 346, 1 ; of the subject and 
especially of the Subs. 238, 5 ; 
of the copula thai 238, R. 6 
and 7 ; of* the Subs, to which 
the attribute belongs 263; of av 
260, R. 3. 6, 7 ; of the Protasis 
and Apodosis 340. 

Emphasis in sentences 321, 3. 

Enclitics 33 sq. ; accented 35. 

Enhansive sentences expressed by 
xai, ov povov, alka v.al 321, 3. 

Epicenes 40, R. 5. 

Essential words 238, 1. 38, 4. 

Etymology 13. 

Euphonic Prothesis 16, 10. 

Expulsion of consonants 25. 

Factitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c). 

Feminine PL with Sing, verb 241, 
R. 6 ; with the neuter (al [xsra- 
fiohu XvnriQor') 241, 2 ; with a 
Neut. (to yvvaivAOV i<xxi y.aXrj) 
241, 2, sq. ; Fern. Dual with the 
Masc. (?ot'Tw t« xsyva) 241, R. 10. 

Final clauses 330. 

Frequentative verbs 232, R. 2. 

Formal words 238, 1. 38, 3. 

Formation of words 231 sq. 

Future tense 103 ; Attic 117 ; Doric 
in aovfiou 154, 3; without a 154, 

4 ; in ovfxai with mute verbs 154, 

5 ; Mid. instead of Act. (axovw, 
axovooiiai instead of axavaw) 
154, 1, and 198; Synt. 255,3, 
4 ; Fut. Inf. after verbs of think- 
ing, hoping, etc. 257, R. 2. 

Future Perf. 103 ; in Act. form 
154, 6 ; Synt. 255, 5 ; instead 
of the simple Fut. 255, R. 8 ; 
the Lat, Fut. Perf., how ex- 
pressed in Greek 255, R. 9. 

Gender of the substantive 40 ; first 
Dec. 42 ; second Dec. 50 ; third 
Dec. 66 ; of Adj. and Part. 74. 



Gender of the adjective, etc. in the 
const, y.axa avvsaiv 241 ; in gen- 
eral statements 241, 2 ; with sev- 
eral subjects 242; of the Superl. 
with Part. Gen. 241, 7 ; of the 
relative pronoun 332. 

Genitive, attributive 265 ; used el- 
liptically 263, (b). 

Genitive in the objective relation 
270. 

Genitive, separative, with verbs of 
removal, separation, loosing, de- 
sisting, freeing, missing, depriv- 
ing, differing from 271, 2, 3 ; 
with verbs of beginning 271, 4. 

Genitive of origin and author, with 
verbs of originating, being pro- 
duced from 273, 1. 

Genitive, possessive, (a) with sivcu, 
ylyvsad-ou, (/5) Id tog owuoq, etc. 
273, 2. 

Genitive of quality 273, 2, (c). 

Genitive, partitive, with iivai and 
yiyvsa&ai; TL&ivai, noisla&ao, 
jjytUr-dou 273, 3, (a) ; in attribu- 
tive relation with substantives, 
substantive adjectives, substan- 
tive pronouns, numerals and ad- 
verbs 273, R. 4; with words 
which express the idea of parti- 
cipation, sharing in ; with verbs 
signifying to touch, be in connec- 
tion with ; of acquiring and at- 
taining ; of physical and intellec- 
tual contact, of laying hold of; 
of hasty motion, striving after an 
object 273, 3, (b), and R. 7 ; with 
verbs of entreating and suppli- 
cating 273, R. 6 ; with the ad- 
verbs sv&v, Idv, peyyi ; with 
verbs of meeting and approach- 
ing 273, 3, R. 9 ; Part. Gen. in 
poetry 273, R. 7. 

Genitive of place 273, 4, (a). 

Genitive of time 273, 4, (b). 

Genitive of material 273, 5 ; with 
verbs of making, forming 273, 5, 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



595 



(a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of 
eating, drinking, tasting, enjoy- 
ing, having the enjoyment of 
something intellectually, etc. (c) ; 
of smelling (d) ; of remember- 
ing and forgetting ; with expres- 
sions of being acquainted and 
unacquainted with, of experience 
and inexperience, ability, dex- 
terity, of making trial of, with 
verbal adjectives in -wog, etc. ex- 
pressing the idea of dexterity 

(e) ; with words of sensation and 
perception (vcxuueiv, ay.Quua&ai, 
u wit a via & ml, oacpyaiveir&ai (f) 
and R. 19.; with verbs of hear- 
ing 273, R. 18; with verbs of 
seeing, hearing, experiencing, 
learning, considering, knowing, 
judging, examining, saying, ad- 
miring, praising, blaming 273, R. 
20. 

Genitive of cause 274 ; with verbs 
denoting a desire, longing for 
(a) ; care, concern for (b) ; pain, 
grief, pity, with adjectives having 
a similar meaning, particularly in 
exclamations, with interjections 
(c) ; with verbs expressing an- 
ger, indignation, envy, admira- 
tion, praise and blame (d), (e), 

(f ) ; with verbs expressing re- 
quital, revenge, accusing and 
condemning 274, 2; tou with 
the Inf. 274, 3, (a) ; with the 
adverbs iv, xalwg, psTylaig, tag, 
nwg, oTiixtg, u'tuxig, etc. connected 
with s/siv, i]Y,uv, sivai 274, 3, 
(b). 

Genitive with verbs of ruling, supe- 
riority, and inferiority, subjuga- 
tion, with the adjectives iyxguv^g, 
ay.(juir t g 275, 1. 

Genitive after the comparative 275, 
2 ; use of the Gen. and ij with 
the comparative 323, 2 sq. 

Genitive of price 275, 3. 



Genitive with substantives and ad- 
jectives 275, R. 5. 

Genitive, double, governed by one 
substantive 275, R. 7. 

Genitive with the Inf. 307, 2, (a). 

Genitive with the Part, 310, 2. 

Genitive absolute 312, 3 ; when the 
subject is the same as that of the 
predicate 313, 2; with wg after 
eidsvai, voelv, etc. 312, R. 12. 

Gentile nouns 233, 2, (a). 

Grave accent 29 ; instead of the 
acute 31. 

Heteroclites 59, R. 2; 67, (b) ; 71. 
Heterogeneous substantives 70, B. 
Hexameter verse 355. 
Hepthemim 355. 
Hiatus 8 ; 206, 7. 
Historical tenses 103, 2; 254, 3. 
Hypercatalectic verse 352, 2. 
Hypodiastole 37. 
Hypothetical sentences, see el. 

Iambic dimeter 367. 

Iambic monometer 366. 

Iambic trimeter acatalectic 368. 

Iambic tetrameter catalectic 369. 

Iambic verse 365. 

Imitative verbs 232, 1, (a). 

Imperative 104, III ; Synt. 258, 1, 
(c) ; use of the Imp. 259, 4 ; 
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. 255, R. 6. 

Imperfect tense 103; analogous to 
verbs in pu 196 ; Synt. 256, 2 — 4. 

Impersonal construction, see per- 
sonal construction. 

Impersonal verbs 238, R. 2. 

Inclination, see Enclitic. 

Indeclinable nouns 73, 1. 

Indicative 104, 1 ; Synt. 258, (a) ; 
Fut. with av 260, 2, (1) ; 
Impf., Plup. and Aor. with av 
260, 2, (2) ; difference between 
the Impf., Aor. and Plup. 256 ; 
Fut. instead of the Imp. 255, 4 ; 



;96 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



■with ov, e.g. ov Tcavay Xeywv ib.; 
Ind. of the Hist, tenses with words 
expressing a wish 259, R. 6; Ind. 
in subordinate sentences, see the 
separate conjunctions ; Ind. in 
oral, obliq. 344, 6. 

Indirect form of discourse, see ob- 
lique form. 

Infinitive 105, (a) ; Synt., the 
Pres. and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (c) ; 
Aor. Pres. and Fut. after verbs 
of thinking, etc. 257, R. 2 ; with 
«V 260, 2, (5). 

Infinitive 305 ; without the Art. 306 ; 
with verbs of willing and the 
contrary, etc. 306, 1. (a) ; with 
verbs of thinking, supposing, 
saying 306, 1, (b) ; after expres- 
sions denoting ability, cause, 
power, capacity 3U6, 1, (c) ; with 
adjectives and substantives, with 
sivui, ni(fvy.ivaL and ylyv&irxtai 
with a substantive, after ovyfiul- 
vst, dtl, xqi] and the like, after 
substantives, adjectives, demon- 
strative pronouns, after verbs of 
giving, sending, etc. 306, 1, (d). 

Infinitive, or Ace. with Inf. differ- 
ent from Part. 311 ; Inf., or Ace. 
with Inf., different from cm, ag, 
that 329, R. 5; in forms express- 
ing command or wish 306, R. 11 ; 
in forms expressing indignation 
306, R. 11, c ; with at yaQ, 
u&s 306, R. 11, (d). 

Infinitive with Nom., Gen., Dat. 
and Ace. 307. 

Infinitive with the Art. instead of 
the Inf. without the Art. 308, R. 1. ; 
in Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
308, 2 ; in exclamations and 
questions implying indignation 
308, R. 2 ; as an adverbial ex- 
pression (to vvv uvcll and the 
like) 308, R. 3. 
Infinitive Act. instead of the Pass. 
306, R. 10. 



Inflection 38. 

7n/?ec^on-endings of the verb 109 
sq. ; Remarks on 116 ; of verbs 
in pi 171, 172. 

Intensive verbs 232, R. 2. 

Interchange of vowels 201 ; conso- 
nants 202—204. 

Interpunction-m&rks 37. 

Interrogative pronouns, see Pro- 
nouns. 

Interrogative sentences 344 ; modes 
in 344, 6 ; connection with a 
relative sentence 344, R. 3 ; 
change of a subordinate sentence 
into a direct interrogative sen- 
tence (orav xl noLTjoioai) 344, 
R. 6 ; blending of two or more 
interrogative sentences into one 
(rig rlvog u.l'iiog am) 344, R. 7. 

Intransitive verbs 248, (1) (/?) ; as 
Trans, with the Ace. 249, R. 2 ; 
instead of the Pass. 249, 3 ; in 
the Pass. 251, 4, and R. 6. 

Interrogative sentence with the Art. 
344, R. 3. 

Inversion 348, 5. 

Iota subscript 4, R. 4. 

Iterative form in axov 221. 

Lengthening of the vowels 16, 3. 207. 

Lenis Spiritus 6. 

Letters, sounds of 2 a . 

Limitation of sentences 322, 1 — 5. 

Litotes 239, R. 3. 

Local substantives 233, 2, (d). 

Masculine PI. with Sing, verb 241, 

R. 6 ; connected with the Neut. 

(ov TioXXol duvov) 241, 2; Masc. 

with a Neut. (puQumov fan tta- 

Xog) 241, 1 ; Masc. PI. with Fern. 

241, R. 11. 
Metaplasm 67, (c). 72. 214, R. 1. 
Metathesis of the liquids 22. 208, 

3 ; of the aspirates 21, 3 ; verb 

156. 
Middle form 102 ; Synt. 248, (2) ; 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



597 



with reflex, sense 250 ; with the 
meaning to cause to do 250, R. 
2 ; when an action is performed 
to the advantage or disadvantage 
of the subject 250, R. 3 ; with a 
reflex Pron. 250, R. 3; with a 
subjective meaning, figuratively 
250, R. 4 ; with a pass, sense 251. 

Modes 104 ; Synt. 258 sq. ; in subor- 
dinate clauses 327 b , 1 ; attraction 
of 327 b ; comp. the separate con- 
junctions, in Greek Index. 

Mode vowels 111 ; summary of 112 ; 
of verbs in (ii 171; in the Dial. 
220. 

Movable final consonants 15. 

Multiplicatives 96, 1, (d). 

Negatives, ov, pj 318; accumula- 
tion of negatives 318, 6 ; appa- 
rent Pleonasm of 318, 6 — 9. 

Neuter of names of persons con- 
nected with Masc. or Fern. 241, 2, 
R. 3 ; PI. instead of the Sing, with 
verb, adjectives 241, 3 ; PI. of 
pronouns 243, 4 ; PL with Sing, 
verb 241, 4. 

Nominal question 344, 2. 

Nominative with the change of the 
Act. construction of the verb 
with the Gen. or Dat. into the 
Pass., e. g. niarsvofMU 251, 4. 

Nominative Case 269 ; with ovofxd 
sail ^ot, ovopa f/w, with verbs 
of naming 269, R. 3 ; Norn, of 
an abstract instead of a Lat. Dat. 
(mihi est honori) 269, R. 2 ; Nom. 
instead of the Voc. 269, 2 ; in 
axijpa xa& 6Xov xwl (.isgog 266, 
3, R. 4. 

Nominative with the Inf. 307 ; in- 
stead of the Ace. with the Inf. 
307, 4. 

Nominative with a Part. 310, 3 ; in- 
stead of another Case 313; with- 
out a finite verb 313, R. 1. 

Numerals 96 sq. 218. 



Number 41. 106 ; Synt. 243 ; in the 
const. x«t« avveaiv 241 ; with 
verb, adjectives in xoq rsog 241, 
3 ; the number of adjectives 
when they are connected with 
several subjects 242, 1 ; number 
of verb with several subjects 242, 
2 ; with several subjects disjunc- 
tively connected 242, R. 3 ; num- 
ber of the Rel. Pron. 332. 

Object in a sentence 239, 2. 

Objective construction of sentences 
267 sq. 

Oblique discourse 345 sq. 

Omission of consonants 25. 

Optative mode 104, II. see the Subj. 
Synt. ; nature of the Opt. 258, 1, 
(b). 259; with av 260, 2, (4); 
without av 260, R. 7 ; in exhor- 
tations 259, R. 1 ; Opt. Delib. 
259, 2 ; to express frequent rep- 
etition (as often as) 327 u , 2; to 
express a supposition, uncertain- 
ty, possibility, presumption, ad- 
mission 259, 3, (a) ; wish 259, 3, 

(b) ; instead of the Imp. 259, 3, 

(c) ; desire, wish, inclination 259, 
3, (d) ; in direct questions 259, 3, 
(e) ; Opt. without av instead of 
with civ 260, R. 7 ; Opt. in sub- 
ordinate clauses, see the separate 
conjunctions ; in oratio obliqua 
345, 4. 

Oratio obliqua 345. 
Ordinals 96 sq. 
Organs of speech 3. 

Participle 74 sq. 105, (b) ; Synt. 
309 sq. 

Participle as the complement of the 
verb 310 ; Nom., Gen., Dat., Ace. 
of the Part. 310, 2; after verba 
sentiendi 310, 4, (a) ; verba de- 
clarandi 310, 4, (b) ; verbs de- 
noting an affection of the mind 
(verba affectuum) 310, 4, (c) ; to 



598 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



be satisfied with, to enjoy, be full 
310, 4, (d) ; overlooking, permit- 
ting, enduring, persevering, 310, 
4, (e) ; beginning and ceasing 
310, 4, (f) ; to be fortunate, to 
excel, to be inferior, to do well 
or ill 310, 4, (g) ; after nctgoijiftf, 
ix£o[XKi, etc. 310, 4, (h); 



naoacrxsi 



after the phrases it is Jit, useful, 
etc. 310, 4, (i) ; after %yuv, to be 
in a condition, or state, e. g. e/to 
v,T7](jafiSvog 310, 4, (k) ; with 
TV/xdvco, luv&dvw, diarsloj, did- 
yon, cp&dvM, ol'/Ofxcu 310, 4, (1). 

Participle different from Inf. after 
several classes of verbs 311, and 
R. 

Participle as the expression of ad- 
verbial subordinate relations 312. 

Participle with o>g 312, 6; with 
Mgie, ojgneg, axs, o'ta, oiov 312, 6, 
R. 13. 

Participle with tivai, instead of a 
simple verb 238, R. 5. 

Participle with av 260, 2, (5). 

Participials 105 ; see Inf. and Part. 

Participial construction 309 ; ana- 
coluthon 313, 1. 

Particles 38, R. 

Particles expressing purpose, design 
330. 

Parts of Speech 38. 

Passive verb 102 ; Synt. 248, (3). 
251. 

Patronymics 233, 2, (b). 

Pentameter verse 356. 

Perfect tense 103 ; with a 131 ; ni- 
nvouiu, etc. 223, 14 ; Subj. and 
Opt. Perf. or Plup. Mid. or Pass. 
formed without the aid of an aux- 
iliary verb 154, 9 ; Perf. and 
Plupf. of verbs in [u with short- 
ened form 193; Perf. and Plup. 
analogous to verbs in fji 193 — 
195 ; second Perf. with Intrans. 
meaning 141, 4. 249, 2 ; Synt. 
255, 2; in the third Pers. Sing. 



Imp. Mid. or Pass. 255, R. 6 ; 
with the signif. of the Pres. 255, 
R. 5; instead of the Fut. 255, 
R. 7. 

Person of the verb 106 ; with sev- 
eral subjects 242 ; in adjective- 
clauses 332, 2. 

Persons, interchange of in the orat. 
obliq. 345, R. 6. 

Personal construction, instead of 
the Impers. with Inf. 307, R. 6 
and 7; with Part. 310, R. 3; 
with otl, <ag 329, R. 7. 

Personal endings 111 ; view of 113 ; 
difference between endings in 
the principal and subordinate 
tenses 114 ; of verbs in fit 172 ; 
Dialects 220. 

Personal pronouns 87 — 90. 

Plural number 41 ; with the sub- 
stantive in the Gen. 241, R. 2 ; 
PI. subst. with Dual verb 241, R. 
9 ; PL of subst. in proper names, 
names of materials, and abstracts 
243, 3 ; change to the Sing. 241, 
R. 12 ; in an address to one per- 
son 241, R. 13 ; the first Pers. 
PI. instead of the Sing. 241, R. 
12 ; Neut. PI. in verbal adjec- 
tives instead of the Sing. 241, 3 ; 
PI. of verbs with collective nouns 
in the Sing. 241, 1 ; with sub- 
stantives in the Dual 241, 5 ; 
rail a, rdds, exsiva used of one 
idea 241, R. 3 ; PI. interchanged 
with the Dual 241, R. 8. 

Pluralia tan turn 73, 2. 

Pluperfect 103. Comp. Perf. Synt. 
256, 2. 

Position of words 348. 

Position of av 261 ; article o, i], to 
245 ; prepositions 300, 6 ; pro- 
nouns, see the separate pronouns. 
Adverbs and particles, see the 
separate adverbs and particles ; 
of j£ 321, R. 3 ; fisv and di 322, 
R. 2. 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



599 



Positive degree, see Comparative. 

Possessive pronouns 90. 

Predicate 238, 2. 

Predicative relation of sentences 238. 

Pregnant construction 300, 3. 

Prepositions 199 ; Synt. 286 sq. ; as 
adverbs of place 300 ; Tmesis 
300, R. 4 ; in const. Praeg. nin- 
tsiv tv yovvaav) 300, 4 ; with, 
the Art., attracted (ol in rrjg ayo- 
giig av&Q(xmoi i'yvyov) 300, 4 ; 
repeated and omitted 300, 5 ; po- 
sition 300, 6. 

Present tense 103 ; Pres. and Impf. 
analogous to verbs in (it, 196 
Synt. 255, 1 ; Hist. Pres. 255, 1 
instead of the Perf. 255, R. 1 
instead of the Fut. 255, R. 3. 

Primitives 231, 2. 

Principal clauses 326. 

Principal tenses 103, 2. 254, 2. 

Proclitics 32. 

Pronouns 86; Dialects 217; De- 
clension 87 sq.; Synt. 301— 304. 

Pronoun, correlative 94 ; demon- 
strative, Decl. 91 ; Dialects 217, 
4. 303, 1 and 2 ; avxog 303, 3 ; 
prospective and retrospective 
304 ; omitted before a relative 
331, R. 3. 

Pronoun indefinite jig rl Decl. 93. 
303, 4 ; position 303, R. 5. 

Pronoun interrogative, u$ Decl. 93 ; 
see Interrog. sentences ; with Art. 
prefixed 344, R. 3. 

Pronoun personal Decl. 87. 302 ; 
third Pers. prospective 304; re- 
trospective 304, 3. 

Pronoun possessive 90 ; Dialects 
217, 3. 

Pronoun reciprocal Decl. 89. 

Pronoun reflexive Decl. 88. 302, 2 ; 
third Pers. instead of the first 
and second 302, 8 ; instead of 
the reciprocal 302, R. 7. 

Pronunciation 29, 36 ; of letters 3. 

Purpose, particles denoting 330, 1. 



Proportionals 96, 1, (e). 
Protasis 339. 

Prothesis Euphonic 16, 10. 207, 8. 
Punctuation-masks 37. 

Quantity 27 sq. ; in Dialects 209 ; 
first Dec. 45, (a) ; third Dec. 64. 

Redundant nouns 70. 

Reduplication 108, 4. 123, 219 ; in 
sec. Aor. 219, 7 ; Att. in Perf. 
and Plup. 1 24 ; second Aor. 1 24 ; 
R. 2 ; in compound words 1 25 
sq. ; as strengthening of the stem 
163. 

Reflexive verbs 102 ; Synt. 248, (2). 

Reflexive pronouns 88. 

Relation of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 2. 

Relative construction changed to the 
Demonstrative 334, 1. 

Relative pronoun Decl. 92; Synt. 
331 sq. ; instead of the demons. 
331, R. 1 ; agreement of gender 
and number 332 ; Case (attrac- 
tion) 332, 6 ; attraction with 
oiog, baog, fjlUog 332, 7 ; inverse 
attraction 332, R. 11 ; with ovdelg 
ogng ov 332, R. 12 ; with ad- 
verbs of place 332, R. 13 ; at- 
traction in position 332, 8 ; rela- 
tive pronoun of an intermediate 
clause attracted 332, 9 ; construc- 
tion of the relative pronoun 333 ; 
rel. pron. changed to a demons, 
or pers. 334, 1 ; rel. pron. in- 
stead of a demonstrative 334, 3. 

Relative clause, see adjective clause. 

Reciprocal pronouns 89. 

Reciprocal verbs 248, R. 1. 

Resolution of contract verbs 222. 

Restriction of .sentences 322, 1 — 5. 

Rhythm 349. 

Roots 231, 2. 

Scheme, see a^fia in Greek Index. 

Sentences 238, 1. 

Sentences denoting effect or re- 



600 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



suit with aga, ovv, roivvv, etc. 
324, 3. 

Sequence of tenses 327 a . 

Shortening of the vowels 16, 4. 
207,4. 

Singular verb with Masc. or Fern. 
PL 241, R. 6 ; with Neut. PL 241, 
4 ; with several common nouns 
in PL 242, R. 2. 

Singular of substantives 243, 1 ; 
changed to the PL 241, R. 12 ; 
Sing. Imp. e. g. ems in an ad- 
dress to several 241, R. 13. 

Spiritus Len. and Asp. 6. 

Stem of the verb 108, 1 ; pure and 
impure 138 ; strengthening the 
consonant and prolonging the 
stem-vowel 139. 

Stems 231, 4, (a). 

Strengthening of the vowels 16, 1 ; 
consonants 24 ; stem of impure 
verbs 139. 

Subject 238, 2 ; change of the ac- 
tive construct, into the Pass., e. g. 
Ttiarsiofiav from nioxzvw xvvl 
251, 4 ; ellipses of 238, 5. 

Subjunctive Mode 104, II. Perf. 
and Pip. Mid. or Pass, without 
an auxiliary verb 154, 9 ; Subj. 
and Opt. Act. and Mid. of verbs 
in v(xu without auxiliary verb 
176, 5. Synt. 258, 1, (b). 259 ; 
Subj. Aor. instead of Fut. Perf. 
of Latin 255, R. 9. 

Subjunctive with av 260, 2, (3) ; 
(with and without av) instead of 
the Fut. Ind. 259, R. 4; Subj. 
hortative 259, 1 (a) ; delibera- 
tive 259, 1, (b). 260, 2, 3, (b) ; 
Srbj. to den. indefinite frequen- 
cy (as often as) 327 b , 2, 333, 3 ; in 
comparisons 333, R. 2 ; with ffrj 
instead of the Imp. 259, 5 ; in 
subordinate clauses, see the sep- 
arate conjunctions ; in Or. obliq. 
345, 5. 

Subordinate sentences 326 sq.; class- 



es 326, 3; characteristics 326, R. 
4 ; subordinate sentences changed 
into direct interrogative senten- 
ces 344, R. 6. 

Substantive 39 sq. ; Gen. 40 ; Numb., 
Case and Dec. 41 ; Dec. I. 42 
sq. ; Dec. II. 46 sq. ; Dec. III. 
51 sq. 

Substantive 39 sq. ; number 242. 

Substantive instead of adjective 264, 
R. 3. 

Substantive clauses expressing design, 
aim, with <ng, oiwag, \va, etc. 
330. 

Substantive clauses with oti, ag, that 
329. 

Superlative 81 sq. Synt. 239 ; strength- 
ening and more exact definition 
of, 239, R. 2; Gend. with the 
Part. Gen 241, 7. 

Syllables, division of 36. 

Synizesis 12. Dialects 206, 4. 

Syncope 16, 8. 207, 6; in substan- 
tives 55, 2 ; in verbs 155. 

Syntax 238 sq. 

Tenses of the verb 103 ; of the sub- 
ordinate modes 257; derivation 
128 ; formation of the secondary 
tenses, use of the same in con- 
nection with the primary 141 ; 
Tenses primary and Sec. 103, R. 
141. 

Tenses, Syntax 254 ; sequence of 
in subordinate clauses 327 a . 

Tense-formation of verbs in w 127; 
pure verbs 129; mute 142 sq. ; 
liquid 149 ; verbs in p 173 ; in 
Dialects 223. 

Tense-characteristic, see character- 
istic. 

Tense-endings 110. 

Tense-stem 110, 2. 

Theme of the verb 138, 3. 

Thesis and Arsis 349. 

Time, difference between Gen. and 
Dat. of time, 273, R. 13. 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



601 



Tmesis of Prepositions 300, R. 4. 

Transitive verbs 248, (a) («) ; with 
Intrans. or Reflex, signif. (tqstio) 
instead of TQSTio^aL) 249, 1, 2 ; 
with the sense to cause to do 249, 
R. 3. 

Transition from direct discourse to 
indirect and vice versa 345, R. 6. 

Transposition of the attributive 
adjective and Subs, (ol xgyaTol 
jiav av&QO)Ti(av instead of ol %Qi]- 
axol vtv&QCtiTcoi) 264, R. 5. 

Triemim 355. 

Trochaic verse 361. 

Trochaic monometer 362. 

Trochaic dimeter 363. 

Trochaic tetrameter catalectic 364. 

Variable vowels 16, 6 ; in the stem 
of impure verbs 140 ; change of 
el into ol 140, 4 ; of £ into o 
231, 6. 

Verb 102 sq. 219 sq. ; division of 
verbs in cu according to the char- 
acteristic 127 ; barytones 127, 
R.; pure verbs (and contract) 
129—137; Perispomena 127, R; 
impure 127. 138 — 141 ; mute 
127. 142—148; liquid 127. 149 
— 153 ; special peculiarities of 



verbs (pure and impure) 154 ; 
anomalous in w 157 sq. ; in p 168 
sq. ; in w which in certain tenses 
are analogous to verbs in [al : sec- 
ond Aor. Act. and Mid. 191 sq. ; in 
Dialects 227 ; Perf. and Plup. 
193—195 ; in Dialects 228 ; 
Pres. and Impf. 196 ; verbs De- 
nom., Frequent., Imitat., Intens., 
Fact, Desid. 232. 

Verbs active, with Mid. Fut. 198 ; 
those which have both an active 
and middle form for the Fut. 
198, R. 

Verb Act. Trans., Reflex., Recip., 
Pass., Intrans., Mid. 248 — 251. 

Verb jinitum and infinitum 105, R. 

Verbal adjectives in rog and riog 
234. 1, (i) ; PI. instead of Sing. 
241, 3 ; Construction 284, 3, (12). 

Verb characteristic 108, 5. 

Versification 349. 

Vowels 4; change 8 — 16 ; weaken- 
ing or attenuation of 16, 2 ; in- 
terchange in the Dialects 201; 
change in the Dialects 205 — 207. 

Weakening of vowels 16, 2. 

Zeugma 346, 3. 



51 



II. GREEK INDEX. 



Abbreviations. Adv. adverb ; adj. adjective ; Comp. compare; comp. com- 
pared ; c. a, with the accusative ; c. d. with the dative ; c. g. with the genitive ; c. 
inf. with the infinitive ; c. part, with the participle ; coll. collective ; con. construction ; 
Dec. declension; dec. declined ; euph. euphonic; ins. instead of; int. intensive; 
intr. intransitive ; pers. personal ; prep, preposition ; priv. privative ; E. remark ; 
trans, transitive. 



A pure 43, 1, (a) ; a priv., 

coll., int. 236, E, 3, (b); 

a euph. 16, 10. 
ayc&os eornp. 84, 1. 
ayaWeor&cu c. dat. 285, 

1, (1); c. part, 310, 4, 
, (c). 
ayavaKTeiv c. d. 285, 1, 

(1); c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
ayairciu c. a. and d. 274, 

R 1; c. d. 285, 1, (1); 

c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
&ya(r&ai c. gen. and ace. 

273, E, 20; nud vivos 

274, 1, and E. 2. 
ayy4\\eiv c. Inf. and part. 

311, 10. 
ayyiWerai pers. ins. c. a. 

and inf. 307, E. 6. 
&ye referring to several 

persons 241, E. 13. 
aysoelv c. part. 310,4, (a). 
ayopd£eiv c. g. 275, 3. 
ayvievs dec. 57, E, 2. 
&y X i C. g. 273, E, 9. 
&ywv, With, 312, E, 10. 
<*7a;j/i(>o-&a£ c.d. 284,3 (2). 
a8a?js c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
a8e\<pos c. g. 273. 3, (b). 
adiKelv c. a. 279, 1 ; c. two 

ace. 280, 2; c. part. 310, 

4, (g). 
ar)8u>v dec. 55, E. 2. 
'AS6a>s dec. 212, 7. 
cm see et : ot 7ap c. inf. 

306. E. 11, (d). 
a'5e?o-&at c. a. 279, 5; c. 

pai-t. and inf. 311, 14. 
cu5o?os comp. 82, I, (d). 
alSds dec. 60, (b). 



ctipeiv Tiva jxiyav etc., 

280, 4. 
alptiv c. g. 274, 2. 
atpeloSrat c. two a. 280, 4. 
alabduofxai ins. the perf. 

255, E. 1. 
fuV&di'eo'&cu c. g. and a. 

273, 5, E. 19; c. part. 

310, 4, (a). 
aCacxeiv c. a. 279, E. 5. 
aiVxp^s comp. 83, II. 
alaxvveo'&cu c. a. 279, 5 ; 

c. d. 285,1. (1); c.part. 

and inf. 311, 14. 
aiTelv c. two a. 280, 3. 
alTiaa&ai C. g. 274. 2. 
cutios elfit c. inf. 306,1, (c). 
o.k6\ov&os, -e?v, -WS, -7]Tl- 

kos c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
aKovTi^iv c. g. 273, E. 7. 
aKoveiv, audivisse, 255, 

E, 1. 
d/couetv c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(f) and E. 19; to obey, 

c. g. and d. 273, E, 18; 

c. inf. and part. 311, 1. 
aKpar-qs C g. 275, 1. 
aKparos 82, I, (e). 
aKpoaa&ai c. g. 273, 5, (f ) 

and E. 19. 
aXyeiu c. d. 285, 1, (1). 
a\yeiv6s comp. 84. 4. 
aXe|eu/ C. d. 284, 3, (7). 
a\ievs dec. 57, E. 2. 
o-Ais c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
aX'KTKecr&ai c.p. 310. 4, (b). 
dAAa 322, 6 ; in a^ ques- 
tion ib. ; aAAo 7c£p 324, 

E. 1. 
aAAa, aAAo*, ot aAAoi,with- 



out Kai in a series 325, 
(e) ; dAA' % (ovk, ovSev 
dAA' ¥] : ovdev aAAo, dAA' 
% ; ri aAAo, dAA 5 ^ ; aAAo 
ri, dAA' *?J 322, E. 10. 

aWdrreiu, -ecr&ai C. g. 
275, 3. 

a\\r]\ccv dec. 89 ; use of 
302, E. 7. 

aAAo or aAAo ti jj ellipti- 
cal 346, 2, (d). 

a\\o?os c. g. 271, 3. 

&\\os d\\ou (aAAos aAAo- 
&ej/) with another Kom. 
266, 3. 

aAAo ti ¥i and aAAo ti in 
a question: nonne 344, 
5, (g). 

aXAorptos c. g. 271. 3. 

aAs dec. 54, (a) and E. 1. 

aXwvai C. g. 274, 2. 

aW dec 56, E. 1. 

aAa>s dec. 48, E, 1. 70, A, 
(a). 72, (b). 

afia c. d. 289, E. ; with 
part. 312, E. 6; c. d. 
and part. 312, E, 5. 

a/naprdveiv C. g. 271, 2 ; C 
part. 310, 4. (g). 

d^ei/Seij/, -ecrfrat C. g. 275, 
3; c. a. 279, 1. 

afjLciuwu 84, 1. 

d,ueAe?i/ c. g. 274, 1 ; C 
inf. 306, 1, (a). _ 

aix7]X av ^ s e *A" c - m ^- ms * 
b.pA\xav6v ia-TL c. a. et 
inf. 307, E. 6. 

&p.oipos c. g. 273, 3. (b). 

hfxww c. d. 284, 3, (7). 

d^Iprep. 295, 1, (2) ; C 






GREEK INDEX. 



603 



d. in a pregnant signif. 

ins. c. a. 300, 3, (a). 
afupl irepl 300, R. 1. 
a/A.(f>ievvvvai C, two a. 

280, 3. 
a/j.cpisPriT<;?v c.d. 284,3, (2). 
d/xcpco dec. 99, R. 
av- priv. 236, R. 3, (b). 
&v 260; c. incl. fut. 260, 

2, ( 1 ) ; ind. impf., plup. 

and aor. 260, (2) and 

333, 7 ; c. subj. 260,(3); 

c. opt. 260, (4) ; c. inf. 

and part. 260, (5) ; po- 
sition and repetition of 

&v 261. [2, (3), (d). 
&v with conjunctions 260, 
&v ice 261, R. 3. 
&v with the relative 333, 3. 
av in Protasis 340, 6. 
&v omitted with the Opt. 

260, R. 7 ; with Pret. 

Ind. omitted 260, R. 3 

and 6. 
&v ins. idv, which see. 
&va voc. 53, R. 4. 
&va inst. of avdarrj^L 31, 

R. 3. 
avd prep. 290, 1. 
avafSdWeaSai c. inf. 306, 
; 1, (a). 

avayicd^eiv rivd ti 278, 4. 
avaicayyd^eiv c. a. 278, 3. 
aua/j.tfj.vrj(TK€iv c. two a. 

280, 3. 
&va£ dec. 54, (c). 
avldvziv c. d. 284, 3, (5). 
aveiri<rT-f]fj.wv c. g. 273, 5, 

(e). 
avev c. g. 271, 3. 
cb/e'xeo'&cu C. g. 275, 1. 
ave'xeo-ftcu c. inf. 311, 15; 

c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
&veu{s) 25, 4, (c). 
avrip dec. 55, 2 ; to denote 

employment (dvfjp, H-dv- 

ns) 264, R. 3. 
aviaoftai c. d. 285, 1. 
avicrropeTv c. two a. 280, 3. 
cu/Texea&eu C g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
avri prep. 287, 1. 
avTidfav c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
avTiXaixfSdvzaSai c. g. 273, 
, 3, (b). 
aurios and avriov c. g. 273, 

R. 9. 
oj/T«rote?a'd-atc.g.273,3,(b). 



avc&yeav dec. 48. 

et|ios ei/u c. inf. 307, R. 6. 

a|tos, a^icas, a^iovv, -ovo~- 

3-at c. g. 275, 3 ; a^i6s 

tiv6s eifj.1 tivi 284, 3, 

(10) (b). 
afrodv c inf. 306, 1, (a). 
airayopeveiv (eS, kclkgos) C 

a. 279, 2; c. inf. 306, 1, 
, (a). 

cnraiSevTOS C g. 273, 5, (e). 
airaiTeiv c. two a. 280, 3. 
airaWdTTeiu C. g. 271, 2 ; 

-etrfrcu c. part. 310, 4, 

(f). 
a-Trou/Tai/ c. g. 273, R. 9 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (1). 
aireifrelv c. g. 273, R. 19 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
aireiiretv c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
airtipos e.g. 273, 5, (e). 
aireipus e%€Jj/ C. g. 273, 5, 

t e >- , ; 

airexsu', airex e0 ~& al c - £• 
271, 2. 

a-KHneiv c inf. 306, 1, (b). 

airXovs, -rj, -ovv dec. 77. 

anAovs comp. 82, I, (b). 

cbrJ prep. 288, 1 ; with 
pregnant sense ins. iv 
c. d. 300, 3, (c); {airo 
with the art. ins. iu 
(ol airb Trj s ay o pas 
dv&pooTtoi aTre(pvyov)300, 

4, (a). 

airb — eVe/ca 300, R. 2. 
a7ro5execr£cu c. g. 273, 

R. 20. 
aTrodiSoa&ai c. g. 275, 3. 
dTrodidpdaKeii/ c. a. 379, 3. 
auroAaveiv C. g. 273, 5, (c). 
airoAoyelcr&ai c. d. 284, 3, 

(7). 
"AnrohAav dec. 53, 4, 1, 

(a); 56, R. 1. 
aTTcnreipacrfrai c. g. 273, 

5, (gj. 
airoirp6 300, R. 1. 
airopeiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
airo(TTepe7u c. g. 271, 2; 

Tij/c£ ti, rivos ri, riv6s 

riva 280, 3, and R. 3. 
airocrrixfeiv c.g.273,R.16. 
airoo-rp£<pto-&ai c. g. 279, 

R. 3. 
airocpaiveiv c. part, and inf. 

311, 11. 
airo<pe{>yeiv c. a. 279, 3. 



airpeTws c. d. 284, 3, (5). 

airreoSai c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

apa 324, 3. 

Spa ins. 'dpa 324, R. 5. 

apa interrogative 344, 5, 
(b). 

ap4(TK€LU rivd 279, 1 ; ap- 
ecr/ceo-frcci c. d. 284. 3, 
(5); c. dat. of the in- 
strument 285, 1, (1). 

apyyeiv C. d. 284, 3, (7). 

"Ap-qs dec. 59, R. 2. 

dpiCTTOS 84, 1. 

'Apiaro(pdvr]s dec. 59, R. 2. 

apiceTaSai c. d. 285, 1,(1). 

app.6rreiv c. d. 284, 3, (5). 

apvetcrSrai c. inf. 306, l,(b). 

apvSs 55, R. 3. 

ap^d/xevos air6 rivos, par- 
ticularly 312, R. 3. 

&PX € w> to begin, c. g. 271, 
4; to rufe, c. g. 275, 1. 

iipxeo-^ai c. g. 27 1, 4 ; C 
part. 310,4, (f); c.part. 
and inf. 311, 16. 

apxop-euos, in the begin- 
ning, originally, 312, 
R. 3. 

ao-e/3eij/ c. a. 279, 1. 

aaKou, a<rK.6p.T\v 221. 

do-fiwos comp. 82, R. 6. 

dcrcra, acrcra 93. 

ao-T-jjp dec. 55, R. 3. 

aarpdirreiv c. a. 278, 3. 

ao-ru dec. 63. 

arai ins. z/tcu 144, R. 1. 

cn-ap 322, 7. 

are c. part. 312, R. 13. 

arepos 10, R. 2. 

"ArAa Voc. 53, R. 2. 

aro ins. vto 144, R. 1. 

drp4jxa(s) 25, 4, (c). 

'drra and aTTa 93. 

au, avrdp 322, 7. 

avTiita with part. 312., R.6. 

au<r(k dec. 91 ; Dial. 207, 
4, (c). 

avrSs use 302, 4; 303, 
3; with the art. 246, 
3, 8. 

avr6s in avrols 'lirirois, to- 
gether ivith the horses etc. 
283, 2, (a) ; 6 avr 6s c. 
d. 284, 3, (4). 

avrov dec. 88 ; use 302, 2. 

acpaipeicrSrai c. two a. and 
rivd rivos, tiv6s ri 280, 
3, and R. 3. 



604 



GREEK INDEX. 



dcp&ovos comp. 82, E. 6. 
a.'pievcu, -iea&ai Cg. 271,2. 
&<pva>{s) 25,4, (c). 
&xSea&aL c. d.285, 1,(1); 
c. part. 310, 4, (c). 

B euph. 24, 2. 

fiaiveiv iroha and the like 

279, E. 5. 

fiapeais (pepeLV C. d. 285, 
( 1 ) ; eVi Tiw and c. a. 
285, E. 1. [(c). 

fSapweoSai c. part. 310, 4. 

ficxriXzvew c. g. 275, 1. 

fiao-iAevs dec. 57, 2. 

fiaaicaivGu/ c. d. and a. 
284, 3, (b). 

BaTreco 212, 3. 

BoC 97, 2. 

fre\TCLTos 84, 1. 

PeXrepos 84, 1. 

fie\TL(TTos, jSe/Vnau' 84, 1. 

P\dirT€Lv c. a. 279, 1. 

fihaiTTeiv fxeydXa, etc. c. a. 

280, E. 1. 
faeireiu c. a. 278, 3. 
Pori&e?v c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
£o/5pSs Dec. 44, E. 2. 
iSouAei c. subj. 259, 1, (b). 
PovAeafraic. inf. 306,1, (a). 
PovAevea&ai c. inf. 306, 1, 

(a) ; c. 8Va>s and ind. 

fut. 330, 6. 
fiovs dec. 57, 2. 
Operas dec. 61, E. 1. 
Ppifreiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
fipi/iovtrSrou c. d. 284, 3, (6). 

Td\a dec. 54, (c). 
yd\a>s dec. 212, 7. 
yap 324, 2 ; in an answer 

344, 7. 
yaariip dec. 55, 2. 
ye 317, 2 ; in an answer 

344, 7. 
7e\Sy c. a. 278, 3. 
yeXoos dec. 71, B, (c). 
ydpeiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
yevvuv, parentem esse 255, 

E. 1. 
yevos dec. 61 (b). 
yepaio's- comp. 82, I, (c). 
7<fpas dec. 54, E. 4. 
yeveiv, 7eweor&ai C. g. 273, 

5, (c). 
yrjpas dec. 54, E. 4. 
ylyveoftcu syncopated, 

155, 2 ; with the sense 



of the Pres. 255, E. 1 ; 

c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. g. 

posses. 273, 2 ; c. g. 

partit. 273, 3, (a) ; c.d. 

284, 3, (9). 
yiyveral fxoi TifSov\ofAeva> y 

iXirofx4vw 284, 3,10, (cj ; 

yiyvtrai and an abstract 

substantive with an inf. 

306, 1, (d). 
yiyvctxTKeiv c. g. 273, E. 20; 

rl rivi 285, 1, (3) ; c. 

part. 310, 4, (a) ; c. inf. 

and part. 311, 4. 
yiyv&cTKU) c. ws and gen. 

abs. 312, E. 12. 
yiyv&GKU) ins. eyvcoKa 255, 

E. 1. 
ykr)X wt/ dec. 56, E. 1. 
y\ixe<rfrat c. g.273.3, (b). 
y6vv dec. 54, (c) ; 68, 1. 
7paCs dec. 57, 2. 
ypd<p€<r&cu c. g. 274, 2. 
yvfiv6s c. g. 271, 3. 
ywi'i dec. 68, 2. 

A euphon. 24, 2. 

Saep Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a). 

Sat' 315, 7. 

Saiea&cu c. two ace. 280, 3. 

daKpv and ddtcpvov 70 P>. 

Sacrus c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

5e 322, in a question E. 6, 

Be suffix 235, 3 and E. 3 

after a demons. 95, (c) 
SeSoucevcu c. inf. 306, l,(a) 
Set c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. ace 

and dat. 279, E. 4 ; c 

inf. 306, 1, (d) ; c. d 

and ace. c. inf. 307, 

E. 3. 
8eT o-' oirctis 330, E. 4. 
Set/cviW c. part. 310, 4, 

(b) ; c. part, and inf. 

311, 11. 
SelVa dec. 93, E. 2. 
8eiv6s c. inf. 306, 1 (c). 
8e7<rcu c. a. 279, 5. 
SeloSai c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
Se/xas c. g. 208, E. 
devdpos dec. 72, (a). 
Senas dec. 61, (a). 
SepKecr&ai c. a. 278, 3. 
Sea-irSCeiu c. g. 275, (1). 
8e<rir6Tr)s dec. 45, 6. 
Seueiv c. a. 278. 2. 
Sevrepos c. g. 275, 2. 



dex*(r&ai c. two ace. 280, 
4 ; Tin' Ti 284, E. 4. 

877 95, (b); 315, 1.2. 

dij&ev 315, 5. 

SrjAov efocu, iroieiv with 
part. 310, 4, (b) ; JijAiij 
et/xi Totwj/ rt 310, E. 3. 

drj\6s eifii on 329, E. 4. 

drjAovv c. g. and a. 273, 
E. 20; c. part. 310, 4, 
(b) ; c. inf. and part. 

311, 12. 
A7)fj.iiTr)p dec. 55, 2. 
Arj/xoafrevris dec. 59, E. 2. 
S-fjiroTe 95, (b). 
Sfoovfrep 315, 6. 

S^ra 315, 3. 
SiaPrep. 291. 
8ia Trpc* 300, E. 1. 
Sidyeiv a part. 310,4,(1). 
SLayiyj/ecr&cu C. part. 310, 

Mi). 

fiiadex ecr & a h Siddoxos, 8i- 

a5ox7? C. d. 284, 3, (3). 

SiaStiSvcu c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

SiaSoxos c. g. and d. 273. 

3, (b); 284, 3, (3). 
8iaipe?v c. two acc. 280, 3. 
Sto/ceTcr^ai tV yvct>fx.r]v 

with 60s and gen. abs. 

312, E. 12. 
SiaXeyeoSfcu c. d. 284, 3, 

(1). 
8iaAnr<i>j/ Xp6vov 312, E. 3. 
SiaXXdrreLv c. part. 310, 

4, (f j. 
diaWaTTeiv, -drreff^ai C. 

d. 284, 3, (1). 
8ia^et/8e<r3-ai c. g. 275, 3. 
Siave/j^w c. two acc. 280, 3. 
8iavoe?(r&ai c. 07ra>s c. ind. 

fut. 330, 6 ; c. us and 

g. abs. 312, E. 12. 
8iairpdTTeo~&ai c. inf. 306, 

1, (c). 
SiaTeAetj/ C. part. 310, 4, 

(b). 
Siacpepeiv C. g. 271, 2. 
Sic£(popos c. g. 271, 3 ; c. d. 

284, 3, (4). 
8id(pwvos c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
SiaxpyoSai c. d. and acc. 

285, 1, (2). 
diddo-Keiv c. two acc. 280, 

3; c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
8i8(U» c. g. partit. 273, 
3, (b) ; c. g. price, 275, 
3. 



GREEK INDEX. 



605 



Stexe'" C. g. 271, 2. 

$iK<L(eiv c. g. 274, 2; Sj- 

KaCe<r£at c. d. 284,3, (2). 
Sittaios el/xi c. inf.,personal 

ins. ZiKaiSv <itm c. a. 

and inf. 307, R. 6. 
diKaiow c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
S'iktiv c. g. 288, R. 
8iopi£ew c. g. 271, 2. 
Stem see on. 
5iXa c. g. 271, 3. 
S'upa and Styos 70, B. 
Siiprjv c. g. 274, 1. 
dicbicew c. g. 274, 2. 
So/ceiV c. inf. 306, 1, (b) ; 

videri, pers. 307, R. 7. 
So'pu dec. 54, (c) and 68, 3. 
dopvcpopew C. a. 279, 1. 
SpaTreTGueiu c. a. 279, 3. 
SpaTTeo-frai C. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
SvvaaSrai c. a. 279, 6 j C. 

inf. 306, 1, (c). 
SwaTos eijut c. inf. 306, 1, 

(c) ; personal ins. dwa- 

t6v icrri c. ace. and inf. 

307, R. 6. 
Sio dec. 99, 5 ; with the 

Subst. in the PI. 241, 

R. 10. 
Svs in composition, 236, 

R. 3, (b), ($). 
Sysxepaiveiv c * a - 279, 5 ; 

c. d. 285, 1, (1). 
dccpeav, gratis 278, R. 2. 
Sa)/9e?o"i&at Tiia ti and Tifa 

Tm 279, R. 2. 
Acopteus dec. 57, R. 2. 

'ESp c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
idu cons. 339, 2, II, (b) ; 

whether, an 344, 4 ; iau 

Se' ins. eav Se fi-f] 340. 4 5 

cay /cat ib. 7. 
eaz/Te— ed>Te323, 1. 
cap dec. 56, R. 2. 
ea-rcu, e'aro ins. rjvrai, t]v- 

to, qvto 220, 13. 
lauToC dec. 88 : use 302,2. 
idcou 215, R. 
iyyt(z,.v C. g. 273, R. 9 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
iyyus c. g. 273, R. 9 ; c. 

d. 284,3, (2). 
iyimXelv c. g. 274, 2 ; c.d. 

284,3,(6). 
iyKpar-fjs c. g. 275, 1. 
«7XeAus dec. 63, R. 5. 



iyca dec. 87 ; use, 302, 1. 

£70)76 95, (a). 

irjos from ivs 215, R. 

edeAetp c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 

et ins. 77 aug. 122, 3. 

ei ins. redup. 123, 3. 

ei II. Pers. ins. p 116, 11. 

et cons. 339. 

el concessive 340, 7 ; in 
wishes 259, 3, (b). 

et an, whether 344, 5, (i). 

et 7a> 259, 3, (b). 

et 8' a 7 e 340, 3. 

et Se' ellipt., 340, 3 ; et Se' 
ins. et Se ^ and et Se 
fi-fl ins. et Se' 340, 4. 

et /cat 340, 7. 

et we see e'dV. 

et fi-f] iron. 324, 3, (a) ; et 
fi-fl except 340, 5 ; et /r}? 
et, nisi, si, ib. 

eta, etas, ete, etap opt. ins. 
at^tt and etc. 116, 9. 

etSeVat C g. 273, R. 20 ; C. 
partic. 310, 4, (a); dif- 
ference between inf. 
and part. 311, 2; c. as 
and g. abs. 312, R. 12. 

e't'fre in wishes 259, 3, (b) 
and R.3, 6. ; c. inf. 306, 
R. 11. 

et/ca^etv ti tivi 285, 1, (3). 

etKetj/ c. g. 271, 2; c. d. 
284, 3, 2. 

gIkos, eiKOTcas C. dat. 284, 
3, (5). 

et/c&V dec. 55, R. 2. 

eifieu, e?re, etep ins. efy- 
juep, etc. 116, 7. 

e?vat as copula 238, 6 ; as 
an essential word (to be, 
to exist, etc.) 238, R. 4 ; 
with adv. 340, R. 4; 
dvai with a part. ins. 
of a simple verb 238, 
R.5; omitted 238, R.6,7. 

elvai apparently unneces- 
sary with 6uofxd(eiu, 
-ea&ai 269; R. 1. 

ehai c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. 
g. possess. 273, 2 ; e.g. 
partit. 273, 3, (a) ; c.d. 
284, 3, (9) ; eluai and a 
subs. c. inf. 306, 1, (d). 

etVe referring to several 
persons 241, R. 13, (a). 

6t7T6?J/ eS, KIXKOOS TlVa 279, 

2 ; nana, xa\d c. a. 280, 2. 
5 1# 



etVe?;/ c. d. 284, 3, (1); c. 
d. and a. c. inf.307, R. 3. 

cfyyeii/, -(r&cu c g. 271, 2. 

ds (is) Prep. 290, 2; in 
pregnant sense ins. iv 
c. d. 300, 3, (b) ; with 
the art. ins. eV (?? \i(ivq 
£k8i8o? is tV ~2,vpTiv 
is At£tV) 300,4, (b). 

ets, juta, eV dec. 99, 5. 

eis with Superl. 239, R. 2. 

etsayetp c. g. 274, 2. 

etcrap ins. ecrav in plup. 
116,6. 

etsopap, to permit c. part. 
, 310, 4, (e). [3. 

elsTrpdrreiu c. two.acc.280, 

elra with Part.312, R.8 ; 
etVa in a quest. 344, 5, 
(e). 

etVe— eiVe 323, R. 1 ; et— 
etVe, e'iVe — et Se' etc. 323, 
R. 1 ; in an indirect 
question 344, 5, (k). 

elaSrevcu c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 

4k, e'£ 15, 3; Prep. 288.2; 
in Preg. sense ins iv 
c. d. 300, 3, (c) ; i K 
with the Art. ins. eV 
(ol e/c rrjs ay o pas 
&vSrp<»>iroi airetpvyov) 
300, 4, (a). 

iicds c. g. 271, 3. 

e/cao-Tos with the Art. 246, 
6. 

e'/cSuetj/ c. two ace. 280, 3. 

e/cet&et/ with the Art. ins. 
iice? (6 i k e 1 3- e v ir6\e- 
/xos dedpo^et) 300,R. 8. 

ii<e?pos dec. 91 ; Dial. 217, 
4, (d) ; use 303, 2 ; with 
the Art. 246, 3. 

iKeivoai(v) 15, 1. ( e ). 

e'/ceTtre in Preg. sense ins. 
iK€? 300, R. 7. 

eVr>7Tt c. g. 288, R. 

iKXe'nreiv C part. 310, 4, 
(f). 

iKTr\T)TT€(T&ai c. a. 279, 5 ; 
c. d. 285, 1. 

iKarrjvai c. a. 279, R. 3. 

iKTpeirecr&ai c. a. 279,R.3. 

e/ccW etpat 306, R. 8. 

eAaTTOf without ^ 323, 
R. 4. 

e'A.aTTo0o-3at C. g. 275, 1. 

iXdrrwv 84, 6. 

iXdxwros 84, 6. 



606 



GREEK INDEX. 



i\eyX*iv c. part.310,4,(b). 
eXtyxurros 84, R. 4. 
eAee?z/ c. g. 274, 1, (c) ; 

c. a. 279, 5. 
i\ev&epos, eAev&epovp c. 

g- 271, 2, 3. 
k\icr<reip &edV 279, R. 5. 
eXfiius dec. 54, (c). 
iAirifav c. d. 285, 1 (1) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 
ifiavrov dec. 88 ; use 

302, 2. 
4/i6s ins. juow, 302, R. 2. 
e/j.Tra{s) 25, 4, (c). 
e/xireipos C. g. 273, 5, (e). 
i/j.Tre\d£€(T&cu C. g. 273, R. 

9; c d. 284, 3, (2). 
ilAir'iTKaa&cu c. part. 310, 

4, (d). 
e/jurpocrfreu C. g. 273, 3, (b). 
i/xcpepris c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
ev ins. rjaav 220, 14. 
eV Prep. 289, 1 ; in Preg. 

sense ins. els 300, 3, 

(a)j e.g. 263, (b). 
eV ro?s, ip tcus c. Superl. 

(e.g. irpwroi) 239, R. 2. 
ivavrlov, -ios c. g. and d. 

273, R. 9 and 284, 3,(2). 
eVSerjs c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
iVSod-ei/ with the Art. ins. 

eVSoi/ (ttjp evfioSev rpd- 

Tre(au (pepe) 300, R. 8. 
ipfivetp c two acc. 280, 3. 
eVeSpeuetj/ C. a. 279, 1. 
eveica, epeicep, e'lPeiax, e'l- 

veKev,ovveKa c. g. 288, R. 
epe<TTiv C inf. 306, 1, (c). 
iy&vfiela&ai c.g.273,R.20; 

c. part. 310, 4 (a). 
eVt ins. evetrri 31, R. 3. 
ippoe7p c. g. 273, R. 20. 
eVoxAeu/ c. a. 279, 1 ; C d. 

284,3, (6). 
Ivravha. with Part. 312, 

R. 7. 
ivTpeTree&ai 273, 3. (b). 
e| Prep. 288, 2 ; see 4k. 
ilatcppris with Part. 312, 

R. 6. 
i£a.px£W C. g. 271, 4. 
i^AeyxeLV C. part. 310, 4, 

(b). 
e^eanv c. inf. 306, 1, (c) ; 

c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, 

R. 3. 
Igerrffci'C. g, 373, R. 20; 

c. two acc. 280, 3. 



itfs c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (3). 
Qi<TTa(r&ai C g. 271, 2. 
i^opKovu c. a. 279, 4. 
e|o> c g. 271, 3. 
ioinivai c. d. 284, 3, (4) ; 

c. inf. 307, R. 7.; c. 

part. 310, R. 2 ; c. inf. 

and part. 311, (9). 
e6s ins. i(j.6s, (t6s 302, R. 8. 
iiraiveiv c. g. and a. 273, 

R. 20; nvAnvos 274,1. 
iiratpeip ripd ti 278, 4. 
iiraipeoScu C d. 285,1, (1). 
iirafoaeiv c. g. 273, R. 7. 
iiraiTLaofrcu C. g. 274, 2. 
67raA|ets dec. 213, 19. 
€7raj/ see Srav under ore. 
iirapKfup c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
irrei see 'oVe ; in interrog. 

and imp. clauses 341, 

R. 4. [(b). 

iireiyeaSat. C. g. 273, R. 7, 
4irei5dv see oTai/ under 

ore. 
iireiSr] see oVe. 
e7T6£Ta in a question 344, 

eVen-a with part. 312, R. 8. 
e7re|ieVcu C. g. 274, 2. 
eW&cu c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
i-rr-fiv see eVav. 
tVi ins. eireo-Ti 31, R. 3. 
eVt' Prep. 296 ; c. dat. in 

Preg. sense ins. c. a. 

300, 3, (a) ; c. g. and 

part. 312, R. 5. 
im&dMefffrai c. g.273,R.7. 
eTriSo^os elfii c. inf. 307, 

R. 6. 
i-rrifrv/AW c. g. 274, (1); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
SrucaXetv c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
iiriKOvptTu c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
iiriAauPdvecrSrcu C. gen. 

273, 3, (b). 
iTrtAavSdvecr&cu C. g. 273, 

5, (e); c.part.310,4,(c). 
imAeiireip C. a. 279, 4 ; C. 

part. 310, 4, (f ). 
iTri/xalea&ai C. g.273,R. 7. 
iTTiiAeKeoSai, -e7(T&c(.i C. g. 

274, 1 ; c. ottoos c ind. 
fut. 330, 6. 

iir'nreSos comp. 82, R. 6. 
iirnr\7)cr(retv c. d. and acc. 
284, 3, (6). 



eiriiTK^irTeo^ai c. g. 274,2. 
iTna-rd/bLeuos C g.273,5,(e). 
i-rriaTaa-^ai c. g. 273,R.20; 

c. partic. 310, 4, (a); c. 

part, and inf. 311, 2; c. 

&s and gen. abs. 312, 
s R. 12. 

i-rnvTOLTeiv c. g. 275, 1. 
eVio-T 97,110)1/ e.g. 273, 5, (e). 
iTTiax^v XP^ V0V 312, R. 3. 
eTriTdrreiv c.d. 284, 3, (3). 
emreWeiv c.inf.306,l,(a). 
e7TiT7j8etosc.inf.306, 1, (c). 
iniTifiavC. d. 284, 3, (6). 
eViTpeVeu/ c. inf. and part. 
^ 311, 15. 
iTTiTpoireveiv C g. 275, 1 ; 

c. a. 279, 1. 
4tvi(p^6vo3s diaKela&cu c. g. 

274, 1, (e). 
i-Kixeipelv c.inf. 306, 1, (a). 
iirixApios c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
kirofiivcos c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
iTTorpvveiu riud ti 278, 4. 
epap, epaa&ai C.g.274, 1. 
ipydCeaSrat naAa, icand C. 

a. 280, 2. 
ipea&cu c. two acc. 280, 3. 
epeeiVetj/ c.tWO acc. 280, 3. 
eprjfxos, iprifiovu C gen. 

271, 2, 3. 
iprjTveip C g. 271, 2. 
^«y c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
ippoi>p.4vos comp. 82, 1, (e). 
ipcorav c. two acc. 280, 3. 
epooTiKtos eX* lv c - g- ^74, 1. 
ia&Uip c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) andR. 15. 
e&icop, ecTKOfxrjv 221. 
eVr' £tj/ see ecos. 
esTe see eW. 
eCTi jxoi ti jSouAo/xeVw 284i 

3, (10) (c). 
itrn (licet) c.inf. 306,1, (c). 
i<rri with the PL 241, R. 6. 
ecrTiv o'i, a>p etc. 3^1, R. 4. 
ecru' OTe, oTrou, 87T7j,07rcos, 

ov, "va, ep&a, f\ 331, R. 5. 
ecrxaTos with the Art. 

245, R. 5. 
%repos in Oasis 10, R. 2; 

c. g. 271, 3. 
Irt with the Comp. 239, 

R. 1. 
eri ttoAAw with the Comp. 

239, R. 1. 
eu and euin the Aug. 121, 

R.: 125, 2. 



GREEK INDEX. 



607 



c5 X4yeiu, note?//, etc. c. a. 
^279, 2. 

eu iroKuv c. part. 310,4,(g). 
Ebfrjevs dec. 57, R. 2. 
€vdai/j.oi/i£€ii>, euSaifxcov C. 

g. 274,1, (f). 
«u5ios comp. 82, I, (d). 
cvepyeretv c. a. 279, 2. 
€v£a>/5os comp. 82, R. 6. 
eu&u c. g. 273, R. 9. 
ev&vs with Part. 312, R. 6. 
€v\aj3e7aSfai C a. 279, 1. 
evXoye7v c. a. 279, 2. 
euTropetj/ c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
evpicrKziv, -e<r&cu c. part. 

310,4, (b). 
evo-efSeTv c. a. 279, 1. 
cu-rux^ c. part.310,4,(g). 
euxeo-^at c. d. 284, 3, (1); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 
evwxe'tvfrcu e.g. 273, 5, (c). 
e>e|^s c. g. and d. 273, 3, 

(b);284, 3, (3). 
i<pUar£rai c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
4<piKve7a&ai c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
£<popav c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
i<f> 3>, 4(p" $re c. ind. fut. 

or inf. fut. 341, R. 5. 
^xeivc. inf. 306, 1, (c); c. 

part, iroi-qaas ex w 310, 

4, (k). 
%X* lv e "> KaXws, etc. c. g. 

274, (3). 
exetj/ yuwixrju c. d>s and g. 

abs. 312, R. 12. 
K X e<r&ai c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
£x&P° s comp. 83, II. 
ex«, possum, c. inf. 306, 1, 

( c )- 
%X<*>v Xypeh, <pXvape7s 312, 

R. 9 ; ex w "> withl > 312 > 

R. 10. 
ews dec. 48. R. 1. 
eois construction 337. 

Zaxp-nSov 213, 14. 
£ suffix 235, R. 3. 
Zevs dec. 68, 4. 
fyxow c. g. 274, 1 ; c a. 

279, 1. 
CvreTv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
(vy6s and £vy6v 70, A,(b). 

V H, (a) ^ alternativum, or, 
323, 2 ; in a question 
344, 5, (h);-(b) ¥, 
comparativum 323, 2 ; 



after the omission of 
fxaXXov 323, R. 3 ; omit- 
ted with irX4ov, TrXeioj, 
eXaTTov in connection 
with the numeral 323,' 
R. 4; with the Gen. 
after a comparative 
323, R. 5. 

7] ins. €iu in Plup. 116, 6. 

77 union vowel 237, R. 1. 

r) Kara, or r) irp6s c. a. 
323, 7. 

f) fore c. inf. 341, 3, (a). 

t) 316, 2. 

il ^316.2. 

7) ttou 316, 2. 

77 with Sup. 343, R. 2. 

t) interrogative 344, 5. 

?, 8' 5s 331, R. 1. 

riyuaStai c. g. 273, 3, (a) ; 
c. g. and d. 275, 1, and 
R. 1 ; c. two a. 280, 4 ; 
c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 

rjye/j.oi'eveu' c. g. and d. 
275, 1, and R. 1. 

TjSe', and, 323, R. 2. 

rjdea&ai c. d. 285, 1, (1); 
c. part. 310, 4, (c). 

rjSv/jios comp. 82, R. 6. 

t?Sus comp. 83, I. 

H]K^iv eS, KaXus etc. C. g. 
274, 3, (b). 

tflKMTTOS 216, 2. 

Vco, vem, 255, R. 2. 
7}XIkos attracted 332, 7. 
Vfxev— r)54 323, R. 2. 
?7/« in compos. 236, R. 3, 
, (b)-„ 

TjjUtj/, 7}fj.iy 87, R. 4. 
Vio-us dec. 76, R. 2 ; 77 

77/iiVeta tt^s 777s and the 

like 264, R. 5, c. 
r/fxwu 87, R. 4. 
tfv see eav. 
rjj/iKa, when, see oVe. 
T^peVa comp 84, R. 3. 
fyNws dec. 60, (a). 
7)(r&cu c. a. 279, R. 6. 
rjffffccv, Attic f /}TT<av 84. 
riaarwu elfxi C inf. 306, 1, 

(c). 
rjo-vxos comp. 82, I, (d). 
j]Toi 316, 2 ; T^TOi — $7 fye 

303, R. 2. 
T)TTa<rSrai C. g. and u7T(f 

Tij/os 275, 1, R. 2. 
7)TTa(r&cu with the sense 

of the Perf. 255, R. 1. 



rjTTacr&cu C. part. 310, 4, 

(*)■ 

7/x<4 dec. 60, (b). 
7]dos dec. 60, (b). 

QaX?is dec. 71, A. (a). 
&aAAei*/ c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
^appuv c. a. and d. 279, 3, 

and R. 3. 
bdorcreiv c. a. 279, R. 6. 
Sravauv 83, I. 
frarepa, etc. 10, R. 2. 
&avfxd(eii' c. g. and a. 273, 

R. 20; iivd nuos 274, 

1, (f) and R. 2; c. d. 

285, (1); ivl tivl 285, 

R. 1. 
Sravixao-rhv '6<rov 332, R. 

10. 
SteMai C. g. 273, R. 20. 
&4Xeiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
&e>s 73, 1, (c). 
&ev suffix 235, 3, and R. 

1 and 2. 
grepaTrevetv C. a. 279, 1. 
frepdiroov dec. 68, 5. 
&V 315, 4. 
&i suffix 235, 3. 
3-£77aj/e«/ c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
Svi}<rKeiv ins. Perf. 255, 

R I ; vir6 twos 249, 3. 
Stpdo-o-oo 17, R. 4. 
dpfg dec. 54, (c). 
Srvydrrip dec. 55, 2. 
3 r veu' iiTLviKia, yeve&Xia, 

yd/xovs 278, 2. 
^vfjiovo-^ai c. g. 274, 1 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
frootreveii', frcbirTeii/ c. a. 

279, 1. 
bcis dec. 60, (a). 



R. 2. 

154, referring to several 
persons, 241, R. 13, (a). 

ftios comp. 82, I, (d). 

ftios c. g. 273, 2. 

iSiwT77.v c. g. 273, 5, (e). 

iSpws dec. 213, 7. 

Uvea, elfii with the mean- 
ing of the Fut. 255. 
R. 3. 

lepos c. g. 273, 2. 

&u(s) c. g. 273, R. 9. 

inavds c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 

iKereveiv c. g. 273, R. 6 



608 



GREEK INDEX. 



iKve7(rScu C. g. 273, E. 6. 
'Lva, that, in order that 330. 
'Iva ri 344, R. 6. 
Xaos comp. 82. I, (d). 
foos c. g. and d. 273, 3, 

(b), and 284, 3, (4). 
lo-Topzlv c. two a. 280, 3. 
iX&vs dec. 62. 
Ixu ins. lx<*>pa> 213, 11. 

K movable 15, 4. 
Kc&apos c. g. 271, 3. 
Kc&i&iv c. a. 279, R. 6. 
KaSiardvcu C. two a. 

280, 4. 
tcabopav, to permit, c. part. 

310, 4, (e). 
Kai 321, 1 ; with Sup.239, 

R. 2; with part. 312, 

R. 8;»rof ins. ore 321,1. 
Kal yap 324, R. 1 and 3. 
Kal idv, Kal ei 340, 7. 
Kal jxaAuna with Sup. 

239, R. 2. 
Kal os ins. Kal ovtos 331, 

R. 1. 
Kal ov, Kal /j.'f] 321, 2. 
zeal TaCra with part. 312, 

R. 8. 
KatVep with part. 312,R.8. 
Kahoi 322, 7 ; with part. 

312, R. 8. 
KaKicrros, KaKiwv, 84, 2. 
KaKo\oye7v, KaKOTroisiv C. 

a. 279, 2. 
koko's comp. 84, 2. 
kokos «/ii c. inf. 306, l,(c). 
KaKovpye?v c. a. 279. 2. 
KaK&s Aeyeiv, ttolw, hpav 

etc. c. a. 279, 2. 
KaAuv c. two a. 280, 4. 
KaAAiareveiu c. g. 275, 1. 
Ka\\L(TTos, KaAAiuu 84, 3. 
KaAcfc comp. 84, 3. 
KaAov/xeuos, so called 264, 

R. 1. 
Ka\ws dec. 48 ; 70, A, (a). 
Ka.jj.uetv c. part. 310, 4,(e). 
KaireLTa with part. 312, 

R. 8. 
Kapa dec. 68, 6. 
KapTtpuv c.part.310, 4,(e). 
KaTa Prep. 292 ; KaTa in 

composition, construc- 
tion with 292, R. 
KaiTa with part. 312, R. 8. 
KaraKoveiv, to obey, c. g. 

273, R. 18 and 19. 



KaraWaTTeiv, -drTecr&ai, 

c. d. 284, 3, (1). 
KaTaveueti/ c two a. 280,3. 
KaTaTr\r)TT€(T&ai c. a. 279, 

5; c. d. 285, (1). 
Karapaor&at c. d. 284, 3,(1 ). 
Kardpx^iv c. g. 271, 4. 
KaTaxp7?0"&at c. d. and a. 

285, 1, (2). 
Karevavriov C. g. 273, R. 9. 
KaTepyd(ea&at c. inf. 306, 

l,(c). 
Kare'xeu' c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
Kar-l)Koos c. g. and d. 273, 

R. 18. 
Ke, KeV, see £V. 
Ktivos see iKeTuos. 
Ke?<r&ai c. a. 279, R. 6. 
KeAeveiu c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; 

c a. et inf. 307, R. 1. 
ksv6s c. g. 271, 3. 
Kepa/xeovs 76, 1. 
Kepas dec. 54, R. 4. 
KepSiW 216, R. 2. 
Kev&e/j/ c. two a. 280, 3. 
K-hSeaSrai c. g. 274, 1. 
Krjvos see iKeTvos. 
KivSuveveiv C. inf. 306, 1, 

(b). 
Kts dec 62. 
kAcis dec. 68, 7. 
kA.6os dec. 61, (b). 
k\4itt7)s comp. 82, II. 
KK7]povop.eLV C. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
KXveiv c. d. 284, R. 4. 
Kvecpas dec. 61, R. 1. 
koto's, KoivovaSai C. g. 

273, 3, (b). 
KOtv^s, koivovu, -oucrd-ai C. 

d. 284, 3, (1). 
Koivoovtiv c. g. 273,3, (b) ; 

c d. 284,3, (1). 
KoivcDvds dec. 72, (a). 
KoAaKeveiv C. a. 279, 1. 
Kop4vvva&ai c. g. 273, 5, 

(c). 
Ko'a)s dec. 212, 7. 
KpaTtiv c. g. and a. 275, 1, 

and R. 1. 
Kpareiv c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
KpdrurTos 84, 1. 
Kpe'as dec. 54, R. 4. 
Kpelffo-aov, Kpz'nTUV 84, 1. 
KpiVeti/ c. g. 273, R. 2 and 

20 ; KpiVeo-^at c. g. 274, 

2 ; Kpiveiv rt nvi 285, 1, 

(3). 



Kpivov dec. 72, (a). 
KpoiVeco 212, 3. 
KporaAi(etv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
Kporelv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
Kpinrreiu -zcrSai C a. 279, 

4 ; c. two a. 280, 3. 
Kpi'xpa c. g. 273, 5. (e). 
KTaa&ai c. g. 275, 3. 
Kudpds comp. 83, II. 
KVKew 56. R, 1. 213, 11. 
Kvvrepos 216, R. 2. 
Kvpios c. g. 273, 2. 
KiW dec. 68, 8. 
Ku>as dec. 61, R. 1. 
KcoAvetu C. g. 271, 2; C. 

inf. 306, 1, (a). 

Aas dec. 72, (a). 
Aa&d>u, with, 312, R. 10. 
Aayxdvetv c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
Adyws dec. 48, R. 1 ; 70, 

A, (a). 
AaSpa, AaSrpaius C. g. 273, 

5, (e). 
Aa&wv, secretly 310, R. 4. 
AaAos comp. 82, I, (f ). 
Aa,u/8dVeer&at c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
Aa/uLireiv a a. 278, 3. 
Aau&dvetv C. a. 279, 4. 
Aay&oVeo-&ai c. g. 273, 5, 

(e). 
XavStaveiv c. part. 310, 4, 

(!)■ 

Aaos- and Aecfo 70, A, (a). 
AeVetv C. g. 273, R. 20. 
Aeyeiv c. two a. 280, 4 ; c 

d. 284, 3, (1); c. inf. 

306, 1, (b) ; c. d. and a. 

and inf. 307, R. 3. 
Asytiv c. ws and g. abs. 

312, R. 12. 
Aeyeiv ev, KaKus c. a. 279, 

2 ; KaAa, KaKa, etc. C a. 

280, 2. 
Aeyerai C. a, et inf. 307, 

R. 6. 
AeySfxeuos 264, R. 1. 
Aeiireiu C. a. 279, 4. 
Ae'nrea&ai C. part. 310, 4, 

(0- 
A-hyeiu c. part. 310, 4. (f ). 
Aypels %x° 3V 323, R. 9. 
AiV eAato) 68, 9. 
Anrapeiv c. part. 310, 4, 

(e). 
Afs dec. 214, R. 2. 
Afo-o-eo-frai c. g. 273, R 6. 



GREEK INDEX. 



609 



Xoyl&rrfrai c.inf.306,l,(b). 
XoiSopew c. a. 279, 1. 
Xoidopsio~&al rivi 284, 3, 

(6). 
Xovea&ai C. g. 273, E. 16. 
Xoxav C. a. 279, 1. 
Xvtiv c. g. sep. 271, 2; c. 

g. of price 275, 3. 
XvfxaiveoStai c. a. 279, 1 ; 

c. d. 279, R. 1. 
AuTmo-^cu c. d. 285, (1). 
\v<riT(:\e?v c.d.284,3, (7). 
XwQacr&ai c. a. 279, 1 5 c. 

d. 279, R. 1. 

X(fi(TTOS 84, 1. 
Xcpwv 84, 1. 

M<£316, 4; fxa Ala 279, 4. 
jua/cp<fc comp. 84, 5. 
IAaKp<2 with Com. and 

Sup. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
fidXiara with Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
fiaXXov with Com. 239, 

R. 1. 
fxaXXovf) oh 318, R. 7. 
\xdv 316, 1. 
Hav&aveiv with sense of 

the Perf. 255, R. 1. 
liav&uveiv c. g. and a. 273, 

R. 20; c. part. 310, 4, 

(aj; c. part, and inf. 

311,3. 
fidprvs dec. 68, 10. 
fxdaawv 84, 5. 
/xaT-qp, incassum 278, R. 2. 
,uaxeo-&aj C. d. 284, 3, (2). 
fx4ya with Com. and Sup. 
. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
/xeyaipeiu C. g. 274, 1. 
^6705 dec. 77 ; comp. 84, 8. 
fxeyia-rov with Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
H&ieff&ai c. part. 310, 

4, (f )• 
(xsifav 84, 8. 
lA.eiXio-<Te<Tbai C. g. 273, 

R. 16. 
/xelov without ¥1 323, R. 4. 
uets 214, 4. 

(XeioveKTe'iv C. g. 275, 1. 
fxeiovaStai c. g. 275, 1. 

/X€LWV 84. 

/xeAet ^101 tij/os and ti 274, 

1, and R. 1. 
p.eXXeiu c inf. 306, 1, (a). 
[leiAvrmcu fore ins. '6ti 329, 

R. 6. 



/j.e/x<pe<r&ai c. g. and a. 273, 
R. 20 ; nvd rtvos 274:, 
1, (f); c. d. and a. 284, 

3, (6). 

(iev ins. (i-fjv 316, R. 
[x4u — 5e322, 5. 
^€^77 316, R. 
jtteVetj/ c. a. 279, 3. 
/xeuovp 316, R. 
(x4vtoi 316, R. 322, 7. 
/ieo-7}7w(s) 25, 4, (c). 
fiea-os comp. 82, 1, (d) and 

R. 5; with the Art. 245, 

R. 5. 
fxearbi/ efocu c. part. 310, 

4, (d). 

/xto-Tos c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
jite-rct Prep. 294 ; /x4ra ins. 

IA6T$<TTl 31, R. 3. 
jueTaStS^ot c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
fxcra/x4Xei fxoi twos and rt, 

274, 1, (b) andR. 1. 
juera^eA-e? a part. 310, 4, 

(c). 
(xerafxeXeloSrcu C.part. 310, 

4, (c). 
/xera^v c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
jueTafu with part. 312, 

R. 6. 
(jLeTecrri /xoi rivos 273, 3, 

(b). 
|UeT6xe«/ c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
lxe X pi{s) 25, 4, (b). 
[x4 X pi(s) c. g.273, R. 9; 

fjiexpt(s) &v, see ecus. 

jUTl c.imp. and subj. 259, 5. 

/*^ 318; /xi) pleonastic, 
after expressions signi- 
fying to fear, to doubt, 
etc. 318, 8. 

ixr) interrog. 344, 5, (d). 

fxr) OTi, /xr) ottcos — aXXa. 
Kai (aXXd) 321, 3. 

fxr) oh 318, 10. 

/xr)84 321, 2, (a). 

lM7)8eis dec. 99, R. 

firiKiaros 84. 

fxf)u 316, 1. 

/xrjuieiy c. g. 274, 1. 

fxTJins dec. 63, R. 5. 

fjLrjTe — MTe 321, 2, (c). 

/wr/TTjp dec. 55, 2, 

fj-ijTpws dec. 71, B, (c). 

firixavacr^ai c. inf. 306, 
1, (a) ; c. forws and ind. 
fut. 330, 6. 



fxiyvvvcu, (xiyvvo~&at C d. 

284,3, (1). 
LiiKpSs comp. 84, 6. 
fxifxtloSai c. a. 279, 1. 
fii/Av-qo-Keu/ -etr&cu C g. 

273, 5, (e). 
y.ifivf)o-Keo-&cu c. part. 310. 

4, (a) ; c. part, and inf. 

311, 2. 
Mivus dec. 71, C. 
fxoi, ethical Dat. 284, 3, 

(10) (d). 
povos with the Art. 245, 

R. 6; different from 

lx6vov 264, R. 7. 
fiSvos c. g. 271, 3. 
/xovocpdyos comp. 82, 1, (f }, 
pod, /xoi, fxi use 87, R. 1. 
fxvKris dec. 71, A, (a). 
lxv(rdTTeo~&cu c. a. 279, 5. 
[xwv 344, 5, (c). 

N icpeXKvo-riKou 15, 1 and 
R. ; in the Dialects 
206, 6. 

mi 316, 4; *>al /*& A fa 
279, 4. 

jWs and pecfo 70, A. (a). 

ya7T77 and vdiros 70, B. 

vdo-<reiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

vavs dec. 68, 11. 214, 5. 

vearos 82, R. 5. 

vecos and youfe 70, A, (a). 

vr) 316,4; j/^Ato279, 4. 

j/^ttj from v4os 82, R. 5. 

VIKVLV 'OXllfXTTia, yVCtifXTfV 

278, 2. 
viKav with sense of the 

Perf. 255, R. 1. 
vikw c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
viv [viv) ins. avTovs or 

avrds 87, R. 3. 
well' c part. 312, R. 12. 
vo/xiCeLv c. two a. 280, 4 ; 

c. d. (m*i) 285, (2) ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (bj ; c.part. 

311, 2. 
voacpi£eiv C. g. 271, 2. 
vov&ereTv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
w316, 3. 
varos and vcotov 70, A, 

(b). 

xevovo-bai c. d. 284, 3, (1 ). 
14vojs exsw c. g. 273, 5, 

(e). 
l-vfx<pop6u io-Tt c. d. and a. 

c. inf. 307, R. 3. 



610 



GREEK INDEX. 



£vv Prep. 289, 2. 

O union-vowel 237, 2. 
6- in biroios, 6tt6(tos, etc. 

93, R. 1. 
6, 7), t6 dec. 91 ; relat., 

demons., as a prop. Art. 

see under Article. 
6 tjXlkos attract. 332, R. 9. 
6 ohs attract. 332, R. 9. 
&V use 303, R. 2. 
6'5e, 7?5e, r68e dec. 91 ; 

Dialects 217, 4, (b) ; 

use 303, 1 ; with the 

Art. 246, 3. 
68i 95, (e). 
Hw e.g. 273, 5, (d); c. 

a. 278, 3, (b). 
6&ovveKa ins. oVt 329, R. 

1 ; because 338, 2. 
ola/j«f>l (irepi) riva 263,(d). 
oh c. part. 312, R. 13. 
OiSiirovs dec. 71, B, (b). 
o'tKeios c g. 273, 2. 
o'lKTclpetv c. g. 274, 1, (c). 
oiKTpSs comp. 83, II. 
ohv c. part. 312, R. 13. 
ohs with Sup. 239, R. 2 ; 

ohs, ohs r el/xi c. inf. 

306, 1, (c). 

ohs ins. '6ti toiovtos 329, 

R. 8. 
ohs attracted 332, 7 ; c. 
^inf. 332, R. 8. 
ohs ins. #sTe 341, R. 2. 
oIcS-' 3 Spaaov, ohfr ws 

irolrjaov 259, R. 10. 
(rtX°P-cu, abii, 255, R. 2. 
olxofj-ai c. part. 310, 4, (1). 
o/a/eli/ c. inf. 306, 1, (a.) 
bxiyos comp. 84, 7. 
bxiyce, bxiyov with Com- 

par. 239, R. 1. 
oXiywpeiu C. g. 274, 1, (b). 
bXo<pvpe<T&cu c. g. 274, 1, 

(c); c. a. 279,5. 
blxiX^v c. d. 284, 3. (1). 
bfxvvvai c. a. 279, 4. 
'6/xoia to7s c. Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
(Sfxoiov elvai c. par tic. 310, 

R. 2. 
'6/xoios c. g. 273, 3, (b); 

'6/ULOLOS, 6/j.oiovv, -ovo~&ai, 
bfxoiws c. d. 284, 3, 4. 

6fj.oXoye?u c. d. 284, 3, (6). 

dfjioXoyelrai C a. and inf. 

307, R. 6. 



'6[xws 322, 7 ; with a part. 
312, R. 8. 

bveiMCeiv c. d. 284, 3, (6). 

ovsipos dec. 72, (a). 

bvivdvai, -aa&ai C. a. 279,1. 

ouo/xd icrri fxoi and the 
like 266, R. 1. 

bvojj.aCsiv c two a. 280, 4. 

ovToov ins. eTccffau 116, 12. 

owio-frev c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

o7ro: in pregnant sense 
ins. oVou 300, R. 7. 

oVo'tcw sec '6ra.v under &Ve. 

071-o'Te see oVe. 

^7rou in pregnant sense 
ins. foot 300, R. 7; 
87Tou, quandoquidem see 
oVe. 

oVws with Sup. 239, R. 2. 

oVws ins. &n 329, R. 1. 

faus, that, in order that, 
330 ; Sttoos and 'birws fir) 
c. ind. fut. ellip. 330, 
R,4. 

ottws, when, see ore. 

Hircas, as 342. 

opav C. g. 273, R.20 ; opav 
olXkw 278,3, (c); with 
verbs of appearing, 
showing 306, R. 9 ; c. 
part. 310, 4, (a). 

bpyi£e<r&aL C. g. 274, 1 ; C 
part. 310, 4, (c). 

bpeyeoSai C. g. 273, 3, (b). 

opbpios comp. 82, I, (d). 

bpfxao-bai c. g. 273, R. 7, 
(b). 

bpvi&o&r)pas dec. 44, R. 2. 

o>ws dec.54,(c) and 68,12. 

bpcpavbs C. g. 271, 3. 

gs, 7?, 3 dec. 92 ; use 331, 
sq. ; agreement in gen. 
and num. 332, sq.; Case 
(attraction) 332, 6 ; 
Attractio inversa 332, 
' R. 1 1 ; attraction in 
position 332, 8 ; '6s, 
%, '6 before intermedi- 
ate clauses, attracted 
332, 9 ; modes 333 ; '6s 
changed into a demons. 
334, 1 ; '6s ins. the de- 
mons. 334, 3; e 6s ins. 
'6ti, since, because, ins. 
'Lva, ut (after o'vtws, 

&Se, TOIOVTOS, TTjXlKOV- 
TOS ? TOffOVTOs) &STe, HIS. 

4dv or ei 334, 2. 



'6s, % '6; bs nh—bs $4; 
bs teal '6s demons. 331, 
R. 1. 

'6o~ov {'6acc) — ToaovTov (to- 
o-ovTcp) 343. 

6o~ov, oaoj with Comp. 
and Sup. 239, R. 1 and 
2 ; oaov, ocra c. inf., e. 
g. oo~ov y t-fi eldevai 
341, R. 3. 

oaos ins. otl t6(Tos 329, 
R. 8. 

oaos attracted 332, 7. 

'6aos ins. &STe 341, R. 2. 

bo-Teov = oo-tovv dec.47,1. 

'6stis dec. 93. 

bo-<ppatveo-&cu C g. 273, 5, 
(f ), and R. 19. 

'6aop — ToaovTop 343,2, (b).' 

'6to.v see ore. 

oVe and otolv const. 337. 

6Ve fundamental mean- 
ing 338, 1. 

'6ti with Sup. 239, R. 2. 

'6ti, that, const. 329 ; dif- 
ference between 6ti, a. 
c. inf. and part. 339, R. 
5 ; in citing the words 
of another 329, R. 3. 

'6ti, since, because, const. 
338, 2. 

'6ti ri 344, R. 6. 

ov(k) 15, 4. 17, R. 2; oV 
at the end of a sen- 
tence 15, 4. 

oi> 318 ; ov pleonastic, af- 
ter expressions denot- 
ing doubt, denial, after 
Comp. and Sup. ex- 
pressions 318, 8, and 
R. 7. 

ov yap aXXa 322, R. 11. 

ov interrog. 344, 5, (d). 

ov with Sup. negative 
adjectives 239, R. 3. 

oh fievroi aXXd 322, R. 11. 

ov fii) 318, 7. 

oh fir) c. second pers. ind. 

fut. interrog. {ov \xr) 

<pXvapf)o~eis ; ins. firf 

ipXvdpei) 255, 4. 

ov firiv aXXa 322, R. 11. 

ov fi6vov — aAAa Kai 321,3. 

ov pron. dec. 87 ; use 

302, R. 3. 
ovdas dec. 61, R. 1. 
ouSe 321, 2. 
ohdds dec. 99, R. 



GREEK INDEX. 



611 



ouSeiy ostis ov attracted 
332, R. 12. 

OVK e^riu OTtOV, OTTWS 331, 
R. 5. 

ovkovv and ovnovv 324, 
R. 7. 

ovv suffix 95, (b) ; con- 
clusive 324, 3, (b) ; in 
an answer 344, 7. 

ovvena c. g. 288, R. ; ou- 
vetca ins. 6Vi 329, R. 1 ; 
since, because 338, 2. 

o3s dec. 54, R. 4. 

otfre — oi/re ; oi/Te — Te 
321, 2. 

ovros dec. 91 ; Dialects 
217,4, (c); use 303, 1; 
^with the Art. 246, 3. 

ovtos, heus ! 269, 2, (a). 

ovroal 95, (e). 

oStw(s) 15, 2. 

oStcos, ojs in wishes 342, 
R. 2. 

ovTws with part. 312, R. 7. 

OUX O1TC0S (0Tl), 01>X OTl, 

— a A. Act Kai ; qi>x olov 

— aAAa 321, 3. 
ocppa, that, so that, 330. 
6<ppa, until, see eW. 
tyios comp. 82, 1, (d). 
oij/cxpcfyos comp. 82,1, (f ). 

lieu Voc. 53,4, (1), (c). 
iraiSeueif c. two a. 280, 3. 
iraAaiSs comp. 82, I, (c). 
KavToiov elvai, yiyvear&ai 

c. Part. 310, 4,' (h) ; c. 

a. c. inf. 311, 18. 
irapd Prep. 297 ; napd C. 

g. ins. c. d. 300, 4, (a). 
irdpa ins. Trdpeari 31, R. 3. 
irapaiveiv c. d. 284, 3, (3) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
irapaKtXevea&ai C d. 284, 

3, (3). 
irapaAafiPdveii/ c. g. 275, 

3 ; c. two a. 280, 4. 
irapairAr)<TLos C g. 273, R. 

9; c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
7rapa<rKevd£ea&cu 306, 1, 
- (a) ; c. 07rws c. ind. fut. 

330, 6 ; c. part, and c. 

as and part. 310,4. (h). 
7rapaxcope?f C. g. 271, 2; 

c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
irape/c, 7rape|, 7rape£, 300, 

R. 1. 
irdpeffTif c inf. 306, 1, (c). 



irapo^vveiv c.inf. 306, 1, (a) 
ircis with the Art. 246, 5. 
7rSs Tty with the second 

pers. imp. 241, R. 13, (c). 
Trdcrawu 216, 2. 
irdaxew vt6 twos 249, 3. 
Trarrip dec. 55, 2. 
irdrptos dec. 71, B. (c). 
iravew, -€<r&cu C. g. 271, 2 ; 

c part. 310, 4, (f ) ; c. 

part, and inf. 311, 17. 
Traxvs comp. 216, 2. 
Trei&ew Twd n 278, 4 ; C. 

a. 279, 1 ; c. inf. 306, 1, 

(a) ; c. ws 306, R. 2. 
irei&ea&ai C. g. 273, R. 18 ; 

c d. 284, 3, (3). 
ireivriv c g. 274, 1. 
netpcuet's dec. 57, R. 2, 
TreipaoScu C. g. 273, 5, (e); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; c. 

part, and inf. 311, 18. 
ireAdCeiv, ireAas c. g. 273, 

R. 9; c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
Trevea&cu, Trevrjs C. g. 273, 

5, (b). 

1, (c). 
ireirepi dec. 63, R. 1. 
7re7rot&eVcu c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
tt4ttwj/ comp. 84, 11. 
Trep 95, d; Synt. 317, 1. 
irepcuos comp. 82, I, (c). 
irepav C. g. 271,3. 
ivepdv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
7repi Prep. 295, 1 and 3. 
irepi — 'dvena 300, R. 2. 
7rept c. d. in pregnant 

sense ins. of the ace. 

300, 3, (a). 
Trept ins. irepieo'Ti 31, R. 3. 
ireptfidAAeii/ c.tWO a. 280,3. 
irepiytyve(T&cu C g. 275, 1. 
Trepi8ido<r&ai c g. 275, 3. 
7repieiVcu C. g. 275, 1. 
7repiexecrd-cu C. g. 273, 3, 

7repuSe?j/ see irepiopav. 
riept/cArjs dec. 59, 2. 
irepijx4vew C. a. 279, 3. 
irepiopau c. part. 310, 4, 

(e) ; c. part, and inf. 

311, 15. 
Trepiopacr&ai C g. 274, 1. 
Trepi Trpo 300, R 1. 
7reptTT(k c. g. 275, 2. 
irefpvKevcu C inf. 306, 1 , (d). 
irrjxvs dec 63, 



iriapa 78, R. 8. 
Tri/ATrAr]fu c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
7rtVei^ c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) and R. 15. 
iriineiv vtt6 tlvos 249, 3. 
irio-Tfjziv c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
iclav comp. 84, 12. 
TrAe?^ c. a. 279, R. 5. 
itA<hq-tou with Sup. 239, 

R. 2. 
irAiuov without % 323, R. 4. 
7rAeiW, 7rAer<TTOs 84, 9. 
7rAeV ins. 7rAeW 78, R. 5. 
7rAeV without ^' 323, R. 4. 
ivAeoveKTztv C g. 275, 1. 
ffAeos c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
irAecos dec. 78, R. 5. 
irA^co c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
?rAi?v c. g. 271, 3. 
TrA-hpris, irA^poco C. g. 273, 

5, (b). 
irA7]<Tid£eiv, irA-qaiov C. g. 

273,R.9;c.d. 284,3, (2). 
ttAt]<tlov comp. 84. 
ttaSos = ttAovs dec. 47. 
■kAovvios c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
iryuv c. g. 273, 5, (d) ; c. 

a. 278, 3, (b). 
-kvvI dec. 68, 13. 
iro&e7v c a. 274, R. 1. 
7roi in Preg. sense ins. tcov 

(ubi) 300, R. 7. 
Troie?v c. g. of material 

273, 5, (a) ; c. two a. 

280, 4. 
iroieiu ev, nanus C. part. 

310, 4, (g); c a. 279, 2; 

aya&d, nana etc. C. a. 

280,2; c.inf.306,l,(c). 
Troielv c. part. 310, 4, (b) ; 

c. part, and inf. 311, 

13. 
iroieloSrai C. g. 273, 2 and 

3, (a) ; c. g. of price 
275,3. 

iro?os with the Art. 344, 

R. 3. 
iroAefxelv c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
tt6Ais dec. 63. 
iroAAbi/ elvai, £yKe?(T&ai, 

yiyvea&ai C. part. 310, 

4, (h). \ 
ttoAAov Sew C. inf. 307, 

R. 6. 
iroAAy with comp. and 

superl. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
iroAv with Comp. and 

Superl. 239, R. 1 and 2. 



612 



GREEK INDEX. 



iro\vs dec. 77. 

Iloa-eiSwu dec. 53, 4, (1) 
(d) ; 56, E. 1. 

irore, vis wore etc. 344, 
E.2. 

irdrepa, irorepov — tf in a 
direct and indirect 
question 344, 5, (f ). 

-rrpaos dec. 76, XIV. 

irpciTTzii/ e3, KaKus C. a. 
279, 2 ; signification of 
the first and second 
Perf. 249, 2; dya&d, 
Kana etc. c. a. 280, 2 ; 
Trpdrreiu, -ecrSai, to de- 
mand, c. two ace. 280, 
3; c. d. 284, 3, (1). 

irpi-neiv, irpeTrovTuis C. d. 
284, 3, (5) ; c. inf. 306, 
1, (d) ; c. d. and a. c. 
inf. 307, E. 3. 

irpiirei c. part. 310, 4, (i). 

7rpeafieis, 7rpe<Tj8uT7js, irpe- 
O-Pvs 70, B. 

Trpeafieveiv c. g. 275, 1. 

TrpeafiicrTOS 83, E. 2. 

irpia<r&cu c. g. 275, 3. 

Trpiv, irplv dv, irplv ij const. 
337. 

vp6 Prep. 287, 2. 

irpoixsw C. g. 275, 1. 

7rpoSrufxbv elvcu, irpoSrv/xe7<T- 
&ai c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; 
c oirws c. ind. fut. 330, 6. 

irpo?Ka 278, E. 2. 

irpoKaXeloSai rivd ti 278, 
4. 

irpOKpiveiv c. g. 275, 1. 

Trpovoeiu c. g. 274, 1. 

irpooifxiov 17, E. 4. 

irpoopav Cg. 274, 1. 

irpos Prep. 298 ; c. d. in 
Preg. sense ins. c. a. 
300, 3, (a). 

-rrposPdWeiv C. g. 273, 5, 
(d). 

irposSiSSvcu c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

Trpos7]Keiv c. d. 284, 3, (5) ; 
c. inf. 306, 1, (d) ; c. d. 
and a. c. inf. 307, E. 3. 

irpos-f}Kei fxoL C. 2. 273, 3, 
(b). 

wp6s&eu c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

TrposKa\e7<T&ai c. g. 274, 2. 

irposicvveTv C. a. 279, 1. 

irpo<na.Teiv c. g. 275, 1. 

TrposTaTTtiv c. d. 284, 3, 
(3); c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 



Trpocrcpep-fjs C. d. 284, 3, (4). 
•KpoTifxau c. g. 275, 1. 
Trpovpytairepos 84, E. 3. 
npcxpepeiv c. g. 275, I. 
npoxovs dec. 71, B, (b). 
irpcaios comp. 82, I, (d). 
TrpooTtvsiv c. g. 275, 1. 
irpuTos and trp&Tov 264, 

E.7. 
7ni)(r(reiv c. a. 279, 5. 
7rra>x<k comp. 82, I, (f _). 
irw&dvea&ai with the sig- 

nif. of Perf. 255, E. 1. 
Trvv&dvev&ai. c. g. 273, E. 

20 ; c. part. 310, 4, (a); 

c. part, and inf. 311, 6. 
Trw\e?v c. g. 275, 3. 
irws &u c. opt. 260, 2, (4) 

.(d). 

'Padtccs (pepeiv c. part. 310, 

. ,' 4 ' (C) - 

pdwv, pacrros 84, 10. 

pelv c. a. 278, 3, (a). 

peireiv c. a. 279, B. 5. 

fads dec. 47. 

2 omitted 25, 1 ; mova- 
ble at the end of a 
word 15; in the for- 
mation of tenses of 
pure verbs 131, and 
133 ; euphonic or con- 
necting letter 237, 1 
and E. 2. 

adrreiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

aavTov or aeavrov dec. 
88 ; use 302, 2. 

<re Suffix 235, 3 and E. 3. 

aeXas dec. 61, (a). 

avs dec. 68, 14. 

trfr in inflex. changed to 
& 25, 3. 

aba inflex. 116,2. 

aSrcov ins. oSwcrav 116, 12. 

a union syllable 237, 1. 

aivairi dec. 63. 

aiveabai c. a. 279, 1. 

ckov, (TK.6p.r\v 221. 

(TKoirziv c. g. and a. 273, 
E, 20 and 21. 

<tk&p dec. 68, 15. 

aoi ethical Dat. 284, 3,(10) 
(d). 

cos ins. crov 302, E. 2. 

(rnavi^iv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

CTTreVSeffdai c. d- 284. 3. 



(rirevSeiv c. a. 279, E. 5. 
airovhdCeiv c. inf. 306, 1 , a. 
(Tirovocuos comp. 82, E. 6. 
o-Ta(eiv c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
o"Tofyia<r&ai Tt Ttz/i 285, 1, 

(3). 
crreap dec. 68, 16. 
arevdCeiv c. d. 285, 1, (1). 
(TTepyeu/ c. a. and d. 274, 

E. 1; c.d. 285, (1). 
arepeiv c. g. 271, 2 ; c. 

two ace, rivd rivos 280, 

3 and E, 3. 
(Trfjycu c. a. 279, E. 6. 
2t? see BaD 97, 1. 
<rToxd£ea&cu c. g. 273, 3. 

(b). 
ffTpaT-nyeiv c. g. 275, 1. 
cv dec. 87 ; use 302, 1. 
cvyyiyvdxrKu ifxavrqi c. 

part. 310, E. 2. 
(Tvyyvujxuv e.g. 273, 5, (e). 
crvyxtopew c. inf. 306,1, (a). 
o-uASj/ c. two ace. 280, 3. 
(rvufSaiveiv c. inf. 306, 1, 

(d) ; c. d. and a. c. inf. 

307, E, 3 ; personal 307, 

E. 6. 
av[xf3ov\eveiv c. inf. 306, 

1, (a). 
avfXTrpdTTeii' c. d. 284, 3, 

(7). 
(rv/j.<pep€iv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 

av/j.(pepei C. part. 310, 4, 

avjA<pop6v £<tti c. d. and 

ace. c. inf. 307, E. 3. 
avv, £vv Prep. 289, 2. 
(TvvaipeG&ai C. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
awzKovri 284, 3, 10, (a). 
o-vveTTev&ou c. g. 273, 3. (b). 
avvepyos c. g. 273, 3, b. 
avvUvai c. g and c. g. and 

a. 273, 5, (f) and E. 19. 
avvoi'oa ifxavTcp C. part. 

310, E. 2. 
avvrepLovTi 284, 3, 10, (a). 
crvs dec. 62. 

a(pd\\e(T&ai c g. 271, 2. 
a<piaiv ins. ty/Tv 302, E. 8. 
o- X e5d^ c. g. 273, E. 9.^ 
(TXVI* - Ka &' oAoj/ Kal /xepos 

with the Nom. 266, 3 ; 

with the Ace. 266, E. 4. 
axoXalos comp. 82, I, (c). 
2o)/cpdT7)s dec. 59, 2 and 

E. 2. 



GREEK INDEX. 



613 



tras dec. 78, E. 6. 

ararep Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a). 

Ta rotavra without Kai 

following 325, 1, (e). 
rapdtrtw ir6\eixov 278, 2. 
ravra referring to one 

thought 241, R. 3. 
raxvs comp. 83, I. 
raws dec. 72, (b). 
Te 321, 1 ; re — Kai, ib. 
reyyeiv c. a. 278, 3. 
reKfiaipeo-frai ri rivi 285, 

1, (3). 
reKvovv, parenteral esse 255, 

R. 1. 
reAeioy c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
retevrwv, finally, 

312, R. 3. 
refiveiv c. two ace. 280, 3. 
Te'pas dec. 54, R. 4. 
rep-rrea&ai c. part. 310, 4, 

(d). 
rerrapes dec. 99, 5. 
r-nXiKovT os dec 91. 
ti 8e'344. R. 4. 
Tt p.aSwv, ri 7ro^wj/ 344, 

R. 5. 
ri oi), ri ovv ov 256, 4, (e). 
r&evai, -ea&ai c. g. 273, 

3, (a) ; c. two ace. 280,4. 
riKreiv, parentem esse 255, 

R. 1. 
ri/xav, rifxaabai C. g. 275, 3. 
rifiwpuu c. d. 284, 3, (7); 

rifiwpeicr&ai rivd rivos 

274, 2 ; c. a. 279, 7. 
rh and ris dec. 93. 
rh or iras ris with the II. 

pers. Imp. 241, R. 13. 
ris use 303, 4; rh 

omitted 238, 5, (e). 
ris ins. osns in indirect 

question 344, R. 1. 
tJ, rov, t<£ c. inf. or c. a. 

c. inf. 308 ; r6 c. inf. or 

c. a. c. inf. in exclam. 

and question 308, R. 2. 
rb teal r6, rbu km r6v 

247, 3. 
to vvv elvat, rb tt) fxepov 

elvat, rb Kara, rovrov 

elvai 308, R. 3. 
roi 317, 3; in answers 

344, 7. 
roiyap, roiyapovv 324, 3, 

(c). 
roiydproi 324, 3, (c). 



roivvv 324, 3 (c). 
roiovTos dec. 91 ; roiov- 

ros el/xi c. inf. 341, R. 2. 
ToTsSecri 217, 4. 
roXfxav c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
ro^eveiv C. g. 273, R. 7. 
roaovrov — oaov ; rocrovrw 

—ova) 343, 2, (b). 
roaovro -ovrw with Com. 

and Sup.' 229, R. 1 

and 2. 
too-oGtos dec. 91. 
roaovrou Sew c. inf. and 

wsre c. inf. 307, R. 6. 
rod or rov fir) c.inf. 274.3, 

rpacpeis rivos 275, R. 5. 
Toeti/ c. a. 279, 5. 
Tpets dec. 99, 5. 
rpi&wv c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
rpLr)pT)s dec. 59, 2. 
TU7x«* /eu/ c> S- 2 "3,3, (b); 

c. part. 310, 4, (1). 
rvpavvetv, -veveiv c. g. 

275, 1. 
rv<pu>s dec. 72, (b). [(e). 
ravro ins. rb avro 217, 4, 

'r&piCeiv c. a. 279, 1. 
vfipio-Torepos 82, II. 
vSwp dec. 68, 15. 
vl6s dec. 72, (a). 

V/J.CDV, VfllV, v/xiv 87, R. 4. 
uTrcryett/ C. g. 274, 2. 
fora/covetf c. g. 273, R. 18 ; 

C. d. 284, 3, (3). 
inravio-raoSai c. g. 271, 2. 
vnavrav, inravrid(eiv c. g. 

273, R. 9; c. d. 284, 

3, (2). 
uTropx 6 " 7 c - g- 271, 4; c.d. 

284, 3, (9) ; c. part. 

310, 4, (f.) 
inre'iKeiv C. g. 271, 2 ; C. d. 

284, 3, (2). 
vireK 300, R. 1. 
u7reKTp67reo"&ai c. a. 279, 

R. 3. [R. 3. 

virel-epxeo-&aL C a. 279, 
iirep 293. 
U7rep)6aAAeiJ/ C. g. and a. 

275, 1. 
vTrepexew C. g. 275, 1. 
virepopav C. g. 274, 1. 
VTrep<p4p€iv c g. 275, 1. 
vttt)koos c. g. and d. 273, 

R. 18. 
inrnxeiv c. a. 278, 3, (b). 
' 52 



inrS Prep. 299 ; c. d. in 

Preg. sense ins. c. a. 

300, 3, (a) ; c. a. and 

part. 312, R. 5. 
vwo ins. vireo~Tt 31, R. 3. 
biroixeveiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a); 

311, 15; c. part. 310, 

< 4 ' {e) ; 

vTro/xLfj.vfjo'Keiv c. two ace. 

280, 3. 
vnovoziv c. g. 273, R. 20. 
vTTo(TTr)vai c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
virox^pelu c. g. 271, 2. ; 

c. a. 279, R. 3. 
icrepeTv, varepov elvai, 

varepifetv c. g. 275, 1. 
v<pio-rao-&ai c. d. 284, 3, 

(2). 
v\piaros 216, R. 2. 

$ay*?v c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) and R. 15. 
(paivtiv, (paiveaSai C part. 

310, 4, (b) ; (paivo/xai 
iroicov Tt ib. R. 3. 

cpaivtoSai c. inf. and part. 

311, 8. 

<pdvai c. inf. 306, 1, (b.) 
cpavepos eifii ttoiwv ri 310, 

R. 3. 
<pd5eo-S>ai C. g. 274, I, (b). 
<pepe % referring to several 

persons 241, R. 13, (a). 
(pepo/xevos, (pepwv, maximo 

studio 312, R. 9 ; (pepwv, 

with ib. R. 10. 
(pepraros 84, 1. 
(peprepos, <pepio~ros 84, 1. 
(pevyeiv with signif. of 

Perf. 255, R. 1 ; <pev- 

yeiv C g. e. g. k\ottt)s 

274,2; viro rivos 249, 3. 
<pevy€iv c. a. 279, 3 ; c. inf. 

306, 1, (a). 
<p&d[x.€vos, (p&ds, quickly 

310,4, (e). 
(p&dveiv c. a. 279, 4; c. 

part, followed by ij, 

irplv i) 3lu, 4, (1) 
(p&4yy€o-&ai C. a. 278, 3. 
cp&oyyos and ^^077^ 70, 

B. 
(pSfois dec. 68, 17. 
(p&oveiv c. g. 274, 1, (e) ; 

c.d. 284, 3, (6). 
<pi\os comp. 82, R. 4. 
<pi\os c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
<pi{v) suffix 210. 



614 



GREEK INDEX. 



(pope7o-&ai c. a. 279, 5 ; c. 
inf. 306, 1, (a). 

(pOLVLKOVS 76, R. 3. 

<poveva with signif. of 

Perf. 255, R. 1. 
(ppa(eiv c. d. and a. c. inf. 

307, R. 3. 
<ppeap dec. 68, 16. 
tppoi/niov 1 7, R. 4. 
ippovTlfeiv c. g. and a. 274, 

1 and R. 1 ; c. as and 

g. abs. 312, R. 12: c. 

faas c. ind. fut. 330, 6. 
(ppovSos 17, R. 4. 
ipveiv ; cpvvcu c. g. 273, 1. 
<pv\aTT€<r&ai c. a. 279, 1. 

Xaipeiv C. d. 285, (1); C 

part. 310, 4, (c). 
XaKeiraiveiv C. g. 274, 1 5 

c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
XaXeirds el/xt c. inf. ins. 

XaXeirSv earn with ace. 

c. inf. 307, R. 6. 
XaXeiras (pepeiu C. g. 274, 

1, d; c. d. 285, (1); c. 

hrl Tivi and c. a. 285, R. 

1 ; c. part. 310, 4 (c). 
Xdpris dec. 71, A, (a). 
Xdpiv 278, R. 2 ; c. g. 288, 

R. ; x°-P LV *l x 'h v i vw i°- 
X^ip dec. 55, R. 1. 

X^pKTTOS, x ei P wv ^4, 2. 
XeAiSwj/ dec. 55, R. 2. 
XVpovv c. g. 271, 2. 
Xvovs dec. 47. - 
X<>evs dec. 57 and 68, 18. 



XoXova&ai c. g. 274, 1 ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (6). 
Xopzvew Se6f 279, R. 5. 
Xovs dec. 68, 18. 
Xpa.iafj.e7u c. d. 284, 3,(7). 
Xpef>v 73, 1, (c). 
Xpt<*js dec. 69. 
Xp-h c g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. a. 

and d. 279, R. 4, c. inf. 

306, 1, (d); XPV c. d. 

and a. c. inf. 307, 6, 

and R. 3. 
Xpyvbai riv'i ri 278, 4 ; C. 

d. 285, (2). 
Xp6s dec. 68, 19. 
Xope?v c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
Xvpl&iv c. g. 271, 2. 
Xccpis c. g. 271, 3. 
X&pos and x&P a 70, B. 

^ouett/ c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
■tyiyeiv c. g. and a. 273, 

R. 20. 
\pevdecrfrai c. g. 271, 2. 
ijkuSrjs comp. 82, II. 
t]/l\6s e.g. 271, 3. 

^fi5e with Part. 312, R. 7. 

ava.%, 5fa 53, R. 4. 

avetv&ai c. g. 275, 3. 

as Prep. 290, 3 and R. 2. 

d>s i/ictf, see on. 

as ut, in wishes (utinam) 
259, 3, (b). 

as, as, so as, const. 342 ; 
ovras (as) — as in wish- 
es and asseverations 



242, R. 2; as with a 
Subs, (as might be ex- 
pected, as AaKedai/j.6' 
vios, ut Laced, for a La- 
cedaemonian) 342, R. 4. 

as with Superl. 239, It. 2. 

as C d., as : ass yep6vri, 
as ifj-oi, meo judicio, as 

f ifxijSo^rj 284,3, (10) (b). 

as c. part, and case abs. 
312, 6; c. part. fut. 312, 
6, (a). 

as ins. on oSras 329, R. 8. 

as, that, so that 330 ; &s kg, 
c. opt. utinam 260, R. 9. 

as, when, see #re. 

as ins. asre, so that, see 
&sre. 

as ehreiv and «s itros ei- 
7T6?J/ 341, R. 3. 

as els, iiri, irpos C a., as 
iiri c. d. 290, R. 2. 

o>s Tt 344, R. 6. 

as &(pe\ov, -es, -e C inf. 
259, R. 6. 

asirep, as, const. 342 ; with 
Part. 312, R. 13. 

&st€ c. inf. ins. of a sim- 
ple inf. 306, R. 3. 

&sre c. part. 312, R. 13. 

&st€, so that, const. 341. 

&sre, as, so as, const. 342. 

avros ins. 6 avrds 217, 4, 
(e). 

a<pe\e?v C. a. 279, 1 ; C. 
two a. 280, R. 1 ; c. d. 
279, R. 1. 



III. INDEX FOR THE EORMS OF THE VERBS. 



Abbreviations. A. Aorist ; A. I. first Aor. ; A. II. second Aor. ; Aug. Aug- 
ment ; Char. Characteristic ; Comp. Compare ; Dial. Dialect ; F. Future ; P. 
Passive; Pf. Perfect; Pf. M. Perfect Middle; Plup. Pluperfect; R. Remark; 
Red. Reduplication. 



'Ada 230. 
aya.iop.ai 230. 
#70^0.1 179, 1. 
aydo/j.a.1, ayalofxai 230. 
fryefpa Pf. with Att. Red. 
124, 2, (6). Dial. 230. 



ayvoea 230. 

S 7 i/u/« 187. 1. Dial. 230. 

&7W,A.I. i5£a, a|cu in Thu. 
and Xen. ; A. II. 124, 
R. 2; Pf.I.Act. 124,2; 
Pf. M. #y/«M. Dial. 230. 



ada (Poet, aetda), F. affo- 
fiat (aeicrofjiai), Att. 
(aetffa, dffa non-Att.)j 
Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230. 

aeipa 230. 

ar)oi£o[Acu Aug. 122, I. 



INDEX FOR THE FOEMS OF VERBS. 



615 



'AHMI 230. 

ald(w Char. 143, 6. 

alSeo/xai, a'i5op.ai 166, 1. 

Dial. 230. 
alveoo, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d), 2. 
c&wixoLi 230. 
alpeoo 167, 1. Dial. 230. 
aXpto see aetpco 230. 
aloSdj/0/j.ai 160, 1. 
aiorcra Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 

230. 
&ia> Aug. 122,1. Dial. 230. 
aKaxlfa 230. 
aKax^vos 230. 
aKeojAaiy formation of 

tenses 130, (d), 1. 
a/CTjSeco 230. 
clkovw, Pf. with Att. Red. 

124, 2 ; F. aKoxxrofxai. 

Pass, with o- 131, 2. 
ct.KpodoiJ.cu, F. -do-ouai 129, 

R. 1. 
a\a\d(a>, Char. 143, 6. 
akdopcu 230. 
aAcnra^co 223, 5. 
akSaivcd 230. 
dAei<pa>, Pf.with Att. Red. 

124, 2. 
aAe|o 166, 2. Dial. 230. 
a\eojj.ai or aAeiofiai 230. 
&Aeo>, formation of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
aXSrijo-Kw, -&'io~kw 230. 
a.K.io'KOixai 161, 1. 
aXiraivto 230. 
aXicdfreu/, see dA€|« 162. 
aXXaaato, Char. 7. 143, 1. 

—A. I. and II. P. 141, 

4, (b,). 
aXXofiai, a in format. 149, 

R. 2. Dial. 230. 
aXodco, F. -atrco. 129, R. 1. 
aXvitreoo 230. 
aXvaicco 230. 
aXcpaivto, -dvto 230. 
afxaprdvw 160, 2. Dial. 

230. 
aixfiXio-Koo 161, 2. 
afxirex^ 159, 4. 
aiATrhanio-KU} 230. 
o.fxvvto, a/u,vi/a&ov 162. 
a/j.(piyvoeto, Aug. 126, 1 

and 3. 
afxcpUvvvfAi 184, 1. 
aix<pis$T)Te(a, Aug. 126, 2. 
avafiidcarKO/jLai 161, 3. 
amAio-Kco 161,4. 



a*/8c£j/&> 230. 

'ANE@n 230. 

avexofJ-ai Aug. 126, 1. 

b.vi}voSa (Ep.j 230. 

avoiyvvfu, auoiyco 187, 6. 

etc op&Ja>, Aug. 126, 1. 

ai/Tctco 230. 

avurw, aj/uw formation of 
tenses 130. (b),l.Dial. 
230. 

&z>a>7a 230. 

aivavpdto 230. 

aircxpio-Kw 230. 

a7reiAea> 230. 

a.Trex&dvofj.ou 160, 3. 

aTrJepo-e 230. 

airSxpri 177, 3, contrac- 
tion 137, 3. 

atroxpto/jLou 230. 

'APA& 230. 

apeaKo) 161, 5. 

apKeco, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d), 1. 

apfj.6TTO), -fa, Char. 143, 3. 

dpvvjj.ai 188, 1. Comp.230. 

ap<ta, formation of tenses 
130, (e). 

ap7ra<>, Char. 143, 7. 

apvTto, apveo, formation 
of tenses 130, (b), 1. 

'APil, apaplo-Kto 230. 

q,crcrto, aiao-to 230. 

avaivto, Aug. 122, 1. 

'ATAAZOMAI, Char. 143, 
6. 

'ATPAXi, see airavpato. 
Comp. 230. 

au^ai/co, ai/|a>, 160, 4. 

'ATPI2KOMAI, <?7raup.230. 

a<pLKveojj.cu 159, 2. 

d<piWa>, Char. 143, 4. 

s A<£>n, airacpio-Kto 230. 

&x&o[j.ai 166, 4. 

5 AXn, d/cax'C^ 230. 

'AH, (Ep.) 230. 

bitopro (asipto) 230. 

Bd(co, Char. 143, 6. 
ai Vo> 158, 1. Dial. 230. 
0oAAa> 156,2. Comp.230. 
Pdrrrto, Char. <p. 143, I. 
fiapeto 230 

pao-rdfy, Char. 143, 7. 
BAfl, see Qaivo). 
/3eio/zc«, fieo/j.cu 230. 
Pido/jLcu 230. 

j3ij8dC«> 163, 1. Comp. 
0aiVa> 230. 



Ptfpto'o-Kto 161, 6. Dial. 

230. 
£«*cw 192, 10. 

PltoCTKOfXCU 161, 3. 

/3Aa7rra>, Char, p, 143, 1. 

Red. 123, 2. 
fiXao-rduto 160, 5. 
fi\ao-(pr]p.eto, Red. 123, 2. 
£AeVa>, A. II. P. 140 R. 1. 
fiAiTTto Char. 143, 3. 
pKdbo-Kto 230. 
0oaco 230. 
fiocrKto 166, 5. 
PovXo/jLai 1 66, 6. Dial. 230. 
fSpdo-o-w, Char. 143, 3. 
iSpexw A. II. P. 140, 2. 
/3ptCw, Char. 143, 6. 
fipvxdojxai 230. 
fiwtto, jSwo/xot, /8uo> 159, 1. 

Ta/iew 165, 1. Comp.230. 

ydvufxai 230. 

rAXl, seeyiyyo/j.ai. Comp. 
230. 

yey tovio-Kto 161, 7. Comp 
y4ytoua 230. 

y€ivo/j.cu 230. 

yeAdto, formation of ten- 
ses 130 (c). 

7eVro 230. 

TENfl, see yiyvo/xai. 

yeixa, A. P. with o- 131, 3, 

yri&ito 165, 2. 

yqpdaKto, yrjpdto 161, 8. 
Dial. 230. 

yiyvofxai, yiuofxat 163, 2. 

yiyv(>bo-Kto,yZv<ao~Kto 161,9 

yodto 230. 

yprjyapito, see iyetpto. 

Acd(to 143, 6. 223, 5. 

ScuW/xi 230. 

8cua> 230. 

Sa/ci/w 158, 9. 

Sa/xdto, Sap.d(to 156, 2. 

Sa^factf 230. 

SapWo 160, 6. Dial. 230. 

Sareo/Acu 230. 

AAQ. 230. 

dearo 230. 

5e?166, 7. 

8ei5a>, Pf. SeSia 193. 

Comp. 230. 
fe'iKwpu 175, 187, 2. Dial. 

230. 
de?v, see 5e?. 
AEKfi, see ddicvviAi. and 

8exofJ.cu. 



616 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



Se/xw, formation of ten- 
ses 156, 2. 

deofjiai contract. 137, 2. 

SepKO/nai, Pf. SeSopKa with 
the meaning of the 
Pres. 140, 4. Dial. 230. 

Se>w,A. II. P. andPf.A. 
140, 2 and 4. 

Se'xojucu 230. 

devco 230. 

Sew, formation of tenses 

130, (d), 2, contraction 
137, 2. 

Sew, see Se?. 
SiaiTctw, Aug. 126, 2. 
8iaKovea>, Aug. 126, 2. 
dia\4yo/j.cu, Aug. 123, R. 2. 
StSacr/cw 161, R. 
AIAHMI 230. 
SiSpdcTKa 161, 10. 
SiSwfMi 175. 
S/£wuu'180, R. 3. Dial. 

230. 
AIHMI 180, R. 3. Dial. 

230. 
5io-Ta£o>> Char. 143, 7. 
SnJ/aw, contracted 137, 3. 
Sio> 230. 

Sjwkw. i8i&Kc&ov 162. 
SodcrcraTo 230. 
doKeca 165, 3. 
SouTre'w 230. 
Spaw, formation of tenses 

131, 3. 
APEMfl see Tpe'%w. 
SiWauu 179, 2. Accent 

176, 1. Dial. 230. 
Suj/w, Suw 158, 2. Dial. 
230. 

'Edcp&r} see a7TTW 230. 

eaw, Aug. 122, 3. For- 
mation of tenses 129, 
R. 1. 

iyeipeo Pf. with Att. Red. 
124, 2, (b) ; Pf II. with 
variable vowel 140, 4. 
A or. II. M. 155, 1. 
Dial. 230. 

'ErKn, see (pepw. 

iyxetpeo, Aug. 126. 5. 

4'5w ^eo ia&iw. 

k(o,uai, see Ka&l£a>. 

e&e'Aw 166, 8 

ifri(a t Aug. 122, 3. 

'E&a Aug.l22,3,Dial.230. 

'EIAH, see dpdw. 

ewca£w, Aug. 121, R. 



'EIKfl, Pf. eWa, Plup. 

icpKeiv 140, R. 3 ; Aug. 

122, 5. Inflection of 

tWa 1 95, 2. Dial. 230. 
eftcw, tfnafrov 162. 
etAew, etAew, etAAw and 

etAAw, see e?Aw. 
etXuw 230. 
e?Aw 166, 9. 
eifii 181 and 225. 
elfu 181 and 226. 
eivvfjLi, see aficptevvvfju. 
'Einn, see (jty/u. 
e'lpyvvfii 187, 3. 
eip-yw 187, 3. Comp. 230. 
'EIPOMAI 166, 11. Comp. 

230. 
'EIPTMI, see ipvu 230. 
elpvoo, see ipva). 
elpcc 230. 
eiaa, Aug. 122, 3, Dial. 

230. 
efco&a, see e'd-i'Cw. 
iXavvco 158, 3. Dial. 230. 
e'Aaw, see e'Aaww. 
i\eyx<», Pf.with Att.Red. 

124, 2. 
e'AeAi'Cw, Char. 143, 6. 

Dial. 230. 
'EAET©n, see epxojuat. 
eklaaw, Aug. 122, 3.— Pf. 

with Att. Red. 124, 2. 
'EARTH, see eA/cw. 
eA/cw 166, 10. 
eA7ra>, Pf. eoA7ra, Plup. 

ZwXireiv 140, R. 3. Aug. 

122, 5. 
'EAfl, see cupew. 
ifxecc, foi-mation of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
i/x/j-i 225. 

4fX.V7]jXVK€, See TI/jLVO). 

ifj.iriir\7]jj.i 177, 5. 
ivaplfa, Char. 143, 6. 
eVauw, Pass, with a 131,2. 
'ENE0A, see ivrivo&a. 
'ENEKn, see (pepw. 
ii/4irco, see <pr)fxi. Comp. 

230. 
evhvo&a 230. 
iviirrci) 230. 
eWeVw, see <£t7,iJ. Comp. 

230. 
'ivwjxi, see aix<pi£vvvp.i. 

Comp. 230. 
eVoxAe'w, Aug. 126, 1. 
poiKa, see 'EIKn. Comp. 

230. 



eop7a, see 5 EPm. 
koprdfa, Aug. 122, 5. 
eVcuw 230. 
iiravpiaicci} 230. 
i-rreiyo/Acu 197, R. 2. 
iiri&v/Aea), Aug. 126, 5. 
iiria-Ta/jLaL 179, 3. DiaL 
^ 230. 
eVw, Aug. 122, 3. Comp. 

230. 
epafiai 179, 4. 
epctw see epafJLai. 
ipyd£op.ai, Aug. 122, 3. 
ep7» 230. 
'EPm, plup. edopyeiv 122, 

5. — Perf. with variable 

vowel 140, R. 3. 
IpSw see 'EPrn. Comp. 

230. 
epetSw, perf. with Att. 

Red. 124, 2. Dial. 230. 
epeiVw 230. 
epeWw 143, 3. 
eptSatVw 230. 
4pi(w 230. 
'EPOMAI see 'EIP. 
epru^co, ep7rw, Aug. 122, 3. 
ep£w 166, 12. Dial. 230. 
epvyydvco 160, 13. 
ipv&aiuw 230. 
ipi/KW 230. 
epup,cu see e'pvw 230. 
epuw, formation of tenses 

223, 1. Comp. 230. 
epxo/jiai 167, 2. Comp. 

230. 
iff&la, eV&w 167, 3. 
£<nido), Aug. 122, 3. 
euaSe see avddva. Comp. 

230. 
ei/'Sw see Ka&evdw. 
evpicnccti 161, 11. 
evxofJ.ai Aug. 121, R. 
ix&dvop.cu see d-n-ex^-. 
exw 166, 14. Comp. 230. 
eifu 166, 15. 

Zaw, contract. 137, 3. 

Comp. /3iow. 
geuvvpu 184, 2. Comp. ^ew. 
£evyuv/j.L 187, 4. 
£ew, fonnation of tenses 

130, (1), d. 
£wvvup.i 186, I. 

TiPdcTKw, r/£aw, 161, 12. 
riyepefro/Aai see dye'pw 
Comp. 230. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



617 



tiep4&op.ai see aipw. Comp. 

230. 
fl/xai 190. Dial. 230. 
flfifipoTov see ap-aprdvo). 
71/xi 178, R. 3. 
l/xvca 230. 

Qdirrw, Char. </> 143, 1. 
&e Aw see e&eA«. 
Srepopai 230. 
&€w 154, 2 ; contract. 137, 

1. Comp. Tpe'xw. 
di/Aew 230. 
0Hnn 230. 
&i77a»'w 160, 14. 
d-Aaw, formation of tenses 

130, (c). 
bvfotcca 161,13.Comp.230. 
SfpaTTU) from TapaTTw 156, 

R. 
&pcwa> Pass, with cr 131, 3. 
bpvwifa, Char. 223, 5. 
SrpviTTw, Char. </> 143, 1. 
fy^cr/cco 161, 14. 156, 2. 

Dial. 230. 
3wa> and &voo 158, 4. 
&ua>, formation of tenses 

130, (b) 2. ■ 

'Idp6a>, contract. 137, R. 

1. Dial. 230. 
l^avca see Ka&i(a. 
tfa see Ka&ifa. 
trjpu 180. Dial. 230. 
iKveofiat, 'Uci) 159, 2. See 

a<piKv4op.ai. Comp. 230. 
IXacrKopai 161, 15. 
'IAHMI 230. 
t\\ca see e«Ao>. 
l/j-da-aco, Char. 143, 3. 
fcrd/a 230. 
tarriixi 175. 
l<rxvaiva>, a in format.149, 

R. 2. 
laxv^ojxai and Xaxopai 

see VTTHTXVeOIXCU. 

'Iil see ef/a. 

KAA-, KAIA-, see «at- 

Ka&4£op.ai, Aug. 126, 3. 
Ka&edovficu 154, 5. 
Ka&ew8a> 166, 13. 
Ka&r]p.ai, Aug. 126, 3. 

/cafri^c"^ see Ka3 r 'C ft >' 
Kaxvvp.ai 230. 

Ka(w «dw 154, 2. Dial. 
230. 



KaX4w, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d) 2: Opt. 

Plup. M. or. P. i54, 8; 

metath. in Pf. 156, 2. 
ko^z/w149, 5, and 158,10. 

Dial. 230. 
Kap.iTTw Pf. M. or P. 144, 

R. 2. 
Karriyvpeci), Aug. 126, 5. 
/caco see Kcua>. 
KeTpai 189. Dial. 230. 
Keipw 230. 
KEIX1 see Ke?p.at. 
KeAevw, Pass, with <r, 

131,2. 
Ke'AAoj 230. 
KeXoficu 230. 
KeuTew 230. 
Kepdvvvpi 183, 1. Dial. 

230. 
KepSaivoa, a in format.149, 

R. 2. Pf. I. Act. 149, 6. 

Comp. 230. 
Kev&e,} 230. 

Ki)Sw 166, 17. Dial. 230. 
Kiduap.ai 230. 
nlvvp.a.1 230. 
Kipvdw 230. 
KixdvoO) -op.ai 230. 
Kixpr\pi 177, 1. 
Ki'w 230. 

KXayydvm 160, 8. 
KAaCo>, Char. 77 143, 8. 

Dial. 230. 
kAcuw 154, 2 and 166, 18. 
KAaw formation of tenses 

130, (c). 
/cAeto) Pass, with a 131, 3. 

Dial. 230. 
/cAe7TTw, Char. 7r 143, 1. 

P. M., A. II. P. 140, 2. 

Pf. I. and Pf. M. or P. 

140, 5. 
kX4oo 230. 
/cArj'i'w, KXrfw see /cAeta 

230. 
K\iv<a, Pf. A. and M. or 

P. and A. I. P. 149, 7. 

and R. 4. 
k\vq) 230. 

arnica Pass, with <r 131, 2. 
Kj/a« Pass, with <r 131, 2. 

contract. 137, 3. 
Kudxracc, Char. 143, 3. 
Kdifa, Char. 143, 6. 
KoiXaivco, a in form. 149, 

R. 2. 
koXovw, Pass, with cr 131, 3. 



KSrrrca, Char. 7r, 143, 1. 

Dial. 230. 
Kopivvvpi 182. Dial. 230. 
Korica 230. 
Kpdfa, Char. 7 143, 6 ; 

Perf. 194, R. Comp. 

230. 
Kpalvco 230. 
Kp4p.ap.ai 179, 5. 
Kpepdvvvp.1 183, 2. 
/cpiVco Pf. A. and M. or 

P. and A. I. P. 149, 7, 

and R. 4. 
Kpovca, Pass.with <r 131,3. 
KpvirTO) 143, 1. 
Kpc*>(w, Char. 143, 6. 
Krdopai, Red. 123, R. 1 ; 

Subj. Pf. and Opt. 

Plup. 154, 8. 
KTelvvpi 188, 2. 
Kreivct}, F. KTevw. A. I. e/c- 

rei^a, (A. II. eKTavov 

doubtful in prose) ; Pf. 

A. eKToua 141, 4; Pf. 

P. e/cTa^ai and Aor. 

P. iKrd&rjv ( eKrdvSrriv 

in later writers) 149, 

R. 3. Poet, and Dial 

230. 
KTivvvpa see KTelwp.1. 
KTvrrda) 165, 4. 
kvXtw, Pass.with <r 131, 2. 
Kvveca 159, 3. 
Kvp4w, Kvpca 230. 

Ao7xaJ / w 160, 15. Dial. 
230. 

AAZTMAI 230. 

XapPdvca 160, 16. Dial. 
230. 

Xavfrdvca 160, 17. Dial. 
230. 

XdffKw 230. 

Ae7«, (a) to say, without 
Pf. A.; Pf. M. Ae'A€7- 
p.ai. A. P. ix4x&yv. — 
(b) to collect, and in 
compounds Pf. etxoxa, 
M. or P. dXeyp.ai 140, 
5 ; Aug. 123, 3 ; A. II. 
P. 4x4yr]v and A. I. P. 
140,R.l. Comp.AEXn. 

Aenra, A. eXlirov, Pf. II. 
x4Xonra 140, 4. A. II. 
A. and P. 141, 3. cor- 
responding form 160, 
18. 

A«=W A. II. P. 140, R. 1 



618 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



\evKali/a),a in for.149, R. 2. 
Xevcro~a>, Char. 143, 3. 
Aeua>, Pass, with cr 131,2. 
AEXn 230. 
Ai/jLTrdvco see Xeiirw. 
Ai/uLdoTTco, Char, r 143, 3. 
Xiaaofiai, Char. 143, 3. 
Aoi5a>, contract. 137, 5. 

Dial. 230. 
Xvp.aivofj.ai Pf. M. 01* P. 

149, 8. 
Xvw, formation of tenses 

130, (b) 2. Dial. 230. 

Maivo/j.ai 230. 
fj.aiop.ai 230. 

pavfrdvw 160, 19. Dial.230. 
fj.dpvap.ai 230. 
fxaprvpeca 165, 5. 
fidaaco, Char. 7 143, 1. 
fj.ao~rify, Char. 143, 6. 
fj.dxop.ai 166, 19. Dial. 

230. 
MAH 230. 
jxebvcrKco 161, 16. 
fxeipo/xai 230. 

Ate'Aei 166, 21. Dial. 230. 
lueAAco 166, 20. 
yueAco see fieXei. Comp. 

230. 
fxtvoivdw 230. 
jueVo 149, 5; 166, R. 2. 

Comp. MAX!. 
fj.erap.4XeL, fxerafJ.eXofj.ai, 

166,21. 
fxepurjpifa, Char. 223, 5. 
fj.rjKvoiJ.ai 230. 
fj.iQ.iua>, fj.ir)vai, fj.ia.vai 149, 

R. 2= Pf. Act. fxepiayKa 

149, 6. Pf. M. or P. 

fiefj.lao-fj.at 149, 8. Dial. 

230. 
fiiyvvfii 187, 5. Dial. 230. 
fj.ifxur)o-Kw Subj. Pf. and 

Opt. Plpf. M. 154, 8; 

161, 17. 
fiicyo} see /j.iyuvfj.1. 
fioXov/xai see fi\ooo-K(ti. 
fjoXvvca Pf. M. or P.149, 1. 
fj.v(w, to suck, 166, 22. 
/j.v(oj, to groan, 143, 7. 
fj.vicdop.ai 230. 
jUuoj, formation of tenses 

130, (b) 1. 

Naiw 230. 
vacrcrco 143, 4. 
i/et/c^w 230. 



veicrffofxai see vio~o~ofio.i. 

vifxoD 1 66, R. 2. 

vew 1 54, 2. 

via (vr)Sa>). Pass, with 

<r 131,3. 
via, Pf. M. or P. with 

and without a 131, 3. 
vicro-ofiai, Char. 143, 3. 

Dial. 230. 
voeco contract. 205, 5. 
vvo-rdfa 143, 7. 

Hew, formation of tenses 

130, (d) 1. 
frpalvco Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. 
£vpeu> 165, 6. 
\vw, Pass, with 0-, 131, 2. 

'OSa'£o, Char. 143, 6. 
b5vo~ao-&ai see 'OAT2- 

20MAI 230. 
0(00 166, 23. 
olanifa Aug. 122, 1. 
oXyvvfii, oXya> see avoiy. 
olda see opcw. Comp. 

230. 
ot'Sau/w, oi'Sa^w, oldda) 

160, 9. 
olnovpew 122, 2. 
ol^ou see otofiai. 
olfidu 122, 2. 
olfid!)(<a 143, 6. 
0iVt£a> 122, 2. 
olvoxoeu 219, 5. 
ojWw, Aug. 122, 2. 
otofxai 1 66, 24. Comp. 230. 
ol6(t>, olcti&rjv 122, 1. 
olarpeco 122, 2. 
0'1'xofj.ai 166, 25. 
ofco see otofiai. and <£ep«. 
oAKrdxtvo) 160, 10. 
oAAujUt 182, B. 
bXoXvfa, Char. 143, 6. 
bfxapreco, Epic bfxaprr)rrfv 

222, R. 1. 
oixvvfxi 182, B. 
6fj.oK\dco, Epic bfionXeov 

222, I. A, (2). 
bfjSpyvvfxi 187, 7. 
5 OMO,Q see ofxvvfj.i. 
bveipcorro} 143, 3. 
bvivtffxi 177, 4. 
oi'Ku.ai 230. 
'Oirrn see <5/k£o>. 
opaco 167, 4. 230. 
bpyaivca, a in form. 149. 

R. 2. 
'OPErNYMI 230. 



LPO- 



bpeyw 230. 
opvvfj.1 230. 
bpvcro-co, Char. 7 143, 1. 

Pf. with Att. Red.124,2. 
bacppaivofiai 160, 11. Dial. 

230. 
oo~(ppao~&ai see bacppaii 

fiat, 
ovpeca, Aug. 122, 4. 
ovrdca 230. 
•tyeiAw 166, 26. Dial. 

230. 
bcpeXXcc 230. 
b<p\i<TKdv(o 160, 12. 

lWc>, Char. 143, 7. 

Traiw 166, 27. 

7raA.cua> Pass. with tr 131, 2. 

71-aAAco 230. 

irapavofxeca, Aug. 126, 5. 

ivapotveoi, Aug. 126, 1. 

irapo^vvw Pf. M. or P. 
149, 8. 

Trdo-aa), Char. 143, 3. 

7rao-x*> 161, 18. Dial.230. 

irareofxai 230. 

7rovc«-, A. P. with <r 131,4. 

•aaxiivn Pf. M.or P. 149, 8. 

7reti^o), Pf. II. Treiroi&u 
140, 4. Dial. 230. 

ireivdw, contract. 137, 2. 

7re/CTea>,7r6KTW,7reift:£«j 143,2. 

xeAa£a> 230. 

7reAe/ii£w, Char. 223, 5. 
vdfjLirw, Pf. I. and Pf. M. 
or P. 140, 5. 

nEN@n, see irdcTx<0> 
7reiralva), a in the format. 

149, R. 2. 
Trepaivco, u in form.l49,R. 
2 ; Pf. M. or P. 140, 8. 
irepdco, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (c). 
irepSw 166, 28. 
irepSru 230. 
ireravvvixi 183, 3. 
ireTOfjai syncopated Aor. 
iirr6nnv 155; 166, 29. 
Dial. 230. 
nETn see Trtirrw. 
wevfrofiai, see irvvSavofAai.. 
irecpvov, eire<j>vov 230. 
irriyvvfii 187, 8. Dial.230. 
iriXva/iai 230. 
TrifiTTXrifiiin, 5. Dial.230. 
irip.Trpri(j.L 177, 6. 
ttij-w 158, 5. 
■Ki-uio-Kw 161, 19. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



619 



iriirpda'KO) 161, 20. 

irtiTTw 163, 3. Dial. 230. 

•mrvau) 230. 

tt\&(w, Char. 77 143, 8. 

irA&dw, see ireAdfa. 

irXdaaco, Char. 143, 3. 

TrAe/cco A II. P. 140, E. 1. 

ir\eu, formation of ten- 
ses 154, 2 j contract. 
137, 1. 

7rA-f)<r<ra}, Char, y 143, 1 ; 
A. II. P. 140, R. 2. 

Trhvi/o), Pf. A. and M. or 
A. I. P. 149,7 and R. 4. 

ttAcow 230. 

irve<a, formation of ten- 
ses 154, 2; contract. 
137, 1. 

7ro&ew, format, of tenses 
130, (d), 2. 

iroAepify, Char. 223, 5. 

iroj/eo), format, of tenses 
130, (d), 2. [143, 1. 

wpdcrau}, Trpdrrw, Char. 7 

vpiaaSrai 179, 6. 

irpito, Pass, with <r 131, 2. 

TcpoSrvp.ovp.ai, Aug. 126, 5. 

iTTaia), Pass, with <r 131,2. 

3TT7)0-0-W 230. 

jmWw 143, 3. 

3TTUW 130, (b), 1. 

TrvvSdvop.ai 160, 20. 

'PaiVcu Pf. M. or P. 149, 8 ; 

Dial. 230. 
pd-TTTco, Char. <p 143, 1. 
pe(w, Char. 143, 6. 
pe'C<a, see ep5a> 230. 
pew, formation of tenses 

154, 2 and 192, 7. 
'PEX1, see 4>77,ut. 
pT)ywp.i 187, 9. 
/3i7e« 230. 

piy6w, contract. 137, 3. 
pivTO}, Char. <p 143, 1. 
^i/ttooj, Red. 219, 6. 
pvo-Tdfr, Char. 143, 6. 
pwvvvpi 186, 2. 

5aA7n<>, Char. 77 143, 8, 

o-aSca 230. 

afievvvpi 184, 4. 

(retw, Pass, with <r 131, 2. 

orevw 230. 

^ttoj 140, R. 2. 

o-7ip.aivu), t) and d in for- 
mat. 149, R. 2 ; Pf. M. 
149, 8. 



ffKdiTTca, Char. <p 143, 1. 
o-Ke8dvwfMi 182, and 183,4. 
ovceAAw, ovceAew 166, 30. 
0-Kidisap.ai 230. 
(T^aw, contract. 137, 3. 
coDtoh, aovao (croD), see 

(reuco. 
airdoo, format, of tenses 

130, (c). 
cireipca, Pf. eo-Kopa 140, 4. 
o~irei/8w 144, R. 1. 
<rra£o, Char. 143, 6. 
<rTa\d(w, Char. 143, 6. 
o-reAAco, A. II. P. 140, 2. 
(Tre^a^o, Char. 143, 6. 
(TTepyca, Pf. II. effropya 

140, 4. 
arepio-Kw, ffrepea) 161, 21. 

Dial. 230. 
CTeptCco, Char. 143, 6. 
o-ti'Cw, Char. 143, 6. 
o-Topevvvpi,o-T6puvpi 184,5. 
o-T P 6>a> A. II. P. 140, 2. 

Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
o-rpd>vvvp.i 182 and 186,3. 
GTvyiw 230. 
avKdca, Ep. o-v\"i\T7)V 222, 

R. 1. 
(TuptX " (tfupiTTcw), Char. 

143, 6. 
o~<pdfa, ffcpdrTw, Char. 7 

143, 1 and 6. 
o~<plyyo), Char. 144, R. 2. 
o-<f)v(w, Char. 143, 6. 
(rxa«, format, of tenses 

130, (c). 

<txK<»> Cnar - 143 > 5 - 
o-«C«w, see caSw 230. 

TAm 230. 

TAAAX1 230. 

ravvu, format, of tenses 

223, 1. Comp. 230. 
Tapdao~a>, &paTTa> 156, R. 

Dial. 230. 
rdao-o), rdrTw, Char. 7 

143, 1. 
reivca 149, R. 3. 
reAeco, format, of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
re/xvco 158, 11. 
TEMn 230. 
repirco 230. 
rerp.ov, see TEMH. 
rerpaivco 163, 4. 
Teuxw 230. 
•Hjko, 14Q, R, 2 4 
TIEH 230, 



Tl&7}p.l 175. 

rt/cTw 143, 2. 

TiWu^ui 185 ; Comp. 230. 

rhca 158, 6. 

tit paw 163, 4. 

TiTpwCKca 161, 22. 

W» 158, 6. 

TAAfl, 194,4. 

tKt)vcu 177, 7. 

Tpi-fiya) 230. 

rpaxww Pf M. or P. 149,8. 

TpeVw, variable vowel in 
A. II. Act. M. P. 140, 
2'\ A.I.Act.M.P. 141, 
3 ; Pf. I. Act. and Pf. 
M. or P. 140, 5, 6. 
Verb. Adj. rpeirrSs and 
with middle sense 
rpaTTifjTeos. 

rpecpca, Pf. rerpocpa 140, 
4. Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
A. I. P. i&pecp&rii/, ra- 
rer than A. II. P. irpd- 
<pT)v 140, 2. Dial. 230. 
verb Adj. &peirr6s. 

rpix® 167, 5. 

rpew, format, of tenses 
130, (d), 1. 

rpifa, Char. 7 143, 6. 

rvyxdvo) 160, 21. 

TVTTTO) 166, 31. 

'TTrep.wfip.vKe see T\p.voi 230. 
vTrio-xveopai 159, 4. 
virvdoTTw, Char. 143, 3. 
vca, formation of tenses 
with a- 131, 2. 

#Ar\Q see e<r&io>. 

<patW Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. 

Pf. II. irecfrriva 149, 9. 

151. Dial. 236. 
(pdo-KCo 161, 23. 
<peidop.ai 230. V 

4>ENX1 see irecpvov 230. 
<pe>w 167, 6. comp. 230. 
(pevyco see (pvyydvco. comp. 

230. 
(pTj^t 167,7, 178. 
(pSrdvo) 158, 7. Dial. 230. 
cp&eipca, A. II. P. 140, 2. 

Pf.II.140,4. comp. 230, 
<pSFtwa) 158, 8. Dial, 230, 
JuAeV 135. Dial. 230. 
<pAeyw, A. II. P. 140, R. 1. 
<pAv(u> Char. 143, 6. 
<pondw, Ep. (poiT^jTTjj/ 222, 

R. 1. 



620 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



tppdyvvjxi 187, 10. 
<ppd(u> 148. Dial. 230. 
(ppdaa-ai, Char, y 143, 1. 
<pp£<a, formation of ten- 
ses, 131, 2. 
<ppi(T(ru, Char. k. 143, 1. 
<pvyydvw (cpevyw) 160, 22. 
(pvpw 230. 
tpiw 192, 11. comp. 230. 

X<x(oij.cu 230. 

X cu>o> 166, 32. comp. 230. 

XaAaw, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (c). 

X*vMvw 160, 23. comp. 
230. 



Yckncco 161, 24. 
Ye'Cco, Char. S 143, 5 ; Pf. 
II. Ke'xoSa 140, 4. Fat. 
X eaovfiai 154, 3. A. 11. 
Act. according to the 
analogy of A. 1. 154, 8. 
Yea>, formation of tenses 

154, R. 1. 230. 
x 6a>, Pass, with <r 131, 2. 
■ypdoixai, formation of 
tenses 129, R. 2.; A. P- 
with <r 131, 4 ; con- 
tract. 137, 3. 
vpaco, formation of ten- 
ses 129,11. 2; contract. 
137,3. 



X p^l77,2. 

Xpi«, formation of tenses 

130, (a). 
yjp&vvv\xi 186, 4. 

Yava>, Pass, with <t 131,2. 
\}/aw, Pass, with a 131, 3; 

contract. 137, 3. 
J, e ' 7 o>, A. II. P. 140, P. 1. 
^ X o>, A. II. P. 141, R. 



ufrew 165, 7. 
wveofxai, Aug. 



122, 4. 



comp. Trpfotr^ot. 



inC/T 5 



- 1950 






W x ' : \ ^ 




V< 






,/ ^ ' 



"-^''^ r 1 ^ "'"."'. < ^ '" S 0° ,V! 







«£ «V. 









Q* 
•%. 



iS >. 




%. 












* * 










°* 



°o. *<7 



-:% 



^c. 



V ^ 



£ .' 



v v ^ 



= ■%<>* : [\ % > 






#^>. 



O 






%, 



tf*% 






A 




1$ 

' o 






^ 



o.% 










^ <* 



^^ : 



^9 

•v ^ v * ■ 



^ % 
















,#„ 



6' 



4 













LIBRARY of 



CONGRESS 




°003 035 543A 



